Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
31B-249 (12)
NO M �r DEFICIENCY NOTICE CONSTRUCTION DESIGN WARRANTY Date: Proiect: ITEM NO. Problem Identified: u on Recommended Response: 4" - Reported By: BVH Engineers,Inc. Date Owner's Representative: Signature Date NOTIFICATION OF DEFICIENCY CORRECTION THE ABOVE NOTED DEFICIENCY HAS BEEN CORRECTED AS FOLLOWS: By: Date: END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Building Systems Commissioning 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 17000-9 (Smith College Campus Center) NORTHAMPTON,MASSACHUSETTS A. Verification Of Completion The following system/equipment is installed per the design documents, is complete, and is functional. (LIST SYSTEMS APPLICABLE) Name Contractor Date Smith Campus Center Building Systems Commissioning 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 17000-8 I'm 10). Operation and control of the fan coils and unit heaters. 11). Run standby operation of pumps 12). Proper annunciation of building alarms including fail safe controls and proper shut down of equipment. 13). Proper control of all air handling equipment with respect to air volume. 14). Calibration of all temperature pressure and safety devices. 15). Proper display of all ATC graphics. 16). Control of all automatic control valves and dampers. 17). Assist in calibration of all airflow stations. 18). Demonstrate proper operation smoke control management systems 3.5 DUCTWORK PRESSURE TESTING A. After each duct system is completed, test for duct leakage in accordance with SMACNA"HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test manual", latest edition. Also, a report shall be submitted to the Commissioning Agent. B. Leaks found during pressure tests shall be repaired and retested until total leakage is within SMACNA standards for the type of system. C. Notification of pressure testing shall be given to the Commissioning Agent at least 72 hours prior to the test date. D. The following ductwork systems shall be tested: 1. Supply 2. Return 3. Exhaust 4. Pressurized Outdoor Air Supply Systems E. The Contractor shall furnish all fans and equipment required to perform all pressure tests. F. Submit eight(8)copies of the test reports to the Commissioning Agent prior to the final acceptance of the project. 3.6 EXCLUSIONS A. The Commissioning Agent is not responsible for construction means, methods, job safety, or any management function on the job site. „ B. The subcontractors will provide all technician services requiring tools or the use of tools to test, adjust or otherwise bring equipment into fully operational state. The Owner's Commissioning Agent shall observe technicians as they complete testing, and may make minor adjustments,but shall not perform construction or technician services. 3.7 CERTIFICATION A. The following certificate shall be signed by each trade Contractor effected by the commissioning process. This indicates that all commissioning work may proceed and that all systems are installed according to the contract documents and manufacturers installation instructions. The Contractors further certify that all adjustments, lubrication, alignment and start-up procedures have been carried out. Smith Campus Center Building Systems Commissioning "M 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 17000-7 .w f. Any noted drafts or noisy air distribution devices shall be evaluated and corrective action taken. g. (TAB) shall verify the proper calibration of temperature, pressure and safety devices as installed on the various pieces of the mechanical equipment. (TAB) shall assist the CA in the proper setting of all temperature, pressure ..,, and safety devices. h. Any balancing related problems identified during the preliminary walk- through shall be addressed and corrected. 2. Hydronic Systems: a. Testing and Balancing Contractor shall demonstrate total flows at each pump,air handler and terminal heating equipment. .. b. Discrepancies between balancing report and spot checking results shall be dealt with to correct all deficiencies. In the event that significant deficiencies are detected,the entire balancing procedure shall be repeated. C. Assist in verifying the calibration and operation of any flow meters and .� differential pressure sensors. 3. Exhaust Systems: a. Testing and Balancing Contractor (TAB) shall demonstrate total air flow at each exhaust fan. b. Spot checks of approximately 50% of air outlets shall be made. The Commissioning Agent shall select outlets and air balancer shall demonstrate a reading of that outlet. C. (TAB) shall demonstrate proper room static pressure with respect to the adjacent space(s). d. Observe motor HP draw at selected fan motors. e. Discrepancies between balancing report and spot check results shall be dealt with to correct all deficiencies. In the event that significant deficiencies are ... detected, the entire balancing procedure shall be repeated. f. Any noted drafts or noisy air distribution devices shall be evaluated and corrective action taken. .� 4. Automatic Temperature Controls(ATC): a. ATC shall demonstrate the proper operation of the temperature control sequences for each air handling system, roof top unit, variable air volume boxes, boilers, pumps, exhaust and terminal heating equipment as listed in 1.5 of this section. b. ATC shall demonstrate the proper sequences as they apply to the equipment listed in 1.5 of this section: This includes but not limited to the following: 1). Occupied/Unoccupied time sequences 2). Night setback/Night set-up features 3). Morning warm-up sequence 4). Air-side economizers 5). Proper control of discharge air temperature from air handling equipment including reset temperature sequences. 6). Hot water discharge temperature control to the building systems including hot water reset. 7). Control of hot water freeze pumps. 8). Proper control and discharge temperatures from the reheat coils. 9). Operation and control of the snow melt systems Smith Campus Center Building Systems Commissioning 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 17000-6 B. Deficiency lists shall be prepared by the Owner's Commissioning Agent in conjunction 4W with system start-up. The deficiency list shall then be issued to the Contractor for appropriate remedial action. The Contractor shall advise the Commissioning Agent when all start-up deficiency list items have been corrected. OR C. Air and hydronic balancing will be completed by an independent test, adjust and balance (TAB) firm which specializes in TAB work. The Contractor shall advise the TAB firm when systems are complete and ready for balancing. This work shall be started as early as possible so as to be essentially complete prior to the functional performance tests. 3.4 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST PROCEDURES A. Functional performance testing will commence as systems are brought to substantial completion and will be done on a system by system basis. The results of these tests will be documented and submitted to the Owner for final system acceptance. Substantial completion requires that: 1. All testing be complete and approved. 2. O&M manuals are complete(not in process). 3. All training is complete. B. Acceptance procedures must confirm the performance of systems to the extent of the design intent. When a system is accepted, the Commissioning Agent must be assured that the system is complete, works as intended, is correctly documented, and Owner's staff is trained in the operation and maintenance of the system. C. The objective of functional performance testing is to advance the building systems from a state of substantial completion to full dynamic operation in accordance with the specified design requirements and design intent. D. The Commissioning Agent shall attain this objective by developing individual systems testing protocols which, when implemented by the Contractor, will allow the Commissioning Agent to observe, evaluate, identify deficiencies, recommend modifications, adjust, and document the systems and systems equipment performance over a range of load and functional levels. Functional performance testing will be performed on the following systems: 1. Air Distribution Systems: a. Testing and Balancing Contractor (TAB) shall demonstrate total air flow at each piece of air handling equipment at simulated full cooling, heating and/or max/min or fresh(outside)air. b. Spot checks of approximately 50% of air outlets shall be made. The Commissioning Agent shall select outlets and air balancer shall demonstrate W a reading of that outlet. Where appropriate, the thermostat shall be adjusted to simulate full cooling, full heating, etc. C. (TAB) shall demonstrate proper room static pressure with respect to the 40 adjacent space(s). d. Observe motor HP draw at selected fan motors. e. Discrepancies between balancing report and spot check results shall be dealt ON with to correct all deficiencies. In the event that significant deficiencies are detected, the entire balancing procedure shall be repeated. 40 Smith Campus Center Building Systems Commissioning OR Smith Construction Documents: 01.11.12 17000-5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING A. The following procedures shall be verified during the commissioning process. All procedures are to be checked and carried out by the Contractor prior to the functional testing of equipment. 3.2 INSTALLATION VERIFICATION A. Before any system start-ups begin, the Contractor(s) shall conduct a final installation verification audit for their work. The Contractor shall be responsible for completion of all work including change orders and punch list items to the Owner's satisfaction. This visual check of the various systems to be commissioned shall verify that all components are properly installed. The following items shall be observed, but not be limited to, check of: 1. Air Distribution Systems: a. Mounting and support of equipment. b. Noise, vibration, air and water leaks. C. Air filtration, presence and operation of dampers, diffusers, grilles, fire dampers and access doors. d. Presence of thermostats and other adjustable temperature control devices. *■ e. Presence of smoke sensors and other safety devices. f. Instrumentation, gauges, thermometers and flow measuring devices. g. Access to equipment and filters. .. h. Insulation of ductwork is complete. I. Ductwork is sealed. J. Power available to equipment. k. Temperature controls is complete. 2. Heating and Cooling Systems Equipment and Piping: a. Service access is acceptable. b. Proper cycling. C. Excessive noise, vibration or leaks. d. Presence of safety devices and controls. e. Proper identification of all piping, valves, starters and equipment. f. Pressure testing and flushing of systems. g. Power available to equipment. h. Temperature controls is complete. B. If any work is found incomplete, incorrect, or non-functional, the Contractor shall correct the deficiency before system start-up work proceeds. 3.3 SYSTEM START-UP A. A start-up schedule shall be developed and submitted by the Contractor to the Commissioning Agent for approval. The Contractor shall commence with system start- up after approval has been given to the start-up plan and after the prestart-up inspection has been completed. The Commissioning Agent shall witness system start-up and list all system and equipment deficiencies noted during start-up. The Contractor shall take ' corrective action on all system deficiencies noted and demonstrate to the Commissioning Agent suitable system operation. Smith Campus Center Building Systems Commissioning 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 17000-4 E. The subcontractors and their vendors shall provide assistance, when requested by the Commissioning Agent, to help develop and edit operation descriptions by system. F. Owner/Building Operator will schedule personnel to participate in the mechanical commissioning process. 1.5 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work included under this section includes a complete and thorough investigation of pw all mechanical systems in order to insure proper installation and operation of all components and systems. The following systems will be commissioned: 1. All Air Handling Units 2. All General Exhaust Systems 3. Kitchen Exhaust Fans 4. Atrium Smoke Control Systems 5. All Variable Air Volume Boxes 6. All Fan Coils 7. Ductwork 8. Cabinet And Unit Heaters 9. Smoke Damper Control 10. Humidifiers 11. Heat Exchangers 12. Pressure Reducing Stations 13. Chilled and Hot Water Pumping Systems 14. Condensate Pumps 15. Boilers and Boiler Support Devices 16. Fin Tube Radiation 17. Temperature Control System ,far PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT A. All industry standard test equipment required for performing the commissioning tests specified herein shall be provided by the trade Contractor(s), with proprietary equipment 1. specific test equipment to be provided by the manufacturer. B. The Contractor(s) instrumentation shall meet the following standards: 1. Be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance within the tolerances required to determine adequate performance. 2. Be calibrated on the manufacturer's recommended intervals with calibration tags permanently affixed to the instrument being used. 3. Be maintained in good repair and operating condition throughout the duration of use on this project. 4. Be recalibrated/repaired if dropped and/or damaged in any way since last calibrated. Smith Campus Center Building Systems Commissioning "'" 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 17000-3 40 3. Information regarding the progress and performance of systems within the facility. 4. Information necessary to achieve date of acceptance for each component and system for start of the warranty period. 1.3 SCHEDULE A. Scheduling is the responsibility of the Contractor(s). Commissioning activities shall be scheduled through the Construction Manager. The lead tradesman for each trade, who actually performed the work, are to be present. All trades are to be present as 4W scheduled during the commissioning process. The Contractor shall be responsible for integrating functional performance testing and commissioning requirements into the master activity schedule. B. A meeting shall be arranged by the Contractor, prior to commissioning activities, to discuss and outline a commissioning activity work schedule. Meeting shall take place a minimum of 60 days prior to the start of commissioning. All trades involved in .. commissioning shall be present along with the Owner, Engineer, Construction Manager\General Contractor and Commissioning Agent. C. Commissioning of systems will proceed per the criteria established in the specific sections that follow, or as the commissioning agent deems necessary, with activities to be performed on a timely basis. Commissioning of systems may proceed prior to final completion of systems to expedite progress and should have the approval of the Commissioning Agent before starting. D. Problems observed shall be addressed immediately, in terms of notification to responsible parties, and actions to correct deficiencies. The Commissioning Agent will distribute a deficiency notice for corrective work to all parties with a response date. E. An equipment training schedule shall be provided by the Contractor which will describe the piece of equipment, expected duration of training, personnel involved, time and date. 1.4 RELATED WORK A. The commissioning activities are the primary responsibility of the Construction Manager/General Contractor, with secondary and support responsibility by the various trade Contractors. The commissioning process does not relieve the subcontractors from participation in the process or diminish their role and obligations to complete all portions of work in a satisfactory and fully operational manner. B. Construction Manager shall verify completeness of the building envelope, perimeter and interior items which affect proper operation and control of HVAC, plumbing, fire protection and electrical equipment and systems. C. The Construction Manager will assure participation and cooperation of his subcontractors as required for the commissioning process. D. The Contractor will be responsible for providing labor, materials, equipment, etc., required within the scope of his specialty to facilitate the commissioning process. The Contractor will perform form tests and verification procedures required by the commissioning process, as outline in the specifications and requested by the Commissioning Agent. Smith Campus Center Building Systems Commissioning 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 17000-2 SECTION 17000 BUILDING SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including general and supplementary conditions and other divisions of these specifications,apply to work of this section. wA B. Related Sections: 1. 15000-M&E Supplemental Requirements 2. 15600-HVAC, Temperature Controls and Air/Water Balancing 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. The intent of this section is to specify the commissioning responsibilities of the General Contractor, HVAC Subcontractor (HVAC), Electrical Subcontractor, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Subcontractor, Automatic Temperature Controls Subcontractor (ATC), Plumbing Subcontractor, and the Fire Protection Subcontractor. The General Contractor and his Subcontractors are required to participate in the Commissioning process. The Commissioning Agent for this project will be hired by the Owner. B. The purpose of the commissioning process is to provide the Owner/operator of the facility with a higher level of assurance that the systems have been installed in the prescribed manner and will operate within the performance guidelines. It is intended to enhance the quality of the building start-up and aid in the orderly transfer of the building and systems to beneficial use by the Owner. C. The commissioning work will begin only after all systems are 100% complete and functional. The factory start-up of all equipment must have been carried out as well as control system completion and system checkout. Air and water balancing reports must have been submitted and approved by the design engineer.-All punch list items must be complete. D. The commissioning team will be made up of representatives from the Owners, Engineer, Contractor's organizations and the Commissioning Agent hired by the Owner. E. The Commissioning Agent will actively participate in the construction phase of the project to assure compliance with the mechanical commissioning requirements. F. The Commissioning Agent is a building system specialist dedicated to advancing the building systems from a state of static completion to a state of full, demonstrated, and documented working order. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall provide the following information to the Commissioning Agent: 1. Completed equipment tests and system functional performance tests. 2. Operations and maintenance manuals, as-builts and any other items as may be specified herein for support of the HVAC systems and equipment for review and comment. Smith Campus Center Building Systems Commissioning """ 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 17000-1 1 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 e e 6 1 1 E 1 1 1 E e e 00 handbook to guide and instruct operators in all automatic and manual operations of equipment, and to provide adequate detail to allow basic system maintenance 00 diagnostics and testing so that only essential service call back by the Installer is required. They shall include all programming values,access codes, alarm transmission formats, default codes, output relay trip programming and system database loading of all on-site programmable equipment. These manuals shall be assembled and written specifically for this job. Include these manuals as a part of the final turnover. N. Include names, addresses and telephone numbers of all component manufacturers or dealers, and of service firms for each item, for Owner's use after expiration of guarantee period. 3.8 KEYS A. The Contractor shall furnish a minimum of four keys for each lock, uniquely keyed, on each piece of equipment and for each key switch. The Contractor shall exercise every precaution to protect the security of these keys. Upon completion of the work, the keys shall be properly identified and tagged and delivered to the Owner's representative, and a written receipt obtained. 40 B. Enclosures of identical equipment shall be keyed alike. 3.9 PROGRAMMING A. The Contractor shall be responsible for programming the entire security system to provide complete operation and monitoring as specified herein and/or as clarified by the Owner. B. It is the Owner's intent to have the contractor provide an initial programming setup in accordance with the Security Specifications, and a second"re-programming"session to fine tune the system to Owner's requirements after a short, initial use period(2 weeks). C. This system will use the Campus Simplex, security system communications network for alarm reporting to Public Safety. The Contractor shall request programming information relating to response instructions, zone numbers, and any/all special programming information. The request shall be in writing to the Owner's representative four weeks prior to programming the system. In the letter, the Contractor shall provide descriptive information of what is to be reported by the SCCC w� system for each alarm device, and identify all required questions which the Owner must respond to in order to complete system's programming. D. The Contractor shall load the Project database. The Contractor shall provide all the necessary database loading forms and informational requirements, a database loading/ creation manual, and four (4) 4-hour sessions to work with the Owner in database information development and use of manuals and forms. 40 E. The contractor shall download to the SCCC ISC, the owner provided and contractor loaded access control card database. M F. The Contractor shall provide both hard copy and electronic media back-up database for the intrusion alarm point monitoring and access control system. END OF SECTION 40 "a Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-55 7. Preventive maintenance requirements, 8. Detailed schematics and assembly drawings, 9. Complete spare parts lists, 10. Interface requirements and capabilities, 11. Signal identification and timing diagrams and settings, 12. User database development instruction and forms. 13. Programming options and requirements. E. General Operational: This document shall describe, in layman's, non-engineering terms, all the functional and sequence of operational requirements for the system and �. its functions that have been established. It shall not require extensive knowledge of electrical engineering techniques or control system theory,or security engineering. F. System Operation: Complete guidance and procedures for operation of the system, including required actions at each operator position, and emergency, alarm, and failure recovery procedures. Step-by-step instructions for system activation and reset, backup equipment operation, and execution of all system functions and operating modes shall be provided. G. An operations matrix shall be provided in which all intrusion detection and access control alarm inputs, and associated relay outputs and other exceptional condition functions are related to all other interfaced sub-system events, so that each system event can be logically linked to activation of another system using "if/then" logic in chart form. Matrix shall address field related events, operator initiated events and time-zone events. H. Functional Description: Detailed documentation, in language readily understandable to ,. systems maintenance personnel, the theory of operation, design philosophy, and specific functions of the system. Full details of detection loop components and interfaces, and operator test or self-test of detector/initiating integrity for all system components and peripherals during each system function and operating mode shall be ' provided. Hardware functions, system component interfaces, and requirements shall be explicitly detailed for all system components in all system functions and operating modes. I. Person-equipment interactions shall be functionally described as required to supplement data called for in the preceding paragraph in providing a complete system description. Known or established constraints on system operation shall be fully described. Any operating procedures currently implemented or planned for implementation in an automatic or manual mode shall be stated and described. J. Maintenance: Documentation of all user-performed maintenance on all system components including inspection,periodic preventive maintenance, fault diagnosis, and repair or replacement of defective units. This shall include calibration, maintenance, .� and repair of all components and controls, plus diagnosis and repair or replacement of all system hardware, and software,not part of the Installer's standard service contracts. K. Contractor shall complete as-built documentation manuals to include descriptions of all conduit, trough, and of any other raceway systems, complete cable installation and all security equipment and methods of installation. L. A special documentation Section shall outline all drag-line and box labeling to assist in the installation of any future equipment by a security contractor. M. Contractor shall provide manuals describing in detail the operations of all components of all systems. Such manuals shall be adequate in detail to serve as an operator's Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-54 standard intrusion detection alarm zones for the Simplex system. Similarly, provide end-of-line supervision of ISC"door forced" inputs to the IDS panel. OR 8. Program the intrusion detection panel, to be compatible with the Simplex ISC input points. Ensure that the Simplex front-end at Public Safety acknowledges each alarm input point, and, provides a printout of these alarm input activations for verification of alarm receipt. 9. Provide dedicated output relays to control local audible horns/sirens power in each of the three partition controlled areas so that violation of that partition, when armed, will sound that local audible only. 10. Provide complete as-built drawing information, including point to point wiring diagrams between the intrusion detection inputs and CA/IDS outputs and the terminal strips within the panel, and, it's zone input and relay output expander modules. K. Radio Station Doorbell and Chime/Light System M 1. Furnish and install exterior, illuminated, "doorbell" buttons and connect to power supply, and interior chime/flashing light. 2. Mount exterior button per Architect's exterior elevations. 3. Mount interior button and chime/light per Architect's interior elevations. aw 4. Connect power supply to 120VAC circuit. 5. Activation of either"doorbell"shall cause the chime to sound and light to flash for a preset time period utilizing a custom timed program module settable from 2 to 60 seconds by the Owner or to be immediately "silenced" by a local "acknowledge"button on the radio station console. on 3.7 MANUALS A. Contractor shall carefully complete, during progress of work, operation and maintenance manuals to include methods of care and cleaning of all types of visible �w surface materials both interior and exterior, and descriptions of all systems and equipment and methods of operation thereof. Descriptions shall give pertinent diagrams, identifying charts, color coding, connections, maintenance instructions, programming sequences and constraints, programming values, data base development routines, loaded database file information/ data, and single-line and detailed wiring diagrams. B. Use manufacturer's printed information where possible; otherwise obtain written instructions prepared by the installer. Include names, addresses and telephone numbers of all service firms for each item, for the Owner's use after expiration of guarantee period. C. Contractor shall provide manuals describing in detail the operations of all components of system. Such manual shall be adequate in detail to serve as an operator's handbook to guide and instruct operators in all set-ups, programming, database entry, automatic and manual operations of equipment. D. These manuals shall contain full support documentation, which shall include, without being limited to the following: 1. General description and specifications, 2. Installation and initial checkout procedures, available to the Owner's staff, 3. Principles and theory of operation, 4. Detailed electrical and logical description, 5. Complete trouble-shooting procedures, diagrams, and guidelines within User's capabilities, 6. Complete alignment and calibration procedures for all components, Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-53 am 4. Mount detector on ceiling immediately above door at intersection of wall and ceiling,or on wall, centerline of door, approximately 6"to 12"above doorframe to centerline of device. See REX detector monitoring details on security drawings. Prior to rough in,refer to Architect's reflected ceiling plan and interior elevations. Insure detection pattern only "sees" exiting person within 3'-0" radius of door opening. If ceiling mount, check height above finished floor and move to wall .� mount location, if ceiling is too high. 5. Identify if exit signage or other trade items affect detector pattern and notify Architect prior to rough in. Follow manufacturer's instructions carefully. 6. Walk-test detection pattern and insure only valid exiting process trips REX circuit alarm shunts. Adjust during final checkout and test with Engineer. REX shall not unlock lock. 7. Adjust latching relay to allow detector reset within 2 to 4 seconds of exiting circumstance to preserve"door forced"alarm reporting capacity. 8. Where future "REX" motions are shown, pull all required cables as shown on the riser to allow future REX installation and connection to ISC. J. Intrusion Alarm Panel 1. Furnish and install an intrusion detection panel and integrate with the access control and intrusion detection system to retransmit alarm conditions associated with the SCCC premises to Smith College Public Safety office. This panel shall be furnished and installed at SDF1, as shown on the drawings. 24 IDS panel output relay modules shall be installed at the IDS panel location to interconnect with 24 Simplex ISC alarm zone inputs. 2. Connect the alarm panel to surge suppressed 120VAC power. Provide surge suppression between the alarm panel and it's transformer/power supply in order to protect both the power supply and alarm panel from surges in the 120V service. 3. Connect intrusion detection system keypads to keypad cable expansion bus. Mount keypads, as shown on the drawings and program to display status operation functions. Also, furnish and install a keypad on the IDS panel for set up and local troubleshooting. The keypad at office number A06B shall be used for arm/disarm capability of the Campus Center's perimeter and interior security systems and to �* locally annunciate all SCCC alarms. Keypads at the radio station, mail storage and kitchen shall locally display and control(arm/disarm)those alarm partitions. 4. Install output relay modules to integrate with the Simplex CA/IDS ISC system. .� Also, include zone input modules to manage all Campus Center security device zone circuits, 4 "door forced" alarms from the Simplex ISC output relays, plus 8 spare. Provide a communications bus, off the main panel, for input expansion modules to integrate additional alarm input modules to IDS panel and increase number of points to be received by the panel. Provide appropriate expansion bus cards and slots in the IDS control panel,as required. 5. Provide IDS input capability and wire out to intrusion detection zones, as shown on the riser diagram. Use E.O.L. resistors for each alarm circuit. Note, device zoning as conveyed by wiring shown on the system riser. 6. Prior to the establishment of Public Safety/Simplex interconnection, review with the Owner, options for alarm status monitoring and, programming of the card access/intrusion detection system and the IDS panel. 7. Connect the intrusion detection input modules and panel output relays, using twisted and shielded#20 gauge wire, so that output relays in the IDS control panel are wired as alarm input zones to the Simplex alarm input terminal strip points. Provide end-of-line supervision over these Simplex alarm inputs as if they were "" Smith Campus Center Security Systems ,,W 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-52 users in system's operation, database creation, and all other aspects of intended user interface. H. Card Reader Sensor: 1. Install onto finished walls adjacent to door to be controlled, using concealed screws or bolts as required by wall construction and manufacturer's instruction. Where surface mount readers are required, mount on recessed conduit back box network. Coordinate construction with general contractor. 2. Coordinate final placement and mounting of unit to assure placement is compatible with conduit and cable runs, device operation, and ADA requirements. Refer to Architect's exterior elevations for exact placement requirements. 3. Wire electric lock "energize" circuit through card reader interface (CI) output w relays to achieve activation of lock. Install EMF suppression utilizing diodes of factory recommended rating to protect card reader interface electronics from back EMF from lock,where required,etc. 4. Set energize relay adjustable timer to allow adequate time for passage through from access side location. Confer with Owner's representative and program time accordingly to allow passage but discourage tailgating. 5. Allow valid door exiting and assure detection of forced entry, by use of"request- to-exit" motion detector(s), and/or panic bar microswitches and programming of alarm shunt functions. REX to shunt contact only, not unlock lock. Review REX shunt timing with Owner's representative and program time accordingly to allow exiting but enforce"door forced"alarms. 6. Wire card readers to dedicated Cl or ISC, using cable per manufacturer's recommendations with shield, and terminate shield on dedicated RF ground in Cl or ISC enclosure, separate from 120VAC grounding. 7. Seal all exterior units with 50 yr. silicone and neoprene gaskets to eliminate water and moisture from ingress to back box. S. Review, with the Owner, the option to label readers with door number and name for use by visitors and staff to assist in identification of where they will be granted access. Review nomenclature, with Owner, prior to labeling to gain approval of agreed language. Use professional labeling decals such as those produced by "Kroy" or "Brother P" label machines. Program pin readers to Owner's specifications so that card and pin, card only, pin only is selected and set on a reader-by-reader basis. 9. Review reader mounting with General Contractor and manufacturer's instructions, paying special attention to related, adjacent construction material constraints. Review prior to reader rough-in to insure compliance with manufacturer's recommended mounting details and adequate physical blocking to insure strong and secure attachment, minimal interference with reading of proximity tags, and reliable operation of the access control system. I. Request-to-Exit Motion Detection Devices: 1. Install REX motion detector at required door opening. Mount on cover plate of color to match detector and ceiling or wall, as directed by the Architect. Paint plate to match wall or ceiling, if required. 2. Connect to 12VDC power supply using cable specified for 12VDC security devices. Tag with REX/door controlled circuit number at device and power supply end. 3. Connect to ISC/CI interface REX input terminals per manufacturer's instructions using same cable as security device alarm wiring. Tag wiring at REX and ISC/CI terminal ends. Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-51 a, Oft 2. Data Communication Gathering Network a. Provide all necessary installation, labor and supervision over connection of ISC data loop controller, and/or data communication connections to Smith AN College provided Campus backbone fiber. Configure all connections out to ISC and data loop controller in configuration to match approved manufacturer's data communication interconnect scheme. Insure ow configuration is integrated, specifically with the network architecture of the Smith College Simplex system, and provides fault tolerant, bi-directional, self-healing/redirecting communications in the event of a communication fault on the communication line between ISC or the front end Public Safety ' server. b. Use identical cable type and color code after verification with Smith College and equipment manufacturer. Install any required device in the data and communication circuits to achieve complete signal supervision and reporting capabilities as provided by the communication network. Terminate and tag all data communication circuits per manufacturer's instructions so that data communication link is identified at both the controller and remote panel(s) end. C. Insure proper cable is utilized to manufacturer's standards. Use a shielded w* cable unless specifically prohibited by the manufacturer. Insure continuity of cable shield is maintained and one end ground provided. d. Connect dataloop communications controller or other related network communication's equipment to 120VAC power. e. Arrange, coordinate and assist Smith College in the development of an approved signal communication path between the Public Safety office and the Campus Center security system, Simplex equipment. 3. Card Reader Interface Module(Cl): (If separate module in ISC): a. Connect Cl module (if separate from ISC) to data communications network wiring per manufacturer's instructions. b. Connect to output relay panels (ORC), and/or card reader, door contacts, request to exit device(s), electric lock(s), and electric lock power supplies per manufacturer's instructions. C. Connect to relay outputs which shall unlock lock and shunt door alarm contact at each controlled door. d. Program to achieve specified functions. " e. Connect to request-to-exit devices, which, for electric strike and/or electrified panic bars or mortised electric lock equipped doors, shall shunt door alarm contact and local audible alert only. It shall not unlock lock, with the exception of electric deadbolt locks, electromagnetic locks, or delayed exit hardware equipped doors. 4. Factory Support: a. A full service contract, providing all parts and field labor on equipment shall be available, local (90 miles) to the site with labor to be provided by factory trained, system technicians. Manufacturer shall have available an existing, �.. regularly scheduled formal factory training program for Owner's technicians. b. The successful Bidder shall engage the services of the local Factory Customer Service Technician to perform or supervise the final hook-up, integration and checkout of the System, and to insure validation of the Warranty of system components at the site. C. The Contractor shall include in the Bid Cost, one complete factory training session, as called out in these specifications to support the Owner's system Smith Campus Center Security Systems �.. 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-50 to that provided by the system manufacture), to protect equipment from utility transient and lightning induced strikes, conducted through the 120VAC emergency � feeds connected to this equipment. 120VAC surge suppression shall be as manufactured by PolyPhaser, DITEK, or approved equal. Include all necessary ground wiring, as required by surge suppression manufacturer's installation �r instructions. G. Campus Wide and SCCC Alarm Monitoring and Access Control Equipment 1. Installation a. Install the SCCC ISC controller at the SDF location shown on the Drawings. Coordinate equipment location with final room security equipment layout and other telecom equipment. Install to maximize hands-on use and provide maximum maintenance capability. Review maintenance criteria with system manufacturer and site installation requirements to assure proper dimensional clearances,environmental conditions, and user operational capabilities. w b. Connect to Simplex system front end at SC Public Safety office via Smith College provided fiber or copper interconnects. Install converters, modems, hubs, drivers or any other necessary component to integrate the Campus Center equipment with the Simplex Public Safety front end. C. Hook-up ISC to 120VAC power. d. Tie-in all 1/0 relay control panels, access control field multiplex panels (ISC's), supplemental card reader and alarm input and output relay interface modules and data communication link wiring from field multiplex panels located at the SDF to campus Simplex CA/IDS server to achieve system monitor/control capabilities. * ' e. Connect card readers, request to exit (REX) devices, electric door locks, door contacts, door control panels and lock power supplies to card reader interface modules in Simplex field multiplex panels (ISC's) to provide local door access control interface and access control via system database accordingly. f. If required by equipment manufacturers, hardwire connect all field multiplex panels to dedicated low voltage power supplies provided at SDF's, as shown on the security drawings and riser diagrams and/or as required by the manufacturer. ON g. Load all operating and applications software and fully test all system functional modules and features, assist the Owner in the creation of and load the Owner-provided database information, and create complete, fully operational user files for all system reader control points and all alarm input points, as directed by the Owner. Effect download of database from SC Public Safety front end to Campus Center ISC's. h. Provide single line alarm input, relay output control and card reader termination directories in each ISC to achieve proper test, checkout and maintenance. Directories to be encased in clear vinyl envelopes. Number all field wiring screw address points with Security As-Built Drawing card reader number terminations, and panel hardware circuit numbers (manufacturer's terminal address circuit no.). Label all panels per appropriate specification section. i. Connect output relays to IDS system panel's alarm input ports to notify the panel which of the four (4) card readered doors of the building are experiencing an alarm(door forced) condition. so J. Insure software database download complete and fully operational from server and workstation front end. on Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-49 ■■ 6. Do not hook up LAEA output relay to alarm point monitoring and access control field multiplex panel for device status signal transmission. The device shall be a stand alone, local sounding device. 7. Mount any associated junction box in or above ceiling or in wall, as directed by Architect or his designee. Any associated wall-mounted junction box covers to face into security side of space. Otherwise, mount junction boxes above accessible portions of suspended ceilings. Wherever an accessible ceiling is provided, mount J-box above ceiling. Where drywall ceilings exit, mount J-box with flush, single gang cover at location agreed to by the Architect. Use tamperproof screws where fasteners are required and exposed. 8. Door contact signal wiring shall be run from door buck junction box, per door contact mounting details, to LAEA. Provide and/or wire contacts with sufficient wire lead length to reach associated LAEA with no intermediate splices. Run wire " in EMT or flexible metallic conduit. 9. Insure mounting height of LAEA is coordinated with ADA mounting height requirements. Review mounting height with Architect and interior elevations accordingly. 10. Note that devices have been specified under Part 2, Products, to be provided with rim hardware and cylinder, prior to purchase. Coordinate with the General Contractor and Hardware Consultant, the specific requirements of manufacturer of the rim hardware and cylinder. The LAEA shall be keyed alike, on a keyway, identical in manufacture to that used throughout the balance of locks provided in ••• the project Hardware Schedule. 11. Review all timing sequences for alarm sounding, auto-reset and shunt delay with Owner. Discuss operation of each function and identify timing sequences which allow appropriate passage through door with key usage, but which minimize opportunity for tailgating. 12. Connect to factory recommended low voltage power supply, as required to achieve „s all device operational functions, using power cable, as specified on the drawings, or as required by the manufacturer, based on cable distance between the LAEA and its power supply. E. 120 VAC Interconnects 1. The access control system and its associated ISC controller and fiber to copper interface, shall be fed off a dedicated 120 VAC circuit with security contractor ,. provided surge suppression. 2. The intrusion detection panel and its associated power supply at the SDF shall be powered off dedicated, 120VAC circuits with security contractor provided surge suppression. 3. All electrified door locks' transformers and/or power supplies shall be fed off 120 VAC, circuits with security contractor provided surge suppression. 4. Local audible alert transformer shall be fed as per 2. Above. 5. The Security Contractor shall provide commercial/industrial quality surge suppression devices between the 120VAC power and each security system device requiring 120VAC. 6. No 120 VAC circuit shall be loaded in excess of 70% of its breaker rating and all electrical work shall be in accordance with the latest edition of NEC. 7. 120VAC power connections to the security equipment shall be performed by the security system contractor. F. Additional CAJDS Field Panel 120VAC Surge Suppression 1. Provide additional 120VAC feed surge suppression for all devices (ISC's, RC's, CI's), which compromise the Simplex "data communication" network (additional Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-48 40 security devices, per floor plan notes and riser details, manufacturer recommendations and device installation specifications. 2. Hard wire into 120VAC source provided by Electrical Contractor. Wire loss of "AC" power relay and low battery relay in panel enclosure, and connect as separate alarm zones to intrusion detection input panel module, using end-of-line resistors. 3. Wire from 12VDC individually fused terminals to 12VDC security device power circuits. Do not exceed 200 milliamps of connected load to any one fused circuit without the approval of the engineer. Do not exceed 80% of overall power supply power output rating. 4. Connect power supplies to CA/IDS field multiplex panels (if they require 12/24VDC input) to provide required power for their operation. Do not connect more than 2 FMP's to any power supply, without IMP manufacturer and engineer's approval. 5. Check to assure charging circuits and power supply module is operating, producing proper"on-battery" current,proper output voltage at load, and does not exceed advertised ripple, and that power supervision relays change state. Battery back up shall be 16-hour minimum at full load. Calculate number of 12 VDC so powered devices per 12 VDC circuit, and number of circuits per power supply. Assume all devices in normal state (largest current draw), and systems back up time capability present under this heaviest device load condition. Provide additional batteries in separate, externally protected,enclosure, if required. 6. Mount to provide 3'-0" clear in front of enclosure doors, and provide tamper switch on doors wired to intrusion detection panel tamper switch zone via end-of- line resistors. 7. Tag all 12VDC circuits with panel and 12VDC circuit number at both devices and at power supply fuse strip. 8. Wire out to 12 VDC devices using twisted, shielded, unique color-coded cable per specifications. Utilize wire gauge of adequate size to eliminate voltage drop outside of detector/device manufacturer's specification at furthest device from the panel. Increase size of wire from that shown on the drawings, based on actual run length used in the field. 9. Unit shall be UL listed, and come complete in enclosure with batteries, lock, tamper switch, loss of AC relay, low battery monitoring, fused output circuits, etc. �w D. Local Audible Exit Alert 1. Install at selected perimeter door, per manufacturer's instructions and as shown on the security drawings. 2. Local Audible Alert at this location shall not be part of a designated reporting door contact security zone and shall not be wired to be armed or disarmed, by CA/IDS system PC time zone software or IDS keypad command. It shall be armed/disarmed by its integral key switch control. 3. Local Audible Exit Alert (LAEA) to be recess/flush-mounted to conceal all elements of device and wiring. Security contractor shall provide any special backbox to the electrical contractor for conduit system rough in. 4. One LAEA required per door opening, whether single or double door. See security drawings for locations and details. s 5. Coordinate all wall preparation with appropriate contractors for general construction. If special conditions so require, perform work to connect Local Audible Alert to door contacts under the supervision of the Architect or his 40 _ designee. Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-47 oft NA B. Volumetric Motion Detection System 1. Install system of motion detection by selecting and locating devices as shown on the Drawings to achieve coverage of those areas. 2. Install units in designated applications and select appropriate lens optics to provide best coverage or the rooms/spaces shown on the drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Each device shall constitute a unique zone or portion of a single zone of motion detection. Detectors shall be wired to the intrusion detection input module panel, and capable of being armed and disarmed by the appropriate system keypad commands. (Refer to the security device cable installation schedule and to the riser drawings for device zoning). 4. Placement of motion detector units to be adjusted, if required, from Drawing locations to eliminate "holes" in coverage. Resubmit locations for approval, and discuss layout with the Engineer and Architect or his designee before roughing-in of devices and/or back boxes and commencing of work. Placement of detectors is critical for operation, appearance,maintenance and service. 5. Exact dimensional placement of detection devices in all locations to be site approved if present location provides inappropriate coverage, as per Paragraph 4 above, or because of the substitution of another manufacturer or model number of detector, or if Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plan or interior elevation requires relocation of device to a more suitable location. 6. Provide appropriate 12VDC power for the specified units, in circuits as shown on ..,► the Security Drawings. Do not connect more than five (5), 12VDC security devices on any 12 VDC power supply fused circuit without the approval of the engineer. .. 7. Mount all units as shown on the Security System Floor Plans, approved shop drawing details, jobsite conditions, and as per manufacturer's recommendations. Unusual detection coverage circumstances shall be solved via site-developed .� details with the Owner or his designee and/or the Engineer on-site prior to commencement of work. Propose alternate manufacturer and model number device to achieve better coverage or more reliable detection if required. In that circumstance, review the model numbers of detectors specified with the Architect ` and Engineer on a location-by-location basis prior to procurement. 8. Wire each detection zone with 2 wires for signal, and 2 separate conductors for 12VDC detector power per cable specifications. 12VDC power circuit shall not be shared with other security devices, except water leak or gas detection equipment. Contractor to verify loading requirements of individual fused outputs from 12 VDC power supply to insure compliance with specifications. 9. Wire any Form"C"alarm relay contacts as NC to open on alarm activation. 10. Alarm circuit to be fully supervised for open, short, normal and alarm. Provide end-of-line resistors at (preferably within) the device as necessary to achieve this supervision per manufacturer's instructions, and connect alarm signal circuits to intrusion detection panel input modules accordingly. 11. Affix detector onto raceway system device back box for connection to cable �.. system. Review backbox and extension ring requirements prior to rough-in work to coordinate device mounting criteria and requirements of finished wall and ceiling construction, to achieve recess or semi-flush mounting wherever possible. C. 12/24 VDC Security Device Low Voltage Power Supplies 1. Install in locations shown on Drawings at SDF's adjacent to other power supply panels, card access field multiplex panels, IDS remote input module enclosures, local audible alert power supplies, etc., and connect to field multiplex panels and Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-46 3.6 SCOPE OF WORK-SPECIFIC SYSTEM INSTALLATION CRITERIA A. Magnetic Contact Switches: 1. Install, at selected interior, perimeter doors, and roof hatches per manufacturer's instructions and as shown on the Drawings. 2. Switches installed at each location shall be a unique designated reporting security zone and be wired to their respective intrusion detection system input panel module to individually report which zone is to be armed or disarmed by the appropriate system keypad commands. (Refer to the security device cable installation schedule and the riser drawings for zoning.) 3. At card readered doors, contacts shall be installed. The contact shall be wired to the appropriate card reader field multiplex panel door open detect circuit. 4. Magnetic contact system to be fully supervised for circuit open, short, normal, and alarm. Provide required end-of-line resistors as required by CA/IDS field multiplex and IDS panel manufacturers to achieve this supervision. so 5. Switches to be recess/flush mounted to conceal all elements of switch and wiring wherever ossible. Rollin doors,p Rolling grilles and roof hatches only shall utilize surface mounted contacts. 6. One pair required per door leaf. See Security Drawings, for locations and details. 7. Coordinate all door, frame, or other preparation with the Construction Manager and the appropriate Contractors for general construction. Frames must be factory prepared to receive contacts by the Security System Contractor and shall be "�" coordinated to achieve exact preparation details per manufacturer's installation instructions. Only under duress, if special conditions so require, field drill doors under the supervision of the Architect or his designee and the General Contractor. no 8. Connect to ISC field multiplex and IDS input panel modules for device status signal transmission, and provide one end ground of cable shield at the panel. 9. Prepare aluminum doors and frames to receive magnetic contacts to match recessed hollow metal locational details if material geometry allows. 10. Magnetic contacts shall be typically placed at the door head. Jamb mounting of contact on strike side of door is also acceptable, based on field conditions. Mounting of contacts of the hinge side is prohibited. 11. Door contact wiring shall be spliced to homerun signal wiring in door buck junction box, or through purchase of suitable length contact wire, in stainless steel sheathing, to adjacent junction box,based on field conditions associated with door contact mounting details. Purchase contacts with sufficient armor clad wire and lead length to reach associated junction box with no intermediate splices. Mount associated junction box in or above ceiling or in wall in protected space as directed b the Architect or his designee.ghee. Wherever an accessible ceiling is provided, mount J-box above ceiling. Where drywall ceilings exist, mount J-box with flush, single gang cover at location agreed to by Owner. Use tamper proof screws where fasteners required and exposed. 12. Use suitable rubber bush compression fittings to secure miniature armor clad door contact cable entry to junction box if used,per Article 10 above. "! ' 13. Installation of contacts in special conditions at doorframes shall be reviewed in the field and a sample installation of each typical condition shall be created in a working session between Construction Manager, Contractors, Engineer and the Architect or his designee, prior to final installation. 14. Silicone/RTV glue-in all flush mount where button-type contacts in hollow metal and aluminum frames are allowed. Insure adequate clearance exists between contact mounting, flanges and door and frame. Advise General Contractor, Architect and Engineer whenever inadequate clearances exist. Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-45 MW .0 basis per Specification Sections 1.12 and 1.13. The Contractor shall provide proof of maintaining telephone communications on a twenty-four hour, seven-day-a-week basis and his service personnel shall be available for emergency service as specified in Specification Sections 1.12 and 1.13. D. The Contractor shall submit with the bid a manufacturer's certificate of acceptance of the qualifications of the Installing Contractor to install, test, maintain and repair the manufacturer's equipment. E. In order for the Architect to verify that they meet the competency requirements of this specification,Contractors must submit the following information if so requested: ..� 1. Proof that the Contractor has installed, services and maintained similar security systems for a minimum of ten(10)years. 2. Proof that the Contractor is a firm, which currently and regularly installs, services and maintains security systems as a full time business. 3. The names and qualifications of security system technicians that shall perform and supervise the work, and perform tests or adjustments on the systems and XM equipment. Qualifications shall include all schooling, training, and history of work experience. 4. A list of four prior systems comparable to the one specified under this contract me which were installed, serviced, and maintained satisfactorily by the Contractor for a minimum of one (1) year. Each system listed shall include the firm or owner, location, person to contact (with telephone number), date of installation and service period, and a brief description of the system and work performed on the system. F. The Contractor shall submit any other information required by the Architect to determine the competency of the Contractor. If this information is not submitted as requested, it shall be submitted within the time specified by the Architect after the bid opening. If the Contractor fails to submit the information in accordance with the Architect's request, the Contractor shall be declared non-responsive, and his bid may be rejected at the Architect's discretion. 3.5 OWNER TRAINING A. The Contractor shall provide the services of factory trained and certified instructors who will give full instruction to designated personnel in the adjustment, operation and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the equipment and system actually installed. B. Instructors shall also assist in the development of the system's required database ► creation, through an interactive dialog of text, actual system displays or laptop example simulations, and oral training/example sessions with the Owner's security staff until adequate familiarity is obtained by the Owner to participate in the completion of the .ilk database by Contractor. C. The training shall be based on the system installed rather than being a general (canned) training course. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the subject matter he is to teach, and of this system as installed. Training manuals shall be turned over to the Owner at least seven(7) days in advance of the training session. An agenda of subject matter and hours devoted to same shall be provided 7 days in advance to allow Owner scheduling of staff participation. D. Refer to Article 1.14 of these specifications for further details. Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-44 Y. Wiring and cables that are installed shall maintain color-coding from origination point to termination point. Where paired cable is used, the pairs in the cable shall be maintained in the run. Pairs shall not be separated to form different pairs than those in the original cable. Color-coding shall be maintained within the system. Maintaining color-coding applies to all type circuits in the system. Z. Review wiring type, scheme and tagging for all systems prior to installation, with factory/technical representatives. Advise the engineer of any required modifications prior to wire procurement and installation and obtain approval accordingly. It is the 40 contractor's responsibility to review the system's wiring with the factory representatives and supply the cables, which meet their requirements. Where heavier gauge cables are specified by the engineer and such provide enhanced performance 4" reliability, durability or future capacity, they shall be used unless prohibited by the manufacturer. Where cable gauges must be increased,due to length of runs in the field, they shall be provided at no extra cost to the Owner. ww AA. Paralleling of multi-conductor cables to "create" a cable of larger wire gauge is prohibited, except at doorframe power transfer hinges or knuckles. BB. Wiring diagrams shall be provided in all signal and power panels along with cable schedules, in a clear plastic envelope, for future use in system maintenance and service. CC. Run electric lock power circuits so that each electrified locking door opening is wired ik" on its own wire pair to a dedicated fused circuit in a dedicated lock power supply. DD. Connect no more than five(5) 12VDC security or rex devices to a single 12VDC power circuit on a dedicated fused outlet in the 12VDC power supply. Land no more than two pair #18 on each fused terminal screw port. Use terminal strips to collect individual 12VDC power circuits to devices and cross-connect to power supply fused outlet terminal screws. EE. Security equipment panels, located at SDFs shall be interconnected using EMT. Panel connections to SDF conduit trough shall be in EMT. Conduit troughs shall be extended to above ceiling areas using EMT, as shown on the SDF details. Add additional EMT, as required,to assist in wire pulling. FF. Tamper wire equipment trough. Connect on same zone as IDS field multiplex panels. GG. Maintain a minimum of 6' clearance from variable speed drives, transformers, 480V and higher electrical service, and other known sources of RF and EMI. Maintain 2' clearance from florescent ballasts. HH. Make all conduit turns at 90 degrees using a minimum bending radius approved by the cable manufacturers. Do not arbitrarily run conduits at 45 or other degree angles, unless necessary to avoid creating an unorganized conduit distribution network. 3.4 LICENSING/COMPETENCY A. This Contractor shall be a bona fide security systems contractor, licensed by the State a.r of Massachusetts for the installation of the low voltage security and signal communication systems, and engaged in security system maintenance, service and contracting for at least the last ten years. B. The Contractor shalt employ technicians who have been trained by the factory to install the systems of their manufacture. They shall all be NICET trained. r C. The contractor shall be, or shall hire, a factory authorized stocking distributor of the manufacturer of the equipment included in the system so that immediate replacement parts can be made from inventory and service provided as needed on an emergency Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 1677043 Q. Minor deviations (relocations) in wire runs to installed mounting locations may be required prior to final acceptance when site conditions affect the equipment's operation, performance, or purpose. Relocations which require only minimal work (plus or minus 15')and/or materials shall be made without additional cost or credit. R. The Contractor shall note that connection of alarm zone circuits to the intrusion detection panel and ISC field multiplex panels will require the installation of end-of- +� line resistors in each alarm zone circuit. Locate as close to the device as possible to provide as much circuit supervision as possible. EOL resistors shall not be located at the panel for active security circuits, unless full line supervision is provided by a 4 wire . circuit. All unused zones shall have the end-of-line resistor mounted in the panel if manufacturers' requirements so dictate. Where end-of-line resistors are to be mounted at devices that are factory sealed and have factory configured wire leads, the resistor shall be spliced in-line with the leads as close to the device as possible (splices shall be soldered and covered with heat shrink tubing as specified elsewhere in these specifications). .. S. The Contractor shall install panel cover-operated tamper switches in each equipment enclosure, cabinet, housing, to actuate an alarm signal before access to equipment wiring within the enclosure is gained. Tamper switch mounting hardware shall be concealed so that the location of the switch cannot be visually detected from the exterior of the enclosure. These circuits shall be supervised. Multiple panels, of the same subsystem type,may be wired as a common security zone. .� T. All wiring or cable shall be tested for, and be free of, opens and shorts. All wiring shall test free of grounds with the exception of circuits that are intended to be connected to the groundside of protective circuits. U. All wire and cables entering equipment cabinets and enclosures shall be grouped and tied inside the enclosures on 6-inch centers with self-locking nylon cable ties. All wiring shall be grouped in an orderly fashion. Under no circumstances is the use of adhesive tapes (electrical or other) permitted for either permanent or temporary ties or wire management. V. All stranded wiring that is connected to equipment that has terminal strips or screw lugs shall be terminated with either nylon insulated crimp-on spade lugs, equal to Thomas & Betts STA-KON fork tongue locking type or equivalent, sized for correct wire and screw sizes or shall be solid bare wire attached to screw terminals. Where compression screws are used to cap wiring, wiring shall be tinned to eliminate destranding and consequent poor connection. Each wire shall be documented on the as-built wiring diagrams. W. All wiring that is connected to equipment with solder lug connectors shall terminate wire to lug in a solder joint. The solder joint, lug and any bare wire shall be covered , with heat shrink tubing. Multi-conductor bare wire ends shall be soldered to prevent de-stranding. X. Each wire and cable shall be clearly marked within each enclosure, junction box, or where termination is made. Wires and cables shall be marked with a clear, heat-shrink system such as "Shrink Mark" or equivalent, labeling system as manufactured by RayChem. Cable numbers shall be generated on a PC. Felt-tip "Sharpie" type pen .. markings are unacceptable. Marking documentation shall be included with the detailed wiring diagram to be provided to the Owner on completion of the installation as part of the As-Built documentation in the"Project Manuals". Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100%Construction Documents: 0 l.l 1.12 16770-42 ±0 exceed 40% fill criteria. All conduit shall be 3/a" minimum unless otherwise noted on the floor plans, riser diagrams or device installation details. Do not exceed 270° of go bends without a junction or pull box. F. Insure cabling shield does not touch terminal connections. Provide "one-end" ground on all shields using drain wires at control panels, power supplies, or head end *" equipment, then to separate and dedicated RF ground via #8 AWG copper cable. Insulate shield at device end with shrink tubing to completely cover shield and drain wire. Where multiple devices are served by the same shielded cable, shield continuity shall be maintained and properly insulated to eliminate intermittent grounding. Do not bring shield grounds to a building electrical ground. Carefully follow manufacturer's instructions and advise Engineer accordingly. Shield grounds shall be treated as specified herein unless prohibited by manufacturers. G. Lay out conduit and cable runs with Electrical and General Contractor prior to installation, and maintain 1'-0" clearance from parallel runs with 120VAC or larger voltage conduit and wiring. Cross 120VAC or larger voltage conduit runs at 90° to reduce EMI and RF induction in security wiring. All wires shall be color coded to provide separate identification of intrusion alarm signal, 12 VDC, 24 VAC,or CAMS system data communication, card access, lock power, zone expansion or relay board power and databus or any other system function. Wires shall be similarly coded for each system throughout the entire installation. H. All resistors shall be solder connected or utilize double crimp "B" connectors to eliminate any additional circuit resistance. Stranded wires connected to resistors shall be solder-tinned to insure positive solder connection or crimp connection. Resistors shall be insulated with shrink tubing extending a minimum of 1"either side of resistor. (Unless factory installed and potted as part of magnetic contact construction.) I. No intermediate cable splices are allowed without the specific written approval of the Engineer. Request clarification and approval prior to installation of any splices. J. All alarm circuits shall be tagged at the device end and field multiplex control panel end with alarm panel or zone addressing module hardware circuit terminal address numbers. K. Transformers and power supplies shall be identified, along with their cable, at both transformer and load fed end of cable. L. Each card reader access control system cable shall be tagged at both the device and access control field multiplex panel end with the door opening number and device type ` ' (i.e. card reader/keypad, electric lock, REX input, etc.). M. Patch cords between equipment shall be labeled, wherever possible, with field equipment label designations, to create as uniform a tagging system as possible. N. All 12VDC power circuits shall be tagged at each device and 12VDC power supply fused terminal strip with 12VDC panel and fused circuit number. All power cables shall be tagged at the device end and power panel end with matching numbers. O. All wiring in panels shall be neatly dressed, run parallel wherever possible, and provided with adequate slack for future maintenance and service terminations. P. All "unused" wire conductors shall be insulated to eliminate shorts and grounds, tagged with their terminal points and identified as "spare" at each end with a unique spare cable tag identification system. Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 1677041 ... operates in accordance with project specific, Owner-approved and contractor loaded database. 4. Complete operation of the card access control system including field multiplex panels, card readers, electrified locks, door contacts, and output relay signaling to the IDS panel. 5. Complete operation of the doorbell and chime/light system. 6. Complete operation of battery and standby power systems, including all battery power charging circuits, and proper equipment function of all low voltage power supplies. G. Prior to gaining approval to conduct final "Turnover meeting acceptance testing", the installing Contractor must provide the Architect or his designee with a preliminary test report, (from "Initial check-out" test) enumerating each component of each system tested and showing satisfactory results,as achieved during"initial check-out"test. H. After completion of installation, and as part of"Initial check-out" tests, and prior to "Turnover meeting acceptance test", a factory-trained technician shall test and certify *�*» each system's operation. Test shall also certify that equipment is installed in accordance with approved factory means and methods. I. A letter of certification indicating that each system functions and conforms to all specifications herein shall be presented to the Construction Manager, Architect or his designee prior to "Turnover meeting acceptance test", as part of the "Initial check-out" test documentation. J. Prior to "Turnover meeting acceptance test", the Contractor shall provide one complete set of the approved equipment shop drawings and wiring diagrams for use by the Architect or his designee during the"Turnover"test process. K. In order to facilitate the final "Turnover" meeting test, the Contractor shall prepare "Test Site/Floor Plans" which give the alarm point field multiplex panel security zone address of each intrusion detection device, each component identity of the IDS systems and card reader circuit address so that immediate recognition of device tested and system reaction can be verified as part of the final"turnover"test. L. As-Built drawings shall be available during the final turnover meeting test so their accuracy can be verified by the Engineer in the field. 3.3 CONDUIT AND WIRING A. All necessary and incidental wiring associated with the Security System shall be furnished and installed by the Security Contractor. B. Wiring to provide all 120 VAC sources and points of connection to same shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor. C. All conduit and standard electrical device backboxes shall be furnished and installed by the electrical contractor. D. Special device backboxes, unique to security products, shall be furnished by the security contractor to the electrical contractor, for their installation. E. All wiring, including low voltage power, voice, signal and data communication, shall be installed in approved metal raceway as required and as shown on the Drawings. All wiring, conduit and installation shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code, with conduit fill requirements as though system wiring were 120VAC, (40% conduit fill) and the requirements of Division 16, Electrical Specifications. Up-size conduits from sizes shown on drawings, as necessary not to Smith Campus Center Security Systems .. 100%Construction Documents: 0 l.11.12 1677040 4W J. The Contractor's security system design submission shall be based on calculations which provide for the proper functioning of all devices shown on the drawings and functions, as specified herein, and required integration to the Simplex front-end, located in the Smith College Public Safety and Facility's Department. K. The Security System Contractor is responsible for locating all ceiling mounted detection devices in all suspended or other type ceilings, in accordance with Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans. This Contractor shall also refer to Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans for locations of other trade items in ceiling systems where r shown. As above, for wall mounted equipment, refer to Architectural Interior and Exterior Elevations. L. In some special cases, devices occur in hung or suspended ceilings with lay-in or limited access spline ceilings, and are not to be located in the the centers, but in accordance with an alignment of other trade items which define an imaginary architectural grid line. Refer to the Architectural Drawings for locations of tile centering or grid alignment. 3.2 TESTING AND INSPECTION an A. Refer to Section 1.10,this Specification. B. This work shall include pre-delivery testing of major Security System equipment, field testing and adjustment of all equipment, and an on-site final operational acceptance test WX of the complete operational system. The Owner or his designee shall be advised at least fifteen (15) business days in advance of the dates of all tests. Acceptance of tests witnessed by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the complete system meeting the requirements of these Specifications after installation. C. Prior to the final "Turnover Meeting Acceptance Test", the Contractor shall provide a system "initial check-out" test. Each system component shall be tested alone and for so system operation and shown to operate successfully. It is the intent of this test to check out all systems to establish any system failures or faults prior to the final tests in the presence of the Owner or his designee. Manufacturers' requirements, engineers, or ON factory/dealer support shall be solicited and obtained by the Contractor to insure all systems perform as specified herein and per manufacturers' requirements. am D. Upon completion of the installation and system "Initial check-out" test, a "Turnover Meeting Acceptance Test" shall be held at the site at which the Architect or his designee, Construction Manager, the Owner, system equipment suppliers, and all associated Sub Contractors are present. The manufacturer's representatives shall also be advised and their presence requested in writing for attendance. At this time, a functional test of the entire system and all its components shall be demonstrated. E. Functional test shall include all security sub-systems and their components, communication with the Smith College Public Safety Department, as well as the SCCC "front end"security equipment, and any interfaced systems. F. Testing procedures set forth in this Specification Section, shall conclusively show that all interfaced device functions are achieved,minimally as follows: 1. All Security detection devices detect and report. 2. Complete operation of the building's intrusion detection system and its keypad arm/disarm status display system, and its interface to the Simplex intrusion detection and access control systems. 0% 3. Intrusion detection and access control system LAN (SC Public Safety and Facilities and SCCC Simplex equipment) and software fully functional and 4W Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-39 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S ENGINEERING AND DESIGN RESPONSIBILITIES A. The contractor shall include adequate time and technical engineering expertise to refine and complete the final design aspects of the installation to reflect the specific requirements of each piece of equipment and subsystem to be utilized as part of the system installation. B. As a result of the contractor's engineering and system integration design, if it is determined that additional equipment is required beyond that shown on the drawings or called for in the specifications, such shall be provided at no additional cost. It is not the owner's or engineers' intent to require the contractor to increase the quantity of detection,reporting, or access control applications,but rather to insure that variances in manufacturer's products, substitution of equipment, superseding of equipment by manufacturer's or configuration of the system by the integrator, or custom design of .. special system components are not responsible for the system's equipment shown from working in a manner that does not fully utilize their published performance criteria or achieve the intrusion detection and access control functions shown on the drawings and ~` called for in the specifications. If additional or larger power supplies, relays, zone expander modules, software, line drivers, amplifiers, hubs, modems or other support components are required,they shall be provided as part of the integrator's installation. C. The final required arrangement of conduit and cable sizing and type and routing will be dependent on the approved equipment selected as part of the shop drawing submission process. The Security Contractor is hereby cautioned and instructed to install, wire, in point to point and homerun routing and sizing in accordance with the approved conduit and wire drawings submitted jointly by the Electrical and Security Contractors. The selection of backboxes, extension rings and cover plates for device mounting shall be installed per these same criteria. D. The Contractor is required to read the Specifications covering all aspects of the work and will be held responsible for coordination of his work with work performed under all other contracts. E. Building security and access control system shall comply with the rules and regulations of the local Building Code,and as required for all government approvals. F. All systems are to be factory engineered to provide the functions described herein and as provided by the capabilities of the products specified in Part 2.00 of these Specifications, and to assure integration with the existing headend Simplex equipment in Public Safety. .s. G. Calculations and drawings shall be furnished by the Contractor for this system, which shall meet the requirements of approving and listing agencies, the Architect or his designee. H. The Security System Contractor shall include in his Bid the cost for factory engineering and field tests to verify design calculations and system performance as required for approvals. I. If the Contractor has any questions concerning the Plans and Specifications, he is to contact the Architect in writing, for clarification prior to bid, to fully understand the extent and responsibilities of his work. Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-38 w I. The following list of spare parts shall be quoted as an add alternate to the Security System: B. Security System: 1. Magnetic Contacts: six contacts of each type 2. Motion Detectors: two detectors of each type 3. Tamper Switch: two of each type 4. End-of-Line Resistors: 12 spare of each value 5. Fuses: twelve of each type 6. ISC alarm Zone Input Expansion Board: one 7. ISC Output Relay Expansion Board: one 8. Security System, 12 VDC Low Voltage Power Supplies: one 9. Exterior pushbutton: one 10. IDS keypad: one C. Access Control System: 1. Card reader: one of each type 2. Request-to-exit motion detector: one of each type 3. 2 reader card reader ISC board: one ON on OR Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-37 00 6. Access Control/ID Cards: Shall be furnished under separate contract as part of a new campus wide "one card" system. These cards shall be compatible with the magnetic stripe readers selected and specified for this project. Obtain an initial lot of 10 "mule"cards to check the SCCC access control system. 7. Access Control Card Readers: To be as manufactured by Dorado, mag stripe card reader, Simplex Model No. 3209-9904, standard, single gang, mount, bottom insertion reader or Model No. 3209-9905, vertical swipe reader or Model No. 3209-9907, ruggardized vandal resistant, vertical swipe reader. These shall be mag stripe type cards readers capable of reading the cards specified as part of the campus"one card"program. 8. Data Communication, Loop Wiring: a. Copper: Wiring shall be #20 AWG, twisted and shielded, with drain wire, w. low impedance and a nominal velocity of propagation per system (Simplex) manufacturer requirements. H. Hardwired(and Wireless)Intrusion Detection Panel: ..� 1. Shall be as manufactured by ADEMCO, 1-800-573-0154, Model No. VISTA-100, with 6139 custom alpha keypad/consoles, 4204 output relay modules (24 outputs required for interconnect to the Simplex system and four (4) additional relays to ., control legal partition alarm audibles), complete with 8 hours of battery standby and all required accessories to effect a complete and operational system. Provide the capability to monitor all of the hardwired zones associated with the Campus �. Center system,plus 8 additional spares. 2. Alternate hardwired and wireless alarm system shall be as manufactured by Napco, tel. 1-800-645-9445, Model No. GEM-P9600, with Model No. GEM- RP1CAe2 custom alpha/symbol keypads, Model No. RB3008, 8 output relay x module (28 outputs required as per H.l. above), complete with 8 hours of battery standby and all required accessories to affect a complete and operational system. Provide the capability to monitor all of the hardwired zones associated with the Campus Center system,plus 8 additional spares. 3. Or approved equal by"Maxsys". 1. Alarm Horn 1. Shall be as manufactured by ADEMCO. Alarm horn shall be ADEMCO Model 748, high powered outdoor siren, producing 119 dB at 12VDC, with a two-tone, steady and warble signal, weather resistant, fully tampered for mounting on a 4" electrical box. J. Radio Station Doorbell,Chime and Flashing Light ..� 1. Shall be as manufactured by Trine, Edwards, Doortronics, or an approved equal complete with exterior, illuminated center switch/pushbutton assembly, chime and flashing light. .n 2. Provide low voltage power supply for illuminated pushbutton, chime and flashing light, as required. 3. Review exterior pushbutton finish with the Architect. 4. Provide chime and flashing light with a programmable timer and latching function so activation of pushbutton energizes chime and light for an owner selected time of 1 second to 60 seconds. Also, provide a local "acknowledge" button and wire into timer module so activation of button immediately silences audible and .�. extinguishes flashing light, as required. 2.4 SPARE PARTS(ALTERNATE NO. SS2) A. General: Smith Campus Center Security Systems ..� 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-36 W* 8. Request to Exit Detector Cable: Shall be per items no. 1 and no. 2 of this specification section. 9. Panel and Enclosure Grounding Cable: Alarm panel and enclosure grounding, lightning suppression, and 120VAC surge suppression drain cable shall be #8 AWG, copper cable. G. Access Control and Alarm Point Monitoring/Control System Equipment: 1. Manufacturers — equipment as manufactured by Simplex, Tel. 968-632-2500 are referenced for purposes of specifying performance operational criteria and to achieve compatibility with the existing Simplex campus wide system. 2. Equipment Specifications: a. Due to the rapid changes in computer hardware and software development, the contractor shall provide at the time of installation the most current version of hardware, firmware and operating system software. This shall include any required network upgrade hardware or software at the SC facilities and/or Public Safety Office. The current operating system ISC hardware specification in this specification shall be considered minimum criteria. The contractor shall carry in his price all monies and fees to upgrade software and hardware to meet the current technology at the time of the installation. b. The contractor shall ensure that all hardware and software prior to the completion and acceptance of the contract shall be upgradeable and backward compatible with the current installation or any existing Simplex computer equipment,which is used as part of the system. C. The contractor shall meet with all necessary departments of the Smith College that may have input to the final design, operating system software and the implementation of the Security System, and provide the most current equipment and software that fulfills their requirements. u 3. Data Communications Connection to Simplex Campus Fiber: Shall be a fiber to copper connecter module, mounted in the SCCC ISC, and as manufactured by Simplex, Inc. to incorporate new ISC controllers into the existing Simplex 3400 campus wide fiber network. 4. Field Multiplex Panel-Alarm Point Monitor, Output Relay Control and Card Access Control Panel: As manufactured by Simplex, Inc., Model #ISC,Complete in lockable and tampered enclosure, modular mother-board construction, supporting up to 12 card readers, utilizing 2 reader modules, 16 supervised input point modules and 8 input or output relay modules, including manufacturer's on standard 18 amp hours of standby battery backup and loss of AC alarm reporting. Provide required number of reader boards, input boards, and output relay boards to effect a complete and operational system. Note requirement for 4 output relays to link door forced alarms to the IDS panel, and 24 additional alarm inputs from the + u IDS panel to link the IDS p panel to the Simplex front-end, via the ISC. Provide quantity as required to achieve access control requirements and alarm point monitoring and system control requirements, for devices shown on the floorplan and riser diagrams and as called for in these specifications. ISC to also include any required memory modules, hardwired media modules, media converters and/or modem continuity cards as required to effect a complete and operational system. 5. Security System Software: As manufactured by Simplex, Inc., NT 3400 SMFS, _ version "as required", security management information system software, to integrate SCCC ISC controller(s). Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-35 W" ,w. coded. One pair # 20 AWG per security device zone required. West Penn Wire (WPW) #292 or approved equal by Belden. (Note: This is a guide specification, insure cable used is approved by equipment manufacturer. Shields and twisted wire are required unless prohibited by the manufacturer. 20 AWG is a minimum wire size unless prohibited by the manufacturer.) 2. Low Voltage Security Power, 12 VDC: Shall be minimum of#18 AWG for runs up to 200', and a minimum of#16 AWG for runs up to 300', twisted, shielded, stranded, with shield drain wire, UL listed, jacketed, pair, separate color code from any other power circuits,as follows: a. WPW#293 (up to 200') WA b. WPW#294(up to 300') C. Or approved equal by Belden,Columbia or Southwest Wire. 3. Electric Lock Power Cable: Shall be minimum of#14 AWG for runs up to 75' serving a single lock. Twisted, shielded, stranded, jacketed pair, UL listed, separate color code from any other power circuits. WPW#295, or approved equal by Belden, Columbia or Southwest Wire. This is a guide specification for bidding. Review lock inrush current requirements and distance (cable length) to power supply. Review voltage drops and increase cable gauge to #12 AWG accordingly. (A separate wire pair is required for each electrified locking device/lock.) 4. Electric Lock Monitoring Cable: For electrified locks, requiring monitoring, such as delayed exit lock initial trip, electromagnet bond sensors, electric strike latch bolt position switches,cable shall be as per Item F 1 above. 5. Access Control, Card Reader (no pin) and Card Reader (w/pin) Data and Power Cable: a. Card Reader (no pin) Seven conductor, #18 AWG UL listed, stranded with overall shield and drain wire, WPW, Model No. 3281. (7 conductors is minimum,even if reader requires less than 7 conductors.) b. Card Reader (w/pin) Nine conductor #18AWG, UL listed, stranded with „R overall shield and drain wire, WPW, Model No. 3282. (9 conductors is minimum, even if reader requires less than 9 conductors.) Shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for specified system. Note requirement for powering LEDs and audible beeper function. Cables to be shielded with shield drain wire unless specifically prohibited, in writing, by the manufacturer. Confirm suitability with manufacturer of card reader and access control system reader interface prior to purchase. Provide additional conductors, if required, by approved card reader and card reader/FMP interface. 6. Intrusion Detection and Access Control System RS 485 Data/Power Communication Bus Cable: 2 Pair, #18 AWG UL listed, stranded, twisted and with overall shield and drain wire, WPW, Model No. 3751. Shall be in accordance with manufacturer's requirements for specified system. Shall be as manufactured by West Penn Wire, Columbia, Belden, or Southwest Wire. Cables to be shielded with shield drain wire unless specifically prohibited, in writing, by the manufacturer. Confirm suitability with Simplex,prior to purchase. 7. Local Audible Alert Power Cable: Shall be minimum of #18 AWG for runs up to 100', WPW #293, twisted, shielded, stranded, jacketed pair, UL listed, separate color code from any other +.. power circuits. Over 100' use #16 AWG. WPW #294 or approved equal by Belden, Columbia or Southwest Wire. Smith Campus Center Security Systems AM 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-34 *• Am lockable, and tampered enclosure and mount transformers internally, accordingly. B. Security System, Intrusion Device 12VDC Low Voltage Power Supplies: 1. Shall be manufactured by Altronix, Model #AL600ULX, selectable 12VDC or 24VDC, 6.0 amp power supply. (Tel. #718-998-8999). Provide 8 (eight) so individually fused outputs, with relay outputs to intrusion detection system to indicate loss of AC power, and low battery. Provide tamper switch on factory enclosure door and wire to IDS as an alarm input. Provide complete with internal battery and transformer. UL listed and approved, or approved equal by Alarm SAF. C. Power Supplies for Field Multiplex Panels(if required by IMP manufacturer): 1. Shall be powered by a separate power supply, identical in manufacture to: "Security System, 12VDC Low Voltage Power Supplies", complete with battery. Coordinate, with Simplex ISC field multiplex panel hardware to be provided. Before purchase, confirm correct voltage and amperage. Provide a minimum of 8- hour battery standby. D. Power Supplies for Electric Locks: 1. Shall be provided by Division 8 E. Electric Locks, Electric Lock Power Supplies, Delayed Exiting Hardware, ADA Power Operated Doors and Controls, Power Transfer Hinges and Knuckles and Fire Alarm Release: 1. Shall be furnished by the Division 8 Hardware Supplier and Division 16 Fire Alarm Contractor. Verify all voltage and current draw requirements of electrified locking hardware. Match up power supplies to electrified door locking hardware accordingly. (Locks and their respective power supplies shall be wired, terminated and tested by the Electrical and Security Contractors.) 2. The Construction Manager shall coordinate division of responsibilities between Contractors and Suppliers with these specifications and Division 8 "Finish Hardware", and Division 16, "Electrical'. Review power transfer and electrified panic hardware request to exit signal conductor requirements with the hardware supplier to achieve coordinated electrical interface between the hardware and the access control system for lock power and request to exit signaling. + " 3. The Construction Manager shall coordinate division of responsibilities and labor and material required to interface any ADA power operated doors, their controls, and card access system equipment. The Security Contractor shall furnish all required supplementary relays to integrate card access control and power door operators. 4. The Fire Alarm Contractor shall provide all required control wiring, power and relays to release delayed exit doors or fail safe electric locks, as required. These shall be installed by the Project Electrical Contractor, under the supervision of the Security Contractor when card access is a required function at the delayed exit an door. 5. The hardware supplier shall furnish all electrified locks, power supplies and associated wiring diagrams. F. Wire and Cable: 1. Low Voltage, Security Alarm Signal Cable: To be twisted, single pair, stranded, shielded cable, with shield drain wire, with overall jacket, gauge calculated to compensate for length of run, and current requirements. All conductors for security zone signal to be minimum #20 AWG, UL listed. All wire to be color- Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-33 oft Review installation application and conduit and junction box rough in prior to purchase and order longer pigtails, as required. See Part 3 of this specification governing door contact installation. •o j. Do not surface mount contacts other than those shown on the drawings to be surface mounted without prior approval of the Architect and Engineer. k. Note any use of D.P.D.T. contacts as shown on the riser diagrams and/or 00 floor plans. 1. Propose alternate type unit, if desired, after identifying each door/frame geometry, using Architect's and Aluminum Storefront/Curtainwall and Hollow Metal Supplier's Door Schedule. m. Color selection per door by Architect from manufacturer's standard color range. n. Wherever possible, Contractor shall use approved factory manufactured configuration of door contact with built-in and potted end of line resistors to eliminate field installation of resistors and to provide continuous stain-less steel sheath potted into door contact switch body. o. As manufactured by Sentrol, (Tel.: 1-800-547-2556) or approved equal by GRI or Ademco. All to be UL listed. 2. Motion Detectors: a. Ceiling Mounted Units: Shall be as manufactured by Detection Systems, Inc., # 1-800-289-0096, Model Nos. DS936, semi-flush mount, or DS938Z, based on coverage and aesthetic considerations, or Aritech Model No. PR 569 for surface mount applications or Model No. ZT 360, with"RK" recess mounting kit for recess mount applications available from Sentrol, Tel.: 1- 800-547-2556, based on field detection condition requirements associated * ► with room construction. Review, with the architect and engineer and submit accordingly. Detectors shall be as selected by the architect and engineer, or approved equal dual technology unit by CK Systems. All to be UL listed. ..' b. Wall Mounted in Corners: Shall be as manufactured by Sentrol, Inc., Tel.: 1-800-547-2556. Model No. 6150 Series, or Detection Systems Model No. DS934 or DS935Z standard or optional coverage patterns based on specific application coverage requirements, (review with the architect and the engineer) with zone sighting system mirror, swivel bracket hardware and masking kit,or approved equal by Crow or Napco. All to be UL listed. C. REX Motion Sensor: Shall be as manufactured by Detection Systems, Inc., 130 Perinton Parkway, Fairport, NY 14450, Tel.: 716-223-4060, or 1-800- 289-0096. Model No. DS 1501 (beige)/DS 1511 (black) (color as selected by the Architect), or approved equal by Kantech Systems. 3. Security System Equipment Panel or Enclosure Door Plunger Tamper Switches: a. Shall be as manufactured by Sentrol, Model No. 3017, 30141, 3014, or 3027, with or without clip based on panel/enclosure construction. UL listed, or approved equal. 4. Security System Equipment Panel or Enclosure Door Roller Tamper Switches: a. Shall be as manufactured by Sentrol, Model # 3002, 3005, or 3008 based on condition to be monitored. UL listed,or approved equal. 5. Local Door Audible Exit Alarm: a. Shall be as manufactured by Detex Corp., 302 Detex Drive, New Braunfels, TX 78130, Tel.: 1-800 729-3839, Model EA250OF (flush mounted) with ECL-445K (rim cylinder) key switch. Key all units alike. (All units in a building to be keyed alike). Provide 2 keys per unit. Also provide Detex model no. PP-5152-3, 12VAC transformer, 1 per unit. Provide ventilated, Smith Campus Center Security Systems +► 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-32 provide alarm inputs to the campus wide Simplex card access system for event display recording and event printing, utilizing system software. Also, IDS programmable relays shall control the alarm horn/audible in the alarmed partition and energize that audible only. Violation of the building's perimeter protection will not sound local audible, but shall be a "silent" alarm to Campus Public Safety. Campus Center card access control shall include request-to-exit devices at 4 card reader controlled perimeter exit doors which shall locally shunt perimeter door contacts when they are in the "armed" condition and, consequently, when the building is operating in the "secured occupancy" mode, allowing individuals to exit the building without violating the perimeter protection. Card access devices shall also provide exterior/perimeter local door access control (unlocking of electrified door locking """ hardware) on a door-by-door basis. Entry to the building, when in the "secured occupancy"mode(perimeter door contracts armed), shall require the use of a valid card to unlock the associated electric lock. 2.3 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS A. Security System Intrusion Detectors: 1. Magnetic Contacts: Clad Wiring in Stainless Steel Armor Sheath, unless wiring runs in conduit from homerun junction box to contact dust box mounted to frame. a. For recess hollow metal, not requiring D.P.D.T. contacts, use Sentrol 1090 standard ANSI type, 1/2" gap. Contact type to provide fully supervised circuit loop. For hollow metal requiring D.P.D.T. contacts, use Sentrol 1076D, 3/8"gap. b. For recess glass doors with aluminum frames, not requiring D.P.D.T. contacts, use Sentrol 1125W, 3/4" gap. Contact type to provide fully supervised circuit loop. If D.P.D.T. contacts are required, use Sentrol 1076D, 3/8"gap. C. For surface mount doors, gates, or roof hatches use Sentrol 2507-AH, high security biased type 3/4"to 2'/z"gap. Contact type to provide fully supervised circuit loop. " d. For elevators, use Sentrol Model #2227A, 3" gap, or Sentrol #1044 TW, 3" gap, include all brackets and accessories as required. e. For recess wood, not requiring D.P.D.T. contacts, use Sentrol 1065, 7/8" " gap. Otherwise, use Sentrol 1070D, 3/8" gap, D.P.D.T. contact type to provide fully supervised circuit loop. f. For special cross section,dimensionally small, hollow metal/aluminum doors and frames, not requiring D.P.D.T. contacts, use Sentrol 1090 Series, utilizing a standard 4-7/8"x 1-1/4"mounting plate, integral with the contact. (This contact is to be used when other units will not fit due to frame sizing.) If D.P.D.T. contacts are called for, use two 1090 units per leaf. g. For rolling grilles, sliding doors, and shutters, use Sentrol 2304, up to 3" gap, or 2207A-H or 2507A-H, 3/4" to 3" gap contact-type to provide fully supervised circuit loop. High security-biased type. Do not use contacts that require a floor-mounted device. h. For surface mount access doors use Sentrol 2507-AH, high security biased type, 3/4"to 2%"gap. Contact type to provide fully supervised circuit loop. i. Provide all contacts with sufficient wire lead length and stainless steel armor sheathing to allow an installation free of exposed conductors, unnecessary splices, and inappropriately placed junction boxes between contact mounting and connection to alarm signal homerun cables and their associated junction box. Note: Contacts generally are manufactured with standard F-0"pigtails. w. Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-31 .w product/system requirements necessary. If the drawings show a product, which is not called out in the Specification, confirm product manufacturer and model number with Engineer prior to purchase. Submit shop drawings as if the product were listed in the project specifications. If additional equipment is required due to specific job conditions or systems' configuration, products and equipment shall be supplied in accordance with the required submission process to create a complete and operational system. J. Where special, custom designed systems are to be engineered and fabricated by the Contractor, components shall be selected by the Contractor, which provide electrical performance criteria, and operational criteria identified in these specifications. Equipment selected shall be of the heavy duty commercial/industrial type, and shall be selected to provide mean time to failure, and mean time to repair, at values no less than that associated with the intrusion detection and access control multiplex panels or intrusion detection control panel, security device and electric lock power supplies. This equipment is referenced to identify and set a standard for the expected quality of �. microelectronic boards,power supplies, and chargers, etc. on a system-by-system basis. 2.2 SYSTEM DESIGN INTENT A. The security system for this facility involves the use of intrusion detection devices and card access control devices. The alarm panel based intrusion detection system shall be designed to accommodate the Owner's requirements to individually arm and disarm individual devices and/or groups of devices consisting of unique portions of the building(partitions) and the perimeter of the building. This has been specified in order to provide "partial occupancy" wherein some devices are locally disarmed through alarm panel system software and/or alarm keypads, allowing the remaining portions of the building to have the benefit of intrusion detection protection, and also to allow a "secured occupancy" mode where interior motion detection and door contacts are disarmed while the building perimeter protection is armed. The radio station, mail storage and kitchen area occupancies in the building, as well as the building perimeter, are protected by a stand-alone intrusion detection system alarm panel with its own arm/disarm/annunciator keypads, located at the radio station, mail storage, kitchen and Office 106B. This panel is linked to the Campus Center system, through the use of output relays in the IDS panel, acting as alarm inputs to the Campus Center, Simplex card access/intrusion detection system (CA/IDS) ISC based system. The radio station, mail storage, kitchen and Campus Center Building Perimeter alarm system are connected to a Simplex ISC controller in the SCCC building, which is then networked with the existing campus wide Simplex equipment, located in the Facilities and Public Safety offices. ' The Campus Center intrusion detection system shall have the capability to support "partitioned" area control through group shunt functions of its alarm devices, allowing arming and disarming of the radio station, mail storage, kitchen area and the building perimeter, as unique groups of alarm zones. However, alarms on the Campus Center IDS panel system shall report to the PC based Simplex system for communication with Public Safety. Upon an alarm from an armed partition of the building perimeter, the respective IDS panel software and programmed database shall initiate relay outputs which shall Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-30 po PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. All materials shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's model numbers, performance levels, quality, style and sizes as specified herein. Manufacturers' names and model numbers are given in the Specifications for the purposes of establishing a standard of performance, quality, style, size and type and shall be considered to exclude equipment and materials of other manufacturers unless the words "or approved equal" appear in the Equipment Specification Section. It is the intent of these an Specifications that, wherever a manufacturer or product or a catalogue number is specified, substituted items must conform in all respects to the specified item where substitution is allowed, in accordance with Division 1, 16 and Specification Section 16770. B. When the Contractor is allowed and elects to substitute materials or equipment other than that specified, the Contractor will be held responsible for all structural, + " mechanical, and electrical changes required for their installation at no additional cost to the Owner. All changes shall be subject to the Architect or his designee's complete written approval in accordance with Division 1. C. When the Contractor receives approval to substitute, he shall include, during the Shop Drawing submission process, complete specifications of the substituted item along with specifications of each specified product, indicating the necessary modifications to, or differences from the specified product to satisfy requirements of the Contract Specifications. Substitute Manufacturer's Specifications shall be written as close as possible over the Contract Specifications to aid comparisons by the Owner and Engineer. D. When a specified manufacturer's product has been superseded by a newer model, the later model shall be furnished, provided the newer model retains the essential characteristics of the item specified herein and maintains compatibility with other new and/or existing integrated systems hardware and software. Indicate in submission if such condition exists. E. The materials and equipment to be furnished shall be new and unused and fabricated from new materials. Factory"reconditioned"products are not allowed. F. Materials and equipment shall be, where so specified, UL labeled, as required, and shall bear the manufacturer's name, model number and any other Listing Agency identification markings. G. Materials and equipment shall be the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of the required type of material or equipment for at least five (5) years (unless specifically exempted in writing by the Architect or his designee) and shall be the manufacturer's latest design with published properties. H. Equipment and materials of the same general type shall be of the same manufacture throughout the project to provide uniform appearance, operation, maintenance, and compatibility with existing components and/or systems. 1. The specifications package reflects the range of anticipated system equipment and s► ,_ components to be used as part of the completed security system. The Contractor should also refer to the security system drawings to determine the extent of Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-29 133 SUBCONTRACTING OF WORK A. All work shall be performed by skilled personnel directly employed and supervised by the Electrical and Security System Contractors. ""' B. The Security Contractor may elect to have wiring and/or devices or other security components installed by the project electrical contractor. Coordination of labor and assignment of work shall be accomplished prior to bid and a price for the complete installation shown on the drawing and included in the specifications shall be provided in the bid. 1.34 OWNER FURNISHED AND/OR EXISTING SECURITY EQUIPMENT A. The Owner may furnish equipment and devices for installation under this contract as indicated herein, or existing equipment may be reused as identified in the specifications and/or as shown on the drawings. B. The Contractor or his representative will be required to sign an itemized equipment receipt for Owner supplied equipment. After receipt, the Contractor will then be held responsible and liable for the loss of, or damage to the equipment until the job is completed and accepted by the Owner. C. Any Owner-furnished equipment and/or devices that are not installed for any reason shall be returned to the Owner's Representative. 1.35 AUTHORIZES CHANGES IN CONTRACT WORK REQUIREMENT s A. The Contractor shall note that no changes in the work requirements or scope of work under this contract shall be made by the Contractor without a written modification to the contract in accordance with Division 1 of the Specifications. 1.36 INTER-TRADE JURISDICTION A. Each trade shall cooperate with, and assist other trades on the project in conformance with trade jurisdictional rulings and each trade shall perform the work, which is within its jurisdiction. Jurisdictional disputes, which alter the assignment of work, called for in these Specifications and the Security System drawings shall not alter the responsibility of the Contractor from achieving a completed installation in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings. The Contractor shall make whatever agreements with other trades as required to complete the scope of this work and include this cost in his bid. Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-28 F+ H. Where security system cabling must be co-mingled with other system cables, such as in power supplies, fire alarm enclosures, etc., the security contractor shall coordinate the cable installation, conduit and enclosure sizing and partitioning with the appropriate contractors and,as required, to meet governing electrical codes. 1.31 VERIFYING JOBSITE CONDITIONS A. Before commencing work, examine all existing and adjoining work on which this work is in any way dependent for perfect workmanship according to the intent of this Specification. No "waiver of responsibility" for incomplete, inadequate or defective "existing" conditions or "adjoining" work will be considered unless notice has been filed prior to commencing work. "a B. Become thoroughly familiar with actual existing conditions at the building site. The intent of the work is shown on the drawings and described hereinafter, and no consideration will be granted by reason of lack of familiarity on the part of the Contractor with actual physical conditions at the site. C. Review electrical contractor provided conduit system,trough,cable trays, ductbanks, as well as door frames/storefront construction curtain wall assemblies, and insure proper installation of wiring can occur. Review any precluding field conditions with the Construction Manager and Architect. D. Visit the site, prior to bid, and become thoroughly familiar with the existing Simplex ? access control and intrusion detection equipment in the SC public safety and facility offices, so that expansion, revision and integration into the new Campus Center system is completely covered in the bid. 0' E. It is the engineer's intent for the security contractor to make use of all raceways and conduits installed, in accordance with the security drawings, for the installation of the security system, as defined in the contract documents. However, these engineering drawings are schematic for conduit run locations, as a result of the building design complexity and type of construction. The contractor shall provide any necessary field investigation/verification to insure their complete accuracy and, as part of the shop drawing process,revise horizontal and vertical conduit runs as required. 1.32 CONFIDENTIALITY OF DOCUMENTS wr A. The documents, consisting of all technical proposals, drawings, specifications, shop drawings, as-builts, manufacturers' literature, etc., shall be considered proprietary information and treated with complete confidentiality. Dissemination of any security system documentation to any party without a pre-defined and approved"need-to-know" status will be considered a violation of the contract documents and all pursuant clauses regarding financial penalties, project termination and/or legal prosecution apply. Obtain a list of"need-to-know"parties from the Owner and/or Construction Manager. B. Use of these plans and specifications is restricted to the original site for which they are prepared. Publication therefore is expressly limited to such use. Re-use, reproduction, r storage by any medium or publication by any method in whole or in part is prohibited. Visual contact with these plans and specifications constitutes prima facie evidence of the acceptance of these restrictions. Unlawful publication, dissemination and use of these documents carry significant liability and the Owner maintains the right to legally pursue restitution and/or penalty for violation of these confidentiality conditions. �r Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-27 no D. Contractor shall not do any cutting that may impair strength of building construction. No holes, except for small screws,may be drilled in beams or other structural members without obtaining prior approval. All fastenings into deck plank, lintels, or other structural assemblies, when approved, shall be done in a neat manner by mechanics skilled in their trades and as approved by the Architect. E. All sleeves through rated walls (sound or fire rating) shall be sealed/packed with an ,. approved and listed-for-the-purpose material in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, to maintain the fire and/or sound rating of the penetrated wall. Sealants shall be submitted for approval to the Architect per the contract documents. F. Connections to fireproofed steel shall remove fireproof coating only sufficient to make connection. Repair any damaged fireproofing to like new condition per fireproofing specifications, utilizing the appropriate trade contractor. G. Cutting and patching of any slabs and walls to accommodate work, which was not performed in an appropriate manner, shall be performed by the appropriate trade Contractor. Coordinate cutting and patching work and insure all necessary work is properly carried out in accordance with specifications governing that trade work. 1.30 ARRANGEMENT OF WORK A. The drawings are partially diagrammatic and indicate general arrangement of the work. Drawings may not show all work specified. Consult the balance of the project contract documents including drawings and specifications for additional installation *■ requirements, equipment and exact locations and space coordination, and coordinate installation with the work of other trades. B. Maintain maximum headroom and accessibility for maintenance, and prepare large- scale drawings of the work where tight space conditions exist and where installation conflicts appear likely. Secure the approval of other trades and the Architect before proceeding. C. Refer to respective Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans for ceiling mounted devices, and respective Architect's Interior and Exterior Elevations for wall mounted .» equipment. D. Where Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans or Interior and Exterior Elevations do not show devices or equipment, lay out all wall and ceiling mounted devices on each floor in a walk-through with the Architect. Tag or suitably mark all device locations as directed by the Architect and use as location for actual, final rough in. E. If a walk through with the Architect does not locate all devices not shown on architectural drawings, request in writing "location-sketches" of devices still not located by the Architect. If such sketches are not provided after such written request, and timely notice, and construction schedule requires rough in, mount in accordance .R with locations shown on Request for Information (RFI) detail drawings created by the Contractor and submitted to the Architect for clarification and approval. F. When work calls for "homerun" connections, include all work necessary to bring conduit and wire to that location as part of the bid price. G. For any equipment located so that maintenance or service requires removal, leave adequate cable slack for equipment maintenance and terminations in the panels. Failure to leave adequate cable slack may be cause for rejection of work and complete rewiring, without any allowance for splices or terminal blocks by the contractor. Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-26 D. The Security Contractor shall furnish and install wire and shall connect to all equipment indicated on the Drawings and as required by the manufacturer and the approved shop drawings at no additional expense to the Owner. The Security Contractor shall advise the electrical contractor of any required conduit modifications from those shown on the security drawings, prior to installation, including size,routing, back boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, to achieve complete coordination with the approved security equipment and wiring diagrams provided in the shop drawing submission process. E. The Security Contractor is required to interconnect the new Simplex ISC panels to new fiber optic cable in the telephone closet. The Contractor shall furnish and install all cable terminations to convert from fiber to copper, as required to interconnect the ISC "N panels with the campus fiber backbone. Work shall also include coordination, in cooperation with Smith College Facilities, Public Safety and Information Services personnel,to identify any network related shutdowns,connections,and programming. 1.28 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS(WHERE APPLICABLE) A. Access doors and panels shall be no smaller than 12"x 12", and no larger than 24"by 24" for all apparatus located in chases,walls, non-accessible hung ceilings or floors. B. Access doors shall be of the type and make specified under Division 9 and 10, except where special architectural details provide,otherwise, for same. C. Identify access doors to the Construction Manager, Architect and appropriate contractor trade in which the access door will be mounted, for furnishing and installation by that Contractor. D. All panels and their exact location shall be subject to approval by the Architect or his designated representative for placement and finish. E. Where space conditions prevent swinging open type, removable door or lift-up hinge type shall be provided. F. Furnish a complete list indicating sizes and locating all access doors required in finished walls, ceilings, partitions, etc., to the Construction Manager and Architect prior to commencement of trade work in which the access doors are to be installed. G. Access doors for security equipment shall not be externally labeled. H. Wherever possible, locate boxes or equipment requiring access above accessible ceilings on the secure side of (in the electronically protected area) to minimize 00 unauthorized access without detection. 1.29 CUTTING AND PATCHING(WHERE APPLICABLE) A. All cutting and rough patching required for equipment included in these Specifications ""' shall be performed in accordance with the General Conditions. This shall include all sleeves required and any cutting and patching required in both existing and new work. ter, B. Locate all sleeves and inserts required in new floors and walls prior to their completion and include the cost of the appropriate trade contractor for cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves and inserts are needed, were not installed, or where incorrectly located. C. All holes cut through concrete plank or slabs or arches shall be core drilled. No structural members shall be cut without the approval of the Architect and his Structural Engineer and all such cutting shall be done in a manner directed by them. Smith Campus Center Security Systems '" " 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-25 prior to bid if he objects to the proposed use of any product of his manufacture or in operation with his equipment as shown on the drawings and/or specifications. D. During construction, each manufacturer, or their licensed representatives, shall visit the site periodically to observe the installation of his product. The manufacturer shall notify the Architect and the Contractor immediately if his product is not being installed or connected to as recommended by the manufacturer of the product. E. Upon completion of the Work each manufacturer, or their licensed representatives, shall certify, in writing, that his product was installed, or connected to, in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations and the installation is accepted by the manufacturer, or their licensed representatives, as compliant with these requirements. wa F. A safe product and safe equipment as required by codes or standards is the responsibility of the manufacturer. Necessary safety labels and safety instructions shall be provided by the manufacturer and included in the Project Manual. Contractor .� installation techniques or methods, which affect the safety of a product, shall, when observed by the manufacturer, be corrected in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations. G. Contract Documents are based on the manufacturers specified. If more than one manufacturer is listed, the Contract documents are based on the first manufacturer named to establish functions, quality, space, and operating features, and other manufacturers may be considered an approved equal, as long as they are configured by the manufacturer to provide the features and functional capability of the primary listed product, achieve the required system's integration with other products and the requirements of Specification Section 1.07 are adhered to. H. The intrusion detection and access control system's manufacturers, or their licensed representatives, shall certify that proper equipment is submitted during shop drawing ..� process, and that hardware and/or software is shipped and installed on site to achieve complete functional stand alone and integration systems operation with the balance of system equipment specified. „ 1.27 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT AND CONNECTIONS A. Furnish all fittings, conduit associated with panel to panel and panel to trough connections, trough, wireways, boxes, hangers, wiring devices, enclosures, signage, fasteners, connections, control panels, relays, and miscellaneous accessories necessary for the complete installation of the Security System and final connections to equipment furnished by other trades and/or the Owner. B. Furnish engineering support, project management coordination, and develop detailed diagrams which identify the required wiring interface between the electrified door locks and card reader system, ADA power operated doors and card reader system, and lock power supplies. C. Engineering Drawings are, of necessity, schematic for systems equipment as exact roughing requirements vary slightly with different manufacturers and job conditions. The Drawings represent an accurate, but schematic, depiction of the Security System conduit and wire network layout for the system equipment specified. However, final ..• conduit and wire quantity, size, and arrangement, as well as final routing, and placement, may vary based on the shop drawing approval of system equipment, manufacturer's engineering requirements, field coordination with other trade work, and as a result of other trade equipment which must be connected to. Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 0 l.11.12 16770-24 B. Minor equipment locational deviations from Drawings may be made to allow for better accessibility, but changes of magnitude or which involve extra cost or exposing equipment, shall not be made without prior approval. C. Minimum clearances in front of or around equipment shall conform to the latest applicable manufacturers requirements for inspection and testing, and the NEC for "a control panel and junction box access, (treat all control panels, power supplies for access, as though they were 120 VAC leaving a minimum of 3'-0" clear in front of same, floor to ceiling). D. All Security System equipment, except wiring and conduit, shall be completely accessible without the requirement to remove any portion of building structure or other system component, except an appropriately sized access door or ceiling tile. E. Enclosure access doors shall be hinged and arranged to allow full swing open and complete access to all enclosure components and wiring. r 1.25 NAMEPLATES(NOT SIGNAGE) A. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, model number and rating on a plate securely affixed in a conspicuous place. Nameplate of a manufacturer's representative or a distributing agent will not be acceptable. FCC, UL, EIA, NEMA, or other Code ratings, or other data, which is die- stamped into surface of equipment, shall be positioned in an easily visible location. B. Provide Lamacoid plastic laminate labels on all terminal or equipment cabinets, power supplies, control panels, and control equipment, to clearly identify device number, system type, function, operation, and status. Labels for all equipment shall be submitted to the Owner for approval, and all labels shall be reflected on the as-built drawings for all respective equipment. C. Laminated plastic shall be 1/8" thick Melamine plastic, blue with white center core. Surface shall be a matte finish. All corners shall be square. The characters shall be accurately aligned and engraved into the white core. Size of nameplates shall be 2"by no 3" minimum. Provide larger nameplates where text requires. Characters shall be in accordance with"Helvetica"letter style standard, or approved equal. D. Labels shall be securely affixed using screws or rivets. Two-sided adhesive tape will only be accepted if sample submitted for prior approval and deemed suitable by the engineer. 1.26 MANUFACTURERS 4W A. Each manufacturer, or their licensed representatives, shall refer to his respective Section of the Specifications and all general articles of this Section,before bid due date and after bid award. Contractor shall provide each potential equipment manufacturer with these Specifications when soliciting price quotations and for potential order placement. B. Failure of the Contractor to provide manufacturers, or their licensed representatives, with the appropriate portions of the drawings and specifications may be the basis for rejection of his Bid or denial of a Change Order associated with required modifications to systems as a result of manufacturers' non-participation in bid price preparation and/or order placement. C. Each manufacturer, or their licensed representatives, shall thoroughly familiarize 4-0 himself with all specified products relating to the Work and submit written objection Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-23 no *.w 9. UL: Underwriters' Laboratories, specifically: a. UL 294: Access control system units b. UL 611: Central station burglar alarm system units C. UL 1076& 1610: Proprietary burglar alarm system units d. UL 1635: Digital burglar alarm communication system units C. Notify the Owner and the Architect or his designated Representative of any materials or apparatus believed to be inadequate, unsuitable, in violation of laws, ordinances, rules or regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. D. In case of differences between Building Codes, State and Federal laws, local ordinances,rulings by the authority having jurisdiction, and utility company regulations and the Contract Documents,the most stringent will govern. s: E. The minimum standards for system equipment installation and configuration to be the recommendations of each manufacturer. F. Should work be performed which does not comply with the requirements of the applicable building codes, State and Federal laws, local ordinances, industry standards and utility company regulations, changes for compliance shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. G. All material and equipment shall conform to the applicable NFPA, UL, NEC, EIA, ANSI, ADA, IEEE and NEMA Standards and Requirements. H. If any additional requirements of the Owner are identified after bid award, the consequences of any requested modifications shall be reviewed in a meeting between the Owner, Architect, Construction Manager, the Engineer, and this Contractor, for the purpose of obtaining a cost and time schedule impact. 1. Refer to Division 1 and 16 of the project specifications for further code and regulatory agency requirements. J. Ratings of devices and equipment specified without reference to specific performance criteria shall be understood to be nominal factory or nameplate ratings or performance criteria established by means of industry standard procedures and manufacturer's specifications. 1.23 FINAL ADJUSTMENTS A. The adjustments of the system(s) and components shall be accomplished by the Contractor to the complete satisfaction of the Architect or his designated representative, the authority having jurisdiction, and the manufacturer's representatives. B. The Contractor shall advise the Owner of any access codes, keys, program settings, factory default codes, used during set up and testing, etc., and shall invalidate same at system acceptance time, only after turnover of complete documentation to the Owner, and the provision of proper systems use training, as directed by the Owner's Project Manager. 1.24 ACCESSIBILITY A. Locate all equipment, which must be serviced, operated or maintained in fully accessible positions, especially when located in concealed locations. If required, for better accessibility, advise the Construction Manager to authorize the trade in which the access door will be mounted to furnish access doors for this purpose, after + coordination with the Architect. Smith Campus Center Security Systems * 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-22 No AW B. The Foreman shall be qualified and authorized to make decisions and answer questions asked by the Architect, Engineer, Construction Manager or Owner or his designated ►► representative regarding progress and details of the work. C. The Contractor shall perform all work under the supervision of representatives of the manufacturer(s) of the new systems equipment. Costs for such supervision shall be borne by the Contractor and included as necessary in the Base Bid. D. Refer to Section 1.02, 1.04, 1.05, 1.17, 1.18, 1.26 and 1.27 of these Specifications for additional manufacturer's participation. 1.21 JOB CONFERENCES A. A pre-installation Job Conference shall be convened including the Architect, Construction Manager, Electrical Sub-Contractor, Hardware Supplier and Installer, Storefront Door Installer, Security Contractor and other parties deemed necessary, in order to insure a complete coordination of the security system work and its impact on other trades. B. A security system coordination job conference shall be conducted at the time of security shop drawing submission by the Construction Manager to insure coordination of the security shop drawings prior to their submission to the Architect. Failure to provide this coordination meeting will be the basis for shop drawing submittal rejection. C. Job conferences shall be held as required while construction is in progress. Contractor shall attend personally, or be represented at such meetings. Should the Contractor elect to be represented, it is to be understood and agreed upon that in dealing with Contractor's representative, the full assurance that such representative's actions and commitments may be accepted the same as though the Contractor who signed and is bound by the Contract, were himself present and personally made such agreements and ` commitments, in accordance with all terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Representation will only be allowed if approved, in advance, by the Construction Manager, Architect and Owner. 1.22 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. When standards of the Federal Government,the State, the City, trade societies, or trade associations are referred to in the Contract Documents by specific date of issue, these shall be considered part of the Contract. When such references do not bear a date of issue, the current published edition at date of First Invitation to Bid shall be considered as part of this Contract, including supplements thereto. B. Codes and Regulations. In addition to the codes and regulations identified in the Division 1 General Requirements and Div. 16, the following codes and standards shall be adhered to and shall not be contravened without approval from the Engineer or Governmental Agency having jurisdiction: 1. All Federal, State and Local codes governing(latest issue) 2. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code (especially Section 7.2, Means of Egress Components) 3. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code im 4. ADA: American Disabilities Act 5. ANSI: American National Standards Institute (especially A17.1) 6. ASTM: American Society for Testing&Materials 7. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association 8. EIA: Electronic Industry Association Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-21 G. Card readers, which are on the outside of the building, shall be mounted on exterior wails and conduit and wires routed through same in a manner approved and supervised by the contractor's responsible for wall construction and Construction Manager to maintain wall integrity, waterproofing,moisture/vapor barriers. 1.18 SPECIAL CONSULTANTS A. In the event that the Contractor is required by the design of the system,job conditions, equipment specifications, existing conditions or by special installation requirements,to employ the service of special consultants, factory or system maintenance/technical engineers, system installers, factory representatives, etc. to aid in the performance of the work, such shall have been included in the Contract Amount. B. The Contractor is to minimally include two site visits for each system of intrusion detection and access control for direct factory technical support on-site. One site visit for assistance and inspection of work in progress, and a second site visit for system commissioning and set-up and certification prior to Engineer's review and sign-off. ,r C. All systems shall be set up, wired, adjusted, tested, commissioned and turned over to the Construction Manager, Architect and Owner by the security contractor's installation team,complete with a certification of fitness and operation from the factory technical representatives. This shall be accomplished during the contractor tests, as called out in Section 1.10 and 1.18 of these Specifications. D. Note the system design requirement to integrate the existing Simplex equipment in public safety to the SCCC and, hence, the need to include Simplex technical representation as part of the system installation. 1.19 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS A. At the request of the Construction Manager or Architect, bidders must detail their qualifications to undertake and complete this Project. Declarations of qualifications ..� must list installations of equal cost and technical scope; must represent evidence of seven(7)years of experience in installing and servicing of intrusion detection systems, access control systems, communication systems, and video badging systems; must represent experience in project site area (within 60 miles of site); and maintain a crew of maintenance and service personnel capable of providing the specified guarantee and warranty service. In addition, the Contractor shall provide written documentation of his current State license, indicating date of renewal and any qualifications. The Contractor must also document any factory authorized affiliation with the manufacturers of specified equipment. B. A single prime Contractor shall be responsible for all work of this Section and as shown on the Security Drawings. The Contractor shall make whatever arrangements are necessary with an Electrical Contractor for conduit and box work to insure a complete bid price for the entire raceway system (conduit, back box network, wiremold, etc.). 1.20 SUPERVISION OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of an experienced Foreman who shall be constantly in charge of the installation of the work. Foreman shall have a minimum of low 10 years experience in the installation of similar security systems equipment, and shall have equivalent skills and training of a licensed Master Electrician. Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-20 P" D. Check conduits installed outside of buildings, underground, in ductbanks or in slab on- grade construction for water presence and advise engineer prior to cable purchases. Revise cable type to moisture proof type after discussion with the Engineer. E. Protect all equipment from other construction activities such as dust, paint, and sealers, using non-damaging protective means. F. Protect all equipment, devices and cables installed to achieve protection from other contractor activities. Ir G. Protect all equipment from lightning and voltage surges. Damage due to lightning strikes or voltage surges prior to system acceptance shall be repaired by the Contractor at his own expense. ' 1.17 JOB COORDINATION A. The work specified under this Contract requires complete coordination with the work of other trades working under separate contracts. Special attention is called for coordination with the appropriate trade contractor in the preparation of drywall, masonry, wood, steel, concrete, and other general construction details, the Electrical Sub-Contractor for connection to the 120 volt AC system, any electrified door fire alarm releases, the installation and layout of the security system conduit and required electrical boxes and trough box, as well as the installation of any security system cabling, the Hollow Metal Manufacturer and Hardware Supplier for access control door unlocking system, electrified exiting hardware control and door contact preparation, the Hardware Supplier for the provision of the electrified door unlocking hardware and power supplies, etc. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to initiate, generate, maintain and respond to all such coordination efforts, with these and other trades. B. This Contractor shall dedicate whatever time is necessary in working with the appropriate Contractors for General Construction, Millwork Contractors, storefront/aluminum curtain wall fabricator and installer, Electrical Contractors, Hardware Suppliers, Door and Frame Manufacturers and Installers to insure coordination of Security System equipment, wiring, and conduit layout for the purpose of achieving the installed system as shown on the Contract Drawings. C. Special attention is called for concerning coordination of aluminum and hollow metal door and frame suppliers, hardware suppliers, special doors and gate manufacturers, Electrical and Security Contractor in placement of all devices, wiring, and door and frame preparation for door contacts, access control system equipment, wire OW terminations, cable selection, conduit routing and mounting of all associated equipment. D. All doors and frames scheduled to receive magnetic contact devices shall have them recess mounted. This Contractor shall provide all details and wiring information to the Door and Frame Suppliers to insure recess mounting of contacts, concealment of wiring, and maintenance of factory guarantees and fire and sound rating labels. E. Access control door unlocking system equipment and electrified hardware shall be wired strictly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions provided by the Hardware Supplier, access control manufacturers, and power supply manufacturer. F. Any wiring through hollow metal, aluminum or wood doors and/or storefront construction shall be through factory or "providing-trade" raceways. Security contractor shall coordinate with other trade divisions and fabricators to insure these - raceways are provided and sized for wiring approved in the Security System Shop Drawing submissions. Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-19 w K. The Contractor shall provide the services of factory trained and certified instructors who will give full instruction to designated personnel in the adjustment, operation and " maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the equipment and system actually installed. L. Instructors shall also assist in the development of the system's required database creation, through an interactive dialogue of text, system displays, and oral training/example sessions with the Owner's staff, until adequate familiarity is obtained by the Owner to participate in the completion of the database by the Contractor. M. The training shall be based on the system installed rather than being a general (canned) ,. training course. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the subject matter he/she is to teach, and of this system as installed. An agenda of subject matter and hours devoted to same shall be provided ten (10) days in advance to allow Owner scheduling of staff participation. 1.15 PRODUCT HANDLING AND PROTECTION A. Deliver, store, handle, and install all devices and system equipment, to prevent damage. Deliver materials in their original unopened containers, cartons, and packing, unless "prior-to-delivery" bench testing was performed, in which case boxes shall be marked "bench tested". Store where protected from damage, from exposure to the elements, and theft. B. Turn over operation and installation booklets contained in equipment shipping boxes to the Owner as part of the"Project Manuals". C. Coordinate with the General Contractor and the Owner or his designated representative for site access and availability of lockable and secure storage. D. Where installation of security system equipment occurs prior to final completion of space,provide temporary protection of all equipment to maintain"as new"condition. E. Loss of inventory due to theft, vandalism, etc., shall be the Contractor's responsibility until written system acceptance date. F. The Contractor is responsible for protection of all stored or installed materials, equipment or systems until the written date of accepted turnover. Damage from vandalism, theft, lightning, or other acts of God or man shall be repaired by the Contractor to the specification and drawing standards and requirements at the Contractor's expense. 1.16 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not store, install, or expose, prior to, during, or after installation, any Security System device or device or control panel equipment, in an environment in which the temperature drops below 45° F, rises above 95° F, or comes in proximity to or contact with strong magnetic fields, corrosive fumes, paint, static electricity, dust, moisture, etc. w B. Check all 120VAC feeds for clean power, clean grounds, hi/lo voltage and amperage, etc.,prior to any equipment connection. C. Check all cables for shorts, grounds, induced voltages or other spurious noise, which could adversely affect system components or performance, prior to connection of any signal transmission equipment. Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-18 C. Operator level training shall include three(3)4-hour days(12 hours)of course material minimally encompassing the following: 1. Sequence of operation review of all systems 2. Sign on-sign off,all systems 3. Selection of all displays and reports 4. Commanding of all input and output points,keypad mode 5. Use of all dialog boxes and menus D. Supervisor level training shall include an additional five (5) 4-hour days (20 hours) of sr► on-site instruction encompassing all of the above,plus: 1. Purge and/or dump of historical data 2. Creation and modification of cardholder database 3. Password assignment/modification 4. Modifying alarm limits and start-stop times 5. Operator assignment/modification 6. Download and initialization of remote panels 7. Commanding of all card reader, access control addresses, keyboard and mouse mode 8. Commanding of all intrusion detection system's controls 9. Point disable/enable,access/secure schedules 10. Troubleshooting of sensors (determining bad sensors) 11. ISC data segregation/modification 12. Use of report software with system data 13. Creation and modification of all site-specific user-defined fields E. System's manager programmer level training shall include an additional two(2) 4-hour sessions(8 hours),on site,encompassing all of the above,plus: - 1. Software review of Sequence of Operation and flowcharts 2. Use of diagnostics on site 3. System maintenance procedures 4. Review of initialization 5. Upload/download on off-line archiving system software 6. Graphic creation 7. Factory diagnostic routines,on-line with manufacturer 8. English language text programming F. Supervisor and system manager/programmer level training shall be for three owner personnel. go G. Scheduling of Owner training prior to completion of the work shall be coordinated with the Owner. Training sessions shall be provided at the Owner's option and availability. Training sessions may, at the Owner's option,be spread over a three(3)month period. ion H. The Contractor shall arrange training sessions at least 15 business days in advance to accommodate trainee schedules of availability. 1. The Contractor shall provide a training agenda, including all required pictorial and any other required training material to Owner fifteen(15)business days prior to the training session. The training agendas shall be provided to the Engineer for preliminary review prior to their submission to the Owner. J. The specified system training manuals shall be provided a minimum of ten (10) business days in advance of training sessions to provide adequate time for staff training preparations. Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-17 ,o 1.13 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE CONTRACT (PROJECT ALTERNATE NO. SS1) A. Contractor shall submit, at the time of bid, as a document separate from bid proposal responding to the Specifications, a contract for maintenance of newly installed equipment and response to emergency service calls which contract details the proposed maintenance and service to be provided after the expiration of first year guarantee and AN warrants, as specified under Section 1.12. B. Such contract shall provide for preventive maintenance inspections and tests of system no and sub-system components on a regularly scheduled basis (Minimally, 2, bi-annual inspections and tests as stipulated in 1.12) to accommodate the Owner's requirements for efficient and reliable operation of the entire system. Emergency service response 44 shall be provided within eight (8) hours of receipt of telephone call or fax from a representative of the Owner for such service. C. Such contract shall identify all costs to the Owner for such service and response and should identify costs for total contract for a minimum of one (1) year of such service, and stipulate renewal rates for service for a minimum of one year after termination of first year of service. D. As part of this maintenance and service agreement, the Contractor shall include two(2) bi-annual inspections and complete device-by-device and complete system operational tests of the installed system to verify proper operation of every aspect of the system and all of its components. Test reports shall be provided to document test and corrective procedures/results. E. Maintenance and service agreement shall stipulate hourly rates for business hours and overtime hours, travel rates and reimbursables, spares stocking requirements, and a "return-to-on-line" performance path that identifies time and equipment performance milestones and contractor service and management staff dedications and equipment resource dedications to minimize and define "time-off-line" without opportunity for ambiguity. These line item cost and corrective performance identifications are a minimal requirement. •r F. Provide this agreement and submit with the Base Bid documents. The price for this agreement shall remain valid for one year from the date of Owner acceptance of the security system (expiration of first year guarantee and warranty). It shall be the Owner's option to execute the maintenance and service agreement at any time up to expiration of first year guarantee and warranty. G. Failure to submit the maintenance and service agreement may serve as the basis for Base Bid dismissal. 1.14 OWNER TRAINING A. Contractor, as part of this work, shall train no fewer than ten (10) designees of the Owner's Security and Facility Management Staff in the operation of the equipment, prior to final systems' acceptance. B. Such training shall include instruction in automatic and manual operation of all system components and equipment. Training shall be provided by qualified, factory trained and certified personnel familiar with each sub-system's operations and shall be provided at the site for a period of no less than thirty-two (32) hours of instruction to five (5)persons, as follows: (Refer to Section 3.05 for further details.) Smith Campus Center Security Systems •A• 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-16 W SCCC Simplex equipment with the existing Simplex equipment, as a result of expanding and upgrading the existing Simplex campus system. 1.12 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall guarantee and warrant in accordance with the General Conditions, 1-6 all work called for in the Contract Documents. Date of Owner acceptance will be the date of first day of first year guarantee and warranty, as well as maintenance and service,as called out in Section 1.13 of these Specifications. go B. The Contractor shall secure warrants from all equipment suppliers and provide the Owner or his designated representative with copies of each, for each piece of equipment, as part of the "Project Manuals". Each warranty and guarantee shall state that all work performed will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of final written acceptance by the Owner, unless guarantees for longer periods are provided by equipment suppliers or required elsewhere in these Specifications. The warranty and guarantee shall state that any defects in workmanship and/or materials appearing in the work or operation of system or components of system within the prescribed time will be corrected without costs (labor and material) to the Owner within two (2) days after receipt of written notice from the Owner, if such defects or faults do not prevent proper operation of the system, and shall further agree to repair or replace any and all damages to the system caused thereby at any time or times during the guarantee period. C. If detection, reporting, access control, arming/disarming, communications, or system operation is compromised, provide emergency 8 hour, service response as outlined below. (Particular attention is called to the fact that the Contractor is to include the necessary maintenance [labor and materials] to all the system equipment and components to provide for this one-year warranty in his Base Bid. Validity of the one year warranty requirement is not to be voided, canceled, or shortened by any requirements for special, or additional service, during the first year of operation, after the date of system acceptance.) ow D. The Contractor shall be responsible to provide, during guarantee and warranty period, emergency service response, including labor and materials, within eight (8) hours of receipt of telephone call or fax for service from the Owner. Such response shall be required for calls placed regardless of hour, day or night, business day or Holiday. Such emergency service response shall be for repair of system component failures, wiring faults, or other system related circumstances, which compromise functional performance. E. Where acts of God, negligence and abuse, acts of vandalism or other such occurrences cause damage to the system, emergency maintenance and service agreement shall stipulate hourly rates for business hours and overtime hours, travel rates and reimbursables, spares stocking requirements, and a "return-to-on-line" performance path that identifies time and equipment performance milestones and contractor service and management staff dedications and equipment resource dedications to minimize and define "time-off-line" without opportunity for ambiguity. These line item cost and corrective performance identifications are a minimal requirement. r F. The Contractor shall include, in the first year as part of the guarantee and warranty, two (2) bi-annual inspections and complete device-by-device and complete system operational tests of the installed system after acceptance to verify proper operation of the entire system and all of its functional components. First test shall be provided at Month No. 6, the second during Month No. 12, from the date of Owner acceptance. Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-15 ..A and the General Conditions. Copies of all tests shall be delivered to the Construction Manager, Architect or his designated representative prior to scheduling final system acceptance test. Identify all malfunctions as either work performed under this contract or under another contract. 3. Costs associated with the repair of equipment provided by the Contractor and found faulty in the test process shall be the Contractor's responsibility. 4. All instruments, ladders, scaffolding, lifts, testing equipment and labor required for all tests shall be furnished by the Contractor. 5. The operation of individual components of equipment as part of these tests does not constitute a final acceptance of the work by the Owner. The final acceptance is to be made after the Contractor has adjusted his equipment and demonstrated that it fulfills the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings, all punch list items are completed and retested/inspected, successful completion of Owner's acceptance test, and the systems have operated for 15 consecutive days without fault or failure, as complete, operational,on-line systems. Should a fault or failure occur, in a particular system, the 15-day period shall commence again after the required repair, for that system. 6. Upon completion of the installation and prior to acceptance, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean (internally and externally) all equipment furnished and/or installed under this Section. 7. All systems shall be restored by the Contractor to full operating capacity and operating capability after testing. 8. The Architect or his designated representative shall be notified in writing of all scheduled tests at least 15 business days in advance, so that he may witness same. .. Unwitnessed tests shall be performed again at no expense to the owner. 9. Should the Contractor not pre-test the system prior to making official notification of being ready for the final acceptance tests, and should a final test be conducted and malfunctions or unfinished work be evidenced, the cost of retesting and professional travel and inspection fees shall be borne by the Contractor. 10. The Contractor shall complete his work in a timely manner and coordinate with the Construction Manager to accomplish tests for final acceptance during normal business hours (8 am - 5 pm), Monday through Friday,prior to Owner occupancy. Should tests need to be conducted after hours or on weekends or holidays, due to improper scheduling of work, premium costs for design professional oversight .. shall be borne by the Contractor. 11. Tests shall be performed to demonstrate a fully functional system, up through and including operation of the SC public safety CA/IDS front end PC and software. 1.11 DEFECTS A. A. Should it be found that material furnished and installed under this Section fails to comply with the Contract Documents, it shall be rejected and replaced in accordance with the General Conditions, by the Contractor, and all work disturbed by changes necessitated in consequence of said defects or imperfections shall be made good at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor is cautioned to check out all devices for function before installation. B. Only new products and equipment shall be utilized for this Contract. Refurbished, reconditioned, repaired or components used in any way shall be considered "defective" and rejected from the project. The only exception is the existing campus SC Simplex front end hardware and software and interface equipment, used to integrate the new Smith Campus Center Security Systems .. 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-14 W 1. PROJECT ALTERNATE NO. SS 1: Second Year Maintenance and Service a. State the amount to be added to the Base Bid if maintenance and service is provided in accordance with Article 1.13 of these Specifications. 2. PROJECT ALTERNATE NO. SS2: Spare Parts a. State the amount to be added to the Base Bid if spare parts are provided in accordance with Article 2.03 of these Specifications. 3. PROJECT ALTERNATE NO. SS3: Bi-Annual Inspections a. State the amount to be added to the Base Bid if the two (bi-annual) inspections and complete device by device system operational tests are performed, in accordance with Article 1.12 "Guarantee and Warranty", Article E, requirements, and Article 1.13, "Maintenance and Service", Articles B and D,bi-annual inspection requirements. ' 4. PROJECT ALTERNATE NO. SS4: Not used at this time. 1.9 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE CONTRACT—PRICING A. Contractor shall submit with his Bid, under Alternate No. 1, a contract stating the amount to be added to the Base Bid if maintenance and service is provided in accordance with Article 1.13 of these Specifications. This price identification shall remain valid and available for Owner acceptance until expiration of 1st year guarantee and warranty. 1.10 TEST AND ACCEPTANCE A. This Contractor shall carry all time, equipment, manpower,etc.,to provide the required tests for the project. Tests shall be conducted in two distinct categories (A) Factory Tests and(B)Field Completion Tests. B. Factory Tests 1. Factory tests of individual components shall be provided. If manufacturers do not provide such tests, contractor shall bench test equipment at their shop prior to delivery to site. 2. The primary systems listed below shall be configured at the contractor's office (Simplex) or at Smith College, in such a manner to insure primary system hardware, firmware, and field communication and control panels operate prior to arrival on site. a. Intrusion detection and Access control ISC system(connect to Smith College public safety office front end) b. Hardwired IDS alarm panel system 3. Provide documentation of factory tests by submitting copies of factory test sheets, which can be unequivocally identified as the test report for equipment shipped to the job site. C. Field Completion Tests 1. Tests shall be made of the completed system under conditions simulating as nearly as is practically possible, final installed conditions using actual system go components. These tests shall show conclusively that the requirements of the Contract Documents, have been fulfilled, and as required in Section 1.10, 1.12 and 3.02 of this Specification Section. 2. Documentation: Keep full and thorough records of all tests, in tabulated, permanent reproducible form, completely indexed and explained, indicating the specific test performed, participants, environmental conditions such as temperature and humidity, date of performance, results obtained, corrective 40 actions taken (if any), (and by whom), final results, and comments if required. Provide tests and information in accordance with Part 3.02 of these Specifications, Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-13 qW C. Substitution specifications will not be reviewed unless an item-by-item physical and electronic performance comparison to the specified product is provided to allow a complete comparison of products/systems to the Engineer's satisfaction. D. The Owner or his designee reserves the right to refuse any substitution on the basis of the requirement to maintain a uniformity of equipment purpose, function, maintenance and service, to achieve compatibility with other portions of the installation, or aesthetic «■ requirements as dictated by the Architect, or otherwise at the complete discretion of the Engineer. 1.7 BASE BID A. Contractor shall set forth the Base Bid total cost for a complete installation of the specified system components,all work completed. «� B. Refer to the Security System Drawings and Security Specifications and balance of the contract documents for other base bid requirements. 1.8 ALTERNATES AND UNIT PRICING: A. Contractor shall submit with his Bid, on the project Bid Form,Alternate and Unit Price Bids stating the difference in price from the Base Bid for materials, items, work or construction differing from that specified and/or shown on the Drawings, as an Alternate,or to be added or deleted from the job as a unit cost item. B. Approval or acceptance of the Alternate makes all requirements of scope,performance, service and guarantee binding as if that material, item, work or construction appeared in the Specifications for the Base Bid. All necessary changes in work to accommodate the Alternates shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor without any extra cost to the Owner. C. Unit Pricing: Contractor shall provide prices for both the addition of, and the elimination of,the following components for the project by identifying the "additive" or"deductive"price for each. Prices to include labor and material to furnish and install,test, and integrate into the system,provide the specified documentation and as- built drawings and manuals and required training. Where conduit and wire connections are required, include 35' of necessary cables, conduit and interconnections. The contractor acknowledges that should conditions make it necessary to revise the scope of the project,the Contract Unit Price Itemization shall serve as the basis for adjustments to the Contract Price. UNIT PRICE TO ADD OR ITEM DEDUCT(ONE NUMBER) 1. Surface or recess-mounted magnetic door contact switch.............$ 2. Ceiling, corner or wall mounted motion detector..........................$ , 3. IDS keypad ....................................................................................$ 4. Request to exit motion detector ....................................................$ 5. Alarm horn ....................................................................................$ 6. Door bell button with chime-light..................................................$ 7. Proximity card reader with PIN.....................................................$ 8. Access control card........................................................................$ 9. Local audible exit alert with power supply....................................$ 10. Security device power supply........................................................$ 11. Electric lock power supply.............................................................$ D. List of Alternates: Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-12 4W 1. Furnish factory/manufacturer approved equipment design for each of the specified systems and obtain statements of integration compatibility from the equipment manufacturers. 2. Provide all system equipment, wire, etc. for each specified system. 3. Install all system equipment, wire, etc. for each specified system, coordinated with other trades in accordance with the project construction schedule. 4. Furnish As-Built drawings and operation and maintenance manuals, in a "project manual" format. 5. Provide contractor self-check test, and final turnover operation test for each device and control function of all systems on system-by-system basis as well as complete operation of the SCCC and public safety security systems. 6. Scheduling with the General Contractor and Owner for the installation and testing of security system devices and controls and commissioning/testing of said system, and training of Owner's staff, in accordance with the construction and building's completion schedule. 7. Program and Load Database for Access control and Intrusion detection system as directed by the Owner or his designated representative. 8. Create access control/ID card credentials utilizing owner-supplied artwork. 9. Provide a"second year"maintenance and service contract. 10. Provide first year maintenance and service to maintain first year guarantee and warranty as part of Base Bid price. 11. Execute Integration of access control panels and readers with electrified locks and elevator controls. 12. Coordinate the Design of, and supervise the electrical contractor's conduit so installation and wire pulling and other work, claimed by or performed by the electrical contractor, which is part of the security system work. 13. Coordinate the data communications work between the SCCC Simplex equipment and the Simplex equipment in the SC Public Safety Department with SC Information Services and Public Safety personnel. J. Nothing contained in the drawings and specifications shall be construed to conflict with applicable State and local laws, codes, and ordinances. Comply with drawing and specification requirements,which are in excess of minimum code requirements. 1.6 EQUIPMENT SUBSTITUTIONS no A. Refer to Division 1 of the General Requirements for stipulations governing the substitution process. In addition to terms and conditions identified therein, requests for approval will not be considered unless they are submitted and are accompanied by, "o minimally,the following information: 1. List of five similar scope installations arranged to show name of project, equipment application, system size, capacity and date of installation completion, t*r contact person and phone number; 2. Complete literature, performance, and technical data describing the proposed equipment, including size, power requirements, detection, reporting, and rr programming capabilities, wiring requirements, installation, maintenance and performance criteria, limits or constraints on operation, listings and labeling by Testing Agencies, compatibility with existing and new integrated systems,etc.; WS B. Substitutions shall not be considered if they are not accompanied by simultaneous submissions of the specified equipment. Smith Campus Center Security Systems "" 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-11 representative, in writing. At this time, a"punch list" of items to be completed or corrected will be sent to the Contractor upon completion of inspection by the Architect or his designee. 3. It is required that each design team's respective portion of the project shall be treated separately and punch lists created separately and responded to and completed by each contractor separately, if so administered by the Construction Manager. F. PERMITS 1. The Contractor shall take out and pay for all permit applications, licensing fees, and submit any working drawings required by applicable sections of State of Massachusetts and City of Northampton, and required by all approving authorities, and in accordance with applicable sections of the General Conditions and project Specifications. G. TEST REPORTS 1. Test reports are required for the work of this Section. These reports shall be *�* submitted to document all site tests performed for final system functional checkout and acceptance. Two test reports shall be submitted as required for review and record documentation purposes 1.5 INTENT A. It is the intent of the Specifications and Drawings to call for finished work, tested, ready for operation and programmed specifically for this site and Owner's requirements. B. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on Drawings but mentioned in the Specifications, or vice versa, and any incidental accessories necessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and ready for operation, even if not particularly specified, shall be provided without additional expense. Coordinate with each system manufacturer to insure all hardware, firmware, relays, or other necessary components are provided prior to bid submission. C. Minor details not usually shown or specified but necessary for the proper installation and operation, shall be included, the same as herein specified. D. In all cases wherein apparatus is herein referred to in singular numbers, it is intended that such reference include as many such items as are required to complete the work. E. Specifications are of simplified form and may include incomplete sentences. Words or phrases such as "the Contractor shall", "shall be", "furnish", "provide", "a", "an", .,. "the", and"all",may have been omitted for brevity. F. Work under jurisdiction of the State and local Fire Marshal (electrically locked door control systems) shall comply with requirements set forth by the Fire Marshal and/or their inspection authorities. G. The latest edition of NFPA Sections 70, 72, and 101, and State of Massachusetts and City of Northampton Building, Fire, Electrical Codes and associated amendments to same, shall be the minimum requirements for all conduit, wiring, and access control/electrically locked door systems including related materials, methods and operating functions. " H. Additional requirements of other local authorities having jurisdiction shall be provided as required to achieve system approval and sign off. I. In brief, the scope of the Security Contractor's work is as follows: Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-10 !M f. All monitor and control equipment panels locations and type, size, capacity - and spares remaining; g. All back up battery power supplies, type, low voltage side connection circuitry, and 120 VAC side circuit no.,panel and connection type; h. All security system equipment shown on the contract documents, approved shop drawings, or otherwise utilized as part of the system installation, and associated connection diagrams to equipment provided herein, provided by other trades, or connected to owner-provided equipment; i. Interface drawings to other systems such as fire alarm, electrified locks, ADA power operated doors, Simplex campus system,etc.; j. Control equipment internal module schematics, including electronic assemblies, interface wiring, and external field device signal, power, circuit wiring,etc.; k. Areas of equipment application and zones of detection, and location of equipment, complete with building designations, room names and numbers, door numbers, etc. Review room and door names and numbers with the Architect and Owner prior to submission. 1. A legend explaining all abbreviations and details; m. And any other information as required by the Engineer to adequately describe the"as-built"condition. n. Refer to Section 1.25 for nameplate/as-built requirements. 6. The Contractor shall create his As-Built Drawings in such a manner so that the As- Built Architectural conditions are referenced and used as backgrounds. It is the intent to incorporate the Security System As-Built work into the overall building Contract Architectural As-Built Drawings. The As-Built Drawings made by this Contractor must therefore incorporate the information identified on those prints. 7. Vellum, CAD plot (AutoCAD 2000), thin line (half-tone equivalent) architectural wo floor plans will be made available by the Architect for this purpose, upon written request. Contractor's option is to obtain equivalent CAD disks of floor plans from Architect. In either case, the Contractor shall create floor plan plots and no backgrounds for As-Builts accordingly. 8. Use manufacturers' printed information where applicable, otherwise obtain or generate written instructions. Where control panel connection/wiring diagrams are provided by the manufacturer, include as part of the as-built drawings and '! modify"factory generic"connections to the specific conditions for this project. E. NOTIFICATION FOR PUNCH LIST DEVELOPMENT/CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 1. When the Contractor deems that the work is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare for submission to the Construction Manager and Architect a list of items to be completed or corrected. The failure to include any item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall prepare this Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of substantial completion, shall state the responsibilities of the Owner and the Contractor for maintenance and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall complete the items listed therein, said time to be within the Contract Time, unless extended, in writing, by the Owner. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted for the Owner's and the Contractor's written acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. 2. When the Contractor submits his Certificate of Substantial Completion, he shall inform the Construction Manager, Owner and the Architect or his designated Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-9 9W accomplish specified system operations using conduit, equipment and cabling submitted in the Shop Drawings, factory installation requirements, engineering calculations, sample board, and coordinated with all other trade work, as represented by Shop Drawings for other trades. 2. The Security Contractor shall advise the Construction Manager, Electrical Engineer and Electrical Contractor of any additional 120VAC requirements prior .A to electrical rough-in to insure a cost effective coordination of this work. 3. Where device or equipment relocation to a position other than that shown on the Security Drawings is required, as a result of coordination with other trade work, relocations of up to 15 feet shall be provided at no additional cost or credit to the Owner. 4. See Article 1.30 for further coordination drawing criteria. 5. Submit these drawings within 21 days of approval of contractor's shop drawings. 6. Submit coordinated wiring drawings, showing one of each type of electrified door hardware and card reader system connections. D. AS BUELT/RECORD DRAWINGS The Contractor shall create and maintain in accordance with the General Conditions and this Section,the following evidence of the"as-built"condition of the project: 1. The Contractor shall maintain on the job site one complete dedicated set of Drawings and Specifications on which all items which are part of the system's installation and all changes of materials, equipment, or dimensions from the contract documents or shop drawings shall be recorded and kept current on a daily basis and shall be made available to the Engineer at all times during the construction process. Monthly progress payments may be withheld if the Architect determines that the Contractor has failed to keep the "As-Built" current as specified. The amount of retention may exceed the value of the As-Built documentation at the Owner's discretion. 2. The Contractor's schedule of amounts for monthly contract payments as required *w by the General Conditions shall include an allowance for preparation and delivery of the required As-Builts. (Also, see Article 1 above regarding retention's). 3. Upon completion of the work, Contractor shall furnish final As-Built Drawings showing work as actually installed, to be submitted as a part of the "Project Manual". 4. Two (2) print sets and a reproducible set shall be submitted for preliminary approvals. Final reproducible submission shall be signed by the Contractor with a certification attesting to correctness, and marked "As-Built", and dated, with Contractor's title block. Final submission shall also be provided on CAD disks, using AutoCAD 2000 or latest version at time of creation. 5. As-Built shall include,but not be limited to, showing the following details: a. Rigid and flexible conduit size, location, and dimensional offset from column lines. Entire system piping shall be shown. This shall include duct banks used for security cabling to interconnect SCCC with campus public safety and facilities Simplex front end equipment; b. Conductor size, type, color and numerical codes, and numbers in raceway,as well as any cable or wiring system run outside of conduit system; C. Systems type identification, circuitry and zoning numbers of conductors; d. Size and type of raceway and cable and its in-situ placement within the structure, using dimensions and architectural "landmark" references (column lines) wherever possible; e. Type of device, and cable installed(manufacturer, model number, functional description) and spares remaining; Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-8 W to submission to Architect. Shop Drawings shall be stamped by factory engineer indicating approval of submitted configuration with Contract Drawings, and will go not be reviewed without factory stamp or approval letter. 9. Samples of each system device, as reflected in Shop Drawings, for return to the Contractor,as follows: a. Each type of magnetic contact switch b. Each type of motion detector C. Card reader(one of each type)and access control card d. Local audible door alert !!" e. Each type of cable, adequate length to show factory cable ID marking, each with label for intended use in system f. Wire tags ?' g. One of each type of cable connector- individually labeled with intended use. One sample of each, to be submitted with shop drawings and prior to installation of conduit, pulling of wire, construction of interior partitions, or commencement of finish work, in or on which the device is to be installed, to provide coordination detail requirements with other trades. Samples shall be returned for Contractors' use after review period. (Refer to shop drawing submission schedule in next article.) Samples may be assembled on site for Architect's review to minimize shipping. All samples shall be present for a single review session by the Engineer. (See Article 11,this Section). 10. Complete shop drawings package and samples shall be submitted within 60 calendar days of contract award, unless specific waiver is given in writing by the Architect or his designated representative. 11. Sample Boards: a. Immediately after approval of shop drawings, within 21 calendar days, the Contractor shall create, on site, an installation "sample board" with each security and access control device mounted on the actual, to be used, backbox and extension ring, complete with wire and or E.O.L. terminations and tagging to represent final mounting, conduit and wiring connection and identification methods for Architect's and Engineer's approval. Approved sample board shall be the standard for fieldwork inspection and quality control and used as reference for the balance of the project. 12. All Shop Drawings and samples shall be returned to the Contractor for corrections and additional information and shall be resubmitted, within 14 days, properly corrected, and with required supplemental information. r 13. Drawings shall contain all corrections made by the Engineer, or the manufacturer's engineering department, prior to, or as part of, approval process, and shall satisfy all requirements of the Specifications. 14. Prior to final acceptance Contractor shall furnish 3 complete sets of all approved Shop Drawings submitted during the course of construction. The final sets shall be bound in as a part of the three (3) "Project Manuals", for turnover to the Owner. This is in addition to all other drawings and manual information called for in these specifications. 15. See Job Conferences, Article 1.21 B for further requirements. 16. Under no conditions shall the contract Drawings be retitled, or otherwise reprocessed, and used as a Shop Drawing submission. C. COORDINATION DRAWINGS 1. The Contractor shall create field installation Coordination Floor Plan Drawings which specifically convey the required conduit size and cable routing to Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-7 connections for access control system functions, service requirements, conduit and wire entry locations, cable type requirements, grounding, shield terminations required, heat generation, battery back-up, loss of AC and low battery monitoring, etc. Provide factory wiring diagrams for all panel boards, expansion boards, relay boards, communication boards with wiring connections shown specific to this project, etc. Identify means of connection to SC public safety Simplex front end networked to the facilities system server"front-end". i. Complete intrusion detection system and access control system's applications software description, database programming description, describing all specified and provided system capabilities for this project, indicating use of system software programming features, IDS input interface and output relay and input point programming on a device by device basis in matrix format, etc. Also, complete ISC operating system hardware and integration with campus front end and fiber interconnect requirements, and how they are integrated into the access control system network. Identify resident locations of software for SCCC system, public safety front end, facilities server,etc. J. Connection to "fire alarm released" electrified door exiting hardware, �! including power supply, fire alarm interface, remote electrified door locks, system cable requirements, point to point wiring diagrams, a complete text sequence of operations, installation, test and set-up instructions, connection to card access system field multiplex panel, etc. k. 120 VAC Line conditioning and surge suppression and battery backup equipment, complete with load side capacity calculations, load side power connection diagrams, line side connection, disconnect means, bypass means, regulation and filtration criteria, alarm output to intrusion detection system, etc. 1. All intrusion detection, access control, and related systems signal, data/communication, control and power cables. m. Grouped locations of security equipment panels and power supply locations, hereinafter referred to as Security Distribution Frames (SDF's), including equipment, conduit, trough and NEMA enclosures arrangement, including access control and intrusion detection system field multiplex panels system input/output module enclosures, intrusion detection device power supplies, and/or transformers, as well as power supplies for all other related system equipment including local door audibles, electric lock power supplies, etc. Also, 120 VAC connections, power and data cable surge suppression, enclosure tampering, as well as wiring, grounding, shield terminations, conduit and wire entry schemes. Also, SDF to SDF, communications signal conduit and wire configuration and connection to both local Simplex and public safety Simplex equipment. n. Conduit and wire routing drawings of all work in ceilings, walls and floors. o. Any other component of system as specified herein or as called for in the + � Drawings, or as required to achieve specified system operation. p. Provide large scale drawings (1/2" = 1'-0") of primary security equipment locations, as follows: 1). Each SDF location 8. Shop Drawings shall be reviewed and pre-approved by system and equipment manufacturer's engineering department for complete system including all wiring, devices, power requirements, agency listings, manufacturers' ratings, environmental operating criteria, and operating performance characteristics, prior Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-6 .» "• b. Motion detectors, all types required for intrusion detection and local door contact shunting from card access request to exit, showing mounting, installation detail, signal and power, conduit and wire connection, end-of- line resistor placement, value and connection to alarm point monitoring field multiplex panel and/or card access multiplex panels, detector pattern, lens selection,range and sensitivity adjustments,and connection to power supply. C. Local audible exit alert device, complete with template for recessed mounting, special backbox requirements, power requirements,power supply, connections to power supply and door contact trip circuit, and keying !' options. d. Electrified lock connection to card reader controlled electrified door hardware, power and local door release button circuit, complete with specifications on device operation, (hardware manufacturer verified), conduit and wiring, and junction box connection details, EMF/suppression and fusing placement, and connection to card access field multiplex panel and lock power supply panel. Include details of coordination with hardware supplier. Also, show fire alarm interface for electric lock release, coordinated with fire alarm system shop drawings. are e. Complete information on intrusion detection system control panel, complete with all required alarm point zone expander modules, output relay modules, alarm input point's list, E.O.L. resistor requirements and values, power requirements, alarm zone input and output relay programming matrix and terminations, specific connections for Simplex system interface, keypads and related conduit and wire entry locations, cable type requirements, grounding, shield terminations required, heat generation, battery back-up, loss of AC and low battery monitoring, service requirements,etc. Provide factory wiring diagrams for all panel boards, alarm point zone expansion boards, relay output boards, communication boards, zone and power inputs with wiring connections shown specific to this project. Provide point-to-point wiring diagrams to convey these conditions. f. Low voltage power supplies and transformers for security devices, local door audible alerts, card reader access controlled locks, and field multiplex panels, complete with load calculations, circuit wiring, battery back-up calculations, and supervisory monitoring circuit connections to the intrusion detection field multiplex panel, loss of AC and low battery alarm inputs to alarm point monitoring panel, etc. g. Complete information on remote (field located) card reader access control devices, including card reader, electrified locks, lock power supplies, request-to-exit devices and backboxes, wiring requirements, power loss and fire alarm release interface/functions, interface to ADA power operated door controls, etc. Obtain electrified lock and lock power supply wiring diagrams and power transfer hinge and/or knuckle information and ADA power operated door control schematics from Division 8 Hardware Supplier, to assure proper installation techniques, voltage requirements, power supply sizing, back EMF protection, sequence of operation and fire alarm system's interface from Division 16 and fire alarm equipment supplier, etc. h. Complete information on intrusion detection system alarm point monitoring and access control field multiplex panels, complete with all required alarm input, zone or card reader expander modules, output relay modules, as well as premises functions, IDS output relay points, E.O.L. resistor requirements and values, power requirements, alarm signal input and output relay programming matrix and terminations, specific alarm output relay Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-5 w� equipment compliance with specified functions and security system drawing layout, and integration into said system. 7. Note that the contractor has the obligation of upgrading and expanding the existing "Simplex 3400" system, by the addition of networked ISC controllers in the SCCC building to provide the building equipment interface for the card access system. The technical proposal shall clearly state the contractor's intended approach. This approach shall clearly indicate the ability and intention to connect to the existing Simplex 3400 front end in the Smith College Public Safety and Facilities Office to the Simplex ISC field multiplex panels in the Campus Center 8. The Technical Proposal shall not be acceptable as a substitution for any portion of the Shop Drawing submission process. B. SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 1. Shop Drawings for all equipment and floor plan areas, coordination issues and drawings, as called for in this Section, shall be required to be submitted to the Architect and Engineer. .. 2. It is the intent for the security system and electrical contractor to prepare and submit, as a single submittal, a complete equipment and cable shop drawing, and coordinated conduit and wiring drawing package. The engineer will review a .� vellum set of drawings only, as part of the review and approval process. 3. Partial submittals of cable, conduit drawings, equipment/components, WILL NOT be reviewed. They will be returned"Rejected" for non-compliance with the submittal requirements of the contract documents. 4. The Drawings and Specifications are intended to supplement each other so that any details or equipment shown on the Drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications or vice versa shall be executed the same as if mentioned in the Specifications and shown on the Drawings. Shop Drawings shall reflect this coordination of Drawings and Specifications. 5. All Shop Drawings submitted shall be checked by the Contractor for all clearances and field conditions, including, but not limited to, plumbing piping, HVAC and related equipment, architectural finishes, access door locations, light locations, millwork construction, electrical connections, distribution and equipment, HVAC �* duct and register sizing and locations, glazing details, door and frame details, roof hatch details, existing security equipment, etc., as required to insure shop drawings reflect"to be installed"coordination. 6. Shop Drawings shall be created by the Contractor,manufacturer or manufacturer's designated representative. If created by the Contractor, they shall be submitted to and reviewed by the manufacturer or their designed representative and include a statement on the Drawings that this process has occurred and that the Shop Drawing reflects the approval of the configuration to work in accordance with these specifications and manufacturer's standards. Manufacturer's installation instructions shall be submitted for each piece of equipment and/or system. 7. The Contractor shall submit for approval, in accordance with General and Supplementary General Conditions, Shop Drawings and samples of the equipment being provided which shall include,but not be limited to, the following: A a. Magnetic contact switches, all types as required, showing mounting installation detail for all door, hatch, rolling door and grille types in this project, dimensioned door and frame preparation (template) requirements, conduit and box system, end-of-line resistor and wire terminations, and interconnect to intrusion alarm point monitoring field multiplex panels and/or card access multiplex panels. Smith Campus Center Security Systems ,,., 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-4 accommodate these components and/or systems, lock voltage and current draw coordination, interfacing with electrified locking systems, interface and integration with any ADA power operated doors, and any other related equipment and/or RN requirements. Electrified locks, lock power supplies, and ADA power operated doors shall be furnished under Division 8, "Hardware" and installed by the security contractor. ADA power operated doors shall be installed by others. F. Also, review Division 15, "Mechanical" and mechanical drawings to avoid motion detection false alarms due to placement of detectors adjacent to air supply registers. • G. See Division 16 of the contract documents, "Electrical" for information relating to the fire alarm system and required relay interface to interrupt power to electrified emergency exit door hardware, as required. The electrical contractor and fire alarm integrator shall provide control relays in lock power supply circuits to interrupt lock power if this is required. H. See Division 6, "Wood and Plastics" for coordination of security equipment placement at all reception/information desks and installation details for mounting, service and wiring. I. Review all other Specification Sections as required to achieve complete inter-trade coordination. 1.4 SUBMITTALS ! ' A. TECHNICAL PROPOSAL 1. All responding contractors must submit with this bid a detailed response to the requirements of the Contract Documents. This response shall constitute a description of methods, procedures and specific equipment the Contractor proposes providing in order to achieve conformity with the Specifications, and compatibility with the system designed, which includes integration with existing • campus systems configuration. 2. The document shall indicate compliance with existing site conditions, equipment standards, maintenance and service standards, and compatibility with all proposed security operations and equipment. Note the requirement to interconnect the intrusion detection and the access control system and its database, to provide an integrated system of detection,reporting,and assessment. 4M 3. This Technical Proposal shall contain a complete description of operating functions and integration of required portions of the systems and equipment and any proposed alternative configurations, by the system equipment manufacturers and/or the Security System Contractor. 4. Manufacturers' or venders' catalogue "cuts" and technical information of all system equipment and all cables as proposed shall be included and identified in descriptive text of Proposal as to application in system. 5. As part of the Technical Proposal, the prospective Contractor shall give written notice of any materials or apparatus believed by the Contractor or manufacturers or their representatives to be inadequate or unsuitable, in violation of laws, codes, ordinances, rules or regulations of authorities having jurisdiction; and any necessary items of work omitted to provide system functions as specified or required herein. 6. Complete information as specified must be provided, which documents a clear understanding of the systems as designed, which clearly allows an evaluation of this understanding, and which completely describes all system components and their integration into operating systems, as well as manufacturer's agreement on Smith Campus Center Security Systems ! " 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-3 J. Provide instruction and training for the Owner's security staff, facility personnel and maintenance personnel. - K. Warrant all new equipment, wiring, and components for a period of one year from accepted written date of turnover. Provide a written warranty to define this coverage. L. Maintain and service the new equipment for a period of one year from the written accepted date of turnover. Provide maintenance and service agreement to define this service. M. Provide complete manufacturer/factory assisted system design, specification, installation instructions and sizing of all system equipment and insure proper annunciation and operation, programming configuration and cabling requirements to ascertain that all specified functions will be provided and all devices shown will be integrated into the security system, and supported by the manufacturers and/or their licensed representatives for guarantee and warranty services. N. Produce and update, and submit to the owner or his designated representatives, in �. accordance with the General Conditions, all shop drawing logs, work schedules, submittal status, delivery dates, purchase schedules, outstanding RFI's, and contract change orders. O. Coordinate with any State Inspection Service Departments and Electrical Department the required mounting heights for all card readers, local audible alerts, and IDS keypads and confirm locations as shown on the Drawings comply with current ADA standards. P. Program access control system and intrusion detection system and load with user defined database requirements and specified operations contained herein. Q. Provide all necessary text and graphic and artwork database preparation and loading to incorporate all devices and integrate all systems and create access cards as required by the owner. Create 100 access control cards per owner requirements. .� 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER CONTRACTS A. See Division 16, "Electrical"of the contract documents for all specifications governing the performance of work associated with the installation of raceway (conduit, EMT, cable trays, wire mold, trough, etc.), system junction and pull boxes, and device rough- in boxes, for all Security System work shown on the Security Drawings. Conduit and *■ back box work shall be provided by the electrical contractor, working with, and under the supervision of,the security contractor. B. See Division 16, "Electrical" of the contract documents for all work related to supplying 120 VAC emergency and normal power for hook-up to any security system equipment requiring same. The project electrical contractor shall furnish and install all required 120VAC points of connection for security systems equipment requiring same. C. See Division 9 of the contract documents, "Finishes", for details relating to acoustical ceilings and gypsum board systems, floor finishes, painting, etc. for information pertinent to device and back box selection and installation. D. See Division 8 of the contract documents, "Doors and Windows", for all associated details of doors and frames, and windows and frames, as pertinent to selection of magnetic contact device type, placement and mounting in frames and doors and associated back boxes, wiring pull and/or junction boxes. E. See Division 8 of the contract documents; "Finish Hardware" for details relating to door/ frame hardware and preparation, lock power supplies, required coordination to Smith Campus Center Security Systems 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-2 '"" SECTION 16770 SECURITY SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Contract Documents - All work of this Section shall comply with the requirements of the Conditions of Contract (including: Bidding requirements, Contract forms, Conditions of Contract and Standard forms),with all Specification Sections of Division 1 -General Requirements, with the Drawings,and with all other Contract Documents. B. Special attention is called to applicable Specification Sections of Divisions 1, 6, 8, 9, 15 and 16 as referenced in Specification Section 1.03. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish office, field, factory, manufacturers' representatives, and contractors' shop engineering, supervision, labor, materials and methods required to provide the complete Security System work, in first class condition, as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein, including all devices, system integration, conduit, wiring, and connection to 120 VAC sources provided elsewhere in Division 16. B. Conduit for this system shall be furnished and installed by the electrical contractor under the supervision of the security contractor. C. Prepare Shop Drawings for all system components and submit for approval prior to ordering. See Article L,this Section, for mandatory manufacturer's participation. D. Provide samples of equipment and cables proposed for installation to expedite equipment approvals, assure architectural design compatibility, and equipment compatibility with the Security System and conduit sizing. w E. Verify all dimensions and conditions at job site. F. Provide templates or special instructions of installation requirements to applicable trades of the Construction Manager, Contractors for General Construction, including no but not limited to Architectural Woodwork, Hollow Metal and Wood Doors and Frames, Special Doors and Frames Fabricator, Storefront Curtain Wall Fabricator, Misc. Metals, Grilles/Gates and Architectural Metals Contractor, Hardware Supplier ! " and Electrical Contractor. G. Supply, install, make operative, and test, the system and its components in accordance with applicable codes, local authorities having jurisdiction, manufacturers' recommended practices, industry standards, the Construction Manager, Engineer, Owner, Architect or their representatives, these Specifications, and the Drawings. H. Make final adjustments, calibrations and programming modifications as directed by the authority having jurisdiction, Construction Manager, Engineer, Owner, Architect or his designated representative, other system equipment manufacturers, and demonstrate all e� systems for acceptance. I. Furnish documentation, including approved Shop Drawings, product data, test reports, programming sequences, database input, operators, maintenance and installation manuals, and As-Built Drawings, in final "Project Manuals", for Owner's use. Smith Campus Center Security Systems '" 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16770-1 po shop drawings and shall be terminated on barrier terminal strips and in connectors and labeled in the same manner as active conductors. C. Field terminations in these systems shall be made to numbered screw terminals on circuit breakers or switches or on numbered barrier terminal blocks. Wire nuts and crimped connectors are not acceptable. on D. The Electrical Contractor shall run separate neutrals for all branch load circuits. E. Upon completion of the installation and prior to removal of the bypass jumpers, the electrical contractor shall completely test all line voltage power and low voltage control !""' wiring for continuity and accuracy of connections. The jumpers shall remain in place until all loads have been fully tested and found to be free of miswires, short circuits, or other wiring defects. 1.18 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Manufacturer to assemble and test the dimming system at full load for a minimum of five hours before shipment. B. System shall be commissioned by a factory based engineer. The commissioning will be performed upon notification by the electrical contractor that the system installation is complete and that all loads have been tested live for continuity and freedom from defects and that all control wiring has been connected and checked for proper continuity. The electrical contractor shall provide both the manufacturer and the Architect with ten .,, working days notice of the scheduled commissioning date. Factory engineer to demonstrate the operation and maintenance of all system components to the Owner's representative. C. Provide an Operation and Maintenance Manual to the Owner's representative containing a set of as-built drawings,operation instructions, maintenance and trouble shooting information and parts lists. ow D. Manufacturer shall provide access to qualified personnel able to address problems with the dimming system 24 hours per day, 365 day per year. 1.19 FIELD ADJUSTMENT AND SETUP A. The Lighting Consultant shall create all scenes and sequences necessary for all specified spaces, and program the dimmer control stations to select individual scenes, as appropriate. B. All scene creation shall be carried out after the entire installation is complete. C. Where possible, scenes shall be created and programmed during the normal working day. However, where daylight interferes with seeing, this work shall be accomplished at night. D. The Lighting Consultant shall indicate the number of crews(foreman and apprentice) required. E. All ladders, scaffolds, etc. required shall be furnished by the Contractor at the direction of the Lighting Consultant. ow END OF SECTION 40 in Smith Campus Center Architectural Dimming Systems No 100%Construction Documents: 0 1.1 1.12 16511-13 w 3. Notes a. Electrical Contractor to coordinate all dimming components with final approved reflected ceiling plans and Electrical Engineers load schedule. b. Electrical Contractor to coordinate and confirm quantities of all dimming components with electrical drawings. c. All control station locations to be confirmed by Architect; refer to Architectural elevations for exact locations. d. AV interfaces as required; Electrical Contractor to coordinate with AN System(s). e. Electrical Contractor to coordinate emergency tranfer requirements with Electrical Engineer. �* f. Faceplate finish to be confirmed by Architect for all visible components. g. Engravings on control stations per Architect. 4. Control Riser Diagram 85232 Wrin (50 (t. max) To A/V System IA11 o a o o AI#II SGRX-28NL—WH—E SGRX-2BNL—WH—E GRX—PRG Function: Scenes 1 k Off Function: Scene 1 k Off System Programmer, Timeclock, and A/V Interface XP16-1204ML-20 GP24-1204ML-20 111 SGRX-4SNL—WH—E GRX-4516—T—WH—E I�11 Function: Scenes 1-4 do Off Address: Ai,A2 with Zone Raise/Lower Zones: Al-1 thru Ai-8, A2-1 thru A2-8 Dimmer Panel Function: Scenes 1-4 R Off NORMAL/EMERGENCY 3PH,4W Switching Panel Main Lugs NORMAL 3PH,4W Main Lugs EXECUTION 1.17 GENERAL .,I A. Provide any additional relays, transformers,power supplies, or other necessary or auxiliary devices not specifically listed in these specifications or shown on the drawings but needed to affect the functional requirements of the control systems. B. Provide ten percent minimum spare conductors in all conduits and raceways, control cables, and control cable connectors. Spare conductors shall be indicated and labeled on Smith Campus Center Architectural Dimming Systems 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16511-12 ps O 1.16 INDIVIDUAL DIMMING SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS A. Multi-Use/Perfomance Space- #208 1. Control Zone Breakdown po Control Zone Fixture Type Source Description Notes 01 RQ Fluorescent Ceiling cove Non-dim:on/off RQ-1 Fluorescent Vertical wall cove Non-dim:on/off 02 RQ Fluorescent Ceiling cove Non-dim:on/off RQ-I Fluorescent Vertical wall cove Non-dim:on/off 03 RQ Fluorescent Ceiling cove Non-dim:on/off RQ-1 Fluorescent Vertical wall cove Non-dim:on/off 04 RR Fluorescent Ceiling cove Non-dim:on/off 05 RP Incandescent Incandescent Dimmed downlight 06 RS Track Track Non-dim:on/off 07 RS Track Track Non-dim:on/off 08 RS Track Track Non-dim:on/off 09 RS Track Track Non-dim:on/off 10 RS Track Track Non-dim:on/off 11 RF Incandescent Incandescent Dimmed downlight 12 RQ-2 Fluorescent Ceiling cove Non-dim:on/off 13 RF Incandescent Incandescent Dimmed downlight 2. Components a. Wall mounted front access dimmer panel for normal/emergency lighting Manufacturer: Lutron GP24-1204ML-20 or ETC equal Location: To be indicated on Electrical drawings. b. Wall mounted front access switching panel for normal lighting Manufacturer: Lutron XP16-1204ML-20 or ETC equal Location: To be indicated on Electrical drawings. c. Wall mounted(16)zone master control station Manufacturer: Lutron GRX-4516-T-WH-E or ETC equal Location: To be indicated on Electrical Drawings. d. Wall mounted(4) scene remote control station with master raise/lower Manufacturer: Lutron SGRX-4SNL-WH-E or ETC equal Location: To be indicated on Electrical Drawings. e. Wall mounted remote control station for(1) scene and off Manufacturer: Lutron SGRX-2BNL-WH-E(2 required)or ETC equal Location: To be indicated on Electrical Drawings. f. Wall mounted RS232 A/V interface Manufacturer: Lutron GRX-PRG Location: To be indicated on Electrical Drawings. ON Smith Campus Center Architectural Dimming Systems 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16511-11 W 1.15 SINGLE AREA PRESET CONTROL SYSTEMS A. The controls specified in this section are designed to control a single room or area on a stand-alone basis. More than one of these controls can be used in order to create a multi- ** area or larger system within common dimming panels; however,each control is capable of operating independent areas. B. Master Preset Controls 1. Where indicated on the drawings, master controls shall provide preset selection, editing and recording for multiple control zones. The maximum number of zones shall be based upon processor size and job requirement. 2. Controls shall incorporate built-in wide angle infrared receiver,providing control via a separate wireless remote control transmitter from up to 50 feet away. 3. Preset levels shall be set via raise/lower indicators, one raise and lower switch per zone. The intensity for each zone shall be indicated via an illuminated bargraph,one bargraph per zone. More than one zone may be proportionately raised or lowered at "' the same time. One or more zones may be temporarily overridden without altering the scene values which are stored in memory. 4. Lighting levels shall fade smoothly between scenes at a rate of 0-59 seconds or 1 to .o 60 minutes. The fade time shall be separately selectable for each scene and shall be indicated by a digital display for the current scene. go 5. Pressing a scene select button will light the corresponding scene LED and simultaneously begin changing the bargraph levels to reflect the currently selected scene. In the event that a preset scene with a long fade time is initially selected from an OFF condition,the programmed fade time shall be temporarily overridden, unless otherwise noted,and the lights shall fade up to that scene over a five second time span. 6. Power failure memory of up to ten years in duration to return unit to last selected scene through power outage and ensure retention of all programmed information. 4W Smith Campus Center Architectural Dimming Systems 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16511-10 c. Unlock control stations d. Provide sequencing functions. 7. Audio Visual (AN) Interface(s)shall allow the AN system to access the preset scenes in each area shown with an interface via RS-232 protocol. 8. Special Function Control(s) shall provide the following functions: a. Shall allow the user to set up and operate a sequence,defined as a series of steps, while a step shall be defined as the recall of a scene. Each step interval is adjustable from 1 second to 60 minutes. b. Zone lockout shall allow temporary changes without the altering of light levels preset for each scene. c. Scene lockout shall lockout the control,maintaining current scene and disabling all buttons on the preset dimming control. d. Fade override shall set all fade times to zero. 9. Partitioned Room Control System(s) a. Two Rooms With Common Partition i. Where shown on the drawings, provide partition control station(s)and any other ancillary equipment which electronically "combines" the two rooms when the partition is opened in order to create a larger room. ii. The control shall provide either a two-position switch or two pushbuttons which shall be clearly labeled"Room Open" and"Room Closed," unless otherwise shown on the drawings. With preset controls,when the partition is opened,scene select pushbuttons work in parallel. Pressing any scene select push-button on any master or remote preset control will cause both rooms to go to the same preset scene (likewise both rooms will go OFF if either OFF push-button is selected). iii. The same partition control station shall also allow the rooms to operate independently when the partition is closed. b. Three or More Rooms With Multiple Partitions iv. Where shown on the drawings,provide a Room Combiner Control station which electronically "combines" two or more rooms when adjacent partitions are opened to create one or more larger rooms. r v. The control shall provide either a two-position switch or two pushbuttons which shall be clearly labeled"Room Open" and"Room Closed," unless otherwise shown on the drawings. With preset controls, when the partition is opened,scene select pushbuttons work in parallel. Pressing any scene select push-button on any master or remote preset control will cause both rooms to go to the same preset scene(likewise both rooms will go OFF if either OFF push-button is selected).Exact location of control stations per electrical Drawings. vi. The same partition control station shall also allow the rooms to operate independently when the partition is closed. Smith Campus Center Architectural Dimming Systems 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16511-9 ws 1.14 DIMMING SYSTEM CONTROL STATIONS A. Control faceplates shall be in the color and finish as selected by Architect. Controls shall be engraved or silk-screened with appropriate zone and/or scene descriptions, furnished to the manufacturer prior to fabrication. Legends on control faceplates to be engraved or silk-screened to resist removal by cleaning or scratching. Font, type size and color to be as selected by Architect. B. Controls shall fasten to a flush mounted standard wall box with no visible fasteners. Faceplate shall be held securely with set screws or similar mechanical devices, attachment by Velcro or magnets not allowed. *■++ C. Controls shall operate at low voltage,powered from a UL listed class 2 transformer in the dimmer or control panel. D. Controls to have power failure memory so that if power to the control stations, control panel or the dimming panels is disrupted, the lights will return to the same state when power is restored. ww E. Where controls use electronic memory they shall be capable of withstanding surges and electrical noise on the power line of 6000V, 3000A as specified by ANSUIEEE std. C62.41 without loss of memory or impairment to performance. Memory shall be protected without reliance on backup or data reloading systems. F. Provide the following remote control stations for use with the preset control station(s)as shown on the drawings: *■ 1. Single Scene Entrance Control Station(s); shall be capable of recalling Scene One plus OFF. 2. Four Scene Remote Control Station(s); shall be capable of recalling any one of four preset scenes plus OFF. 3. Eight Scene Remote Control Station(s); shall be capable of recalling any one of eight preset scenes plus OFF. 4. Fine Tuning Controls(s); shall allow the temporary override of a particular zone or zones from the preset light level. 5. Wireless Infrared Transmitter(s) and Receiver(s); shall be capable of recalling any one of four preset scenes plus OFF. Where shown on the drawings interfacing with a eight scene preset system,provide an eight scene transmitter and receiver. The ww dimming system manufacturer shall manufacture both the transmitter(s)and the receiver(s). Range of the transmitter to any single receiver shall be at least 60; however, it shall be possible to connect more than one receiver in parallel to increase the effective range. 6. Programmable Timeclock Control shall be programmable via an IBM compatible PC (desktop or laptop)using Windows based software. Commands can be in either real or astronomic (relating to sunrise/sunset) time. Timeclock shall automatically correct for Daylight Savings Time and Leap Year, where appropriate. There shall be a total of 4 timeclock schedules/60 events per day available for each of eight preset control w stations. Any special schedules that have been programmed shall be capable of being stored in a"calendar" format on a screen up to a year in advance for easy reference. Timeclock shall be able to execute any of the following events: a. Select pre-set scenes b. Lockout control stations Smith Campus Center Architectural Dimming Systems 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16511-8 no perceptible flicker or striations. Different length lamps shall track evenly together. Electronic dimming ballasts shall be inaudible. Ballasts shall meet the electrical interference limitations as specified by FCC Part 18. No electrical noise ap shall be generated which could interfere with any other properly installed electrical equipment. System manufacturer shall coordinate with the Electrical Contractor to assure that appropriate dimming ballasts and wiring are provided for proper operation • of the dimming system 4. Dimmers for neon and cold cathode shall have a dimming range of full to 10% without flicker. Electrical contractor to ensure that low power factor transformers are supplied for dimming. I Non dim modules shall use an air gap relay for on/off switching and shall be rated to switch 16A of resistive, inductive capacitive and electronic loads. K. Each dimmer shall have a primary circuit breaker which shall protect the dimmer against overloads and short circuits and which shall serve as a disconnect switch. L. Each dimmer shall incorporate an electronic "soft-start" default at initial turn-on that smoothly ramps the lights up to the desired levels within 0.5 seconds. M. The power efficiency of the dimmer modules at any setting and with any load shall exceed 95%. N. The outputs of the dimmers at any setting shall not vary more than one(1)volt for any change in load from a minimum of ten(10)watts to full rated load. O. All dimmer and non dim modules shall be clearly identified with the Manufacturer's name and address, the dimmer rating in amperes and volts,and the catalogue or serial number. 1.13 EMERGENCY LIGHTING/LOSS OF POWER ap A. All circuits listed as emergency lighting shall transfer from normal dimmer intensity to full intensity in the event of normal power failure. Under normal conditions, the emergency circuits in the dimmer zone shall dim at the same intensity as the dimmer zone normal circuits. See Electrical Drawings for schedule of circuits to be transferred. B. Normal power feed to the dimmer panel shall remain on at all times. Upon the loss of normal power,and with the subsequent presence of emergency power,all emergency circuits shall immediately come to full intensity regardless of the state of the dimmer control settings. Once normal power is restored, all lighting circuits shall revert to the state prior to the power failure. Im C. Loss of power, including both emergency and normal shall not cause the loss of any programmed in information. an D. Emergency full on to be accomplished in a manner in compliance with local codes and its operation to be coordinated with the engineer as to the type of emergency power source available in the building. Full on transfer may be accomplished by UL Class 1008 Emergency Transfer Relays mounted in the dimmer panel,or by control signal switching means. E. Refer to Electrical Drawings for exact quantity and location of emergency fixtures. F. Exact location of dimmer panels per Electrical Drawings. G. Emergency Transfer System shall be as specified and shown elsewhere in the specification or on the drawings. �w Smith Campus Center Architectural Dimming Systems 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16511-7 w 1.12 DIMMER MODULES A. Quantities and types of dimmer modules shall be provided to control each type of load shown on the load schedule and/or the drawings. .s B. Dimmer module capacity shall be 125 percent of the connected load. Two or more dimmer modules may be controlled together to achieve required capacities. C. The dimmers shall be solid state, utilizing thyristors for the controlling device. The dimmer shall be both designed and tested to withstand surges, without impairment to performance,of 6000V, 3000A as specified by ANSUIEEE std. C62.41. D. The dimmer module shall be designed and UL listed for the load they are scheduled to control. The dimmer module shall be designed to operate properly in ambient temperatures up to 40°C, with line voltage variations of+-10% from nominal. Dimmers shall be rated at carrying their full load indefinitely. Under full-load conditions in a 40°C environment, all silicon thyristors shall operate at a minimum 20°C safety margin below the component temperature rating. .., E. The output of the dimmer shall be at all times symmetrical with no more than one volt DC output. The output voltage of a dimmer at full intensity shall be at least 95%of the incoming line voltage. Outputs of different dimmers with equal loads and equal control voltage shall not vary more than six volts. F. Dimmers shall provide a smooth and continuous Square Law dimming curve throughout the entire dimming range. Dimmers shall incorporate circuitry to prevent momentary flashing when the dimmer is turned on or off. Dimmers shall contain a maximum and minimum light output adjustment. G. The dimmers shall be voltage regulated so that a+-10%change in line voltage will result in no more than a+-3%change in output voltage. H. An air gap relay shall be employed with each dimmer module so that power to the �. dimmer's load circuit is completely shut off when a control station "off'button is pressed. 1. The dimmer module shall accommodate incandescent, magnetic low voltage incandescent, electronic low voltage incandescent, fluorescent,neon, cold cathode lamps or non dim loads as listed in the dimmer schedule. 1. Incandescent and low voltage dimmer modules shall contain an inductive type filter to eliminate lamp filament singing and radiated RF in the system. Filtering shall be provided in each dimmer module so that current rise time shall be at least 350microsec at 50%rated dimmer capacity as measured from 10-90%of the load current waveform at a 90° conduction angle. The rise time portion of the curve shall , approximate a straight line, and shall be free from peaks, valleys, and spikes and at no point rise faster than 30mA/microsec. The Manufacturer shall supply oscillographic evidence in support of the rise time feature of the dimmer. 2. Low Voltage/Electronic Transformer Dimmer modules. Dimming shall not adversely affect sound rating of the electronic transformers. In addition, no flicker or interaction shall occur at any point in the dimming range. Electrical contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the compatibility of the transformers with the dimmer modules. 3. Fluorescent dimmer modules shall have a dimming range of full to 1% light output for T-8 lamps (5% for compact fluorescent T-5 lamps). Fixtures shall be supplied with compatible electronic dimming ballasts as specified in the fixture specification and listed on the fixture schedule. All lamps shall track evenly in light output, with Smith Campus Center Architectural Dimming Systems 100%Construction Documents: 0 1.1 1.12 16511-6 9. Interface for audio-visual system control of scheduled presets B. All components shall be completely prewired and tested as a system by the manufacturer. C. Dimmer Panels shall be assembled of NEMA-1 16 gauge steel or aluminum and securely welded or fastened at all joints. The panels shall be louvered or pierced where necessary to provide ventilation to the interior. Where specified,provide wide-swing hinged doors made of formed steel or aluminum over panels and components. Shop-prime the frames, panels, and doors with zinc chromate and paint with baking enamel. Prime paint all surfaces with zinc chromate and finish with baked enamel. OR D. Contractor to reinforce walls as required for wall mounted panels. E. Electrical service to the dimmer panel is as shown on the electrical drawings. Contractor to provide incoming feeder, load circuit wiring and control wiring. Provide separate neutral wires for all load circuits. F. Dimmer panels shall contain an input circuit breaker to provide primary line side 40 protection and disconnect for each dimmer module. Circuit breakers shall have the following performance characteristics: 1. Be UL listed under UL 489 as a molded case circuit breaker for use on lighting circuits. 2. Contain a visual trip indicator and be rated at 10,000 AIC(120V)or 14,000 AIC (277V),unless otherwise noted. 3. Be magnetic or thermal-magnetic in construction for both overload and dead short protection. w■ 4. Be switching duty (SWD)rated so that the loads can be switched off via the breakers. 5. Circuit breakers have a visible trip indicator. G. Dimmer panel shall contain terminals at which a jumper can be installed to completely bypass a dimmer module. Jumpers shall be copper or brass and shall be rated to carry the full load current of the dimmer they bypass. Dimmer panel shall be shipped from the manufacturer with the bypass jumpers installed. H. Dimmer panel shall be cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans, and capable of continuous operation to all specifications within an ambient temperature range of 0°C (32°F) to 40°C(104°F). When fans are necessary for the proper cooling of the dimmer panel, all dimmer modules shall be oversized as indicated in the dimmer module specifications, and each dimmer shall have individual over temperature shut off. Shutting off of the entire dimmer panel is not acceptable. I. Where heat gain within an enclosure would affect the proper operation of components therein,provide quiet running fans to draw in air at the bottom of the enclosure and exhaust it at the top through louvers or grilles fitted with dust filters. J. Panels shall provide the capability to electronically assign each circuit to any zone in the dimming system. Multiple panels shall be capable of operating in one system, up to a maximum of 32 panels and 768 dimmers. K. Legends on control panels may be engraved or silk-screened. The silk-screen process shall be such that the graphic material chemically bonds so that it resists removal via commercial cleaning solutions or scratching by fingernails. In general and unless otherwise specified, legends should be located above or alongside the devices identified. Character size should vary according to relative importance of functions described or identified. Smith Campus Center Architectural Dimming Systems po 100%Construction Documents: 0 1.l 1.12 16511-5 am One or more zones may be temporarily overridden without altering the scene values .� which are stored in memory. D. Lighting levels shall fade smoothly between scenes at a rate of 0-59 seconds or 1 to 60 minutes. The fade time shall be separately selectable for each scene and shall be indicated by a digital display for the current scene. E. The control units shall meet or exceed the following standards: 4• 1. Voltage regulation so that a f 10% variation in line voltage shall cause no more than a f 5%variation in load voltage when dimmer is operating at 40V(5% light output). 2. LC filtering network to minimize interference with properly installed radio,audio, and video equipment. 3. Power failure memory of up to ten years in duration to return unit to last selected * scene through power outage and ensure retention of all programmed information. 4. ANSI 62.41 surge standards(IEEE587). 5. 15 kV electrostatic discharge standard(IEC 801-2). 6. UL Listed(UL 508). F. Control station/dimmer shall operate the following lighting loads: 1. 800 watts(per zone)of incandescent,magnetic low voltage,neon/cold cathode and magnetic non-dim loads 2. 1000 watts of electronic low voltage loads via remote booster 3. 16 amps of fluorescent load of Lutron Hi-Lume FDB dimming ballasts or electronic fluorescent ballasts via remote interface w G. For incandescent and magnetic loads greater than 800 watts, a separate power booster shall be provided to increase dimmer capacity. Booster capacity shall be 2000 W/VA. Electrical contractor to supply as required. H. For all above load types that exceed 2000 watts,a separate 1,2 or 3 circuit high power module shall be provided. High power module capacity shall be 180OW/1 circuit, +*� 3600W/2 circuit and 5400W/3 circuit. I. Where indicated provide remote control stations to handle up to 16 scenes and off. 1.11 DIMMER PANELS A. The Dimmer panels shall contain all components necessary to perform the specified function of the system, including but not limited to: +�+ 1. Dimmers and non dim modules as scheduled 2. Dimmer panel main breakers 3. 20A branch circuit breakers 4. Dimmer bypass jumpers 5. Emergency transfer circuitry to operate designated branch circuits at full power when on emergency power 6. Control Circuit breaker and power supplies 7. Additional components as required 8. Interface for Building Energy Management System Control of dimmer systems Smith Campus Center Architectural Dimming Systems 100%Construction Documents: 0 1.1 1.12 16511-4 on Provide: HP-2 for loads up 1800 watts,HP-4 for loads up to 3600 watts and HP-6 for loads up to 5400 watts. E. All switches and dimmers shall be UL listed for the specific load to be controlled. Dimmers to contain an air gap switch and meet the limited short circuit test of UL standard 20. F. Dimmers and switches to have power failure memory so that lights will return to the same state as before a power failure. G. Dimmers shall withstand surges of 6000 volts and 200 amps without damage,per ANSI/IEEE standard C62.41-1980. H. Dimmers shall be voltage regulated so that a ten percent change in line voltage shall result in no more than a five percent change in output voltage,as measured with the dimmer operating at five percent light intensity. I. The number of dimmers per control zone shall be the minimum required to fulfill all specifications. J. Where shown on the electrical drawings provide an external filtering network(lamp debuzzing coil) for each dimmer. The lamp debuzzing coil(LDC) shall be connected in series with the dimmer. For loads less than 1000W provide a 10 Amp LDC, for loads 1000W to 2000W provide a 16 Amp LDC. The LDC shall be UL listed and mounted in a NEMA enclosure. Install LDC in a location remote from the dimmer, such as an electrical closet or above ceiling. The LDC shall provide sufficient filtering so that current rise time shall be at least 350 microsec at 50%rated dimmer capacity as measured from 10-90%of the load current waveform at a 90° conduction angle, and at no point rise on faster than 30mA/microsec. K. Exact location of wall box dimmers per Architectural Drawings. L. Contractor shall provide separate neutrals for load circuits. eiw 1.10 PRESET DIMMING CONTROL WITH INTEGRAL DIMMERS A. Where indicated on the drawings, provide preset control stations that include integral dimmers. Control function shall provide preset selection and off for multiple zones in a single control station. 1. The control shall be mountable in a standard 2,3 or 4 gang wallbox. 2. Pressing a scene button will also simultaneously light the corresponding scene LED. When the off scene is selected, all LED's shall be illuminated at a low level visible in a dark room. 3. Preset values shall be permanently stored until altered by using the raise/lower switches. on 4. Where indicated provide remote control stations to handle up to 16 scenes and off. 5. The maximum number of stations shall be based on the processor size. The quantities and types of control stations shall be shown on the plans. B. Controls shall incorporate built-in wide angle infrared receiver, providing control via a separate wireless remote control transmitter from up to 50 feet away. C. Preset levels shall be set via raise/lower indicators, one raise and lower switch per zone. The intensity for each zone shall be indicated via an illuminated bargraph,one bargraph per zone. More than one zone may be proportionately raised or lowered at the same time. __. Smith Campus Center Architectural Dimming Systems 100%Construction Documents: 0 1.1 1.12 16511-3 oft 1.5 MANUFACTURERS A. The dimming systems shall be manufactured by: 1. Lutron Electronics Co. 7200 Suter Road Coopersburg PA 18036-1299 610-282-3800 (or) 2. Electronic Theater Controls(ETC) 3030 Laura Lane Middleton WI 53562 608-831-4116 B. The listing of a manufacturer as "acceptable" does not imply automatic approval. It is the responsibility of the electrical contractor to ensure that any price quotations and submittals meet or exceed the specifications herein. .w 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work performed shall conform to the standards of the National Electrical Code and all other applicable local codes. B. Equipment shall be fabricated according to the standards of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear Underwriters' Laboratories labels. C. Manufacturer shall maintain ISO 9001 certification. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Warrant the work of this Section according to the guarantee provisions in the General, Supplementary, and Special Conditions of the Contract. B. Unless otherwise noted, Manufacturer shall provide a two year warranty on the complete system for all systems with factory commissioning. Warranty shall cover 100%of the cost of the manufacturer's services and any replacement parts required over the first two years which are directly attributable to the manufacturer. PRODUCTS 1.8 GENERAL w. A. All materials and equipment provided under these specifications and drawings shall be new and of high quality. 1.9 WALL BOX DIMMERS A. Wall box dimmers and switches shall be Lutron Vareo(Nova T) series or preapproved substitute. B. Dimmers shall use linear sliders for control of light intensity and shall be installed in flush mounted wall boxes. Dimmer slide shall be captured in place by the faceplate. Faceplate shall completely cover cooling fins on the front of the device. One seamless, multi-gang faceplate shall be provided where more than one dimmer, switch or other electrical device are to be mounted together and in the color as selected by Architect. C. Dimmer capacity to be 125%of connected load. Dimmers to be installed without breaking off fins or derating. D. Where the load on a dimmed zone exceeds 1000 watts provide HP-2,4,6 high power dimmer modules. Provide a wall mounted 600 Watt Vareo for control of the HP unit. Smith Campus Center Architectural Dimming Systems 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16511-2 ' SECTION 16511 ARCHITECTURAL DIMMING SYSTEMS GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. All work of this Section shall comply with the requirements of the Conditions of the Contract(General and Special),with all Sections of Division 1 -General Requirements, with the drawings, and with all other Contract Documents. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnishing all labor,materials,tools, appliances, and equipment, and performing all operations necessary to fabricate, deliver,and install the dimmers and dimming systems and related work indicated on the drawings and in these specifications. B. Providing the Manufacturer's Services as outlined in these specifications. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Architectural lighting- See Section 16510. B. Related sections of electrical work: See sections of Division 16. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings, including wiring diagrams of all components and riser diagrams indicating interconnecting wires between items of equipment in each of the dimming systems for approval by the Architect, Engineer and Lighting Designer prior to fabrication, shipment, or installation of any equipment. B. Submit standard cut sheets or catalog literature which includes performance specifications indicating compliance to the specifications herein. C. Submit a dimming load schedule which clearly lists the actual loads per circuit, which circuits are on their respective control zones, which circuits are on emergency, and the on corresponding circuit numbers (per the electrical drawings). D. Each load schedule shall be arranged(by zone and circuit number)to match as closely as possible the load schedule shown on the drawings. E. Samples: Submit samples of exposed-finish items for Architect's selection of colors and finishes. Submit color sample(s) of engraving or silk-screen graphics for Architect's approval. F. Where wallbox dimmers and matching accessories(receptacles,etc.)are shown on the drawings,provide standard cut sheets or catalog literature on these products as part of the lighting control system submittals. G. Shop drawings and manufacturers data for all lighting controls specified(dimming systems, wallbox dimmers,relay switching systems, timeclocks,photocells, etc.) to be submitted at one time. H. Provide test data or other related information as required to demonstrate conformance with Part 2 of this specification. Smith Campus Center Architectural Dimming Systems 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16511-1 t� 4 ) 1 3 2 ) Pictorial Image 4 3/4" NTS (12tlrm) t(25mm) _—————————— �2 NOTES: F--- 8"003mm)dia —I 1.Lamp F— 9 1/2"(24w)w)da 11 3/4"x 14 7/8"(298 x 37&T n) 2.Reflector 3.Lens 4.Housing Requires ceiling opening of 8 15/i6"(227mm) 5. Ballast In inaccessible ceilings,a total depth of 7'/i(191mm)is required to allow ballast removal. 6.Ceiling reference Section .� NTS OPrismatic l-ns( Diffuse Lens x a ) �'` While % ,s lens Lens Options (Refer to notes below for exact lens type) NTS CANDLEPOWER DISTRIBUTION(candelal Vertical Horizontal Angle Angle 0.0 45.0 90.0 135.0 180.0 0 796 796 796 796 796 10 767 776 791 791 791 eo° 20 694 726 771 760 740 30 603 627 681 661 649 40 398 412 431 422 388 Photometrics 50 149 175 158 169 146 ieo• 60 61 52 55 50 56 Lamp: (2)26w quad,4-pin,G24q-3 base,0. 70 22 24 24 25 22 1800 lumens each. 90 0 0 0 0 0 Photometrics shown shall be prorated to specified 0 30• lamp output,per manufacturer's information. � Description [g] STANDARD Fully recessed compact fluorescent nominal 8"dia.apeture downlight with prismatic acrylic lens, ❑ Modified Standard �w aluminum reflector and integral electronic ballast. � Custom .ewe Notes Lamp(s) Clear specular aluminum reflector. Philips PLC 26W/35/4P Lamp(s)per unit 2 .w Manufacturer Fixture Wattage EDISON PRICE LIGHTING SLL 226/8-120-COL 52 INDY LIGHTING Voltage 120 Project Smith College Campus Center B163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type IV X11+ RAV Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 100% Construction Documents 4 5 1 2 3 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Pictorial Image 5 an O-� 7 9-7/16" 5 Pictorial Image NOT TO SCALE O NOTES: 1. Lamp 2. Lampholder 6 3. Ballast 4. Housing )� 5. Louvers 3 / it i 6. Aluminum faceplate I n I 7. Stainless steel screws 8. Arch.reference � J1 5 4 2 6 J14 .10 � \ 4 1D 50 5 5" 2 2. 1 ft. 2 4 L. 1 Elevation and Sections Photometrics NOT TO SCALE Lamp: 18W PL-C quad tube, 1250 lumens ` Photometrics shown shall be prorated to specified lamp output,per manufacturer's information. w1a Description Fx-1 STANDARD Recessed compact fluorescent single lamp exterior steplight with aluminum faceplate,stainless steel E] Modified Standard faceplate screws,white glass diffuser,louvers and integral electronic ballast. El Custom Notes Lamp(s) Refer to Arch.elevations for exact mounting locations.To be UL listed for wet location.Opening Philips PL-C 18W/35 required of 8-5/16"dia.x 4". Standard finish per Architect. Lamp(s)per unit Manufacturer Fixture Wattage BEGA USA 2945P 18 Voltage 120 Project Smith College Campus Center B163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RAT .a Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 .o 100% Construction Documents I r 2 1 4 13/4" IL.- Pictorial Image <. I NOT TO SCALE 7 3l8' -- O NOTES: 1. Lamp 2. Ballast Enclosure Section 3. Housing NOT TO SCALE 4. Endplate 5. Arch.reference iIs., 15"—J 49'Ar 18" CANDLEPOWER DISTRIBUTION CANDLEPOWER DIET. MOUNTING HOLE LEGEND VEFrr. HORQ ANGLE ZONAL o /i VIA.KO. low ANC. 0 4 135 180 LLWAa4s 'h"OIA YOU141MG HOLES _15W 0 4 24 24 24 24 5 24 24 23 23 23 2.2 15 34 32 27 24 23 7.9 25 29 26 - 20 17 13 9.8 Mounting Holes (Refer to notes below) 35 31 26 17 10 9 11.3 55 21 15 4 0 0 6.5 NOT TO SCALE ar s 17 to 0 0 0 2:a as 7 0 -0 0 0 .8 y� 95 267 2D9 13 63 83 135.0 0' 105 548 471 68 135 157 2825 115 797 597 141 219 237 380.2 4�"t 1 25 846 626 3/4" .�"�g/4NJ 135 838 629 217 93 36 390 372.1 90. 145 737 .584 370 421. 444 311.1 155 637. 538 421 469 474 227.6 165 552 508 472 491 513 142.6 175 488 480 466 463 463 45.0 Standard Lengths (Refer to notes below) 180 476 476 476 476 476 NOT TO SCALE PHOTOMETRICS Report No.8494.0 for Cat No.201 IW/1 T8-4' Lamp Type: F32T817351RS,2850 lumens I.E.S.data disk no.2011WB1.IES R-ROUND HOLE S•SLOTTED PERFORATED PATTERN PERFORATED PATTERN Photometrics Photometrics shown shall be prorated to specified Perforation Options (Refer to notes below) lamp output,per manufacturer's information. NOT TO SCALE Description 0 STANDARD Surface mounted linear fluorescent asymmetrical nominal 4'long uplight with perforated metal housing, Modified Standard acrylic diffuser,specular aluminum reflector,extruded aluminum endplates and connectors and integral electronic ballast. El Custom Notes Lamp(s) Fixture to be mounted so that bottom of fixture aligns with lower ceiling;refer to Architecural details for 32W T8ITL835 complete information. E.C.to provide components as required for continous row mounting per Arch. Lamps)per unit RCP's. Standard white painted finish;Architect to confirm. Perforated metal to have staggered round 1 holes. Fixture Wattage Manufacturer NEO-RAY LIGHTING 2011W/1-R-12 8 per linear foot Voltage 120 Project Smith College Campus Center 8163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type us Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 100% Construction Documents am 9 8 2 3 .w T - 7-7/8` (moo ) 4 Pictorial Image NOT TO SCALE s -� NOTES: 1. Reflector (44m/m) ►� 11-7/8"(302mm) 2. Canopy/Ballast Enclosure 3. Ballast 4. Endplates 5 5. Glass lens 6. Cut-off visor .. 6 7. Mounting plate 8. Arch.reference 9. Junction box reference 1 2x 27-1/8'(689mm) ►� 50W 1X Elevations (Side/ Front) 5oW - -- _ NOT TO SCALE 2200 7'(178mm) ►� Cd - ----- ' --- ° ° 3-1/4' 5' (83mm) (127mm) T � 15'(381mm) 7 Photometrics Lamp:Philips PL-T 32W/35/4P/ALTO Mounting Backplate Photometrics shown shall be prorated to specified NOT TO SCALE lamp output,per manufacturer's information. Description Q STANDARD Surface mounted compact fluorescent uplight with nominal 27"long elliptical smooth reflector,cut-off ❑ Modified Standard visor,adjustable yoke with positive locking mechanism and integral electronic ballast. � Custom Notes Lamp(s) Refer to Architectural Elevations for exact mounting heights. Standard white painted finish;Architect to Philips PL-L 50W/35/RS confirm. Lamp(s)per unit Manufacturer Fixture Wattage ELLIPTIPAR INC. F114-1_150-E-02-1400 50 WINONA STUDIO OF LIGHTING Voltage 120 IVProject Smith College Campus Center B163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type .w RAR Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 ante 100% Construction Documents w 7 w 9-7/16" 5 Pictorial Image O NOT TO SCALE r NOTES: 1. Lamp 2. Lampholder 3. Ballast 4. Housing )j) 5. White glass diffuser 3 n 1 6. Aluminum faceplate 7. Stainless steel screws 8. Arch.reference 4 2 Fft. 2 2942P 10 H=2ft. 25 50 1.0 4 6 8 10 12 14 Elevation and Sections Photometrics NOT TO SCALE Lamp: 18W PL-C quad tube, 1250 lumens Photometrics shown shall be prorated to specified lamp output,per manufacturer's information. Description Q STANDARD Recessed compact fluorescent single lamp cast in place exterior steplight with aluminum faceplate, stainless steel faceplate screws,white glass diffuser and integral electronic ballast. Provide fixture with ❑ Modified Standard concrete protection cover. ❑ Custom ON Notes Lamp(s) Refer to Arch.elevations for exact mounting locations. To be UL listed for wet location. Opening Philips PL-C 18W/35 required of 8-5/16"dia.x 4".Standard white finish. Lamps)per unit 1 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage BEGA USA 2942P610 18 Voltage 120 Project Smith College Campus Center 8163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RA Q Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 IIIR 100% Construction Documents am r----------------------- i i i i i C E p 1 Pictorial Image i s" NTS � (1s2) 21/16" i i NOTES: (52) 1.Lamp L---- ----- J 2.Reflector ..� i 3. Ballast 4. Housing 2 3 5.Architectural reference i i i i i t i 5 i i i i i i i i �r we, Schematic Section NOT TO SCALE Description ❑x STANDARD XW Surface mounted linear fluorescent T51-10 continuous uplight with asymmetrical reflector and integral Modified Standard electronic ballast mounted in architectural wall cove. El Custom .se Notes Lamp(s) Lamp as required to come within 6"of the end of the cove. Refer to Architectural RCPs for exact 54W T51-10 3500K lengths required. Standard finish. Lamp(s)per unit 1 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage LITECONTROL CORPORATION CC-AI-25-1-4T5HO-LP/ELB 15 per linear foot Voltage PEERLESS LIGHTING CORPORATION 120 Project Smith College Campus Center 8163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type IV "* RAP Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 100% Construction Documents , NOTES: 1. Lamp 2. Lampholder 3. Housing 4. Junction box access cover 5. Yoke 6. Spread lens 4 3 2 5 6 7 7. Reflector 8. Ceiling reference � 11.500 o 01 no 0 4ft 1 _,Opp ----_------__ VA _y iii 1 UL 11 1 / 1 1 • _.__ 1 1 "FC TRIM �—(127 mm) s' OIA—� "O(_" TRIM (-----(157 mm) 6 1/4' DIA n (162 mm) 6 3/IrDIA HOLE REO'D 8 (171 mm) 6 314' DIA Section Direction of lighted wall -� 3/8" = 1'4" REFER TO NOTES BELOW FOR TRIM FLANGE DETAIL REQUIRED. Description Q STANDARD Fully recessed incandescent nominal 5"diameter aperture lensed wallwasher with integral linear Modified Standard spread lens and internal specular kick reflector. Custom we Notes Lamps) Clear overlap trim. 50PAR20/HAUNFL Lamp(s)per unit 1 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage EDISON PRICE LIGHTING DLWL 20/5-COL 50 KURT VERSEN COMPANY Voltage 120 Project Smith College Campus Center 13163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type FU0 Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 100% Construction Documents .f. 1 .M NOTES: 1. Canopy 2. Glass diffuser • 3. Pendant 4. Lamp assembly 5. J-box reference 6. Ceiling reference Pictorial Image NTS 5.25" 1 6 23.5" 31.5° 51.125" 3 5.5" 13" 4.75" Side Elevation/ End Elevation/ Detail Section NTS +w Description Q STANDARD Pendant mounted quartz halogen decorative fixture with glass diffuser. Modified Standard .� Custom Notes Lamp(s) Refer to Arch. elevations for exact pendant lengths required. Standard glass,stem and canopy 200T3QICL finishes per Arch. Lamp(s)per unit 1 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage LEUCOS Vittoria 200 Voltage w 120 IVProject Smith College Campus Center B163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RAN w Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 so 100% Construction Documents Ballast 0 0 0 65/8" (168 mm) „ 1 113/4 " 1 (298 mm) Section w� N.T.S. Candlepower I�w Angle Along ll 45° Acrossl 0 1851 1851 1851 � 5 1847 1843 1839 III 10 1822 1820 1819 � 15 1779 1780 1784 20 1718 1723 1722 1% 25 1638 1639 1616 30 1534 1519 1472 -� 35 1404 1367 1320 40 1249 1189 1144 45 1064 992 926 GM-232A 50 858 787 714 Electronic Ballast 55 655 588 543 F32T8/35K Lamps 60 480 422 399 2850 Lumens 65 346 282 287 70 244 183 219 Spacing criterion: 75 173 135 178 (II)1.2 x mounting 80 128 111 135 height,(1) 1.2 x 85 68 62 75 _ mounting height 90 0 0 0 Photometrics shown shall be prorated to specified Efficiency 72.4% lamp output,per manufacturer's information. Photometrics Lamp(s):(2) F32T8,2850 Lumens each Description 0 STANDARD Fully recessed linear fluorescent three lamp profile troffer with acrylic lens and integral electronic Modified Standard ballast. El Custom �w Notes Lamp(s) E.C.to coordinate mounting and wiring with ceiling construction. White overlap trim. Philips F32T8/TL835 Lamp(s)per unit 3 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage METALUX LIGHTING GM332-A125-120-E881-G2 96 LEGION LIGHTING Voltage 120 Project Smith College Campus Center B163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RAM Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 we 100% Construction Documents 4M IN wow Pictorial Image NTS NOTES: 1. Lamp 2. Housing Filename: FSD4D6.T8 3. Lens Cat.No.: FSD 40-648-CR. 180° 160° 140° .■, 5000-1 1 1 4000- 3000- -120° 2000- 8-5/8" 1000- — 90° 0— 1000 2000- 3000- - 60° ( 1 3 4000- 5000-1 1 1 0° 20° 40° Cross Section Photometrics NTS Photometrics shown shall be prorated to specified lamp output,per manufacturer's information. , Description Q STANDARD Fully recessed(2)lamp compact fluorescent nominal 2'diameter circular fixture with overlap flange, Modified Standard .. steel plaster ring,arched acrylic diffuser,and integral electronic ballast. � Custom + Notes Lamp(s) E.C.to coordinate mounting and wiring with field conditions. Standard white overlap flange finish. Philips PL-L40W/35/RS Lamp(s)per unit 2 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage FOCAL POINT LIGHTING FSD-22-D-2-BX40-S-120-G-CR-XX-HW 80 COLUMBIA Voltage 120 Project Smith College Campus Center B163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RAk an Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 w 100% Construction Documents rw 8V8' x9V8' + ! 2 NOTES nI 3 I �P 2 Housing O 3. Unpholder 0 4. Reflector 5 5. Spread lens 8. Transfmw co O 8 7. ArcHtectural Ref. r 4' 7 5 V4' ' 13 7/8' x11 3/4' ♦ , -35 DEGREES OF ADa1STABllfY SECTION ►1T.3. Candlepower Distnbution (a�w 90 ! var" �o � '�`"�' 0 30 6o Bo 120 00 M 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 80 10 1Tl4 504 71 32 13 13 13 20 VW 747 45 9 0 0 0 30 195 04 2E 0 0 0 0 40 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 I!w 50 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 70 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 so 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 90 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 30 PHOTOWETAICS Law 75w AR-70 SP,500 lmir Photometrics shown shall be prorated to specified lamp output, per manufacturer's information. Description Q STANDARD Fully recessed tungsten halogen nominal 4"diameter downlight with 120/12 volt electronic transformer, Modified Standard clear glass lens,clear specular reflector and overlap trim. 0°-35°lamp angle adjustment,358° El horizontal rotation. Custom Notes Lamps) Coordinate mounting with ceiling configuration. Positive locking mechanism for rotation and vertical Osram Sylvania 50AR70/FL adjustment required. Clear overlap trim. Lamp(s)per unit 1 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage EDISON PRICE LIGHTING Anglux AR/4 COL 50 '■ KURT VERSEN COMPANY custom/requires greater recess depth Vol 1 tage Project Smith College Campus Center (3163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RAJ Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 100% Construction Documents 4- --- —— --------,--————— 6 2 /e' 2 5 REFER TO ARCH. ELEVATIONS FOR g EXACT PENDANT LENGTHS w •4• REQUIRED. Dimensions shown are with T-12 lamp. 00 .Minus'/:for OCTRON T-8 lamp. Section Section (with Wireguard) NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE NOTES: 1.Lamp 2. Housing 3. Ballast 4. Pendant stem 5. Canopy and"hang straight' 6. Junction box reference 7. 7/8"DIA.knockout 8. Chain/Pendant slot 9. Ceiling reference 48 J) �w 8 Plan - Back of Channel NOT TO SCALE + Description Q STANDARD Pendant mounted linear fluorescent nominal 4'-0"long two lamp profile strip with wire guard,rigid E] Modified Standard .� pendant stem,canopy with hang-straight and integral electronic ballast. El Custom Notes Lamp(s) E.C.to coordinate pendant lengths required with Architectural Elevations/Sections. E.C.to coordinate Philips F32T8/TL835 mounting with ceiling construction. Standard baked white enamel channel finish. Lamps)per unit 4 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage LEGION LIGHTING 2410-240/EB-WG-SP 64 C.J. LIGHTING voltage no H.E.WILLIAMS 120 ttlProject Smith College Campus Center 8163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RAI M Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 uw 100% Construction Documents �I. 2t/s'� NOTES: 1.Lamp 2. Ballast I 3. Housing 2 119• 4. Ceiling reference 43� Pictorial Image ` 9 .4. NTS Dimensions shown are with T-12 lamp. 'Minus V0 for OCTRON T-8 lamp. O Section a NTS Section (with Wireguard) NTS r l J 3 } NO.AND NOMINAL CAT.NO. TYPE LAMPS u DIMENSIONS NSION ONS WEIOM 14 WATT 15 WATTo 20 WATT a F017 300-114 1-14W-TS 2-12 X 15 3 300.115 1-15W-TS 3' __.� 2-12X19' 3 TY' �3' ♦300-120 I+ -00W-TS 2-1/2 X 24' 4 o•s _ I A300-130 • 1f017CT e' 30 WATT a F025 !- 40 WATT a FW2 6'FO40 9•y 1-30W-RS 2-12 X 36" 7 4 1-FO25-OCT 72' 3' 3 4300-140 1-40W-RS 2-1/2X49• 9 b' 1-F032-0CT - o 0 300-160-ES13MT 1+040-OCT 2-12 X 600 11 M 30 WATT-69.TANDEM F025-an TANDEM ♦300-130-6T 2-30W-RS 2-12 X 72' 14 2-F025-OCT •WO-140-8T 2-40W-RS 2-12 X96' 16 �� 48 3• •2-F032-OCT F4 f 4 40 WATT-fill.TANDEM To specify OCTRON BALLAST,add suffix"ESB/OCT"to catalog number. �g 1-6'-{ F032-8R TANDEM Lengths and Mounting (See below for length required) Lengths and Mounting ! " NTS NTS Description Standard Surface mounted linear fluorescent single lamp profile nominal 4'length strip with wire guard and integral electronic ballast. QX MODIFIED STANDARD Custom Notes Lamp(s) E.C.to coordinate mounting with ceiling construction. Standard baked white enamel channel finish. Philips F32T81TL835 Lamp(s)per unit Manufacturer Fixture Wattage LEGION LIGHTING 300-140-WG 8 per linear foot C.J. LIGHTING Voltage H.E.WILLIAMS JIM Project Smith College Campus Center B163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RAH Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 on 100% Construction Documents 7," T. 1 s."�-S:i IIIM t 1 r--_I I I I I I I I 12" * I I I J _ S Pictorial Image 3 I NOT TO SCALE I I 2 I I 4 —ir NOTES: 1. Canopy 2. Glass Diffuser I 3. J-box reference I 4. Wall reference I ~' I 1 I Elevation NOT TO SCALE .MI! Description STANDARD Surface mounted compact fluorescent sconce with satin white blown glass nominal 12"diameter Modified Standard diffuser,metal canopy,and integral electronic ballast. � Custom MW Notes Lamp(s) Refer to Architectural Elevations for exact mounting height. White painted metal canopy. Philips PL-C 18W135 Lamp(s)per unit 1 .4 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage ILLUMINATING EXPERIENCES Riviera Wall M4247 18 Voltage no 120 Project Smith College Campus Center 6163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type to- w RAG Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 +eu 100% Construction Documents —————i Detail A NOTES: t 1. Lamp 4-1/4"dia. 2. Lampholder 11th r t 3 3. Ribbed glass diffuser /4"min. i 4. Acrylic insert i 5. Set screws I; L————— 6. Ballast compartment 5 cover(removable for access to ballast) N LL: 7.Spring clip 8.Ballast 9.Splice compartment 1 J d 13 cover(removable for v io access to wiring) 10.Fasteners as req'd �* 11.Wiring as req'd 12.Conduit reference 19 (by E.C.) 13.Aluminum tubular base 14.Metal support sleeve 4 —— —i 15.Base Plate w/conduit t t opening(bolts as req'd) —-- Detail B 16-Template w/conduit I 2 Elevation opening *• NOT TO SCALE 17.Coupling 18.Anchor bolt(as req'd) I 5 19.Floor reference 4-1/2"dia. 13 N — 0 ® I 5 6 o0o co I I 14 $ o 19 I I 10 15 Base Plate e.l I 16 O I X X 0 11 .. , 13 o ) 12 Template —� 12 -_ 18 5-1/8"o.d. Plan Views Section-Base Detail Detail B - Plans/Section Detail A - Section NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE Description Standard 11s Surface mounted compact fluorescent bollard with ribbed glass glass jelly jar diffuser,translucent inner Modified Standard acrylic insert,electronic ballast and captive,tamper-proof fasteners. Fixture base plate to allow tubular aluminum base to be flush with floor,no exposed fasteners. MX CUSTOM SAMPLE REQUIRED Notes Lamp(s) Fixture to be UL listed for wet locations.Contractor to coordinate base plate and anchoring details with Philips PL-C 26W/35/4P floor construction.Acrylic insert to be shaped(all not identical);to be determined by RDG&Architect in Lamps)per unit mock-up.Clear anodized aluminum finish. 1 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage D'AC Custom 26 C.W.COLE AND COMPANY Voltage 120 Project Smith College Campus Center 8163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RAF Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 100% Construction Documents 4 U4` (140MM) W8mm} �41102ffffO dia Section NTS ww Description Q STANDARD Track mounted PAR 30 tungsten halogen object light with adjustable yoke. Fixture to have 0°-180° ❑ Modified Standard r� vertical adjustment and 385°horizontal rotation. � Custom Notes Lamp(s) Provide one fixture for every 2 LF of track. Contractor to install one fixture for each circuit of track. 75W PAR30 NFL Standard matte white finish. Lamps)per unit 1 m! Manufacturer Fixture Wattage EDISON PRICE LIGHTING MIN 30 75 Voltage No 120 Project Smith College Campus Center 6163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RAD-AC Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 low 100% Construction Documents 1 4 - ....................... 4 :;;:;:;<;;;::;:•;::;•; 3 44 (fl4mrN Pictorial Image Track mounted version shown 2 718' (73rrn) dia (44mm) dia Section NOTES: NTS 1. Track adapter(see notes below for mount- ing option) Lamp:50WAR70SP,400 Lumens Lamp:50WAR70FL,430 Lumens 2. Ceiling reference(typical) CANDLEPOWER DISTRIBUTION �. CANDLEPOWER DISTRIBUTION �. 3. Cylindrical aluminum transformer housing Vertical Candela .,96l angle A Angle candela 4. Lamp power connector �! 5. Vertical lamp adjustment axis with friction 0 8725 0 2308 focus lock 5 4473 s0' 5 1887 no' 10 516 - 10 1095 6. Lens(see notes below for options) 15 108 15 500 Bp 20 55 20- 209 25 33 25 86 30 20 30 39 35 0 35 12' 40 0 40 5 45 0 45 2 50 0 50 2 55 0 0• 00• 55 2 0' 30' 60 0 LUMINANCE DATA 60 1 LUMINANCE DATA 65 0 65 1 70 0 Vertical Candela/m2 70 0 Vertical A t Angle COndela/m 75 0 g 75 0 Angle Ilk 80 0 45 0 80 0 45 238 85 0 55 0 85 0 55 191 90 0 65 0 90 0 65 86 75 0 75 0 to 85 0 85 0 To convert edim'tofoodamberts multiply by 0.2919. Photometrics Photometrics shown shall be prorated to specified on lamp output,per manufacturer's information. Description STANDARD to Track mounted tungsten halogen low-voltage adjustable downlight with integrated aluminum transformer housing and one-way spread lens. Fixture to provide 350*horizontal rotation and 0'to ❑ Modified Standard 180*vertical adjustment. ❑ Custom Notes Lamp(s) Provide one fixture for each 2 LF of track. Provide flood lamps for 100%of fixtures and spot lamp for Osram Sylvania 50AR70 FL&SP 50%.Contractor to install one fixture for each circuit of track. Standard matte white finish. Lamp(s)per unit 1 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage EDISON PRICE LIGHTING MW/AR-CLR,LLS/2.75 50 t Voltage 120 ,• Project Smith College Campus Center 6163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type MD-1 Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 100% Construction Documents an 1 NOTES: 2 1.One-piece extruded aluminum housing 2.Architectural ref. 3.Overlap trim N r 1A! 3 3/4' 17/8' Section N.T.S. Description Q STANDARD Fully recessed single circuit extruded aluminum lighting track with overlap trim. � Modified Standard Custom Notes Lamp(s) Contractor to provide and coordinate all mounting hardware,joiners and electrical feed components for N/A complete system. Refer to Architectural RCP's for exact lengths. Standard matte white finish. Lamp(s)per unit ..R Manufacturer Fixture Wattage EDISON PRICE LIGHTING SLR 90 per linear foot Voltage ' 120 Project Smith College Campus Center 6163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type *o RAD Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 we 100% Construction Documents 3-11/16" s (94mm) 6 7 Pictorial Image Direction of lighted wall —► NTS Section NOTES: NTS 1.Extruded aluminum mounting trim/frame 2 (see description below for exact trim detail specification). 3 g 2.Integral ballast with splice compartment 6-7/8 3.Aluminum housing (175mm) 4.Mounting clips(4 provided) 5 z — 5.Die-cast hood (51 mm) 6.Micro-prismatic tempered glass lens 12-9/16• 6 T 7.Specular extruded aluminum reflector (319mm) 8.Ceiling reference Front Elevation Side Elevation NTS NTS 26w QUAD � T 6-1/4• (160mm) i 12' 15oW 1400 (305mm) TH Cd Photometrics Ceiling Cutout Photometrics shown shall be prorated to specified NTS lamp output,per manufacturer's information. Description STANDARD Semi-recessed compact fluorescent wallwasher with asymmetric aluminum reflector,tempered Modified Standard prismatic glass spread lens,overlap trim frame and integral electronic ballast. rl Custom Notes Lamps) E.C.to coordinate mounting and wiring with ceiling construction. Standard white overlap trim finish. PL-C 26W/35/4P Lamp(s)per unit Manufacturer Fixture Wattage ELLIPTIPAR INC. F-205-P126-T-02-1-000 26 w WINONA STUDIO OF LIGHTING Voltage Project Smith College Campus Center B163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 RAC 100% Construction Documents AN 6 49� 2 2 up! 3-3/4" Pictorial Image NTS Section NTS C NOTES: .1- 1. Lamp EQ. EQ. 5 2. Ballast .F e 3. Housing 4. 7/8"DIA.knockout 5. J-box reference 101. 6. Architectural slot reference X410-Min. 12" Slot Recommendations NTS 96. 3- 48- 3- 0 0 0 4 F096 --8ft SINGLE LAMP STRIP Plan view of the back of the fixture housing NTS Description STANDARD Surface mounted linear fluorescent single lamp nominal 8'-0"long strip with integral electronic ballast Modified Standard in architectural ceiling slot. Custom Notes Lamp(s) E.C.to coordinate mounting within Architectural slot. Fixture to be centered within slot. Interior surface F96T8/TL835 of slot to be painted;Colors per Arch.Standard baked white enamel finish. Lamps)per unit 1 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage LEGION LIGHTING 300-1-F096-EBO-120V 96 C.J. LIGHTING Voltage H.E.WILLIAMS 120 Project Smith College Campus Center 1131163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RAB Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 100% Construction Documents O �4 1517(114=r t Pill 1 x y % 7 7/16' 0 a Pictorial Image O NTS l - r 125r1rN _—— 40° � -4-(IO2ffW dial 51/4'(331rW dia —I NOTES: Pik 9'x 12 (229 x 305 oW dia 1. Housing 2. PAR20 metal halide lamp Requires ceiling opening of 4%(124mm) 3. Reflector(see notes for finish and trim option) 4. Ceiling reference Section 5. Ballast JIM NTS CANDLEPOWER DISTRIBUTION ca Vertical Candela Angle 0 6665 5 6335 to 15 3535 25 656 35 54 45 0 55 0 65 0 75 0 ON 85 0 90 0 V 3d , Photometrics Lamp:CDM35/PAR20/FL,2300 Lumens Photometrics shown shall be prorated to specified _ lamp output,per manufacturer's information. Description Q STANDARD Fully recessed metal halide nominal 4"diameter aperture downlight with spun aluminum reflector, Modified Standard overlap trim and integral electronic ballast. D Custom Notes Lamp(s) E.C.to coordinate mounting and wiring with field conditions. Fixture to be UL listed for damp location. Philips CDM351PAR20/FL Provide 0°outdoor electronic ballast. Clear reflector and overlap trim. Lamp(s)per unit ON 1 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage EDISON PRICE LIGHTING ARC 20/4-COL 50 I'm KURT VERSEN COMPANY Voltage 120 Project Smith College Campus Center 8163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RY Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 100% Construction Documents Pictorial Image " NOT TO SCALE 3 2 4 1 NOTES: :r 1. Lamp 2. Ballast 3. Housing 4. Louver 5. Ceiling reference 5 1168mm l 7 i 213/4' 1603m.1 Candlepower Section An91. A1-911 45' Acr I NOT TO SCALE 0 1554 1554 1554 5 1550 1541 _1549 � 10 1515 1504 1504 15 1466 1438 1433 2PGAX-2U 1-5/8 S331 20 1405 1356 1433 \ Electronic Ballast 25 1330 1309 1462 FB031/35K Lamps N____ 1245 1290 1427 35 Viso 1233 1377 2800 Lumens 40 1040 1136 1344 �1 Spacing criterion: 45 913 1047 1254 (11)1.2 x mounting so 770 941 1130 height, (1)1.4 x 55 612 739 773 mounting height 60 311 407 444 65 79 107 91 Efficiency 63.4% 70 34 46 36 Test Report 75 19 25 19 #1091`133 60 10 13 9 85 1 5 3 Photometrics 90- — 6 0 0 Lamp: Photometrics shown shall be prorated to specified lamp output,per manufacturer's information. Description STANDARD Fully recessed fluorescent 2'x2'fixture with two U-lamp profile lamps,semi-specular parabolic 9 cell Modified Standard louvers and integral electronic ballast. � Custom 1�t Notes Lamp(s) Fixture to be suitable for air return;Mech.Engineer to review and confirm air return requirements.E.C. Osram FB031/835 to coordinate mounting and trim type with ceiling configuration. Standard trim finish per Architect. Lamp(s)per unit 2 *+* Manufacturer Fixture Wattage METALUX LIGHTING HR2PGX2U1-518S33H120E61 61 Columbia voltage 120 Project Smith College Campus Center 8163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RX Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 X w 100% Construction Documents �a. NOTES: 1. Canopy F? " 2. Glass Diffuser 3. J-box referencesk . imp sr 4. Ceiling reference r - Pictorial Images so NTS 4 2 3 i -- - L-------1 6" 19" Elevation NTS 9wr Description STANDARD Surface mounted compact fluorescent fixture with sandblasted glass bowl diffuser and integral ballast. Modified Standard Custom Notes Lamps) White painted metalwork. Philips PL-C 18W/35/4P Lamp(s)per unit 2 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage ILLUMINATING EXPERIENCES Jesolo Plus 3440 36 Voltage 120 Project Smith College Campus Center B163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RW Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 100% Construction Documents Am 2 Ile NOTES: 1.Lamp � .. 2. Ballast 2 3. Housing 2'/e' Pictorial Image e4' NTS w� Section NTS .� 15' 1B' {{{----------24• 3• 3'y �- 3• 7 3• NO.AND NOMINAL CAT.NO. TYPE LAMPS DIMENSIONS WEIGHT 300-114 1-14W-TS 2-12 X 15' 3 11 WATT 15 WATT 20 WATT 8 Fb17 49. } 300-115 1-15W-TS 2-12 X 1a' 3 3' 3' 3'� �W }-3' ♦3W-120 1-20W-TS 2-12 X 24• 4 • 1 o• o o F017-OCT � 30 WATT a F025 '`p' 40 WATT a F032 6•f;W e'-� •300-130 ♦ 1-F0-Rs 2-12 X 36' 7 72' 3, 49• 3 •300-110 1-FO32-O 2-12%4S a ♦ 1-F032-OCT 300-160-ESB/OCT t-FO40-OCT 2-12 X 60' 11 30 WATT-ea.TANDEM F025-e1t TANDEM •300-130'67 230W-RS 2-12 X 77 14 2-FO25-OCT • •300-140-6T 2-40W-RS 2-12 X 96' 16 3- te' 3' ♦2-F032aCT o I •To specify OCTRON BALLAST,add suffix"ESBIOCT"to catalog number. 40 WATT-eR TANDEM I=-90 TANDEM Lengths and Mounting Lengths and Mounting NTS NTS > Description ❑X STANDARD Surface mounted linear fluorescent nominal 24"long striplight with integral electronic ballast. Fixture is Modified Standard mounted within architectural wall cove. Custom Notes Lamp(s) Refer to Architect's details for exact fixture location,orientation and cove configuration. Standard white Philips F171T8/TL80/35 P ainted finish. Lamps)per unit 1 ►*► Manufacturer Fixture Wattage LEGION LIGHTING Series 300 17 C.J. LIGHTING Voltage H.E.WILLIAMS Project Smith College Campus Center 6163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RV Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 100% Construction Documents j� 21/2' I NOTES: •w ¢' 1.Lamp 2. Ballast 2 3. Housing 2'/a' Pictorial Image *4' NTS v -- ------ 'J Section NTS S 24. NO.A IN M NOMAL CAT.NO. TYPE LAMPS DIMENSIONS INWEIOH7 14 WATT 15 WATT 20 WATT L For 300-114 1-14W-TS 2-12 X 15" 3 300.115 1-15W-TS 2-12X18• 3 r 3' 3' }-3' 4 300-120 1-20W-TS 2-12 X 24• 4 o o•i o _0 A I+017-OCT 30 WATT&F025 I-rr-4 IowATT 6.Fow a'F040 C-j •300-130 1-30W-RS 2-12 X 36' 7 A I+02S-OCT 72'4 .300-140 1-40W-RS 2-12 X 48' 8 —f 3' • tf032-OCT o•i p I~� 30 WATT-&t TANDEM 300-160-ESa/OCT 1-FO40-OCT 2-12 X 60• 11 8 F025-8R TANDEM •300-130-67 2-30W-RS 2-12 X 72 14 •2-FO25-OCT •300-140-BT 2-40W-RS 2-12 X 96' 16 •2-F032-OCT •To spit*OCTRON BALLAST,add suffix"EMOCT'to catalog number. 40 WATT-ea TANDEM I=-e8.TANDEM Lengths and Mounting Lengths and Mounting NTS NTS Description Q STANDARD Surface mounted linear fluorescent striplight with integral electronic ballast. Fixture is mounted below Modified Standard mailboxes. � Custom Notes Lamp(s) Refer to Architectural details for exact mounting I orientation/and locations. Standard white painted Philips F32T8/TL835 finish. Lamp(s)per unit +� 1 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage LEGION LIGHTING Series 300 8 per linear foot C.J.LIGHTING Voltage H.E.WILLIAMS 120 PA Project Smith College Campus Center 6163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RT Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 100% Construction Documents s1amN[TAAQI nlle IMAION Sip►TAL9Q TOQ f MRDC./11 G Sim 11r pN 51C11 1/Z 1OK � OTAIM IOM AssDoLT i 1) now C"1111N MAf1C SIavw II 1 I MOMpC SUQ 10MM am rommm on I 1 IAIf1A71DEN \ / LOMU[R COMA 250 WATT VAX PM M \\ 1 II 1 A011ME TAT I=ASSMY \ . 1`011 1 MIT - � \ 1`01101 fim R 1 IM!KI MIC Ie11C W1rt euai Me6N so ' _' 10'•7v VKM Ulm eye \' C"w S 23/3f \ - o 0►' s 1/r �,t�o• i s .>>r -------�--- .yw Io rq IN Composite Sections/ Elevations NTS Description Q STANDARD Track mounted tungsten halogen adjustable wallwasher with specular reflector,positive tilt and rotation ❑ lock assemblies and 40°x 70°spread lens. Modified Standard ❑ Custom w� Notes Lamp(s) Allow for 8 total fixtures. Standard matte white finish. 25OW PAR38 FL Lamp(s)per unit 1 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage EDISON PRICE LIGHTING Artima 38 W 250 Voltage > 120 Project Smith College Campus Center 8163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RS-Z' Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 A 100% Construction Documents r--ij _ 13i NOTES: 12 1. Lamp 2. 'Push-on'Lamp Connector 3. Rotation Lock Assembly 4. Voltage Selector Switch 3 5. Transformer in Aluminum Housing ---- � 6. Steel Yoke ON 7. Positive Tilt Lock Assembly '_" OR 11Z 8, Lamp Retaining Rings 5 9.Aluminum Housing 10.Cross Baffle Assembly containing r --;-;-- 6 springs for lens 11.See description for lens requirements 12.Track Reference ' I 13.Architectural Ceiling Reference 2 C] O !� 3-3/8" !` e� --------------- e 8 6-3/16" 9 f 8-7/8" 5"Dia. 10 --------- a -- ----- 5-9/32,Nom.Dia. --- --- rY 11 Section/Elevation Elevation NTS NTS W Description FX-1 STANDARD Track mounted tungsten halogen adjustable downlight with cross baffle assembly,clear protective ❑ Modified Standard glass lens, positive tilt and rotation lock assemblies,ceramic push-on lamp connector and integral 120112V transformer and 30°spread lens. ❑ Custom Notes Lamp(s) Allow for 24 total fixtures.Contractor to install only one fixture per circuit of track. Standard matte Osram Sylvania 100AR111/SP&FL white finish. Lamp(s)per unit 1 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage EDISON PRICE LIGHTING Artima 36/AR111 Lens/4.75-30 100 7�IIr Voltage 120 ON Project Smith College Campus Center 8163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RS-1 Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 100% Construction Documents 4W 1 NOTES: 2 1.One-piece extruded aluminum housing 2.Architectural ref. 3.Overlap Vim N r � flue 3 3/4' 17/8' Section N.T.S. Description STANDARD Fully recessed single circuit extruded aluminum lighting track and overlap trim. E] Modified Standard ❑ Custom Notes Lamp(s) Contractor to provide all mounting hardware,joiners and electrical feed components for complete N/A system. Refer to architectural details for exact mounting orientation and locations. Standard matte Lamps)per unit white finish. Manufacturer Fixture Wattage EDISON PRICE LIGHTING SLR 90 per linear foot Voltage * 120 Project Smith College Campus Center 6163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RS + Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 100% Construction Documents i" op I Ceiling reference 14°min. (356) I 8114°min. Cut-off to lamp (210) — t to be above horizontal B. (203) _t__---- > T 31/2" , , 3 314"min. (89) I ---- (95) . - - Refer to Architectural cove sections/details for exact cove configuration. Section nts CANDLEPOWER SUMMARY — E 0°PLANE PEHPENDCIAM TO LAMPS 0 215 45 67.5 90 110 312 312 312 312 312 115 31T 314 311 311 314 30 170 314 311 312 311 323 165 272 306 307 324 372 90 160 260 265 300 353 H2 155 233 256 261 397 515 153 ISO fit 233 260 446 607 145 173 205 267 496 762 227 140 116 176 252 565 991 135 124 1S3 236 679 1064 321 5 130 100 126 217 612 1124 125 77 103 196 866 I 121 360 ,. 120 63 61 1 e1e Las 115 45 fit 151 766 616 350 110 30 12 125 630 197 105 11 27 96 433 131 220 Q 100 3 12 63 263 263 95 0 1 71 106 97 72 90 1 2 7 75 100 t Photometrics Description STANDARD 10 Surface mounted linear fluorescent single lamp uplight with asymmetrical reflector and integral Modified Standard electronic ballast. Custom Notes Lamp(s) Refer to Architectural drawings for exact mounting conditions and lengths required. Philips F25/32T8/TL835 Lamp(s)per unit 1 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage LITECONTROL CORPORATION Cove 45-CC-AI-28S14T8-CWM-ELB-120 8 per linear foot FOCAL POINT LIGHTING Voltage PEERLESS LIGHTING CORPORATION Project Smith College Campus Center 8163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RR Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 100% Construction Documents OR +I NOTES: nT 1.Lamp 2. Ballast 3. Housing 21/a' Pictorial Image .4. NTS w A�1+ Section NTS nr TJ r } 3 3._Y}— } 3 NO.AND NOMINAL on CAT.NO. TYPE LAMPS DIMENSIONS WEIGHT 14 WATT a 15 WATT 20 WATT 8 F017 300-114 1-14W-TS 2-12 X 15• 3 } 300-115 1-15W-TS 2-12 X IF 3 � -3' 3•-1 --- 3• •300.120 1-20W-TS 2.12 X 24' 4 o•i _ • 1-FO17-OCT 30 WATT&F025 �e-4 40 WATT 8 F032 a•F040 A 300-130 1-30W-RS 2-12 X 36" 7 • I+025-OCT ♦300-110 1-40W-RS 2-12 X 48• b 6 3 3 -_ • 110W-RS �6•i 30 WATT-6a TANDEM o 300.160-ESSIOCT 1+040-OCT 2-12 X 60• 11 F025-6R TANDEM 64 •300-130-6T 2-30W-RS 2-12 X 72' 1 •2-FO25-OCT 1300-140-8T 2-/OW-RS 2-12 X 36• 16 3•-1 .-� 3• •2-F0-40W b WATT-BR TANDEM •To speedy OCTRON BALLAST•add suit"ESB=T'•to Mtabg number. r6' 6•-{ FOX-ea TANDEM on Lengths and Mounting Lengths and Mounting NTS NTS WX .�I Description 0 STANDARD Surface mounted linear fluorescent fixture with integral electronic ballast. Fixture is mounted in 4? Modified Standard architectural ceiling cove. Custom Notes Lamp(s) Refer to Architectural details for exact mounting/orientation/and locations. Standard white painted Philips F32T8(TL835 finish. Interior surfaces of cove to be painted matte white. Lamp(s)per unit 1 an Manufacturer Fixture Wattage LEGION LIGHTING Series 300 8 per linear foot C.J. LIGHTING Voltage H.E.WILLIAMS 120 Project Smith College Campus Center B163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type A IV RQ- Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 100% Construction Documents — , •` 4'/e' 2 :. . .+ 3 4 _ - 1 - Pictorial Image NOT TO SCALE NOTES: 1.Lamp 2. Ballast 3. Housing 4. Lens 5. Arch.reference Section NOT TO SCALE 48'-72'-96' 10' 10' —{ 5' S' 7/e'dia knockouts Housing Backplate (See below for length required) NOT TO SCALE Description 0 STANDARD Surface mounted linear fluorescent single lamp profile fixture with clear acrylic diffuser and integral electronic ballast. Fixture is mounted vertically within architectural wall cove. ❑ Modified Standard ❑ Custom l Notes Lamp(s) Fixture mounted vertically;sockets as req'd to maintain electrical connection.E.C.to provide mounting Philips F32T8/TL835 hardware as required for continuous runs. Refer to Arch.details for exact mounting location.Standard Lamp(s)per unit white painted finish. Interior surfaces of cove to be painted matte white. 1 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage LEGION LIGHTING 13-132-AC-EBO 8 per linear foot C.J. LIGHTING voltage 120 H.E.WILLIAMS Project Smith College Campus Center B163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RQ-1 Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 100% Construction Documents VIM 2 Ile NOTES: 1.Lamp 2. Ballast 3. Housing 2 1/9• Ow --03 Pictorial Image NTS 17, Section NTS 24- 3.4 -3' 3• 11-31 3• NO.ANO NOMINAL CAT.NO. TYPE LAMPS DIMENSIONS WEIGHT 0 300.114 14 WATT 15 WATT 20 WATT&1`017 1-14W-TS 2-12 X 15" 3 300-115 1-15W-TS 2-12X/8' 3 3• .300-120 1:20W-TS 2-12 X 24' 4 A I F017CT W WATT&F025 1,-e-4 4o WATT&F=&-Fo4o 300-130 1-30W-RS 2-12 X 36" 7 • I-FO25-OCT •300-110 3- 1:40W-AS 2-1/2%18' a • /-F032-OCT 30 WATT-8ft.TANDEM 1-FO40-OCT 2-1/2 2-1X60'II F025-6ft TANDEM W 2 3 01 -RS 2-1/2 X 72' 14 IfM • 2:1`02S-OCT 4 •300-110-BT 3- 2-40W-R S 2-1/2 X 96' -1 3- •2+032-OCT •To specify OCTRON BALLAST,add suffix"ESB/OCT'*to Cate"number. 40 WATT-Be TANDEM F032-W TANDEM Lengths and Mounting Lengths and Mounting NTS NTS Description STANDARD Surface mounted linear fluorescent uplight with integral electronic ballast. E] Modified Standard WOO Custom on Notes Lamp(s) Refer to Architectural details for exact mounting/orientation and locations. Standard white painted Philips F32T81TL835 finish. Interior surfaces of cove to be painted matte white. Lamp(s)per unit 1 so Manufacturer Fixture Wattage LEGION LIGHTING Series 300 8 per linear foot C.J.LIGHTING Voltage H.E.WILLIAMS 120 Project Smith College Campus Center B163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RQ Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 1MM 100% Construction Documents 1 12316'x 12 3V M9 xV9W Q ' 13U r1B9RY -`- - _ _ Pictorial Image - NTS F W I� 6-(1 WO Lia yl 13U 161rtml dQ 136x63I4'a33 x425BW R.q.6-<.1n9 opening o(6"/.:(176.nm) Section NTS PHOTOMETRIC REPORT-FLOOD LUMINANCE DATA lc-w6/.fl Independent Testing laboratories Report No.33762 V-1 A`°r°8� A-9. A.arog. Luminaire lamp holder aimed of 30a above vertical; ANA. 0°taemd. 90°to86de 180-tofiNd. speculor aluminum reflector 45 132333 600 120. Lamp.._......................150-wall PAR-38 FL,1735 lumens 55 18092 4e5 0 Efficiency....................70.0% 65 805 401 0 75 0 0 0 85 0 0 0 Te ranert dA,e w f-lmb ix.4il1)69 0.2919 CANDLEPOWER DISTRIBUTION(C-M.; vemcal Hon.—J A.gb Ao9�6 0.0 22.5 45.0 67.5 90.0 11105 1350 157.5 100.0 0 339 339 339 339 339 339 339 339 339 10 1274 1114 801 496 336 295 245 222 210 20 2912 2324 1391 509 146 62 44 36 31 30 3596 2842 1179 132 25 19 12 9 6 40 2501 1777 496 22 12 7 4 2 2 50 760 366 33 10 6 4 2 2 0 5 60 26 13 6 4 3 2 1 0 0 70 3 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 90 1 D 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Photometrics Lamp: 150W PAR38 FL, 1735 lumens Photometrics shown shall be prorated to specified lamp output,per manufacturers information. Description Q STANDARD Fully recessed PAR 38 tungsten halogen nominal 6"diameter adjustable accent light with 40°cut reflector cone and overlap trim. Fixture to have 358°rotation and 0°-40"vertical angle adjustment. ❑ Modified Standard ❑ Custom po Notes Lamp(s) Positive locking mechanism for rotation and vertical angle adjustment required. Clear specular Q250PAR38/FL reflector cone and overlap trim. Lamp(s)per unit Manufacturer Fixture Wattage EDISON PRICE LIGHTING DL38/40/6AA-COL 250 KURT VERSEN COMPANY Voltage 120 ( Project Smith College Campus Center B163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RP Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 100% Construction Documents - — - — - — ti . 1 1 Ceiling reference 14'min. (356) 8114"min. Cut-off to lamp l (210) — t to be above horizontal �t 8. .� (203) _t------ >_ 31/2" O , 3 314"min. (89) (95) Refer to Architectural cove sections/details 1 --'-� for exact cove configuration. a Section J nts CANDLEPOWER SUMMARY r PLANE PEAPEMYC"TO LAMPS wnF 0 22.5 15 67.5 90 aurwr 180 312 312 712 312 175 J12 311 311 711 12 33 11 170 311 311 312 311 323 165 292 306 307 321 372 90 160 260 285 300 357 112 155 233 258 281 387 515 153 150 202 233 260 44 607 115 173 205 287 196 762 227 110 118 178 252 565 961 135 121 153 236 679 1081 321 MA 100 126 217 812 1121 125 r7 103 196 656 n21 380 120 63 81 175 818 1045 715 15 61 151 788 816 350 110 30 lT 125 'X 526 ^ 105 18 27 96 103 131 720 L� JI 100 3 12 63 263 263 % 0 1 37 175 97 R 90 I 2 7 75 100 Photometrics .., Description 0 STANDARD Surface mounted linear fluorescent single lamp uplight with integral electronic ballast and mounted Modified Standard within architectural cove top of mailbox wall. Custom Notes Lamps) Install 3'and 4'lamps as required to come within 6"of end of cove. Paint all interior surfaces of the Philips F25132T8/TL835 cove matte white. Lamp(s)per unit *■ 1 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage LITECONTROL CORPORATION Cove 45-CC-AI-28S14T8-CWM-ELB-120 8 per linear foot >A FOCAL POINT LIGHTING Voltage IVProject Smith College Campus Center 8163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RO Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 1�w 100% Construction Documents NOTES: ----- ------------- 1.Lamp 2. Acrylic diffuser 3. Ballast 4. Housing a 5 3/411 If 5 -M 5. Architectural reference 700 2 NO I 5 1/1611 Section 114 FULL Fixtures butt together end to end Metal supporting band at center in continuous rows 8'fixtures 0 9 /100 Elevation 66 .62 .59 .58 .56 .53 .49 .48 .46 9*' 0 1 100 2 .56 .51 .47 .50 .46 .43 .42 .40 .37 we NTS 200 3 .49 .43 .39 .44 .39 .35 .37 .34 .31 4 .43 .37 .32 .38 .34 .30 .33 .29 .26 48-1/2" 300 5 .38 .32 .27 34 .29 .25 .29 .25 .22 8' 6 .34 .28 .23 .30 -25 .21 .26 .22 A 6' 7 30 .24 .20:.27 .22 .18 .23 .19 .16 40"00 0 8 .27 .21 .17 i.24 .9 -;6 .21 .17 .14 9 .24 .19 15 22 17 .4 A .15 .12 10 .22 A7 A .20 .15 A2 .17 .13 .11 Photometrics Lamp:(2)Philips F32T8/TL830 Plan Photometrics shown shall be prorated to specified NTS lamp output,per manufacturers information. Description r-X-1 STANDARD Surface mounted fluorescent 4'nominal fixture with white acrylic wrap around lens,integral electronic Modified Standard ballast.Lengths vary;where 8'lengths are required fixtures to be butt mounted in continuous row. Custom Notes Lamp(s) Refer to Arch.dwgs.for exact mounting locations/orientation I lengths required. Standard white Philips F32T8/TL835 painted housing. Lamp(s)per unit 2 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage PRUDENTIAL LIGHTING P-5102-48-RSE-WA-120-PEL 16 per linear foot Voltage 120 Project Smith College Campus Center 113163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RN Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 100%Construction Documents .w 2 .. 3 .w_ 7 314" 097wi r:.. Pictorial Image 9 i NTS ::.. .,,..; ;`s; 314"(19mm) ------- L . i an 40° — 5"(1279m)dia — 1 NOTES: 6 V4"(159mm)dia 4 1. Housing 2. Lamp(see notes for wattage) 9 x Ir(229 x 279mm) i 3. Architectural Reference 4. Reflector Trim(see notes for finish Section and trim detail) NTS .� CANDLEPOWER DISTRIBUTION . 90° Vertical Candela Angle LUMINANCE DATA ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARY 0 1052 Vertical Zone Lumens %Lam %Fixture an 5 1013 60' Angle Candela/mz P 15 860 0- 30° 724 41.6 62.0 25 840 45 14916 0- 40° 1053 60.5 90.1 35 533 55 404 0- 60° 1167 67.1 100.0 45 137 65 0 0- 90, 1 168 67.1 100.0 ' 55 3 75 0 90-180, 0 0.0 0.0 65 0 85 0 0-180° 1 168 67.1 100.0 75 0 To convert cd/m'to foodamberts 85 0 multiply by 0.1919. gAl1 90 0 o° 30° Photometrics shown shall be prorated to specified PhotometricS lamp output,per manufacturers information. Lamp: 100W A19, 1740 Lumens Description STANDARD Recessed incandescent side mounted A19 downlight with spun aluminum reflector,overlap trim and Modified Standard .w nominal 5"diameter open aperture. ❑ ❑ Custom Notes Lamp(s) E.C.to coordinate mounting and wiring with ceiling construction. Clear specular aluminum reflector 100A19/IF(2500hr Long Life) and overlap trim. Lamp(s)per unit 1 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage EDISON PRICE LIGHTING DL A1915 COL 100 KURT VERSEN COMPANY Voltage 120 Project Smith College Campus Center 6163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type m RH Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 no 100% Construction Documents up NOTES: 1. Cylindrical glass shade �w 2. Metal backplate and lamp support z *r Pictorial view NTS 1 2 r Front and Side Elevafions NTS Description Q STANDARD Surface mounted incandescent wall sconce with cylindrical glass shade,chrome backplate and medium base lamp support bracket. El Modified Standard [:] Custom Notes Lamp(s) Refer to Architect's elevations for exact mounting height and location. White glass shade.Matte 100W A19 IF(2500 hr.) chrome finish. Lamp(s)per unit an 1 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage Tango Lighting Silo wall 100 Voltage 120 Project Smith College Campus Center B163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RG Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 100% Construction Documents _ wA 7 9/16" (192 mm) w , Pictorial Image 3l4'119�mU - - -- - - .. -- -- -- NTS 450 i 1- 3 5/8" J .� (92 mm) NOTES: 1.Housing 4 7/8 2.PAR20 Lamp (124 mm) 3.Architectural Reference 9"x11" (229 x 279 mm) CANDLEPOWERDISTRIBt)TION Section 90' Vertical Candela NTS Angle 0 1192 5 1110 60" 15 759 25 224 35 9 45 1 55 0 65 0 75 0 85 0 90 0 0° 30° Photometrics Lamp:50W PAR20 NFL,560 Lumens Photometrics shown shall be prorated to specified lamp output,per manufacturer's information. w. Description STANDARD Fully recessed incandescent nominal 4"aperture PAR20 downlight with spun aluminum reflector and Modified Standard overlap trim. ❑ Custom Notes Lamp(s) Matte white painted overlap trim. Clear specular reflector cone. 50PAR20/HAUNFL30 Lamp(s)per unit 1 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage EDISON PRICE LIGHTING DL20 COL WF 50 KURT VERSEN COMPANY Voltage 120 Project Smith College Campus Center B163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type IV RF Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 w 100% Construction Documents 2 � M � 3 NOTES: - ---- --- ri ------------------- ----- 1. Lamp k 2. Housing -- --- ------------- ----- - 3. Lampholder $' 5 4. Cross Baffle(see notes 9 117 below for finish info) 30°Cut-off 14 718. 5. Architectural Ref. 2 CJ 3 Ww ® ®® co ---- --- -------k � 4 8' 5 9 V2' 40°Cut-off 11 314' SECTION KTA Candlepower Distribubon (avicip ) 90 VerLlcal f>b►tantar kpk kpie ao 450 9Q0 135.0 moo 0 1066 1066 VW 1066 1066 5 VW 1090 VW 1057 1063 60 15 1055 1075 tw tw VW 25 936 1021 1064 1096 967 35 996 743 733 982 799 ono 45 302 305 415 415 442 55 19 37 25 67 85 65 0 0 0 0 0 75 0 0 0 0 0 0 65 0 0 0 0 0 90 0 0 0 0 0 �' 0 30 PHOTONETRICS Photometrics shown shall be prorated to specified Lamps:2x 26W quad,4-pin,G24q-3 base, 1800 lumens each lamp output, per manufacturer's information. Description ❑ STANDARD Fully recessed compact fluorescent downlight with nominal 8"diameter aperture,white cross baffle 11 Modified Standard assembly,and integral electronic ballast. El Custom Notes Lamp(s) E.C.to coordinate mounting and wiring with ceiling construction. E.C.to coordinate installation of Philips PLC 26W/35/4P fixtures so that all cross baffles align and are oriented w/one baffle perpendicular to the walls.White Lamp(s)per unit overlap trim. 2 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage EDISON PRICE LIGHTING SB 226/8 WOL 52 KURT VERSEN COMPANY Voltage Project Smith College Campus Center 8163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RD Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 100% Construction Documents no ima Cane Fixture support rail, S NNEA H..g.Y`° continuous 0100.&0 �^^C-P 131/2" (343) 4 9" _.W = a11n Mwe figwe xYermwpdm b,olhrs (229) ��'�'� _r Typical Installation, viewed from above 3 3/4" N.T.S. -� 10 (95) -- 3/811 ' (10) `- - 911 Wall reference (229) PARABOLIC REFLECTOR Ceiling reference Section N.T.S. CMSS— '5 -- CANDLEPOWER SUMMARY u1GlE 0 45 90 135 180 ouma LWENS 90 0 0 0 0 0 85 1 3 12 10 8 9 80 10 12 37 21 20 75 19 22 79 35 32 46 70 28 34 151 49 43 ' 65 38 133 228 63 56 107 60 90 245 311 75 70 55 233 332 397 86 83 189 50 341 363 482 90 96 45 433 393 563 90 102 2304 ' 40 453 448 640 93 102 35 469 526 713 92 100 231 30 525 614 M 92 98 Photometrics shown shall be prorated to specified 25 613 694 835 94 95 .219 20 716 759 894 102 93 lamp output, per manufacturers information. 15 781 858 920 223 95 177 10 906 989 942 457 246 5 1014 996 951 769 625 83 0 954 954 954 954 954 Photometrics Lamp: (I) 4'T8 4 Description Fx—] STANDARD Fully recessed fluorescent one-lamp profile,continuous perimeter wallwasher with clear specular Modified Standard aluminum reflector and integral electronic ballast. El Custom Notes Lamp(s) 4� Install 3'and 4'lengths as required to come within 6"of the end of the cove. Coordinate mounting with F25 or F32 T8 TL835 ceiling configuration. Baked white enamel finish on overlap trim. Lamp(s)per unit 1 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage LITECONTROL CORPORATION 201(3or4)T8-CWM-277 8 per linear foot Voltage w� 120 Project Smith College Campus Center 6163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type 4o IV C Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 on 100% Construction Documents PIN ----- Detail A NOTES: 1. Lamp 4-1/4"dia. i 3 2. Lampholder /4"m n. 3. Ribbed glass diffuser 4. Acrylic insert i 5. Set screws 6. Ballast compartment I !, ——— — ' 5 cover(removable for i III access to ballast) N 7.Spring clip B.Ballast - LL 9.Splice compartment ! 1 ) d 13 cover(removable for l to access to wiring) 10.Fasteners as req'd 11.Wiring as req'd 7 3 12.Conduit reference 19 (by E.C.) 13.Aluminum tubular base ,1 14.Metal support sleeve U —— —i 15.Base Plate w/conduit opening(bolts as req'd) —-- Detail B 16.Template w/conduit Elevation— opening 2 NOT TO SCALE 17.Coupling 18.Anchor bolt(as req'd) 5 19.Floor reference c 4-1/2"dia. L 7 ens 13 `� o I ® I 5 s) PIN 8 0 0 0 co 14 19 ,oj I I 15 Base Plate o I I 16 X .2< 11 000 —— —1 I 17 13 o / 12 Template 18 5-1/8"o.d. a� Plan Views Section-Base Detail Detail 6 - Plans/Section Detail A - Section NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE Description ❑ Standard Surface mounted compact fluorescent bollard with ribbed glass glass jelly jar diffuser,translucent inner Modified Standard acrylic insert,electronic ballast and captive,tamper-proof fasteners. Fixture base plate to allow tubular ❑ aluminum base to be flush with floor,no exposed fasteners. ❑ CUSTOM Notes Lamp(s) Contractor to coordinate base plate requirements and anchoring details with floor construction.Acrylic Philips PL-C 26W/35/4P inserts to be shaped(not identical);exact shape to be determined by RDG&Architect in mock-up. Lamp(s)per unit Clear anodized aluminum finish. 1 Manufacturer Fixture Wattage D'AC Custom 26 0M C.W. COLE AND COMPANY Voltage 120 Project Smith College Campus Center 8163.00 Date 12 NOV 01 Type RA Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design 15 East 32nd Street New York, NY 10016 100% Construction Documents w Smith College Campus Center Issued for 100% CD Lighting Fixture Index Issue Dates 0 0 0 0 � TYPE DESCRIPTION � w O J cn z o 00 MO N RAH Surface mounted linear fluorescent strip with wire guard. ✓ ✓ ✓ RAI Pendant mounted linear fluorescent strip with wire guard. ✓ ✓ ✓ RAJ Fully recessed tungsten halogen 4"dia. adjustable accent fixture. ✓ ✓ ✓ RAK Fully recessed compact fluorescent 2'diameter circular fixture. ✓ ✓ ✓ RAL Fully recessed tungsten halogen nominal 6"aperture downlight. ✓ ✓ ✓ w RAM Fully recessed linear fluorescent three lamp troffer with acrylic lens. ✓ ✓ ✓ RAN Pendant mounted quartz halogen decorative fixture with glass diffuser. ✓ ✓ ✓ RAO Fully recessed PAR20 nominal 5"diameter aperture lensed wallwasher. ✓ ✓ ✓ ,,,� RAP Surface mounted linear fluorescent uplight. ✓ ✓ ✓ RAQ Recessed compact fluorescent steplight with glass diffuser ✓ ✓ ✓ RAR Surface mounted compact fluorescent uplight ✓ ✓ RAS Surface mounted linear fluorescent uplight with perforated metal shield ✓ ✓ ° RAT Recessed compact fluorescent steplight with glass diffuser and louvers ✓ RAU Surface mounted compact fluorescent downlight with acrylic lens ✓ RAV Recessed compact fluorescent downlight with acrylic lens ✓ RAW Surface mounted compact fluorescent downlight with cross baffles ✓ Renfro Design Group, Inc. Architectural Lighting Design Page 2 of 2 Smith College Campus Center Issued for 100% CD Lighting Fixture Index Issue Dates 0 0 0 o w TYPE DESCRIPTION ~ z w � J U) z W CO CO N O RA Surface mounted compact fluorescent bollard ✓ ✓ ✓ RA-1 Surface mounted compact fluorescent lighting element on fascia. ✓ ✓ ✓ RB Pendant mounted Metal Halide uptight. ✓ RC Fully recessed fluorescent one-lamp profile perimeter wallwasher. ✓ ✓ ✓ RD Recessed compact fluorescent 8"aperture downlight. ✓ ✓ ✓ RE Surface mounted fluorescent task light. ✓ ✓ ✓ RF Fully recessed incandescent PAR20 downlight. ✓ ✓ ✓ RG Surface mounted incandescent wall sconce. ✓ ✓ ✓ MO RH Recessed incandescent side mounted A19 5"aperture downlight. ✓ ✓ ✓ RI Recessed incandescent/fluorescent downlight with decorative glass ✓ RJ Surface mounted fluorescent uptight. ✓ RK Fully recessed incandescent nominal 4"aperture PAR20 downlight with ✓ clear specular reflector. RL Surface mounted compact fluorescent wall sconce. ✓ RM Surface mounted Neon within Architectural cove. ✓ RN Surface mounted fluorescent fixture with white acrylic wrap around lens. ✓ ✓ ✓ RO Surface mounted linear fluorescent single lamp uplight. ✓ ✓ ✓ Fully recessed PAR 38 tungsten halogen nominal 6"diameter adjustable ✓ ✓ ✓ RP accent light. RQ Surface mounted linear fluorescent uptight. ✓ ✓ ✓ Surface mounted linear fluorescent fixture mounted vertically within ✓ -/ ✓ RQ-1 Architectural cove. RQ-2 Surface mounted linear fluorescent fixture in Architectural cove. ✓ ✓ ✓ RR Surface mounted linear fluorescent single lamp uplight. ✓ ✓ ✓ *w RS Recessed single circuit extruded aluminum lighting track. ✓ ✓ ✓ RS-1 Track mounted tungsten halogen adjustable downlight ✓ ✓ ✓ RS-2 Track mounted tungsten halogen wallwasher with specular reflector ✓ ✓ ✓ RT Surface mounted linear fluorescent strip integrated into mailbox wall. ✓ ✓ ✓ RU Recessed linear fluorescent uplight for railing. ✓ RV Linear fluorescent 2'-0" strip within architectural niche. ✓ ✓ ✓ RW Surface mounted compact fluorescent fixture with glass bowl. ✓ ✓ ✓ RX Fully recessed fluorescent 2'x2'fixture with parabolic louvers. ✓ ✓ ✓ RY Fully recessed metal halide nominal 4"diameter aperture downlight. ✓ ✓ ✓ RZ Surface grade mounted metal halide tree uptight. ✓ ✓ ✓ RAA Fully recessed tungsten halogen PAR20 spread-lensed wallwasher. ✓ ✓ ✓ Surface mounted linear fluorescent single lamp nominal 8'-0"long strip ✓ ✓ ✓ RAB within Architectural slot. RAC Semi-recessed compact fluorescent wallwasher. ✓ ✓ ✓ RAID Fully recessed single circuit lighting track with overlap trim. ✓ ✓ ✓ RAD-1 Track mounted tungsten halogen low-voltage adjustable downlight. ✓ ✓ ✓ RAD-2 Track mounted PAR 30 tungsten halogen object light ✓ ✓ ✓ Surface mounted fluorescent single lamp T5 continuous staggered strip RAE light with integral electronic ballast mounted within architectural cove. RAF Surface mounted compact fluorescent bollard. ✓ ✓ ✓ RAG Surface mounted compact fluorescent fixture. ✓ ✓ ✓ Renfro Design Group, Inc. Al Architectural Lighting Design Page 1 of 2 1.24 AIMING AND ADJUSTMENT A. All adjustable lighting units shall be aimed, focused, locked,etc.,by the Contractor under .. the supervision of the Lighting Consultant. The Lighting Consultant shall indicate the number of crews(foreman and apprentice)required. All aiming and adjusting shall be carried out after the entire installation is complete. All ladders, scaffolds, etc. required shall be furnished by the Contractor. As aiming and adjusting is completed, locking setscrews and bolts and nuts shall be tightened securely. B. When possible, units shall be focused during the normal working day. However, where daylight interferes with seeing, aiming shall be accomplished at night. 1.25 CLEANUP ' A. At the time of final acceptance by the Owner, all lighting fixtures shall have been thoroughly cleaned with materials and methods recommended by the manufacturers, all broken parts shall have been replaced, and all lamps shall be operative. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Architectural Lighting Fixtures 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16510-14 ON EXECUTION 1.23 INSTALLATION A. Do not scale electrical drawings for exact location of the lighting fixtures. In general, the architectural reflected ceiling plans indicate the proper locations of lighting fixtures. B. Install each fixture properly and safely. Furnish and erect hangers,rods, mounting brackets, supports, frames, and other equipment required. C. Furnish lighting fixtures complete with appurtenances required for the proper, safe and distortion-free installation in the various surfaces in which they appear. Determine surface types from the Architectural drawings. D. Each lighting fixture shall be packaged with complete instructions and illustrations +M showing how to install. Install lighting fixtures in strict conformance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. PM E. Rigidly align continuous rows of lighting fixtures for true in-line appearance. F. Install pendant lighting fixtures plumb and at a height from the floor as specified on the ON drawings. In cases where conditions make this impractical,refer to the Architect for a decision. Use ball aligners and canopies on pendant fixtures unless noted otherwise. G. Do not install fixtures and/or parts such as finishing plates, lenses and trims for recessed on fixtures until all plastering and painting that may mar fixtures finish as been completed. H. Lighting fixture locations in mechanical and electrical equipment rooms are approximate. "a Coordinate mounting height and location of lighting fixtures to clear mechanical, electrical and plumbing equipment and to illuminate adequately meters, gauges and equipment. 40 I. Support all lighting fixtures independently of duct work or piping. J. Whenever a fixture or its hanger canopy is applied to a surface mounted outlet box, a finishing ring shall be utilized to conceal the outlet box. K. Splices in internal wiring shall be made with approved insulated"wire nut" type mechanical connectors, suitable for the temperature and voltage conditions to which they are subjected. L. All wire utilized for connections to or between individual lamp sockets and lamp auxiliaries(i.e., wires which do not constitute "through circuit" wiring) suitable for temperature, current, and voltage conditions to which it is subjected. M. Install reflector cones, baffles, aperture plates, light controlling element for air handling fixtures, and decorative elements after completion of ceiling tiles, painting and general cleanup. N. Replace blemished, damaged or unsatisfactory fixtures as directed. Smith Campus Center Architectural Lighting Fixtures 100%Constriction Documents: 01.1 L 12 16510-13 ow 4W D. Ballast shall be rated for 55°C ambient temperature. .p E. Outdoor ballasts shall provide reliable starting and proper lamp performance to -29°C. F. Ballasts shall be suitably fused. G. Ballasts shall be encapsulated or potted with solid fill where possible. H. Ballasts shall be mounted in or on a lighting fixture to produce maximum sound attenuation. I. Mercury Vapor Indoor ballasts shall be constant wattage or stabilized wattage type with a .� power factor not less than 90%. Regulation: 13%variation in line voltage shall vary lamp watts not greater than+/-2%. Ballast shall provide sufficient voltage at lamp with a line voltage drop as much as 40%below nominal to prevent lamp from being extinguished. J. Outdoor ballast shall be constant wattage auto-transformer type with power factor of not less than 90%. Regulation: +/- 10% variation in line voltage shall vary lamp watts by no .. more than+/-5%. Ballast shall sustain line voltage drop as much as 40%(typical) without extinguishing lamp. K. Metal halide ballasts shall be auto-stabilized type with lead peaked circuiting,and power factor not less than 90%. Regulation: 10% variation in line voltage shall vary lamp watts not greater than+/- 10%. Ballast shall provide sufficient voltage at lamp with a line + voltage drop as much as 40%below nominal to prevent the lamp from being extinguished. L. High Pressure Sodium Vapor ballasts shall be the voltage stabilized type with not less than 90%power factor. Regulation: 10% variation in line voltage will vary lamp watts not,greater than+/- 3%. Ballast shall provide sufficient voltage at lamp with a line voltage drop as much as 30%below nominal to prevent the lamp from being .� extinguished. Ballast shall be complete with 180°C. insulation system and 80°C. rated capacitors. Ballast shall be capable of starting and operating lamp down to-29°C. and up to 35 feet away from the ballast. ■ was Smith Campus Center Architectural Lighting Fixtures 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16510-12 w go 1.20 INCANDESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Incandescent lighting fixtures shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. or other testing agency acceptable to local code authorities, for installation in fireproof or non-fireproof construction, damp or wet locations, as required. B. Aluminum reflectors shall be Alzak(finish as selected)or as authorized, and not less than 0.057 inch thick unless specified otherwise. on C. Lampholders shall be UL listed,and be heavy duty type constructed of high grade porcelain. Provide medium base sockets for lamps to and including 250 watts and mogul PM based sockets from 300 watts up to 1500 watts(rated for 1500 watts, 600 volt service) unless specified otherwise. D. Incandescent lighting fixtures utilizing tungsten halogen sources shall be designed and constructed so that lamp seal temperatures do not exceed 350°C. at an ambient of 25°C. when tested in accordance with UL Standard#57 and shall maintain an operating bulb wall temperature of approximately 600°C. and not less than 250°C. awn E. Lead wires for fixtures utilizing tungsten halogen sources shall be rated for not less than 200°C. operation,but shall be rated for 250°C. if temperature warrants. F. Temperature on reflectors shall not exceed 205°C. at any point. OR G. All fixtures supplied for recessing in suspended ceilings shall be supplied with pre-wired junction boxes. 1.21 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Lamps and ballasts shall be of one manufacturer to insure proper and consistent lamp performance. B. Exterior high intensity discharge fixtures shall be enclosed completely. C. Lime glass shall not be used in refractors, lenses, and diffusers with mercury vapor high intensity discharge sources. D. Where acrylic is used for lenses, refractors and diffusers with mercury vapor discharge sources, the fixtures shall be designed not to exceed 65°C fixture ambient temperature. 1.22 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE BALLASTS OR A. Ballasts shall meet Reference Standards defined in part 1 above. Ballasts for high intensity discharge lighting fixtures shall be U.L. listed. B. Fabricate core laminations of die-cut high quality steel precision welded. Coils shall be of high temperature enameled magnetic wire and precision wound. Coils shall be constructed using materials suitable for operation at 180°C. C. Capacitors shall be highest quality aluminum can type for the type of service intended. Outdoor ballasts shall use capacitors with 90°C. temperature rating. Smith Campus Center Architectural Lighting Fixtures 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16510-11 ow E. Ballasts shall meet minimum efficacy standards of all applicable state and local energy standards. F. Ballasts shall maintain constant light output of all fluorescent lamps over operating ranges of 108v to 132v(120v ballasts)and 249v to 320v(277v ballasts). G. Relative light output(percentage of light emitted with reference tube and ballast)shall be not less than 85% and not more than 100%. H. Ballast Total Harmonic Distortion(THD) shall not exceed 10%. I. Ballast shall withstand line transients as defined in IEEE Publication 587,Category A. �. J. Ballast case temperature shall not exceed 21°C temperature rise over 40°C ambient. K. Ballast shall have a power factor of 97% or above. L. Ballast shall have Class P thermal protector for automatic ballast disconnect when ballast temeratures exceed UL temperature limitations. M. Outdoor ballasts shall be suitable for operation and starting at 0°F. minimum. w 1.19 OTHER FLUORESCENT BALLASTS A. When electronic ballasts are not available,use two lamp and/or one lamp magnetic ballasts in any one fluorescent fixture. Fluorescent lighting fixture ballasts(except single ' reactor type) shall be equipped with an internal, automatic resetting thermal protector adjacent to the coils, and on-time non-resetting thermal device to protect the capacitor. B. Ballasts shall be U.L. listed, Class P, and comply with all A.N.S.I. specifications for lamp operation. Ballasts must be the manufacturer's best sound rating, and the sound rating indicated on the ballast. Ballasts found by the Architect to be unduly noisy shall be replaced without charge prior to acceptance of the job. Ballasts shall be high power factor, high efficiency, low loss type, similar to Magnetek Universal, Valmont, or Advance Mark III for double-ended lamps, and Robertson, Advance, or Magnetek for , single ended compact fluorescent lamps. C. Relative light output: (percentage of light emitted with reference tube and ballast) shall be not less than 95%. D. Ballasts shall be designed and constructed to maintain a case temperature not greater than 90°C. when operated at a room ambient of 50°C. when tested in accordance with U.L. '■" and A.N.S.I. standards. E. Ballasts shall be designed for single frequency operation 60 Hz. nominal, and shall „ operate at the nominal voltages indicated on label, 120 volt and/or 277 volt as required. F. Outdoor ballasts shall be suitable for operation and starting at -18°C. minimum. Smith Campus Center Architectural Lighting Fixtures 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16510-10 on N. Apply porcelain enamel finishes smoothly. Finish shall be not less than .0075 in. thick of non-yellowing, white, vitreous porcelain enamel with a reflectance of not less than 85%. 1.16 LAMPS A. Unless otherwise specified, lamps shall be manufactured by:General Electric, Philips or Osram-Sylvania. B. All lamps of a given type shall be supplied by the same manufacturer. C. If a specific manufacturer is noted in the schedule, only that manufacturer shall be acceptable. D. Incandescent and tungsten halogen lamps shall not be operated, other than for initial testing,prior to final inspection. 1.17 FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Housing end plates, socket bridges,reflectors,wiring channels and ballast covers shall be die formed of not less than#20 gauge(0.0359 inch thick)cold rolled steel unless specified otherwise. B. Lampholders shall be heavy white thermoset urea plastic with definite locking-in feature and silver plated contacts for proper lamp operation and life. Outdoor lampholders shall be neoprene gasketed and compression type. Sockets with open-circuit voltage over 300 volts shall be safety type and designed to open supply circuit on lamp removal. C. Mount lamps on rapid-start circuits within one inch of grounded metal,minimum one �w inch wide, as long as lamp. D. Construct fixtures so that ballast is secured firmly to prevent vibrations and may be serviced or replaced without removal of fixture housing. 1.18 FLUORESCENT ELECTRONIC BALLASTS A. Ballasts shall be high frequency electronic type wherever available. Ballasts shall be U.L. listed(or equal), Class P and comply with all ANSI specifications for lamp operation including: filament voltage, lamp current crest factor, lamp starting voltages and currents, lamp light output, etc. Ballasts are to operate lamps at a frequency of 20 KHz or higher with no detectable flicker. Ballast sound levels shall not exceed Class A ambient noise levels. Ballasts shall be Advance Mark V,Magnetek Triad, or EBT. B. Ballast shall provide continuous heating voltage to lamp cathodes and operate lamp(s)on a rapid start circuit. C. Programmed rapid start ballasts shall provide greater than 30,000 starts, based on standard 90 second on/off cycle testing. D. Compact fluorescent ballasts shall contain a Lamp End Of Life detection and shut down circuit in accordance with ANSI/IEC proposed standards. Smith Campus Center Architectural Lighting Fixtures 100%Constniction Documents: 01.11.12 16510-9 w� 1.15 LAMP HOLDERS A. Incandescent: 1. Body: porcelain 2. Screw Shell: nickel-plated brass, pre-lubricated with silicone compound. B. Fluorescent 1. Body: white urea plastic 2. Contacts: silver-plated phosphor bronze. C. High Intensity Discharge 1. Body: porcelain 2. Screw Shell: nickel-plated brass, pre-lubricated with silicone compound 3. Contacts: spring-loaded silver-plated phosphor bronze. D. Finishes E. Painted Surfaces shall be of synthetic enamel, with acrylic,alkyd, epoxy, polyester, or polyurethane base, light stabilized, baked on at 350° Fahrenheit minimum, catalytically or photochemically polymerized after application. F. White finishes shall be of minimum of 85%reflectance. G. Ceiling opening frames shall either be manufactured of non-ferrous metal, or be suitably rustproofed after fabrication. ! H. Unless otherwise noted, finishes shall be as selected by the architect. 1. Except for stainless steel give ferrous metal surfaces a five stage phosphate treatment or other acceptable base bonding treatment before final painting and after fabrication. J. Unpainted non-reflecting surfaces shall be satin finished and coated with a baked-on clear lacquer to preserve the surface. Where aluminum surfaces are treated with an anodic process, the clear lacquer coating may be omitted. K. Unpainted Aluminum Surfaces L. Finish interior aluminum trims with an anodized coating of not less than 7 mg. per square * inch, of a color and surface finish as selected by the Architect. M. Finish exterior aluminum and aluminum trims with an anodized coating of not less than 35 mg. per square inch, of a color and surface finish as selected by the architect. w.. Smith Campus Center Architectural Lighting Fixtures 100%Construction Documents: 0 l.1 1.12 16510-8 P" B. All Alzak parabolic cones shall be guaranteed against discoloration for a minimum of ten years, and, in the event of premature discoloration, shall be replaced by the manufacturer, including both materials and the cost of labor. C. Aluminum reflectors shall be finished specular, semi-specular, or diffuse as required and shall meet or exceed Alzak specifications. Minimum requirements of reflector finishes for interior and exterior service shall be as follows: 4s Description of Service Minimum Weight of Min. Reflectance Coating,mg per sq in Specular/Diffuse Normal interior commercial 5.0 83/75 service General interior industrial and 7.5 82/73 exterior work-reflector go protected by glass covering Exterior industrial and 10.0 78/75 commercial work-reflector Fw not protected Exterior marine service- 13.0 78/65 reflector not protected 40 D. Reflectors,reflector cones and visible trim of all lighting fixtures shall be turned over to on the Owner clean and free of scratches and fingerprints. 1.14 LENSES on A. Plastic for lenses and diffusers shall be formed of colorless 100% virgin acrylic as manufactured by Rohm&Haas, DuPont or equally acceptable manufacturers. The quality of the raw material must meet American Society of Testing Materials(ASTM) P0 standards as tested by an independent test laboratory. Acrylic plastic lenses and diffusers shall be properly cast, molded or extruded as specified, and shall remain free of any dimensional instability, discoloration, embrittlement, or loss of light transmittance for at least 15 years. B. Glass used for lenses,refractors, and diffusers in incandescent lighting fixtures shall be tempered for high impact and heat resistance; the glass shall be crystal clear in quality with a transmittance of not less than 88%. For exterior fixtures use tempered Borosilicate glass, Corning#7740 or equal. For fixtures directly exposed to the elements and aimed above the horizontal, use Corning Vycor glass or equal. no C. Where optical lenses are used, they shall be free from spherical and chromatic aberrations and other imperfections which may hinder the functional performance of the lenses. D. All lenses, louvers,or other light diffusing elements shall be removable,but positively held so that hinging or other normal motion will not cause them to drop out. E. All lenses shall be turned over to the Owner clean and free of dust. Smith Campus Center Architectural Lighting Fixtures 100%Constriction Documents: 01.11.12 16510-7 .■ K. Fixtures for use outdoors or in areas designated as damp locations shall be suitably gasketed to prevent the entrance of moisture. Provide approved wire mesh screens for ventilation openings. All dissimilar metal materials shall be separated by a non- conductive material to prevent galvanic action. L. For steel and aluminum fixtures, all screws, bolts, nuts and other fastening and latching hardware shall be cadmium or equivalent plated. For stainless steel fixtures, all hardware shall be stainless steel. For bronze fixtures, all hardware shall be stainless steel or bronze. M. All fixtures and ballasts must operate within the temperature limits of their design and as specified by Underwriters'Laboratories, Inc. in the applications and mounting conditions herein specified. N. Each lighting fixture which has a beam angle adjustment shall have reliable angle locking devices for all adjustable axes. O. Each lighting fixture which has a lamp with an oval shape beam pattern shall contain lamp orientation locking devices to insure that beam orientation is not disturbed during future lamp replacement or cleaning. P. Each lighting fixture which has a spread lens shall contain lens orientation locking devices to insure that lens orientation is not disturbed during future lamp replacement or cleaning. Q. All materials, accessories, and any other equipment necessary for the complete and proper installation of all lighting fixtures included in this Contract shall be furnished by the Contractor. R. Welding shall be done with electrodes and/or methods recommended by the manufacturers of the metals being welded. Welds shall be continuous,except where spot .. welding is specifically permitted. Welds exposed to view shall be ground flush and dressed smooth. All welds on or behind surfaces which will be exposed to view shall be done so that finished surface will be free of imperfections such as pits,runs, splatter, cracks, warping, dimpling, depressions or other forms of distortion or discoloration. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from all welded surfaces. S. Extruded aluminum frame and trim shall be rigid and manufactured from quality * aluminum without blemish in the installed product. Mitre cuts shall be accurate,joints shall be flush and without burrs and cuts alignment maintained with the light fixture located in its final position. 1.13 REFLECTORS & TRIMS A. Reflectors,reflector cones and visible trim of all lighting fixtures shall not be installed until completion of plastering,ceiling tile work,painting and general cleanup. They shall be carefully handled to avoid scratching or fingerprinting and shall be,at the time of acceptance by the Owner, completely clean. Smith Campus Center Architectural Lighting Fixtures 100%Construction Documents: 0 1.1 L 12 16510-6 aw PRODUCTS 1.12 FIXTURE CONSTRUCTION(GENERAL) A. All materials,accessories, and other related fixture parts shall be new and free from s defects which in any manner may impair their character,appearance, strength,durability and function,and effectively protected from any damage or injury from the time of fabrication to the time of delivery and until final acceptance of the work. B. Fabricate fixture enclosures with a minimum of#20 gauge(0.0359 inch thick)cold rolled sheet steel. Enclosures may be constructed of other metals,provided they are equivalent in mechanical strength and acceptable for the purpose. Fabricate lighting fixtures to be finished in vitreous porcelain enamel from a minimum of#20 gauge enameling steel. C. All sheet metal work shall be free from tool marks and dents,and shall have accurate -w" angles bent as sharp as compatible with the gauges of the required metal. All intersections and joints shall be formed true, of adequate strength and structural rigidity to prevent any distortion after assembly. we D. Housings shall be so constructed that all electrical components are easily accessible and replaceable without removing fixtures from their mountings,or disassembly of adjacent ON construction. E. All castings shall be exact replicas of the approved patterns and shall be free of sand pits, blemishes, scales and rust, and shall be smoothly finished. Tolerance shall be provided for any shrinkage of the metal castings in order that the finished castings will accurately fit in their designated locations. F. All lamp sockets in lighting fixtures shall be suitable for the indicated lamps and shall be set so that lamps are positioned in optically correct relation to all lighting fixture components. If adjustable socket positions are provided, socket should be preset in �!* factory for lamp specified. If different socket positions are specified for same fixture, sockets shall be preset for each type, and cartons marked accordingly. G. All fixtures shall be completely wired at the factory. H. If ceiling system requires, each recessed and semi-recessed fixture shall be furnished with a mounting frame or ring compatible with the ceiling in which they are to be installed. The frames and rings shall be one piece or constructed with electrically-welded butt joints, and of sufficient size and strength to sustain the weight of the fixture. I. Light leaks between ceiling trims of recessed lighting equipment and the ceilings will not be tolerated. If fixture is used in partially transparent ceiling, light leaks above the ceiling line will not be tolerated. J. Yokes,brackets and supplementary supporting members needed to mount lighting fixtures to carrier channels or other suitable ceiling members shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. Smith Campus Center Architectural Lighting Fixtures 100%Construction Documents: 0 1.11.12 16510-5 .o B. Manufacturer shall have not less than five years of experience in design and manufacture of lighting fixtures of the type and quality shown. Pre-qualification submissions must include a list of completed projects and dated catalogue pages or drawings indicating length of experience. C. Manufacturer shall also submit a prototype sample of each fixture for review by the Architect. Prototype samples shall be sufficiently detailed and operational to allow evaluation of compliance with the salient features of the specification. Preliminary design or shop drawings shall not be accepted in place of prototype samples. D. The architect shall be the sole judge in determining whether the prototype sample complies with the specifications, and shall reserve the right to disqualify any bidders. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials, equipment and tools, as well as workmanship provided under this Section shall conform to the highest commercial standard as specified and as indicated on drawings. 1.10 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warrant the fixture,its finishes, and all of its component parts, except ballasts, to be free from defects for a period of one year from date of acceptance if operated within rated voltage range. Replacement of faulty materials and the cost of labor required to make the replacement shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Ballasts shall be warranted for three years. 1.11 BASE BID MANUFACTURERS A. The Contractor shall base their bid for lighting fixtures on those manufacturers as specified. B. Specification of alternate manufacturers, identified by means of manufacturers'names and catalog numbers, is to establish basic features and performance standards. Any substitutions must meet or exceed these standards. C. Within sixty days of placement of order,Contractor must furnish independent photometric tests and samples for all alternative fixtures. If fixture fails to comply with specification requirements at that time, Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the Architect's and Lighting Designer's fees for time spent evaluating alternate fixtures, and shall furnish the originally specified fixture at no additional cost to the Owner and with no delay to the project. Smith Campus Center Architectural Lighting Fixtures 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16510-4 on H. Supply photometric data for any fixture offered in substitution for a specified fixture. I. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining from his supplying lighting manufacturers, for each type of lighting fixture, a recommended maintenance manual including: 1. Tools required on 2. Types of cleaners to be used 3. Replacement parts identification lists on 4. Final,as-built shop drawings 1.6 SAMPLES A. After shop drawing review, and prior to release for manufacturing, the Contractor shall furnish one sample of each fixture on the fixture schedule and contract drawings for which sample requirement is noted. B. Samples shall be complete with specified lamp(s),ready for hanging, energizing,and examining,and shall be shipped,prepaid by Contractor, to the Lighting Consultant, or as otherwise advised. C. Two weeks from date received shall be allowed for thorough examination of the samples by the Lighting Consultant. D. Samples are not returnable,nor included in quantities listed for a project. E. Samples must be actual working unit of materials to be supplied. 1.7 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Materials and installation shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the National Electrical Code and any applicable Federal, State,and local codes and regulations. B. All fixtures and ballasts shall be manufactured in strict accordance with the appropriate and current requirements of the National Electric Code as verified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or other testing agency as acceptable to local code authorities. Such a listing shall be provided for each fixture type, and the appropriate label or labels shall be affixed to each fixture in a position concealing it from normal view. 1.8 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS ow A. Manufacturers listed in the fixture schedule shall be assumed capable of supplying the listed fixtures unless exceptions are set forth in their quotations. Any such exceptions shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Architect and the Lighting Consultant. Manufacturers not listed must be pre-qualified to bid as follows: Smith Campus Center Architectural Lighting Fixtures 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16510-3 Ow 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings shall clearly indicate the Contract Drawing number of fixture details used as reference in the development of the shop drawings and the names of the job, architect and lighting consultant. Shop drawings shall be complete submissions for approval and maintenance and, where applicable, shall include the wiring diagram, scale plans, and .. details showing the method of installation of lampholders, lamps, reflectors, transformers and secondary feeds as well as complete bill of materials. Where applicable, verify field dimensions and include them on shop drawings showing exact locations of lampholders, and lamp shapes and lengths. Provide sepia copies of approved shop drawings for owner's use in maintenance and lamp replacement. B. The Contractor shall coordinate all his lighting fixture drawings with the drawings and details of the Architectural, Structural, Electrical,Mechanical, and other related trades to assure a perfect and efficient installation. C. No variation from the general arrangement and details indicated on the drawings shall be made on the shop drawings unless required to suit the actual conditions on the premises, .. and then only with the written acceptance of the Architect. All variations must be clearly marked as such on drawings submitted for approval. D. Catalogue Cuts lacking sufficient detail to indicate compliance with contract documents will not be acceptable. E. Shop drawings shall be submitted in reproducible form for all lighting fixtures and shall be received no later than sixty days after award of Contract. F. Review of shop drawings or samples does not waive contract requirements. G. Where indicated on the fixture schedule and contract drawings, supply complete photometric data for the fixture, including optical performance rendered by independent .. testing laboratory developed according to methods of the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America as follows: 1. Coefficients of utilization 2. Luminance table with data presented numerically, showing maximum luminance of the fixture at the shielding angles. Readings should be taken both crosswise and *+* lengthwise in the case of fluorescent fixtures or fixtures with an asymmetric distribution 3. Candela distribution data, presented graphically and numerically, in 5° increments (5°, 10°, 15°, etc.). Data developed for up and down quadrants normal, parallel, and at 22-1/2°, 45°, 67-1/2° to lamps if light output is asymmetric .o 4. Zonal lumens stated numerically in 10° increments(5°, 15°, etc.)as above 5. Area and roadway fixtures shall also include isocandela charts and IES roadway .m distribution classification. 40 Smith Campus Center Architectural Lighting Fixtures 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16510-2 so SECTION 16510 ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES ("R"PREFIX ONLY) GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide lighting fixtures in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. All work of this Section shall comply with the requirements of the Conditions of the Contract(General, Supplementary,and Special),with all Sections of Division 1 -General Requirements, with the Drawings, and with all other Contract Documents. 1.3 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install a lighting fixture of the type indicated by letter at each location shown on the drawings. B. Furnish and install lamps for all lighting fixtures(furnished as part of the electrical work). C. All materials,accessories, and any other equipment necessary for the complete and proper installation of all lighting fixtures included in this Contract shall be furnished by the Contractor. D. Fixtures shall be manufactured in strict accordance with the Contract Drawings and OR Specifications. E. Specifications and scale drawings are intended to convey the salient features, function on and character of the fixtures only, and do not undertake to illustrate or set forth every item or detail necessary for the work. F. Minor details,not usually indicated on the drawings nor specified,but that are necessary 40 for the proper execution and completion of the fixtures, shall be included,the same as if they were herein specified or indicated on the drawings. G. The Owner shall not be held responsible for the omission or absence of any detail, construction feature, etc. which may be required in the production of the fixtures. The responsibility of accurately fabricating the fixtures to the fulfillment of this specification rests with the Contractor. 1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Related sections of electrical work: See sections of Division 16. Smith Campus Center Architectural Lighting Fixtures 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 16510-1 ,o B. All isolated electrical equipment and/or components shall be restrained by Type I or . Type II devices as specified hereinafter. C. All seismic restraints shall be capable of safely accepting 0.5 "g" (1.0 "g" for life safety systems) external forces without failure and shall maintain equipment in a captive position. Seismic restraints shall not short circuit isolation systems or transmit objectionable vibration or noise, and shall be provided on all equipment as scheduled .. on drawings. Calculations by Registered Civil or Structural Engineer shall be submitted to verify snubber capacities for each piece of equipment. D. Seismic restraints are not required for the following, provided they are not part of life ' safety systems: 1. Conduits suspended by individual hangers 12 in. or less in length from the top of the conduit to the supporting structure. 2. Conduits less than 2-1/2 in.diameter. 3. Pendulum lighting fixtures, except they shall be designed for a component seismic coefficient(Cc) of 1.5 and the vertical support shall be designed with a safety factor of 4. E. Equipment mounted on springs does not require additional seismic restraints providing that the spring mountings: 1. Comply with general characteristics of spring isolators. 2. Have vertical limit stops and are capable of supporting equipment at fixed elevation during equipment erection. 3. Incorporate seismic snubbing restraint in all directions at specified acceleration loadings. 4. Acceptable seismic spring mountings are: Type SSLR -M.I.I. Type SAWR -V.M.C.I. Type BXL - V.E.C. F. Seismic Restraint Types 1. Seismic Restraint Type I a. Each corner or side seismic restraint shall incorporate minimum 5/8 inch thick pad limit stops. Restraints shall be made of plate, structural members of square metal tubing in a welded assembly, incorporating resilient pads. Angle bumpers are not acceptable. System to be field bolted to deck with 1.5 "g" acceleration capacity. b. Seismic spring mountings as described above are an acceptable alternative providing all seismic loading requirements are met. C. Mason Industries Type Z-1011, Type Z-1225,or as approved. 2. Seismic Restraint Type II: Metal cable type with approved fastening devices to equipment and structure. System to be field bolted to deck or overhead structural members or deck with aircraft cable and clamps as per SMACNA guidelines. END OF SECTION 16100 X projccts`119.11993-Smith Collcgc'Spcc\Eicctncal_100%Cmswucttm_01-11-12jd-kn doc Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-60 OR fixture from ceiling. Ballasts will be used on 60 hertz, 120 volt or 277 volt circuits as required. All ballasts will be individually equipped with a built-in, automatic resetting thermal protector in accordance with National Electric Code 410-71(e), Class "P". Ballasts' third harmonic content shall not exceed 20% and shall have a power factor greater than 90%. Ballasts shall be Advance RIC/VIC 112/3S40-TP, Magnetek or Valmont, or as approved. Ballast manufacturer name and catalog number shall be included in shop drawing submission. Ballasts for compact fluorescent lamps shall be high power factor(HPF), encased w and to have an"A" sound rating. Ballasts for all fluorescent lamps shall be of a type that will not attenuate carrier RO current signal and will meet FCC Rules and Regulations, Part 18, Subpart J. I. Shop drawings and samples for all lighting equipment and fixtures shall be submitted as to Architect for approval as directed. Samples shall be delivered where directed by Architect. All adjustable type lighting fixtures shall be adjustable from below ceiling with final adjustment as directed by the Architect upon completion of this job. go J. All ceiling types and trim requirements shall be verified prior to placement of lighting fixture order. am K. Integral thermal protection shall be provided with all recessed incandescent and high intensity discharge fixtures. Thermal protection shall be included as an integral part of ballast for high intensity discharge fixtures. L. All fixtures having exposed metal parts shall incorporate a means of suitably - connecting a ground conductor to the fixture. M. Where fixtures are specified to be of an air handling type used for supply air and the supply air pattern criteria specified in other Sections cannot be achieved with the adjustable air pattern deflector located in the mechanical duct element, all fixtures shall be furnished with an adjustable integral air pattern deflector capable of being adjusted from below the ceiling. If such a determination cannot be made at time of bid, the deflector shall be included as part of fixture. N. Where fixtures are specified to be used for air return and heat extraction, the heat extraction louvers shall be adjustable from fully closed to fully open from below the ceiling while the air return slots shall be provided with blank-off plates where fixtures are indicated on drawings as not being used for air return. 3.9 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. All electrical equipment, whether isolated or not, shall be bolted to structure to allow for minimum 0.5 g" of acceleration and 1.0 "g" for life safety equipment and systems. Bolt points and diameter of inserts shall be submitted and verified as part of the Contractor's submission for each piece of equipment and certified by a Licensed Civil or Structural Engineer. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-59 40 C. Megger all feeders and provide a written schedule indicating the values obtained for each feeder. Where values are less than the minimum values allowed by Code, make the necessary corrections to obtain the minimum values stipulated. D. Perform any tests other than those specified which may be required by legal authorities or by agencies to whose requirements this work is to conform. 3.8 LIGHTING EQUIPMENT,GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Lighting equipment and lighting fixtures shall be as called for on plans by designated symbols and type and as hereinafter specified. Said equipment shall embody the highest standards of electrical and mechanical design with maximum efficiency obtainable and all shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. B. All required lamps for lighting fixtures and lighting equipment shall be furnished and installed under this Section. Lamp wattages and types shall be as designated herein and on plans. Where lamp wattages are not designated, fixtures shall be lamped as directed by the Architect. Lamping of all fixtures shall commence at the direction of the Architect. C. All lighting fixtures will be furnished under this Section unless specifically noted otherwise herein. This Subcontractor shall receive all lighting fixtures delivered to the job site and directed to his attention, inspect same and refer all claims for nonshipment, shortage and/or damage to the shipper immediately for required adjustments. ..w D. This Contractor shall be responsible for storage and installation of all lamps and lighting fixtures, including damaged or missing fixtures, and replacement of lamps until installation is accepted. E. All hangers, cables, supports, earthquake clips, channels, frames and brackets of all kinds for safely erecting this equipment in place shall be furnished and erected in place under this Section. Hangers for pendent mounted fixtures shall be 1/2 inch conduit from swivel canopy on outlet box. Where pendent lengths exceed 8 feet, an intermediate unistrut member shall be employed. No fixture or unistrut shall be supported from mechanical ductwork or piping. F. Plaster frames for all fixtures recessed in plaster ceiling will be furnished and installed by this Contractor. Mounting channels for all fixtures recessed in tile ceilings shall be furnished and installed under this Section. G. All lighting units when installed shall set true and be free of light leaks, warps, dents and other irregularities. The finish of exposed metal parts of lighting fixtures and finish trim of all recessed lighting fixtures shall be as directed by the Engineer. H. Ballasts for fluorescent lamps shall be low heat, energy efficient, ETL approved, with a 1.4 crest factor, high frequency "electronic" or as specified herein or on the drawings. Three lamp ballasts shall be provided where practicable, unless otherwise specified on drawings. All ballasts and transformers shall be removable to facilitate repairs. All ballasts for recessed fixtures shall be replaceable without removal of Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-58 _ C. Where current limiting fuses are specified,rejection type fuse clips shall be provided to prevent installation of non-current-limiting type fuses. �w D. All switches shall be heavy duty type with defeatable door interlock to prevent door opening when switch is in "ON"position. Switches shall be externally operated, with handle whose position is readily recognizable and lockable in the "OFF" position. Switch mechanism shall be quick-make quick-break type with visible, nonteasible contact blades and line terminal shields. E. Switches shall be rated 250 volts where used on 208 volt circuits, and 600 volts for 480 volt circuits. F. In general, indoor enclosures shall be general purpose (NEMA 1), except in plenums, where gasketed (NEMA 12) enclosure shall be used. Switches located outdoors shall be in raintight(NEMA 3R)enclosures. w G. Each switch shall be provided with an external front cover mounted manufacturer's nameplate indicating switch type,catalogue number and ratings. H. Switches shall be UL listed and hp rated where required for motor circuits. Where fused switches are specified, they shall be UL listed in combination with fuses for the short circuit duty required. ter I. The use of lockout pushbuttons in control circuits of motors shall not be permitted in lieu of the above-specified disconnect means. J. Disconnect switches shall not be installed on any surface subject to vibration. on Suitable rigid support shall be provided as required. 3.6 CONCRETE WORK AND HOUSEKEEPING PADS A. Include all concrete work required for the installation of all work in connection with equipment pads specified in this Section. Four inch high housekeeping equipment pads shall be provided under all floor mounted electrical equipment. Pads shall extend 3 inches beyond equipment on all sides. Structural design details, including calculations, shall be submitted to the Consulting Engineers for approval prior to the commencement of installation. 3.7 TESTS A. Provide all labor, material, instruments, supplies, services and temporary equipment and bear all costs for the tests herein specified. Correct any and all defects appearing during the tests, and repeat the tests as required to remedy any defects disclosed; leave the equipment clean and ready for use. B. All grounds, crosses, shorts, etc., must be eliminated from the wiring. Test out all lighting fixtures, together with switches and controls; test the operation of all motors, controllers and other electrical equipment devices. Each piece of electrical equipment, including lighting fixtures, motors and controls shall be operated continuously for a period of not less than one (1) hour in the presence of the Owner, before acceptance. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-57 3.3 MOTOR WIRING AND CONTROLS A. Connect the motor starting devices for all motors, except where otherwise specifically provided for; furnish all necessary connections between controllers and motors in conduit, and leave motors ready to start. Change connections, if necessary, to secure proper rotation of motors. The power supply leads to the motors, from the controllers, shall be of the same size as the feeds indicated. B. Include the erection and connection of all motor control groups, pushbuttons, relays, controllers, etc. Single starters shall be suitably mounted either on wall or separately on angle iron racks. C. Include being responsible for the exact location of the motor controllers or control center and motors as far as wiring is concerned. Ascertain the proper location of the controllers, control groups, or groups and motors in each case before installing the circuit work. D. Perform all the necessary wiring in connection with the motor starting and remote control equipment, where so designated. Where control or starting equipment is sent to the job as individual units they shall be installed, wired up complete and left ready for operation. E. All motor controllers will have main fusible switches either in combination or as separate units. F. Include making all the electrical connections between motors, starters, controllers, aquastats and thermostats,and leaving unit heaters ready to operate. G. Included in the general requirements for motor control equipment wiring and connections, the following specific items shall be performed: 1. Installation and connecting up of motor controls singly or in groups. These control groups will be arranged and contain certain equipment indicated. 2. Wherever indicated or required when motors and their respective controls are out of sight of one another, an unfused motor rated disconnect switch shall be located at the motor or the branch circuit protective device of combination starter shall have provisions for padlocking in the open position. If padlocking provisions are provided, disconnect switches shall still be provided if so noted. Motors in outdoor locations shall require weatherproof disconnect switches. 3.4 INSERTS, ANCHORS, ETC. A. Provide all inserts, anchors or other required items which are to be built-in for securing all hangers or other supports for conduit and for anchorage of electrical apparatus and equipment. Supervise the placing of these anchors, inserts,etc. 3.5 DISCONNECT MEANS A. A disconnect switch shall be provided at each appliance, motor and other equipment as indicated on drawings. B. Disconnect switches shall be fused where required for overcurrent protection and +• unfused where disconnecting means only is required. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-56 continuous inner core of self-regulating conductive material between two parallel copper bus wires suitable for operation on 120, 208, or 277 volts, 60 hertz, single phase power. The heat tracing strips shall be capable of being cut to the desired length in the field. Operating energy shall be conserved by the self-regulating feature of the heater materials which automatically controls heat output in proportion to the heat requirement. The heater cable shall be similar and approved equal to Nelson Type LT-Limitrace or Raychem XL-Trace. D. The heat tracing system shall be controlled by an ambient sensing thermostat set at 40°F. located in an approved location. The ambient sensing thermostat shall be used to control contactor coils. Contactors shall be provided as needed for operation of heating cables.Thermostat shall be similar and approved equal to Raychem AMC-IA. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 LIGHT AND POWER WIRING SYSTEM A. Provide all wiring and connections between main service switchboard, panelboards, motor starter groups, and to all light, switch and receptacle outlets, and to all motor controllers and motors. B. The power leads to all motors shall be in conduit. Where motors have conduit terminal boxes, the feeder conduit shall not be connected directly into same. Provide "x a flexible conduit for final connection to motor terminal box. Flexible conduit shall be long enough (but in no case less than 24 inches long) and of suitable arrangement to achieve a true flexible connection between motor and rigid conduit. Under no circumstances shall rigid conduit terminate in or be fastened to motor foundation. Anaconda "Sealtite" flexible conduit shall be installed to pump motors and motors located outside and indoors where subject to moisture or oil, or where located within fan plenums. 3.2 LOCATION OF WIRING AND OUTLETS A. Coordinate work so that exact locations may be obtained for all outlets, apparatus, appliances and wiring. B. The location of outlets shown on diagrammatic wiring plans shall be considered as approximate. Before installing outlet boxes all pertinent drawings shall be studied and precise information obtained from the architectural schedules, scale drawings, large scale and full size details of finished rooms, or reviewed shop drawings. It shall be understood that any outlet may be relocated a distance not exceeding five feet horizontally from the location shown, if so directed by the Owner. Make any + necessary adjustment of the work to fit conditions for recessed fixtures and for outlets occurring in glazed tile, block, wood paneling or other special finish material in order that all boxes may register flush with finish and shall be centered properly. In centering outlets make due allowance for overhead piping, ducts, window and door trim, variations in thicknesses of furring, plastering, etc., as erected, regardless of conditions which may be otherwise shown on small scale drawings. Outlets incorrectly located shall be properly relocated without expense to the Owner. Locate local switches which are shown near doors at the strike side of the door. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-55 ON B. All wiring channels (fluorescent and incandescent) and baffles shall be cold rolled steel of minimum gauge, or as required by local Code. C. All sockets shall be of the porcelain type and shall be securely mounted to channels .w with screws. Spring mounted sockets are not acceptable. Manufacturer is responsible for supplying correct sockets for lamps indicated for use in fixture. D. All fixture wiring shall be of the heat resistant type, or as required by local Code. E. Manufacturer and Contractor shall be responsible for proper ventilation and temperature conditions of light fixtures. F. All fixtures with removable covers or cones shall be supplied with safety chains securely attached to main housings. There shall be a sufficient quantity of safety chains to support total weight of fixture. G. The Contractor shall verify with the Architect and/or Engineer that all lighting equipment meets all national and local Codes as applicable, e.g. Thermal protection and UL label. H. Contractor shall submit for written approval of the lighting consultant manufacturer's catalogue specification sheets for all standard catalogue light fixtures prior to purchase of same. ► I. Manufacturer and/or Contractor shall submit for approval detailed drawings of all special design fixtures prior to fabrication of same. J. Contractor shall verify ceiling construction for each fixture type and location and shall coordinate trim details. K. Unless otherwise specified, voltages of all lamps shall be determined by Electrical Engineer. Electrical Contractor shall coordinate proper lamp base types with socket provided in specified fixture. ®* L. Unless otherwise specified, initial purchase of lamps not easily available locally shall include 100% spare quantity of lamps. M. Manufacturer and/or Contractor shall be responsible that all fixtures specified for exterior use shall be treated with a weather-resistant corrosion protective coating. 2.21 ELECTRIC HEAT TRACING SYSTEM A. Heat tracing system shall be designed to maintain the water temperature within the piping to at least 40"F. with an ambient temperature of 0°F. The piping will be insulated as specified in Division 15 in Section 15600 Article No. 2.05 titled "Thermal Insulation". .moo B. Snow-melting and anti-icing system shall be designed to maintain sidewalks and driveway temperature to 40°F. with an ambient temperature of 0°F. C. Heating cables shall be UL listed electrical heating strips. The electric heat tracing shall be a self-regulating type of parallel circuit construction consisting of a Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-54 2.16 NAMEPLATES A. Provide screw-fastened type engraved phenolic nameplate with 1/4 inch high white lettering on black background, clearly indicating the function, designation or equipment controlled for each of the following: 1. Service switchboard utility panels, lighting panels,and power panels. 00 2. Motor starters and miscellaneous control switches. 3. Disconnect switches. 4. Enclosed circuit breakers. 5. Contactors and relays. 6. Time switches. 7. Remote alarm bells or annunciators. 8. Miscellaneous cabinets. 2.17 PAINTING A. All exposed panelboards, boxes, conduits, switches and hangers which require touching up after installation, shall be painted. All bare metal on panels, cabinets, etc., shall be wire brushed and coated with a prime coat. 2.18 ACCESS DOORS FOR FINISHED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide access doors as required for all concealed pull boxes, controls, and other elements requiring access above ceilings or behind walls or as indicated on the drawings. The installation of all doors will be performed under the Specifications of another Trade. Coordinate the work and assume responsibility for the accessibility of all valves. B. Contractor must submit documents showing type and location of access doors in finished construction. C. Furnish buttons or tabs to job site for setting, as approved, to indicate location of equipment located above removable type ceilings where access doors are not furnished. 2.19 LAMPS A. Provide and install all lamps, incandescent, fluorescent, mercury vapor, or as required, in all fixtures up to the time of acceptance by the Owner. Installation shall be made only when requested by the Architects. 2.20 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Furnish and install a lighting fixture at each fixture symbol shown on drawings and designated as type listed by the Architect. The description shall establish the appearance, quality, construction, etc., required for these fixtures with any modifications, if required, to comply with "Lighting Equipment, General Requirements". Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-53 4. Dead-Break Cable Terminators: Elbow-type unit with 600A continuous current +� rating, designed for deenergized disconnecting and connecting; coordinated with insulation diameter, conductor size, and material of cable being terminated. Include test point on terminator body that is capacitance coupled. ■• 5. Dead-Front Terminal Junctions: Modular bracket-mounted groups of dead- front stationary terminals that mate and match with above cable terminators. 2-, 3-, or 4-terminal units as indicated, with fully rated, insulated, watertight conductor connection between terminals. Grounding lug and manufacturer's standard accessory stands, stainless-steel mounting brackets, and attaching hardware. ., a. Protective Cap: Insulating, electrostatic-shielding, water-sealing cap with drain wire. b. Portable Feedthrough Accessory: 2-terminal, dead-front junction arranged for removable mounting on accessory stand of stationary terminal junction. C. Grounding Kit: Jumpered elbows, portable feedthrough accessory units, protective caps, test rods suitable for concurrently grounding 3 phases of feeders, and carrying case. d. Standoff Insulator: Portable, single dead-front terminal for removable mounting on accessory stand of stationary terminal junction. Insulators suitable for fully insulated isolation of energized cable-elbow terminator. 6. Test-Point Fault Indicators: Arranged for installation in test points of load- break separable connectors. Self-resetting indicators capable of being installed •• with a shotgun hot stick and tested with a test tool. Current-trip ratings as indicated. 7. Tool Set: Shotgun hot stick with energized terminal indicator, fault-indicator test tool, and carrying case. F. Arc-Proofing Materials 1. Tape for First Course on Metal Objects: 10 mil (250 micron) thick, corrosion- protective, moisture-resistant, PVC pipe-wrapping tape. 2. Arc-Proofing Tape: Fireproofing tape, flexible, conformable, intumescent to 0.3 inch(8 mm) thick, compatible with cable jacket. 3. Glass-Cloth Tape: Pressure-sensitive adhesive type, 1/2 inch(13 mm) wide. G. Fault Indicators 1. Indicators: Manual-reset fault indicator, arranged to clamp to cable sheath and provide a display after the cable has faulted. Instrument immune to heat, moisture, and corrosive conditions and recommended by manufacturer for installation conditions. Indicators have current-trip ratings and quantities as indicated. 2. Resetting Tool: Designed for use with fault indicators, with moisture-resistant storage/carrying case. H. Source Quality Control 1. Test and inspect cables according to NEMA WC 7 (ICEA S-66-524) and NEMA WC 8 (ICEA S-68-516)before shipping. 2. Test strand-filled cables for water-penetration resistance according to ICEA T-31-610, using a test pressure of 5 psig (35 kPa). Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-52 �w ' a. Compound-filled, cast-metal body,metal-clad cable terminator for metal-clad cable with external plastic jacket. b. Compound-filled, cast-metal body, metal-clad cable terminator for an metal-clad cable without external plastic jacket. C. Cold-shrink sheath seal kit with preformed sleeve openings sized for cable and insulated conductors. 40 d. Heat-shrink sheath seal kit with phase-and ground-conductor rejacketing tubes, cable-end sealing boot, and sealing plugs for unused ground-wire openings in boot. e. Cast-epoxy-resin sheath seal kit with wraparound mold and packaged,.2- part, epoxy-resin casting material. 2. Conductor Terminations: Comply with IEEE 48-1996, as indicated. Insulation class is equivalent to that of cable. Terminations for shielded cables include a shield ground strap. a. Class 1 Termination for Shielded Cable: Modular type, furnished as a �. kit, with stress-relief tube; multiple, molded-silicone rubber, insulator modules; shield ground strap; and compression type connector. b. Class 1 Termination for Shielded Cable: Heat-shrink type with heat- shrink inner stress control and outer nontracking tubes; multiple,molded, nontracking skirt modules; and compression type connector. C. Class 1 Termination for Shielded Cable: Modular type, furnished as a kit, with stress-relief shield terminator; multiple-wet-process, porcelain, ±+ insulator modules; shield ground strap; and compression-type connector. d. Class 1 Termination for Indoor Shielded Cable: Kit with stress-relief tube, nontracking insulator tube, shield ground strap, compression-type connector, and end seal. e. Class 2 Termination for Shielded Cable: Kit with stress-relief tube, nontracking insulator tube, shield ground strap and compression-type connector. Include silicone-rubber tape, cold-shrink rubber sleeve, or heat-shrink plastic-sleeve moisture seal for end of insulation whether or not supplied with kits. f. Class 3 Termination for Shielded Cable: Kit with stress cone and compression-type connector. 3. Termination for Nonshielded Cable: Kit with compression-type connector. Include silicone-rubber tape, cold-shrink rubber sleeve, or heat-shrink plastic- '"' sleeve moisture seal for end of insulation whether or not supplied with kits. E. Separable Insulated Connectors 1. Separable Insulated Connectors: Modular system complying with IEEE 386. Disconnecting, single-pole, cable terminations and matching, stationary, plug- in, dead-front terminals designed for cable voltage and for sealing against moisture. 2. Terminations at Distribution Points: Modular type, consisting of terminators installed on cables and modular, dead-front, terminal junctions for interconnecting cables. 3. Load-Break Cable Terminators: Elbow-type units with 200A load make/break and continuous current rating; coordinated with insulation diameter, conductor size, and material of cable being terminated. Include test point on terminator body that is capacitance coupled. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-51 OW B. Cables Type MV90 Conductor Copper Conductor Stranding Compact Conductor Stranding Class B Strand Filling Conductor interstices are filled with impermeable compound �* Insulation Ethylene propylene rubber complying with NEMA WC 8 (ICEA S-68-516) Insulation Ethylene propylene rubber complying with AEIC CS 6 with an insulation shield and metallic shielding tape and an overall jacket Voltage Rating 5 kv Insulation Thickness 133% insulation level Shielding Solid copper wires,helically applied over semiconducting insulation permashield Circuit Identification Color-coded tape(black,red,blue)under the metallic shielding Insulation System Permashield Insulation Shield 5 mil semi-conducting tape Metallic Shield 5 mil copper tape, 20%overlap Armor Interlocked galvanized steel applied over cable (vertical applications only) Jacket Cross-linked polyethylene (horizontal applications only) Jacket Ethylene propylene rubber ••� (horizontal applications only) C. Splice Kits 1. Connectors: IEEE 404, UL Listed 90°C., 35 kv, BIL 150 kv, two-hole copper, long barrel with belled entry for copper cable, compression type, as recommended by cable manufacturer for the application. 2. Splicing Products: As recommended in writing by splicing kit manufacturer for specific sizes, ratings, and configurations of cable conductors and splices specified. Include all components required for complete splice, with detailed instructions. O a. Taped splice kit. b. Combination tape and cold-shrink rubber sleeve kit with rejacketing by cast-epoxy-resin encasement or other waterproof, abrasion-resistant material. C. Heat-shrink splicing kit of uniform, cross-section, polymeric construction with outer heat-shrink jacket. .. d. Premolded, cold-shrink rubber, in-line splicing kit. e. Premolded EPDM splicing body kit with cable joint sealed by I nterference fit of mating parts and cable. D. Solid Terminations 1. Multiconductor Cable Sheath Seals: Type recommended by seal manufacturer for type of cable and installation conditions, including orientation. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-50 0► 2.14 WIRE ANM CABLE A. Wire and cable shall be copper and shall have current carrying capacity not less than indicated and shall conform to UL standards. Conductor sizes shall be as indicated on the drawings and shall not be less than No. 12 AWG for power and lighting work unless otherwise indicated or specified. All No. 8 B&S gauge wire and larger shall be stranded unless otherwise noted on drawings. Voltage rating of conductors which operate at 600 volts and below shall be 600 volts. Type THWN insulation (horizontal runs only) and X IHN insulation (all vertical risers over 30 feet in length) shall be used for all sizes of wire, unless otherwise noted. Recessed lighting fixtures in hung ceilings shall be supplied with Type AF insulated wire in flexible metal conduit, in lengths not exceeding 6 feet, from adjacent junction box. B. All wire and cable shall be factory color coded as follows: 120/208 volts-black, red, blue and white; white conductors shall serve as neutral conductors. The use of insulating electrical tape for color coding black insulated feeders only, not branch circuits, will be permitted. Color taping shall be half-lapped at each terminationand junction,pull and cable support box for the entire visible length of cable. C. Branch circuits shall in all cases contain the necessary number of wires to afford the switch control indicated or required. All multiwire branch circuit wiring shall be in conformance with local Code requirements. fa D. Unless specifically approved, no wires shall be pulled in until the conduit system is completed. No grease or oil shall be used to facilitate the pulling in of wires; 0 acceptable pulling compound shall be used. All wires shall be continuous between outlet and outlet, or from panelboard to the first outlet. Joints that become necessary in circuit work at the outlets shall be made with approved pressure connectors. All joints shall be covered with an insulation equal to that on the conductors. Pressure connectors, Ideal Wingnuts, Scotch-lock, Buchanan, or Thomas & Betts, may be used in lieu of solder and tape. E. Wiring in areas used as air conditioning plenum chambers (i.e., hung ceilings, etc.) shall comply with the latest provisions of the National Electrical Code. 2.15 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cables Kente Co. (The); Hubbell Inc. Okonite Co. (The) Pirelli Cable Corp.; Power Cable Division Rome Cable Corp. 2. Cable Splicing Terminating Products and Accessories Mac Products, Inc. MP Husky Corp. Raychem Corp.; Energy Division Thomas& Betts Corp. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division Air Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-49 ON an C. In general, switches shall be for single pole, 20 ampere, 120 volt, Pass & Seymour �. No. 20AC1, color as selected by Architect, unless indicated otherwise. Three-way switches shall be 20 ampere, 120 volt, Pass & Seymour 20AC3, Hubbell 1183 or AH&H 1993. D. Check drawings for the door swings so that all switches are located on the lock side of the opening unless specifically noted otherwise, as in Paragraph B. above. In general, switches shall be installed 42 inches AFF to centerline. 2.11 PLATES A. Device plates shall be of material and color as selected by Architect, except where weatherproofing is required. B. Install Crouse Hinds Type DS switch operating mechanisms for weatherproof switches with adapter, if required,or as approved. 2.12 TAPS AND SPLICES A. All copper cable lug connections to copper bus bar mains and branches made in main service switchboards, substations, panelboards, etc., shall use copper solderless connectors having either 2-bolt cast copper pressure plate clamp or indent compression connectors. All lugs accommodating cables of 200 ampere ampacity and , larger shall be of the two hole type. Where compression connectors are used, they shall be installed using compression tooling manufactured by the lug manufacturer. B. Copper cable branch taps from copper cable main lines under 600 volts shall be made in junction, panelboard or pull boxes, with approved cast copper alloy solderless connectors in a hi-impact phenolic insulating cover having at least two spring clip fasteners. Connectors shall be O. Z. Type "PT" parallel tap with "PTC" cover, Type "PM" parallel looped tap with "PMC" cover and Type "T" cable tap with Type "TC" cover. C. Splices (600 volts and below) of copper conductors shall be made in junction or pull boxes with an approved O. Z. Type "TW" or "XW" cast copper alloy solderless connector in a hi-impact phenolic insulating cover,Type "TWC" or "XWC". D. All splices shall be insulated with T&B heat shrink insulation tubing, HS Series,using T&B heat gun. E. Terminal lugs with bolting pads shall be tinned-plated. 2.13 RECEPTACLES A. Receptacles shall be of ampere and voltage ratings and type as indicated on drawings. All receptacles in finished areas shall be mounted as indicated by architectural plans and specifications. In unfinished mechanical areas, receptacles shall be mounted 18 inches AFF to centerline, vertically. Special mounting heights are noted on drawings. All receptacles shall be side and back wired type, color as selected by the Architect. The following listing and catalogue numbers are for type and grade only: I. Duplex, 3 pole, 2 wire grounded, 20 ampere, 125 volt, Pass & Seymour No. 5352, Hubbell No. 5352, or AH&H No. 5735. w� Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-48 $0 2.7 INSULATING BUSHINGS A. Insulating bushings or insulating throats shall be installed on all fittings. B. All rigid conduit 1-1/4 inch and larger terminating in cabinets, panel boxes,pull boxes and similar boxes shall have insulating bushings, Type "B" or Type "BL" for grounding bushings, as manufactured by O.Z. Electric Mfg. Co. C. All EMT fittings, light-tight flexible conduit fittings, flexible metal conduit fittings, chase nipples and metal-clad cable fittings shall have insulating throats. VW 2.8 CABINETS A. All cabinets, pull boxes, cable support boxes, junction boxes, etc., shall be made of sheet steel of Code thickness. „® B. Unless otherwise specified, all covers, trims and doors on such boxes and all exposed boxes, including doors and trims, shall be bonderized or treated in some equivalent manner to resist rusting and shall be painted with two coats of protective primer paint gray in color. All boxes receiving aluminum conduits shall be galvanized. 2.9 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES on A. Junction or pull boxes shall be provided where indicated, and wherever else such a box may be deemed necessary,providing location is approved, to facilitate the pulling of wires and cables. All such boxes must be made accessible and built of heavy gauge so steel, unless otherwise specified, and shall be built only from approved detail working drawings. The covers of boxes shall be designed for quick removal. When the system is finished the boxes shall contain no openings, except that into which the conduit passes. Generally,junction boxes and pull boxes shall be installed every 100 feet in a conduit run and shall not be exposed in finished spaces and,where necessary to do so, reroute these conduit or make other arrangements to meet the approval of the Owner. Pull boxes or junction boxes occurring in finished areas shall have the removable cover plates flush with finished ceiling. All cables within pull boxes shall be properly tagged for identification, using one (1) inch diameter brass tags. Suitable supports shall be provided in all pull boxes to support feeders passing through the boxes so that the conductors will not remain unsupported for a distance greater than required by Code. 2.10 LOCAL SWITCHES A. Flush quiet type tumbler switches shall be installed at each switch outlet. In all cases where two or more are shown together, they shall be grouped behind a common plate with barriers installed in back box to isolate adjacent switches connected to different phases. on B. Switches indicated on plans for various rooms shall be installed directly adjacent to the entrance door or on the wall directly past the full opened position of the door or as detailed. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-47 go I. The wiring provided between the panelboard and the first outlet box of the �++ homerun. 2. All wiring in Mechanical Equipment Rooms. 3. Where exposed. 4. In wet areas. 5. Where buried. 6. Where prohibited by Code. AC armored cable shall be used for receptacle branch circuits. All exceptions shall be provided in an approved conduit system as herembefore described. Armored cable shall be provided with color coded conductors, including a full size insulated green ground conductor, and shall meet all grounding criteria established within these Specifications for grounding of wiring systems. All AC armored cable shall be properly fastened and supported at intervals as required by Code. 2.6 OUTLET BOXES A. All outlet boxes for concealed work shall be Code gauge hot dipped galvanized stamped steel. All wall boxes on exposed work shall be aluminum or cadmium plated cast iron with threaded openings. B. Generally, boxes shall be 4 inches square or octagonal by 1-1/2 inches deep. A deep box shall be used in hung ceilings. C. All concealed ceiling fixture outlet boxes shall be 3 inches deep with cover and fixture stud. Cover shall be placed on box when it is secured in position. 1). Wall bracket outlets shall be 4 inches square by 1-1/2 inches deep with cover, having 2-3/4 inch round opening and except for one light receptacle shall be furnished with a fixture stud. E. Outlet boxes, except those installed within metal partitions for insertion of receptacles and switches, shall be 4 inches square by 1-1/2 inches deep with regular deep switch covers. Provide small boxes(Gem) as required for devices in shallow partitions. F. Empty outlet boxes, used for junction or extension purposes shall be 4-11/16 inches square, 2-1/2 inches deep, and provided with blank covers. G. Outlet boxes shall be firmly anchored in place and where required provided with fixture supports. Provide special supports for recessed fixtures, etc.; suitable expansion screws shall be used for securing boxes to solid masonry and approved type toggles for securing to hollow masonry units. Boxes in hung plaster ceilings shall be provided with two hanger bars and two hanger clips for each bar. H. Where flush floor boxes are required, provide Hubbell No. B-2529 with carpet flange, where required, and duplex receptacle, using S-3925 flap for power and grommeted opening for telephone. I. See symbol list on drawings for other required outlets. *�+ Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-46 we E. Conduit terminals at boxes and cabinet shall be rigidly secured with locknuts and bushings as required by governing Codes. F. Conduit shall be securely fastened in place in accordance with Code requirements, and hangers, supports or fastenings shall be provided at each elbow at the end of each straight run terminated at a box or cabinet. Where riser conduit pierce floor slabs, XX they shall rest on each floor with approved riser clamps. Horizontal conduit runs may be supported by beam clamps, special brackets or adjustable trapeze hangers. Single branch circuit conduit in hung ceiling shall be adequately supported by means of IN clamps, pipe straps or heavy iron tie wire to the black iron structural members supporting the ceilings. If black iron is not used, conduit system shall be independently supported from the slab, beams or other structural members. The 4" combined strength of the supporting equipment(channel steel,rods, etc.) and size and type of anchors shall be based on the combined weights of conduit, hanger and cables. All hangers and rods shall be painted with one coat of prime paint. In no case shall any conduit be supported from any mechanical ductwork or piping. gw G. Entire conduit and wiring system shall be thoroughly grounded in an approved manner. Ground wires shall be suitably protected from mechanical injury. H. Provide conduit expansion fittings together with bonding jumper where required as follows: 1. A conduit expansion fitting shall be installed in each conduit run wherever it crosses an expansion joint in the structure to which it is attached. 2. A conduit expansion fitting shall be installed in each conduit run wherever it w crosses an expansion joint in the concrete structure. The expansion fitting shall be installed on one side of the joint with its sliding sleeve end flush with the joint and with a length of bonding jumper in the expansion joint equal to at least three times nominal width of joint. 3. Where conduits are buried in concrete, they shall cross the building expansion joints at right angles, and the ion fittings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Free ends of conduits shall be provided with insulated bushings. I. Hot dipped galvanized steel conduit shall be used, in lieu of EMT, where subjected to ww any water or moisture conditions, and where buried in poured slabs, walls or columns. J. The EMT shall be of milled steel tubing. The interior of the tubing shall be coated with a suitable paint or lacquer. The exterior of the tubing shall have a zinc coating applied by the electro-galvanized process and shall be further protected by immersing in a chromic acid solution after galvanizing so as to form a zinc chromate surface. EMT elbows shall conform to same specification as above. EMT shall not be installed where subject to any water or moisture conditions. Compression type fittings shall be used for all EMT connections. K. Provide and install drag lines for cable pulling in all empty conduit installed. L. AC armored cable shall be used for lighting and receptacle branch circuits where concealed above accessible ceiling or in partitions, exclusive of: +�w Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-45 M. Series ratings in conformance with UL listings will be acceptable as meeting the interrupting rating requirements specified for the branch circuit breakers only where the rating is based on the series connection of a single panel main protective device and its first immediate downstream branch circuit device. N. All panelboards shall be of same manufacturer. 2.5 CONDUIT A. All wires shall be run in EMT conduit with compression fittings, unless otherwise noted or specified hereinafter. Each length of conduit shall bear the maker's trademark or stamp. The plans indicate the general location of outlet boxes and circuiting. The conduit runs for these circuits may be modified at the time of installation to adapt same to building construction, but in no case shall a circuit be „■, doubled up or modified. No smaller than 3/4 inch conduit shall be used for concealed or buried lighting or power wiring,unless indicated otherwise. For all sizes of conduit larger than 1-1/2 inch, use standard elbows for all bends 45 degrees and larger; in .. smaller sizes or those conduits requiring less than a 45 degree bend, field bends will be permitted instead of using manufactured elbows but care must be taken not to damage the conduit or alter the cross-section or its area. Specification conformity of field bends shall be demonstrated if so requested by passing mandrel of size equivalent to inner diameter of conduit through bend. The radius of the inner curve of any bend shall not be less than that permitted by the Code. B. In installing the conduit particular care must be taken in cutting it to the proper length so that the ends will fit exactly into the outlet boxes and cabinet. Where conduits terminate in cabinets they shall be neatly arranged and all ends shall be at the same level. The ends of all conduit shall be carefully plugged with a bushette so as to avoid them filling with plaster, dust, etc.; the ends of the conduit at motors, motor starting boxes and similar apparatus and devices shall be furnished with suitable conduit fittings as required in each case. C. All exposed conduit must be securely fastened in place by means of approved supports and fastenings and shall be installed with threaded fittings of types adaptable +� for the particular location. Where conduits are to be fastened to masonry walls, floors or partitions, use malleable pipe clips with screws and suitable expansion sleeves. Arrangement and method of fastening all conduit shall be subject to direction and approval. The conduit for all lighting and circuit work shall be run concealed except where allowed by symbols on drawings to be run exposed. Power circuits and feeders, unless otherwise specified or specifically approved in some particular case, shall be installed in such a manner as to be exposed on machines or on ceilings, walls or partitions of the building as directed. Exposed branch circuit conduit shall run at right angles, using conduit fittings for taps and direction changes. D. The ends of all conduit shall be carefully reamed before installation and after the application of the die. Where it becomes necessary to cut a length of conduit it shall be done with a hacksaw or especially approved cutter and care shall be taken to secure °` a square end on all conduit. Before installing conduit for motor control groups or centers and motors, check coordinated location of motor connections and arrange conduit accordingly. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-44 E. Cabinets shall be of sufficient size to insure adequate gutter space to accommodate associated cables with required minimum bending radius. In general, a gutter space of at least six inches on all sides around lighting and utility panels and eight inches for power panelboards shall be required. Conduit entry points shall be coordinated so that additional gutter space is provided for proper cable parallel taps where required and termination at mains or lugs to avoid short radius bends of cable. F. Boxes shall be galvanized sheet steel with prime and finish coat of gray enamel on doors and trim. Ago G. Doors and trim shall each be in one piece so designed that doors will close without a rabbet. Doors shall be fastened to cabinet with flush butt concealed hinges. Trims shall be fastened to cabinet by means of captive screws or approved adjusting clamps and flush butt concealed hinge. Multi-section panels shall be provided with separate door and trim components for each section. H. Panelboards shall be identified by screw-fastened engraved nameplates indicating panelboard designation and voltage. I. A typewritten directory 5 inches x 8 inches with metal frame and lexan face shall be provided on the inside of the door of each cabinet, indicating the service controlled by each circuit. Each circuit shall clearly indicate the space it controls and the wattage it serves. Allow 180 watts for each duplex receptacle without special designation. Alternate phases shall be used in consecutive circuit numbering. Neutral bus capacity on 120/208 volt utility panels shall be sufficient to permit termination of a separate neutral conductor for each panel pole for panels as indicated in the drawings. J. All circuit breakers rated 225 amperes and less shall be marked as required by UL as suitable for termination of conductors sizes No. 14 through No. 1 AWG whose ampacities are based on 75°C. ratings. Where such circuit breakers are installed in equipment other than an individual device enclosure, the equipment in which the circuit breaker is installed shall also be marked as required by UL for 75°C. conductor terminations. This requirement shall also apply to all other relevant sections of these specifications, such as switchboards, disconnect means, etc. All circuit breakers shall be fully rated for the available short circuit current. K. Power, lighting and utility panels for 208/120 volts shall be bolt-on circuit breaker type unless otherwise noted. Single pole branches shall be bolted-on type of at least 22,000 amperes rms symmetrical interrupting capacity. Multiple pole breakers shall be common trip, of the capacity and number of poles as indicated in schedule. Panelboards shall be equipped with solid neutral bar and separate isolated ground bus and contain the number of poles, overcurrent devices and bused spaces as specified in schedule. L. Where several panels are fed by one feeder, solid tap connections shall be made in the gutters as required with tapped connectors. Gutter space shall be increased as required to accommodate feeder taps. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-43 H. A screw-secured type engraved phenolic plate, with white letters 1/4 inch high on black background, shall be provided for each service switch as well as for the entire switchboard assembly. I. Power quality meter (PQM) readouts shall be provided for the entire switchgear assembly. These systems will obtain all of the circuit breaker information via a network connection such that each switchgear will be configured with one PQM meter ,. at the input and the output. These PQM devices will obtain all of the information available at the individual circuit breakers, including the functions listed in the circuit breaker section. *�+ J. The panel mounted power quality meter shall be a digital,true RMS reading meter per ANSI C39.1, 1% accuracy, flush mounted, and shall include the following monitoring functions: 1. Input voltage. 2. Input current(phase and neutral). 3. Input kilowatts/kilovolt-amperes. 4. Output current on each phase of the circuit breakers. 5. Power factor. 6. Frequency. ` 7. VAR and watt demand. 8. Power quality(logging and recording). 9. Harmonics analyses. 10. Waveform recording and monitoring. K. Switchboard assemblies shall be rustproofed prior to painting, finished with a light gray paint, ANSI 61, over all steel surfaces on both the interior and external faces. 2.4 PANELBOARDS A. Panelboards to be provided under this Contract shall be categorized as follows: 1. 120/208 volt distribution and power panels. 2. 120/208 volt lighting and 120/208 volt utility panels. B. All panelboards shall be of the enclosed type, flush or surface mounted,as required, in steel cabinets -- code gauge, with steel trim, concealed hinges, doors and flush type locks, all keyed alike. Panelboards shall be built in accordance with ANSI and NEMA standards, and shall be listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory such as UL. C. All buses, including neutral, shall be electrical grade hard-drawn copper or aluminum and sized in conformance with NEMA standards with minimum rating of 100 amperes. Buses shall be arranged for sequence phasing and loads shall be balanced as equally as possible amongst the three phases. Neutral buses on all 120/208 volt panels shall be double the normal ratings. D. Panelboards shall be equipped with molded case circuit breakers, of voltage required, and of size and number of poles indicated in schedule and fully rated for the available short circuit current. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-42 M. Low Voltage Distribution Section 1. The distribution section shall be designed, built, and tested in accordance with the applicable NEC, NEMA, ANSI, NOM, CSA and IEEE Standards for metal enclosed switchboards and circuit breakers. Applicable standards include, but are not limited to: a. Massachusetts Building Code. b. ANSI C37.20, C37.51. C. UL 891. 2.3 MAIN SERVICE SWITCHBOARD A. Furnish and install metal-enclosed main service switchboard assembly consisting of two (2) molded case group-mounted circuit breaker sections, and a metering current transformer and main circuit breaker section. Assembly shall be free-standing, for complete front access, self-supporting metal cubicles and manufactured similar to distribution switchboards. Provide isolation barriers and approved nonhygroscopic firestops at main buses entering and leaving the current transformer section to meet the requirement of NEC and local Codes. Circuit breakers shall be 120/208 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire with ampere ratings as indicated on drawing schedules. All circuit breakers shall have ground fault protection. B. Bolted or welded frames and insulating blocks shall be provided to support and brace e• all main buses for the stresses due to the maximum available short circuit current from the electrical system, but not less than 65,000 amperes rms symmetrical. C. All main horizontal buses and bus connections between main bus and switching devices shall consist of copper of sufficient size to limit temperature rise to 65°C. over an average air temperature outside the enclosure of 40°C.,but not less than one square inch per 1000 amperes. All bus connections shall be silver or tin plated, after fabrication, and bolted and taped. Provide Belleville washers on all bolted joints, torqued to manufacturer's requirements. D. A full capacity neutral bus, fully insulated from frame, shall be provided with suitable disconnect link. Provide separate ground bus in each service switch and distribution switchboard assembly. See "Electrical Grounding System" for neutral ground bus low connections. E. A continuous 1/4 in. x 4 in. copper ground bus, readily accessible upon opening the rear doors, shall be run through and connected to all component parts of the service switch assembly structure. Provide for the connection of a 500 MCM copper equipment ground conductor. F. All buses shall be assembled so as to maintain the minimum UL electrical clearances without the use of insulating material. G. The switchboard assemblies shall be mounted on 4 inch high concrete housekeeping pads. Provide all required shims, etc., to achieve a level installation. 1 Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-41 winding. Transformers shall have a sound rating not to exceed 64 dB and be complete with all standard NEMA accessories and shall be equipped with suitable lightning arresters. F. Transformers shall be of the explosion resistant, fire resistant, liquid insulated, silicone construction, cooled by the natural circulation of air through the windings. The transformer shall be constructed in accordance with ANSI C57.12.41-1994 and IEE Standard C57-12.00-1993. G. Transformer shall be provided with provision for a fan cooling system for w, automatically increasing the kva rating to 133 percent. The system shall accommodate all necessary components and wiring, fans, including a temperature indicator and control device. Contacts for alarm, as well as for starting and stopping fans, shall be accommodated. H. Transformer enclosures shall be formed of 13 gauge sheet steel construction. I. Paint finish shall be applied over a properly prepared surface. Color shall be light gray ANSI No. 61. J. Transformer shall include a diagram instruction plate, provisions for lifting and jacking, removable case panel for access to high voltage taps, two (2) ground terminals with continuous copper ground bus(internal). K. The transformer enclosure shall meet or exceed the requirements of a 12 psi seal tank construction. L. The core and coil assembly of the transformer shall be fitted with special vibration isolators to prevent the transmission of objectionable airborne and structureborne noise to adjacent occupied spaces and to the floors above and below where the substations will be located. 1. Vibration isolators shall be bare stable spring type, Mason Industries Type SL or equal, and shall be located between the core and coil assembly and the substation structure. Spring isolators shall incorporate a neoprene acoustical pad leveling device and shall provide a minimum static deflection of one inch. 2. All cable and bus connections to the primary and secondaries of the .. transformers shall be designed to compensate for the resulting isolation of the core and coil assemblies from the adjacent structures. 3. The transformer isolation system shall be such that the transmitted structureborne noise to the Tenant spaces above and below the transformers shall not exceed NC-35. 4. Subcontractor shall advise the manufacturer that the standard internal vibration .� isolators normally furnished with the transformer are not acceptable for this purpose. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-40 ON 2.2 UNIT SUBSTATIONS,2.4 KV-208Y/120 VOLT,3 PHASE,4 WIRE A. Unit substations shall be single-ended,consisting of a free-standing outdoor rated high voltage fused load break switch, transformer, and secondary voltage distribution switchgear. B. Medium Voltage Service Feeders: Receive, store, install, connect and terminate, in accordance with the Contract Documents and manufacturers' approved shop drawings, all 5 kv service feeders between the primary switchgear, medium voltage switches (2) and transformer (750 kva). The work shall include the installation.of conductors in duct bank, conduit and/or cable tray as provided under this and other Sections, including splicing and termination of the conductors as required. All cable shall be spliced and terminated by certified splices in strict accordance with cable manufacturer's instructions. The Contractor shall notify the Owner where any splices are being made, so that he may monitor the work. The Contractor shall be advised by the cable manufacturer prior to commencing any splicing work. Cable bending limitations shall not be exceeded at any time. Field measure to verify all lengths of conductor and report same to Owner for proper manufacture of cable lengths. Provide proper phasing and mark the same for all 5 kv feeders. Phasing shall be 1-2-3 (A, B, C) left-to-right as viewed from the front of the switchgear. Phasing shall be accomplished initially using the ringing method. Final phasing shall be accomplished with equipment energized using phasing sticks. Include all labor and materials necessary for the field testing of the cable as hereinafter specified. C. 5 kv Medium Voltage (MV) Wiring Methods: The quantity and capacity of the new MV feeders shall be as necessary to serve the facility. Cabling shall be shielded ethylene propylene rubber (EPR) insulated triplex cable rated for the primary distribution voltage level. These cables shall be installed in raceways (four in. conduit). Cables shall be supported from ladder rack for horizontal runs in the rated underground vaults. Cabling shall be in accordance with UL Standard 1072. D. Medium Voltage Fused Air Interrupter Switches: The switchgear lineup shall consist of three (3) compartments with two (2) compartments, each to contain a 5 kv, 600 amp load break fused switch, the third compartment to contain a transition section or termination compartment for connection to transformer. Fuses shall be provided to ± ' protect the primary of the new 750 kva 2.4 kv delta to 120/208V wye unit substation at 133% operation (S&C No. 250E fuse or equivalent). Fuses shall provide visual indication when blown. Switch mechanism shall be gang operated, 3 pole, 600 amperes continuous rating. Fuses shall have the ability to interrupt 500 Mva short circuit and have a BIL rating of 60 kv. Switch shall be contained within a metal-clad enclosure close-coupled or cabled (as shown on drawing) to transformer. Switch mechanism shall be operated by means of a removable front lever with switch position indicator. Windows shall be provided to permit viewing the switch mechanism. E. Outdoor Medium Voltage Step-Down Transformer: The distribution shall have one (1) 750 kva outdoor rated transformer which shall be liquid filled(silicone), 2,400 volt delta primary to 208Y/120 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire secondary, 60 hertz, isolated bushed neutral. Transformers shall have four(4) 2-1/2% full capacity taps, two(2)above and two (2)below normal primary voltage. Transformers shall be rated 55°C. rise above a 40°C. ambient. Basic impulse level shall be minimum 60 kv for high voltage Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-39 Im Conduit Bodies and Fittings �. Appleton Electric Crouse-Hinds Gedney Electric Mfg. Co. Thomas& Betts Steel City Solderless Connectors and Lugs Burndy Thomas and Betts Dossert O.Z. Electric Mfg. Co. Wire and Cable wr Essex Anaconda Cerro de Pasco General Cable General Electric Kerite Company Phelps Dodge Rome Cable Triangle Conduit& Wire Collyer Pirelli Hatfield Wire Wiring Devices Hubbell w. Leviton Pass& Seymour General Electric Circuit Breakers Square "D" Lighting Fixtures As specified Safety Switches Square "D" Smith Campus Center Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.l 1.12 Electrical 16100-38 OR Switchboards Square"D" aw Panelboards Square"D" Transformers Square"D" Sorgel General Electric Cutler-Hammer Siemens Hevi-Duty Cable Supports O. Z. Electric Mfg. Co. Conduit (Aluminum) VAW CANALCO NJ Aluminum Liquidtight Conduit Anaconda Electri-Flex International Metal Hose Liqua-Tite Conduit (Steel) 40 ETPBerger Steel Duct Republic Steel Triangle Allied Tube & Conduit Co. Wheatland Insulating Bushings O. Z./Gedney Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-37 Lugs Only With Main *�* Size 277/480V Breaker 277/480V 6 CKTS 8 CKTS 12 CKTS ** 18 CKTS 24 CKTS 30 CKTS �• 36 CKTS 42 CKTS Thru Feed Lugs 9. Disconnect Switches: State unit price for furnishing and installing disconnect switches with current limiting fuses as specified in the Base Specifications, ..� completely connected up. All switches shall be 3 pole. 30 ampere,250 volt $ ea. 60 ampere,250 volt $ ea. 100 ampere, 250 volt $ ea. ~' 30 ampere, 600 volt $ ea. 60 ampere, 600 volt $ ea. 100 ampere, 600 volt $ ea. 10. Same as preceding paragraph,but unfused: 30 ampere, 250 volt $ ea. 60 ampere, 250 volt $ ea. �* 100 ampere, 250 volt $ ea. 30 ampere, 600 volt $ ea. 60 ampere, 600 volt $ ea. 100 ampere, 600 volt $ ea. 11. Additional Miscellaneous Items a. Connection to fractional horsepower motors. Price includes junction box, flexible conduit, required wire between motor and junction box and all connections for single phase motors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. The following list of materials and manufacturers shall constitute an approved list of materials: Medium Voltage Switchgear S&C .r Square "D" Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-36 6. Wireways 2-1/2 inch x 2-1/2 inch $ L.F. 4 inch x 4 inch $ L.F. 6 inch x 6 inch $ L.F. 8 inch x 8 inch $ L.F. 7. THHN and THWN—Copper Wire(Separate Price for Each) No. 14 $ L.F. No. 12 $ L.F. No. 10 $ L.F. No. 8 $ L.F. No. 6 $ L.F. No.4 $ L.F. No. 2 $ L.F. No. 1 $ L.F. No. 1/0 $ L.F. No. 2/0 $ L.F. No. 3/0 $ L.F. No.4/0 $ L.F. No. 250 MCM $ L.F. No. 300 MCM $ L.F. No. 350 MCM $ L.F. No.400 MCM $ L.F. No. 500 MCM $ L.F. No. 750 MCM $ L.F. 8. Lighting and Utility Panels: Provide in accordance with Specifications. State complete installation price for each unit shown below, including mounting required, all supports, etc., and all connections. Branches shall be 20 ampere trip, single pole, 277 volt,and 20 ampere trip, single pole, 120 volt. M Lugs Only With Main Size 208/120V Breaker 208/120V 6 CKTS 8 CKTS 12 CKTS 18 CKTS 24 CKTS 30 CKTS 36 CKTS 42 CKTS Thru Feed Lugs Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-35 no 1.31 RECORD DRAWINGS A. During construction, keep an accurate record of all deviations between the work as shown on drawings and that which is actually installed. This record set of prints shall be kept at job site for inspection by the Owner and the Engineer. B. Upon completion of the installation, obtain from the Engineer a CAD disk of all drawings. Enter thereon a complete record of all revisions of the original drawings as actually installed. The cost of disks and for making the required changes shall be borne by the Electrical Contractor. Submit one (1) set of black and white plots of the revised drawings to the Engineer for review. After review by the Engineer, make the *" necessary changes (if any) and then deliver a final disk and one (1) set of black and white plots to both the Engineer and the Owner. 1.32 UNIT PRICES A. Give unit price for each of the following scheduled items to be furnished, installed and connected up complete, in full accordance with the Specifications as hereinbefore written. B. The unit prices shall include all hangers, inserts, couplings, drafting, engineering, testing, tools, supervision, labor, coordination, materials, equipment, and all other necessary items to provide the electrical installation unless noted otherwise. C. Unit prices for wiring devices shall include, in addition to device, cover plates, conduit, wires and connections,unless otherwise noted. D. The Contractor shall submit ADD and DEDUCT unit prices as follows: Add or Deduct 1. Completely wired, duplex wall mounted convenience receptacles, feed overage quantity of 6 per circuit, with a maximum of 8. $ ea. 2. Completely wired, 30 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounded, single wall mounted receptacle, with a separate branch circuit for each. $ ea. 3. Completely wired, 20A, 120 volt single pole, lighting switch. $ ea. 4. Completely wired. wall mounted 120V lighting dimmer control (separate price for each type specified) $ ea. 5. E.M.T. Conduit 3/4 inch $ L.F. AM 1 inch $ L.F. 1-1/4 inch $ L.F. 1-1/2 inch $ L.F. 2 inch $ L.F. "` 2-1/2 inch $ L.F. 3 inch $ L.F. 3-1/2 inch $ L.F. •" 4 inch $ L.F. an Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-34 am 1.27 CLEANING A. Remove from entire installation of work all protecting materials, dirt, dust, smears, stains,paint spots, and the like,and leave in a clean condition. 1.28 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 40 A. Three (3) sets of operating and maintenance instruction manuals and listing of all spare parts, shall be furnished to Owner. B. Furnish a list of manufacturers (with names of local representatives) in order to expedite ordering of replacement parts. Abe C. This Contractor shall provide operating and maintenance instruction for not more than four building operators with personal on-the-job instruction by an engineer representing the Contractor for 20 hours. This instruction shall be scheduled at time(s) convenient to the Owner's personnel. Instruction shall cover all equipment and systems provided by this Contractor. The number of hours is a minimum requirement. Where additional hours are specified in other paragraphs of this Specification, those hours shall be additive to the minimum above. Instruction shall be comprised of both classroom type and actual hands-on operating experience. Number of hours in each category to be arranged with the Owner directly. 1.29 TOOLS A. All special tools needed for proper operation, adjustment and maintenance of equipment shall be delivered to Owner's representative. 1.30 SLEEVES low A. Provide sleeves for all conduits passing through floors, walls and concrete,or concrete fireproofed beams. 1. Sleeves in concrete beams, through concrete walls, and exposed conduits penetrating floors: Schedule 40 steel pipe. 2. Sleeves within furred out enclosures in floors, through partitions, steel beams and walls 18 gauge galvanized sheet metal. 3. Provide sleeves in foundation walls and in concrete pits with anchor flanges. B. Provide sleeves with an i.d. at least 1/2 inch greater than outside of conduit served. t 1. Finish sleeves flush with underside of slab and 1 inch above finished floor wherever floor is waterproofed. 2. Sea] space between the conduits and sleeves in exterior walls, foundation walls and pits, with approved "Link-Seal" (Thunderline Corporation) type seal, or as approved. Where conduits penetrates walls (other than foundation walls), partitions, floor slabs, etc., space between conduits and sleeve shall be packed with mineral wool. low Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-33 B. Submit samples of the following, if requested: Switches Receptacles and plugs Receptacle plates Wire and cable Conduit and conduit fittings Switchplates �* Outlet boxes Cable supports Cable identification tags 1.23 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. In general, cutting and patching will be done under other Sections of the .. Specifications. B. Furnish to the Construction Manager necessary information so that openings for this work can be built into the floors and walls in time. Such cooperation is required to keep cutting of walls and floors to a minimum. 1.24 RUBBISH REMOVAL A. At conclusion of each day's work, clean up and stockpile on site, at location designated by the Construction Manager, all rubbish, debris and trash, which may have accumulated during the day as a result of work of this Contractor and of his presence on the job. Construction Manager will then remove stockpiled rubbish. B. Sidewalks and streets adjoining the property shall be kept broom clean and free of debris, rubbish, trash and obstructions of any kind caused by work of this Contractor, which will affect the condition and safety of streets,walks, utilities and property. w 1.25 PROTECTIVE PAINTING A. Provide protective painting as herein specified. Finished painting will be done by another Trade. B. Deliver all equipment with prime coat or prime and finish coat as specified. Clean up **� all equipment and leave in condition for finish painting before acceptance. 1.26 IDENTIFICATION OF SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT ,. A. All major components of the distribution system, such as switchboards, transformers, panelboards, etc., must have nameplates with equipment identification,voltage and phase ratings, and source of feed or circuit utilization. Panelboards shall have typed �. directories and identifying nameplate. B. All starters, disconnect switches and controls shall have nameplates identifying the equipment served. Nameplates shall be laminated phenolic, with white letters on a black field secured to the equipment with sheet metal screws. Self-adhesive nameplates will not be accepted. C. Devices protected by personnel ground fault interrupters shall be suitably identified. Receptacles not otherwise identified by the manufacturer shall have cover plates with �. the words "PROTECTED BY GFI - TEST BEFORE USING" engraved thereon. 4W Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-32 .w procedures, including clearance requirements for maintenance work,and conformance to the specified codes and code ratings. Note that in addition to these requirements, other specific submittal data, and forms of data submission, are required by the Contract Documents for particular items of equipment and material. K. Shop drawings for Equipment Rooms, and for piping, conduit and similar distribution services shall show by dimension the exact size and location of each element of the system in both the horizontal and vertical plane, as well as relationship to the building structure, architectural construction, equipment, and the work of other Trades. Pads, foundations, anchorages, supports and attachments to the building structure where required for the installation of the work shall be shown in layout and detail with sizes, dimensions,materials and methods of construction noted. L. Samples shall be identical in all respects to the material which is to be installed or applied in the execution of the work, and shall be of sufficient size or quantity to permit proper evaluation and review. Manufacturer's descriptive labels and printed application instructions which are normally attached to the material or its packaging shall be furnished with the sample. Samples shall be submitted for review when requested by the Architect and/or Engineer. M. Within three weeks after award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit for the Architect's and/or Engineer's review, a list of the manufacturers and Subcontractors whose products and services he proposes to use for the work. Proposed substitutions for material and equipment required by the Contract Documents shall be submitted to the Architect and/or Engineer for review during this period. Submittals proposing or w requesting substitutions shall be expressly identified as such in a letter of transmittal, with the reasons for requesting the substitution stated. Submittals for this purpose shall be complete in every respect, shall conform to all the information requirements for shop drawing and sample submittals, and shall include, at no cost to the Owner, the necessary revisions to other related work required by the Contract Documents. The judgment of the Architect and/or Engineer with respect to the adequacy and acceptability of a proposed substitution shall be final and binding on the Contractor, and shall not be subject to question in any other place. After the expiration of this period, substitutions for material or equipment shall not be proposed or requested in shop drawing and sample submittals, and the Contractor will be required to execute " the work in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents. N. Within six weeks after award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit a schedule W listing all shop drawings and samples with the projected date that each item will be submitted to the Architect and/or Engineer for review. 1.22 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and/or catalogue cuts of the following: Fire Alarm System Fuses Switchboards Cable Panelboards Cable Supports Cable Identification Tags Disconnect Switches Dry Type Transformers Wiring Devices Lighting Equipment and Lamps Grounding System Medium Voltage Transformer Medium Voltage Switchgear we Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-31 B. The Architect and/or Engineer will review shop drawings and samples with reasonable promptness and will return them to the Contractor stamped to indicate the appropriate action as described in "General and Supplementary Conditions". OW C. Architect's and/or Engineer's review is for general compliance with the design concept and contract documents. Markings or comments or the lack thereof shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from compliance with the project plans and *■ Specifications. The Contractor remains solely responsible for details and accuracy, for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of construction, for performing his work in a safe manner, and for coordinating his work with that of other Trades. D. The term "shop drawings" shall include layout, detail, and assembly drawings, diagrams, schedules, catalogue sheets, printed descriptive matter, and tabular and graphical presentations of operating and performance data that describe work required by the Contract Documents. E. No part of the work shall be started in the shop or in the field until the Architect and/or Engineer has reviewed the shop drawings and samples for that portion of the work. Thereafter, the work shall be executed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the indicated status of the reviewed shop drawing. F. Shop drawings and samples shall be submitted for review sufficiently in advance of *� the scheduled start of the work in the shop or in the field to allow ample time, in consideration of the number and complexity of the drawings in the submittal, for the Architect and/or Engineer to make an orderly review. No extension of the time to complete the work will be granted to the Contractor by reason of his failure in this respect. G. The Contractor shall carefully check shop drawings and samples, including those received by him from Subcontractors and material men, for accuracy, completeness of required information and conformance with the Contract Documents. Shop drawings found to be inaccurate, incomplete or not in conformance with the Contract Documents shall be corrected before being submitted to the Architect and/or Engineer for review. .e H. Each submitted shop drawing shall bear the Contractor's stamped and signed certification that the work has been checked for all related job conditions, for maintenance of architectural conditions, and coordinated with the shop drawings of other affected trades for interrelated work, as required for the proper and complete performance of the work. No shop drawing submittal will be reviewed without this certification. +*• I. Each shop drawing and sample submitted for review shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal, and shall be identified by the project title, Contractor's name, and a Am reference to the related part of the Contract Documents. J. Shop drawings for manufactured material and equipment shall include model numbers, dimension drawings, operating weights, material specifications, operating features and controls, wiring diagrams, performance characteristics, service Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-30 „� 1.18 CODES AND PERMITS A. Install all work in full accordance with the requirements of all local and governmental departments having jurisdiction over these matters, as well as with any requirements of the National Electrical Code, NFPA, UL, and other applicable Codes. Secure and pay for necessary approvals,permits, inspections, etc., and deliver the official records ON of the granting of permits to the Architect without additional cost to the Owner. B. Pay royalties or fees required in connection with the use of patented devices, or systems, and save the Owner, the Architect, the Consulting Engineers and .the Construction Manager harmless from any claims or lawsuits arising from such use and indemnify each thereof against attorneys' fees in connection therewith. C. Provide signs required by the municipal authorities. 1.19 ENGINEERING REFERENCE POINTS A. The Construction Manager will provide bench marks,monuments,and other reference points on the job which will be available for this Contractor's use. B. Maintain all existing bench marks,monuments and other reference points and perform all field engineering required to insure that work under this Section shall conform with grades,elevations and lines required. 1.20 GUARANTEE A. Submit a single guarantee stating that all portions of the work are in accordance with Contract requirements. Guarantee all work against faulty and improper material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of final acceptance by the Owner, except that where guarantees or warranties for longer terms are specified herein, such longer term shall apply. At no additional cost to Owner, within 24 hours after notification, correct any deficiencies which occur during the guarantee period, all to !' the satisfaction of the Owner and Architect. This Contractor shall require similar guarantees from his Subcontractors. 1.21 ARCHITECT'S AND/OR ENGINEER'S REVIEW A. The Architect and/or Engineer will review shop drawings and samples for conformance with the design concept of the project and the information contained in the Contract Documents. The Architect's and/or Engineer's review of shop drawings and samples is only for the convenience of the Owner in following the work and does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect's and/or Engineer's review shall not be construed as a complete or detailed check of the work submitted, nor shall it relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors of any sort in the shop drawings and samples,or from the necessity of furnishing any work required by the Contract Documents which have been omitted from the shop drawing submittals. The review of a separate item shall not indicate review of the complete assembly in which it functions. Nothing in the Architect's and/or Engineer's review of shop drawings and samples shall be considered as authorizing additional cost to the Owner or increased time for completion of the work. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-29 1.16 COORDINATION A. Certain materials will be furnished, installed, or furnished and installed, under other Sections and Contracts. Examine the Contract Documents to ascertain these requirements. B. Carefully check space requirements with other Trades to insure that all material can be installed in the spaces allotted thereto. Finished-suspended ceiling elevations are indicated on the general construction drawings. C. Transmit to Trades doing work of other Sections all information required for work to be provided under their respective Sections (such as foundations, electric wiring, access doors,and the like)in ample time for installation. D. Wherever this Contractor's work interconnects with work of other Contractors, this Contractor shall coordinate his work with these Contractors to insure that all Contractors have the information necessary so that they may properly install all the ..� necessary connections and equipment. E. Caution men both verbally and in writing as to the dangers involved in doing work within or adjacent to electrical closets on various floors, the Mechanical Rooms and the Switchgear Room, due to dangers caused by presence of high voltages in these spaces. F. Furnish and set all sleeves for passage of conduits through structural masonry and concrete walls and floors and elsewhere ill be required for the proper protection of each conduit passing through building surfaces. Coordinate this work with the Construction Manager in order to properly expedite and perform this work. G. Field drilling, cutting and/or reinforcing of holes in structural metal deck required for work under this Section shall be coordinated through the Construction Manager and approved by the Structural Engineer. All such drilling, cutting and reinforcing costs shall be borne by this Contractor. .. H. Due to the type of the installation, a fixed sequence of operation is required to properly install the complete systems. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to coordinate, protect and schedule his work with other Trades in accordance with the construction sequence. I. Coordinate and provide layouts of all conduit, etc.,on sheet metal coordination shop drawings. Drawings shall be signed by a representative of each Trade. J. Architectural drawings shall be checked for ceiling height requirements. 1.17 SUBCONTRACTS A. Where Contract Documents require manufacturers' services, and wherever the staff of the Trade performing the work of this Section cannot adequately perform such services, this Trade shall stipulate such performance in its contracts with its Subcontractors or Sub-Subcontractors, vendors, manufacturers, and the like, or else subsequently pay them any additional fees required therefor. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.1 1.12 16100-28 I. Become thoroughly acquainted with the work involved, obtain and verify at the building all measurements necessary for the proper installation of work. Furnish to other Contractors any information relating to work of this Section necessary for the proper installation of their Contracts. Confer with other Contractors for finish adjacent to work of this Section and arrange to have visible portions of the work(such as access doors, escutcheons, etc.) fit in and harmonize with the finish in a manner satisfactory to the Architects. J. Make every effort to furnish all equipment of any equipment type from one manufacturer. K. Where disagreements occur between the plans and the Specifications, or within either document itself, the item or arrangement of better quality, greater quantity or higher cost shall be included in the base bid. L. The drawings show the various conduit systems schematically. No added compensation will be permitted for variations due to field conditions. M. Provide all rigging required for complete installation and furnish drawings showing ! " necessary points of support, reactions and supplementary bracing. This shall be submitted for approval by Owner. Should any shoring be required,provide same after Owner's approval. N. Equipment and materials shall be new and listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,manufactured in accordance with NEMA or IEEE standards,and approved by the 0" local authorities having jurisdiction. O. Any references in this Specification or on the plans which refer to work to be performed or provided by the Construction Manager or "by others" is intended to mean that the required work will be provided under another Section of the Specifications. 1.14 VERIFYING EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Before commencing work, examine all adjoining work on which this work is in any way dependent for perfect workmanship according to the intent of this Specification, and report to the Construction Manager any condition which prevents performance of first-class work. No "waiver of responsibility" for incomplete, inadequate of defective adjoining work will be considered unless notice has been filed before submittal of a 1r proposal. 1.15 QUALIFICATIONS A. Furnish all equipment of any equipment type from one manufacturer. B. The drawings show the various systems schematically. No added compensation will be permitted for variations due to field conditions. C. Install all work in full accordance with the requirements of all local and governmental departments having jurisdiction over these matters, as well as with any requirements of the NFPA and UL. Secure and pay for necessary approvals, permits, inspections, carting, legal dumping, etc., and deliver the official records of the granting of permits to the Engineer without additional cost to the Owner. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-27 AW C. The Contractor covenants and agrees that he and his Subcontractors and his and their agents, servants and employees will provide and maintain a safe place to work and that he and they will comply with all laws and regulations of any governmental authority having jurisdiction thereof, and the Contractor agrees to indemnify, defend "* and hold harmless the Owners, Architects and Consulting Engineers from and against any liability, loss, damage or expense, including attorneys' fees, arising from a failure or alleged failure on the part of the Contractor, his Subcontractors and his and their • agents, servants and employees to provide and maintain a safe place to work or to comply with all laws and regulations of any governmental authority having jurisdiction thereof. D. The Contractor and each Subcontractor covenants and agrees to indemnify, defend and hold harmless the Owners, Architects and Consulting Engineers against any liability, loss, damage or expense, including attorneys' fees, arising from a failure or alleged failure on the part of the Contractor, his Subcontractors or his or their agents, servants and employees properly to discharge the obligations assumed by him or them in the performance of the work, including any act or omission allegedly resulting in .� death or personal injury or property damage or improper construction, construction techniques,or the use of improper or inappropriate material or tools. E. The Contractor agrees that any controversy or dispute to which the Contractor and the Consulting Engineers are parties shall be submitted to the American Arbitration Association for decision in accordance with the rules of such Association for construction industry disputes. All Subcontractors likewise agree to submit to such arbitration any dispute between or among them, the Contractor, and the Consulting Engineers, and the Contractor agrees to make available to the Consulting Engineers, on demand, signed copies of the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor and between the Contractor and his Subcontractors. The Contractor and each Subcontractor agree that by submitting a bid, which is accepted, this paragraph shall be deemed a written agreement to submit any controversy thereafter arising to arbitration. F. Put work in place as fast as reasonably possible; at all times, keep a competent �. foreman in charge of the work and facilitate its inspection by the Architects and Consulting Engineers. G. Except for such changes as may be specifically approved by the Architects and Consulting Engineers, in accordance with alternates or options stated hereinafter, all work must be in full accordance with the intent of the plans and Specifications, �* complete in every way and ready for satisfactory and efficient operation when delivered to the Owner. H. Guarantee that the materials and workmanship supplied under these Specifications will be of the best grade, that the apparatus will be erected in a practical and first-class manner, that it will be complete in operation, nothing being omitted in the way of labor and material required to make it so, although not specifically shown or mentioned herein, and that it will be delivered in well-working order, complete and perfect in every respect, without additional cost-- whether or not shown in detail on .. the drawings or described in detail in this Specification. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-26 R. Guarantees 1. All equipment furnished under this Specification shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from the date of Owner's final acceptance of the equipment and must include all costs for repairs,parts, labor,travel and living expenses for the manufacturer's service personnel. 2. Four-hour field service assistance shall be available on a 24 hour, 7 day a week basis from the manufacturer or his authorized representative in the Springfield, Massachusetts area. 3. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Include ten complete sets of operating �. and maintenance manuals which shall be submitted prior to shipment.of equipment. Maintenance manuals shall outline all necessary periodic functions required and shall include a recommended system for keeping logs and records. Include trouble-shooting charts, schematics of all assemblies and wiring diagrams, in sufficient detail and clarity to enable the Owner's technicians to understand,operate,and maintain the system. w S. Empty Conduit System for Communications Wiring 1. Provide sleeves and empty conduit system for the wires and cables of the Telephone Company; location and size of sleeves and conduit shall be as specified on the drawings. The manner of installing sleeves and conduit shall be the same as specified herein for light and power wiring system and in accordance with the requirements of the Telephone Company. 2. The telephone equipment in the Main Telephone Room and various closets will be furnished and installed by the Telephone Company. Lateral distribution on floors, when required, shall be as indicated on drawings, through conduits. Provide sleeves in each telephone closet as called for on plans. 3. The public telephone system shall consist of empty raceways, sleeves, outlet boxes, faceplates, bushed cover plates, junction boxes, pull boxes, etc., left in readiness for wiring to be provided by others. The entire layout shall be installed as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the requirements of the company supplying the telephone service. 4. Wall outlet boxes shall be of size and type to suit each individual location. In general, 4 inch square boxes with or without plaster rings as required, 1-1/2 inches deep, and bushed cover stainless steel plates shall be provided at each telephone location. 1.13 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Execute the work in the best and most thorough manner and to the satisfaction of the Architects and Consulting Engineers, who will jointly interpret the meaning of the drawings and specifications and shall have the power to reject any work and materials which. in their judgment, are not in full accordance therewith. B. Be responsible for material and workmanship until completion and final acceptance. Replace any of same which may be damaged, lost or stolen, without additional cost to Owner. Guard the building and its contents against damage by this Contractor, his employees or Subcontractors, and make good any damage free of charge. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-25 K. All control relays, solid-state voltage monitors,transfer switch assemblies, shall be the .. product of a single manufacturer regularly engaged in design, development and production of automatic transfer switches. Said manufacturer shall provide service and spare parts on a 24 hour-a-day, 7 day-a-week,availability at a local level. .+. L. Adequate conduit space shall be provided in each automatic transfer switch to satisfy the cabling design. All cable terminations shall be made with two-bolt hole, long, barrel,copper bodied, concentric compression type lugs, which shall be supplied with the automatic transfer switch. M. Transfer switch shall include auxiliary contacts on the main shaft as follows: 4 sets of contacts closed on "Normal" 4 sets of contacts closed on"Emergency" 4 sets of contacts open on "Normal" 4 sets of contacts open on"Emergency" N. Transfer switch shall be as manufactured by ASCO,Onan or Russelectric, Inc. O. Transfer switch shall be shipped to the job site; coordinate with MSKCC Installing Contractor. .. P. Transfer switch shall be"wrap-around"bypass type for maintenance bypass. Q. Shop and Installation Drawings 1. The Manufacturer shall prepare and submit for approval detailed composite shop and installation drawings for all equipment furnished under this Section, including but not limited to generators, automatic transfer switches and controls. 2. All submittals shall be complete and shall contain all required and detailed information for all components of the system, including all necessary wiring diagrams and/or interconnecting cable schematics for connection of the generator and associated switchgear. The interconnect diagrams shall be composite drawings for all components and shall indicate wiring and termination points for all cable. 3. The engine generator manufacturer shall assume total system responsibility for all components and associated controls and shall be responsible for coordination of all system components. 4. If the submittals differ from the requirements of the specifications or drawings, the manufacturer shall make specific mention of such difference in his letter of transmittal, with a request for substitution, together with his reasons for same in order that, if acceptable, suitable action may be taken for proper adjustment. Otherwise the manufacturer will not be relieved of the responsibility for executing the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 5. The approval of any submitted data or drawings for material, equipment apparatus, devices, arrangements and/or layout shall not relieve the manufacturer from the responsibility of furnishing same of proper dimensions �* and weight, capacities, sizes, quantity, quality and installation details to efficiently perform the requirements and intent of the Contract. Such approval shall not relieve the manufacturer from responsibility for errors of any sort on the submitted data or shop drawings. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-24 " and control relays shall be continuous duty industrial control type with minimum contact rating of 10 amperes. All timers shall be field adjustable without de energizing control circuits. I. ATS Control Panel 1. Each automatic transfer switch shall be equipped with a microprocessor based control panel. The control panel shall perform the operational and display functions of the transfer switch. 2. The digital display shall be accessible without opening the enclosure door and shall be provided with a 4 line by 20 character LCD display screen with touch pad function and display menus. The programming functions shall be pass code protected. ,. 3. The control panel shall be provided with menu-driven display screens for transfer switch monitoring,control and field-changeable functions and settings. 4. The control panel shall be optoisolated from electrical noise and provided with the following inherent control functions and capabilities: a. Multipurpose display for continuous monitoring and control of the ATS functions and settings. All field-changeable functions shall be pass code protected and accessible through the keypad. b. Built-in diagnostic display that includes the capturing of historical data, such as number of transfers and time on emergency power source, for ease of troubleshooting. C. Voltage monitors shall be provided to sense all ungrounded lines of the normal source voltage and initiate an emergency sequence of operation upon loss of or reduction in any line of the normal source to 85 percent or less for an adjustable period of 0.5 to 6 seconds. Upon return of the normal source to 95 percent or more on all lines, the voltage monitors shall initiate a retransfer to normal. The voltage monitors shall be solid- state and field adjustable on pickup from 85 percent to 100 percent of nominal and on dropout from 75 percent to 98 percent of pickup. Monitors shall have a minimum repetitive accuracy of 2 percent of the set point over a temperature range of-20°C. to 75°C. d. A time delay shall be included to allow stabilization of the normal source at acceptable limits before retransfer of the load from the emergency source. The time shall be adjustable in one minute increments, from 0 to 30 minutes maximum. e. Control circuitry shall provide for the retransfer to a dead normal source or neutral position for load shedding upon loss of sufficient generating capacity and bypass to emergency under test condition. The controls shall include necessary auxiliary contacts to give indication of transfer switch position and source availability. The controls shall also include a pilot contact, to close and initiate the start of the emergency system and open to stop the system. In addition, these controls shall include a voltage sensing relay to sense the availability of emergency power prior to allowing transfer, to insure its acceptability. J. Switch shall be provided with "in-phase" monitors or neutral position with time delay to prevent excessive currents during transfer of these loads. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-23 R 1. The transfer switch shall include a test switch to simulate normal power failure, ^" pilot lights on the cabinet door to indicate the position of the switch as listed below. 2. The transfer switch shall be provided with a two (2) position test switch. The "UP" position shall be labeled "TEST" to simulate normal power failure, bypassing ATS timer and permitting extended time under load. The "DOWN' position shall be labeled "NORMAL" placing the ATS control circuit into .. normal mode permitting the preset timer(0-30 minutes)to initiate transfer back to normal. Provide pilot light to indicate position of switch. 3. The transfer switch shall be provided with a spring loaded momentary toggle switch. Activation of this switch shall bypass the ATS timer, initiating an immediate return to normal. Switch shall operate from left to right. Left position shall be normal mode. Right position, indicated by an arrow pointing right and labeled "RESET TO NORMAL" must be held until transfer back to normal position is completed. D. Pilot Lights: The transfer switch shall be provided with the following pilot lights. Pilot lights to be push-to-test type. Each pilot light is to be provided with label plates as follows: 1. "GREEN'light indicating"LOAD CONNECTED TO NORMAL". 2. "RED"light indicating"LOAD CONNECTED TO EMERGENCY". 3. "GREEN'light indicating"NORMAL SOURCE AVAILABLE". 4. "GREEN'light indicating"EMERGENCY SOURCE AVAILABLE". 5. "GREEN'light indicating"TEST SWITCH IN NORMAL POSITION'. 6. "RED" light indicating"TEST SWITCH IN TEST POSITION'. 7. "YELLOW" light indicating "AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH IN LOAD SHED" E. The transfer switch, complete with timers,relays and accessories, shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., in their Electrical Construction Materials Catalogue under Standard UL-1008 (automatic transfer switches)and approved for use on emergency systems outlined in NFPA 110. F. Provide terminals for connection to the generator control panel to permit automatic shedding and restoration of loads on the emergency power plant and indication of source availability and switch position. Automatic load shedding shall be achieved by transferring back to a de-energized normal source or to a dead neutral position upon signal from the generator control panel. G. Switch shall have two positions (normal, emergency)or three positions(normal, emergency, neutral) and shall be double-throw. The switch shall be electrically operated and mechanically held, with the operating mechanism energized only during time of transfer. All main contacts shall be silver alloy, wiping action type, protected by separate arcing contacts and blowout coils. Contacts shall be of a design specifically intended for automatic transfer switch service, and shall not be circuit breaker contact assemblies. H. A11 switch and relay contacts, coils, springs and control elements shall be removable from the front of the transfer switch without removal of the switch panels from the enclosure and without disconnection of drive linkages or power conductors. Sensing Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-22 3. Provide all labor and materials required for on-site testing with dummy load at unity power factor, including but not limited to,the following: a. The required resistive dummy load banks to achieve system full load conditions. b. Temporary connections, copper cable, from generator output breakers to dummy load, including grounding conductor. (Installation by MSKCC Installing Contractor.) C. Overcun ent and short circuit protection devices, contactors, relays, etc., for temporary cables, as required. d. All instrumentation and connections required to measure and record test data (switchboard mounted instruments are not acceptable). Provide accurate voltage, current, frequency, and kw meters to accomplish this. For each transient or load change, provide oscillograph trace recordings of voltage frequency and current, showing the initiating disturbances, entire restabilization period for each. Record and log all test data and submit to Owner in a comprehensive test report. Provide 7 copies. e. Disconnection and removal of all temporary power and control wiring and equipment. (Deinstallation under Section 16400.) f. Seven sets of certified test reports, submitted within two weeks. 4. Perform a final integrated system test ("pull-the-plug") to demonstrate the system as a whole, including safeties, etc., to the satisfaction of the Owner/Engineer. This test shall not be conducted as an extension of the site acceptance test, but rather as a separate test after substantial completion of all other work associated with this project. (Submit a detailed chronological test plan with the shop drawings.) a. Operate all other features of the control system, including but not limited to: load demand control,main bus overload protection,etc. b. This test shall utilize actual building loads and temporary portable load bank(furnished by this Section). 5. Provide complete, chronological, detailed factory, on-site and pull-the-plug test procedures for approval with shop drawings. 6. A minimum of 10 working days notice shall be provided to the Owner, Architect and Engineer, in writing, before all factory, on-site and pull-the-plug testing. 1.12 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH A. Furnish an automatic transfer switch rated at 600 amps, 120/208V, 3 phase,4 wire. po Transfer switch shall be capable of switching all classes of load and shall be rated for continuous duty when installed in a nonventilated enclosure constructed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Standard UL-1008. B. The transfer switch shall be rated to close on and withstand the available RMS symmetrical short circuit current of 65,000 amperes. The switch mechanism shall be listed to the UL 1008 standard for 1.5 and 3 cycle ratings. Series rating with upstream protective devices will not be accepted without consent of the Engineer. C. Test Switch PM PM Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-21 d. Operate the unit from 0 to 100 percent load, with the following increments: 0% to 50%, 50% to 0%, 25% to 75%, 75% to 25%, 0% to 100%, 100% to 0%. Hold at each incremental load for 10 minutes and check for stable operation. The generator set shall be capable of returning to its rated voltage and frequency with a maximum voltage drop as described hereinabove when incremental loads are added. Record voltage and frequency transients. ., e. Perform full load transient tests verifying that kilowatts, voltage, amperes, and frequency transient characteristics are within acceptable limits. Submit oscillograph tracings with all 3 phases of voltage and , frequency recorded for all transient tests. f. Acoustical readings, taken on all sides, top and bottom, shall verify acoustical performance. B. Site Acceptance Test 1. The generator shall be tested as hereinafter described under the supervision of a capable service engineers provided by the diesel engine-generator manufacturer. (Submit a detailed chronological test plan with the shop drawings.) Prior to any testing, verify that the generator is complete and ready for testing and that all instrumentation required is connected and ready for **� startup and test. Tests shall be witnessed by the Owner and/or his representatives. Provide necessary lube oil, fuel oil, and testing equipment to obtain full load conditions, including the required load banks. .. 2. The on-site test program shall cover the following as a minimum: a. Verify that all components are correctly installed and interconnected. Exercise each circuit breaker. b. Individually test engine protective device and verify the accuracy of instrumentation set points. C. The diesel engine-generator shall be operated individually under full load .w conditions for a minimum of four(4)hours. The diesel engine-generator set shall maintain rated voltage t5 volts and rated frequency t.5 hertz for the duration of the full load test. Voltage, amperage and frequency measurements, as well as engine gauge and monitor points, shall be recorded at 15 minute intervals. d. From a "cold" start, operate the diesel engine-generator from 0 to 100 percent load, starting at no load and increasing in increments of 25 percent. Operate the generators as a system from 0 to 100% load, starting at 25% load and increasing in increments of 25%. Hold at each incremental load for 15 minutes and check at each load point for stable operation, fuel consumption, engine performance, and generator performance. The generator shall be capable of returning to its rated voltage and frequency as described hereinabove with a maximum voltage n.w drop when incremental loads are added. Demonstrate load sharing (kva, kvar) and circulating currents are within acceptable limits at each system load step. e. Perform load transient tests verifying that kilowatts, voltage, amperes, and frequency transient characteristics are within acceptable limits. The transient tests provided in the factory shall be repeated during this test. Submit oscillograph tracings of all transient tests. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-20 04 3. Components of each piece. - 4. Method in which each piece must be assembled in the field. 5. Type of physical protection that must be provided for all equipment, in the event of an extended installation period. 1.9 TAPS AND SPLICES A. All copper cable lug connections to copper bus bar mains and branches shall use two bolt-hole copper indent compression connectors,Thomas&Betts,Homac, O.Z. Gedney,or as approved. B. Terminal lugs with bolting pads shall be tin-plated. 4W 1.10 LABELS A. Provide screw fastened phenolic nameplates with 1/4 inch high engraved letters for all operating faces and hinged accessible compartments of all electrical equipment. Nameplates shall have white letters on a black background. Nameplates shall include: 1. Equipment designation. 2. Equipment voltage. w 3. Load served(for distribution switches/circuit breakers and ATS's). 4. Switch/circuit breaker size and fuse size. B. Submit for review. 1.11 TESTING OM A. Factory Acceptance Test 1. Diesel engine-generator set shall be tested at the factory to demonstrate compliance with the Specifications. Tests may be witnessed by the Owner and/or his representative. (Submit a detailed chronological test plan with the shop drawings.) A certified copy of this performance test shall be submitted before shipment to the job site, with a minimum of the following conditions tested. a. Engine-generator set shall be capable of attaining rated voltage and frequency under no-load conditions, within five (5) seconds of the , . initiation of a start signal. b. Engine-generator set shall be operated under full prime rated load conditions (125 k-w) for a minimum of six (6) hours. The generator set shall maintain rated voltage t5 volts and rated frequency t0.5 hertz for the duration of the full load test. Voltage, amperage and frequency measurements, as well as engine gauge and monitor points, shall be recorded at 15 minute intervals. C. From a "cold" start, operate the unit from 0 to 100 percent load, starting at no load and increasing in increments of 25 percent then decreasing from 100 to 0 percent load in 25 percent increments. Hold at each incremental load for 10 minutes and check at each load point for stable operation, fuel consumption, engine performance, and generator. performance. The generator shall be capable of returning to its rated voltage and frequency as described hereinabove with a maximum voltage drop when incremental loads are added. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-19 9. The controls of the load bank shall be interlocked with its respective emergency power control system to prevent the load bank from being energized in the event of an actual loss of power, as sensed at the automatic transfer switches. This interlock shall not prevent the load banks from being used in conjunction . with actual building loads for testing of the emergency power system. 10. The Electrical Contractor shall connect the load bank dump circuit from the automatic transfer switch(provide and install all required conduit and cable). K. Generator Set Auxiliary Equipment and Accessories: 1. Coolant Heater: a. Engine mounted, thermostatically controlled, contactor for coolant heater(s)on each engine. Heater voltage shall be 208 volts, single phase, or as otherwise shown on the project drawings. b. The coolant heater shall be installed on the engine with silicone hose connections. Steel tubing shall be used for connections into the engine coolant system whereever the length of pipe run exceeds 12 inches. The coolant heater installation shall be specifically designed to provide " proper venting of the system. The coolant heaters shall be installed using quick disconnect couplers to isolate the heater for replacement of the heater element. The quick disconnect/automatic sealing couplers shall allow the heater element to be replaced without draining the engine cooling system or significant coolant loss. C. The coolant heater shall be provided with a 24VDC thermostat and contactor, installed at the engine thermostat housing. An AC power connection box shall be provided for a single AC power connection to the coolant heater system. d. The coolant heater(s) shall be sized as recommended by the engine manufacturer to warm the engine to a minimum of 100°F (40°C) in a 40T ambient, in compliance with NFPA 110 requirements. e. Provide an engine-mounted duplex water separator. L. Panel UP-Gen 1. Provide 3 phase, 4 wire, 100 amp bus, 24 circuit utility panel in NEMA 3R enclosure, to be installed inside the generator's exterior enclosure, with required circuit breakers for the coolant heater and the balance to be 1 phase, 20 amp. M. Provide an exterior-mounted "breakglass station"which will be configured to shut down the generator's engine when a momentary "mushroom type"push-button is depressed. 1.8 SHIPPING AND RIGGING A. The diesel-generator and enclosure shall be shipped to the job site or another location of the Installing Contractor's choice, ready for rigging (by others). B. State in the technical proposal the anticipated breakdown of each piece to be rigged including a description of the following: 1. Dimensions of each piece. 2. Weight of each piece. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-18 additional factory tests as described above_and shall be responsible for paying time and expense associated with the Engineers' and Acoustical Engineers' witnessing of such tests. 19. Following complete installation at the project site, the manufacturer shall conduct controlled tests to demonstrate and verify that the acoustical objectives have been met. Any and all measures required to comply with the acoustical objectives shall be implemented by the manufacturer at their expense. 20. Provide an integral 275 gallon sub base tank incorporating double-wall construction and leak detection. The sub base tank shall comply with all Federal, State and Local Regulations, including, but not limited .to, environmental, fuel containment and construction regulations.. Provide a fuel oil cooling system as required for engine performance. J. Load Bank: 1. Provide, as part of the generator package,a 50 kw, 1.0 power factor continuous rated load bank for diesel engine-generator system testing. Load bank shall be a completely self-contained unit and shall include all resistive load elements, load control devices, and protective devices. Unit shall be constructed of structural steel channel and angle iron with steel panels, shall be mounted on the discharge side of its respective diesel engine-generator radiator. One load bank shall be provided on each diesel engine-generator set. 2. Load bank shall contain resistive load units in incremental sizes to allow for step loading. Rating shall be 120/208 volt, 3 phase,4 wire. 3. Load bank shall be operated and monitored by an integrated control panel in a separate NEMA I enclosure, to be mounted adjacent to the diesel engine- generator, and shall include the following items: 2 - 3-1/2 inch a.c. voltmeter, with f2% full scale accuracy. 2 - 3-1/2 inch a.c. ammeter with t2% full scale accuracy and three current transformer. 2 - Ammeter 3 phase selector switch. 2 - Voltmeter 3 phase selector switch. 2 - 3-1/2 inch kilowatt meter. 2 - Resistive load step control switches with indicating light for each load step of each load bank. 1 - Load bank status indicator(i.e.,common failure indication per load). 4. The load bank shall be fed from a second generator output circuit breaker key interlocked with the primary output breaker feeding the emergency distribution switchboard. 5. All controls shall be fed from separate 120 volt, 20 amp branch circuits derived from the line side of the feeder breaker. All controls shall be housed in an integral enclosure attached to the side of the load bank. Controls shall be fall- I'm safe, such that the loss of control power, loss of adequate air flow, or overtemperature will automatically de-energize the load bank. 6. Provide branch circuit fuse protection (current limiting fuses) to protect each load circuit. 7. All conductors and terminals shall be copper with tin or silver plating at bus joints. All lugs shall be copper bodied, two bolt hole concentric compression, long barrel type. S. The load bank shall be utilized for both factory and site acceptance testing. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-17 MW S. Provide fail-safe louvers of the "spring open,motor close" type. 9. Provide access hatches as required for inspection and maintenance of each louver motor and spring mechanism as well as any other device requiring maintenance access. �*�! 10. Provide stainless steel floor drains with stainless steel screw caps for maintenance of each enclosure. The drains shall be placed to allow for proper drainage of the enclosure. .� 11. Fuel supply and return shall terminate in the sub base tank as described herein. Each supply line shall also be equipped with shutoff valve for unit isolation solenoid valve for unit operation and a "fusible link". Firematic valve for fuel shutoff. The fuel oil return line shall be equipped with a check valve as a prevention from loss of prime as well as a gate valve for unit isolation. Both supply and return piping shall be equipped with stainless steel flexible connections. The fuel system return line header shall be a minimum of 2-1/2 inches in diameter. Fuel oil pipe to be black seamless steel A53 Schedule 40 with malleable iron fittings. 12. All valves shall be ball valves with tamper switches with Form"C"contacts for connection by the Mechanical Contractor. 13. Provide adequately sized conduit stub-up areas in floor of enclosure for generator power conduits, engine-generator control wiring and enclosure �* auxiliary 120/208 volt load center. 14. Oil and water drains with 3/4 inch bronze valves shall be provided and terminate at the floor of the unit, at the exterior wall with access from outside .. the enclosure. A crankcase fumes disposal line shall also be piped from the engine to the outside of the enclosure. 15. The enclosure shall be provided with a structural steel base. The base shall NO have sufficient rigidity to accept spring type isolators, furnished under this Section, beneath the entire enclosure between it and building structural support steel. Outdoor spring isolators shall be provided in quantities determined by a qualified vibration isolation vendor to permit a minimum static deflection of 3 inches. Mountings shall incorporate a leveling device, vertical limit stops and single layer of 3/4 inch Super W type pad. The mountings shall be installed directly under the structural steel base and shall be positioned to accept the weight and weight distribution for uniform mounting deflection. Spring isolators shall be similar to Vibration Eliminator Co., Type SLR, or as approved. Pads shall be similar to Vibration Eliminator Co., Super W, or as approved. The vibration isolators shall not have a surge or neutral frequency within M of any operating speed of the engines. 16. Any internal vibration isolation shall be selected with due care and consideration to the main spring vibration isolators supporting the entire package enclosure (see Section above for details). The isolators internal to the units shall not have a natural or surge frequency within 212 of the external isolators. Internal spring vibration isolators shall have one inch of static deflection or less. 17. A minimum of four steel lifting rings shall be welded and bolted to assembly for the maximum combined lifting weight. Integral leveling jacks shall be provided to support total system weight. 18. Should any of the units not pass the acoustical tests, the manufacturer shall undertake all measures necessary to comply. They shall then conduct Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-16 3) Fail to synchronize. C. Immediate Shutdown 1) High lube oil temperature. !" 2) Low lube oil pressure. 3) High jacket water temperature. 4) Overspeed. 5) Overcrank. 6) Reverse power. 7) Low water level. 8) Engine lockout. 9) Emergency stop. 10) Control voltage failure. 21. Provide an annunciator for transfer switch position indication. Provide a green light for a switch in normal position and a red light for a switch in emergency position. Annunciator shall have positions for twenty (20) automatic transfer switches. 22. Provide a remote annunciator with all alarm indicators as specified for LICP. Remote annunciator wiring between LCI and the remote annunciator shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor. I. Generator Sound Attenuating Enclosure 1. Provide for engine-generator sets and controls a sound attenuating enclosure which shall limit the sound level to no more than 80 dBA when measured at 5 feet from any side, top or bottom, including entry doors, hot gas discharges and any penetrations for conduits, etc., under all operating conditions. In addition to the 80 dBA requirement at 5 feet, the enclosure shall limit the sound level to no more than 100 dBA when measured at 50 feet horizontally from any part of the enclosure or appendage to the enclosure, with the enclosure and generators operating per plans and specifications. The generator shall be housed in one common enclosure. 2. Each panel shall have full aluminum or galvanized steel framing of 14 gauge, and studs no more than 24 inch on center. Stiff-ended wall panels are not to exceed 24 inch width. 3. The panel cores are to be 100% filled with fireproof 3-1/2 inch thick mineral fiber sound-absorbing material having a flame spread of 10 or less, with fuel contributed as 0 and smoke developed as 0. 4. The enclosure shall be designated to remain structurally intact during normal transport and rigging, with no loss of shape or weather integrity. The enclosure base shall be fumished with "I" beams sized and spaced as required. 5. The manufacturer shall submit details of construction materials and methods together with octave band calculations detailing the performance of each element and showing compliance with the acoustical objectives. 6. The enclosure shall be sized as required with a minimum 1 foot working space all around. The enclosure shall have a removal panel section for future repairs and maintenance, insulated soundproof panels, fully gasketed all around on all four(4) flanged edges. 7. The air intake and discharge louvers and sound traps shall be of adequate size to ensure minimum air restriction to the diesel engine-generator. The louvers on the enclosure shall be arranged and designed to prevent leakage. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-15 1. The following safeties shall be provided and annunciated in the LICP: 1) Immediate Shutdown a) High lube oil temperature. b) Low lube oil pressure. c) High jacket water temperature. d) Overspeed. e) Overcrank. �* f) Reverse power. g) Overcurrent. 2) Prealarms Mo a) Low oil pressure. b) High water temperature. c) Impending engine overload. d) Low water temperature. 3) Diesel Engine-Generator Set Alarms a) Low battery voltage. b) High battery voltage. c) Battery charger malfunction. d) Low water temperature. e) Low water level. f) Low lube oil level. g) Engine crank failure. 19. Provide two (2) generator main output overcurrent molded or insulated case circuit breaker devices in the local control panel in a NEMA 12 enclosure for the diesel engine-generator set. These devices shall each have a minimum of four (4) Form "C" contacts wired to terminal blocks for remote monitor status under a separate scope of work. Circuit Breaker No. 1 - 600AF/500AT Circuit Breaker No. 2 - As required for the integral radiator-mounted load bank. 20. The following safeties shall be terminated on terminal blocks in the control panels (LICP) (two [2] contacts to be provided; one [1] for connection to �. remote annunciator and one [1] for connection to building ATC system by others): a. Engine-Generator Set Alarms 1) Low oil pressure. 'r 2) High water temperature. 3) Low water temperature. 4) Low water level. "" 5) High oil temperature. 6) High lube oil level. 7) Low Tube oil level. �*! 8) Water in fuel. 9) Fuel pressure. 10) Battery charger malfunction. w. 11) Air box damper closed. b. Shutdown After Cool-Down 1) Overcurrent. 2) Reverse VAR(Device 40). Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-14 w� g. Voltage Regulator: Voltage regulator shall be matched to exciter and alternator and be totally solid-state, including voltage buildup circuit. Overexcitation protection due to loss of sensing voltage shall be provided. It shall include field adjustable underfrequency protection using a volts per hertz function. The regulator shall have three-phase true rms sensing isolated from the power input in reactive drop or reactive difference (cross-current compensation mode). Stability and voltage range shall be mounted on the regulator and be easily accessible with provisions for remote voltage level control. Voltage shall be maintained to ±1% of rated voltage from no load to full load with.no more than t0.5% of rated voltage within a 40°C. change in operating temperature. Remote voltage level rheostat shall provide adjustment of ±10%. Voltage regulator shall be bench tested with varying sensing voltages for a 48 hour burn-in period. 17. Engine-generator set shall be provided with a structural steel base. The base shall have sufficient rigidity to accept spring type isolators, furnished under this Section, beneath the entire unit between it and building structural support. Spring isolators shall be provided in quantities determined by a qualified vibration isolation vendor to permit a minimum static deflection of 3 inches. s.. Mountings shall incorporate a leveling device, vertical limit stops and single layer of 3/4 inch Super W type pad. The mountings shall be installed directly under the structural steel base and shall be positioned to accept the weight and W weight distribution for uniform mounting deflection. Spring isolators shall be similar to Mason Industries. Inc., Type SLR, or as approved. Pads shall be similar to Mason Industries, Inc., Super W, or as approved. The vibration isolators shall not have a surge or neutral frequency within 242 of any operating speed of the engines. 18. A local indicator and control panel (LICP) in a free-standing enclosure shall be provided at diesel engine-generator set, suitably isolated from vibration, and go shall contain all necessary equipment required for control and annunciation of the unit, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Elapsed time indicator (up to 99,999.9 hours, nonresettable), to indicate time which the diesel engine-generator has run, whether or not it has been on-line. b. Jacket water temperature indicator. C. Lube oil pressure indicator. d. Lube oil temperature indicator. e. Fuel oil pressure indicator. f. Analog true rms voltmeter and six-position selector switch(1% full scale accuracy). g. Analog true rms ammeter and three-position selector switch (1% full scale accuracy). h. Analog true rms frequency meter, dial type, with 1%accuracy. i. Engine local control key switch with "automatic-run-stop" positions; key shall be removable in the stop and automatic positions only. Operation shall be as hereinbefore specified under Article 10.13. j. Engine prealarm/shutdown annunciator panel with audible alarm and silence switch. k. Mushroom type "lockout" switch. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-13 me and no load. Stable generator operation is defined as operation with terminal voltage held constant within plus or minus 1% of rated voltage. Steady state frequency regulation shall be maintained within 0.5%of 60 Hz. Windings shall be braced to withstand the maximum available line-to-line or line-to-neutral •■ short circuit current. The generator shall be provided with output termination wiring chamber, which shall contain copper bus bars of adequate size and spacing,with a minimum of eight(8) inches between phases and between phase .., and ground, so as to be able to properly terminate the load side cables. Provide solderless copper bodied, long barrel, concentric compression type 2 bolt-hole lugs. The wiring chamber shall be suitable for top or bottom entry of cable and conduit and shall be of sufficient size for termination of cable and installation of current transformers. The generator bus bars shall be arranged to be compatible with phase rotation sequence of the normal supply service. The box shall be mounted on either side or top as instructed by customer. A grounding pad shall be provided. Calculations must be submitted with the proposal response to demonstrate generator specification compliance. a. Stator: Windings shall be form wound and be of 2/3 pitch design. All insulation shall have a minimum hot spot rating of 155°C. and be of an epoxy resin type. Stator frame shall be fabricated bar and plate steel construction. The windings shall be braced to withstand single and three phase fault conditions b. Rotor: The rotor shall be a fully laminated, salient pole design. Cooling fan(s) shall be an integral part of the rotor assembly. Rotor shall be • dynamically balanced according to NEMA Std. MG1 and ANSI 2.19 (1989) except that the maximum amplitude will be .001 in. peak to peak. Rotor shall be braced to withstand overspeeds of 25% over synchronous speed. All insulation shall have a minimum hot spot rating of 155°C. and be of an epoxy resin type. C. Exciter: The exciter shall be a high-frequency, direct-connected rotating brushless type. It shall be three phase, fullwave and be matched with rotor and voltage controller. The rotating part of the exciter including the rectifier assembly shall rotate together with the alternator rotor as a complete assembly on one shaft. The exciter field leads shall be terminated on a terminal strip. All insulation shall have a minimum hot spot rating of 155°C. and be of an epoxy resin type. d. PMG: The rotor/exciter shaft shall include a permanent magnet type alternator to provide power for the voltage regulator. The PMG stator output leads shall be brought out to a terminal strip. The stator power output shall be matched to the voltage regulator requirements. All insulation shall have a minimum of 155°C. and be of an epoxy resin type. e. Temperature Sensors: The main stator shall include six temperature *■ sensor thermocouples. Each bearing shall include its own temperature sensor thermocouple. All leads shall be terminated on terminal strips located in a terminal box. Supply digital meter with selector switch matched with thermocouples mounted in the LICP. f. Auxiliary Terminal Box: A suitable terminal box separate from the main terminal box shall be supplied to house terminal strips for RTD's, exciter , field connections and PMG output leads. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-12 4M complete with d.c. ammeter, voltmeter, individual float and equalize adjustments, on-off switch, d.c. fuse and charging indicator light and shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt circuit. Charger shall automatically current limit during the engine cranking cycle. Provide two sets of Form "C" contacts rated 10 amperes at 120 volts for remote indication of the chargers low d.c. voltage and a.c. power failure alarms under another Contract. The alarm initiation shall have an adjustable time delay to compensate for loss of normal power. Chargers shall be connected to enclosure panel by this Contractor. P d. Furnish and install all interconnecting conductors as required and recommended. All prewiring on each machine that is. furnished and installed by the engine-generator manufacturer shall be installed in a suitable raceway system consisting of properly organized junction boxes, flexible metal and/or sealtite conduit raceways, termination boxes with terminal blocks with wiring identifications and all additional appurtenances, fasteners, hardware, etc., needed to achieve a neat and orderly arrangement of all branch circuit components formed into a consistent pattern. 14. Engine shall be equipped with sensors which will shut down the engine and prealarm sensors indicating the approach to specified settings, all as listed hereinafter. 15. Provide a crankcase explosion relief valve or vented crankcase for engine. 16. Generator shall be a four lead machine of required kw rating as hereinbefore specified, 0.8 p.f., 3 phase, 4 wire, with grounded neutral, 60 hertz, 120/208 volt, 1800 rpm, with Class H synthetic nonhygroscopic fungus-resistant insulation. Maximum allowable temperature rise shall be 80°C. rise over 40°C. ambient for the 125 kw minimum standby power rated unit. Generator shall be of the heavy duty, air cooled brushless revolving field type, bail bearing(s) (regreasable), dripproof construction, close-coupled directly to the engine flywheel through a flexible drive disc for positive alignment. Generator shall be capable of maintaining the rated output voltage at the terminals of the generator with a maximum total harmonic voltage distortion of 5 percent when a 100 percent nonlinear six-pulse rectifier current load profile having a 3 to 1 crest factor is applied at the terminals of the generator. Subtransient reactance shall not exceed 12% at specified load requirement. The exciter shall have "` sufficient capacity to provide ample excitation to the generator under all normal load conditions, including motor starting, and shall be of the permanent magnet type. The voltage regulator circuiting must be protected by a thermal breaker and also be inherently protected from prolonged undervoltage and underfrequency periods. The regulator power circuit shall be isolated from the distribution that occurs when the generator supplies a non-linear load. The instantaneous voltage drop shall not be greater than 20% of rated voltage when full load at rated power factor is applied to the generator, nor greater than 15% of rated voltage when any increment of 75%of full load at rated power factor is applied to the generator. Frequency modulation shall not exceed one cycle per second for the load steps previously noted and 0-5 cycles per second for 33 percent step-load at 5 second intervals with a maximum 20% voltage drop. Stable operating conditions shall be reestablished within five seconds following any sudden change in load between no load and full load or between full load Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-11 .. maximum backpressure capacity of the diesel engine-generator. For the purposes of this Specification, the following octave band sound pressure levels shall not be exceeded for conformance with the 80 dBA criteria. Maximum Sound Octave Band Power Level,dB 1 90 2 85 3 80 4 75 " 5 71 6 69 7 68 10. The cooling system shall consist of a vertically mounted radiator, fan, engine- driven water circulating pump and all accessories pertaining thereto. The • system shall have sufficient capacity for cooling the engine under full load conditions at an outdoor ambient temperature of 105T. Provide permanent type antifreeze for -25T. protection. The radiator fan shall be capable of overcoming 0.50 inch of water column static pressure external to the unit, including its radiator. 11. Provide an engine block heating system complete with contactor, thermostat .A accessories and wiring to a terminal box on the generator(for connection under another Contract). The heater shall be a size as recommended by the engine manufacturer to ensure quick automatic starting of the set in an ambient temperature of 0°F. Heaters shall be suitable for operation at single-phase, 208 volt, 60 hertz, wired to enclosure panel by this Contractor. 12. Provide a suitable filter, to filter all indoor or outdoor air, as available, for combustion. Filter shall be dry type, replaceable element. Filter shall have air restriction gauge. 13. The engine shall be started by means of a separate 24 volt d.c. automatic starting system. There shall be dual engine starting motors, each capable of starting the engine should the other one fail. Each starting motor shall be of the heavy duty type and shall automatically disconnect upon engine startup. a. The automatic starting control shall be actuated by contacts in the .. automatic transfer switches. b. Furnish and install in enclosure nickel cadmium batteries as manufactured by Nife, Inc., Alcad or approved equal,complete with steel rack for each engine, necessary cable and connectors, all in conformance with engine manufacturer's requirements. Batteries shall provide a minimum of 240 seconds of continuous crank in an ambient of from 0°F. .. to 105°F. C. For maintenance of batteries at 90-100% of full charge, a temperature sensitive automatic two-rate type battery charger, Lamarche, Nife, Inc., Simms, or as approved, shall be furnished and installed in enclosure for each engine's starting battery system. The automatic charger shall be capable of charging the batteries and the charger shall recycle automatically to high rate after a discharge. The charger shall be Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-10 The diesel engine-generator shall provide the output rating with an exhaust system including flexible connections for all piping, exhaust silencer and flue pipe having a maximum of 10 in. of water back pressure after the silencer. 2. The diesel engine shall be a full compression ignition engine, four stroke cycle, water cooled solid injection, suitable for operation with No. 2 diesel oil. The engine speed shall not exceed 1800 rpm at normal full load operation. 3. The governor shall be speed sensing, capable of maintaining accurate engine speed control for any load from open circuit to full rated load, and shall, be electronic, Woodward Model 2301A or as part of the generator's integrted electronic control system. The frequency at any constant load, including no load, shall remain within a steady state band of±0.25% of rated frequency. Frequency modulation shall not exceed one cycle per second for the addition of full load with a voltage dip not to exceed 20% of nominal voltage. The frequency regulation from no load to rated load shall be in accordance with that defined by diesel engine-generator performance. For any addition of load up to 100% of rated load, the frequency shall recover to the steady state frequency band within 5.0 seconds. 4. Replaceable element dual fuel filters shall be engine mounted and convenient s. for servicing. Dual fuel filters shall enable replacement of either one with the diesel engine-generator under full load operation. Engines shall have dual water separators with alarm contacts. Provide single lever actuation for transferring between the dual filters and dual water separators with contacts for remote indication. 5. Unit's fuel oil system shall be configured as follows: a. The engine fuel oil pump shall have the capability of lifting the supply oil 12 feet. b. Fuel oil piping, solenoid valves, check valves, and isolation valves, external to the unit shall be provided under another Contract. 6. The engine shall have a lubricating oil pump for supplying oil under constant pressure to main bearings, piston pins, timing gears, camshaft bearings, crank pin bearings, and valve rocker mechanism. Provide an oil makeup system with 10 gallon reserve lube oil reservoir for automatic lube oil makeup including reservoir lube oil level sight glass and low oil level and high oil level alarm switches wired to a terminal block in the generator local control panel for u connection to a remote alarm provided under a separate Contract. 7. A full flow shell and tube fuel oil cooler with automatic bypass valve shall be provided to ensure proper oil cooling. 8. A crankcase fumes recovery system shall be provided similar to the air-sep system, which includes air cleaners, valves and piping which recovers all fumes and return to engine intake. 9. Furnish and install for engine, a stainless steel flexible exhaust fitting and super-critical (Hospital) type Maxim, Nelson (Donaldson) or Burgess-Manning silencer (minimum 80 dBA at a distance of 5 feet 0 inches beyond the attenuated muffler discharge pipe in fully installed position; selection is responsibility of manufacturers). Exhaust outlet pipe and insulation will be provided under this Contract. The resulting available backpressure for the system, after silencer losses, shall be at least 16 inches of water, with a so maximum allowable pressure loss across the silencer not to exceed 40% of the an Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-9 so the loss of the normal source through the automatic transfer switch, which shall initiate the start of the engine-generator set with the unit ready to assume load within 10 seconds of the start signal. 2. The fuel delivery systems external to the generator sets will be furnished under another Contract. The installation of the furnished exhaust silencers and flexible connections to the exhaust manifolds, as well as the furnishing and installation of the exhaust piping from thdo silencers, including elbows, wall flanges and supports, will be provided under this Contract and installed within enclosures. G. System Operation 1. Local Indicator Control Panel(LICP) a. Provide a local indicator and control panel for installation in the Life Safety Room. Panel shall contain a key switch labeled "automatic-run- stop". From this, it shall be possible to control the respective diesel engine-generator(except when the key switch is in the "stop" position or when the"emergency stop"pushbutton has been activated). b. When the key switch is in the "stop"position,the diesel engine-generator shall be locked out. Whenever the key switch is placed in the "stop" position while the diesel engine-generator is operating but off-line, it IM shall allow a normal shutdown with a time delay to allow the engine to cool after operating under load. C. When the key switch is placed in the "auto" position, the diesel engine- we generator shall operate automatically. d. When the key switch is placed in the "run" position, the diesel engine- generator shall start and run. e. The LICP shall contain a separate "emergency stop" pushbutton. This switch shall be a mushroom type, push-to-activate and be colored red. Activation of this maintained contact switch shall cause the operation as described above for the "stop" position of the local panel key switch, except the diesel engine-generator shall stop immediately without a cooldown time delay. The control circuit associated with this switch shall not permit further operation of the engine-generator until the device is manually reset. H. Diesel Engine-Generator Set 1. Diesel engine-generator shall be capable of developing sufficient horsepower to deliver the specified kw at 80 percent power factor when equipped with all necessary operating accessories, including engine mounted radiator, auxiliary *■! pumping equipment, and fuel oil pump, and when operating under the following conditions: a. Standby power rating with outside ambient temperature of 0°F. to 105T.,0-100%relative humidity. b. At an elevation of 2000 feet above sea level. C. Room combustion air temperature of 120T. maximum, 0°F. minimum. d. Generator speed not to exceed 1800 rpm maximum at full load operation. e. The net combined output rating shall include all derating due to ambient conditions noted above and any derating due to elevated fuel oil temperatures in excess of 90T. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-8 a. The Contractor shall assume total system responsibility for all components and associated controls and shall be responsible for coordination of all system components. 9. If the submittals differ from the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall make specific mention of such difference in his letter of transmittal, with.a request for substitution, together with his reasons for same in order that, if acceptable, suitable action may be taken for proper adjustment. Otherwise the Contractor will not be relieved of the responsibility for executing the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 10. The approval of any submitted data or drawings for material, equipment apparatus, devices, arrangements and/or layout shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of furnishing same of proper dimensions and weight, capacities, sizes, quantity, quality and installation details to efficiently perform the requirements and intent of the Contract. Such approval shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors of any sort on the submitted data or shop drawings. 11. All equipment furnished under this Specification shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from the date of Owner's final acceptance of the equipment and must include all costs for repairs,parts, labor,travel and living expenses for ! * the manufacturer's service personnel. 12. Include ten complete sets of operating and maintenance manuals which shall be submitted prior to shipment of equipment. Maintenance manuals shall outline all necessary periodic functions required and shall include a recommended system for keeping logs and records. Include trouble-shooting charts, schematics of all assemblies and wiring diagrams, in sufficient detail and clarity to enable the Owner's technicians to understand, operate, and maintain the system and identify replaceable parts in an effective and expeditious manner. 13. The manufacturer warrants that all parts incorporated in the equipment and not normally available on the open market, shall be available to the Owner for a period of twenty (20) years from the date of acceptance. Manufacturer further agrees to negotiate reasonable prices for such items in good faith. In the event the Manufacturer terminates its business or manufacture of the aforesaid #0 components and does not provide for alternative sources, the manufacturer shall make available to the Owner, six months before the termination of manufacture of the product line, all drawings and specifications for such parts so that they *0 may be manufactured by the Owner or procured elsewhere. The Manufacturer shall also provide a complete and a recommended spare parts list for the system. This list shall provide commercial equivalents where available. s" 14. Equipment and materials shall be new of heavy duty industrial construction, listed by the Underwriters Laboratories (components only where applicable), and manufactured in accordance with OSHA, NEMA, ANSI, and IEEE Standards. F. General Description 1. Furnish a emergency power distribution and control system with one (1) diesel engine-generator set at 125 kw. When equipped with all necessary operating accessories, such as a.c. generator, radiator fan, fuel pump, water pump, etc., and complete with required starting system, local and remote control equipment, and safety devices. The control system shall be capable of sensing on Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-7 a. Emergency diesel generator set required to achieve the hereinafter .w specified capacities, including all required appurtenances, control equipment and distribution gear. b. Complete shop and installation drawings. **� C. Factory testing. d. Final field inspection and acceptance. e. Site acceptance testing to verify operational integrity. ... f. A complete installation including,but not limited to, all interconnections, bus,cable,wire, etc., to the emergency generator system. g. Storage, reloading equipment on vehicles at the designated delivery area, transport and rigging equipment to point of installation. h. Erection and installation of equipment. 3. The equipment shall be suitably crated to prevent any damage in transit and during storage and final rigging at the site. Movable parts shall be suitably blocked. Transparent, heavy gauge plastic covers shall be used to protect the equipment from weather damage during shipping, storage and delivery. 4. The system product shall be from the authorized dealer of the generator manufacturer's organization, established to design and build engine-generator power plants, and shall be fully qualified and authorized to provide service and parts for both the engine and generator. The system supplier shall assume responsibility for the generator set and must demonstrate that experienced factory personnel are available on a 24 hour basis, seven days a week, for service from a location within two hours from the installation. •�+ 5. The engine manufacturer shall warrant for a period of 20 years that it will maintain a complete parts inventory and make the same available for replacement of any of the units provided. These parts may be available to other customers of the engine manufacturer as well. If taken from inventory for use by this project or any other customer, it is to be replaced within 30 days. The Contractor states that it will be responsible for any costs incurred by Owner for , failure to comply with this warranty. 6. The engine-generators and control system shall be provided from a single source. Make every effort to furnish all equipment of any generic equipment type from one manufacturer. if not of one manufacturer, all components requiring interfacing must be coordinated between manufacturers prior to submission of shop drawings for approval to insure compatibility of equipment upon installation. Shop drawings shall be so annotated when submitted. a. Provide all required documents showing necessary points of support, reactions and supplementary bracing. 7. The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval eight (8) sets of detailed composite shop and installation drawings for all equipment furnished under this Contract. In case of question, the Owner/Engineer will be the final judge as to the requirement for shop drawings for specific areas of work. Within 10 days .� after award of the Contract, submit a list of drawings to be furnished 10 days after issue of the Contract. 8. All submittals shall be complete and shall contain all required and detailed information for all components of the system, including all necessary wiring diagrams and/or interconnecting cable schematics for connection of the generator. The interconnect diagrams shall be composite drawings for all components and shall indicate wiring and termination points for all cable. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-6 6 Operate control relay contacts to "hand-off' a signal Op y gnat to the direct digital control (DDC)building management system. b. Activation of a duct smoke detector shall automatically: 1) Provide those operations as above-listed in Paragraph A., Subparagraphs 9.a.1)through 6). 2) Cause its respective fan system to shut down; this shutdown shall be accomplished by hard-wiring between each detector relay and the respective fan starter. 3) Wiring shall be provided between each detector relay and the remote test station specified herein. C. Activation of an elevator lobby smoke detector shall automatically: 1) Provide those operations as above-listed in Paragraph A., Subparagraphs 9.a.1)through 6). 2) Operate control relay contacts to "hand-off' a single to the elevator control system for elevator recall. Furnish and install all wiring and conduit between the fire alarm control panel and the Elevator Machine Room to accomplish this function. 10. As indicated on the drawings, the Contractor shall provide an override switch, which will allow one-way voice communications via the fire alarm system's speaker/horn/strobes. In connection with the above, the Contractor shall provide all microphones, amplifiers, junction boxes, raceway, wire, modules and programming for a working voice override system from both the fire command station and the remote annunciator location. 11. Preliminary Testing: Upon completion of the wiring system, the Electrical Contractor shall test same to verify continuity and that the wiring is free of shorts, grounds and the like. After testing, the Contractor shall notify SecurityLink that the wiring is complete and ready to accept connections to the equipment. 12. Associated with the fire alarm system's smoke control function, provide a system operation report in accordance with 780 CMR 921.6.1. 13. Associated with the fire alarm system, including the smoke control function, submit an acceptance testing procedure for approval, in accordance with 78 CMR 921.6.2. Provide all materials and labor to conduct said test, coordinate testing to occur at the convenience of both the Engineer and the Fire Department. E. Standby Emergency Power System: The work under this Section includes furnishing and installation of equipment required for a complete and operational on-site generating system, as hereinafter described. I. Approved System Suppliers Caterpillar po Cummins Detroit Diesel Kohler 2. The Contractor shall provide all materials and services for manufacturing, delivering, unloading and installing the generating system equipment. The work required by this Contract shall include the following. Smith Campus Center Electrical so Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-5 7. The fire alarm system and its installation shall be provided in conformance with all applicable portions of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1992. 8. System shall be 4100 series addressable fire alarm control panel as manufactured by Simplex Grunnell of Westminster, Massachusetts, and shall include,but not necessarily be limited to, the following: a. Fire alarm control panel, flush-mounted,Model 4100. b. Distributed Intelligent Units, Model 4000 series intelligent initiating devices. C. Manual pullstations, double-action type, surface- or flush-mounted, as indicated on the drawing, Model 4000 series. • d. Duct smoke detectors,photoelectronic type,Model 4000 series. 1) For each duct smoke detector related to a fan system, include a 2088 series relay for fan shutdown and a wall-mounted remote .. rest/reset station Model 4000 series. 2) For each duct smoke detector related to a supply air or return air fire/smoke damper, include a wall-mounted remote test/reset station Model 4000 series. 3) Each remote test/reset station requires a 24 VDC power supply which shall be obtained from the main fire alarm control panel. For this purpose, furnish and install a separate two-conductor No. 14 cable and connect as required. e. Combination speaker/hom-strobe units, Model 4000 series (flush- mounted or surface-mounted). f. Strobe units,Model 400 series(flush-mounted or surface-mounted). g. Beam smoke detectors series 2098. 9. System Alarm Operation a. Operation of any manual fire alarm pullstation,area smoke detector,duct smoke detector or sprinkler water flow alarm switch shall automatically: 1) Sound a pulsing audible signal at the fire alarm control panel. Pressing the alarm silence switch on the fire alarm control panel shall silence the audible signal during the alarm condition. Subsequent alarm conditions shall resound the audible signal. 2) Visually annunciate the device initiating the alarm condition at the fire alarm control panel. The visual indication shall remain on until the alarm condition is reset to normal. 3) Visually annunciate the device initiating thealarm condition at the ..� remote annunciator panel. The visual indication shall remain on until the alarm condition is reset to normal. 4) Activate all speaker/homs throughout the building; all speaker/ horns shall emit a pre-recorded evacuation announcement alternating with a synchronized, three (3) pulse temporal pattern, in accordance with NFPA 72, as required by 780 CMR 9.17. + 5) Flash all alarm strobe light units throughout the building. The alarm strobe light units shall be automatically turned off at approximately the same time that the alarm speakers stop sounding. Subsequent alarm conditions from other alarm initiating devices shall again turn on the alarm strobe light units and speaker/homs. �. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-4 C. Division of Responsibility(Campus Service) 1. This Contractor shall furnish and install the following: a. 208/120 volt cabling and related conduits between the exterior transformer and the interior main service switchboard and all related connections to the transformer and the incoming line section of the service switchboard. b. Conduit and wiring between existing underground vault and new high voltage switchgear. C. Existing high voltage substation(outdoor). d. Installation of underground conduits and 5 kv cables to the splicing chamber. e. Installation of 5 kv rated air interrupter duplex switches(primary service) and outdoor high-voltage step-down transformer. D. Fire, Smoke and Sprinkler Detection and Alarm System 1. Furnish and install a complete addressable, analog, microprocessor-based fire, smoke and sprinkler detection and alarm system. 2. The system shall include,but not necessarily be limited to, the following: a. Fire alarm control panel. b. Distributed intelligent units(DfU). C. Addressable manual fire alarm pull stations. d. Addressable analog area smoke detectors. e. Addressable, analog elevator lobby smoke detectors. f. Addressable, analog duct smoke detectors. g. Beam smoke detectors. h. *Sprinkler water flow alarm switches. I. *Sprinkler valve tamper switches. J_ Combination alarm speaker/horn-strobe light units. k. Alarm strobe light units. * Furnished and installed under another Section of the Specifications, wired under this Section. 3. All equipment shall be UL listed and conform to the latest UL standards: a. UL 864 Fire Protective Signaling Systems. b. UL 268 Smoke Detectors. C. UL 1480 Fire Alarm Signaling Devices. d. UL 1971 Visual Fire Alarm Signaling Devices. 4. National Fire Protection Association Standards a. NFPA Standard No. 70- 1996 Edition National Electrical Code. b. NFPA Standard No. 72 - 1993 Edition National Fire Alarm Code. C. NFPA Standard No. 90A - 1993 Edition Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 5. All control equipment shall be UL listed under Category UOJZ as an interrelated assembly by a single manufacturer. 6. All raceways and wiring shall be installed in compliance with NFPA Standard 70 (National Electrical Code - Article 760). All applicable portions of the National Electrical Code shall be implicitly followed, in particular with regard to material type and quality, circuitry extensions from and connections to outlet and junction boxes,panelboards and similar appurtenances. so Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-3 am 1.5 SCOPE OF WORK '* A. Provide all materials, labor, equipment, tools, appliances, services, hoisting, scaffolding, support and supervision for all Documents. cal � Work,and all related work complete, to accordance with the Contract 1.6 WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Furnishing of motors,motor control devices,and unit heaters. B. Furnishing of mechanical and plumbing system alarm devices, unless otherwise specifically mentioned herein or noted on drawings. C. All finished painting of exposed conduits and apparatus. D. All cutting and patching. E. All control and alarm wiring for Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning and Plumbing Work. 1,7 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS A. General 1. Include all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Electrical Work as shown on the drawings and specified herein, including, but not limited to,the following: a. All work in connection with the new electric service to be obtained from the existing campus 2.4 kv distribution. b. All work in connection with distribution of the new electric service (outdoor medium voltage load interrupter fusible switchgear and step- down transformer). C. All adjustment required to the existing medium voltage switchgear (the ON individual overload protection devices). d. All work in connection with standby emergency power system and automatic transfer switches. am e. Main unit substation and service switchboard. f. Subdistribution and panelboards. g. Feeders, subfeeders, and branch circuiting for light, power and control wiring, including connections to all service and distribution switchboards, panelboards, transformers, outlets, motors and equipment included in these Specifications or indicated on the accompanying drawings. h. Lighting equipment, lighting fixtures and lamps. i. Lightning protection system. j. Empty conduit system for communications wiring. ON k. Fire, smoke and sprinkler detection and alarm system. 1. Preparation of a set of"record" drawings. B. Electric Service 1. A new service will be supplied at 2.4 kv, 3 phase, 3 wire, 60 hertz. 2. This Contractor shall perform all work as listed hereinafter under "Division of Responsibility —Campus Service". Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-2 SECTION 16100 ELECTRICAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Provide all electrical work in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General and Supplementary General Conditions accompanying these Specifications are hereby made a part of the requirements for the work under this Section of the Specifications. B. Where General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions clauses are repeated in these Specifications, it is to call special attention to them, or as a further qualification. No General Conditions and/or Supplementary General Conditions clause referring to the work of this Section shall be considered waived unless specifically stated herein. C. The "General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for Construction" A.I.A. Document No. A-201, latest edition. shall be included as part of this Section. 1.3 NOTICE TO BIDDERS A. Before submittal of bid, examine all drawings, specifications, addenda, alternates, special conditions, and all other bidding documents of all Sections of this project, verify all governing conditions at the site, and become fully informed as to the extent and character of the work required, as well as its relation to other work in the building. Submitt al of a bid is an agreement to all requirements of the Contract Documents, and no consideration will be granted for any claimed misunderstanding thereof. B. Submittal of a bid is deemed a representation by the bidder that it is qualified in all respects properly to perform the work for which it is bidding and has experience with similar work. Bidders are deemed to be aware, on the basis of their background and experience, of materials which may be required in the discharge of their !! responsibilities, even though unspecified. For example, claims for extras for unspecified shonng or supporting materials will not be considered if the need for such materials would have been reasonably obvious to bidders skilled and experienced in the work to be done, and the submittal of a bid shall be deemed a waiver of any such claims. 1.4 CONTRACTOR A. Throughout these Specifications, the term "this Contractor" shall be understood to mean the individual, partnership or corporation to whom has been awarded the contract for providing the Electrical Work. Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-1 7 7 7 7 7 7 Z 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 3 l 7 7 e E 1 1 1 e 8 Q E E e c e t TABLE OF CONTENTS(Continued) X Article Title Page 16100- 1.28 Operating and Maintenance Instructions 33 1.29 Tools 33 1.30 Sleeves 33 1.31 Record Drawings 34 .. 1.32 Unit Prices 34 PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 Approved Manufacturers 36 2.2 Unit Substations, 2.4 kv-208Y/120 Volt, 3 Phase,4 Wire 39 2.3 Main Service Switchboard 41 2.4 Panelboards 42 2.5 Conduit 44 2.6 Outlet Boxes 46 2.7 Insulating Bushings 47 2.8 Cabinets 47 2.9 Junction and Pull Boxes 47 2.10 Local Switches 47 2.11 Plates 48 2.12 Taps and Splices 48 2.13 Receptacles 48 2.14 Wire and Cable 49 2.15 Medium Voltage Cables 49 2.16 Nameplates 53 2.17 Painting 53 2.18 Access Doors for Finished Construction 53 2.19 Lamps 53 2.20 Lighting Fixtures 53 2.21 Electric Heat Tracing System 54 .. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Light and Power Wiring System 55 3.2 Location of Wiring and Outlets 55 3.3 Motor Winng and Controls 56 3.4 Inserts, Anchors. Etc. 56 3.� Disconnect Means 56 ).6 Concrete Work and Housekeeping Pads 57 3.7 Tests 57 3.8 Lighting Equipment, General Requirements 58 so 3.9 Seismic Restraints 59 as Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 1000/o Construction Documents: 01.11.12 16100-TC-2 SECTION 16100 ELECTRICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS Article Title Page 16100- PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 General I 1.2 Related Documents I 1.3 Notice to Bidders I 1.4 Contractor I 1.5 Scope of Work 2 1.6 Work of Other Sections 2 1.7 Description of Systems 2 A. General 2 B. Electric Service 2 C. Division of Responsibility(Campus Service) 3 D. Fire, Smoke and Sprinkler Detection and Alarm System 3 E. Standby Emergency Power System 5 F. General Description 7 G. System Operation 8 H. Diesel Engine-Generator Set 8 I. Generator Sound Attenuating Enclosure 15 ! ' J. Load Bank 17 K. Generator Set Auxiliary Equipment and Accessories 18 L. Panel Up-Gen 18 ± s M. "Breakglass Station" 18 1.8 Shipping and Rigging 18 1.9 Taps and Splices 19 1.10 Labels 19 1.11 Testing 19 1.12 Automatic Transfer Switch 21 1.13 General Requirements 25 1.14 Verifying Existing Conditions 27 1.15 Qualifications 27 1.16 Coordination 28 1.17 Subcontracts 28 1.18 Codes and Permits 29 1.19 Engineenng Reference Points 29 120 Guarantee 29 1.21 Architect's and/or Engineer's Review 29 1.22 Submittals 31 1.23 Cutting and Patching 32 1.24 Rubbish Removal 32 1.25 Protective Painting 32 w 1.26 Identification of Systems and Equipment 32 1.27 Cleaning 33 w Smith Campus Center Electrical Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 0 1.1 1.12 16100-TC-1 B. Protect the work and material of others from damage that might be caused by work or workmen of this Section and make good any damage thus caused. END OF SECTION 16100 XAprojectsA 19\11993-Smith College\Spec\BATC_100°/.Construction_01-1 1-12_mam-kts.doc Irr ow a� atp all 4W MW on IM Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-66 ,�, M B. Three service kits for use by building personnel in testing and making minor service adjustments of the system shall be furnished and delivered to the Owner and a receipt obtained. This kit shall be adequate for the building personnel trained by this Trade to effect the immediate repair of the remote equipment specified above. The following items shall be included as a minimum service kit requirement: 1. Specialized nonstandard tools and adapters and fittings required for operating, maintaining, testing and adjustment of the system. C. In addition to the above service kits, special tools and spare parts required for operation and maintenance of equipment shall be furnished and delivered to the Owner and a receipt obtained. A list of the special tools and spare parts to be supplied shall be detailed in the technical proposal. These items shall be given to the Owner .0, prior to or at the time of the instruction to operating personnel. The special tools and spare parts shall,as a minimum, consist of the following: 1. Keys for thermostats and humidistats, six each. 1 2. Lubricant required for automatic valves and automatic dampers, one year supply. D. Warrant the continuous future availability of service for the central automation system. The servicing shall be provided by a factory trained service representative. E. Components,parts and assemblies shall be guaranteed against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one year after final Owner acceptance. In addition, provide preventive maintenance, operator instruction (as described hereinbefore) and system maintenance training. F. During system commissioning and prior to the guarantee period, provide the operating instructions to the Owner's console operators. G. For the purpose of definition, the following shall apply: 1. Beneficial Use: This shall mean that the Owner's operators are able to use the facility and receive reliable information therefrom in their nonnal work schedules for inputs and outputs in the automation system in which this vendor has completed work. 2. Acceptance: The effective date of the start of the 12 month service contract A�W shall constitute formal acceptance of the system or portions thereof. 3. Guarantee: The terms of the service contract shall fulfill the guarantee requirements. The expiration of the first 12 month paid-up service contract shall constitute termination of the guarantee period unless excepted by amendments to the service contract. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Be responsible for work and equipment provided under this Section until finally inspected, tested and accepted. Materials and equipment shall be carefully stored on which are not immediately installed after delivery to site. Close exposed parts of the work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of moisture or obstructing materials_ Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-65 .w am G. Minimum validation and sign-off requirement (on all work stations) shall be as follows: 1. Run samples of specified reports and trends. MW 2. Execute menu tree. 3. Display all required graphics. 4. Execute digital and analog commands via mouse and keyboard. , 5. Demonstrate data entry/point modification/programming. 6. Demonstrate program downloading. 7. Demonstrate program uploading. 8. Demonstrate control loop execution and stability. 9. Demonstrate specified diagnostics. 10. Demonstrate scan, update and alarm response. 11. Execute all-points summary. 12. Execute communication status checks. H. The guarantee period shall not start until systems in this Section have been approved .� and accepted by the Owner, Architect and Engineer, as detailed in the previous paragraph, at which time the Owner will accept, in writing, the system of this Section in its entirety. This does not preclude the beneficial use by the Owner of any portion of the system prior to final acceptance of the whole system. I. During the guarantee period, the vendor shall test the system under varying seasonal conditions to ensure that all operational sequences, as specified, are performed correctly. This shall include at least three additional visits after initial Owner acceptance. Where necessary, the vendor shall make programming adjustments and ., instrument calibrations at no cost to the Owner. 3.5 INSTRUCTION OF OPERATING PERSONNEL A. Operating Instructions: Provide a minimum of 40 hours of operating and maintenance instruction for ten building operators, with personal on job instruction by factory trained engineers representing the direct control system manufacturer. This instruction shall be scheduled at time(s) convenient to the Owner's personnel. Instruction shall cover all equipment and systems provided under this Section. The number of hours is a minimum requirement; where additional hours are specified in , other paragraphs of this Section, those hours shall be additive to the minimum above. Instruction shall be comprised of both classroom type and actual hands-on operating experience. Submit an outline of the instruction program and instruction manual to .� the Owner for his approval at least two weeks prior to the proposed start date of the instruction sessions. The Owner will videotape all instruction sessions for purposes of future training. Provide a review and written critique of Owner's videotape within one month after completion of the instruction sessions and receipt of the Owner's videotapes. The critique shall correct all mistakes and clarify all outstanding questions which arise during the sessions. w� 3.6 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Ten complete sets, each, of the following shall be provided: Written operating and maintenance instructions, as-built drawings, specification data sheets and maintenance schedules. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-64 ,.,, P0 C. Suitable templates or instructions, or both, shall be provided under this Section for setting items placed in the forms. Items to be embedded in concrete, as specified in this Section, shall be inspected and their locations and positions verified by parties involved in such work. 3.4 TESTING, CALIBRATION AND COMMISSIONING A. After completion of the installation of work in this Section, test, regulate, and adjust system equipment, controllers, alarms, thermostats, humidistats, automatic control valves, automatic damper motors, and related system accessories, the entire automation system, including interconnections with the building life safety system, and place these items in complete and satisfactory operating condition. B. Furnish labor and test apparatus required to calibrate and prepare for service instruments, controls and accessory equipment furnished under this Section. This work includes: Zero, span and range calibration checks of instruments and accessories, both field and panel mounted. In addition, the vendor shall check actuators, control valves and automatic dampers, to insure proper action, stroke each actuator valve and automatic damper, and make necessary adjustments for stem and blade travel. C. Furnish labor and test apparatus required to check the operation of control loops, set points and interlocks, as well as electronic equipment. The Contractor shall test every input/output point for proper performance through the entire system and maintain accurate test records for each point throughout the testing cycle and thereafter. The Owner reserves the right to inspect those test records at any time and also to witness any of the point tests he deems appropriate. Testing shall be witnessed and accepted by Owner's representative and this Trade shall be responsible for correcting any work WA unacceptable to Owner. D. Upon completion of the testing and calibration and in the presence of the Owner, Architect and Engineer, conduct an inspection of the control system and perform such tests that will be required to determine that contract obligations have been fulfilled. Notify Owner, Architect and Engineer two (2) weeks in advance of readiness to make �r such tests. E. For site tests, the Contractor shall submit a test plan for review by the Owner. After review of the plan, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a detailed test procedure for review. The test procedure shall also include reference to the Specification Section and Paragraph with which each test is intended to demonstrate compliance, together with the criteria for acceptance or rejection. F. The site system test, conducted by the Contractor in accordance with the test procedures and project schedules,and witnessed by the Owner, Architect or Engineer, shall be a comprehensive test of the system to demonstrate that all aspects of the hardware and software are in conformance with the Specification requirements. The system test shall include testing of all network computers so as to demonstrate no substantial degradation of performance of their functions as buildings, blocks, and 1, network computers are added to the system. The Owner shall be notified at least five (5) working days prior to any testing and shall have the option of witnessing any and all tests. W Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-63 .. P. Conduits shall be offset where they enter surface mounted equipment. Wiring installed in panels and other enclosures shall be neatly looped and laced. Q. Conduit runs which extend from the interior to the exterior of a building shall be sealed to prevent the circulation of air. This shall be accomplished by the installation of sealing fittings. R. All wires terminating at each field device,terminal box, field equipment cabinet,DDC control unit, or any other terminals, shall be identified using Brady clip sleeve type nonmetallic wire markers or equivalent. The identification shall be consistent with the tagging indicated on the approved shop drawings. The same identification code shall be carried through from the field device to the final termination point. After identification is complete, the wire markers shall be anchored using a single layer of , non-yellowing clear mylar tape. S. Wires shall be terminated with insulated spade type lugs on screw terminals. Soldered connections shall only be made at instruments where no other means of termination is practical. T. Perform continuity testing for all wiring installed. U. Control raceways shall not be hung from electrical raceways or attached to ceiling grid hanger wires. .. V. Percent fill of conduit, EMT or IMC shall not exceed Code maximum, regardless of service. W. No 300 volt insulated wiring shall terminate within or occupy any enclosure containing conductors operating at a voltage greater than 300 volts. This particularly applies to any analog or digital UO wiring entering 460 volt motor starter enclosures or motor control centers. X. Provide, install and wire receptacles for Control Room devices. Y. Use of tie wraps for supporting conduit, wire,cable, etc., will not be permitted. 3.2 LOCATION OF WIRING AND OUTLETS A. Coordinate with other Sections involved in this work so that exact locations may be obtained for outlets, apparatus, appliances and wiring. 3.3 CONCRETE PADS, FOUNDATIONS, SUPPORTS AND PIERS A. Concrete pads, foundations, supports and piers inside the building will be provided under another Section. B. For Concrete work, furnish necessary inserts, anchors, bolts, forms, etc., for foundations, supports, pads, bases, and piers required for the support of equipment. These inserts, etc., will be set under another Section. .� Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-62 .w E. 120 volt a.c. circuits used for control and instrumentation shall be taken from panelboards connected to the emergency power distribution system, with the exception of circuits powered from motor starters. Panelboard and circuit breakers shall be provided under the Electrical Section, but the wiring and raceway materials and installation for ATC system power requirements shall be furnished under this Section. so F. 120 volt a.c. circuits used for control and instrumentation shall be dedicated to the ATC system and shall not be used for any other purposes. G. Conveniently located terminal junction boxes shall be used for the transition from the single pair local signal cables to the multipair homerun cable. These boxes shall have "terminal schedules"attached to the inside of their covers displaying the terminals and the service tags of the cables terminated there. H. Conduits shall be run exposed in mechanical spaces, concealed in occupied spaces, and parallel or perpendicular to structural members or architectural features. I. Bends in conduit shall not have a radius less than six (6) times the diameter of the w conduit, nor bend more than 90 degrees, and shall be in accordance with NEC requirements. J. Provide junction boxes or pull boxes as required and necessary to avoid excessively long runs or too many bends between outlets. u K. Fittings in conduit containing multi-conductor cables shall be oversized to accommodate 3 times cable bending radius for 90 degree bends and 4 times bending radius for straight runs. L. Expansion fittings shall be provided with bonding jumpers. Expansion joint fittings shall be provided at each point where conduits cross expansion joints and conduit is rigidly attached to structure on both sides of joint. Where there is a 45 degree or greater bend and five feet of unconfined conduit on one side of the joint, the fittings may be omitted. M. For conduit supports and installation of wires and cables, see applicable paragraphs of the Electrical Section of the Specifications. r N. Conduit entering a cabinet, box, trough, etc., shall be secured with a locknut on the outside and on the inside, such that the conduit system is electrically continuous throughout. A bushing shall also be provided on the inside. Bushings shall be metal with insulated throats. Locknuts shall be the type designed to bite into the metal, or on the inside of the enclosure shall have a grounding wedge lug under the locknut, as manufactured by Thomas & Betts, or approved equal. Top or side of any enclosure in No a nonfinished area, such as Garages, Substations, Rooms, etc., shall be terminated with screwed waterproof hubs such as manufactured by Myers. O. Conduit box type connectors for conduit entering enclosures shall be the insulated throat type. Smith Campus Center BATC on Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-61 14. Alarms called for under the Electrical Section of the Specifications, as follows: a. Diesel-Generator (Each Engine) 1) Common alarm. 2) Generator run status. 3) Generator failure to run alarm. b. Automatic Transfer Switch(each) 1) Connected to normal. 2) Connected to emergency. 3) Normal power available. 4) Emergency power available. 15. Alarms called for under the Plumbing Section of the Specifications, as follows: a. Hot Water Heaters(Each) 1) High temperature alarm. b. Sump(Each New and Existing) 1) High level alarm. C. Ejector(Each Exisitng) 1) High level alarm. 16. Signal Devices a. All signal devices for equipment furnished and installed under the w„ Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning, Electrical, and Plumbing Sections shall be furnished and installed by the respective Trade on the applicable equipment. b. All wiring between the signal devices (alarm contacts) and this system shall be installed as part of this Section. U. Steam Pressure Reducing Valve Station Controls: This Section shall provide all power, control and alarm wiring associated with the steam pressure reducing valve station controls and alarm monitoring, as described in Section 15600 of the Contract Documents and the associated drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ELECTRICAL WIRING A. All wiring shall be in approved raceways (cable tray, conduit, EMT, etc.). Wiring within dry wall cavities or enclosures or beneath raised floor construction shall be in conduit. Wiring shall be independently supported from the building structure with bridal rings and clips. The supporting of wiring from mechanical ductwork or piping is not acceptable. B. Cables for 120124 volt a.c. wiring, communications wiring and low level signal wiring (i.e., 4-20 mA analog) shall always be run in separate raceways. C. Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit, 1/2 inch minimum size, for making connections at instruments and devices mounted on piping or vessels or on equipment subject to vibration. D. Low level signal wiring homeruns to local control stations may be by means of multi- pair cables. The number of pairs in such cables shall be uniform throughout the installation, and, in general, there shall be at least 20% spare pairs in each such cable. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-60 f. Maximum air flow set point. g. Fan start/stop. h. Fan status. 6. Outdoor air temperature via weather station. 7. Outdoor air humidity via weather station. 8. Miscellaneous Exhaust Fans(Each) a. Start/stop. b. Status(via current sensing relays). 9. Chilled Water System a. Start/stop(via variable frequency drive). b. Status(via current sensing relay). C. Speed control (via variable frequency drive). an d. Speed feedback(via variable frequency drive). e. Malfunction alarm(via variable frequency drive). f. System differential pressure. g. Common chilled water supply temperature. h. Common chilled water return temperature. i. Temperature control valve control. j. Chilled water flow(gpm). 10. Steam Pressure Reducing Valve Station a. Common high pressure alarm- high pressure side. go b. Common low pressure alarm-high pressure side. C. Common high pressure alarm-low pressure side. d. Common low pressure alarm-low pressure side. 11. Expansion Tanks(Each) a. High pressure alarm. b. Low pressure alarm. 12. Hot Water System !* a. Pump start/stop(each pump via variable frequency drive). b. Pump speed control(each pump via variable frequency drive). C. Pump speed feedback(each pump via variable frequency drive). d. Pump variable frequency drive malfunction(each pump). e. Perimeter hot water system supply water temperature. f. Perimeter hot water system return water temperature. g. Reheat hot water system supply water temperature. h. Reheat hot water system return water temperature. L Plate and frame heat exchanger supply water temperature (each exchanger). J. Plate and frame heat exchanger return water temperature (each exchanger). k. System differential pressure. 1. Pump status(each pump). M. Steam valve control. n. Minimum flow valve control. o. Reheat hot water system water flow(gpm). p. Boiler common alarm. q. Boiler hot water reset. 13. Steam condensate flow(gpm). Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-59 an 2. Dining Area Air Conditioning System (Typical for Multipurpose Room Air Conditioning System) a. Start/stop(each fan via variable frequency drive). ,■ b. Status(each fan via current sensing relay). C. Speed control (each fan via variable frequency drive). d. Emergency stop(each fan via variable frequency drive). e. Speed feedback(each fan via variable frequency drive). f. Emergency start(each fan via variable frequency drive). g. Supply air temperature. h. Return air temperature. i. Variable frequency drive malfunction each fan via variable frequency drive). j. Chilled water valve control. k. Steam valve control. 1. Return air damper control. M. Maximum outdoor air damper control. n. High discharge pressure switch. o. Low suction pressure switch. p. Low temperature thermostat. ** q. Spill air damper control. r. Supply air flow(cfm). S. Return air flow(cfm). t. Minimum outdoor air flow(cfm). U. Return air humidity. V. Reheat Coil Control. , 3. Kitchen Heating and Ventilating Unit a. Start/stop. b. Status(via current sensing relay). C. Emergency stop d. Emergency start e. Supply air temperature. f. Steam valve control. A* g. High discharge pressure switch. h. Low suction pressure switch. i. Low temperature thermostat. 4. Variable Air Volume Terminal Units (Each) a. Space temperature. b. Damper control. C. Air flow. d. Minimum air flow set point. e. Maximum air flow set point. 5. Fan Powered Variable Air Volume Terminal Units(Each) a. Space temperature. b. Damper control. c. Reheat coil control (as required). d. Air flow. e. Minimum air flow set point. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 0 l.11.12 15950-58 , „ 10. A DDC reset program shall reset the hot water supply temperature set point of the boiler based on a manual command at the network computer. Set point reset shall be via interface signal to the boiler control panel. 11. A flow meter installed in the main hot water return line shall provide an input to a DDC two-mode software program which shall modulate the normally closed hot water bypass valve to maintain minimum flow set point (constant flow through the boiler). 12. Temperature transmitters located in main hot water supply line and main return line of the perimeter hot water system and hot water reheat system shall provide remote indication at the DDC system network computer. 13. The DDC system shall monitor a common malfunction alarm originating at the boiler control panel. No 14. A DDC software program shall activate an alarm at the network computer if the outdoor air temperature drops below 55°F. and a hot water pump is not operating. ON 15. Mechanical Equipment Room: Activation of a breakglass located outside each exit from the Mechanical Equipment Room shall stop the boiler. Switch shall be furnished, installed and hardwired by this Section. S. Expansion Tank Makeup Pump Controls: This Section shall provide all control wiring associated with the expansion tank makeup pump controls as described in Section 15600 of the Contract Documents and the associated Contract Drawings. T. Miscellaneous System Points: The following system points are in addition to those called for in the "Description of Control Operation". 1. Main Building Air Conditioning Systems(Each) a. Start/stop(each fan via variable frequency drive). b. Status (each fan via current sensing relay). C. Speed control (each fan via variable frequency drive). d. Emergency stop(each fan via variable frequency drive). e. Speed feedback(each fan via variable frequency drive). f. Emergency start(each fan via variable frequency drive). g. Supply air temperature. h. Return air temperature. L Variable frequency drive malfunction(each fan via variable frequency drive). j. Chilled water valve control. k. Steam valve control. 1. Return air damper control. m. Minimum outdoor air damper control. n. Maximum outdoor air damper control. o. High discharge pressure switch. p. Low suction pressure switch. q. Low temperature thermostat. r. Spill damper control. S. Supply air flow(cfm). t. Return air flow(cfm). U. Minimum outdoor air flow(cfm). Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-57 network computer and alarm printer and start the standby pump. An audible signal shall also alert the operator to the alarmed condition. 3. The DDC system shall start the lead perimeter hot water pump when outdoor .w air temperature, as measured by the weather station, drops below 55°F., and stop the system when outdoor air temperature rises to 60°F. d.b. The lead reheat coil hot water pump shall be started by an operator and run continuously. .. One(1)nonpotable water pump shall run continuously. 4. Hot water supply temperature shall be controlled by a 3-mode direct acting DDC software controller, based upon an input from an electronic temperature transmitter measuring leaving hot water supply temperature from the converter. On an increase in hot water supply temperature, the DDC temperature controller shall modulate closed the 1/3 capacity and 2/3 capacity normally closed steam control valves to maintain set point. On a decrease in temperature, the controller will modulate open the steam valves to maintain set point. The valves will be modulated in sequence. 5. Hot Water Pump Speed Control: A differential pressure transmitter located at ... the farthest floor served by the system shall provide an input to a DDC two- mode software controller which shall modulate the speed of the lead pump variable frequency drive to maintain system differential set point at 80% pump flow. There shall be a differential pressure transmitter and software controller per pump set. 6. Nonpotable Water Pump Control: The nonpotable water heater shall provide a w. dry contact output(representing a request to start the lead pump)which shall be wired to the DDC system. On receiving the contact signal, the DDC system shall start the lead pump. On failure of the lead pump as sensed via current sensing relay, the standby pump shall start and an alarm shall be activated at the DDC system. 7. Perimeter Hot Water System_ Hot water supply temperature shall be controlled by a 3-mode direct acting DDC software controller, based upon an input from an electronic temperature transmitter measuring leaving hot water supply temperature. The set point of the controller shall be reset by a DDC software reset program, based upon outdoor dry bulb temperature. A decrease in « outdoor temperature will raise the set point of the controllers from 95°F. to 190°F. as outdoor temperature drops from 60°F. to 0°F. During the night and unoccupied times, a DDC software program shall reset the set point of each controller from 75°F. to 170°F. as outdoor temperature drops from 60°F. to 0°F. 8. The hot water boiler shall be furnished with factory-mounted and wired control .. panel and pipe-mounted sensors shipped loose for mounting and wiring by this Section. 9. When steam is not available, the operator shall manually valve open the boiler and valve closed the converter. The operator via the network computer shall start the lead reheat hot water pump. When the boiler is required for operation a hardwired interlocked shall start the Pump Room makeup fan and its damper shall open. A flow switch in the main hot water supply line and a flow switch in the makeup air duct shall be interlocked with the boiler start circuit. The boiler shall be prevented from starting on a loss of air or water flow. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 0 l.11.12 15950-56 ,.,, Q. Chilled Water System 1. The chilled water system shall consist of two (2) chilled water pumps. One pump shall be a standby pump. Pumps shall be furnished with variable frequency drives. 2. The lead pump shall be started locally or through the DDC system from the network computer and run continuously. A DDC runtime totalization program shall automatically alternate pumps to equalize runtime. 3. The DDC system shall monitor pump status via a current sensing relay furnished and installed by this Section. Should a pump fail to start or fail to run after starting, the DDC system through a 0-30 second (adjustable) time delay relay shall send an alarm to the network computer and alarm printer. An audible signal shall also alert the operator to the alarmed condition. The standby pump shall automatically start. 4. Chilled Water Pump Differential Pressure Control: A differential pressure transmitter located upstream of the furthest unit served by the system shall provide an input to a DDC software two-mode controller (PI) which shall modulate the pump speed to maintain differential pressure set point. 5. An electronic temperature transmitter, located in the chilled water supply pipe, shall measure chilled water supply temperature. Based upon its input signal, a DDC software PID temperature controller shall modulate the normally closed control valve in the primary chilled water return line to maintain temperature set point (adjustable). A second temperature transmitter in the primary chilled water return pipe shall provide an input to a DDC high limit program which shall override the control of the supply temperature sensor and modulate the control valve to maintain a minimum return water temperature of 57°F. to the campus loop. 6. Expansion tank high and low pressure alarm switches furnished and installed by Section 15600 will provide alarms at the DDC system through digital inputs. R. Hot Water Systems 1. The systems shall consist of one (1) steam-to-hot water converter and two (2) hot water pumps, and one(1) gas-fired boiler and two (2) hot water pumps,and two (2)pumps to serve the nonpotable water system. When steam is available, the steam-to-hot water converter and its associated pumps shall serve the perimeter heating system, the reheat system and the nonpotable water pumps. When steam is not available, the gas-fired boiler shall serve the reheat system and nonpotable water pumps. The hot water pumps shall be variable speed pumps furnished with variable frequency drives. The nonpotable water pumps shall be constant speed pumps. One pump of each set shall be standby. The converter and boiler shall be manually valved shut and manually placed in operation by an operator. When steam is available from the campus steam distribution system, the hot water boiler shall be off and isolated from the system via manual valves. When steam is not available from the campus system, the converters shall be valved shut and the associated pumps shall be off. The boiler and one hot water reheat system pump shall be manually started by an operator. 2. The DDC system shall monitor pump status via current sensing relays furnished and installed by this Section. Should a pump fail to start, the DDC system through a 0-30 second (adjustable) time delay relay shall send an alarm to the Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-55 a 6. Smoke Detection Sequence a. Activation of a smoke detector in an elevator lobby or a sprinkler water flow on any floor or any other smoke detector on a floor (not including Atrium area smoke detectors) will automatically cause the following sequence of events to take place: 1) All supply air systems will stop their discharge air damper, and the fresh air intake dampers will automatically close. Respective return and exhaust fans shall stop and their dampers shall close. b. Activation of an area smoke detector located in the Atrium will automatically cause the following sequence of events to take place: 1) The smoke exhaust fans dedicated to the Atrium will automatically start. When the fans start, their discharge dampers shall open. 2) Makeup air to the Atrium shall be provided by opening doors to the Atrium,which shall automatically open. 3) All other air conditioning systems and associated supply, return *■ and exhaust fans shall stop and their dampers shall close. C. Activation of smoke detectors in any of the supply air systems, located downstream of the filters, will automatically cause the following sequence of events to occur: 1) The affected supply air system will stop, and its respective dampers will automatically close. The fan system shall be prevented from starting until the smoke detector has been cleared and reset. 7. This Section shall be responsible for the interwiring between the life safety interface panel located at the Fire Command Station and the DDC system to monitor one (1) common fire alarm point for the entire building and one (1) supply air smoke detector alarm for each air conditioning unit Supply Fan ACS-1 through ACS-4. On activation of the common alarm for the building, a DDC software program shall deenergize the DDC start/stop digital output to each unit and prevent the fan from restarting unitl the common alarm point is reset. All "off normal" alarms shall be disabled during this mode. The fire alarm system shall provide a separate fan shutdown signal to each supply and return fan for "positive shutdown". On activation of a supply air smoke detector alarm, only the specific unit shall stop. The DDC start/stop digital output to the unit shall deenergize and prevent the unit from starting. All "off normal" alarms shall be disabled during this mode. Similarly the fire alarm system shall provide a separate fan shutdown signal to each supply fan for "positive shutdown". All wiring from the fire alarm system and fan starters shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Section of the Specification. All smoke control functions and override panel shall furnished and installed by the Electrical Section of the Specification. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-54 3. As the space temperature decreases, the terminal unit damper shall modulate closed. 4. Whenever the fan system serving the terminal unit is off the terminal unit damper shall fully open. 5. During warm-up, the unit damper shall be fully opened until space set point is reached. The damper will then be controlled to maintain set point. 6. Each terminal unit's direct digital control unit shall be capable of remote reset of all set points and damper position automatically or manually through the network computer. Furthermore, all data associated with terminal unit controllers shall be continuously monitored at the DDC system. 7. All power and control wiring for terminal units shall be furnished and installed by this Section. !" O. Packaged Air Conditioning Units Serving Switchgear Room 1. Packaged air conditioning units shall be split air-cooled direct evaporation units. All interlock wiring between condenser and evaporator shall be furnished and installed by this Section. 2. A wall-mounted thermostat furnished and installed by this Section shall control the unit to maintain space temperature set point. 3. A space temperature transmitter shall provide an input to the DDC system for remote monitoring and high temperature alarm annunciation at the DDC system. 4. A leak detector furnished and installed by this Section in the unit drip pan shall be monitored at the DDC system. 5. A common alarm originating from the unit controller shall be monitored at the DDC system. P. Life Safety Operation 1. A complete automatic smoke detection system shall be provided by the so Electrical Section of the Specification for all the air handling systems in the building, and shall be interfaced with the automatic sprinkler system and fire alarm system. 2. The automatic temperature control system shall be configured so that failure of a network computer or a communications controller shall not prevent the life safety(smoke control) functions described hereinafter. 3. Air handling systems that are included in the buildings are: a. Air conditioning systems and associated return fans serving main building, multipurpose room and dining area. b. Spill/return fans associated with the air conditioning systems listed above. C. Smoke exhaust fan serving the atrium. d. Miscellaneous toilet exhaust fans, miscellaneous exhaust fans, etc., will be located at various points in the building. 4. Smoke detectors, furnished, installed and wired by Electrical Section, shall be incorporated into the air handling systems. 5. During normal operation, or on activation of a fire alarm, whenever the air fans are shut down, the dampers associated with their respective air fans shall automatically close. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-53 am 5. A three-mode direct acting DDC software temperature controller, based on an input from a return air temperature transmitter, shall control the heating coil control valve to maintain return temperature set point. 6. Fan status shall be monitored at the network computer via current sensing relays. 7. Control valve shall be furnished by this Contractor. «. L. Emergency Generator Fuel Oil System 1. The emergency generator shall contain a fuel oil tank. 2. This section of the specification shall furnish and install level probes to monitor a high, low and extreme low level alarm at the DDC system. M. Fan Powered Variable Volume Terminal Units with Hot Water Reheat Coil 1. Electric controlled terminals with fail-in-place dampers shall be controlled from a unit mounted direct digital control unit. 2. A software interlock shall start the terminal unit fan when the primary air fan " serving the terminal unit starts. 3. When the space temperature rises, as sensed by an electronic space temperature transmitter, the software controller shall modulate the terminal unit primary • damper open. 4. As the space temperature decreases, the terminal unit primary damper shall modulate closed. 5. When space temperature continues to decrease, the output of the controller shall modulate the fail-in-place heating coil control valve to maintain space temperature. The control valve shall be factory mounted and wired by the terminal unit manufacturer. The valve shall be provided by this Contractor. 6. During warm-up, the terminal unit shall be positioned fully opened until set point is reached. The damper will then be controlled to maintain set point. 7. During cooldown, the unit damper shall remain under control of its space thermostat. 8. Each terminal unit's direct digital control unit shall be capable of remote reset of all set points and damper position automatically or manually through the "" network computer. 9. Whenever the primary fan for the terminal unit is off, the terminal unit primary damper shall be positioned fully open. 10. On actuation of a life safety alarm in the area served by the terminal unit, the unit fan shall stop. 11. Night Setback: When the primary air fan is off, the set point of the DDC software controller shall be lowered to 55°F. adjustable. If the temperature falls below set point, the software control shall start the terminal unit fan and modulate the reheat coil to maintain space temperature set point. N. Variable Volume Terminal Units 1. Direct digital controlled terminals with fail-in-place dampers shall be controlled .�. from a reverse-acting, 3-mode (PID) pressure independent software program located at the terminal unit direct digital control unit. 2. When the space temperature rises, as sensed by an electronic space temperature transmitter, the software controller shall modulate the terminal unit damper open. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-52 H. Unit Heaters (Hot Water/Steam): For each unit an electric thermostat, located as directed, shall start and stop the unit heater and open or close the two-position AP electrically actuated spring return fail open valve in the steam/hot water piping to the heater to maintain an adjustable room temperature. An aquastat on the return line of each unit shall stop the unit when steam/hot water is not available. Control wiring shall be furnished and installed by this section. Power wiring shall be by the Electrical Contractor. The two-position valve thermostat and aquastat shall be - provided by this Section of the Specification. The valve shall be installed by Section 15600. Thermostat and aquastat shall be mounted by this Section of the Specification. I. Smoke Exhaust Fans 1. When the fan is not in operation, the fan discharge damper shall be closed. The fan is a constant speed fan. Discharge damper shall be hardwired interlocked to exhaust fan via a time delay relay by the Section. The relay shall prevent the fan from starting until the damper is open. 2. Fan shall be started automatically via the fire alarm system. 3. In addition, fan shall be capable of being started locally(for testing purposes). 4. Upon activation of the fan, the fan discharge damper shall open. PM 5. If the fan fails to start, an alarm,actuated by a differential pressure switch, shall be transmitted to the fire alarm system. 6. Wiring between the fire alarm system and each exhaust fan starter and pressure switch shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Section of the Specification. Differential pressure switch, time delay relay, actuator, etc., shall be furnished and installed by this Section. J. Mechanical Equipment Room Exhaust Fan 1. When the exhaust fan is off, the exhaust fan discharge damper and the outside air damper shall be closed. 2. The unit shall be started automatically through a DDC software program based on space temperature. A transmitter located in the space shall provide an input to the DDC program. go 3. On a rise in space temperature to 55°F., the exhaust fan shall start, its discharge damper shall open and the outside air damper shall open. A decrease in space temperature to 50°F. will stop the fan and close the dampers. 4. Fan status shall be displayed at the network computer via current sensing relays. K. Lobby Hot Water Cabinet Heaters I. When the supply fan is not in operation, the normally open heating coil control valve shall be under control of a DDC software lot limit controller to maintain a IN minimum air temperature of 45°F. leaving the heating coil, as sensed by the temperature transmitters on the leaving air side of each coil section. 2. When fan starting is initiated, the temperature control system shall be in operation. The supply fan shall start when the outdoor air temperature is below 55°F. and stop when the outdoor air temperature is above 60°F. 3. The operator shall have the ability to override a starting or stopping sequence at any time from the network computer or the direct digital field control unit. 4. On a command to stop the fans, the fans shall stop. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-51 damper is open due to cooling mode, the exhaust fan shall operate and its discharge damper shall open. When the unit starts due to heating mode, the return air damper shall open, the outdoor air damper shall close, and the exhaust fan shall remain off. 6. The operator shall have the ability to override a starting or stopping sequence at any time from the network computer or the direct digital field control unit. 7. On a command to stop a fan, the fan shall stop and its dampers shall close. 8. Normal Operation a. When the system is in operation,the fan discharge temperature controller .M shall control the preheat coil valves to maintain the discharge temperature set point. b. On an increase in supply air temperature, control action shall be to close AM the preheat coil valves. 9. High Discharge Pressure Switches and Low Suction Pressure Switches: Pressure differential switches installed in the inlet of the supply fan, which sense inlet pressure, shall stop the fan and transmit an alarm to the network va computer by means of a digital input to the system DDC controller, if the pressure set point of the switch is exceeded. The fan shutdown shall be operative whether the starter H-O-A switch is in the "Auto" or"Hand" position. wo 10. Low Temperature Switches: Low temperature switches (freezestats), one for each preheat coil, shall stop the supply fan, by means of a digital input to the system DDC controller, after a 180 second (adjustable) time delay, if the air leaving the coil drops below 35°F. When the fan stops, an alarm shall be transmitted to the network computer. Low temperature switches shall have automatic reset. Fan shutdown shall be accomplished through a hard wired contact into the fan starter circuit. F. Kitchen and Servery Exhaust Fans 1. The exhaust fan is started locally via a wall-mounted switch furnished and installed by this Section. 2. Exhaust fan status shall be indicated at the network computer through current sensing relays. ..� 3. Hood water wash sequence shall be coordinated with Kitchen hood manufacturer. 4. Activation of the hood fire suppression will automatically stop the Kitchen .W exhaust fan. 5. Activation of the high temperature detector in the hood collar shall stop the exhaust fan. N 6. Interwiring between the hood water wash, fire suppression system and high temperature detector and the exhaust fan shall be by this Contractor. on G. Toilet Exhaust Fans 1. When the exhaust fan is off, the discharge damper shall be closed. 2. When the exhaust fan is started locally through the network computer via a RM time program or manually by the operator, the damper shall open. 3. Fan status shall be displayed at the network computer via current sending relays. oft Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 0 1.1 L 12 15950-50 ow automatic reset. The fan shutdown will be operative whether the starter H-O-A switch is in the "Auto" or "Hand" position. 16. Spill Air Damper Control a. The spill air damper controls shall be in operation when their respective return air fan is operating. b. A static pressure transmitter in the return air fan discharge plenum or duct shall, through a two-mode software static pressure controller in the system DDC controller, position the normally closed spill dampers to maintain the spill plenum set point pressure. C. During the smoke exhaust mode, when the return fan is started, the spill damper shall be fully opened. 17. Area Isolation Dampers: Supply area isolation dampers shall open when any supply fan serving the damper is started, and shall close when the fan serving the dampers is stopped. Return area isolation dampers shall open when the return fan serving the dampers is started and shall close when the fan is off. 18. Minimum Outdoor Air Flow Quantity Control: Air flow measuring stations installed upstream of the minimum outside air dampers of each air conditioning system shall measure minimum air flow. Should outside air flow be below set PM point, the return air damper shall be modulated closed until the minimum outside air flow is at set point. On an increase of outside air above set point, the return air damper shall be modulated open to achieve set point. This program shall be overridden during the economizer mode of operation. The minimum outside airflow rates shall be transmitted, on a real time basis, to the DDC system for monitoring and trending. E. Pump Room Heating and Ventilating Unit and Associated Exhaust Fan 1. The heating and ventilating unit is a constant volume system. The system shall be controlled by a direct digital control system (DDC) with electronic sensing of system temperatures and pressures, and electric actuation of control valves and dampers. 2. When the supply fans is not in operation, the outdoor and return air damper shall be closed. The exhaust fan shall be off. The normally open preheat coil valves shall be under control of DDC software, low limit controllers to maintain a minimum air temperature of 45°F. leaving the preheat coils as sensed by the temperature transmitters on the leaving side of each preheat coil. The low limit set point shall be reset by the DDC system based on outside air temperature. As outside air temperature drops, the low limit set point shall be raised. 3. When fan starting is initiated via an interlock with the boiler or based on space temperature, the temperature control system shall be in operation and a hardwired time delay shall inhibit the fan start until its intake dampers are open. On sensing a space temperature below 65°F. or above 80T, the system shall start. 4. When the unit starts due to an interlock with the boiler, the unit shall operate with the outdoor air damper fully open and the return air damper closed. The exhaust fan shall remain off. 5. When the unit starts due to space temperature of the Pump Room, a DDC software program shall open the outdoor air damper and close the return air damper when the unit starts in the cooling mode. Whenever the outdoor air Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-49 C. A static pressure transmitter in the common supply fan discharge duct shall provide a signal proportional to fan discharge static pressure to a software based 2-mode pressure controller with reverse action, acting as a high limit. If fan discharge static pressure exceeds its set point, the high limit controller shall, through a software low selector, override the output of the system static pressure controller to proportionally reduce �. the speed of each supply fan to maintain fan discharge pressure high limit set point. d. Static pressure controls shall control system operation during all cycles of operation, including smoke control mode. e. During system start-up, the static pressure control algorithm, integral control mode shall be suppressed until the control point is within the proportional band of the controller to avoid reset wind-up. 12. Flow Control: A software based DDC flow control program shall receive input signals from airflow measuring stations installed in the inlet of the supply and return fan, and totalize, linearize and scale them. The flow control program shall match the return fan with the supply fans and maintain the volumetric balance between return and supply airflow by varying return fan speed to maintain a constant differential between supply and return airflow. A software bias shall be provided to compensate the return flow for a constant outside air minimum at all operating loads. The operator shall be able to manually override the flow control program and manually control each supply and return fan. The software bias will be suppressed during warm-up or in the smoke control override mode of operation. 13. Dehumidification Mode: A humidity transmitter located in return air duct to the unit shall input to a DDC dehumidification software controller. On an increase in return air humidity above set point, the software controller shall override the discharge temperature controller and modulate the chilled water valve open to maintain return air humidity set point. On a decrease in return temperature due ON to the dehumidification mode, the return air temperature controller shall modulate the reheat coil control valve to maintain return temperature set point. On a decrease in return air humidity below set point, the DDC software controller shall return the unit to the normal heating and cooling mode of operation. 14. High Discharge Pressure Switches and Low Suction Pressure Switches: , Pressure differential switches installed in the discharge of each supply and return fan, which sense discharge pressure, shall stop the fan and transmit an alarm to the network computer by means of a digital input to the system DDC controller, if the pressure set point of the switch is exceeded. A separate pressure switch installed in the inlet of each supply and return fans shall also stop the fan and transmit the alarm if fan suction pressure is below its set point. The fan shutdown shall be operative whether the starter H-O-A switch is in the "Auto" or"Hand" position. 15. Low Temperature Switches: Low temperature switches (freezestats), one for each cooling coil, shall stop the supply fan by means of a digital input to the " system DDC controller, after a 180 second (adjustable) time delay, if the air entering the cooling coil drops below 35°F. When the fan stops, an alarm shall be transmitted to the network computer. Low temperature switches shall have .. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-48 „�„ 1�s the preheat valve shall be fully closed, the face damper shall be closed, and the bypass damper shall be open. 8. Normal Operation - Winter Mode a. The minimum outdoor air damper shall be open. b. When the operator selectable "Summer-Winter-Auto" software selector is commanded into the "Winter" position, the variable outdoor air and return air dampers shall be under control of the fan discharge temperature controller. The fan discharge temperature controller shall control in sequence the preheat coil control valves and face and bypass dampers, the variable outdoor damper and the return air damper and cooling coil control valve to maintain the supply air set point temperature. C. On an increase in supply air temperature, control action shall be to first gradually close the preheat coil face damper and open the bypass damper, close the preheat coil valves, then to gradually open the variable outdoor air damper,and close the return air damper,and finally, open the cooling coil valve. Heating and cooling shall be sequenced to prevent simultaneous heating and cooling. 9. Normal Operation Auto Mode: When the operator-selectable "Summer- Winter-Auto' software selector switch is commanded into the "Auto" position, a DDC software program shall monitor the outdoor air temperature and select either the "Summer" or "Winter" mode. When the temperature is less than 55T. (adjustable), the program shall select the "Winter" mode. When the temperature is above 57T. (adjustable), the program shall select the "Summer" mode. On selecting a mode, the DDC controller shall position the dampers and valves as described above. 10. Maximum Outdoor Air Damper Control: During normal occupancy of the multipurpose room, the maximum outdoor air damper shall operate as described above. The operator via the network computer shall be capable of initiating a software program which shall provide a "minimum position" to the maximum damper for periods of higher than normal occupancy such as during a performance. The percentage value of the "minimum position" for the maximum damper shall be operator adjustable. If during the "winter" mode of operation when the software program is initiated, the maximum damper is required for free cooling, the program shall limit the closed position of the damper to the "software"minimum position. 11. Static Pressure Control a. A reverse-acting 2-mode (proportional plus integral) DDC software controller shall control the supply fan speed, based upon the input from a static pressure transmitter located at the end of the duct riser served by the air conditioning unit. b. The output of the software controller shall be the input to the speed controller on the supply fans. As duct static pressure decreases, the controller output shall increase, to increase fan speed. On an increase in duct static pressure, the output of the controller shall decrease, to decrease fan speed. A software auto/manual switch function shall enable the operator to override the output of the static pressure controller and OR adjust fan speed from the network computer or the DDC controller. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-47 return air temperature is less than 65T. and the outdoor temperature is below 50T., warm-up mode shall be initiated. C. In warm-up mode, the outdoor air dampers shall remain closed, the fan , discharge temperature set point shall be raised to 90°F. The terminal unit dampers shall be positioned open to 100% airflow, and the fan discharge software temperature controller shall fully open the preheat coil valve and modulate the face and bypass dampers to maintain the set point temperature as sensed by the temperature transmitter in the fan discharge duct. The chilled water valve shall remain closed. d. When the return air temperature, as sensed by the return air temperature transmitter, reaches 70T., the warm-up mode shall be terminated, the minimum outdoor air dampers shall open, the variable air volume terminal units shall be returned to control of their thermostats, and the systems shall operate in the normal discharge air temperature control mode with the fan discharge temperature controller reset to the normal cooling set point. e. If, when the system is started, the return air temperature is above 80T. and outdoor temperature is above 75T., cool-down mode shall be initiated. The outdoor air dampers shall remain closed, the return air , dampers shall be open, and the fan discharge temperature controller shall control the cooling coil valve to maintain normal set point. The terminal units shall be under control of their unit thermostats. WA f. When the return air temperature decreases to 76T., the cool-down mode shall be terminated. The minimum outdoor air damper shall open, and the variable outdoor air dampers and the return air damper placed under control of the fan discharge controller, which will continue to position the cooling coil valve as required to maintain its set point. g. If, when the system is started, the return air temperature is above 65T. and below 80°F., warm-up/cool-down mode shall not be initiated, and the systems shall be released to normal,operation. h. At the completion of warm-up/cool-down, the outside air dampers shall remain closed until scheduled occupancy, if the two do not coincide. On entering the scheduled occupancy time, the DDC program shall control the dampers. i. Set point temperatures and operating limits are user definable and may ■ be changed at any time. 7. Normal Operation - Summer Mode a. The minimum outdoor air damper shall remain open. b. When the operator selectable "Summer-Winter-Auto" software selector switch is commanded to the "Summer" position, the variable outdoor air damper shall remain closed and the return air damper shall remain open, the three-mode fan discharge temperature controller shall position the cooling coil valve to maintain the supply air temperature set point. The preheat coil control valves shall remain under control of their software low limit controllers to maintain a minimum leaving air temperature. When the unit is in operation, the low limit controller shall fully open the preheat valve and modulate the face and bypass damper to maintain low limit set point. On sensing a temperature above the low limit set point, A. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-46 rs Pw D. Multipurpose Room Area Air Conditioning System(ACS-4)and Associated Return Fan 1. Air conditioning system is a variable air volume system which operates in conjunction with a variable volume return fan. The supply and return air fans shall be provided with variable frequency drives. The systems shall be controlled by a direct digital control system (DDC) with electronic sensing of system parameters,and electric actuation of control valves and dampers. 2. When the fans are not in operation, the minimum outdoor air, variable outdoor air, return air, spill air dampers, supply and return floor isolation and fan discharge dampers shall be closed. No control signal shall be transmitted to the variable frequency drive process follower speed controller. 'The normally closed chilled water coil valve shall be closed. The normally closed reheat coil valve shall be closed. The preheat coil face and bypass damper shall be fully open to the coil and closed to bypass. The two-position (open/close) normally open steam preheat coil control valves, one per coil, shall be under control of DDC software, low limit controllers to maintain a minimum air temperature of 45T. leaving the preheat coils, signal as sensed by temperature transmitters on the leaving air side of each coil section. On sensing a temperature below 45T., the controller shall fully open the valve. On sensing a temperature above 48T., the valve shall be closed. The low limit set point shall be reset by the DDC system based on outside air temperature. As outside air temperature drops, the low limit set point shall be raised. The terminal unit dampers shall be open. 3. When fan start is initiated, the temperature control system shall be in operation, and a software time delay shall inhibit supply fan start until the system return air damper is open. Air conditioning system shall be interlocked via software to start whenever its associated kitchen exhaust fan(F-7) starts. Fans shall start and run at minimum speed required to maintain rotation, but not less than 6 Hz. The supply fan and return discharge dampers shall open after a time delay to !" enable the fan to reach minimum speed. After the fans are running, and the discharge dampers are open, the software static pressure controller shall slowly ramp up the speed of all fans to satisfy system static pressure demand. OF 4. The operator shall have the ability to override a starting or stopping of any fan from the network computer or the direct digital field control unit. 5. On a command to stop a fan, the fan shall ramp down to its minimum speed and the fans shall stop in the reverse order of starting. The fan discharge damper shall close slowly and shall not be fully closed until fan speed has decreased to approximately 10%. The return air damper and outdoor air dampers shall close. 6. Warm-Up/Cool-Down Mode a. Warm-up/cool-down operation shall be an operator selectable function. If the DDC software selector switch is commanded "Off', the system shall start in a normal fashion with the minimum outdoor air and return air dampers open. If the warm-up/cool-down selector is commanded "On", the systems shall start with the minimum and variable outdoor air dampers closed and the return air damper open. The system shall run for 5 or 10 minutes to establish a stable return air temperature before the warm-up/cool-down software decision is made. b. A temperature transmitter in the return air duct shall sense the temperature of the return air and compare it to programmed limits. If the Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-45 in return air humidity above set point, the software controller shall override the discharge temperature controller and modulate the chilled water valve open to maintain return air humidity set point. On a decrease in return temperature due �. to the dehumidification mode, the return air temperature controller shall modulate the reheat coil control valve to maintain return temperature set point.On a decrease in return air humidity below set point, the DDC software controller shall return the unit to the normal heating and cooling mode of operation. 13. High Discharge Pressure Switches and Low Suction Pressure Switches: Pressure differential switches installed in the discharge of each supply and return fan, which sense discharge pressure, shall stop the fan and transmit an alarm to the network computer by means of a digital input to the system DDC controller, if the pressure set point of the switch is exceeded. A separate *� pressure switch installed in the inlet of each supply and return fans shall also stop the fan and transmit the alarm if fan suction pressure is below its set point. The fan shutdown shall be operative whether the starter H-O-A switch is in the "Auto" or"Hand"position. 14. Low Temperature Switches: Low temperature switches (freezestats),one for each cooling coil, shall stop the supply fan by means of a digital input to the system DDC controller, after a 180 second (adjustable) time delay, if the air entering the cooling coil drops below 35°F. When the fan stops, an alarm shall be transmitted to the network computer. Low temperature switches shall have automatic reset. The fan shutdown will be operative whether the starter H-O-A . switch is in the "Auto" or "Hand"position. 15. Spill Air Damper Control a. The spill air damper controls shall be in operation when their respective return air fan is operating. b. A static pressure transmitter in the return air fan discharge plenum or duct shall, through a two-mode software static pressure controller in the �* system DDC controller, position the normally closed spill dampers to maintain the spill plenum set point pressure. C. During the smoke exhaust mode, when the return fan is started, the spill .� damper shall be fully opened. 16. Area Isolation Dampers: Supply area isolation dampers shall open when any supply fan serving the damper is started, and shall close when the fan serving the dampers is stopped. Return area isolation dampers shall open when the return fan serving the dampers is started and shall close when the fan is off. 17. Minimum Outdoor Air Flow Quantity Control: Air flow measuring stations installed upstream of the minimum outside air dampers of each air conditioning system shall measure minimum air flow. Should outside air flow be below set point, the return air damper shall be modulated closed until the minimum outside air flow is at set point. On an increase of outside air above set point, �1 the return air damper shall be modulated open to achieve set point. This program shall be overridden during the economizer mode of operation. The minimum outside airflow rates shall be transmitted, on a real time basis, to the DDC system for monitoring and trending. ..A Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-44 ,,,,R g• w 9. Normal Operation Auto Mode: When the operator-selectable "Summer- Winter-Auto" software selector switch is commanded into the "Auto" position, a DDC software program shall monitor the outdoor air temperature and select either the "Summer" or "Winter" mode. When the temperature is less than 55°F. (adjustable), the program shall select the "Winter" mode. When the temperature is above 57T. (adjustable), the program shall select the "Summer" mode. On selecting a mode, the DDC controller shall position the dampers and valves as described above. 10. Static Pressure Control a. A reverse-acting 2-mode (proportional plus integral) DDC software controller shall control the supply fan speed, based upon the input from a static pressure transmitter located at the end of the duct riser served by the air conditioning unit. b. The output of the software controller shall be the input to the speed controller on the supply fans. As duct static pressure decreases, the controller output shall increase, to increase fan speed. On an increase in duct static pressure, the output of the controller shall decrease, to decrease fan speed. A software auto/manual switch function shall enable the operator to override the output of the static pressure controller and adjust fan speed from the network computer or the DDC controller. C. A static pressure transmitter in the common supply fan discharge duct shall provide a signal proportional to fan discharge static pressure to a software based 2-mode pressure controller with reverse action, acting as a high limit. If fan discharge static pressure exceeds its set point, the high limit controller shall, through a software low selector, override the output of the system static pressure controller to proportionally reduce r the speed of each supply fan to maintain fan discharge pressure high limit set point. d. Static pressure controls shall control system operation during all cycles of operation, including smoke control mode. e. During system start-up, the static pressure control algorithm, integral control mode shall be suppressed until the control point is within the proportional band of the controller to avoid reset wind-up. 11. Flow Control: A software based DDC flow control program shall receive input signals from airflow measuring stations installed in the inlet of the supply and return fan, and totalize, linearize and scale them. The flow control program shall match the return fan with the supply fans and maintain the volumetric balance between return and supply airflow by varying return fan speed to " maintain a constant differential between supply and return airflow. Asoftware bias shall be provided to compensate the return flow for a constant outside air minimum at all operating loads as well as during operation of the Kitchen exhaust fan. When the Kitchen exhaust fan is in operation, the return fan airflow shall be reduced by a fixed amount equal to the Kitchen exhaust fan airflow. Airflow offset set points shall be determined via balancing. The operator shall be able to manually override the flow control program and manually control each supply and return fan. The software bias will be suppressed during warm-up or in the smoke control override mode of operation. 12. Dehumidification Mode: A humidity transmitter located in return air duct to the unit shall input to a DDC dehumidification software controller. On an increase Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-43 minimum outdoor air dampers shall open, the variable air volume terminal units shall be returned to control of their thermostats, and the systems shall operate in the normal discharge air temperature control mode with the fan discharge temperature controller reset to the normal cooling set point. e. If, when the system is started, the return air temperature is above 80T. and outdoor temperature is above 75T., cool-down mode shall be ` initiated. The outdoor air dampers shall remain closed, the return air dampers shall be open, and the fan discharge temperature controller shall control the cooling coil valve to maintain normal set point. The terminal units shall be under control of their unit thermostats. f. When the return air temperature decreases to 76T., the cool-down mode shall be terminated. The minimum outdoor air damper shall open, and the variable outdoor air dampers and the return air damper placed under control of the fan discharge controller, which will continue to position the cooling coil valve as required to maintain its set point. g. If, when the system is started, the return air temperature is above 65°F. and below 80°F., warm-up/cool-down mode shall not be initiated, and the systems shall be released to normal operation. h. At the completion of warm-up/cool-down, the outside air dampers shall remain closed until scheduled occupancy, if the two do not coincide. On entering the scheduled occupancy time, the DDC program shall control the dampers. i. Set point temperatures and operating limits are user definable and may be changed at any time. 7. Normal Operation - Summer Mode a. The minimum outdoor air damper shall remain open. b. When the operator selectable "Summer-Winter-Auto" software selector switch is commanded to the "Summer" position, the variable outdoor air *� damper shall remain closed and the return air damper shall remain open, the three-mode fan discharge temperature controller shall position the cooling coil valve to maintain the supply air temperature set point. The .�. preheat coil control valves shall remain under control of their software low limit controllers to maintain a minimum leaving air temperature. 8. Normal Operation - Winter Mode a. The minimum outdoor air damper shall be open. b. When the operator selectable "Summer-Winter-Auto" software selector is commanded into the "Winter" position, the variable outdoor air and return air dampers shall be under control of the fan discharge temperature controller. The fan discharge temperature controller shall control in sequence the preheat coil control valves, the variable outdoor damper and the return air damper and cooling coil control valve to maintain the supply air set point temperature. C. On an increase in supply air temperature, control action shall be to first gradually close the preheat coil valves, then to gradually open the variable outdoor air damper, and close the return air damper, and finally, open the cooling coil valve. Heating and cooling shall be sequenced to prevent simultaneous heating and cooling. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-42 „ 2. When the fans are not in operation, the minimum outdoor air, variable outdoor air, return air, spill air dampers, supply and return floor isolation and fan discharge dampers shall be closed. No control signal shall be transmitted to the variable frequency drive process follower speed controller. The normally closed chilled water coil valve shall be closed. The normally closed reheat coil valve shall be closed. The normally open steam preheat coil control valves,one per coil, shall be under control of DDC software, low limit controllers to maintain a minimum air temperature of 45°F. leaving the preheat coils, signal as sensed by temperature transmitters on the leaving air side of each coil section. The low limit set point shall be reset by the DDC system based on outside air temperature. As outside air temperature drops, the low limit set point shall be raised. The terminal unit dampers shall be open. 3. When fan start is initiated, the temperature control system shall be in operation, and a software time delay shall inhibit supply fan start until the system return air damper is open. Air conditioning system shall be interlocked via software to start whenever its associated kitchen exhaust fan starts. Fans shall start and run at minimum speed required to maintain rotation, but not less than 6 Hz. The supply fan and return discharge dampers shall open after a time delay to enable the fan to reach minimum speed. After the fans are running, and the discharge dampers are open, the software static pressure controller shall slowly ramp up the speed of all fans to satisfy system static pressure demand. 4. The operator shall have the ability to override a starting or stopping of any fan from the network computer or the direct digital field control unit. 5. On a command to stop a fan, the fan shall ramp down to its minimum speed and the fans shall stop in the reverse order of starting. The fan discharge damper ■"' shall close slowly and shall not be fully closed until fan speed has decreased to approximately 10%. The return air damper and outdoor air dampers shall close. 6. Warm-Up/Cool-Down Mode a. Warm-up/cool-down operation shall be an operator selectable function. If the DDC software selector switch is commanded "Off', the system shall start in a normal fashion with the minimum outdoor air and return air dampers open. If the warm-up/cool-down selector is commanded "On", the systems shall start with the minimum and variable outdoor air dampers closed and the return air damper open. The system shall run for 5 or 10 minutes to establish a stable return air temperature before the warm-up/cool-down software decision is made. b. A temperature transmitter in the return air duct shall sense the temperature of the return air and compare it to programmed limits. If the return air temperature is less than 65°F. and the outdoor temperature is below 50°F., warm-up mode shall be initiated. C. In warm-up mode, the outdoor air dampers shall remain closed, the fan discharge temperature set point shall be raised to 90°F. The terminal unit dampers shall be positioned open to 100% airflow, and the fan discharge software temperature controller shall control the heating coil valve to maintain the set point temperature as sensed by the temperature transmitter in the fan discharge duct. The chilled water valve shall remain closed. d. When the return air temperature, as sensed by the return air temperature transmitter, reaches 70°F., the warm-up mode shall be terminated, the Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-41 bias will be suppressed during warm-up or in the smoke control override mode of operation. 12. High Discharge Pressure Switches and Low Suction Pressure Switches: .� Pressure differential switches installed in the discharge of each supply and return fan, which sense discharge pressure, shall stop the fan and transmit an alarm to the network computer by means of a digital input to the system DDC controller, if the pressure set point of the switch is exceeded. A separate differential pressure switch installed in the inlet of each supply and return fans shall also stop the fan and transmit the alarm if fan suction pressure is below its set point. The fan shutdown shall be operative whether the starter H-O-A switch is in the "Auto" or"Hand"position. 13. Low Temperature Switches: Low temperature switches (freezestats), one for each cooling coil, shall stop the supply fan by means of a digital input to the system DDC controller, after a 180 second (adjustable) time delay, if the air entering the cooling coil drops below 35°F. When the fan stops, an alarm shall be transmitted to the network computer. Low temperature switches shall have .�. automatic reset. The fan shutdown will be operative whether the starter H-O-A switch is in the "Auto" or"Hand"position. 14. Spill Air Damper Control a. The spill air damper controls shall be in operation when their respective return air fan is operating. b. A static pressure transmitter in the return air fan discharge plenum or duct shall, through a two-mode software static pressure controller in the system DDC controller, position the normally closed spill dampers to maintain the spill plenum set point pressure. C. During the smoke exhaust mode, when the return fan is started, the spill damper shall be fully opened. 15. Floor/Area Isolation Dampers: Supply floor/area isolation dampers shall open when any supply fan serving the dampers is started, and shall close when the *�* fans serving the dampers are stopped. Return floor/area isolation dampers shall open when the return fan serving the dampers is started and shall close when the fans are off. *s 16. Minimum Outdoor Air Flow Quantity Control: Air flow measuring stations installed upstream of the minimum outside air dampers of each air conditioning system shall measure minimum air flow. Should outside air flow be below set point, the return air damper shall be modulated closed until the minimum outside air flow is at set point. On an increase of outside air above set point, the return air damper shall be modulated open to achieve set point. This program shall be overridden during the economizer mode of operation. The minimum outside airflow rates shall be transmitted, on a real time basis, to the DDC system for monitoring and trending. C. Dining Area Air Conditioning System(ACS-3)and Associated Return Fan 1. Air conditioning system is a variable air volume system which operates in conjunction with a variable volume return fan. The supply and return air fans shall be provided with variable frequency drives. The systems shall be controlled by a direct digital control system (DDC) with electronic sensing of system parameters, and electric actuation of control valves and dampers. * Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-40 ,.,, a DDC software program shall monitor the outdoor air temperature and select either the "Summer" or "Winter" mode. When the temperature is less than 55°F. (adjustable), the program shall select the "Winter" mode. When the temperature is above 57°F. (adjustable), the program shall select the "Summer" mode. On selecting a mode, the DDC controller shall position the dampers and valves as described above. 10. Static Pressure Control a. A reverse-acting 2-mode (proportional plus integral) DDC software controller shall control the supply fan speed, based upon the input from multiple static pressure transmitters located at the end of the duct risers served by the air conditioning unit. There shall be four(4)static pressure transmitters. Transmitters shall provide an input to a DDC software selector which shall select the lowest value of the four transmitters. The output of the low signal selector shall be the input to the DDC software controller to control the supply fan speed. b. The output of the software controller shall be the input to the speed controller on the supply fans. As duct static pressure decreases, the controller output shall increase, to increase fan speed. On an increase in duct static pressure, the output of the controller shall decrease, to decrease fan speed. When both air conditioning system supply fans are in operation, the fans shall operate at the same speed in parallel. A software auto/manual switch function shall enable the operator to override the output of the static pressure controller and adjust fan speed from the network computer or the DDC controller. C. A static pressure transmitter in the common supply fan discharge duct shall provide a signal proportional to fan discharge static pressure to a software based 2-mode pressure controller with reverse action, acting as a high limit. If fan discharge static pressure exceeds its set point, the high limit controller shall, through a software low selector, override the output of the system static pressure controller to proportionally reduce the speed of each supply fan to maintain fan discharge pressure high limit set point. d. Static pressure controls shall control system operation during all cycles of operation, including smoke control mode. e. During system start-up, the static pressure control algorithm, integral control mode shall be suppressed until the control point is within the proportional band of the controller to avoid reset wind-up. 11. Flow Control: A software based DDC flow control program shall receive input signals from airflow measuring stations installed in the inlet of the supply and return fan, and totalize, linearize and scale them. The flow control program shall match the return fan with the supply fans and maintain the volumetric balance between return and supply airflow by varying return fan speed to maintain a constant differential between supply and return airflow. When both air conditioning system supply fans are in operation, both return fans shall be in operation and shall operate at the same speed in parallel. A software bias shall be provided to compensate the return flow for a constant outside air minimum at all operating loads. The operator shall be able to manually override the flow control program and manually control each supply and return fan. The software Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-39 terminal units shall be returned to control of their thermostats, and the wo systems shall operate in the normal discharge air temperature control mode with the fan discharge temperature controller reset to the normal cooling set point. e. If, when the system is started, the return air temperature is above 80°F. and outdoor temperature is above 75°F., cool-down mode shall be initiated. The outdoor air dampers shall remain closed, the return air dampers shall be open, and the fan discharge temperature controller shall control the cooling coil valve to maintain normal set point. The terminal units shall be under control of their unit thermostats. f. When the return air temperature decreases to 76°F., the cool-down mode shall be terminated. The minimum outdoor air damper shall open, and the variable outdoor air dampers and the return air damper placed under M control of the fan discharge controller, which will continue to position the cooling coil valve as required to maintain its set point. g. If, when the system is started, the return air temperature is above 65°F. No and below 80°F., warm-up/cool-down mode shall not be initiated, and the systems shall be released to normal operation. h. At the completion of warm-up/cool-down, the outside air dampers shall remain closed until scheduled occupancy, if the two do not coincide. On entering the scheduled occupancy time, the DDC program shall control the dampers. i. Set point temperatures and operating limits are user definable and may be changed at any time. 7. Normal Operation- Summer Mode a. The minimum outdoor air damper shall remain open. + b. When the operator selectable "Summer-Winter-Auto" software selector switch is commanded to the "Summer" position, the variable outdoor air damper shall remain closed and the return air damper shall remain open, the three-mode fan discharge temperature controller shall position the cooling coil valve to maintain the supply air temperature set point. The preheat coil control valves shall remain under control of their software low limit controllers to maintain a minimum leaving air temperature. 8. Normal Operation - Winter Mode a. The minimum outdoor air damper shall be open. b. When the operator selectable "Summer-Winter-Auto" software selector .� is commanded into the "Winter" position, the variable outdoor air and return air dampers shall be under control of the fan discharge temperature controller. The fan discharge temperature controller shall control in sequence the preheat coil control valves, the variable outdoor damper and the return air damper and cooling coil control valve to maintain the supply air set point temperature. C. On an increase in supply air temperature, control action shall be to first gradually close the preheat coil valves, then to gradually open the variable outdoor air damper, and close the return air damper, and finally, open the cooling coil valve. Heating and cooling shall be sequenced to prevent simultaneous heating and cooling. 9. Normal Operation Auto Mode: When the operator-selectable "Summer- Winter-Auto" software selector switch is commanded into the "Auto" position, Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-38 discharge dampers shall be closed. No control signal shall be transmitted to the variable frequency drive process follower speed controller. The normally closed chilled water coil valve shall be closed. The normally open steam preheat coil control valves, one per coil, shall be under control of DDC software, low limit controllers to maintain a minimum air temperature of 45T. leaving the preheat coils, signal as sensed by temperature transmitters on the leaving air side of each coil section. The low limit set point shall be reset by the DDC system based on outside air temperature. As outside air temperature drops, the low limit set point shall be raised. The terminal unit dampers shall IV be open. 3. When fan start is initiated, the temperature control system shall be in operation, and a software time delay shall inhibit supply fan start until the system return air damper is open. Both air conditioning systems shall operate simultaneously. Fans shall start and run at minimum speed required to maintain rotation, but not less than 6 Hz. The start of each supply fan shall be time delayed to avoid simultaneous starting of fans on the same system. The supply fan and return discharge dampers shall open after a time delay to enable the fan to reach minimum speed. After the fans are running, and the discharge dampers are open, the software static pressure controller shall slowly ramp up the speed of all fans to satisfy system static pressure demand. 4. The operator shall have the ability to override a starting or stopping of any fan from the network computer or the direct digital field control unit. 5. On a command to stop a fan, the fan shall ramp down to its minimum speed and the fans shall stop in the reverse order of starting. The fan discharge damper shall close slowly and shall not be fully closed until fan speed has decreased to approximately 10%. The return air damper and outdoor air dampers shall close. 6. Warm-Up/Cool-Down Mode a. Warm-up/cool-down operation shall be an operator selectable function. If the DDC software selector switch is commanded "Off', the system shall start in a normal fashion with the minimum outdoor air and return air dampers open. If the warm-up/cool-down selector is commanded „ "On", the systems shall start with the minimum and variable outdoor air dampers closed and the return air damper open. The system shall run for 5 or 10 minutes to establish a stable return air temperature before the warm-up/cool-down software decision is made. b. A temperature transmitter in the return air duct shall sense the temperature of the return air and compare it to programmed limits. If the return air temperature is less than 65°F. and the outdoor temperature is below 50T., warm-up mode shall be initiated. C. In warm-up mode, the outdoor air dampers shall remain closed, the fan discharge temperature set point shall be raised to 90T. The terminal unit dampers shall be positioned open to 100% airflow, and the fan discharge software temperature controller shall control the heating coil valve to maintain the set point temperature as sensed by the temperature transmitter in the fan discharge duct. The chilled water valve shall remain closed. d. When the return air temperature, as sensed by the return air temperature transmitter, reaches 70T., the warm-up mode shall be terminated, the minimum outdoor air dampers shall open, the variable air volume Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-37 am digital control units and run subject to smoke detector and protection interlocks. In addition, the network computer can start and stop each system regardless of the time program. 5. All motors shall be provided with MCC "Hand-Off-Auto" switches located at the starter. Motors can be started locally by placing these switches in the "Hand" position. These switches should be placed in the "Auto" position for DDC operation. 6. If a motor which was last commanded 'off' is started locally from the "Hand" position of the starter H-O-A switch, an "off-normal" alarm shall be transmitted to the network computer, the system controls for that motor only shall be activated, and a normal starting procedure shall be executed. The system shall remain in the "off-normal" alarm state until the starter H-0-A switch is returned to the "Auto" position. Similarly, if a motor last commanded "on" is running ** and is stopped locally by placing the starter H-O-A switch in the "Off' position, an "off-normal" alarm shall be transmitted to the network computer, the control system shall be deactivated and the system shall remain in the "off-normal" alarm state until the H-O-A starter switch is returned to the "Auto" position. During normal starting or stopping of the motors from a DDC program or the network computer, a motor which fails to follow its commanded state shall generate an "off-normal" alarm at the network computer. 7. Simultaneous starting of motors shall be prevented by a sequential start program in the DDC system. This program shall also provide sequential restart after power failure of motors that were running prior to power failure. 8. Software time delay relays shall be provided in the DDC system to allow fan motors to cool down before restarting. Motors shall have both a minimum interval time (between consecutive starts) and a minimum off time (between start and stop). The time periods shall be based on motor hp per the following table. Time periods are in minutes. Motor Horsepower 1/4-10 10-20 20-50 50-100 Minimum Interval Time(Adj.) 10 20 30 40 Minimum Off Time (Adj.) 3 5 7 7 �. 9. Automatic restart of fans after an equipment or life safety system shutdown trip shall be software prohibited through the deenergization of the remote start/stop contact. Fan restart shall be manually initiated by the operator either locally or remotely through the DDC system network computer. 10. Alarming devices (i.e., freezestats, pressure switches, dry alarm contacts) shall be wired so that alarm contacts "open" in the alarm condition. w� B. Main Building Air Conditioning Systems (ACS-1 and ACS-2)and Associated Return Fans 1. Air conditioning system is a variable air volume system which operates in conjunction with a variable volume return fan. The supply and return air fans shall be provided with variable frequency drives. The systems shall be controlled by a direct digital control system (DDC) with electronic sensing of system parameters, and electric actuation of control valves and dampers. 2. When the fans are not in operation, the minimum outdoor air, variable outdoor • air, return air, spill air dampers, supply and return floor/area isolation and fan Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-36 ,,,, am w NOTE: The cables listed above have conductors with 300 volt insulation ratings. Similar cables with 600 volt insulation ratings must be provided for any cable terminating within or occupying an enclosure containing conductors operating at a voltage greater than 300 volts (i.e.,460 volt motor starter enclosure). 4. RTD Wiring: 3/C No. 16 AWG DeKoron No. 1860-6860R, or as approved by the Engineer. 5. DDC Communications Cables: DDC communications wiring between the local control units shall be No. 18 AWG shielded cable, fiber optic cable or coaxial cable and shall be run in separate conduit. The control manufacturer shall be responsible for selection of fiber optic and coaxial cable types. +!! E. Terminal junction boxes shall be fabricated in accordance with NEC and NEMA requirements and standard insofar as materials, gauges, dimensions and methods of fastening are concerned. F. Sheet metal boxes of 50 cubic inch internal capacity and smaller shall be sheet steel, galvanized with suitable covers and screws. G. Sheet metal boxes larger than 50 cubic inch internal capacity shall be constructed of code gauge welded sheet steel, reinforced if required, and finished with standard gray enamel or galvanized. Boxes shall have removable screw mounted covers. Steel boxes shall use brass screws. H. Boxes installed outdoors shall be weatherproof NEMA Type 4X. Boxes installed M indoors shall be NEMA Type IA in Control Room and NEMA Type 12 elsewhere. I. Tags for wires and cables shall be Brady clip-sleeve type nonmetallic wire markers or Mw equivalent. J. For conduit fittings, conduit hangers and supports, expansion joints, sleeves and wiring devices, see applicable paragraphs of the Electrical Section of the Specifications. 2.8 DESCRIPTION OF CONTROL OPERATION A. General 1. Control of each air conditioning systems will be accomplished by a DDC + ► system. 2. All control algorithms, computation functions and energy management functions shall be software-based and resident in the DDC system. The operator shall have the capability through the existing network computer operator's keyboard to access all programs, display all data resident in the DDC system memory and perform analog and digital functions at each local direct digital control unit or at the network computer. 3. The DDC system network computer shall be the primary location for operator access to the system. 4. Unless otherwise noted, air conditioning systems, heating and ventilating systems and exhaust fans may be started manually from the DDC system network computer, or from a time program within the local stand-alone direct Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-35 an op 8. Provide control and signal wiring between the DDC system and equipment provided by other Sections such as boilers,house pumps,etc. 9. Provide control and signal conduit and wiring between the DDC system and .� boiler control panels, and all control and signal interwiring between each boiler and its respective control panel. (Assume 14 No. 18 AWG conductors in a 3/4 in. conduit between each boiler and its local control panel.) 10. Provide power, control and communication wiring for each variable air volume terminal unit. 11. Provide control and communication wiring for each fan powered variable air volume terminal unit. 12. Provide power and control wiring for each automatic louvered, smoke and combination fire/smoke damper. 13. Provide all required power, control and communication wiring between the DDC system serving this building and the campus DDC system. 14. Provide lightning protection for all communication networks. Lightning protection shall be Kele Bayboro PC642. .� B. Conduit shall be rigid steel, hot dip galvanized, threaded with couplings, 3/4 inch minimum size, manufactured in accordance with ANSI C-80-1 or electrical metallic tubing (EMT) with compression fittings or intermediate metal conduit (IMC) may be used where permitted by the NEC. EMT or IMC shall not be acceptable for outdoor installation, in wet areas, where subject to mechanical damage or for unsupported vertical drops. C. Flexible metal conduit shall be liquidtight, zinc coated flexible steel, vinyl jacketed, with integrally connected copper bonding wire, UL approved, Anaconda Type UA- OR, or approved equal. Fittings shall be Crouse-Hinds liquidtight grounding type or approved equal. D. Wires and cables shall be as follows: 1. Single Conductor (120 volt a.c.): Type THHN 12 AWG stranded copper with 600 volt insulation color coded red for hot leg, white for neutral, black for all others, for use in conduit, EMT or IMC only. Larger gauge cables shall be provided where necessary to limit the voltage drop to 3% or 3.6 volts. 2. Signal Cables(4-20 mA Analog) a. 2/C No. 16 AWG shielded DeKoron No. 1852-6860R, and multi-pair No. 20 AWG individually shielded DeKoron No. 1874 Series, or as approved by the Engineer. NOTE: The cables listed above have conductors with 300 volt insulation ratings. Similar cables with 600 volt insulation ratings must be provided for any cable terminating within or occupying an enclosure containing conductors operating at a voltage greater than 300 volts(i.e.,460 volt motor starter enclosure). 3. Alarm, Digital Input/Output and Control Cables(24 volt a.c.) a. 2/C No. 16 AWG DeKoron No. 1850-6860R, and multi-pair No. 20 AWG DeKoron No. 1870 Series, as or approved by the Engineer. b. Larger gauge cables shall be provided where necessary to limit the voltage drop to 1.2 volts. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-34 , F. Cabinets shall be provided with space for future addition of instruments. Fully loaded cabinets will not be acceptable. G. Separate terminal blocks shall be installed for 120 volt a.c. wiring and for low level signal wiring within field equipment cabinets. Terminal blocks for line voltage wiring shall be separated from low level signal wiring terminal blocks by a barrier partition. H. Terminal blocks shall be 300 volt rated, medium duty, channel mounted, with numbered marking strips. I. Submit shop drawings of each panel for review before fabrication. PO J. Interlock Relays: The control manufacturer shall check the electrical diagrams(starter diagrams) and shall furnish all required interlock relays and manual switches prewired in the field equipment cabinets. K. Each cabinet shall have a laminated readable drawing of the final working cabinet and sensors, controllers, etc. Drawing to be permanently fixed to cabinet. If there is no room in the cabinet,affix the drawing next to the cabinet. L. Panels shall be keyed to PK625, campus HVAC key. W 2.7 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND MATERIALS A. Install, connect and wire the items included under this Section. This work includes providing required conduit, wire, fittings, and related wiring accessories. All wiring shall be installed in conduit. 1. Provide wiring for thermostats, aquastats, and control and alarm devices for all Sections of the Specifications. 2. Power for each direct digital control unit, field equipment panel, unitary controller, as well as all equipment furnished by this Section shall be taken from a 120 volt a.c. dedicated power source connected to the emergency power ' distribution system. Wiring and conduit between the emergency power source and all direct digital control units, field equipment cabinets, and unitary controllers, etc., shall be furnished and installed by this Section of the Specifications. In addition, this Contractor shall provide 120 volt, 60 hertz convenience outlet in each controller and panel. 3. Provide status function conduit and wiring for equipment covered under this �w Section. 4. Provide conduit and wiring between the DDC control units and field equipment cabinets and the temperature, humidity, or pressure sensing elements, including low voltage (under 100 volt)control wiring and coaxial cable in conduit. 5. Provide conduit and control wiring for devices specified in this Section. 6. Provide conduit and signal wiring between motor starters in motor control centers and high and/or low temperature relay contacts and remote relays in DDC panels located in the vicinity of motor control centers. 7. Provide conduit and wiring between the DDC system, electrical panels, metering instrumentation, indicating devices, miscellaneous alarm points, remotely operated contactors, and DDC units as shown on the drawings or as specified. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-33 O. Damper Operators: All damper operators shall be of the electrically actuated (120VAC) spring return type, and shall be fully proportioning, unless otherwise specified. They shall be quiet in operation and have ample power to overcome .. friction of damper linkage and air pressure acting on louvers to position dampers accurately and smoothly for velocities up to 3500 fpm. The damper operator mounting arrangement shall be outside the air stream wherever possible. The control manufacturer shall provide a substantial (strong) linkage between operator and damper. Operators shall be capable of operating at varying rates of speed to correspond to the dictates of the controllers and variable load requirements. The operators shall be capable of operating in sequence when required by the sequence of operation. The operators shall have external adjustable stops to limit the stroke in either direction. The operator linkage arrangement shall be such as to permit normally open or normally closed positions of the dampers as required. P. A sufficient number of damper operators shall be installed to operate single and multiple damper sections smoothly and in unison at the maximum rated static pressure and air velocity, and to provide the close-off torque required to meet damper leakage criteria. Provide auxiliary drive shafts with pillow block bearings and bearing support brackets rigidly attached to the damper frame assembly on damper banks more than .. one damper section wide. Q. Dampers shall be manufactured by Ruskin Damper and Louver or Imperial Damper and Louver. 2.6 FIELD EQUIPMENT CABINETS A. Provide, adjacent to each air conditioning system, ventilating system, water circulation system and other systems as required, field equipment cabinet. The cabinet shall be made of steel or extruded aluminum, with proper bracing for rigid wall or floor mounting. The cabinet shall not be attached to any piece of building equipment. Mount in this cabinet all associated temperature controls, such as relays, switches, air gauges, etc., except as otherwise specified. All adjustable devices shall be mounted within a cabinet section with doors and a key-operated lock of an approved type. B. Each control device on the cabinet shall be marked with engraved nameplates describing its function and cross-referencing it to control diagrams shown on the panel. C. Internal cabinet wiring shall have identification sleeves at each termination at the terminal strip. D. Field equipment panels shall be complete so that they may be erected at the site and after connection of external wiring and tubing to the designated terminal points. Each panel assembly will be a unit capable of performing its functions in accordance with the Specifications, and any other attachments which are a part of this Section. E. Failure of Specifications to state or show materials which are essential to make the .. instrument panel assemblies a complete and operating unit shall not relieve the responsibility of furnishing such materials without additional cost to the Owner. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-32 „�, go G. Total blade height shall not be less than duct height minus the damper frame width. Blank-off plates will not be permitted. Where damper sizes are increased above those indicated on mechanical due to standard blade width, this Section of the Specification shall be responsible for coordinating with the Sheet Metal Contractor to incorporate transition ducts. All costs for fabrication and installation of transition ducts shall be included as part of this Section of the Specification. Transitions shall be installed by the Sheet Metal Contractor. H. Dampers shall have continuous stainless spring steel jamb seals installed the full height of each vertical frame member to maintain tension on the thrust bearing sealing the blade ends and axle. Non-smoke dampers shall be provided with fabric reinforced, or vinyl neoprene edge seals. Smoke dampers shall be furnished with silicon rubber blade edge seals. Edge seals shall be securely attached to the damper blades and shall increase the tightness of the seal as the differential static pressure across the damper increases. I. Breaks in the galvanized finish caused during fabrication operations shall be cleaned and completely covered with a sound coat of zinc rich paint. J. All dampers shall be constructed to withstand the approach velocity developed at maximum design air flow for each damper and ductwork configuration as shown on the mechanical drawings. This Contractor shall determine the maximum design air flow through each damper, calculate the air velocity through the damper, and select a damper suitable to withstand the velocity developed. Maximum design air flow calculations shall be included with damper schedule submissions. K. For non-smoke control dampers, air leakage through a closed damper shall not exceed the following values: Damper Dimensions Differential Total Leakage Height x Width S.P. Inches, w.g. Cfm 48 in. x 48 in. 4 160 L. Damper leakage and pressure drop for non-smoke control dampers shall be certified by tests performed in accordance with AMCA Standard. 500 at an independent AMCA approved testing laboratory. Test data including the close-off torque required to achieve the specified leakage rates shall be included when submitted for approval. M. Damper banks consisting of multiple damper sections shall be furnished with continuous vertical 10 gauge galvanized steel stiffeners every 48 inches as part of the damper assembly. Drive blades of multiple section damper assemblies shall be coupled together with jack shafts. The assembly of damper sections shall be constructed to operate against the maximum differential static pressure specified for individual damper sections. N. Smoke dampers and combination smoke/fire dampers consisting of multiple damper sections shall be provided with mounting frames, mullions and hardware required to conform with their UL listing. This Section of the Specification shall be responsible for coordinating with the Sheet Metal Contractor and insuring that the dampers are - installed in accordance with the manufacturer's and UL requirements. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-31 ON NEMA 4 rated. All pneumatic devices shall be weatherproof. All exposed valve components (i.e., stem, shaft, gear operators, handwheel, etc.) shall be constructed of nonrusting metal or factory-coated with rust-inhibiting paint. 2.5 AUTOMATIC CONTROL AND AUTOMATIC SMOKE DAMPERS A. Low leakage automatic control dampers, automatic smoke dampers and/or combination smoke/fire dampers shall be furnished under this Section of the Specifications. Smoke dampers shall meet the requirements of UL 555S for Class II leakage at 350°F. Combination smoke/fire dampers shall meet the requirements of UL555 and UL555S for Class II leakage at 350°F. All electrical wiring (power and control) for the dampers will be furnished and installed by this Section. B. Dampers Which Require Opposed Blade Action: Dampers under modulating control such as outdoor air,return air and spill air dampers in air conditioning systems and air intake,recirculation air,and exhaust air dampers in ventilation systems. C. Dampers Which Require Parallel Blade Action: Dampers in two-position service such as outdoor air intake and exhaust air dampers in 100 percent outdoor air ventilation systems, fan discharge dampers and floor isolation dampers in supply and return air ducts. D. Smoke Dampers: All floor isolation dampers shall be smoke dampers. Provide smoke dampers at all in two hour rated walls and wherever a fire damper is installed. In systems over 15,000 cfm, the fan discharge damper and return air damper at the mixed air plenum shall be smoke dampers. E. Combination Smoke/Fire Damper: Combination smoke/fire damper incorporating a one-time 165°F. fusible link shall be furnished and installed in all two hour fire rated ,, walls. Damper shall be capable of being reopened only up to the link disconnect temperature. Dampers shall be suitable for installation in dynamic systems and be dynamically rated for closure against air flow in both vertical and horizontal mounting configurations. All combination smoke/fire dampers shall meet all NFPA requirements. F. Dampers shall be constructed with 5 inch x 1 inch welded frames of 16 gauge (min.) galvanized steel, roll formed into triple "U" configuration, or 2 inch x 1 inch x 1/8 inch welded galvanized steel channel frame. Blades shall be not less than 16 gauge galvanized steel formed with multiple, longitudinal breaks and interlocking "V" groove edges. Maximum blade width, 8 inches; maximum blade length, 48 inches. Blades shall pivot on 1/2 inch diameter zinc plated steel axles through-bolted to blade, and mounted in low friction bearings. Smoke dampers shall be provided with stainless steel bearings. Damper blade linkages shall be face mounted on the blades. Drive linkage and damper operators shall be located outside of the duct. Damper operator drive brackets and linkage hardware, including brackets, couplings, .,. connecting rods, bolts and set screws shall be zinc or cadmium plated steel of sufficient size and strength to operate dampers against the maximum rated static pressure. Linkage trunnions shall be brass or bronze. All damper hardware shall be bolted in place. Speed screws will not be permitted. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-30 �, Sub-Critical Flo,�%- Liquid: CV - Q t-�F DP Steam: CV = W 2.1 V P(P I - P2) Critical Flow For Steam: (AP> Pl/2) CV _ W 1.65P1 Where: CV = Valve flow coefficient GF = Specific gravity at flowing temperature(water= 1 @ 60°F.) P 1 = Upstream pressure,psia P2 = Downstream pressure,psia AP = Actual pressure drop P1 -P2 Q = Liquid flow rate, US gpm W = Steam flow rate,pounds per hour F. Motorized Valves 1. All motorized valves, where shown on the drawings or specified herein, shall be high performance butterfly type with lug ends. Motorized valves used in on/off service shall be furnished with electric fail-in-place operators, and open and closed limit switches. Valves shall fail in their last position upon loss of electric power. Motorized valves used in modulating service shall have electric actuators. All such valves shall be provided under this Section. Valve body shall be carbon steel with 316 stainless disc, 17-4 pH stainless shaft. Seat and seal materials shall be Teflon. The valve shall be provided with a speed control device (adjustable) to prevent the valve from too rapid a closure rate. Body pressure rating and connection type construction shall conform to fitting and valve schedules. The operator shall be provided with an external position OR indicator. Valves shall be full-bodied, full lug type only (wafer type or sem'lugged valves will not be permitted). Valves shall be bolted from both ends of the flanges. Valves shall be capable of bubble-tight double dead-end closure with either upstream or downstream flange removed through the valves' full rated pressure. Valve shall be Jamesbury Corp., DeZurik Model HP Il, Bray,or Engineer-approved equal. 2. All motorized valves shall be provided with manually de-clutchable operated handwheels for overriding the operator in both emergency and normal operation. 3. Motorized valves, automatic control valves, actuators, limit switches, manual override handwheels, position indicators, etc., which are located outdoors shall be constructed for outdoor use. All electrical devices shall be weatherproof and Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-29 speed to correspond to the exact dictates of the controllers and variable load requirements. The valves shall be capable of operating in sequence with other valves and/or dampers when required by the sequence of operation. All control valves shall be sized by the control manufacturer and shall be guaranteed to meet the heating and cooling loads as scheduled. All control valves shall be suitable for the pressure conditions and shall close against the differential pressures involved. Valve operators shall be spring return electrically actuated type. Body pressure rating and connection type construction shall conform to fitting and valve schedules, as per the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Section of the Specifications. Control valves 2 inch and smaller shall have bronze bodies and stainless steel trim and stem. End connections shall be threaded. Control valves 2-1/2 in. and larger in a service where pressure does not exceed 125 psig at 350°F. or where steam pressure does not exceed ., 100 psig shall have 125 pound cast iron bodies. Trim and stem shall be stainless steel. End connections shall be flanged. Valves 2-1/2 in. and larger in a service where pressure does not exceed 250 psig at 400 °F. shall have 250 pound cast iron bodies. Trim and stem shall be stainless steel. End connections shall be flanged. Valves shall have sufficient stuffing box protection to insure against leakage at hydrostatic head involved. Control valve operators shall be sized to close against a differential pressure equal to the design pump head plus 10 percent. Where pressure and flow combinations exceed ratings for commercial valves and operators, industrial class single-seated valves and operators or double-seated valve with an ANSI Class III leakage (.1%of rated valve capacity) shall be provided. • B. Single-seated valves shall meet ANSI Class IV leakage(0.01%of Cv). C. Steam control valves shall be single seated type with linear flow characteristics. Preheater valves shall be normally open type and water heater valves shall be normally closed type. Whenever the steam flow rate is such as to require a single valve larger than 2-1/2 inches, provide two valves in parallel, arranged to operate in sequence. Low pressure (15 psig) steam valves shall provide tight closure at a pressure at least 10 psig higher than the normal, maximum operating pressure. WM D. Control valve shall be provided with travel indicator (pointer) attached to stem and a travel indicator scale attached to the yoke to indicate valve travel. IM E. Control valves shall be sized using the following basic formulas: No Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-28 go N. Airflow Measuring Stations 1. Airflow measuring stations shall be Air Monitor Corporation, Volu-Probe FI Airflow traverse probe, Tek-Air Systems VorTek. Airflow measurement accuracy shall be f2% of actual flow over a range of 6 to 1 capacity turndown. The probe installation shall not produce any static barrier (resistance to airflow). 2. Each airflow measuring station shall be furnished with an electronic differential pressure transmitter capable of transmitting a 4-20 mA d.c. output signal. Transmitter accuracy shall be f0.5%of span, including linearity, hysteresis and repeatability. Repeatability f0.5%of span. The transmitter shall be capable of being field recalibrated for a different span within its range limits. Span shall be matched for a specific cfm range. Transmitter zero shall be field adjustable. Transmitter shall be Tek-Air VorTek, or Air Monitor Veltron Series 1000C. O. Differential Pressure Switch-Water 1. Differential pressure switch shall contain brass bellows which shall operate snap-acting SPDT contacts. 2. High and low sensing ports shall be 1/4 inch NPT. 3. Adjustable operating range shall be capable of sustaining 75 psig in either direction. 4. Switch shall be Penn Controls - Series P74, Mercoid - Series DP, or as approved by Engineer. P. Differential Pressure Switch-Air 1. Differential pressure switch shall be diaphragm operated with SPDT contacts. ' Contact rating shall be 15A, 120VAC. 2. High and low sensing ports shall be 1/8 inch NPT connected to angle type tips designed to sense pressure. 3. Switch shall be Dwyer Series 1800, or as approved by Engineer. Q. Pressure Electric Switch: Pressure electric switch shall be pneumatically operated snap-acting switch with SPDT contacts. Set point adjustable from 3 to 20 psi., 2.0 psi differential (deadband), fixed. Switch shall be L&G Powers Model 134, Honeywell Model P-658, or as approved by Engineer. R. High Temperature Room Thermostat: High temperature room thermostat shall contain either bi-metallic or mercury type switches, SPDT rated for 5 amps at 120 VAC. S. Current Sensing Relays: Relay shall be field adjustable for detecting a.c. current levels in equipment served. Relay shall be non-latching and shall have no time delay. Nominal input voltage and current sensing range shall be selected based on electrical characteristics of equipment served. Relay shall be installed on one lead of the load _ side of motor feed. Relay contacts shall be Form C rated for 5A at 120 VAC. 2.4 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES A. All automatic control valves shall be single-seated globe valves and shall have equal percentage flow characteristics unless specified otherwise. The valves shall be quiet in operation and fail-safe in either normally open or normally closed position in the event of power failure. All valves shall be capable of operating at varying rates of Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-27 element shall be averaging type, wound to provide sensing of the average of temperatures along the full length of the probe sheath. The complete RTD assembly shall include a die-cast aluminum connector head fitted to the lead end of the probe sheath. Connector head shall be weather resistant with threaded aluminum captive cap and chain, terminal block for lead wires, 112 NPT process end and extension wiring connections. 4. Pipe Mounting: Install RTD in matched Thermowell with an internal diameter to exactly fit the probe sheath. The RTD probe shall be inserted to the full depth of the Thermowell. Provide a union connection in the 1/2 inch NPT pipe nipple extension between the Thermowell and the connector head. 5. Duct Mounting: RTD probes installed in air ducts shall be the full width of the duct. Provide a 1/2 inch NPT common flange and gasket bolted to the duct side wall at mid-height. Install RTD assembly on flange with union connection in the 1/2 inch NPT pipe nipple extension from flange to connector head. Provide continuous support of exposed RTD probe inside of duct by strapping to support angle iron spanning full width of duct. The sensing probe shall be fully exposed to the airstream, and the support sufficiently rigid to prevent any vibration or movement of the sensing probe due to air velocity effects. L. Differential Pressure Transmitters(Used in Water Service) 1. Differential pressure transmitters shall be variable capacitance type arranged for 2 wire, 4-20 mA control signal output. Transmitter shall be enclosed in a gasketed, dust and watertight housing. All body cavities open to the process fluid shall be provided with drain ports at the cavity bottom and vent ports at the top of the cavity. Both drain and vent ports shall be minimum 1/4 inch- 18 NPT. The transmitter shall have continuously adjustable (externally) zero and " span. 2. The differential pressure range span shall be adjustable to permit maximum zero elevation of 600% of calibrated span and a maximum zero suppression of ■* 500% of calibrated span. These adjustments shall be made within the transmitter housing without a change of parts. The transmitter shall be capable of sustaining differential pressures in either direction, up to the body rating without damage to the instrument or a loss of accuracy or zero shift. 3. The transmitter shall be fully compensated for both process and ambient temperature variations and a calibrated accuracy of±0.25% of calibrated span. 4. Transmitter shall be furnished complete with factory mounted 5-valve manifold, manufactured by Anderson Greenwood & Co. Model N16T. Transmitter shall be Rosemount Model 1151 DP,or as approved by Engineer. M. Turbine Flow Meters - Insertion Type: Insertion type turbine meters shall be designed to mount through a fully open 1 inch ball, plug or gate valve. Meter flow range shall be .4-20 ft./sec. for liquid. Meter linearity shall be ±2% of actual rating. Wetted metal parts shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel. Housing pressure rating shall be 400 psig. A d.c. powered three-wire flow transmitter shall be flow meter mounted. Flow transmitter output shall be 4-20 mA d.c. linear with flow. Sensing method shall be impendence sensing nonmagnetic and nonphotoelectric. Transmitter accuracy shall be ±0.1% of span. Turbine meter shall be Onicon Incorporated Model F1210, or as approved by the Engineer. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 0 l.11.12 15950-26 „11 ww tl% R.H. Visala, or as approved by the Engineer. Finish and final locations shall be reviewed by the Owner and Engineers. 3. Combination temperature and humidity transmitters are not acceptable. L Weather Station I'M 1. The weather station shall be Texas Electronic Series 3000, and shall initially be used to measure outside air dry bulb temperature and relative humidity. Weather station shall be installed on a six foot mast furnished and installed by this Section. 2. The components of the station shall be: a. Temperature sensor, TT-101, and signal conditioner, SC-15-3, generating a 4-20 mA signal over a range of-40°F. to 120°F. Accuracy no shall be t 1°F. b. Relative humidity sensor, TH-2013, and signal conditioner, SC-13-3, generating a 4-20 mA signal over a range of 0-100% R.H. Accuracy shall be t2%R.H. over the range of 20-90% R.H. C. Surge arresters at sensor inputs to prevent system damage from high voltage lightning spikes. d. Chassis assembly, BPC-250, used to house the signal conditioners for the sensors and a PS-01-2 120/240 volt, 50/60 Hz. power supply. J. Thermowells 1. Provide a Thermowell for every temperature sensing element installed in piping and equipment, including transmitter sensing bulbs, RTD's and temperature switches. 2. Thermowells shall be Type 304 stainless steel, tapered pattern, 3/4 inch NPT external process connection, 1/2 inch NPT internal thread, with lagging INS extension, equal to insulation thickness, where installed in insulated piping. Thermowells shall have an insertion length of at least 1/3 of pipe diameter but in no case shall wells be less than 4-1/2 inch insertion length. Maximum immersion length shall be 6 inches or 3/4 of pipe diameter, whichever is smaller. Thermowells shall be rated for maximum system operating pressure, temperature and fluid velocity. 3. Internal bore of Thermowells shall be sized to exactly fit the diameter of the sensing element to be installed. K. Resistance Temperature Detector(RTD) 1. For monitoring of temperature, use of an RTD as a direct signal input into the direct digital system is an acceptable alternate to a temperature transmitter, provided the accuracy is equal to that of the substituted transmitters (f 0.15% of calibrated span). 2. The RTD shall be a platinum three-wire RTD with base resistance 100 ohms at 0°C., DIN Standard 43760 calibration. Compensated for lead wire resistance, and wired directly to direct digital controller analog input terminals. Operating range 0 to 100°F. Maximum temperature indication error in operating range not to exceed plus or minus 0.55°F. 3. Platinum sensing wire shall be wound on ceramic or glass mandrel with lead wires encased in ceramic lead support tube and epoxy sealed in 1/4 inch OD, Type 304SS, pressuretight sheath. For RTD's installed in air ducts, the sensing Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-25 Temperature Range -80°C. to 250°C. Accuracy(0°C.) 0.2°C. to 0.05°C. Accuracy(70°C.) 0.2°C. to 0.05°C. Accuracy(150°C.) 1.0°C. Sensitivity -4%/°C. (100 ohm to 100,000 ohm) F. Static Pressure Transmitters (Electronic Type): Duct static pressure transmitters shall consist of static pressure probe, transmitter and electrical box for wiring connections. Duct wall pressure taps shall be acceptable. Reference pressure sensing connections to duct static pressure transmitters shall be made through an ambient pressure probe or chamber which will minimize effects of air disturbances and maintain a steady, uniform reference pressure. Transmitter shall provide 2-wire 4-20 mA d.c. output .� linear over specified pressure range, with an accuracy of±0.05% of span. Wiring connections shall accept 16 AWG wire. Transmitter shall be Air Monitor Corporation Series 1000C,or as approved by Engineer. w G. Protective Thermostats and Detectors 1. Electric high temperature thermostats shall be bimetallic element type with snap-acting manual reset switch and with a sensing element with at least 10 go inch insertion length. Thermostats shall be set for duct temperature of 125°F., unless otherwise noted. Install where noted on drawings, or as directed by the Engineer. „m 2. The Electrical Section will furnish and wire all smoke detector elements where noted on drawings, and where indicated or detailed hereinbelow. Smoke detectors shall be installed in ductwork by the Heating, Ventilating and Air so Conditioning Section. 3. Electric low temperature (freeze protection) thermostats shall have 20 foot capillary (not averaging type) installed to cover the entire cross-sectional area of coil face. Switch actuation shall occur if any 12 inch length of capillary ■ senses a temperature below set point. As a minimum, one thermostat shall be furnished and installed for each cooling coil. If one thermostat is not sufficient to provide adequate coverage of coil, this Contractor shall furnish and install no additional thermostats to provide sufficient coverage. Sufficient coil coverage shall be field verified by Engineer. These thermostats shall be two-position automatic reset type. The elements shall be suspended at least 6 to 8 inches ... downstream of the preheat coils. Furnish in the direct digital control system a software time delay relay to delay fan shutdown and alarming at the network computer for 180 seconds (adjustable), unless otherwise stated. H. Relative Humidity Transmitters 1. Duct mounted relative humidity transmitter shall provide 4-20 mA linear d.c. output corresponding to range of 0 to 95% R.H. Calibrated end-to-end accuracy shall be ±1.0% R.H. over the range of±10% R.H. of set point and ±2.5% R.H. over the range of 0-95% R.H. at 25°C. Repeatability ±0.5% R.H.; linearity±1% R.H. Visala, or as approved by the Engineer. 2. Space relative humidity transmitter shall provide a 4-20 mA linear d.c. output corresponding to the range of 0 to 95% R.H. Calibrated end-to-end accuracy shall be ±1.0% R.H. over the range of±10% R.H. of set point and±2.5% R.H. over the range of 0-95% R.H. at 25°C. Repeatability ±0.5% R.H.; linearity X11 Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-24 B. Field wiring for each digital device shall be manufacturer's standard. The details of the wiring shall be included in the submittal. C. The overall accuracy of values at the remote points which are reported to the network computer are given below. Final testing, using test methods as approved by the Engineers, to determine instrument accuracy, shall be made under the direction of the Engineers. D. Temperature Transmitters(Electronic Type) 1. Duct mounted averaging type transmitters shall consist of a 100 ohm platinum RTD averaging element housed in a flexible sheath and electrical box for wiring connections. Transmitter shall provide 2 wire 4-20 mA d.c. output linear over specified temperature range, with an accuracy of±1°F. over entire operating span. Wiring connections shall accept 16 AWG wire. Probe length shall be one (1) linear foot per four (4) square feet of duct area. Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Kele or as approved by Engineer. 2. Duct mounted nonaveraging type transmitters shall consist of a 100 ohm platinum RTD mounted on a 18 inch probe and electrical box for wiring connections. Transmitter shall provide a 2 wire 4-20 mA d.c. output linear over specified temperature range with an accuracy of ±0.5°F. over the entire operating span. Probe length shall be full length of duct. Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Kele, or as approved by Engineer. 3. Liquid insertion type transmitters shall consist of a spring loaded 100 ohm platinum RTD and electrical box for wiring connections. Transmitter shall provide a 2 wire 4-20 mA d.c. output linear over specified temperature range ON with an accuracy of±0.25°F. over entire operating span. Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Kele with sensor mounted in a thermowell, or as approved by Engineer. 4. Transmitters for duct locations shall not be affected by vibrations encountered in normal duct systems. 5. Space transmitter shall be designed for wall mounting in a decorative ventilated enclosure and consist of a 1000 ohm platinum RTD element and electrical box for wiring connections. Transmitter shall provide 2-wire 4-20 mA d.c. output linear over temperature range of 0-100°F, with an accuracy of±l°F. over entire operating span. Wiring connections shall accept 16 AWG wire. Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Kele or as approved by Engineer. Finish and final locations shall be reviewed by the Owner and Engineers. 6. Combination temperature and humidity transmitters are not acceptable. E. Thermistors 1. Thermistor temperature sensing elements are an acceptable alternate for RTD's provided they meet the following performance criteria: a. Thermistors must be measurement grade, semi-conductor glass encapsulated bead type with a negative temperature coefficient of resistance. Thermistors shall meet or exceed the following performance criteria: Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 0 1.1 1.12 15950-23 4) Owner tailored programs. The Owner shall be capable of generating additional programs as may be required through the library of routines available in firmware. 9. Diagnostics and Serviceability: The direct digital control units and unitary controllers shall have built-in, nondestructive procedure for checking the local display(s) and the memory. It shall display advisories for maintenance, .. performance,and/or software problems. 10. Program Availability: The Owner shall be furnished with all software programs required to modify and create new DDC and unitary controller software programs and upload and download the programs. In addition, all programs shall become property of the Owner on completion of the project at no additional cost. AM N. Network Computer Software (The existing network computer operating system shall be used to serve this building's DDC system. All modifications to the existing database and software graphics shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor.) , 1. Provide a separate graphic display for each system specified below. Use different colors to indicate the various components and the state of these components. Colors shall conform on all displays and shall allow easy interaction and rapid recognition. Alarms shall not automatically generate a graphic display but shall send a message to the operator indicating on which graphic display the alarm condition may be viewed. a. Fresh air intake fans. b. Each air conditioning system. C. Each ventilation and exhaust system. d. Each exhaust fan. e. Each floor plan indicating all fans, floor dampers,etc.,per floor. f. Each variable air volume terminal unit. g. Each fan powered variable air volume terminal unit. h. Emergency generator system. i. Each chilled water system. J. Each hot water system. k. Ten(10)additional graphics to be defined by the Owner. 1. Each graphic shall display, as a minimum,the following: 1) Set points. 2) Process variable measurements. 3) Damper position(open/closed, % open). 4) Valve position(open/closed, % open). 5) Equipment status(green - on, white -off,red -alarm). 6) Alarms(green - normal,red - alarm). 2.3 TEMPERATURE CONTROL INSTRUMENTS A. Instruments and control devices shall be provided for all required points detailed hereinafter. Instruments shall have accuracies as stated herein. Instrument characteristics such as hysteresis, relaxation time, span, and maximum and minimum limits, shall be accounted for in applications of instruments and controls. Not all devices specified_ma be re cared for this ro -ect. _—_ q- _ -__p-j ,_ Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-22 ,,,,� 5. Power Fail Restart a. The operating programs and data base shall be protected against loss of normal power by 72 hour (minimum) volatile memory battery backup. When normal power is restored after failure, a software restart program shall be automatically initiated. b. Following recovery from a power failure, all control points in the local controllers and network computer shall be updated to current status. 6. Interface: The unitary controllers shall interface with the direct digital control so units. The direct digital control units shall interface with the network computer. The software portion of this interface shall provide the ability for monitoring and control from the network computer. The interface shall have implemented, as a minimum, the protocol for the following: a. Initialization and down load of programs and data bases. b. Data base definition. C. Process definition. d. Operation interface definition. e. Point monitor and control. f. Enable/disable process and point functions. g. Direct digital control unit status. h. Unitary controller status. 7. Stand-Alone Operation a. In the stand-alone mode, the direct digital control unit and unitary controller shall perform the following operations: 1) Processing of local loop control and energy management functions. 8. Energy Management a. The direct digital control unit shall contain all necessary firmware to implement any of the following energy management functions with the addition of any required field sensors and software programming: 1) Supply air reset from specific load demands. 2) Economizer control. 3) Optimal start using an adaptive algorithm to prevent the need for manual adjustment or parameters. 4) Intermediate season (dead zone)control. 5) VAV fan matching and supply fan control. 6) Trending of system variables at DDC. 7) Short term data storage. 8) Totalization of system variables. 9) Holiday programming. 10) Supply water reset from specific load demands. 11) Operator initiated adjustable staggered restart. 12) Owner tailored programs. The Owner shall be capable of generating additional programs as may be required through the library of routines available in firmware. "* b. The unitary controllers shall contain all necessary firmware to implement, as a minimum, the following energy management functions. 1) Supply air reset from specific load demands. 2) Economizer control. 3) Holiday programming. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-21 2. The software program shall be made to permit on-line programming modifications to add, delete or modify points to any existing programmed category in the field by the Owner subsequent to inputting an established .� authorization Code. 3. The direct digital control unit and unitary controller shall contain resident software as follows: a. Mathematical, logic, and utility functions. b. Standard energy calculations and control functions. C. Routines available in any combination for site programming the unit, including the following: 1) Math Routines Basic Arithmetic Binary Logic Fixed Formulas for Psychometric Calculations 2) Utility Routines Process Entry and Exit ... Keyboard Functions Variable Adjustments and Output Alarm Indication Restart 3) Control Routines Signal Compensation Loop Control Control Tuning Energy Conservation Timed Programming User Defined Programming 4. Sensing and Control a. Monitor and control functions indicated on the point list or as specified. b. Resident programs shall include: 1) Control algorithms to permit proportional, integral and derivative control modes to meet the needs of the application. + 2) Other control modes, such as incremental, floating or two positions. 3) Control routines to bypass or suppress integral and derivative time constants in two-mode and three-mode control algorithms during startup of systems to prevent reset windup. 4) Automatic control loop tuning. C. Point monitoring and control functions shall include the following: 1) Digital Inputs (DI). 2) Analog Inputs (Al). we 3) Digital Output(DO). 4) Pulsed Outputs(PO) with feedback. 5) Analog Output(AO) with feedback. d. Analog to digital conversion for analog point monitoring shall be up, provided at the direct digital control unit before digital transmission to the network computer. The conversion resolution shall be preferably not less than 12 bit. "t Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-20 „� 10. The control of each terminal unit shall be capable of complete stand-alone operation and shall not depend on information from any other element in the building, including other terminal units and network computer for primary control. Failure of any component shall not interrupt control of any other terminal unit controller. 11. The terminal unit shall be furnished complete with factory mounted air velocity sensor, direct digital control unit and software, space temperature sensor, damper, damper actuator, and power transformer(if required). This Contractor shall mount and wire the space temperature sensor and provide communication wiring between each terminal unit and the network computer. Power wiring of variable volume terminal units shall be furnished and installed by his Contractor. Power wiring of fan powered terminal units shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor. This Contractor shall also provide all required software interface for the network computer to monitor temperatures and air flows and adjust set points. The operator at the network computer shall be able to change temperature set point, change minimum and maximum velocity set point, display space temperature, actual air flow and duct velocity. Each terminal unit shall be addressable through the network computer. This Contractor shall field calibrate the air velocity sensor and DDC controller. 12. Mounting configuration for control enclosure (i.e., right or left hand side) shall be as indicated on Mechanical Drawings. No K. Network Computer(The existing campus network computer shall serve this building's DDC system.) L. System Communications 1. Each direct digital control unit shall communicate with each other and the existing network computer through a software "token passing" protocol. If a control unit or the network computer fails, all other devices on the communications network shall be notified of the failure and the communications network shall automatically adjust to reflect the failure. When the failed control unit(s) or network computer reestablishes communications, all other devices on the network shall be notified and normal communications shall resume. 2. Communication between unitary controllers shall be through a peer-to-peer protocol. 3. The network computer shall alarm and notify the operator by screen display, printout, and audio tone when a communications breakdown occurs between any direct digital control unit and the network computer or unitary controller and direct digital control unit. 4. All communication shall be lightning protected by providing a Kele-Baybond PC 642. M. Direct Digital Control Unit and Unitary Controller Software 1. The direct digital control unit and unitary controller programming language shall be designed for automation and control applications. System controller programming, editing and data base generation, control and reporting functions shall be performed at the network computer. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-19 be permanently labeled and color coded for ease of identification. No access to within the enclosure shall be required for installation, startup or operation of the terminal unit. ill provide the terminal unit with fail-in-place 3. The terminal unit manufacturer w damper. 4. The Automatic Temperature Control Contractor shall field calibrate the .s microprocessor controller and all field devices. 5. This Contractor shall be responsible for shipping costs associated with the devices discussed above, the repair and/or replacement of all devices damaged .w during shipment and all instructions pertaining to mounting, wiring and tubing, including wiring diagrams. 6. The control unit shall be capable of interfacing with a hand-held terminal unit, DDC panel and the network computer. The control unit shall accept a temperature signal from an electronic space sensor/transmitter with warm/cool adjustment, override switch and LED occupied/unoccupied indicator. Room temperature, actual and calculated air flows and flow and temperature alarms shall be continuously transmitted to the network for access by the network computer or other DDC units. The accuracy of the air flow measurement shall be f5%, within the temperature range of 50-90°F. The status of all control unit 1/0 points shall be available to the entire network or the network computer at any time. All alarms shall be automatically transmitted to the appropriate locations as required by the system programming. 7. Control algorithms necessary to accomplish the stated sequence of operation shall be preprogrammed in the control unit and shall be ready for operation after application and unit address information is programmed into the .. controller. All control sequences shall be selectable from the network computer, DDC panel and/or hand-held terminal unit. The operator at the network computer shall be able to change temperature set points, change minimum and maximum velocity set point, display room temperature and display duct velocity. Control software shall be maintained in nonvolatile memory for reset after a power failure. 8. The hand-held terminal unit shall connect into the system via a jack connector at the room temperature sensor and at the terminal unit. It shall be capable of display of system variables, override control, enabling/disabling of resident control programs, and adjustment of control parameters. .M► a. Connection of a hand-held terminal, or multiple hand-held terminals, shall not interrupt nor interfere in any way with normal peer network operation, prevent alarms from being indicated, or preclude central initiated commands and system modification from the network computer. The hand-held terminal shall have its own rechargeable battery-supplied power. Battery supply shall be sufficient for 24 hours nominal usage before recharging. Low battery condition shall be visibly displayed. .� 9. The unit controller shall have, as a minimum, the following I/O: a. Space temperature. b. Differential pressure (velocity pressure). " C. Damper control. d. Reheat coil control (as required per application). e. Fan start/stop(fan-powered terminal units only). f. Fan status (fan-powered terminal units only). Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-18 .,., 10) Report all points in alarm status. 11) Add a new point. 12) Modify an existing point. 13) Remove an existing point. 14) Copy an existing point. 15) Adjust control settings(proportional band reset rate, etc.). 16) Initiate energy management programs. 17) Define control algorithms. 18) Acknowledge alarms. The operator, through the hand-held terminal, shall be capable of performing Points 1., 2., 3., 10., 12., 15. and 18. j. All variables shall be continuously monitored for sensor failure. When a OR j. uses a variable (sensed or calculated) that is in a trouble condition, the variable will alarm and the calculation will use a user- defined default value or use the last reliable input from the sensor. * ! k. Each direct digital control unit and unitary controller shall be provided with the ability to prevent unauthorized access to its software program. This shall be accomplished by a keyboard or cabinet lock or through software programming. In the locked, unauthorized position, or without password authorization, the operating characteristics of the system cannot be changed, although inputs, outputs and set point values can be we displayed. In the unlocked, authorized position, or with password authorization, the ability to change the control unit program shall be unhindered. Key locks shall be keyed to PK625 campus HVAC key. 1. The direct digital control units shall interface directly with the network computer via a token passing pier-to-pier local area network communicating at a rate of 2.5 megabit/sec. The unitary controllers shall communicate with each other via an industrial standard network operating at 9600 baud minimum. J. Fan Powered Variable Air Volume Terminal Unit Controllers and Variable Air Volume Terminal Unit Controllers I. The DDC system vendor shall ship for mounting and wiring to the terminal unit manufacturer the following items: a. Microprocessor based pressure independent terminal unit controller. b. Software. C. Enclosure terminations. d. Control transformer(if required). e. Air velocity sensor. f. Electric damper actuator. g. Interposing relays. 2. The DDC controller and its associated power supply, transducers, electric damper operator, etc., shall be neatly mounted within a separate 20 gauge sealed and gasketed galvanized sheet metal enclosure by the Automatic No Temperature Control Contractor. The completed assembly shall be shipped by the Automatic Temperature Control Contractor to the terminal unit manufacturer for mounting directly to and supported from the terminal device it serves. All external electrical connections to the DDC controller within the box shall be terminated in two separate junction boxes (with removable covers), i.e., one for power and one for signal communications. All wiring and tubing shall Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-17 2. Each direct digital control unit and unitary controllers shall provide the following features: a. The direct digital control unit shall be a completely self-contained, site programmable,real time, microprocessor based controller. b. It shall include integral power supplies, communications channels, clocks, analog and digital input and output modules and a self-charging battery capable of supporting all random access memory (RAM), clock functions, and DDC database and operating programs within the control unit for 72 hours (minimum) in the event of power failure or power interruption. C. In the event of power failure or power interruption, equipment or life safety system trip, all unit outputs shall go to a fail-safe condition, allowing all final control elements (i.e., valves, dampers, fans, pumps, .■ etc.)to go to their respective fail-safe modes. d. Upon recovery from a power failure(normal power restored), the control unit shall automatically resume MI operation based upon a restart software program. In addition, all control loops shall be reset upon system restart to the condition they would have been in had a power failure not occurred. e. Each direct digital control unit and unitary controller shall have the ability on a stand-alone basis to adjust controller variables, start/stop motors and position valves and dampers. f. Digital control algorithms shall be resident in the controller to permit proportional, integral, derivative and two-position control modes in any combination to meet the needs of the application. Temperature controller shall be three mode (P+I+D) controllers. All other controllers shall be two mode (P+I)controllers. g. Offer immunity to EMI and RFI radiated noise (e.g., walkie-talkies within a 10 foot radius of the closed DDC enclosure). ,rep h. The operator shall have the ability to communicate with a control unit through the use of any of the following: 1) The control unit integral display and control panel or hand-held terminal. (If control unit does not contain an integral display, as a minimum, two hand-held terminals shall be furnished to the Owner.) 2) Laptop computer. ..R 3) The network computer. i. The operator, through any of the devices mentioned, shall, with the exception of the hand-held terminal, perform any of the following functions: 1) Display the status of any point. 2) Change set points. 3) Command points on or off. 4) Enable or disable existing points. 5) Report status of all points in the system. *•� 6) Report all failed points. 7) Report all points being trended. 8) Report all points being totalized. 9) Report command priority of all points. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.1 1.12 15950-16 G. System Architecture 1. The system architecture shall consist of a network of independent, stand-alone direct digital control units and unitary controllers communicating over a two- tier local area network. Each control unit shall perform all specified control functions independently. Failure of one control unit shall have no effect upon any other unit in the network. 2. Each direct digital control unit shall communicate with each other and with the existing network computer. 3. Each direct digital control unit shall be capable of sharing point information with other direct digital control units, such that control sequences or closed loop control executed at one control unit may receive input signals from sensors connected to other units on the network. If the network communications link fails or the originating control unit malfunctions, the control loop shall continue to function, using the last value received from the failed direct digital control unit. 4. Each direct digital control unit shall control, at a maximum, one (1) central air conditioning system. In addition, direct digital control units shall be dedicated to each chilled and hot water system. Provide multiple control units per system such that each control system serving water systems shall be configured so that the loss of a control unit will not result in loss of an entire system. Wherever possible, the DDC control units shall be located in Mechanical Equipment Rooms. 5. The direct digital control system shall be capable of supporting multiple network computers. 6. The direct digital control system shall be capable of interfacing with the existing campus Automated Logic Direct Digital Control System. Any functions associated with this building's DDC system shall be accessible at the campus network computer. H. Operating Environment 1. The entire control system installed within the building shall be capable of +w operating at ambient temperature between 40T. and 110T., except for the network computer where the operating temperature range shall be between 507. and 85°F. with relative humidity maintained between 20% and 85%, noncondensing. All equipment installed outside the building shall be subject to ambient design dry bulb and wet bulb for the area. 2. The entire system shall operate normally within fluctuations of plus or minus 10 percent in the rated voltage of primary power sources. Operation shall be at 60 hertz plus or minus 1/2 hertz. I. Direct Digital Field Control Units and Unitary Controllers Field monitoring and control shall be by stand-alone site programmable microprocessor based direct digital control units (DDC's). Each direct digital control unit shall provide the following: ! a. All control functions shall be by means of software in the direct digital control units. Auxiliary air pilots or relays for performing control logic are not acceptable. ,w b. Specified software functions. C. Specified energy management functions. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-15 we B. The control system vendor shall have complete responsibility for providing the direct digital automatic temperature control system described in this Specification. This responsibility shall include: on 1. System engineering. 2. System hardware. 3. System programming and configuring. .� 4. System documentation. 5. System installation. 6. Recommended spare parts. 7. Factory testing. 8. Packing and shipping. 9. Maintenance training program. 10. Operator training program. " 11. Startup assistance. C. The direct digital control system furnished shall be complete in all respects so that it shall perform its specified functions in accordance with this Section of the Specifications. Implementation of all control functions shall be the responsibility of the control system provider. D. The entire direct digital control system shall be complete with all necessary control devices, thermostats, valves, motors, relays, switches, dampers, panels, and electric wiring to provide the functions as described hereinafter, regardless of whether or not specifically mentioned. E. The direct digital control system shall be installed complete in all respects by competent mechanics, regularly employed by the manufacturer of the control system. All automatic control valves and dampers shall be installed in pipelinesand ducts by the respective trade under supervision of the control system manufacturer. F. System Functions and Performance 1. The direct digital control system shall be capable of accepting analog inputs(4- .� 20 mA d.c., 0-5 volt d.c., etc.), digital, pulsed digital, thermistor and RTD's from field devices and producing analog outputs (4-20 mA d.c., pulse width modulation), and digital type to enforce specific control and monitoring MW functions. The control system shall be able to: a. Adjust control parameters for process controlled variables. b. Initiate,define and acknowledge audible alarms. C. Start/stop motors and position valves and dampers. """ d. Initiate emergency shutdowns. e. Communicate with a network computer. 2. Equipment normally associated with a conventional analog control panel will or be replaced by a local, stand-alone direct digital control unit. Pneumatic equipment shall not be used. 3. There shall be a discrete analog and/or digital output signal for each field 00 device. Split ranging of a single analog output to sequence valves and dampers is not acceptable. No Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-14 f. The color display monitor shall be 21 inch, high contrast, flat square type, operating in conjunction with an SVGA high speed 8 MB video output card. The monitor and video card shall provide a noninterlaced display with a minimum 85 MHz. refresh rate and shall be capable of displaying color graphics and text. The display area shall have a resolution of 1028 horizontal by 1024 vertical resolvable pixels. The monitor shall be capable of displaying 256 colors selected from a palette of 16.7 million colors. A digital display clock shall display on the monitor at all times. Provision for manually resetting it shall be provided. It shall be a 24 hour real time clock and seven day calendar to provide data for logging. g. A network control key or software passwords shall allow automatic l" functions of the system to continue, but prevent unauthorized tampering with any computer pushbuttons or controls while the computer is unattended. This shall not disable the scanning or alarming functions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish all major items of equipment and materials as made by the following manufacturer. Automatic Temperature Controls Automated Logic Yankee Technology 280 Moody St. Ludlow,MA 01056 Attention: Mr. Chuck Arbo (413) 547-6595 2.2 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM A. The direct digital control system shall consist of a network of microprocessor based direct digital control units (DDC) as manufactured by Automated Logic. Each direct digital control unit shall perform all specified control and monitoring functions independently. Failure of one control unit shall have no effect upon any other unit in the network. The direct digital control units shall communicate with each other and the existing campus Automated Logic DDC system network computer. 1. Communications between the direct digital control units and the existing network computer shall be by way of a new network communications cable furnished and installed by this Section. 2. System input/output point capacity shall be expandable by the addition of DDC units and unitary controllers to the communications network. 3. The operator, through the existing network computer, shall have the ability to monitor DDC application and sensor data, override set points and schedules, set and reset control points and download programs to the local direct digital control units. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-13 so 30 GB (minimum) internal hard disk drive, 9.5 msec. access time. One 16XIOX40 CD RW drive. ** One 1.44 MB 3-1/2 in. floppy disk drive. Local bus 32-bit IDE controller capable of supporting two hard disk drives and two floppy disk drives. , ISA expansion bus with three spare expansion slots. Local bus SVGA video output card (1280 x 1024 pixels, 256 color)with 8 MB VRAM graphics accelerator. Iomega Zip 100 MB internal drive with 10 formatted cartridges. One parallel port(printer). Two serial ports(one dedicated for mouse,one spare). Tower type chassis including high capacity power supply with surge suppressor. 101 key keyboard. Microsoft mouse. C. Audio tone generator to activate on reception of an alarm. Audio tone shall be capable of being enabled or disabled on operator command. d. Network computer keyboard,mouse and monitor shall be the primary means of operator access to the system. They will provide the operator interface for control of the entire system. Hard copy of the display will be transferred at the operator's request to the alarm and logging printer. To communicate with the direct digital control system, the operator shall input via the keyboard or mouse a command along with a proper identification of the system. e. Receive-only printer shall be provided for all hard copy output, including alarm reporting, system logging and program development. 1) The printer shall be 24 pin dot matrix heavy duty type with 132 characters per line. The printer shall be capable of print speeds of not less than 400 characters per second at draft quality and 100 characters per second at letter quality. Printer shall include a 80K buffer to hold data waiting to print in order to free the network computer for other tasks. Printer shall be capable of top and rear paper feeds. Printers shall be provided with alarm tone sound. 2) The print shall have a full alphanumeric capability plus WA punctuating and miscellaneous characters. 3) The output typed copy shall be paper and shall be suitable for easy insertion into ring binder with calendar date and time of day automatically typed at beginning of each log. 4) The printer supplied with the system shall operate when messages fall due. The printer shall be used for the recording of information associated with system logs requested by the operator,binary alarms, off-normals of analog indication, and operator changes introduced through the keyboard. A descriptive format shall be used, for ready interpretation by the operator without use of an index or other reference. 5) The printer shall utilize two-color printing or an alternative approved means to distinguish between alarm conditions and return to normal. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-12 +. OR a. The service contract shall include the following minimum provisions: 1) To provide regularly scheduled preventive maintenance and service of at least one man-day per month by factory trained service representatives of this vendor. This service shall be provided from a fully staffed direct branch office of the vendor located within 30 miles of the job site. b. To replace defective parts and components as required. 1) To incorporate improved system reliability as it becomes available for the system from the manufacturer. This provision includes direct component replacements and wiring changes, but shall not include major system design changes. 2) To make available, upon request, 24-hour emergency maintenance service which includes on-site response to emergency service call within 4 hours of initial request and system interrogation within 2 hours of initial request via telephone modem interface. 3) The Owner shall reserve the right to exclude from the service agreement those input points and installation thereof for which construction conditions prohibit installation, calibration, and checkout by the manufacturer. As these input points are subsequently placed in operation, they shall be included in the service agreement by amendment to the agreement. 2. Alternate 15950-2: State the amount to be ADDED to the Base Contract to furnish and install a remote operator workstation located in the Lower Level Pump Room. The workstation shall be capable of communicating to all DDC units located within the building. The workstation shall contain a dynamic software graphic for each system within the building. The workstation shall be installed in a ventilated lockable metal enclosure keyed to PK625 campus HVAC key. The enclosure shall contain all components of the workstation ! including an adjustable "pullout" draw for the keypad. All required power and control wiring and communication wiring and conduit shall be furnished and installed by this Section. a. Network Computer 1) The network computer shall function as the primary means of overall system control and monitoring. The computer equipment shall be arranged to present an efficient and organized appearance. The following components shall be located with the network computer: a) PC based network computer(as manufactured by Dell or IBM). b) Color graphic monitor(as manufactured by Dell, IBM, NEC or Sony). c) Logging and alarm, receive only printer(as manufactured by Epson or Panasonic). b. Provide a network computer to meet Specification requirements. The computer shall include the following: Intel Pentium 11 microprocessor with MMX technology operating at 1000 MHz. • 128 MB SDRAM (expandable to 384 MB) 100 MHz. with 512 KB integrated LZ cache memory. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-11 Am on 8. Remote Points: A separate price shall be included for furnishing and installing each point listed below. (Price shall include all auxiliary devices and input cards to perform each function.) a. Analog input point. $ ea. b. Analog output point. $ ea. C. Digital input point. $ ea. d. Digital output point. $ ea. e. Conduit and wiring for above points between device and DDC panel. $ per ft. .� f. Direct digital control units and all necessary appurtenances to permit attachment of control devices included above. $ ea. g. Trunk wiring for transmission of data, including conduit. $ per first 100 ft. $ per additional ft. 9. Field Devices: Furnish and install(not including wiring or DDC input/output). a. Duct-mounted RID Type transmitters $ ea. b. Liquid insertion RTD Type transmitters and wells $ ea. C. Duct-mounted static pressure transmitters $ ea. w� d. Duct-mounted high temperature thermostats $ ea. e. Low temperature thermostats(freeze protection) $ ea. f. Duct-mounted relative humidity transmitter $ ea. g. Wall-mounted relative humidity transmitter $ ea. h. Differential pressure transmitter(water) $ ea. i. Annubar $ ea. j. Airflow measuring stations $ ea. k. Differential pressure switch(water) $ ea. 1. Differential pressure switch(air) $ ea. m. Wall-mounted high temperature thermostat $ ea. n. Current sensing relays $ ea. o. Electric pneumatic valve $ ea. 10. Electrical Wiring: Furnished and installed: a. 120 VAC wiring and conduit(2 conductor No. 12 in 3/4 inch conduit): 1) Rigid steel $ /ft. 2) EMT $ /ft. 3) IMC $ /ft. 1.16 ALTERNATE PRICES .a A. Quote an alternate price to cover all labor, material, equipment, appurtenances, overhead, profit, taxes, delivery, etc., as required to provide the specified alternate work as a modification to, addition to, subtraction from or as a substitution for the original work specified for the Base Bid. All additional work required under this Section of the Specifications shall be governed by all applicable Sections of the Base Bid Specifications, as if originally included therein. 1. Alternate No. 15950-1: State the amount to be ADDED to the Base Contract to provide an annual service contract for the 1st through 5th year. Provide a copy of the service agreement which is the basis of your pricing, which you would ask the client to sign. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-10 a,, a�w E. All patching will be done as described under another Section of the Specifications. Cost of patching shall be borne by this Division of the work. 1.15 UNIT PRICES A. Submit unit prices, which shall be applied for additional or deleted work, as requested by the Owner/Architect/Engineer. Items to be furnished, installed and connected up complete shall be in full accordance with Specifications as hereinbefore written. The unit prices shall include all testing, tools, supervision, labor, coordination, shop drawings, drafting, materials, equipment, and all other necessary items to provide the installation unless noted otherwise. Receiving, handling, distributing, storing, hoisting and protecting all items provided shall be included in the unit prices set forth below. Unit prices shall also include all overhead,profit and taxes: 1. Automatic Louvered Dampers with Actuators: Furnished only: $ per sq.ft. 2. Smoke Dampers with Actuators: Furnished only: $ per sq.ft. 3. Combination Smoke/Fire Dampers with Actuators: Furnished only: go $ per sq.ft. 4. Automatic Valves with Actuators: Furnished only: 1/2 in. $ per valve 3/4 in. $ per valve i in. $ per valve 1-1/2 in. $ per valve 2 in. $ per valve 2-1/2 in. $ per valve 3 in. $ per valve 4 in. $ per valve 5. Motorized Block Valves with Actuators, Limit Switches, Hand Wheels, Etc.: Furnished only: 6 in. $ per valve u 8 in. $ per valve 10 in. $ per valve 12 in. $ per valve 14 in. $ per valve 16 in. $ per valve 18 in. $ per valve 20 in. $ per valve 6. Variable Air Volume Terminal Units (Direct Digital Control): Furnish only DDC controller, actuator, flow sensing element, power transformer. Devices pa factory mounted and wired at terminal unit manufacturer. Furnish and install space sensor and associated control wiring and power and control wiring to DDC unit. $ per unit 7. Fan Powered Variable Air Volume Terminal Units (Direct Digital Control): Furnish only DDC controller, actuator, flow sensing element, power transformer. Devices factory mounted and wired at terminal unit manufacturer. Furnish and install space sensor and associated control wiring to DDC unit. $ per unit Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-9 the work of other Trades, including flooring and electrical distribution. Submit drawings showing location of holes and proposed reinforcing and obtain Architect's approval before proceeding with installation. D. Do not support pipes by resting clamps on sleeves. Clamps must extend beyond sleeve and be supported outboard of sleeve in an approved manner. E. Provide waterproof type pipe sleeves with galvanized Schedule 40 pipe extensions where penetrating membrane waterproofed floors. F. For pipes passing through roofs,provide roof couplings at suitable level above roof to terminate flashings. G. Wherever pipes are exposed and pass through walls, floors, partitions or ceilings, fit them with chromium plated cast brass escutcheons held in place with set screws. Fit escutcheons snug over insulation, secure in place. Take special care to protect the escutcheons during the course of construction. H. Where space for future pipe is required, provide sleeves and fill with lightweight concrete. 1.13 PROTECTION A. Be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested and accepted. Materials and equipment shall be carefully stored which are not immediately installed after delivery to site. Close exposed parts of the work with temporary covers or plugs • during construction to prevent entry of moisture or obstructing materials. B. Protect the work and material of others from damage that might be caused by work and make good any damage thus caused. 1.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Furnish to the Construction Manager necessary information so that openings for this work can be built into the floors and walls in time. Such cooperation is required to keep cutting of walls and floors to a minimum. B. Set sleeves for pipes accurately before concrete floors are poured, or set boxes on the forms to leave openings in the floors and subsequently set required sleeves in the +� openings. C. Should this Trade neglect to perform preliminary work, and should cutting be required in order to install equipment, the expense of this cutting and restoring of surfaces to their original condition shall be bome by this Trade. D. Do any cutting required for the passage or installation of pipes, conduit, tubing, supports, and the like, provided under this Section. In general, demolition of existing walls and ceilings will be done under another Section of the Specifications. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-8 ,,,,, 40 B. Tag electrical wiring with Brady clip-sleeve type, nonmetallic wire markers, or as approved. C. Furnish and install a screw-fastened type engraved phenolic nameplate with 1/4 inch high white lettering on black background, clearly indicating the function, on cabinets, panels, and pneumatic and electrical junction boxes. D. Furnish lists of panelboards where power has been taken. Lists shall include panel name, load served, amperage and wattage. 1.10 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Multiple sets of operating and maintenance instruction manuals, as herein specified, covering completely equipment starting sequences, operation, maintenance,automatic controls and pumps, and listing of all spare parts, shall be furnished to Owner. In addition, one set of operating and maintenance instructions for each Mechanical Equipment Room shall be neatly laminated in permanently translucent plastic and hung where directed. Three sets of lubricating charts and manuals for each item of equipment shall be furnished to Owner. B. Furnish a list of manufacturers (with names of local representatives) in order to expedite ordering of replacement parts. t 1.11 TOOLS A. All special tools needed for proper operation, adjustment and maintenance of equipment shall be delivered to Owner. 1.12 SLEEVES A. Provide sleeves for all pipes passing through floors, walls,partitions and roofs. 1. Sleeves through concrete walls and exposed pipes and conduits penetrating floors: Schedule 40 steel pipe. 2. Sleeves within furred out enclosures in floors, partitions, through block walls: 14 gauge galvanized sheet metal. 3. Provide waterproof sleeves in foundation walls and in concrete pits with anchor flanges. �r B. Provide sleeves with an Ed. at least 1/2 inch greater than outside of pipe served, including pipe insulation which must be continuous through sleeve. 1. Finish sleeves flush with underside of slab and 1 inch above finished floor (4 inches at Mechanical Rooms). 2. Caulk space between pipes and sleeves in exterior walls, foundation walls and pits, with Zurn Link-Seal. Where piping penetrates walls (other than foundation walls), partitions, floor slabs, etc., space between piping and sleeve shall be packed with mineral wool. C. Set sleeves as construction progresses and secure in place during pouring of concrete. 1. Where cellular steel flooring is installed, furnish and locate sleeves, cut holes through deck, reinforce deck, and set sleeves. Coordinate sleeve locations with Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 0 1.1 1.12 15950-7 .M r coded), which will be signed by each Trade representative upon completion of the coordination. Coordination drawings shall be prepared on sepia transparencies. an 1.6 RECORD DRAWINGS A. During the progress of the work, make a careful record of all changes by which the actual installation differs from that indicated on the Contract Documents. B. Upon completion of the installation, furnish two complete sets of as-built drawings, one of which shall be furnished on mylar transparencies and one of which shall be furnished on paper. These drawings shall be submitted to the Architect for approval. After approval they shall become the property of the Owner. Final payment will be withheld until receipt of the approved record drawings. C. Include the cost of furnishing above.prints and preparing these record drawings. 1.7 CODES AND PERMITS A. Install all work in full accordance with the requirements of all local and governmental departments having jurisdiction over these matters, as well as with any requirements of the NFPA, UL, and other applicable Codes. Secure and pay for necessary approvals, permits, inspections, carting, legal dumping, etc., and deliver the official records of the granting of permits to the Architect without additional cost to the Owner. B. Pay royalties or fees required in connection with the use of patented devices, or systems, and save the Owner, the Architect, the Consulting Engineers and the Construction Manager harmless from any claims or lawsuits arising from such use and indemnify each thereof against attorneys' fees in connection therewith. C. Provide signs required by the municipal authorities. 1.8 PROTECTIVE PAINTING A. Provide protective painting as herein specified. B. Deliver all equipment with prime coat or prime and finish coat as specified. Clean up all equipment and leave in condition for finish painting before acceptance. C. Provide all pipe hangers in concealed locations with a heavy factory coat of aluminum or black asphaltum paint unless hangers are galvanized or cadmium plated. D. Provide a heavy field coat of black asphaltum paint on all steel pipe, cradles, vibration isolating mounts, and the like, that will be encased or partially encased in building construction, set in cement or fill, before items are built into the general construction. 1.9 IDENTIFICATION OF SYSTEMS A. Automatic control valves, dampers, and instruments, as well as other equipment provided under this Section, shall be tagged for identification. Tags shall be brass with identification lettering stamped with letter punches and attached with brass wire or chain. we Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-6 .,. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Certain materials will be furnished, installed, or furnished and installed, under other Sections of the Contract Documents. Examine the Contract Documents to ascertain these requirements. B. Carefully check space requirements with other Sections of the Contract Documents to insure that all material can be installed in the spaces allotted thereto. Finished suspended ceiling elevations are indicated on the general construction drawings. C. Transmit information required for work to be provided under other Sections (such as drains, foundations, electric wiring, access doors, and the like) in ample time for "a installation. D. Wherever work interconnects with work of other Sections, coordinate this work to insure that other Sections are advised of the information necessary so that they may properly install all the necessary connections and equipment. Identify all work items (valves, dampers, coils, etc.) in an approved manner in order that the work of other Sections may know where to install access doors and panels. E. Caution workers both verbally and in writing as to the dangers involved in doing work within or adjacent to electrical closets on various floors, the Mechanical Rooms and the Switchboard Rooms, due to dangers caused by presence of high voltages and currents in these spaces. r F. Consult with other Sections so that, wherever possible, motor controls, fuses and valves are of the same manufacture. G. Furnish and set all sleeves for passage of pipes, ducts and conduits through structural masonry and concrete walls and floors and elsewhere as will be required for the proper protection of each pipe, duct and conduit passing through building surfaces. Coordinate this work with the Construction Manager in order to properly expedite and perform this work. H. Provide required supports and hangers for piping, conduit and equipment, so that loading will not exceed allowable loadings of structure. Submittal of a bid shall be deemed a representation that such bid has included allowable loadings and has included in estimates the costs associated in furnishing required supports. I. Due to the type of the installation, a fixed sequence of operation is required to properly install the complete systems. It shall be the responsibility of thisSection to PM coordinate, protect and schedule its work with other Sections in accordance with the construction sequence. J. Architectural drawings shall be checked for Base Building ceiling height requirements. K. Shop drawings provided under Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Section of the Specifications shall be utilized as a basis for coordination with all other Trades. Each Trade will indicate their respective work on the coordination drawings (color Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-5 6. Scaled drawings of local control panel front face showing location of instruments and control devices. 7. Panel nameplate details with lettering size,plate size and legend schedule. .■ 8. Ladder type electrical diagrams for each control system with terminal connections identified by number and location. 9. Symbol and abbreviation list for electrical control diagrams. 10. Complete listing and description of program routines resident in direct digital control units. 11. Control algorithms in flow chart format which define control modes for each system. ' 12. Panelboard from which power will be taken, along with total power to be taken from each panelboard. 13. Complete software(DDC unit)point identification code. +*� 14. Sample of network computer advisory messages, printouts, logging and alarm formats. 15. Drawings of system graphics showing monitored points. 16. Application Programs: Include specific programming for each system, calculation of parameters, method of field tuning, and integration into DDC control sequences. Specifically include: a. Detailed description of how Contractor's program meets application program specified. b. Detailed flow chart of program complete with line-by-line section comments. C. List of remote points utilized for each program. d. History of development and past use, if any, of program. e. Explanation of how each parameter value in program is determined; i.e., measurement, "look-up table,"mathematical approximations to empirical curves, internal computation in program. 17. Description of system operation under failure conditions. **� a. Include procedures to be taken during failure mode to minimize impact. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Furnish all equipment of any equipment type (such as dampers, valves, etc.) from one manufacturer. B. The drawings show the various piping and duct systems schematically. No added compensation will be permitted for variations due to field conditions. C. Install all work in full accordance with the requirements of all local and governmental departments having jurisdiction over these matters, as well as with any requirements of the NFPA, UL, and Massachusetts Building Codes. Secure and pay for necessary approvals, permits, inspections, carting, legal dumping, etc., and deliver the official records of the granting of permits to the Owner. D. All Controlled Inspections shall be performed by, or under the direct supervision of a licensed Professional Engineer. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-4 B. Shop drawings for manufactured material and equipment shall include model numbers, dimension drawings, operating weights, material specifications, operating features and controls, wiring diagrams, performance characteristics, service procedures, including clearance requirements for maintenance work, and conformance to specified codes and code ratings. Note that in addition to these requirements, other specific submittal data, and forms of data submission, are required by the Contract Documents for particular items of equipment and material. C. Pads, foundations, anchorages, supports and attachments to the building structure where required for the installation of the work shall be shown in layout and detail with sizes, dimensions, materials and methods of construction noted. D. Samples shall be identical to the material which is to be installed or applied in the execution of the work, and shall be of sufficient size or quantity to permit proper evaluation and review. Manufacturer's descriptive labels and printed application instructions which are normally attached to the material or its packaging shall be furnished with the sample. Samples shall be submitted for review when requested by the Architect and/or Engineer. E. Materials installed or work performed without appropriate action by the Architect/Engineer shall be done at the risk of this Trade and the cost of removal of such material or work which is judged unsatisfactory for any reason shall be at no expense to the Owner. F. Prior to the fabrication or installation of any control system instrumentation, control ON devices or equipment, complete drawings and manufacturer's specification sheets for system components shall be submitted for approval. G. All shop drawings and "as-built" drawings shall be produced using the latest version of AutoCAD with AIA layering. Contractor shall provide the Owner with 3-1/2 inch disk format of all shop drawings. H. Submittals shall include the following: 1. Specification sheets for electronic sensors, transmitters, controllers, actuators, relays, switches, solenoid valves, and miscellaneous control devices. '! 2. Schedule and specification sheets for control dampers, including material and construction details, duct size, damper size, maximum design air velocity, damper rated velocity, leakage and pressure drop test data, as well as damper !! free area. The schedule shall indicate the closing torque required for each damper to attain the required maximum leakage rate at the specified static pressure differential across the damper. Actuator sizing calculations and configuration shall be submitted. 3. Schedule of automatic control valves and motorized block valves with specification sheets for each valve. The schedule shall list body pressure rating, close-off pressure rating, Cv factor, pressure drop at specified capacity, rangeability, and valve flow characteristics. 4. Dimension and specification sheets for field mounted direct digital control panels. ' 5. Control diagrams for each system with a written sequence of operation, and with control devices identified with instrument tag numbers. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.1 1.12 15950-3 B. Data Transmission: The transmission system shall serve to transfer data and command functions between the DDC panels and the network computer, Fire Command Stations and firemen's smoke control override panels. All required communication wiring for the DDC system shall be furnished and installed by this .� Section. All required communication wiring to interface this building's DDC system with the existing campus DDC system and Ethernet communication network shall be furnished and installed by this Section. All required communication modules (i.e. Langates, etc.,)shall be furnished and installed by this Section. C. The direct digital control and instrumentation subsystems shall be configured as a * distributed processing network with the existing campus network computers performing the functions of the operator interface. The software required to communicate with the direct digital control subsystems and perform the specified aw functions shall be provided under this Section. D. The direct digital control system operator interface shall be the existing campus network computer serving the Automated Logic DDC system. E. Field mounted sensors and transmitters for temperature, relative humidity and static pressure inputs to direct digital controllers shall be electronic with a 4-20 mA current " output signal. F. Actuation of automatic control valves and dampers shall be electric. " G. Provide 120 VAC, low voltage, and signal wiring required for: 1. Direct digital control communication bus network between remote field controllers and the network computer. 2. Interlocking control between motor controllers and system controls. 3. Floor/area isolation damper(combination fire/smoke dampers)controls. 4. Signal wiring from DDC control panels for the interconnection of remote alarm via fire alarm system. 5. Analog and digital signal wiring from signal originating device to direct digital control field panels. 6. Final connections to Owner furnished equipment, as defined by Owner furnished equipment shop drawings. 7. Do any cutting required for the passage or installation of pipe, conduit, tubing, supports, and the like, provided under this Section. H. The direct digital control system shall function as a fully integrated system incorporating the requirements of this Section of the Specifications and the Contract Drawings. The Specification and the Contract Drawings define the minimum system. I. Where disagreements occur between the plans and the Specifications, or within either document itself, the item or arrangement of better quality, greater quantity or higher cost shall be included in the Base Bid. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings, product data and samples in accordance with the Contract Documents. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-2 PW P0 SECTION 15950 BUILDING AUTOMATION AND TEMPERATURE CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide Building Automation and Temperature Controls in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. All finished painting of conduit, apparatus, etc. 2. Base flashing for conduits through roof. 3. All patching,except as specifically modified in these Specifications. 4. Excavation and backfill. 5. Concrete foundations, pads and blocks for equipment mounting (except as otherwise specified in this Section), except that anchor bolts and templates shall be furnished as the work of this Section. 6. Installation of access doors in finished building construction. 7. Sprinkler system waterflow and tamper switches. 8. Fire signaling and life safety system, which is provided for connection to the direct digital control system for remote alarm monitoring. 9. The installation in pipe lines and ducts of the following: a. Automatic control and smoke dampers. b. Backdraft dampers. C. Automatic control valves. d. Wells or sockets in pipe lines for control and remote sensing. e. Outlets for flow or pressure sensing in pipe lines. f. Flow Measuring Elements: Waterflow meter primary elements and airflow measuring elements. g. Furnishing and installation of smoke detector elements. 10. Companion flanges for automatic valves and reducing fittings will be furnished under another Section. ! ! 11. Electric power wiring to motors and motor controllers. 12. Installation of Owner furnished equipment. 13. Wiring of all life safety system field initiating devices (smoke detectors, heat detectors, sprinkler switches, etc.). 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS A. General System Capabilities: Provide a dedicated, stand-alone field programmable direct digital automatic temperature and energy management control system as manufactured by Automated Logic to perform the specified control and monitoring functions. The control system serving this building shall be interfaced to the campus Automated Logic System 20/20 DDC system such that all input/output points, software points, software programs, set points, time programs, etc., serving this building shall be monitored and adjustable at the existing network computers. Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15950-1 1 SECTION 15950 BATC TABLE OF CONTENTS Art icle Title Page 15950- pw PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 Description I 1.2 Description of Systems 1 1.3 Submittals 2 1.4 Qualifications 4 1.5 Coordination 5 1.6 Record Drawings 6 1.7 Codes and Permits 6 1.8 Protective Painting 6 1.9 Identification of Systems 6 1.10 Operating and Maintenance Instructions 7 1.11 Tools 7 1.12 Sleeves 7 1.13 Protection g 1.14 Cutting and Patching 8 wo 1.15 Unit Prices 9 1.16 Alternate Prices 10 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Approved Manufacturers 13 2.2 Direct Digital Control System 13 2.3 Temperature Control Instruments 22 2.4 Automatic Control Valves 27 2.5 Automatic Control and Automatic Smoke Dampers 30 2.6 Field Equipment Cabinets 32 2.7 Electrical Wiring and Materials 33 2.8 Description of Control Operation 35 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Electrical Wiring 60 3.02 Location of Wiring and Outlets 62 3.03 Concrete Pads,Foundations, Supports and Piers 62 3.04 Testing, Calibration and Commissioning 63 3.05 Instruction of Operating Personnel 64 3.06 Servicing and Maintenance Requirements 64 3.07 Protection 65 Smith Campus Center BATC Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.1 1.12 15950-TC-1 MR .�1 G. All piping in sleeves passing through walls, furrings, partitions, hung ceilings, etc., throughout the building where exposed to public and/or Tenant view, shall each be provided with a proper size approved escutcheon plate which shall prevent the passage of rodent vermin between the walls of the sleeve and pipe passing through the sleeve. All exposed escutcheons shall be cast brass, bell type, with set screws and chromium plated. All escutcheons shall be of sufficient diameter to include any required pipe insulation. H. Any piping passing through waterproof wall or roof construction shall be provided with counterflashing, consisting of steel rainhood welded all around to pipe and overlapping flashing. I. Pack the void between the sleeve and pipe, in all cases, as hereinafter described and • shown on the drawings. END OF SECTION 15600 X\projects\1 19\11993-Smith Collegc\Spec\HVAC_100°/,Construction_01-11-12_mam-kis.doc 11M No ■A11 711A Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-114 „® D. Provide protective pans under or over individual pipes passing high voltage electrical bus duct, transformer and switchgear equipment, motor control centers, motor starter racks, telephone equipment, or other electrical equipment. The pans shall be constructed of 12 gauge steel with a 6 inch lip, the corners being welded to make the pans watertight. Each pan shall be given three coats of Rust-Oleum paint and shall be supported by pipe hangers. The pan shall drain clear of the bus duct or electrical or telephone equipment. Where pans are above piping, they shall be designed to serve as a deflector plate. Pans over bus duct and electrical or telephone equipment shall be sized to fully protect equipment. 3.3 PROTECTION FOR PIPING wr A. All pipes passing through floors, walls or partitions, hung or furred ceilings, woodwork, etc., shall be provided with sleeves (of sufficient diameter to accommodate the pipe covering where such is required). Sleeves for concrete floors, walls and other masonry work shall be set in place before the arches or walls are poured or built and shall be so located and secured in place that space all around the pipes,after the pipes are installed in place, shall be about equal. B. Sleeves for pipes passing through walls, partitions, hung or furred ceilings, etc., shall be made of not lighter than 18 gauge galvanized steel and flanged one inch on each side of wall, partition, hung or furred ceiling, etc. Sleeves for reinforced concrete " floor construction shall be made of standard weight galvanized pipe extending 2 inches above the floor. C. Pipes passing through floors with membrane waterproofing and roofs shall be protected with Schedule 40 pipe extensions (not sheet metal) and provided with Zurn Z-197 waterproof type pipe sleeves, or as approved. For membraned floors, fill void between sleeve and pipe with asbestos or mineral wool and then seal the top with mastic to prevent sound transmission. Sleeves shall be set in such a manner that no concrete fills their interior during the concrete pouring and screening operations. D. Sleeves for foundation and other reinforced concrete walls shall be standard weight galvanized steel pipe and shall be packed watertight. Sleeves through Toilet Rooms and any other such wet area floors shall be made of iron pipe size brass. Floor sleeves for exposed pipes shall be caulked, watertight and shall project approximately 2 inches above the finished floor so that the plate, specified hereinafter, will properly fit over same. Sleeves shall finish flush with the bottom of slab and also with the finished faces of wall. E. Where faulty installation of sleeves, etc., occurs, this Contractor shall make all necessary changes and make repairs to the satisfaction of the Owner; otherwise, the Owner shall direct the Construction Manager to do this work which shall be paid for by this Contractor. F. Where openings required by this Contractor are left in floors or walls by the Construction Manager and are not used, such openings shall be filled in to match adjoining work by this Contractor. All additional openings required and not requested while the work proceeds shall be cut by this Contractor, or cut by the Construction Manager at this Contractor's expense. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-113 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPING A. All piping shall be properly supported or suspended on stands, clamps, hangers, etc., of approved design and make as directed. Supports shall be designed to permit free expansion and contraction while minimizing vibration. Pipes shall be anchored where shown or directed by means of steel clamps, or other approved means, securely fastened to the pipe and rigidly attached to the building construction. Riser heels shall •� have capped dirt pockets. B. Screw threads shall be cut clean and true; screw joints shall be made tight without caulking and without red or white lead. No bushings shall be used. All reductions shall be made with eccentric reducers or eccentric fittings. All pipe 2 inches and less shall be reamed out after cutting to remove all burrs. C. The drawings indicate generally the size and location of piping, and while sizes must not be decreased, the right is reserved to change runs and sizes of pipes in order to accommodate conditions at the job. Any pipes not shown on plans shall be of sizes as directed, and run where directed. Pipework shall conform fully to the following requirements: 1. Piping shall be properly graded to secure easy circulation and prevent noise and water hammer. Water piping shall pitch 1 inch in 60 feet. Dirt pockets shall be provided at all riser heels, low points, and other places where dirt and scale may accumulate. Proper provision shall be made for expansion and contraction in all portions of pipework, to prevent undue strains on piping or on fixtures or " ! apparatus connected therewith. 2. Approved screw unions, with steel or bronze bodies and ground brass taper or spherical joints, shall be installed at traps, instruments, etc., and wherever else required, to permit easy connection and disconnection. 3. Riser branches and other offsets shall be made up with 40elbow swings. This shall also apply to copper risers and branches. 4. To meet job conditions, water supply and return mains shall be set up and down where so directed; in any such case, drain cocks shall be provided at low points and vent traps at high points-- with vent connections extended to nearby points .� of disposal as directed. 5_ Vent connections shall be provided at all high points, connected to expansion tanks or to air traps, or to valve blowoffs, as shown or directed. Where valve blowoffs are used, valves are to be installed no higher than 6 feet 0 inches above finished floor. Automatic air and vent traps of the ball float type shall be installed at all high points of chilled water system and be installed with copper drain lines piped to nearest funnel drain. wo 6. Alterations: If,after plant is in operation, any coils do not circulate quickly and noiselessly (due to trapped or airbound connections), make proper alterations in these defective connections. If connections are concealed in furring, floors or ceilings, bear all expense of tearing up finished construction, and refinish, leaving same in as good condition as before it was disturbed. 7. Pipe Nipples: Any piece of pipe 3 inches in length and less shall be considered �. a nipple. All nipples shall be extra heavy. Close nipples shall not be used. 8. All piping connections to coils and equipment shall be made with offsets provided with screwed or flanged unions so arranged that the equipment can be e11, serviced or removed without dismantling the piping. Unions shall not be directly screwed to coil header piping connections. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-112 ,�„ 4. The leakage testing of medium pressure ductwork shall comply with the following: a. Air testing during erection shall include separate leakage air tests of each complete air riser, each completed horizontal distribution system, and, after all ductwork is installed and the air handling apparatus is erected, leakage testing of the pressure side of the whole system up to the inlet of the variable air volume boxes. It is the intent of the Specifications that ductwork shall be tested in sections if required, or as directed by the Construction Manager in order to permit work of other trades to proceed. b. Tests shall be made prior to insulation of system being tested using suitable test equipment, including "U" tube, orifice, tubing and cocks, arranged to indicate the amount of air leakage. C. The leakage test of the rectangular and circular ductwork shall be made with pressure in the ductwork maintained at approximately 3 or 6 inches as determined by the duct construction, obtained by operation of the air supply fan or, if the fan cannot be operated, by use of the test blower(s). Leakage test of the medium pressure sealed ductwork shall be made with pressure maintained at approximately 3 inches of water gauge. All joints shall be inspected and checked for leakage, by means as directed, and allowable leakage rate shall be limited to a maximum in accordance with the associated duct leakage class (see below). Even if a duct section passes the leakage test, all audible leaks shall be sealed. Test procedure shall be in accordance with the test procedure outlined in Chapter 10 in SMACNA "High Pressure Duct Construction Standards" Third Edition, 1975. d. The maximum allowable leakage rates for ductwork between the fan discharge and the floor isolation damper is as follows: Ductwork Type Leakage Class Construction Positive Internal Allowable Class(in. W.G.) Time Pressure Leakage Rate (in. W.G.) (cfm/100 sq.ft. of tested duct ! ! surface area) Round 3 6 6 9.6 Rectangular 6 6 6 19.5 e. The maximum allowable leakage rates for ductwork between the floor isolation damper and the inlet to the VAV boxes is as follows: Ductwork Type Leakage Class Construction Positive Internal Allowable Class (in. W.G.) Time Pressure Leakage Rate (in. W.G.) (cfm/100 sq.ft. of !F tested duct surface area) Round 3 6 3 6.2 Rectangular 6 3 3 19.5 Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-111 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CLEANING AND TESTING A. Cleaning and Testing of Piping 1. During construction, properly cap all lines, so as to prevent the entrance of sand, dirt, etc. Each system of piping shall be blown through after completion (for the purpose of removing grit, dirt, sand, etc., from coils and piping), for as long a time as required to thoroughly clean the apparatus. Bypass arrangements shall be provided. 2. All piping, etc., shall be tested, prior to application of insulation, by hydrostatic pressure at least 1-1/2 times the maximum operating pressure (but not less than 100 psi) for a sufficiently long time to detect all leaks and defects and after testing shall be made tight in an approved manner. If necessary,piping shall be taken down and reassembled as no makeshift method of temporarily repairing leaks,etc., will be permitted. + + 3. Apply a chemical cleaning operation to the interior of all piping for all water systems to remove and dissolve foreign substances. This shall be done under the supervision of the Water Treatment Contractor. All chemicals shall be provided under this Contract. 4. After the piping system has been properly cleaned as indicated above, the piping systems shall be operated for a minimum of three days with surgical felt bonded to the baskets on each pump strainer. These felt filters shall be removed and replaced each day and the systems shall be run as long a time as necessary to thoroughly clean all piping until approved by the Owner. All systems provided with flushout connections, as indicated on the drawings, shall be operated during this cleaning operation with all coil valves closed. 5. It is to be specifically noted that the work under this Section will not be accepted until it is free of foreign matter to the satisfaction of the Owner. Repair or replace free of additional charge any and all control valves or other system components which do not function properly because of imperfect cleaning of any piping system. Replace any materials rusted, corroded, or �• otherwise damaged through this Contractor's failure to properly operate and maintain the installation without charge,prior to the acceptance by the Owner. 6. Piping shall be tested in sections where directed by the Owner, in order to permit construction to proceed. B. Cleaning and Leakage Testing of Ductwork 1. The open ends of all unfinished sections of ductwork, including fan outlets, tappings for air outlets, etc., shall be properly capped at all times during construction, unless the particular section of ductwork is actually being worked on. 2. The requirement for capped duct openings shall continue until white plastering or equivalent finishing operations in the building are completed. 3. If the above requirements have not been strictly enforced during the construction period, the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Contractor will be required to cover all air outlets with cheesecloth and blow out the duct system to the satisfaction of the Owner. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-110 ,�, on biological activity. Testing shall be done according to the following schedule, or more frequently if results indicate that problems may be present: a. Monthly samples shall be taken from open systems and monitored for total planktonic count, using "dip sticks" or similar simple field test devices. PP 1) A referee sample shall be taken quarterly for plate counts in a qualified microbiological laboratory. b. A "Robbins Device" or similar device for collecting sessile bacteriological deposits shall be installed in each system and inspected at least quarterly. The removable spoolpiece included in the corrosion monitoring station may be used for this purpose. C. Biocide dosages and operating parameters shall be adjusted as needed, based on the results of these tests, to maintain required microbiological control limits. d. At least semiannually,a properly prepared sample shall be submitted to a qualified laboratory for identification of pathogenic bacteria that may be present in the system. e. Test the cooling tower basin on a monthly basis for the presence of legionella pneumophila, utilizing the DFA method as practiced by Bioindustrial Technologies, Inc. of Grafton, New York. The report shall give the result in bacteria per milliliter and shall reference deviations from the previous month. Any major increase in legionella pneumophila bacterial growth shall require shock treatment of the cooling tower basin with an oxidizing agent such as chlorine at a level of 25-50 ppm for 1/2 hour. F. Required Submittals 1. Submit a complete list of services which will be supplied by the proposed water treatment system supplier. List shall include the extent of field supervision required to certify that the required cleaning and passivation results have been achieved. 2. Submit drawings which indicate requirements for piping connections to mechanical systems, electric power, and treatment equipment space requirements, etc. These drawings should be provided as separate documents, i.e., power, equipment layout, etc., and should depict the locations of sensors, meters, etc., planned to be incorporated into the piping systems. 3. Submit for each chemical proposed for use, for each system, the following: Product Name Cost per Unit Purpose of Use Product Description Product Composition Detail Method of Treatment and/or Disposal Approval by authorities having jurisdiction for chemicals and proposed plan for control, if applicable Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 0 l.11.12 15600-109 7. Chemicals a. Closed Recirculating Water Systems System Treatment and Chemical Conditions Control Level Hot Water Buffered sodium nitrite as sodium 3000-4000 ppm nitrate with triazole nonferrous metal organic inhibitor and polymeric deposit inhibitor Organic growths None pH 9.0-10.5 1) An alternate molybdate based program may be used for the closed recirculating water system as follows: System Treatment and Chemical Conditions Control Level Hot Water Nontoxic organic corrosion and scale 3000-4000 ppm inhibitor. Phosphonate-molybdate type with triazole nonferrous metal organic inhibitors and polyacrylate dispersants. Organic growths None pH 8.5-10.5 „ D. Testing: Provide all necessary field test equipment for maintaining control of treatment standards and cycles of concentration as above. Test kits shall be supplied by the water treatment supplier and remain the property of the Owner. Test kits shall be as follows: 1. Hot Water Systems Field Kit for Nitrite or Molybdate "® Field Kit for pH in range 6.0-12.0 E. System Monitoring as 1. Corrosion Monitoring of Water Systems: Provide corrosion test monitoring station(s) for water system(s) utilizing a corrosion test rack of 1 inch steel installed across condenser system supply and return in accordance with NACE .�. standards. Corrosion test rack to consist of 4 corrosion test stations and at least one section of removable carbon steel pipe to use as a test spool piece, with 1 inch flow meter, 2-15 gpm to maintain flow at 7.0 gpm. Water treatment supplier shall provide at least four corrosion test coupon holders with one preweighed corrosion test coupon of each of the materials used in the system. Analyze coupons every 30 days. Reports shall be issued by water treatment supplier's laboratory for the period of the Contract. Stations shall be installed where indicated on the drawings, or as directed by the Owner's representative. 2. Biological Monitoring of Closed Water Systems: Open cooling water systems and closed recirculating systems shall be monitored on a regular basis for Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-108 .A dispersant or alternate product used, as well as products of corrosion and foulants, shall be gone as confirmed by a system water analysis performed by the water treatment supplier and submitted to the Engineer for approval. 2) The disposal of waste water from the piping system cleaning and flushing shall be at the Contractor's expense. C. Immediately after filling the system with clean water, add sufficient quantities of the specified biocides and inhibitor to passivate the system. d. The water treatment supplier shall certify as to the adequacy of the cleanout/flush, passivating and corrosion inhibiting procedures performed under his supervision. 6. Application of Chemicals: Provide an environmentally acceptable nontoxic water treatment program to maintain the hereinafter specified conditions in each of the systems. The treatment program has been based on a typical city water analysis,but it is the water treatment supplier's responsibility to verify the nature of the incoming water. No extra charges will be allowed for additional chemicals required due to seasonal variations in the water analysis. All chemicals used and disposal methods shall be acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction, for discharge to the municipal sewers. a. Supply water treatment chemicals concurrently with the operation of each system. Supply an initial dosage(s) of treatment chemical(s) immediately after each system is filled with water in preparation for operation. No system will be accepted without written certification and demonstration of biological cleanliness and proper inhibitor levels. b. The chemicals which are to be utilized in the treatment program must be completely acceptable to the authorities. All chemicals and combinations proposed for the treatment program must be approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. All treatment chemicals used in the course of the Contract must be similarly approved by the authorities having jurisdiction and follow the following criteria: 1) They must be nontoxic to personnel and not hazardous to handle. 2) At use concentrations in the systems, they must be readily disposable to the receiving sewer system or waterway. 3) Procedures for cleaning up spills of neat or diluted chemical must OR be simple, readily available and not dangerous to personnel. The cleaned material must be readily disposable. C. The water treatment supplier shall certify the chemicals used in the treatment program will meet or improve on the following general !" performance criteria: 1) Closed Cooling and Hot Water Systems Corrosion rate on mild steel less than 0.5 mpy PM Corrosion rate on brass and copper less than 0.1 mpy Scaling rate None PM Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-107 program for a period oqlne year after acceptance of the system(s) by the Owner for his operation. Approved Supplier: Stabb Associates. &x %1F *44 0, 2. The water treatment supplier shall have at least one officer or official holding a college or university degree in chemistry, chemical engineering, or sanitary engineering. He should have at least ten years' experience in treating the water in systems of similar size and capacity, and he shall be in active responsible charge of all treatment work. 3. The supplier's laboratory shall be equipped to analyze samples in accordance with the standard testing methods of the American Water Works Association and the American Society for Testing Materials. 4. The water treatment supplier shall include the following services: a. Supervise all water related operations, including testing, cleaning and passivation. b. Provide the necessary inhibitors required for all pressure testing of piping systems, and maintaining the inhibitor levels in systems until systems are ready for cleaning and passivation. C. Provide the Owner with complete written instructions for chemical feeding, bleed-off, testing and other procedures required for successful routine operation of the water systems. Instructions shall include .. recommended lay-up,on-line and off-line cleaning procedures. d. Demonstrate to Owner's personnel the proper application of written instructions(minimum of 2 man-days of training). e. Provide all chemicals, chemical feeding equipment and testing equipment, as described herein. f. Provide monthly field service visits by a qualified representative for the supervision of the chemical treatment program. A written report detailing treatment conditions and including any necessary recommendations shall be submitted to the Owner following each visit. In addition, laboratory water analysis, corrosion tests and microbiological tests shall be provided. All site visits by the Water Treatment Contractor shall be scheduled with the Owner. g. Provide an analysis of glycol strength and inhibitor level after initial fill and every three months thereafter. 5. Hydrostatic Testing, Initial Cleanout and Flushing a. Only water containing an adequate level of corrosion inhibitor shall be used for hydrostatic testing and, if permitted to remain in the system, the chemical level shall be adequate for passivation purposes. A minimum of 1500 ppm of buffered sodium nitrite shall be maintained. b. Fill and flush all recirculating water systems, both open and closed, with a 0.5% solution, by weight, of a nonfoaming chemical detergent, or suitable approved product proposed by water treatment service company, to remove all foreign matter. These chemicals shall not be injurious to persons, piping, pipe joint compounds, packings, coils, valves, pumps and their mechanical seals, tubes or other parts of the system. 1) Solution shall be circulated for a minimum of 8 hours and drained ..• as rapidly as possible to remove suspended matter. The system shall be flushed with fresh water, drained a second time and refilled. After final filling, the pH of the water shall be within 0.5 of the pH of the fresh incoming water. All traces of detergent Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-106 2. Duct thermometers shall be provided in all air conditioning and ventilating units, one downstream of each coil bank to read the dry bulb temperature of the respective coil. In addition, such thermometers shall also be installed in the inlet to all return fans, in all fresh air intakes, and ahead of preheat coils. C. Pipe Thermometers 1. Pipe thermometers shall be field adjustable angel stem type, with 5-1/4 inch long separable socket. 2. Pipe thermometers shall be provided at the inlet and outlet of all water coil banks, heat exchangers, on water circuits of steam-to-water interchangers, and common Equipment Room air handling units. They shall also be provided in the hot water radiation system return line before the injection line. D. Pressure Gauges 1. Pressure gauges shall be Bourdon type, with 4-1/2 inch dials and aluminum cases. Gauges shall be fitted with snubbers and lever handed brass ball valves. In addition,pressure gauges on steam services shall be mounted on pig tails. 2. Pressure gauges shall be provided in water and oil lines at the inlet and outlet of all pumps, water coil banks, converters, and water-to-water heat exchangers, and on steam lines upstream and downstream of pressure reducing valves at inlets to coils,converters and other equipment as shown on plans. 2.44 WATER TREATMENT A. General 1. Install all connections, pipe, valves, feeding equipment, etc., required to Y provide water treatment for control of scale, corrosion, fouling and microbiological growth and deposition in the following mechanical piping systems: _ Closed Heating System The equipment will become the property of the Owner. B. Equipment and Installation 1. Closed Recirculating Water Systems: Install a bypass feeder across each recirculating pump package, 150 psi test pressure with 2 inch fill line and cap, of the following capacity: System Feeder Size Closed Heating 5 gal. a. All piping and tanks shall be insulated to conform to insulation material as specified for the respective system. b. Bypass feeder tanks shall be Neptune Model No. DBF-5 with a FBK-5 filter bag and a Dwyer Model No. 100 flow indicator. Both the filter and flow indicator shall be provided with ball valves on each side for isolation. C. Chemical Treatment Program 1. Engage a qualified and approved water treatment supplier to provide a „ supervised water treatment program from the date of the initial introduction of water into the systems and/or equipment indicated. Continue the treatment Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-105 7. All starters shall have a pilot light built into cover. 8. All starters for 208 volt service shall have 208/120 volt transformers built into each starter casing. Each control transformer shall be provided with fuse protection on both the primary and secondary side of the transformer. Transformers shall serve all control circuits, including auxiliary devices. Each starter subject to electrical interlock and/or automatic control shall have the necessary auxiliary contacts. One set of terminals shall be provided for each control circuit. Control centers shall be provided with control terminal blocks. 9. All magnetic starters shall have ambient compensated, manually resettable, thermal overload in each phase leg and low voltage protection. Overload ■* selection shall be based on actual full load nameplate amps of motor installed. 10. All coils, cores, resistance, insulation contacts, trippers, etc., of starters and relays shall be of the approved type. All parts subject to wear, arcing,etc.,shall be renewable. 11. All wiring, starters, switches, etc., shall be in full accordance with all local and Underwriters Code requirements. 12. Furnish detailed composite wiring diagrams to those assembling control centers and those installing the electrical work, and furnish such other information necessary to assure the proper connection, operation and control of motorized .� equipment, including interlocks, and automatic and safety control auxiliary circuits. 13. Furnish the pertinent information, such as starting torque requirements of high inertia equipment, so that the proper type starter may be provided by the starter manufacturer. All information is subject to the review of the Engineer. 14. Starter to be coordinated with fan, pump and motor manufacturers for required starting time. .A 15. Furnish interposing relays where indicated on the electrical drawings, built into starters, where possible. In all other cases, relays shall be furnished in separate enclosures or local control panels. ** 2.43 INSTRUMENTS A. General 1. All instruments called for hereinbelow shall be provided in addition to any other instruments called for elsewhere. All thermometers and pressure gauges shall have ranges suitable for the service intended. 2. Thermometers and pressure gauges shall be as manufactured by one of the approved manufacturers listed in Article 1.22, "Approved Manufacturers". 3. Thermometers shall be 4-1/2 inch diameter vapor pressure actuated dial type with aluminum casing. 4. In addition to where specified below, a pressure gauge of thermometer shall be located adjacent to any DDC sensor used for control or monitoring of air and water systems. B. Duct Thermometers 1. Duct thermometers shall be remote bulb type having necessary length of capillary tubing for remote mounting and shall be mounted on casings or ducts in a manner that permits easy reading. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-104 C. Wiring of all packaged equipment shall be in accordance with the requirements of the local and National Electrical Codes. D. Provide all wiring in connection with the automatic and safety control of the refrigerating machines, including all auxiliary equipment. ■P 2.42 ELECTRIC MOTOR CONTROLS A. Furnish and turn over to the General Contractor who will coordinate the installation of same, suitable starting and controlling equipment, all as specified hereinafter and as shown on drawings. Starting equipment shall be arranged, generally, in control centers or, in certain cases, as isolated combination starters, as specified or indicated. No The control equipment shall be turned over to the General Contractor at the building site for installation. so B. All controllers shall be as manufactured by Allen-Bradley, Sylvania, Cutler-Hammer, Westinghouse, or General Electric. Individual starters shall be fully enclosed in neatly finished ventilated boxes of code gauge steel, machine formed and welded. MR These boxes shall be arranged for floor, wall or angle iron frame mounting as.shown on plans or as directed, and shall each have a door with a spring catch handle. These controllers shall be of the combination starter and lockout fusible switch type. They will be mounted by the Electrical Trade on suitable concrete curbs and pads, furnished by others. Isolated starters shall generally be used for isolated pieces of equipment, such as propeller type unit heaters, special exhaust fans and wherever else indicated. w C. General 1. All starters for motors less than 1/2 hp shall be 120 volt, single phase, 60 hertz, a.c. service. Manual starters with overload protection and lockout type no disconnect switch or breaker may be used to control such motors, except where interlocks or automatic controls are required. In such cases, magnetic across- the-line starters shall be furnished. 2. All starters for motors 1/2 hp to 75 hp shall be magnetic across-the-line type with combination fusible switches. Such starters shall be 208 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz, a.c. service. 3. All starters for pump motors over 100 hp shall be part-winding (1/2-1/2) type. All starters for fan motors 100 hp and over shall be reduced voltage, autotransformer closed-transition type. These starters shall be for 208 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz, a.c. service, and they shall be combination lockout fusible switch type. 4. Controllers for condensate pumps, duplex air compressor, sump and ejector pumps, etc., shall be factory mounted and wired as part of the work of this Section and the Plumbing Section. 5. All fusible switches in control centers shall be in accordance with the schedules on the electrical drawings. 6. All magnetic starters subject to manual start and in direct view of the motors they control shall have momentary contact start and stop buttons built into cover. All magnetic starters subject to electrical interlock or automatic control PM shall have Hand-Off-Automatic switches built into cover. All selector switches in starters shall be of the maintain-contact type. Refer to motor control center schedules on the electrical drawings. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-103 am an K. Instruction of Operating Personnel 1. Provide a minimum of 40 hours of operating and maintenance instruction for building operators, with personal on-the-job instruction by factory trained engineers representing the variable speed drive unit manufacturer. This instruction shall be scheduled at time(s) convenient to the Owner's personnel. Instruction shall cover all equipment and systems provided under this Section. Instruction shall be comprised of both Classroom type and actual hands-on operating experience. Submit an outline of the instruction program and instruction manual to the Owner or Owner's representative for his approval at least two weeks prior to the proposed start date of the instruction sessions. The Owner may videotape all instruction sessions for purposes of future training. Provide a review and written critique of Owner's videotape within one month after completion of the instruction sessions and receipt of the Owner's videotapes. The critique shall correct all mistakes and clarify all outstanding questions which arise during the sessions. 2. Furnish five bound copies of operating and maintenance instructions, covering the complete operation and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals for the variable speed drive units and controls. 3. Include spare parts data listing; source and current price of replacement parts and supplies for each item of equipment. L. Service 1. For the duration of the guarantee period, provide all required service at no additional cost. Service shall include parts and labor and shall be available through an attended telephone number on a 24-hour-a-day basis with a guaranteed response time as follows: a. Telephone contact of qualified technician within four(4)hours. b. Qualified technician on site within twelve (12)hours. 2. The manufacturer shall make available to the Owner or Owner's representative .., a Preventive Maintenance Contract to begin on the date of expiration of the free service period. 2.41 ELECTRIC WIRING A. The installation of all starting equipment furnished under this Section shall be as specified under the Electrical Section, except starters specified to be factory mounted and wired as part of the equipment, and all wiring necessary to supply power to the electric motors provided under this Section will be provided under the Electrical Section, including connections from the starters and/or motor control centers to the motors. B. Power wiring to unit heaters will be provided under the Electrical Section. Wiring of their thermostats and aquastats and wiring of all the electric-pneumatic and pneumatic-electric switches will be provided under Automatic Temperature Control Section of the Specifications. Under the Electrical Section of the Specifications, the connecting of all electric safety thermostats and smoke detector systems to controlled motors will be provided. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-102 2) Attendance will be by others as required, to override or operate external control systems to enable the variable speed drives to operate continuously throughout the commissioning cycle. b. A field test of the system harmonics shall be provided to ensure that the THD does not exceed 5% DF at the point of common coupling. If the inverter load causes greater distortion than defined, the drive manufacturer will be responsible to further filter the line. Cost associated with the supply of the additional filters and their installation will be borne by the drive manufacturer. C. These tests shall ensure variable speed motor controllers are regulated and capable of proper operation. d. All performance testing shall be performed in the presence of the Owner or Owner's representative. 5. Final Acceptance Test a. This test shall duplicate the test procedure and reporting as outlined in OR Paragraph 4. above, except it shall be performed utilizing all final controls. b. Parameters measured and recorded will include: 1) Motor Data: Volts,amps,winding temperature. 2) Power factor. 3) Electrical power consumption. 4) Control from 100%to 10%. C. Calculations substantiating overall system efficiency, power factor conformance and final DF. d. The commissioning document, with test results and report, shall be issued to the Owner or Owner's representative. I. Guarantees 1. All equipment shall be new, of first class material, and of latest design. Workmanship shall be of the best quality, free from any defects that might render the equipment unsuitable or inefficient. 2. The manufacturer shall guarantee his equipment to meet the performance conditions specified for the period of time which is normal industry practice for this type of equipment, but in no case for less than one year from the date of Owner's acceptance. If the base price includes a guarantee period of more than one year, but less than three years, state the following: a. The period included in base price. b. Additional cost for three years. J. Packaging, Delivery and Storage 1. The drives shall be delivered on the date and to the location designated by the Owner. 2. Manufacturer shall be responsible for all shipping costs. The manufacturer shall bear the costs of all storage if storage is required between the completion of factory tests and the designated delivery date. 3. After completion of factory tests, the drives shall be broken down for shipping to the location designated. Splits shall be individually wrapped for protection, and mounted on skids. go 4. Coordinate size of shipping splits, delivery date and shipping location with the installing contractor. �w Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-101 G. Inspection and Startup Service 1. The drive manufacturer shall provide factory trained, field service personnel for the final checkout and startup of the variable speed drive systems. This service shall include: a. Field checkout of power and control wiring to controllers and motors, including interfacing signal wiring to the building control system. b. Initial power-up of the equipment, including measurement of input voltages and d.c.bus voltage with no output load. C. Initial operation of the equipment, including measurement of output voltage and current under operating load. d. Operational check of control logic, operator devices, safety devices, protective functions, power modules, regulators, motors, and auxiliary control devices. " e. Adjustment of drive operating parameters and controls to meet the performance requirements of the variable speed drive systems. H. Performance Tests 1. The performance tests of the variable speed drive units shall be in multiple stages. A comprehensive performance testing and commissioning document shall be forwarded to the Owner or Owner's representative for review before testing commences. (Submit a minimum of five copies.) 2. This commissioning document shall comprise: a. Full details of all test equipment and instruments, including test equipment calibration certificates. b. Comprehensive procedures for all tests and commissioning activities. C. All relevant manufacturers' performance data and a column for entering test results. d. Outline of proposed report format. This to detail performance assessments that will be made and how they will be determined. Electrical and mechanical parameters of the drive system, including the combined efficiency of the controller and motor combination for each fan drive. 3. The following tests shall be provided for each drive size, and shall be documented and performed in the presence of the Owner and/or their deemed representatives: a. Preproduction factory harmonics test, at all operating conditions, providing a hard copy printout of complete three phase harmonic voltage and current distortion content to the 25th harmonic, fundamental frequency power, current, voltage and power factor. b. Commissioning and performance test of each variable speed drive (as installed). C. Final acceptance test of each variable speed drive(as installed). 4. Field Performance Test a. Before on-site commissioning commences, the following items shall be completed by others: ' 1) Connection of electrical power wiring. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-100 ,,,� Ro filtering is required, the analysis must show how the addition of the filters will reduce the DF to within the specified levels. 6. A field test of the system harmonics shall be provided to ensure that the THD does not exceed 5% DF at the point of common coupling. If the inverter load causes greater distortion than defined, the drive manufacturer will be responsible to further filter the line. Cost associated with the supply of the additional filters and their installation will be borne by the drive manufacturer. C. Contactor Bypass on 1. Each controller shall be provided with a contactor bypass to allow motor to be safely transferred from controller output power to the a.c. line, or from the a.c. line to the controller, while the motor is at zero speed. 2. The contactor bypass shall utilize two motor contactors electrically interlocked. One contactor is to open and close the connection between the controller output and the motor. The other contactor shall open and close the connection PM between the bypass power line and the motor, providing "across-the-line" starting. 3. Motor protection shall be provided in both the "controller" mode and the "bypass" mode by a motor overload relay. Relay control logic shall be included within the controller enclosure to allow the same "start/stop" command and system safety shutdown commands to operate the motor in both "controller" and"bypass" modes. The relay logic power shall be 115 volts. 4. The bypass circuit shall include a second disconnect installed in the controller. This disconnect shall provide the ability to safely troubleshoot and test the controller, both energized and de-energized, while the motor is operating in the "bypass" mode. 5. The entire contactor bypass assembly, as well as all associated auxiliaries, shall be mounted within the controller enclosure and shall be electrically, structurally and mechanically isolated from the controller itself. D. Painting: All internal and external surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and,except as 40 otherwise noted, all factory manufactured and assembled apparatus that is not galvanized shall be factory coated with one coat of primer and two coats of machinery enamel at the factory. Provide one can of touch-up paint of matching color per unit to repair any damage which may have occurred during installation. E. Permanent Identification: A stainless steel tag shall be attached to all units and stamped in not less than 5/8 inch high letters with the Owner's designated identifying number and nomenclature as directed and as shown on the drawings and schedules. F. Coordination With Fan and Pump Manufacturers 1. The variable speed motor control ler/high-efficiency motor manufacturer shall be responsible for the following: a. Coordination of variable speed motor capabilities with the requirements 0" of each fan or pump motor to ensure proper matching of components. b. Review of approved shop drawings for each fan and pump to ensure complete compatibility of all system components. C. Factory preprogramming of each controller so as to prevent fan or pump operation at critical speeds. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-99 40 18. PWM Inverter Section 1 hp to 125 hp a. The inverter logic shall be fully digital, microprocessor-based, and the control logic circuits shall be galvanically isolated from the power circuitry. All inverter programming shall be via the digital keypad. b. The inverter shall provide smooth stepless operation of the drives motor from .5 to 60 hertz. The drive shall have the ability to operate up above 60 hertz in a constant horsepower mode up to 87 hertz. C. The inverter shall incorporate a switching power supply operating off of the d.c. link of the control, eliminating line disturbance sensitivity. d. Inverter shall be voltage source type with a pulse width modulated (PWM)output utilizing short circuit limiting bipolar power transistors. e. Pulse width modulation technique shall be flux-vector. Alternatively, insulated gate bipolar transistors(IGB rs)may be utilized. 19. The drive shall include the following features and be capable of providing isolated output signals and accepting the following input signals, to permit interface with a microprocessor-based direct digital control (DDC), building automation and temperature control system: a. A hand-off-automatic switch to allow local speed control by a potentiometer in the hand position and remotely controlled with a dry contact signal and a remote speed command. b. Start/stop commands via closure of a dry contact(voltage-free contact). C. Status(via dry contact closure from drive). d. Drive malfunction(via dry contact closure from drive). e. Speed command input signal: 4-20 mA d.c., impedance 250 ohms. f Drive speed feedback(via 4-20 mA signal). g. Drives serving fan systems shall have the following additional features: 1) Safety stop(via dry contact closure from DDC). 2) Fire system override start (via dry contact). This override shall function with the selector switch in hand, off or auto position. B. Distortion Factor 1. The drive manufacturer shall ensure that the distortion factor does not exceed .. 3% THD (voltage) at each drive input and 5% THD (voltage) at the point of common coupling (as defined on the electrical drawings) as defined by IEEE 519-1992. In no case shall the current THD exceed 10%. .� 2. If line reactors or tuned filters are required, they shall be supplied inside the inverter cabinet. If line transformers are required they shall be supplied in matching cabinets immediately adjacent to the drive which they serve. 3. Input line filters shall be capable of protecting electronics against transient voltage spikes of 10 kv, 50 joule. 4. Provide the necessary isolation transformers and/or filters such that the area of the notch in the line-to-line voltage waveform caused by the shorting of the converter bridge during the commutation cycle shall not exceed 22,800 volt/microseconds. 5. A harmonic analysis of the power system defining distortion factor (DF) through the 16th harmonic shall be provided with the submittal. This analysis shall show voltage and current distortion at 10%, 30%, 50%, 67%, 80% and 100% speed. Full motor power shall be used at 60 Hz. and follow the cubed •■+ speed power requirements of a centrifugal fan or pump at the lower speeds. If Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 0 l.11.12 15600-98 �, o. Adjustable acceleration and deceleration times of 0-360 seconds for 0-60 Hz. p. Adjustable maximum speed 100-0%. q. Adjustable minimum speed 0-100%. r. Adjustable motor output voltage boost. S. Adjustable electronic motor overload protection from 60-100% of the control's rated current. t. Selectable inverted speed signal. U. Selectable automatic restart after a fault. V. External fault indicator of fire or smoke. W. Up to two motor thermal overload relays with through-the-door reset button. X. Critical speed avoidance(adjustable). y. Low frequency voltage boost. Z. Stability from 0-100°/x. aa. 97%minimum efficiency at rated load. 12. The controller shall be capable of operation without motor connected. 13. The controller shall have power outage ride-through capability of 5 cycles. 14. The controller shall be capable of starting into a rotating motor, in forward or reverse direction. 15. A built-in digital display shall be provided to indicate: a. Output Frequency b. Output Current C. Output Power d. Input Voltage per Phase ""'" e. Output Voltage per Phase f. Torque g. Motor rpm 16. The display shall also indicate the following fault conditions: a. High Motor Current; line-to-line(overcurrent) b. High Motor Current; line-to-ground(ground fault) Ns C. Overvoltage(high d.c. bus voltage) d. Overtemperature e. Undervoltage (low d.c. bus voltage) f. Stalled Motor g. Electronic Motor Overload Trip IZR h. Internal Control Fault(Function Loss) i. 24 VDC Auxiliary Voltage Fault J. Drive Ready 17. Input(Converter) Section a. The converter shall incorporate full wave diode bridge input. b. The input diode bridge shall offer complete immunity against voltage dips, line noise and harmonics. C. The input displacement power factor shall be 0.98 or better over the entire operating frequency and load range. d. The converter shall incorporate metal oxide varistors (MOV's) in accordance with ANSI C63.41-1980 for input surge protection. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-97 eliminate objectionable motor noise shall be borne by the controller manufacturer. 5. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1. All controllers and associated auxiliaries shall be mounted within enclosures, suitable for floor, rack, or motor control center mounting without modification of the enclosure. 6. Power terminations shall consist of pressure type copper feeder cable terminals for top or bottom entrance, with wire way space suitable to meet the applicable ** Codes. All exit/entrance conditions must be coordinated with the Plans and the Installing Contractor. Ground lugs shall be provided for incoming and outgoing ground connections. All internal power wiring, control wiring, bus bars and associated components shall be copper. 7. Enclosure doors shall be key-locked with interlock provisions to prevent unauthorized opening of the door with the disconnect circuit breaker in the on position. 8. The enclosure shall provide adequate conduit space and wire ways and/or troughs in accordance with all applicable code requirements. 9. Field wiring of the adjustable frequency motor controllers and motors shall be �. limited to power supply connections to the controller,power output wiring from controller to the motor, grounding connections, and signal wiring and single phase interlock control wiring that is required for connection to devices for the ` remote control of motor speed and system operation from the building central control system. Field installed power, signal and control wiring will be provided under another Section of the Specifications. 10. A built-in digital keypad shall be provided for adjustment of all internal drive functions. 11. The controller shall include, as a minimum, the following features and functions: a. A.C. incoming line circuit breaker with an interlocked, padlockable handle mechanism. b. Incoming line current limiting fuses for fault current protection (200,000 A.I.C.). C. Designed to withstand output terminal line-to-line and line-to-ground short circuits without component failure. d. Reverse phase and single phase loss protection for each phase on both the line (input)and load(output) sides of the VFD. e. Overfrequency protection. f. D.C. overvoltage protection. g. Surge protection from a.c. line transients. h. Motor slip dependent speed regulation 3% maximum. i. Frequency stability t0.5% for 24 hours with voltage regulation of t2% of maximum rated output voltage. j. Adjustable dwell time at start to optimize motor starting torque. k. 115 volt a.c. control power for operator devices. Control power shall be isolated from logic circuits. Control power transformer shall be fused on the primary and the secondary side. 1. Instantaneous overcurrent protection at 115% of the control's rated current. M. Adjustable current limit(50-110%of the controller's rated current). n. Selectable volts per hertz (V/Hz.), linear or squared. . w Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-96 a. The installed construction shall provide the following acoustical properties when tested in accordance with ASTM Procedure C-423-66 (sound absorption) and ASTM Procedure E90-70 (sound transmission loss) in a recognized acoustical testing laboratory. Panel Overall Noise Sound Transmission Class Thickness Reduction Coefficient(NRC) (STC) 2 inch 0.90 38 b. The stiffness of the sound insulating duct and plenum assemblies under the expected fan system operating pressure and the leakage of the sound insulating duct and plenum assembly shall comply with specified requirements described under Article 2.3 1, "Sheet Metal Ductwork" (i.e., medium pressure construction). 2. Sound insulating panels shall be as manufactured by one of the approved manufacturers listed in Article 1.22, "Approved Manufacturers". 3. ACS-1, ACS-2, ACS-3, ACS-4 and ACS-4 return ductwork shall be constructed in their entirety of sound insulating panels, including the common supply header and all associated supply air ductwork within the confines of the Mechanical Equipment Room, including taps and branch supply air risers. In addition to the above, all sound panels downstream of the air conditioning unit final filters shall be furnished with a visquine liner between the perforated metal liner and the acoustic absorbent material within. Liner and assembly shall have a flame spread and smoke developed rating of less than or equal to so 25 and 50,respectively. 2.40 VARIABLE SPEED MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. Variable Speed Motor Controller - 1. Variable speed motor controllers and starters shall be designed and constructed on in accordance with the National Electrical Code all applicable local code requirements and ANSI,FS, IEEE,NEMA and UL standards. 2. Variable speed motor controllers and starters shall be products of one of the approved manufacturers listed in Article 1.22, "Approved Manufacturers". 3. Controllers shall be designed to withstand the following service conditions: a. Elevation: To 3,300 feet altitude without Berating. b. Ambient Temperature: 0°C. to 40°C. C. Relative Humidity: To 95%noncondensing. d. Input Voltage: 208 VAC,±10%, 3-phase, 60 Hertz,f2 Hz. e. Output Voltages: 0 to 208 VAC, 3-phase 3 to 60 Hz. 4. The variable speed motor drives shall consist of a fully digital (front end) adjustable frequency, variable torque, a.c. motor controller performance matched to a high efficiency motor. The controller manufacturer shall assume responsibility for matching motor and adjustable frequency controller characteristics to each other and to the requirements of the driven load. The controller must be able to safely vary the speed of the motor while allowing the • motor to meet the requirements of the attached fan or pump speed torque curve as dictated by the system static and dynamic requirements at the shaft of the motor. The selection of the controller/motor combination must result in acoustically compatible performance without objectionable motor noise. Costs associated with field adjustment and/or modifications of the controller to Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-95 A" Sound traps for VAV and FPB: 0-1,400 cfm Type A for NC-30(Radio Station/Conference Room) Type B for NC-35 1,400-3500 Type B for NC-35 Note: Type A- 3HMS Type B - 5HMS 4. The maximum self-generated noise by the above sound trap types shall not exceed the following sound power levels at face velocities of 1000 fpm. Sound Power Level db re: 10' Watts Bands Band Width Sound Trap Types Center Freq. (cps) AB 2 125 32 3 250 36 *` 4 500 34 5 1000 31 6 2000 32 5. Vaneaxial fan cone/diffuser silencers shall be factory prefabricated and constructed from 18 gauge galvanized steel (minimum) exterior and 18 gauge perforated galvanized steel (minimum) interior. The center cone shall be constructed of 18 gauge perforated steel (minimum) with 23% open area. All acoustical filler materials shall comply with this Specification Section and the interior center cone shall be the same diameter as the fan hub. Dynamic insertion loss of cone silencers to be determined by sound traps which will fit on the selected fans. a. Minimum dynamic insertion loss at _ fpm face velocity shall be as follows: Bands Band Width Dynamic Insertion Loss(dB) Center Freq. (cps) Cone/Diffuser Silencer WN 2 125 DNP 3 250 DNP 4 500 DNP 5 1000 DNP 6 2000 DNP 6. Certification: Submit certified test data of pressure drop and insertion loss ratings for a 24x24 cross-section rectangular trap or 24 inch diameter conical trap. The certification data for both pressure drop and insertion loss shall be based upon tests of the same trap for both measurements. The certifying �+ laboratory shall be open to inspection and/or test of sound traps upon request of the Architect. F. Sound Insulating Panels, Ducts and Plenums 1. Where shown on the drawings and specified hereinbelow, provide factory fabricated laboratory sound rated, sound insulating panels, ducts and plenums. , Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 0 l.11.12 15600-94 „� hereinafter, shall be lined with 1 inch thick, 3 lb. density, sound absorption material, Owens-Corning Fiberglas "Ductliner Board". (Note: 20 ft. assumes mixed flow fans. Typical axial fan will need 30 ft.) The sound absorption material shall be faced with a galvanized perforated metal facing having the same dimensions as the unlined ductwork connecting to the lined section of the ductwork. The perforated metal shall be 24 gauge and have one of the following perforation patterns, or approved equal: Open Area 7/64 inch round holes on 3/16 inch staggered centers 29% 1/8 inch round holes on 7/32 inch staggered centers 29% 1/8 inch round holes on 1/4 inch staggered centers 23% .085 inch round holes on 5/32 inch staggered centers 29% 1/16 inch round holes on 1/8 inch staggered centers 22.5% A visquine liner shall be installed between the perforated metal liner and the acoustic absorbent material within. C. All acoustic lining and sound absorber materials shall have a flame spread and smoke developed rating of less than or equal to 25 and 50 respectively. D. All pipe sleeves and duct openings penetrating floor slabs,partitions, walls, etc., shall be packed with mineral wool and sealed with nonhardening mastic. E. Factory Built Sound Traps 1. Prefabricated duct silencers shall be constructed of all incombustible materials and shall be the standard product of an approved manufacturer. The shell of the silencer shall be at least 22 gauge galvanized steel sheet and shall be leakproof when subjected to a differential pressure of 8 inches w.g. 2. Pressure drop shall be not greater than shown in the sound trap schedule. Total system pressure before and after the sound traps shall be measured after the traps are installed. Should the pressure drop be greater than specified or scheduled, replace the traps and/or modify the entrance or discharge aerodynamic flow to achieve the specified results. Make all corrective measures at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. The sound traps shall provide the following net insertion ratings under design airflow velocities as scheduled on the drawings. The ratings shall be determined by the duct to reverberant room test method at 1,000 fpm face No velocity. Dynamic Net Insertion Loss(db) Bands Band Width Sound Trap Types Center Freq. (cps) A B 2 125 5 8 3 250 8 12 4 500 12 20 5 1000 16 27 6 2000 19 28 M" Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-93 ,m L. Any ceiling grille, diffuser, linear diffuser, etc., located above a plaster ceiling or any other type of ceiling with limited or no access shall be provided with a cable operated damper in the branch duct that serves the diffuser. M. Acoustical Performance 1. It is the intent of the Specification that the manufacturer shall furnish units to .. attain a room noise criteria (NC) level for 5 NC points below the NC levels outlined in the "Design Criteria". Perforated or plaque-faced diffusers shall be selected for 8 NC points below specified NC level. Selection shall be based on .� 100%design flow. 2. The terminal device manufacturer shall submit to the Architect's representative selections according to the above criteria. This data submitted shall substantiate that the equipment types and sizes operating as in an installed **� condition per plans and specifications shall conform with the above. Neither the manufacturer nor the specific unit selection will be approved until such data has been submitted. 3. The terminal devices shall be tested in accordance with ADC Standard 1062- R.3. 4. Should the Owner desire that units as furnished under this Section be checked for conformance to the above guarantee,the cost of such test will be paid for by the Owner. If the unit furnished and subsequently tested does not conform to the above guarantee, the cost of the test and the cost of any corrective measures shall be at no additional expense to the Owner. The testing, if required, shall be performed at manufacturer's factory and observed by the Engineer. 2.39 ACOUSTIC TREATMENT A. Where shown on the drawings and specified hereinbelow, conventional low velocity return and exhaust ductwork shall be installed with 1 inch thick acoustic lining. Such acoustic lining shall be mat-face duct liner of a type approved by the NFPA. Acoustic lining shall be the products of one of the approved manufacturers listed in Article 1.22, "Approved Manufacturers". Dimensions of lined ducts shown on drawings are .a. the inside dimensions of the duct after the lining has been installed. Stapling method of attachment will not be permitted. Mat-faced duct liner shall be adhered by a fire retardant adhesive such as Benjamin Foster 81-99, or as approved. Mechanical fasteners which do not pierce the sheet metal will be on 16 inch centers on top sections (when width exceeds 12 inches), and on sides (when height exceeds 24 inches). All abutting edges of acoustic lining shall be caulked, and all exposed edges w. of acoustic lining shall be installed with sheet metal nosings. Acoustical lining shall be provided for: 1. All Toilet exhaust branch ducts. Lining can be deleted if ductwork configuration has at least two 90 degree bends between the closest air outlets of the Men's and Women's Toilet Rooms. 2. Air transfer and jumper ducts. 3. 20 ft. upstream of toilet exhaust fans. "" B. All rectangular ductwork of medium velocity systems within the Mechanical Equipment Rooms and not less than 30 ft. beyond supply fan discharge and 20 ft. • beyond return fan inlet and where called for on the drawings, and/or as stated Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-92 ,,,� ■m a removable knob through lever and cam. Provide proper duct connection to diffuser grille and register inlets with at least three (3) duct diameters of straight ductwork ,ww (flex or sheetmetal) before attachment to terminal. Avoid excessive dampering immediately at diffusers, etc. Registers shall be as scheduled on plans under grilles and registers, or as approved, with clips and/or flange holes and screws (as required by architectural finishes) to secure registers to ceiling construction and/or exposed ducts as required. Face bars shall be inclined 30 degrees having not less than 86% free area. D. Air bar plug-in diffusers shall be Titus Model N(lengths as required), or as approved, or as otherwise shown on the drawings. Each supply air ceiling diffuser shall be insulated and furnished with air directional control and volume damper at inlet to boot. Volume damper shall be easily operable through face of boot. E. Linear type ceiling diffusers and grilles, where shown on drawings, shall be of extruded aluminum construction with finish as indicated. They shall be furnished with air volume pattern control devices and frames where required. Volume dampers located in the branch duct serving the supply plenum over the diffuser shall be po operable(via a cable operator) through the face of the linear diffuser which it serves. F. Extruded aluminum linear diffusers and grilles, complete with blank-off sections and dampers, where required, shall be provided where indicated on the drawings. Linear diffusers shall be Anemostat as shown on plans, with mounting frames to match ceiling or wall, or as approved. Actual total lengths of units shall be field verified. ON Active lengths shall be as indicated on the drawings. G. All registers, grilles and diffusers shall be furnished with matte enamel finish. Color shall be as selected and approved by the Architect. Grilles serving the performance 00 space shall be painted black. H. All grilles, registers and linear diffusers in plaster construction shall be furnished with 00 plaster frames. Plaster frames shall be properly identified and turned over to the General Contractor for installation. I. Each air supply outlet shall have the capacity as noted on the drawings and shall be guaranteed to give the required throw with draftless diffusion. Where manufacturer's recommendations require duct sizes differing from those shown on the drawings, provide same at no additional cost to the Owner. All registers and diffusers shall be provided with directional and volume controls specified, and shall be of such dimensions (including the accessory equipment) as to conform to the building space conditions. J. All grilles,registers and diffusers located over showers or steam-producing appliances shall be aluminum covered with a coat of Eisenheis epoxy paint. K. A schedule and samples shall be prepared and submitted to the General Contractor showing the sizes and model numbers of all grilles, registers and diffusers before they 40 are ordered for installation. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-91 .W C. The manufacturer shall submit to the Consulting Engineer guaranteed radiated sound power levels in octave bands,and shall substantiate that the equipment operating in an installed condition in accordance with plans and Specifications shall conform with those described above. Radiated sound power ratings shall be without allowance for ceiling absorption. D. The VAV unit manufacturer shall submit guaranteed sound power level ratings by ' octave bands. These ratings shall list the unit sound power generation with the VAV unit installed within the test chamber. The sound power generation shall be listed for an upstream pressure of 2 inch and 1 inch and minimum water gauge with a downstream pressure of 0.0 inch water gauge. Neither the manufacturer nor the specific unit selection will be approved until such data has been submitted. E. Sound power shall be measured in accordance with ADC (Air Diffusion Council) Standard 1062-R.3. F. Should the Owner desire that units as furnished under this Section be checked for conformance to the above performance, the cost of such test will be paid for by the Owner provided that the test proves that the unit furnished does conform. If the unit as furnished and subsequently tested does not conform, the cost of the test and of any corrective measures shall be at no additional expense to the Owner. The testing, if required, shall be performed at the manufacturer's factory and observed by the Engineer. G. Unit ratings shall be tested in accordance with current ADC Test Code Standards. H. Shop Testing/Startup Supervision: All units shall be shop tested for pressures, temperatures and flow capacities as scheduled, with test and calibration results shipped with each unit. The unit manufacturer shall provide the services of direct factory personnel to supervise the installation, testing, checking, balancing and final calibration of each unit, pair of units and flow tracking system for not less than ten working days. 2.38 GRILLES,REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS A. Provide, where shown on the drawings, all metal diffusers, grilles and registers of sizes indicated or of equivalent areas as approved. B. All supply ceiling diffusers, unless otherwise noted on the drawings, shall be Titus Omni, or as approved. Each supply air ceiling diffuser shall be furnished with air directional control and air volume control devices. See drawings for schedule of sizes. The method of attachment of the diffuser (supply and return) to the ceiling system and the type of margin shall be compatible with the type of ceiling system approved for installation on the job. Coordinate with other Trades. All supply registers shall be of the double deflection type with opposed blade dampers, with the damper operated by a removable knob through lever and cam. Registers shall be Titus Model 272RL. 4M C. Return and exhaust registers and grilles, where called for on drawings, shall be of fixed single deflection type with opposed blade dampers, with the damper operated by on Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-90 „o MW I. Acoustical Performance 1. Fan powered unit design and selection shall result in space sound pressure levels conforming to the following NC curves as defined in 1987 and later editions of ASHRAE Guide. (Refer to Article "Variable and Constant Volume Boxes [DDC]" for required space NC levels.) 2. Acoustical performance data shall be submitted to comply with discharge noise levels defined in Specification Articles "Variable and Constant Volume Boxes (DDC)" and "Radiated Noise from VAV Units". 3. Fan powered constant volume box manufacturers shall submit certified radiated and discharge sound test data. 4. Coordinate with other Trades the required inlet configuration of the rigid ductwork upstream of each fan powered box. In no case shall the distance be less than 36 inches. 5. Coordinate with the Section "Automatic Temperature Control" for the quantity of pneumatic air required per box and also as to the quality of the pneumatic air (i.e., maximum contaminants in parts per million, temperature and humidity requirements). A letter stating the above requirements shall be submitted by this Section in conjunction with the shop drawings of the boxes. J. All volume dampers serving linear diffusers and dampers located above inaccessible ceilings shall be provided with cable-operated dampers operable through the face of the diffuser. ON K. Unit ratings shall be tested in accordance with current ADC Test Code Standards. aw 2.37 RADIATED NOISE FROM VAV UNITS A. Where VAV units are located in ceiling plenum over occupied spaces, the maximum permissible radiated sound power levels in octave bands when operated in an installed condition per plans and Specifications, based on a maximum inlet static pressure of 2 inches w.c. and 100%design flow,shall be as follows: Octave Mid-Frequency Max. PWL re: 10 Watts Band (cps) NC-35 NC-40 1 63 69 73 2 125 66 70 3 250 61 66 4 500 61 66 5 1000 59 64 6 2000 58 63 7 4000 56 61 no 8 8000 54 59 B. VAV's and FPB's not to be located over NC-30 spaces. Smith Campus Center HVAC w 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-89 .W D. All final mounting, wiring, testing, etc., to make the terminal units completely operational shall be the responsibility of the terminal unit manufacturer. All work associated with same shall be closely coordinated with the Automatic Temperature Control Contractor. E. The DDC controller and its associated power supply, transducers, electric damper operator, etc., shall be neatly mounted within a separate 20 gauge sealed and gasketed galvanized sheet metal enclosure by the Automatic Temperature Control Contractor. The completed assembly shall be shipped by the Automatic Temperature Control Contractor to the terminal unit manufacturer for mounting directly to and supported from the terminal device it serves. All external electrical connections to the DDC controller within the box shall be terminated in two separate junction boxes (with removable covers), i.e., one for power and one for signal communications. All wiring and tubing shall be permanently labeled and color coded for ease of identification. No access to within the enclosure shall be required for installation, startup or operation of the terminal unit. ' F. Terminal units shall be pressure independent and shall be capable of reset of air volume within plus or minus 5% of required air flow (as determined by the space temperature sensor) regardless of changes in system air pressure. A multiple arm (minimum 4) flow traversing unit shall be used and the means of sensing airflow and shall provide control signal pressure for the cfm to the DDC controller. Sensor tubing .� between the flow traversing unit and the DDC unit shall be furnished and installed by the terminal unit manufacturer. Separate differential pressure taps shall also be provided for air flow measurement with a 0-1 inch gauge. Each terminal unit shall be .. provided with a flow chart attached. Maximum and minimum cfm setting shall be factory set but shall be capable of easy readjustment in the field. Terminal units shall be capable of operating as described above at inlet static pressures between .05 inch and 6 inch water gauge. Units shall be selected to operate at a static pressure loss through the unit between .05 and .25 inch water gauge (maximum). Terminal units shall be furnished with airflow switch wired to start terminal unit fan on sensing airflow. G. Electric actuator and accessories shall control the terminal unit damper within the maximum and minimum limits as determined by the space temperature sensor and controller. The minimum limit unless otherwise noted will be to 50% (maximum leakage of 5% of design air flow with an inlet pressure of 6 inch w.g.). Space temperature sensor shall be furnished and installed by the Automatic Temperature .� Control Contractor. Terminal unit damper shall be normally open type upon loss of control signal unless otherwise noted. Dampers shall be furnished and installed by the terminal unit manufacturer. H. Each unit shall be provided with a forward curved direct drive fan with single speed motor. A combination backdraft and balancing damper shall be provided in the fan discharge. Fan motors shall be wired for 208 volts, single phase. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-88 RM ow H. This Contractor shall coordinate with the Automatic Temperature Control Contractor regarding the quantity of power required per VAV box and also as to the quality of the power(voltage limits, etc.). A letter stating the above requirements shall be submitted by this Contractor in conjunction with the shop drawings of the VAV boxes. I. Acoustical Performance 1. VAV unit design and selection shall result in space sound pressure levels conforming to a noise criteria curve (as noted in Article 1.2 "Design Critera") as defined in 1984 and later editions of ASHRAE Guide. Low pressure 0 ductwork downstream of VAV units shall include in-duct sound attenuators of sufficient dynamic insertion loss (DIL) to achieve the required criteria but not less than the DIL scheduled on the drawings. 40 J. The maximum discharge permissible sound power levels measured at the terminal outlets of VAV units,based on a maximum inlet static pressure of two inches w.c. and 100%design flow, in octave bands for the NC curves, are as follows: Octave Mid- Max.PWL re: 10" Watts Band Frequency NC-30 w/ NC-35 w/ NC-35 w/ NC-35 w/ NC-40 w/ (cps) Type B Type A Type B Type no Type B Sound Sound Sound Sound Sound Attenuator Attenuator Attenuator Attenuator Attenuator 1 63 — — — — — 2 125 69 70 74 65 74 78 3 250 65 65 73 57 70 78 4 500 68 65 79 54 70 84 5 1000 71 65 80 50 70 85 6 2000 70 66 79 48 71 84 7 4000 64 64 73 47 69 78 un, 8 8000 — — — 2.36 FAN POWERED VARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOXES(DDC) A. Provide low terminal pressure units, as shown on plan. Unit casings shall be galvanized steel complying with ASHRAE and SMACNA construction standards, with sandwiched thermal and sound attenuating rigid insulation. Thermal and acoustic insulation material shall have a flame spread and smoke developed rating of less than or equal to 25 and 50 respectively and shall comply with the requirements of NFPA Bulletin 90A. Units shall be constructed in accordance with dimensional sw constraints indicated. B. Leakage through the unit casing shall be less than 3%of design volume at 6 inch inlet 00 pressure. C. All terminal units shall be of the distributed direct digital control technology type. The direct digital controller (DDC), damper actuator, power supply, communications ports, terminal strips, etc., shall be furnished by the Automatic Temperature Control Contractor to the successful terminal unit manufacturer for factory installation and testing at the terminal manufacturer's facility. Smith Campus Center HVAC an 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-87 4M B. Leakage through the unit casing shall be less than 3% of design volume at 6 inch inlet pressure. C. All VAV and constant volume terminal units shall be of the distributed direct digital control technology type. The direct digital controller (DDC) and its associated wall mounted temperature sensor, power supply communications ports, terminal strips, .. etc., shall be furnished to the successful terminal unit manufacturer for factory installation and testing at the terminal manufacturer's facility. The DDC unit and appurtenances shall be furnished under another Section of the Specifications. The location of the actuator and controller shall be as shown on the plans. D. All final mounting, wiring, testing, etc., to make the terminal units completely operational shall be the responsibility of the terminal unit manufacturer. All work +� associated with same shall be closely coordinated with the Building Automation and Temperature Control Contractor(Section 15950 of the Specifications). E. The DDC controller and its associated power supply, transducers, electric damper operator, etc., shall be neatly mounted within a separate 20 gauge sealed and gasketed galvanized sheet metal enclosure, mounted directly to and supported from the terminal device to which it serves. All external electrical connections to the DDC controller within the box shall be terminated in two separate junction boxes (with removable covers), i.e., one for power and one for signal communications. All wiring and tubing .� shall be permanently labeled and color coded for ease of identification. No access to within the enclosure shall be required for installation, startup or operation of the terminal unit. F. Terminal units shall be pressure independent and shall be capable of reset of air volume within plus or minus 5% of required airflow (as determined by the space temperature sensor) regardless of changes in system air pressure. A multiple arm �.• (minimum 4) flow traversing unit shall be used and the means of sensing airflow shall be incorporated within the unit and shall provide control signal pressure for the cfm to the DDC controller. Separate differential pressure taps shall also be provided for airflow measurement with a 0-1 inch gauge. Each terminal unit shall be provided with a flow chart attached. Maximum and minimum cfm setting shall be factory set but shall be capable of easy readjustment in the field. Terminal units shall be capable of M► operating as described above at inlet static pressures between .05 inch and 6 inch water gauge. Units shall be selected to operate at a static pressure loss through the unit between .05 and .25 inch water gauge (maximum). G. Electronic actuator and accessories to operate the terminal unit between maximum and minimum limits as determined by the space temperature sensor and controller shall be provided by the DDC unit manufacturer, installed and tested by the terminal unit manufacturer at the factory. Minimum limit unless otherwise noted will be to shutoff (maximum leakage of 5% of design airflow with an inlet pressure of 6 inch w.g.). Actuator and all accessories shall be mounted in easily accessible enclosure, +� completely wired, requiring only power. Space temperature sensor and controller shall be furnished under the Automatic Temperature Control Section of the Specifications. Terminal units shall be normally open upon loss of control signal .., unless otherwise noted. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-86 ,,,4 directed, shall be installed by this Contractor. Damper banks consisting of multiple damper sections shall have vertical intermediate 10 gauge galvanized steel stiffeners every 48 inches as part of the damper assembly. 2.34 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Fan Flexible Connectors 1. Fan connections, both at inlet and discharge, shall be made with flexible material so as to prohibit the transfer of vibration from fans to ductwork connecting thereto. Connections shall be made of heavy glass fabric and coated on one side with neoprene (type "Ventglas-L.A.") on fume hood exhaust fans, and of heavy glass fabric and double neoprene coated (type "Ventglas") for !* conventional systems, except as otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction and except as otherwise noted below. 2. The flexible connections shall be approximately 6 inches long and held in place with heavy metal bands or double hemlock securely attached to prevent any leakage at the connection points. 3. The flexible connections at the discharge ends of the fans for the medium pressure air conditioning systems shall be type "Ventglas" fiber glass, of lengths noted above and fastened as above. It is the intent that these flexible connections shall withstand the operating air pressure, shall not permit air leakage and shall not transmit vibration. 4. All materials shall be as manufactured by Ventafabrics and listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., for a Fire Hazard Classification, as tested under ASTM,NFPA, or UL procedures,not to exceed the following: Flame Spread 25 Fuel Contributed 50 Smoke Developed 50 B. Air Distribution Flexible Connectors 1. Upstream Side of VAV Boxes: No flexible duct connections will be permitted upstream or downstream of VAV boxes. This Contractor shall install a minimum of 36 inches of straight rigid duct or the equivalent of four (4) inlet diameters, whichever is greater, to the inlet of each VAV unit. 2. All materials shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., for .. a Fire Hazard Classification, as tested under ASTM, NFPA, or UL procedures, not to exceed the following: Flame Spread 25 Fuel Contributed 50 Smoke Developed 50 w 2.35 VARIABLE AND CONSTANT VOLUME BOXES(DDC) A. Provide low terminal pressure units, as shown on the plans. Unit casings shall be galvanized steel complying with ASHRAE and SMACNA construction standards, with sandwiched thermal and sound attenuating rigid insulation. Thermal and acoustic insulation material shall have a flame spread and smoke developed rating of ww less than or equal to 25 and 50 respectively and shall comply with the requirements of NFPA Bulletin 90A. Units shall be constructed in accordance with dimensional constraints indicated on the drawings. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-85 .0 No 3. Doors: Minimum 14 gauge steel, heavy hinges flush with frame, invisible when closed, wing type airplane catches; no bolts, screws, nuts or other loose device required for opening of door. we 2.33 DAMPERS A. Fire dampers suitable for installation in dynamic systems shall be installed in all ducts piercing fire-rated shafts, walls or floors. Fire dampers shall be dynamically rated for closure against air flow in both vertical and horizontal mounting configurations and shall be rated to close against 8.0 inches water gauge maximum, across closed damper. Fire dampers shall meet the requirements of; and be manufactured in accordance with, UL 555. All fire dampers shall meet all NFPA requirements. Dampers shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's UL listing requirements. B. Volume dampers, as shown on the drawings and as required, shall be installed in the various branches of the ductwork to be used in balancing the system. Note that these 4 dampers shall be separate and independent from the registers hereinafter specified to be set behind supply and/or return air grilles. Multiblade dampers shall be provided in large ducts. Volume dampers shall be provided in all supply, return and exhaust am branch ductwork,and where indicated on the drawings. C. Volume dampers shall be of the quadrant type, of heavy construction, pivoted to turn am easily,and provided with approved operating and locking devices,mounted on outside of the duct in an accessible place. Details as directed. D. Backdraft dampers shall be self-operating, counterbalanced(adjustable)type. Frames as shall be 3/4 inch x 4 inch x 3/4 inch galvanized channel steel on all four sides. The blades shall be at least 12 gauge galvanized steel and shall have blade brackets with tie bar of 1-1/4 inch x 1-1/4 inch galvanized steel. The pivot rods shall be 1/2 inch diameter cadmium plated steel. All bearings for the pivot rods and for tie bar shall be of the self-lubricating type. The blades shall have bulb type vinyl stripping on edge for tight closing. Maximum blade length shall be 44 inches; multiple sections shall be ,. used with the frame's full height for stability. Dampers shall have a maximum leakage of 1% of the design airflow across such damper with the damper closed against 6 inch w.g. pressure across the face. All backdraft dampers serving chemical, .. radioactive and/or solvent storage shall be suitable for a minimum of 20 inch water column differential pressure, with no more than 1% leakage. Dampers shall be installed with suitable reinforcing at wall to which they serve so as to maintain their integrity at the design. The damper manufacturer shall review the fan systems and static pressures to ensure that the construction of the damper is adequate, that the dampers shall operate properly without fluttering, and shall open and close under all system operating conditions. E. All dampers shall be constructed of the same material as the duct system in which they are installed, and SHALL BE suitable for the same pressure class and duct *� velocities. F. Dampers furnished under the Automatic Temperature Control Section of the Specifications, as indicated on the drawings, in air inlet ducts, discharge ducts, supply air ducts and/or plenums, of supply air fans, exhaust fans, return air fans, etc., or as Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-84 ., B. All access doors in ductwork shall be hung on separate frames on heavy flat hinges and shall be secured in the closed position with Ventlok No. 100 cast zinc latch. A minimum of four heavy window-type latches shall be provided, except on doors 18 inches x 18 inches and larger on high velocity air systems where two latches per side shall be furnished. All required gasketing shall be provided for all access doors to make them airtight. C. In no case shall access to any items of equipment requiring inspection, adjustment or servicing, require the removal of nuts, bolts, screws, wingnuts, wedges, or any other screwed or loose device. It is the intention of this Contract that all access doors shall be latched and made airtight. Quantity of latches shall be as stated above and as required to make for an airtight fitting and as approved. D. Access doors into ducts shall in general not be smaller than 24 inches x 24 inches, except where duct sizes prohibit. In such cases, two access doors are to be installed. Access doors shall be provided at all splitter dampers,upstream and downstream of all reheat coils and electric strip heaters, at all,fire dampers, and automatic and backdraft dampers. Quantity of access doors shall be determined by size and construction of fire dampers and requirements for resetting damper linkage. E. Furnish buttons or tabs to job site for setting, as approved by Architect, to indicate location of valves, dampers or other equipment located above removable type ceilings where access doors are not furnished. F. Access doors shall be constructed of the same material as the duct or system in which they serve. 2.32 ACCESS DOORS IN FINISHED CONSTRUCTION A. Furnish access doors as required for all concealed valves, dampers, variable and constant air volume boxes, controls, cleanouts and other elements requiring access above ceilings or behind walls or as indicated on the drawings. Coordinate the work and assume responsibility for the accessibility of all valves, etc. B. Use the following type doors as manufactured by Karp Associates, Inc. 1. In plaster ceilings, KARP DSC 210-PL. 2. In 2 hour masonry enclosures (pipe or duct shafts), KARP KRP-150FR. 3. In nonrated masonry, KARP DSC-214M. 4. In drywall construction, KARP DSC-214M. 5. In drywall construction, 2 hour fire rating, KARP KRP-150FR. C. Door and frame shall be given a prime coat of corrosion-resistant paint at the factory. D. All access doors shall be 24 inches by 24 inches. E. Construction I. General: Factory made, completely flush, heavy metal as manufactured by Karp Associates, Inc. s 2. Frames: Welded, minimum 14 gauge steel, mitered comers ground smooth, anchors. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-83 so clips are not available, sleeves shall be minimum 16 gauge for ducts having dimensions less than 24 in. high and less than 36 in. wide. For ducts having dimensions greater than 24 in.high or 36 in. wide,sleeves shall be minimum 14 gauge. 2. Where fire dampers and/or combination fire/smoke dampers are installed in ducts constructed to SMACNA standards for pressures 2 in. water gauge and .�. greater, breakaway connections shall not be used. Sleeves shall be minimum 16 gauge for ducts having dimensions less than 24 in. high and less than 36 in. wide. For ducts having dimensions greater than 24 in. high or 36 in. wide, sleeves shall be minimum 14 gauge. 3. Fire and/or fire smoke dampers shall be installed in accordance with UL Standards 555 and 5555 respectively. W. Required Access Doors 1. Provide access doors as specified in Article "Access Doors" to permit inspection, operation and maintenance of all valves, coils, controls, fire dampers, splitter dampers, backdraft dampers, automatic dampers, filters, bearings or other apparatus concealed behind the sheet metal work. 2. Each sheet metal chamber shall be provided with access doors in locations shown on the drawings. The doors shall be made with inner and outer shells 2 in. apart so that they may be properly insulated and properly operated and shall not be smaller than 20 in. wide x 60 in. high. Door hardware shall be: Ventlok No. 310 cast zinc door latches operable from both sides, or as approved, two per door; Ferum Co. No. 245 extra heavy, zinc plated, 6 in. T hinges, or as approved, minimum two per door. The doors shall be provided with rubber gaskets so as to make them airtight. Provide reinforcing angles above and below access door frames to stiffen casings. Doors at fan plenums must be large enough to facilitate removal of motors but not less than listed above. All access doors must open against the system pressure. 3. Provide access doors and frames where specified and shown on plans. Minimum size 18x18 inches. 4. Access doors in insulated ducts shall be double panel insulated of not less than 20 gauge. Access doors in uninsulated ducts may be of single panel construction of not less than 18 gauge, galvanized steel, and shall have sponge rubber gaskets around their entire perimeter. 5. Each access door shall be provided with retaining wires or chains, a minimum of four window type latches to allow complete removal. 2.31 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide access doors and frames to permit inspection, operation and maintenance of all valves, controls, fire dampers, automatic control dampers, filters, humidifiers, bearings, traps or other apparatus concealed behind the sheet metal work shall be provided. All such doors in insulated ducts shall be double panel insulated of not less than No. 20 gauge. Access doors in uninsulated ducts may be of single panel �*! construction of not less than No. 18 gauge, galvanized, and shall have sponge rubber gaskets around their entire perimeter. Access doors shall be installed before and after each device where possible. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-82 "+ ■r T. Equipment Connections 1. Inlet duct connections to air volume regulating devices (i.e., VAV boxes, fan powered boxes, constant volume regulators, etc.) shall be made with hard duct with a minimum straight length of 3 duct diameters, but not less than 36 in. Flexible ducts are not permitted. 2. All branch ducts to diffusers are to be provided with balancing (volume) dampers as shown in Figure 2-14. Dampers are to be located near the branch duct take-offs as far as possible from the drop to the diffuser. 3. Round drops to diffusers shall be made with spin-in collars as shown in Figure 3-8, Figures D or E. Square drops to diffusers shall be made with clinch connections. All diffuser connections shall be gasketed and have a minimum 3/4 in. overlap. Round duct shall have grooved seam, pipe lock or flat lock longitudinal seams. The final connections to diffusers may be made with 12 in. of flexible duct(maximum offset 10 degrees). .� U. Hangers and Supports 1. All methods of attachment to the building structure shall be of the type approved and described in Article "Hangers, Anchors, Supports." Methods of Ala attachment must be submitted to the Structural Engineer for approval. Expansion nails,power and/or power actuated devices will not be permitted. 2. Rectangular and flat oval ductwork shall be supported in accordance with Table „A 4-1, except that wire shall not be used and the maximum hanger spacing shall not exceed 8 ft. 0 in. 3. Round ducts shall be supported in accordance with Table 4-2, except that wire shall not be used and the maximum hanger spacing shall not exceed 10 ft. 0 in. 4. Where the width of the duct exceeds 48 in., the hanger shall be bent under - _ bottom of ducts and fastened to bottom as well as to sides. 5. Additional hangers shall be provided for all acoustically lined double wall ducts. 6. Where ducts are stacked,they shall be independently supported as above. 7. Particular care shall be taken to support large and heavy ductwork in a manner on approved by the Engineer, including the providing of supplementary steel, if required. Shop drawings, indicating support methods, point loadings to the building structure, and hanger locations shall be submitted to the Structural ON Engineer for review sufficiently in advance of concrete pouring schedules to permit evaluation, critique and any necessary changes of hanging and support methods. If additional hangers, inserts and/or supplemental steel are required, such hangers, inserts and/or supplemental steel shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. 8. Where horizontal ducts are required to be enclosed in dry wall, etc., such enclosures shall not be supported from the duct hangers. Supports for such enclosures shall be provided by the Trade responsible for the installation of those enclosures. V. Fire Dampers/Fire Smoke Dampers 1. Where fire dampers and/or fire smoke dampers are installed in ducts constructed to SMACNA standards for pressures below 2 in. water gauge and manufactured transverse joints are utilized, the corner clips or corner bolts are to be eliminated and plastic clips are to be installed-- not metal clips. If plastic Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-81 am 3. The main supply headers in the Machine Rooms and out to a point 25 ft. 0 in. beyond the Machine Room wall shall be constructed of two layers of galvanized steel sheets in a panel construction with a minimum of 1 in. thick, 3 lb. density thermal insulation (similar to Owens Corning "Duct Liner Board") sandwiched between. The outer layer shall be minimum 16 gauge, the inner layer perforated, minimum 20 gauge. Panels shall be provided with integral capped and sealed joints, suitable for continuous use out-of-doors. Refer to Article "Acoustic Treatment" for additional requirements. 4. Distribution headers outside of the MER to inlet to VAV box shall be 2 in. .ft Class "A" sealed (transverse joints, longitudinal seams and branch connections caulked)minimum 24 gauge. 5. Ductwork downstream of box shall be 1 in. Class "C" sealed (transverse joints am and branch connections only caulked)minimum 26 gauge. Q. Field erected casings and plenums shall be constructed as follows: 1. The suction and discharge of return fans and exhaust fans (except Kitchen am exhaust fans) shall be constructed in accordance with 3 in. water gauge load classification per Table 6-1. 2. Casings for the supply fan systems from the intake ALD up to the system shutoff damper shall be constructed in accordance with 6 in. water gauge load classification per Table 6-1. 3. Casings and/or plenums which have sheet metal floors shall be constructed with �. additional bracing to support maintenance personnel. 4. Casings between louvers and automatic dampers shall be constructed in accordance with 3 inch water gauge load classification per Table 6-1. R. Return and Exhaust Duct Construction 1. For local ducted return or exhaust systems, 2 in. class"A" sealed. 2. Return risers and exhaust risers, 2 in. Class "A" sealed. Local Branches in these systems 1 in. Class "C" sealed. S. Kitchen Hood Exhaust Duct Construction 1. Ducts shall be not less than 10 gauge carbon steel with continuously welded longitudinal seams and transverse joints. All branch duct connections shall also be welded. 2. Kitchen hood exhaust ducts shall pitch upward in the direction of airflow in accordance with the requirements of all governing codes. 3. All kitchen hood exhaust risers shall be provided with a drip collector located at heel of the riser elbow. 4. All branch connections to kitchen hood exhaust ducts shall be located a minimum of 1-1/2 in. above the bottom of the duct. 5. Raised access doors shall be provided 20 feet on centers and at all changes in direction. Access doors shall be 18 in. by 18 in. minimum except where limited by duct dimensions; in such cases, the opening shall be large enough to permit cleaning. However, the minimum horizontal dimension shall be 18 in. Access " doors shall be located a minimum of 1-1/2 in. above the bottom of the duct. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-80 MR 4. Where manufactured transverse joints are used (SMACNA T-25a, T-25b, i.e., Duct Mate, TDC, TDF, etc.), they shall be submitted with the manufacturer's standards for construction and installation and installed in accordance with those standards. 5. Tie rod attachments shall be installed in accordance with Figures 1-2 and 1-3, except that attachments D, E and F shown in Figure 1-2 shall not be installed in the field. Only tie rod attachments A, B, C and G shown in Figure 1-2 and all details shown in Figure 1-3 are permitted on return air ductwork. 6. All unlined duct shall be cross broken or beaded in accordance with the requirements in Figure 1-8. M. Rectangular Duct Fittings 1. Branch connections shall be made with 45 degree flare connections as shown in Figure 2-6, with complete metal-to-metal contact,as noted. 2. Full radius elbows shall be.used in all ducts with air velocities in excess of 2000 ft./min. and wherever possible in all other ducts. Radius elbows shall be Type RE-1,RE-3 or RE-5 as shown in Figure 2-2. 3. Where full radius elbows cannot be installed in high velocity ducts(above 2000 fpm) due to space restrictions, smaller radius elbows utilizing turning vanes may be used, providing that turning vanes are constructed in accordance with Figure 2-3. Square elbows shall not be used. 4. Where square elbows are used in low velocity ducts (below 2000 fpm), single- thickness turning vanes shall be installed in accordance with Figure 2-3. Vanes shall be installed through the runner, with blades welded to the runner. go N. Round and Oval Duct Joinery and Fabrication 1. Round oval ducts shall be: Spiral Seam (RL-1) or continuous butt or lap welded (RL-4) as shown in Figure 3-1. Seam Types RL-2 and RL-3 may be used in accordance with Class I sealing requirements. 2. Transverse joints shall be Beaded Sleeve Type Rt-1 or Van Stone Type Rt-2 as shown in Figure 3-2. O. Round and Oval Duct Fittings 1. Round and oval duct branch connections to round, oval or rectangular ducts ,ws shall be made with conical or bellmouth connections as shown in Figure 2-6, 90 degree tee oval to round taps or 45 degree laterals as shown in Figure 3-4 or conical connections as shown in Figure 3-5. 2. Round elbows shall be stamped, segmented or segmented standing seam as shown in Figure 3-3. Segmented elbows shall have a minimum of five segments. 3. All changes from square to round or round to square must be made with formed transition pieces. Transition angle shall be 15 degrees or less. P. Supply Duct Construction Classifications 1. All longitudinal seams shall be made with 3/8 in. Pittsburgh. 2. Headers in Machine Rooms, risers and takeoff up to and including floor shutoff damper, 4 in. Class "A" sealed (transverse joints and longitudinal seams caulked) minimum 24 gauge. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-79 E. Exact dimensions of register boxes must await approval of grilles, and exact locations shall be in accordance with architecturally reflected ceiling plans and shall be - submitted for approval; otherwise, any changes directed after installation shall be made without additional cost. All register boxes and other openings of the ductwork .. must be tightly closed during construction to keep out rubbish. F. Whenever intermediate reinforcing angles are required on 2 in. water gauge and up (even if only on two [2] sides),they must be connected at the corners. G. All angle irons required for any ductwork construction or support shall be galvanized. w H. Any ductwork passing through waterproof wall or roof construction shall be provided with counterflashing. I. All ducts and/or plenums exposed to the weather (i.e., plenums which discharge up through a roof and/or floors of outdoor intake plenums),or as shown on the drawings, up to and including discharge caps, hoods, elbows, etc., shall be built substantially as shown on the drawings, of Type 304 stainless steel or aluminum properly braced and supported, and secured to the building construction. Stainless steel or aluminum ductwork shall be of type, thickness, and construction in conformance with the requirements for 2 in. water gauge, Class "A" sealed. The bottom of all plenums which discharge up through a roof and/or floors of outdoor intake plenums shall be of welded pan construction with a minimum 2 in.high lip. J. Exposed and concealed ductwork connecting to equipment discharging water vapors or serving areas with high vapor content (i.e., dishwashers, driers, showers etc.), and all other ductwork where indicated, shall be built of Type 304 stainless steel in accordance with the requirements for 2 in. water gauge hereinbelow, and properly braced and supported and secured to the building construction. Horizontal ductwork shall be of pan construction with longitudinal seams at the top. All transverse joints of such ducts shall be welded. Bracing of ducts shall be as specified for galvanized iron ducts except that angles, screws and hangers shall be of nonferrous steel. Ductwork shall be watertight. K. All gaskets and sealants must conform with NFPA requirements of flame spread rating not to exceed 25 and smoke developed rating not to exceed 50. L. Rectangular Duct Joinery and Fabrication I. Pittsburgh Lock seams shall be minimum 3/8 in. 2. The following longitudinal seams are not permitted: a. Button Punch/Snap Lock(L-2) ** b. Standing Seam(L-4) C. Single Corner Seam(L-5) 3. The following transverse joints are not permitted: + a. Lap (T-4) b. Reinforced S Slip (T-7) C. Standing Seam (T-15) d. Reinforced Standing Seam(T-16) e. Pocket Lock(T-17) f Reinforced Pocket Lock(T-18 and T-19) .� g. Capped Flange(T-20) Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-78 Filter efficiency shall not be less than 25-30% with a 5 micron particle efficiency of 95% 2. Prefilters shall have an initial resistance of not more than 0.25 inches w.g., with a final resistance of 0.9 inches w.g. D. High Efficiency Final Filters(Bag Type) w 1. Provide factory fabricated bag type filters consisting of high lofted glass microfiber media with a pleated,bonded metal backing and corner stabilizers in a galvanized metal enclosure having either diagonal reinforcement or welded galvanized faceguards. 2. Glass fiber media shall be high density microfiber type having a minimum of 14.4 sq. ft. of media per sq. ft. of filter face area. 3. Final resistance may be up to 1.50 inches w.g., initial resistance shall be in accordance with the following: Efficiency Flow Rate Pressure Drop 90- 95% 2,000 cfm .68 inches w.g. 80- 85% 2,000 cfm .50 inches w.g. 60-65% 2,000 cfin .28 inches w.g. 00 40% 2,000 cfin .25 inches w.g. Note: 95%efficient filters shall be used in ACS-1,ACS-2, ACS-3, OR ACS-4 and HV-1. E. Draft Gauges 1. Provide a draft gauge across each group of roughing prefilters and final filters go to indicate the pressure drop across the roughing prefilters and final filters. The gauges shall be legible to 0.10 inch of water pressure with a range of 0 to 3 inch w.g. 2.30 SHEET METAL DUCTWORK po A. All construction standards, figure numbers and details referred to are from the SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards (Metal & Flexible)", Second Edition, 1995. u B. Provide all ductwork, sheet metal flues, register boxes, air chambers, dampers, and all auxiliary work of any kind necessary to make the various air conditioning, ventilating and heating systems of the building complete and ready for satisfactory operation. C. While the drawings shall be adhered to as closely as possible, the right is reserved to vary the runs and sizes of ductwork and to make offsets, where necessary, to accommodate conditions arising at the building. D. All ductwork shall be built with approved joints and seams smooth on the inside and a neat finish on the outside. Duct joints shall be made with laps in the direction of airflow; flanges shall not project into the air stream. Ducts shall be adequately braced to prevent vibration; additional bracing shall be provided where necessary. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-77 40 Fan Sound Power Levels Maximum Sound Power Levels in dB re: 10" watts Equipment Octave Band Center Frequency(Hertz) 63 125 250 500 IK 2K 4K 8K DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP I DNP DNP I DNP I DNP DNP DNP 2.29 AIR FILTERS A. Filter Unit 1. All filters shall have an Underwriters Laboratories Class I listing. 2. Provide packaged or built-up combination frame and filter assemblies to .r receive prefilters and final filters. 3. Holding frames shall be minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel suitably designed to rigidly support prefilters and final filters and shall be suitably sealed to prevent any air or dirt leakage between individual frames or around and between any particular frame at its prefilter or final filter. Frames shall be universal in design, so that various types of filters may be utilized with only a change in the type of retaining clip. There shall be a minimum of four (4) ' retaining clips with a spring tension of at least 25 lbs. installed for each for high efficiency filter. 4. Provide side service filter housings with access doors on both sides and filter tracks to accommodate both prefilters and final filters. The filter housing shall be fully gasketed and employ an easily replaceable filter seal to ensure a good seal in the direction of air flow. Leakage shall be guaranteed not to exceed 0.5 * inches w.g. at 3.0 inches w.g.pressure differential. 5. Filters and frame assemblies shall be the product of one of the listed approved manufacturers. See Approved Manufacturers Article 1.22 of this Specification. .►w 6. Filter efficiencies and rated capacities on atmospheric dust over the life of the filter shall meet ASHRAE Standard 52-76 requirements. B. Replaceable Construction Filters 1. During construction provide prefilters of the throwaway type upstream of final filters hereinbelow described. 2. Prefilters shall be 2 inch thick, UL Class 2 long strand fiber glass fiber media in a fiberboard casing with retaining grids front and rear. Arrestance shall be greater than 70 percent. Initial resistance shall not exceed 0.17 inches w.g. at 500 ft./min. C. Permanent - Prefilters 1. Provide 4 inch thick, factory fabricated UL Class 2 pleated prefilters with high lofted non-woven reinforced cotton and synthetic media bonded to a heavy gauge metal backing. Media shall have a minimum thickness of 0.15 inches and a media weight of 2.5 oz./sq.yd. Total effective net media area shall be 7.0 • sq./ft. of filter face area. There shall be a minimum of 13 pleats per linear foot. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-76 aver speed. The pitch of the blades in the controllable pitch rotor shall be varied by a pneumatic actuator provided by the fan manufacturer. For accessibility, the actuator AM and its associated positioner shall be mounted external to the fan mounted on the fan casing. The actuator shall be controlled by a signal from a remote controller, furnished and installed by others. Controllable pitch mechanism shall be equipped with safety stop to prevent blade pitch settings being increased beyond maximum design setting and overloading motor. Periodic overhaul or routine maintenance shall not require disassembly of the controllable pitch rotor assembly. No E. To avoid the possibility of hysteresis and to assure a precise blade angle setting for any given signal pressure, regardless of the direction of travel, the pneumatic actuator must be of the double-acting air cylinder type operating by air pressure in both "' directions. A spring return type actuator will not be permitted. The actuator shall be sized to operate on a maximum supply pressure of 80 psig and change the blade pitch range by means of a 3-15 psig control signal from the control panel through a pilot ! + positioner. F. Vaneaxial fans shall be belt driven as indicated on the drawings and/or fan schedule as follows: 1. Inlet bells with radius inlet screens shall be provided for all vane axial fans. Bells may be aluminum, fiber glass or galvanized steel. 2. The fan rotor shall be whirl tested to 125% of maximum operating speed and shall be statically and dynamically balanced on the fan motor shaft to a maximum tolerance, guaranteed in writing, of 1 mil double amplitude at design operating speed. In lieu of whirl test, manufacturer may provide documented results of x-ray test. 3. Refer to Article 2.27 Paragraphs F. and G. for belt drive requirements. G. All vaneaxial fans shall be provided with supports for horizontal or vertical mounting, as shown on plans and shown in schedules. Horizontal and vertical fan supports shall be provided by the fan manufacturer and shall be securely bolted or welded to the on housing of the fan. Supports shall be braced with angle braces to prevent misalignment and add structural rigidity. H. Fans F-1, F-2, and F-3 shall be constructed with a clam shell design casing. The bottom 1/3 section of the casing shall be bolted to the remaining section and shall be removable for routine service of the motor and bearings. I. The fan manufacturer shall furnish published performance curves, and such data is to be based on tests in accordance with AMCA Standard 210-74. J. The fan manufacturer shall furnish published sound power level data based on tests conducted in accordance with AMCA standards. Such data is to define sound power levels (PWL), re: 10-12 watts for each of the eight frequency bands. ter, K. Note: Maximum sound power levels for return/exhaust mixed flow fans are given in the following table. Should units be selected with greater sound power levels, the Contractor will be required to provide additional attenuation treatments to those specified. All fan submittals shall incorporate certified sound power data for review by the Engineer/Acoustic Consultant. All additional attenuation treatments to be approved by the Engineer/Acoustic Consultant prior to final acceptance. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-75 am M. Fume hood and specialty laboratory exhaust fans shall, in addition to those items listed in this Article, be internally coated (all wetted surfaces) with one coat of Koppers 654 epoxy primer to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils with two additional coats of Koppers 201 epoxy to a dry film thickness of a minimum of 2 mils per coat, cured under controlled conditions and then baked. The wetted surfaces shall be sandblasted to a near white blast to remove dust and scale (all joints and flanges shall be of all-welded construction) in accordance with Specification SSPC-SP10 prior to the factory application of the paint described above. The fan exterior shall be factory painted in the manufacturer's standard over a coat of red oxide primer. All fume hood and specialty laboratory fume hood exhaust fans shall be of sparkproof + construction, and be Arrangement 9 with motor, drives,belts and bearings located out of the air stream. Fan manufacturer shall furnish TFE shaft seal. Baked "Heresite" coating (minimum, two coats) may be substituted for Koppers system as described herein. N. All fans shall be provided with galvanized steel inlet guard screens, built in accordance with OSHA requirements. Inlet guard screens shall be of such design that they will not reduce the inlet area of fan beyond the maximum reduction permitted by the fan manufacturer to guarantee the fan performance. O. Submit shop drawings plotting current versus time curves for the fans indicated. Curves shall cover the time period from fan rpm = 0 to fan rpm = design fan rpm. Curves shall be based on the equipment to be installed in the project. information is required in order to verify and coordinate the overcurrent protection devices in the combination motor starters. Where reduced voltage starting is indicated to be required, the current versus time curves shall include the recommended transition time for optimum acceleration. P. Furnish to motor and motor starter manufacturers pertinent data, such as moment of inertia of high inertia fans, to assure proper selection of motors and starters. 2.28 AXIAL FLOW FANS A. Provide the required vaneaxial fans where shown on the drawings and of the capacities and types as indicated in fan schedule. B. Fan rotor hub and blades shall be cast aluminum construction. Hub to be cast of aluminum, heat treated, and blades shall be cast of aluminum alloy. Fan blades shall be air foil shaped for maximum efficiency. A blade angle indicator shall be provided + * to indicate blade position for various pitch settings. Blade tip clearance to fan housing shall not exceed 0.05 inch for 36 inch diameter or smaller fan rotor and 0.10 inch for all other sizes. , C. Fan blades shall be automatically adjustable through a pitch range as required by design and specification to vary volume and pressure characteristics across this range. D. Where indicated on schedule, fan blades shall be controllable through a pitch range of sufficient angularity to vary volume and pressure characteristics across design range. Each blade must be index marked for various pitch settings and shall be capable of stepless control across the complete pitch range while the motor is operating at full Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-74 approval for each fan, certified sound power ratings with an octave band analysis and also the volume-pressure-horsepower characteristic curves from shutoff to free delivery. Wheels shall have ample strength. They shall be statically and dynamically balanced to avoid vibration and shall have blades to secure quiet efficient operation. F. Fans, unless otherwise indicated, shall be belted to respective motors by V-belt drives. Sheaves shall be cast iron. Motor sheaves shall be adjustable type for 2-groove or less. Drives requiring 3-groove sheaves shall have vari-pitch motor sheaves and companion type fan sheaves. Belts shall have a rated capacity of not less than 150% "o of brake horsepower. All V-belt drives for integral horsepower motors shall have not less than two belts and shall have sufficient belt capacity to drive fans with one belt broken. Sheave ratio shall be selected so that top fan speed is not less than 105% and not more than 110% of rated fan speed. Drives for fractional horsepower motors may have one belt rated at 200% motor horsepower. Drives for fans with motors 75 horsepower and larger may be constant pitch type. If, to balance air in system, a fan speed other than that provided should be required,necessary changes shall be made in V-belt drive at no additional expense. Provide belt guards in accordance with OSHA requirements for all sheaves and belts. G. Each fan motor shall be sized to drive its respective fan when fan is operating at a speed (due to pulley adjustment) of 5% in excess of that required to meet the fan on performance, and when fan requires the maximum power at this speed. No motor shall operate within the service factor range. H. All fans shall carry the AMCA performance and construction seal. I. All fans shall be factory coated with one coat of primer and one coat of machine enamel. The interior of all fans and all fan wheels shall be painted as per manufacturer's standards. J. Each fan so shown in the schedule on the drawings shall be furnished and installed with automatic inlet vortex dampers with positioners. Dampers and operators shall be furnished as an integral part of each fan assembly. There shall be provided on each such fan, suitable automatic control devices to permit easy automatic operation of the vortex dampers on each fan, and to permit each such vortex damper to be locked in the required position. The fan manufacturer shall provide the necessary damper operators with positive positioning relays to which the Control Contractor can connect the necessary signal devices to properly position the inlet vanes. Certification of these fans to a reduced airflow of 40% of the design value at any system static pressure shall be provided. The fan, under these conditions, shall operate in a stable condition without affecting the fan acoustical sound power output. K. All fans discharging directly up through roof shall be equipped with 1-1/2 inch casing drains and piped with a shutoff gate valve to nearest floor drain. Kitchen range hood exhaust shall be similarly equipped. L. All fans scheduled to be arranged as belted vent sets shall have overhung wheels and motors mounted on a common base with the bearings. All such belted vent sets shall be furnished with weatherproof motor housings, where located outdoors. ow Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-73 .m 2.27 CENTRIFUGAL FANS A. Provide, as shown on the drawings, and connect up complete, all supply, return, transfer and exhaust fans. All fans shall be of the nonoverloading centrifugal fan type. Fan wheels shall have backwardly curved blades. Fans shall be of type(s) indicated on the drawings. B. The capacities of the fans shall be in accordance with fan schedules as shown. Fans shall have direction of rotation, discharge direction, arrangement, to suit space conditions; unless otherwise directed, they shall conform to the layouts shown on the +� drawings. Static pressures listed in the fan schedules are exclusive of drive losses, inlet screens, and variable or fixed inlet vane losses. All motor horsepowers and fan selections shall be sized to deliver the design cfm as scheduled versus the listed static pressure plus the additional static pressure required by the fan manufacturer to compensate for the difference in static pressures between the heating and cooling coils to be provided versus that scheduled, the drive losses per AMCA, inlet screen losses, belt guards and inlet vane losses per published data. Motor selections shall not be based on operating within the service factor range. If the approved fan manufacturer requires a larger motor horsepower than that scheduled, all costs (mechanical and electrical) associated in making that change shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. Prior to consideration of an approval for substitution of any fan manufacturer for the manufacturer scheduled on the drawings, submit the manufacturer's certified performance curves for the main supply, return and exhaust air fans showing the system plot from the scheduled design point down to a cfm equal to 40% of design cfm at approximately 2 inches water static pressure. Certified performance curves shall also indicate the input kilowatts to the motor at design point and 75%, 60%, 50% and 40% of design cfm. This data shall be submitted as a prerequisite to consideration of approval of a substitute fan manufacturer. C. Fan housing shall be rigidly built and braced. Where fan scroll is 19 inches or more in width or where called for in schedule or shown on plans for scrolls less than 19 inches in width, on access door with frame and gasket shall be provided. All access doors shall be so fabricated that the inner surface is flush with the inside of the scroll. Raised frame doors of the pan type shall be provided on all fans where insulation is required. The doors shall be secured to the frame by hand-grip latches and shall be provided with lift handles. Bolted doors are not acceptable except where specifically noted in schedules. D. All fans operating against a total pressure of 3-3/4 inch w.g. or greater shall be "* equipped with heavy duty, self-aligning, double row, spherical roller bearings with split pillow blocks, and shall be grease lubricated with Zerk or Alemite fittings. Bearings for fans operating against a total pressure less than 3-3/4 inch w.g. shall be self-aligning, spherical, roller type with split pillow blocks for grease lubrication with Zerk or Alemite fittings. On all Class I fans, Arrangement No. 1 and No. 2 heavy duty ball bearings may be furnished. All bearing casings shall be furnished with drain plugs. E. All fans shall be guaranteed to fulfill the specified requirements. Fans shall not produce excessive noise as compared to units of like size and power when used in conjunction with the specified vibration isolation. Fan manufacturers shall furnish for Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-72 2.26 FACTORY ASSEMBLED SUPPLY FAN UNITS A. Furnish and install, where shown on the Contract Drawings, required factory assembled supply fan units. Each such unit shall include within an integral casing a fan unit, heating coils, and cooling coils, all of which shall comply with the Specifications for these particular items in Articles "Centrifugal Fans" and "Water Cooling and Heating Coils" as herein specified. Filters shall be furnished and installed as herein specified and shall be furnished as part of the fan unit. Casings for ACS-1 and ACS-2 shall be customized as shown on the plans. B. Each fan unit shall consist of DIDW fans, each internally spring mounted in individual fan housings. Each unit shall include a welded heavy structural frame for supporting the unit assembly and to which each section shall be fastened. Cabinet casings shall be double wall with a perforated inner metal panel (minimum open area 22%) and not less than No. 18 gauge galvanized steel outer casing, and shall be arranged with removable side panels. Each casing shall be lined (for thermal and acoustic reasons) with 2 inch thick, 6 pound density, mat-faced fiber glass. Casing insulation shall have a flame spread and smoke developed rating of less than or equal to 25 and 50 respectively. Insulation shall meet the "Erosion Test Method" described in Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Publication No. 181. C. Each unit shall fulfill the requirements shown in the schedule on the Contract 00 Drawings. Each unit shall be assembled with a heavy angle iron frame construction. Each unit shall include a heavy drain pan of not less than No. 12 gauge stainless steel construction under the cooling coil section, and galvanized steel which shall extend from the mixing box section up to and including the fan section. The cooling coil drain pan shall have a drain connection. The cabinet casing shall be not less than No. 18 gauge galvanized steel,arranged with insulated access doors in side panels for each section. Two empty coil sections shall be furnished as part of each unit, one between the preheat coil section and the cooling coil section and the other between the cooling coil section and the fan section. Each such empty coil section shall be furnished with on an access door on either end to permit ready and easy access to the unit. D. The fans are to be driven by V-belt drives equipped with belt guards, as described under "Centrifugal Fans". E. Each fan motor shall be sized to drive its respective fan when fan is operating at a speed (due to pulley adjustment) of 5% in excess of that required to meet the fan performance, and when fan requires the maximum power at this speed. No motor shall operate within the service factor range. F. Fans shall be guaranteed to fulfill the specified requirements. Fans shall not produce excessive noise as compared to units of like size and power when used in conjunction with the specified vibration isolation. Fan manufacturers shall furnish for approval for each fan certified sound power ratings with an octave band analysis and also the volume-pressure-horsepower characteristic curves from shutoff to free delivery. Wheels shall have ample strength. They shall be statically and dynamically balanced to avoid vibration, and shall have blades to secure quiet efficient operation. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-71 approved combination temperature/pressure port at inlet and outlet to each coil and coil bank, complete with brass chain and brass cap. 4. Connections to coils shall be as shown on the detail drawings. Automatic Ow valves will be provided for coils where shown and as detailed or specified. 5. Suitable supports as required to properly mount these coils shall be furnished and erected under this Section of the Specifications. All coil frames shall be reinforced so as to accommodate to coil stacking arrangements as shown on plans. C. Cooling Coils(Water) 1. All cooling coils shall be continuous tube type, copper tubes, copper fins, solder coated, with nonferrous headers and 304 stainless steel casings. Tubes shall be seamless copper, 5/8 inch o.d., 0.035 inch wall thickness after 0* attachment of fins. Fins shall be .010 inch thick. 2. A continuous horizontal stainless steel drip pan shall be provided for each coil section in height and each such drip pan shall be independently drained to a ,O drain header at the bottom, as shown on the drawings. Drip pans shall be stainless steel,Type 304. 3. For all air conditioning supply systems, space only shall be provided for future installation of eliminators. Drain pans shall be sized and constructed now to be able to accommodate the addition of the eliminators in the future. D. Heating Coils (Water): Coils shall be constructed of heavy gauge seamless copper tubing, 5/8 inch o.d., 0.025 inch wall thickness, with 0.010 inch thick aluminum fins. Tubes shall be expanded or joined in an approved manner to steel headers and connections. Coils shall be mounted in suitably flanged galvanized steel casings. E. Steam Heating Coils 1. Preheating and tempering coils shall be provided where shown on the drawings. All coils shall be of the steam distributing tube-within-a-tube construction, and guaranteed nonfreeze. All coils shall be provided with outlets for complete drainage of condensation from the coils. All coils shall have heated return headers. Each bank of heating surface shall have separate valved steam and return connections. 2. One or more sections as shown on the drawings, or as specified, maybe controlled by a common thermostatic valve, but each section shall have its individual combination float and thermostatic trap. 3. The size and capacity of the steam coils shall conform to the coiled schedules. Coils shall be Aerofin,Trane, or as approved. 4. Coils shall be copper tubes (1 inch in diameter, 0.030 inch wall thickness with 0.010 inch thick aluminum fins). 5. Coils shall be mounted in suitable flanged frame arranged for connection to unit casing. Additional steel supports shall be provided as required to mount coils in arrangements as shown. 6. Preheat coils for ACS-3 and ACS-4 shall be Aerofin Aeromix IFB. ..nom Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-70 „� �r 2.24 CONVERTERS A. Converters shall be shell and tube type, with steam in the shell and water in the tubes. Converters shall be U-tube type unless otherwise specifically noted on the drawings. Shell shall be constructed of rolled steel or steel pipe of ample thickness for the specified pressure and temperature. Tube sheets shall be heavy steel, accurately drilled for all tubes. Heating surfaces shall be composed of seamless 3/4 inch o.d. by 18 BWG copper, securely expanded into tube sheet at one end and properly supported at the other end. Head shall be cast iron or steel. B. Where straight tube converters are required, approved provision for differential expansion shall be provided. C. Provide on each converter a 1 inch brass mounted pop-relief valve for connection with the water outlet pipe (between the converter and the shutoff valve). Valves to be set to discharge at a pressure approximately 15 psi above the normal working water pressure at the converters. Provide, in addition, vacuum breaker for each converter with separate relief valve on its shell piped directly to atmosphere(set for 15 psig). 00 D. Furnish and install suitable saddles to fit the heat exchanger which in turn shall be resiliently supported by structural supports designed to safely support the heat exchanger when filled with water. Supports shall be furnished and installed under this Section of the Specifications. Details of supports shall be submitted for approval prior to fabrication. E. All converters shall be built in accordance with the ASME Unfired Pressure Vessels Code, and shall be so stamped, and shall carry an ASME approved insurance certificate. 2.25 COOLING AND HEATING COILS A. Heating and cooling coils shall be manufactured by one of the approved manufacturers listed in Article 1.22, "Approved Manufacturers". B. General r 1. Provide, where shown on the drawings, chilled water cooling coils, glycol and water heat recovery coils, and glycol and water heating coils. 2. All coils shall be of the continuous tube type and shall have dimensions, number of rows, and capacities, as indicated in the schedule. Coils shall be Aerofin, Trane, or as approved. 3. Each water coil shall be guaranteed to withstand the working pressures shown in schedule on drawings, but not less than 175 psig. All coils shall be guaranteed capable of the schedule performance under the actual job conditions and all coil performance ratings shall be certified by the American M, Refrigeration Institute (ARI). Coils shall be provided with positive means for completely draining and venting each coil. Each drain and vent shall be piped and valved as shown on the drawings. Each vent and drain outlet shall be fitted with a hose-end valve of the packless type and a pipe cap. Coils shall be mounted in suitably flanged casings. In addition, provide "Pete's plug" or as �r Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-69 thermostat and prevent the operation of the fan unit in the event that there is no hot water in the heater coil. Each unit shall be complete with factory mounted valve package, including water regulating valve in the supply line to the unit. When the unit is off, the valve shall be closed. 4. Furnish a complete detailed wiring diagram of the wiring from the starter to the thermostat, aquastat (for hot water) and fan motor, which work will be done under Section 15950. 5. Each unit heater shall be properly supported from building construction and braced as necessary. 6. All enclosures shall be provided with one prime coat of paint. B. Hot Water Propeller Fan Type 1. Unit heaters shall consist of copper coils behind which shall be installed motor ... driven propeller type fans,all installed in an attractive metal casing. 2. Proper supply and return connections to each unit heater shall be made. C. Hot Water Centrifugal Fan Type 1. Unit heaters shall be cabinet unit heaters of type as shown on drawings. Enclosures shall be fabricated of the best grade furniture steel, shall be rigidly braced throughout and shall be fabricated of not less than 16 gauge steel on the top, bottom, front and sides and 18 gauge steel on the back. Where the drawings show hand or automatic valves or radiator traps to be installed within the enclosure, suitably located hand access doors shall be furnished as part of the enclosure to achieve access to the valve and trap. Where the unit heater is shown as recessed or semirecessed, neat, close-fitting metal trim strips shall be provided to form a permanent bond between the unit heater and the wall. 2. Proper supply and return connections to each unit heater shall be made. D. Electric Unit Heaters 1. Unit heaters shall be as approved, of type as shown on the drawings. 2. Control voltage transformer shall be provided where required. 2.23 FINNED TUBE CONVECTORS A. Finned tube convectors shall be as approved, of sizes, capacities, materials, etc., all as shown on the drawings. B. Mounting brackets for all finned type convectors shall be of the teflon slide-cradle type to permit absorption of the expansion strains. This Contractor shall provide all support brackets and sheet metal air baffles where required and/or noted on the drawings. Wall-mounted finned tubes and covers shall be provided in all areas except Circulation Areas, Main Lounge, Garden Lounge and Dining Areas. Wall-mounted �!! finned tubes shall be Vulcan 1-1/4 in. C - 4-1/4-48 cover and installation shall be in accordance with Vulcan Custom Drawing No. AA-25-R2. Pedestal-mounted finned tubes shall be provided in Circulation Areas, Main Lounge, Garden Lounge, and Dining Areas. Pedestal finned tubes shall be Vulcan 1-1/4 in. C-4-1/4-48. Pedestal details and installation shall be in accordance with Vulcan Custom Drawing No. AA- 19-R2. . Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-68 H. Water pumps shall be provided with John Crane Code XP1D1 Type 1 (unbalanced) tungsten carbide seals. Pumps shall be provided with bronze or stainless steel shaft sleeves. I. Pumps and/or pump sets shall be leveled with tapered steel wedges to allow a minimum of 3/4 inch of grout between pump base and inertia base or concrete pad. 2.20 BOILER(HOT WATER) A. To follow 2.21 BOILER BREECHING AND CHIMNEY A. Provide factory built chimney and breechings. The system shall consist of factory built Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed chimney and breeching as manufactured by Van-Packer Products Co.,or as approved. B. The flue system shall consist of all items which form a part of the assembly, including cleanout section, tee section, straight section, elbow, flashing and counterflashing, floor support and companion section,and insulated thimble where required,expansion joints, and all other required appurtenances. Each section of the chimney and breeching shall bear the factory applied UL label. C. All chimney sections shall be centrifugally cast in 26 gauge aluminized steel jackets with stainless steel riveted seams. The insulating refractory shall be capable of „r withstanding 1800°F. of continuous firing and 2000°F. intermittent firing. - D. All chimney sections shall be joined with acid resistant joint cement supplied by the manufacturer or silicone sealant. (Silicone sealant shall be used for flue gas temperatures less than 350°F.) E. The manufacturer shall furnish floor support sections with matching companion sections of variable lengths where shown on drawings. The companion and floor support sections shall be installed so as to provide a 1/2 inch expansion joint. F. Chimney to terminate approximately 3 feet above roof. Flash and/or counterflash and install insulated thimble as required. 2.22 UNIT HEATERS A. General 1. Unit heaters, having capacities as indicated on the drawings, shall be provided where shown. Heating elements shall be made of nonferrous construction throughout. 2. Remove and replace any unit heaters which are found to be objectionably noisy in the opinion of the Architect. 3. A manual starter providing overload protection, a toggle disconnect switch for mounting near heater, and a line-voltage thermostat located where shown or as directed, shall be provided. In the return line from each hot water unit heater there shall be installed an aquastat which will be wired in series with the Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-67 Ow 2.18 FLASH TANKS A. Furnish, erect and connect up complete, flash tanks of the size as indicated on the drawings. Tanks shall be constructed of welded black iron sheet in accordance with the ASME Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels, suitable for working pressures of 200 .� psig. Tanks shall be provided with reinforced threaded tappings for condensate return, vent and condensate discharge. Tanks shall be hung from building structure in a manner as approved by the Architect. The tanks shall be fitted with gauge glass (with shutoff cocks) of sufficient length to determine level of condensate inthe tanks. Provide one coat oxide paint on exterior surfaces. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings,all flash tanks shall be 24 inches in diameter and 48 inches long. 2.19 CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS A. Pumps shall be manufactured by one of the approved manufacturers listed in Article , 1.22,"Approved Manufacturers". B. Provide pumps of sizes, types and performance ratings scheduled. Pumps shall be M. designed and guaranteed for continuous or intermittent service when operating at design speed at any point over the full range of the pump curve without overheating the motor or bearings, without exceeding the nominal horsepower of its motor and without producing noise audible in any area of the building outside of space in which it is installed. Pumps shall be, designed and tested at 1-1/2 times the scheduled working pressure. Guaranteed performance curves shall be submitted for approval for each pump. C. Pumps shall be driven by constant speed motors or variable speed motors as scheduled and as specified under "Electric Motors". Motor windings are to be compatible with starters and controllers as specified. D. Horizontally split pumps shall be of the single stage, volute type, with cast iron body, fully bronze fitted, double suction inlet, bronze impeller, flanged suction and discharge outlets. E. End suction pumps shall be of vertical split type, cradle mounted, with iron body, • fully bronze fitted. F. All pumps shall be furnished with grease lubricated outboard bearings provided with drain plugs and fittings suitable for in-service lubrication. Pumps shall be mounted with their motors on integral baseplate (suitably reinforced to maintain pump and motor alignment), provided with drain outlets. Flexible spacer couplings (Woods, or as approved, manufacture) shall connect motor and pump shafts. (Couplings shall ®! permit removal of pump shaft without removing motor.) Exposed sections of pump shafts, motor shafts and shaft couplings shall be protected by 16 gauge sheet metal guards. Pump bearings shall have a minimum of 100,000 hour 1310 life. .. G. Pump impellers shall be no greater than 85% of the largest impeller designed to fit pump casing. , Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-66 ,� Mw B. Each of the main pressure reducing valve stations (reducing from one pressure to another, whether it be an intermediate pressure or final pressure) shall consist of two pressure reducing valves and a manual bypass. The one pressure reducing valve shall be sized to control 100% of the station load and the other a fractional amount (as shown in the schedule on the drawings) of the station load. Operation shall be such 40 that on an increase in load, the smaller pressure reducing valve shall gradually open to full open position; upon further increase in load, shall close with simultaneous opening of the large pressure reducing valve. Each such pressure control valve shall be Spence Type ED pilot-operated. Operation shall be such that in any pressure reducing valve rig consisting of two or more pressure reducing valves in series, if the downstream pressure beyond the downstream pressure reducing valve(s) starts to rise, and the downstream pressure reducing valve(s) is unable to maintain pressure, upstream pressure reducing valve(s) shall then operate to maintain the final downstream pressure beyond the downstream pressure reducing valve(s). The pressure reducing valves shall operate off the system steam pressure. Each such P1 pressure reducing valve shall be a cast iron body or bronze body (one or the other as shown in the schedules on the drawings), stainless steel trim, and stellited main valve seat. In all cases, the smaller of the two pressure reducing valves at each pressure 0„ control station shall be of the V-port type. 2.17 CONDENSATE PUMPS A. Condensate pumps shall be manufactured by one of the approved manufacturers listed in Article 1.22, "Approved Manufacturers". B. Provide, where indicated on the drawings, duplex condensate return pumping units having capacities as listed in schedule on drawings. The units shall be complete with cast iron condensate receiver, pumps, motors and base, float switches, supports and other incidental items necessary to complete the units. The units shall consist of the following elements: 1. A cast iron base with drip connection and all necessary tappings, holes for r, foundation bolts, etc. -- arranged to support the receiver and the motors and to keep the entire equipment aligned. 2. A receiver of cast iron of approved design, with all necessary tappings and glass water gauge. 3. Two close-coupled pumps of approved pattern and construction with the pump inlets piped to the receiver, and with the motors securely supported on the baseplate. 4. An approved cleanable strainer at the inlet connection to the receiver. Note that the receiver inlet size shall be not less than one pipe size smaller than the connecting piping shown on the drawings. Check and ball valves shall be provided at each pump discharge. 5. Fully automatic controls shall be provided for each pump motor consisting of a float in the receiving tank, a float switch, on-off-automatic switch, combination a.w starter as hereinafter specified. Control equipment shall be factory mounted and wired on the units. Control equipment shall be arranged so that if one pump fails to carry the load, then the second pump shall be automatically started, and both pumps shall operate simultaneously. A switch shall be provided for manually selecting the leading pump. P. Smith Campus Center HVAC Pr 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-65 2.14 RELIEF VALVES A. Provide, where shown on the drawings, or as required by Code, safety relief valves to carry 100% of scheduled capacity of the larger valves in each step of each pressure reducing station. Relief piping shall be sized according to outlet size of relief valve. B. Where two relief valves are joined, the larger pipe size shall be continued to the point .m of relief. Relief valve shall comply with ASME requirements and as manufactured by one of the approved manufacturers listed in Article 1.22, "Approved Manufacturers". 2.15 STEAM SPECIALTIES A. Condensate return traps shall be provided throughout the steam system for automatically trapping condensate from all steam-using items as well as from riser heels and ends of steam mains. B. The manufacturer of specialties shall supervise their attachment and make all adjustments necessary for their operation. C. A thermostatic trap shall be provided on the return end of each steam convector. Each trap shall have a cast body with suitable outlets and cap, large renewable brass or nickel port and a valve operated by a metallic bellows or multiple diaphragm in which a volatile fluid is sealed. D. A combination float-and-thermostatic trap shall be provided at the return end of each unit heater, each tempering coil section, each convector and drip point in steam mains and elsewhere as shown or directed. Each shall be provided with unions, inlet strainer, check valve and hand valves, etc., as shown on the drawings. E. At steam inlet to each domestic hot water heater, a hand valve, together with automatic control valve (furnished under another Section), shall be installed. A strainer,heavy-duty trap,check valve and hand valve shall be provided at the outlet. F. Install the entire system of return line piping so that all condensate will be returned by gravity to the condensate pumps, condensate reclamation tank and/or condensate cooler without water hammer. G. Provide high and medium pressure traps for dripping the high and medium pressure mains. These shall be of the inverted bucket type,or as approved. H. All steam traps on air heating coils and at heat exchangers shall be sized for a pressure drop of 0.25 psi at the scheduled apparatus steam flow. Where required, multiple traps in parallel shall be provided. 2.16 STEAM PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Provide pressure reducing valves of capacities, types and models as shown in the schedules on the drawings. Each pressure reducing valve station shall be as detailed on the drawings or as described herein. Except as otherwise shown in the schedule on the drawings, all valves shall be single-seated and designed for tight shutoff under "" dead-end conditions. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-64 .,, 00 B. The automatic air separator/eliminator shall be manufactured by Spiro Vent and shall be constructed of cast iron or welded steel, constructed tested and stamped in accordance with Section VIII of the ASME Code for a working pressure of 150 psi, and all working parts shall be noncorrosive. 2.13 STRAINERS A. There shall be approved "self-cleaning" strainers in the inlet connections to each feeder and make-up connection and each automatic control valve, and all traps and each pump. The intention is to protect by strainers all apparatus of an automatic character, whose proper functioning would be interfered with by dirt on the seat or by scoring of the seat. B. All strainers in water lines shall be Y-pattern set in a horizontal (or vertical downward) run of the pipe. Where this is not feasible, strainers may be of enlarged cross-section flat type. In all cases, strainers shall be so arranged as not to "trap" pipes,and to facilitate disconnection and opening-up for cleaning. C. All strainers shall have cast iron, or bronze, bodies of ample strength for the pressure to which they shall be subjected and suitable flanges or tappings to connect with the piping they serve. They shall be of such a design as to allow blowing out of accumulated dirt, and to facilitate removal and replacement of a strainer screen, 00 without disconnections of the main piping. Strainer basket screens shall be nickel, copper or brass and shall be of ample strength to prevent collapsing the basket under shock loading. Perforations shall be in accordance with the following table: PO No. of Perforations System or Service Perforation Size per Square Inch , ,,� Steam and Air 0.020 in. 625 Water-To 6 in. 0.0625 in. - 6 in. &over 0.125 in. D. Provide approved valved dirt blowout connections for each strainer. Each such valve shall be located at hand height with hose adapters. In the case of strainers under water pressure, the blowout connections shall terminate in an approved manner at a point where there is no risk of flooding or damage. E. Extra heavy basket or Y-strainer similar to those manufactured by the McAlear Mfg. Co., and Mueller, with flanged ends and copper basket, shall be installed in water lines where shown on the drawings. F. Clean the strainers as necessary until accepted by the Owner. G. All strainers installed upstream of automatic control valves shall be installed line size, which shall mean the size of the inlet pipe shown on the drawings, not the reduced size serving the control valve. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-63 2.11 PNEUMATIC DIAPHRAGM EXPANSION TANKS A. Provide pneumatic tanks with dimensions and storage capacities as scheduled with all specified appurtenances, as manufactured by one of the approved manufacturers listed in Article 1.22, " Approved Manufacturers". Tanks are to be built in accordance with NSF and ASME Code standards, all seams double butt welded by certified code welders, Underwriters' Certificates and stamping to be furnished. Tank sizes and factory set air pressures for tanks to be as indicated on drawings. B. Tanks shall be of the vertical type. C. Tanks to be provided with suitable tappings for cold water inlet, air connection, charging valve, and drain connection. All wetted metal parts must be brass or .A stainless steel. D. Provide pressure relief valve between shutoff valve and tank on inlet pipe. A E. Provide at each tank, a pressure switch, Honeywell L604A, to alarm at 5 psi (adjustable) below system operating pressure and at 5 psi (adjustable) above the system operating pressure. Switch shall include a time delay, adjustable from 1 to 10 minutes, and auxiliary contacts so that the alarm remains off for 2 minutes after alarm condition is reached. Auxiliary contacts shall be wired to the building automation system under another Section of the Specifications. *�* F. For water systems without make-up pump sets, furnish a water makeup assembly(one for each system), complete with automatic, adjustable pressure reducing valve, .. backflow preventer, strainer, pressure gauges (before and after each device) and tangential air separator/eliminatorassemblies, all installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. G. Tanks and appurtenances for glycol systems shall be suitable for use with ethylene glycol and water solution. .A 2.12 AUTOMATIC AIR ELIMINATORS A. All free air originally contained in the chilled water, hot water heating, and hot water reheat systems and all entrained air bubbles carried by system water shall be eliminated at the highest point in the return piping (connected to pump suction) and at all system points as indicated on the drawings by a combined air separator/eliminator +" -- a completely integrated unit. Tangential inlet and outlet piping connections shall create a vortex in the body of the unit allowing air separation from flowing system water. Air shall be eliminated to the atmosphere as fast as it is separated through a float activated,remote pressure operated air elimination valve located in the top of the unit. The valve shall have a high removal rate at low pressure differentials (not to exceed 2 prig at full flow) and shall be fully open for the removal of air at all pressures in the operating range from 2 psig to 150 psig. It shall be tightly sealed against loss of system water and prevent entrance of air in negative pressure situations. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.l 1.12 15600-62 WOW on M. All steam service valves 6 inches and larger shall be furnished with a 1 inch bypass valve installed around the valve. Bypass valves shall have the same pressure- temperature ratings as the main valve. N. Provide all necessary manual or automatic vent valves. All drain valves in Equipment 44 Rooms shall be located at an elevation not greater than 6 feet0 inches above the floor and shall be piped to the nearest floor drain. All automatic and manual vents shall have same pressure rating as primary valves in the system to which they are connected. O. All ball or plug valves indicated on plans, or specified hereinafter, as a balancing valve, or used for such purpose, shall be furnished with a pair of differential ports over a fixed orifice (for the purpose of measuring the flow through the valve)and a locking type memory stop. Furnish flow characteristic curves (differential pressure vs. flow) for each valve type. P. Provide all other hand valves, check valves, cocks, etc., as required for the complete and proper valving of the entire installation as defined herein. Q. All water piping connections to equipment shall include all necessary isolation valves, air vent valves, drain connections, balancing valves and the automatic valves arranged IM as detailed on the drawings. R. Water pipes shall be vented at the high points and wherever else required or directed. S. Drain cocks with threaded ends for hose connection shall be provided at any low points in the water supply and return mains and risers where directed. T. Compression type, key-operated air cocks shall be provided where shown and where required for venting. Cocks shall be 114 inch in size and shall be all bronze construction; at least two dozen keys shall be delivered to the Owner's representative for operating these cocks. U. Valves in Pump Rooms, Equipment Rooms or Fan Rooms which are more than 6 feet 0 inches above the floor shall be provided with chain operated sheaves and chains. V. All valves shall have self-packing stems so that they can be packed while open and under pressure. W. Valves on the discharge side of all pumps shall be lubricated plug type. X. All lubricated tapered plug cocks shall be lubricated with the manufacturer's recommended lubricant for water service before shipment to the job site. Lubricated tapered plug cocks installed more than 6 feet 0 inches above floors shall be furnished with chain wheels if gear operated and double end chain wrenches if wrench operated. All plug valves shall be furnished with an external position indicator on the valve assembly. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-61 so 2. Butterfly valves shall be leak tested in accordance with MSS, SP-67 for Type I Valves and/or MSS, SP-68. 3. For all water services and all other normal noncorrosive services, butterfly a. valves shall be: Body Cast iron Body Style Tapped lug Trim 316 Stainless Steel stem Disc Bronze Seat Field replaceable resilient seat, fully bi-directional,totally encapsulated Seat Working P/T Rating 175 psig @ 250°F. minimum Body Working P/T Rating ANSI 150 ., Actuator 4 inch and under-locking lever handle; over 4 inch-gear operator 4. For low and medium pressure steam service,butterfly valves shall be: Body Cast iron Body Style Tapped lug Trim 316 Stainless Steel double offset stem Disc 316 Stainless Steel Seat TFE Seat Working P/T Rating 100 psig @ 350°F. minimum Body Working P/T Rating ANSI 150 Actuator 4 inch and under-locking lever handle; over 4 inch-gear operator,with locking hardware and position indicator *• 5. All butterfly valves for high pressure steam service shall be installed with a warmup bypass using a properly sized (1 inch to 2 inch) high pressure ball valve. L. Valve Schedule Service Size Type Balancing Valves for Water Services, To 2-1/2 inches Ball Glycol/Water Services and Condensate 3 inches and larger Plug Shut-off Valves for Water Services, To 2-1/2 inches Ball Glycol/Water Services and Condensate 3 inches and larger Butterfly Check Valves for Water Services, All sizes 15 degree Glycol/Water Services, Steam swing checks and Condensate in the horizontal position •» Check Valves for Water Services, All Sizes Balanced Glycol/Water Services and Checks Condensate in the vertical position Steam Service To 2-1/2 inches Ball 3 inches and larger Butterfly Refrigerant All Sizes Kerotest, Packless Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-60 """ 2. For high pressure steam service,ball valves shall be: Body Carbon or 316 Stainless Steel PX Body Style One piece, standard port Trim 316 Stainless Steel ball and stem Seat High temperature(RTFE),double seal Seat Working P/T Rating 200 psig @ 400°F. minimum Body Working P/T Rating 750 psig @ 100°F. minimum WOG Rating 400 psig minimum Steam Rating 200 psig @ 400°F. minimum Actuator Geared with position indicator with locking hardware I. Plug Valves Body Cast Iron Body Style One piece, standard port Plug Nickel Plated or EPDM coated Cast Iron Seat Welded Nickel Seat Working P/T Rating 300 psig @ 250°F. minimum Body Working P/T Rating 300 psig @ 100°F. minimum WOG Rating 300 psig minimum Actuator 4 inch and under- locking lever handle; over 4 inch-gear operator J. All ball or plug valves specified herein or as shown on drawings, as balancing valves, or used for such purpose, shall, in addition to the options listed,be reduced port type, furnished with a pair of differential ports over a fixed orifice (for the purpose of measuring the flow through the valve) and a locking type memory stop. Furnish flow characteristic curves(differential pressure vs. flow) for each valve type. 1. Minimum Flow Coefficients(Cv) Size Cv 1/2 inch g 3/4 inch 14 1 inch 35 1-114 inch 50 1-1/2 inch 75 2 inch 110 2-1/2 inch 300 K. Butterfly Valves 1. The use of butterfly valves shall be limited to shutoff services only and only where specifically permitted by the Consulting Engineers. Butterfly valves will not be permitted in those services which require balancing or throttling valves. The manual operator shall be provided with an external position indicator. Butterfly shall permit draining or removal of equipment and piping protected by the valve. Valves shall be full-bodied, full lug type only (wafer type or semilugged valves will not be permitted) high performance type suitable for double dead-end service with either flange removed. Valves shall be bolted ! ► from both ends of the flanges. All butterfly valves for water services shall be ANSI Class 150, 250 or 300 as specified hereinbefore. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-59 aw ow G. All soldered joints, except for refrigerant piping, shall be made with 95% tin and 5% antimony solder, having a melting point of not less than 460T. Refrigerant piping joints shall be made with silver solder. All soldered joints shall be thoroughly cleaned before the application of the solder. All soldered joints for tubing larger than 2 inches in size shall be made with the simultaneous application of two or three blow torches. H. Where dissimilar metals come in contact, a dielectric coupling shall be installed. " Dielectric flange kits will be permitted where screwed piping is not employed. I. Victaulic piping may be used in MER's and where accessible. All locations are to be identified by the Contractor and approved by the Owner and Engineer prior to preparation of shop drawings. Victaulic valves, strainers, etc., shall not be used. 2.10 VALVES A. All valves shall be manufactured by one of the approved manufacturers listed in Article 1.22, "Approved Manufacturers". B. Shut-off valves, isolation valves, balancing valves and check valves shall be provided dW as shown on the drawings, required or directed. The standard features required of valves are listed herein below. C. Unless otherwise noted, all valves for shutoff and bypass service shall be ball valves, so 2-1/2 inch and below, and butterfly valves 3 inches and above. D. All end connections shall be the same as are used for fittings for 2 inch and below. ow 2-1/2 inches and above, valves shall be flanged. E. Unless otherwise directed, steam pressure/temperature ranges are defined below: 1. Low Pressure: 250°F. @ 15 psig maximum. . s 2. High Pressure: 450T. @ 200 psig maximum. F. All valves except valves at equipment, shall be labeled with 1-1/2 inch brass tags, with stamped lettering or numbers filled in with black paint bearing a letter to indicate the service and a number to indicate the valve. A permanent valve chart and system schematic diagram shall show the location of all valves. G. A manufacturer's valve tag shall be on all valves identifying the valve type and major component materials. H. Ball Valves *� 1. For all water services, low pressure steam, low pressure condensate and all other normal noncorrosive services,ball valves shall be: Body Bronze or Brass Body Style One piece, standard port Tnm 316 Stainless Steel ball and stem Seat Reinforced teflon(RTFE), 15% glass filled, double seal Seat Working P/T Rating 300 psig @ 250T. minimum Body Working P/T Rating 300 psig @ 100°F. minimum WOG Rating 400 300 psig minimum Saturated Steam Rating 150 psig minimum Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-58 .. E. Welding Piping 1. Where so shown on drawings, specified or directed, welded joints, outlets and flanges shall be used. Welded joints may also be provided elsewhere,at option, except on piping smaller than 3 inches (which may be screwed except as noted hereinbefore), or at points where it may be explicitly specified or directed to leave flanged joints in order to facilitate future changes. 2. All welded joints (except pipe welded end-to-end) shall be made by the use of forged one-piece weld neck flanges(slip-on flanges will not be accepted), caps, nozzles, elbows, branch outlets and tees, of Tube-Turn, Taylor-Forge, Ladish, Grinnell or other approved make, except as specified to the contrary herein. Cut samples shall be submitted for approval if directed. All such fittings, etc., shall be of a type which maintains full wall thickness at all points, ample radius and fillets, and proper bevels or shoulders at ends. "Weld-o-lets" may be used where standard fittings of required sizes are not available and elsewhere as approved. All job welding shall be done by the electric arc welding process in accordance with the following: a. All joints 45 degree bevel type. Pipe shall be mill beveled or machine beveled under this Section of the Specifications. Ift b. All scale and oxide removed with hammer, chisel or file and bevel left smooth and clean. C. Pipe lengths lined up straight with abutting pipe ends concentric. d. Both conductors from the welding machine shall be extended to locations at which welding work is being done. The leads from welding machine to location of welding work shall be held together in an approved manner and then taped so as to prevent induced current in structural steel, in piping or in other metals within the building. The ground lead shall be connected to length of pipe with suitable clamp in such manner that welding current will not flow through joints in pipe, structural steel of building or steel pipe supports. e. Weld metal thoroughly fused with base metal at all sections. Welds shall be of sound metal, free from laps, slag inclusion or other defects. f. All welders shall be certified for the service for which they are employed and on which they work by the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau of the Mechanical Contractor's Association of America. 3. Welding tees and saddles may be omitted and shaped cut end connections provided directly to pipe as follows: a. All chilled water, hot water and condensing water piping up to two pipe sizes smaller than the size of main. b. "Weld-o-lets" must be used on hot water perimeter risers where horizontal branches tap into risers at each floor. NOTE: Socket "Weld- o-lets" and/or socket tees will not be permitted. F. Wherever welded piping connections to equipment, valves, or other units need maintenance, servicing, or require possible removal, the connecting joint shall be sp flanged. Pressure-temperature rating of the pipe flanges shall match the pressure- temperature rating of the flanges on the equipment to which the piping connects. o• Smith Campus Center HVAC po 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-57 Service Material Type Weight Chilled Water To 3 Inch C.I. Screwed 125 Lbs. (Except Risers) (Steam Rating) , (250 psi w.o.g.) 4 Inch to 10 Inch Seamless Steel Butt Welding Schedule 40 12 Inch and Above Seamless Steel Butt Welding .375 Inch Wall Thickness Hot Water Heating Systems To 3 Inch C.I. Screwed 125 Lbs. (Steam Rating) (250 psi w.o.g.) , 4 Inch to 10 Inch Wrought Copper Solder Standard NOTES: 1. See drawings for locations of all welded construction required in overhangs. 2. Drain mains and expansion lines for all systems shall correspond in weight,class, etc., to above schedule. Refrigerant All Wrought Copper Silver Solder Standard Fresh Water All Wrought Copper Solder Standard Vents All C.I. Screwed 125 Lbs. Drains All Galv. Screwed Standard C. All steel elbows shall be of long radius pattern except where space conditions do not permit. D. Material for drains shall be as specified above except where otherwise noted on the drawings. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-56 , , 2.9 PIPE FITTINGS A. All products shall be manufactured by one of the approved manufacturers listed in Article 1.22, "Approved Manufacturers". B. Schedule Service Material Type Weight Steam: 50 psig and Over 2 Inch and Under C.I. Screwed 250 Lbs. (Steam Rating) 2-1/2 Inch to 10 Inch Seamless Butt Welding Schedule 40 Steam: Below 50 psig 3 Inch and Under C.I. Screwed 125 Lbs. (Steam Rating) 4 Inch and Over Seamless Steel Butt Welding Schedule 40 NOTE: All fittings up to and including the shutoff valve on the secondary stage of each steam pressure reducing valve station shall be extra heavy weight. Pumped Condensate 3 Inch and Under C.I. Screwed 250 Lbs. (Steam Rating) 4 Inch to 10 Inch Seamless Steel Butt Welding Schedule 40 Condensate Return and Drips Below 50 psig 3 Inch and Under C.I. Screwed 125 Lbs. (Steam Rating) 4 Inch to 10 Inch Seamless Steel Butt Welding Schedule 80 Condensate Return and Drips 50 prig and Over es 3 Inch and Under C.I. Screwed 250 Lbs. (Steam Rating) 4 Inch to 10 Inch Seamless Steel Butt Welding Schedule 80 Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-55 Service Material Type Weight Pumped Condensate Steel Seamless Black Schedule 80 (Above Ground) ASTM A-53 Grade B Chilled Water(Inside Building) 3 Inch and Under Steel ASTM A-120 Black Schedule 40 Butt Welded 4 Inch to 10 Inch Steel ERW or Black Schedule 40 Seamless ASTM A-53 Grade B Chilled Water(Outside Building) Same as inside building except that the pipe shall be preinsulated with Urecon V.I.P. factory insulated piping process. Hot Water Heating and Hot Water Reheat 3 Inch and Under Copper Hard Type L 4 Inch to 10 Inch Steel ERW or Black Schedule 40 Seamless ASTM A-53 Grade B Refrigerant Copper Hard Type L(ACR) •�! Fresh Water Copper Hard Type L Vent Steel ASTM A-120 Galv. Schedule 40 Drains Copper ASTM B-88 Hard Type L or Galv. Schedule 40 Steel ASTM A-120 C. Note that all pipe shall be suitably reinforced at all anchor points. D. Copper tubing for refrigerant service shall be furnished cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed. *- E. Dimensions and weights of steel pipe shall conform to ANSI Standard B16.10. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-54 ,,� WX Chilled Water Pumps 2 inch thick, 3 lb. density, unfaced Fiberglas rigid board insulation applied to the inside of 18 gauge aluminum sheet metal housing with approved adhesive and secured with weld pins and speed washers. Details as described herein below under"Removable Head Insulation". 2. Weld pins shall be clipped flush to insulation surface. On cold service equipment,pin penetration shall be sealed with vapor barrier coating. 3. Removable Head Insulation: Removable insulation jackets shall be provided for all equipment such as chilled water pumps, strainers, etc., and all other equipment which requires access to internal parts for servicing and maintenance. The removable insulated covers shall consist of an appropriately shaped, 18 gauge aluminum sheet metal housing lined with 3 lb. density fiber glass insulation board. The insulation shall be carefully cut to fit contour of the inside of the housing and shall be adhered to the sheet metal with adhesive weld pins, speed washers and adhesive. All seams and joints in the sheet metal shall be soldered, or welded to form a vapor-tight enclosure. The enclosure shall be split and flanged so that removal of the insulated housing will permit convenient access to seals, bearings and casing. A bolted and gasketed flanged joint shall be provided for convenient removal. Lifting eyes or handles shall be furnished to facilitate removal. A soft seal shall be installed at point of shaft entry into the insulated enclosure. Submit details of removable, insulated enclosures prior to proceeding with their assembly. 2.8 MATERIALS FOR PIPING A. All materials shall be the products of one of the approved manufacturers listed in Article 1.22, "Approved Manufacturers". B. Schedule Service Material "type Weight Steam 3 Inch and Under Steel Black Schedule 40 ASTM A-120 Butt Welded 4 Inch to 10 Inch Steel ERW or Black Schedule 40 Seamless ASTM A-53 Grade B 12 Inch and Over Steel ERW or Black .375 Inch Wall Seamless ASTM A-53 Thickness Grade B Condensate Return Steel Seamless Black Schedule 80 and Drips ASTM A-53 Grade B Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-53 Kitchen hood exhaust ducts and fans, 2 layers of 1 inch thick asbestos free, calcium silicate block from hood connection to system insulation. Apply blocks to ducts with edges tightly butted, - discharge at exterior wall or roof joints of adjacent layers are to be staggered and secured opening. with No. 16 gauge galvanized, annealed steel wire, or 1/2 inch x 0.15 inch galvanized steel bands on 12 inch centers maximum. Point all joints on each layer with insulating cement. Anchor wires or bands to studs welded to duct. For concealed and exposed ducts, stretch 1 inch hexagonal galvanized, wire mesh over block insulation, with edges of mesh tied together and secured to weld studs. Reinforce all corners with corner bead secured to attachment wires and wire mesh. Finish with a 1/2 inch thick coat of insulating cement troweled to a smooth, hard finish. 2. All vapor barriers shall be completely sealed against moisture penetration. 3. Wherever external duct insulation is specified and internal acoustic treatment of equivalent insulating effect is also required (by drawings or specifications) for the same location, the external insulation may be omitted. 4. All duct sleeves and openings penetrating floor slabs, partitions, walls, etc., shall be packed for full depth of penetration with approved fire resistive material and sealed with nonhardening mastic. I. Equipment Insulation 1. Material and Finishes Air Conditioning Axial Flow Return 2 inch thick, 6 lb. density, fiber glass, rigid insulation board Fans (Wrap as Shown on Drawings) with white Kraft, fiber glass reinforced, aluminum foil laminate, All-Service Jacket (ASJ). Adhere to duct with weld pins and speed washers spaced on 12 inch centers maximum. Pins spaced not more than 3 inches from insulation joints and from corners of duct. Minimum of two rows of pins per side of duct. Seal all joints with 4 inch wide ASJ butt strips adhered with approved adhesive. Seal all punctures and pin penetrations with approved vapor barrier coating. Where stiffening angles are larger than 2 inches, insulation thickness shall match size of angle. Steam-to-Hot Water Converters and Hot 2 inch thick, 6 lb. density, rigid board fiber glass insulation Water Expansion Tanks with ASJ. Cut, score and miter insulation to fit contour of .A equipment and secure with weld pins and speed washers on 12 inch centers maximum . Pins shall not be more than 3 inches from insulation joints or comers. seal all joints with 4 inch wide ASJ strips adhered with approved adhesive. Chilled Water Expansion Tanks Same as preceding paragraph, except insulation jacket shall be sealed to maintain vapor barrier, see "Removable Head Insulation". Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-52 „�, on centers. Seal all joints and seams with minimum 3 inch wide FSK tape applied with same adhesive. Additionally, support insulation on the bottom side of rectangular ducts over 36 inches wide with a single row of weld pins 'and speed washers. Clip off pins flush with facing and seal all pin punctures and breaks in vapor barrier with FSK tape and adhesive. Concealed medium pressure rectangular Same as above. and round air conditioning supply ducts on all floors except Mechanical Equipment Rooms and where exposed All low pressure supply air ductwork, Same as above. both upstream and downstream of VAV boxes where concealed NOTE: All supply air ductwork shall be insulated in its entirety. Outside air intake, exhaust and spill air 1 inch thick, 6 lb. density, fiber glass rigid insulation board ducts and plenums between intake and with white Kraft, fiber glass reinforced, aluminum foil discharge louvers and automatic louver laminate, All-Service Jacket (ASJ). Adhere to duct with dampers (ALD's) (unless otherwise weld pins and speed washers spaced on 12 inch centers indicated on the drawings) maximum. Pins spaced not more than 3 inches from insulation joints and from insulation joints and from corners of duct. Minimum of two rows of pins per side of duct. Seal all joints with 4 inch wide ASJ butt strips adhered with approved adhesive. Seal all punctures and pin penetrations with approved vapor barrier coating. t Where stiffening angles are larger than 2 inches, insulation thickness shall match size of angle. Rectangular Heated Air Supply Ducts - 1 inch thick, 1 lb. density fiber glass blanket with factory Concealed applied foil faced, scrim reinforced, Kraft vapor barrier (FSK) and 2 inch flange. Wrap insulation tightly on duct and firmly butt all joints with 2 inch flange overlap on circumferential joints. Adhere to duct with 2/3 coverage of approved adhesive applied in 4 inch wide bands, 8 inches on centers. Fasten all joints and seams with flare type staples on 4 inch centers. Additionally, support insulation on the bottom side of rectangular ducts over 36 inches wide with a single row of weld pins and speed washers. Clip off !*' pins flush with facing. Vapor barrier sealing at joints and pin penetrations not required. All return air and exhaust air ducts Uninsulated except where external insulation or internal acoustic treatment is required by the drawings or specifications. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-51 C. Insulation on cold pipes shall be protected from hangers, guides and rollers by a 180 degree galvanized steel shield on the outside of the insulation and vapor barrier. A half-section of waterproof, calcium A silicate, high density insulation of the same thickness as the pipe insulation, and full length of the shield, shall be used to support weight of the pipe at the shield. Factory assembled thermal protection shields may also be used. Pipe Size Shield Length 1-1/2 inches to 2-1/2 inches 10 inches ' 3 inches to 6 inches 12 inches 8 inches to 10 inches 16 inches 12 inches and over 22 inches d. Pipe protection shields may be factory assembled thermal protection shields as manufactured by one of the approved manufacturers. See Approved Manufacturers Article 1.22 of this Specification. e. Piping in MER's and Piping Exposed to Weather: Insulated piping including fittings, flanges and valves, which is exposed to weather or called for to be weatherproofed, shall be covered(except as noted below) with a 30 mil (0.8 mm) thick thermoplastic jacket with solvent welded seams forming a completely monolithic system. f. Piping Penetrating Floors and Walls: Where piping penetrates walls, partitions, floor slabs, etc., the space between the piping and the sleeve shall be packed with an approved fire resistive material. H. Insulation for Sheet Metal Work 1. Materials and Finishes Built-up air supply apparatus chambers 2 inch thick, 6 lb. density, fiber glass,rigid insulation board and outside air intake plenums from with white Kraft, fiber glass reinforced, aluminum foil connections to louvers and/or gratings up laminate, All-Service Jacket (ASJ). Adhere to chambers to heating coils and/or lined casing. and/or ducts with weld pins and speed washers spaced on 12 inch centers maximum, but not more than 3 inches from insulation joints and/or corners. Minimum of two rows of pins per side of duct. Seal all joints with 4 inch wide ASJ tape. Seal all punctures and pin penetrations with approved vapor barrier coating. Exposed rectangular air conditioning Same as above except 1 inch thick, 6 lb. density, fiber supply ductwork within all Mechanical glass, rigid insulation board. Where stiffening angles are Equipment Rooms and exposed in all larger than 1 inch, insulation thickness shall match size of other spaces and rectangular heated air angle. supply ducts exposed in any space. Medium pressure rectangular air 2 inch thick, 1 lb. density fiber glass blanket with factory conditioning supply duct risers within applied foil faced, scrim reinforced, Kraft vapor barrier ""' shafts (FSK) and 2 inch flange. Wrap insulation tightly on duct and firmly butt all joints with 2 inch flange overlap on circumferential joints. Adhere to duct with 2/3 coverage of ■, approved adhesive applied in 4 inch wide bands, 8 inches Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-50 W 4. Installation of Insulation a. Pipe insulation sections firmly butted together at all joints with jacket laps and joint butt strips pulled tight and smooth. Longitudinal joints, a minimum of 2 inch overlap. Butt joint strips a minimum of 3 inches wide. b. Fittings insulated with premolded fiber glass, fitting covers for the sizes manufactured. For other types and sizes, fittings insulated with radially mitered segments of pipe covering secured in place with 16 gauge copper plated, annealed steel wire. Molded fitting covers suitable for same service temperature as pipe insulation. C. Valves insulated over the bonnet with cut and built-up sections of pipe insulation. Voids and irregular spaces between pipe insulation section bore and valve body filled with fiber glass blanket insulation(suitable for same service temperature as pipe insulation)wired to valve body. d. Flanges insulated with built-up sleeves of pipe covering overlapping adjacent pipe insulation. e. Insulation for fittings, valves, flanges, and accessories, same thickness as adjacent pipe insulation. *„ f. Valves, strainers, expansion joints and other specialties requiring periodic servicing or inspection shall be provided with insulation covers, removable and replaceable without damaging insulation, vapor barriers or finishes. Insulation on valves shall be extended over the bonnets. g. Hot Service Piping 1) Insulation jacket laps and joint butt strips stapled on 4 inch centers with flare type staples and secured with aluminum bands on 18 inch centers with one band over each joint butt strip. 2) Voids around fittings, valves and at flanges, filled with insulation and covered with premolded thermoplastic covers. h. Cold Service Piping 1) Insulation jacket laps and joint butt strip sealed with lap sealing adhesive. At all fittings, valves, etc., and at intervals of every 5 sections of straight run pipe insulation, apply a vapor barrier coating, 1/16 inch thick, to all butt joints and on the bore of the pipe insulation for a minimum of 2 inches from the joint. Position insulation and press firmly into place making certain that a complete unbroken seal is obtained. 2) Voids around fittings, valves and at flanges, filled with insulation and covered with premolded thermoplastic covers. i. Piping Subject to Freezing: Any piping subject to freezing shall be covered with an additional layer of 2 inch fiber glass insulation of the same finish as specified for the particular service when not subject to freezing. 5. Protection of Insulation a. Insulation on hot pipes 4 inches and larger shall be protected from hangers, guides and rollers by pipe protection saddles welded to the pipe, and filled with pipe insulation or insulating cement. Saddles shall not be welded to the pipe hanger or support. !!* b. Insulation on hot pipes smaller than 4 inches shall be supported on factory assembled thermal protection shields. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-49 CHILLED WATER PIPE INSULATION(Inside Building) Material: AP Armaflex closed cell insulation, black, unslit. All joints and seams shall be sealed with Armstrong 520 adhesive. Insulation of valves and fittings shall be fabricated from tubular or flat stock. CHILLED WATER PIPE INSULATION(Outside Building) Material: Urecon V.I.P. factory insulation process, 1-1/2 in., 3.0 lb./ft3 density, rigid polyurethane foam. Provide an outer protective jacket consisting on 50 mil custom blended black polyethylene adhered to the insulation •• with a modified butyl rubber adhesive. All fittings shall be field insulated to the same specifications. The entire assembly shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the Urecon V.I.P. system manufacturer's instructions. 2. Calcium silicate pipe insulation shall be composed of asbestos free hydrous calcium silicate for use on systems operating up to 1200°F. (649 0C.). Insulation shall be preformed half sections (two piece) secured with 1/2 inch wide, .020 inch aluminum bands or 16 gauge wire 12 inches on centers. Insulation shall be covered with a .016 inch aluminum jacket with factory applied moisture barrier, secured in place with .020 aluminum bands 12 inches on centers. Physical characteristics shall be as follows: Average(Dry)Density 15 lbs./cu.ft. Thermal Conductivity 0.46 Btu-in./hr.-sq.ft.-°F. 3. Insulation Thickness �* Service Pipe Size Temp Thickness Low Pressure Steam, All Steam 2 in. and under 450°F. 1-1/2 in. •• Condensate, Hot Water Systems, 2-1/2 in. and over 2 in. Supply and Return Risers, Mains and Branches Medium Pressure Steam, 2 in. and under 450°F. 2-1/2 in. Steam PRV's (Over 15 psig) 2-1/2 in. to 4 in. 3 in. 5 in. and over 4 in. w Hot Water Heating within Convector All 450°F. None and Fan Coil Unit Enclosures Only. Chilled Water- Supply and Return 6 in. and under 1 in. 8 in. and over 1-1/2 in. ^* Fresh Water Makeup All I in. Condensation Drains - Risers, Mains All 1/2 in. and Branches Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-48 B. Insulation materials and adhesives shall be products of one of the approved manufacturers listed in Article 1.22, "Approved Manufacturers". C. Quality Assurance: Insulation materials manufacturing facilities must be certified and registered with an approved registrar for conformance with ISO 9000 quality standards. D. Fire and Smoke Hazard Rating 1. All thermal and acoustical insulation jackets, facings, membrane, adhesives, mastics, coatings and accessory materials shall be tested in compliancewith the latest versions of ASTM E-84, MSS SP-69, NFPA 255 and/or UL 723 procedures. All materials shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters so Laboratories,Inc. for a fire hazard classification,as not to exceed the following: Flame Spread 25 Fuel Contributed 50 FN Smoke Developed 50 2. The rating for insulation with factory applied jackets or facings shall be on a composite basis of insulation,jacket or facing, and the adhesive used to adhere the jacket or facing to the insulation. 3. Shipping containers for insulation and accessory materials shall be labeled to indicate conformance to the fire hazard classification. 4. Submittals of insulation and accessory materials shall include a written certification that the material being submitted for approval meets the above - criteria and shall include the required Materials Safety Data Sheets. E. Before applying insulation, all surfaces shall be free of dust, grease and foreign matter. Insulation shall not be applied to any piping, ductwork or equipment until required pressure testing has been completed and the system approved for tightness. F. Insulation jackets, facings, vapor barriers and finishes on ducts and piping handling cold water shall be continuous and sealed through floor and wall sleeves, hangers, supports and attachments. G. Pipe Insulation(Except Chilled Water) wu 1. Material: Fiber glass, molded, one-piece insulation with white Kraft, fiber glass reinforced, aluminum foil laminated, All-Service Jacket (ASJ). Pipe insulation shall be capable of continuous service at a pipe temperature of 450°F. without oxidation or burnout of binders or the development of odors or smoke by any constituent of the material. Physical characteristics shall be as follows: Minimum Density 4 lbs./cu.ft. Thermal Conductivity 0.23 Btu-in./hr.-sq.ft.-°F. Jacket Vapor Permeability 0.02 perms. Jacket Puncture Resistance 50 units(Beach). PM W Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-47 3. Incorporate seismic snubbing restraint in all directions at specified acceleration loadings. 4. Acceptable seismic spring mountings are: Type SSLR - M.I.I. Type SAWR - V.M.C.I. Type BXL - V.E.C. C. Seismic Restraint Types 1. Seismic Restraint Type I a. Each corner or side seismic restraint shall incorporate minimum 5/8 inch thick pad limit stops. Restraints shall be made of plate, structural members or square metal tubing in a welded assembly, incorporating resilient pads. Angle bumpers are not acceptable. System to be field bolted to deck with 1 g acceleration capacity. b. Seismic spring mountings as described above are an acceptable alternative providing all seismic loading requirements are met. C. Mason Industries Type Z-1011,Type Z-1225,or as approved. 2. Seismic Restraint Type II: Metal cable type with approved end fastening devices to equipment and structure. System to be field bolted to deck or overhead structural members or deck with aircraft cable and clamps as per SMACNA guidelines. D. Furnish and install as shown, or as approved, all necessary supports for equipment furnished under this Section. To meet the varying conditions in each case, these supports shall consist of pipestands, steel angle or strap hangers, saddles, brackets, etc., as shown, or as approved. All such supports shall have substantial flanges bolted to floor construction; hangers shall be supported from the framing as described hereinabove. Supports shall be properly located with reference to any supporting pads, legs, etc., of the equipment carried and must be of such number and so •• distributed as not to bring any undue strains to the equipment. All details shall be as approved. E. Provide suitable brackets,pipestands,piers or other supports for all various float traps, receivers, etc. Also provide suitable supports for all tempering stacks, air filters, mixing and control dampers, etc., securely clamped to steel beams, column or bearing walls. All details of this work shall be as shown on the drawings, or as approved. F. Guarantee that the work, as installed under this Section of the Specifications, will not result in the transmission of objectionable noise or vibration to any occupied parts of the building, and take full responsibility for any necessary modifications of this equipment, or of the foundations and supports for the same, necessary to secure this result. 2.7 INSULATION A. Provide insulation systems for all piping, ductwork and equipment using an installer approved by the insulation manufacturer. Execute the work in accordance with the best practice and workmanship of the Trade and the requirements of this Section of the Specifications. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-46 W isolation pad. Vertical restraints shall be provided by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. The allowable load on the isolation material shall not exceed 500 psi. C. Mountings shall be Type VSG-M.I.I., or as approved. 3. Anchors a. The pipe clamp at anchor points shall be welded to the boiler breeching and to acoustical pipe anchor mountings which, in turn, shall be rigidly fastened to the steel guide framing. b. The acoustical pipe anchor mountings shall be capable of safely accepting loads developed by the installed boiler breeching and shall consist of a bolted assembly of steel plates with laminations of 1/2 inch thick heavy duty neoprene and canvas duck isolation material. A heat w, shield shall be provided as required. The isolation material loading shall not exceed 500 psi. C. Acoustical pipe anchor mountings shall be Type ADA - M.I.I., or as approved. 4. Supports a. Boiler breeching supports within shafts shall be provided with suitable �• bearing plates and two layers of 1/4 inch thick ribbed or waffled neoprene pad loaded for 50 psi maximum. The isolation pads shall be separated with 1/4 inch steel plate. b. The isolation pads shall be one of the following, or as approved: Type W - M.I.I. Type Shearflex - V.M.C.I. Type 20ON - V.E.C. C. Isolation supports at the base of risers shall be two layers of 1/2 inch thick heavy duty neoprene and canvas duck isolation pad separated by 1/4 inch thick steel plate. Suitable bearing plates sized to provide a pad OP loading of 500 psi maximum shall be provided. The stanchion between the pipe and isolation support shall be welded to the pipe and welded or bolted to the isolation support. The isolation support shall be bolted to an the floor slab with resilient sleeves and washers. d. All boiler breeching support resilient materials shall be Type HL-M.I.I., or as approved. ON 2.6 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. All seismic restraints shall be capable of safely accepting one-half"g" external forces on without failure and shall maintain equipment, piping, duct and pressure reducing boxes in a captive position. Seismic restraints shall not short circuit isolation systems or transmit objectionable vibration or noise, and shall be provided on all equipment as am scheduled on drawings. Calculations by registered Civil or Structural Engineer shall be submitted to verify snubber capacities for each piece of equipment. PM B. Equipment mounted on springs does not require additional seismic restraints providing that the spring mountings: 1. Comply with general characteristics of spring isolators. 2. Have vertical limit stops and are capable of supporting equipment at fixed elevation during equipment erection. u■ Smith Campus Center HVAC PM 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-45 4. Supports a. Piping supports within shafts shall be provided with suitable bearing plates and two layers of 1/4 inch thick ribbed or waffled neoprene pad loaded for 50 psi maximum. The isolation pads shall be separated with 1/4 inch steel plate. b. The isolation pads shall be one of the following,or as approved: Type W - M.I.I. Type Shearflex - V.M.C.I. Type 20ON - V.E.C. C. Piping isolation supports at the base of risers shall be two layers of 1/2 inch thick heavy duty neoprene and canvas duck isolation pad separated by 1/4 inch thick steel plate. Suitable bearing plates sized to provide a pad loading of 500 psi maximum shall be provided. The stanchion between the pipe and isolation support shall be welded to the pipe and welded or bolted to the isolation support. The isolation support shall be bolted to the floor slab with resilient sleeves and washers. d. All pipe support resilient materials shall be Type HL - M.I.I., or as approved. 5. There shall be no direct contact of piping with shaft walls, floor slabs and/or partitions. All uninsulated piping shall be sleeved with one inch fiber glass the full depth of the penetration. BB. Mounting of Heat Exchangers-Mounting Type X 1. Each heat exchanger shall be resiliently supported by means of mountings provided between the structural or concrete pier support and the equipment. The mountings shall provide a minimum static deflection of 1 inch. Mountings '!"! shall be one of the following,or as approved. Type SLR - M.I.I Type AWR - V.M.C.I. Type KW - V.E.C. 2. Mounting system shall incorporate Seismic Restraint Type 1. CC. Boiler Breeching, Flues and Stacks, Anchors, Guides and Supports - Mounting Type XI 1. Boiler breeching guides, anchors and supports in all risers, and anchors in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or occupied spaces shall be isolated from the building structure so that there shall be no direct metal-to-metal or metal-to- structure contact of the boiler breeching with the building structure. 2. Boiler Breeching and Stack Guides a. Steel guides shall be welded to the breeching at a maximum spacing of 60 degrees. The outside diameter of the opposing guide bars shall be smaller than the inside diameter of the pipe riser clamp in accordance with standard field construction practice. Each end of the pipe anchor shall be rigidly attached to an all-directional pipe anchor isolation mounting which, in turn, shall be rigidly fastened to the supplementary *® steel framing within the shaft in an approved manner. b. The all-directional pipe anchor isolation mountings shall consist of a telescoping arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum of 1/2 inch thick heavy duty neoprene and canvas duck Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-44 1. Pipe guides, anchors and supports in all risers, and piping anchors in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or occupied spaces shall be isolated from the building structure such that there shall be no direct metal-to-metal contact of the piping with the building structure. 2. Piping Guides a. Steel guides shall be welded to the pipe at a maximum spacing of 60 degrees. The outside diameter of the opposing guide bars shall be smaller than the inside diameter of the pipe riser clamp in accordance with standard field construction practice. Each end of the pipe anchor shall be rigidly attached to an all-directional pipe anchor isolation mounting, which in turn shall be rigidly fastened to the steel framing within the shaft, in an approved manner. +*� b. The all-directional pipe anchor isolation mountings shall consist of a telescoping arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum of 1/2 inch thick heavy duty neoprene and canvas duck isolation pad. Vertical restraints shall be provided by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. The allowable load on the isolation material shall not exceed 500 psi. �. C. Mountings shall be Type VSG-M.I.I.,or as approved. d. Low temperature piping guides shall be constructed with a 360 degrees, 10 gauge metal sleeve around the piping. The thermal insulation requirements for the piping shall be provided between the piping and the sleeve. Heavy duty neoprene and canvas duck isolation pad of thickness equal to thermal insulation requirements shall space the metal sleeve away from the piping with urethane or other suitable thermal insulation ■" provided in the voids between the pipe sleeve and isolation pad material. The metal sleeve outside diameter shall be smaller than the pipe riser clamp inside diameter in accordance with field construction practice. The pipe riser clamp shall be rigidly attached to the steel framing within the shaft. 3. Anchors „w a. Pipe anchors shall consist of heavy duty pipe clamps or structural steel shapes with gusset plates welded to the pipe and to pairs of vertical acoustical pipe anchor mountings, which in turn, shall be rigidly fastened to the structural steel framing within the shafts. b. The acoustical pipe anchor mountings shall be capable of safely accepting loads developed by the installed piping. C. Anchors at the base of risers shall consist of a bolted assembly of steel plates with laminations of 1/2 inch thick heavy duty neoprene and canvas duck isolation material. A heat shield shall be provided as required. The isolation material loading shall not exceed 500 psi. d. Intermediate anchors shall utilize all-directional pipe anchor isolation mountings consisting of a telescoping arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum of 1/2 inch thick heavy duty neoprene and canvas duck isolation pad. Vertical restraints shall be provided by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. The allowable load on the isolation material shall not exceed 500 psi. e. Acoustical pipe anchor mountings shall be Type ADA - Mason Industries, Inc., or as approved. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-43 .M w 2. Mountings shall be one of the following,or as approved: Type SLR - M.I.I. Type AWR - V.M.C.I. Type KW - V.E.C. 3. Mounting system shall incorporate Seismic Restraint Type I. Z. Support of Piping, Flues and Breeching-Mounting Type VIII 1. The following piping, flues and breeching shall be resiliently supported: a. All piping, flues and breeching in Equipment Rooms. b. Piping flues and breeching within 50 feet (or 100 pipe diameters, if greater than 50 feet)of connected rotating equipment. C. All piping where exposed on the roof. 2. All other piping shall be rigidly supported and provided with approved seismic restraints to maintain the piping in a captive attitude without excessive motion. 3. All piping seismic restraints shall be installed with a maximum spacing conforming to the hanger rod spacing schedule as hereinbefore specified, or as +. required to limit transmitted forces to the building structure to acceptable limits. 4. Resilient diagonal mountings or other approved devices shall be provided as required to limit piping motion due to equipment startup or shutdown, to a maximum of 1/4 inch. 5. Isolators for water piping shall be resiliently spring and neoprene supported with mountings providing a minimum static deflection of 7/8 inch. The spring elements of the mounting shall have a minimum surge frequency of no less than 340 Hz. 6. Multiple sections of piping running in parallel shall be rigidly supported from supplementary steel and the supplementary steel isolated from the building structure by means of mountings as described in the preceding paragraphs. Supplementary steel shall be sized so that maximum deflection between supports does not exceed 0.08 inch. + 7. Positioning type hanger rod isolators shall be provided for boiler breeching and for all piping greater than 12 inch diameter and all supplementary steel supports. Positioning type hanger rod isolators shall be one of the following, or as approved: Type PDNHS - M.I.I. Type RSHP - V.M.C.I. Type PCSR - V.E.C. 8. All other water piping hanger rod isolators shall be one of the following, or as approved: Type DNHS - M.I.1. ` Type RSH - V.M.C.I. Type SNRC - V.E.C. 9. Floor supported water piping shall be mounted on one of the following, or as approved: Type SSLR - M.I.I. Type AWR - V.M.C.1. Type KW - V.E.C. AA. Piping Anchors, Guides and Supports- Mounting Type IX Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-42 ,,,,, No 4. The spring supported reinforced concrete inertia foundation shall be poured within structural perimeter frame of the required thickness indicated in the above schedule. The structural perimeter frame shall be equipped with height saving brackets and stable bare spring isolators having spring diameters no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. The mountings shall provide minimum static deflection of 1 inch. The structural perimeter frame, mounting templates, reinforcing bars, height saving brackets and spring system shall be provided as an assembly by vibration control vendor. There shall be a minimum of 2 inches operating clearance between the pump inertia base and the foundation pad. 5. Vertical piping loads including water, strainers, and valves between the pump base elbow supports and the suction and discharge header piping shall be !w supported by the pump base spring isolators without stress or strain to the pump casing. 6. Provide suitable and adequate space between suction and discharge valves and the pump to permit the future installation of flexible stainless steel braided metal hose connectors capable of accepting the operating working pressures with a burst pressure of not less than four times the operating pressure. 7. Mounting assemblies shall be one of the following,or as approved: Structural Steel Perimeter Form Wood Perimeter Form Type KSL Type KIPWF - M.LI. Type ASSB Type UWPF - V.M.C.I. Type SN-OSK Type WSN - V.E.C. 8. Mounting system shall incorporate Seismic Restraint Type I. X. Mounting of Centrifugal Pumps- �w (3 hp or less) - Mounting Type VI 1. Pumps 3 hp or less shall be bolted and grouted to rubber-in-shear supported reinforced concrete inertia blocks that are a minimum of 6 inches thick. Rubber-in-shear isolators shall provide a minimum static deflection of 3/8 inch and shall be protected against corrosion. 2. Mountings shall be one of the following,or as approved: Type ND - M.1.1. Type RD - V.M.C.I. Type 368SD - V.E.C. 3. Provide base elbow supports and structural perimeter frames and reinforcement as described for Mounting Type V. 4. Mounting system shall incorporate seismic restraint Type I. ! Y. Mounting of Boilers -Mounting Type VII 1. Each boiler and/or refrigeration machine (cooler, condenser, compressor and motor) shall be installed on an integral one-piece steel rigid structural frame which shall be installed on spring supported mountings. Each spring mounting shall be bare and stable and shall provide a minimum static deflection of one inch. All spring mountings shall provide a leveling device, neoprene acoustical pad and built-in vertical stop to prevent spring extension when equipment is removed from the base or drained. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-41 ow U. Mounting of Ceiling Supported Factory Assembled Fans, Axial Flow Fans, Tubular Fans and Belted Vent Sets-Mounting Type III 1. All such units shall be hung by means of vibration isolation hangers consisting of a steel housing or retainer incorporating a steel spring and neoprene isolators. 2. If the equipment to be mounted is not furnished with integral structural frames and external mounting lugs (both of suitable strength and rigidity), approved structural sub-base shall be installed in the field, which shall support the equipment to be hung and to which shall be attached the hangers. 3. All such equipment shall be supported by a rigid structural frame from the structure above to capture the equipment laterally under seismic forces. 4. Isolators shall be one of the following, or as approved: Type DNHS - M.I.I. Type RSH - V.M.C.I. Type SNRC - V.E.C. sm 5. Resilient diagonal restraining isolators shall be provided as required to limit horizontal motion to 1/4 inch maximum under fan operating conditions. 6. Seismic Restraints Type 11 shall be provided to hold captive the equipment for ON lateral movements. V. Mounting of Ceiling Supported Factory No Assembled Fans, Axial Flow Fans,Tubular Fans and Belted Vent Sets -Mounting Type IV 1. This equipment shall be mounted exactly as described under Mounting Type III except that mountings shall be one of the following,or as approved: Type HD - M.I.I. Type RHD - V.M.C.I. Type CD - V.E.C. 2. Resilient diagonal restraining isolators shall be provided as required to limit horizontal motion to 1/4 inch maximum under fan operating conditions. 3. Seismic Restraints Type II shall be provided to hold captive the equipment for lateral movements. W. Mounting of Centrifugal Pumps - .e (Greater than 3 hp) - Mounting Type V 1. Each pump with its driving motor shall be bolted and grouted to a spring supported concrete inertia base reinforced as required. R, 2. Each concrete base (rectangular or "T" shape for horizontally split pumps) shall include supports and base elbows for the suction and discharge connections. Base elbows shall be bolted and grouted to the concrete foundation. 3. Reinforced concrete inertia base thickness shall be in accordance with the following schedule: Minimum Inertia Block Motor Size Thickness Required 5 hp to 15 hp 6 inches 25 hp to 50 hp 8 inches , 60 hp to 100 hp 10 inches Over 100 hp 12 inches Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-40 ,� w per 3. Equipment operating speed. 4. Maximum motion at fan flexible connections. 5. Drawings, as required, to show the number and location of seismic restraints for each equipment, specific details of restraints, including anchor bolts for mountings and maximum load (static plus dynamic) expected at each restraint or snubbing device and showing that fastening devices for the seismic restraints are capable of maintaining equipment in a captive position when subjected to external forces of 0.5 "g" in any direction. R. Equipment seismic restraints or snubbing devices and vibration isolation systems mounting shall be the product of one manufacturer. The following vibration control manufacturers will be approved provided mounting systems are in strict accordance with the design intent as specified herein: M.I.I. - Mason Industries,Inc.,Hauppauge,NY V.E.C. -Vibration Eliminator Co.,Long Island City,NY eiw V.M.C.I. -Vibration Mountings&Controls, Inc.,Bloomingdale,NJ S. Floor Mounting of Centrifugal Fans-Mounting Type I 1. Each such fan and driving motor shall be mounted on an integral one-piece structural base, reinforced as necessary,to prevent flexure of the base at startup and during operation of the fan. The unitized structural mounting base for the fan and motor shall include motor slide rails. The structural frame shall be drilled and tapped to receive the fan and motor so that the frame shall act as a template. 2. The structural steel integral base shall be supported on steel spring mountings. These mountings shall be positioned in accordance with the weight distribution to ensure adequate deflection and vibration isolation. Housing or snubbing devices shall not be used to contain the isolator springs. OW 3. Isolator types shall be one of the following or as approved: Type SLF - M.I.I. Type OSK - V.E.C. Type AN - V.M.C.I. 4. Mounting system shall incorporate seismic restraint Type I. .� T. Mounting of Factory Assembled Fans -Mounting Type II 1. This equipment shall be mounted directly on stable bare steel spring isolators, except that where the units to be mounted are furnished with internal structural frames and external lugs (both of suitable strength and rigidity), or without any severe overhangs, no additional structural frame need be furnished and installed beneath the unit. In any event, the motor shall be integrally mounted to the unit and shall be mounted on slide rails. 2. Isolator mounting types shall be one of the following, or as approved: Type SLF - M.I.I. Type OSK - V.E.C. Type AN - V.M.C.I. 3. Resilient diagonal restraining isolators shall be provided as required to limit horizontal motion to 1/4 inch maximum under fan operating conditions. 4. Mounting system shall incorporate Seismic Restraint Type I. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-39 Each mounting assembly shall incorporate a neoprene acoustical pad and leveling adjustment. The spring specified minimum deflection from loaded operating height shall be 50% of the rated deflection. The maximum motion of any resiliently , supported equipment at startup or shutdown shall be 1/4 inch. Approved lateral restraints shall be provided as required to limit motions in excess of 1/4 inch. K. Where neoprene-in-shear isolation systems are described in the following specifications, the mounting assemblies shall utilize bare neoprene elements with unit type design molded in oil resistant neoprene. The neoprene shall be compounded to meet the following: 1. Not greater than 70 durometer. 2. Minimum tensile strength of 2000 psi. 3. Minimum elongation of 300%. 4. Maximum compression at 25%of original deflection. L. The vibration isolation systems shall be guaranteed to have the deflection indicated on the schedule on the drawings. Mounting systems and components of the isolation mounting shall not be resonant with any of the forcing frequencies of supported equipment or piping. Mounting sizes shall be determined by the mounting manufacturer, and the sizes shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. M. During equipment installation, floor supported spring isolation bases shall be set on 2 inch high spacers between the isolation base and the housekeeping pad. After all connections (pipe, dust, and conduit), have been made to the equipment and the system filled, the normal operating equipment load shall be removed without change of equipment elevation or transfer of stress to the equipment. N. Mountings incorporating vertical limit stops shall be furnished and installed with 1/4 inch spacers. The mounting shall serve as blocking during installation. Mountings shall be adjusted and spacers removed after equipment achieves normal operating loads. O. Each seismic restraint, snubbing device or isolation mounting incorporating seismic restraint shall be installed and/or adjusted to provide the minimum operating clearance in all directions to permit the operation of the equipment without objectionable noise or vibration to any part of the building structure. The operating clearance for equipment seismic restraints shall not be greater than 1/4 inch. P. Guarantee that the work as installed under this Section of the Specifications will not result in the transmission of objectionable noise or vibration to any occupied parts of the building, and take full responsibility for any necessary modifications of this equipment, or of the foundations and supports for the same, necessary to secure this result. no Q. Vibration isolation equipment submittal drawings shall include the following information: I. Isolation mounting deflections. 2. Spring diameters, compressed spring heights at rated load; solid spring heights, where steel spring isolation mountings are used. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-38 ,,, so b. Upper or lower truss chords in bar joist construction at the panel points. C. Cast-in-place inserts or drilled and shielded inserts in concrete structures. 7. All structurally suspended overhead equipment isolated or unisolated shall be four-point independently braced with Type II seismic restraining system. 8. Install Seismic Restraining System Type II: Taut for overhead suspended unisolated equipment, piping or ductwork, and slack with 1/2 inch cable deflection for isolated systems. D. Concrete foundations and supports and required reinforcing therefor will be furnished „" and installed under another Contract. However, this Contractor shall furnish shop drawings showing adequate concrete reinforcing steel details and templates for all concrete foundations and supports, and all required hanger bolts and other appurtenances necessary for the proper installation of his equipment. Although the General Contractor will complete all concrete work, all such work shall be shown in detail on the shop drawings, prepared by this Contractor, which drawings shall be w. submitted to the Architects showing the complete details of all foundations including necessary concrete and steel work,vibration isolation devices, seismic restraints,etc. E. Provide, as shown or as approved, all necessary supports for equipment furnished under this Section. To meet the varying conditions in each case, these supports shall consist of pipestands, steel angle or strap hangers, saddles, brackets, etc. All supports shall have substantial flanges bolted to floor construction; hangers shall be supported from the structure as described herein. Supports shall be properly located with reference to any supporting pads, legs, etc., of the equipment carried and must be of such number and so distributed as not to bring any undue strains upon the equipment. F. Floor-mounted equipment and equipment specified to be mounted on vibration eliminating devices and/or concrete inertia blocks shall be erected on 4 inch high a concrete pads under the complete floor area of the equipment and/or inertia block, unless specified to the contrary herein. G. Provide suitable brackets,pipestands,piers or other supports for all various float traps, receivers, etc. Also provide suitable supports for all tempering stacks, air filters, mixing and control dampers, etc., securely clamped to steel beams, columns or bearing walls. H. Vibration isolation devices, mounting systems and seismic restraints exposed to weather and other corrosive environments shall be protected with factory corrosion resistance. All metal parts of mountings (except springs and hardware) to be hot dip galvanized. Springs shall be cadmium plated and neoprene coated. Nuts and bolts shall be cadmium plated. I. Where supplementary steel is required to support piping, the supplementary steel shall be designed to provide a maximum deflection of 0.08 inch at the midspan under the we supported load. J. Where steel spring isolation systems are described in the following specifications, the go mounting assemblies shall utilize bare springs with the spring diameter not less than 0.8 of the loaded operating height of the spring. Each spring isolatorshall be designed and installed so that the ends of the spring remain parallel during and after installation. No Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-37 M m F. All equipment (air handling systems, fans, ducts, pumps, heat exchangers, etc.) shall be labeled utilizing painted on stenciled lettering for identification. Identification labels shall match the nomenclature in the equipment schedule sheets or on he Wo drawings. 2.5 FOUNDATIONS,VIBRATION ISOLATION INCORPORATING SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. Vibration isolation devices and seismic restraints shall be manufactured by one of the approved manufacturers listed in Article 1.22, "Approved Manufacturers". B. All equipment, piping, etc., shall be mounted on or suspended from approved foundations and supports, all as specified herein, as shown on the drawings, or as �* required. C. All equipment, whether isolated or not, shall be bolted to structure to allow for minimum 0.5 "g" of acceleration. Bolt points and diameter of inserts shall be submitted and verified as part of the Contractor's submission for each piece of equipment and certified by a licensed Civil or Structural Engineer. .. 1. Seismically restrain all piping and ductwork with center bracing or Type II restraining system in accordance with SMACNA guidelines to comply with 1987 BOCA Code as outlined below: a. Piping to be braced at 40 foot intervals and at turns of more than 4 feet. b. Ductwork to be braced every 30 feet and at every turn and duct run ends. C. Piping to be restrained as per 1987 BOCA Code. d. Ductwork to be restrained as per 1987 BOCA Code. 2. Seismic restraints are not required for the following: a. Gas piping less than 1 inch internal diameter. b. Piping in Boiler and Mechanical Equipment Rooms that is less than 1-1/4 inch internal diameter. C. All other piping and electrical conduit less than 2-1/2 inch internal diameter. d. All rectangular ducts less than 6 square feet in cross-sectional area. e. All round ducts less than 28 inches in diameter. f. All piping suspended by individual hangers 12 inches in length or less from the top of the pipe to the bottom of the structural support for the hanger. g. All ducts suspended by hangers 12 inches or less in length from the top of the duct to the bottom of the structural support for the hanger. 3. Chimneys and stacks passing through floors are to be bolted at each floor level or secured above and below each floor with riser clamps. 4. Chimneys and stacks running horizontally to be braced every 30 feet with Type 11 restraining system. 5. Where base anchoring is insufficient to resist seismic forces, supplementary restraining such as Seismic Restraint System Type II shall be used above system's center of gravity to suitably resist "g" force levels. Vertically mounted tanks may require this additional restraint. 6. For overhead supported equipment, overstress of the building structure must w•. not occur. Bracing can occur from: a. Flanges of structural beams. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-36 ,., w� H. Coordinate motor with the torque and inertia load of the equipment served, and the inrush characteristics of the motor with the starter selection, so that all items furnished constitute a properly related package. No motor shall operate in the service factor range. I. All motors shall be sized to have sufficient starting torque to be able to accelerate the driven load from zero rpm to design speed rpm within 6 seconds maximum. Submit substantiating calculations. " J. Motor shall be adequately protected against water and dirt damage until operational. 2.4 IDENTIFICATION OF SYSTEMS !W A. Provide three sets of charts or diagrams showing outline plans of structures and essential features of the several systems, including all piping, ducts, equipment, valves, dampers and controls. Identifications shall be manufactured by one of the ON approved manufacturers listed in Article 1.22, "Approved Manufacturers". B. All valves, dampers, and controls shall be designated by distinguishing numbers on the charts or diagrams. Provide stamped brass or engraved phenolic tags for all designated items with numbers corresponding to those on the charts. The nomenclature to be used on these tags shall be submitted to the Consulting Engineer for approval. C. The tags shall be not less than 2 inches in diameter with depressed black numbers of 3/8 inch height, prefixed by the letters "HVAC". They shall be fastened to valves and w controls with brass chains and hooks. D. Furnish three complete sets of valve tag schedules and schematic flow charts with corresponding valve numbers noted on chart indicating valve location by floor and nearest column number. Valve schedule shall also show the valve size and service. Valve schedules shall be mounted in heavy duty polypropylene sheet protectors and 8-1/2 x 11 three ring binders. A reproducible drawing of the valve schedule and flow charts shall also be provided to the Owner for his use. E. Provide and affix identification labels in conformance with the following: no 1. Pipe markers shall be pressure sensitive adhesive type, meeting ANSI/OSHA requirements identifying the service, by system and zone, and direction of flow in the various piping systems. Markers shall be provided on all concealed and ,P" exposed piping as well as in shafts. Markers shall be affixed to each pipe not less frequently than every 40 feet. There shall be at least one identifying marker per pipe in each enclosed space and at each floor level within shafts. Identifying markers shall also be provided adjacent to each valve. Valves at MR equipment and pumps do not require separate identification. 2. Each set of markers shall consist of one label on which the name of the service is printed in black letters not less than 1 inch high for pipe 2-1/2 inches and smaller, 2 inches high for 3 inch pipe and larger, and one band on which is printed a black directional arrows. Markers shall be applied where they can be easily read and with their long dimension parallel to the axis of the pipe. Markers and bands shall have backgrounds of different colors for the various service groups. Colors shall conform to ANSI Standard A13.1. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-35 ow 3. The motor conduit box shall be cast iron, diagonally split with threaded hole for conduit. 4. Motors shall be of cast iron construction. Aluminum frames are not acceptable. 5. Each motor shall have a stainless steel nameplate containing the following .A minimum information: Manufacturer rpm UL Label Type Voltage/Phase/Frequency Connection Diagram .. Model Enclosure Type Motor Efficiency Horsepower Frame Size Full-Load Current Service Factor 6. All belt-connected motors shall be provided with adjustable bases and set screws to maintain proper belt tension and alignment. Provide proper belt guards meeting all OSHA requirements. F. Motors shall be fitted with extra heavy duty bearings and seals with a minimum 1310 life of 100,000 hours (rated at continuous duty). Bearings shall be fitted with Zerk or Alemite lubrication fittings and excess lubrication drains. Where motors are concealed or as specified elsewhere, the grease fittings and lubrication drains shall be extended to the outside of the respective housing of the unit for ease of service. G. Motors shall have the following guaranteed minimum efficiencies when tested in accordance with IEEE Standard 112 Test Mounted Method B: The spread between the specified minimum efficiency and the nominal efficiency shall not exceed the values listed in NEMA Standard MG-1-12.536. ' Nominal Minimum Efficiencies 1750 rpm HP Driproof Type TEFC Type 1 84.0 82.5 ` 1-1/2 86.5 82.5 2 86.5 82.5 3 86.5 84.0 5 86.5 85.5 7-1/2 88.5 87.5 10 88.5 88.5 «* 15 90.2 88.5 20 91.0 90.2 25 91.7 91.0 30 91.7 91.7 40 92.4 91.7 50 93.0 92.4 .. 60 93.0 93.0 75 93.6 93.0 100 93.6 93.6 125 93.6 93.6 150 94.1 94.1 200 94.1 94.5 Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-34 ,, 4W R. Install pipe guides, ADSCO Model G, or as approved, for all risers located in shafts, at each of the first two floors immediately above and below each anchor, and, where applicable, per the requirements of this Specification, and where indicated on the drawings. PW Pipe Size Guide Spacing Up to 3 inches Every other floor 4 through 6 inches Every third floor 8 inches and above Every fourth floor Fw S. Protect the insulation for a length of the sleeve with a galvanized 20 gauge shield(360 deg.) 2.3 MOTORS A. All motors and accessories shall comply in all respects with NEMA, ANSI, IEEE and NEC Standards, all applicable Codes and the requirements of local authorities. " Motors shall be manufactured by one of the approved manufacturers listed in Article 1.22, "Approved Manufacturers". B. Furnish and install all electric motors driving heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment. Motors shall be "high-efficiency" of sizes and types as specified, of the proper power and speed to suit the specified makes of equipment. If other than the specified makes of equipment are accepted, the proper adjustment of motor horsepower, motor speed, wiring, motor disconnect and starter sizing must be included without additional cost. Drawings and data sheets shall be submitted for approval before the equipment is purchased. C. All motors 1/2 horsepower and larger shall operate on 208 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz, alternating current, except as otherwise noted. All motors smaller than 1/2 horsepower shall operate on 120 volt, single phase, 60 hertz, alternating current, except as otherwise noted. D. Motors driving vaneaxial fans and pumps shall be direct connected; motors driving centrifugal fans shall be belt connected. All motors shall be suitable for the use intended i.e. with variable speed (variable frequency/voltage) drives cycled start/stop and/or constant speed as scheduled,. Motors used in variable speed applications shall 40 be designed to operate under variable torque load (or as specified) from maximum rated speed down to 10% of rated speed. Motors shall be designed to operate continuously at any point in the speed range. Any deviation from this requirement shall be noted and submitted with bid. E. In general, except as otherwise specified, all motors shall be open dripproof squirrel- cage induction type, guaranteed to fulfill the specified requirements without producing No any sound audible outside of Machine Rooms. Motors shall be constructed in accordance with the following: 1. NEMA Class "B", with Class "B" or"F" nonhygroscopic insulation. 2. Motors rated for continuous duty shall operate with a 1.15 service factor at 40°C. ambient temperature. Motor temperature ratings shall conform to NEMA Standard MG-1-12.42. ow Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-33 .■ H. Smaller pipes may be suspended from cross-pieces of pipe or steel angles, which, in turn, shall be hung from building concrete construction by means of rods and inserts. The intention is to provide supports which, in each case, shall be amply strong and rigid for the load, but which shall not weaken or unduly stress the building construction. I. Provide approved roller supports, floor stands, wall brackets, etc., for all lines running near the floor or near walls, which can be properly supported or suspended by the floors or walls. Pipelines near walls may also be hung by hangers carried from approved wall brackets at a higher level than the pipe. J. No piping shall be hung from other piping. In no case shall hangers be supported by means of vertical expansion bolts. K. Hangers shall be of heavy construction suitable for the size of pipe to be supported. All materials, except rollers, shall be wrought or malleable iron or steel. Hangers shall be swivel ring, split ring, roller, wrought pipe clamp, or adjustable wrought clevis type. L. Wherever roller type hangers are used, approved steel pipe covering protection saddles shall be spot welded to the piping at each hanger location, except as otherwise specified hereinbelow. M. Piping shall be anchored where required to localize expansion or to prevent undue strain on piping and branches. Anchors shall be entirely separate from hangers and shall be of heavy forged or welded construction of approved design. All anchors shall be submitted and shall include piping reactions which respective anchors are capable of supporting. N. All lines of copper tubing shall be individually supported by approved type hangers not more than six feet apart or as shown on the drawings. Hangers for uncovered lines shall be especially designed for copper tubing and shall be exact o.d. of tubing. , Hangers for covered tubing shall have broad straps fitting outside of covering. O. Hangers for cold piping shall support the pipe without piercing the insulation. Insulation shields shall be used to protect the insulation on cold pipes. Insulation protection saddles shall be welded to insulated hot pipes at roller supports. Wherever fiberglass pipe insulation is installed, Kaylo of equal thickness shall be installed in lieu thereof wherever hangers and insulation shields are installed. It is the intent that the insulation shields shall bear only on an insulation material which is of such density that it will not compress, crush or deform. P. Anything specified in this Article notwithstanding, all hangers and supports shall comply with the requirements prescribed under "Foundations and Vibration Isolation". Q. Coordinate with other Trades to use common means of support. Submit for approval all pertinent design data relating to the support as well as verification of the responsibility for the support. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-32 ,., ON SINGLE ROD SUPPORT Pipe Size Maximum Hanger Spacing Rod Size 1 inch and smaller 6 feet 0 inches 3/8 inch 1-1/4 to 2 inches 9 feet 0 inches 3/8 inch 2-1/2 to 5 inches 10 feet 0 inches 1/2 inch 6 to 14 inches 12 feet 0 inches 5/8 inch 16 to 24 inches 16 feet 0 inches 1 inch DOUBLE ROD SUPPORT Pipe Size Maximum Hanger Spacing Rod Size 6 to 14 inches 12 feet 0 inches 1/2 inch 16 to 24 inches 16 feet 0 inches 3/4 inch C. Maximum hanger spacing may not be exceeded; however, actual installed spacing will depend on location of structural supports and floor slab construction. Where building construction does not permit above spacing, provide additional steel supports. ► D. Where hangers cannot be supported from building structure, they may be supported from concrete inserts, subject to the approval of the Structural Engineer. Furnish, locate and set such inserts and make sure that such inserts are in place when the concrete is poured. Inserts shall be constructed of malleable iron or pressed steel and shall have space for rods of all sizes. All inserts for pipes 3 inches and larger in size - shall be installed with a reinforcing rod 5/8 inch in diameter, run through a slot in the insert specifically provided for this purpose. E. Particular care shall be taken to support all pipe mains, ductwork and all large and NO heavy pipes in a manner approved by the Architect, including the providing of supplementary steel, if required. Shop drawings indicating support methods, P oint loadings to the building structure and hanger locations shall be submitted for review sufficiently in advance of concrete pouring schedules to permit evaluation, critique and any necessary changes to hanging and support methods. F. Set all inserts for all pipes in ample time to allow the work of the other Trades to be performed on scheduled time. G. If any pipe or duct has to be hung in space where no inserts have been provided, install two double expansion shields connected by a 2 inch x 2 inch angle, from which suspend the hanger rod. For pipe sizes 2 inch and under, use a single double expansion shields, but the hanger spacing defined above shall be reduced to 5 feet 0 inches. The minimum size shield acceptable is 3/8 inch. The carrying capacity and size of each shield shall be calculated on the basis of the spacing indicated above but the minimum size shall be 3/8 inch. Additional shields of the same size shall be installed so that the number of hangers are double that allowed for inserts. The rods on all hangers shall be of adequate size to support the loads which they carry. Shields may be used in stone concrete slabs only. No power or powder actuated inserts will be permitted. a�w Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-31 no 3. Where pipes penetrate fire or smoke rated walls, partitions, floor slabs, etc., the space between sleeves and pipe insulation or the pipe of uninsulated service shall be caulked with a UL listed, intumescent type, firestop system. Space between sleeve and pipe/pipe insulation shall be sized in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements for pipe size and damming material thickness for the type of rated construction for which the system is to be used. The firestop systems shall be as manufactured by 3M Fire Protection Products, or as approved. In addition, fit escutcheons on both sides of the construction. C. Set sleeves as construction progresses and secure in place during pouring of concrete. 1. Where cellular steel flooring is installed, furnish and locate sleeves, cut holes through deck, reinforce deck, and set sleeves. Coordinate sleeve locations with the work of other Trades, including flooring and electrical distribution. Submit drawings showing location of holes and proposed reinforcing and obtain Architect's approval before proceeding with installation. D. Do not support pipes by resting clamps on sleeves. Clamps must extend beyond sleeve and be supported outboard of sleeve in an approved manner. E. Provide waterproof type pipe sleeves, Zurn Z-197, with galvanized Schedule 40 pipe extensions where penetrating membrane waterproofed floors. F. For pipes passing through roofs, provide roof couplings (Zurn Z-196-3) at suitable level above roof to terminate flashings. G. Wherever pipes are exposed and pass through walls, floors, partitions or ceilings, fit them with chromium plated cast brass escutcheons held in place with set screws. Fit escutcheons snug over insulation, secure in place. Take special care to protect the escutcheons during the course of construction. H. Where space for future pipe is required, provide sleeves and fill with lightweight concrete. 2.2 HANGERS, ANCHORS,SUPPORTS, GUIDES,ETC. A. Provide suitable and substantial hangers and supports for all horizontal pipes and ductwork. Hangers and supports shall be of the type, size and spacing specified, or as approved. All piping shall be carried by pipe hangers supported from building ! structure. Provide drawings indicating pipe loads, including method of suspension and hanger location, and submit them for approval prior to proceeding with installation. Provide all the supplementary steel required to support, guide and anchor piping within shafts, Mechanical Equipment Rooms and all the other floors. Method of attachment to and load imposed on building structures by hangers, anchors, supports, guides and supplemental steel shall be submitted. All methods of support shall be as manufactured by one of the approved manufacturers listed in Article 1.22, "Approved Manufacturers", and must be submitted and approved by the structural engineer. B. Horizontal piping shall be supported in accordance with the following schedules: .m Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-30 „� e T. Piping insulation(Unit price includes required covering of all fittings, valves, etc.) $ per lin.ft. 1. For each pipe size and thickness for each service as specified $ per lin.ft. NOTE: Submit schedules for hot and cold piping 1/2 inch diameter through 5 inch diameter. U. Piping: Furnished and installed $ per lin.ft. NOTE: Submit schedule covering pipe sizes from 1/2 inch diameter through 5 inch diameter, for screwed and welded piping. Prices for piping shall include hangers. V. Fittings: Furnished and installed $ each NOTE: Submit schedule covering fittings for pipe sizes from 1/2 inch diameter through 8 inch diameter .. for screwed and welded piping. W. Valves: Furnished and installed $ ea. as NOTE: Submit schedule for each specified pressure class and type covering sizes from 1/2 inch to 8 inch. PART 2 PRODUCTS - 2.1 SLEEVES A. Provide sleeves for all pipes and ducts passing through floors, walls, partitions and roofs. 1. Sleeves through concrete walls and exposed pipes and conduits penetrating floors: Schedule 40 steel pipe. 2. Sleeves within furred out enclosures in floors, partitions, through block walls: o 18 gauge galvanized sheet metal. 3. Provide waterproof sleeves in foundation walls and in concrete pits with anchor flanges. B. Provide sleeves with an i.d. at least 1/2 inch greater than outside of pipe served, including pipe insulation which must be continuous through sleeve. 1. Finish sleeves flush with underside of slab and 1 inch above finished floor (4 inches at Mechanical Rooms). No 2. Space between pipes and sleeves in exterior walls, foundation walls and pits shall be equipped with "Link Seal" waterproof assemblies. Where piping penetrates walls (other than foundation walls), partitions, floor slabs, etc., which are of non-rated construction, the space between piping and sleeve shall be packed with mineral wool. e Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-29 ..b H. Changes to ductwork layout necessitating changes in insulation of same (submit for each insulation type as specified): 1. For concealed ductwork $ per sq.ft. 2. For exposed ductwork $ per sq.ft. I. Submit unit prices for registers, grilles,and diffusers .� (for all types and sizes as specified, including linear types on a per lin.ft. basis): $ each 1. Registers $ each 2. Grilles $ each 3. Ceiling diffusers $ each 4. Linear diffusers $ per lin.ft. 5. Linear slots $ per unit 6. Volume controls $ each 7. For distributing(equalizing) grids,volume dampers,blanking baffles $ each J. Variable Volume Boxes and Fan Powered Boxes: Furnish and install, as specified, for each size scheduled on drawings. Unit price shall include thermostatic control. $ each K. Dampers: Furnish and install: 1. Automatic $ each 2. Manual $ per sq.ft. 3. Fire Dampers $ per sq.ft. 4. Splitter Dampers $ per sq.ft. 5. Backdraft Dampers $ per sq.ft. 6. Smoke Dampers $ per sq.ft. L. One inch acoustic lining inside ducts $ per sq.ft. M. Duct turns $ per sq.ft. N. One inch acoustic lining with perforated metal liner inside ducts $ per sq.ft. O. Flexible fan connections $ per sq.ft. w, P. Access doors in ducts, 18 inch x 18 inch minimum $ each Q. Large access doors at built-up casings and plenum ON walls (as detailed on drawings) $ per sq.ft. R. Sound attenuators(for each type specified) $ per sq.ft. S. Wire Mesh Screens: No. 16 gauge, 3/4 inch mesh, square pattern interwoven, galvanized wire and galvanized frame (minimum 2 sq.ft.) $ each Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-28 ,,,,� 40 Vibration Isolators Amber Booth Kinnetics Noise Control Inc. Mason Industries Vibration Eliminator Co. Vibration Mountings& Controls 1.23 UNIT PRICES A. This Contractor shall state in his proposal unit prices in accordance with the following schedule. 40 B. Any additional work not called for under this Contract will be performed by this Contractor at any time and in any quantity as directed by the Construction Manager at the unit prices set forth below. Such work will be performed by this Contractor upon request at any time until final acceptance of all work under this Contract. All such additional work will be performed by the Contractor in accordance with the terms and conditions of this Contract. In the event that the Construction Manager shall direct the w. elimination of any work under this Contract, the Contractor will credit to the Construction Manager the cost of said eliminated work at the unit prices set forth below. C. The unit prices shall include all hangers, inserts, couplings, testing, tools, supervision, labor, coordination, materials, equipment, and all other necessary items to provide the heating, ventilating and air conditioning installation unless noted otherwise. The Contractor has included in the unit prices set forth below receiving, handling, distributing, storing, hoisting and protecting all items provided by him. These unit prices shall include all overhead,profit and taxes. D. Computations of duct weight shall be based on the specified gauge and the square foot area of sheet metal measured from sizes on drawings. Lengths of all ducts and bends shall be computed along the centerline. Shop drawings shall not be used as the basis for comparison. E. Fifteen percent waste factor shall be added to the weight. F. Transformations shall be established at the end of the greater perimeter. ON G. Payment or credit shall be based on the net difference between the drawings and the revisions to same. on 1. G.I. ductwork-rectangular low pressure, sealed $ per lb. 2. G.I. ductwork-rectangular low pressure, unsealed $ per lb. 3. G.I. ductwork-rectangular medium pressure $ per lb. OR 4. G.I. ductwork- spiral constructed medium pressure $ per lb. 5. Transfer ducts furnished and installed(size as $ each detailed on detail sheets) 6. Flexible ducts $ per ft. Smith Campus Center HVAC on 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-27 Swing Check Crane , Grinnell Hammond(I.B. Series only) Milwaukee Powell Rockwell-Nordstrom Walworth Gate Valves Crane Grinnell Hammond(I.B. Series only) Milwaukee + Nordstrom Powell Walworth Globe Valves Crane Grinnell Hammond(I.B. Series only) Milwaukee w.. Nordstrom Powell Walworth Plug Valves (Lubricated Type) DeZurik Milliken Valve Company, Inc. Nordstrom Walworth Plug Valves (Non-Lubricated Type) DeZurik Milliken Valve Company, Inc. Walworth Solenoid Valves Asco Magnatrol Skinner Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-26 Unit Heaters ON Steam/Water Modine Sterling Trane Electric Berko Brasch we Chromolox Electromode Fostoria ON Indeeco Trane Valves Balancing Valves (Water) T&A series STAF/STAD Ball Type Watts(Series B-6001-SS-XH) Balanced Check Hager Mueller no Smolenski Butterfly NOTE: High performance type butterfly valves shall be tier ANSI Class 150, 250 or 300 with double lug body suitable for double dead-end service, with either flange removed in accordance with MSS, SP-67 for Type I valves and/or MSS, SP-68. High-Performance Bray McCanna DeZurik Flow Seal Grinnell Jamesbury Posi-Seal/Fisher Saunders W.K.M. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-25 go .. Pumps Horizontal Split,End Suction and In-Line Chesterton Gould Grundfos a. Sheet Metal Duct Connections A Ductmate TDC TDF *■ Sound Traps MM Dynasonics I.A.C. (Industrial Acoustics Co.) Rink(Not approved for hospitals or labs) United McGill " Vibro-Acoustics Steam Traps Armstrong Hoffman • + Mepco Sarco TLV Yarway Strainers Fabrotech Hoffman Lunkenheimer McAlear Mfg. Co. Metraflex Mueller Sarco Yarway System Identification Seton Nameplate Corp. W. H. Brady Co. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-24 ,,,, 40 Pipe Fittings Steel Pipe Laclede LTV Newport North Star Steel Quanax t Sawhill Sharon U. S. Steel Wheatland Steel Pipe Fittings Hackney Tube Forgings Tube Line Weldbend Corporation Copper Pipe n. American Brass Co. Bridgeport Brass Chase Brass Lewin Matheis Nibco Phelps Dodge Reading Tube Corp. Revere Wolverine Tube Co. Pressure Regulating Valves (Steam) *0 Leslie Spence Pressure Regulating Valves (Water) Leslie Spence Pressure Relief Valves(Steam) Consolidated Farris Kunkle Lunkenheimer Watts Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-23 .. Motors Standard Efficiency(Less Than 1 hp) A. O. Smith General Electric Gould �. Lincoln Magne Tek Marathon Reliance Siemens Allis Toshiba Westinghouse High Efficiency(1 hp and Above) General Electric MagneTek Reliance «*� Toshiba Motor Starters Allen Bradley Cutler Hammer General Electric Gould Siemens Square "D" Westinghouse Motor Controllers (Variable Speed) Allen-Bradley Asea Brown Boveri ,., Dan foss Eaton Hitachi Im Mitsubishi Reliance Robicon Siemens Allis ON Toshiba Yaskawa Electric America to aft Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-22 a* Instruments Pressure Gauges 1.00% Accuracy Ashcroft Trerice Weksler Pressure Switches Barksdale Dwyer on Mercoid Thermometers 1.00% Accuracy so Trerice Weksler so Instrument Test Ports Peterson Equipment No Sisco Insulation wr Armstrong Certain-Teed Knauf Johns-Manville Owens-Corning Fiberglas (O-C-F) P.P.G. (Pittsburgh Plate Glass) Insulation Adhesives Benjamin Foster Company Elgen Insul-Coustic Insulation Pipe Shields Insul-Coustic Div., Insul-Shield Pipe Shields Inc. uar Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-21 Hangers,Anchors and Guides Bee-Line Carpenter Patterson Erico, Michigan Hanger Fee&Mason F& S Central Grinnell Piping Technologies, Inc. Heat Exchangers Shell and Tube Aerco Bell&Gossett .w Patterson-Kelley TACO Thrush Yula Hood Exhaust Systems K-vent Inc. Inserts Bee-Line Carpenter Patterson Erico, Michigan Hanger Fee & Mason F& S Central Grinnell Piping Technologies, Inc. Inserts (Expansion Bolts) NOTE: Powder or power actuated devices, grip nails and adhesive anchors are not to be permitted. Grinnell Hilti Phillips Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-20 ,,�, ns Davidson Fan Company Greenheck so Harrington Jenn-Air Penn Ventilator i Fan Powered Units Anemostat Enviro-Tec Nailor Hart Titus Trane Fan Coil Units Enviro-Tec ,a International McQuay Trane York Flexible Duct Clevaflex, Inc. Flexmaster Genflex Wiremold Flow Measuring Devices Air Systems Air Monitor Corporation Ebtron, Inc. Tek-Air Systems, Inc. Water Systems Badger Balance Master Barco (Venturi Meters) Dietric Standard Ellison Inst. Michigan ON Mid-West Instrument New Buffalo Onicon Presso Steam Systems ON B.I.F. Smith Campus Center HVAC g 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-19 Expansion Tanks Bell &Gossett TACO Fans Axial Type Aerovent Buffalo-Howden Greenheck New Philadelphia Fan Co. (Joy) Strobic Air TFF Aerovent Woods MM Barrel Type(Tubular Centrifugal) Aerovent am Barry Buffalo-Howden Greenheck ,,,,,, Woods Cabinet Fans ON Carnes Greenheck Penn Ventilator ""t Twin City Centrifugal OR Aerovent Barry Bayley Buffalo-Howden Peerless Trane Twin City Mixed Flow Type Buffalo-Howden Woods Roof Type Aerovent Buffalo-Howden .,. Cook w Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-18 Hot Condensate(Low Pressure Steam Return) Bell &Gossett Hoffman Skidmore Cooling/Heating Coils Water/Steam 00 Aerofin Heat Craft Marlo McQuay Temtrol Trane York Electric Brasch Chromalux Electric Heaters Inc. Electromode Indeeco Markel Trane Controllers(Water Level) B&W Magnatrol International, Inc. McDonnell Miller Warrick Dampers(Dynamic Fire/Smoke) Arlan Air Balance Inc. Arrow United Industries Imperial Pottorff xis Ruskin Draft Gauges Dwyer Hays so Smith Campus Center HVAC nw 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-17 on Air Volume Regulators Anemostat Environmental Technology, Inc. Krueger Nailor Industries Titus Trane Baseboard Radiation M. Steam/Water Standard Sterling Trane Vulcan Electric Berko Brasch Electromode Inc. Trane Q Mark Boilers High Efficiency Viessman Breechings and Flues Ambco Industries Metal-Fab •+� The Schebler Co. Condensate Pumps Cold Condensate Federal Hartell Little Giant Shipco Watsco Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-16 ,,,� substitutions shall be all inclusive of all cost and physical implications throughout the project. Under no circumstances should the substitution result in added cost to the project. Project specifications/documents will not be revised to reflect the substitution should the substitution be approved. Access Doors Finished Construction Karp Mil-Cor Sheet Metal Duct Mate Flexmaster Access Door Hardware(Sheet Metal) Duro Dyne Ventlok ?A* Air Filters Air Guard American Air Filter(AAF) Cam-Farr Continental National Air Filter Air Handling Units Packaged Self-Contained Chilled Water Air Conditioning Units Buffalo McQuay Trane York Air Outlets Air Concepts Air Devices Anemostat Enviro-Air Krueger Nailor Industries Titus w Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-15 1.20 RECORD DRAWINGS A. During construction, keep an accurate record of all deviations between the work as .. shown on drawings and that which is actually installed. This record set of prints shall be kept at job site for inspection by the Architect. B. Upon completion of the installation, obtain from the Architect a complete set of mylar "'" transparencies on heavy gauge film. Enter thereon, in a neat and accurate manner, a complete record of all revisions of the original drawings, as actually installed. The cost for transparencies and for making the required changes shall be borne by this 4W Contractor. Submit one set of black and white prints of these revised transparencies to Architects and Consulting Engineers for review. After review by Architects and Consulting Engineers, make necessary changes to transparencies and then deliver no them to the Architects for transmittal to the Owner,before final payment is made. 1.21 GUARANTEE as A. Submit a single guarantee stating that all portions of the work are in accordance with Contract requirements. Guarantee all work against faulty and improper material and MR workmanship for a period of one year from date of final acceptance by the Owner, except that where guarantees or warranties for longer terms are specified herein, such longer term shall apply. At no additional cost to Owner, within 24 hours after notification, correct any deficiencies which occur during the guarantee period, all to the satisfaction of the Owner and Architect. This Contractor shall require similar guarantees from his Subcontractors. B. Be responsible for all leaks in all pipes for a period of one year from date of acceptance of work under this Contract. Repair at not cost to Owner all such leaks which occur within 24 hours notice thereof by the Owner. Leaks which occur prior to the completion of this Contract shall be repaired at once. Be responsible for any damage caused by such leaks and repair thereof and reimburse Owner for all expense incurred thereby. This Contractor indemnifies the Owner, the Architect, the Consulting Engineers and the Construction Manager against loss, liability, damage or expense, including reasonable attorneys' fees, in connection with any claim resulting from such leaks which may be asserted by Tenants or any other third person. C. All refrigeration compressors shall be warranted for five (5)years, including labor. 1.22 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish all major items of equipment and materials as made by the manufacturers listed herein. B. Being listed herein as an approved manufacturer does not permit the manufacturer to provide standard manufactured equipment which does not comply with the performance and/or physical characteristic requirements of the contract documents. C. All substitutions must be included in the contractors base bid, and must be accompanied by a letter of equivalency certifying the products equivalency in all performance and physical characteristics to the products listed herein. The proposed Smith Campus Center HVAC 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-14 the necessary revisions to other related work required by the Contract Documents. The judgment of the Architect and/or Engineer with respect to the adequacy and w acceptability of a proposed substitution shall be final and binding on the Contractor, and shall not be subject to question in any other place. After the expiration of this period, substitutions for material or equipment shall not be proposed or requested in shop drawing and sample submittals, and the Contractor will be required to execute the work in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents. N. Within six weeks after award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit a schedule listing all shop drawings and samples with the projected date that each item will be submitted to the Architect and/or Engineer for review. 1.19 SUBMITTALS A. Submit detailed shop layout drawings for each floor of the project, including all the Mechanical Equipment Rooms, showing equipment,piping work and ductwork. Shop drawings shall be 3/8 inch equal to 1 ft. 0 in. scale. Shop drawings shall also indicate the point loading and spacing of each hanger and the method of support. Drawings shall include full coordinated plans and sections for Mechanical Equipment Rooms, floor plans and risers. In addition, required detail drawings, such as anchor and guide details, coil and equipment connections, radiation piping within enclosures, built-up casing details,plenum details, etc., shall be submitted. B. Submit manufacturer's data or shop drawings of the following: Pumps Vibration Isolation Devices Packaged Air Conditioning Units Fire Dampers Equipment Foundations Heating Coils Motors Boilers Motor Starters Schedule of Piping Materials, Fittings, Fans Valves, Hangers, Insulation Air Filters Sheet Metal Construction and Water Treatment Equipment Fabrication Details (Standards) Variable Air Volume Boxes Cooling Coils Fan Powered Variable Air Volume Boxes Grilles,Registers and Diffusers Unit Heaters Fan Coil Units Instruments Smoke Dampers Sound Traps Automatic Louver Dampers Panelboards Variable Speed Drives Air Handling Units C. Names, sizes, catalogue numbers and/or samples of the following specialties shall also be submitted for review, unless otherwise directed: Strainers Safety Valves Valves Air Diffusers Check Valves Relief Valves Hangers and Inserts Registers Sleeves and Escutcheons Thermostats Valve Tags Sheet Metal Flexible Connectors am Air Vent Valves Acoustic Materials Insulation Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.1 1.12 15600-13 G. The Contractor shall carefully check shop drawings and samples, including those received by him from Subcontractors and material men, for accuracy, completeness of required information and conformance with the Contract Documents. Shop drawings found to be inaccurate, incomplete or not in conformance with the Contract " Documents shall be corrected before being submitted to the Architect and/or Engineer for review. H. Each submitted shop drawing shall bear the Contractor's stamped and signed certification that the work has been checked for all related job conditions, for maintenance of architectural conditions, and coordinated with the shop drawings of other affected trades for interrelated work, as required for the proper and complete performance of the work. No shop drawing submittal will be reviewed without this certification. I. Each shop drawing and sample submitted for review shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal, and shall be identified by the project title, Contractor's name, and a �► reference to the related part of the Contract Documents. J. Shop drawings for manufactured material and equipment shall include model numbers, dimension drawings, operating weights, material specifications, operating features and controls, wiring diagrams, performance characteristics, service procedures, including clearance requirements for maintenance work,and conformance to the specified codes and code ratings. Note that in addition to these requirements, other specific submittal data, and forms of data submission, are required by the Contract Documents for particular items of equipment and material. K. Shop drawings for Equipment Rooms, and for piping, conduit and similar distribution services shall show by dimension the exact size and location of each element of the system in both the horizontal and vertical plane, as well as relationship to the building structure, architectural construction, equipment, and the work of other Trades. Pads, foundations, anchorages, supports and attachments to the building structure where required for the installation of the work shall be shown in layout and detail with sizes, dimensions, materials and methods of construction noted. L. Samples shall be identical in all respects to the material which is to be installed or applied in the execution of the work, and shall be of sufficient size or quantity to permit proper evaluation and review. Manufacturer's descriptive labels and printed application instructions which are normally attached to the material or its packaging shall be furnished with the sample. Samples shall be submitted for review when " requested by the Architect and/or Engineer. M. Within three weeks after award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit for the Architect's and/or Engineer's review, a list of the manufacturers and Subcontractors whose products and services he proposes to use for the work. Proposed substitutions for material and equipment required by the Contract Documents shall be submitted to the Architect and/or Engineer for review during this period. Submittals proposing or requesting substitutions shall be expressly identified as such in a letter of transmittal, with the reasons for requesting the substitution stated. Submittals for this purpose shall be complete in every respect, shall conform to all the information requirements for shop drawing and sample submittals, and shall include, at no cost to the Owner, Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-12 B. Furnish a list of manufacturers (with names of local representatives) in order to expedite ordering of replacement parts. 1.18 ARCHITECT'S AND/OR ENGINEER'S REVIEW A. The Architect and/or Engineer will review shop drawings and samples for conformance with the design concept of the project and the information contained in the Contract Documents. The Architect's and/or Engineer's review of shop drawings and samples is only for the convenience of the Owner in following the work and does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect's and/or Engineer's review shall not be construed as a complete or detailed check of the work submitted, nor shall it relieve the 40 Contractor of responsibility for errors of any sort in the shop drawings and samples,or from the necessity of furnishing any work required by the Contract Documents which have been omitted from the shop drawing submittals. The review of a separate item shall not indicate review of the complete assembly in which it functions. Nothing in the Architect's and/or Engineer's review of shop drawings and samples shall be considered as authorizing additional cost to the Owner or increased time for completion of the work. B. The Architect and/or Engineer will review shop drawings and samples with reasonable promptness and will return them to the Contractor stamped to indicate the appropriate action as described in "General and Supplementary Conditions". C. Architect's and/or Engineer's review is for general compliance with the design concept w. and contract documents. Markings or comments or the lack thereof shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from compliance with the project plans and Specifications. The Contractor remains solely responsible for details and accuracy, 40 for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of construction, for performing his work in a safe manner, and for coordinating his work with that of other Trades. 00 D. The term "shop drawings" shall include layout, detail, and assembly drawings, diagrams, schedules, catalogue sheets, printed descriptive matter, and tabular and graphical presentations of operating and performance data that describe work required ' by the Contract Documents. E. No part of the work shall be started in the shop or in the field until the Architect and/or Engineer has reviewed the shop drawings and samples for that portion of the work. Thereafter, the work shall be executed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the indicated status of the reviewed shop drawing. 00 F. Shop drawings and samples shall be submitted for review sufficiently in advance of the scheduled start of the work in the shop or in the field to allow ample time, in consideration of the number and complexity of the drawings in the submittal, for the Architect and/or Engineer to make an orderly review. No extension of the time to complete the work will be granted to the Contractor by reason of his failure in this respect. ors Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-11 2. Each set shall consist of one band on which the name of the service is printed in black letters not less than 2 inches high for 3 inch pipe and larger, 1 inch high for pipe 2-1/2 inches and smaller and one band on which is printed a black directional arrow. Bands shall be applied where they can be easily read and with their long dimension parallel to the axis of the pipe. Bands shall have backgrounds of different colors for the various service groups. Colors shall conform to ANSI Standard A-13.1. 3. Adhesive bands shall be W. H. Brady Company's "Quik-Label", or as approved. G. A schedule of symbols shall be stenciled on ducts and fans for identification; the stenciling shall be done by this Contractor. "Brady" system of identification shall be employed. 1.16 PROTECTIVE PAINTING A. Provide protective painting as herein specified. Finished painting will be done by another Trade. B. Provide a heavy field coat of black asphaltum paint of all steel pipe,cradles, vibration isolating mounts, and the like, that will be encased or partially encased in building construction, set in cement or fill,before items are built into the general construction. C. Motors, fans and all other factory manufactured apparatus shall be factory coated with one coat of primer and one coat of machinery enamel, and after installation shall be cleaned and touched up to repair any damage incurred during construction. ... D. Coat interior of each outdoor air chamber with two coats of odorless, rust resisting, nonscaling paint. E. Coat interior of ducts at register boxes with two coats of black paint, to a dull finish. F. All pumps, motors, fans and all other factory manufactured and assembled apparatus shall be factory coated with one coat of primer and one coat of machinery enamel,and after installation shall be cleaned and touched up to repair any damage incurred during construction. G. All finished painting, except as noted above, including the painting of the various piping systems, will be done under Specifications of other Trades, except as otherwise « described herein. 1.17 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS WN A. Three sets of operating and maintenance instruction manuals, covering completely equipment starting sequences, operation, maintenance, automatic controls, equipment, and listing of all spare parts, shall be furnished to Owner. In addition, one set of ' ' operating and maintenance instructions for the rooftop air conditioning systems and the toilet exhaust system shall be neatly laminated in permanently translucent plastic and hung where directed. Three sets of lubricating charts and manuals for each item "" of equipment shall be furnished to Owner. to Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-10 oft B. Maintain all existing bench marks, monuments and other reference points and perform all field engineering required to insure that work under this Section shall conform with grades, elevations and line required. 1.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. In general, cutting and patching will be done under other Sections of the Specifications. B. Furnish to the Construction Manager necessary information so that openings for this work can be built into the floors and walls in time. Such cooperation is required to keep cutting of walls and floors to a minimum. to C. Set sleeves for pipes accurately before concrete floors are poured, or set boxes on the forms to leave openings in the floors and subsequently set required sleeves in the ON openings. 1.15 IDENTIFICATION OF SYSTEMS A. Provide three sets of charts or diagrams, on cloth, showing outline plans of structures and essential features of the several systems, including all piping, ducts, equipment, valves, dampers and controls. B. All valves, dampers, and controls shall be designated by distinguishing numbers on the charts or diagrams. Provide stamped brass tags for all designated items with numbers corresponding to those of the charts. The nomenclature to be used on these tags shall be submitted to the Consulting Engineer for approval. C. The tags shall be not less than 2 inches in diameter with depressed black numbers of 1/2 inch height, prefixed by the letters "HVAC". They shall be fastened to valves and controls with approved brass chains and hooks. WA D. Furnish to the Owner's representative complete valve tag schedules, printed on cloth, properly mounted in three 8-1/2 x 11 ring binders. A reproducible drawing of valve schedule shall also be turned over to the Owner for his use. Also furnish schematic flow chart with corresponding valve numbers noted on chart. E. Valve tag schedules shall show valve location by floor and nearest column number 0" and shall also show the valve size and service. F. Piping identification shall be in conformance with the following: 00 1. Provide and affix approved adhesive bands identifying the service, by system and zone, and direction of flow to the various piping systems. Such bands shall be provided in all occupied and unoccupied rooms as well as in all the other spaces (such as shafts) in which piping may be viewed. A set of such bands shall be affixed to each pipe not less frequently than every forty feet and there shall be at least one set of identifying bands per pipe in each space requiring identifying bands. Identifying bands shall also be provided adjacent to each valve. Valves at equipment and pumps do not require separate identification. Smith Campus Center HVAC am 100% Construction Documents: 01.l 1.12 15600-9 ON 00 penetrations and slab penetrations shall be indicated and sized and shall be coordinated. All work routed underground or embedded in concrete shall be indicated by dimension to column and building lines and shall be coordinated. This requirement for "Coordination Drawings" shall not be construed as authorization for �` the Contractor or Subcontractor to make any unauthorized changes to the Contract Drawings. All Contract Drawing space allocations shall be maintained, such as ceiling height, eight(8) inch high zone installation free zone as discussed hereinbefore directly above the ceiling reserved for tenant build-out and flexibility, chase walls, equipment room size, etc., unless prior written authorization is received from the Architect to change them. Prior to final acceptance of the work of this Division, the Contractor shall give the two (2) copies of the drawing files, in AutoCAD Release 14 on "Zip Drive" diskettes, and two (2) hardcopy "as-built" drawings, one (1) of which shall be furnished on wash-off mylar transparencies on heavy gauge film and one (1) w.. of which shall be on paper containing the Contractor's coordination documentation to the Owner. 1.11 SUBCONTRACTS A. Where Contract Documents require manufacturers' services, and wherever the staff of the Trade performing the work of this Section cannot adequately perform such services, this Trade shall stipulate such performance in its contracts with its Contractors or Subcontractors, vendors, manufacturers, and the like, or else subsequently pay them any additional fees required therefor. 1.12 CODES AND PERMITS A. Install all work in full accordance with the requirements of all local and governmental departments having jurisdiction over these matters, as well as with any requirements of the local building, 1996 BOCA Basic Building, Mechanical, Fire Prevention and Energy Codes, the 1996 Edition of the National Fire Protection Association National Electric Code, NFPA, UL and other applicable Codes. Secure and pay for necessary approvals, permits, inspections, carting, legal dumping, etc., and deliver the official records of the granting of permits to the Owner without additional cost to the Owner. B. The drawings will be filed by others. Contractor shall pay all fees to obtain release of approved plans and shall complete and file all forms, tabulations, plans, etc., required by the applicable Codes and accomplish such work with personnel of proper caliber, in particular Professional Engineers, where so required. C. Pay royalties or fees required in connection with the use of patented devices, or systems, and save the Owner, the Consulting Engineer and the Construction Manager harmless from any claims or lawsuits arising from such use and indemnify each thereof against attorneys' fees in connection therewith. 1.13 ENGINEERING REFERENCE POINTS A. The Construction Manager will provide bench marks, monuments, and other reference points on the job which will be available for this Contractor's use. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-8 "M loadings and has included in his estimates the costs associated in furnishing required supports. Aw H. Field drilling, cutting and/or reinforcing of holes in structural metal deck required for work under this Section shall be coordinated through the Construction Manager and approved by the Structural Engineer. All such drilling, cutting and reinforcing costs shall be borne by this Contractor. I. Due to the type of the installation, a fixed sequence of operation is required to properly install the complete systems. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to coordinate, protect and schedule his work with other Trades in accordance with the construction sequence. wir J. Architectural drawings shall be checked for ceiling height requirements. 1.10 CONTRACTOR'S COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall coordinate efforts of all trades and shall furnish (in writing, with copies to the Architect and Construction Manager) any information necessary to WA permit the Work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay. • B. This Contractor and his Subcontractors shall prepare a complete set of construction "Coordination Drawings" indicating the equipment actually purchased and the exact location of the equipment and the exact routing and elevations for all lines such as piping, busway, conduit, ductwork, etc., including conduit embedded in concrete (where permitted). All dimensions shall be referenced to building structural center lines. The "Coordination Drawing"preparation and completion shall comply with the requirements of the project construction schedule. Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall obtain from the Architect or Engineer a set of AutoCAD Release 14 or compatible format Architectural and Engineering Drawings files to be used to produce the "Coordination Drawings". The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall give to the Architect and Engineer the written release included as part of this Section of the Specification as Appendix A, signed by a corporate officer of the Contractor and each Subcontractor who requires the diskettes, prior to receipt of the diskettes. The sheet metal drawings, prepared on electronic media(CAD)at a scale not less than 3/8 in. = 1 ft. 0 in. shall serve as the base drawings to which all other Contractors will overlay and add their work. Each trade shall draw their work on separate layers represented by individual colors. Each "Coordination Drawing" shall be completed and signed off by the other Contractors and this Contractor prior to the installation of the work in the area covered by the specific coordination drawing. The Contractors work shall be installed in accordance with the shop drawings and the "Coordination Drawings". If the Contractor allows one trade to install their work before coordinating with the work of other trades, the Contractor shall make necessary changes to correct the condition without extra cost to the Owner. The Contractor's "Coordination Drawings" indicating piping, conduit, busway, and equipment support points and loads exceeding 500 lb. imposed on the building structure shall be submitted to the Project Structural Engineer for review and approval. The elevation, location, support points, static, dynamic and expansion forces and loads imposed on the structure at support, and anchor points, and the size of all lines shall be indicated. All beam Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-7 00 w. 1.8 VERIFYING EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Before commencing work, examine all adjoining work on which this work is in any way dependent for perfect workmanship according to the intent of this Specification, and report to Construction Manager any condition which prevents performance of first-class work. No "waiver of responsibility" for incomplete, inadequate or defective adjoining work will be considered unless notice has been filed before submittal of a .,,. proposal. B. Become thoroughly familiar with actual existing conditions. The intent of the work is shown on the drawings and described hereinafter, and no consideration will be granted by reason of lack of familiarity on the part of the Contractor with actual physical conditions at the site. Inspect each and every area affected by the total alteration of the building before submitting bid and report to the consulting engineers any conflicts that are found between the design drawings and the actual existing conditions. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Certain materials will be furnished, installed, or furnished and installed, under other Sections of the Specifications. Examine the Contract Documents to ascertain these requirements. B. Carefully check space requirements with other Trades to insure that all material can be installed in the spaces allotted thereto. Finished suspended ceiling elevations are indicated on the general construction drawings. C. Transmit to Trades doing work of other Sections all information required for work to be provided under their respective Sections (such as fresh water connections, foundations, electric wiring, access doors, and the like) in ample time for installation. D. Wherever this Contractor's work interconnects with work of other Contractors, this Contractor shall coordinate his work with these Contractors to insure that all Contractors have the information necessary so that they may properly install all the + • necessary connections and equipment. Identify all work items (valves, etc.) in an approved manner in order that the Ceiling Trade may know where to install access doors and panels. ..N, E. Caution workers both verbally and in writing as to the dangers involved in doing work within or adjacent to electrical closets on various floors, the Mechanical Rooms and the Switchgear Room, due to dangers caused by presence of high voltages and currents in these spaces. F. Furnish and set all sleeves for passage of pipes through structural masonry and concrete walls and floors and elsewhere as required for proper protection of each pipe passing through building surfaces. Coordinate this work with Construction Manager in order to properly expedite and perform this work. G. Provide required supports and hangers for piping and equipment, so that loading will not exceed allowable loadings of structure. Submittal of a bid shall be deemed a „�.. representation that the Contractor submitting such bid has ascertained allowable Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-6 J. Become thoroughly acquainted with the work involved, obtain and verify at the `-' building all measurements necessary for the proper installation of work. Furnish to other Contractors any information relating to work of this Section necessary for the proper installation of their Contracts. Confer with other Contractors for finish adjacent to work of this Section and arrange to have visible portions of the work(such as access doors, escutcheons, etc.) fit in and harmonize with the finish in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. K. Make every effort to furnish all equipment of any equipment type (such as motors, or motor controls,pumps, valves, etc.) from one manufacturer. L. Where disagreements occur between the plans and the specifications, or within either document itself, the item or arrangement of better quality, greater quantity or higher cost shall be included in the base bid. M. The drawings show the various piping and duct systems schematically. No added so compensation will be permitted for variations due to field conditions. N. Provide all rigging required for complete installation and furnish drawings showing necessary points of support, reactions and supplementary bracing. This shall be submitted for approval by Owner. Should any shoring be required,provide same after Owner's approval. O. Equipment and materials shall be new and listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., manufactured in accordance with ASME, ASHRAE, NEMA, ANSI or IEEE standards,and approved by the local authorities having jurisdiction. P. The entire installation shall be ready in every respect for satisfactory and efficient operation when completed. Q. Where, due to union regulations or trade agreements, any of the work shown on the drawings or specified herein is not considered Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Work, subcontract the work in question, but assume full responsibility for the complete installation. R. Consult with Trades doing work of other Sections so that, wherever possible, motors, w motor controls, pumps and valves are of the same manufacture. S. Deliver all equipment with prime coat of machine enamel. Clean up all equipment 0 and leave in condition for finish painting before acceptance. T. Provide a heavy field coat of black asphaltum paint on all steel pipe, cradles, vibration isolating mounts, or the like, that will be encased or partially encased in the building ? ! construction, set in cement or fill, before items are built into the general construction. U. Continuous slots and openings in finished ceilings will be provided under other Sections of the Specifications. �r V. Any references in this Specification or on the plans which refer to work to be performed or provided by the Construction Manager or "by others" is intended to mean that the required work will be provided under another Section of the Specifications. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-5 oft C. This Contractor covenants and agrees that he and his Subcontractors and his and their agents, servants and employees will provide and maintain a safe place to work and that he and they will comply with all laws and regulations of any governmental authority having jurisdiction thereof. This Contractor agrees to indemnify,defend and hold harmless the Owner, Owner's agents, Architects and Consulting Engineer from and against any liability, loss, damage or expense, including attorneys' fees, arising from a failure or alleged failure on the part of this Contractor, his Subcontractors and his and their agents, servants and employees to provide and maintain a safe place to work or to comply with all laws and regulations of any governmental authority having jurisdiction thereof. D. This Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify, defend and hold harmless the Owner, Owner's agents, Architect and Consulting Engineer against any liability, loss, damage or expenses, including attorneys' fees, arising from a failure or alleged failure on the part of this Contractor, his Subcontractors or his or their agents, servants and employees properly to discharge the obligations assumed by him or them in the performance of the work, including any act or omission allegedly resulting in death or personal injury or property damage or improper construction, construction techniques, or the use of improper or inappropriate material or tools. WAR E. The Contractor agrees that any controversy or dispute to which the Contractor, the Owner and the Consulting Engineers are parties shall be submitted to the American Arbitration Association for decision in accordance with the rules of such Association for construction industry disputes. All Contractors likewise agree to submit to such arbitration any dispute between or among them, the Contractor, the Owner and the Consulting Engineers, and the Contractor agrees to make available to the Consulting Engineers, on demand, signed copies of the contract between the Owner and the Contractor and between the Contractor and his Subcontractors. The Contractor and each Subcontractor agree that by submitting a bid, which is accepted, this paragraph shall be deemed a written agreement to submit any controversy thereafter arising to arbitration. F. Put work in place as fast as reasonably possible; at all times, keep a competent foreman in charge of the work and facilitate its inspection by the Owners and Consulting Engineers. G. Except for such changes as may be specifically approved by the Consulting Engineers, in accordance with alternates or options stated hereinafter, all work must be in full accordance with the intent of the plans and specifications, complete in every way and ready for satisfactory and efficient operation when delivered to the Owner. H. Guarantee that the materials and workmanship supplied under these Specifications will be of the best grade, that the apparatus will be erected in a practical and first-class manner, that it will be complete in operation, nothing being omitted in the way of ' labor and material required to make it so, although not specifically shown or mentioned herein and that it will be delivered in well working order, complete and perfect in every respect, without additional cost-- whether or not shown in detail on the drawings or described in detail in this Specification. I. Provide signs required by the municipal authorities. w Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-4 F. Base flashing for all roof equipment,ductwork and piping penetrations. G. Excavation and backfill. H. Cutting and patching. ! ' I. Finished painting. J. Electric power wiring, except that furnished as an integral part of factory assembled equipment and as otherwise specified herein. K. Installation of plaster frames for diffusers, grilles and/or registers and access doors in finished construction furnished as the work of this Section. L. Framed openings and curbs for roof fans,etc. M. Floor and funnel drains adjacent to equipment requiring the same. N. Undercutting of doors or louvers in doors. O. Fusible link fire dampers at louvers in fire rated doors. P. Domestic hot water heaters. Q. All motor disconnect switches and circuit breakers, except in combination starters and where otherwise noted. R. Mounting of all starters and motor control devices, except factory mounted and wired as part of the equipment. S. Smoke detector elements and related wiring. T. Linear slots in finished ceilings for purpose of air supply or return(terminal air outlets shall be coordinated with the furnished linear slots). w U. Double wall insulating backup panels for all inactive louvers. 1.7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Execute the work in the best and most thorough manner and to the satisfaction of the Owner and Consulting Engineer, who will jointly interpret the meaning of the drawings and specifications and shall have the power to reject any work and materials which, in their judgment, are not in full accordance therewith. B. Be responsible for material and workmanship until completion and final acceptance. on Replace any of same which may be damaged, lost or stolen, without additional cost to Owner. Guard the building and its contents against damage by this Contractor, his employees or Subcontractors, and make good any damage free of charge. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-3 so 1.3 NOTICE TO BIDDERS A. Before submittal of bid, examine all drawings, specifications, addenda, alternates, special conditions, and all other bidding documents of all Sections of this project, verify all governing conditions at the site, and become fully informed as to the extent and character of the work required, as well as its relation to other work in the building. Submittal of a bid is an agreement to all requirements of the Contract Documents, and *" no consideration will be granted for any claimed misunderstanding thereof. B. Submittal of a bid is deemed a representation by the bidder that it is qualified in all ..� respects properly to perform the work for which it is bidding and has experience with similar work. Bidders are deemed to be aware, on the basis of their background and experience, of materials which may be required in the discharge of their responsibilities, even though unspecified. For example, claims for extras for unspecified shoring or supporting materials will not be considered if the need for such materials would have been reasonably obvious to bidders skilled and experienced in the work to be done, and the submittal of a bid shall be deemed a waiver of any such claims. 1.4 CONTRACTOR A. Throughout these Specifications, the term "this Contractor" shall be understood to mean the individual, partnership or corporation to whom has been awarded the contract for providing the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Work. 1.5 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide all materials, labor, equipment, tools, appliances, services, hoisting, scaffolding, support and supervision for the furnishing and installing of all the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Work, and all related work complete, in .Me accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.6 WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. All finished painting of exposed pipes, apparatus, etc., except as otherwise specified herein. 4W B. Outside air intake and discharge louvers, bulkheads, intake and exhaust penthouses, etc., with screens in walls. .a C. Custom convector enclosures, fan coil unit enclosures and ornamental grilles. D. All concrete foundations, curbs, pads and blocks for equipment mounting (except as .� otherwise noted hereinafter), except that anchor bolts and templates shall be furnished to the Construction Manager by this Contractor. Drawings of equipment foundations, curbs, pads and blocks (with required reinforcing rods, etc., indicated) shall be furnished by this Contractor to the Structural Engineer for approval. E. Access doors in finished building construction. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-2 SECTION 15600 HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General and Supplementary General Conditions accompanying these f" Specifications are hereby made a part of the requirements for the work under this Section of the Specifications. B. Where General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions clauses are repeated in these Specifications, it is to call special attention to them, or as a further qualification. No General Conditions and/or Supplementary General Conditions clause referring to the work of this Section shall be considered waived unless specifically stated herein. C. The "General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for Construction" A.I.A. No Document No. A-201,latest edition, shall be included as part of this Section. 1.2 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Design Conditions 1. Outside Winter: -5°F. Summer: 91°F. d.b., 73°F. w.b. 2. Inside a. Heating Lounges, Dining, Performance, Offices 72°F. 00 Mechanical Rooms 60°F. Elevator Machine Rooms 60°F. b. Cooling 0% Lounges, Dining, 750F. ±20F. Performance, Offices 50% R.H. maximum. Mechanical Rooms Mechanical ventilation. Elevator Machine Rooms Air conditioned. 3. Outside Air Quantity All Areas 20 cfm per person 4. Space Noise Criteria (NC). All spaces designed for NC-35 except: a. Radio Station Booth NC-25 b. Multi-purpose Space and Conference Room NC-30 C. Atrium and Corridors NC-40 d. Toilets NC-45 Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-1 .A ww TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Article Title Page 15600- 2.15 Steam Specialties 64 2.16 Steam Pressure Reducing Valves 64 2.17 Condensate Pumps 65 + 2.18 Flash Tanks 66 2.19 Centrifugal Pumps 66 2.20 Boiler(Hot Water) 67 .. 2.21 Boiler Breeching and Chimney 67 2.22 Unit Heaters 67 2.23 Finned Tube Convectors 68 2.24 Converters 69 2.25 Cooling and Heating Coils 69 2.26 Factory Assembled Supply Fan Units 71 2.27 Centrifugal Fans 72 2.28 Axial Flow Fans 74 2.29 Air Filters 76 2.30 Sheet Metal Ductwork 77 2.31 Access Doors 82 2.32 Access Doors in Finished Construction 83 2.33 Dampers 84 .e 2.34 Flexible Connections 85 2.35 Variable and Constant Volume Boxes(DDC) 85 2.36 Fan Powered Variable Air Volume Boxes(DDC) 87 2.37 Radiated Noise from Vav Units 89 2.38 Grilles, Registers and Diffusers 90 2.39 Acoustic Treatment 92 ,. 2.40 Variable Speed Motor Controllers 95 2.41 Electric Wiring 102 2.42 Electric Motor Controls 103 2.43 Instruments 104 2.44 Water Treatment 105 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Cleaning and Testing 110 3.2 Installation of Piping 112 3.3 Protection for Piping 113 r,. Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-2 SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING TABLE OF CONTENTS Article Title Page 15600- PART1 GENERAL �Ir 1.1 Related Documents 1 1.2 Design Criteria 1 1.3 Notice to Bidders 2 1.4 Contractor 2 1.5 Scope of Work 2 1.6 Work of Other Sections 2 1.7 General Requirements 3 1.8 Verifying Existing Conditions 6 1.9 Coordination 6 1.10 Contractor's Coordination Drawings 7 1.11 Subcontracts 8 1.12 Codes and Permits 8 1.13 Engineering Reference Points 8 1.14 Cutting and Patching 9 1.15 Identification of Systems 9 1.16 Protective Painting 10 1.17 Operating and Maintenance Instructions 10 1.18 Architect's and/or Engineer's Review 11 1.19 Submittals 13 1.20 Record Drawings 14 1.21 Guarantee 14 1.22 Approved Manufacturers 14 1.23 Unit Prices 27 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Sleeves 29 2.2 Hangers, Anchors, Supports, Guides, Etc. 30 2.3 Motors 33 2.4 Identification of Systems 35 2.5 Foundations, Vibration Isolation Incorporating Seismic Restraints 36 2.6 Seismic Restraints 45 2.7 Insulation 46 2.8 Materials for Piping 53 2.9 Pipe Fittings 55 2.10 Valves 58 2.11 Pneumatic Diaphragm Expansion Tanks 62 2.12 Automatic Air Eliminators 62 2.13 Strainers 63 2.14 Relief Valves 64 Smith Campus Center HVAC 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15600-1 C. Furnish and pay for all devices, materials, supplies, labor and power required in connection with tests. Make all tests in the presence and to the satisfaction of the Architect, Insurance Underwriters and City Inspectors having jurisdiction. D. Repair, or if required by the Architect replace, defective work with new work without extra charge to the Owner. Repeat tests as directed, until all work is proven satisfactory. E. Restore to its original condition any work damaged or disturbed by tests, engaging the original Trades to do the work of restoration. F. Notify the Architect and Inspectors having jurisdiction at least 48 hours in advance of making the required tests, so that arrangements may be made for their presence to witness the tests. G. Test equipment in service and demonstrate that the equipment performs the work intended for it and that it complies with the requirements of these Specifications for .. such equipment. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove from entire installation of work all protecting materials, dirt, dust, smears, stains, paint spots, and the like,and leave in a clean condition. B. As soon as sprinkler heads are in place, cover each head with a small paper bag of an approved type, and remove it only after all painting is complete. After the bag is removed, clean and polish all heads. C. Cover and protect all openings left in floor for passage of pipes. Protect pipes with suitable coverings as soon as set. Close all open ends of pipes with a plug fitting to prevent obstruction and damage. «■t D. Protect the system against freezing in cold weather. E. Before final connections are made and before operation of equipment and piping, thoroughly blow out, rod out, or wash out all piping, at least twice in a manner as directed and/or approved by the Architect, to remove all accumulation of dirt, chips or other deleterious material. Make all temporary connections and furnish all appliances required for the purpose of cleaning at no extra expense to the Owner. END OF SECTION 15500 X:\projects\1 19\1 1993-Smith CollegeASpecAfire protection_!00%Construction_01-1 1-12_aj m-krs.doc waiA Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-26 B. This Contractor shall provide all equipment and appurtenances necessary to complete the installation according to Code requirements, whether indicated on the drawings or not. Include in proposal the complete installation of the quantity of heads indicated on the drawing with all required piping, valves, etc. The layout to be determined and shop drawings prepared after the Tenant layouts and reflected ceiling plans are available. C. Install sprinkler heads in all areas on a true axis line in both directions with a maximum deviation of 1/2 inch plus or minus from the axis line as established by the Architect for use of all trades. At the completion of the installation, remove and reinstall any heads found to exceed the above mentioned tolerance. Install flush plate sprinkler heads within manufacturer's tolerances. Prior to installation of flush plates, notify Architect and Consulting Engineer for verification of installation. Install U- bends for all pendent heads. Any heads found out of tolerance shall be removed and reinstalled. D. Do not install pipes or other apparatus in a manner which interferes with the full swing of the doors. E. The arrangement, positions and connections of pipes, drains, valves, and the like, indicated on the drawings shall be followed as closely as possible, but the right is reserved by the Architect to change locations, and elevations, to accommodate conditions which may arise during the progress of the work, without additional compensation to this Contractor for such changes, provided that no additional heads are required and changes are requested prior to the installation of the work. The responsibility for accurately laying out the work rests with this Contractor. Should it be found that any work is laid out so that interferences will occur, report that to the Architect before commencing work. F. Ream all pipe smooth before installation. Do not bend, split, flatten nor otherwise injure pipe. G. Provide protective pans under or over individual pipes passing high voltage (440 V) electrical bus duct or switchgear equipment. Construct the pans of 12 gauge black iron with a 6 inch lip, the corners being welded to make the pans watertight. Give 0" each pan three coats of Rust-Oleum paint and support with pipe hangers, and drain clear of the bus duct or switchgear. H. Install all pendent sprinkler heads in exposed hung ceiling areas, in strict accordance with shop drawings. The Architect reserves the right to reject any and all installed heads not in accordance with the approved shop drawings. 10-4 3.2 TESTS A. Test the systems before any paint is applied. ? ! B. Test all systems in full accordance with applicable Underwriters' and Municipal requirements, but in no case shall the sprinkler system be tested at less than 200 lbs. hydrostatic pressure. Apply the test for a minimum of two (2) consecutive hours with r no loss in pressure. Prior to applying the hydrostatic test, the system shall be tested with 50 psig compressed air for a period of ten minutes with no loss in pressure. ar►_ Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-25 am B. All isolated fire protection equipment and/or components shall be restrained by Type I or Type H devices as specified hereinafter. C. All seismic restraints shall be capable of safely accepting 1.0 "g" external forces without failure and shall maintain equipment in a captive position. Seismic restraints shall not short circuit isolation systems or transmit objectionable vibration or noise, and shall be provided on all equipment as scheduled on drawings. Calculations by Registered Civil or Structural Engineer shall be submitted to verify snubber capacities for each piece of equipment. D. Equipment mounted on springs does not require additional seismic restraints, providing that the spring mountings: w. 1. Comply with general characteristics of spring isolators. 2. Have vertical limit stops and are capable of supporting equipment at fixed elevation during equipment erection. 3. Incorporate seismic snubbing restraint in all directions at specified acceleration loadings. E. Acceptable seismic spring mountings are: or Type SSLR -M.I.I. Type SAWR -V.M.C.I. Type BXL -V.E.C. F. Seismic Restraint Types 1. Seismic Restraint Type I a. Each corner or side seismic restraint shall incorporate minimum 5/8 inch thick pad limit stops. Restraints shall be made of plate, structural members of square metal tubing in a welded assembly, incorporating resilient pads. Angle bumpers are not acceptable. System to be field- .� bolted to deck with 1.5 "g"acceleration capacity. b. Seismic spring mountings as described above are an acceptable alternative, providing all seismic loading requirements are met. C. Mason Industries Type Z-1011,Type Z-1225, or as approved. 2. Seismic Restraint Type IL Metal cable type with approved fastening devices to equipment and structure. System to be field bolted to deck or overhead .� structural members or deck with aircraft cable and clamps as per SMACNA guidelines. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Where piping and head arrangements are indicated on the drawings, run and arrange piping approximately as indicated on the drawings and as directed during installation, as straight and direct as possible, forming right angles or parallel lines with building walls and other pipes, and neatly spaced. Erect all risers plumb and true, parallel with walls and other pipes and neatly spaced. Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-24 3) Manual Emergency Station: Model B-6, with replaceable glass rod, which will not break when key tested. (Designer Note: For 00 small systems; for large systems use larger compressor.) 4) Air Supply: Model B air compressor panel, 16 inch x 20 inch x 6 inch, complete with air compressor, pressure switch, copper tubing, alarm horn and contacts for remote alarm. 2.10 SPRINKLER DRAINS A. Provide all necessary drain valves, capped nipples, auxiliary piping, etc., as required to drain trapped portions of the system. B. Inspectors test connections shall be provided with a sight connection and piped to waste. C. Main drain and test connection shall be piped to waste. D. Automatic ball drips from siamese connections, etc., shall be piped to waste or W connected to the waste connection from the fire standpipe siamese. E. Provide all piping required to spill the drains and test connections to the floor, funnel or other drainage connections provided under the Plumbing Contract, or arrange with the Plumbing Contractor to provide additional drainage facilities, in which case pay all charges related to the additional Plumbing Work. 2.11 SIGNS A. Provide all designating signs for curb valves, control valves, alarms, hydraulically on designed systems, etc., as required by the authorities having jurisdiction. 2.12 PIPE AND MATERIAL FINISHES 00 A. All piping, hardware, trim, etc., shall be finished in accordance with this Article, unless otherwise specified hereinbefore. B. The following hardware or trim shall be furnished with the finish indicated. Where chrome plating is indicated, the item shall be polished prior to plating so that no bumps, pits or burrs are visible in the finished product. 1. Fire standpipe hose valves,hose Rough brass ! " couplings, hose nozzles and chains not in cabinets 2. Fire standpipe Siamese Polished chrome plated 2.13 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. All fire protection equipment, whether isolated or not, shall be bolted to structure to allow for minimum 1.0 "g" acceleration for equipment and system. Bolt points and diameter of inserts shall be submitted and verified as part of the Contractor's submission for each piece of equipment and certified by a licensed Civil or Structural Engineer. Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-23 b. Detection Devices: Detectors shall be Reliable Model 302-1-1200. The thermal detectors shall be a rate anticipation fixed temperature type which shall have the inherent ability to operate at or within specified tolerances of the factory set temperature, regardless of the rate of rise. It shall not alarm as a result of rapid temperature changes or fluctuations occurring below the device's temperature setting. The detector shall be a compact, stainless steel shell, hermetically sealed assembly which shall be self-restoring. The detector shall have temperature setting of 200°F. The detector shall mount on an octagonal electrical junction box and either surface or flush mounting may be accomplished by the use of either a flush or surface mount adaptor supplied by the manufacturer. The detector shall be UL listed and FM approved. 2. Power Supply: Only one source of energy shall be connected to the system. This service connection shall be 120/208 volt, single phase, 3 wire, taken from the standby power system, through an approved fuse cutout box. 3. System Operations "P a. The system shall function as follows when any single detector operates within the protected area. 1) Light proper zone indication and fire indication on central control panel. 2) Initiate signal to building fire alarm system. (Coordinate contact closure requirements.) aM, 3) Initiate circuits to deactivate electrical supply to all elevators via shunt trip circuit breakers in electrical distribution panels(Elevator Room only). .�. 4) Actuate preaction sprinkler valve. b. Common trouble alarm shall initiate signal to building system. 4. Wiring: The wiring arrangement for the system shall be as shown on the drawings. Each wire shall be a single No. 14 AWG minimum conductor (heat detectors, No. 16 AWG minimum) with 3/64 inch Type THWN insulation. All wiring for the automatic fire detection system shall be installed in a rigid iron, steel or aluminum conduit, except where required otherwise by the Code, and 4" shall generally be run concealed in finished spaces, and exposed in unfinished spaces. Conduit containing wires, identified as fire and detection system wires, will not be permitted to contain any other wires. Conduit shall enter only at the 4M side or the bottom of cabinets. 5. Installation a. The system shall be installed in a workmanlike manner, and in 40 accordance with Specifications and standards approved by all authorities having jurisdiction. b. The system shall be provided complete with all outlet boxes, junction u, boxes, cabinets, etc., regardless of whether or not such items are furnished as integral parts of the equipment. C. Preaction sprinkler components shall be as manufactured by Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co. and shall include the major items listed herein: `" 1) Water Control Valve: Model B deluge valve, complete with basic trim and wet pilot line trim sets. 2) Release Valve: Model LV2LBX25 Supertrol release valve. Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-22 3. All devices, combinations of devices and equipment constructed and installed in conformity with this Specification shall be approved by the applicable on insurance agency for the purposes for which they are installed and by all authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Any equipment proposed as equal to that herein specified must be proven by r the Section, who shall submit to the Architect the manufacturer's name and model numbers of substitute equipment and material, together with three (3) copies of engineering data sheets, and a list of twenty (20) installations of similar equipment which have been satisfactorily installed and in continuous operation on user's premises over a period of three(3)years. B. Heat Detection System 1. System Components -- a. Central Control Panel 1) Control panel shall be Notifier Model 5000. All components of ! " the central control panel shall be prewired to terminal strips, and shall be securely fastened to steel rails mounted in a 14 gauge sheet steel housing, finished in scratch-resistant, baked red enamel. The panel shall be complete with a continuous 1/4 barrel hinge, and provided with an Eagle 903 lock and keys. Separate illuminated signal indications shall be provided for power, fire and trouble, in addition to one (1) indication per zone. Plastic nameplates, engraved and filled, shall be provided for each indication, and shall be securely fastened to the panel with machine screws. Provisions shall be made for operation from a self-contained, 24 volts d.c. emergency power supply. The units shall have built-in rechargeable standby batteries of sufficient capacity to provide for a minimum of 90 hours of continuous monitoring with a full alarm and auxiliary control capability for five (5) full minutes at the end of the 90 hour period. All battery recharging and power leads shall be designed for ease of installation with no special tools required. Provide for a local alarm indication on the control panel for "low battery" condition. It shall be constructed to permit maintenance by qualified electricians without special tools or training. the central control panel shall contain the following individual units of control equipment. 2) The power supply unit for the detection system shall be capable of providing power for the following functions for the system: a) Furnish necessary d.c. power for operation of detectors. b) Provide control of fire alarm and trouble alarm signals. c) Activate preaction sprinkler valves. 3) The unit shall perform the following functions: a) Provide visual indication of the zone in which the alarm initiating detector is located. b) Provide visual indication of the zone in which a trouble signal is initiated. c) Provide supplementary nonpowered control circuits which shall be activated independently for each zone. Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-21 C. Provide the following flow alarm devices: 1. Paddle type water flow detectors, closed circuit type with an adjustable retard or time delay to prevent false alarms due to water pressure surges. Switches w shall be Acme Fire Alarm Co.,Type WFD, or as approved. 2.8 FIRE STANDPIPE SYSTEM/SPRINKLER SYSTEM APPURTENANCES A. Provide the fire standpipe/sprinkler system appurtenances required to provide fire protection for the entire building. B. Finish hose couplings, hose valves, spanner wrenches and chains, siamese connections and hydrant connections as specified under"Pipe and Material Finishes". C. Elkhart Brass Co. numbers have been used to designate the type of material desired; equivalent material as made by other manufacturers listed as "Approved Manufacturers" may be submitted for approval. D. Provide flush type, or free-standing type, siamese as indicated on the drawings, cast bronze, complete with yellow cast iron caps and brass chains. Escutcheon shall be lettered "COMBINATION STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS". Install siamese at the outside walls of the building in the locations indicated on drawings. Siamese shall be similar to Elkhart #166, #165, #15, or as approved. Siamese escutcheon shall be modified to eliminate all manufacturer's identification marks and lettering other than that required by the authorities. E. Provide a 3/4 inch bronze automatic ball drip in each siamese connection, between the siamese and the check valve. Pipe the ball drips to a sink or to a floor drain. F. Valve stations indicated on the drawings shall consist of valve, spanner wrench and chain. Valve: Elkhart Fig. No. U-20 cast bronze angle type with red enamel wheel ` handle, 300 lb. wwp. Spanner wrench: Galvanized pressed steel, double end type secured with brass chain. G. Use materials as specified for each of the FSP pressure zones. 2.9 ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOM PREACTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM ... A. Provide preaction sprinkler systems for the Elevator Machine Rooms and Electrical Room complete with central control panels, emergency standby batteries, outlying detection devices, alarms, conduit and wires, preaction sprinkler valves and trim, air 'M! compressor panel, and piping, complete and ready for operation, all as shown on the drawings and as hereinafter specified. 1. The system shall provide audible and visual annunciation at its central panel .e upon detection of a fire condition, visually identifying the space associated with each of its individual detection devices. The system shall be electrically supervised against wiring derangement of all circuitry involved by zone in the sensing of fire, and the response signal of alarm. The occurrence of a wiring derangement shall cause an audible and visual trouble indication to occur at the central panel. 2. The entire preaction system shall be furnished and installed under the responsible of one Contract. Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-20 w, 2.6 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Provide automatic sprinkler heads of finish as approved by the Architects. All cover plate flush type sprinkler heads shall be Reliable Quick Response G4-FR, 3-1/4 inch plate diameter; all other sprinkler heads shall be Reliable Model "G" automatic water spray heads, or as approved. Dry pendent cover plate sprinkler shall be Model G-3A. B. All heads shall be as approved by the Architects, the municipal authorities and by the insuring agencies having jurisdiction. C. All heads shall be "standard" 1/2 inch diameter orifice, upright, pendent, flush type pendent,cover plate flush type, or dry type pendent,to fit the conditions in which they ` are installed. D. All pendent heads and flush type pendent heads installed in ceilings shall be chrome- * plated with chrome-plated escutcheons. E. All upright heads, sidewall heads and pendent heads connected to exposed piping shall be rough brass construction, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. F. All heads shall be of the proper temperature rating for the locations in which they are installed. In general, temperature rating shall be 165°F., except for Mechanical Equipment Rooms and Kitchen areas, which shall be 286°F and other areas subject to high temperature. !"!"t G. Furnish and install,where directed,one approved type sprinkler cabinet containing not less than 24 extra sprinkler heads, of the various degrees used in the work; also one sprinkler wrench for emergency use. H. Provide a duplicate number of cover plate flush type sprinkler heads for the purpose of replacing the pendent sprinkler heads, in the tenant spaces, at the request of the Owner and upon tenant fitout. 2.7 ALARM DEVICES 4-0 A. All interconnecting electrical wiring will be furnished under the Specifications of other Trades. Provide all switches directly connected to equipment provided by this Trade, required for the transmission of alarm impulses. Switches shall be open or closed type to conform with the alarm system to which they are connected. B. Provide tamper switches for the following valves: p 1. All valves controlling the flow of water to sprinkler heads, including floor control valves,pump control valves, meter valves, etc. 2. Switches shall give an alarm if the valves served are closed, the switches are removed, or if the cover is opened. Valve stems shall be notched to take the switches. Switches shall be Acme Fire Alarm Co. Type OSYS-U, or as approved. Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-19 NNW D. All valves shall be approved by the Underwriters and municipal authorities. Where the valve manufacturer selected cannot furnish an IBBM valve with such approval, substitute an approved cast steel valve. ■*+ E. Dry pipe alarm valve shall be Reliable Type "D" with full trim, accelerator, and pressure actuated alarm switch, or as approved. F. Provide ladders to all valves located more than 7 feet 0 inches above floor. 2.5 INSULATION A. All insulation shall be done by an approved Subcontractor specializing in this type of work. Insulation shall be Owens-Corning Fiberglas, or as approved. B. Piping 1. List of Materials Fiberglas Thickness Frostproofed Mains and Branches 2 inch C. Fiberglas Density: All glass fiber pipe insulation in Equipment Rooms shall be of one-piece type with at least 4 pound density. D. Insulation Jackets: White fire retardant vapor barrier, factory applied, with self- sealing laps and self-sealing end strips. Ends of pipe insulation shall be sealed off at valves, fittings, flanges and 21 feet of continuous runs with BF 30-35. 1. It is the intent of these Specifications that all vapor barriers be sealed and continuous through hangers, sleeves, etc. E. Fittings, Valves and Flanges 1. Where manufactured, use factory premolded glass fiber covers on all fittings +�* and valves. Insulate flanges with glass fiber insulation to a thickness equal to the adjoining covering. 2. Where premolded covers are not available for fittings and valves, use mitered sections of 7 pound Fiberglas pipe covering, or build up the insulation with 1 pound Fiberglas Aerocor double wrapped to a thickness equal to the adjoining insulation. F. Insulation Exposed to Weather: Cover all piping with weatherproof jacket of ..► corrugated aluminum with a 3 inch lap that will shed water. Fittings, valves and flanges weatherproofed with a weatherproof mastic reinforced with a glass cloth membrane and further coated with mastic. G. Fastening of Insulation: Aluminum bands on approximately 12 inch centers and at all fittings and valves. H. Insulation shall be protected from hangers by a 180 degree galvanized steel saddle on the outside of the insulation and vapor barrier. A half section of waterproof, calcium silicate, high density insulation of the same thickness as the pipe insulation, and full length of the saddle, shall be used to support the weight of the pipe at the saddle. Saddles shall be of sufficient length to allow for the hanger load at the specified hanger spacing. Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-18 �r �r G. Where space for future pipe is required, provide sleeves and fill with lightweight concrete. 2.4 VALVES ®, A. All FSP water control valves within the building shall be OS&Y wedge gate valves with painted iron wheel handles, shall have gland followers in stuffing boxes, constructed so that they may be repacked while open and under pressure. All valves shall have the name of the manufacturer and working pressure cast or stamped thereon. All valves shall be furnished with a tamper switch. B. Valves controlling sprinkler takeoffs from the FSP system shall be UL or FM approved butterfly,ball or plug valves. 1. Ball Valves: Ball valves shall be all brass or bronze construction with replaceable teflon seat ring, two-piece union or three-piece bolted construction, with stuffing box; working pressure shall not be less than 1501bs. at 175°F. and shall conform with ANSI standards. All valves shall be standard port unless full-ported valves are indicated on plans. Threaded valves used in brazed or ■ soldered piping systems shall be fitted with adapters. When brazed or soldered end valves are used, teflon seats must be removed prior to soldering or brazing. 2. Butterfly Valves: Wafer type butterfly valves (use screwed lug type when valve has to perform dead-end service): Cast iron body to 200 psi WWP, ductile iron for higher pressures, installed between flanges of similar rating; stem to be monel or 416 stainless steel sized in accordance with AWWA-6504- 70 Class 150; stem seal shall not rely on compression between seating material and disc,but shall be accomplished by 0-rings; disc shall be bronze, fastened to shaft by means of dowels or locknuts; bushings at each end of valve stem shall be teflon; seating material shall be Buna-N one piece, of groove or ledge so design, to prevent dislocation during closure; seating material must simultaneously act as flange gasket; valve must be factory tested and certified to seat bubbletight; actuators shall be manual gear type with handwheel; valve shall incorporate a visible indication of open or closed position. C. The valves tabulated below have been selected from the catalogue of Stockham. Valves with corresponding features as manufactured by Jenkins, Crane Co., Walworth, Fairbanks, or Kennedy may be submitted for approval. All valves shall be UL and FM approved. VALVESCHEDULE Gate Valves Fig.No. Material W.W.P. Flanged OS&Y G634 IBBM 175 Screwed (drains, etc.) B133 Bronze 175 Butterfly Valves Milwaukee Screwed BB-SCS02 Bronze 175 Check Valves Flanged G939 IBBM 175 Screwed(drains, etc.) B319 Bonze 200 Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-17 H. Provide approved roller supports, floor stands, wall brackets, masonry piers, etc., for all lines running near the floors, which can be supported from the floors or walls. Pipelines near walls may be hung by hangers, carried from approved wall brackets at a ..� higher level than the pipe. I. Do not hang piping from ductwork or other piping. Hangers shall not be fastened by means of vertical expansion bolts. All materials, except roller: Wrought or malleable iron or steel. Rollers: Cast iron. Hangers: Swivel split ring, Grinnell Fig. 104, wrought pipe clamp, Grinnell Fig. 216, or adjustable wrought clevis, Grinnell Fig. ++�+ 260. J. Support vertical risers from the building construction by means of pipe clamps, Grinnell Fig. 261, at every floor. Provide channels of approved sizes where pipe clamps are too short to connect to the building construction. 2.3 SLEEVES A. Provide sleeves for all pipes passing through floors, walls and concrete, or concrete fireproofed beams. 1. Sleeves in concrete beams, through concrete walls, and exposed pipes penetrating floors: Schedule 40 steel pipe. 2. Sleeves within furred out enclosures in floors, through partitions, steel beams and walls: 18 gauge galvanized sheet metal. 3. Provide sleeves in foundation walls and in concrete pits with anchor flanges. B. Provide sleeves with an i.d. at least 1/2 inch greater than outside of pipe served, M. including pipe insulation which must be continuous through sleeve. 1. Finish sleeves flush with underside of slab and 1 inch above finished floor. 2. Calk space between pipes and sleeves in exterior walls, foundation walls and r pits, with lead and oakum. Where piping penetrates walls (other than foundation walls), partitions, floor slabs, etc., space between piping and sleeve shall be packed with mineral wool. ■* C. Set sleeves as construction progresses and secure in place during pouring of concrete. 1. Where cellular steel flooring is installed, furnish and locate sleeves, cut holes W" through deck, reinforce deck, and set sleeves. Coordinate sleeve locations with Flooring Subcontractor and electrical distribution. Submit drawings showing location of holes and proposed reinforcing and obtain Architect's approval IM before proceeding with installation. D. Do not support pipes by resting clamps on sleeves. Clamps must extend beyond sleeve and be supported outboard of sleeve as detailed on drawings. E. Provide waterproof type pipe sleeves, Zurn Z-197 with galvanized Schedule 40 pipe extensions where penetrating membrane waterproofed floors. F. Wherever pipes are exposed and pass through walls, floors, partitions or ceilings, fit them with chromium-plated cast brass escutcheons held in place with set screws. Fit + escutcheons snug over insulation, secure in place. Take special care to protect the escutcheons during the course of construction. Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-16 B. Space supports so that there is at least one hanger for each length of pipe, with one hanger within 30 inches of the end sprinkler head. Where this would require hangers closer than 6 feet 0 inches apart, hanger spacing may be increased to 10 feet 0 inches between hangers for pipes up to and including 2 inch ips and 12 feet 0 inches between hangers for pipes 2-1/2 inch ips and larger. Where possible, fasten hanger rods to structural steel beams. C. Hangers may be directly bolted to steel beams of building construction, where they occur. Smaller pipes may be suspended from crosspieces of pipe or steel angles, which, in turn, shall be securely fastened to building beams. Where hangers cannot be supported from building steel framing or where small piping is to be supported from the deck, fishplates and rods may be used. All hanging devices shall be designed to support the load of the water-filled pipe plus a minimum of 250 pounds applied at the point of hanging. Furnish, locate and set fishplates and rods before the concrete is poured. Fishplates and rods shall be designed for metal deck construction and shall be manufactured by Grinnell Co., F&S Manufacturing Corp., or as approved. The intention is to provide supports which, in each case, shall be amply strong and rigid for the load,but which shall not weaken or unduly stress the building construction. D. Support hangers from approved concrete inserts where concrete slabs exist. Use inserts with space for nuts of all sizes. On all inserts for pipes 3 inch or larger in size, insert a reinforcing rod 5/8 inch in diameter through slot provided for this purpose, and maintain it in place when concrete is poured. Place all inserts in forms for all pipes which are to be hung, in ample time to allow the Concrete Work to be performed on schedule. If any pipe has to be hung in space where no inserts have been provided, drill a hole from below through stone concrete slabs,and provide a rod and hanger attached to an approved fishplate, or for pipes smaller than 3 inch ips, install a Phillips or other approved self-drilling type expansion shield. For pipes 3 inch ips and over, attach the rod and hanger to a 2 inch x 2 inch angle fastened to the slab by two Star No. 7000 double expansion shields. Do not use shields smaller than 3/8 inch size. The rods on all hangers shall be of adequate size to support the loads wr which they carry. E. Regardless of the type of construction(i.e.,concrete, concrete-deck-steel or variations thereto), particular care shall be taken to support all main lines and all large and heavy pipes in a satisfactory manner, including the furnishing and installation of supplementary steel, if required. Shop drawings, indicating support methods, point loadings to the building structure and hanger locations shall be submitted for approval in advance of concrete pouring schedules to permit evaluation, critique and any necessary changes to hanging and support methods. F. Set all inserts for all pipes in ample time to allow the work of all other Sections to be performed on scheduled time. + G. This Section may coordinate with the other Sections to use common means of support. Submit for approval all pertinent design data relating to the support as well as verification of the responsibility for the support. Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-15 C. Joining Methods 1. Make screwed joints without the use of lampwick or filler, except "utility compound" or teflon tape applied to male threads only. 2. Cut or rolled grooves in pipe for use with mechanical grooved couplings shall be made with an approved machine manufactured by the supplier of the couplings. 3. Make welded joints (except for pipe welded end-to-end) with forged one-piece welding flanges, caps, nozzles, elbows, branch outlets and tees, of Tube-Turn, Taylor-Forge, Ladish, Grinnell, or other approved make. Submit cut samples for approval if directed. Use fittings of a type which maintains full wall thickness at all points, ample radius and fillets, and proper bevels or shoulders at ends. "Weld-0-lets" may be used where standard fittings of required sizes , are not available and elsewhere as approved. a. All job welding shall be done by the electric arc welding process in accordance with the following: 1) All joints shall be 45 degree bevel type. Pipe mill-beveled or machine-beveled by this Contractor. 2) All scale and oxide removed with hammer, chisel or file and bevel left smooth and clean. .� 3) Pipe lengths lined up straight with abutting pipe ends concentric. 4) Both conductors from the welding machine shall be extended to locations at which welding work is being done. The leads from w welding machine to location of welding work shall be held together with tape or other approved means so as to prevent induced current in structural steel, in piping or in other metals 1e„� within the building. The ground lead shall be connected to length of pipe with suitable clamp in such manner that welding current will not flow through joints in pipe, structural steel of building or steel pipe supports. 5) Weld metal thoroughly fused with base metal at all sections. Welds shall be of sound metal, free from laps, slag inclusion or other defects. �• b. All welders shall be certified for the service for which they are employed and on which they work by the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau of the Mechanical Contractors Association of America. .� C. Connections to equipment shall be made with weld neck flanges of forged steel or stainless steel as required. d. Connections to equipment shall be made with weld neck flanges of forged steel or stainless steel as required. 2.2 HANGERS, INSERTS AND PIPE SUPPORTS A. Provide suitable and substantial hangers, inserts and supports for all piping. Hangers and supports shall be Grinnell, F&S, or as approved. Main lines and any other large or heavy pipes shall be supported from building structural steel wherever practicable. Where steel spacing and/or pipe locations preclude the use of building steel, provide supplementary steel supports between building structural members. Pipe hangers shall be attached to steel by beam clamps of approved design. Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-14 RM D. State a unit price for piping in excess of that included under Paragraph C.: 1 inch so 1-1/4 inch 1-1/2 inch 2 inch 2-1/2 inch 3 inch 3-1/2 inch 50 4 inch 5 inch 6 inch PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Piping 1. Steel Pipe (Stl.): Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with the latest issue of ASTM Standard A-120 and/or A-53. Each length shall be legibly marked by the producer to show name of manufacturer, kind of pipe; specification number W and pipe length. Each length shall be hydrostatically tested at the mill and the producer's certification of said tests shall be furnished. Pipe shall be black or galvanized and of the weight, fitting type and joining method as specified hereinafter or indicated on the drawings. Galvanized steel pipe shall be used for drain risers and dry pipe system. "a B. System Requirements 1. Fire Standpipe Piping: Black steel, Schedule 40 a. Fittings shall be screwed, malleable iron fittings, UL and FM approved for this service. Mechanical groove couplings, Victaulic Style 07 "Zero- ~' Flex", or as approved, may be used in lieu of screwed fittings. When used with Schedule 10 pipe, couplings shall be rolled groove. When used with Schedule 80 pipe, couplings shall be cut groove. Either roll or cut groove may be used with Schedule 40 pipe. Welded joints and fittings may be used where permitted by the authorities having jurisdiction provided safety procedures described in NFPA-13 and 14 are followed. 2. Sprinkler System Piping: Black steel, Schedule 40 (2 inch and above, Schedule 10 is permitted) a. Fittings shall be screwed, standard weight, cast iron, UL and FM approved, fittings. Mechanical groove couplings, Victaulic Style 75, or as approved, may be used in lieu of screwed fittings. When used with Schedule 10 pipe, couplings shall be rolled groove. When used with Schedule 80 pipe, couplings shall be cut groove. Either roll or cut groove may be used with Schedule 40 pipe. Welded joints and fittings may be used where permitted by the authorities having jurisdiction provided safety procedures described in NFPA-13 and 14 are followed. Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-13 am Fire Equipment Devices Croker Elkhart w Water Flow Detectors Potter Viking Grinnell Reliable Now Acme Tamper Switches Potter Viking Grinnell Acme 1.18 UNIT PRICES A. State in proposal a unit price per head to be added or deducted if additional or fewer heads are required due to a change in architectural design or scope of work. Submit the prices in the following form: Unit Increase Decrease 1) Brass Upright Head $ $ 2) Chrome Pendent Head $ $ 3) Brass Pendent Head $ $ 4) Chrome Flush Ceiling Head $ $ 5) Hose Station(No Cabinet) $ $ 6) Hose Station(With Cabinet) $ $ 7) Cover Plate Flush-type Head $ $ B. Any deletion of heads, interchange or substitution in the types of heads shall be made in accordance with the price established for such changes. low C. The prices shall include (on a unit basis per head)all necessary branch piping, cross mains, fittings, hangers, etc., as required to make the system complete, but shall not include bulk or feed mains or branch piping in excess of 15 ft. for a single head or nozzle. Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-12 Contractors or Subcontractors, vendors, manufacturers, and the like, or else subsequently pay them any additional fees required therefor. 1.16 GUARANTEE A. Submit a single guarantee stating that all portions of the work are in accordance with Contract requirements. Guarantee all work against faulty and improper material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of final acceptance by the Owner, except that where guarantees or warranties for longer terms are specified herein, such longer term shall apply. At no additional cost to Owner, within 24 hours after notification, correct any deficiencies which occur during the guarantee period, all to the satisfaction of the Owner and Architect. This Contractor shall require similar guarantees from his Subcontractors. B. Be responsible for all leaks in all pipes for a period of one year from date of acceptance of work under this Contract. Repair at not cost to Owner all such leaks which occur within 24 hours notice thereof by the Owner. Leaks which occur prior to the completion of this Contract shall be repaired at once. Be responsible for any damage caused by such leaks and repair thereof and reimburse Owner for all expense incurred thereby. This Contractor indemnifies the Owner, the Architect, the Consulting Engineers and the Construction Manager against loss, liability, damage or expense, including reasonable attorneys' fees, in connection with any claim resulting from such leaks which may be asserted by Tenants or any other third person. C. All compressors shall be warranted for five(5)years, including labor. 1.17 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish all major items of equipment and materials as made by the following manufacturers: Valves Jenkins Crane Walworth Stockham Watts Milwaukee Sprinkler Heads Reliable Viking Grinnell Star Hangers Grinnell F&S Fee &Mason Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-11 B. This Contractor and his Subcontractors shall prepare a complete set of construction "Coordination Drawings" indicating the equipment actually purchased and the exact location of the equipment and the exact routing and elevations for all lines such as piping, busway, conduit, ductwork, etc., including conduit embedded in concrete (where permitted). All dimensions shall be referenced to building structural center lines. The"Coordination Drawing"preparation and completion shall comply with the *+ requirements of the project construction schedule. Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall obtain from the Architect or Engineer a set of AutoCAD Release 14 or compatible format Architectural and Engineering Drawings files to be used to produce the"Coordination Drawings". The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall give to the Architect and Engineer the written release included as part of this Section of the Specification as Appendix A, signed by a corporate officer of the Contractor and each Subcontractor who requires the diskettes,prior to receipt of the diskettes. .. The sheet metal drawings,prepared on electronic media(CAD)at a scale not less than 3/8 in. = 1 ft. 0 in. shall serve as the base drawings to which all other Contractors will overlay and add their work. Each trade shall draw their work on separate layers represented by individual colors. Each"Coordination Drawing" shall be completed and signed off by the other Contractors and this Contractor prior to the installation of the work in the area covered by the specific coordination drawing. The Contractors �. work shall be installed in accordance with the shop drawings and the "Coordination Drawings". If the Contractor allows one trade to install their work before coordinating with the work of other trades, the Contractor shall make necessary changes to correct the condition without extra cost to the Owner. The Contractor's "Coordination Drawings" indicating piping, conduit,busway, and equipment support points and loads exceeding 500 lb. imposed on the building structure shall be submitted to the Project Structural Engineer for review and approval. The elevation, location, support points, static, dynamic and expansion forces and loads imposed on the structure at support, and anchor points, and the size of all lines shall be indicated. All beam penetrations and slab penetrations shall be indicated and sized and shall be coordinated. All work routed underground or embedded in concrete shall be indicated by dimension to column and building lines and shall be coordinated. This requirement for "Coordination Drawings" shall not be construed as authorization for the Contractor or Subcontractor to make any unauthorized changes to the Contract Drawings. All Contract Drawing space allocations shall be maintained, such as ceiling height,eight(8) inch high zone installation free zone as discussed hereinbefore w� directly above the ceiling reserved for tenant build-out and flexibility, chase walls, equipment room size, etc., unless prior written authorization is received from the Architect to change them. Prior to final acceptance of the work of this Division, the Contractor shall give the two(2)copies of the drawing files, in AutoCAD Release 14 on "Zip Drive"diskettes, and two (2) hardcopy"as-built"drawings, one (1) of which shall be furnished on wash-off mylar transparencies on heavy gauge film and one(1) of which shall be on paper containing the Contractor's coordination documentation to the Owner. 1.15 SUBCONTRACTS A. Where Contract Documents require manufacturers'services, and wherever the staff of the Trade performing the work of this Section cannot adequately perform such services, this Trade shall stipulate such performance in its contracts with its Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-10 - B. Carefully check space requirements with other Trades to insure that all material can be installed in the spaces allotted thereto. Finished suspended ceiling elevations are NO indicated on the general construction drawings. C. Transmit to Trades doing work of other Sections all information required for work to fir► be provided under their respective Sections (such as fresh water connections, foundations, electric wiring, access doors, and the like)in ample time for installation. D. Wherever this Contractor's work interconnects with work of other Contractors, this Contractor shall coordinate his work with these Contractors to insure that all Contractors have the information necessary so that they may properly install all the necessary connections and equipment. Identify all work items (valves, etc.) in an approved manner in order that the Ceiling Trade may know where to install access doors and panels. E. Caution workers both verbally and in writing as to the dangers involved in doing work within or adjacent to electrical closets on various floors, the Mechanical Rooms and the Switchgear Room, due to dangers caused by presence of high voltages and Or currents in these spaces. F. Furnish and set all sleeves for passage of pipes through structural masonry and concrete walls and floors and elsewhere as required for proper protection of each pipe passing through building surfaces. Coordinate this work with Construction Manager in order to properly expedite and perform this work. G. Provide required supports and hangers for piping and equipment, so that loading will not exceed allowable loadings of structure. Submittal of a bid shall be deemed a representation that the Contractor submitting such bid has ascertained allowable loadings and has included in his estimates the costs associated in furnishing required supports. H. Field drilling, cutting and/or reinforcing of holes in structural metal deck required for work under this Section shall be coordinated through the Construction Manager and approved by the Structural Engineer. All such drilling, cutting and reinforcing costs shall be borne by this Contractor. - 1. Due to the type of the installation, a fixed sequence of operation is required to properly install the complete systems. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to coordinate, protect and schedule his work with other Trades in accordance with the construction sequence. J. Architectural drawings shall be checked for ceiling height requirements. 1.14 CONTRACTOR'S COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall coordinate efforts of all trades and shall furnish(in writing, with copies to the Architect and Construction Manager) any information necessary to permit the Work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay. Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-9 J. Make every effort to furnish all equipment of any equipment type (such as motors, motor controls, vibration isolation equipment, etc.) from one manufacturer. K. Where disagreements occur between the plans and the specifications, or within either document itself, the item or arrangement of better quality, greater quantity or higher cost shall be included in the base bid. L. The drawings show the various piping systems schematically. No added compensation will be permitted for variations due to field conditions. M. Provide all rigging required for complete installation and furnish drawings showing necessary points of support, reactions and supplementary bracing. This shall be submitted for approval by Owner. Should any shoring be required,provide same after Owner's approval. N. It should be noted that temporary power and light has been provided under another Contract, which shall provide facility for general lighting and portable hand tools which can be plugged into lighting circuits during normal working hours. Any additional lighting for specified areas, or power for welding machines or other heavy current equipment, shall be provided by this Contractor, at his own expense. The Owner will provide 480 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz electric circuits in Mechanical Equipment Rooms for Contractor's use. Contractor shall pay for cost of power and labor required for welding machines and/or lighting at times other than normal working hours. O. Equipment and materials shall be new and listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., manufactured in accordance with ASME and ANSI standards, and approved by the local authorities having jurisdiction. P. Any references in this Specification or on the plans which refer to work to be performed or provided by the Construction Manager or "by others" is intended to mean that the required work will be provided under another Section of the Specifications. 1.12 VERIFYING EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Before commencing work, examine all adjoining work on which this work is in any way dependent for perfect workmanship according to the intent of this Specification, and report to Construction Manager any condition which prevents performance of first-class work. No "waiver of responsibility" for incomplete, inadequate or defective adjoining work will be considered unless notice has been filed before submittal of a proposal. 1.13 COORDINATION A. Certain materials will be furnished, installed, or furnished and installed, under other Sections of the Specifications. Examine the Contract Documents to ascertain these requirements. Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-8 comply with all laws and regulations of any governmental authority having jurisdiction thereof. D. This Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify, defend and hold harmless the Owners, Architects and Consulting Engineer against any liability, loss, damage or expenses, including attorneys' fees, arising from a failure or alleged failure on the part of this Contractor, his Subcontractors or his or their agents, servants and employees properly to discharge the obligations assumed by him or them in the performance of the work, including any act or omission allegedly resulting in death or personal injury or property damage or improper construction, construction techniques, or the use of improper or inappropriate material or tools. ww E. The Contractor agrees that any controversy or dispute to which the Contractor, the Owner and the Consulting Engineers are parties shall be submitted to the American Arbitration Association for decision in accordance with the rules of such Association for construction industry disputes. All Subcontractors likewise agree to submit to such arbitration any dispute between or among them, the Contractor, the Owner and the Consulting Engineers, and the Contractor agrees to make available to the *w Consulting Engineers, on demand, signed copies of the contract between the Owner and the Contractor and between the Contractor and his Subcontractors. The Contractor and each Subcontractor agree that by submitting a bid, which is accepted, this paragraph shall be deemed a written agreement to submit any controversy thereafter arising to arbitration. W_ F. Put work in place as fast as reasonably possible; at all times, keep a competent foreman in charge of the work and facilitate its inspection by the Architects and Consulting Engineers. G. Except for such changes as may be specifically approved by the Consulting Engineers, in accordance with alternates or options stated hereinafter, all work must be in full accordance with the intent of the plans and specifications, complete in every way and ready for satisfactory and efficient operation when delivered to the Owner. H. Guarantee that the materials and workmanship supplied under these Specifications will be of the best grade, that the apparatus will be erected in a practical and first-class manner, that it will be complete in operation, nothing being omitted in the way of labor and material required to make it so, although not specifically shown or mentioned herein and that it will be delivered in well working order, complete and perfect in every respect, without additional cost -- whether or not shown in detail on the drawings or described in detail in this Specification. I. Become thoroughly acquainted with the work involved, obtain and verify at the building all measurements necessary for the proper installation of work. Furnish to other Contractors any information relating to work of this Section necessary for the +o proper installation of their Contracts. Confer with other Contractors for finish adjacent to work of this Section and arrange to have visible portions of the work(such as access doors, escutcheons, etc.) fit in and harmonize with the finish in a manner FM satisfactory to the Architects. Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-7 B. Provide diagrammatic charts of all piping systems. Provide schedules of all valves. Provide two copies of charts and schedules in laminated form, suitable for wall mounting. Provide three copies of charts and schedules, printed on cloth and bound in booklets. Valve numbering system shall indicate service and shall indicate floor level where valve is installed. Valve charts and schedules must indicate valve sizes. Valve charts must indicate type of valve. 1.9 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Three sets of operating and maintenance instruction manuals, covering completely equipment starting sequences, operation, and maintenance, and listing of all spare parts, shall be furnished to Owner. In addition, one set of operating and maintenance instructions for each Mechanical Equipment Room shall be neatly laminated in permanently translucent plastic and hung where directed. Three sets of lubricating charts and manuals for each item of equipment shall be furnished to Owner. B. Furnish a list of manufacturers (with names of local representatives) in order to expedite ordering of replacement parts. 1.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Furnish the necessary information so that openings for this work can be built into the floors and walls in time. Such cooperation is required to keep cutting of walls and floors to a minimum. B. Set sleeves for pipes accurately before concrete floors are poured, or set boxes on the forms to leave openings in the floors and subsequently set required sleeves in the openings. w 1.11 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Execute the work in the best and most thorough manner and to the satisfaction of the Architects and Consulting Engineers, who will jointly interpret the meaning of the drawings and specifications and shall have the power to reject any work and materials which, in their judgment, are not in full accordance therewith. B. Be responsible for material and workmanship until completion and final acceptance. Replace any of same which may be damaged, lost or stolen, without additional cost to Owner. Guard the building and its contents against damage by this Contractor, his employees or Subcontractors, and make good any damage free of charge. C. This Contractor covenants and agrees that he and his Subcontractors and his and their agents, servants and employees will provide and maintain a safe place to work and that he and they will comply with all laws and regulations of any governmental authority having jurisdiction thereof. and the Contractor agrees to indemnify, defend ,. and hold harmless the Owners, Architects and Consulting Engineers from and against any liability, loss, damage or expense, including attorneys' fees, arising from a failure or alleged failure on the part of this Contractor, his Subcontractors and his and their agents, servants and employees to provide and maintain a safe place to work or to Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-6 W C. Submit names, sizes,catalogue numbers and/or samples of the following materials: Sprinkler Heads Fittings Pipe Hangers Strainers Valves Pressure Gauges Insulation ON Sleeves and Escutcheons Valve Tags D. Submit copies of engineering calculations for hydraulically designed systems. E. Shop drawings for hydraulically designed systems and calculations for same shall be submitted as a package. F. Each shop drawing shall contain job title and reference to the applicable drawing and/or Specification Article. 1.6 RECORD DRAWINGS A. During the progress of the work, make a careful record of all changes by which the actual installation differs from that indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. Upon completion of the installation, furnish two complete sets of as-built drawings, one of which shall be furnished on mylar transparencies and one of which shall be furnished on paper. These drawings shall be submitted to the Consulting Engineer for approval. After approval they shall become the property of the Owner. Final payment will be withheld until receipt of the approved record drawings. C. Include the cost of furnishing above prints and preparing these record drawings. 1.7 PROTECTIVE PAINTING A. Provide protective painting as herein specified. B. Deliver all equipment with prime coat or prime and finish coat as specified. Clean up all equipment and leave in condition for finish painting before acceptance. C. Provide all pipe hangers in concealed locations with a heavy factory coat of aluminum or black asphaltum paint unless hangers are galvanized or cadmium-plated. D. Provide a heavy field coat of black asphaltum paint on all steel pipe,cradles,vibration isolating mounts, and the like, that will be encased or partially encased in building construction, set in cement or fill, before items are built into the general construction. 1.8 IDENTIFICATION OF SYSTEMS A. Provide a tag for each valve, three inch diameter brass tags stamped with designating numbers two inches high, painted with white enamel; background painted with red enamel. Attach tag to valve handle or spindle with brass chain. Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-5 to the specified codes and code ratings. Note that in addition to these requirements, other specific submittal data, and forms of data submission, are required by the Contract Documents for particular items of equipment and material. K. Shop drawings for Equipment Rooms, and for piping, conduit and similar distribution services shall show by dimension the exact size and location of each element of the system in both the horizontal and vertical plane,as well as relationship to the building structure, architectural construction, equipment, and the work of other Trades. Pads, foundations, anchorages, supports and attachments to the building structure where required for the installation of the work shall be shown in layout and detail with sizes, dimensions, materials and methods of construction noted. L. Samples shall be identical in all respects to the material which is to be installed or applied in the execution of the work, and shall be of sufficient size or quantity to permit proper evaluation and review. Manufacturer's descriptive labels and printed application instructions which are normally attached to the material or its packaging shall be furnished with the sample. Samples shall be submitted for review when requested by the Architect and/or Engineer. M. Within three weeks after award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit for the Architect's and/or Engineer's review, a list of the manufacturers and Subcontractors whose products and services he proposes to use for the work. Proposed substitutions for material and equipment required by the Contract Documents shall be submitted to .. the Architect and/or Engineer for review during this period. Submittals proposing or requesting substitutions shall be expressly identified as such in a letter of transmittal, with the reasons for requesting the substitution stated. Submittals for this purpose shall be complete in every respect, shall conform to all the information requirements for shop drawing and sample submittals, and shall include, at no cost to the Owner, the necessary revisions to other related work required by the Contract Documents. The judgment of the Architect and/or Engineer with respect to the adequacy and acceptability of a proposed substitution shall be final and binding on the Contractor, and shall not be subject to question in any other place. After the expiration of this period, substitutions for material or equipment shall not be proposed or requested in shop drawing and sample submittals, and the Contractor will be required to execute the work in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents. N. Within six weeks after award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit a schedule listing all shop drawings and samples with the projected date that each item will be submitted to the Architect and/or Engineer for review. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Procedure: Furnish submittals in accordance with the general requirements specified in Section 01340, "Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples". B. Submit manufacturer's data or shop drawings of the following. Sprinkler Equipment A, Sprinkler Head Cabinet Dry Pipe Valve Equipment Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-4 PM B. The Architect and/or Engineer will review shop drawings and samples with reasonable promptness and will return them to the Contractor stamped to indicate the appropriate action as described in"General and Supplementary Conditions". C. Architect's and/or Engineer's review is for general compliance with the design concept MW and contract documents. Markings or comments or the lack thereof shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from compliance with the project plans and Specifications. The Contractor remains solely responsible for details and accuracy, for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of construction, for performing his work in a safe manner, and for coordinating his work with that of other Trades. D. The term "shop drawings" shall include layout, detail, and assembly drawings, diagrams, schedules, catalogue sheets, printed descriptive matter, and tabular and graphical presentations of operating and performance data that describe work required by the Contract Documents. E. No part of the work shall be started in the shop or in the field until the Architect and/or Engineer has reviewed the shop drawings and samples for that portion of the work. Thereafter, the work shall be executed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the indicated status of the reviewed shop drawing. F. Shop drawings and samples shall be submitted for review sufficiently in advance of the scheduled start of the work in the shop or in the field to allow ample time, in consideration of the number and complexity of the drawings in the submittal, for the Architect and/or Engineer to make an orderly review. No extension of the time to complete the work will be granted to the Contractor by reason of his failure in this respect. G. The Contractor shall carefully check shop drawings and samples, including those received by him from Subcontractors and material men, for accuracy, completeness of required information and conformance with the Contract Documents. Shop drawings found to be inaccurate, incomplete or not in conformance with the Contract Documents shall be corrected before being submitted to the Architect and/or Engineer for review. PM H. Each submitted shop drawing shall bear the Contractor's stamped and signed certification that the work has been checked for all related job conditions, for maintenance of architectural conditions, and coordinated with the shop drawings of other affected trades for interrelated work, as required for the proper and complete performance of the work. No shop drawing submittal will be reviewed without this certification. I. Each shop drawing and sample submitted for review shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal, and shall be identified by the project title, Contractor's name, and a reference to the related part of the Contract Documents. J. Shop drawings for manufactured material and equipment shall include model numbers, dimension drawings, operating weights, material specifications, operating features and controls, wiring diagrams, performance characteristics, service procedures, including clearance requirements for maintenance work, and conformance Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-3 ON No B. Provide a complete combination fire standpipe-sprinkler system in accordance with the Massachusetts State Building Code, NFPA requirements, and the rules of all authorities having jurisdiction. on C. The fire standpipe portion of the system shall include: am 1. Siamese connections. 2. Risers serving hose valves and sprinkler connections at each floor. 3. Hose valve stations, where indicated. 4. Preaction sprinkler system serving Elevator Machine Room. 5. Pressure gauges at top of each fire standpipe riser. D. Sprinkler systems shall be supplied from the fire standpipe risers or distribution mains. Systems shall include: 1. A shutoff valve, flow switch, pressure gauge and a drain/test connection for each valved section. 2. A vertical drain riser serving each floor sprinkler rig. 3. The sprinkler system shall be hydraulically calculated to the following parameters: a. Hazard Classification 1) Student/Public: Light Hazard, 0.15 gpm/sq.ft. over 2,000 sq.ft. 2) Storage, Mechanical Equipment Rooms, Shops: Ordinary Hazard, ,2 0 gpm/sq.ft. over 3,000 sq.ft. 3) Loading Level (Dry Pipe System): Ordinary Hazard: .20 gpm/sq.ft. over entire area. E. Wire-trace and insulate all exposed wet system piping to prevent freezing. F. Include all pipe, fittings, mains,risers, branches, valves, alarm valves, alarm switches, ladders, signs, Siamese connections, protective painting, test connections, sprinkler heads, drains, tests, alarm panels, etc., in full accordance with Underwriters' and municipal requirements. 1.4 ARCHITECT'S AND/OR ENGINEER'S REVIEW A. The Architect and/or Engineer will review shop drawings and samples for .. conformance with the design concept of the project and the information contained in the Contract Documents. The Architect's and/or Engineer's review of shop drawings and samples is only for the convenience of the Owner in following the work and does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect's and/or Engineer's review shall not be construed as a complete or detailed check of the work submitted, nor shall it relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors of any sort in the shop drawings and samples, or from the necessity of furnishing any work required by the Contract Documents which have been omitted from the shop drawing submittals. The review of a separate item , shall not indicate review of the complete assembly in which it functions. Nothing in the Architect's and/or Engineer's review of shop drawings and samples shall be considered as authorizing additional cost to the Owner or increased time for completion of the work. Smith Campus Center Fire Protection M0 Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-2 OR SECTION 15500 FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The General and Supplementary General Conditions accompanying these Specifications are hereby made a part of the requirements for the work under this Section of the Specifications. go B. Where General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions clauses are repeated in these Specifications, it is to call special attention to them, or as a further qualification. No General Conditions and/or Supplementary General Conditions uw clause referring to the work of this Section shall be considered waived unless specifically stated herein. C. The "General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for Construction" A.I.A. Document No. A-201, latest edition, shall be included as part of this Section. D. General: Provide all Fire Protection Work in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 NOTICE TO BIDDERS A. Before submittal of bid, examine all drawings, specifications, addenda, alternates, special conditions, and all other bidding documents of all Sections of this project, verify all governing conditions at the site, and become fully informed as to the extent and character of the work required, as well as its relation to other work in the building. Submittal of a bid is an agreement to all requirements of the Contract Documents, and no consideration will be granted for any claimed misunderstanding thereof. B. Submittal of a bid is deemed a representation by the bidder that it is qualified in all respects properly to perform the work for which it is bidding and has experience with similar work. Bidders are deemed to be aware, on the basis of their background and experience, of materials which may be required in the discharge of their responsibilities, even though unspecified. For example, claims for extras for no unspecified shoring or supporting materials will not be considered if the need for such materials would have been reasonably obvious to bidders skilled and experienced in the work to be done, and the submittal of a bid shall be deemed a waiver of any such so claims. 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS A. Extension from the valved outlet, provided inside of the building by the Plumbing Contractor, to the fire protection system. Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15500-1 on SECTION 15500 FIRE PROTECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS Article Title Page 15500- PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 Summary 1 1.2 Notice to Bidders I MR 1.3 Description of Systems I 1.4 Architect's and/or Engineer's Review 2 1.5 Submittals 4 1.6 Record Drawings 5 1.7 Protective Painting 5 1.8 Identification of Systems 5 1.9 Operating and Maintenance Instructions 6 1.10 Cutting and Patching 6 1.11 General Requirements 6 1.12 Verifying Existing Conditions 8 1.13 Coordination 8 1.14 Contractor's Coordination Drawings 9 1.15 Subcontracts 10 1.16 Guarantee I1 1.17 Approved Manufacturers 11 1.18 Unit Prices 12 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials of Piping Systems 13 low 2.2 Hangers, Inserts and Pipe Supports 14 2.3 Sleeves 16 2.4 Valves 17 2.5 Insulation 18 2.6 Sprinkler Heads 19 2.7 Alarm Devices 19 2.8 Fire Standpipe System/Sprinkler System Appurtenances 20 2.9 Elevator Machine Room Preaction Sprinkler System 20 2.10 Sprinkler Drains 23 2.11 Signs 23 2.12 Pipe and Material Finishes 23 2.13 Seismic Restraints 23 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 General Installation 24 3.2 Tests 25 3.3 Cleaning and Protection 26 Smith Campus Center Fire Protection Issued for 100% Construction Documents: 0 1.1 1.12 15500-TC-1 ew ceiling,or floor construction, to the point of final connection to the fixture,except that piping built into fixed benchwork with concealing doors shall not be considered exposed. No chrome plating will be required in Mechanical Equipment Rooms unless specifically called for on the drawings or hereinbefore specified. D. Insulated pipes installed where chrome plating is required shall be enclosed with chrome plated covering tubes. E. Silver painting in lieu of chrome plating is not acceptable. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove from entire installation of work all protecting materials, dirt, dust, smears, stains, paint spots, and the like, and leave in a clean condition. so B. Cover and protect all openings left in floor for passage of pipes. Protect pipes with suitable coverings as soon as set. Close all open ends of pipes with a plug fitting to prevent obstruction and damage. C. Seal all set traps with oil or molasses. Take due precautions against freezing during cold weather. D. Do not use new, permanent, water closets and other new plumbing fixtures during the progress of the work. E. As soon as installed, cover all metal fixture trimming with noncorrosive grease and maintain it until construction work is completed. Upon the completion of the work, clean and polish all fixtures and trimmings. F. Prior to delivering the plant to the Owner, clean all equipment. G. Before final connections are made and before operation of equipment and piping, thoroughly blow out, rod out, or wash out all piping at least twice, in a manner as directed and/or approved by the Architect,to remove all accumulation of dirt, chips or other deleterious material. Make all temporary connections and furnish all appliances ! " required for the purpose of cleaning at no extra expense to the Owner. END OF SECTION 15200 on X:\projects\119\1 1993-Smith Co11egc\Spec\P1umbing_100%Construction_01-11-12_ajm-krs.doc 00 Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-43 so I. Provide valve rigs after the last branch supply connection from circulated water systems, prior to connecting the end of the supply riser to the circulation main. The rig shall consist of one Walworth 160 bronze body, bronze bevel seat,globe valve for ., throttling flow, one check valve and one gate valve, reading in the direction of flow. Eliminate the handle on the throttling valve. Provide separable sockets between the check valve and the gate valve for insertion of a thermometer during balancing. .� 3.4 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide flanged, valved connections at each connection to all mechanical equipment. Where a check valve is provided at equipment, install it between the equipment and adjacent hand valve. B. Make connections to equipment so that equipment may be removed, repaired or replaced with a minimum of piping changes. C. Make plumbing connections to all equipment and fixtures requiring such connections, as indicated on the drawings,whether the equipment and fixtures are furnished by this Trade or are furnished under Specifications of another Trade or by the Owner. Investigate equipment furnished by others to determine if combination fittings have a means of shutoff requiring the installation of check valves as specified under "Water Piping Construction Details". D. Leave valved water connections in equipment spaces and other locations where indicated for the use of other Trades. On each valved outlet for equipment with submerged inlets and/or where indicated on the drawings, provide a swing check valve and a vacuum breaker after the shutoff valve. E. Provide funnel drains and floor drains for the use of the Contractors doing the Fire .. Protection Work and the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Work. These Contractors will run drain piping to outlets provided by this Trade. 3.5 PIPE AND MATERIAL FINISHES A. All piping, hardware, trim, etc., shall be finished in accordance with this Article, unless otherwise specified hereinbefore. *"! B. The following hardware or trim shall be furnished with the finish indicated. Where chrome plating is indicated, the item shall be polished prior to plating so that no bumps, pits or burrs are visible in the finished product. 1. Wall hydrants Chrome plated(satin finish) 2. Hose bibbs in Machine Rooms Rough brass ., or equipment areas 3. Hose bibbs in spaces other than Chrome plated (satin finish) Machine Rooms and equipment areas C. All piping, fittings, escutcheons, valves, supports, hangers, etc., where installed in conjunction with plumbing fixtures or benchwork containing items requiring plumbing connections, shall be chrome plated, where exposed to view. The term "exposed to view" shall apply to all piping from the point that it leaves the wall, Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 1540042 E. Repair or,if required by the Architects,replace defective work with new work without extra charge to the Owner. Repeat tests as directed, until all work is proven satisfactory. F. Restore to its original condition any work damaged or disturbed by tests,engaging the original Trades to do the work of restoration. G. Test all fixtures for soundness, stability of support and satisfactory operation. H. Notify the Architects and Inspectors having jurisdiction at least 48 hours in advance of making the required tests, so that arrangements may be made for their presence to witness the tests. I. Test equipment in service and demonstrate that the equipment performs the work intended for it and that it complies with the requirements of these Specifications for �. such equipment. 3.3 WATER PIPING CONSTRUCTION DETAILS A. Install piping spaced to permit insulation to be installed properly. B. Provide 24 inch long air chambers (full pipe size) on top of all hot and cold water risers on upfeed systems and on all hot and cold water fixture branches. Groups of fixtures may be served by one full branch sized air chamber, where indicated on the drawings. Provide oversized air chambers (three pipe sizes) on heat exchange equipment and pressure booster pump. C. Provide shock absorbers of the sealed bellows type on all individual branch water lines to equipment controlled by solenoid or other quick-closing valves. Shock absorbers shall be as manufactured by Wade Mfg. Co., or P.P.P. Co., sized in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. D. Provide riser control valves on all risers with drain valves at the heel of each riser inside of shutoff valves. E. Provide valves and drain valves on branches to wall hydrants and sill cocks. F. Pitch all piping to low points. Provide all low points and any pockets caused by changes in elevation required by structural or other interferences with 1/2 inch capped nipples(screwed). G. Install approved type of vacuum breakers and/or check valves or backflow preventers, as herein specified, on all equipment and fixture connections required by Code, indicated on the drawings, as specified,or as required for the proper functioning of the equipment. Provide all hose threaded faucets and serrated tips with vacuum breakers. H. Where hot and cold water supply pipes connect to a combination supply fitting with a shutoff valve on its discharge, or the combination supply fitting is equipped with manual or thermostatic mixing valve, equip each hot and cold water supply pipe with a composition disc, swing check valve ahead of the supply fitting. Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-41 am E. Ream all pipe smooth before installation. Do not bend, flatten, split or otherwise injure pipe. F. Use reducing fittings, unless otherwise approved in special cases, in making reduction in size of pipe. Bushings will not be allowed unless specifically approved. G. Where chrome plated piping is installed, cut and thread pipe so that no unplated pipe threads are visible when the work is completed. H. Carry fixture connections, concealed in building construction, to points above floor, break out close to the underside of fixture and rise exposed to fixture. I. Provide protective pans under or over individual pipes passing high voltage (440 V) electrical bus duct, switchgear or starting equipment. Construct the pans of 12 gauge black iron with a 6 inch lip, the corners being welded to make the pans watertight. Give each pan three coats of Rust-Oleum paint and support with pipe hangers, and drain clear of the equipment. J. Do not install exterior piping in water or when trench or weather conditions are unsuitable for the work, as decided by the Architect. K. Wedge fittings at bends or tees in buried water pipelines against concrete thrust blocks poured between the vertical face of the trench and the fittings, to prevent the fittings from being blown off the lines when under pressure. Base the size of the blocks on the working pressure plus 85 psi, the pipe size and the bearing capacity of the soil, all as recommended in the Journal of the American Water Works Association. L. Use friction type wrenches and vises on all copper tubing and brass piping. Remove and replace pipe showing tool marks with new materials. M. Do not reuse any existing piping. 3.2 TESTS A. Subject the drains, waste, and vent piping inside the building to a water test. The water test shall include the entire system from the lowest point to the highest pipe above the roof. Water test shall be made in accordance with all local requirements. The system shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure equivalent to at least a ten foot head of water. After filling, shut off water supply and allow it to stand two hours, under test, during which time there shall be no loss or leakage. �® B. Test all interior water distribution systems to a pressure of at least 50 lbs. gauge higher than their normal operating static or street main pressure; minimum test 150 lbs. gauge. Run test for two hours with no loss in pressure. C. Test connections to the Municipal water supply in accordance with the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. ..� D. Fumish and pay for all devices, materials, supplies, labor and power required in connection with tests. Make all tests in the presence and to the satisfaction of the Architects, Plumbing and other Inspectors of the City, applicable Insurance Association and Public Utilities Inspectors having jurisdiction. Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.1 1.12 15400-40 C. An automatic alternator of the mechanical type shall be provided to alternate the pump operation and to allow both pumps to operate when one cannot carry the load. A standby float switch shall be provided to start both pumps at a third water level setting. D. Provide wall mounted motor starters as specified in Article"Starters and Controls". E. Mount high water alarm float switch on a stand bolted to the basin cover. " F. All devices penetrating the cover plate shall be airtight. G. All float devices deeper than 6 feet 0 inches shall have float guide pipes designed for the depth of the pit and securely fastened to the pit cover. H. Conduit, wiring, etc., will be done by the Electrical Contractor under the supervision of this Contractor who shall be responsible for the complete installation. I. The installation shall be complete with all accessories required to obtain approval of the authorities having jurisdiction. J. Provide a horizontal swing check valve in the discharge from each pump. The valve shall be equipped with a lever weight for quick closure. K. Guarantee shaft and bearings for two years, including related labor required for pulling and replacing pumps. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION OF PIPE A. Install pipes approximately as shown on the drawings and as directed during installation, as straight and direct as possible, forming right angles or parallel lines with building walls and other pipes, and neatly spaced. Erect pipe risers plumb and true,and parallel with walls and other pipes and neatly spaced. B. Keep all horizontal runs of piping, except where concealed in partitions, as high as possible and close to walls. Maintain minimum 1/8 inch fall per foot on all soil,waste and leader lines. C. Do not install pipes or other apparatus in a manner which interferes with the full swing of the doors. ±! D. The arrangement, positions and connections of pipes, fixtures, drains, valves, and the like, indicated on the drawings shall be followed as closely as possible,but the right is reserved by the Architect to change locations and elevations to accommodate conditions which may arise during the progress of the work, prior to installation, without additional compensation for such changes. The responsibility for accurately laying out the work and coordinating the installation with other Trades rests with this Contractor. Should it be found that any work is laid out so that interferences will occur, report that to the Architect before commencing work. Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-39 H. Conduit, wiring, etc., will be done by the Electrical Contractor under the supervision of this Contractor who shall be responsible for the complete installation. I. The installation shall be complete with all accessories required to obtain approval of the authorities having jurisdiction. J. Provide a horizontal swing check valve in the discharge from each pump. The valve shall be equipped with a lever weight for quick closure. 2.26 EJECTORS A. Provide in a cast iron basin,in a concrete pit,provided under Specifications of another Trade, a duplex sewage pumping unit, Weil Pump Co., submerged nonclog type. Each pump shall have the capacity scheduled. B. Furnish and install on the concrete basin, a 1/2 inch thick galvanized steel diamond plate cover having openings for two pumps, two brass float switch rods, high water alarm brass float switch rod and manhole. Cover shall have crossbeams to support the pumps and be properly supported on an angle iron frame, in an approved manner. This Contractor shall deliver to the Construction Manager all required galvanized frames, anchor clips and drawings to facilitate the installation of the cover and adjacent concrete work. The cover and supports must be of adequate strength to guarantee proper alignment of the pumps without deflection in the cover assembly. 1. Each pump shall be direct connected to the drive motor with a flexible coupling and mounted on a heavy floor plate with gastight gland and packing type stuffing box around the shaft, machined registered surface for the motor tripod to assure permanent alignment of the pump and motor shafts, and discharge pipe with flanged fitting. 2. Discharge pipe shall be of galvanized wrought steel sealed at both ends by nonrigid connections to prevent strain on the pump unit and with a 45 degree, 125 lb. flanged fitting bolted to the floor plate. 3. Motors shall be vertical heavy duty, solid shaft type with ratings and enclosures ' as specified in Article "Electric Motors" and mounted on heavy, rigid supports with the bottom end bell not less than one foot above the floor plate. 4. Each pump shall have a heavy cast iron volute casing with volute and discharge nozzle in one piece symmetrical casting, flanged galvanized wrought steel shaft column with tongue and groove construction at all bearing housings, high tensile Type 416 stainless steel shaft turned, ground and polished, two blade + cast iron nonclog impeller and with all flanges accurately machined and registered. 5. The shaft and impeller shall be supported by a sealed ball thrust bearing in a moistureproof and dustproof housing mounted above the pump floor plate providing precise location for the impeller in the pump casing. Impeller shall be dynamically and hydraulically balanced to prevent excessive wear on the casing bearing, with top section having a machined sealing surface to prevent .� flushing action from the liquid in the pump casing. Impellers shall pass a minimum of a 2-1/2 inch sphere. 6. Lower bearing hall be extra long g g (minimum of 5-1/2 inches), heavy duty type locked in the casting above the casing, with spiral grooving to insure distribution of the bearing lubricant. Intermediate bronze bearings shall be provided for every four feet of pump shaft (minimum of one), with individual lubricating line(grease) to each upper, lower and intermediate bearing. Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-38 installation of the covers and adjacent concrete work. The cover and supports must be of adequate strength to guarantee proper alignment of the pumps without deflection in the cover assembly. 1. Each pump shall be direct connected to the drive motor with a flexible coupling and mounted on a heavy floor plate with watertight gland and packing type stuffing box around the shaft, machined registered surface for the motor tripod to assure permanent alignment of the pump and motor shafts, and discharge pipe with flanged fitting. 2. Discharge pipe shall be of galvanized wrought steel sealed at both ends.by nonrigid connections to prevent strain on the pump unit and with a 45 degree, 125 lb. flanged fitting bolted to the floor plate. 3. Motors shall be vertical heavy duty, solid shaft type with ratings and enclosures as specified in Article "Electric Motors" and mounted on heavy, rigid supports with the bottom end bell not less than one foot above the floor plate. 4. Each pump shall have a heavy cast iron volute casing with volute and discharge nozzle in one piece symmetrical casting, flanged galvanized wrought steel shaft column with tongue and groove construction at all bearing housings, high tensile Type 416 stainless steel shaft turned, ground and polished, two blade cast iron nonclog impeller and with all flanges accurately machined and registered. 5. The shaft and impeller shall be supported by a sealed ball thrust bearing in a moisture-proof and dustproof housing mounted above the pump floor plate providing precise location for the impeller in the pump casing. Impeller shall be dynamically and hydraulically balanced to prevent excessive wear on the casing bearing, with top section having a machined sealing surface to prevent !!* flushing action from the liquid in the pump casing. Impellers shall pass a minimum of a 2-1/2 inch sphere. 6. Lower bearing shall be extra long (minimum of 5-1/2 inches), heavy duty type locked in the casting above the casing, with spiral grooving to insure distribution of the bearing lubricant. A minimum of one intermediate bronze bearing shall be provided for every four feet of pump, shaft, with individual grease lubricating line to each upper, lower and intermediate bearing. Shaft and bearings shall be guaranteed for two years, including related labor required for pulling and replacing pumps. C. An automatic alternator of the mechanical type shall be provided to alternate the pump operation and to allow both pumps to operate when one cannot carry the load. A standby float switch shall be provided to start both pumps at a third water level P" setting. D. Provide wall mounted motor starters as specified in Article "Starters and Controls". E. Mount high water alarm float switch on a stand bolted to the basin cover. F. All devices penetrating the cover plate shall be watertight. G. All float devices deeper than 6 feet 0 inches shall have float guide pipes designed for the depth of the pit and securely fastened to the pit cover. Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-37 a H. All magnetic starters subject to manual start shall have momentary contact start and stop buttons built into cover. All magnetic starters subject to electrical interlock or automatic control shall have Hand-Off-Automatic switches built into cover. I. All starters located not directly adjacent to motors shall have a pilot light built into cover. In all such cases, a disconnect switch at motor will be provided by the Electrical Contractor. J. All starters for 440 volt service and higher shall have 120 volt transformers built into starter cubicle or casing. Transformers with fuses in the primary and secondary circuits shall serve all control circuits, including auxiliary devices. Each starter subject to electrical interlock and/or automatic control shall have the necessary auxiliary contacts. One set of terminals shall be provided for each control circuit. Control centers shall be provided with control terminal blocks with an individual terminal for each external connection. No more than one external connection shall be made to any terminal. K. All magnetic starters shall have thermal overload in each phase leg and low voltage protection. L. All coils,cores,resistors,insulation,contacts,trippers,etc.,of starters and relays shall be of the approved type. All parts subject to wear,arcing, etc.,shall be renewable. M. All wiring, starters, switches, etc., shall be in full accordance with all local and Underwriters'Code requirements. N. All starters shall be enclosed in NEMA I enclosures unless otherwise specified. O. Hereinafter specified control groupings shall be constructed in accordance with this Article. Where pilot lights, Hand-Off-Automatic switches, or reset buttons are called for, they shall be mounted through the door of the control cabinet. P. All heater elements must be coordinated against motor nameplate ratings. Q. Furnish detailed wiring diagrams to those installing the Electrical Work, and furnish such other information necessary to assure the proper connection, operation and control of motorized equipment, including interlocks, and automatic and safety control auxiliary circuits. 2.25 VERTICAL SUMP PUMPS .. A. Provide in cast iron basins in concrete pits, provided under the Specifications of , another Trade, duplex sump pumping units, Well Pump Co., submerged nonclog type. Each pump shall have the capacity scheduled. B. Provide on each concrete basin a 1/2 inch thick steel diamond plate cover having openings for two pumps, two brass float switch rods, high water alarm brass float switch rod and manhole. Cover shall have crossbeams to support the pumps and be properly supported on a galvanized angle iron frame, in an approved manner. Deliver "" to the Builder all required frames, anchor clips and drawings to facilitate the Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-36 D. All motors and accessories shall comply in all respects with NEMA standards, with a rated operating temperature for NEMA B motors of 100°F. higher than ambient. ap E. All motors are to have roller or ball bearing mounted shafts. F. All motors mounted in the vertical position shall have drip covers. G. Horsepower,rpm,voltage,hertz and phase shall be as scheduled. • H. Wound rotor motors shall be open induction type with a rated operating temperature of 100°F. higher than ambient. I. Motors shall conform to the voltage waveform distortion limits established by the IEEE 519 Standard on the line-side of its connection. 2.24 STARTERS AND CONTROLS A. All starters and related devices indicated to be installed in motor control centers shall be furnished by this Contractor and delivered to the factory of the manufacturer of the heating, ventilating and air conditioning motor control center,with all required wiring diagrams to permit the complete factory assemblage of the starting equipment. The starters must be of the same manufacture as the control center furnished by the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Contractor, and this Contractor shall note that the selection of the starter manufacturer from the names listed in Article "Approved Manufacturers" will be made at the Owner's option subsequent to the award of contract. B. Where starters and related devices are not in motor control centers, furnish and deliver to the Electrical Contractor (who will install and wire same), all starting equipment, circuit breakers and controlling devices, as required for all plumbing equipment furnished by this Contractor. C. Coordinate electrical equipment with the components furnished with each piece of plumbing equipment so that the entire assembly of electrical components and plumbing equipment components of an electrical nature comply with the National go Electrical Code and governing local Codes. D. Manual starters shall include thermal overload protection and disconnect switch. E. All starters interlocked with an outside source of control and all starters 1/2 hp and over shall be combination circuit breaker and across-the-line magnetic starters. Starters for motors over 75 hp shall be autotransformer type with 65%taps. F. Each starter shall be equipped with one sealing contact for momentary contact start buttons and auxiliary contact for control of pilot lights. G. All pushbuttons shall be heavy duty, oiltight, one hole mounting,momentary contact, either normally open or closed contacts as required. Pilot lights shall be red and ganged in same enclosure with pushbuttons. Pilot lights shall be for 120 volt service as noted herein. Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-35 so 3. All piping suspended by individual hangers 12 in. in length or less from the top of pipe to the bottom of the structural support for hanger. E. Equipment mounted on springs does nor require additional seismic restraints, providing that the spring mountings: 1. Comply with general characteristics of spring isolators. 2. Have vertical limit stops and are capable of supporting equipment at fixed elevation during equipment erection. 3. Incorporate seismic snubbing restraint in all directions at specified acceleration loadings. F. Acceptable seismic spring mountings are: Type SSLR -M.I.I. , Type SAWR -V.M.C.I. Type BXL -V.E.C. G. Seismic Restraint Types .� 1. Seismic Restraint Type I a. Each corner or side seismic restraint shall incorporate minimum 5/8 inch thick pad limit stops. Restraints shall be made of plate, structural members of square metal tubing in a welded assembly, incorporating resilient pads. Angle bumpers are not acceptable. System to be field- bolted to deck with 1.5 "g"acceleration capacity. b. Seismic spring mountings as described above are an acceptable alternative,providing all seismic loading requirements are met. C. Mason Industries Type Z-1011,Type Z-1225, or as approved. 2. Seismic Restraint Type II: Metal cable type with approved fastening devices to equipment and structure. System to be field bolted to deck or overhead structural members or deck with aircraft cable and clamps as per SMACNA •r guidelines. 2.23 ELECTRIC MOTORS we A. Provide electric motors for driving plumbing equipment of proper type, power and speed to suit the specified equipment; if other equipment is submitted, include the proper adjustment of motor speed and power without additional cost to the Owner. am Coordinate the NEMA type of each motor with the torque and inertia load of the equipment served, the inrush characteristics of the motor and the starter selection so that all items furnished constitute a properly related package. Certify to the .N coordination of the equipment at the time drawings are submitted for approval. B. Motors driving air compressors shall be belt-connected with approved belt guards; pumps shall be generally direct-connected, constant-speed, NEMA B squirrel-cage type motors unless otherwise specified. Single phase motors shall be capacitor-start, induction-run, or split phase type as approved for the service. Motors for use on .. variable speed pumping systems shall be NEMA D design. C. All Motors: Quiet operating type, guaranteed to fulfill specified requirements without producing any sound audible outside of Machine Rooms. Supply motors made by one ..� of the approved manufacturers. Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-34 on 1. The modifications of the fittings shall be as follows: a. Modification No. 1 (M-1): Substitute a vertical fitting with branch inlet connection. b. Modification No. 2 (M-2): Substitute a vertical fitting without branch connections. C. Modification No. 3 (M-3): Substitute a vertical fitting with tapped auxiliary connection. D. Generally support urinals on concealed wall carriers securely fastened to Zurn Series 1222 chair carrier with block base supports bolted to slab, top plate to have threaded bolts with nuts for fastening to the fixture hanger, lower plate for supporting bearing bolts to keep lower part of fixture free of walls, steel pipe uprights,adjustable sleeves M! and adjustable alignment truss. E. Generally support lavatories on Zurn Series 1231 concealed arm chair carrier, single or double as required, with block base supports bolted to slab, steel pipe uprights, adjustable sleeves to receive arms and adjustable alignment truss. Concealed arms shall be provided with leveling screws and locking device and shall be designed to receive cast brass chrome plated threaded escutcheons. 2.21 TOILET ACCESSORIES A. All toilet accessories will be furnished under the Specifications of another Trade, but this Contractor shall review the list of accessories and furnish all labor and incidental material required to install those items considered"Plumber's work"by local unions. 2.22 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. All plumbing equipment, whether isolated or not, shall be bolted to structure to allow for minimum 0.5 "g" of acceleration and 1.0"g" for life safety equipment and system. Bolt points and diameter of inserts shall be submitted and verified as part of the Contractor's submission for each piece of equipment and certified by a licensed Civil or Structural Engineer. B. All isolated plumbing equipment and/or components shall be restrained by Type I or Type lI devices as specified hereinafter. C. All seismic restraints shall be capable of safely accepting 0.5 "g" (1.0 "g" for life safely system) external forces without failure and shall maintain equipment in a captive position. Seismic restraints shall not short circuit isolation systems or transmit objectionable vibration or noise, and shall be provided on all equipment as scheduled on drawings. Calculations by Registered Civil or Structural Engineer shall be submitted to verify snubber capacities for each piece of equipment. ew D. Seismic restraints are not required for the following, provided they are not part of the life safety system: 1. MER piping less than 1-1/4 in. internal diameter (except gas piping and High Hazard piping). 2. All other piping less than 2-1/2 in. internal diameter. Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-33 No loose key angle stops; reducers and cast brass escutcheons with set screws; 1- 1/4 inch x 1-1/2 inch cast brass "P" trap with cleanout; slip inlet, threaded outlet, cast brass escutcheons with set screws. Provide Truebro "Handi Lav- Guard"protection on exposed hardware. 5. P-4 Mop Service Sink shall be as manufactured by American Standard, Model 7741.00. The mop service basin shall be made from enameled cast iron. The unit shall be 28 inches by 28 inches. The unit shall have 13 inch high walls with not less than 1 inch wide shoulders and an integrally molded shelf 10-9/16 inches wide. The drain body plate,No. 7721.038, shall be cast brass, cadmium plated, complete with cast brass locknut and gaskets. A combination dome strainer and lint basket made from No. 302, 16 gauge stainless steel attached with tamperproof screws shall be included. Provide a plastic edge molding on the two exposed edges of basin. The plastic molding shall be made of PVC *� (polyvinyl chloride)semi-rigid, 12 inch by 3/8 inch o.d. The basin shall be fitted with American Standard 8344.111 supply fitting with stops in shanks, hose end spout with bucket hook, top brace and vacuum breaker. The basin shall be fitted with Kohler K8908 supply fitting with stops in shanks, hose end spout with bucket hook,top brace and vacuum breaker. 6. P-5 Electric Water Cooler shall be Haws single-level wheelchair access Model No. H-1001-8, standard No. 4 satin finish stainless steel, self-closing pushbutton valves. Mounting frame, automatic stream height regulator, complete with chiller mounted at unit, Model No. HCR8, 8 gph, hermetically sealed refrigeration system, 115 hp compressor motor, 115 volts, single phase, 60 hertz. Furnish manufacturer's warranty. Unit shall have UL and CSA approvals. an 2.20 FIXTURE SUPPORTS A. Support all of the hereinbefore specified fixtures securely in a neat workmanlike on manner on approved carriers or supports. The method of support for each fixture shall be as listed hereinafter, except where fixture designations on the drawings indicate modifications. Zurn Industries, Inc. numbers have been used to designate the type and no quality of equipment desired; equivalent supports as made by others listed in Article "Approved Manufacturers" may be submitted for approval. B. Generally, support water closets on Zurn Series ZU1203 combined chair carrier and adjustable wall closet fitting. The carrier or support shall include a corrosion resistant pipe nipple and adjustable nosepiece with closet gasket, studs, hardware and chrome plated cap nuts necessary to secure the fixture to the support. Carrier or support shall have a monolithic faceplate with removable incremented sections at bottom and fitted with adjustable, reversible feet, bolted to the slab, so carrier will not depend on wall construction for support. The basic installation shall be horizontal. The fittings shall be cast iron with 2 inch vent connection, single or double, left or right hand as required for the location in which it is installed. The combined carrier fitting shall allow 4 inches of vertical adjustment. w C. The modifications listed hereinafter shall substitute in the basic water closet installation a Zurn Series ZU1204 vertical, single or double, as indicated on the drawings, and shall include all requirements of the basic installation specified .. hereinbefore: Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-32 ,�,, 2.19 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. All fixtures shall be free from imperfections, true as to line, angles, curves and color, smooth, watertight, and complete in every respect. B. All fixtures specified to be of vitreous ware, shall be fired vitreous chinaware of the best quality, nonabsorbent and burned so that the whole mass is thoroughly fused and vitrified, producing a material white in color, which when fractured will show a homogeneous mass, close grained and free from pores. The glazing and vitreous china fixtures shall be white, thoroughly fused and united to the body, without discoloration, chips, or flaws, and shall be free from craze. Warped or otherwise imperfect fixtures will not be accepted. C. All fixtures shall be furnished by one manufacturer unless otherwise specified. The figure numbers used hereinafter are those of American Standard,Inc.,Crane Co., Eljer s.► or Kohler Co., unless otherwise noted, and are used as identification of the types, quality and features desired. Prefix numbers identify and locate the fixtures on the drawings relative to the fixtures described herein. D. All fittings,cast brass set screw escutcheons, faucets, traps, exposedpiping, etc., shall be brass, chrome plated over nickel plate with polished finish. Any hanger nuts visible shall likewise be chrome plated over nickel plate. E. Flush valves shall be Sloan Valve Co. or Coyne and Delany Co., as specified; quiet action devices shall be provided on valves, except where static pressures are less than 30 psig. F. Fixtures shall be: 1. P-1 Water Closets shall be American Standard 2257.103 Afwall bowl vitreous china siphon jet, elongated 1.6 gpf quiet action bowl wall hung water closet with 1-1/2 inch top spud; fitted with Sloan Royal No. 111-HL-3YO-1.5, quiet action flush valve with non-hold-open feature, cast wall escutcheon, white metal handle, angle stop, vacuum breaker, 1-1/2 inch outlet spud escutcheon, fitted with Church commercial toilet seat Model No. 9500C open front, white, with concealed stainless steel check hinge. The escutcheon at the fixture spud may be chrome plated pressed brass but it must be made tight by means of the locknut or inside clips as approved. Carriers as hereinafter specified. 2. P-lA Water Closets shall be the same as P-1, except with rim height set at 18 inches above finished floor(to be used by handicapped personnel). 3. P-2 Urinals shall be American Standard Allbrook Model No. 6541.132, 1.0 gpf vitreous china siphon jet urinal with extended shields, integral flush spreader, 3/4 inch top spud, outlet connection threaded 2 inch inside with bolts and washers; fitted with Sloan Royal Model No. 186-1-HL-3 quiet action flush valve, angle stop with protecting cap, vacuum breaker, non-hold-open feature, 3/4 inch outlet, cast wall escutcheon with set screw; especially designed to operate the urinal. 4. P-3 Lavatories (Public) shall be Elkay Model LLVR-1310,deck-mounted 16 in. x 12-1/2 in. modified ADA oval lavatory, 18 gauge, Type 302, self-rim, fitted with Speakman metering faucet Model No. S4171 LD; integral perforated grid with offset 1-1/4 inch tailpiece; pair McGuire 2165-LK 3/8 inch supplies with w� Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-31 am One- All-bronze pressure relief valve with monel seat set at pressure indicated on drawings, or as required,pipe discharge to funnel drain. Valve to have a Btu rating equal to capacity of heating element. One- Insertion type thermometer. Two - 1-1/2 inch all-bronze vacuum breakers. 2.17 WATER METERS A. Water meters shall be compound type, sized as shown on the drawings. Meter shall have all bronze case. All internal working parts shall be of brass, bronze and noncorrosive units. 1. Meter shall consist of one current type meter to register large flows and one disc type meter to register small flows. 2. A built-in bypass valve shall open automatically when the volume of flow exceeds the capacity of the disc meter,to activate the turbine type meter. 3. Meter shall register in cubic feet or U.S. gallons and be of the straight or round reading type as required by local authorities. Reading register shall be readily removable for repairs. 4. Provide an encoder register, wire and remote receptacles for remote reading of water and fire service. Devices to be "Neptune" ARB-II, or as approved by local authorities. B. Pressure rating of meter shall be suitable for service in which it is installed. C. Meter shall be constructed for easy maintenance and calibration. D. Maximum pressure loss through the meter shall not exceed the stated pressure and the flow rate listed on the drawings. E. Meters must conform with the requirements of the AWWA and must comply with all �. local authorities having jurisdiction. Meters shall be Hersey-Sparling, or as approved. F. This Trade shall provide proper supports under water meters. G. Provide a double detector check in the fire service. Detector check shall be Hersey- Sparling,or as approved. 2.18 DRAINS A. All floor drains and funnel drains indicated on the floor plans have been given lettered .. type designations corresponding to the letters listed in the "Drain Schedule". B. The drains have been listed with Zurn figure numbers, for illustrative purposes, but .� equivalent drains of other approved manufacturers may be submitted for approval. The drains shall be of basically the same design and weight of the model listed and shall include the variations indicated in the schedule. C. Special purpose drains shall be as detailed on the drawings. 4W Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-30 _ B. Provide thermometers on each cold water service into the building and outlet of each water heating unit,and other locations indicated on the drawings or specified. 1. 'Thermometers: 4-1/2 inch dial type, mercury actuated, with adjustable angle face, immersion bulb and separable socket, cast iron case, white face, black figures and pointer, American Type "Any Angle", as manufactured by Manning, Maxwell & Moore, or as approved. Sockets for installation in nonferrous systems shall be standard weight bronze or brass sockets; sockets in ferrous systems shall be Type 316 stainless steel sockets. Bulbs and sockets shall be installed so that they extend into the pipe and parallel with the flow of fluid. 2.15 ALARM DEVICES A. All alarm panels, gongs or other alarm receiving devices and all interconnecting electrical wiring will be furnished under the Specifications of other Trades. Provide all switches directly connected to equipment provided by this Trade, required for the transmission of alarm impulses. Switches shall be open or closed type to conform with the alarm system to which they are connected. B. Provide switches for systems as specified herein and/or under the system requiring such devices. Without excluding the generality of the foregoing, provide alarm switches for the following systems: 1. High temperature alarm,Honeywell L4008B, for each hot water heating unit. 2.16 HOT WATER STORAGE HEATERS A. Provide,where indicated on drawings, water storage heater,as manufactured by Viessmann Manufacturing Company,or as approved. Tank shall be of dimensions and storage capacity as scheduled. Tank shall be Type"B",built in accordance with the ASME Code Standards,with all seams double-butt welded by certified Code welders. Insurance certificates and stamping to this effect shall be furnished. Tank to be constructed of steel with the shells and heads of thickness as scheduled. The Veissmann heater shall be vitocell horizontal indirect-fired storage water heater. Each hot water storage tank and heat exchanger shall be made of hygienic,austenitic chrome-nickel stainless steel. The units shall be suitable for domestic hot water production in combination with boiler hot water. The tank shall be designed for use on heating systems with a maximum boiler water temperature of 392°F. at a maximum pressure of 195 psi. B. Provide tank with suitable tappings for cold water inlet,circulation connection,drain connection, thermometer, vacuum breaker,relief valve and a modified hot water w outlet consisting of a full coupling and dip tube,or as approved, so that the hot water supply is taken at a point 6 inches below the top of the tank, all as shown on the drawings or as required. Air relief valve to be provided at relief outlet. Heater to be provided with suitable openings for boiler water,hot water return and vacuum breaker connections. go C. Tank shall be completely outfitted with the following accessories: Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-29 on tm 9. Hangers: Carry insulation continuously through hangers. a. Insulation on hot pipes shall be protected from hangers and guides by pipe protection saddles soldered to the pipe, and filled with pipe �** insulation or insulating cement. Saddles shall not be welded to the pipe hanger or support. b. Insulation on cold pipes shall be protected from hangers and guides by a ,. 180 degree galvanized steel saddle on the outside of the insulation and vapor barrier. A half section of 9 lb. density fiber glass insulation of the same thickness as the pipe insulation, and full length of the saddle, shall wo be used to support the weight of the pipe at the saddle. Saddles shall be of sufficient length to allow for the maximum pipe movement and hanger load at the specified hanger spacing. C. Pipe protection saddles may be factory assembled thermal protection saddles,Pipe Shields, Inc.Model C5-CW,or as approved. C. Equipment Fiberglas Board A* Cold Water Meters Fiberglas Aerocor with foil facings 1 inch sealed and tied with jute twine or wire, an open weave +•• glass cloth jacket applied with BF 30-35 adhesive. 2.13 ACCESS DOORS A. Access doors will be provided under the Specifications of another Trade. Furnish under this Section all necessary information pertaining to quantity, size and locations. ` B. Install all valves so that they are accessible. Coordinate valve locations with the access doors. Relocate at no additional expense to the Owner any valves considered by the Architect to be in a position causing difficulty in operation or repair. C. Install all valves to fit within the limit of the following size access doors: Where two or less valves are located with their bonnets within 12 inches of the face of the door and all portions of the valves are within the area defined by the opening in the door, 16 inch x 16 inch doors may be used. Where more than two valves are served by a door and the bonnets are within 12 inches of the face of the door, the size of the door shall be increased so that all portions of the valves are within the area defined by the opening in the door. Where the bonnets of the valves are more than 12 inches from the face of the door, the doors shall have a minimum of 20 inch x 20 inch clear opening. 2.14 GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS A. Provide pressure gauges on each water service into the building,and other locations as specified or indicated. 1. Pressure Gauges: 4-1/2 inch size, cast iron case, aluminum ring, bronze bourdon tube, all brass linkage, 1/4 inch N.P.T. bottom connection, with black pointer, white face, black figures and segmentals as per Ashcroft Gauge Co. Series No. 1079, or as approved, for the service in which they are installed. Gauges shall be fitted with brass lever handled cock, Fig. No. 1095, or as approved. Gauges shall read in the pressure ranges of the systems in which they are installed or as listed in the Equipment Capacity Schedule. Smith Campus Center 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 Plumbing 15400-28 .. OR Hot Pipes Concealed All Service Jacket, 25 ASJ/SSL, fire retardant vapor barrier, factory applied, stapled. Hot Pipes Exposed All Service Jacket, 25 ASJ/SSL, fire retardant vapor barrier, factory applied, with self-sealing laps and end strips. Cold Pipes,Concealed and All Service Jacket, 25 ASJ/SSL, fire and retardant vapor Exposed barrier, factory applied, self-sealed at jacket laps and butt strips. Ends of pipe insulation shall be sealed off at the valves, fittings, flanges and 21 feet of continuous runs with BF 85-20 or IC-225. a. It is the intent of these Specifications that all vapor barriers be sealed and continuous through hangers, sleeves,etc. 5. Fittings, Valves and Flanges a. Where manufactured, use factory premolded glass fiber covers on all fittings and valves. Insulate flanges on cold service with glass fiber insulation to a thickness equal to the adjoining covering. b. Where premolded covers are not available for fittings and valves, use mitered sections of 7 pound Fiberglas pipe covering, or build up the insulation with 1 pound Fiberglas Aerocor double wrapped to a thickness equal to the adjoining insulation. C. On hot service, finish fittings, valves and flanges with open weave glass cloth applied with BF 30-36 adhesive. On cold service, install a vapor 40 barrier on fittings, valves and flanges consisting of open weave glass cloth applied with BF 30-35 adhesive and finished with a flooding brush coat of the same adhesive. 6. Insulation on Piping Subject to Freezing: Cover piping subject to freezing with an additional 1 inch minimum of Fiberglas insulation over that specified when not subject to freezing. A minimum of 2 inch thick Fiberglas insulation is required. 7. Insulation Exposed to Weather: Cover all piping with weatherproof jacket of corrugated aluminum with a 3 inch lap that will shed water. Fittings, valves and flanges weatherproofed with a weatherproof mastic reinforced with a glass cloth membrane and further coated with mastic. 8. Fastening of Insulation a. Inside Building Concealed Aluminum bands or soft annealed wires at approximately 12 inch centers and at all fittings and valves. Wire shalt not compress the insulation or damage the jackets. Exposed Aluminum bands on approximately 12 inch an centers and at all fittings and valves. Exposed to Weather Aluminum bands or copper wires at approximately 12 inch centers and at all fittings go and valves. Smith Campus Center Plumbing +�w 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-27 .. 2.11 HOSE BIBBS A. All interior single hose bibbs for use on tempered and cold water service: Chicago Faucet Co. Model No. 7 or 15 cast brass, short pattern 3/4 inch hose end faucets with male pipe thread for connection to exposed piping or female threaded flanged connection for piping concealed in wall construction. 2.12 INSULATION A. All insulation shall be done by an approved Contractor specializing in this type of work. Insulation shall be Owens-Corning Fiberglas,or as approved. B. Piping 1. List of Materials Fiberglass Thickness Cold Water Mains and Branches 1/2 inch Cold Water Risers(including 1/2 inch Pump Discharge) .R Cold Water Fixture Risers 1/2 inch (including Wet Stacks and Toilets) Cold Water Fixture Branches in Pipe Spaces None Cold Water Fixture Branches Exposed 1/2 inch Cold Water Fixture Branches 1/2 inch above Ceilings Horizontal Leader and Horizontal Storm Drain 1 inch (including Vertical Stub to Roof Drain) Horizontal Drains Serving Dehumidifiers 1/2 inch (above Hung Ceilings) Tempered and Hot Water Mains, 1 inch Risers and Branches Tempered Water Fixture Branches 1 inch in the Pipe Spaces 2. If insulation is not manufactured in thickness specified, substitute the nearest, heavier thickness manufactured. 3. Fiberglas Density: All glass fiber insulation shall be of one-piece type with at least 4 pound density. .. 4. Insulation Jackets Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-26 diaphragm failure. Both check valves and relief valve shall be constructed so they may be serviced without removing device from the line. Unit shall be 00 rated to 175 psi working pressure at 180°F. water temperature. Backflow preventers 2 inches and smaller, Watts series, shall have bronze bodies and trim. 2-1/2 inches and larger shall have cast iron bodies with epoxy coating and bronze trim,or as approved. D. Hose Connected Vacuum Breakers 1. Hose connected vacuum breakers must assure against back-siphonage .by relieving water under pressure when hose end is closed off. 2. Unit shall be vandalproof, all brass construction, finished to match existing piping with female inlet and hose-end outlet connection. Unit shall be Watts No. 8A or 8AC,or as approved. E. Pipeline Air Gaps 1. Pipeline air gaps must assure against back-siphonage by overflowing. Units shall be installed in water makeup lines to vessels under atmospheric pressure only. Air gap of unit must be at least twice the pipe diameter of the pipe in an which it is installed. 2. Pipe material and finish of unit shall match piping system in which it is installed. Unit shall be as approved. F. Vacuum Breakers and Backflow Preventers: Where indicated on plans and as required by the latest edition of the Administrative Code of the State of Massachusetts, furnish and install vacuum breakers and backflow prevention equipment as described above. 2.9 STRAINERS A. Provide strainers on the upstream or inlet side of each automatic temperature and/or pressure regulating valve and/or automatically controlled open-close device, either snap-acting or modulating, and in systems handling liquids. B. Except where specifically noted on the drawings to the contrary, or where local Codes dictate to the contrary, provide "Y" type strainers, full pipe size, fitted with blowoff gate valves of the same size as the blowoff plug thread. C. Strainer Basket Screens: Brass,except as otherwise specified,perforations as follows: System or Service Size of Each Perforation No. of Perforations per Square Inch Water .033 inch 324 D. Provide strainer bodies of the same material as scheduled for valves. 2.10 WALL HYDRANTS A. Provide Wade Model No. B65C, or as approved, cast brass, anti-siphon, nonfreeze low wall hydrants with wall box, finished as specified under"Pipe and Material Finishes". a _. Smith Campus Center Plumbing so 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-25 .o 5. The tempering valves shall be adjustable to deliver water within close tolerances of any temperature between 120 degrees and 200 degrees Fahrenheit. 6. The tempering valves shall be as manufactured by the Holby Valve Co., Inc., New York,New York 10021. 2.8 VACUUM BREAKER AND BACKFLOW PREVENTERS „ A. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers 1. Atmospheric vacuum breakers must assure positive protection against back- siphonage in the event that pressure loss causes vacuum conditions. Poppets are to be Selcon plastic. Vacuum breakers are to be rough brass unless otherwise noted. 2. Atmospheric vacuum breakers shall be used as protection against cross- connections where the vacuum breaker is not subjected to back pressures due to pumps or gravity(open end service)and must be installed on the discharge side of last shutoff, and be of nonspilling type. Install at a minimum of 6 inches above the highest overflow level, with the air inlet in a level position and a check valve in line after vacuum breaker. No valves shall be installed after vacuum breaker. They shall be rated to 150 psi working pressure and shall withstand water temperature to 212T. Atmospheric vacuum breakers shall be Watts 288A,or as approved. B. Double Check Valve Assembly 1. Backflow preventer, 314 inch through 4 inch, shall consist of two bronze independently operated internally spring loaded check valves, two bronze gate valves and four test cocks for field testing. Check valves must be loaded to withstand 1 psi in direction of flow. All internal parts must be readily accessible for maintenance without removing device from line, must be installed in a horizontal position and be accessible for periodic testing. Units 5 + inch to 10 inch shall be of similar construction,but have "Y" type check valves and be of internally epoxy-coated cast iron construction. 2. Double check valve assembly shall be Watts or as approved. C. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer 1. Unit shall prevent contamination of water lines due to pressure reversal. This w„ shall be accomplished by automatically reducing the pressure through the unit by means of the "reduced pressure principle". Unit shall consist of two "Y" pattern spring loaded check valves, a differential pressure relief valve having two diaphragms separated by a spacer, two shutoff valves, and test cocks for field testing. Under normal flow conditions, both check valves shall be open and the differential relief valve shall remain closed. Under backflow conditions and when one of the check valves leaks, the differential relief valve shall open so and discharge to atmosphere to maintain the zone at 2.0 psi lower than inlet pressure. 2. Device shall automatically reduce the pressure in the "zone" between the check ON valves. Should the pressure differential, normally 5 psi, drop to 2.0 psi, the relief valve shall open, discharge the liquid to floor or funnel drain and maintain the proper differential. A small hole in the spacer will bleed to 40e atmosphere if either diaphragm is damaged, giving visual evidence of im Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-24 wo low C. Drain valves (at riser heels and low points): 3/4 inch with male thread for hose connections. 00 D. Furnish one manufacturer's guarantee for all valves. E. Composition Discs: Types recommended by the accepted valve manufacturer for the service in which they are installed. F. Provide ladders or chain operating devices in Mechanical Equipment Rooms for all ' valves not accessible from the floor. G. Ball Valves: Ball valves shall be all brass or bronze construction with replaceable PO teflon seat ring,,two-piece union or three-piece bolted construction, with stuffing box; working pressure shall not be less than 150 lbs. at 175°F. and shall conform with ANSI standards. All valves shall be standard port unless full-ported valves are indicated on plans. Threaded valves used in brazed or soldered piping systems shall be fitted with adapters. When brazed or soldered end valves are used, teflon seats must be removed prior to soldering or brazing. H. Butterfly Valves: Wafer type butterfly valves (use screwed lug type when valve has to perform dead-end service): Cast iron body to 200 psi WWP, ductile iron for higher pressures, installed between flanges of similar rating; stem to be Monel or 416 stainless steel sized in accordance with AWWA-6504-70 Class 150; stem seal shall not rely on compression between seating material and disc, but shall be accomplished by O-rings; disc shall be bronze, fastened to shaft by means of dowels or locknuts; go bushings at each end of valve stem shall be teflon; seating material shall be Buna-N one piece, of groove or ledge design, to prevent dislocation during closure; seating material must simultaneously act as flange gasket; valve must be factory tested and certified to seat bubbletight; opening of valve shall be via quarter turn of handle; handle shall be equipped with adjustable stops. I. Automatic Water Tempering or Mixing Valves 1. Automatic hot water tempering valves shall be constructed completely of brass and tested to 300 pounds per square inch. 2. The tempering valves shall be equipped with a long mixing chamber with vanes at an angle to the longitudinal axis of the valve to cause thorough mixing of hot and cold water. 3. The thermostatic element shall be located in the mixing chamber, in the main body of the tempering valve. 4. The thermostatic element shall have a minimum length as per the following schedule: Size of Tempering Valve Length 1/2 in. 7-1/4 in. 3/4 in. 7-1/4 in. 1 in. 11 in. Kw 1-1/4 in. 18 in. 1-1/2 in. 23 in. 2 in. 23 in. 2-1/2 in. 27 in. 3 in. 27 in. 4 in. 27 in. Smith Campus Center 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 Plumbing '!�" 15400-23 go am B. Provide sleeves with an i.d. at least 1/2 inch greater than outside of pipe served, including pipe insulation which must be continuous through sleeve. 1. Finish sleeves flush with underside of slab and 1 inch above finished floor. 2. Calk space between pipes and sleeves in exterior walls, foundation walls and pits, with lead and oakum. Where piping penetrates walls (other than foundation walls), partitions, floor slabs, etc., space between piping and sleeve shall be packed with mineral wool. C. Set sleeves as construction progresses and secure in place during pouring of concrete. 1. Where cellular steel flooring is installed, furnish and locate sleeves, cut holes through deck,reinforce deck, and set sleeves. Coordinate sleeve locations with Flooring Subcontractor and electrical distribution. Submit drawings showing location of holes and proposed reinforcing and obtain Architect's approval before proceeding with installation. D. Do not support pipes by resting clamps on sleeves. Clamps must extend beyond sleeve and be supported outboard of sleeve in an approved manner. E. Flashing of floor drains in membrane waterproofed floors and of roof drains will be performed under Specifications of another Trade. Provide drains with suitable flashing devices. 1. Where drains are installed in nonmembrane waterproofed floors with fill, ., provide 3 foot 0 inch x 3 foot 0 inch square 16 oz. copper flashing at each drain. .d F. Provide waterproof type pipe sleeves, Zurn Z-197, with galvanized Schedule 40 pipe extensions where penetrating membrane waterproofed floors. G. Roof drains and pipes passing through roofs will be flashed under Specifications of another Trade; provide roof couplings (Zum Z-196 or approved) at suitable level above roof to terminate flashings. H. Wherever pipes are exposed and pass through walls, floors, partitions or ceilings, fit them with chromium plated cast brass escutcheons held in place with set screws. Fit escutcheons snug over insulation, secure in place. Take special care to protect the .�. escutcheons during the course of construction. I. Where space for future pipe is required, provide sleeves and fill with lightweight concrete. 2.7 VALVES A. Provide valves as specified and/or indicated on the drawings. Valve numbers tabulated in the schedule on the drawings generally refer to Stockham valves. Corresponding valves as made by approved manufacturers may be submitted for approval. B. All gate valves inside the building 4 inches and over shall be of the OS&Y type • except where space conditions do not permit the installation of this type of valve. Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-22 • PW fittings are installed between hangers, provide additional hangers. Securely anchor fittings to the building construction at changes of direction to eliminate all horizontal movement. L. Provide steel channels, angles or "Unistruts" of approved design in each pipe shaft or closet, for the support of all vertical piping. Install supports at those floors which are not slabbed over and/or where the building structure is not directly usable for pipe support. OW M. Suspend all piping in Equipment Rooms connecting with the various pieces of equipment with hangers utilizing vibration isolating elements. I. All such piping less than 50 feet from connected rotating equipment shall be supported from resilient hanger rod isolators providing a minimum static deflection of 1 inch. Hanger rod isolators shall be combination of steel spring and neoprene-in-shear mountings. These hangers shall be one of the following, OR or as approved: Type DNHS -Mason Industries, Inc.,Jamaica,NY(M.I.I.) Type RSH-Vibration Mountings&Controls,Inc.,Butler,NJ(V.M.C.I.) Type SNRC-Vibration Eliminator Co.,Long Island City,NY(V.E.C.) 2. The first four piping isolation hanger supports from rotating equipment on piping 5 inches and larger shall be capable of supporting piping during piping installation at fixed elevation regardless of load changes. These isolation hanger supports shall incorporate an adjusting feature to transfer the load to the spring element within the hanger mounting after the piping system has been filled with water. Mountings shall be one of the following,or as approved: Type PDNHS - M.I.I. Type PR - V.E.C. 3. Where such piping is floor supported, brackets shall be clamped to the piping and the piping supported from these brackets by means of spring vibration isolating mounts. The spring in each support shall have a minimum static deflection under the installed load of 1.0 inch. Mountings shall be one of the following, or as approved: Type SLR - M.I.I. Type OSKHD - V.E.C. Type ANR - V.M.C.I. 4. Provide hangers as manufactured by Grinnell Co., Fee and Mason, or as approved. 2.6 SLEEVES A. Provide sleeves for all pipes passing through floors, walls and concrete, or concrete fireproofed beams. I. Sleeves in Concrete Beams, through Concrete Walls, and Exposed Pipes Penetrating Floors: Schedule 40 steel pipe. 2. Sleeves within Furred out Enclosures in Floors,through Partitions, Steel Beams and Walls: 18 gauge galvanized sheet metal. 3. Provide sleeves in foundation walls and in concrete pits with anchor flanges. Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-21 been provided, drill a hole from below through concrete slabs, and provide a rod and hanger attached to a 4 inch x 4 inch x 1/8 inch steel fishplate or install two Phillips Red Head stud concrete anchors connected by a 2 inch x 2 inch angle and connect the hanger rod to the angle. For pipes 2-1/2 inches and below, a single Phillips anchor may be used provided the hanger spacing does not exceed 5 feet 0 inches. Do not use smaller than 3/8 inch shields. The rods on all hangers shall be of adequate size to support the loads which they carry. D. Provide approved roller supports, floor stands, wall brackets, masonry piers, etc., for all lines running near the floors, which can be supported from the floors or walls. Pipelines near walls may be hung by hangers,carried from approved wall brackets at a higher level than the pipe. E. Do not hang piping from ductwork or other piping, except for small water branches in toilets, where no other practical means of support can be found. In such cases obtain specific approval of the proposed installation method from the Architect, prior to proceeding. Hangers shall not be fastened by means of vertical expansion bolts, except as otherwise specified. All materials,except roller: Wrought or malleable iron or steel. Rollers: Cast iron. Hangers: Swivel split ring, Grinnell Fig. 104, wrought pipe clamp, Grinnell Fig. 216, or adjustable wrought clevis, Grinnell Fig. 260, or as approved. F. This Contractor may coordinate with other Contractors to use common means of support. Submit for approval all pertinent design data relating to the support as well as verification of the responsibility for the support. G. Take special care in placing hangers at the top, bottom and in offsets of hot water supply and recirculation risers, to allow for expansion of the vertical piping. H. Support vertical risers from the building construction by means of pipe clamps, Grinnell Fig. 261, at every floor, or as approved. Provide channels of approved sizes where pipe clamps are too short to connect to the building construction. I. Where cellular steel flooring is installed, each hanger rod shall pierce the floor construction with a 6 inch x 6 inch x 1/8 inch steel bearing plate and nut resting on top of the steel of the floor construction. Coordinate the locations of these penetrations, so that no interference occurs with the work of other Trades. Where the bearing plates cannot be installed prior to pouring concrete, install hanger rod attachments of a type conforming to the design of the cellular steel flooring. Insert the attachments from below and securely fasten in place. Provide sufficient attachments so that hanger loadings will not exceed the recommendations of the floor manufacturer. J. Support cast iron hub and spigot pipe and fittings on not more than 5 foot 0 inch centers, or a minimum of one hanger per each length of pipe. Where an excessive number of fittings are installed between hangers, provide additional hangers or reinforcing as required. Securely anchor fittings to the building construction at changes of direction to eliminate all horizontal movement. K. Support No-Hub cast iron pipe with a minimum of two hangers per each length of pipe. Hangers to be installed on each side of joint. Where an excessive number of Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-20 �,�, B. No-Hub Cast Iron Pipe Cleanouts: No-Hub cast iron cleanout plug or extra heavy brass screw plug in tapped cast iron fittings, with solid hexagonal nut or countersunk w plug to suit. C. Steel Pipe Cleanouts: Extra heavy brass screw plug in drainage fitting. D. Cleanout Plugs: Comply with the Plumbing Code; American Standard pipe threads with "Permacel" or approved teflon tape applied to the male threads. M E. Extend cleanouts to walls and floor with long sweep ells or "y" and 1/8 bends with plugs and face or deck plates to conform to the architectural finish in the room. Where no definite finish is indicated on the architectural and/or mechanical drawings, use stainless steel wall plates and floor plates of nickel bronze. F. Cleanouts and Plates: Zurn models as indicated in the following tabulation or as approved: ■ Type Location Pi in Z-1440A Exposed C.I.pipe Z-1470-A Exposed steel pipe 'pa Z-1440-1 Wall Concealed C.I. pipe Z-1460-8 Wall Concealed steel pipe Z-1405-2 Concrete Floor Steel or C.I. +r. Z-1405-C Waterproofed Slab Floor Steel or C.I. Z-1405-6 Asphalt Tile Floor Steel or C.I. Z-1405-3 Ceramic Tile Floor Steel or C.I. Z-1415-2 Heavy Duty Traffic Floor Steel or C.I. Z-1400-2N Concrete Floor No-Hub Z-1400-CN Waterproofed Slab Floor No-Hub Z-1400-6N Asphalt Tile Floor No-Hub Z-1400-3N Ceramic Tile Floor No-Hub Z-1410-2N Heavy Duty Traffic Floor No-Hub oo 2.5 HANGERS,INSERTS AND PIPE SUPPORTS A. Provide suitable and substantial hangers and supports for all piping. B. Support horizontal piping in accordance with the following schedule: Pipe Size Maximum Hanger Spacing Rod Size 1 inch and smaller 8 feet 0 inches 3/8 inch 1-1/4 inch to 2 inches 9 feet 0 inches 3/8 inch 2-1/2 inches to 4 inches 10 feet 0 inches 1/2 inch 5 inches and larger g 12 feet 0 inches 1/2 inch C. Support hangers from approved concrete inserts where concrete slabs exist. Use inserts with space for nuts of all sizes. On all inserts for pipes 3 inches or larger in size, insert a reinforcing rod 5/8 inch in diameter through slot provided for this purpose, and maintain it in place when concrete is poured. Place all inserts in forms for all pipes which are to be hung, in ample time to allow the concrete work to be performed on schedule. If any pipe has to be hung in space where no inserts have Smith Campus Center 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 Plumbing VIA 15400-19 .w 6. Flanged Fittings: Cast iron, ductile iron, bronze or cast steel, of required working pressure,as scheduled. 7. Solder Fittings for Use with Copper Tubing: Wrought or cast brass fittings as made by American Brass Co., or as approved, of drainage pattern or standard design as required. a. Soldered joints for copper tubing shall be made with 95-5 (tin and antimony) solder. No other solder is to be used for any purpose on the job. 8. Fittings for Use on Copper Pipe,Tubing, or Brass Pipe Where Brazed Joints Are Required a. Bronze fittings or wrought copper fittings designed for use with the scheduled pipe or tubing. „ b. Water Services: Brazed joints for copper tubing, pipe or brass pipe: Make joint with Handy and Harmon Sil-Fos, silver solder or as approved, in compliance with ANSI/AWS A5.8 and BCUP-4, using an oxyacetylene flame. Brazing temperature: 1300°F., minimum. Take care to see that the pipe is not excessively annealed. Fittings shall be as made by Stanley G. Flagg & Co., Inc. Make the installation per the manufacturer's recommended procedures. " 9. Brass Screwed Fittings: Weight as scheduled, flat band, ips. No plain couplings permitted. Make joints in brass pipes without the use of lampwick or filler except "utility compound" or Permacel teflon tape, applied to male , threads only. B. For joints between cast iron and steel pipe and vent connections to vent hubs on .� carrier fittings, screw a half-coupling on the steel pipe to form spigot head, make a calked joint as specified for cast iron pipe. C. Flanges on Steel Pipe: Black or galvanized, cast iron, ductile iron or steel, working pressure and coating as scheduled. Do not use cast iron screw-on flanges in pump discharge piping; in this service, use cast steel or ductile iron flanges. 2.3 TRAPS A. Sanitary and Leader Systems **� 1. Traps in Drainage Piping System: Cast brass, cast iron and/or galvanized cast iron, one-piece pattern, 3 inch minimum seal, of the same material and coating and/or finish as the piping system in which they are installed, except traps 2 inch ips and under not buried in earth shall be cast brass. 2. Fixture Traps: Cast brass one-piece "P" traps with 2 inch minimum trap seal and gasketed cleanout plugs made of machined bar stock. Locate traps per Code requirements. 2.4 CLEANOUTS A. Cast Iron Pipe Cleanouts: Tapped extra heavy cast iron ferrule, calked into cast iron fittings, and extra heavy lead seal plug with solid hexagonal nut or countersunk plug to suit. Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-18 � . PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Use the following materials in the various piping systems, in accordance with the pipe material schedule on the drawings: 1. Cast Iron Soil Pipe(C.I.): Uncoated extra heavy cast iron soil P i P e S hub and spigot type, with size, weight per foot and maker's name clearly cast or stamped on each length. Pipe shall be manufactured by a member of the Cast Iron Soil ! �! Pipe Institute. 2. Cast Iron Soil Pipe(C.I.N.H.): Coated cast iron No-Hub type, with size,weight per foot and maker's name clearly cast or stamped on each length. Pipe shall be manufactured by a member of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. 3. Steel Pipe(Stl.): Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with the latest issue of ASTM Standard A-120 and/or A-53. Each length shall be legibly marked by V, the producer to show name of manufacturer,kind of pipe, specification number and pipe length. Each length shall be hydrostatically tested at the mill and the producer's certification of said tests shall be furnished. Pipe weight, black, hot dipped galvanized as scheduled or as indicated on the drawings. 4. Copper Tubing C.T. pp g (P. ) - (In Pressure Systems): Seamless drawn or extruded tubing Type "L" or 'W", as scheduled, hard temper in accordance with ASTM Specification B-88. 5. Red Brass Pipe (R.B.P.): Seamless annealed drawn tubing, iron pipe size, containing a mixture of not less than 85% copper, in accordance with ASTM B-43. 2.2 PIPE JOINTS AND FITTINGS A. Use the following pipe joints and fittings in the various piping systems in accordance with the pipe material schedule: 1. Calked Fittings for Use with Cast Iron Soil Pipe (C.I.): Uncoated, extra heavy cast iron, hub and spigot type,manufactured by a member of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. 2. Fittings for Use with Cast Iron Soil Pipe(C.I.N.H.): Coated,cast iron,No-Hub type, with mechanical joints of stainless steel band with neoprene sleeve, for pipes up to 4 inch, manufactured by a member of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. Use MG or Clamp-All coupling for jointing No-Hub cast iron pipe for 5 inch or larger. 3. Joints Used for Cast Iron Soil Pipe (C.I.): Calked joints made with gasket of hemp or packed oakum and lead. After the lead has cooled, thoroughly calk, make tight and smoothly face the joints. Use pure, soft, best quality lead for r joints. Sufficiently heat lead to run joint full at one pouring without hardening. Do not allow dross to accumulate in the melting pot. 4. Screwed Fittings for Use on Steel Pipe: Type and finish as scheduled. 5. Joints between Lengths of Steel Pipes: Drainage piping - cast iron drainage pattem couplings; other -standard malleable iron couplings with flat band. All joints in steel pipe: Screwed, flanged or welded as scheduled. Make screwed joints without the use of lampwick or filler, except "utility compound" or Permacel teflon tape applied to male threads only. Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-17 event that the Architects/Engineers shall direct the elimination of any work under this Contract, the Contractor will credit to the Owner the cost of said eliminated work at the unit prices set forth below. w 2. The unit prices set forth hereunder shall include the furnishing of fixture types specified (except water coolers) and all other materials required for the complete installation of the item. The Contractor has included in the unit prices set forth receiving, handling, distributing, storing, hoisting and protecting all items whether furnished and installed only by him. These unit prices shall include all overhead,profit and taxes. a. Furnish and install lavatories , each. b. Furnish and install urinals ,each. C. Furnish and install water closets ,each. d. Furnish and install lead pan for tile floor, including trim and roughing (tile by others) ,each. e. In the event that an individual fixture or a group of fixtures shall be located apart from a wet column, an additional sum shall be paid this Contractor for all piping necessary based upon the distance from the wet column to the nearest point of the nearest wall enclosing the fixture or fixtures less 2 feet 0 inches. The additional charge for piping shall be per ., Toilet Room regardless of the number of fixtures within said room. The charge for piping shall be based on the unit prices for piping and valves stated herein. , f. The Contractor shall furnish and install pressure reducing valves and gate valves, including necessary nipples, etc., where directed by the Architects/Engineers at the unit prices below: Valves 4 inches ,each. 3 inches ,each. 2 inches ,each. 1-1/2 inches , each. 1-1/4 inches ,each. 1 inch ,each. 3/4 inch each. 1/2 inch each. PRV's 4 inches , each. ... 3inches each. 2 inches , each. 1-1/2 inches , each. 1-1/4 inches ,each. 1 inch , each. 3/4 inch ,each. 1/2 inch , each. Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-16 .,,s Plumbing Fixture Trim Lavatories American Standard Kohler T&S Symmons Delta Water Closets and Urinals Sloan �w Brass & Copper Pipe&Tube American Brass Co. Chase Brass 70 Phelps Dodge Brass Craft Bridgeport Brass r Wolverine Tube Co. T& S Bronze Fittings Flagg Co. Walworth Co. N.Y. Brass Foundry Sump Pumps and Ejector Pumps Well Pump Peerless Interceptors Zurn 1.19 UNIT PRICES A. This Contractor shall state in his proposal unit prices in accordance with the following schedule: 1. Any additional work not called for under this Contract will be performed by this Contractor at any time and in any quantity as directed by the Architects/Engineers at the unit prices set forth below. Such work will be performed by this Contractor upon request at any time until final acceptance of all work under this Contract. All such additional work will be performed by the Contractor in accordance with the terms and conditions of this Contract. In the Smith Campus Center Plumbing go 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-15 Gauges and Thermometers Manning,Maxwell&Moore H. O.Trerice Weksler Taylor •� Thermostatic Tempering Valves Leonard , Powers Hydroguard Series 1000 Symmons Insulation Owens-Corning Manville Pittsburgh Plate Glass Plumbing Fixtures ON American Standard Kohler Elkay Fiat Toilet Seats Church Olsonite Sperzel Beneke Electric Water Coolers Halsey Taylor w�c Fixture Supports Zurn Drains Zum .r� .. Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-14 ,,, the satisfaction of the Owner and Architect. This Contractor shall require similar guarantees from his Subcontractors. B. Be responsible for all leaks in all pipes for a period of one year from date of acceptance of work under this Contract. Repair at not cost to Owner all such leaks which occur within 24 hours notice thereof by the Owner. Leaks which occur prior to the completion of this Contract shall be repaired at once. Be responsible for any damage caused by such leaks and repair therof and reimburse Owner for all expense incurred thereby. This Contractor indemnifies the Owner, the Architect, the Consulting Engineers and the Construction Manager against loss, liability, damage or expense, including reasonable attorneys' fees, in connection with any claim resulting from such leaks which may be asserted by Tenants or any other third person. 1.17 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING aaw A. All excavation and backfilling, as required for the installation of the Plumbing Work, will be done under Specifications of another Trade. 1.18 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish all major items of equipment and materials as made by the following manufacturers,or as approved. Hot Water Heaters Hubbell -The Electric Heater Company Patterson-Kelley Company Viessmann A.O. Smith Valves Jenkins Crane Walworth so Stockham Ball Valves so Watts r Butterfly Valves Jenkins Crane Hammond Milwaukee(1/2 inch to 2 inch) or Smith Campus Center 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 Plumbing ' " 15400-13 of the Specification as Appendix A, signed by a corporate officer of the Contractor and each Subcontractor who requires the diskettes,prior to receipt of the diskettes. The sheet metal drawings,prepared on electronic media(CAD)at a scale not less than ..� 3/8 in. = 1 ft.0 in. shall serve as the base drawings to which all other Contractors will overlay and add their work. Each trade shall draw their work on separate layers represented by individual colors. Each"Coordination Drawing" shall be completed and signed off by the other Contractors and this Contractor prior to the installation of the work in the area covered by the specific coordination drawing. The Contractors work shall be installed in accordance with the shop drawings and the"Coordination Drawings". If the Contractor allows one trade to install their work before coordinating .. with the work of other trades, the Contractor shall make necessary changes to correct the condition without extra cost to the Owner. The Contractor's"Coordination Drawings" indicating piping, conduit,busway,and equipment support points and loads exceeding 500 lb.imposed on the building structure shall be submitted to the Project Structural Engineer for review and approval. The elevation,location, support points, static,dynamic and expansion forces and loads imposed on the structure at support,and anchor points,and the size of all lines shall be indicated. All beam penetrations and slab penetrations shall be indicated and sized and shall be coordinated. All work routed underground or embedded in concrete shall be indicated .. by dimension to column and building lines and shall be coordinated. This requirement for"Coordination Drawings" shall not be construed as authorization for the Contractor or Subcontractor to make any unauthorized changes to the Contract Drawings. All Contract Drawing space allocations shall be maintained, such as ceiling height,eight(8)inch high zone installation free zone as discussed hereinbefore directly above the ceiling reserved for tenant build-out and flexibility, chase walls, equipment room size, etc., unless prior written authorization is received from the Architect to change them. Prior to final acceptance of the work of this Division,the Contractor shall give the two(2)copies of the drawing files,in AutoCAD Release 14 on"Zip Drive" diskettes,and two(2)hardcopy"as-built"drawings, one(1)of which shall be furnished on wash-off mylar transparencies on heavy gauge film and one(1) of which shall be on paper containing the Contractor's coordination documentation to the Owner. ** 1.15 SUBCONTRACTS A. Where Contract Documents require manufacturers' services, and wherever the staff of the Trade performing the work of this Section cannot adequately perform such services, this Trade shall stipulate such performance in its contracts with its Contractors or Subcontractors, vendors, manufacturers, and the like, or else subsequently pay them any additional fees required therefor. 1.16 GUARANTEE A. Submit a single guarantee stating that all portions of the work are in accordance with Contract requirements. Guarantee all work against faulty and improper material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of final acceptance by the Owner, except that where guarantees or warranties for longer terms are specified herein, such longer term shall apply. At no additional cost to Owner, within 24 hours after notification, correct any deficiencies which occur during the guarantee period, all to Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-12 ,„ necessary connections and equipment. Identify all work items (valves, etc.) in an approved manner in order that the Ceiling Trade may know where to install access doors and panels. E. Caution workers both verbally and in writing as to the dangers involved in doing work No within or adjacent to electrical closets on various floors, the Mechanical Rooms and the Switchgear Room, due to dangers caused by presence of high voltages and currents in these spaces. W F. Furnish and set all sleeves for passage of pipes through structural masonry and concrete walls and floors and elsewhere as required for proper protection of each pipe passing through building surfaces. Coordinate this work with Construction Manager in order to properly expedite and perform this work. G. Provide required supports and hangers for piping and equipment, so that loading will not exceed allowable loadings of structure. Submittal of a bid shall be deemed a representation that the Contractor submitting such bid has ascertained allowable loadings and has included in his estimates the costs associated in furnishing required supports. H. Field drilling, cutting and/or reinforcing of holes in structural metal deck required for work under this Section shall be coordinated through the Construction Manager and approved by the Structural Engineer. All such drilling, cutting and reinforcing costs shall be bome by this Contractor. I. Due to the type of the installation, a fixed sequence of operation is required to properly install the complete systems. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to coordinate, protect and schedule his work with other Trades in accordance with the construction sequence. J. Architectural drawings shall be checked for ceiling height requirements. 1.14 CONTRACTOR'S COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall coordinate efforts of all trades and shall furnish(in writing,with copies to the Architect and Construction Manager)any information necessary to permit the Work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay. B. This Contractor and his Subcontractors shall prepare a complete set of construction "Coordination Drawings" indicating the equipment actually purchased and the exact location of the equipment and the exact routing and elevations for all lines such as piping, busway,conduit,ductwork,etc., including conduit embedded in concrete (where permitted). All dimensions shall be referenced to building structural center lines. The "Coordination Drawing"preparation and completion shall comply with the requirements of the project construction schedule. Prior to commencing work,the Contractor shall obtain from the Architect or Engineer a set of AutoCAD Release 14 or compatible format Architectural and Engineering Drawings files to be used to produce the"Coordination Drawings". The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall give to the Architect and Engineer the written release included as part of this Section Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-11 M. Provide all rigging required for complete installation and furnish drawings showing necessary points of support, reactions and supplementary bracing. This shall be submitted for approval by Owner. Should any shoring be required,provide same after Owner's approval. N. It should be noted that temporary power and light has been provided under another �. Contract, which shall provide facility for general lighting and portable hand tools which can be plugged into lighting circuits during normal working hours. Any additional lighting for specified areas, or power for welding machines or other heavy current equipment, shall be provided by this Contractor, at his own expense. The Owner will provide 480 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz electric circuits in Mechanical Equipment Rooms for Contractor's use. Contractor shall pay for cost of power and labor required for welding machines and/or lighting at times other than normal " working hours. O. Equipment and materials shall be new and listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., manufactured in accordance with ASME, NEMA, or ANSI standards, and approved by the local authorities having jurisdiction. P. Any references in this Specification or on the plans which refer to work to be performed or provided by the Construction Manager or "by others" is intended to mean that the required work will be provided under another Section of the Specifications. 1.12 VERIFYING EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Before commencing work, examine all adjoining work on which this work is in any way dependent for perfect workmanship according to the intent of this Specification, and report to Construction Manager any condition which prevents performance of first-class work. No "waiver of responsibility" for incomplete,inadequate or defective adjoining work will be considered unless notice has been filed before submittal of a proposal. 1.13 COORDINATION A. Certain materials will be furnished, installed, or furnished and installed, under other Sections of the Specifications. Examine the Contract Documents to ascertain these requirements. B. Carefully check space requirements with other Trades to insure that all material can be installed in the spaces allotted thereto. Finished suspended ceiling elevations are indicated on the general construction drawings. �s C. Transmit to Trades doing work of other Sections all information required for work to be provided under their respective Sections (such as fresh water connections, foundations, electric wiring, access doors, and the like) in ample time for installation. D. Wherever this Contractor's work interconnects with work of other Contractors, this Contractor shall coordinate his work with these Contractors to insure that all Contractors have the information necessary so that they may properly install all the Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-10 ,� E. The Contractor agrees that any controversy or dispute to which the Contractor, the Owner and the Consulting Engineers are parties shall be submitted to the American 40 Arbitration Association for decision in accordance with the rules of such Association for construction industry disputes. All Subcontractors likewise agree to submit to such arbitration any dispute between or among them, the Contractor, the Owner and the Consulting Engineers, and the Contractor agrees to make available to the Consulting Engineers, on demand, signed copies of the contract between the Owner - and the Contractor and between the Contractor and his Subcontractors. The Contractor and each Subcontractor agree that by submitting a bid, which is accepted, " this paragraph shall be deemed a written agreement to submit any controversy thereafter arising to arbitration. F. Put work in place as fast as reasonably possible; at all times, keep a competent foreman in charge of the work and facilitate its inspection by the Architects and Consulting Engineers. G. Except for such changes as may be specifically approved by the Consulting Engineers, in accordance with alternates or options stated hereinafter, all work must be in full accordance with the intent of the plans and specifications, complete in every way and ready for satisfactory and efficient operation when delivered to the Owner. H. Guarantee that the materials and workmanship supplied under these Specifications will be of the best grade,that the apparatus will be erected in a practical and first-class manner, that it will be complete in operation, nothing being omitted in the way of labor and material required to make it so, although not specifically shown or mentioned herein and that it will be delivered in well working order, complete and perfect in every respect, without additional cost -- whether or not shown in detail on the drawings or described in detail in this Specification. I. Become thoroughly acquainted with the work involved, obtain and verify at the building all measurements necessary for the proper installation of work. Furnish to other Contractors any information relating to work of this Section necessary for the proper installation of their Contracts. Confer with other Contractors for finish adjacent to work of this Section and arrange to have visible portions of the work(such as access doors, escutcheons, etc.) fit in and harmonize with the finish in a manner satisfactory to the Architects. J. Make every effort to furnish all equipment of any equipment type (such as motors, +s motor controls, vibration isolation equipment, etc.) from one manufacturer. K. Where disagreements occur between the plans and the specifications, or within either document itself, the item or arrangement of better quality, greater quantity or higher cost shall be included in the base bid. L. The drawings show the various piping and duct systems schematically. No added compensation will be permitted for variations due to field conditions. 40- Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.1 1.12 15400-9 lubricating charts and manuals for each item of equipment shall be furnished to Owner. .. B. Furnish a list of manufacturers (with names of local representatives) in order to expedite ordering of replacement parts. 1.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Furnish the necessary information so that openings for this work can be built into the floors and walls in rime. Such cooperation is required to keep cutting of walls and floors to a minimum. B. Set drains and sleeves for pipes accurately before concrete floors are poured, or set boxes on the forms to leave openings in the floors and subsequently set required sleeves in the openings. 1.11 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Execute the work in the best and most thorough manner and to the satisfaction of the Architects and Consulting Engineers, who will jointly interpret the meaning of the drawings and specifications and shall have the power to reject any work and materials which, in their judgment, are not in full accordance therewith. B. Be responsible for material and workmanship until completion and final acceptance. Replace any of same which may be damaged,lost or stolen,without additional cost to Owner. Guard the building and its contents against damage by this Contractor, his employees or Subcontractors,and make good any damage free of charge. C. This Contractor covenants and agrees that he and his Subcontractors and his and their ., agents, servants and employees will provide and maintain a safe place to work and that he and they will comply with all laws and regulations of any governmental authority having jurisdiction thereof. and the Contractor agrees to indemnify, defend and hold harmless the Owners, Architects and Consulting Engineers from and against any liability, loss, damage or expense, including attorneys' fees, arising from a failure or alleged failure on the part of this Contractor, his Subcontractors and his and their agents, servants and employees to provide and maintain a safe place to work or to comply with all laws and regulations of any governmental authority having jurisdiction thereof. D. This Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify, defend and hold harmless the Owners, Architects and Consulting Engineer against any liability, loss, damage or expenses, including attorneys' fees, arising from a failure or alleged failure on the part *+� of this Contractor, his Subcontractors or his or their agents, servants and employees properly to discharge the obligations assumed by him or them in the performance of the work, including any act or omission allegedly resulting in death or personal injury .■ or property damage or improper construction, construction techniques, or the use of improper or inappropriate material or tools. Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-8 ,., approval. After approval they shall become the property of the Owner. Final payment will be withheld until receipt of the approved record drawings. C. Include the cost of furnishing above prints and preparing these record drawings. 1.7 PROTECTIVE PAINTING A. Provide protective painting as herein specified. B. Deliver all equipment with prime coat or prime and finish coat as specified. Clean up all equipment and leave in condition for finish painting before acceptance. 00 C. Provide all pipe hangers in concealed locations with a heavy factory coat of aluminum or black asphaltum paint unless hangers are galvanized or cadmium plated. D. Provide a heavy field coat of black asphaltum paint on all steel pipe, cradles, vibration isolating mounts, and the like, that will be encased or partially encased in building construction, set in cement or fill,before items are built into the general construction. 1.8 IDENTIFICATION OF SYSTEMS A. Provide adhesive bands identifying equipment,as well as service and flow direction in } piping systems. Bands for piping: In all occupied and unoccupied rooms, and in all accessible shafts. Pipe service and direction bands: At least every 40 feet,and at least once in each space. Locate bands and labels where easily readable. B. Each Set: Bands shall contain service name; one band with black directional arrow. Sizes,color and lettering and background colors per ANSI Standard A-13.1-1975. C. Bands: W. H. Brady Co., or as approved. D. Provide a tag for each valve. General service, two inch square, brass, or approved plastic, with embossed black enamel numbers, 3/4 inch high. Attach tag to valve handle or spindle with brass chain. E. Provide diagrammatic charts of all piping systems. Provide schedules of all valves. Provide two copies of charts and schedules in laminated form, suitable for wall mounting. Provide three copies of charts and schedules,printed on cloth and bound in booklets. Valve numbering system shall indicate service and shall indicate floor level where valve is installed. Valve charts and schedules must indicate valve sizes. Valve charts must indicate type of valve. 1.9 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Three sets of operating and maintenance instruction manuals, covering completely equipment starting sequences, operation, maintenance, automatic controls, and listing of all spare parts, shall be furnished to Owner. In addition, one set of operating and maintenance instructions for each Mechanical Equipment Room shall be neatly w laminated in permanently translucent plastic and hung where directed. Three sets of Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-7 the necessary revisions to other related work required by the Contract Documents. The judgment of the Architect and/or Engineer with respect to the adequacy and acceptability of a proposed substitution shall be final and binding on the Contractor, and shall not be subject to question in any other place. After the expiration of this period, substitutions for material or equipment shall not be proposed or requested in shop drawing and sample submittals, and the Contractor will be required to execute the work in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents. N. Within six weeks after award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit a schedule .r listing all shop drawings and samples with the projected date that each item will be submitted to the Architect and/or Engineer for review. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Furnish submittals in accordance with the General Requirements specified in Section 01340, "Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples". ..a B. Submit detailed shop drawings for Mechanical Equipment Rooms, Toilet Rooms, piping work, and other distribution services described herein, including locations and sizes of all openings in cellular steel floor decks, walls and floors. Shop drawings with multiple parts shall be submitted as a package. C. Submit the following manufacturers shop drawings and data for approval: Backflow Preventers Plumbing Fixture Supports Plumbing Fixtures Plumbing Fixture Rough-In Data Sheets Water Meter Hot Water Heaters and Supports Double Detector Check Valve D. Submit names, sizes, catalogue numbers and/or samples of the following materials for approval: Toilet Accessories Floor, Funnel and Area Drains Pipe Roof Drains Valves Sleeves and Escutcheons Thermometers Valve Tags Pressure Gauges Insulation Hangers Thermostatic Mixing Valves .. Fittings E. Each shop drawing shall contain job title and reference to the applicable drawing and/or Specification Article. 1.6 RECORD DRAWINGS A. During the progress of the work, make a careful record of all changes by which the actual installation differs from that indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. Upon completion of the installation, furnish two complete sets of as-built drawings, one of which shall be furnished on mylar transparencies and one of which shall be furnished on paper. These drawings shall be submitted to the Consulting Engineer for Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-6 A G. The Contractor shall carefully check shop drawings and samples, including those received by him from Subcontractors and material men, for accuracy, completeness of pe required information and conformance with the Contract Documents. Shop drawings found to be inaccurate, incomplete or not in conformance with the Contract Documents shall be corrected before being submitted to the Architect and/or Engineer for review. H. Each submitted shop drawing shall bear the Contractor's stamped and signed certification that the work has been checked for all related job conditions, for ? maintenance of architectural conditions, and coordinated with the shop drawings of other affected trades for interrelated work, as required for the proper and complete performance of the work. No shop drawing submittal will be reviewed without this 10 certification. I. Each shop drawing and sample submitted for review shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal, and shall be identified by the project title, Contractor's name, and a reference to the related part of the Contract Documents. J. Shop drawings for manufactured material and equipment shall include model numbers, dimension drawings, operating weights, material specifications, operating features and controls, wiring diagrams, performance characteristics, service procedures, including clearance requirements for maintenance work, and conformance to the specified codes and code ratings. Note that in addition to these requirements, other specific submittal data, and forms of data submission, are required by the Contract Documents for particular items of equipment and material. K. Shop drawings for Equipment Rooms, and for piping,conduit and similar distribution services shall show by dimension the exact size and location of each element of the system in both the horizontal and vertical plane,as well as relationship to the building structure, architectural construction, equipment, and the work of other Trades. Pads, foundations, anchorages, supports and attachments to the building structure where required for the installation of the work shall be shown in layout and detail with sizes, dimensions, materials and methods of construction noted. L. Samples shall be identical in all respects to the material which is to be installed or applied in the execution of the work, and shall be of sufficient size or quantity to permit proper evaluation and review. Manufacturer's descriptive labels and printed application instructions which are normally attached to the material or its packaging a shall be furnished with the sample. Samples shall be submitted for review when requested by the Architect and/or Engineer. M. Within three weeks after award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit for the Architect's and/or Engineer's review, a list of the manufacturers and Subcontractors whose products and services he proposes to use for the work. Proposed substitutions for material and equipment required by the Contract Documents shall be submitted to the Architect and/or Engineer for review during this period. Submittals proposing or requesting substitutions shall be expressly identified as such in a letter of transmittal, with the reasons for requesting the substitution stated. Submittals for this purpose shall be complete in every respect, shall conform to all the information requirements for shop drawing and sample submittals, and shall include, at no cost to the Owner, Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-5 horizontal swing check valves in the discharge from vent valves installed above the highest fixture served by the system being vented. Pipe the discharge of all vent valves to funnel drain, floor drain, or as indicated on the drawings. 1.4 ARCHITECT'S AND/OR ENGINEER'S REVIEW A. The Architect and/or Engineer will review shop drawings and samples for conformance with the design concept of the project and the information contained in the Contract Documents. The Architect's and/or Engineer's review of shop drawings and samples is only for the convenience of the Owner in following the work and does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect's and/or Engineer's review shall not be construed as a complete or detailed check of the work submitted, nor shall it relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors of any sort in the shop drawings and samples,or from the necessity of furnishing any work required by the Contract Documents which have been omitted from the shop drawing submittals. The review of a separate item *�* shall not indicate review of the complete assembly in which it functions. Nothing in the Architect's and/or Engineer's review of shop drawings and samples shall be considered as authorizing additional cost to the Owner or increased time for ..� completion of the work. B. The Architect and/or Engineer will review shop drawings and samples with reasonable promptness and will return them to the Contractor stamped to indicate the appropriate action as described in "General and Supplementary Conditions". C. Architect's and/or Engineer's review is for general compliance with the design concept and contract documents. Markings or comments or the lack thereof shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from compliance with the project plans and Specifications. The Contractor remains solely responsible for details and accuracy, for confirming=and correlating all quantities and dimensions, for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of construction, for performing his work in a safe manner, and for coordinating his work with that of other Trades. D. The term "shop drawings" shall include layout, detail, and assembly drawings, diagrams, schedules, catalogue sheets, printed descriptive matter, and tabular and graphical presentations of operating and performance data that describe work required by the Contract Documents. E. No part of the work shall be started in the shop or in the field until the Architect and/or Engineer has reviewed the shop drawings and samples for that portion of the work. Thereafter, the work shall be executed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the indicated status of the reviewed shop drawing. F. Shop drawings and samples shall be submitted for review sufficiently in advance of the scheduled start of the work in the shop or in the field to allow ample time, in r� consideration of the number and complexity of the drawings in the submittal, for the Architect and/or Engineer to make an orderly review. No extension of the time to complete the work will be granted to the Contractor by reason of his failure in this respect. Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 154004 ,,, receive flashings. Increase smaller pipes to 4 inch size before passing through roof slab. C. Interior Cold Water System 1. Provide a complete cold water distribution system to supply water to all fixtures, water consuming equipment, hot water heating equipment and valved outlets for the use of other Trades. 2. The system shall be supplied by the site street pressure system, complete with the required meter and backflow preventer. A single domestic street service will provide supply to all fixtures and hot water heaters. A 6 in. fire service, including a double-detector check assembly and valved outlet for the Fire Protection Contractor, will also be provided. 3. Provide compound meter, test connection, for the domestic service and detector check for the fire protection service, all as required by the authorities, and obtain approval of the installations without additional cost to the Owner. Provide in the domestic service and fire service a reduced pressure principle backflow preventer after each meter and detector check valve. 4. Use materials as scheduled. 40 5. All equipment used in this system shall have capacities as scheduled. 6. Adjust all fixture stops so that flush valves, faucets, etc., work quietly and efficiently before final acceptance by the Owner. D. Exterior Water System 1. Service connections shall be extended from a point 5 ft. outside the building into the building in as straight a line as possible. 2. Provide a backflow preventer with a valved outlet, as indicated on the plans, for the Irrigation Contractor. E. Hot Water System 1. Provide complete hot water heating and distribution systems to supply water to all fixtures and equipment requiring heated water. 2. Use materials as scheduled. 3. All equipment used in this system shall have capacities as scheduled. 4. Protect all heat exchangers and storage tanks used in this system with an approved pressure and temperature relief valve. 5. Adjust fixture stops so that faucets work quietly and efficiently before final acceptance by the Owner. 6. Provide complete hot water heating and distribution systems to supply water to all fixtures and equipment requiring heated water. The system shall be zoned as described for cold water system. Hot water will be supplied via gas-fired hot heaters during the summer period and steam-fired hot water heaters during the winter period, located on the 3rd Floor Mechanical Room. 7. Provide a check valve in the supply to each heat exchanger. 8. Pitch piping to high points for venting purposes and install vent valves at all inversely trapped high points in the system, including those points where piping has changed elevation to clear structure or other interferences. Tap the vent valve into a full pipe size cap on a nipple connected to a full size tee in the pipeline. Install the cap approximately 6 inches above the horizontal main. Vent valves: Sarco No. 13W all bronze body with copper float, stainless steel valve and pin, of required working pressure. Install composition disc, Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-3 MW OW gravity drain will be provided with a sewage ejector,which shall discharge to the building's house drain. 2. Storm Drainage: Provide a complete system of storm drainage piping for all roof and areas. Connect to a catch basin spur 5 feet outside the building wall provided under the Site Contract. Any storm drains below the gravity storm drain shall drain to the sump pumps, which shall discharge to the building's storm drain. a. Provide all drains required to conduct rainwater from the building surfaces to the storm drainage system, including all of the scheduled drains and any special drains indicated on the architectural and/or plumbing drawings. b. Take special care in setting roof drains to assure that they are set at an elevation which will preclude formation of puddles. C. Install connections to roof drains in conjunction with the roofing specified under Specifications of another Trade, and at such times as designated by the General Contractor so that the building is adequately •.■ protected during construction from damage by storm water. d. Provide sump pumps within elevator pits complete with piping and controls. 3. Make all branch connections to drainage systems with "Wye" and long "Tee- Wye" fittings. Do not use short 1/4 bends, common offsets and double hubs. Use short "Tee-Wye" fittings in vertical piping only, and only where space conditions preclude the use of long turn fittings. Use only fittings conforming to Code requirements. 4. Provide cleanouts at foot of all leaders,sanitary stacks,changes of directions,at ..o the ends of branch runs, in straight runs as required by Code, and where indicated. Terminate as specified under"Cleanouts". 5. Run house drains at a minimum grade of 1/8 inch per foot downward in the direction of flow. Pitch branch connections to stacks from fixtures at 1/4 inch per foot where possible. 6. Provide all the required appurtenances to make the drainage system complete in compliance with Code requirements, including traps,pipe, fittings,hangers, and .� the like. B. Drainage Vents 1. Provide ventilating pipes from the various sanitary plumbing fixtures and other equipment to which drainage connections are made. Connect ventilating pipes to the discharge of[each] trap and carry individually to a point above the rim of the fixture before connecting with any other vent pipe; in general, this will be approximately 3 feet 6 inches above the finished floor. Pitch branch vents back to fixtures. 2. Collect individual vent pipes together in branch vent lines and connect to vent stacks, paralleling soil and waste stacks. Wherever possible, vent stack offsets shall be made with 45 degree fittings. Vent stacks shall be connected to adjacent soil stacks at the base of the stacks. 3. Extend the tops of ventilating stacks independently through the roof or collect together and run through the roof in series of larger pipes, as shown on the drawings. Provide roof couplings at a level 18 inches above the finished roof to ••• Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-2 SECTION 15400 PLUMBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. General: Provide all Plumbing Work in accordance with requirements of the Contract " Documents. B. The General and Supplementary General Conditions accompanying these rw Specifications are hereby made a part of the requirements for the work under this Section of the Specifications. C. Where General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions clauses are repeated in these Specifications, it is to call special attention to them, or as a further qualification. No General Conditions and/or Supplementary General Conditions clause referring to the work of this Section shall be considered waived unless specifically stated herein. D. The "General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for Construction" A.I.A. Document No. A-201, latest edition, shall be included as part of this Section. 1.2 NOTICE TO BIDDERS A. Before submittal of bid, examine all drawings, specifications, addenda, alternates, special conditions, and all other bidding documents of all Sections of this project, verify all governing conditions at the site, and become fully informed as to the extent and character of the work required,as well as its relation to other work in the building. Submittal of a bid is an agreement to all requirements of the Contract Documents, and no consideration will be granted for any claimed misunderstanding thereof. B. Submittal of a bid is deemed a representation by the bidder that it is qualified in all respects properly to perform the work for which it is bidding and has experience with similar work. Bidders are deemed to be aware, on the basis of their background and experience, of materials which may be required in the discharge of their responsibilities, even though unspecified. For example, claims for extras for unspecified shoring or supporting materials will not be considered if the need for such materials would have been reasonably obvious to bidders skilled and experienced in the work to be done, and the submittal of a bid shall be deemed a waiver of any such claims. 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS A. Interior Drainage Systems 1. Gravity Sanitary Drainage: Provide a complete system of sanitary drainage piping for plumbing fixtures, which can be drained to the house sewers by gravity. An outlet connection for the house drain to connect into the site sewer is provided in the Civil Site Contract. Any fixtures or equipment below the po Smith Campus Center 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 Plumbing 15400-1 TABLE OF CONTENTS(Continued) Article Title Page 15400 2.18 Drains 30 2.19 Plumbing Fixtures 31 2.20 Fixture Supports 32 2.21 Toilet Accessories 33 2.22 Seismic Restraints 33 2.23 Electric Motors 34 2.24 Starters and Controls 35 2.25 Vertical Sump Pumps 36 126 Ejectors 38 PART 3 EXECUTION ..A 3.1 General Installation of Pipe 39 3.2 Tests 40 3.3 Water Piping Construction Details 41 3.4 Equipment Connections 42 3.5 Pipe and Material Finishes 42 3.6 Cleaning and Protection 43 ! tA Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 15400-TC-2 SECTION 15400 PLUMBING TABLE OF CONTENTS Article Title Page 15400- PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 Summary I 1.2 Notice to Bidders I 1.3 Description of Systems 1 1.4 Architect's and/or Engineer's Review 4 1.5 Submittals 6 1.6 Record Drawings 6 1.7 Protective Painting 7 1.8 Identification of Systems 7 1.9 Operating and Maintenance Instructions 7 1.10 Cutting and Patching 8 1.11 General Requirements 8 1.12 Verifying Existing Conditions 10 1.13 Coordination 10 1.14 Contractor's Coordination Drawings 11 1.15 Subcontracts 12 1.16 Guarantee 12 1.17 Excavation and Backfilling 13 1.18 Approved Manufacturers 13 1.19 Unit Prices 15 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials of Piping Systems 17 2.2 Pipe Joints and Fittings 17 2.3 Traps 18 2.4 Cleanouts 18 2.5 Hangers, Inserts and Pipe Supports 19 2.6 Sleeves 21 2.7 Valves 22 2.8 Vacuum Breaker and Backflow Preventers 24 2.9 Strainers 25 2.10 Wall Hydrants 25 2.11 Hose Bibbs 26 2.12 Insulation 26 2.13 Access Doors 28 2.14 Gauges and Thermometers 28 2.15 Alarm Devices 29 WL 2.16 Hot Water Storage Heaters 29 2.17 Water Meters 30 Smith Campus Center Plumbing 100% Construction Documents: 0 1.1 L 12 15400-TC-1 7 d J 3 7 9 5 3 1 1 1 1 i A 1 R 1 1 i 1 1 1 t 1 1 .. no cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Use same parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation "'" of original equipment. 2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and other procedures to protect elevators. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage .. elevator Installer to restore damaged work so that no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. , END OF SECTION .A Smith Campus Center Hydraulic Elevators 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 14240-10 E. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators. F. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts designed to effectively prevent transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby eliminate sources of structure-borne noise from elevator system. G. Install Pm i P g above the floor, where possible. Where not possible, install underground piping in Schedule 40 PVC pipe casing assembled with solvent-cement fittings. H. Install piping above the floor, where possible. Where not possible, cover underground piping with permanent protective wrapping before backfilling. I. Lubricate operating parts of systems as recommended by manufacturers. J. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, delay installation of sills and frames until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe,workable dimension at each landing. K. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch, up or down,regardless of load and direction of travel. L. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with non-shrink,non-metallic grout. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use either temporary or permanent of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1 and by governing regulations and agencies. B. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times tests are to be performed on elevators. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper use, operations, and daily maintenance of elevators. Review emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of operational failure and other building emergencies. Train Owner's personnel in procedures to follow in identifying sources of operational failures or malfunctions. Confer with Owner on requirements for a complete elevator maintenance program. B. Make a final check of each elevator operation with Owner's personnel present and before date of Substantial Completion. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Temporary Use: Do not use elevators for construction purposes unless cars are provided with temporary enclosures, either within finished cars or in place of finished cars, to protect finishes from damage. 1. Provide full maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of elevator Installer for elevators used for construction purposes. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, ■ Smith Campus Center Hydraulic Elevators 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 14240-9 00 K. Hoistway Doors Vertical biparting 1. Size 6'-0"x 7'-0" 2.10 PASSENGER ELEVATOR CHARACTERISTICS A. Control "Oildraulic" B. Capacity 3,000 lbs. C. Speed 100 fpm D. Car Size 4'-9"x 6'-8" E. Clear Hoistway 6'-3"x 8'-11" F. Travel 27'-3" G. Power Supply 208V, 3 phase,60 cycle H. Machine Location Remote at Lowest landing I. Stops 3 J. Openings 3 K. Hoistway Doors Single Speed Side Sliding 1. Size 3'-6"x 7'-0" PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION +*■ A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Verify critical dimensions, and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which �* elevator work is to be installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. For the record, prepare a written report, endorsed by Installer, listing dimensional ,■, discrepancies and conditions detrimental to performance. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Excavation for Jack: Drill excavation in each elevator pit to accommodate installation of cylinders; comply with applicable requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 1. Provide waterproof well casings to retain walls of well hole. B. Install cylinders in protective casings. Before installing protective casing, remove water and debris from well hole or casing and provide permanent waterproof seal at bottom of well casing. Fill void space between protective casing and cylinder with .� corrosion-protective filler. 1. Align cylinders and fill space between well casing and protective casing with fine sand. C. Install cylinders in well casings. Before installing cylinders, remove water and debris from well casing and provide permanent waterproof seal at bottom of casing. D. Install cylinders plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel. Anchor securely in place, supported at pit floor. Seal between protective casing and pit floor with 4 inches of non-shrink,non-metallic grout. Smith Campus Center Hydraulic Elevators 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 14240-8 �"' W 2.6 SERVICE ELEVATOR CAR ENCLOSURES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard steel-framed car enclosures with non-removable wall panels, suspended ceiling, trim, accessories, access doors, doors, power door operators,sills, thresholds, lighting, and ventilation. 1. Floor finish is black VCT 2. Patterned stainless steel. 3. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment. 4. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car. 5. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction, fabricated from stainless steel. 6. Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick. 7. Luminous Ceiling: Fluorescent light fixtures and ceiling panels of translucent acrylic or other permanent rigid plastic complying with flammability requirements. 8. Handrails and Bumpers: Solid bar, satin stainless steel. 9. Controls: Otis Series 1 car fixtures with in-car lantern and hall stations, or approved equal. 2.7 PASSENGER ELEVATOR CAR ENCLOSURES A. See Drawings. 2.8 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Provide frame go size and profile to coordinate with hoistway wall construction. 1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, provide self-supporting frames with reinforced head sections. B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standards but not less than the following: 1. Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed stainless-steel sheet. 2. Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick. 3. Non-Shrink, Non-Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-gaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. 2.9 SERVICE ELEVATOR CHARACTERISTICS A. Control "Oildraulic" B. Capacity 4,000 lbs. C. Speed 100 fpm D. Platform Size 6'-0"x 8'-0" E. Clear Hoistwa Y 7'-8"x 8'-11" F. Travel 27'-3" G. Power Supply 208V, 3 phase, 60 cycle H. Machine Location Remote at Lowest landing I. Stops 3 J. Openings 4 Smith Campus Center Hydraulic Elevators !"' 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 14240-7 D. Fire Department Communication System: Provide flush-mounted cabinet in each car and required conductors in traveling cable for fire department communication system .� specified in Division 16 Sections. E. Car Position Indicator: Otis, Series 1, or approved equal that satisfies the following requirements: 1. Provide illuminated- signal type, digital-display type, or segmented type, located above car control station. 2. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car control station. 3. Provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. F. Hall Push-Button Stations: Otis, Series 1,or approved equal that satisfies the following .� requirements: 1. Provide hall push-button stations at each landing for each elevator or group of elevators as indicated. 2. Provide units with flat stainless steel faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall. 3. Provide units with direction-indicating buttons; two buttons at intermediate landings; one button at terminal landings. 4. Mount unit with centerline at 42"above the finish floor. G. Hall Lanterns: Otis, Series 1, or approved equal that satisfies the following requirements: 1. Provide units with illuminated arrows, but provide single arrow at terminal landings. .� 2. Provide units with flat stainless steel faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall and with illuminated elements projecting from faceplate for ease of angular viewing. 3. Place lanterns above each hoistway entrance, unless otherwise indicated. Mount at a minimum of 72 inches above finished floor. 4. With each lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down. H. Hall Position Indicators: Otis, Series 1, or approved equal that satisfies the following requirements: 1. Provide illuminated- signal type or digital-display type, located above each hoistway entrance at ground floor. 2. Provide units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall. 3. Integrate hall lanterns with hall position indicators as one unit. 2.5 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES A. Door Edge Device: Provide retractable edge shoes on elevator entrance doors that ..� cause doors to stop and reopen upon contacting an obstruction. Include photoelectric device with timed cutout that projects dual-light beams across car entrance at 5-and 29- inch heights; the beams, when interrupted, cause doors to stop and reopen. 1. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for a predetermined adjustable time, through activating door reopening device, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to close at reduced kinetic energy. Smith Campus Center Hydraulic Elevators 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 14240-6 `""' 3. Loaded-Car Bypass: When car load exceeds a predetermined weight, car will respond only to car calls,not to hall calls. Predetermined weight can be adjusted. 4. Automatic Dispatching of Loaded Car: When car load exceeds a predetermined weight, doors will begin closing. C. Security Features: In addition to above operational features, provide the following security features, where indicated. Security features shall not affect emergency firefighters'service. 1. Keyswitch Feature: Car and hall push buttons are activated and deactivated by security keyswitches. Key is removable only in deactivated position. 2. Secured Landing Feature: Allows each landing to be secured or cleared. If landing is secured, car buttons for that landing do not register a call unless landing access code is entered within a predetermined time period after landing button is pressed. When a secured landing button is pressed, a "Restricted Floor" lamp lights and remains lit until landing access code has been entered or predetermined time period has elapsed. a. Access codes are programmed at each car operating panel using a security keyswitch. Secured landing feature is activated and deactivated by a security keyswitch at the main landing. 3. Car-to-Lobby Feature: Feature, activated by a keyswitch at main lobby, that causes all cars in a group to return immediately to lobby and open doors for inspection. On deactivation by keyswitch, cars complete calls registered before keyswitch activation and resume normal operation. 2.4 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide signal equipment for each elevator or group of elevators with hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements of acrylic or other permanent, non-yellowing translucent plastic. B. Swing-Return Car Control Stations: Provide car control stations fully recessed in hinged return panel adjacent to car door. 1. Include call buttons for each landing served and other buttons, switches, and controls required for specified car operation. 2. Mark buttons and switches with manufacturer's standard identification for required use or function that complies with ASME A17.1. 3. Mount controls at heights complying with the U.S. Architectural &Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), " Accessibility Guidelines(ADAAG)." ICC A117.1. C. Emergency Communication System: Provide system that complies with ASME A17.1 and the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)." On activation, system dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and identifies elevator location to monitoring station. System provides two-way voice communication without using a handset and provides visible signals that indicate when system has been activated and when monitoring station has responded. System is contained in flush- mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery backup power supply. Smith Campus Center Hydraulic Elevators 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 14240-5 No ON F. Protective Cylinder Casings: PVC pipe casings complying with ASME A17.1, of sufficient size to provide not less than 1-inch clearance from cylinder, and extending 00 above pit floor. G. Corrosion Protective Filler: A solventless, petroleum-based gel formulated for filling the space between hydraulic cylinders and protective casings. Filler is heavier than am water,electrically non-conductive, and liquefies at approximately 150 deg F. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: ° 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: a. Diversified Enterprises;No-Ox-Id R-R#6110A. b. Pacific Standard Chemical Co.; Union-Gard 160. H. Car Frame and Platform: Welded steel units. 1. For freight elevators, provide special heavy-duty units where indicated for power truck loading,designed to withstand impacts and wheel loadings indicated. I. Finish Materials: Provide the following materials and finishes for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures, car doors, hoistway entrance doors and frames, and signal equipment as indicated: 1. Satin Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4, directional satin finish. a. Surface is satin polished after rolling. 2. Enameled-Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 366/A 366M, matte finish, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness; hot- rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 569/A 569M may be used for door •� frames. Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect. 3. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3; color,texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from plastic-laminate manufacturer's full range of products. 4. See 2.6 (below) for additional finish materials. 2.3 OPERATION SYSTEMS A. Elevators: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system for each elevator or group of elevators as required to provide type of operation system indicated. 1. Single Elevator: Provide "selective collective automatic operation" as defined in ASME A17.1. B. Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the following operational features for elevators. 1. Standby Powered Lowering: On activation of standby power, cars that are at a floor remain at that floor, open their doors, and shut down. Cars that are between floors are lowered to a preselected floor, open their doors, and shut down. Cars that are below the preselected floor are lowered to the next lower floor, open their doors, and shut down. 2. Independent Service: Keyswitch in car control station removes car from group operation and allows it to respond only to car calls. Key cannot be removed from keyswitch when car is in independent service. When in independent service,doors + ► close only in response to the door close button. Smith Campus Center Hydraulic Elevators 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 142404 agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations,conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 7m offering hydraulic elevators that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following: 1. Otis Elevator Co. 2. Schindler Elevator Corp. 2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Where components are not otherwise indicated, provide standard components, published by manufacturer as included in standard preengineered elevator systems and as required for a complete system. B. Pump Units: Positive-displacement type with a maximum of 10 percent variation between no load and full load and with minimum pulsations. Provide either of the following: 1. Pump, with fan-cooled squirrel-cage induction motor, mounted on top of oil tank with vibration isolation mounts. Enclose pump in prime-painted steel enclosure lined with 1-inch thick, glass-fiber insulation board. 2. Submersible pump, with submersible squirrel-cage induction motor, suspended inside tank from vibration isolation mounts. 3. Provide motor with wye-delta or solid-state starting. we 4. Provide variable-voltage variable-frequency motor control. 5. Mount hydraulic unit on double deflection neoprene isolation mounts simial to Mason Industries "ND"or approved equal, with o.35"static deflection. C. Hydraulic Silencers: Provide hydraulic silencer containing pulsation-absorbing material in a blowout-proof housing at pump unit within the pump discharge line. Mount hydraulic plunger on noise and vibration pad with static deflection of isolation a material a minimum of 0.10"under normal. D. Piping: Provide size, type, and weight piping recommended by manufacturer, and provide flexible connectors to minimize sound and vibration transmissions from power pa unit. Resiliently mount and sleeve all piping from hydraulic unit and plunger. There shall be no direct contact between piping and surrounding conditions. 1. Provide dielectric couplings at plunger/cylinder units. 2. Casing for Underground Piping: PVC pipe complying with ASTM D 1785 joined with PVC fittings complying with ASTM D 2466 and solvent cement complying with ASTM D 2564. E. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work where installation of devices is specified elsewhere 1. Guide rails to be attached to building structural elements only. 2. Roller wheels to be resilient material similar to neoprene.. Smith Campus Center Hydraulic Elevators 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 14240-3 an E. Maintenance Manuals: Include operation and maintenance instructions, parts listing with sources indicated, recommended parts inventory listing, emergency instructions, MR and similar information. Include diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel. Submit for Owner's information at Project closeout as specified in Division 1. F. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having jurisdiction for normal,unrestricted elevator use. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or an experienced installer approved by elevator manufacturer who has completed elevator installations similar in material, .. design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Regulatory Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, comply with applicable provisions in ASME A17.1, "Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators." 1. Accessibility Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, comply with Section 4.10 in the U.S. Architectural &Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)." Section 407 in ICC A117.1. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, and items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish templates and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in time for installation. ` B. Furnish well casing and coordinate delivery with related excavation work. C. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to hydraulic elevators including pit ladders, sumps, and floor drains in pits; entrance sub-sills; and electrical service, electrical outlets, lights,and switches in pits and machine rooms. 1.8 WARRANTY "' A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair,restore,or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion. 1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide months' full maintenance service by skilled employees of the elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 1. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours. 2. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service. a. Response Time: Two hours or less. B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Provide a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly or other period maintenance Smith Campus Center Hydraulic Elevators 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 14240-2 OR SECTION 14240 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS +�! PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 4" A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the hydraulic elevators, as indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein, an including but not limited to, the following: 1. One holed hydraulic passenger elevator with cab as shown on drawings. 2. One holed hydraulic service elevator with cab as shown on drawings. 3. Two machines in Elevator Machine Room with hydraulic connections to elevator hoistway. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Unit masonry-Section 04200. B. Gypsum drywall—Section 09250. C. Electrical power and wiring to elevator controllers and car lights -Division 16. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Defective Elevator Work: Operation or control system failures; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; the need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar information. B. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other construction, and locations of equipment and signals. Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and maximum and average power demands. C. Samples: For exposed finishes of cars, hoistway doors and frames, and signal equipment; 3-inch square samples of sheet materials; and 4-inch lengths of running trim members. D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and machine room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, including emergency generator, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided. Smith Campus Center Hydraulic Elevators 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 14240-1 7 7 7 7 7 3 7 7 7 7 7 7 i e e e 0 e e 0 e e 0 Nw FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT SUBSTITUTIONS BASE BID SHALL INCLUDE ALL ITEMS AS SPECIFIED. Bidder may offer substitutions for any items or details noted in specifications by listing in the blanks below the name of the substituted item, drawings or the details in question, together with total Unit Price stating the amount to be added to or deducted from the base bid for the substituted item(s). The right is reserved to accept or reject any proposed substitution without question. No substitution is to be considered if not listed on this sheet at the time of bidding. Sum stated to include any modifications of work or additional work that may be required by reason of acceptance of substitution. Substitute materials listed below must be checked and approved. Foodservice Equipment Contractor is to be responsible for any charges that may be made because of changes to the buildings and mechanical facilities and/or additional requirements brought about by substitutions. DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE TO BASE ITEM# QUANTITY SUBSTITUTION BID Add Delete 00 ***END OF SECTION*** Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment go 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 1 1400-61 am 14.19 2 Dish Dolly, Heated 14.20 3 Jackstack Plate Rack 14.21 1 Banquet Ring Dolly 14.22 1 Utility Stand w/Sink 14.23 1 Utility Stand 14.24 1 Utility Stand w/Sink 14.24A 1 Undercounter Warewasher 14.25 1 Wall Cabinets 14.26 1 Ceramic Cook Top Conv. Oven .. 14.27 1 Exhaust Ventilator 14.28 1 Fire Extinguishing System 14.29 1 Microwave Oven .■ 15.00 LOWER LEVEL BAR 15.01 1 Front Bar Counter 15.02 1 Back Bar Counter 15.03 1 Sink, Drop-In 15.04 1 Back Bar Cooler 15.05 1 Ice Cuber, Undercounter 15.06 1 Hand Sink 15.07 1 Water Filter Additional equipment included in Addenda or not covered in itemized list. Total Equipment Price Including Delivery, Rigging, Setting, Made Ready for Final Connection Total Applicable Taxes Subtotal WX Insurance TOTAL CONTRACT PRICE Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-60 10.07 1 Refrigerated Equipment Stand 10.08 1 Exhaust Ventilator 10.09 1 Fire Extinguishing System 10.10 1 Utility Stand w/Hand Sink ` 10.11 1 Work Top Freezer 11.00 BEVERAGES 11.01 1 SelfServeCase, Refrigerated 12.00 CASHIERS 12.01 1 Cashier Counter 12.02 3 POS Systems 12.03 1 Condiment Stand " 13.00 COFFEE/JUICE BAR 13.01 1 Coffee Bar 13.02 1 Coffee Brewing System 13.02A 8 Coffee Dispenser 13.03 1 Espresso Machine 13.04 1 Refrigerated Display Case 13.05 1 Refrigerator 13.06 1 Hand Sink 13.07 1 Blender Station 13.08 1 Blender 13.09 1 Ice Bin 13.10 1 Ice-Cream Cooler 13.11 1 Soda&Ice Dispenser 13.12 1 Ice Cuber, Undercounter 14.00 PANTRY 14.01 1 Utility Stand w/Sink 14.02 1 Urn Stand 14.03 1 Refrigerator w/Freezer 14.04 1 Coffee Brewing System 14.05 1 Water Filter 14.06 1 Roll-In Refrigerator 14.07 1 Hand Sink,Wall Mounted 14.08 2 Holding Cabinet on, 14.09 1 Ice Maker 14.09A 1 Ice Bin 14.10 1 Water Filter 14.11 --- Open Number 14.12 --- Open Number 14.13 --- Open Number 14.14 --- Open Number 14.15 --- Open Number 14.16 I Plating Table 14.17 2 Dish Dolly 14.18 1 Glass Rack Dolly Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-59 ON 05.15 1 Fire Extinguishing System 05.16 1 Kettle, 6-Gallon 06.00 DISH/POTWASHING 06.01 1 Soiled Dishtable 06.02 1 Collector/Disposer 06.03 1 Warewasher 06.04 1 Condensate Hood 06.05 1 Booster Heater 06.06 1 Clean Dishtable 06.07 1 (3)Compartment Pot Sink 06.08 3 SmartWall Shelving System 07.00 SALAD & DELI .. 07.01 1 Front Service Counter 07.02 1 Refrig. Salad/Deli Display 07.03 1 Hot Holding Cabinet 07.04 3 Soup Warmer 07.05 1 Sneeze Guard 07.06 1 Refrigerated Salad Case 08.00 --- Open Number 08.01 1 Utlity Stand 08.02 1 Hand Sink 08.03 1 Utility Sink 08.04 1 Work Top Refrigerator 08.05 1 Toaster 08.06 1 Slicer 08.07 1 Panim Grill am 09.00 PIZZA 09.01 --- Open Number 09.02 --- Open Number no 09.03 1 Oven, Stone Hearth 09.04 --- Open Number 09.05 --- Open Number 04 09.06 1 Sneeze Guard 09.06A 2 Heat Lamp 09.07 1 Pizza Prep Refrigerator OR 09.08 1 Heated Open Display 10.00 GRILL No 10.01 --- Open Number 10.02 1 Heated Open Display 10.03 1 Filler panel am 10.04 1 Assembly Refrigerator 10.05 2 Fryer 10.05A I Filter&Warmer so 10.06 2 Griddle/Charbroiler Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment ,o 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-58 ITEMIZED QUOTATIONS Provide below the lump sum price of each item, including delivery, rigging, setting, and erection. Failure to include the delivery, rigging, setting, and erection in each item will automatically void the bid. Do not leave blank spaces. If no work is required, insert the words "No Work Required." For container shipments, delivery for each item may be omitted; information to be provided in applicable area at end of section. ITEM# OTY. DESCRIPTION ITEMIZED COST 01.00 REFRIGERATION 01.01 1 Two Comp't Walk-in Ref/Frzr 01.01A 1 Freezer Coil 01.0113 1 Refrigerator Coil 01.01C --- Open Number 01.011) 1 Refrigeration System 01.02 9 Shelving Unit,Mobile 01.03 1 Mobile Pan Rack 02.00 DRY STORAGE 02.01 5 Storage Shelf,Mobile 02.02 1 Chemical Cabinet 02.03 1 Soda Syatem 03.00 EMPLOYEE LOCKER 03.01 5 Locker, Two-Tier 04.00 ICE PRODUCTION & JAN. CLOSET 04.01 1 Ice Cuber 04.02 1 Ice Bin 04.03 1 Water Filter 04.04 1 Floor Trough 04.05 1 Mop Sink 04.06 1 Air Door 05.00 COLD PREPARATION 05.01 1 Hand Sink,Wall Mounted 05.02 1 Reach-In Refrigerator 05.03 1 Worktable With Sinks 05.03A 1 Waste Disposer 05.04 2 Worktable, Mobile 05.05 1 Manual Can Opener 05.06 1 Food Processor 05.07 1 Greenskeeper 05.08 1 Wastebasket 05.09 1 Bowl Stand Unit, Mobile 05.10 1 Salad Dryer 05.11 3 SmartWall Shelving System 05.12 1 Four Open Burner Range 05.13 1 Convection Oven, Stacked 05.14 1 Exhaust Ventilator Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment ' 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-57 (City and State) NOTE: If the bidder is a corporation, indicate state of incorporation under signature and affix corporate seal; if a partnership, give full names and residential addresses of all partners; and if an individual, give residential address if different from business address. ON M wo o Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-56 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT AND BONDS The Undersigned agrees that if he is selected as Foodservice Equipment Contractor, he will,within ten(10) days (Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays excluded) after presentation thereof by the Owner, execute a Contract in accordance with the terms of this proposal and will furnish a performance bond and also a labor and materials bond in standard AIA form as security for the faithful performance of this Contract for payment of all persons performing labor on the project under this Contract. The performance bond and labor and materials bond shall be of a surety company qualified to do business under the laws of the state or jurisdiction in which the project is located and in form and amount satisfactory to the Owner and each shall be in the face amount of 100%of the Contract price, the premiums for which are to be paid by the Foodservice Equipment Contractor for the sum of$ ; and if so required, the Contract price shall be increased by this amount. The Undersigned further agrees not to withdraw this proposal for a period of sixty(60) calendar days from the date of submittal for this proposal. ADDENDUM RECEIPT Receipt of the following Addenda to the Terms and Conditions, Drawings, or Specifications is acknowl- edged.- Addendum No. Dated: + • Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: DATE: (Name of Foodservice Equipment Dealer) (Authorized Signature and Title) (Type or Print Name and Title) (Business Address) Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment "�"" 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-55 .W MR Part 6 -BID PROPOSAL FORM SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSSETS TO: Gentlemen: The undersigned, (Name of Bidder) a (Proprietorship, Partnership, or Corporation) (State of Incorporation, if applicable) of (Address) having carefully examined the Project Manual, the Drawings, Addenda, and all associated bid documents as prepared by Cini•Little International, Inc., as well as the premises and conditions affecting the work, proposes to furnish all material, equipment, labor, plant machinery, tools, supplies, services, applicable taxes, licenses, permits, certifications, and specified insurance necessary to perform the entire work, as set forth in, and in accordance with,the said documents for the following considerations: GRAND TOTAL CONTRACT PRICE The grand total Contract price is Dollars($ ). • SUBCONTRACTORS The following are Subcontractors the Bidder intends to employ in the completion of the foodservice equipment Contract: Subcontractor Address Phase of Work ..a Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-54 ON im ww war ow - ww ON NFA WALK-IN COOLER/FREEZER EVAPORATOR COIL DRAIN LINE (HEATED IN FREEZER COMPARTMENT! ESCUTCHEON BY KEC "P" TRAP FL OOR DRAIN "P" TRAP 0• p '.°Q• p .•0•Q _p` V p V• p• V `O• 'vim p _V_ 'G0'V � ..V �CONCRETE� SUB FLOOR L OOR GRAIN wo 00 K.E.C. TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL WALK-IN COOLER/FREEZER ASSEMBLY. no EVAPORATOR COIL DRAIN LINE AND "P" TRAP AS DETAILED TO BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY THE KITCHEN CONTRACTOR. N SEAL ALL PENETRATIONS NEATLY WITH THERMAL MASTIC. "o 0 W O a 4 M Q 0 EVAPORATOR COIL DRAIN "P" TRAP STANDARD DETAIL ewr NO SCALE 7.03 k+ INCOMING ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPL Y PROVIDE "SEAL OFF" JUNC TION BOX IN CONDUITS BRANCH TO OTHER LIGHTS AND SWITCH(ES) rrA WALK-IN CEILING PLASTIC CONDUIT THROUGH WALK-IN FILL VOID BETWEEN FILL WITH THERMAL MASTIC AFTER PLASTIC CONDUIT & RUNNING WIRE WALK-1N PANEL SLEEVE WITH THERMAL MASTIC VAPOR PROOF LIGHTS PER SPECS. I ALL CONDUIT TO BE RUN ON EXTERIOR OF WALK-IN. 2. ALL PENETRATIONS THRU WALK-IN ARE TO BE SEALED W/TH THERMAL MASTIC. 0 3. LIGHT FIXTURES TO BE SHIPPED LOOSE BY KEC FOR INSTALLATION AT a JOB SITE UNDER ELECTRICAL PORTION OF PROJECT q 1 WALK-IN REFRIGERATOR LIGHT STANDARD DETAIL INSTALLATION 7.02 0 cr-Z gcc �Q� Lu r ` Q) �WW ` W tij 11c N°U Z�Q m`Qc \moo Z) O O 2 J` i - - - - - - - - - - - - Q 2W ati UQ: co zi °e QV) C�Q-W a:Q- Q O `n �L Qj �� O O V)W � � O U U Q z m o � Q x � 0 3 p �QW~ 22 o J Q) Li c U co -4 W W W k.' p V)U) �° Q CONDENSATE HOOD STANDARD DETAIL NO SCALE 5.07 cc cc W 00 Oc cs`IV ~ j cn Q WC)u- �o U~ ~ OTC `-UW O� Y� Ups., OZ QY ti QY Oa O U QOM �� �': Q k�� �O =WZQ F- Q It Wq ti U WtoQ CE O�w� co W J LLJ ti m 0 O W ZW Lu q Q 0000 m� � � UJ oz Off LL � � ° 41 F-1 I-- �O Yry W- jY `f O�j � �Qz �v>�O �o YtrUZ J � Ot�00 CAN mV?(Ltu)W ca cu �? a zi� �p ew!■ N O O LL � U W W Z Z ii s' 00 p 2 Utipw canJj i I ° °° lz ' `ti N o C-) Q q JQ jj I I NNW co Z Q„K 1^ 2 W W O W o°o°o°o 0 0 0 0 Q W L'oa z pct �� I Up I I o�o 00 zi op q QapO W� �O I wz ° FLU Q cn cn cc (f) O W Otu - 4 �t - - °o°o°o° o°o°o° J o000 000o i —j cc m a L'i rc J Q W O ti ui p W p Q Lt, (WWSZJ I p (WW08IJ 7kvn / (WINOS! co C) W o a (WWOSI ,Z L Z (o o a Q � K (WWO�'ZI (WWS Ono.911 CO Z p E, ..6 IZ _9 Z) u � pO I Q O to (INW SI 61 U jz UJ 9� two W � k W � a ►- 0 0 2 W v ,o Q p ^ a � ��RUCi v JWOUW Q Q ~ El tL ri ct Ll Q Q: F W O p STANDARD DETAIL REFRIGERATED DRAWER CABINET BASE NO SCALE SEE ALSO: 115,1,25 & 4.70.4 4.75 PULL OUT SLIDES FOR ALL ELECTRIC (SR OR JBI COUNTER COMPRESSORS. CC -REFRIGERA TION SL EEVE j 1"X 1" (25MM X j NOTE 25MMI X 14 GA. (1.8Mh . MOUNT COMPRESSOR TO GAL V. ANGLE(WELDED IN FRONT OF SLIDES PL A CEI O 314" X 1" (20MM X 25MMI14GA. (18MMI GAL V. ANGLE �;� - STOP 3 8 REMOVABLE X 3" L (WELDED IN PLACE/ v �% (10MM D X 75MM L I BOL T 1-1/2" X 4" X 1-1/2" 1-1/2" X 2" X1-1/2" (40MM X 100MM X 40MMI (40MM X 50MM X 40MMI 14 GA. (L8MM/ GAL V. CHANNEL 14 GA. (18MMI GAL V. CHANNEL COMPRESSOR FRAME TRACKS (WELDED TO (TO SLIDE IN TRACKS/ COUNTER FRAME/ REMOVABLE STOP a IIAU TACK WELD 318" (10MMI NUT TO UNDERSIDE OF COMPRESSOR FRAME COMPRESSOR TO HAVE CORD & PLUG AND/OR FLEXIBLE CONDUIT. CORD OR FLEXIBLE CONDUIT TO BE LENGTH TO ALLOW PULL OUT OF UNIT FOR SERVICES. PROVIDE MIN. (21 T WO COIL S ON REF. L INES FOR PUL L OU T OF COMPRESSOR. PULL-OUT COUNTER COMPRESSOR STANDARD DETAIL NO SCAf 4.71 a ° TOP 0 0 N 0 0 � 3/16" (� (4MMJ .,. REFRIGERATOR LIGHT REFRIGERATOR THERMOMETER A. REFRIGERATOR LIGHT 1. GARCY 4510 SERIES INCANDESCENT FIXTURE WITH LAMP. ONE FIXTURE PER DOOR, WITH S/S EXPANDED METAL SHEIL D, FRAME AND CLIPS. 2. KITCHEN EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR TO INTERWIRE TO DOOR SWITCH, COMPONENT HARDWARE GROUP R61-8410 OR EQUAL, MOUNTED IN HINGE SIDE OF DOOR AND COMPLETE CIRCUIT TO UTILITY COMPARTMENT. B. REFRIGERATOR THERMOMETER 1. MARSH INSTRUMENT CO. #K1510 DISTANT READING; BRASS CASE; 2" (50MM)DRAWN FRONT FLANGED CASE - FLUSH MOUNTED, CHROME PLATED 3" 175MMJ WET BULB TYPE QUALITY MOVEMENT WITH CENTER BACK OUTLET. DIAL TO BE FAHRENHEIT -40°F TO +60°F (-40°C TO 15-C)IN 2 INCREMENTS. PROVIDE W/REQUIRED LENGTH ARMORED CAPILLARY TUBE. Cc 2. TO MOUNT W/ (3) 1/8- X 32" 13MM X 800MM)S/S SCREWS IN DIE STAMPED RECESS AS SHOWN IN SECTION ABOVE. 3. THERMOMETER TO BE L OCA TED IN VERTICAL CENTER OR SIDE MUL L ION, TO BE EAS/L Y PEA DA BL E. 4. SENSING BUL B TO BE L OCA TED ON INTAKE SIDE OF BL 0WER COIL. REFRIGERATED BASE CABINETS STANDARD DETAIL NO SCAJJ 4. 70.4 E TOP SLIDE MOUNTED 4-112" 015MM)BELOW DOOR OPENING F. ROUND CORNER 112" R 05MM R.l. .� Dr ` C. D. A. D. A. B. D. C B. . A. A. B. B. A. A. B. 2-114" ° A. D. A. D. (57MM) SPA CES WIDTH OF I G�F\�Q �P(1 SPECIFED PS 59E TPA Y •112"" (15MM) �0 O 1t 1/2"t(40MM1 F. PGG0M 1-1/a" (30MM1 D. 2"(50MM) A ANGLE SLIDES A. STANDARD-KEIL COMPONENT HARDWARE C. A. T21-SERIES ALUMINUM , C. KEYHOLE PER STANDARD .r B C. A B. A. a , f B. i C. C. B. 1 W 1 1-3/4 (45MM1 C. B. WIRE SHEL VES - CHROME PL A TED, 5116" (20MM) 2" (50MM) FRAME, 5132•" (10MM)RIBS RUN FRONT TO BACK. .. C. CL IPS - I" 125MM1 L ONG 14 GA. (1.8W S/S WI TH WEL DED 1-1/8 S/S STUDS. WELD CLIPS TO INTERIOR. 130MM) WELD CLIPS TO INTERIOR. on W. WIDTH OF REFRIGERATOR DOOR. Bso REFRIGERATED BASE CABINET STANDARD DETAIL NO SCALE CONTINUED ON 4.70.4 4./ O.3 AS SPECIFIED F. (200MM! F. F. (50MM) (50MM) I. A. I I A. G. ' I D. B. 4" 3(20MM) D' B. I. 1100MM) 45 SECTION 1 1"125MM) A. 18 GA. (1.2MM) S/S ALL WELDED COVED pp CORNER CONSTRUCTION. B. 18 GA. 11.2MM) NON-MAGNETIC G. S/S CABINET BODY. i t C. 18 GA. (1.2MM) 430 S/S. �n B. � D. 18 GA. (1.2MM) S/S INTERIOR AND 2-1/2 1-1/2 'i EX TERIOR. 5 14 ) . . E MAGNETIC GASKET, JARROW 2002 2" A. OR EQUAL, FULLY PERIMETER. ! OM �� F. BAKELITE BREAKER STRIP FULL Y C j PERIMETER SECURED WITH COUNTERSUNK S/S SCREWS. E G. EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE, STYROFOAM F. BRAND INSULATION BY DOW. HINGES (NO T SHO WN) CONCEA L ED �- SEL F-CL OSING, MOUNT TOP f AND BOTTOM. �• I. SEAL ALL AROUND WITH SILICONE SEALANT. J. 430 S/S WHERE MAGNETIC GASKET HITS, 430 IS ATTACHED TO MAGNETS D. ����� ``, Z UNLIKE REGULAR S/S. SECTION 2 REFRIGERATED BASE CABINET STANDARD DETAIL NO SG1LE CONTINUED ON 4.70.3 4.7 0.2 GASKET INTERIOR PANEL ,f/ INSUL A TION 1 ( 5 1 (30MM) 4 2" (50MM) 3/4" (2 0MM) 314" �1 120MM) \\ (15MM) EXTERIOR PANI 125MM) DOOR HANDLE DETAIL i 1 i 0 i 0 FOR SECTION 1, SEE STANDARD DETAIL - 4.70.2 FOR SECTION 2, SEE STANDARD DETAIL - 4.70.2 PLASTIC LAMINATE (WHEN SPECIFIED)BONDED TO 18 GA. (1.2MM) GALVINIZED STEEL. SECURE WITH WELDED STUDS, LOCKWASHERS AND NUTS. STANDARD DETAIL .R REFRIGERATED BASE CABINETS .>" NO SCALE CONTINUED ON 4.70.2 4.70.1 LIGHT STANDARD DETAIL - 4.70.4 THERMOMETER f �� STANDARD ) DETAIL - 4.70.4 B. 3" j75MMl CABINET d DOOR - - - - - - - - - CONSTRUCTION ' STANDARD DETAIL - 4.70.1 I I - 4.70.2 ' I I � I� I I� I� I SLIDES d SHEL VES I STANDARD DETAIL - 4.70.3 SIS TUBING - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - DRAIN TO FLOOR DRAIN OR EVAPORATOR `° o PAN A. THE KITCHEN EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL ALL NECESSARY ELECTRICAL AND REFRIGERATION FITTINGS, CONTROLS AND CONNECTIONS TO PROPERLY SIZED COMPRESSOR TO PROVIDE A COMPLETELY TESTED REFRIGERATION SYSTEM TO MEET THE INTERIOR OPERATING TEMPERATURE REQUIREMENT DEFINED AS, REFRIGERATORS 35°F 11.60CI AND FREEZERS -10"F t-2300) UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. B. THE BLOWER COIL SHALL BE AS MANUFACTURED BY BOHN HEAT TRANSFER DIVISION, MODEL KM OR U FOR MUL TIPL E SECTION REFRIGERA TORS, MODEL TA OR U FOR SINGLE SECTION REFRIGERATORS AND MODEL TL FOR ALL FREEZERS. ELECTRICAL AND REFRIGERATION CIRCUITS SHALL BE COMPLETED = TO THE UTILITY COMPARTMENT OR CONDENSING UNIT LOCATION, STANDARD DETAIL REFRIGERATED BASE CABINETS NO SCALE CONTINUED ON 4.70.1 4.70 1-112" [4 C. 2 114" (5MMl— 1/2" (15MM)— Q1 1/24"(15MM1— � 114- (5MMl— U a Q 1" (25MM)- 1/2" (15MM)- 1/2" (15MM)— f-� (25MM) 1" (25MM) SECTION 1 r A. C. a :N\ a i (15MM 1/2 15MM) 11/2" 1-1/2 1-1/2 .1/2 B. ow di (40MM1 140MM1 (40MM1 AS SPECIFIED SECTION 2 a CONSTRUCT INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR FRAME OF 18 GA. (1.2MM) S/S ALL FLUSH WELDED AND POLISHED. TACK WELD INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR TOGETHER TACK WELD 18 GA. (1.2MM)S/S BLADES IN POSITION, GRIND SMOOTH AMD POLISH. B. HEAVY-DUTY S/S SLIP JOINT HINGE COMPONENT HARDWARE GROUP R74-9000 (P.H.) �. OR R74-9001 (L.H.) SET IN FLUSH WITH SURFACE OF DOOR AND JAMB AND WELDED IN PLACE. T C. COMPONENT HARDWARE GROUP M32-2401 MAGNETIC CATCH MOUNTED FLUSH IN .■ CUT OUT ON 1" (25MM) TURN DOWN, PROVIDE TOP AND BOTTOM CATCHES ON DOORS OVER 24" H X 24- W (610MM H X 610MM Wl. 0 D. STEEL PLATE FOR MAGNETIC CATCH TACK WELDED TO INTERIOR DOOR PAN. w C HINGED LOUVERED DOOR STANDARD DETAIL NO SCAU 4.27 D. � 2 , C) C. L U q a �+ Q EJ JAMB DOOR B• (25MM1 HINGE DETAIL SECTION 1 A. D. A A. 125MM) HEM 45° 314" (20MM) (30MM) AS SPECIFIED SECTION 2 A. 18 GA. (Z2MM) S/S EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR PANS TACK WELDED. B. HEAVY-DUTY S/S SLIP JOINT HINGE, COMPONENT HARWARE GROUP R74-9000 (R.H.) OR R74-9001 (L.H.)SET IN FLUSH WITH SURFACE OF DOOR AND JAMB WELDED IN PLACE. C. COMPONENT HARDWARE GROUP M32-2401 MAGNETIC CATCH MOUNTED FLUSH IN CUT OUT ON 1" (25MM) TURN DOWN. PROVIDE TOP AND BOTTOM CATCHES ON DOORS OVER 24" H X 24" W 1610MM H X 610MM W). D. STEEL PLATE FOR MAGNETIC CATCH TACK WELDED TO INTERIOR DOOR PAN. STANDARD DETAIL HINGED SOLID DOOR NO SCALE 4.26 .I. PROVIDE VERTICAL MEMBER TO SUPPORT BACK 1-1/2" X 1-1/2" X 118" (40MM X 40MM X 3MM) GI OR CHANNEL TO TOP EL c EGS B. I ' ' I I VC FULL , I ' I ' DEPTH , OPEN BOTTOM I I I I I I I ' I I CHANNEL I ' UNDER I ' j1 It 11 ' n SEE DETAILS BELOW -1 SECTION 2 COUNTER TOP BOTTOM SHELF 2" (50MMI DOWN IN FRONT CHANNELS TO CLOSE UP 2" (50MM)AT SIDES MULLION REQUIRED BY NSF AND ACROSS REAR SUPPORT DETAIL L VERTICAL MULLION IS SUPPORT FOR TOP FRAME BOTTOM SHELF VERTICAL MULL ION I I I I I I I CHANNEL OR h GUSSET PL A TE LEGS POSITIONED a UNDER VERTICAL o SUPPORTS DEPENDENT a UPON OVERALL LENGTH ELEVATION t BACK COUNTER STANDARD DUML NO SCALE SEE ALSO:4.07 4.01 .1 F A• A SIZE AS SPECIFIED. NOTE :POP B. SEAL WITH SILICONE RIVETS & EX- POSED STUDS & SEALANT, COMPONENT .�► CAP NUTS NOT HARDWARE GROUP M90- r SERIES INSFI. ACCEPTABLE. CHANNEL GUSSET - LEG PLATE LEG B, EDGE BACKSPLASH STANDARD DETAIL - L 02 AS SPECIFIED STANDARD DETAIL- t 04A x TOP 14 GA. IT 8MM1 S/S SECURED TO FRAMEWORK WITH WELDED STUDS, S/S L OCK WASHER AND S/S CAP NUTS. po 20" MAX. a 1500MM1 Lu FRAMEWORK <, STANDARD DETAIL - 1.06 jI BODY & L INER 1 w~ ' 18 GA. 11.2MM1 S/S WITH SHELVES INTERGRALL Y FORMED i 16 GA. It5MM1 S/S SECURED STRUCTURAL ANGLES AND TO LINER WITH TACK CHANNELS TACK WELDED, po O FULLY FLUSH WELD ALL WELDS 112" 115MM1 L ONG, L" EXPOSED SEAMS. 12" t 300MM) D.C. `�+ DOOR h � _ _ STANDARD DETAIL - 4.25 - 4.26 I g - 4.27 'o }- - 4.28 0 RE 3/4" (20MM1 h� LEGS Q STANDARD DETAIL 1.08 SECTION 1 i BACK COUNTER STANDARD DETAIL NO SCALE CONTINUED ON 4.01.1 SEE ALSO:1.02,1.04A,1.06,1.08,4.25, 4.01 4.26,4.27 & 4.28 LENGTH & WIDTH AS SPECIFIED G. E I(50MM1 A. D. ° o h H. B. F. �B. `- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i TYPICAL SECTION AL MA TER/AL - 14 GA. It 8MM)S/S B. ENTIRE UNIT SHALL BE ALL WELDED COVE CORNERED CONSTRUCTION WITH VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL AND INTERIOR CORNERS HAVING A 314" 120MM1 RADIUS, FULLY WELD SINK TO TOP WITHOUT OVERLAPPING JOINTS. C. TWO SIDES AND BOTTOM SHALL BE ONE CONTINUOUS PIECE WITH ENDS WELDED INTEGRAL, WITHOUT OVERLAPPING JOINTS. D. PARTITIONS BETWEEN COMPARTMENTS TO BE DOUBLE WALL CONSTRUCTION WITH 112" 05MM1 RADIUS ROUNDED TOP, ALL WELDED INTERGAL WITH SINK. E FULLY WELD SINK TO TOP WITHOUT OVERLAPPING JOINTS- L F. WASTES SHALL BE SEATED IN DIE STAMPED DEPRESSIONS WITHOUT USE OF SOLDER, RIVETS OR WELDING. INSTALLED COMPONENTS SHALL BE FLUSH WITH SURROUNDING SURFACE. G. FAUCETS - T&S MODEL B-222 WITH B-199 AERATOR, REMOVABLE MONEL SEATS AND 112" (15MM)).P.S. MALE INLETS. H. WASTES -2" (50MM)NICKEL PLATED BRONZE ROTARY HANDLE WASTE AND S/S STRAINER PLATE WITH CHROME PLATED BRASS CONNECTED OVERFLOW, ON COMPONENT HARDWARE GROUP #D50-7215 h U we b crW O a am Q STANDARD DETAIL COUNTER TOP SINKS NO SCALE 3.04 M. STANDARD DETAIL - 1.04A BACKSPLASH N. SOUND DAMPENING TO BE COMPONENT HARDWARE GROUP APPLIED TO TOP OF FRAMING O. FAUCETS - T&S MODEL B-290 REMOVABLE MONEL SEATS, 314" (20MM/N.P.T. MALE INLETS. P. WASTES - 2" (50MM)NICKEL PLATED BRONZE ROTARY HANDLE WASTE AND S/S STRAINER PLATE WITH NICKEL PLATED BRASS CONNECTED OVERFLOW, COMPONENT HARDWARE GROUP No. D50-7215 Q. OVERFL OW WASTE - 1-112" (40MMI NICKEL PL A TED BRASS OPEN DRAIN. EXTENDED THROUGH SINK BOTTOM USING GASKET AND FLANGE. R. 0VERFL OW BASKS T - 16 GA. (1.5MM)PERFORA TED S/S COVED CORNERED WI TH HEMMED EDGES, 112" (15MM1 SOLID ROD FEET AND HANDLES. S. REAR CROSSBRACING ONL Y. T. OMIT FRONT AND REAR LENGTHWISE CROSSBRACING UNDER SINKS. U. 12 GA. 12.6MMI S/S 6" X 6- (150MM X 150MMI TRIANGUL AR SUPPOR T PL A TE WEL DED TO UNDERSIDE OF S INKS. W. WIDTH AS SPECIFIED. )L WASTE - 2" (50MMI NICKLE PLATED BRASS ROTARY HANDLE WASTE AND S/S STRAINER PLATE. COMPONENT HARDWARE No. D50-7200 WITHOUT 0VERFL OW. v SINKS AND DRAINBOARDS STANDARD DETAIL NO SCALE SEE ALSO 3A1& 3A1.1 3.01 .2 6" _ (150MM/ R J S� 10 o m o o gm 1° 0 ° ° ° °; (oop o0 1 �� N G O °1/2" (15MM1 ° N ° O ° ° ° ° °0 ° °° ° o ° ° SECTION ° o ° ° \ 0 ° ° ° ° ° ° ° 0 ° ° ° ° ° o 0 5 1 o ° Q ° ° PP� S �/ ° ° CIO �(S L OVERFLOW COMPARTMENT AND BASKET E DRAINBOARDS UP TO 24" (600MM/1N LENGTH REQUIRE NO LEGS. DRAIN BOARDS OVER 30" 1750MM/REQUIRE 1' 125MM1 O.D. 16 GA. (L5MMl S/S LEGS AND CHANNEL FRAMEWORK R F• DRAINBOARDS SHALL PITCH TO SINK 1/8" (3MM/PER FOOT OF LENGTH TO PROVIDE COMPLETE DRAINING WITHOUT POOLING. THE 3" (75MM1 HIGH RAISED ROLLED RIM AT THE SINK SHALL DECREASE IN HEIGHT TOWARD THE OUTER ENDS OF THE DRAINBOARD. G. PARTITIONS BETWEEN COMPARTMENTS TO BE DOUBLE WALLED CONSTRUCTION ! WITH 112" (15MM/RADIUS ROUNDED TOP, ALL WELDED INTEGRAL WITH SINK BODY. H. BACK, BOTTOM AND FRONT SHALL BE ONE CONTINUOUS PIECE WITH ENDS WELDED INTEGRAL, WITHOUT OVERLAPPING JOINTS OR OPEN SPACES, BE T WEEN COMPAR TMEN TS I. WASTES SHALL BE SEATED IN DIE STAMPED DEPRESSIONS WITHOUT USE OF SOLDER, RIVETS OR WELDING INSTALLED COMPONENTS SHALL BE FLUSH WITH SURROUNDING SURFACE. �. EACH SINK COMPARTMENT TO BE PITCHED AND CREASED TO WASTE TO ASSURE COMPLETE DRAINING WITHOUT POOLING. K. ENTIRE UNIT SHALL BE ALL WELDED COVE CORNERED CONSTRUCTION WITH c VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL AND INTERIOR CORNERS HAVING A 314" (20MM1 RADIUS. c L. STANDARD DETAIL- 102.1 N EDGE. No I SINKS AND DMINBOARDS STANDARD DETAIL NO SCALE CONTINUED ON 3.01.2 3.01.1 ON 2-112" (65MM/MIN. DRAINBOARD 2-112" (65MM/MIN. DRAINBOARD TO HA VE BUIL F-IN PITCH TO THE TO HAVE BOIL T-IN PITCH TO THE SINKS-SEE NOTE "F" AS SPECIFIED SINKS-SEE NOTE "F" CLEAN E ND SOILED END LEVEL R. ^N K. F. LEVEL — - - F. K. B. RINSE IG•RIN�S G.�I ,` WASH N. B, o K. J. K. J. K. K. E C. cn �U. P. P. Q. X.�i S. E. Q D. D. C. T. C, C pm ELEVATION 45° W. 2" (50MM1 1-1/2" (40MM1 r M. FAUCET (0) L o I - - - - - - —1J REFL. H. v cis ) 0 tt^^ S O W O - ` _J C) ° K. I. K. h ` P. C. D. C. o TYPICAL SECTION c a A. MA TERIAL - 14 GA. (t 8MM)S/S. C. S TANOARD DE TAIL - 1.07 B. STANDARD DETAIL - L05C. D. STANDARD DETAIL - 1. 10 POT SINKS AND DRAINBOARDS STANDARD DETAIL NO SCALE CONTINUED ON 3.01.1 3.01 1 lel 14GA.(1.8MM)S5 TOP STANDARD �� DETAIL - STANDARD 2.01 DETAIL - 1.02 AS SPECIFIED LEGS FRAME STANDARD STANDARD DETAIL - DETAIL - 1.07 1.056 UNDERSHELF STANDARD DETAIL - 1.11 MOUNT (415" (125MM) JARVIS 8 JARVIS SERIES 60 HEAVY DUTY, NON-MARKING POL YURETHANE CASTERS (2) WITH TOE OPERATED SWIVEL AND TIRE LOCKS rl 4: J a 71wA a Q CIL- DIMENSIONS & HEIGHT AS SPECIFIED � STANDARD DETAIL MOBILE UTILITY TABLE NO SCALE SEE ALSO 1.02,1.05A,1.07,1.11& 2.01 2.30 30��11 is�o��8•- �5 1„ (25MM1 1" 125MMJ 5" (125MM) 16 GA. 11.5MM1 S/S 0 0 o 0 o v o o 16 (15MM1 GAUGE S/S o 0 PERFORATED 'J Q REMOVABLE SCRAP BASKET AT PRE-RINSE SINK STANDARD DETAIL 1E mill NO SCALE 2.2 O.2 i --WASTE DISPOSER OPENING ISOMETRIC VIEW SHOWS RACK SLIDE OVER PRE-RINSE SINK - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I (100MMJ ' ' 3/4"�, (2OMMl 21" (530MM) � ' If I L — 112" (15MM)DI A. S/S RODS (100MM) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - v 2 0 a 21" 1530MMJ PLAN PRE-RINSE SINK RACK SLIDE STANDARD DETAIL NO SCALE CONTINUED ON 2.20.1 2.20 13" 1" (25MM) 16 GA. 0_5MM)S/S TUBULAR CROSS RAIL (330MM) C RACK IN FULL LENGTH OF SHELF, 1" (25MM)DIA. POST TION - 16 GA. (15MM)S/S TUBULAR VERTICAL SUPPORTS \ 14 GA. (L8MM)S/S 4'-D" 11200MM) 0.C. END PANELS 14 GA. (18MM)S/S SHELF PITCH SLIGHTL Y TO DRAIN \ `° o SEE DETAIL BELOW FOR \ CUTTING BACK, FRONT & REAR EDGE AT EACH / h END. 45° 1" (25MM) WEEP HOLE S/S NIPPLE AT 1-1/2" X 4" X 1-1/2" 3" (75MM1 LOW END WITH (40MM X f00MM X 40MM) I• PLASTIC TUBE 40MM) 12 GA. (2.6MM)S/S 1" (25MM) WEEP HOLE P1/4" (32MMI 16 GA. (L5MMl S/S TUBULAR CHANNEL FRAME AT S/S NIPPLE AT UPRIGHTS CONTINUED THROUGH ENDS 4'-0" 0200MM) LOW END WITH & ATTACHED TO FRAMING O.C' PLASTIC TUBE PER STANDARD DETAIL 1.12. q, 0 TABLE & TROUGH PER D TL. 2.22 & 2.23 -:� ------------ ----- ----- - - - ----------- - --- -------- - - SECTION a � a ' PITCH SLIGHTY TO f 1-1/2" X 1-112" 140MM X 40MM) ' DRAIN. 12 GA. (2.6MM)S/S PERIMITER ANGLE FRAME. _/ r- � I 1 h ' ' 25MM CLEAR PLASTIC DRAIN TUBE EXTEND TO TABLE Cyl 15" (380MM)' , 1 AS SPECIFIED TO TABLE BELOW AT DRAIN ' �-1" (25MM) CLEAR PLASTIC DRAIN TUBE EXTEND TO o , I TABLE BELOW AND SECURE TO WALL WITH S/S ^j CLIPS AND FASTENERS. DRAIN SHALL BE AT WALL ° END IF THERE IS A WALL. AWAY FROM PRIMARY Q WORKING END. FRONT ELEVATION STANDARD DETAIL W DOUBLE—SIDED RACK SHELF NO SCAU 2.19 �S F ?• TROUGH LENGTH LESS 114" (5MM) ° ° O / �. �iQ♦ ° ° ° ° O O ° iV O� ° o 0 / 0 0 0 ° o ° O ° O ° 0 0 0 ° ?. ° O 0 �LO O C 00 / _ O 2-118" (53MM) ° ° ° ° 2"(50MM) 1/2" l- (15MM) BOTH B. ENDS ` ti \ /2O Opt TO o4r 10 spo, k� S � �PS��a A. BASKET - 16 GA. (1.5MM) PERFORATED S/S, ALL WELDED CONSTRUCT/ON (1F REQUIRED). B. WASTE - 1-1/2" (40MM) NICKEL PL A TED BRASS DRAIN - COMPONENT HA RDV✓ARE c #E 16-4 051 (IF REQUIRED) „s STANDARD DETAIL EEO 1 51 1 j WAREWASHER CONNECTION AND TABLE TROUGH No SCALE 2.03 1 AS SPECIFIED LEVEL SEE DTL. 2.03 L EVEL L J z t PITCH WORKING SURFACE Z PITCHED o 0 1/8" PER FOOT OMM PER �, ;Q) 100MM) TO WAREWASHER. 12" TROUGH 7(300MM 1( c' STANDARD DETAIL 2.03 MAX. 5'-6 (1675MM) 0.C. MAX. 5'-6" 0675MM1 0.C. FRONT ELEVATION BACKSPL ASH STANDARD DETAIL - 1.04 30" (75OMM) OR AS SPECIFIED TO SUIT 21" (530MMJ WAREWASHER DOOR (SEE STANDARD DETAIL 2.03) 1"(25MMJ 1'"(25MMJ 11/2"(40MMJ "! DECREASES �FWM 3" 175MM) EDGE STANDARD DETAIL - t 02B FRAMEWORK WHEN SPECIFIED, STANDARD DETAIL - t058 APPLY SOUND DAMPENING TOP o MASTIC IN COMPLIANCE WITH 14 GA. (L8MMJ S/S SECURED �. N.S.F. STD. 2, _ TO FRAME WITH WELDED PARA, 4.41.3 i STUDS, S/S L OCK- COMPONENT WASHERS AND S/S CAP NUTS. HARDWARE _ NO. 075-2500 LEGS STANDARD DETAIL - 1.07 UNDEPSHELF STANDARD DETAIL - 1.11 WHEN SPECIFIED TT SECTION 1 CROSSBRA CING STANDARD DETAIL - 1.10 WHEN SPECIFIED STANDARD DETAIL DISHTABLE NO SCALE SEE ALSO 1.026,1.04,1.058,1.07,1.10, 2.02 1.11,2.03 O uj - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i 1 CL li ii - - - - - - - - - - - - - - L t' AS SPECIFIED Q PER PL AN Q W V UNDERSHELF CROSSBRACING Q "A" ISLAND TABLE-UNDERSHELF "B" ISLAND TABLE-CROSSBRACING E w a � _ - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 AS SPECIFIED 1 PER PLAN a W QU Lu OcQ__i1 Q u.l UNDERSHELF CROSSBRACING Lo s Q "C" TABLE WiSPLASH-UNDERSHELF "D" TABLE WSPLASH-CROSSBRACING WORK TABLES.-TYPE STANDARD DETAIL NO SCALE SEE ALSO 1.02,1.05,1.07,1.10,1.11 2.01 .1 10" 3'-0" o (250MM1 (915MM1 po Tto - 2'-6" (760MM1 12" OR AS SPECIFIED O (300MM1 M o1 po I I ! L)i r Q n O m J LU LQ U �o LUU _ Lu Q a � I OU O Q =Lu ! W I ! I I Lu / Zi L>, QL f o c / O LU cn r Q \ Li- Z p Q \ zj Lli i jU JI U O !lam - - - - - - - Lug m O C� Q0 z ,4P ' h U co ( l 10" 3'-0" (250MM1 (915MM1 STANDARD DETAIL PREP. TABLE WITH SINKS OR NO SCALE SEE ALSO 1.02,1.05,1.07,1.10,1.11 2.01 .2 AS SPECIFIED O LL c') � U I rn � Q EQUAL EQUAL 1 MAX. 5'-6" (1675MM10.C. 1 MAX. 5'-6" (1675MM10.C. j FRONT ELEVATION AS SPECIFIED TOP 14 GA. (1.8MM1 S/S SECURED TO FRAME WITH WELDED STUDS, S/S LOCKWASHERS AND S/S CAP NUTS. I ZWHEN SPECIFIED, APPLY TFRAMEWOPK EDGE COMPONENT HARDWARE No. 075-2500 IN COMPLIANCE STANDARD DETAIL - 1.02 WITH N.S.F. STD.2, PA RA. 4.41.3 AS SPECIFIED STANDARD DETAIL 1.05B LEGS STANDARD DETAIL - 1.07 CROSSBRACING STANDARD DETAIL 1.10 WHEN SPECIFIED UNDERSHEL F STANDARD DETAIL 1. ll o WHEN SPECIFIED no C SECTION 1 .;.t WORK TABLE STANDARD DETAIL NO SCALE SEE ALSO 1.02,1 A5,1.07,1.10,1.11 2.01 t CABINET BODY 16 GA. (1.5MM1 S/S SHELF 1-1/2" X 1-1/2' X 1/8" 140MM X 40MM X 3PAM) GALVANIZED ANGLE FRAME WORK 1" X 5" X 1" 18 GA. (1.2MM) GAL V. 125MM X 125MM X 25MM1 12 GA. (2.6MM) CHANNEL FILLER LEG: STANDARD 4" DETAIL 108 (100MM) L COMPONENT HARDWARE GROUP # A76-4460 SPRING CL AMP BLACK VINYL 14 GA (1.8MM) GALV. KICK PLATE MOP BOARD W/1/2" (15MM) BREAK AT TOP W/COVED BOTTOM AND BOTTOM (S/S IF SPECIFIED) (IF S/S KICK PL ATE NOT SPECIFIED) U o w 0 a a Q CLIP ON BASE STANDARD DETAIL NO SCALE 1 .25 AS SPECIFIED '� (25MM1 (24M1 Ql `-----------------—------------------------------------ 5Q ' P � A. I � I i B. CUT CORNERS OFF AT 45* ANGL ES. L OCA TE PINS TO ` POSITION & HOLD BOARD IN ' PLACE AGAINST 45° CUT. A. 314" (20MM) THICK THERMO PLASTIC BOARD, POLY-1000 AS MFD. BY JOHN BOOS COMPANY OR EQUAL, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. B. PINS-1/4" (5MM)DIA. ROD, 114" (5MM)LONG, WELDED TO TOP. BOARD MOUNTING A r LENGTH OF BOARD a 114" (5MM) INS- Q OF 00P� C' 3- 1/2" (90MM) B. 1/4" R 3-112" (5MM R) m (90MM) 1/4" R (5MM R) A. o ' W a A. BOARD-AS SPECIFIED ABOVE. .� 4 B. 16 GA. (1.5MM) S/S CUTTING BOARD BRACKETS WELDED TO UNDERSIDE OF FIXTURE TOP WITH FRONT SET FLUSH WITH FRAME OR APRON. C. TIE TOGETHER AT BACK W/16 GA. (1.5MM) S/S X 1" (25MM) BAND BOARD HOLDER B I CUTTING BOARD STANDARD DETAIL w IOC 1.19 W A WALL SHELF & BRACKET STANDARD DETAIL 1.13 L L L LW E. (5 omm) SIDE VIEW A. I" X 1" X 2' (25MM X 25MM X 50MM) 14 GA. (t 8MM)SIS ANGLES WEL DED TO 12 GA. W SIS WA L L BRA CKE T SHEL F SUPPOR T. A L 114 (5MM)DIA. SIS BOLTS, L SIS LOCKWASHERS & SIS CAP NUTS. WELD SECTION 1 - THRU BRACKET WALL SHELF UTENSIL RACK E A. BANDS - 114- X 2- 15MM X 50MMISIS BAR. B. SPREADERS - I' (25MM)O.D. 16 GA. (1.5MM)SIS. C. UPRIGHTS - 1-518 (4 1MM)0.0. 16 GA. (t 5MM) SIS. D. HOOKS - SIS DOUBLE PRONG SNAP-OVER COMPONENT HARDWARE GROUP # J77-4401, 6- 050MM) ON CENTER E. COMPONENT HARDWARE GROUP #J79-4115 HOOKS. 6- 050MM) ON CENTER. POT AND UTENSIL RACK STANDARD DETAIL NO SCALE RE ALSO 1.18.1 a 1.13 1 .18.1 AS SPECIFIED g E. 225MM) E. A. A. h D. ad A• D, 72" (1800MM)MAX. ON (1950MM) C. ABOVE 2 SUPPORTS FL OOR TABLE MTD. SINGLE SIDE Al AS SPECIFIED 18" r (450MM) A. ' R B. E. 9" R B. (225MM) B. (225MM) E. 7'-0- o (2130MM) D, A. ABOVE D. FL OOR C. 96" (2440MM)MAX. ON 2 SUPPORTS TABLE MTD. DOUBLE SIDE B AS SPECIFIED 9" (225MM) 5" (125MM) EOUA L EOUA L •• 60" (1525MM)MAX. 60" 0525MM)MAX. E. loer A. A. 6•_6 A E. (1950MM) (SECURE TO WALL STRUCTURAL ABOVE MEMBERS WITH S/S BOLTS.) FL OOR WALL MOUNTED C AS SPECIFIED (450MM) A. B. B. B. E. A. Q) E. A. Q' 9" R 96'• MAX. 9" R (225MM) (2400MM) (225MM) 7'-0" o p, (2130MM) o CEILING ABOVE MOUNTED FL OOR D. D (SECURE TO CEILING STRUCTURAL RACKS TO BE ALL WELDED CONS TRUCTION• MEMBERS WITH S/S BOLTS-) GROUND SMOOTH AND POLISHED. POT AND UTENSIL RACKS STANDARD DETAIL +M. NO SCAT E CONTINUED ON 1.18.1 1.18 y ys, 0 i ON 2" (50MM) B. GLASS FILLERS OR A. BEVERAGE DISPENSERS WHEN SPECIFIED C. MILL WORK TOP e■ AS REQUIRED AS REQUIRED TO CENTER SPOUT OVER CENTER OF DRAINER 1-318" 5" (125MM) 1-318 ' , (35MM) (35MM) (35MM) A. 1/2" (13MM) C. A. ' B. I -------- ------------ .. -�--- 3/8" (9MM) 314" 120MM) D. ' SECTION 1 A. 18 GA. (1.2MM). S/S FULLY WELDED PAN WITH TROUGH PITCHED TO DRAIN AT !" 114" PER FOOT (2MM PER 100MM). LEVEL FLANGE TO HUG TIGHT EDGE. UNIT EMBEDDED IN SEALANT AND SECURED TO MILLWORK TOP WITH WELDED STUDS, S/S WASHERS, S/S L OCKWASHERS AND S/S CAP NUTS. B. REAR FLANGE EXTENDED, WHEN SPECIFIED, TO PROVIDE FOR MOUNTING ti GLASS FILLERS OR BEVERAGE DISPENSERS. C. MODEL J80-5107 ANTI-SPLASH DRAINER AS MFD. BY COMPONENT HARDWARE GROUP OR EQUAL. CLOSE AND WELD ENDS. 24" (610MM)MAXIMUM LENGTH. WHEN LENGTH EXCEEDS 24" (610MM)PROVIDE EQUAL LENGTH MUL TIPLE SECTIONS. a D. 1" 125MM) O.D. S/S WASTE EXTENDED TO FLOOR DRAIN. E. 1- (25MM)DIA ME TER FINGER HOL E, ONE END ONL Y, GRIND SMOG TH A ND POL I SH. ANTI-SPLASH DRAIN TROUGH STANDARD DETAIL NO SCALE (MILLWORIO 1 .17 B. 4 oll'11j4 2 X 112" (13MMI 59E .. 2 SPACE TO ATTACH INDIRECT WASTE LINE. 5" 027MM) A. 14 GA. It 8MM)S/S 112" (13MM)A. A A SI TACK WELD 314" I2OMM)MIN. -- - & SEAL WI TH Al SIL ICONS C. SEALANT i C. D. ( M) D. 5/8" I15M PARTIAL SECTION 1 SECTION 2 STANDARD END WASTE SHOWN. BOTTOM WASTE SHOWN. USE ONLY WHEN SPECIFIED A. 20 GA. S/S ANTI-SPLASH DRAINER MODEL J80-5107 AS MFD. BY COMPONENT HARDWARE GROUP CLOSE AND WELD ENDS. 24- (610MM)MAXIMUM SINGLE LENGTH. B. 1" I25MM)DIAMETER FINGER HOLE. ONE END ONL Y. GRIND SMOOTH AND POLISH. C. 16 GA. I1.2MM). S/S PAN FULL Y WELDED TO FIXTURE TOP. PITCH BOTTOM TO WASTE 114" PER FOOT I2MM PER 100MM). D. 1" (25MM) O.D. S/S INDIRECT WASTE EXTENDED TO FLOOR GRAIN STANDARD L OCA TION A T CENTER OF END OF TROUGH. NEAREST FL OOR DRAIN. WHEN ° SPECIFIED PROVIDE L OCA T10N A T 80 TOM OF TROUGH. (SECTION 21 EX TENDED a WASTE LINE NOT TO BE VISIBLE. a 1. DRAINER LENGTH AS SPECIFIED LESS 114" (5MM). WHEN LENGTH OF DRAINER EXCEEDS 24" I61OMM)PROVIDE EOUAL LENGTH MUL TIPL E UNITS. ANTI—SPLASH DRAIN TROUGH STANonW DUAIL NO SCAU 1 .16 N D. A o h C. C a ` D. oil B. E. 60' rt25MM) O'D TO MEET REOM'TS OF C SLOPED CONTROLS A VERTICAL CONTROLS B A. MOUNT THERMOSTATIC CONTROLS AND/OR SWITCHES IN PANEL AS RECOMMENDED BY MFR. WHERE APPLICABLE CONTROL PLATES SHALL BE SECURED WITH S/S COUNTERSUNK SHEET METAL SCREWS. B. PILOT LIGHTS SHALL BE MOUNTED ABOVE OR BELOW CONTROL OR SWITCH TO PROVIDE THE MOST READILY VISIBLE POSITION. PILOT LIGHTS MOUNTED TO THE SIDES IN A SERIES OF CONTROLS OR SWITCHES WILL NOT BE ACCEPTABLE. C. KNOBS, TOGGLES AND GUARDS SHALL NOT PROTRUDE BEYOND THE FIXTURE TOP EDGE.1 T SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR TO ADJUST THE DEPTH OF THE PANEL RECESS TO COMPLY WITH THIS REQUIREMENT. D. LENGTH OF RECESS SHALL A CCOMODA TE REQUIRED SERIES OF CONTROLS '7 AS SPECIFIED WHILE MAINTAINING ADEQUATE SPACING AROUND EACH CONTROL. a E. ENCLOSE CONTROLS IN 22 GA. 1.8MM)STEEL BOX. IF ENCLOSURE IS NOT PROVIDED OTHERWISE. STANDARD DETAIL CONTROL PANELS NO SCAU 1 .15 G. 2 1 1 2 L A. 125MM) CHAMFER 314" EDGE AT FRONT 1-518" C. 1-518" 120MM1 D. DRAWER STOP {- (41MM) (41MM1 1-114" (32MM) 125MM) 314" 314" 314" (20MM 45° 20MM1 120MM) (25MM1 E. H. Q o F. 1\ F. 0 B. E. J. E. E. CHANNEL • EDGE No SECTION 1 SECTION 2 125MM) + Ull E. 16 GA. 1 L 5MM) S/S AL L WEL DED- F. SLIDE AS MFD. BY COMPONENT HARDWARE, MODEL S521S26 NSF SLIDE, PITCHED 318" /FT (3MM PER 100MM) TO MAKE SELF-CLOSING " G. 18 GA. 11.2MM) S/S DRA WER ENCL OSURE. AL L WEL DED 0 a H. SEMI-RIGID FIBERGLASS SOUND DAMPENING. No a Q I. 1" X 1" 125MM X 25MM) 16 GA. (1.5MM) S/S ANGLE BRACE AT OPEN FRONT OF ENCL OSURE J. PROVIDE DIE-STAMPED 18 GA. (1.2MM1 an c1j ( S/S REMOVABLE DWR, PANS AS FOLLOWS. OVERALL DRAWER DIMENSIONS Y✓ STANDARD DETAIL DRAWERS .. NO SCALE CONTINUED ON 1.14.1 1 .14 D. 6" (150MM) TYP L WAL v�' C. A. D. 2' AS SPECIFIED I'50MM 50MM) w z 112" (15MM)R D. B. o EDGE S TA NDA RD DE TA IL A. 1.02A OR AS SPECIFIED UV D. 0 1-112 (4 OMM) SECTION THRU 0 7 SHELF & BRACKET colo A. BRACKET DETAIL A. TWO 14 GA. (1.8MM) SIS BRACKETS TO BE SUPPLIED ON SHELVES UP TO 6--0-- (1800MM)IN LENGTH. SHEL VES LONGER THAN 6'-0" (1800MM) TO HAVE ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS EQUALLY SPA CED. MAXIMUM OF 5'-0'" (1525MM) BETWEEN BRACKET EACH BRACKET DRILLED AND SECURED TO WALL WITH A MINIMUM OF TWO 114" (5MM) X 20 SIS ROUNDHEAD BOLTS AND SIS LOCKWASHERS ANCHORED WITH TOGGLES OR LEAD EXPANSION SHIELDS. VERF1Y WALL CONSTRUCTION AND PROVIDE BACKING IF REQUIRED. B. SHELF 16 GA. (t 5MM)SIS CONSTRUCTION W1 TH ALL JOIN TS WELDED, GROUND SMOOTH AND POL ISHED. SHEL VES TO HA VE STUDS WEL DED TO UNDERSIDE �J DRILL BRACKET, FASTEN WITH SIS LOCK WASHERS AND SIS CAP NUTS. C. 2 150MM) CLEAR REAR AND ENDS. 1� I,- al D. FULL Y WELD, GRIND SMOOTH AND POLISH. yfJ WALL SHELF AND SUPPORT STANDARD DETAIL NO SCALE SEE ALSO 1.02A 1 .13 Nil A. 16 GA. t 1.5MM). S/S SHELF — B. EDGE - STANDARD DETAIL - 1.02 OR AS SPECIFIED. C. 1" X 3" X 1" (25MM X 75MM X 25MM) 14 GA. (1.8MM)S/S CROSS CHANNEL. D. I- X 3'• X I" (25MM X 75MM X 25MM) 14 GA. (1.8MM) S/S LENGTHWISE CHANNEL, WHEN LENGTH W. BETWEEN SUPPORTS EXCEEDS 42" (1050MM). E. SECURE REAR LEGS A. D. PER STANDARD DETAIL - 1.12 E B. F. 1-1/4" (32MM) 0.D. 16 GA. (1.5MM)S/S REAR ' UPRIGHTS. MAXIMUM 5'-0- 0525MM) ON CENTER. ' J. G. a G. TIGHT FIT d SEAL. G• COUNTER- B• H. 1-1/4" 132MM1 0.D. 16 GA. (1.5MM)S/S STANDARD FRONT UPRIGHTS. MAXIMUM DETAIL - D. C. 5'-0" f 1525MM) ON CENTER. WELD 4.02 OR H. K, TO BOTTOM COUNTER FRAMING 4.03 AS F. AND EX TEND UP THRU SPECIFIED. G. COUNTER TOP AND LOWER 0 VERSHEL F A ND FUL L Y WELD TO UPPER AND LOWER E. OVERSHELF CROSS CHANNELS AND UNDERSIDE OF COUNTER TOP. CUT 3/4'• (20MM)DIAMETER HOLES IN SIDE OF UPRIGHTS AT TOP AND BOTTOM AS COUNTER REOUIRED FOR PASSAGE FRONT OF FLEXIBLE ELECTRIC CONDUIT. PROVIDE GROMMETS IN HOLES HEAT L AMP AS SPECIFIED. J. HEIGHT AS SPECIFIED. M. �* K. HEIGHT AS SPECIFIED. JUNCTION BOX SECURED TO TABLE FRAMING WITH 114- (5MM) `• X 20 S/S BOL TS, LOCK WASHER, AND NUTS. DELETE IF COUNTER CONTAINS AN INTEGRAL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL. M. IF COUNTER CONTAINS AN INTEGRAL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT o BREAKER PANEL, RUN WIRING LLJ C) OUT THRU SIDE OF FRONT UPRIGHT AND EXTEND TO PANEL. �. W. WIDTH AS SPECIFIED. weM DOUBLE OVERSHELF WITH HEAT LAMP STANDARD DETAIL NO SCALE SEE ALSO 1.12,1.02,4.02 & 4.03 1 .1 2,1 E. D. A. F. F, F. F. A g � F. f , DRAINBOARD = FIXTURE i I = TOP MIN. SINK H , j --- / 114'" (5MM) / MIN. FIX TUBE D E SUPPORT F A. 16 GA. (1.5MM) S/S SHELF. B. STANDARD DETAIL - 1.02 EDGE AS SPECIFIED. C. l- X 3" X 1° 125MM X 75MM X 25MM) 14 GA. (1.8MM) S/S CHANNEL. D. I" X 3" X 1- (25MM X 75MM X 25MM) 14 GA. (1.8MM)S/S L ENG THWISE CHANNEL WHEN LENGTH BETWEEN SUPPORTS EXCEEDS 42" (1050MM) E. 14 GA. (1.8MM) S/S BRACKETS FULL Y WELDED TO SUPPORT AND CHANNEL. F. 1-1/4" (32MM) 0.0. 16 GA. (1.5MM) S/S UPRIGHT. MAXIMUM 5 0" (15251vfM) ON CENTER. G. TIGHT FIT 8 SEAL. H. 1-1/2' X 1-1/2" (40MM X 40MM) 12 GA. S/S CLIPS WELDED TO REAR OF 0 SINK AT DRAINBOARD HEIGHT W/HOLE FOR BOLT TO SECURE UPRIGHT. 318" (10MM) 16 GA. 0.514M) S/S HEX HEAD BOL T, COMPONENT HARDWARE & S/S L OCK WASHER ,v W/ J58-0014 PLATED STEEL NUT. NUT WELDED IN UPRIGHT F. W. WIDTH AS SPECIFIED. NOTE:DETAIL E IS ONL Y TO BE USED WI TH DETAIL C SHELF, WHEN NO ELECTRICAL WIRING IS REQUIRED TO SHELF (MINIMUM-4 UPRIGHTS). OVERSHELVES AND SUPPORTS STANDARD DETAIL NO SCALE CONTINUED ON 1.12.1 1 .12 s I � 1 1 � / I i rr ri n n B C LEG STANDARD DETAIL - t07 L C. A, UNDERSHEL F 0 16 GA. It 5MMJ. S/S NOTCHED TO LEG o B. 120MM1 o Q h N v FUL L Y WEL D, GRIND SMOO TH AND POL I SH, WHERE VER SHEL F a INTERSECTS LEGS. a B. ON ISLAND TABLES, TURN DOWN ALL SIDES AS SHOWN IN "B" UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. M C. ON TABLES AGAINST WALLS, TURN REAR AND ENDS UP 2" 150MM)AS SHOWN IN "C" UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED UNDERSHELF STANOAM DETAIL ..d NO SCALE SEE ALSO 1.07 1 1 1-314" (45MM) 1-314" (45MM) WOOD BL OCKING WOOD BL OCKING 1-1/4" (32MM)S/S FLANGE " AND SOCKET 1-114" (32MM) S/S FLANGE AND SOCKET NO. 10 PHILLIPS HEAD - 114" (5MM)X 20" _ , (�� S/S WOOD SCREWS S/S TOGGLE BOL TS APPROPRIATE LENGTH APPROPRIA TE L ENG TH WALL WALL SAS FLANGE MOUNTED SAS FLANGE MOUNTED WITH WOOD SCREWS A WITH SAS TOGGLE BOLTS B MASONRY BOLT THRU FIXTURE CABINET WALL SIDE AND FRAMING BASE rN LEAD ANCHOR ANGLE 1-1/4" (32MM) S/S FL ANGE 1-1/4" (32MM) S/S AND SOCKET , FLANGE AND SOCKET NO. 10-24 NO. 10-24 PHILLIPS - ' HEA D S/S MA CHINE PHILLIPS HEAD jj ; SCREWS LOCK WASHERS S/S MACHINE SCREWS AND S/S CAP NUTS _ MASONRY WALL MOUNTED C CABINET BASE MOUNTED D LEG STANDARD DETAIL - 1.07 FULLY WELD, GRIND SMOOTH 89MM) " AND POL ISH m O O 1-1/4" (32MM) 0 D. 16 GA. 0.5MM). S/S CROSSBRACING STANDARD-KEIL No. 1018-0406-1283 °h W/FL ANGE W/ALLEN SET SCREW v NOTE: THIS CONSTRUCTION TO BE USED WHEN o SPECIFIED OR TO ELIMINATE REAR CROSS BRACING BETWEEN LEGS. 0 cl- USE APPROPRIA TE METHOD A, B. C OR D, TO SUPPORT LEGS TO WALL OR CABINET BASE. STANDARD DETAIL WALL SUPPORT FOR CROSSBRACING NO SCALE SEE ALSO 1.07 & 110 1 ,10.1 i� LEG - STANDARD DETAIL - 1.07 CROSSBRACING - FRONT TO BACK 8 ACROSS BACK ONL Y UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. 1-1/4" (32MM) O.D. 16 GA. (1.5MM). S/S COPED TO LEG A. 0 A. FUL L Y WEL D, GRIND SMOOTH AND POL ISH. h 0 0 a Q AI all-9 E 11 4 CROSSBMCING STANDARD DETAIL NO SCALE CONTINUED ON 1.10.1 SEE AM 1.07 1 .10 LEG STANDARD DETAIL - 1.07 NOTE: ENTIRE FINISHED STRUCTURE AND INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS ! ' TO MEET NSF REQUIREMENTS A. `- LB.FOOT . COMPONENT HARDWARE GROUP NO. A46-9934 A. FOOT SET AT MIDPOINT TO ALLOW 1" (25MM)ADJUSTMENT UP AND 1" (25MM)DOWN WITHOUT EXPOSED THREADS. B. MAXIMUM 1132" (1MM) CLEARANCE BETWEEN LEG AND FOOT. C. WHEN SPECIFIED LAG FOOT TO FLOOR WITH COUNTERSUNK S/S BOLTS. v 0 W O 2 Z FLANGE FOOT STANDARD DETAIL NO SCALE SEE ALSO 1.07 1.09 A �6 1 3/4" LEG (20MM1 COMPONENT HARDWARE NOTE: ENTIRE FINISHED GROUP A-18 SERIES STRUCTURE AND INDIVIDUAL COMPO- NENTS TO MEET NSF REQUIREMENTS MAINTAIN 6" 050MM) MINIMUM CL EAPANCE BE T WEEN FINISHED STRUCTURE 8 FLOOR .�. C D A. FULLY WELD TO FRAMEWORK CHANNEL. B. 314" (20MM1 MINIMUM CLEARANCE ALL AROUND. •. C. MAXIMUM 1132" (1MMl CLEARANCE BETWEEN LEG AND FOOT. D. FOOT SET AT MIDPOINT TO ALLOW 1" (25MM) ADJUSTMENT o UP AND 1" (25MM)DOWN. WITHOUT THREAD EXPOSURE. 0 4 � a Q COUNTER LEGS STANDARD DETAIL NO 50kLE 1.08 A B. 3/4" GUSSET 12OMM) S/S DIE-STAMPED WITH LOCKING SET SCREW COMPONENT HARDWARE GROUP A-18-0406 C. NOTE: ENTIRE FINISHED STRUCTURE AND INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS TO MEET NSF REQUIREMENTS LEG 1 518" (41MM) 0.D. 16 GA.(1.5MM). S/S D. FOOT COMPONENT HARDWARE GROUP NO. A46-9935 F. A. FULLY WELD GUSSET TO FRAMEWORK OR SINK. B. 314" 120MM)MINIMUM CLEARANCE ALL AROUND. C. SET SCREW NOT VISIBLE TO WORKING SIDE OF EQUIPMENT. D. FOOT SET AT MIDPOINT TO ALLOW 1" 125MM)A OJUS TMEN T UP AND 1" DOWN. WITHOUT THREAD EXPOSURE. E. MAXIMUM 1132" I1MM) CLEARANCE BETWEEN LEG AND FOOT. a o F. LEGS UNSUPPORTED LATERALLY BY CROSSBRACING OR UNDERSHEL VES a SHAL L BE PINNED TO FL OOP USING 114" 15MM)DIA. X 112"" (15MM)PINS + * 4 WELDED TO FOOT AND SET IN MATCHING HOLES IN THE FLOOR. NOTE: SEE SPECIAL DETAILS IF SEISMIC CONDITIONS APPLY TABLE AND SINK LEGS STANDARD DETAIL NO SME 1 .07 A. A. FULL Y WELDED CONSTRUCTION. B. SECURE TOP TO FRAMEWORK WI TH WEL DED STUDS, S/S L OCKWASHERS, AND S/S CAP NUTS. MAXIMUM 15" (380MM) ON CENTER. C. TOP ANGL E L OCA TION - ENDS, SIDES OF TOP INSER TS,- UNDER HEA V Y EOUIPMENT LEGS;INTERMEDIATES 24" (380MM) ON CENTER. �. BACK ANGLE LOCATION - ENDS, INTERMEDIATE MAXIMUM 5--6 (1650MM1 ON CENTER E. CAFETERIA FRONT ANGLE (CHANNEL)LOCATION - ENDS;INTERMEDIATES TO CORRESPOND TO PILASTERS, TRAY SLIDE BRACKETS, BREATH PROTECTORS, DISPLAY SHEL VES PANEL SPACING, MAXIMUM 4'-0" (1200MM)ON CENTER. RE: STANDARD DETAILS. 4.01 THRU 4.04. F. WORK SIDE L OCA TION - ENDS, SIDE OF OPENINGS;INTERMEDIA TES MAXIMUM 5'-6" 0650MMlON CENTER. G, BOTTOM LEG CHANNEL LOCATION - ENDS, INTERMEDIATES CORRESPOND TO FRONT PANEL SPACING;PILASTERS, SLIDE BRACKETS. MAXIMUM 5'-6" (1650MMION CENTER. J 7 s C COUNTER FRAMEWORK (CONT'D) STANDARD DETAIL NO SGQE SEE ALSO 1.06 1 .0 6.1 A. / B. C. F- - FORM STRUCTURAL CHANNEL BACK " FROM BODY AT TOP AND AS WELD 1-1/2" X 1-1/2" 140MM X 40MM) I NEEDED AND APPROPRIATE 12 GA. (2.6MM)FRAME MEMBERS 18 GA. (L2MM) S/S BODY AS NEEDED 15" (380MM)MAX. O.C. BOTTOM CHANNEL FOR LEGS r TO HAVE VERTICAL CHANNEL G. AT FRONT PER DETAIL TYPICAL VERTICAL CHANNEL AT FRONT ;/- SIDE OF BODY FORMED FROM BODY. BOX-IN CHANNEL PER NSF r BOTTOM CHANNEL 1" X 5" X ON 1" (25MM X 125MM X 25MM) 12 GA. (2.6MM) GAL VANIZED DETAIL OF FRONT VERTICAL CHANNEL FRAMING FOR STRUCTURALLY FORMED CABINET BODY q A !E. --E. C. C. 1" X 5" X 1" F. ! G / F. ! ( G 125MM X 125MM X 25MM) 12 GA. 12.6MM) GAL VANIZEO rr' 1 1 J I 1-1/2"' X 1- 112'" X 1/8" (4 0MM X 4 0MM X 3MM) BOX FRAME FOR PANEL CABINET BODY 12 GA. (2.6MM) GAL VANIZED ANGL E B gig COUNTER FRAMEWORK STANDARD DETAIL NO SCALE CONTINUED ON 1.06.1 1 .06 B E �A 12 GA.(2.6MM) GAL V. GUSSET PL A TES ENCLOSED OR 1-112° X 1-112" X 1/8- 140M11 X SEMI-ENCLOSED 40MM X 3MM) GAL V. ANGLE TABLES A r�7 E L E A F WORK TABLES 25MM X 125MM X AND 25MM) 14 GA. (1.8MM)S/S CHANNEL= DISH TABLES B A D E E --- F 1" X 5' X 1" 125MM X 125MM X 25V!I;: SINK 14 GA. (1.8MM) S/S CHANNEL DRAINBOARDS C A. FUL L Y WEL DED CONSTRUCTION. B. ANGL E L OCA TION ENDS; SIDES OF TOP INS=P TS,_ h INTERMEDIATES 24'" (600MM) ON CENTER. *R C. CHANNEL LOCATION - ENDS AND INTERMEDA -=S MAXIMUM 5'-6" (1650MM) ON CENTER .M W D. ADD CENTER CHANNEL WHEN DRAINBOARD :=NGTH EXCEEDS 4'-6" (1350MM). 0 Q E. SECURE TOP TO FRAMEWORK WITH WELDE.; STUDS, S/S LOCKWASHERS Q - AND S/S CAP NUTS. MAXIMUM 15" (380MM) G•'. CENTER. F. CLOSE CHANNEL AT FRONT ONLY. TABLE AND DRAINBOARD FRAMEWORK STANDARD DETAIL ... NO SCALE 1 .05 1" X 1" 125MM X 25MMJ 12 GA. 12.6MMJ S/S ANGLE WELD IN PLACE TO HOLD REMOVABLE PANEL 14 GA. (1.8MM)S/S SINK BA CKSPL A SH 18 GA. 11.2MM1 S/S REMOVABLE PANEL - ENCL OSE ENDS 1-t/2" X 1-1/2" X 4 RETURN PANEL S 1-112" (4OMM)A T ENDS AND (40MM X 40MM X 100MMJ BOTTOM EXCEPT AT CUT OUTS FOR PIPING. LONG 12 GA. (2.6MM1 S/S ANGLE WELDED TO BA CK OF SINK DRILL & TAP ANGLE & FASTEN W/ S/S BOL T SECTION 1 HAIRLINE JOINT STANDARD DETAIL 1.01 — CL OSE ENDS 1 CUT BOTTOM OF ENCLOSURE o, 8 ANGLES AS REQUIRED FOR PIPES 3-SECTION REMOVABLE a ENCLOSURE PANELS 0 Q a �Q ENCLOSED SINK BACKSPLASH STANDARD DETAIL NO SCALE SEE ALSO: 1.04 .O/I .1 A B ANGLE TYPE CHANNEL TYPE ELEVATION mo -` T� ° v o 87 v o BEND EACH SIDE IN 3° o ""J an (1 DOMM) INSIDE DIMENSION VERIFY RADIUS. TO BE TO FIT WALL IDENTICAL TO CORNER TO BE PROTECTED SO THA T GUARD FITS SNUGLY. SECTION 1 NOTE: MOUNT 16 GA.(1.5MM1 STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARDS ON CORNERS o IMMEDIATELY ABOVE 5'" (125MM)HIGH COVE BASE TILE WITH a SUITABLE S/S FASTENERS AND SEAL v CORNER GUARDS STANDARD DETAIL No SCALE 1 .03 IN A AS SPECIFIED. TO MA TCH ADJACENT l- 114" EDGES. 114"- 15MMl 30, A SEAL WI TH SIL ICONE p SEALANT COMPONENT HA RD VIA RE INVERTED "V" GROUP M90 SERIES NSF ROLLED RAISED OPENING J RAISED OPENING K STRAIGHT TURN DOWN L 314- R -� 1-1/2 12 0MM RI , 14 OMMJ L W U 180° ry W z 15° Zi Oo 90" � 3/4" 1/2'" 3/4" R (20MM R) SILICC' ; (20MM! (15MM) FIL L EC t JOINT TURNED DOWN M UP & ROLLED N BOXED p T C; j ,J 4 Q 1 EDGES (CONTINUED) STANDARD DEVIL NO SCALE SEE ALSO 1.02 1 .0 2.1 1-1/2" 114" 3( (4 0MM) (SMMI 180 180° C) A A Q 15° 3/4" 3/4" 112" (20MM) (20MM) (15M1 MIN. ROLLED A RAISED ROLLED B INVERTED "V" C 112" (15MM) R AT ENDS 114" 1-112" L (5MM)� (4 0MM) U112' 180° � o 20° 3/4" LEA VE ENDS (20MM1 OPEN MIN. (2 0MM) .. MIN. BULL NOSE D MARINE E FLOUR GUTTER F FULLY WELD FILLER PIECE IN PLACE, GRIND SMOOTH .�• AND POLISH TO APPEAR 60° INTEGRAL. N (75MM1 .(15MM) \ �i 112" 1 (15MM) o � a 1/2" (15MM) R A T (15MM)i�j ENDS .---- --RECIPE CARD HOLDER G UNDERSHELF H STANDARD CORNER I EDGES STANDARD DETAIL " NO SCALE CONTINUED ON 102.1 1 .02 VISIBL E SURFA CE OF HA IRL INE JOIN T JOINED FIX T URE \ 1 77 77 t 1-1/2" X 1-1/2" X 1/8 (4OMM X 4 O X 3MM) ---4a GALVANIZED IRON ANGLES WELDED TO SECTIONS OF FIXTURE. n mrl SECURE WITH S/S BOLTS, AND S/S CAP NUT 12" (300MM) O.C. ITEMS TO BE JOINED ARE TO BE DRAWN TOGETHER, LEAVING ONLY A HAIRLINE SEAM. BOLT DRAWN JOINT A GRAIN ON BOTH PIECES TO RUN IN THE SAME VISIBLE SURFACE DIRECTION. ON FIXTURES SPECIFIED WITH WELDED FIELD JOINTS, WELDS TO BE CONTINUOUS, GROUND AND POLISHED SO THAT NO EVIDENCE OF WELD IS VISIBLE WELDED BUTT JOINT B EXTERIOR HAIRLINE JOINT ps / r TYPICAL- SEAL W1 TH INTERIOR SILICONE SEALANT ull SECURE WITH S/S BOL TS, S/S LOCKWASHERS, AND S/S CAP �\ \ NUT, 12" (300MM1 0.C. 0 I ITEMS TO BE JOINED ARE TO BE DRA WN TOGE THEP, L EA V/NG ONL Y A HAIRL INE SEAM. j !RAISED CAP SEAM- KNUCKLE JOINT STANDARD DETAIL FIELD JOINTS AND ASSEMBLY NO sckf 1 .01 4.04 Cafeteria Counter Tray Slides 4.04.1 Cafeteria Counter Tray Slides 4.05 Metal Cafeteria Counter Front Paneled 4.06 Millwork Cafeteria Counter Front Paneled 4.14 Serving Shelf with Lift-Off Glass Panel 4.14.1 Serving Shelf with Lift-Off Glass Panel 4.20 Counter Mechanical Utility Cabinet 4.26 Hinged Solid Door 4.27 Hinged Louvered Doors 4.70 Refrigerated Base Cabinets 4.70.1 Refrigerated Base Cabinets 4.70.2 Refrigerated Base Cabinets 4.70.3 Refrigerated Base Cabinets - 4.70.4 Refrigerated Base Cabinets 4.71 Pull-Out Counter Compressor 4.75 Refrigerated Drawer Cabinet Base 4.80 Iced Salad&Dessert Pan 5.07 Condensate Hood 6.03 Floor Grate&Pan 6.07 Wall Mounted Hose Station 6.12 Utility Chase 6.21 Automatic Fire Protection Electric Shut Off Stationary Equipment 6.22 Automatic Fire Protection Electric Shut Off Stationary Equipment 6.23 Automatic Fire Protection Electric Shut Off Gas Equipment 7.01 Built-In Insulated Floor 7.02 Walk-In Refrigerator Light Installation 7.03 Evaporator Coil Drain "P"Trap ***END OF SECTION*** Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment wo 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-53 WA PART 5 - STANDARD DETAILS A. The following Standard Details are hereby made a part of these specifications and shall be utilized for referenced design requirements. am 1.01 Field Joints & Assembly 1.02 Edges 1.02.1 Edges no 1.03 Corner Guards 1.04 Backsplashes 1.04.1 Enclosed Backsplash 1.05 Table and Drainboard Framework 1.06 Counter Framework 1.06.1 Counter Framework 1.07 Table& Sink Legs 1.08 Counter Legs 1.09 Flange Foot 1.10 Crossbracing 1.10.1 Wall Support for Crossbracing 1.11 Undershelf 1.12 Overshelves &Supports 1.12.1 Overshelves &Supports 1.13 Wall&Shelf Support 1.14 Drawers 1.15 Control Panels - 1.16 Anti-Splash Drain Trough 1.17 Anti-Splash Drain Trough(Millwork) 1.18 Pot Racks 1.18.1 Pot Racks .. 1.19 Cutting Board 1.20 Grill Stand Cutting Boards 1.28 Removable Cutting Board 1.30 Removable Drip Trough 2.01 Worktable 2.02 Dishtable 2.03 Warewasher Connection and Table Trough 2.20 Pre-Rinse Sink Rack Slide 2.20.1 Pre-Rinse Sink Rack Slide 2.30 Mobile Utility Table 3.01 Sinks &Drainboards 3.01.1 Sinks &Drainboards 3.01.2 Sinks & Drainboards 3.04 Counter Top Sink 4.01 Back Counter 4.01.1 Back Counter 4.03 Cafeteria Counters Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-52 6" legs Stainless steel door style Stainless top Door hinged, left and right Door locks Ice Cuber,[Indercouuter NIKE. Verii#ar*C088 ICE CUBER, UNDERCOUNTER NIKECBy Vendor This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract ITEM 15 a6 hand Sink Ell BLR45/LK 2�88iLK Co 8 -8* ' HAND SINK Elkay BLR-15/LK-2088/LK-8 LK-2088-13 faucet LK-8 drain ITEM 15.07 Water Filter NMEC/W Vendor*C088 WATER FILTER NIKECBy Vendor This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract ***END OF SPEC 7ION*** Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-51 OR ITEM 1.l:2Q :Microwave Oven Panasonic N&:1.0 6A*0488' MICROWAVE OVEN Panasonic NE-1056A .ITEM 15.00 ;LOWER.LEVEL BAR *:C088' ITEM 15: 1 From Bar Counter NIKEClBy 1klrllwork *±0088 FRONT BAR COUNTER NIKEC/By Millwork This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract ITEM 15.02 Back Bar Counter NIKECIBy Millwork *0088 BACK BAR COUNTER NIKEC/By Millwork This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract ITEM 15;03 . Sink,D.rap-In Elkay BLR-ISJLKC-2088/LK-8*G088 SINK, DROP-IN Elkay BLR-15/LKC-2088/LK-8 LKC-2088-13 faucet LK-8 drain ITEM 15.64 . : Back Bar Cooler Glastender.BB60-L6-SSH(LR)*C088 .A BACK BAR COOLER Glastender BB60-L6-SSH(LR) Self-contained unit, refrigeration compartment on left Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment .. 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-50 ITEM I4 27 Exhausf Ventilator Gaylord SG-BDL '-4"X 4Z C089 EXHAUST VENTILATOR Gaylord SG-BDL 4'4" X 42" 4'-4"f long X 42"wide Two(2) 100 watt vapor-proof incandescent lights interwired to junction box Light and Fan Switch Mounted on Front Face of Ventilator Piping for Fire Protection System, Item 14.28, to be provided internally in ventilator by ventilator manufacturer 18-gauge stainless steel removable enclosure panels from top of ventilator to underside of building ceiling Manufacturer to comply with all state and local codes Manufacturer to supervise unit installation ITEM 14 ZS F1 I nguislung System Annul R1©2*"38 FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM Ansul R102 System shall provide surface plenum and duct protection for the items of cooking equipment located beneath the Ventilator, Item 14.27, in accordance with all applicable codes, ordinances, regulations,and the provisions of NFPA 17A and 96 and UL300 All system piping fittings and conduit shall be concealed where possible and, if exposed, shall be stainless or chrome-plated finish with no exposed threads System to be interwired with shunt-trip breaker and mechanical gas solenoid valve serving items of cooking equipment beneath the ventilator to provide for power and fuel shut-off in the event of system actuation Recessed remote fire pull station located per Plan at T-0" above the floor Manufacturer to comply with all state and local codes Installation, field inspection, and certification to be performed by factory authorized Ansul agency Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment ! 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-49 Im Stainless steel ends ITEM 14.24 Utility Stand wI Sink C�'aig iIS-8 3fl-D-SP*Cfl88 UTILITY STAND W/SINK Craig US-8-30-D-SP Approximately 4'6"long X 31"deep X 36"high 16"x 20"X 6"deep sink with faucet and drain Stainless steel ends Dishwasher, Item 14.24A, installed as shown ITEM 14 24A Uaader t ter War ksher .... Ho ran;LX 4flH*Cfl88 UNDERCOUNTER WAREWASHER Hobart LX40H .� Pressure regulator valve ITEM 14;25 Wallabwets Custom Fabricated *C088 WALL CABINETS Custom Fabricated 8'-0" f long X F-3" wide X 2'4" high, constructed and equipped in accordance with the Plan and Detail 1.23 Removable glass panel in doors ITEM 14;26 Ceramic Cook Top Convection Oven Wells OC<4HC�C088 CERAMIC COOK TOP CONVECTION OVEN Wells OC-41-IC " Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-48 ITEM 14.19 Dish Da1ty, lEleiited " Ores Cox Hd 531-10240*Cn88 DISH DOLLY, HEATED Cres Cor HJ-531-10-240 Perimeter bumper Verify plate size with Owner ITEM ..420-:1 .ltjdAack Iatc Rack NIKEC/By Uwher xCM8 JACKSTACK PLATE RACK NIKECBy Owner This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract ITE1wI 14.2.1 BangaetRntg Dolly -NM C/By O�vuer *Ca88 BANQUET RING DOLLY NIKECBy Owner This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract ITEM 14,22 Utility Stand wlSink Craig US4-30-D=SP*C088 UTILITY STAND W/SINK Craig US-4-30-D-SP Approximately 4'6" long X 31"deep X 36"high 16"x 20"X 6"deep sink with faucet and drain Stainless steel ends ITEM 14.23 Utility Stand CIr US-4-30-WSP*C088 UTILITY STAND Craig US-4-30-D-SP Approximately 4'-6"long X 31"deep X 36"high Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-47 ITEM 14 10 =WateriFxlter; NIKEC/By Owner *C088 WATER FILTER NIKECBy Owner This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract ITEM 14 11 Open Number *C088. ITEM 1412 Opea blaenber 88 �► ITEM 14.13 Open Number . . .. ITEM 14:14 open 111uetrber *C08$' ITEM 14.15 Opea Number *C488 ITEM 14.16 Plafmg Table: Eagle;T3G96STE*C088 PLATING TABLE Eagle T3696STE 96"long X 36"wide Casters ITEM 14.1? Dish Dolly NKEC/Ily Owner..£C088 DISH DOLLY NIKECBy Owner This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract ITEM 14;18 Glass Rack Dolly NIKECBy Owner *C088 R GLASS RACK DOLLY NIKECBy Owner This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment *• 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-46 This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract +w ITEM 14.06 R611-4 n Refrigerator .Traulsai RR.R1:2-32.11 UT*CO88 ROLL-IN REFRIGERATOR Traulsen RRI 2-32 H UT ITEM 14.07 Hard 5inc,WaIIi Muu,nted ia Eagle HSA-10-FDPST*C088 __. HAND SINK, WALL MOUNTED Eagle HSA-I 0-FDPS-T ITEM I4.t18 Folding CafrneE r�ito Sham IOOQ-UPISRlHD*C088' HOLDING CABINET Alto-Shaam 1000-UP/SR/HD Full perimeter bumper Stainless steel wire shelves ITEM 14.09 Ice Maker NIKECY$y Owner *C088 __. ICE MAKER NIKECBy Owner This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract :ITEM I4.09A Ice Bin NIKEC/By Owner *C088' ICE BIN NIKECBy Owner This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 0 l.11.12 11400-45 ITEM 14.01 UtiityStaud w1Sink 3 w. P C088 UTILITY STAND W/SINK Craig US-3-30-D-SP Approximately 30"long 21"X 21"X 10"deep sink with faucet and drain ■* ITEM 114,02 Urn Stand Crag URA -SP*C08$ ". URN STAND Craig UR-4-30-D-SP Approximately 54"long ** Stainless steel ends aw Locks ITM:1403: RefrigeratQrfreeer 'Iraulsen UR36DT*C088 REFRIGERATOR W/FREEZER ' Traulsen UR36DT Locks Flush Stainless Steel Base with 4'/Z"High Casters ITEM 14:04 Coffee Brewing System NUMC/By` mdor *C088 COFFEE BREWING SYSTEM NIKEC/By Vendor This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract ..� ITEM 14;05 Water Filter NIICEC/By Vwdor *C088 WATER FILTER NIKEC/By Vendor • Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 0 l.11.12 11400-44 PP ITEM 13..I Q Ice ream Cooler Clastender.FRB'-36::4 aP ICE-CREAM COOLER Glastender FRB-36 IT7CNi..... SodaBe,Im Ispenser Follett []150BR5A*088 an SODA&ICE DISPENSER Follett U15013R5A Beverage rail with eight(8)standard valves Air-cooled -ice maker Ice dispenser standard on right side Integral ice-water bath beverage cooling Slide-out ice maker accessory Mount in Item 13.01, per manufacturer's instructions, KEC to verify there is sufficient ventilation for proper operation of ice maker 6" legs Manufacturers installation inspection Key lock for valves Water filter kit ITEM 13.12 Ice Cubex,Undercauntu /By yenciar*C088 ICE CUBER, UNDERCOUNTER NIKECIBy Vendor This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract ITEM 14.00 PANTRY *G088 Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-43 ITEM I344 Refirrger�tor Giasteader LP6Q-Ri.S (LR�*C088 REFRIGERATOR " Glastender LP60-R1-SS (LR) .a. Stainless steel doors ITEM 13Ob Hand Sink GIasTef►der. DB-12*C0138' HAND SINK G1asTender DHSB-12 Soap dispenser Paper towel dispenser *� ITEM 13.47 Blender Station Glastealr BSA-18*CO$8 """ BLENDER STATION Glastender BSA-18 24" deep front-to-back ** ITEM 13:0$ Mender IYIIE7By Owner *C088 BLENDER NIKECBy Owner **' This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract ITEM 13,09 Ice Bin GIaSTentler CBB-36-L*C088 ICE BIN GlasTender CBB-36-L 24" deep front-to-back CP8 eight-circuit cold plate Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 0 l.11.12 11400-42 ITEM I3.a Coffee g::�aystern NIItEClBy Vendor *C088' COFFEE BREWING SYSTEM NIKECBy Vendor This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract ITEM 1 CtBy Vendor *C0$8 COFFEE DISPENSER NIKECBy Vendor This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract ITEM 13.fl3 Es ressa Machine NIKEC/By Vendor "C088 ESPRESSO MACHINE NIKECBy Vendor This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract ITEM 13 04 Refrigerated Display Case Refcan SCMB 48RP*C088 REFRIGERATED DISPLAY CASE Refcon SCMB-48R-SP 48" long X 30"deep X 42"high Flat front Contour of case to match contour of Coffee Bar Counter Item#13.01 Plastic laminate color as selected by architect Self-contained refrigerated display case Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-41 Roll Down Shutter—color to match body of unit—provide enclosure on top of unit to hide shutter Remote refrigeration system, part of Item 01.01 D Plastic laminate color as selected >[TBM i2.Q0 CASHIERS: *C088 ITEM 12.01 Cashier Ct►unter 1€IKEC!$y Qvvner 'C088. CASHIER COUNTER �+* NIKECBy Owner This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract )ITEM 12402 POS Systems: IIKECIBy Owner *C088 POS SYSTEMS *R NIKECBy Owner This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract ITEM 12.03 Condimeot stand NIKECIBy Millwork *C088 CONDIMENT STAND NIKEC/By Millwork This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract ITEM 13;00 COFFEFjJUICE BAR *C088 ITEM 13.01 Coft'e�Bar NIKECBy Millwork *C088 COFFEE BAR NIKECBy Millwork This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment ,. 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-40 System to be interwired with shunt-trip breaker and mechanical gas solenoid valve serving items of cooking equipment beneath the ventilator to provide for power and fuel shut-off in the event of system actuation Recessed remote fire pull station located per Plan at 4'-0" above the floor Manufacturer to comply with all state and local codes Installation, field inspection, and certification to be performed by factory authorized Ansul agency ITI+:l 1010 U#ity Stand�vl Viand Slnic. . >Cr mg US-x-33 p SPhC088 UTILITY STAND W/HAND SINK Craig US4-33-D-SP Stainless steel hinged door Stainless steel end 12"x 14"x 9"sink with faucet and drain ITEM 1011 Work Top Freezer Craig LB-5-33-SCF*C088 WORK TOP FREEZER Craig LB-5-33-SCF 16-gauge stainless steel top Stainless steel ends Dial thermometer Cylinder lock ITEM 11.00 BEVERAG.ES *C088 ITEM11.01 Se[f ServeCase,Refrigerated Refcon SWINDR09¢*C088 SELF SERVECASE, REFRIGERATED Refcon SWINDR096 Rear load doors Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment '" 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-39 4W T. E >10.07. Refrigerated E+qu pateat Stand Crag RBL- - 3-SC-SP*C088 REFRIGERATED EQUIPMENT STAND Craig RBL-5-33-SC-SP 5'-0" long 14-gauge stainless steel top Set of casters, 5"diameter Cylinder lock Dial thermometer ITEM<i0.08 ExhiuA Ventilate .'G I rd .GX2 BDL 11'-0"X 60" :C088! EXHAUST VENTILATOR Gaylord GX2-BDL 11'-0" X 60" 1 P-0" long X 60" wide �* Two(2)4'-0" interwired fluorescent-type light fixtures Piping for Fire Protection System, Item 10.09, to be provided internally in ventilator by ventilator manufacturer 18-gauge stainless steel removable enclosure panels from top of ventilator to underside of building ceiling Manufacturer to comply with all state and local codes Manufacturer to supervise unit installation ITEM 10.09 Fire Extinguishing System Ansul )2102*C088 FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM Ansul R102 System shall provide surface plenum and duct protection for the items of cooking .� equipment located beneath the Ventilator, Item 10.08, in accordance with all applicable codes, ordinances, regulations, and the provisions of NFPA 17A and 96 and UL300 All system piping fittings and conduit shall be concealed where possible and, if exposed, shall be stainless or chrome-plated finish with no exposed threads Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-38 ITEM 0 05 Fryer Fryrf►aster.:MJ45E1kC48..8' FRYER Frymaster MJ45 E Natural gas fired Stainless steel pot, door,cabinet, and legs Inset frypot cover Flue deflector Top connecting strip (when banking two(2)or more flyers) Set of casters, 5" diameter Flexible metal connectors 48" with quick connect couplers 0-15 minute timer(for model without basket lifts) ITEM la 05A Filter & Warmer Frymaster FM-A*"088 FILTER&WARMER Frymaster FM-A Food warmer/holding station with cord and plug "Filter Magic" system installed in battery with fryers, Item 10.05, mount on left as shown on Plan Stainless steel cabinet 5" diameter caster set Cord and plug set ITEM 10.06 GriddlO.Charbmiler Bakers Pride XX4/BG*C088 GRIDDLE/CHARBROILER Bakers Pride XX41BG Flip-up griddle plate accessory Flexible metal connectors 48" with quick connect couplers Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment !"' 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-37 Dial thermometer Cylinder lock Marble cutting board ITEM; 1.©8 Heated Open Display Servolt::D3b050-HS*CO$$ HEATED OPEN DISPLAY Servolift D36050-HS Drop-in ITEM TO.-00 Cil2T .i<: *C088 ITEM:10.01 Open Nainber *C088 ITEM:>1402 ` Heated it Display Se* lift D36150-f�S*CO$$ HEATED OPEN DISPLAY Servolift D36050-HS Drop-in ITEM 10,03 Filler pane[ Craig .STF 33*088 FILLER PANEL Craig STF-33 Approximately 16"long ITEM;10.04 Assembly Refrigerator Craig ?PT-5-33-SC*C088 ASSEMBLY REFRIGERATOR Craig PPT-5-33-SC Stainless steel ends Dial thermometer Cylinder lock Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-36 ITEM;09 03 Oi6 Sto6e Heartfi S Mks - *C088' OVEN, STONE HEARTH Woodstone WS-MS4-GG Black granite mantle Stainless steel oven tool set ITEM X19.0'# Weer Number' C1I88 ITEM 09 05 Open Number *C088 ITEM 0%06 Sneee Guard NIKEGBy Mitwork>*C088 SNEEZE GUARD NIKEC/By Millwork This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract ITEM U�.06A< Heat;Lamp Hatco GRAN 72*C088 HEAT LAMP Hatco GRH-72 Mount beneath Sneeze Guard, Item 09.06 Extend wiring through support to electrical terminal panel High wattage unit Remote infinite control with pilot light(and enclosure) ITEM 69.07 < Pizza Prep Refrigerator ! Craig PPT-5-33-SC*C088 PIZZA PREP REFRIGERATOR Craig PPT-5-33-SC Stainless steel ends Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment `" 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-35 .w .w ITEM" .0� Wock Top 2efrigeratnr ! Craig LB 5 3 SC*C088 WORK TOP REFRIGERATOR Craig LB-5-33-SC 16-gauge stainless steel top Dial thermometer Cylinder lock ITEM Q&65 Toaster > 1�IiIfECBy Owner*C088 TOASTER NIKECBy Owner This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract ITEM'08;06 Slicer NIIM.0/By wneri *088 SLICER NIKECBy Owner ' This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract ITEM a$07 Pan"rni Grill N110IX/By Owner *C088 PANINI GRILL NIKECBy Owner ` This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract ITEM09.00 PIZZA *C088 w. ITEM 09,01 Open Number *C088 ITEM 0.02 Open Number *C088 Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-34 ITEM 07406 Refrigerated Sal zd Case R1EiEiC : l? SVIl1t1R048*C08&'. REFRIGERATED SALAD CASE REFCON SWINAR048 Mirror interior ends Conan counter top (color as selected by architect) Pocket Doors ITEM:-08.00 Opeu 1�Iam:.Erer *C088' ITEMOS.OI Utlty Stand Crag US 433-D*Ct)88 UTLITY STAND Craig US-4-33-D 16-gauge stainless steel top ITEM:08.02 .:;:Hand:Sink Craig SE2033*CO$8 HAND SINK Craig SE2033 Stainless steel hinged door Stainless steel end 12"x 14"x 9" sink with faucet and drain ITEM 08.03 ` Utility Sink Craig SE2033*C08.8 UTILITY SINK Craig SE2033 Stainless steel hinged door Stainless steel end 12"x 14"x 9"sink with faucet and drain Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-33 ITEM 07400 SAIFAI)&DEIfiC088 ITEM07,fl1 Frc��►t Service Counter NIKEClBy Millwork *C088 FRONT SERVICE COUNTER NIKEC/By Millwork This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract )ITEM 07 a2 Refirig Sa[ad/Ueti)display Servoiift Easters ABG24'C REFRIG. SALAD/DELI DISPLAY Servolift Eastern ARC-24 Delete Food Protector ;ITEM 07.03 _ Hot Holdug Gatxinet A[to Shaam 7S0-CTUS*C08$ HOT HOLDING CABINET Alto Shaam 750-CTUS Casters Chrome plated wire shelves ITEM 07.04 Soup Warmer WeIIs SS-10 ULTD*C088 SOUP WARMER Wells SS-10 ULTD ITEM 07.05 Sneeze Guard NIKEC/By Millwork *C088 SNEEZE GUARD NIKEC This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract .w Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment r„ 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-32 Low-water cut-off Temperature/pressure gauges Temperature/pressure relief valve Pressure reducing valve Stainless steel body and base 6" high adjustable stainless steel legs Shock absorber Pilot light and on/off switch ITEM06.06 Chan Dislttable Custom I''abricated *C088 CLEAN DISHTABLE Custom Fabricated Y-10" long X 2'-6" wide X T-10" high, constructed and equipped in accordance with the Plan and Detail 2.02 ITEM 06,07 Three Compartment Pof<Sink Custom Fabricated xC088 THREE COMPARTMENT POT SINK Custom Fabricated POT SINK, THREE-COMPARTMENT Custom Fabricated "U" shaped 5'-0" X 8'-8" X 4'-8"f long X 2'-6" wide X T-10" high, constructed and equipped in accordance with the Plan and Detail 3.01B Provide flush sink covers, removable ITEM 06.08 SmartWall<SheI ing System Metro 8W4536*C088 SMARTWALL SHELVING SYSTEM Metro SW4536 Twelve(12)HK25C —Large hook Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 0 1.11.12 11400-31 so ITEM 06.01 '! Soiled Dishtable Custom Fabricated!*C088. SOILED DISHTABLE Custom Fabricated 5'-2"± long X 2'-6" wide X T-10" high,constructed and equipped in accordance with Plan and Detail 2.02 ITEM#16. 2 Collectarlsposei SaKtalor 30-SML*CO88 .A COLLECTOR/DISPOSER Salvajor 300-SML Integral control panel Mount in Item 06.01, as shown on plan ITEM 06Q3 Warewasber 1f3alyart AM-14TC*C088 WAREWASHER Hobart AM-14TC Corner unit Electric heat ITEM 06.04 Condensate Hood' Gaylord V02 42"X 42"*C088 CONDENSATE HOOD Gaylord V142 42" X 42" Light fixture 'ITEM'06.05 Booster Heater Hatco S-9*C088 BOOSTER HEATER Hatco S-9 Standard "Castone" tank Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 0 l.11.12 11400-30 00 Manufacturer to comply with all state and local codes on Manufacturer to supervise unit installation ITEMU515 F�re'Ex#mguishuigSy�fem Ansul 8102*C088 FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM Ansul R102 System shall provide surface plenum and duct protection for the items of cooking equipment located beneath the Ventilator, Item 05.14, in accordance with all applicable codes, ordinances, regulations, and the provisions of NFPA 17A and 96 and UL300 All system piping fittings and conduit shall be concealed where possible and, if exposed, shall be stainless or chrome-plated finish with no exposed threads System to be interwired with shunt-trip breaker and mechanical gas solenoid valve serving items of cooking equipment beneath the ventilator to provide for power and fuel shut-off in the event of system actuation Recessed remote fire pull station located per Plan at 4'-0"above the floor Manufacturer to comply with all state and local codes Installation, field inspection, and certification to be performed by factory authorized Ansul agency TI`EM fl5.I6 Kett[e,b-Gallon Market Fflrge MT6E*C088 KETTLE, 6-GALLON Market Forge MT6E Lift-off cover Stainless steel wire basket Clean-up brush ITEM 06.00 > DISWPOTWASHING *C088 Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-29 im w ITEM 05.I2 . Four tlpen Banter Range Jade Range JTRH-4-35*C48& FOUR OPEN BURNER RANGE Jade Range JTRH4-36 Four open burners with standard oven base Natural gas operation Stainless steel sides Stainless steel double high shelf Rear gas connection with regulator .. Cap and cover manifold, (left right) A. 6"casters, front two locking 48"flex hose with quick disconnect Gas pressure regulator ITEM O5 I3 Convection Oven,Stacked Jade Range IC-Z4lI-2CHCU88 CONVECTION OVEN, STACKED Jade Range JC-240-2CH Stainless steel solid doors Single manifold connection with 48"flex hose with quick disconnect ITEM OS 14 Exhaust Ventilator Gaylord GX2-BDL!i0'-Z" x 6Q"*C088 EXHAUST VENTILATOR Gaylord GX2-BDL 10'-2" x 60" 10'-2" long X 60" wide Two (2) 4'-0" interwired fluorescent-type light fixtures Piping for Fire Protection System, Item 05.15, to be provided internally in ventilator by ventilator manufacturer 18-gauge stainless steel removable enclosure panels from top of ventilator to underside of building ceiling Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-28 ITEM.OS07 Greeuskeeper IKEC/By.awaerC088 GREENSKEEPER NIKECBy Owner This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract ITEM45.08 �'�stebasket NIIfEC/By Owner' *C088 WASTEBASKET NIKECBy Owner This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract ITEM x5.09 . Bowe Stand Unit,jVlobile Vollrath 79302*C088 BOWL STAND UNIT, MOBILE Vollrath 79302 ITEW05.10 Salad.Dryer Manhardt' SD-97*C088 SALAD DRYER Manhardt SD-97 mm:05.11 SmartWall Shelving System Metro W4548*C088 SMARTWALL SHELVING SYSTEM Metro SW4548 Two (2) SR24BR— Spice rack Two(2) STP3BR— Insert pan holder Two(2) PBA-MS — Small grid shelf Twelve(12)HK-23C — Small hook Twelve(12)HK25C—Large hook Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-27 40 ITEM 5 a3A waste Iiispr ser ...... S vAiQr 150 GA 1 -OFC ARSS Q88 WASTE DISPOSER Salvajor 150-CA-12-OFC-ARSS (208/3) ARSS-2 automatic reverse control panel with mounting bracket Mount in Item 05.03,as shown on Plan 12" cone assembly with offset chute Cone cover Pre-rinse with wall bracket �* . ITEM 4S 44 �Varkta6le,bbde` Eagle:T 484;;EM*G488 WORKTABLE, MOBILE Eagle T3084SEM T-0" long X 2'-6" wide X 3'-3" high, constructed and equipped in accordance with the Plan Double overshelves Table mounted pot rack and utensil rack ITEM 05.45 Manua1.C`an: pener dlund...5-11 0$8 MANUAL CAN OPENER .. Edlund S-11 ITEM 05.46 Food Processor NIKEC/By Owner *C088 FOOD PROCESSOR NIKEC/By Owner *■ This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-26 PW ITEM#)4 OS Mop Sink NIKEClBy;d#hers *C4$8 MOP SINK NIKECBy Others Va This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract ITEMO?1:06 Aur:Door Mars>'VGA 60*C088 AIR DOOR Mars WA 60 ITEM:OS 00> .COLD PREPARATION Ct1$8' ITEM;05 41 Ha>id Siak Wall 1Vlounted Eagle HSA-10- DPS-I`'C488 HAND SINK,WALL MOUNTED Eagle HSA-10-FDPS-T )ITEM t15 02 Rcaeh-In Refrigerator Hoshizaki RH2-SSB*C08$ REACH-IN REFRIGERATOR Hoshizaki RH2-SSB Casters Combination tray/pan slides ITEM 05403 Worktable With Sinks Custom Fabricated *C088 WORKTABLE WITH SINKS Custom Fabricated "L" shape 14'-0" X 8'-6" long X 2'-6" wide X 3'-0" high, constructed and equipped in accordance with the Plan and Details 2.01 and 3.04 T&S B-113 pre-rinse ufflit with B-156 add-on faucet im Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 0 l.11.12 11400-25 "Z"base Slopped top Color: White „ ..TEM 04.#1 GE FRQD C I4 N3E3 S C088 ..� ITEM OCOI ..Ice Colter NIMCIBy Vendor. *:.CtI88 ICE CUBER NIKECBy Vendor This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract *� ITEM.04 02 Ice Bin NIKECIBy Vendor �C088 ICE BIN NIKECBy Vendor This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract ITEM 04.03 Water<Filter.< NIKECfBy.Vendor *C088 WATER FILTER NIKECBy Vendor This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract *�• ITEM 04.04 Floor Trough,: Hudson HFTS*C088 FLOOR TROUGH Hudson HFTS 30"long x 12"wide HGF removable grating(fiberglass) Stainless steel basket drain Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-24 po Jim �. ITEM 02.01 Storage She[f,Nubile Metro NK2*C088 STORAGE SHELF, MOBILE Metro NK2 Each shelf unit to consist of four (4)tiers of metroseal steel wire shelves, four(4) 63" high metroseal posts, four(4) 5"diameter polyurethane swivel casters, two(2)with brakes Shelving size as shown on Plan POP Two(2) -21"X 42" shelf units Three(3) -21"X 48" shelf units 63PK 63" high posts 5MP 5" polyurethane casters 5MPB 5" polyurethane casters with brakes Install first shelf 10"above finished floor with remaining shelves spaced equally apart KEC to verify job site requirements ITEM0102 Chemical C abin�e# Servulift Eastern 7772-M*C088 CHEMICAL CABINET Servolift Eastern 7772-M Shelf option 1 ITEM 02.03 SodaSys#em NIKEC/By Vendor <*C088 SODA SYSTEM NIKECBy Vendor This item is not in the Kitchen Equipment Contract ITEM-03.01 Locker,Two-Tier Penco Vanguard 1811 X 18"*C088 LOCKER, TWO-TIER Penco Vanguard 18" X 18" Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-23 am IT1E N 0 .02 She[viwg Uniif,Mobile Meta► Mai Q Series*G088 SHELVING UNIT, MOBILE Metro Max Q Series Each shelf unit to consist of four(4)tiers of injection molded polypropylene open grid mat shelves, four (4) 63" high posts, four(4) 5" diameter polyurethane swivel casters, two (2) with brakes and bumpers Shelving size as shown on Plan Three(3)—Q2148G 21"X 48" shelf unit,complete with frame, mat and wedge connectors Three(3)—Q2154G 21"X 54" shelf unit,complete with frame, mat and wedge connectors Two(2)—Q216OG 21"X 60" shelf unit,complete with frame,mat and wedge connectors One(1)—Q2172G 21" X 72" shelf unit,complete with frame, mat and wedge connectors Q63PE 63" high posts • 5MPX 5" polyurethane casters with bumper 5MPBX 5" polyurethane casters with brake and bumper Install first shelf 10" above finished floor with remaining shelves spaced equally apart KEC to verify job site requirements ITEM 01.03 Mobile Pan Rack Cres Cor 210-1841*C088 MOBILE PAN RACK New Age Industrial Corp., Inc. #96798 Pan stops Floor lock kit Perimeter bumper ITEM 02.00 DRY STORAGE *'Coss Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-22 W* D 07.06 1/2 +35 C 11.01 1 +35 All field piping installed as per ASHRAE standards and the sizing of the piping shall meet proper velocities as per ASHRAE standards. Insulation will be form type 25/50 smoke and fire type. Medium temperature will use '/2"thick wall and low temperature will use 1/4" thick wall. All field piping installed with plastic bushing where ever steel to copper tubing comes together on any type of hangers. Include all labor, material, equipment, tools, refrigerant,oil,and other required accessories for the complete installation of the systems as shown and specified. Interconnection of all accessories accomplished for ease of servicing. Particular attention given to oil return, refrigerant pressure drops and neatness. Placement of all exposed pipes approved prior to installation with General Contractor. Spacing of piping in accordance with ASHRAE standards and not exceeding 8'-0". Furnish manufacturer's dimensional and schematic drawings, piping, and wiring diagrams. After installation, furnish as-built diagram of refrigeration piping system. This entire assembly must be installed by a Licensed Refrigeration Contractor pre-approved by the manufacturer. Evaporator coil to be hung from non-corrosive, non-conductive rods with 4" clearance to underside of walk-in ceiling; flush mounting not acceptable KEC to verify location of remote (outdoor) Packaged Refrigeration System and interconnect with evaporator coils Approximate line run to be verified by KEC Approximate line run to be verified by KEC System shall be installed complete with all necessary components and accessories as described in Electrical and Mechanical Requirements in the General Conditions of the Foodservice Equipment Specifications Wrap drain line with heater cable and insulate; drain line cable shall be installed for continuous operation, freezer system only Parallel System: UL Listed system will be manufactured with the following standard components, solid state suction pressure control, and outlet valves, pressure relieve valve, '" liquid level indicator, oil reservoirs, oil level regulators, oil separator, oil filter, oil shut-off valves, replaceable core suction filter, replaceable core liquid drier, liquid line moisture indicator, head fan for low temperature compressors, suction, liquid and discharge manifolds, pre-wired electrical control panel with indicator lights, breakers, fuses, contractors, phase monitor, 8-circuit defrost timer, single point power connections, sentronic oil failure controls, super hoses and ball valves for each liquid and suction line leaving system and control transformer. All coils will be supplied pre-wired and pre-plumbed with liquid and suction ball valves, thermostat, solenoid valve and expansion valves. All valves will be solder-type only. Receiver must be designed for total system freon pump down capacity. Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-21 VM Air-cooled remote outdoor system UL Listed •� Package refrigeration system pre-wired and pre-piped for single point connection. All electrical and refrigeration tubing must come up inside the system directly, Rack constructed of 16-gauge formed sheet metal parts, no angle iron or channel iron frames accepted. This housing must be 450 baked enamel stucco-type (non-smooth) finish. Housing constructed to prevent any vibration noises. Air flow through the rack will pass 100% of the condenser air over all the compressors. ** Partial air flow or evaporator-cooled air systems are UNACCEPTABLE. Condenser will be a master circuited-type with " rifled tubes and lanced finned-type ten (10) fins inch maximum, maximum four(4) row thick core. A cold weather package will have the following components: temperature initiated fan cycling and fan speed controller, crankcase heaters, and head master valves on each compressor. Heated cabinet for receivers used if ambient temperature is extreme. Copeland compressors will utilize R-404a as the primary refrigerant. Low temperature systems will use R-404a refiigerant if compressor size allows. If not, R-22 refrigerant will be acceptable. Compressors and refrigeration piping will be installed in such a manner as to eliminate noise and vibration eliminators in refrigeration lines, as needed. Each compressor shall have a high-low automatic reset pressure control. All compressors over five (5) HP shall have an oil failure pressure control. Each compressor shall have all necessary breakers, wiring and controls for proper operation. Each compressor shall have .. a liquid line drier and sight glass properly sized for the compressor. Time clocks mounted and pre-wired at rack system unless noted otherwise on drawing. Capillary tubes on all controls shall be tightly wrapped and protected with silicone in a manner to eliminate excessive vibration and contact with other metals. Oil separators used on all temperature compressor return lines are connected to the top of the crankcase above the oil level. All oil return lines provided with shut-off to the packless stem type. All low temperature compressors to have accumulator. ' Bohn evaporators shall be direct expansion-type of such size and design as to effect required temperatures, humidity, and to suit the application intended. Furnished and installed in accordance with the Specifications. Evaporators used will all be UL Listed. Defrosting of all coils below 34❑ shall be electric defrost-type. .. Supplied from factory with an expansion valve, solenoid valve, and thermostat pre-wired and pre-piped with ball valves under nitrogen pressure to meet the refrigerant listed on the schedule. All base case coils must be UL Listed with expansion valve, solenoid valve, and "" thermostat pre-piped and pre-wired. System Item No. & Description HP Temp F Coil .R A 01.01A 3 -10 ELC-096 B 01.0113 i +35 RLC-092 Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-20 pa Double action vacuum/pressure heater air vent for freezer section Matching finish trim strips and enclosure panels as required to adjacent walls and ceiling Temperature alarm system Aluminum 12-gauge super floor with interior ramp and cooler floor to have aluminum tread plate overlay 3/16"thick Vinyl bumper rail on exposed exterior wall along the front side as shown on Plan, mounted at 10"and 36"above finished floor Locking bar on entrance door with emergency inside release ITEM Ill 01r Freezer Crcl Kaurak CF12KSE-T*C088 FREEZER COIL Kairak CF12K6E-T 10,500 BTU ITEM.01.01B Refrigerator Coil: Kairak RS80GIE-T*C088 REFRIGERATOR COIL Kairak RS80CIE-T 10,800 BTU ITEM 01.010 Open Nainber C088 ITEM 41.01D Refrigeration System Karak In c. MAE2-5E00088' REFRIGERATION SYSTEM Kairak Inc. MAE2-5E0 98"long x 45"wide x 50"high— 1274 lbs. 60 amps 120/208/3 R-12 refrigerant not permitted, see General Specifications for requirements Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-19 +w 4. Obtain regulatory approval for all seismic engineering details. B. If no SMACNA detail exists for a particular situation, prepare and obtain approval for a special attachment detail: 1. Detail must be prepared by an engineer licensed by the State having jurisdiction over the project and accompanied by the supporting calculations used in the design. 2. Verify that the restraint design is appropriate to the building's structural conditions and the surfaces to which the equipment will be secured. up PART 4 -ITEMIZED PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS am Each model number includes the code *C088 as a suffix. This codes is known as the Specifier Identification System. It is not to be removed by the bidders. Its purpose is to identify the specifier to the vendors providing equipment in the event it is necessary to communicate questions, clarifications, and comments, from prior to bid award through the final purchase. It is to be used on all correspondence including fax and e-mail when communicating with manufacturer representatives and factories. ITEM 01.01 Two r omp't'Walkh ll d/Frzr K ctlpak TWO COMPARTMENT WALK-IN REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER Kolpak 23'-1" X 8'-6" X 8'-6" high Two (2) compartment walk-in with 4" polyurethane insulation sized and shaped as shown on Plan (approximately 23'-1" long X 8'-6"wide X 8'-6"high) NSF No. 7 construction Ceiling roof self supporting Embossed aluminum .040 interior and exterior �w Stucco embossed white painted galvalume interior and exterior Two (2) entrance doors with view port window hinged as shown on Plan and automatic door closure Third hinge option on all doors Four(4) extra vapor-proof light fixtures 4" dial thermometer in lieu of standard digital 24" high aluminum tread plate kickplate on both sides of doors and door jambs Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment •• 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-18 1. Coordinate food service equipment startup with service-utility testing, balancing, and adjustments. Do not operate steam lines before they have been cleaned and sanitized. 2. Remove protective coverings and clean and sanitize equipment, both inside and out, and relam p equipment with inte g ral lighting. Where applicable, comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions. 3. Test each equipment item for proper operation. Repair or replace equipment that is defective in operation, including units that operate below required capacity or that operate with excessive noise or vibration. 4. Test refrigeration equipment's ability to maintain specified operating temperature under heavy-use conditions. Repair or replace equipment that does not maintain specified operating temperature. 5. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 6. Test motors and rotating equipment for proper rotation and lubricate moving parts according to manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Test water, drain, gas, steam, oil, refrigerant, and liquid-carrying components for leaks. Repair or replace leaking components. 8. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance for w• each food service equipment item. 9. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." 10. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section"Operation and Maintenance Data." 11. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least 7 days' advance notice. 3.5 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. Install equipment in these contract documents according to the "SMACNA Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Kitchen Equipment" in any State, province, or jurisdiction that has legislated this requirement as necessary for acceptance. This shall include: 1. Identifying these items on his submittal drawings, Plans, Elevations,and Sections. 2. Showing required SMACNA methods of restraint on his submittal drawings. PRO 3. Referencing the appropriate detail(s). Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment " " 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-17 ON u 5. Unexposed welded joints on undershelves of tables or counters in stainless steel construction shall be suitably coated at the factory with an approved metallic- based paint. 6. After galvanized steel members have been welded, welds and areas where galvanizing has been damaged shall have a zinc dust coating applied in conformance with U.S. Government Military Specification Number MIL-P-26915. H. Butt joints and contact joints, wherever they occur, shall be close fitting and shall not require a filler. Wherever break bends occur, they shall be free of undue extrudence and ■" shall not be flaky, scaly, or cracked in appearance; where such breaks do mar the uniform surface appearance of the material, such marks shall be removed by suitable grinding, polishing, and finishing. Wherever sheared edges occur, they shall be free of burrs, fins, �» and irregular projections and be finished to obviate danger of cutting or laceration when the hand is drawn over them. In no case shall overlapping materials be acceptable where miters or bullnosed corners occur. I. The grain of polishing shall run in the same direction on horizontal and on vertical surfaces of each item of fabricated equipment except in the case where the finish of the horizontal sections of each shall terminate in a mitered edge. Where sinks and adjacent dramboards are equipped with backsplash, the grain of polishing shall be consistent in direction throughout the length of the backsplash and sink compartment. J. Component parts, whether fabricated by the Contractor or purchased for building into the fabricated equipment, shall conform to the following. Bolts, screws, nuts, and washers shall be of steel, except where brass or stainless steel is fastened, in which case they shall be of brass or stainless steel, respectively. Where dissimilar metals are fastened, bolts, screws, nuts, and washers shall be of the higher grade metal. The spacing and extent of bolts and screws shall be such as to ensure suitable fastening and prevent buckling of the metals fastened. 3.3 CLEAN-UP A. At completion of the installation, clean up, lubricate, and adjust where necessary items of .� equipment provided and turn them over in first-class condition. 1. Where stainless steel surfaces are disturbed by the installation or fabricating 40 process, such surface shall be finished to match adjoining undisturbed surfaces. 2. At the completion of the installation work, stainless steel shall be gone over with a portable polishing machine and buffed to perfect surfaces. Painted surfaces shall be carefully gone over and retouched as required. 3.4 START-UP AND TESTING AND COMMISSIONING A. Startup Services: Engage factory-authorized service representatives to perform startup services and to demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below. Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment + * 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-16 and horizontal bracing members by welding or other approved means to eliminate buckle, warp, rattle, and wobble. Equipment not braced in a rigid manner and which is subject to rattle and wobble shall be unacceptable, and the Contractor shall add additional bracing in an approved manner to achieve acceptance. C. Suitable pipe slots shall be provided on fabricated equipment to accommodate service and utility lines and mechanical connections. These slots shall be of proper size and shall be neatly made with turned up edges around to eliminate cutting or defacing of equipment on the job. Cabinet bases shall be provided with an inner panel duct at the ends or rear of the cabinet allowing adequate space to conceal vertical piping. Such work, when performed at the job site, shall be of the same quality as similar work performed in the shop. D. Exposed surfaces shall be free from bolt and screw heads. When bolts are required, they shall be of the concealed type and be of similar composition as the metal to which they are applied. Where bolt or screw threads on the interior of fixtures are visible or may come into contact with hands or wiping cloths, they shall be capped with a stainless steel acorn nut and stainless steel lock washer. er E. Where screw threads are not visible or readily accessible, they shall be assembled with stainless steel lock washers and nuts. Wherever bolts or screws are welded to the underside of trim or tops, the reverse side of the weld shall be finished uniformly with the adjoining surfaces. Depressions at these points shall not be acceptable. F. Rivets shall not be permitted in any location. G. Welding shall be the heliarc method with welding rod of the same composition as the sheets or parts welded. Welds shall be complete, strong, and ductile with excess metal OP ground off and joints finished smooth to match adjoining surfaces. Welds shall be free of mechanical imperfections such as gas holes, pits, cracks, etc., and shall be continuously welded so that the fixtures shall appear as one piece construction. Butt welds made by spot solder and finished by grinding shall not be acceptable. 1. Spot welds shall have a maximum spacing of 3" (75mm). Tack welds shall be of at least 1/4" (6mm)length of welding material at a maximum space of 4" (100mm) from center to center. Weld spacing at the ends of the channel battens shall not exceed 2" (50mm) centers. 2. In no case shall soldering be accepted. 3. Fixtures shall be shop fabricated of one piece and shipped to the job completely assembled wherever possible. Equipment too large to transport or enter the building as one piece shall be constructed so that the field joints can be welded at the job site. 4. Exposed joints shall be ground flush with adjoining material and finished to harmonize therewith. Whenever material has been depressed by a welding operation, such depression shall be suitably hammered and peened flush with the adjoining surface and, if necessary, again ground to eliminate low spots. In all cases, the grain of rough grinding shall be removed by successive fine polishing operations. Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-15 an suction line, trap the risers at the bottom. Install piping so that refrigerant or oil cannot drain back into the coils from the suction line. K. Insulate suction and refrigerant lines with minimum 1/2" (13mm) Armstrong armaflex or equal cellular type insulation. Provide metal pipe sleeves where piping passes through a wall, ceiling, or floor. Fill space around the tubing with mastic insulating compound. Install a permanent suction line filter in each compressor suction line with pressure fitting ahead of the filter to facilitate checking of pressure drop through the filter. Fully insulate and seal penetrations through walk-in cooler or freezer structures to be vapor tight to �* prevent condensation within any light fixtures, switch boxes,junction boxes, or any other fittings. Fully seal refrigeration and drain lines and provide escutcheon plates. L. Furnish and completely install a thermostat to control the refrigeration temperatures for each individual compartment. M. Mount the condensing units on a welded steel rack containing all accessories and components necessary to form a complete condensing unit package. Provide each condensing unit with a factory mounted, pre-wired control panel/disconnect switch complete with circuit breakers, contactors,and time clocks as required. N. Furnish the refrigeration systems with a one-year refrigeration service contract, covering all parts and labor, with service available seven days per week, 24-hours per day. Provide an option for continuation of the service contract after the first year.. Warrant the refrigeration system for one year and provide the compressors with the manufacturer's extended five-year warranty. O. Furnish four (4) copies of complete remote refrigeration system control wiring and piping diagrams. Frame one (1)copy in Plexiglas and mount at compressor location or inside the refrigeration system enclosure as appropriate. P. Coordinate the equipment work with the respective work of other Sections so that electrical and mechanical components built into the equipment will conform and/or adapt to the type, materials, and characteristics of the building components. w Q. Install heated and motor-driven equipment so as to operate efficiently. Provide additional vents, guards, deflectors, and other accessories as needed at no additional cost. Note such additions or modifications on the shop drawings and bring to Architect's attention by special accompanying letter. 3.2 FABRICATION 40 A. Items of fabricated equipment shall be fabricated in the same factory and shall be similar in construction details, materials, methods, and appearance to similar types of items so "' fabricated under this contract. B. Each fabricated item of equipment shall include necessary reinforcing, bracing, and "" welding with the proper number and spacing of uprights and cross members for strength. Wherever standard sheet sizes will permit, the tops of all tables, shelves, exterior panels of cabinet type fixtures, and doors and drainboards shall be constructed of a single sheet of im metal. Except where required to be removable, flat surfaces shall be secured to vertical Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment ■. 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-14 OW PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Begin installing the equipment at the time the building is ready to receive the equipment and in accordance with the schedule. B. Provide a competent foreman or supervisor for erection of equipment and to coordinate with other trades regarding connections, installation, and inspection. Coordinate delivery schedule to ensure adequate openings in the building to receive the equipment. C. Install refrigeration work in an approved manner, using first quality fittings, controls, valves, etc. Refrigeration items shall be started up, tested, adjusted, and turned over to the Architect in first-class condition and left operating in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. D. Set equipment that rests on masonry bases level onto a bed of silicone rubber sealant. E. Seal equipment that butts to a wall or against other equipment with silicone rubber seal- ant. Set trim strips or other items requiring fasteners in a bed of silicone rubber sealant and fastened with suitable stainless steel fasteners 48" (1200mm) or less on centers. , surfaces shall be Thoroughly clean and degrease All surfaces prior to the application of sealant. F. Install and interconnect electrical controls, switches, or other units which are separately furnished for field installation in or on equipment provided, unless otherwise specified. G. Install and wire refrigeration systems in strict conformance with the manufacturers' in- structions and recommendations. Ensure that all refrigeration condensing units are ventilated properly and are accessible for repair, maintenance, and inspection. H. Hang evaporator coils per the manufacturer's recommendation at the locations as shown on the drawings. Mount units such that the drain pans are pitched to the drain lines. Hang the coils using nylon or other approved non-conductive, non-corrosive fasteners Furnish #12 gauge galvanized steel fish plates of suitable size and shape on the exterior ceiling of the walk-in to spread the weight of the coils adequately. Connect coils to the condensing unit and install to constitute a complete working system capable of maintaining the interior temperatures specified regardless of the heavy usage the walk-in units may receive. I. Furnish and install a copper or PVC drainline painted silver from each coil outlet to a point V (25mm) above the floor drain. Trap drainlines immediately above the floor drain. Provide continuous electrified heater tape for freezer drainlines, coordinate electrical requirements and wiring with electrical division. Insulate drainline after installation. J. Refrigeration tubing shall be the Type L, ACR hard drawn degreased, sealed copper and shall be installed with horizontal runs sloped V per 20 feet(1:240) toward the condensing units. Refrigerant piping shall be properly supported by adjustable hangers spaced and adjusted to the drop required. Where vertical runs of more than 5' (1500mm) occur in the Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment "a 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-13 4M f. Undercounter Freezers -23.3°C / - 10°F g. Cold Pan -17.8°C/0°F h. Work Rooms 10°C/50°F 4. Provide electrical and refrigeration components needed by the completed system and complete all refrigeration and control connections of and to said components. 5. Provide evaporator coil defrost system on all walk-in refrigerator and freezer rooms where the refrigeration systems are designed to operate at room temperature �. of less than 35°F (1.7°C). 6. Verify the requirements of and provide any or all additional refrigeration special- ty(s) or component(s) required or recommended by the manufacturer for proper �. operation under the specific operating conditions and location of each system specified. M. 7. Verify and provide manufacturer's certification(or certification by manufacturer's authorized agent) that the equipment selection hereinafter specified for each refrigeration system is properly sized and shall meet the operating requirements set forth for each system regarding maintaining specified operating temperature, hours of compressor running time, and system pressures and velocities as recommended by the equipment manufacturer(s). 8. During check-out and initial operation, verify that: a. Controls are properly adjusted. b. Condensers are equipped with an overload protector. .w C. A competent service mechanic is on site during the first eight(8) hours of operation. d. Switches, starters, and controls are identified as to function. 9. Unless otherwise specified, furnish thermometers for walk-in units mounted above the exterior entrance door with suitable length armored capillary tubes to allow the sensing bulbs to be installed in the incoming air stream to the blower coil with runs fastened to the walk-in walls to prevent it from damage. This identical requirement applies to alarm systems when specified. 2.5 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS A. Refer to Part 4 for complete itemized product specifications. .� Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-12 3. No exposed piping in or around fixtures or in other conspicuous places shall show tool marks or more than one thread at the fitting. 4. Steam operating valves on or in fabricated and purchased foodservice equipment shall be provided with composition hand wheels, which shall remain reasonably cool in service. 5. Provide suitable gas and liquid pressure-reducing valves for equipment with such components that might reasonably be expected to be affected over a period of time by adverse pressure conditions, including but not limited to dishwashers, booster heaters, coffee urns, ranges, steam boilers, etc. C. Provide and install complete refrigeration systems--charged, started, and operating properly--including, but not limited to: compressors, condensers, racks, coils, vibration eliminators, sight glasses .- (moisture indicating type), expansion valves, filters, oil separators, thermostats, defrost time clocks, all controls and control wiring, liquid line driers, piping, and refrigeration grade copper tubing with all sweat joints using Safety-Sily No. 1200 or approved equal silver solder(with as few joints as possible) Where specifications call for pre-piped lines (i.e., from a fixture to a valve compartment, etc.), provide such work in strict conformance with other sections of the specifications which set forth standards for this type of work or in conformity with the requirements of the ASHRAE Standards or local authorities, whichever is the greater. 2. Mechanically refrigerated cold pans shall have a normally closed liquid line electric solenoid valve installed before the expansion valve and wired to a silent-type toggle switch complete with an "on-off' red neon light indicator and both mounted in a terminal box on a removable access panel. This switch shall be fed by a separate control circuit and shall not to be wired into the compressor circuit so that it shall stop the flow of refrigerant to the cold pan and not turn off the compressor. The compressor shall then pump down and turn off through the action of the pressure control. 3. Each refrigeration item specification is written to provide minimum specifications and scope of work. Refrigeration equipment shall be designed and installed to maintain the following general temperatures unless otherwise specified. a. Walk-In Refrigerators 1.7°C/35°F b. Walk-In Freezers -23.3°C / - 10°F c. Reach-In Refrigerators 1.7°C /35°F d. Reach-In Freezers -23.3°C / - 10°F e. Undercounter Refrigerators 1.7°C/35°F Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment ' 100%Construction Documents 01.l 1.12 11400-11 am 10. Motors shall be of the drip-proof, splash-proof, or totally enclosed type, having a continuous duty cycle and ball bearings, except small timing motors which may have sleeve bearings. Motors shall have windings impregnated to resist moisture. *�* Motors located where subject to deposits of dust, lint, or other similar matter from the machine on which installed shall be of the totally enclosed type. Motors shall have ample power to operate the machines for which designated under full load operating conditions without exceeding their nameplate ratings. Horsepower requirements on driven equipment shall be determined by the manufacturer based on normal operation at maximum capacity. The nominal rated motor horsepower .� shall be not less than the horsepower required for normal operation of the equipment at maximum capacity. Insulation shall be NEMA Class B, or better. 11. Cover plates shall be furnished and installed for all electrical outlets, receptacles, switches, etc., to match the material and finish of the equipment to which they will be fastened. .. 12. Switches, controls, etc., shall be conspicuously labeled as to use with plastic nameplates secured to the adjacent surface as previously specified in Article 2.01- C. Submit a sample for approval if requested by Architect. 13. Where specified for custom fabricated equipment, provide compartment with electrical sub-panel which shall be pre-wired in conduit concealed in cabinet body M. construction and connected to all electrical components built into or set upon the counter. Electrical sub-panel shall be UL / ETL / CSA listed, 3-phase, 4-wire circuit breaker type with a ground buss main breaker and individual breakers for each serviced load. Buss shall be copper and the circuit breakers shall be the molded case, bolt-on type with thermomagnetic quick-make, quick-break trip. Multi-pole circuit breakers shall have an internal trip bar. The circuit breakers .A shall have an interrupting capacity of 10,000 amperes at 120 volts and there shall be a separate breaker for each connected load. Each breaker shall be sized for 125% of the connected load and a minimum of two (2) extra, single pole, 20 amp circuit breakers shall be provided. The loads shall be connected through the breakers in a phased sequence to balance the load on each phase. B. Water inlets shall be located above the positive water level wherever possible to prevent siphoning of liquids into the water supply system. Wherever conditions shall require a submerged inlet, a suitable type of check valve (except in jurisdictions where check valves are prohibited) and vacuum breaker shall be provided with the fixture to prevent siph- oning. Where exposed, piping and fittings shall be chrome-plated. Where vacuum breaker piping is through equipment, provide chrome-plated escutcheon plates to cover holes. 1. Provide and install indirect waste lines from equipment which will discharge into floor drains or safe wastes, chrome-plated where exposed. Extend to a point at least 1" (25 mm) (or as required by local or state code) above the rim of the floor drain, cut bottom on 45-degree angle and secure in position. 2. Horizontal piping lines shall be run at the highest possible elevation and not less than 6" (150 mm) above the floor, through equipment where possible. Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-10 2.4 ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Standard UL/ ETL/ CSA listed materials, devices, and components shall be selected and installed in accordance with NEMA Standards and recommendations and as required for safe and efficient use and operation of the foodservice equipment without objectionable noise, vibration, and sanitation problems. 1. Provide recognized commercial grade signals, "on-off' pushbuttons or switches, and other speed and temperature controls as required for operation of each item, complete with pilot lights and permanent engraved, plastic laminate signs and graphics identifying each item. Provide stainless steel cover plates at controls and signals. ! " 2. Each item requiring electrical power shall be equipped with either a terminal box for permanent connection or with cord and plug for interruptable connection, as indicated. Provide NEMA standard grounding type plugs, where used. 3. Furnish foodservice equipment completely wired internally using wire and conduit suitable for a wet location, including a separate grounding wire. Provide electrical outlets and receptacles required to be mounted on or in fabricated equipment and interconnect to a suitable terminal box (subpanel, starter, or disconnect switch if so specified) with all wires neatly tagged showing item number, voltage character- istics, and load information. 4. Receptacles for all wall-and floor-mounted outlets will be provided to be used for on plug-in equipment with characteristics as noted on the drawings. Provide Hubbell three-wire or four-wire grounding-type connectors and neoprene cords installed on each item of plug-in equipment to match receptacles provided. 5. Electrically heated equipment shall be internally wired to a thermostatic control and an "on-off' red neon light indicator, which shall be mounted in a terminal box on a removable stainless steel access panel. 6. Only rigid steel zinc-coated conduit shall be used, painted to match adjacent surfaces where exposed. Wiring shall be run concealed wherever possible. 7. Provide on, or for, each motor-driven appliance or electrical heating or control unit, a suitable control switch or starter of the proper type and rating. 8. Appliances shall be furnished complete with motors, driving mechanism, starters, and controllers, including but not limited to, master switches, timers, cut-outs, reversing mechanism, and other electrical equipment if and as applicable. Wiring and connection diagrams shall be furnished with electrically operated machines and for electrically wired fabricated equipment. 9. Appliances shall be of rigid construction, free from objectionable vibration. Quietness of operation of all foodservice equipment is a requirement. Remove or repair any equipment producing objectionable noise and/or vibration as directed by the Architect. Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment '"' 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-9 and washed, meeting requirements of Food and Drug Adminstration's 21 CFF,, Section 177.2600 for use in areas that come in contact with food. Dow-Corning #780 or General Electric "Silastic" or approved equal in either clear or approved color to match �* surrounding surfaces and applied in accordance with sealant manufacturers' recommendations for smooth, sealed finish. J. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select). Provide products complying with ANSI Z97.1, manufactured by horizontal (roller hearth) process .. and %4" (6 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated. Provide exposed safety edges, if any, seamed before tempering. K. Sound Dampening: NSF-certified, nonabsorbant, hard-drying, sound deadening coating. Provide coating compounded for permanent adhesion to metal in 1/8" (3 mm) thickness that does not chop, flake, or blister. 2.3 FINISHES A. Paint and coatings shall be of an NSF approved type suitable for use in conjunction with foodservice equipment. Such paint or coating shall be durable, non-toxic, non-dusting, , non-flaking, and mildew resistant; shall comply with all governing regulations; and shall be applied in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. B. Exterior, galvanized parts, exposed members of framework, and wrought steel pipe where specified to be painted shall be cleaned, properly primed with rust-inhibiting primer, degreased, and finished with two (2) coats of epoxy-based grey hammertone paint, unless otherwise specified. C. Stainless steel, where exposed, shall be polished to a #4 commercial finish. Where unexposed, finish shall be #213. The grain of polishing shall run in the same direction wherever possible. Where surfaces are disturbed by the fabricating process, such surfaces shall be finished to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. D. Galvanized shelving shall not be painted. E. Fabricated equipment shall be spray coated with plastic suitable for protecting the equipment during transport and installation. The coating shall be easily removable and shall be removed after the equipment installation is complete at the work site or, alternatively, when directed by the Architect. F. Exposed surfaces on brass, bronze, or steel shall be plated with chromium over nickel in accordance with Federal Specifications WW-P-541, Paragraph 9.5 and Table 9.4, unless otherwise specified. .. ■. Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment No 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-8 4. Face veneers shall be matched for color and grain to produce balance and - continuity of character. Mineral streaks and other discoloration, worm holes, ruptured grain, loose texture, doze, or shake will not be permitted. Face veneer leaves on each surface shall be full-length, book matched, center matched, and sequence matched. Surfaces shall be sequenced and blueprint matched. Veneers not otherwise indicated shall be plain sliced. Backing veneers for concealed surfaces shall be of a species and thickness to balance the pull of the face veneers. 5. Hardwood plywood for painted surfaces shall conform to U.S. Product Standard PS-51-71, Type I, and shall have sound birch, maple, or other approved close grain hardwood faces suitable for a paint finish. 6. Perforated hardboard shall be a tempered hardboard, 1/4" (6 nun)thick, conform- mg to Federal Specification LLL-B-810B, Type I, SIS, Finish B (primed), Design B (perforated), with ''/<" (6 mm)diameter holes spaced on V (25 mm) centers both ! " ways. 7. Plastic laminate surfaces shall be laminated with thermosetting decorative sheets of the color, pattern, and style as selected by the Architect. Horizontal surfaces shall be laminated with sheets conforming to Federal Specification L-P-508F, Style D, Type I (general purpose), Grade HP, Class 1, 1/16" (2 mm) thick, satin to finish, with rough sanded backs. Vertical surfaces shall be laminated with sheets conforming to Federal Specification L-P-598F, Style D, Type II, (vertical surface), Grade HP, Class 1, non-forming, satin finish, 1/32" (1 mm) thick or heavier. Surfacing for curved surfaces shall be laminated from sheets conforming to Federal Specification L-P-508F, Style D, Type III (post-forming), Grade HP, Class 1, satin finish. Balance sheets for backs in concealed locations shall be either reject material of the same type and thickness as the general purpose grade facing or may be .020" (0.5 mm) thick laminate backing sheets conforming to Federal Specification L-P-00508E, Style ND, Type V(backing sheet), Grade HP. 40 8. Adhesive for application of plastic laminate to wood substrates of counter tops shall be a phenolic, resorcinol, or melamine adhesive conforming to Federal so Specification MMM-A-181C and producing a waterproof bond. Adhesive for applying plastic laminate to vertical surfaces shall be either a waterproof type or a water resistant type such as a modified urea- formaldehyde resin liquid glue conforming to Federal Specification MMM-A-188C. Contact adhesive will not be acceptable. 9. Plywood for laminate assemblies shown or specified with plywood core shall be of the 5 or 7 ply construction with sanded close-grain hardwood face and back veneers, laminated with waterproof glue, in thickness shown, conforming to U.S. Product Standard PS-51-71. Particle board for plastic laminate assemblies shown or specified with particle board wood core shall conform to U.S. Products Stan- dard CS-236-66, Type 1 or 2, Grade B (45 pound density), Class 2; except where fire-retardant treatment is required, the density shall conform to the treatment requirements. 1. Sealant: ASTM C 920; type S, Grade NS, Class 25, use, NT. Provide elastomeric sealant, NSF certified for end use application indicated. Provide sealant that, when cured Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-7 B. Stainless steel sheets shall conform to American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) specification A240, Type 304 Condition A, 18-8, having a No. 4 finish. A No. 2B finish shall be acceptable on surfaces of equipment not exposed to view. Sheets shall be uniform throughout in color, finish, and appearance. C. Stainless steel tubing and pipe shall be Type 304, 18-8, having a No. 4 finish, and shall conform to either ASTM A213 if seamless or ASTM A249 if welded. D. Rolled shapes shall be of the cold-rolled type conforming to ASTM A36. E. Galvanized sheet steel shall conform to ASTM A526; where extensive forming to take .. place, conform to ASTM A527; conform to ASTM A525, coating designation G115, chemical treatment. F. Galvanized steel sheets shall be cold-rolled, stretcher leveled, bonderized, and rerolled to ensure a smooth surface. G. Castings shall be corrosion-resisting metal containing not less than 30% nickel. Castings shall be rough ground, polished, and buffed to bright luster and free from pit marks, runs, checks, burrs, and other imperfections. In lieu of corrosion- resisting metal castings, die-stamped or cast 18-8 stainless steel will be acceptable. H. Millwork materials shall be free from defects impairing strength, durability, or appearance; straight and free from warpage; and of the best grade for their particular , function. Wood shall be well seasoned and kiln dried and shall have an average moisture content of 8%, a maximum of 10%,and a minimum of 5%. 1. Plywood and other woodwork of treatable species, where so required by the code, shall be fire-retardant treated to result in a flame spread rating of 25 or less with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when tested for 30 minutes duration under ASTM E84 and shall bear the testing laboratory mark on a surface to be concealed. OW 2. Concealed softwood or hardwood lumber shall be of poplar, Douglas fir, basswood, red oak, birch, maple, beech, or other stable wood and shall be select or better grade, unselected for color and grain, surfaced four sides, square-edged, and straight. Basswood may be used where fire-retardant treated materials are required. 3. Plywood for transparent finish shall conform to U.S. Product Standard PS-51-71, Type I (fully waterproofed bond), with architectural grade face veneers of species as specified, free of all pin knots, patches, color streaks and spots, sapwood, and other defects. Plywood designated to have plywood cores shall be of either 5 ply or 7 ply construction. Plywood so designated on the drawings and plywood not otherwise shown shall have a particle board core, cross banding of veneers, and V. face and back veneers. Particle board cores shall have a 45-pound density, except where the fire retardant treatment requires cores of lesser density. Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-6 any extended warranties as normally P rovided by �individual manufacturers. Equipment including refrigeration systems both self-contained and remote shall be warrantied by the Contractor on the project for one year as indicated in the preceding sentence. The first day of the first year commences upon the issuance of a certificate of occupancy for each area. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The equipment and its component parts shall be new and unused. All items of standard manufactured equipment shall be current models at the time of delivery. Parts subject to wear, breakage, or distortion shall be accessible for adjustment, replacement, and repair. B. Means shall be provided to ensure adequate lubrication for moving parts. Oil holes,grease fittings,and filler caps shall be accessible without the use of tools. C. Plastic nameplates, to identify controls on fabricated equipment and when specified elsewhere, shall be provided of two-ply, 1/16" (2 mm), rigid plastic material which shall be 90 specifically manufactured for engraving such nameplates. The finished nameplate shall be machine engraved with white letters on a black background and shall have edges beveled at a 45° angle. Nameplates shall be attached using an adhesive recommended by the manufacturer of the engraved material. D. The design of the equipment shall be such as to provide for safe and convenient operation. Covers or other safety devices shall be provided for all items of equipment presenting safety hazards. Such guards or safety devices shall not present substantial interference to the operation of the equipment. Guards shall provide easy access to guarded parts. E. Trim shall not be an acceptable substitute for accuracy and neatness. When trim is required and accepted by Architect in lieu of rejection of items of equipment, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide same at no additional cost. F. Unless otherwise specified herein, no material lighter than #20 gauge shall be incorporated into the work. Gauges for sheet iron and sheet steel shall be U.S. Standard Gauges and finished equipment gauge thickness shall not vary more than 5% plus or minus from the thickness indicated below. GAUGE THICKNESS GAUGE THICKNESS #10 0.1406"(3.0mm) #16 0.0625"(1.6mm) #12 0.1094"(2.5mm) #18 0.0500"(1.25mm) #14 0.0781"(2.0mm) #20 0.0375"(1.Omm) G. Materials or work described in words which have a well-known and accepted technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such accepted meanings. 2.2 MATERIALS _ A. Submit a certified copy of the mill analysis of materials if requested by the Architect. Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment !'" 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-5 4. AGA / CGA: All gas-fired equipment shall be AGA / CGA approved, equipped to operate on the type gas available at the job site, and shall contain 100% automatic safety shut-off devices. 5. NFPA Standards: Comply with NFPA Bulletin 96 for exhaust systems; with NFPA Bulletins 13, 17, 17A and 96 for fire extinguishing systems; and with +•• NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas Code and NFPA 70,National Electrical Code. 6. ASME Code: Comply with ASME boiler code requirements for steam-generating and steam-heated equipment; provide ASME inspection, stamps, and certification of registration with National Board. 7. SMACNA Guidelines: Provide seismic restraints for food service equipment to comply with the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association's (SMACNA) "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines", appendix 1, "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Kitchen Equipment", unless otherwise indicated. 8. ASHRAE: Provide mechanical refrigeration systems complying with the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers' ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration". 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Visit the job site to field check actual wall dimensions and roughing-in and be responsible for furnishing, fabricating, and installing the equipment in accordance with the available space and utility services as they exist on the job site for an accurate fit. .o B. Check all door openings, passageways, elevators, etc., to be sure that the equipment can be conveyed to its proper location within the building and, if necessary, check with the Contractor regarding the possibility of holding wall erection, placement of doorjambs, windows, etc., for the purpose of moving the equipment to its proper location. Any removal and rebuilding of walls, partitions, doorjambs, etc., necessary to place the equipment or, if caused by incorrect information on the Contractor's drawings, shall be done at the expense of the Contractor. C. Physically check the location and utility size of all "rough-ins" at the job site for compatibility with the equipment being installed before finished floors, walls, and/or ceilings are in place. D. Check electrical characteristics and water, steam, and gas pressure. Provide pressure- regulating valves where required for proper operation of equipment. 1.7 GUARANTIES AND WARRANTIES A. Self-contained or remote refrigeration systems furnished under this Contract shall be provided with start-up and a one-year service contract providing free service, 24 hours per day, seven days per week, including parts and labor. Hermetic or semi-hermetic compres- sors shall be covered by the manufacturers' factory warranty for an additional four years. �• Other equipment provided shall include a one-year warranty covering parts and labor, plus Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 114004 E. Product Options: Drawings indicate foodservice equipment based upon equipment r specified herein. All substitutions shall be in compliance with the requirements in Division 1 (or Section I if appropriate.). F. Conflict: Where written specifications and drawings conflict or appear to conflict, request clarification. Prior to receiving clarification use the greater quality or greater quantity. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING PRO A. Deliver foodservice equipment in containers designed to protect equipment and finish until final installation. Make arrangements to receive equipment at project site at a time and place agreed with the General Contractor. If the site is not ready for delivery, then either delay delivery or arrange to hold in a secure and protected warehouse until delivery can be made to job site. B. Store foodservice equipment in original containers and in location to provide adequate protection to equipment while not interfering with other construction operations. Coordinate with other trades so that worktables, serving counters and equipment are not +! used for scaffolding or as workbenches. C. Handle foodservice equipment carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. Do not install damaged foodservice equipment; replace and return damaged components to equipment manufacturer. 1.5 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Except as otherwise indicated, each item of equipment shall comply with the latest current edition of the following standards as applicable to the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of the work in this section. Comply with all Federal, State, and Municipal regulations and notifications which bear on the execution of this work. Call to the attention of the Owner in writing any design conflict with the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) during Bid Process so resolution can be effected prior to Contract Award. 1. NSF Standards: Comply with applicable National Sanitation Foundation stan- dards and criteria and provide NSF "Seal of Approval" on each manufactured item and on major items of custom-fabricated work. 2. UL / ETL / CSA Standards: For electrical components and assemblies, provide either UL / ETL / CSA listed products or, where no listing service is available, provide a complete index of the components used as selected from the UL/ ETL/ CSA "Recognized Component Index." For fire extinguishing systems comply with UL 300. 3. ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable ANSI standards for electric-powered and gas-burning equipment; for piping to compressed-gas cylinders; and for plumbing fittings, including vacuum breakers and air gaps, to prevent siphonage in water piping. Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment +o 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-3 B. Manufacturers' Data: Upon award of Contract, submit bound copies of Manufacturers' Illustrations and Technical Data to the Architect for review prior to procurement. Items of Standard Manufacture shall be submitted, including items purchased to be built into fabricated equipment. Each illustration shall be marked to describe accurately the item to be furnished as specified, including voltage, phase, load, accessories, etc. C. Manufacturers' List: Submit in writing a list of all manufacturers' representatives of the foodservice equipment, such as convection ovens, ranges, etc., and their authorized service agencies'addresses and telephone numbers. ! D. Foundation Data: Data and drawings shall be submitted for each item, if any, requiring special foundations, structures, or supports. Such foundations, structures, or supports will be provided and installed by other appropriate trades in accordance with the drawings and specifications which shall be provided by the Contractor and reviewed by the Architect. E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Provide three bound copies of operation, mainte- nance, and parts manuals for all equipment items of standard manufacture including standard component assemblies built into all custom-fabricated items. F. Review by the Architect of the drawings and brochures submitted by the Contractor does not waive the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish each item of equipment in complete compliance with the specifications and contract drawings. G. The number of copies of all submittals shall be as determined by the Architect. H. Samples: Samples of materials, products, and fabrication methods shall be submitted for review at no additional cost, before proceeding with the work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard Products: Materials, products, and equipment furnished under this contract shall be the standard items of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such materials, products, and equipment and shall be of the manufacturers' latest design that complies with the specifications. ' B. Manufacturers' Qualifications: Manufacturers shall be regularly engaged in the production of the items furnished and shall have demonstrated the capability to furnish similar equipment that performs the functions specified or indicated herein. C. Installation Qualifications: Contractor shall use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work defined in this Section. WM D. Coordination of Work: Coordinate work with the respective trades performing preparatory work for installation of equipment under this Contract, including, but not limited to: construction of pits, trenches, receptors; rough-in of supply, waste and vent piping; elec- trical connections; and field verification of dimensions. Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-2 SECTION 11400 -FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. The work referred to in this section consists of furnishing all labor and material required to provide and deliver all equipment hereinafter specified into the building,uncrate,assemble, I ' hang, set in place, level, and completely install, exclusive of final utility connections. B. Coordinate but do not install (unless specifically directed to do so in the technical specifications) Owner and Vendor-supplied equipment noted on the drawings or in the specifications as NIKEC. Show on roughing in plans the sizes, utilities, and other requirements as furnished in the Specifications, by Owner or appropriate supplier in submittals as if the equipment is contractor furnished. C. Coordinate and show sizes, utilities, and other requirements as determined by physical inspection for equipment noted as existing to be reused. Include costs for marking, removing, storing, cleaning, redelivering and installing such equipment. All requirements within the project manual apply to reused equipment except warranty as if contractor furnished including but not limited to code compliance and accessories necessary to conform with the new application. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Upon award of Contract, furnish the Architect with reproducible copies of the following an drawings, in accordance with the approved project schedule, which shall be made on sheets equal in size and matching the bid set drawing size. Reproduced copies of bid documents will not be accepted for this purpose in any fashion. on 1. Equipment specified for fabrication shall be detailed and fully dimensioned to a minimum scale of 3/4" = P-0" (1:20) for plan and elevation views and 1-1/2" _ F-0" (1:10)for sections. 2. Prepare separate electrical and mechanical dimensioned rough-in drawings at 1/4" = F-0" ( 1:50 )showing exact point of penetration of floors,walls, and ceilings for all services required to operate the equipment that the Contractor shall furnish, including the requirements for Contractor supplied and installed refrigerant and beverage piping line runs. These drawings shall also show exact locations of final connections to equipment. Indicate floor drains, floor sinks, receptacles, lights, and other special conditions related to the equipment known to the Contractor but provided under other Sections. 3. Dimensioned drawings shall be submitted showing the location and size of all bases, depressions, grease interceptors, special height walls, openings in walls for equipment or operations, and critical dimensions, etc. Drawings shall be drawn to a scale of not less than 1/4" = F-0" (1:50). Smith Campus Center Foodservice Equipment 100%Construction Documents 01.11.12 11400-1 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Rite-Hite Products Corporation; 8900 North Arbon Drive, Milwaukee, WI 53223; ' phone 414.355.2600 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS B. Hydraulic Dock Leveler 1. Model HD-17106 STL,nominal dimensions 10'x6',or approved equal. C. Dock Bumpers: Two 4"thick x 15"wide x 12"high tire fabric bumpers D. Levelers shall be equipped with non-adjustable emergency stop velocity safety system for both ramp and lip to limit free fall to 3". E. Factory installed flexible, easily replaced weather seals to be two-piece system consisting of a steel section welded to leveler, or curb angle, and an independent flexible section fitting inside steel. F. Levelers shall have hydraulic cylinders for both the ramp and the lip. The main cylinder shall be inverted, directly opposing the platform, average operating pressure shall be 225-250 psi. G. Automatic night locks to be integral part of manufacturer's standard dock levelers. .. H. Levelers shall have ramp flex of 4" to compensate for unlevel trailer beds. Rear hinges shall be fixed and shall not raise above floor level. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Contractor shall verify the concrete dock where the dock leveler is to be installed and notify Architect of any conditions detrimental to the proper installation and functionality of the dock leveler. Do not proceed with the work until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 Shim dock levelers as necessary; weld into pit. 3.3 Adjust units to operate smoothly. .. 3.4 Carefully review Clearing work required adjacent to existing structures and subgrade foundations. MW END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Dock Equipment 100% Construction Document: 01.11.12 11160 -2 go SECTION 11160 DOCK EQUIPMENT !" PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section shall be governed by the Contract Documents. Provide material, labor, equipment and services necessary to furnish and deliver all Work of this Section as shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and/or as required by job conditions. B. The work shall include but is not limited to the following: 1. Providing and installing Hydraulic Dock Leveler 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 03300-Concrete B. Section 16100-Electrical 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under the provisions outlined in Division 1. B. Submit for approval shop drawings showing pit dimensions (length, width and depth) and anchorage of curb angle and embedded plates. C. Submit manufacturer's owner's manual, maintenance manual and master service manual. D. Provide manufacturer's maintenance videotape. E. Submit the following written warranties: 1. Ten year moneyback structural warranty including the following parts: Slider Lip Assembly, Front Hinge Assembly, Front Hinge and Hinge Pins, Rear Hinge and Hinge Pins, Subframe Assembly, Platform Assembly, and Working Range Toeguards based on the following criteria: Gross weight of fork lift and load shall not exceed 12,000 lbs. 2. Five year parts warranty for Main Lifting Cylinder, Hydraulic Hoses and Fittings, Lip Cylinder, Safety Stop Fuse, Hydraulic Pump and Motor, and Hydraulic Fluid. 3. One Year parts and labor warranty for all parts not covered by either the Ten or Five year warranties. PART 2 PRODUCTS Smith Campus Center Dock Equipment 100% Construction Document: 01.11.12 11160 - 1 B. Provide protections for installed units so that they will be in satisfactory operating condition, without damage at completion of project. END OF SECTION FM 4W p Smith Campus Center Projection Screens 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 11132-3 I. Screen sizes shall be the following as indicated on drawings: a. 9'-0" x 12'-0". b. 70" x 70". D. Screen Fabric: Manufacturer's standard, flame and mildew-resistant fabric, glass beaded with chemical coating and 2" black masking borders. • E. Products: "Signature/Series V" with Low Voltage Control manufactured by Draper Screen Co. 2.2 MANUALLY OPERATED FRONT PROJECTION SCREENS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard units consisting of case, screen, mounting accessories and other components as required for a complete installation and , complying with descriptive requirements indicated below. 1. Screen Case: "U" shaped design fabricated from extruded aluminum with steel end caps containing integral mounting brackets. 2. Screen: As indicated below, with top edge mounted on, and securely anchored to, a 3-inch-diameter rigid steel spring roller and bottom edge formed into a pocket holding a tubular metal slat with ends of slat protected by plastic caps and saddle and pull attached to slat by screws. a. Material: Vinyl-coated glass fiber fabric. b. Size of Viewing Surface: 70"x 70". C. Finish of Viewing Surface: Matte white. 3. Provide extra drop length of dimension indicated to comply with the following requirements for fabric color and location of drop length: a. Color: Black. b. Location: At top of screen. B. Product: Raven Model 210A manufactured by Raven Screens. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where projection screens are to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install projection screen units and accessories at locations shown in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install level, plumb, secure and at proper height. Coordinate with other trades for securing projection screen units to finished surfaces. Repair or replace damaged units as directed by the Architect. Smith Campus Center Projection Screens 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 11132-2 SECTION 11132 PROJECTION SCREENS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the projection screens as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Wood backing and trim for recessed screen installation - Section 06200. ion B. Electrical wiring, connections, and installation of remote control switches for electrically operated projection screens - Division 16. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide each type of projection screen as a complete unit produced by a single manufacturer, including necessary mounting brackets, accessories, fittings and fastenings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of projection screen unit. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE& HANDLING A. Do not deliver projection screens until building is enclosed and ready for screen installation. Protect screens from damage during delivery, handling, storage and installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED,REMOTE CONTROL SCREENS A. Provide units for recessed ceiling mounting completely housed in a metal-lined wood case, listed by UL and bearing re-examination markers of UL. Mount top of screen fabric to metal roller with roller supported on brackets with self-aligning bearings. B. Screen Case: Fabricate wood case with metal lined motor compartment, hinged or removable access panel to motor compartment, electrical outlet box, and finished with manufacturer's standard primer coat. C. Motor Units: Size and capacity recommended by the screen manufacturer. Use instant reversing, gear drive motor with permanently lubricated ball bearings, automatic thermal overload protection, and pre-set limit switches to automatically stop screen in "up" and "down" and "stop" in a box with cover plate for flush wall mounting. Stop action to be positive to prevent coasting. to Smith Campus Center Projection Screens 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 11132-1 7 7 7 7 3 7 3 3 3 7 1 7 7 7 7 7 i 1 E 1 1 B C i t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories at locations indicated on the drawings, using skilled mechanics, in a "" plum, level and secure manner. B. Concealed anchor assemblies for gypsum drywall partitions shall be securely anchored to metal studs to accommodate accessories. Assemblies shall consist of plates and/or angles tack welded to studs. C. Secure accessories in place, at their designated locations by means of theftproof concealed set screws, so as to render removing of the accessory with a screwdriver impossible. D. Unless otherwise indicated, accessories shall conform to heights from the finished floor as shown on the drawings. Where locations are not indicated, such locations shall be as directed by the Architect. E. Installed accessories shall operate quietly and smoothly for use intended. Doors and operating hardware shall function without binding or unnecessary friction. Dispenser type accessories shall be keyed alike. Prior to final acceptance, master key and one duplicate key shall be given to Owner's authorized agent. ' F. The Architect shall be the sole judge of workmanship. Workmanship shall be of the highest quality. Open joints, weld marks,poor connections, etc., will not be permitted. The Architect has the right to reject any accessory if he feels the workmanship is below the standards of this project. G. Grab bars shall be installed so that they can support a three hundred (300) lb. load for five minutes per ASTM F446. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION so A. Upon completion of the installation, clean accessories of dirt,paint and foreign matter. B. During the installation of accessories and until finally installed and accepted, protect accessories with gummed canvas or other means in order to maintain the accessories in acceptable condition. C. Replace and/or repair installed work which is damaged or defective to the Owner's satisfaction, at no additional cost. END OF SECTION .. Smith Campus Center Toilet Accessories 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 10800-4 2.4 MANUFACTURERS ! ! A. Provide products manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment Co., unless otherwise noted. 2.5 ACCESSORY SCHEDULE A. Unless otherwise noted, model numbers used herein are those of Bobrick. Other manufacturer's as listed herein may substitute their products with the approval of the Architect. B. Accessories 1. Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle, Semi-Recessed: Bobrick Model # B-396034; One(1)per Toilet Room. 2. Toilet Tissue Dispenser (TA-1): Bobrick Model # B-2740; One (1) per Water Closet. 3. Soap Dispenser: Bobrick Model # B-822; One (1) per Lavatory, polished chrome finish. 4. Grab Bar(TA-4): Bobrick Model#B-550; Two(2)per ADA Water Closet. 5. Sanitary Napkin Vendor: Bobrick Model # B-3500; One (1) per Women's Toilet Room. 6. Sanitary Disposal: Rubbermaid Model # 6140; One (1) per Women's Water Closet. 7. Utility Shelf with mop holders and rag hooks: B239 x 36; One (1) per Janitor's Closet. 8. Diaper Changing Station, Surface-Mounted: Bobrick Model#B-2200; One(1)per ADA Water Closet,Not to exceed(1)per Toilet Room. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where toilet accessories are to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Accessories which are to be partition mounted shall be closely coordinated with other trades, so that the necessary reinforcing is provided to receive the accessories. B. Furnish templates and setting drawings and anchor plates required for the proper installation of the accessories at gypsum drywall and masonry partitions. Coordinate the work to assure that base plates and anchoring frames are in the proper position to secure the accessories. C. Verify by measurements taken at the job site those dimensions affecting the work. Bring field dimensions which are at variance with those on the approved shop drawings to the attention of the Architect. Obtain decision regarding corrective measures before the start of fabrication of items affected. D. Cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections so as not to delay job progress. Smith Campus Center Toilet Accessories 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 10800-3 we .m 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver accessories to the site ready for use in the manufacturer's original and unopened containers and packaging, bearing labels as to type or material, manufacturer's name and brand name. Delivered materials shall be identical to approved samples. .� PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish, 22 gauge minimum, unless otherwise indicated. B. Brass: Leaded and unleaded, flat products, FS QQ-B-613; Rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges, FS QQ-B-626. �. C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A527, G60. D. Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on base metal, ASTM B456, Type SC 2. E. Mirror Glass: FS DD-G451, Type I, Class 1, Quality ql, 1/4" thick, with silver coating, copper protective coating, and non-metallic paint coating complying with FS DD-M-411. 1. Mirror Fasteners: a. Bottom Support: Continuous stainless steel unequal leg channel. b. Top Support: Stainless steel or chrome plated clips, with fasteners not exposed to view. 2.2 FASTENING DEVICES A. Exposed Fasteners: Theftproof type, chrome plated, or stainless steel; match finishes on which they are being used. B. Concealed Fasteners: Galvanized(ASTM A386)or cadmium plated. C. No exposed fastening devices permitted on exposed frames. D. For metal stud drywall partitions, provide ten (10) gauge galvanized sheet concealed anchor plates for securing surface mounted accessories. 2.3 FABRICATION ., A. General: Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of toilet accessory units are not permitted. Unobtrusive labels on surfaces not exposed to view are acceptable. Where locks are required for a particular type of toilet accessory, provide same keying throughout project. Furnish two keys for each lock. B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous stainless ' steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage. C. Recessed Toilet Accessories, General: Fabricate units of all welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors of access panels with full-length stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage which is fully concealed when unit is closed. w� Smith Campus Center Toilet Accessories 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 10800-2 "�" SECTION 10800 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. PIN 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to PM complete the toilet accessories as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but not limited to,the following: 1. Paper towel dispensers. 2. Toilet tissue dispenser. 3. Waste receptacles. 4. Grab bars. 5. Sanitary napkin. 6. Sanitary disposal. 7. Soap dish. 8. Mirrors. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Masonry-Section 04200. B. Gypsum board partitions-Section 09250. C. Ceramic tile-Section 09310. D. Toilet partitions -Section 10160. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete or built into masonry; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. B. Accessory Locations: Coordinate accessory locations with other work to avoid interference and to assure proper operation and servicing of accessory units. Height of accessories shall be installed in compliance with prevailing Handicap Code. C. Products: Unless otherwise noted, provide products of same manufacturer for each type of unit and for units exposed in same areas. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data, catalogue cuts and installation instructions for each toilet accessory. ON B. Setting Drawings: Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorage devices in other work C. Submit schedule of accessories indicating quantity and location of each item. Smith Campus Center Toilet Accessories 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 10800-1 No PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where operable partition is to be installed and RM correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Provide all bolts, hardware and accessories for complete installation. B. Erect operable partitions plumb, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Adjust opening and closing to operate freely without bind. C. Provide additional field bracing as necessary for rigid, secure installation. D. Installation to be by manufacturer's authorized installer in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. Drill and tap as necessary and securely anchor operable walls and accessories in accurate location. Install track in as long lengths as possible, placed with a minimum of flush, hairline joints. E. Operation: Quiet, smooth, easily moved, without warp or bind. Adjust panels to move evenly and accurately by normal closing movement of unit. F. Upon completion of installation, test operation of partition in the presence of the Architect's representative. G. Instruct Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the partition. END OF SECTION lw Smith Campus Center Operable Partitions 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 10650-3 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERABLE PARTITION SYSTEM A. Operable wall shall be equal to "Acoustiseal 931" individually hinged, top supported, manually operable wall system as manufactured by Modernfold, or equal system made by Panelfold, Hufcor, or approved equal. B. Panel construction shall be three (3) inches thick,. Panel skins shall be 0.50" tackable gypsum board, Class A rated single material or composite layers continuously bonded to panel frame. C. Panel shall be finished with wood veneer as selected by the Architect. D. Sound seals shall be as follows 1. Vertical seals between panels shall consist of tongue and groove configuration, extruded aluminum astragals incorporating vinyl acoustical seals. Horizontal top seals shall be continuous contact extruded vinyl shape. e� 2. automatic operable seals providing nominal 1" operating clearance with an operating range of +l- 0.50" and shall automatically drop as panels are positioned. 3. Provide any additional seals required to achieve STC rating specified below. E. Track shall be minimum 11 ga. roll-formed steel. Extruded aluminum track is not acceptable. Track shall be capable of either direct mounting to a wood header or .� shall be supported by adjustable steel hanger brackets connected to structural support by pairs of 0.38" diameter threaded rods. Brackets s must support the load bearing surface of the track. �. F. Exposed track soffit shall be all steel, integral to the track and prime painted. Wood or aluminum soffits are not permitted. �. G. All panels (except hinged panels) shall have two all-steel trolleys with steel tired ball-bearing wheels. Non-steel tires are not acceptable. Suspension system shall provide automatic indexing of panels into stack area using pre-programmed A. switches without moving parts. H. Provide pass-through door as indicated on drawings; match veneer of partition. I. Laboratory acoustical performance of the operable wall shall have been tested in an independent acoustical laboratory in accordance with ASTM E90-75 Test Procedures, and shall have attained an STC Rating of no less than 50. wen 1. Field performance when tested in accordance with ASTM E336 shall achieve no less than 50 FSTC. Smith Campus Center Operable Partitions 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 10650-2 SECTION 10650 OPERABLE PARTITIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS w A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the operable partitions, as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Structural steel support - Section 05120. B. Wood blocking - Section 06200. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer shall be acceptable to the manufacturer of the folding partition. B. Installer shall have a minimum of three (3) years experience in installing folding partitions and accessories on comparable projects; list of projects to be furnished in writing, with references than can be contacted. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description, installation and maintenance instructions. 2. Shop Drawings: Show partition and track layout, details of head and jamb conditions, stacking arrangement, hardware, and operating mechanism. 3. Samples: 12" x 12" piece of panel with finish selected. 4. Certification: Furnish copies of certificates by independent testing laboratories for the STC rating. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary. �w Smith Campus Center Operable Partitions 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 10650-1 �w 1. Prepare recesses in walls for fire extinguisher cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and style of trim and to comply with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Securely fasten mounting brackets and fire extinguisher cabinets to structure, square and plumb, to comply with manufacturer's instructions. B. Where exact location of cabinets and bracket-mounted fire extinguishers is not indicated, locate as directed by the Architect. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with lettering spelling "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" painted on door by silk-screen process. Provide lettering on door as selected by eA Architect from manufacturer's standard letter sizes, styles, colors and layouts. B. Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with red letter decals spelling 'FIRE EXTINGUISHER' applied to wall surface. Letter size, style and location as selected P* by the Architect. 3.4 SERVICE A. Determine the approximate completion date of the work and then inspect, charge, and tag the fire extinguishers at a date not more than 10 days before or not less than one day before actual completion date of the work. END OF SECTION PM Smith Campus Center Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets ` 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 10522-3 am on 5. Profile International, Inc. 6. Norris Industries. on 2.2 EXTINGUISHERS A. General: Provide fire extinguishers for each extinguisher cabinet and other locations indicated, in colors and finishes selected by Architect from manufacturer's "" standard which comply with requirements of governing authorities. B. Abbreviations indicated below to identify extinguisher type related to UL classification and rating system and not necessarily to type and amount of extinguishing material contained in extinguisher. C. MP Series Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical Type: UL rated 2-A:10:b:C, 5 lb. nominal capacity, in enameled steel container, for Class A, Class B and Class C fires. D. WC Series Wet Chemical Type or Dry Chemical Type: UL rated for Class K fires; at Kitchen 100K and Servery 199DA. s 2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Provide manufacturer's standard bracket designed to prevent accidental dislodgment of extinguisher, of proper size for type and capacity of extinguisher specified, in manufacturer's standard enamel finish; color to match extinguisher. 2.4 CABINETS A. Type and Style: Fire extinguisher cabinets shall be metal, fully recessed, semi recessed or surface mounted, with plexiglass panel, sized to fit within the partition or wall depth. Provide fire rated cabinets within fire rated partitions. B. Color: Fire extinguisher cabinets shall be factory pre-finished with clear anodized finish. C. Design is based on "Model AL-2409-RI" of Larsen's Mfg. Co. Other manufacturers noted herein may substitute their equivalent cabinet upon acceptance by the Architect. D. Fire Extinguishers And Cabinets Schedule: am 1. FE — Fire Extinguisher. 2. FEC/FR—Fire Extinguisher Cabinet, fully recessed. 3. FEC/SR—Semi Recessed. 4. FEC/SM—Surface Mounted. E. Provide and coordinate flame shield (FS) fire extinguisher cabinets at 1-2 hour rated construction where required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where fire extinguishers and cabinets are to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install items included in this Section in locations indicated and at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities. Smith Campus Center Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 10522-2 SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the fire extinguishers and cabinets as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Masonry walls - Section 04200. B. Gypsum drywall - Section 09250. C. Fire suppression systems - Division 15. *■ D. Fire hose cabinets and valve cabinets - Division 15. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE go A. Provide portable fire extinguishers, cabinets and accessories by one manufacturer. B. UL-Listed Products: Provide new portable fire extinguishers which are UL-listed and bear UL "Listing Mark" for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher indicated. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for all portable fire extinguishers required. For fire extinguisher cabinets include roughing-in dimensions, and details showing mounting methods, relationships to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style and door construction, style and materials. Where color selections by Architect are required, include color charts showing full range of manufacturer's standard colors and designs available. B. Samples: Submit samples, 6" square, of each required finish. Prepare samples on metal of same gauge as metal to be used in the work. Where normal color variations are to be expected, include 2 or more units in each sample showing the limits of such variations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Fire End & Croker Corp. 2. J.L. Industries. 3. Larsen's Mfg. Co. 4. Muckle Mfg., Div. of Technico, Inc. Smith Campus Center Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets "' 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 10522-1 no mineral wood insulation. Provide rotating metal disc flue damper with "T" handle control. Provide continuous track with metal link spark curtain with wand closer; support track from hood with metal hangers. Support hood and flue assembly from roof structure with steel carrying channels. D. Provide steel double wall insulated flue, exposed portions at interior stainless steel with shot-peened finish. Terminate above roof with rain cap and spark screen. Flash at roof penetration per roofing manufacturer's details — see Section 07130. Pack mineral wool insulation around flue where it passes through ceiling/roof construction. E. Provide natural gas starter nozzle with valve, operating valve to be recessed in base with lockable access panel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. ' B. Restore damaged finishes and test for proper operation. Clean and protect work from damage. END OF SECTION op N Smith Campus Center Fireplaces on 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 10300-2 SECTION 10300 FIREPLACES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the free standing fireplace as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Free standing fireplace. 2. Fireplace trim. 3. Chimney flue and cap. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Cast-in-place concrete — Section 03300. B. Stonework — Section 04400. C. Membrane roof and roof insulation — Section 07530. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. so B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data, including operating instructions, list of spare parts and maintenance schedule. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Base and Firepit: Cast-in-place concrete. Finish exposed surfaces to match polished concrete topping slab. Line firepit with 4" firebrick. Provide ducted fresh air inlet to firepit. a B. Ledge and Outer Hearth: Jet Mist granite. See Section 04400. C. Hood: Steel double wall construction. Exposed surfaces stainless steel minimum 19 gauge with welded joints, ground smooth, with shot-peened finish. Line with on Smith Campus Center Fireplaces 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 10300-1 OR w F. Provide concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers and insulations, and install as the work progresses to make the installations weathertight. END OF SECTION go OR no Smith Campus Center Aluminum Louvers 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 10200-4 om G. Anchors and Inserts: Use non-ferrous metal or hot dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled in place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. H. Bituminous Paint: SSPC-Paint 12 (cold applied asphalt mastic). 2.2 FABRICATION,GENERAL A. Fabricate frames including integral sills to suit adjacent construction with tolerances 40 for installation, including application of sealants in joints between louvers and adjoining work. B. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. C. Provide sill extensions made of same material as louvers, where indicated, or required for drainage to exterior and to prevent water penetrating to interior. "M D. Join frame members to one another and to stationary louver blades by welding, except where indicated otherwise or where field bolted connections between frame members are necessary by size of louvers. Maintain equal blade spacing, including 4. separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where aluminum louvers are to be installed and 40 correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for the installation of anchorages which are to be embedded in masonry construction. Coordinate the delivery of such items to the project site. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louver units plumb, level and in proper alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages wherever possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and openings for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. D. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering and grinding operations required for fitting and jointing. Restore finishes and prime coats of paint so that there is no evidence of corrective work. Return items which cannot be refinished in - the field to the shop, make the required alterations, and refinish the entire unit, or provide new units, at Contractor's option. E. Protect aluminum surfaces from corrosion by application of a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces which will be in contact with concrete, masonry or dissimilar metals. Smith Campus Center Aluminum Louvers on 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 10200-3 we no field assembly of units. Preassemble units in shop to greatest extent possible and disassemble as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, certified test data, where applicable, and installation instructions for required products, including finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of louver units and accessories. Include plans, elevations and details of sections and connections to adjoining work. Indicate materials, finishes, fasteners, joinery and other information to determine compliance with specified requirements. C. Samples: Submit six (6) inch square samples of each required finish. Prepare samples on metal of same gauge and alloy to be used in work. Where normal color and texture variations are to be expected, include two (2) or more units in each sample showing limits of such variations. +�* 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and .• replacements necessary. PART 2 PRODUCTS an 2.1 LOUVER MATERIAL A. Provide storm resistant extruded aluminum louvers (ASTM B221), of profiles shown on drawings, manufactured by Construction Specialties, Inc., or equal made by Airolite, Airline Products Co., or approved equal. B. Heads, sills,jambs and mullions to be one piece structural members of 6063-T52, ,,,, alloy, .125" thick, with integral caulking slot and retaining beads. Blades to be minimum .081" thick. Closed cell PVC compression gaskets to be provided between bottom of mullion or jamb and top of sill to insure lead tight connections. Concealed structural supports to be designed by the louver manufacturer to carry a .w wind load of not less than forty (40) lbs. per square foot. All fasteners to be stainless steel. C. Aluminum to have 70% fluorocarbon "Kynar 500" finish, conforming to AAMA Spec. 605.2, custom color as selected by the Architect. D. Louvers shall be furnished with 1/2" mesh, .063 diameter aluminum wire intercrimp bird screen secured in removable extruded aluminum frames. E. Provide aluminum blank off panels behind louvers where shown on mechanical drawings, fabricated from 1/8" thick aluminum face sheets, finish to match louvers; reinforce as required to form rigid assembly. Blank off panels shall be insulated with thermafiber insulation of thickness needed to insure an R value of eleven (11). F. Fastenings: Fasteners for exterior application shall be stainless steel. Provide +• types, gauges and lengths to suit unit installation conditions. Use Phillips flat head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. Smith Campus Center Aluminum Louvers 100% Construction Documents: 0 1.1 1.12 10200-2 SECTION 10200 ALUMINUM LOUVERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the aluminum louvers as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Aluminum louvers. 2. Blank off panels. 3. Bird screens. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Masonry - Section 04200. B. Sealant work - Section 07900. C. Louvers in metal doors - Section 08100. D. Aluminum assemblies - Section 08900. E. Louvers connected to ductwork - Division 15. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Requirements 1. Structural Performance: Provide exterior metal louvers capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses from wind and normal thermal movement without evidencing permanent deformation of louver components including blades, frames, and supports; noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. w a. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 30 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward or outward. 2. Thermal Movements: Provide louvers that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, and other detrimental effects. a. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg. F., ambient; 180 deg. F, material surfaces. B. Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendations for fabrication, construction details and installation procedures, except as otherwise indicated. C. Field Measurements: Verify size, location and placement of louver units prior to fabrication. D. Shop Assembly: Coordinate field measurements and shop drawings with fabrication and shop assembly to minimize field adjustments, splicing, mechanical joints and P Smith Campus Center Aluminum Louvers 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 10200-1 N PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where floor mounted toilet partitions are to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install work of this Section in a rigid and permanent manner, straight and plumb, with all horizontal lines level. B. Install panels and doors twelve (12) inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. Toilet compartment doors shall be centered on water closets, unless otherwise indicated. we C. Maintain uniform clearance of approximately 1/2" between pilasters and panels, and 1/2" between pilasters or panels and finished wall. D. Maintain uniform clearance of 1/4" or less between vertical edges of doors and pilasters. E. Set pilaster units with anchorages having not less than two (2) inches penetration into structural floor. Level, plumb, and tighten installation with devices furnished. Hang doors and adjust so that tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors are in closed position. END OF SECTION •, .R Smith Campus Center Floor Mounted Toilet Partitions 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 10161-4 .� Wo 2. Face Sheets for Doors: Twenty two (22) gauge steel sheet. 3. Face Sheets for Pilasters: Sixteen (16) gauge steel sheet for baked enamel finish, unless otherwise indicated. a. For pilasters less then four (4) inches wide - fourteen (14) gauge. 4. Edge Moldings: Eighteen (18)gauge galvanized, bonderized steel. 5. Concealed Reinforcement: Fourteen (14) gauge galvanized steel for tapping and twelve (12) gauge galvanized steel for anchoring devices. B. Thicknesses PM 1. Panels, Screens and Doors: One (1) inch overall thickness. 2. Pilasters: 1-1/4" overall thickness. C. Sizes: As shown on drawings. Pilasters for compartments shall all be of the same go width, except end pilasters which shall be approximately 1/2 the normal width. D. Construction 1. Panels, screens, doors and pilasters shall have face sheets, with formed edges, q'" pressure cemented to each side of core insulation, providing flat, smooth surface, free of waves, warping, buckles or other defects. 2. Lock edges of face sheets together by either concealed tack welding face sheets at contacting edges at eight (8) inches o.c. and installing interlocking edge molding, or by using a combination integral edge molding and internal reinforcing channel epoxy bonded to face sheets. OR 3. Edge molding shall have corners mitered, welded or brazed, ground flush and finished to match adjacent surfaces. Corners, caps or exposed welds not permitted. 4. Provide concealed reinforcement for hardware, grab bars, fastenings and as accessories specified for in both work of this Section and in work of other Sections(such as Toilet Accessories), and for rigidity, strength and support of units in accordance with requirements of type and use of metal toilet partitions. Cut partitions in shop to receive toilet accessories, using templates furnished by Section 10800. E. Compartment Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated, minimum dimensions of components for toilet compartments shall be as follows: 1. Enclosure Height: 5'-10". 2. Typical Door Width: 2'-011 . 3. Door Width for Barrier Free Compartments: 2'-10". 4. Door Height: 4'-0". 5. Floor Clearance: 1'-0". 2.5 FINISHES A. Baked Enamel Finish: Clean steel sheet and surfaces and factory apply one (1) coat of rust inhibitive baked-on primer and two (2) coats of synthetic semi-gloss baked- ,, on enamel on all exposed surfaces. 1. Colors: As selected by Architect. B. Touch-Up Paint: Furnish Owner with one (1) gallon of each color of enamel finish paint for Owner's use. ON 00 Smith Campus Center Floor Mounted Toilet Partitions 40 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 10161-3 2. "Normandie" of Sanymetal Products Co. 3. "Luxor Type FT-700" of the Metpar Co. B. Manufacturer's name or identifying markings are not permitted on exposed surfaces of any metal toilet partition or vision screen, or related hardware. 2.2 URINAL SCREENS/TYPES AND MANUFACTURERS A. Provide wall mounted urinal screens of the types indicated, as manufactured by one of the following, or approved equal: L "WH Wall Hung" of Flush Metal Partition Corp. PM 2. "Type C Wall Hung" of Sanymetal Products Co. 3. "Type T Wall Hung" of the Metpar Co. B. Manufacturer's name or identifying markings not permitted on exposed surfaces of urinal screens or related hardware. 2.3 MATERIALS FOR TOILET PARTITIONS AND SCREENS A. Steel Sheet for Baked Enamel Finish: Prime quality carbon steel, cold rolled, stretcher leveled, galvanized (0.00015" thick galvanized coating on each face) and bonderized. B. Core Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rot-proof and vermin-proof double faced honeycomb or corrugated type core material; required in all panels, screens, pilasters and doors. C. Hardware: Solid forged brass or stainless steel (Type 302 or 304), as indicated below. Stamped, cast alloy, or aluminum extrusions shall not be accepted. 1. Pilaster Shoes: Stainless steel, one piece (no visible joints or seams) flush or offset design, twenty (20) gauge. 2. Hinges: Gravity hinge type, self-closing, concealed within door, fully adjustable, to bring door to rest in thirty (30) degree open position. Hinge , brackets solid forged brass or stainless steel, with solid stainless steel pin and pintels. 3. Latch: Solid forged brass with solid stainless steel slide. 4. Strike and Keeper: One piece, solid forged brass or sixteen (16) gauge stainless steel, with rubber bumper mechanically applied and theft proof. 5. Bumper Coat Hook: Solid forged brass, with ferrule held rubber bumper on back of each toilet compartment door. 6. Stirrup Brackets: Fourteen (14) gauge stainless steel or forged brass. 7. Hardware Finishes a. On Forged Brass: Heavy chromium plating over nickel over copper. Satin Finish (US26D). b. On Stainless Steel: No. 4 , Satin Finish. D. Fasteners: Provide exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chromium plated brass, same finish as adjoining metal, theft proof. Provide concealed fasteners of non- corrosive metal. E. Furnish galvanized steel anchorage devices, complete with threaded rods, lock �. washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters, to permit structural connection at floor. Furnish shoe at each pilaster to conceal anchorage. 2.4 FABRICATION .. A. Minimum Acceptable Metal Gauges I. Face Sheets for Panels and Screens: Twenty (20) gauge steel sheet. wee Smith Campus Center Floor Mounted Toilet Partitions 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 10161-2 SECTION 10161 FLOOR MOUNTED TOILET PARTITIONS PART I GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS l" A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the floor mounted toilet partitions as shown on the drawings and/or po specified herein. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Gypsum board partitions - Section 09250. B. Ceramic tile - Section 09310. C. Toilet accessories - Section 10800. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to fabrication to ensure proper fitting of the work. B. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be built - into other work for the installation of toilet partitions and related work. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Before any of the materials of this Section are delivered to the job site, submit the following: 1. Room layouts and elevations for all areas, with dimensions based on actual dimensions taken at job site. 2. Materials, finishes, details of construction, gauges of metal, hardware, fastening and anchoring conditions and relation to adjoining constructions. B. Samples: Submit the following: 1. One 12" x 12" sample of baked enamel finish for each color indicated. 2. One sample of each type of hardware and fitting item including related fasteners. Include all items listed under 2.2 C. below. C. Templates: Submit templates to other trades as required for support of toilet partitions. PART 2 PRODUCTS tw 2.1 TOILET PARTITIONS AND VISION SCREEN/TYPES AND MANUFACTURERS A. Provide floor mounted toilet partitions and vision screens of the types indicated, as manufactured by of the following, or approved equal: 1. "Flushart" of Flush-Metal Partition Corp. Smith Campus Center Floor Mounted Toilet Partitions 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 10161-1 3 7 7 7 7 7 7 3 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ..s 9. Paste wood filler applied on open grained wood after beginning to flatten, shall be wiped across the grain of the wood, then with a circular motion, to secure a .. smooth, filled, clean surface with filler remaining in open grain only. After overnight dry, sand surface with the grain until smooth before applying specified coat. B. Scheduling Painting 1. Apply the first coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pre-treated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and w before subsequent surface deterioration. 2. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not re-coat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and the application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. C. Prime Coats: Re-coat primed and sealed walls and ceilings where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. D. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. E. "Touching-Up" of Factory Finishes: Unless otherwise specified or shown, materials with a factory finish shall not be painted at the project site. To "touch-up", the Contractor shall use the factory finished material manufacturer's recommended paint materials to repair abraded, chipped, or otherwise defective surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by the painting and finishing work. Leave all such work undamaged. Correct any damages by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to the Architect. „R B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after completion of painting operations. 3.7 CLEAN UP A. During the progress of the work, remove from the site all discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at the end of each work day. " B. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using , care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces. C. At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Painting and Finishing Aw 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09900-10 type filler where the moisture content exceeds seven (7) percent as measured by the electronic moisture meter. H. Touch-Up: Prime paint all patched portions in addition to all other specified coats. 3.4 MATERIALS PREPARATION A. Mix and prepare painting materials in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions. B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing, and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. C. Stir all materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and as required during the application of the materials. Do not stir any film which may form on the surface into the material. Remove the film and, if necessary, strain the material before using. D. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.5 APPLICATION A. General 1. Apply paint by brush or roller in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Use brushes best suited for the type of material being applied. Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high pile sheep's wool as recommended by the paint manufacturer for material and texture required. 2. The number of coats and paint film thickness required is the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has completely dried. Sand between each enamel or varnish coat application with fine sandpaper, or rub surfaces with pumice stone where required to produce an even, smooth surface in accordance with the coating manufacturer's directions. 3. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through the final coat of paint, until the paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to insure that all surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. a. "Exposed surfaces" is defined as those areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, etc., are in place in areas scheduled to be painted. 5. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non-specular black paint, before final installation of equipment. 6. Paint the back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers to match the exposed surfaces. 7. Finish doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as the faces, unless otherwise indicated. 8. Enamel finish applied to wood or metal shall be sanded with fine sandpaper and then cleaned between coats to produce an even surface. Smith Campus Center Painting and Finishing �'"" 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09900-9 w B. General 1. The Contractor shall be held wholly responsible for the finished appearance w and satisfactory completion of painting work. Properly prepare all surfaces to receive paint, which includes cleaning, sanding, and touching-up of all prime coats applied under other Sections of the work. Broom clean all spaces before painting is started. All surfaces to be painted or finished shall be perfectly dry, clean and smooth. 2. Perform all preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with the paint manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition. 3. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvents prior to mechanical cleaning. Program the cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall in wet, newly painted surfaces. .er C. Metal Surfaces 1. Weld Fluxes: Remove weld fluxes, splatters, and alkali contaminants from metal surfaces in an approved manner and leave surface ready to receive painting. 2. Bare Metal: Thoroughly clean off all foreign matter such as grease, rust, scale and dirt before priming coat is applied. Clean surfaces, where solder flux has been used, with benzene. Clean surfaces by flushing with mineral spirits. For aluminum surfaces, wipe down with an oil free solvent prior to application of any pre-treatment. 3. Shop Primed Metal: Clean off foreign matter as specified for "Bare Metal". Prime bare, rusted, abraded and marred surfaces with approved primer after proper cleaning of surfaces. Sandpaper all rough surfaces smooth. 4. Galvanized Metal: Prepare surface as per the requirements of ASTM D-6386. .�. 5. Metal Filler: Fill dents, cracks, hollow places, open joints and other irregularities in metal work to be painted with an approved metal filler suitable for the purpose and meeting the requirements of the related Section of work; after setting, sand to a smooth, hard finish, flush with adjoining surface. D. Gypsum Drywall Surfaces: Scrape off all projections and splatters, spackles all holes or depressions, including taped and spackled joints, sand smooth. Conform to standards established in Section 09250 Gypsum Drywall. E. Wood Surfaces: Sand to remove all roughness, loose edges, slivers, or splinters and then brush to remove dust. Wash off grease or dirt with an approved cleaner. Fill all cracks, splits, nail holes, screw holes, and surface defects with putty after the priming coat has been applied. Putty shall be brought up flush with the surface and sanded smooth and touched-up with primer when dry. F. Block Masonry Surfaces: Thoroughly clean off all grit, grease, dirt mortar drippings or splatters, and other foreign matter. Remove nibs or projections from masonry surfaces. Fill cracks, holes or voids, not filled under the "Masonry" Section, with Portland cement grout, and bag surface so that it has approximately the same texture as the adjacent masonry surface. G. Testing for Moisture Content: Contractor shall test all plaster, masonry, and drywall surfaces for moisture content using a reliable electronic moisture meter. Contractor shall also test latex type fillers for moisture content before application of top coats of paint. Do not apply any paint or sealer to any surface or to latex Smith Campus Center Painting and Finishing .�► 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09900-8 PIN PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where painting and finishing are to be applied and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP REQUIREMENTS A. Only skilled mechanics shall be employed. Application may be by brush or roller. Spray application only upon acceptance from the Architect in writing. B. The Contractor shall furnish the Architect a schedule showing when he expects to have completed the respective coats of paint for the various areas and surfaces. This schedule shall be kept current as the job progresses. C. The Contractor shall protect his work at all times, and shall protect all adjacent work and materials by suitable covering or other method during progress of his work. Upon completion of the work, he shall remove all paint and varnish spots from floors, glass and other surfaces. He shall remove from the premises all rubbish and accumulated materials of whatever nature not caused by others and shall leave his part of the work in clean, orderly and acceptable condition. D. Remove and protect hardware, accessories, device plates, lighting fixtures, and factory finished work, and similar items, or provide ample in place protection. Upon completion of each space, carefully replace all removed items by workmen skilled in the trades involved. E. Remove electrical panel box covers and doors before painting walls. Paint separately and re-install after all paint is dry. F. All materials shall be applied under adequate illumination, evenly spread and flowed on smoothly to avoid runs, sags, holidays, brush marks, air bubbles and excessive roller stipple. G. Coverage and hide shall be complete. When color, stain, dirt or undercoats show through final coat of paint, the surface shall be covered by additional coats until the paint film is of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage, at no additional cost to the Owner. H. All coats shall be dry to manufacturer's recommendations before applying P■ succeeding coats. L All suction spots or "hot spots" in plaster after the application of the first coat shall be touched up before applying the second coat. J. Do not apply paint behind frameless mirrors that use mastic for adhering to wall surface. 3.3 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Existing Surfaces: Clean existing surfaces requiring paint or finishing, remove all loose and flaking paint or finish and sand surface smooth as required to receive new paint or finish. No "telegraphing" of lines, ridges, flakes, etc., through new surfacing is permitted. Where this occurs, Contractor shall be required to sand smooth and re-finish until surface meets with Architect's approval. Smith Campus Center Painting and Finishing """' 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09900-7 First Coat: 1 coat Regal Wall Satin (215) Second Coat: 1 coat Regal Wall Satin (215) a. Total DFT not less than: 3.6 mils Eggshell Finish/Vinyl Acrylic Latex Primer: 1 coat Regal FirstCoat (216) First Coat: 1 coat Regal AquaVelvet (319) Second Coat: 1 coat Regal AquaVelvet (319) a. Total DFT not less than: 3.8 mils F. Interior Painted Wood Satin Finish/Alkyd Primer: 1 coat Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody (217) First Coat: 1 coat Satin Impervo (235) Second Coat: 1 coat Satin Impervo (235) a. Total DFT not less than: 4.0 mils Semi-Gloss Finish/Alkyd Primer: 1 coat Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody (217) First Coat: 1 coat Moore's Alkyd Dulamel (207) Second Coat: 1 coat Moore's Alkyd Dulamel (207) a. Total DFT not less than: 3.8 mils 2.5 EXISTING SURFACES TO BE PAINTED A. Existing surfaces shall be painted in accordance with schedule given in Article 2.4 herein except that first or prime coat may be eliminated where existing paint is sound. Where existing paint must be removed down to base material, provide first or prime coat as specified. 4, 2.6 PIPING AND MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT EXPOSED TO VIEW A. Paint all exposed piping, conduits, ductwork and mechanical and electrical equipment. Use heat resisting paint when applied to heating lines and equipment. The Contractor is cautioned not to paint or otherwise disturb moving parts in the mechanical systems. Mask or otherwise protect all parts as required to prevent damage. B. Exposed Uncovered Ductwork, Piping, Hangers and Equipment: Latex Enamel Undercoater and one (1) coat Acrylic Latex Flat. C. Exposed Covered Piping, Duct Work and Equipment: Primer/Sealer and one (1) coat Acrylic Latex Flat. D. Panel Boards, Grilles and Exposed Surfaces of Electrical Equipment: Alkyd Enamel Undercoater and two (2) coats Alkyd Semi-Gloss. E. Equipment or Apparatus with Factory-Applied Paint: Refinish any damaged surfaces to match original finish. Do not paint over name plates and labels. F. All surfaces of insulation and all other work to be painted shall be wiped or washed clean before any painting is started. G. All conduit, boxes, distribution boxes, light and power panels, hangers, clamps, etc., ' are included where painting is required. H. All items of Mechanical and Electrical trades which are furnished painted under their respective Contracts shall be carefully coordinated with the work of this Section so as to leave no doubt as to what items are scheduled to be painted under this Section. Smith Campus Center Painting and Finishing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09900-6 s F. All thinning and tinting materials shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for PP the particular material thinned or tinted. G. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to see that all mixed colors match the color selection made by the Architect prior to application of the coating. 2.4 SCHEDULE OF FINISHES A. Exterior Galvanized Ferrous Metal First Coat: Touch-Up Galvanized, Second Coat: "Epoxoline 66" by Tnemec or approved equal, Third Coat: "Endurashield 73/74" by Tnemec or approved equal. B. Exterior Wood Stain !" First Coat: Cabot Water Based Problem- Solver #8022 Acrylic Primer by Cabots, Second Coat: O.V.T. Solid Color Acrylic Stain #0600 in color selected by Architect by Cabots, Third Coat: O.V.T. Solid Color Acrylic Stain #0600 in color selected by Architect by Cabots. C. Interior Ferrous Metal PK Satin Finish/Alkyd Primer: 1 coat IronClad Alkyd Low Lustre Metal and Wood Enamel (163), or touch-up shop primer First Coat: 1 coat Satin Impervo (235) Second Coat: 1 coat Satin Impervo (235) a. Total DFT not less than: 3.9 mils Semi-Gloss Finish/Alkyd Primer: I coat IronClad Latex Low Lustre Metal and Wood Enamel (363), or touch-up shop primer First Coat: 1 coat Alkyd Dulamel (207) Second Coat: 1 coat Alkyd Dulamel (207) a. Total DFT not less than: 4.0 mils D. Interior Concrete Block Flat Finish/Vinyl Acrylic Latex over filler Block Filler: 1 coat Moorcraft Super Craft Latex Block Filler (285) First Coat: 1 coat Regal Wall Satin (215) Second Coat: 1 coat Regal Wall Satin (215) a. Total DFT not less than: 10.7 mils Eggshell Finish/Vinyl Acrylic Latex over filler Block Filler: 1 coat Moorcraft Super Craft Latex Block Filler (285) First Coat: 1 coat Regal AquaVelvet (319) Second Coat: 1 coat Regal AquaVelvet (319) a. Total DFT not less than: 10.9 mils Semi-Gloss Finish/Vinyl Acrylic Latex over filler Block Filler: I coat Moorcraft Super Craft Latex Block Filler (285) First Coat: 1 coat Regal AquaGlo (333) Second Coat: 1 coat Regal AquaGlo (333) a. Total DFT not less than: 10.7 mils _ E. Interior Drywall Flat Finish/Vinyl Acrylic Latex ' Primer: 1 coat Regal FirstCoat (216) P* Smith Campus Center Painting and Finishing '"" 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09900-5 No PART2 PRODUCTS go 2.1 PAINT MANUFACTURERS A. Provide best quality "Architectural" grade painting products for all required painting made by Benjamin Moore. Comply with number of coats and required minimum mil thicknesses as specified herein. Names used herein are those of Benjamin Moore; equivalent paint of listed manufacturers are acceptable subject to the Architect's approval. 1. All paint shall be manufactured by Benjamin Moore; no substitutions. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and use only to recommended limits. B. Colors and Glosses: All colors and glosses shall be as selected by the Architect. Certain colors will require paint manufacturer to prepare special factory mixes to match colors selected by the Architect. Color schedule (with gloss) shall be furnished by the Architect. ' C. Coloring Pigment: Products of or furnished by the manufacturer of the paint or enamel approved for the work. D. Linseed Oil: Raw or boiled, as required, of approved manufacture, per ASTM D234 and D260, respectively. E. Turpentine: Pure distilled gum spirits of turpentine, per ASTM D13. F. Shellac: Pure gum shellac (white or orange) cut in pure denatured alcohol using not less than four (4) lbs. of gum per gallon of alcohol. G. Driers, Putty, Spackling Compound, Patching Plaster, etc.: Best quality, of approved manufacture. H. Heat Resistant Paint: Where required, use heat resistant paint when applying paint to heating lines and equipment. 2.3 GENERAL STANDARDS A. The various surfaces shall be painted or finished as specified below in Article 2.4. However, the Architect reserves the right to change the finishes within the range of flat, semi-gloss or gloss, without additional cost to the Owner. B. All paints, varnishes, enamels, lacquers, stains and similar materials must be delivered in the original containers with the seals unbroken and label intact and with the manufacturer's instructions printed thereon. C. All painting materials shall bear identifying labels on the containers with the manufacturer's instructions printed thereon. D. Paint shall not be badly settled, caked or thickened in the container, shall be readily �. dispersed with a paddle to a smooth consistency and shall have excellent application properties. E. Paint shall arrive on the job color-mixed except for tinting of under-coats and possible thinning. Smith Campus Center Painting and Finishing , 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09900-4 B. Samples 1. Accompanying the materials list, submit to the Architect copies of the full range of colors available in each of the proposed products. 2. Upon direction of the Architect, prepare and deliver to the Architect two (2) identical sets of Samples of each of the selected colors and glosses painted onto 8-1/2" x 11" x 1/4" thick material; whenever possible, the material for Samples shall be the materials as that on which the coating will be applied in the work. C. Manufacturer's Recommendations: In each case where material proposed is not the material specified or specifically described as an acceptable alternate in this Section of these specifications, submit for the Architect's review the current recommended method of application published by the manufacturer of the proposed material. D. Submit data indicating that paint meets Performance Standards specified herein. 1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver all paint materials to the job site in their original unopened containers with all labels intact and legible at time of use. B. Protection 1. Store only the approved materials at the job site, and store only in a suitable and designated area restricted to the storage of paint materials and related equipment. 2. Use all means necessary to ensure the safe storage and use of paint materials and the prompt and safe disposal of waste. 3. Use all means necessary to protect paint materials before, during and after application and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. C. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary. 1.8 EXTRA STOCK A. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, deliver to the Owner an extra stock of paint equaling approximately ten (10) percent of each color and gloss used in each coating material used, with all such extra stock tightly sealed in clearly labeled containers. 1.9 JOB CONDITIONS A. Apply water-base paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees F. and 90 degrees F., unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are between 45 degrees F. and 95 degrees F. 40 unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds eighty five (85) percent; or to damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions. D. Painting may be continued during inclement weather only if the areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within the temperature limits specified by the paint manufacturer during application and drying periods. Smith Campus Center Painting and Finishing "" 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09900-3 .R 4a D. Color Coding of Mechanical Piping and Electrical Conduits - Division 15. 1. This Color Coding consists of an adhesive tape system and is in addition to "' painting of piping and conduits under this Section, as specified above. 1.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT NOT TO BE PAINTED No A. Items of equipment furnished with complete factory finish, except for items specified to be given a finish coat under this Section. B. Factory finished toilet partitions. .� C. Factory finished acoustical tile. D. Non-ferrous metals, except for items specified and/or indicated to be painted. E. Finished hardware, excepting hardware that is factory primed. F. Surfaces not to be painted shall be left completely free of droppings and accidentally applied materials resulting from the work of this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Job Mock-Up 1. In addition to the samples, specified herein to be submitted for approval, apply in the field at their final location, each type and color of approved paint materials applied 10' wide, floor to ceiling of wall surfaces, before proceeding with the remainder of the work, for approval by the Architect. Paint mock-ups to include door and frame assembly. 2. These applications when approved will establish the quality and workmanship for the work of this Section. 3. Repaint individual areas which are not approved, as determined by the Architect, until approval is received. Assume at least two paint mock-ups of each color and gloss for approval. B. Qualification of Painters: Use only qualified journeyman painters for the mixing and application of paint on exposed surfaces. C. Paint Coordination: Provide finish coats which are compatible with the prime paints used. Review other Sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of the total coatings system for the various substrates. Upon request from other subcontractors, furnish information on the characteristics of the finish materials proposed to be used, to ensure that compatible prime coats are used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re-prime as required. Notify the Architect in writing of any anticipated problems using the coating systems as specified with substrates primed by others. D. All paints must conform to the Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) standards of prevailing codes and ordinances. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List 1. Before any paint materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the Architect a complete list of all materials proposed to be furnished and installed under this portion of the work. 2. This shall in no way be construed as permitting substitution of materials for •• those specified or accepted for this work by the Architect. Smith Campus Center Painting and Finishing ,w 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09900-2 SECTION 09900 PAINTING AND FINISHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the painting and finishing as shown on the drawings and/or specified pa herein, including but not limited to, the following: 1. Prime painting unprimed surfaces to be painted under this Section. 2. Painting all items furnished with a prime coat of paint, including touching up of or repairing of abraded, damaged or rusted prime coats applied by others. ++ 3. Painting all ferrous metal (except stainless steel) exposed to view. 4. Painting all galvanized ferrous metals exposed to view. 5. Painting interior concrete block exposed to view. 6. Painting gypsum drywall exposed to view. 7. Staining of exterior wood. 8. Painting of wood exposed to view, except items which are specified to be painted or finished under other Sections of these specifications. Back painting of all wood in contact with concrete, masonry or other moisture areas. 9. Painting pipes, pipe coverings, conduit, ducts, insulation, hangers, supports and other mechanical and electrical items and equipment exposed to view. 10. Painting surfaces above, behind or below grilles, gratings, diffusers, louvers, lighting fixtures, and the like, which are exposed to view through these items. 11. Incidental painting and touching up as required to produce proper finish for painted surfaces, including touching up of factory finished items. 12. Painting of any surface not specifically mentioned to be painted herein or on drawings, but for which painting is obviously necessary to complete the job, or work which comes within the intent of these specifications, shall be included as though specified. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Shop priming is required on some, but not all of the items scheduled to be field painted, refer to other Sections of work for complete description. B. Refer to Section 06200 for backpainting of exterior wood siding. C. Shop coat on machinery and equipment: Refer to the Sections under which various items of manufactured equipment with factory applied shop prime coats are furnished, including, but not necessarily limited to, the following Sections. All items of equipment furnished with prime coat finish shall be finish painted under this Section. 1. Heating, ventilation and air conditioning - Division 15. 2. Plumbing - Division 15. Smith Campus Center Painting and Finishing " " 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09900-1 5. Panels shall have noise reduction coefficient values of the following when tested in accordance with Section 1.03 of this specification. Hz 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC 0.03 0.37 0.89 1.10 1.09 1.05 .85 6. Provide all shimming and adjustments required to maintain consistent alignment of joints and finished panel faces. 7. Panels shall have a flame spread of 25 or less per ASTM E-84 B. Provide manufacturer's standard support system specifically designed for the specified wall panels to support the wall assembly. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.2 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas where acoustical panels and accessories are to be installed and notify the Architect of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected to permit proper installation of the layout. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Codes and Standards: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, and to comply with governing regulations and industry standards. B. Install support systems to comply with drawing details and manufacturer's written instructions for rigid, permanent installation. Locate support anchors and fasteners to occur at solid framing members(studs,etc.). C. Install moldings and trim at edges of each acoustical wall area, and at locations where edge of acoustical units would otherwise be exposed after completion of the work. 3.4 ADJUST AND CLEAN +*4 A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical wall panels, including trim and moldings; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. an END OF SECTION am Smith Campus Center Acoustical Wall Treatments 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09840-4 ,,,, 2.2 ACOUSTICAL BACKING MATERIAL A. Provide "Acoustical Core" glass fiber sound insulation manufactured by Owens Corning Fiberglas Corp., or approved equal. 1. Thickness: 1". 2. Density: 5 —7 pcf. 2.3 SUPPORT SYSTEM A. Provide manufacturer's standard support system specifically designed for the specified wall panels to support the wall assembly. B. Provide manufacturer's standard moldings and trim with finish to match wall panels unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 FABRIC FACED ACOUSTIC WALL PANELS A. Provide prefabricated fabric faced acoustical wall panels systems as described in this section for installation in areas as shown on drawings meeting or exceeding the following requirements: 1. Fabric Faced Acoustical Wall Panel: The wall system shall be High Impact Resilient H.I.R. #2 Custom, square defined joint with aluminum frame directly mounted to substrate, as manufactured by Decoustics Ltd. (800) 387-3809; no substitutes. Panel Thickness: 1"unless otherwise indicated. a. Panel Size: As indicated on drawings. ws b. Acoustical Performance: NRC 0.85 (for 1"thickness). C. Fire Treatment: Internal fire treated particleboard framing as required for edge conditions. 2. The flat and curved panels shall be type MENATT constructed of I layer 6 to 7 lb./cu. ft. medium density core with an impact resilient scrim facer. Fabric corners are fully tailored (no exposed darting). The boards shall be fabricated to sizes and radius dimensions required by field dimensions and will not vary from determined sizes by more than 0.020 inches vertically, horizontally, and corner to corner. The boards shall be fabricated to sizes using a CAD/CAM (CIM) Robotics cutting system to ensure accurate panel core dimensions to a tolerance of 0.020 inches. Edges shall be of concealed, mill finish aluminum and shall be factory pre-curved to radius shown on drawings with adequate web thickness to withstand moderate impact during installation and ongoing maintenance. Edges shall be designed to be fixed to the core and will be straight and true with no visible deviations when panels are butted side by side. Edges must be in alignment with the panel face and concealed from view. Soft or non-framed edge treatments are not acceptable. All panels shall be clearly text marked with the project I.D. number, panel number, location code and quantity of units per size and correspond to shop drawings where supplied. 3. Finish shall be fabric as chosen by the Architect. All finishes shall be tested for suitability and approved for use by the panel manufacturer prior to fabrication. 4. Mounting shall be by means of mechanical fastening only (includes slide and engage z-clips, wall clips, and or track. Consult with manufacturer to determine correct fastening to use for specific substrates. Smith Campus Center Acoustical Wall Treatments 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09840-3 M" B. Samples and Product Literature: Submit the three (3) of following samples and related manufacturer's descriptive literature. 1. Perforated acoustical panels- 12"square. 2. Acoustical backing material— 12"square. 3. Supports and fastening devices—full size. .. 4. Fabric faced acoustic absorption wall panels- 12" square. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver panels to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct ., sunlight, surface contamination or other causes. B. Before installing acoustical units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install acoustical panel systems until wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. 1.8 EXTRA STOCK A. Extra Stock: Deliver stock of maintenance material to Owner. Furnish maintenance material matching products installed,packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels. 1. Perforated Acoustical Panels: Furnish quantity of full size units equal to 2.0% of amount installed. 2. Fabric faced acoustic absorption: :Furnish quantity of full size units equal to 2.0% of amount installed. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORATED ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Provide prefabricated acoustical panel system as manufactured by RPG Diffusor Systems, Inc. (301-249-0044)or approved equal.. 1. Acoustical Panel: "Topperflo— 16/16/8"20% panel with M Frequency. a. Panel Thickness: 3/4"unless otherwise indicated. b. Panel Size: As indicated on drawings. . C. Acoustical Performance: NRC 0.80(for 1-3/8"thickness). d. Wood Veneer: As selected by the Architect. e. Fire Treatment: Internal fire treated particleboard framing as required for M, edge conditions. 2. Deliver panels to Section 06400 (Architectural Woodwork) for finishing to match other work on the project. "" Smith Campus Center Acoustical Wall Treatments 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09840-2 no M SECTION 09840 ACOUSTICAL WALL TREATMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to tee complete the acoustical wall treatments as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but not limited to, the following: 1. Perforated wood veneer acoustic wall panels. 2. Acoustical material for perforated wood veneer acoustical wall panels and for operable acoustical panels in Multi-Use Room. 3. Fabric faced acoustic absorption wall panels in TV Lounge/Bar and Radio Booth. 4. Cutting,drilling, scribing and fitting of panels. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Carpentry-Section 06200. B. Finishing of acoustical wood panels-Section 06400. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with all pertinent recommendations published by the Ceilings and Interior Systems Contractor's Association. B. Qualifications of Installers 1. The installer shall have a record of successfully installations of similar acoustical panels acceptable to Architect and shall be currently approved by the manufacturer of the acoustical panels. 2. For the actual fabrication and installation of all components of the system, use only personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required and completely familiar with the requirements established for this work. pa 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit completely dimensioned panel layouts for all areas where acoustical wall panels are required, showing: 1. Any deviations from Architect's layouts and dimensions. 2. Direction and spacing of support members and location of anchors and fasteners. P's 3. Sizes and types of acoustical units and starting point for each individual wall area. 4. Moldings at perimeter of wall and elsewhere as required due to penetrations or exposure at edge of wall panels. 5. Details of construction and installation of wall panels at all conditions. 6. Materials, gauges, thickness and finishes. Smith Campus Center Acoustical Wall Treatments 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09840-1 12. The installer shall now slide this edge until it tightly abuts the edge of the first roll. Hold the edge in place by kneeling on it and work the wrinkles out toward the unglued side. 13. Continue the above procedure throughout the installation. 14. While the cement is still tacky, the carpet must be pressed down along the wall and creased - the excess shall be trimmed. 15. Cross-seaming can be accomplished by Scribe Cutting. Overlap the ends approximately 4". Cut the end with the yarn leaning toward the seam from the back with a straight edge. Use this end as a guide to cut the other end utilizing a top cutter or similar tool. 16. Seal these ends the same as all other cut edges. 17. Exposed edges shall always be protected by a vinyl edging. The vinyl edge shall be fastened to the floor with contract cement. 18. Stains caused by adhesive can be removed using a dry chlorinated or similar solvent. Apply solvent with a clean cloth using a blotting action. Do not saturate carpet with solvent. Dry with rag or tissue using a blotting and not a rubbing motion. C. Stairway Carpeting: Install by secure method, recognized to be durable and safe for traffic. Conceal edges and avoid making seams in areas of high wear. Match adjoining carpet installation in every way possible. 3.4 CLEANING UP A. Upon completion of the carpeting installation in each area, visually inspect all carpet installed in that area and immediately remove all dirt, soil, and foreign substance from the exposed face; inspect all adjacent surfaces and remove all marks and stains caused by the carpet installation: remove all packaging materials, carpet scraps, and other debris from the carpet installation to the area of the job site set aside for its storage. B. Usable carpet pieces shall be turned over to the Owner. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Provide temporary, protection against soiling or damage of carpet for the remainder of the construction period. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Carpet(Glue Down) "" 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09681-5 gain access to the devices. Cut only three (3) sides wherever it is feasible to provide a carpet flat in lieu of a fully-removable cut-out. ..� 4. Install vinyl carpet edge guard at every location where edge of carpet is exposed to traffic, except where another device is indicated. B. Direct Glue-Down Carpet Installation ■* 1. Select best location for a starting seam; strike a chalk line on the floor at this point. (Use white chalk; color chalk should not be allowed on the job.) 2. Check the carpet for direction of pile lay. 3. Cut two lengths of carpet allowing about one inch to run up the walls for trimming. 4. Place the untrimmed edge of one length along the chalk line and stay-nail along its center line, parallel to the seam. During this procedure, work out any wrinkles allowing the carpet to lie smoothly on the floor. Stay-nail at approximately 12" - 18" intervals following the center line of the cut along its entire length. Make sure carpet does not shift from the chalk line. ,eye 5. After checking for pile direction, unroll second length and overlap the edge of the first length by about 1" to 2". Stay-nail second length as in Para. 4 above. 6. Depending on construction, the carpet edge may be trimmed by one of the following techniques: ' a. Utilizing a top cutter cut between the loops if rows are straight and the cut is not too long. b. Scribe cut using a top cutter or cushion back cutter to follow a row on one edge, then overlap and use this cut edge as a guide to trim the second or bottom edge. C. Double cut using a top cutter, make a free hand cut through both overlapped edges. When cutting long areas, utilize an electric cutter. d. All cut edges must be sealed prior to seaming using a premium latex carpet seaming adhesive. 7. Fold back both lengths towards stay-nails. Do not pull out any stay-nails or tear carpet. 8. The exposed floor between the folded cuts shall be swept and vacuumed if necessary. ., 9. Using a notched trowel 1/8" x 1/8" spread adhesive evenly, using a semi-circular motion to avoid excessive deposits and missed areas. The number of men required to spread the adhesive will depend on the areas to be covered. , If the area is large, use 2 men, one on either side of the center, and have them work in opposite directions. Check the trowels occasionally to see that they are free of foreign matter and also that the 1/8" notch is maintained. It is important to allow sufficient open time in order to let the adhesive become tacky before adhering the carpet. 10. After the adhesive is spread as described in Para. 9 above, lay the folded back edge of the first cut over the cement. To do this, the installers shall position themselves at intervals along the entire length of the fold and grasp the folded edge. Lift it up and walk towards the seam. The installer in the middle of the roll walks ahead, thus forming a wedge. Use a 100 lb. roller to smooth the fabric towards the seam. 11. Next, grasp the folded edge of the second roll and place it over the adhesive as in Para. 10 with the exception that this flap should be walked in evenly rather than using the wedge method. Walk in all but one ft. of this and fold this amount back again. Smith Campus Center Carpet (Glue Down) 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09681-4 C. Leveling Compound: Latex/Portland cement flashing patching and leveling compound equal to No. 226 with 3701 admixture made by Laticrete or equal made by Mapei, H.B. Fuller or approved equal. D. Miscellaneous Materials: Provide the types of seaming, adhesives and tape, thread, and other accessory items recommended by the carpet manufacturer and Installer for the conditions of installation and use. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where carpet is to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Floor shall be clean and free of cracks and protrusions. Any gaps or cracks more than 1/16" wide to be filled in with latex leveling compound. Protrusions must be sanded down smooth, the floor cleanly swept and vacuumed if necessary to remove all dust and grit. B. Floor temperature shall be 65 deg., at least 24 hrs. prior to installation; and 48 hrs. after carpet is installed. C. Conduct a moisture test. The presence of moisture in the concrete floor will interfere with the curing and subsequent performance of the adhesive. Conduct the test as follows: 1. Drive a concrete nail a half inch into the floor. Then remove the nail. 2. Place a small amount of anhydrous calcium chloride or calcium sulphate crystals over the hole. 3. Cover the crystals and the hole with a piece of flat glass and seal the edges with waterproof tape or putty. Since concrete pourings vary, repeat the test every 1500 sq. ft. 4. Leave in place 72 hrs. any color change in the crystals indicates the presence of moisture. Do not apply carpet until slab is free of moisture and meets with approval of carpet adhesive manufacturer. D. Sequence carpeting with other work so as to minimize possibility of damage and soiling of carpet during remainder of construction period. h" 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Place seams in the directions as accepted on shop drawings. Maintain direction of pattern and texture, including lay of carpeting. 2. Extend carpet under open-bottomed and raised-bottom obstructions, and under removable flanges of obstructions. Extend carpet into closets and alcoves of rooms indicated to be carpeted, unless another floor finish is indicated for such spaces. Extend carpet under all movable furniture and equipment, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide cut-outs for removable access devices in the substrate. Bind edges as neatly as possible and secure both sides of cuts to the substrate. Use double-faced tape on carpet cut-outs which must be lifted from the substrate to Smith Campus Center Carpet (Glue Down) """' 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09681-3 no 2. Include supporting certified laboratory test data indicating that carpet meets or exceeds specified test requirements. .. E. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's printed maintenance recommendations, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining carpet in optimum conditions under anticipated traffic and use conditions. �. 1.6 EXTRA STOCK A. Overrun: Produce and deliver to the Owner at least five (5) percent overrun on calculated yardage. Provide required overrun exclusive of carpet needed for proper installation, waste and usable scraps. 1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver carpeting materials in original mill protective wrapping with mill register numbers and tags attached. Store inside, in well ventilated area, protected from weather, moisture and soiling. w 1.8 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall repair seams, joints and edge, if required, after the original installation is complete. The exact time for this work shall be left to the discretion of the Owner, but shall be within twenty four (24) months after final approval of finished installation. Fourteen (14) day notice for repairs shall be given by the Owner, so that the Contractor can make the necessary arrangements. B. Further, the Contractor shall provide a one-year unconditional warranty against workmanship defects covering further repair of seams, puckering and any other defects that might be directly attributed to defect in workmanship. "" C. The manufacturer shall provide a warranty that the face yarn of the carpet will not wear more than ten (10) percent in five years. If the carpet wears more than ten (10) percent in five (5) years, the manufacturer will replace the carpet including w' parts, labor and materials, to the Owner's satisfaction. PART 2 PRODUCTS .. 2.1 CARPETING A. Contractor shall provide price allowance as follows: " 1. Type 1 Carpet: $45 per square yard. 2. Type 2 Carpet: $35 per square yard. B. Carpet will be selected by the Architect. 2.2 ACCESSORIES .. A. Provide vinyl edges, reducers and threshold plates where required. They shall be sized to be compatible with the thickness of the carpet, in a color as selected by the Architect, of a commercial quality as manufactured by Armstrong, Mercer Plastics Co., Inc., or approved equal. The type shall be as required by site conditions, as is the custom of the trade, and installation shall be made as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Adhesive: Provide adhesive as recommended by the carpet manufacturer. Provide adhesive which complies with flame spread rating required for the carpet installation, if any. M0 Smith Campus Center Carpet (Glue Down) 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09681-2 SECTION 09681 CARPET (GLUE DOWN) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the carpeting as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Carpet, glue down installation, including adhesive. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Concrete slab - Section 03300. B. Resilient base - Section 09660. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Firm with not less than five (5) years of experience in installation of commercial carpeting of type, quantity and installation methods similar to work of this Section. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm (carpet mill) with not less than five (5) years of production experience with carpet similar to types specified in this Section; and whose published product literature clearly indicates general compliance of products with requirements of this Section. C. General Terminology/ Information Standard: Refer to current edition of "Carpet Specifier's Handbook" by The Carpet and Rug Institute; for definitions of terminology not otherwise defined herein, and for general recommendations and information. D. Carpet used on Project must be from same dye lot for each carpet type. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's complete technical product data for each type of carpet and accessory item required. B. Shop Drawings: Submit carpet layout and seaming drawings, clearly indicating carpet directions, locations and methods of jointing seams and locations and types of edge strips. Indicate columns, doorways, enclosing wall/partitions, built-in cabinets and locations where cut-outs are required in carpet. C. Samples: Submit 18" x 27" samples of each carpet required and six (6) inches long samples of each type exposed edge stripping. D. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification stating that carpet materials furnished comply with specified requirements. 1. Include listing of mill register numbers for carpet furnished. Smith Campus Center Carpet (Glue Down) "" 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09681-1 0 eye I. Bases: In all spaces where base is indicated, install bases tight to walls, partitions, columns, built-in cabinets, etc., without gaps at top or bulges at bottom, with tight joints and flush edges, with molded corner pieces at internal and external corners. Provide end stops adjacent to flush type door frames and where base does not terminate against an adjacent surface. Keep base in full contact with walls until adhesive sets. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes from tile, using neutral type ► cleaners as recommended by the tile manufacturer. Protect installed flooring from damage by use of heavy Kraft paper or other covering. B. Finishing: After completion of the project and just prior to the final inspection of the work, thoroughly clean tile floors and accessories. Apply two (2) coats of wax and buff using materials as specified herein. END OF SECTION Am Am Smith Campus Center Resilient Tile Flooring ,m 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09660-4 ° 3.2 CONDITION OF SURFACES A. Allowable Variations in Substrate Levels (Floors): f 1/8" in 10'-0" distance and 1/4" total maximum variation from levels shown. B. Grind or fill concrete and masonry substrates as required to comply with allowable variation. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Etch concrete substrate as required to remove curing compounds or other substances that would interfere with proper bond of adhesive for tile. Rinse with water to remove all traces of treatment. B. Perform moisture tests on concrete slabs to determine that concrete surfaces are sufficiently cured and are ready to receive tile installation. C. Concrete Primer: Apply concrete slab primer if recommended by tile manufacturer, to prior to application of the adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions. 3.4 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES A. Allowable Tolerances in Finished Work: Do not exceed the following deviations from level and plumb, and from elevations, locations, slopes and alignment shown. 1. Floors: 1/8" in 10'- 0" run, any direction; 1/32" offset at any location. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. Install the only after all finishing operations, including painting, have been completed and permanent heating system is operating. Moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature and relative humidity must be within limits recommended by tile manufacturer. B. Place tile units with adhesive cement in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Butt tile units tightly to vertical surfaces, thresholds, nosings and edgings. Scribe around obstructions and to produce neat joints, laid tight, even and in straight, parallel lines. Extend tile units into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closet and similar openings. C. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on the finish tile as marked in the subfloor. Use chalk or other non-permanent marking devices. D. Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor off- sets, so that tile at opposite edges of the room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 1/2 tile at room perimeters. Lay the square to room axis, unless otherwise shown. E. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged. Cut tile neatly to and around all fixtures. Broken, cracked, chipped or deformed tile are not acceptable. r F. Tightly cement tile to sub-base without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks through tile, or other surface imperfections. G. Lay the with grain in all the running in the same direction. - H. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to tile and secure with adhesive. Provide edging strips at all unprotected edges of tile, unless otherwise shown. Smith Campus Center Resilient Tile Flooring '" 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09660-3 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS A. Continuously heat spaces to receive tile to a temperature of seventy (70) degrees F. for at least forty eight(48) hours prior to installation, whenever project conditions are such that heating is required. Maintain seventy (70) degrees F. temperature continuously during and after installation as recommended by the tile manufacturer, but for not less .� than forty eight (48) hours. Maintain a temperature of not less than fifty five (55) degrees F. in areas where work is completed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TILE A. Provide 12" x 12" x 1/8" thick vinyl composition tile conforming to ASTM F-1066, Composition 1, in colors as selected by the Architect, equal to "Standard Excelon" made by Armstrong, or equal made by Mannington, Tarkett, or approved equal. Provide tile units with uniformly distributed color and pattern throughout the thickness of tile. Variations in shades and off-pattern matches between containers is not acceptable. 2.2 BASE A. Provide 2 3/4" inches high, 1/8" thick, continuous vinyl, top set straight/flat base with pre-formed internal and external corner pieces,color as selected by the Architect. Base shall conform to Fed. Spec. SS-W40, Type H, as manufactured by Allstate, Flexco, Mercer Plastics,Armstrong,or approved equal. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesives: Waterproof, stabilized type, as recommended by the tile manufacturer for the type of service indicated. B. Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining type recommended by the tile manufacturer. C. Leveling Compound: Latex/Portland cement flash patching and leveling compound equal to No. 226 with 3701 admixture made by Laticrete or equal made by Mapei, H.B. Fuller or approved equal. D. Edging Strips: 1/8" thick, homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition, tapered or bullnose edge,color as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standards. E. Finish 1. Cleaner shall be equal to "Super Shine All" made by Hillyard Chemical Co., or approved equal. 2. Wax shall be equal to "Super Hil-Brite" made by Hillyard Chemical Co., or 4W approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION so 3.1 INSPECTION M" A. Examine the areas and conditions where resilient tile flooring is to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do Am Smith Campus Center Resilient Tile Flooring so 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09660-2 SECTION 09660 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the resilient tile flooring, as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but not limited to, the following: 1. Vinyl composition tile. 2. Vinyl base. 3. Transition strips. 4. Accessories. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Concrete slab - Section 03300. B. Gypsum board partitions - Section 09250. C. Carpeting - Section 09680. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installers: Use only personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required and completely familiar with the requirements established for this work. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: For information only, submit manufacturer's technical information and installation instructions for type of resilient tile. B. Samples 1. Submit full-size sample tiles for each type and color required, representative of the expected range of color and pattern variation. Sample submittals will be reviewed for color, texture and pattern only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. 2. Submit six(6) inch long samples of base and strips. 1.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to the project site in the manufacturer's original unopened containers, clearly marked to indicate pattern, gauge, lot number and sequence of materials. B. Carefully handle all materials and store in original containers at not less than seventy (70) degrees F. for at least forty eight (48) hours before start of installation. Smith Campus Center Resilient Tile Flooring """ 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09660-1 Vacuum clean and immediately apply finish. Do not permit traffic on floor after sanding and until finish is completed. Cover sanded floor with building paper to provide access for application of first finish coats. B. Immediately after proper sanding, tack rag with clean-up solvent. Apply one coat of sealer to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Allow to dry for 1-2 hours. After the sealer has thoroughly cured, tack rag surface with towel dampened with water. Apply not less than 2 coats of finish to comply with finish manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect completed wood flooring during remainder of construction period with heavy Kraft paper or other suitable covering, so that flooring and finish will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION ..» w w w 4M AM Smith Campus Center Wood Strip Flooring so 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09560-4 flooring. Provide wood stripping, nosings, saddles and thresholds, as indicated in or op adjacent to wood flooring, of same species, grade and cut as wood flooring. D. Vapor Barrier: Four (4) mils polyethylene. E. Mastic: Cut black asphalt type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where wood strip flooring is to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Wherever direct application of wood flooring to concrete substrate is indicated, test for dryness before proceeding with installation. If tests show dampness, do not proceed until slab is dry. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with flooring manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, but not less than recommended by MFMA in "Hardwood Flooring Installation Material". B. Pattern: Comply with pattern or direction of pattern for laying wood flooring, as shown on drawings. C. Expansion Space: Provide expansion space at walls and other obstructions and terminations of flooring, not less than 1/2". Fill expansion space with flush cork PR expansion strip. Nail shoe molding or other trim to baseboard, rather than to flooring. D. Provide treated wood sleepers, random-length 18" to 48", installed in rows, at right r angles to the longest dimension of the room or at a ninety (90) degree angle to the direction surface floor is to be laid. Sleepers shall be laid, with end joints staggered, in rows twelve (12) inches o.c. with ends lapped four (4) inches. Sleepers shall be dry — no excess residue of treatment chemical. Sleepers shall be imbedded in a bed of trowel applied cut-back asphalt floor mastic, leaving 3/4" space between sleepers and base plate of wall lines. A vapor barrier of four (4) mil polyethlylene film shall be laid loose on top of installed sleepers, with edges lapped 4-6", prior to installation of the surface floor. E. Install plywood over sleepers. Cover plywood with 15 lb. vapor barrier. F. Blind nail flooring to substrate spacing nails eight (8) inches o.c. in accordance with MFMA recommendations. G. Install counter sunk screws at each end of each piece, and spaced not more than k thirty two (32) inches along length of each piece, in addition to blind nailing. Cover screw heads with flush glued wood plugs. 3.4 SANDING AND FINISHING A. Machine sand installed unfinished flooring to remove offsets and non-level conditions, ridges, cups, and sanding machine marks which would be visually noticeable after finishing. Use three (3) grades of sandpaper, ending with 00 grade. Smith Campus Center Wood Strip Flooring "" 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09560-3 ow 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditioning: Do not proceed with installation of wood flooring until spaces have been enclosed and are at approximate humidity condition planned for occupancy. Condition wood for five (5) days prior to start of installation by placing in spaces to receive flooring and maintaining ambient temperature between 65 degrees F. and .. 70 degrees F. before, during and after installation. Open packages of wood flooring which are sealed to permit natural adjustment of moisture content. 1.8 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY .�. A. Submit three (3) year warranty signed by Manufacturer and Contractor agreeing to repair or replace wood flooring which shrinks, warps, cracks, or otherwise deteriorates excessively, or which breaks its anchorage or bond with substrate or ■* otherwise fails to perform as required, due to failures of materials and/or workmanship and not due to unusual exposure to moisture or other abusive forces or elements not anticipated for application. ..s PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood sleepers shall be Construction Grade Douglas Fir, pressure treated with water- borne preservatives complying with AWPB LP-2 (0.23 lbs./cu. ft. of chemical in wood); size sleepers to align wood strip flooring with adjacent finishes. After treatment, kiln dry to a maximum moisture content of 16%. Treatment shall be equal to "Wolmanized" made by Koppers, or approved equal. B. Wood strip flooring shall be Quarter Sawn, Select, White Maple (per MFMA grading 40 rules), 25/32" thick and 3-1/4" face width. Flooring strips shall be tongued-and- grooved and end-matched; back face of each strip shall be back channeled. Strips shall be standard random lengths, complying with grading rules. Wood shall be go kiln-dried. C. Underlayment: Provide APA Plywood Underlayment INT, with exterior glue; 3/4" thick unless otherwise shown. am 2.2 WOOD FIELD FINISHING A. Sealer: Pliable, penetrating type as recommended by finish manufacturer. .. B. Urethane Finish System: Complete system of compatible components that is recommended by finish manufacturer for application indicated. 1. Type: Moisture-cure, water-white, non-yellowing polyurethane. • 2. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products manufactured by BonaKemi Inc., Dura Seal Div. of Minwax Co., Hillyard Floor Treatments, or approved equal. .w 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Provide screw type flooring nails as recommended by MFMA in "Installation Manual". �* B. Cork Expansion Strip: Composition cork expansion strip FS HH—C-576, Type I—B, Class 2. C. Wood Trim: Where indicated to match wood flooring, provide wood base board molding, base shoe molding and stair risers of same species and grade as wood Smith Campus Center Wood Strip Flooring 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09560-2 SECTION 09560 WOOD STRIP FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the wood strip flooring, as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but not limited to, the following: 1. Wood strip flooring and base. 2. Sleepers and underlayment. 3. Field finishing of wood strip flooring. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Concrete slab - Section 03300. *" B. Carpentry - Section 06200. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Specialized wood flooring firm with not less than three (3) years successful experience in installation of types specified, and acceptable to manufacturer of wood flooring. B. General Standard: Comply with recommendations of Marble Flooring Manufacturer's Association (MFMA). C. Source Quality Control: Obtain flooring of each type from single manufacturer or source, to ensure match of quality, color, pattern and texture. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's detailed technical product data and installation instructions for each type of wood flooring. Include instructions for handling, storage, installation, finishing, protection and maintenance. B. Samples: Submit sets of range samples for wood flooring; include finish. 1. Provide three (3) 6" samples of base. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Moisture Content: At time of delivery, limit average moisture content of wood flooring to 12%, with 14% maximum for any piece. B. Protect wood flooring from excessive moisture in shipment, storage and handling. Deliver in unopened cartons or bundles and store in a dry place, with adequate air circulation. Do not deliver material to building until "wet work" such as concrete and plaster have been completed and cured to a condition of equilibrium. Smith Campus Center Wood Strip Flooring " 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09560-1 proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected to permit proper installation of the layout. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for inserts, clips, or other supports required to be installed by other trades for support of ceilings. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, approved shop drawings, approved integrated drawings, and to comply with governing regulations and industry standards. B. Install suspension systems to comply with ASTM C636, with hangers supported only from building structural members. Locate hangers not less than 6" from each end, leveling to tolerance of 1/8" in IT-0". Provide field punched or drilled holes required for suspension system support, as required by the manufacturer. C. Space hangers not more than 4'-0" o.c. along aluminum grid members; attach by clips or wire ties. D. Install edge moldings at edges of each acoustical ceiling area, and at locations where edge of acoustical units would otherwise be exposed after completion of the work. 1. Secure moldings to building construction by mechanically fastening through vertical leg in concealed locations. Space holes not more than 3" from each end and not more than sixteen (16) inches o.c. between end holes. Fasten tight against vertical surfaces. 2. Level moldings with ceiling suspension system, to a level tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0". Provide alignment of molding seams with all other adjacent components and construction by other as shown on drawings. Tightly mitre all facetted members. E. Install acoustical units in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed. F. Light fixtures or other ceiling apparatus shall not be supported from main beams or cross tees if their weight causes the total load to exceed the deflection capability of the ceiling suspension system. In such cases the load shall be supported by supplemental hangers furnished and installed by this Section of work. G. Where fixture or ceiling apparatus installation causes eccentric loading on runners, provide stabilizer bars to prevent rotation. H. Bottom point of inverted dome must be at the elevation defined on the drawings. No deviation from the alignment of the bottom of the dome with adjacent finished construction will be permitted. Coordinate rise of dome with all other overall dimensions and elevations prior to fabrication/installation. 3.4 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge molding, and suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Suspended Fabric Ceiling System 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09511-5 ow will be straight and true with no visible deviations when panels are butted side by side. Edges must be in alignment with the panel face and concealed from view. Soft or non-framed edge treatments are not acceptable. Each panel shall have a vapor barrier backing sufficient to prevent air transfer through the surface. Panel deflection, when installed, shall not exceed 0.27% of the span. All panels shall be clearly text marked with the project I.D. number, panel number, location code and quantity of units per size and correspond to shop drawings where supplied. 3. Finish shall be CLARO — acoustically transparent textured coating — white. This finish shall be applied over panel face and edges with fully concealed metal edges. All finishes shall be tested for suitability and approved for use by the panel manufacturer prior to fabrication. 4. Mounting shall be by means of Decoustics torsion springs mechanically fastened to the panels and received into the Ceilencio connectors and aluminum grid members. Grid shall be factory curved to match panels. When installed the grid members shall be completely concealed with a tight Butt Joint maintained at all panel edges. All panel and system hardware shall be of mill finish aluminum. All panels are to be individually, downward accessible. Provide secondary grid members where required to permit penetrating elements to be located at apparent grid intersections as shown on reflected ceiling drawings. 5. Panels shall have noise reduction coefficient values of the following when tested in accordance with Section 1.03 of this specification. Hz 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC Ceilencio 0.67 0.97 0.76 1.00 1.02 0.98 0.95 6. Provide all shimming and adjustments required to maintain consistent alignment of joints and finished panel faces. 7. Panels shall have a flame spread of 25 or less per ASTM E-84. 2.2 SUPPORT SYSTEM A. The suspension system shall support the ceiling assembly shown on the drawings and specified herein, with a maximum deflection of 1/360 of the span, in accordance with ASTM C635. B. Hangers shall be 12 ga. galvanized wire hangers. C. Provide ceiling clips and inserts to receive hangers, type as recommended by suspension system manufacturer, sizes for pull-out resistance of not less than five (5) times the hanger design load, as indicated in ASTM C635. D. Suspension systems shall conform to ASTM C635, intermediate duty. E. For facetted ceiling or trim construction, tightly mitre all intersections of panels and trim as required to meet the design and as shown on drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas where special ceilings are to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not Smith Campus Center Suspended Fabric Ceiling System 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09511-4 - 1.7 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver panels and related components to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination or other causes. go B. Before installing panels and related components, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content for a minimum of 24 hours. C. Handle panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. D. Handling of panels shall be done only with clean gloves to prevent soiling. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until wet-work and dust generating trades in space are completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings has been completed, and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of suspended fabric panels and suspension system components with other work supported by or penetrating through ceilings, including light fixtures, structural steel, exhaust fan ductwork, roof drains, storm drain piping, HVAC equipment, fire suppression system components, and partition system. 1.10 EXTRA STOCK A. Extra Stock: Deliver stock of maintenance material to Owner. Furnish maintenance material matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels. 1. Furnish quantity of full size units of each type equal to 2.0% of amount installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL ABSORPTIVE CEILING PANELS A. Provide prefabricated acoustical ceiling systems as described in this section for ► installation in areas as shown on drawings meeting or exceeding the following requirements: 1. The ceiling system shall be Ceilencio Custom, Defined Joint individually downward accessing acoustical panels, as manufactured by Decoustics Ltd. (800) 387-3809; no substitutes. 2. The flat and curved panels shall be type MENATT constructed of I layer 6 to 7 lb./cu. ft. density semi rigid glass fibre core finished as detailed in this section. The board shall be free of surface defects and sanded as required to a uniform thickness which will not vary by more than 0.010 inches. The boards shall be fabricated to sizes and radius dimensions required by field dimensions and will not vary from determined sizes by more than 0.020 inches vertically, horizontally, and corner to corner. The boards shall be fabricated to sizes using a CAD/CAM (CIM) Robotics cutting system to ensure accurate panel core dimensions to a tolerance of 0.020 inches. Edges shall be of concealed, mill finish aluminum and shall be factory pre-curved to radius shown on drawings with adequate web thickness to withstand moderate impact during installation and ongoing maintenance. Edges shall be designed to be fixed to the core and Smith Campus Center Suspended Fabric Ceiling System 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09511-3 2. ASTM C636 "Standard Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels", American Society for Testing and Materials. 3. ASTM E84 for fire performance standards. 4. ASTM C423 and E795 for acoustic performance. D. In addition to suspension system specified, provide additional supports to meet seismic standards as required by prevailing Codes and Ordinances. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to shop drawing preparation, obtain all approved submittals for other related trades performing work in the ceiling system, and adjacent to the ceiling system so that other components can be properly integrated and shown on ceiling system shop drawings. B. Shop Drawings: Submit completely dimensioned ceiling layouts based on integrated drawings for all areas where fabric ceiling systems are required, showing: 1. Any deviations from Architect's reflected ceiling plan layouts, especially lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers and other devices and dimensions. Also indicate if any light fixtures will not fit into Architect's ceiling layout due to ... dimensional restrictions of field conditions. 2. Direction and spacing of suspension members and location of hangers for carrying suspension members. 3. Sizes and types of acoustical units, showing suspension members, and starting point for each individual ceiling area. 4. Moldings at perimeter of ceiling, at columns and elsewhere as required due to penetrations or exposure at edge of ceiling tiles. 5. Location and direction of lights, air diffusers, air slots, and other items in the ceiling plane. 6. Details of construction and installation at all conditions. 7. Materials, gauges, thickness and finishes. 8. Must show all interfaces with all adjacent materials/finishes being provided/installed by others taking into account all pertinent alignments or other requirements of the Architectural Drawings. C. Samples and Product Literature: Submit the following fully labeled samples and related manufacturer's descriptive literature. 1. Three (3) sets of twelve (12) inch long components of suspension systems, including moldings. 2. Acoustical units in exact finishes to be provided for all installation requirements as shown on the drawings (flat and curved). Samples shall be original production material. D. Certification: Submit a certificate of compliance verifying acoustical and fire performance signed by the manufacturer with independent test results for each product used. 1.6 MOCK-UPS A. Only after small samples are approved, provide a full size mock-up on-site of a 3' x 3' area of the inverted dome area showing an intermediate intersection of panel and an end of panel in the exact sizes/shapes/finishes to be provided, for approval by the Architect. No work is to proceed without mock-up approval in writing by the Architect. Smith Campus Center Suspended Fabric Ceiling System 100% Construction Documents: 0 1.1 1.12 09511-2 SECTION 09511 " SUSPENDED FABRIC CEILING SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the suspended fabric ceiling system as shown on the drawings and specified herein, including but not limited to, the following: ? " 1. Fiberglass core suspended acoustic panels of sizes as shown on drawings. 2. Suspension system, including hangers and inserts. 3. Provisions for the installation of lighting fixtures, tracks, diffusers, grilles, r speakers, sprinklers, smoke detectors, security devices, and similar items provided under other Sections at locations shown on reflected ceiling plans and related M.E.P. drawings. 4. Cutting, drilling, scribing and fitting as required for electro-mechanical penetrations. 5. Perimeter and column moldings, trim and accessories for acoustical ceilings. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Drywall ceilings - Section 09250. B. Diffusers, grilles and related frames - Division 15. C. Fire protection - Division 15. D. Lighting fixtures - Division 16. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with all pertinent recommendations published by the Ceilings and Interior Systems Contractor's Association. B. Qualifications of Installers 1. The suspended ceiling subcontractor shall have a record of successfully installations of similar ceilings acceptable to Architect and shall be currently approved by the manufacturer of the ceiling suspension system. 2. For the actual fabrication and installation of all components of the system, use !' only personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required and completely familiar with the requirements established for this work. C. The work is subject to applicable portions of the following standards: 1. ASTM C635 "Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings", American Society for Testing and r Materials. Smith Campus Center Suspended Fabric Ceiling System 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09511-1 touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 4 40 on Smith Campus Center Acoustic Panel Ceilings '"'" 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09510-5 am 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for inserts, clips, or other supports required to be installed by other trades for support of acoustical ceilings. B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less-than-half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Codes and Standards: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, and to comply with governing regulations and industry standards. B. Install suspension systems to comply with ASTM C636, with hangers supported only from building structural members. Locate hangers not less than 6" from each end and spaced 4'-0" along direct-hung runner, leveling to tolerance of 1/8" in 12% 0". ..r. C. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structure or to inserts, eye-screws, or other devices which are secure and appropriate for substrate, and which will not deteriorate or fail with age or elevated temperatures. 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum which are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal force by bracing, reinforcing, countersplaying or other equally effective means. D. Install edge moldings at edges of each acoustical ceiling area, and at locations where edge of acoustical units would otherwise be exposed after completion of the work. 1. Secure moldings to building construction by fastening through vertical leg. Space holes not more than 3" from each end and not more than sixteen (16) inches o.c. between end holes. Fasten tight against vertical surfaces. 2. Level moldings with ceiling suspension system, to a level tolerance of 1/8" in 121-051. E. Install acoustical units in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations. F. Light fixtures or other ceiling apparatus shall not be supported from main beams or cross tees if their weight causes the total load to exceed the deflection capability of the ceiling suspension system. In such cases the load shall be supported by supplemental hangers furnished and installed by this Section of work. G. Where fixture or ceiling apparatus installation causes eccentric loading on runners, provide stabilizer bars to prevent rotation. H. At ceiling mechanical grilles which are scheduled at 12" x 24" nominal, provide an .� additional cross tee to bisect the ceiling unit; provide tees punched at 12" in these locations. Provide tile manufactured 12" x 24"; or field cut a regress on one side of a cut tile, to fill the outer half of the ceiling unit, and paint exposed under material .� white to match tile surface. 3.4 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge molding, and suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and Smith Campus Center Acoustic Panel Ceilings 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09510-4 1.9 EXTRA STOCK r A. Extra Stock: Deliver stock of maintenance material to Owner. Furnish maintenance material matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full size units equal to 2.0% of amount installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Provide 7/8" thick, 24" x 24" wet-formed mineral fiber panels; Cirrus 75 Series, ON No. 558 with beveled tegular edge, as manufactured by Armstrong. Panels shall have factory applied vinyl latex paint finish with light reflectance value of 0.83. Panels shall meet Fed. Spec. SS-S-118, Class 25, with a UL flame spread rating of u 0-25. Panels shall have an NRC value of 0.75 or better and a CAC minimum of 35. B. In kitchen provide 5/8" thick 24" x 48" wet formed mineral fiber panels with vinyl membrane face equal to "Clean Room VL, Non-Perforated No. 870" by Armstrong World Industries. Panels shall have Type IV, Form 2, Pattern per ASTM E1264 Classifications. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Provide narrow grid 9/16" screw slotted type; interlude series suspension system, extruded aluminum, with low sheen white baked enamel finish; "Trimlok Screw Slot System" made by Armstrong. 1. Grid for kitchen the shall be Prelude XL 15/16". B. The suspension system shall support the ceiling assembly shown on the drawings and specified herein, with a maximum deflection of 1/360 of the span, in accordance with ASTM C635. C. Provide minimum 12 ga. galvanized wire hangers, soft annealed steel conforming to ASTM A641, prestretched, Class 1 coating, size so that stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM c635, Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire. D. Provide ceiling clips and inserts to receive hangers, type as recommended by suspension system manufacturer, sizes for pull-out resistance of not less than five (5) times the hanger design load, as indicated in ASTM C635. E. Suspension systems shall conform to ASTM C635, intermediate duty. " F. Provide Shadow Molding edge molding by Armstrong, white in color, with main and cross tees bearing on the bottom leg which shall be 9/16" wide and provide a 3/8" reveal at the wall surface. For circular penetrations of ceilings, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas where acoustic panel ceilings are to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected to permit proper installation of the layout. Smith Campus Center Acoustic Panel Ceilings ` "' 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09510-3 MR E. Coordinate ceiling grid layout and support with all equipment above or penetrating acoustical ceilings and with Architect's drawings. Notify Architect of any problems or conditions where the system may not be installed as drawn graphically, before ordering material affected, and before commencing installation. 1.5 SUBNHTTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit completely dimensioned ceiling layouts for all areas where acoustical ceilings are required, showing: 1. Any deviations from Architect's reflected ceiling plan layouts, especially lighting fixture and dimensions. Also indicate if any light fixtures will not fit into Architect's ceiling layout due to dimensional restrictions of field conditions. 2. Direction and spacing of suspension members and location of hangers for carrying suspension members. 3. Direction, sizes and types of acoustical units, showing suspension grid members, and starting point for each individual ceiling area. 4. Edge moldings at perimeter of ceiling, at columns and elsewhere as required due to penetrations or exposure at edge of ceiling tiles. 5. Location and direction of lights, air diffusers, air slots, and similar items in the , ceiling plane. 6. Details of construction and installation at all conditions. 7. Materials, gauges, thickness and finishes. B. Samples and Product Literature: Submit the following samples and related manufacturer's descriptive literature. 1. Twelve (12) inch long components of suspension systems, including moldings. 2. Acoustical units— full size. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination or other causes. B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings has been completed, and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with other work supported by or penetrating through ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire suppression system components, and partition system. Smith Campus Center Acoustic Panel Ceilings 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09510-2 SECTION 09510 W ACOUSTIC PANEL CEILINGS PART1 GENERAL t~ 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the acoustic panel ceilings as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but not limited to, the following: 1. Acoustical units. 2. Grid screw slotted "T" suspension system, including hangers and inserts. 3. Provisions for the installation of lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles and similar items provided under other Sections. 4. Cutting, drilling, scribing and fitting as required for electro-mechanical penetrations. 5. Perimeter and column moldings, trim and accessories for acoustical ceilings. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Drywall ceilings - Section 09250. B. Diffusers, grilles and related frames - Division 15. C. Lighting fixtures - Division 16. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with all pertinent recommendations published by the Ceilings and Interior Systems Contractor's Association. B. Qualifications of Installers 1. The suspended ceiling subcontractor shall have a record of successfully installations of similar ceilings acceptable to Architect and shall be currently approved by the manufacturer of the ceiling suspension system. 2. For the actual fabrication and installation of all components of the system, use only personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills !R required and completely familiar with the requirements established for this work. C. The work is subject to applicable portions of the following standards: 1. ASTM C635 "Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings", American Society for Testing and Materials. 2. ASTM C636 "Standard Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels", American Society for Testing and Materials. D. In addition to suspension system specified, provide additional supports to meet seismic standards as required by New York City Code, Local law 17 —95. Smith Campus Center Acoustic Panel Ceilings 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09510-1 4M no B. Alignment: Base and floor joints shall align through the field and trim. direction and location of all joints as directed by the Architect. C. Provide expansion joints where tile abuts restraining surfaces and directly over joints in structural floor. Install expansion joints in accordance with TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation". 3.5 INSTALLATION A. Allowable Variations in finished Work: Do not exceed the following deviations from level and plumb, and from elevations, locations, slopes and alignment shown. 1. Floors: 1/8" in 10'-0" run, any direction; +\-1/8" at any location; 1/32" offset at any location. 2. Joints: +1/32" joint width variation of any location; 1/16" in 3'-0" run deviation from plumb and true. B. Comply with the ANSI standard installation specifications A108.1 and A108.10 and TCA Detail F-121. Provide minimum temperature limits and installation practices as recommended by mortar and grout materials manufacturers. C. Extend tile work into recesses and under equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions, except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and corners without disruption of pattern or joint alignments. D. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for the mixing and installation of .. materials. E. Neutralize and seal substrates in accordance with the mortar manufacturer's instructions. F. Lay tile on grid pattern. align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center the fields both directions in each space or on each wall area. Provide uniform joint widths. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION OF QUARRY TILE A. Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all quarry tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. Tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but not sooner than 14 days after installation. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning. B. Apply to all clean completed tile a protective coating of neutral cleaner solution, 1 part cleaner to 1 part water. C. Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded or otherwise defective tile work. D. Protect installed tile work with Kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent damage and wear. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using tiled floors for at least 3 days after grouting is completed. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. END OF SECTION •� .rf Smith Campus Center Quarry Tile 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09330-4 in writing, that adhesive and primer used are proper types for the intended tile types and application. Conform to TCA Detail W-202. 2. Over masonry and concrete use a mortar leveling coat followed by a Dry-Set Latex modified Portland Cement Bond Coat conforming to TCA Detail W- 211. I. Floor Tile - Mud Set: Set floor tile using latex modified Portland Cement bond coat conforming to TCA Detail F-121. J. Grout: Laticrete Latapoxy SP 100 Stain Proof Grout made by Laticrete International or equal made by Boiardi Products, H.B. Fuller or approved equal; custom color as selected by the Architect. K. Physical Properties: The setting beds and grouts must meet the following physical requirements: y 1. Compressive Strength - 3000 psi min. 2. Shear Bond Strength - 500 psi min. 3. Water Absorption - 4.0% max. 4. Service Rating (ASTM C-627) - Extra Heavy Duty. 2.3 SEALANT AND ACCESSORIES A. Joint Backing: Preformed, compressible, resilient, non-extruding, non-staining strips of foam neoprene, foam polyethylene or other material recommended by sealant manufacturer. B. Sealant: Two part polyurethane sealant, self-leveling, conforming to Fed. Spec. TT-S-00227E, Class A, Type 1, equal to "THE/900" made by Tremco or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONDITION OF SURFACES A. Examine the areas and conditions where quarry tile is to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 CONDITION OF SURFACES A. Allowable Variations in Substrate Levels 1. Floors: +/-1/8" in 10'-0" distance and 1/4" total maximum variation from levels shown. B. Grind or fill concrete substrates as required to comply with allowable variations. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Etch concrete substrate as may be required to remove curing compounds or other substances that would interfere with proper bond of setting bed. Rinse with water to remove all traces of treatment. B. Seal substrate with sealer as recommended by manufacturer of mortar or adhesive. 3.4 JOINTS IN TILE WORK A. Joint Widths: 1/4" wide in quarry tile. Smith Campus Center Quarry Tile 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09330-3 .. .w 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage 1. Deliver all materials of this Section to the job site in their original unopened containers with all labels intact and legible at time of use. 2. Store all materials under cover in a manner to prevent damage and contamination; store only the specified materials at the job site. B. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during and after installation to protect the installed work of all other trades. C. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary. w 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations. B. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide buildup. C. Maintain temperatures at not less than fifty (50) degrees F in tiled areas during installation and for seven (7) days after completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS M 2.1 THE A. Provide the manufactured by American-Olean, United States Ceramic Tile Co., Summitville Tiles Inc., or approved equal meeting these specifications. The Architect reserves the right to pick tile from any price group. B. Tile shall be 6" x 6" x 1/2" thick square edge, in colors as selected by the Architect. C. Provide trim, cove base and special shapes as required for complete installation of same material, size, color and finish of field tile. ^ 2.2 SETTING BED AND GROUT A. All products shall be factory prepared; there shall be no on-site mixing of Portland .. cement and sand. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. D. Sand: ASTM C 144, clean and graded natural sand. E. Reinforcing: 2" x 2" x 16/16 gauge galvanized welded wire mesh. F. Latex Additive: Equal to Laticrete 211 Crete Filler Powder gauged with Laticrete 4237 additive as manufactured by Laticrete or equal made by Mapei, H.B. Fuller, or approved equal. G. Waterproof Membrane: Laticrete 9235 or approved equal. H. Base Tile 1. Over drywall use ANSI A136.1-1967 Organic Adhesive for installation of .� Ceramic Tile, Type 1. Shear strength shall be 50 psi minimum. Adhesive primer as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. Manufacturer shall certify, Smith Campus Center Quarry Tile 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09330-2 SECTION 09330 QUARRY TILE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the quarry tile as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Quarry tile floor and matching base at kitchen and student kitchen. 2. Setting beds, grout, sealant and waterproof membrane. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Concrete slab - Section 03300. B. Masonry - Section 04200. C. Drywall - Section 09250. D. Ceramic tile - Section 09310. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installers: For cutting, installing and grouting of quarry tile, use only thoroughly trained and experienced journeyman tile setters who are completely familiar with the requirements of this work and the recommendations contained in the referenced standards. B. Codes and Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with the following: 1. Manufacture all quarry tile in accordance with Standard Grade Requirements of ANSI 137.1. 2. Install all quarry tile in accordance with the recommendations contained in Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation of the Tile Council of America, Inc., latest edition. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Samples 1. Before any quarry tile is delivered to the job site, submit to the Architect sample panels, approx. 12" x 12", mounted on hardboard back-up for each color and pattern of quarry tile specified. B. Master Grade Certificates: Prior to opening quarry the containers, submit to the Architect a Master Grade Certificate, signed by an officer of the firm manufacturing the tile used, and issued when the shipment is made, stating the grade, kind of tile, identification marks for the containers, and the name and location of the project. C. Submit independent test reports indicating that setting beds and grout conform to the physical requirements specified herein. Smith Campus Center Quarry Tile ' '" 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09330-1 C. Handle, store, mix and apply setting and grouting materials in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. D. Comply with the ANSI standard installation specifications A108.1 and A108.10 and TCA Detail F-121. Provide minimum temperature limits and installation practices as recommended by mortar and grout materials manufacturers. E. Extend tile work into recesses and under equipment and fixtures, to form a complete covering without interruptions. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and corners without disruption of pattern or joint alignment. F. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish,or built- in items for straight, aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping and fixtures so that plates,collars,or covers overlap tile. G. Lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor,base, walls and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center the fields both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION OF CERAMIC TILE A. Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but not sooner than 14 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning. B. Apply to all clean completed tile walls and floors a protective coating of neutral cleaner solution, 1 part cleaner to 1 part water. C. Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded or otherwise defective tile work. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Ceramic Tile 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09310-5 am OMM D. Sealant: One-part silicone base sealant, conforming to Fed. Spec. TT-S-00230C. Sealant hardness upon full cure shall be between 20-30 Shore "A" Durometer. Color of No sealant to blend with or match adjacent materials, and as selected by the Architect. Sealant shall be equivalent to 1700 Sanitary Sealant made by General Electric or approved equal. am PART 3 EXECUTION WX 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where ceramic tile is to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not oft proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. Aft 3.2 CONDITION OF SURFACES A. Allowable Variations in Substrate Levels 1. Floors: + 1/8" in 10'-0" distance and 1/4" total max. variation from levels shown. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Etch concrete substrate as may be required to remove curing compounds or other .� substances that would interfere with proper bond of setting bed. Rinse with water to remove all traces of treatment. B. Seal substrate with sealer as recommended by manufacturer of mortar or adhesive. .. 3.4 JOINTS IN TILE WORK A. Joint Widths: 1/16" wide in ceramic tile. B. Control Joints: Locate where control joints are in back-up material. Provide control joint at joints between mop receptors and ceramic tile. Provide control joint at all vertical internal joints of wall tile. Control joints 1/8" wide in ceramic tile. Fill all *�* control joints with specified backing and sealant. Use bond breaker where sufficient space for joint backing does not exist. 1. Provide sealant between ceramic tile and plumbing fixtures, mirrors, pipes, ..� countertops and other dissimilar materials penetrating or adjacent to ceramic tile. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. Comply with the following installation standards 1. Wall tile over drywall using organic adhesive-ANSI A108.4 and A108.10. 2. Floor tile using dry set mortar-ANSI A108.5 and A108.10. B. Allowable Variations in finished Work. Do not exceed the following deviations from level and plumb, and from elevations, locations, slopes and alignment shown. 1. Floors: 1/8" in 10'-0" run, any direction; +/- 1/8" at any location; 1/32" offset at any location. 2. Walls: 1/8" in 8'-0" run, any direction; 1/8" at any location; offset at any location, 1/32". 3. Joints: +/- 1/32"joint width variation of any location; 1/16" in 3'-0" run deviation from plumb and true. Smith Campus Center Ceramic Tile 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09310-4 .. B. Tile Type 2: Wall Tile 1. Provide vitreous, 3"x6"xl/4" Field Tile, "Rittenhouse Square", gloss glazed. The Architect reserves the right to pick tile color up to and including Price Group 3. C. Tile Type 3: Wall Tile 1. Provide vitreous, 2"x2"xl/4" Mosaic Tile, "Permabrites", gloss glazed, in color as selected by the Architect. 2.3 TRIM AND SPECIAL SHAPES A. Provide external and internal corners, trim shapes at openings, and all other trim and special shapes to match the tile specified herein, as required by field conditions and drawing details. 2.4 SETTING BEDS AND GROUT A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. C. Sand: ASTM C144, clean and graded natural sand. D. Latex Additive: As manufactured by Laticrete,Mapei,H.B. Fuller or approved equal. E. Wall Tile 1. Over drywall use ANSI A136.1-1967 Organic Adhesive for installation of Ceramic Tile, Type 1. Shear strength shall be 50 psi minimum. Adhesive primer as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. Manufacturer shall certify, in writing, that adhesive and primer used are proper types for the intended tile types and application. Conform to TCA Detail W-242. F. Floor Tile—Mud Set: 1. Set floor tile using latex modified Portland Cement bond coat conforming to Tile Council of America(TCA) Detail F-121. G. Water: Clean, fresh and suitable for drinking. H. Grout 1. For grouting ceramic tile, provide a commercial Portland cement grout made by Laticrete, Mapei, or approved equal; color as selected by the Architect. Add latex additive to grout made by same manufacturer as grout. 2.5 SEALANT A. Joint Backing: Preformed, compressible, resilient, non-extruding, non-staining strips of foam neoprene, foam polyethylene, or other material recommended by sealant manufacturer. B. Bond Breaker: Polyethylene tape, 3 mils thick, or other material recommended by sealant manufacturer. C. Sealant Primer: Colorless, non-staining, or type to suit substrate surface, as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Smith Campus Center Ceramic Tile 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09310-3 I. At an area on the site where approved by the Architect, provide a mock-up ceramic tile installation. a. Make the mock-up approximately 3'-0"x 3'-0"in dimension. b. Provide one mock-up for each type, class, and color of installation required under this Section. 4. C. The mock-ups may be used as part of the Work, and may be included in the finished Work,when so approved by the Architect. d. Revise as necessary to secure the Architect's approval. 2. The mock-ups, when approved by the Architect, will be used as datum for comparison with the remainder of the work of this Section for the purposes of acceptance or rejection. 3. If the mock-up panels are not permitted to be part of the finished Work, completely demolish and remove them from the job site upon completion and acceptance of the work of this Section. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage 1. Deliver all materials of this Section to the job site in their original unopened containers with all labels intact and legible at time of use. 2. Store all materials under cover in a manner to prevent damage and contamination; store only the specified materials at the job site. . � B. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. C. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations. B. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide buildup. C. Maintain temperatures at not less than 50 deg. F. (10 deg. C.) in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS OF TILE A. Provide tile manufactured by Dal-Tile Corp. 2.2 TILE A. Tile Type 1: Floor Tile 1. Provide porcelain type ceramic mosaic floor tile, I" x 1" x 1/4" thick, with all purpose edge in size. The Architect reserves the right to pick tile color up to and low including Price Group 3. 2. Tile to have water absorption not to exceed 0.5%. AM Smith Campus Center Ceramic Tile 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09310-2 SECTION 09310 CERAMIC TILE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. 0" 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the ceramic tile as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Ceramic glazed wall tile. 2. Ceramic mosaic floor tile. 3. Setting beds,grout,and sealant. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Gypsum drywall—Section 09250. B. Quarry tile - Section 09330. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of installers: For cutting, installing and grouting of ceramic tile, use only thoroughly trained and experienced journeyman tile setters who are completely familiar with the requirements of this work, and the recommendations contained in the referenced standards. B. Codes and standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with the following: 1. Manufacture all ceramic tile in accordance with Standard Grade Requirements of ANSI 137.1. 2. Install all ceramic tile in accordance with the recommendations contained in Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation of the Tile Council of America, Inc., latest edition. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Samples 1. Before any ceramic tile is delivered to the job site, submit to the Architect sample panels, approx. 12" x 12", mounted on hardboard back-up with selected grout color for each color and pattern of ceramic tile and grout specified. 7 B. Master Grade Certificates: Prior to opening ceramic tile containers, submit to the Architect a Master Grade Certificate, signed by an officer of the firm manufacturing the ceramic tile used, and issued when the shipment is made, stating the grade, kind of tile, identification marks for tile containers, and the name and location of the project. C. Mock-ups Smith Campus Center Ceramic Tile 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09310-1 C. After topping compound is set, a finishing coat of topping compound shall be spread evenly over and extending slightly beyond the fill coat on all joints and feathered to a smooth, uniform finish. Over tapered edges, the finished joint shall not protrude beyond the plane of the surface. All taped angles shall receive a finish coat to cover the tape and taping compound, and provide a true angle. Where necessary, sanding shall be done between coats and following the final application of compound to provide a smooth surface,ready for painting. D. Fastener Depressions: Taping compound shall be applied to all fastener depressions followed, when hardened by at least two (2) coats of topping compound, leaving all depressions level with the plane of the surface. E. Finishing Beads and Trim: Taping compound shall be applied to all bead and trim and shall be feathered out from the ground to the plane of the surface. When hardened, this shall be followed by two(2)coats of topping compound each extending slightly beyond the previous coat. The finish coat shall be feathered from the ground to the plane of the �AMr surface and sanded as necessary to provide a flat, smooth surface ready for decoration. F. Drywall construction with defects of such character which will mar appearance of finished work, or which is otherwise defective, will be rejected and shall be removed and replaced at no expense to the Owner. 3.9 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT A. At the completion of installation of the work, all rubbish shall be removed from the building leaving floors broom clean. Excess material, scaffolding, tools and other equipment shall be removed from the building. B. Work shall be left in clean condition ready for painting or wall covering. All work shall be as approved by Architect. 00 C. Cutting and Repairing: Include all cutting, fitting and repairing of the work included herein in connection with all mechanical trades and all other trades which come in conjunction with any part of the work, and leave all work complete and perfect after all trades have completed their work. 3.10 PROTECTION OF WORK A. Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures for protecting drywall work ' from damage and deterioration during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Gypsum Drywall and Framing Accessories 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09250-13 1 joints staggered and attached with 1-5/8" Type S screws staggered from those in base, spaced eight(8) inches o.c. and driven into studs. E. Wallboard Installation (Where Both Sides of Shaft Wall are Finished): Apply gypsum wallboard face layers vertically both sides of studs. Stagger joints on opposite partition sides. Fasten panels with one(1) inch or two(2)inches Type S screws spaced eight(8) *+ inches o.c. in field and along edges into studs. F. Cants: Provide one (1) inch thick shaft wall liner, cut to suit condition, at beams and other projections wider than two (2) inches in elevator shafts. Cants shall slope seventy five (75) degrees from the horizontal. Screw attach shaft wall liner to the vertical metal studs. G. Support elevator hoistway door frames independently of drywall shaft framing system, or reinforce system in accordance with system manufacturer's instructions. H. Where handrails are indicated for direct attachment to drywall shaft system, provide *► not less than a sixteen (16) ga. x eight (8) inches wide galvanized steel reinforcement strip, accurately positioned and secured to studs and concealed behind not less than one 1/2"thick course of gypsum board in the system. I. Integrate stair hanger rods with drywall shaft system by locating cavity of system as required to enclose rods. 3.7 ERECTION AT COLUMN ENCLOSURES A. Metal furring supports shall be provided under work of this Section, and shall be cut to lengths as necessary for tight fit such that spacing is not more than sixteen (16) inches .,. O.C. B. Board shall be fastened securely to supports with screws as specified. Place boards in position with minimum amount of joints. Where free ends occur between supports, Im back-blocking or furring shall be required. Center abutting ends over supports. Correct work as necessary so that faces of boards are flush, smooth and true. Provide clips or cross furring for attachment as required. C. All layers shall be screw attached to furring. D. When column finish called for on drawings to be in the same plane as drywall finish layer, maintain even, level plane. 3.8 FINISHING A. Taping: A thin, uniform layer of taping compound shall be applied to all joints and .M angles to be reinforced. Reinforcing tape shall be applied immediately, centered over the joint, seated into the compound. A skim coat shall follow immediately, but shall not function as a fill or second coat. Tape shall be properly folded and embedded in all angles to provide a true angle. B. Filling: After taping compound has hardened, topping compound shall be applied, filling the board taper flush with the surface. The fill coat shall cover the tape and feather out slightly beyond the tape. On joints with no taper, the fill coat shall cover the tape and feather out at least four(4) inches on either side of the tape. No fill coat is necessary on interior angles. ow Smith Campus Center Gypsum Drywall and Framing Accessories 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09250-12 �*► D. Level main runners to a tolerance of 1/4" in 12'-0", measured both lengthwise on each runner and transversely between parallel runners. E. Metal Furring Channels: Space sixteen (16) inches o.c. maximum. Attach to 1-1/2" main runner channels with furring channel clips (on alternate sides of main runner channels) or with two (2) strands of sixteen (16) ga. galvanized soft steel tie wire (saddle tied to main runner channel). Furring channels shall not be let into or come in contact with abutting masonry walls. End splices shall be provided by nesting furring channels no less than eight (8) inches and securely wire tying. At any openings that interrupt the furring channels, install additional cross reinforcing to restore lateral stability. F. Mechanical accessories, hangers, splices, runner channels and other members used in op suspension system shall be of metal, zinc coated, or coated with rust inhibitive paint, of suitable design of adequate strength to support units securely without sagging, and such as to bring unit faces to finished indicated lines and levels. 1. Provide special furring where ducts are over two (2) feet wide. G. Apply board with its long dimension at right angles to channels. Locate board butt joints over center of furring channels. Attach board with one (1) inch self-drilling drywall screws twelve (12) inches o.c. in field of board; eight (8) inches o.c. at butt joints located not less than 3/8" from edges. 3.6 SHAFT WALLS A. Runner Installation: Use "J" metal runners at floor and ceiling, with the short leg toward finish side of wall. Securely attach runners to structural supports with power- driven fasteners at both ends and twenty four(24) inches o.c. B. Shaft Wall Liner: Cut shaft wall liner panels one (1) inch less from floor to ceiling height and erect vertically between J-runners. C. C-H Studs: Cut metal "C-H" studs 3/8" to not more than 1/2" less than floor to ceiling height and install between shaft wall liner panels so that panels are fitted snugly into the one (1) inch wide "H" portion of the stud. Space studs twenty four(24)inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Install full-length steel E-Studs or runners vertically at T-intersections, corners, door jambs, and columns. Install full length E- 40 Studs over shaft wall liner both sides of closure panels. Frame openings cut within a liner panel with J-Runner around perimeter. For openings, frame with vertical E-Stud or runner at edges, horizontal runner at head and sill, and reinforcing as shown on the No drawings. Suitably frame all openings to maintain structural support for wall. Install floor-to-ceiling steel E-Studs each side of elevator door frames to act as strut-studs. Attach strut-stud to floor and ceiling runners with two (2) 3/8" Type S screws, space twelve (12) inches o.c. Over metal doors, install a cut to length section of runner and attach to strut-studs with clip angles and 3/8" Type S Screws space twelve (12) inches O.C. D. Wallboard Installation-Double Layer Installation: Erect gypsum wallboard base layer horizontally one side of studs with end joints staggered. Fasten base layer panels to studs with one (1) inch Type S screws twenty four (24) inches o.c. Caulk perimeter of Irk base layer panels. Apply gypsum wallboard face layer vertically over base layer with Smith Campus Center Gypsum Drywall and Framing Accessories 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09250-11 on 5. At locations where piping receptacles, conduit, switches, etc., penetrate drywall partitions, provide non-drying sealant and an approved sealant stop at cut board locations inside partition. E. Wallboard Installation-Double-Layer Application 1. General: See drawings for wallboard partition types required. 2. First Layer (Screw Attached): Install as described above for single layer application. 3. Second Layer (Screw Attached): Screw attach second layer, unless laminating method of attachment indicated on drawings or necessary to obtain required sound rating or fire rating. Install wallboard vertically with vertical joints offset thirty four (34) inches from first layer joints and staggered on opposite sides of wall. Attach wallboard with 1-5/8" screws sixteen (16) inches o.c. along vertical joints and sixteen (16)inches o.c. in the field of the wallboard. Screw through first layer into metal framing members. 4. Second Layer (Laminated): Install wallboard vertically. Stagger joints of second ° layer from first layer joints. Laminate second layer with specified laminating adhesive in beads or strips running continuously from floor to ceiling in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. After laminating, screw wallboard to framing members with 1-5/8" screws, spaced twelve (12) inches o.c. around perimeter of wallboard. F. Wallboard Installation - Laminated Application: Where laminated wallboard is indicated, use specified laminating adhesive, install wallboard vertically and maintain tolerances as specified for screw attached wallboard. G. Insulation Installation: Install where indicated on drawings. Place blanket tightly between studs. H. Deflection of Structure Above: To allow for possible deflection of structure above *' partitions, provide top runners for non-rated partitions with 1-1/4" minimum flanges and do not screw studs or drywall to top runner. Where positive anchorage of studs to top runner is required, anchorage device shall be by means of slotted hole in stud and bolted fastener,or other anchorage device approved by Architect. I. Control Joints 1. Leave a 1/2" continuous opening between gypsum boards for insertion of surface mounted joint. 2. Back by double framing members. 3. Attach control joint to face layer with 9/16" galvanized staples six (6) inches o.c. at both flanges along entire length of joint. 4. Provide two (2) inch wide gypsum panel strip or other adequate seal behind control joint in fire rated partitions and partitions with safing insulation. •+ 3.5 DRYWALL FASCIAS AND CEILINGS A. Furnish and install inserts, hanger clips and similar devices in coordination with other work. B. Secure hangers to inserts and clips. Clamp or bolt hangers to main runners. C. Space main runners 4'-0" o.c. and space hangers 4'-0" o.c. along runners, except as .. otherwise shown. Smith Campus Center Gypsum Drywall and Framing Accessories 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09250-10 ,. Me 4. Install metal stud horizontal bracing wherever vertical studs are cut or wallboard is cut for passage of pipes, ducts or other penetrations, and anchor horizontal bracing 10 to vertical studs with sheet metal screws. 5. At jambs of door frames and borrow light frames, install doubled-up studs (not back to back) from floor to underside of structural deck, and securely anchor studs to jamb anchors of frames and to runners with screws. Provide cross braces from hollow metal frames to underside of slab. 6. Over heads of door frames install cut-to-length section of runner with flanges slit +0 and web bent to allow flanges to overlap adjacent vertical studs, and securely anchor runner to adjacent vertical studs with sheet metal screws. Install cut-to- length vertical studs from runner (over heads of door frame) to ceiling runner sixteen (16) inches maximum o.c. and at vertical joints of wallboard, and securely anchor studs to runners with sheet metal screws. 7. At control joints, in field of partition, install double-up studs (back to back) from floor to ceiling runner, with 1/4" thick continuous compressible gasket between studs. When necessary, splice studs with eight (8) inches minimum nested laps and attach flanges together with two (2) sheet metal screws in each flange. All screws shall be self-tapping sheet metal screws. C. Runners and Studs at Chase Wall: As specified above for "Runners" and "Studs" and as specified herein. Chase walls shall have either a single or double row of floor and ceiling runners with metal studs sixteen (16) inches o.c. maximum and positioned vertically in the runners so that the studs are opposite each other in pairs with the flanges pointing in the same direction. Anchor all studs to runner flanges with sheet metal screws through each stud flange and runner flange following requirements of paragraph 3.4, B. Provide cross bracing between the rows of studs by attaching runner channels or studs set full width of chase attached to vertical studs with one self-tapping screw at each end. Space cross bracing not over thirty six(36)inches o.c. vertically. D. Wallboard Installation-Single Layer Application(Screw Attached) 1. Install wallboard with long dimension parallel to framing member and with abutting edge joints over web of framing member. Install wallboard with long dimension perpendicular to framing members above and below openings in drywall extending to second stud at each side of opening. Joints on opposite sides of wall shall be arranged so as to occur on different studs. 2. Boards shall be fastened securely to metal studs with screws as specified. Where a free end occurs between studs, back blocking shall be required. Center abutting ends over studs. Correct work as necessary so that faces of boards are flush, + smooth,true. 3. Wallboard screws shall be applied with an electric screw gun. Screws shall be driven not less than 3/8" from ends or edges of board to provide uniform dimple not over 1/32" deep. Screws shall be spaced twelve (12) inches o.c. in the field of the board and 8" o.c. staggered along the abutting edges. 4. All ends and edges of wallboard shall occur over screwing members (studs or furring channels). Boards shall be brought into contact but shall not be forced into place. Where ends or edges abut, they shall be staggered. Joints on opposite sides of a partition shall be so arranged as to occur on different studs. Smith Campus Center Gypsum Drywall and Framing Accessories 100% Construction Documents: 01.1 1.12 09250-9 go I. Joints between face wallboards in the same plane, joints at internal corners of intersecting partitions and joints at internal corners of intersections between ceilings and walls or partitions shall be filled with joint compound. 2. Screw heads and other depressions shall be filled with joint compound. Joint compound shall be applied in three (3) coats, feathered and finish surface sanded smooth with adjacent wallboard surface, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Treatment of joints and screw heads with joint compound is also required where wallboard will be covered by finish materials which require a smooth surface, such as vinyl wall coverings. 3.3 FURRED WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. Use specified metal furring channels. Run metal furring channel framing members vertically, space twenty four (24) inches o.c. maximum. Fasten furring channels to concrete or masonry surfaces with power-driven fasteners or concrete stub nails spaced twenty four (24) inches o.c. maximum through alternate wing flanges (staggered) of furring channel. Furring channels shall be shimmed as necessary to provide a plumb and level backing for wallboard. At inside of exterior walls, an asphalt felt protection strip shall be installed between each furring channel and the wall. Furring channel and splices shall be provided by nesting channels at least eight (8) inches and securely anchoring to concrete or masonry with two(2)fasteners in each wing. B. Wallboard Installation: Same as specified under Article 3.4-"Metal Stud Partitions". 3.4 METAL STUD PARTITIONS A. Runner Installation: Use channel type. Align accurately at floor according to partition layout. Anchor runners securely sixteen (16) inches o.c. maximum with power driven anchors to floor slab, with power-driven anchors to structural slab above. See "Stud Installation" below for runners over heads of metal door frames. Where required, carefully remove sprayed-on fireproofing to allow partition to be properly installed. B. Stud Installation 1. Use channel type, positioned vertically in runners, spaced as noted in Partition Schedule, but not more than twenty four (24) inches o.c. At toilet areas and all gypsum drywall partitions indicated to receive ceramic tile, space studs sixteen (16)inches o.c. 2. Anchor studs to floor runners with screw fasteners. Provide snap-in connections of studs to ceiling runners leaving space for movement. Anchor studs at partition intersections, partition corners and where partition abuts other construction to floor and ceiling runners with sheet metal screws through each stud flange and runner flange. a. At fire rated partitions use Fire Trak ceiling runners with firestopping mineral wool meeting the requirements of Section 07270 and additional drywall cover plates to meet appropriate U.L. design. 3. Connection at ceiling runner for non-rated partitions shall be slotted hole slip joint bolt connection that shall allow for movement. Seal studs abutting other construction with 1/8" thick neoprene gasket continuously between stud and abutting construction. Smith Campus Center Gypsum Drywall and Framing Accessories 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09250-8 �w 4. Provide "Thermafiber" safing insulation meeting standards of Section 07270 at flutes of metal deck where partitions carry up to bottom of metal deck, unless no ceiling is specified. Refer to accessories for closure of wall construction under 2.1.6 in Metal Decking section. 5. Neatly cut wallboard to fit around outlets, switch boxes, framed openings, piping, Ab ducts, and other items which penetrate wallboard; fill gaps with acoustic sealant. Outlets for adjacent rooms to be positioned minimum 24" apart in separate stud spaces. 6. Where wallboard is to be applied to curved surfaces, dampen wallboard on back side as required to obtain required curve. Finish surface shall present smooth, even curve without fluting or other imperfections. 7. Screw fasten wallboard with power-driven electric screw driver, screw heads to slightly depress surface of wallboard without cutting paper, screws not closer than 3/8" from ends and edges of wallboard. 8. Where studs are doubled-up, screw fasten wallboard to both studs in a staggered pattern. F. Metal Trim: Install and mechanically secure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; and finish with three (3) coats of joint compound, feathered and finish sanded smooth with adjacent wallboard surface, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Corner Beads: Install specified corner beads in single lengths at all external "! corners,unless corner lengths exceed standard stock lengths. 2. Edge Beads: Install specified edge beads in single lengths at all terminating edges of wallboard exposed to view, where edges abut dissimilar materials, where edges would be exposed to view, and elsewhere where shown on drawings. Where indicated on drawings, seal joint between metal edge bead and adjoining surface with specified gasket, 1/8" wide minimum and set back 1/8" from face of wallboard,unless other size and profile indicated on drawings. 3. Casing beads shall be set in long lengths, neatly butted at joints. Provide casing beads at juncture of board and vertical surfaces and at exposed perimeters. G. Control Joint Locations: Gypsum board surfaces shall be isolated with control joints where: 1. Ceiling abuts a structural element, dissimilar wall or other vertical penetration. 2. Construction changes within the plane of the partition or ceiling. 3. Shown on approved shop drawings. 4. Ceiling dimensions exceed thirty(30) feet in either direction. 5. Wings of"L", "U", and"T" shaped ceiling areas are joined. 6. Expansion or control joints occur in the structural elements of the building. 7. Shaftwall runs exceed 30'without interruption. 8. Partition or furring abuts a structural element or dissimilar wall or ceiling. 9. Partition or furring runs exceed 30'without interruption. 10. Where control joints are required, ceiling height door frames may be used as control joints. Less than ceiling height frames shall have control joints extending to the ceiling from both corners. H. Joint Treatment and Spackling Smith Campus Center Gypsum Drywall and Framing Accessories 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09250-7 2. All metal framing for drywall partitions shall extend from floor to underside of metal deck above. 3. Spot-grout in metal door frames at the jamb-anchor clips with joint compound " after the studs are installed and just before the wallboard is installed. If second layer of wallboard is indicated, rake out compound after installing first layer of wallboard. Grout frames in solid for door jambs where indicated. 4. Provide concealed reinforcement, 16 ga. thick by eight (8) inches wide or as detailed or as recommended by manufacturer, for attachment of railings, toilet partitions, and other items to be supported on the partitions which cannot be attached to the metal framing members. Concealed reinforcement shall span between metal studs and be attached thereto using two (2) self-tapping pan head screws at each stud. a. Back of drywall shall be scored or notched to prevent bulging out where reinforcement plate occurs. 5. All dtywall to be interrupted at all demising partition intersections and close •+ through perimeter fascia to the base building construction. 6. All partitions shall be cut and sealed around structural elements. B. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install fire-rated assemblies in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, Underwriters' Laboratories and test results obtained and published by the drywall manufacturer, for the fire-rated drywall assembly types indicated on the drawings. C. Acoustic Assemblies: Install acoustic rated assemblies to achieve a minimum STC as noted on drawings, in accordance with test results obtained and published by the drywall manufacturer, for the drywall assembly type indicated on the drawings. D. Sealant 1. Install continuous non-hardening acoustical sealant bead at top and bottom edges of wallboard where indicated or required for sound rating as wallboard is installed, and between metal trim edge beads and abutting construction. 2. Install acoustical sealant in 1/8" wide vertical control joints within the length of .A the wall or partitions, and in all other joints, specified below under "Control Joints". Install bead of acoustical sealant around electric switch and outlet boxes, piping, ducts, and around any other penetration in the wallboard; place sealant bead between penetrations and edge of wallboard. 3. Where sealant is exposed to view,protect adjacent surfaces from damage and from sealant material, and tool sealant flush with and in same plane as wallboard NO surface. Sealant beads shall be 1/4" to 3/8" diameter. E. Wall Board Application 1. See drawings for all board g types. Use fire-rated wallboard for fire rated assemblies. Use water-resistant wallboard where indicated on drawings and where wallboard would be subject to moisture.! water-resistant wallboard in full, large sheets (no scraps)to limit number of butt joints. 2. Apply wallboard with long dimension parallel to stud framing members, and with abutting edges occurring over stud flanges. 3. Install wallboard for partitions from floor to underside of structure above and secure rigidly in place by screw attachment, unless otherwise indicated. Smith Campus Center Gypsum Drywall and Framing Accessories 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09250-6 "Sheetrock Firecode C W/R", 48" wide, in maximum lengths available to minimize -� end to end butt joints. !! D. Shaft Wall Liner: Solid gypsum board liner for shaft wall construction, 1" thick, 16" or 24" wide, as required to suit condition, by standard lengths as required, beveled edges. Provide "USG Shaft Wall Liner". 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: Paper-less, non-combustible, semi-rigid mineral fiber mat, 2" thick, in walls (unless otherwise indicated), 3 lb./cu. ft. maximum density; USG's "Thermafiber",or approved equal. B. Fasteners for Wall Board: USG Brand Screws; Type S Bugle Head for fastening wallboard to lighter gauge interior metal framing(up to 20 ga.). Type S-12 Bugle Head for fastening wallboard to heavier gauge interior metal framing(20 ga. to 12 ga.); Type S and Type S-12 Pan Head for attaching metal studs to door frames and runners; and Type G Bugle Head for fastening wallboard to wall board. Lengths specified below under"Part 3.00-Execution" Articles and as recommended by drywall manufacturer. C. Laminating Adhesive: "Perf-A-Joint Compound Taping". D. Metal Trim-Corner Beads: For 90 degree External Corners - "Dur-A-Bead" No. 103, 27 U.S. Std.ga. galvanized steel, 1-1/4" x 1-1/4", for 90 degree external corners. E. Metal Trim- Edge Beads: "Metal Trim No. 200-A", 28 U.S. Std ga. galvanized steel, channel type, or "Metal Trim No 200- B", L type, where use of channel type (200--A) not possible. F. Metal Trim Treatment Materials and Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Drywall Boards: "Perf-A-Tape" for joint reinforcing; "Durabond 90 Joint Compound-Multi- Purpose" for taping and topping; and "Ready Mixed Compound-Topping" for finishing. G. Water: Clean, fresh and suitable for drinking. H. Control Joints: No. 93,USG. I. Acoustical Sealant: USG "Acoustical Sealant" or "Tremco Acoustical Caulking" of Tremco Mfg. Co.,or approved equal. J. Neoprene Gaskets: Conform to ASTM D1056. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where gypsum drywall is to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. General 1. Install drywall work in accordance with drywall manufacturer's printed instructions and as indicated on drawings and specified herein. Smith Campus Center Gypsum Drywall and Framing Accessories 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09250-5 WD 2.2 METAL SUPPORTS A. Metal Floor and Ceiling Runners + 1. Channel Type: Formed from 20 U.S. Std. gauge (unless otherwise noted) galvanized steel, width to suit channel type metal studs. Use 20 ga. top runners with 1-1/4" minimum flanges. , 2. Ceiling runners at fire rated partitions shall be "Fire Trak" made by the Fire Trak Corp. fabricated of 20 ga. galvanized steel. 3. "J" Type: Formed from 20 U.S. Std. gauge galvanized steel, 1" x 2-1/2" or 4" �,► wide(to suit detail)x 2-1/4" (for shaft wall). 4. 18 ga. steel plate at underside of deck. B. Metal Studs,Framing and Furring 00 1. Channel Type Studs: Channel type with holes for passage of conduit formed from minimum 20 U.S. Std. gauge. (unless heavier gauge required to meet deflection limits)galvanized steel,width as shown on drawings. 2. Furring Channels: Hat shaped, formed from galvanized steel, 25 U.S. Std. gauge. 3. "C-H" Type Stud: 1-1/2" x 2-1/2", 4" or 6"wide (to suit detail) galvanized steel. Use for shaft wall construction; gauge and size as required to meet deflection « limits given herein. 4. Double "E" Type Stud: 2" x 2-1/2", 4" or 6" wide (to suit detail)galvanized steel. Use for shaft wall construction; gauge and size as required to meet deflection aw limits given herein. 5. Continuous 16 gauge x 8" wide steel wall plate screwed to studs as required for support of railings, toilet partitions and other items supported on drywall partitions and walls. C. Suspended Ceiling and Fascia Supports 1. Main Runners: 1-1/2" steel channels, cold rolled at 0.475 lbs. per ft., rust - +.+ inhibitive paint finish. 2. Furring Members: Screw-type hat-shaped furring channels of 25 ga. zinc-coated steel; comply with ASTM C645. 3. Hangers: Galvanized, 1" x 3/16" flat steel slats capable of supporting 5x calculated load supported. 4. Hanger Anchorages: Provide inserts, clips, bolts, screws and other devices NM applicable to the required method of structural anchorage for ceiling hangers. Size devices for 5x calculated load supported. 5. Furring Anchorages: 16 ga. galvanized wire ties, manufacturer's standard clips, bolts or screws as recommended by furring manufacturer. 2.3 GYPSUM WALLBOARDS A. Gypsum Wall Board: 1/2" thick and 5/8" thick as indicated on drawings, "Sheetrock", 48" wide, in maximum lengths available to minimize end to end butt joints. B. Fire Rated Gypsum Wall Board: 1/2" thick and 5/8" thick as indicated on drawings, .. "Sheetrock Firecode C", 48" wide, in maximum lengths available to minimize end to end butt joints. C. Water Resistant Gypsum Wall Board (for areas in toilet rooms, lockers, Janitor's closets): 1/2" thick and 5/8" thick as indicated on drawings, "Sheetrock W/R" or Smith Campus Center Gypsum Drywall and Framing Accessories 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09250-4 '"� !1N B. Samples: Each material specified herein, 12" x 12", or 12" long, or in manufacturer's container,as applicable for type of material submitted. C. Manufacturer's Literature: Submit technical and installation instructions for each drywall partition, furring and ceiling system specified herein, and for each fire rating and sound rating. gypsum board assembly. Submit other data as required to show compliance with these specifications. D. Test Reports: This Contractor shall submit test report, obtained by drywall manufacturer, indicating conformance of drywall assemblies to required fire ratings and sound ratings. UL design numbers and specifications may be used to substantiate fire ratings, so long as assemblies will be constructed according to those specifications. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING AND PROTECTION A. Deliver, store and handle drywall work materials to prevent damage. Deliver materials in their original, unopened containers or bundles, and store where protected from moisture, damage and from exposure to the elements. Store wallboard in flat stacks. B. Protect wallboard from becoming wet. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Provide and maintain minimum temperature of fifty five (55) degrees F. and adequate ventilation to eliminate excessive moisture within the building in the area of the WO drywall work for at least twenty four (24) hours, prior to, during and after installation of drywall work. Installation shall not start until windows are glazed and doors are installed, unless openings are temporarily closed. Space above suspended ceilings shall be vented sufficiently to prevent temperature and pressure build up. 1.8 JOB MOCK-UP A. At a suitable location, where directed by the Architect, lay up a portion of a finished wall and ceiling demonstrating the quality of work, including finishing, to be obtained under this Section. Omit drywall boards in locations as directed by the Architect to show stud spacing and attachments; after acceptance, complete assembly. B. Adjust the finishing techniques as required to achieve the finish required by the Architect as described in this Section of these specifications. C. Upon approval of the mock-up, the mock-up may be left in place as a portion of the finished work of this Section. D. All drywall work shall be equal in quality to approved mock-up. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Materials specified below, unless noted otherwise or specified herein, are those of U.S. Gypsum Co. Equivalent materials of National Gypsum Co., Georgia Pacific and Domtar meeting specification requirements are acceptable. Smith Campus Center Gypsum Drywall and Framing Accessories 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09250-3 2. ASTM C645 "Standard Specification for Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels For Screw Application of Gypsum Board". 3. ASTM A568 "Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements For". 4. ASTM C 13 96 "Specification for Gypsum Board". 5. ASTM C442 "Specification for Gypsum Backing Board and Coreboard". 6. ASTM C475 "Standard Specification for Joint Treatment Materials For Gypsum ^*� Wallboard Construction". 7. ASTM C840 "Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board". 8. ASTM C919 "Standard Specification for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications". 9. ASTM C954 "Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws For the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. to 0.112 in. in Thickness". 10. ASTM C1002 "Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws For the Application of Gypsum Board". 11. ASTM C754 "Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Board". B. Allowable Tolerances: 1/32" offsets between planes of board faces, and 1/16" in 8'-0" for plumb, level, warp and bow. C. System Design Load 1. Provide drywall shaft systems for elevators designed and tested by manufacturer to withstand a lateral loading (air pressure) of 10 lbs. per sq. ft. for the maximum wall height required, and with deflection limited to 1/240 of partition height. 2. Provide standard drywall assemblies designed and tested by manufacturer to withstand a lateral load of 5 lbs. per sq. ft. for the maximum wall height required, and with deflection limited to 1/240 of partition height. .. a. Drywall assemblies with tile finish shall have a deflection limit of 1/360. D. Fire-Resistance Rating: Where gypsum drywall with fire resistance ratings are indicated, provide materials and installations which are identical with those of applicable assemblies tested per ASTM E 119 by fire testing laboratories, or to design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in listing of other testing agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Installer: Firm with not less than 5 years of successful experience in the installation of specified materials. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawing for each drywall partition, furring and ceiling system showing size and gauges of framing members, hanger and anchorage devices, wallboard types, insulation, sealant,methods of assembly and fastening, control joints indicating column lines, corner details,joint finishing and relationship of drywall work to adjacent work. Smith Campus Center Gypsum Drywall and Framing Accessories 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09250-2 ..� SECTION 09250 GYPSUM DRYWALL AND FRAMING ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL w 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS s A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the gypsum drywall and framing accessories as shown on the drawings and/or ON specified herein, including,but is not limited to,the following: 1. Gypsum board work for partitions, ceilings, column enclosures, furring, and elsewhere where gypsum drywall work is shown on drawings. 2. Metal framing, suspension and furring for gypsum drywall construction. 3. Acoustical insulation for gypsum drywall work. - 4. Sealant for gypsum drywall work. 5. Concealed metal reinforcing for attachment of railings, toilet partitions and other items supported on drywall partitions and walls. 6. Taping and finishing of drywall joints. 7. Installing rings and frames in drywall surfaces for grilles, registers and lighting fixtures. 8. Gypsum wallboard cants at beams and other projections over 2" deep in elevator shafts where adjoining wall is of gypsum wallboard construction. 9. Gypsum shaftwall construction. 10. Bracing and connections. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Cold Formed Metal Framing-Section 05400. B. Carpentry -Section 06200. C. Thermal Insulation- Section 07200. D. Hollow metal door frames- Section 08100. E. Access doors- Section 08300. F. Painting- Section 09900. G. Elevators -Division 14. H. Rings for grilles,registers and light fixtures-Division 15 and 16. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The following standards as well as other standards which may be referred to in this Section, shall apply to the work of this Section: 1. Gypsum Drywall Construction Handbook, latest edition, U.S. Gypsum Co. Smith Campus Center Gypsum Drywall and Framing Accessories 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 09250-1 w�! i Smith Campus School Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 01063 VOLUME CT 1 r ' . ► �...�t f�ii�Via} 3 � a = _ '4 '� c r ' r-. r�f�t(��„.••^M "�`'�--•.tom �S Project Manual Weiss/Manfredi Architects 130 West 29th Street 12fl New York NY 10001 OR w !p i. IF P G. ,Im ON 3.9 GLASS SCHEDULE No. Location Glass TypeOuter Lite Inner Lite Comments 1. Curtain Wall/Window Clear Low-E 1/4"FT 1/4"FT 2. Curtain Wall Clear Low-E 1/4"HS 1/4"HS !! ! 3. Curtain Wall Clear 9/16"Lam. (1/4"HS/.060"/1/4"AN) PVB interlayer 4. HM?CW Clear 3/8"FT None 5. HM Clear 3/8"HS None 6. Guardrail Clear 1/2"HS 9/16"Lam. (1/4"HS/.060"/1/4"AN) PVB interlayer 7. BR/Lounge Mirror 1/4" 8. Mail Room Clear 3/8"Lam. Sandblasted 9. Vestibules Clear 1/2"FT None Polished edges at butt glazed corners END OF SECTION PR Smith Campus Center Glass and Glazing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08800-13 IM 4" 3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. go B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.7 FRAMELESS MIRRORS +o A. Apply mastic to back of minor "pats" spaced 4 pats/sq. ft.; adjust mirror so that it is plumb and in place to avoid distortion of reflecting images. Allow 1/8" space between back of mirror and wall surface. am 1. Apply "pats" using Palmer Electric Applicator. B. Apply stainless steel clips at mirror top and bottom; securely clip to substrate using non-corrosive anchors. At drywall back-up anchors must be secured to studs or steel am wallplate spanning from stud to stud. 3.8 PROTECTION AND CLEANING on A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching _ crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. 40 Smith Campus Center Glass and Glazing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08800-11 we J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. �. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant as recommended by glass manufacturer or glass frame manufacturer. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. . H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape where noted on approved shop drawings. OR 3.5 GASKET GLAZING(DRY) A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to .o fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. on C. Center glass liter in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to ,w lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. Smith Campus Center Glass and Glazing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08800-10 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately on before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 GLAZING,GENERAL Im A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Shop Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. w. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass no lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows: No 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. 1. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar 40 characteristics. an Smith Campus Center Glass and Glazing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08800-9 D. Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets: Provide molded or extruded neoprene or EPDM gaskets, Shore A hardness of 75++5 for hollow profile, and 60+5 for solid profiles, ASTM C 864. E. Cellular, Elastomeric Preformed Gaskets: Provide extruded or molded closed cell, integral-skinned neoprene, Shore A 40+5, and 20% to 35% compression, ASTM C 509. F. Preformed Glazing Tape: Provide solvent-free butyl-polyisobutylene rubber with ... 100% solids content complying with AAMA A 804.1. Provide preformed glazing tape in extruded tape form. Provide one of the following: 1. Protective Treatments 303 or 606. 2. Tremco Preshimmed 440. 3. Woodmont Chem-Tape 40. G. Setting Blocks: Provide neoprene or silicone blocks with Shore A hardness of 80- 90. Provide products certified by manufacturer to be compatible with silicone sealants. 1. Shims: For shims used with setting blocks, provide same materials, hardness, length and width as setting blocks. 2. Structural Silicone Glazing: Provide silicone setting blocks where structural silicone occurs at sills and at insulated units with silicone edge seals. .A H. Edge Blocks: Provide neoprene or silicone as required for compatibility with glazing sealants. Provide blocks with Shore A hardness of 55±5. I. Miscellaneous Glazing Materials: Provide sealant backer rods, primers, cleaners, and sealers of type recommended by glass and sealant manufacturers. J. Mirror Adhesive: Palmer's Super Set Mirro-Mastic. 1. Clips: No. 4 finish Type 304 stainless steel. 2.4 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced • glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. Smith Campus Center Glass and Glazing 100% Construction Documents: 0 1.1 1.12 08800-8 _ 6. All glass edges shall conform to the following requirements: a. Shark teeth shall not penetrate more that half the glass thickness. b. Serration hackle shall not penetrate more than 10 percent of the glass thickness. C. Flare shall not exceed 1/16 inch as measured perpendicular to the glass surface at edge. d. Bevel shall not exceed 1/16 inch. e. Flake chips shall not exceed 1/16 inch in length. f. Rough chips exceeding the dimensions listed in Item a above shall not be permitted. L Glass Products: 1. Curtain Wall and Storefront Glass a. Insulating glass unit consisting of 1/4" min. thick clear outer lite, 1/2" air space, and 1/4" min. thick clear outer lite; both lites HS or FT as required by code or design. Outer lite incorporates high performance low- emissivity (Low-E) coating on the #2 surface, providing an overall shading coefficient of+/- 0.43. Monolithic glass shall be 1/2" min. thick clear FT glass. us Light Transmittance: 70% Solar Energy Transmittance: 32%. Shading Coefficient: 0.43 b. Acceptable low-e coatings are: Viracon VE1-2M. PPG Solarban 60. C. Approved Glass Manufacturers: so Viracon PPG J. Frameless Mirrors: 1/4 in., Quality q2, clear float glass with silver, copper, and organic coating, and as follows: 1. Edges: Uniformly ground and polished. 2.3 GLAZING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Provide sealants and gaskets with performance characteristics suitable for applications indicated. Ensure compatibility of glazing sealants with insulated glass sealants, with laminated glass interlayers, and with any other surfaces in contact. B. General Glazing and Cap Bead Sealant: Provide sealant with maximum Shore A hardness of 50. Provide one of the following: 1. Dow Corning 795. 2. General Electric Silglaze N 2500 or Contractors SCS-1000. 3. Rhodorsil 313, 5C, or 6B. 4. Tremco Proglaze. C. Weather Seal Sealant: Provide non-acid curing sealant with movement range _+ 50%, ASTM C 719. Provide one of the following: 1. Dow Corning 795. 2. General Electric Silpru£ 3. Rhodorsil 313, 5C, or 6B. 4. Tremco Spectrum 2. ON Smith Campus Center Glass and Glazing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08800-7 an 3. Visual Quality Control acceptance criteria of the low-e coating shall be consistent with industry guidelines, subject to approval by the Architect and the , Owner. a. Pinholes with diameters in excess of 1/16 inches are not acceptable. b. Clusters of pinholes are not acceptable. C. Scratches no longer than 3 inches in length are acceptable provided that they occur within 3" of an edge. 4. Edge deletion of low-e coatings shall be provided at all insulating glass unless manufacturer submits test data acceptable to the Architect indicating that edge deletion is not required. 5. Manufacturer shall warrant that low-e coating shall not peel, crack, fade or deteriorate for a period of ten (10) years. Manufacturer shall warrant that any glass that is not edge deleted will not develop loss of adhesion with insulating glass or structural glazing sealants for a period of ten (10) years. F. Laminated Glass(PVB) 1. Two liter of glass bonded to a .060 in. clear plastic, puncture resistant, polyvinyl butyral (PVB) interlayer conforming to the requirements of ANSI Z97.1, ASTM C 1172, and CPSC standard 16 CFR 1201 Category IL 2. Interlayer shall be compatible with all glazing gaskets and sealants. 3. Approved Products: a. Saflex as manufactured by Solutia Inc. b. Butacite as manufactured by E.I. DuPont de Nemours & Co., Inc. 4. Manufacturer shall warrant that laminated glass will not develop edge separation or other defects which may obstruct vision through the glass or otherwise compromise the requirements of the glass for a period of ten (10) *� years. G. Ceramic Frit Coated Glass 1. All ceramic frit coated glass shall be heat-strengthened (Kind HS) and meet the minimum requirements of ASTM C 1048. 2. Standard ceramic frit color to match Architect's sample. 3. Visual Quality Control acceptance criteria of the ceramic frit finish shall be consistent with industry guidelines, subject to approval by the Architect and the Owner. 4. Manufacturers shall warrant that ceramic frit glass will not develop any defects which may affect the appearance of the glass or may otherwise compromise the requirement of the glass for a period of ten (10) years. H. Glass Quality + 1. Glass shall be free from defects or impurities detrimental to its performance. Defects which are not detrimental to the performance such as bubbles, waves, spots, scratches, spalls, discoloration, chipping or impurities shall only be acceptable if not visible from a distance of 3 ft or more, or in accordance with the manufacturer's guideline. Any panels with imperfections, scratches, pinholes, irregular cut or chipped edges, chipped corners, or any cracks, exceeding the specified limits shall be rejected. 2. The Glazing Contractor shall supply and replace any glass panels that are broken during construction and up to the date of Substantial Completion of the building, unless otherwise stipulated. .�.� 3. Butt glass edges shall be ground and swiped. 4. All other edges shall have a high quality factory cut edge. 5. Exposed edges, such as at corners, shall be ground and polished. Smith Campus Center Glass and Glazing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08800-6 ^ PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS/FABRICATORS A. All glass and glazing used at the exterior of the Project shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer. The same manufacturer and the same furnace shall be used for all tempered and heat strengthened glass used throughout the project. 2.2 GLASS MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS (SEE GLASS SCHEDULE AT END OF SECTION) A. General 1. "Low-E"clear float glass 2. Clear float glass : B. Annealed Glass: 1. ASTM C 1036; Type I, Class 1, Glazing Select q'. C. Heat Strengthened and Fully Tempered Safety Glass: 1. ASTM C 1048; Type 1, Class 1, Glazing Select q', Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 2. All fully tempered glass shall be heat-soaked at a glass surface temperature of 480° F f 50° F minimum for eight hours,and shall meet CPSC 16-CFR, Part 1201, Category Il. 3. Roller distortion and/or ripples shall run in the same direction for the entire job. All glass shall be heat-treated through the horizontal tempering process. Bow allowance is 0.1%. 4. Heat strengthening shall be achieved by heat treating for a surface compressive stress of not less than 3500 psi nor more than 7000 psi. The level of pre-stress shall be such to resist wind and thermally induced forces. Throughout production, the manufacturer shall maintain a quality control program of destructive testing to ensure that allowable maximum stresses have not been exceeded. D. Insulating Glass 1. Insulating glass units shall be fabricated using the dual-seal system, consisting of two lites of glass (primary seal of polyisobutylene (PIB) specifically intended for ► primary insulating glass seals and secondary seal of silicone insulating glass sealant). 2. Spacer frame shall be fabricated using black, extruded thermoplastic "warm edge" spacer, for improved thermal performance. Care shall be taken to produce corners free from pinholes, gaps and other defects to ensure water vapor-tight construction. Desiccant used within spacer shall be of type and quantity to ensure proper performance of the unit. 3. Insulating Glass units shall be certified as CBA by the Insulating Glass Certification Council and shall comply with the following: so a. ASTM E 773 Standard Test Method for Seal Durability of Insulating Glass Units. b. ASTM E 774 Standard Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units, Class A or better. Smith Campus Center Glass and Glazing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08800-5 am 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather: Perform work of this Section only when existing or forecasted weather conditions are within limits established by manufacturers of materials and products used. .w B. Temperature Limits: Install sealants only when temperatures are within limits recommended by sealant manufacturer, except, never install sealants when temperatures are below 40 deg. F. ,r 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials and products in unopened, factory labeled packages. Store and so handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and GANA Manual. 1. Protect materials from moisture, sunlight, excess heat, sparks and flame. am 2. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage. 1.11 WARRANTIES 00 A. General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have under the Contract Documents. B. Manufacturer's Special Project Warranty on Coated Glass Products: Provide written ON warranty signed by manufacturer of coated glass agreeing to furnish f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed project site, within specified warranty period indicated below, replacements for those coated glass units which develop manufacturing **� defects. Manufacturing defects are defined as peeling, cracking or deterioration in metallic coating due to normal conditions and not due to handling or installation or cleaning practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions. .A 1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than five (5) years after date of substantial completion. C. Manufacturer's Special Project Warranty on Insulating Glass: Provide written *�► warranty signed by manufacturer of insulating glass agreeing to furnish f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed project site, within specified warranty period indicated below, replacements for those insulating glass units developing manufacturing defects. Manufacturing defects are defined as failure or hermetic seal of air space (beyond that due to glass breakage) as evidenced by intrusion of dirt or moisture, internal condensation or fogging, deterioration of protected internal glass coatings, if any, and other visual indications of seal failure or performance; provided the manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting and maintaining units have been complied with during the warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than ten (10) years �w after date of substantial completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS so 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS/FABRICATORS A. All glass and glazing used at the exterior of the Project shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer. The same manufacturer and the same furnace shall be used for all tempered and heat strengthened glass used throughout the project. Smith Campus Center Glass and Glazing ex 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08800-4 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source: For each glass and glazing type required for work of this Section, provide primary materials which are products of one manufacturer. Provide secondary or accessory materials which are acceptable to manufacturers of primary materials. B. Installer: A firm with a minimum of five years experience in type of work required by this Section and which is acceptable to manufacturers of primary materials; and with a successful record of in-service installations similar in size and scope to this Project. C. Glass Thickness: Determine and provide size and thickness of glass products that are certified to meet or exceed performance requirements specified in this Section. Provide units with proper thickness, edge clearance and tolerance to comply with recommendations of glass manufacturer. D. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. GANA Publications: GANA'S "Glazing Manual" and "Laminated Glass Design Guide". 2. SIGMA Publications: SIGMA TM-3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines". 1.7 PERFORMANCE STANDARDS FOR GLASS GUARD RAILS A. Glass rail assembly shall be designed and installed to meet Massachusetts State "a Building Code and/or resist the following ASCE required loads for glass railing: 50-1b per linear foot horizontal load from any direction, 50-1b over 1 sq. ft. for infill panels, and 200-lb concentrated load on top from any direction. B. Top of glass to be zero tolerance and industry standard tolerance (3mm) on the other 3 edges. No C. Submit calculations and drawings signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Massachusetts indicating that glass rail system can meet these performance criteria. 1.8 TESTS A. Preconstruction Sealant Test: Submit samples of materials to be used to glazing sealant manufacturer to determine sealant compatibility. Include samples of glass, gaskets, glazing materials, framing members, and other components and accessories of glazing work. Test in accordance with ASTM C 794 to verify what type of primers (if any) are required to ensure sealant adhesion to substrates. 1. Submit minimum of nine pieces of each type and finish of framing member, and nine pieces of each type, class, kind, condition, and form of glass, including No monolithic, laminated, and insulating glass for adhesion tests. 2. Provide manufacturer's written report and recommendations regarding proper installation. Smith Campus Center Glass and Glazing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08800-3 so 3. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection of L/254t of the short side clear span L, or 3/4", whichever is less, where t = glass thickness (inches). 4. Human impact loads in accordance with CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Category II for those locations designated as hazardous locations by Code. 5. Seismic forces on components of the SGVE shall be determined in accordance with the Massachuetts State Building Code — 780CMR: State Board of Building Regulations and Standards, Section 1612.0: Earthquake Loads. 6. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar .� heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. a. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg. F ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 7. Thermal Performance: The design and installation shall provide the minimum overall U-values and Shading Coefficients as required by the New Energy Conservation Requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code (780 CMR 13). on 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product data, specifications, standard .. details, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each material used. Provide certifications that materials and systems comply with specified requirements. go B. Initial Selection Samples: Submit samples of each glass and glazing material showing complete range of colors, textures, and finishes available for each material used. no 1. Submit complete range of samples of standard colors and patterns for ceramic frits at insulating glass, if requested by the Architect. 2. Submit complete range of samples of sandblasted glass showing variations of grits and opacity achieved. an C. Verification Samples: Submit representative samples of each glass and glazing material that is to be exposed in completed work. Show full color ranges and finish variations expected. Provide glass samples having minimum size of 12" x 12" and 6 in. long samples of sealants and glazing materials; all samples shall bear the name of the manufacturer, brand name, thickness, and quality. 1. Submit glass samples in thicknesses indicated. D. Calculations: Provide wind load charts, calculations and certification of performance of this work. Indicate how design requirements for loading and other performance criteria have been satisfied. E. Test Reports: Provide certified reports for specified tests. F. Warranties: Provide written warranties as specified herein. Smith Campus Center Glass and Glazing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08800-2 pa SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS + A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9A 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the glass and glazing as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but not limited to glazing of the following: 1. Aluminum casement and fixed windows. 2. Exterior storefront and curtain wall framing. 3. Exterior entrance doors. 4. Interior hollow metal doors. 5. Interior hollow metal borrowed lites. 6. Interior frameless mirrors. 7. Glass guardrails as shown on drawings. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS on A. Miscellaneous metals - Section 05500. B. Architectural wood work — Section 06400. C. Hollow metal doors and frames — Section 08100. D. Aluminum windows - Section 08520. E. Aluminum entrances, storefronts and curtain walls - Section 08400. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including +! loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated on drawings and/or specified herein are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements: a. Specified Design Wind Loads: 20 psf or greater if required by Code. 2. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. a. Load Duration: 60 seconds or less. Smith Campus Center Glass and Glazing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08800-1 No Hardware Set#E-8 Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) 2 Exit Devices Von Duprin 5547LBE-F x 12A x US26D 2 Concealed Closers LCN 3130SE x Alum tw 2 Magnetic Holders LCN SEM7850 x Alum 2 Silencers GJ 64 N. Operation: Doors are held open electrically. When signaled from the fire alarm system, doors close and latch automatically. Hardware Set#E-9 Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) 2 Exit Devices Von Duprin 5547L-F x 12A x US26D 2 Masterkeyed Cylinders Corbin(to suit)x US26D 2 Door Closers LCN(see description)x Alum 2 Magnetic Holders LCN SEM7850 x Alum 2 Silencers GJ 64 Operation: Doors are held open electrically. When signaled from the fire alarm system, doors close and latch automatically. Hardware Set#E-10 Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Latchset Corbin ML2010 x DSA x US26D 2 Concealed Closers LCN 3131 series x Alum 2 Automatic Flush Bolts GJ(see description)x US26D ' 2 Door Stops GJ FBI x FB14R x US26D 1 Coordinator GJ(see description)x PC 2 Silencers GJ 64 Operation: Doors are held open electrically. When signaled from the fire alarm system, doors close and latch automatically. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Finish Hardware No 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.01 08700-17 ow 1 Control Box LCN ES7092 1 Control Box LCN 7949 1 Compressor LCN 920 series(one required) 1 set Tubing LCN 7910-925 1 Electric Strike Von Duprin 6111 FSE x US32D 1 Saddle Zero 564A Operation: When signaled from the fire alarm system, doors open automatically. Electric Strike unlocks to allow doors to open. me Hardware Set#E-5 Each to have: on 2 Continuous Hinges Zero 919STST x EPT 1 Electric Lock Corbin ML20905MR x DSA x US26D 2 Flush Bolts GJ(see description)x US26D 2 Door Closers LCN 4011 x Alum 2 Overhead Holders GJ 100H series x US32D 1 Power Supply Locknetics 510 series 1 set Weatherstripping Zero 3 70A i ambs/head .. 1 set Astragal Seals Zero 383AA 2 Kickplates Ives(see description)x US32D 1 Saddle Zero 564A Operation: Card reader(by security vendor)unlocks electric lock. Hardware Set#E-6 Each to have: 1 Floor Closer (Rixso n SC2790SH0 x CWF US26D 1 Intermediate Pivot ixson Ml x S26D 1 Exit Device Von Duprin 55NL x 1 IOMD x US26D 1 Custom Push Pull (see details) 1 Electric Strike Von Duprin 6111 x FSE x US32D 1 Saddle Zero Type C x T'x Alum Operation: Card reader(by security vendor)unlocks electric lock. Hardware Set#E-7 Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Classroom Lock Corbin ML2055MR x DSA x US26D 2 Automatic Flush Bolts GJ(see description)x US26D 2 Door Closers LCN 4111 series x Alum fe 1 Coordinator GJ(see description)x PC 2 Magnetic Holders LCN SEM7850 x Alum 1 set Seals Zero 188N iambs/head 2 Door Bottoms Zero 355A 1 set Astragal Seals Zero 383AA Operation: Doors are held open electrically. When signaled from the fire alarm system, doors close and latch automatically. Smith Campus Center Finish Hardware .. 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.01 08700-16 sw 3.4 ELECTRIC HARDWARE SETS Hardware Set#E-1 Each to have: 1 Continuous Hinge Zero 919STST x EPT 1 Electric Lock Corbin ML20905MR x DSA x US26D 1 Door Closer LCN(see description)x Alum 1 Power Supply Locknetics 510 series 1 set Seals Zero 870AA jambs/head 1 set Seals Zero 119WB (all four sides) 1 Door Bottom Zero 365A 1 Saddle Zero 564A so Operation: Card reader(by security vendor) unlocks electric lock. Hardware Set#E-2 Each to have: so Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Electric Lock Corbin ML20905MR x DSA x US26D 1 Door Closer LCN TJ4041 x 18G x Alum 1 Power Transfer Von Duprin EPT10 x SP28 "' 1 Power Supply Locknetics 510 series 1 set Seals Zero 870AA jambs/head 1 set Seals Zero 119WB (all four sides) 1' 1 Door Bottom Zero 365A 1 Saddle Zero 564A 40 Operation: Card reader(by security vendor) unlocks electric lock. Hardware Set#E-3 Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Classroom Lock Corbin ML2055MR x DSA x US26D 1 Electromagnetic Closer LCN 3130 SE x Alum 1 Overhead Stop GJ 80 series x US32D 1 set Seals Zero 188N jambs/head so 1 Door Bottom Zero 355A Operation: Doors are held open electrically. When signaled from the fire alarm system, doors close and latch automatically. Hardware Set#E-4 a„ Each to have: 1 Continuous Hinge Zero 919STST 1 Exit Device Von Duprin 55NL x 110MD x US26D 1 Automatic Operator LCN 2610 x Alum Smith Campus Center Finish Hardware 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.01 08700-15 Hardware Set#15 Each to have: Not Used Hardware Set#16 Each to have: Not Used Hardware Set#17 Each to have: Not Used Hardware Set#18 Each to have: 1 Floor Closer Rixson 2790NHO x US26D 1 Intermediate Pivot Rixson M19 x US26D 2 Custom Push Pulls (see details) 1 Saddle Zero Type C x 7"x Alum Hardware Set#19 Each to have: 1 Floor Closer Rixson SC2790NHO x CWF x US26D 1 Intermediate Pivot Rixson M19 x US26D 1 Deadlock Adams Rite MS 18505 x US28 2 Masterkeyed Cylinders Corbin(to suit)x US26D 2 Custom Push Pulls (see details) 1 Saddle Zero Type C x 7"x Alum Hardware Set#20 Each to have: 2 sets Center Hung Pivots GJ 7253 x US26D 2 Roller Latches/Stops GJ 1152B x US26D 2 Custom Pulls (see details) 2 Overhead Stops GJ 410 series x US32D Hardware Set#21 Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Exit Device Von Duprin 5575L-F x 12A x US26D 1 Masterkeyed Cylinder Corbin(to suit)x US26D ..�, 1 Door Closer LCN(see description)x Alum 1 Door Stop GJ FBI 3 x FB 14R x US26D 3 Silencers GJ 64 Smith Campus Center Finish Hardware 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.01 08700-14 Hardware Set#11 Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Storeroom Lock Corbin ML2057MR x DSA x US26D 2 Self Latching Flush Bolts GJ(see description)x US26D go 2 Door Closers LCN(see description)x Alum 2 Overhead Stops GJ 410 series x US32D 1 Coordinator GJ(see description)x PC 2 Silencers GJ 64 Hardware Set#I I A Each to have: 2 Continuous Hinges Zero 919STST 1 Storeroom Lock Corbin ML2057MR x DSA x US26D 2 Flush Bolts GJ(see description)x US26D 2 Door Stops GJ FB 13 x FB 14R x US26D 2 Silencers GJ 64 Hardware Set#12 Each to have: r Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Lockset Corbin ML2022MR x DSA x US26D we . 1 Door Closer LCN 4111 H Cush x Alum 1 set Seals Zero 188N jambs/head - 1 Door Bottom Zero 355A Hardware Set#13 Each to have: Not Used Hardware Set#13A Each to have: so 1 Floor Closer �ixsor C2790SH0 x CWF x US26D 1 Intermediate Pivot xson 1 x 1 Exit Device Von Duprin 55NL x 110MD x US26D 1 Custom Push/Pull (see details) 1 Saddle Zero Type C x 7"x Alum ps Hardware Set#14 Each to have: 1 Floor Closer Rixson F2790NHO x US26D 1 Intermediate Pivot Rixson FM 19 x US26D 1 Exit Device Von Duprin 5575L-F x 12A x US26D 1 Masterkeyed Cylinder Corbin(to suit)x US26D 1 Saddle Zero Type C x T'x Alum Smith Campus Center Finish Hardware 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.01 08700-13 ow 1 Coordinator GJ(see description)x PC 1 set Seals Zero 188N jambs/head 2 Door Bottoms Zero 355A 1 set Astragal Seals Zero 383AA .e Hardware Set#9A Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Classroom Lock Corbin ML2055MR x DSA x US26D �* 1 Concealed Closer LCN 3131 series x Alum 1 Overhead Stop GJ 90 series x US32D 3 Silencers GJ 64 ..� Hardware Set#9B Each to have: 2 Continuous Hinges Zero 919STST 1 Lockset Corbin ML2022MR x DSA x US26D 2 Manual Flush Bolts GJ(see description)x US26D 1 Door Closer LCN 4011 H x Alum 2 Door Stops GJ FB 13 x FRB 14R x US26D 2 Armour Plates Ives (see description)x US32D 1 set Weatherstripping Zero 429A jambs head 1 Saddle Zero 564A Hardware Set#9C Each to have: ww Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Classroom Lock Corbin ML2055MR x DSA x US26D 2 Manual Flush Bolts GJ(see description)x US26D 1 Door Closer LCN(see description)x Alum 1 Overhead Holder GJ 410 series x US32D 2 Armour Plates Ives(see description)x US32D 2 Silencers GJ 64 Hardware Set#10 Each to have: 2 sets Pivots Rixson 117 x US26D 1 Deadlock Corbin ML2013MR x US26D . 2 Dummy Levers Corbin ML2050 x DSA x US26D 1 Manual Flush Bolt GJ(see description)x US26D(bottom only) 2 Roller Latches GJ 1152B x US26D 2 Kick Plates Ives(see description)x US32D ww was Smith Campus Center Finish Hardware 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.01 08700-12 Hardware Set#7 Each to have: ON Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Exit Device Von Duprin 98EO-F x US26D 1 Door Closer LCN(see description)x Alum 1 Door Stop GJ FB 13 x FB 14R x US26D 3 Silencers GJ 64 Hardware Set#7A Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Exit Device Von Duprin 98EO x US26D 1 Door Closer LCN 4115 Cush x Alum was 1 set Weatherstripping Zero 429A jambs/head 1 Saddle Zero 564A Hardware Set#8 on Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Exit Device Von Duprin 9875LBE-F x 12A x US26D 1 Door Closer LCN 4111 Cush x Alum 3 Silencers GJ 64 s Hardware Set#8A Each to have: 40 Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Exit Device Von Duprin 5575LBE-F x 12A x US26D 1 Concealed Closer LCN 3131 series x Alum 1 Door Stop GJ FB 13 x FB 14R x US26D `�,j ��1 -Wo 3 Silencers GJ 64 Hardware Set#8B Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Exit Device Von Duprin 5575LBE x 12A x US26D 1 Concealed Closer LCN 3131 HO series x Alum t 1 Door Stop GJ FB 13 x FB 14R x US26D 1 set Seals Zero 188N jambs/head 1 Door Bottom Zero 355A Hardware Set#9 Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Classroom Lock Corbin ML2055MR x DSA x US26D 2 Self Latching Flush Bolts GJ(see description)x US26D 2 Concealed Closers LCN 3131 series x Alum 2 Door Stops GJ FB 13 x FB 14R x US26D Smith Campus Center Finish Hardware 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.01 08700-11 .w on Hardware Set#5B Each to have: .w► Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Classroom Lock Corbin ML2055MR x DSA x US26D 1 Door Closer LCN(see description)x Alum 1 Overhead Stop GJ 410 series x US32D 1 set Seals Zero 188N jambs/head 1 Door Bottom Zero 355A + Hardware Set#5C Each to have: +w Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Classroom Lock Corbin ML2055MR x DSA x US26D ,.. 1 Door Holder GJ F26 x US26D 3 Silencers GJ 64 Hardware Set#5D " Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Classroom Lock Corbin ML2055MR x DSA x US26D 1 Door Closer LCN(see description)x Alum 1 Door Stop GJ FB 13 x FB 14R x US26D ••� 1 set Seals Zero 188N jambs/head 1 Door Bottom Zero 355A Hardware Set#6 Each to have: 1 Set Sliding Door Hardware Coburn(see description) 3 Flush Bolts GJ(see description) 1 Sliding Door Lock Adams Rite MS 1850SNSI-050 x US28 1 Masterkeyed Cylinder Corbin (as required)x US26D 4 Custom Pulls (see details) Hardware Set#6A Each to have: 1 Set Sliding Door Hardware Coburn(see description) , 3 Flush Bolts GJ(see description) 1 Sliding Door Lock Adams Rite MS 1850SNSI-050 x US28 1 Masterkeyed Cylinder Corbin(as required) x US26D 4 Custom Pulls (see details) Note: Furnish curved track(see floor plans and details). Smith Campus Center Finish Hardware 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.01 08700-10 Hardware Set#2G Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Storeroom Lock Corbin ML2057MR x DSA x US26D 1 Door Closer LCN(see description)x Alum 1 Door Stop GJ FBI 3 x FB 14R x US26D 1 set Weatherstripping Zero 429A jambs/head Ok 1 Saddle Zero 564A Hardware Set#3 Each to have: 1 Masterkeyed Cylinder Corbin(to suit)x US26D so Hardware Set#4 Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Privacy Set Corbin ML2060 x DSA x US26D 1 Door Stop GJ FB 13 x FB 14R x US26D 3 Silencers GJ 64 Hardware Set#4A Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Privacy Set Corbin ML2060 x DSA x US26D 1 Door Closer LCN 4111 Cush x Alum 3 Silencers GJ 64 sa Hardware Set#5 Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Classroom Lock Corbin ML2055MR x DSA x US26D 1 Door Closer LCN(see description)x Alum 1 Door Stop GJ FBI 3 x FB 14R x US26D 3 Silencers GJ 64 Hardware Set#5A Each to have: ON, Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Classroom Lock Corbin ML2055MR x DSA x US26D 1 Concealed Closer LCN 3131 series x Alum 1 Door Stop GJ FB 13 x FB 14R x US26D I set Seals Zero 188N jambs/head 1 Door Bottom Zero 355A �r Smith Campus Center Finish Hardware 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.01 08700-9 aw Hardware Set#2A Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Storeroom Lock Corbin ML2057MR x DSA x US26D 1 Door Stop GJ FB 13 x FB 14R x US26D 3 Silencers GJ 64 Hardware Set#2B .• Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Storeroom Lock Corbin ML2057MR x DSA x US26D 1 Door Closer LCN(see description)x Alum 1 Door Stop GJ FBI 3 x FB 14R x US26D 1 set Seals Zero 188N jambs/head 1 Door Bottom Zero 355A Hardware Set#2C Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) * 1 Storeroom Lock Corbin ML2057MR x DSA x US26D 1 Door Closer LCN 4111 Cush x Alum 1 set Seals Zero 188N jambs/head .. 1 Door Bottom Zero 355A Hardware Set#2D Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Storeroom Lock Corbin ML2057MR x DSA x US26D «A 1 Door Closer LCN(see description)x Alum 1 Overhead Stop GJ 410 series x US32D 3 Silencers GJ 64 Hardware Set#2E Each to have: r 2 Spring Hinges Stanley 2060 (as required) 1 Storeroom Lock Corbin ML2057MR x DSA x US26D uu 1 Door Stop GJ 60W x US26D 2 Silencers GJ 64 Hardware Set#2F Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) " 1 Storeroom Lock Corbin ML2057MR x DSA x US26D 1 Overhead Stop GJ 410 series x US32D 3 Silencers GJ 64 Smith Campus Center Finish Hardware 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.01 08700-8 P" Hardware Set#1 Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Office Lock Corbin ML2051MR x DSA x US26D 1 Door Stop GJ FB 13 x FB 14R x US26D 1 set Seals Zero 188N jambs/head 1 Door Bottom Zero 355A Hardware Set#I A Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Office Lock Corbin ML2051MR x DSA x US26D 1 Overhead Stop GJ 410 series x US32D 1 set Seals Zero 188N jambs/head 1 Door Bottom Zero 355A Hardware Set#1 B ?W Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Office Lock Corbin ML2051MR x DSA x US26D 1 Door Closer LCN(see description)x Alum 1 Door Stop GJ FBI 3 x FB 14R x US26D 1 set Seals Zero 188N jambs/head 1 Door Bottom Zero 355A Hardware Set#I C Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Office Lock Corbin ML2051MR x DSA x US26D 1 Door Closer LCN 4041 series x Alum 1 Door Stop GJ FBI 3 x FB 14R x US26D r 1 set Seals Zero 870AA jambs/head 1 set Seals Zero 119WB (all four sides) 1 Door Bottom Zero 365A 1 Saddle Zero 564A Hardware Set#2 Each to have: Hinges Stanley(as required) 1 Storeroom Lock Corbin ML2057MR x DSA x US26D " 1 Door Closer LCN(see description)x Alum 1 Door Stop GJ FB 13 x FB 14R x US26D 3 Silencers GJ 64 Smith Campus Center Finish Hardware 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.01 08700-7 MR so 2.8 LOCKSETS,LATCHSETS ETC. A. Unless otherwise noted, all locksets and latchsets shall be heavy duty mortise type, and shall be Corbin Russwin 2000 Series master ring with the following features: 1. Curved lip strikes with proper lip lengths as required. on 2. Wrought steel box strike. 3. Auxiliary deadlatching. PART 3.00—EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL am A. Approval: As soon as practical after award of Contract and before a hardware schedule is prepared, and before any hardware is ordered or delivered to the project, the Contractor shall I, submit to the Architect for his written approval copies of sample list, listing each of the different items of builders hardware and catalog cuts of each item. B. Templates: As soon as the hardware schedule is approved the hardware supplier shall furnish to the various fabricators, required templates for fabrication purposes. Templates shall be made available not more than(10)days after receipt of the approved hardware schedule. C. Make periodic checks during construction in order to ascertain that the finish hardware furnished has been installed correctly. After completion of all construction work, adjust finish hardware to work properly; test all keys and adjust as required for smooth, free operation. Provide proper lubrication as recommended by manufacturer. " 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights recommended in "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware"by BHMA. Unless otherwise noted or directed by the Architect. B. Install each hardware unit in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication recommended by the manufacturer. Replace units that cannot be adjusted. .. D. Wherever hardware installation is made more than one (1) month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to work during the week prior to acceptance, make final check and adjust all hardware items in such space or area. Adjust door control devices and compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. E. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware. Im 3.3 HARDWARE SETS A. The following is a general listing of hardware requirements and is not intended for use as a 'm final hardware schedule. Any items of hardware required by established standards or practices, or to meet state and local codes or proper door operation shall be furnished whether or not specifically called out in the following listed groups. '" B. Items as specified in hardware sets are to be the products of the listed manufacturer's. Products specified are Smith College standards. SUBSTITUTIONS WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED. an Smith Campus Center Finish Hardware on 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.01 08700-6 -Interior wood doors US26D(Satin Chrome). -Interior metal doors USP(Prime Coat). 2.4 DOOR CLOSERS A. All surface closers shall meet ANSI A156.4 Grade 1 requirements, and furnished with cast iron closer bodies. Closers shall be LCN 4011/4111 series barrier free. B. All closers shall be installed so that closer bodies are positioned on room side of doors to and from adjacent spaces, i.e., in-swing doors shall be regular arm. Out-swing doors shall have a parallel arm. Regular arm shall be used in connecting doors between rooms, unless otherwise noted. C. All closers shall be of one manufacturer's products. All closers shall be inspected after installation by a factory representative to insure proper adjustment and operation. A report shall be filed with the Architect after visit has been made. 40 2.5 PROTECTION PLATES MW A. Kick plates shall be 10"high x 2"less door width x .050 thick x beveled three edges. B. Mop plates shall be 10"high x 2"less door width x .050 thick x beveled three edges. C. Armour plates shall be 34"high x 2" less door width x .050 thick x beveled three edges. 2.6 SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE A. All sliding door hardware shall be the following listed products of Coburn Sliding Door Systems: (2)Tracks C2-16(size to suit) (10)Brackets C2-150 (8)Hangers C2-203 40 (2)Bottom Channels C44-1 (size to suit) (8)Bottom Guides C44-310 (4) Stops C97-711 40 2.7 FLUSH BOLTS AND COORDINATORS A. Flush Bolts: Shall be Glynn Johnson FB6FB6W series, furnish DP-2 dustproof strikes for all 010 bottom bolts. Top bolts shall be furnished with proper extensions to allow for easy operation. B. Self Latching Flush Bolts: Shall be GJ FB50/60 series, furnish DP-2 dustproof strikes for all + • bottom bolts. Furnish wear plates as required. C. Automatic Flush Bolts: Shall be GJ FB30/40 series, furnish DP-2 dustproof strikes for all bottom bolts. Furnish wear plates as required. D. Coordinators: Shall be GJ COR series. Furnish all fillers, mounting brackets, and carry bars as required. E. All flush bolts and coordinators shall be the products of one manufacturer. Smith Campus Center Finish Hardware 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.01 08700-5 heads. Full threaded wood screws shall be furnished for all wood applications. No thru bolts will be allowed. I. Furnish a complete set of specialized tools as needed, for the Owner's continued maintenance, �. removal, and replacement of hardware. 2.2 KEYS AND KEYING A. Keys: All keys shall be nickel silver with visual key control. Furnish a quantity of keys as follows, unless otherwise directed by the Owner: mo 1. Master Keys 3 2. Change Keys 3 each per cylinder 3. Construction Keys 5 ► 4. Control Keys 5 B. Keying: All locks shall be construction keyed and great grand master keyed to the existing Corbin Russwin Master Ring master key system. Hardware Supplier to meet with Owner to establish the keying requirements. All master keys shall be hand delivered to the Owner by the manufacturer or his representative. C. All cylinders shall be Corbin Russwin Master Ring removable core standard size with visual key control. D. Key Cabinet: Provide a key control system set-up(by hardware supplier)to include envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips,receipt forms, 3 way visible card index, temporary markers,permanent markers and standard metal cabinet with locked access. Capacity for 150% of the number of locks required for this project. Instruct OWNER'S representative on the operation of the key control system. Key cabinet shall be Key Control Systems, Inc. 2.3 HINGES A. All hinges shall be full mortise five knuckle ball bearing type (Stanley FBB Series), template, with non-rising loose pins. All outswing doors shall have non-removable pins (NRP). Provide .. offset hinges, where necessary, as per details in drawings. B. All hinges for 1-3/4" thick doors shall be 4" wide in the open position. For other thickness doors, and trim projections, hinges shall be of a width to permit unobstructed swing of the doors. C. Size and weight of hinges shall conform to the following: Up to 36" --------------4-1/2" Standard Weight Over 36" to 42" ----------5" Heavy Weight D. Quantity of hinges shall be provided to conform to the following: Doors up to 60" in height------------------2 hinges Doors 60" to 90" in height-----------------3 hinges Doors 90" and over---------I hinge every 30" in height E. All hinges shall be the products of one manufacturer, unless otherwise noted. F. Unless otherwise noted finish shall be as follows: Smith Campus Center Finish Hardware 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.01 08700-4 ' �r B. Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be factory prepared for the installation of hardware. C. Install all finish hardware as per manufacturer's published installation instructions. Cut all exit device cross bars as required to fit the door size. Adjust all door-closing devices to insure proper closing and latching of door. D. Examine all drawings(including security drawings) covering the work of this Section and refer to all other drawings, including mechanical and electrical drawings, which may affect the work 0 of this Section or require coordination by this trade. 1.8 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturers warranties and replace defective hardware where necessary. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL M" A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are indicated herein. Products are identified by using appropriate hardware designation numbers. N B. Manufacturers are listed for each hardware type required.Provide either the product designated, or approved equal. Before ordering any hardware, review specifications, details and field installation conditions carefully with fabricators and hardware installer, confirming that all 40 hardware specified may be properly installed, and function as intended. Bring any conflicts or discrepancies to the Architect's attention at that time. C. Proprietary Products: References to specific proprietary products are used to establish minimum + ! standards of utility and quality. Other materials may be considered by the Architect in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. D. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this specification or the drawings, the finish hardware shall conform to the requirements of governmental authorities having jurisdiction and such requirements shall be followed as if specifically set forth in this specification. to E. Finish hardware shall conform to the applicable requirements of the American Insurance Association, and the National Board of Fire Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., and other local authorities having jurisdiction, and each such item shall bear a label or mark of the so Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., indicating its conformity with such requirements for use in connection with its specified location. F. Finish hardware shall be uniform in color and finish and free from imperfections affecting its appearance, function, operation and serviceability. Such hardware shall be suited and adapted to its required use and shall fit its respective location. G. Where the finished shape or size of members receiving finish hardware are such as to prevent or w, render unsuitable the use of the specific types or sizes of such hardware, suitable types or sizes shall be furnished, having as nearly as practicable the same function, operation and quality as the specified hardware. H. Bolts, screws and other fastenings required for the application of the finished hardware shall be of size and type to fit requirements and shall be of the same material and finish as the exposed parts of such hardware which they adjoin. Exposed screws and bolts shall have countersunk oval heads and bolts shall be provided with cap nuts. Countersunk part of screw and bolt holes shall be finished smoothly without sharp edges and form a firm seal for such screw and bolt Smith Campus Center Finish Hardware "I"" 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.01 08700-3 Im C. Product Data: Submit six (6) copies of the manufacturer's data for each item of hardware. Include whatever information may be necessary to show compliance with requirements. Submission shall clearly identify item submitted. Facsimile documents or copies of facsimile documents will not be accepted. D. Keying Schedule: A key schedule showing all key numbers and spaces to which each permits entry, shall be provided. Consult with OWNER and provide necessary assistance required for development of the schedule before submitting final key schedule. After final approval has been received, the schedule along with the key gathering envelopes containing keys for each lock endorsed with lock number and space designation shall be turned over to the OWNERS. E. Samples: Prior to submittal of the final hardware schedule and prior to delivery of hardware, submit one (1) sample of each exposed hardware unit as requested by the Architect. Do not • proceed with installation until samples have been approved. Sample will be reviewed by the ARCHITECT for design, color and texture only. Compliance with other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. Samples approved by the ARCHITECT may be installed in the work after substantial completion of work. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Standards: All finish hardware shall conform to all of the following standards: 1. Testing Laboratories: Underwriters Laboratory (UL) and or Warnock Hersey Fire Laboratories Division: All fire rated doors shall have hardware assemblies approved by one of the listed laboratories. Panic hardware UL Listed only. 2. National Fire Protection Association: NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. 3. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association(BHMA). 4. American National Standards Institute(ANSI). 5. American Disabilities Act(ADA). B. Supplier: Finish hardware shall be furnished by those having a minimum of 5 years of builders hardware experience and shall have in their employ at least one AEC to interpret plans,detailed .w drawings and specifications. C. Pack finish hardware in approved manufacturer's containers, complete with trimmings, bolts, screws, washers, etc. as required for application and securement. Provide careful protection of all finish hardware. D. Finish hardware shall be delivered, as directed, to the building site or to the door fabricator's *�* factory. Deliver hardware in order required and in ample time to permit application at the building, or fabricator's shops, within the time required for the completion of the building. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS A. Coordinate hardware with other work. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to the final hardware schedule,and include basic installation instructions in the package. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated and as necessary for proper installation and function. Deliver packaged hardware items to the proper locations for installation. Smith Campus Center Finish Hardware 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.01 08700-2 .� M ON SECTION 08700 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 WORK INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to furnish all the finish hardware as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Steel doors and frames-Section 08100. B. Wood Doors—Section 08200. C. Aluminum Entrances, Storefronts and Curtain Walls -Section 08410. D. Architectural Woodwork—Section 06400. E. Painting-Section 09900. F. Security—Section 16770. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hardware shall be suitable and adapted for its required use and shall fit its designated location. Should any hardware as shown, specified or required fail to meet the intended requirements or require modification to suit or fit the designated location, determine the correction or - modification necessary and notify the Architect in ample time to avoid delay in the manufacture and delivery of hardware. B. For fire rated openings provide hardware complying with NFPA Standard No. 80. requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Barrier Free Requirements: Maximum pressure applied to the latch area to open exterior doors shall not exceed fifteen (15) pounds. Interior doors which have a self-closing feature shall require pressure not to exceed eight(8)pounds. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Before any finish hardware is ordered or purchased, submit catalog cuts and a complete hardware schedule of finish hardware. Each item listed in the hardware schedule shall be identifiable with respect to manufacturer, brand catalog number, material and finish. Submit the following in accordance with the provisions of the general contract documents. B. Hardware Schedule: Submit six (6) copies of the hardware schedule. Follow Door and Hardware Institute (DH>) guide lines for scheduling. At the beginning of the schedule furnish an index, which list each door number with appropriate heading number and hardware set number. Furnish initial draft of schedule at the earliest possible date, in order to facilitate the fabrication of other work. Furnish final schedule after samples,manufacturer's data sheets have been approved. Where submission differs from the Schedule given herein, use different color or other means of identification to bring the change to the attention of the Architect. HORIZONTAL SCHEDULES WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED. Smith Campus Center Finish Hardware 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.01 08700-1 ,MITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 PART 4 APPENDICES TO THE SPECIFICATION 4.01 MOCK-UP TEST DRAWINGS *Steel Trusses shall have varying slopes to simulated condition at south end of Skylight. � II i II it � II i it i II i II i II � II i II i 40 APPRQX.AREA — PLAN _ _ _ _ _ _ SECTION APPROK AREA 1 I I I I I _ I 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 49 of 49 an w� SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER r� Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 damaged material shall be promptly removed from the site. B Cleaning Im I Immediately prior to completion of the Work,completely clean the entire Skylight as follows: a Clean all components of the Work as per the recommendations of the specific product manufacturer. b Clean glass with approved glass cleaning solutions only, and ensure that said cleaning solution is completely removed from the surface after cleaning. Do not clean glass when it is exposed to direct sunlight. sm C Acceptance 1 Acceptance of the completed installation of the Skylight requires the installation be sound, watertight and free from defects of material and workmanship. No 60 ,w �s 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 48 of 49 w� —'ZMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 thinner than 22 gauge. 2 Where indicated on the Drawings and where required to accommodate movement, an elastomeric flashing system shall be used. 3 Elastomeric flashing connecting to work of other Sections shall be provided by the Contractor for the work of this Section,including the attachment to his Work and to other work,(except waterproofing or roof-mg). 4 Where elastomeric or other flashing connects to roofing and waterproofing work provide 8 inches of flashing beyond the point of attachment to the Work of this Section. The connection to roofing work shall be provided by the roofing/waterproofing sub-contractor. Connections of such flashing to other than water-proofing work shall be provided by the Contractor for the Work of this Section. 5 Elastomeric flashing exposed to view shall be carefully bonded to the substrates without blistering;joints shall e be neat and as infrequent as possible. 6 Elastomeric flashing not supported by substrate material shall receive another layer of 60 mil flashing for reinforcement, fully bonded to the finish layer and the substrate and extending at least 1 inch beyond the unsupported area. 3.03 PROTECTION,CLEANING AND ACCEPTANCE A Protection I Protect the Skylight from any material equipment or practices that may impair the functioning, appearance, or durability of the Skylight or any other construction. 2 Package and store the materials in such a manner that shall prevent damage,contamination,distortion,breakage or structural weakening. 3 Pre-glazed units shall be stored upright or shall be crated and packaged with a rigid protection board top to prevent damage from ponding water,or by the work of other trades. 4 Units and related components shall not be staged more than one week in advance of installation in order to avoid damage by other trades. Units shall not be uncrated more than one day in advance of installation. 5 Replace any material damaged during manufacture, shipping,storage or erection. 6 Protect the installed Skylight from damage by other trades. t 7 Protection material, such as plastic membrane tapes and adhesive sheeting, shall be suitable for the intended protection application and protection period. 8 Protection materials shall be installed in a manner that will not trap harmful moisture or otherwise contaminate the Work in any way. 9 The Contractor shall submit samples and manufacturer's performance data, as well as application and removal procedures, for all protection materials. RN 10 Remove and replace any portion of the Skylight that has been damaged by other trades. All rejected and 08600–SKYLIGHTS July 26,2001 Page 47 of 49 on e� SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER a Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 11 Avoid excess shimming that may induce additional stress on fasteners. The total thickness (t) of a shim pack shall not exceed a dimension equal to the diameter(d) of the fastener/anchor. Where t>d, the fastener/anchor shall be recalculated to take into account the additional stress from bending on the fastener with the assumption that the shim does not contribute to resistance to fastener bending. Additional stress due to bending shall be added to tension stress and the tension/shear interaction analyzed. 12 Shim packs that resist compressive forces only may be high-impact plastic, Korolath type or equal. Shim packs subject to shear forces shall be stainless steel or HDG steel plates pinned together to form a monolithic shim. C Corrosion Protection 1 Ensure by design that no metals, including alloys of the same base metal, are placed together in a manner, .. combination or location likely to give rise to damage by electrolytic action or other corrosion. In particular avoid metal to metal contact between aluminum and metals other than an appropriate grade and composition of stainless steel as per the recommendations of the material manufacturer and to the approval of the Architect. Ensure that dissimilar aluminum alloys in contact with each other are compatible with each other or isolated. Any other dissimilar materials are to be treated or protected in such a manner as necessary to prevent corrosive action. war, 2 Isolation of dissimilar metal surfaces to prevent electrolytic action shall be accomplished by materials which are impervious to moisture and non-absorptive. on 3 All steel parts shall receive a protective treatment commensurate with their respective functions and locations. The treatment shall be one or more of those described above, and as approved by the Architect 4 Where used to the exterior of air-seals, or in any location vulnerable to moisture, steel shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication,or receive the zinc-rich coating system specified herein. 5 Field welds on galvanized steel shall be treated with an approved field cold galvanizing process(e.g. ZRC). Remediation of finish of galvanized steel shall be as per the requirements of ASTM A 780. 6 Aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete, fireproofing, plaster, masonry, or absorptive materials of any kind shall be coated with an anti-galvanic material,impervious to moisture. D Installation of Insulation 1 Install thermal insulation and frresafrng where indicated on the Contract Documents and as required to meet overall fire separation requirements. 2 Install insulation using welded or mechanically fixed impaling and/or retaining clips. Adhesive attachment of insulation is not permitted. 3 Install foil tape around perimeter of foil-face of insulation board to adjacent metal framing to achieve positive vapor barrier. E Flashings .m 1 Where required or indicated on the Drawings, all copings parapets,sills,offsets and setbacks to have continuous through wall flashing to direct water penetration and seepage back to the exterior, unless otherwise noted. Flashing shall be formed from appropriate thickness of stainless steel. Stainless steel flashing shall be no am 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26,2001 Page 46 of 49 so --SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 3 Skylight shall be erected plumb,square,level,and correctly aligned within the following limitations: a Offset from true horizontal, vertical, and design location shall not exceed t 1/8 inch per 12 feet nor t 1/2 inch over any one length or part thereof the building. b Maximum offset from true alignment between abutting components or components separated by less than 3 inches shall not exceed 1/32 inch. c All tolerances are non-cumulative. on 4 Joint widths as noted in the Contract Documents are the design joint width at an ambient temperature of 22° F. Installation procedures should be adjusted to take into account the ambient temperature at the time of installation. ®w 5 Care shall be exercised to properly brace and reinforce units against racking during hoisting and installation. B Anchors and Connections 1 Structural fixings shall be designed to resist dead loads, live loads, wind loads,vertical and lateral loads, and all building movements, individually and in combination. Anchors and connections shall be provided to fully satisfy their required purpose of adjustability,movement and load transfer. 2 The Contractor is to adopt embedded anchor details included in the Contract Document. Any deviation from the detail shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to design and coordinate the fixing with adjacent constructions. Any cost or delay resulting from the change shall be responsibility of the Contractor. 3 Connections between different materials shall be designed to allow for the differential thermal movement of the respected materials. Provide oversize holes and/or slotted holes as appropriate to accommodate differential thermal movement between such materials as aluminum and mild steel,aluminum and concrete,etc. 4 Anchors and connections that do not provide for movement shall prevent such movement by appropriate means. Provision shall be made for vibration proofing of all fixings either by the use of locking nuts, locking washers or application of an approved locking fluid 5 Anchors and connections that are designed for movement shall be of such construction that friction is low Ili enough to allow for such movement without buckling and other damage and without causing binding and noises. 6 Self-drilling,self-threading fasteners shall not be permitted for use into concrete or masonry. 7 Metal surfaces shall be separated in such a manner that metal does not move on metal. Materials used for this purpose shall be low friction components, sealants or gaskets as applicable. 8 Anchorages to Structural Steel shall not induce rotational forces in supporting members. 9 All anchors,connections and fixings outboard of the air-seal shall be 300 series stainless steel. 10 Adhere to manufacturer's recommendation for installation of anchors. 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 45 of 49 ON OR SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER in Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 7 The Contractor shall provide test samples of all substrate materials to the sealant manufacturer for peel adhesion aw and accelerated weathering testing, and shall submit the results of all tests. All testing shall be with materials and finishes identical in every respect to approved production materials and finishes. 8 Prior to undertaking any structural glazing, the Contractor shall submit complete structural glazing procedures, w including permissible conditions, temperatures, cure times, temporary restraint design, surface preparation and all other procedures, including quality control inspection program that may be employed to properly undertake the Skylight. 9 After installation and curing, the Contractor shall engage the sealant manufacturer to perform pull testing on the complete work to confirm proper adhesion and sealant depth. At least one (1) lite of each type of each storey shall be tested. In the event of any failures, additional statistical testing shall be performed on a statistical sample size acceptable to the Architects. 10 The sealant manufacturer shall confirm that the installation procedures are consistent with the manufacturer's requirements for warranties on the sealant products. 11 Installation of all structural sealant shall be in strict compliance with all recommendations by the sealant w manufacturer for cleaning,priming,and sealant installation procedure. 12 Provide silicone batch logging procedures to record all batches used including silicone batch manufacture date, arrival date, date of silicone installation, temperature and humidity measured inside the factory at a nominated time each day. J Stainless Steel Tension Rod Installation: on 1 Post tension rod to ensure that required tension in members are maintained when the Tension Rod is subject to the design loads specified. 2 Control the amount of post-tensioning to ensure that members are not over stressed when subject to design loads. 3 Monitor force in members with load cells or strain gages. Record and submit data for review and approval by the Architect. 4 Submit installation procedure including means and methods for post-tensioning and surveying for review and 60 approval. 3.02 INSTALLATION w� A General 1 Prior to start of installation, inspect the building and verify all conditions and dimensions as being acceptable to receive the Work of this Section. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to take to check adjacent structure to the Works or from which the Works are supported. Full allowance shall be made to accommodate all necessary adjustment within the specified limits. 2 Should any conditions be found that may prohibit proper execution of the Work, the Contractor shall imediately notify the Architect in writing of these conditions. Installation shall not proceed until remedial acti mon,acceptable to the Architect,has been executed. 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26,2001 Page 44 of 49 w. "`SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 width of the rabbet, and placed at the glass quarter points. They shall be of a length recommended by the glass manufacturer and be configured in such a way as not to impede water drainage of the glazing rabbet. 13 Jamb blocks shall be used on each glass unit supported on four sides. The blocks shall be 60 f5 Shore A durometer extruded silicone rubber, and shall be placed at the top and bottom of the rabbet, 1/8 inches clear of the glass edge. 14 Face spacers shall be 60 f5 Shore A durometer extruded silicone rubber, applied around the perimeter of each glazed opening on both inside and outside faces. 15 Glass shall be centered in each opening to provide the purchases and clearances recommended by the glass manufacturer and approved by the Architect. 16 Sealant tapes or ribbons,where used,shall be mitered at each corner. 17 Apply no tapes,ribbons or markings to the glass. 18 Glazing details shall permit glass replacement after initial construction, shall permit replacement glass of same minimal side as original glass,and shall not require cutting of framing members or removal of interior finishes. I Structural Glazing 1 Structural glazing shall utilize medium or high modulus silicone sealant. 2 Sealant shall be of the configuration and dimensions necessary to provide the following allowable stresses and attendant safety factors when the Skylight are subject to the requirements of Section 1.04 (Performance Criteria),above. u Stress Type Allowable Stress Safety Factor (Maximum) (Minimum) Tension 20 psi 5 Compression 20 psi 5 Shear 20 psi 5 Dead Load Shear 1 psi 5 3 Structural glazing shall conform to the specific requirements of Section 3.0 1,H(Glass and Glazing),above. l 4 Structural silicone shall not be used for primary dead load support. 5 Wherever possible, silicone glazing design shall permit glazing to the major framing members in the factory, or shall incorporate a separate aluminum glazing sub-frame to permit structural glazing under factory conditions. 6 All substrate framing extrusions for structural glazing shall provide for an aluminum insert with a finish approved for adhesion of structural glazing sealant by the sealant manufacturer. _w 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 43 of 49 aw SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 6 Joints and joint surfaces shall be clean, dry, and free of any materials that may have an adverse effect on the +w performance of the sealant and gasket materials. 7 Apply sealants and gaskets under the climatic conditions recommended by the manufacturer(s). Sealant shall not be installed when substrates are wet or when ambient temperature is below 40° F. All surfaces to receive �. sealants shall be treated (cleaned, primed or unprimed) in accordance with the recommendations of the sealant manufacturer. Use no sealant that has started to set in its container, or any sealant that has exceeded the shelf life published by the manufacturer. 8 All glazing gaskets shall be vulcanized, injection molded or heat-welded at the corners to form a continuous closure. w 9 Fill all joints continuously and completely with sealant, forming a neat, uniform, concave bead. Finish the material flush with adjoining surface unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. All sealant surfaces shall be tooled smooth. Upon completion of tooling, immediately remove masking tape from adjacent surfaces. 10 Color of sealant shall match the color approved by the Architect. H Glass and Glazing 1 Glazing shall be performed by skilled workmen in accordance with the best trade practices, and without springing or forcing. All instructions of the glass and glazing materials manufacturers shall be followed. 2 Tong marks shall be concealed within sill rabbet. 3 Glass and glazing materials shall be compatible with each other and adequate for their intended purpose. Each wA material type shall be as per details and approved Shop Drawings. 4 Protect all adjoining surfaces not to receive glazing materials against staining or damage of any kind. 5 Glazing rabbets shall be clean, dry, and free of any materials that might adversely affect the bond and seal of the glazing materials or the drainage of the rabbet. 6 Install glass and glazing materials under the climatic conditions recommended by the fabricator. 7 Prime all surfaces to receive glazing materials,unless recommended otherwise, in writing, by the manufacturers and approved by the Architect. 8 Use no sealant that has started to set in its container, nor a sealant that has exceeded the shelf life published by the manufacturer. 9 Do not install sealant if the ambient temperature is below 40°F. No 10 Sealant color shall be as selected by the Architect. 11 Exposed sealants shall be installed so that the top surfaces of the sealant beads are sloped to drain water away •m from the glass. Exposed sealant surfaces shall be tooled smooth. 12 Setting blocks shall be 90 t 5 Shore A durometer extruded silicone rubber, at least 1/4 inch in thickness, full 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 42 of 49 PP No SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER +fir Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 1 All welding of steel shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the American Welding Society. " 2 All welding shall be done by skilled mechanics qualified by test in the last 12 months as prescribed in the American Welding Society Code and as applicable to the material thickness and type of welded joint on which the welders will be employed. 3 All welding shall be done with electrodes and/or methods recommended by the suppliers of the metals being welded. The type, size, and spacing of welds shall be as shown on the approved shop drawings. Welding materials and methods shall be such as not to cause distortion,discoloration,or result in any other adverse effect on the required profiles and finishes of visible surfaces of the Skylight. Im 4 Welding of aluminum alloys and the qualifications of aluminum welders shall conform to the requirements of the Aluminum Association "Specifications for Structures of Aluminum Alloys, Aluminum Construction Manual". 5 Welding of Stainless Steel shall be by TIG welding or other methods subject to approval. Use double bevel butt welds,backing 6 bars to remove heat,jigging,tack welds and any other measures necessary to minimize distortion. 7 Weld splatter and welding oxides on exposed surfaces shall be removed. All exposed welds shall be finished to match and blend with adjacent parent metal prior to final finish application. 8 Stud welding shall be done by mechanics trained by the manufacturer of the stud setting system. The manufacturer shall develop specific programs and instructions in cooperation with the fabricator to suit the needs of the specific details. The fabricator shall exercise particular care that all recommendations of the manufacturer are closely followed. 9 Visible marks(telegraphing)on finished surfaces due to welding of studs shall not be acceptable. 10 Welded joints shall typically be confined to concealed locations. Any exposed joints shall be ground-off. G Sealant and Gasket Application 1 Sealing mechanisms (sealants and gaskets) shall be provided where shown on the drawing, or required for a permanently weather-tight installation. The sealing mechanism for each location and use shall be as indicated on drawings. In those locations where a mechanism is necessary but is not indicated, it shall be of a type recommended by the Contractor and approved by the Architect. 2 The design of all sealed joints shall be in accordance with the recommendation of the sealant and/or gasket manufacturer. go 3 Specific alloys, compounds, etc. of gasket materials shall be appropriate for the function intended and are subject to approval by the Architect. Gasket manufacturers/suppliers are subject to approval by the Architect. 4 Submit test samples of all substrate materials to the sealant manufacturer for compatibility and peel adhesion testing. 5 Protect all adjoining surfaces not to receive sealants against staining by masking and/or other methods. Sealant joints shall be concealed from view to the extent possible. 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 41 of 49 40 SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 of this section. MR B Fabrication and Assembly 1 The design of the Skylight shall endeavor to keep site operations to a minimum. Manufacturing, finishing, and .. assembly processes shall, wherever possible, be carried out off-site and under controlled environmental conditions. 2 Assembly procedures to be carried out on site shall be simple to execute and capable of execution within the time(s)allowed in the Master Construction Program. C Manufacturer's Standards I Materials, components and systems incorporated in the Work shall be mixed, applied, installed and otherwise used in strict accordance with the recommended standards and procedures of the respective manufacturers. D Storage and Handling 1 Materials shall be stored in a dry, well ventilated location. Handling of materials shall be kept to a minimum, and all materials shall be carefully protected from soiling and from condensation and other harmful moisture. E Jointing and Reinforcing , 1 Accurately fit and firmly secure all exposed metal joints with metal to metal hairline contacts. 2 All fastenings shall be installed at an approved spacing. Fasteners shall not penetrate gutters and drainage systems. 3 All screws and bolts up to and including 5/16 inch diameter, and all screws and bolts that are drilled and/or tapped into aluminum,shall be 300 series stainless steel. 4 All bolts 3/8 inch diameter and heavier shall be stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized. 5 No self-drilling fasteners shall be allowed outboard of the air-seal line. 6 All jointing and splicing of members shall be concealed. rw 7 Exposed fasteners shall occur only where expressly permitted by the Architect. Where exposed in finished surfaces,screw heads shall be Phillips oval-head countersunk type, finish to match adjacent surfaces. 8 Conceal all joint sealants except as noted on the drawings. 9 Where slots or oversized holes are provided for adjustment only, secure connection after final adjustment. Washers or nuts, which rely on friction,are not acceptable,unless otherwise indicated. 10 All work shall be properly reinforced to resist all loads imposed upon them by all doors, hardware, anchors,and other attachments. F Welding om 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 40 of 49 Am F* SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER ter Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 3 To the extent possible, all trusses shall be shop-assembled and finished; all components not shop assembled shall be shop-fitted. F Embeds 1 Embeds shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel and shall incorporate minimum embed extension of 12 inches, with hooked profile for securing to structure reinforcement. 2 An acceptable manufacturer is Halfen. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY A General 1 Use no materials, equipment or practices that may adversely affect the functioning, appearance or durability of on the completed Skylight and related construction. 2 The Skylight shall be accomplished in compliance with the specified criteria without buckling, opening of joints, undue stress on fasteners, sealants and gaskets, opening of welds, cracking of glass, leakage, noises or other harmful effects. — 3 Conform strictly to the materials, finishes, shapes, profiles, sizes, thickness, and joint locations required by the Drawings and Specifications. 4 Match all materials to produce continuity of line,texture and color. !! ? 5 All work shall be of the highest quality, in accordance with the best trade practices, and performed by skilled workmen. All work shall be accomplished to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner. 6 To the fullest extent practicable, fabrication and assembly shall be executed in the shop. All Work that is not shop-assembled shall be shop-fitted. 7 To the extent possible, all fabrication shall be done prior to finishing. Exposed metal edges shall be finished to match typical finished surfaces. 8 All components exposed in the finished work shall be free from warping and oil-canning effects, the telegraphing of welds,studs,and other fasteners,and streaks,tool and die marks. 9 Skylight design shall typically incorporate an outside weatherseal and an inside air-seal. System shall provide proper drainage of any water infiltration, due to failure of the primary weatherseal, through internal gutter and weep system. 10 Do not proceed with fabrication of the work of this section until the shop drawings and other submittals have been approved and the mock-up tests have been successfully completed. 11 Prior to commencement of the installation work, a meeting shall be arranged to review procedures, sequences, schedules ad coordination between the relevant parties. Prior to the meeting, the Skylight Contractor shall have completed the layout and be prepared to certify that the adjoining supporting work is ready to receive the work 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 39 of 49 SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER .r Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 2 Lines shall be straight, surfaces flat and without surface imperfections, corners square and with uniform and sharp arris. Surface shall be free of scaling,pitting, or damages of any kind that would be visible in the finished work. 3 All welds shall be ground smooth to match surrounding surfaces, flush welds shall blend with adjacent surfaces. 4 Tolerances, as a minimum, shall be consistent with the AISC tolerances for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel, Section 10 of the Code of Standard Practice, except where more stringent tolerances are required by the +* design. 5 Tolerances for fabrication and installation shall be half those normally acceptable for structural steel. .� 6 Surfaces shall be blast cleaned and receive the finish specified herein. D Skylights: s 1 Skylights and all glazing frames not in vertical position shall have a condensate/leakage collection system capable of controlling water to prevent leaks to the interior space. Joints in this system shall be sealed tight; cross members shall overlap and be designed for controlled water flow. 2 Skylights shall typically include a continuous heel bead of sealant around the perimeter of all snap caps. 3 Provide weepholes to the exterior for the removal of condensate/leakage; weep holes shall be protected on the exterior by appropriate rain hoods or baffles against water infiltration. 4 The perimeter elastomeric flashing shall start at the glass line and extend to and overlap the terrace/roof system. Fasteners penetrating the elastomeric flashing shall be sealed using uncured elastomeric boots or other approved seals. All joints shall be lapped at least 3 in. 5 Fabrication and installation tolerance of the steel trusses shall be taken into consideration in the design of the skylight system to ensure that sufficient adjustment is built into the system to accommodate reasonable misalignments. �. E Stainless Steel and Painted Carbon Steel Truss Assembly: 1 Stainless steel truss members shall be machined components of medium high-strength stainless steel rod and post as specified below: a Bottom Chords: Heat-treated A304 or A316 .w b Major and Secondary Posts: A304 or A306 c Diagonal and Bracing Rods: Cold Drawn A304 or A316 d End Bracing Rods: A304 or A306 2 Carbon steel truss members shall be formed of A36 steel bar stock shop welded and painted. Finish of all steel shall be high—build epoxy primer with high performance polyurethane finish coats. Steel shall be Architectural Steel and shall conform to the requirements listed in Item 2.13C above. 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 38 of 49 .Ar No •MITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 2 Metal panels and extruded aluminum edge frames shall follow the profiles indicated on the Contract Documents. 3 At formed metal panels, the perimeter arris to panels (i.e. the arris between the face plane and the edge plane) shall be consistent throughout the work. Panel sheet shall be scored and back-cut to achieve a sharp arris with a design radius not exceeding 1/16 inch. 4 Panels shall be fabricated to ensure that the grain of all panels are oriented in the same direction upon installation. 5 Panel support construction shall result in a panel visual flatness acceptable to the Architect. 6 Aluminum sheet thickness shall be a minimum of 4 mm(3/16 inch). Stainless Steel sheet shall be a minimum of 16 ga.In thickness. 7 Horizontal aluminum panels shall be reinforced with corrugated sheet, extruded stiffeners, etc. as required to meet the load requirements specified in Section 1.04(Performance Criteria),above. 8 Extruded aluminum stiffeners or any alternate panel stiffening devices shall be designed to prevent "telegraphing"or"read through"of the stiffening device on the exposed face of the panel. 9 At horizontal panels, panel construction shall be capable of providing a sound barrier to rain impact noise. Sound deadening material shall be impervious to moisture. 10 Panels subject to human impact, within six feet of any walking surface, and wherever else indicated on the Drawings shall be reinforced with galvanized steel or alternate suitable devices to the Architect's approval. 1 I Panel anchorage shall be designed to permit ease of replacement without disturbing contiguous work. 12 All comers of formed sheet shall be welded to inhibit water infiltration. W 13 Flatness of Metal Panels: a All exposed flat exterior metal panels of the curtain wall shall be designed, fabricated,and installed in such a manner that they are visually flat when viewed from any angle. Any short length distortions, ripples, !r waves, oil canning, or telegraphing of fasteners shall not be permitted. Provisions shall be made to allow for differential thermal expansion between framing members and the exposed metal of the Skylight without noise and without distortion of the exposed face. b Visual flatness shall be to the approval of the Architect. c In the event that metal flatness requires interpretation by measurement,this shall be done by measuring and calculating the slope between any two points on the exposed surface 1 inch apart. The slope shall not exceed 0.5 percent from the nominal plane of the surface, when measured at an ambient temperature of 75° F. C Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel 1 All steel exposed to view shall be Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel. go 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26,2001 Page 37 of 49 SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 .w b Serration hackle shall not penetrate more than 10 percent of the glass thickness. c Flare shall not exceed 1/16 inch as measured perpendicular to the glass surface at edge. d Bevel shall not exceed 1/16 inch. e Flake chips shall not exceed 1/16 inch in length. f Rough chips exceeding the dimensions listed in Item a above shall not be permitted. J Glass Products: I Skylight Glass a Performance characteristics for an '/4 inch minimum thickness clear FT outer lite with high performance low-e coating and 40% ceramic frit pattern on the no. 2 surface - %2 inch air space — %2 inch minimum thickness clear laminated HS inner lite insulating glass unit shall be equal to or better than the following: Light Transmittance: 47 percent U-Value(Summer): 0.28 Btu/hr/ft2/°F ..r U-Value(Winter): 0.29 Btu/hr/ft2/°F Shading Coefficient: 0.31 b Acceptable low-e coatings are: Viracon VE1-2M. PPG Solarban 60. c Approved Glass Manufacturers: Viracon PPG 2.13 COMPONENTS A General 1 Components shall be manufactured from extruded or sheet aluminum, except where indicated otherwise. Substitutions for aluminum may be considered only for such components that are not finished or exposed to the weather. B Metal Panels wis 1 Metal panels shall be fabricated from the specified alloys of aluminum or steel. 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 36 of 49 Rw �'MITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 obstruct vision through the glass or otherwise compromise the requirements of the glass for a period of ten(10) years. G Ionoplast Interlayer 1 Two lites of glass bonded to a 2 mm clear plastic, puncture resistant, ionoplast interlayer conforming to the requirements of ANSI Z97.1,ASTM C 1172,and CPSC standard 16 CFR 1201 Category II 2 Manufacturer shall warrant that laminated glass will not develop edge separation or other defects which may obstruct vision through the glass or otherwise compromise the requirements of the glass for a period of ten(10) years. Interlayer shall be compatible with all glazing gaskets and sealants. 3 Approved Products: a Sentryglas Plus as manufactured by E.I.Dupont de Nemours&Co.,Inc.. H Ceramic Frit Coated Glass 1 All ceramic frit coated glass shall be heat-strengthened (Kind HS) and meet the minimum requirements of ASTM C 1048. 2 Ceramic frit color to match Architect's sample. 3 Visual Quality Control acceptance criteria of the ceramic frit finish shall be consistent with industry guidelines, subject to approval by the Architect and the Owner. 4 Manufacturers shall warrant that ceramic frit glass will not develop any defects which may affect the appearance of the glass or may otherwise compromise the requirement of the glass for a period of ten (10) years. I Glass Quality 1 Glass shall be free from defects or impurities detrimental to its performance. Defects which are not detrimental to the performance such as bubbles, waves, spots, scratches, spalls, discoloration, chipping or impurities shall only be acceptable if not visible from a distance of 3 ft or more, or in accordance with the manufacturer's guideline. Any panels with imperfections, scratches, pinholes, irregular cut or chipped edges, chipped corners, or any cracks,exceeding the specified limits shall be rejected- 2 The Skylight Contractor shall supply and replace any glass panels that are broken during construction and up to the date of Practical Completion of the building. 3 Butt glass edges shall be ground and swiped. 4 All other edges shall have a high quality factory cut edge. 5 Exposed edges, such as at corners, shall be ground and polished. 6 All glass edges shall conform to the following requirements: a Shark teeth shall not penetrate more that half the glass thickness. 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 35 of 49 SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 3 Insulating Glass units shall be certified as CBA by the Insulating Glass Certification Council and shall comply with the following: a ASTM E 773 Standard Test Method for Seal Durability of Insulating Glass Units. b ASTM E 774 Standard Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units,Class A or better. c Insulating glass shall meet these tests considering the climatic conditions of the location of manufacture as .� well as the location of the installation. 4 Insulating Glass units shall be covered by manufacturer's warranty for ten(10)years. .w E Low-e Coated Glass 1 Low-emissivity (low-e) coating(s) shall be neutral in transmitted and reflected color and otherwise exhibit the visual and performance characteristics of the products specified. 2 The coating shall be as approved by the Architect. .. 3 Visual Quality Control acceptance criteria of the low-e coating shall be consistent with industry guidelines, subject to approval by the Architect and the Owner. a Pinholes with diameters in excess of 1/16 inches are not acceptable. b Clusters of pinholes are not acceptable. w C Scratches no longer than 3 inches in length are acceptable provided that they occur within 3"of an edge. 4 Edge deletion of low-e coatings shall be provided at all insulating glass and structural glazing unless manufacturer submits test data acceptable to the Architect indicating that edge deletion is not required. 5 Manufacturer shall warrant that low-e coating shall not peel, crack, fade or deteriorate for a period of ten(10) years. Manufacturer shall warrant that any glass that is not edge deleted will not develop loss of adhesion with insulating glass or structural glazing sealants for a period of ten(10)years. F Laminated Glass(PVB) an 1 Two liter of glass bonded to a .060 in. clear plastic, puncture resistant, polyvinyl butyral (PVB) interlayer conforming to the requirements of ANSI Z97.1,ASTM C 1172,and CPSC standard 16 CFR 1201 Category II. si 2 Interlayer shall be compatible with all glazing gaskets and sealants. 3 Approved Products: w. a Saflex as manufactured by Solutia Inc. b Butacite as manufactured by E.I. Dupont de Nemours&Co.,Inc. 4 Manufacturer shall warrant that laminated glass will not develop edge separation or other defects which may 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26,2001 Page 34 of 49 W PW 7MITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER on Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 on barriers,and secondary water infiltration barrier. C Sound-deadening: No 1 Acoustical board, thickness and density as required by design, non-combustible waterproof type, to Architect's approval. ON 2 Adhesive-backed,bitumen compound sheet membrane,thickness as required by design,to Architect's approval. 2.12 GLASS an A General 1 All glass of the same type shall be the manufactured product of one company. B Annealed Glass: 1 ASTM C 1036;Type I,Class 1,Glazing Select q3. C Heat Strengthened and Fully Tempered Safety Glass: 1 ASTM C 1048;Type 1,Class I,Glazing Select q3,Kind HS,Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 2 All fully tempered glass shall be heat-soaked at a glass surface temperature of 480° F f 50° F minimum for eight hours, and shall meet CPSC 16-CFR, Part 1201, Category Il. Skylight Contractor may propose alternate time/ temperature ratio, provided it can be demonstrated that such alternative is as good as or better than that specified above. 3 Roller distortion and/or ripples shall run in the same direction for the entire job. All glass shall be heat-treated through the horizontal tempering process. Bow allowance is 0.1%. 4 Heat strengthening shall be achieved by heat treating for a surface compressive stress of not less than 3500 psi nor more than 7000 psi. The level of pre-stress shall be such to resist wind and thermally induced forces. Throughout production, the manufacturer shall maintain a quality control program of destructive testing to ensure that allowable maximum stresses have not been exceeded. The Skylight Contractor shall submit this program for the Architect's and the Owner's approval. D Insulating Glass 1 Insulating glass units shall be fabricated using the dual-seal system, consisting of two liter of glass(primary seal of polyisobutylene (PIB) specifically intended for primary insulating glass seals and secondary seal of silicone insulating glass sealant). For structural glazing applications, contact width of secondary seal shall be designed to resist the wind loads specified herein. 2 Spacer frame shall be fabricated of mill or black anodized aluminum, with sealed corners, welded, soldered or formed by bending. Care shall be taken to produce corners free from pinholes, gaps and other defects to ensure water vapor-tight construction. Desiccant used within spacer shall be of type and quantity to ensure proper performance of the unit. 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26,2001 Page 33 of 49 SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 1 Rigid polyvinylchloride:ASTM 4216(50+Shore A durameter) no 2.10 ELASTOMERIC SHEET MATERIAL A General .. 1 Elastomeric Sheet shall be a complete engineered membrane system,consisting principally of: a Cured Neoprene(polychloroprene) or EPDM(ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer) sheet: ASTM D 4637, Class SR(60 mil.thick). b Uncured Neoprene(polychloroprene) or EPDM(ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer) sheet flashing: w. ASTM D 4811. c Bonding and splicing adhesives, primers, putty, sealants and all other materials as recommended by the manufacturer. d Sheet Neoprene(polychloroprene) or EPDM(ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer) shall comply with ASTM D 4637,Class SR. 2 Acceptable elastomeric membrane and flashing systems are: a Rubbergard system as manufactured by Firestone. b Bituthene as manufactured by W.R.Grace. an 2.11 INSULATION, BACK PANS AND SOUND DEADENING A High-density Semi-rigid Mineral Fiber Board am 1 Semi-rigid mineral wool fiberboard with water-resistant binders conforming to the following requirements: a ASTM C 612,Type III. b ASTM C 518,thermal conductivity of`k' =0.23 btu-in/hr ft2 at 75❑F. C Nominal density of 8 lbs/ft3. d ASTM E 84, flame spread 25, smoke developed 5. e Provide sizes to fit specific panel applications. Install foil tape around perimeter of foil-facing to adjacent metal framing to achieve positive vapor barrier. Thickness to be 2 inches minimum unless indicated otherwise. 2 An acceptable product is U.S.Gypsum Co.Thermafiber CW 90(foil-faced). B Back Pans 1 It is intended that aluminum back pans be installed at the curb conditions to act as effective vapor and air 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 32 of 49 w ,MITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER 4W Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 2.09 PREFORMED SYNTHETICS A General 1 The particular alloy,compound,etc. shall be appropriate to the intended function of the preformed synthetic and is subject to approval by the Architect. PF 2 Base gasket material manufacturers and gasket extruders are subject to approval by the Architect. 3 All material shall be non-staining,UV stabilized,and ozone-resistant. ww B Glazing Gaskets(NOT in contact with Silicone) 1 Interior closed cell sponge gaskets a Neoprene (polychloroprene) or EPDM (ethylene propylene diene terpolymer) gaskets: ASTM C 509 (60 t5 Shore A durometer). 2 Exterior non-cellular dense wedge gaskets a Non-cellular Neoprene (polychloroprene), EPDM (ethylene propylene diene terpolymer), or Santoprene ! (EPDM-polypropylene alloy)gaskets: ASTM C 864(70 f5 Shore A durometer). 3 Setting blocks a Non-cellular (dense) extruded Neoprene (polychloroprene) or EPDM (ethylene propylene-diene terpolymer): ASTM C 864(90 t5 Shore A durometer). 4 Spacers and edge blocks a Non-cellular(dense)extruded Neoprene(polychloroprene)or EPDM: ASTM C 864. C Glazing Gaskets(in contact with silicone) 1 Setting blocks a Non-cellular(dense)extruded silicone: ASTM C 1115 Type C(90 f5 Shore A durometer hardness). 2 Spacers and edge blocks: a Non-cellular(dense)extruded silicone: ASTM C 1115 (60 f5 Shore A durometer hardness). D Expansion Joint Covers: 1 Extruded dense silicone rubber:ASTM C 1115 Type T. 2 Dense polychloroprene(neoprene): ASTM D 3542. E Thermal Isolators: 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 31 of 49 SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 b General Electric Ultraglaze 4400. C Weatherseal 1 All Weatherseal shall be neutral cure, low or medium modulus, non-staining, matte finish, color to match architects sample,and specifically intended for use specified. 2 Single-component: ASTM C 920,Type S,Grade NS,Class 25,Use A,G,and O. as 3 The following are acceptable Weatherseal products: a Dow Corning 795. b General Electric Silpruf. D Sealant Backing Materials 1 Preformed foam plastics and synthetic rubbers, compressible, non-gassing, non-staining, and compatible with sealants and as recommended by sealant manufacturers. Backing shall be of the sizes and shapes to suit the various conditions and shall be a color different than the sealant color. Backer rods shall be 25 percent wider than the joint width. 2 Open/closed cell extruded polyolef n backer rod: SOF-ROD by Nomaco Inc.or equal. 3 Extruded silicone rubber: same as H.6. 4 Cellular glazing tape shall conform to specifications laid out in Section 2.08,A(Cellular Glazing Tapes). E Dense Glazing Bushings 1 Nylatron type polyamide or equal. F Expanding Foam Sealant I Preformed, expanding, adhesive-backed, polyurethane foam impregnated with water repellant material. .w Acceptable products are: a Greyflex as manufactured by Emseal Joint Systems, Ltd. b Willseal as manufactured by Illbruck, Inc. G Bond Breaker Tape we. 1 Bond Breaker Tape: 3M Company Lithographer Tape. H Weep Hole Filter 1 PVC-coated reticulated open cell polyurethane foam, 30 to 40 pores per 1 linear inch sized for installation at 30- 50 percent compression. 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 30 of 49 P0 w SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 1 Finish shall be uniform and free from blemishes, scratches, and other defects, and subject to Architect's approval. 2 If exposed to view, finish for stainless steel shall be AISI No.4 brushed finish or as indicated to the approval by the Architect. 3 If concealed from view,finish for stainless steel shall be AISI No.2D. 4 All stainless steel shall be cleaned and passivated as per the recommendations of ASTM A 380. 5 The grain of all stainless steel and brushed finishes shall run in the same (vertical) direction for contiguous or adjacent components except where noted on drawings. 6 Touch-up finish in field as required. 2.07 LOW FRICTION MATERIALS A General 1 Wherever materials are subject by design to relative movement, provide suitable low friction moisture impervious material(s),such as: a Teflon strip,0.03 inch thick;and Teflon tape,0.005 inch thick. w b High-impact polystyrene or polyamide equal to Nylatron or Eel-Slip pads as manufactured by Scan-Pac. 2.08 SEALANTS AND SEAL BACKING MATERIAL �ws A Cellular Glazing Tapes 1 All Cellular Glazing Tapes shall be open cell,semi-rigid,adhesive-backed foam backer tape. 2 The following are acceptable Cellular Glazing Tape products: a Norton Thermalbond V2100. b Norton Thermalbond V2200. so B Structural Silicone Compounds 1 All Structural Silicone Compounds shall be neutral cure, medium or high modulus, non-staining, matte finish, color to match architects sample,and specifically intended for use specified. 2 Multi-component: ASTM C 920,Type M. 3 The following are acceptable Structural Silicone Compound products: a Dow Corning 983. 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 29 of 49 SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 adjacent surfaces,all burrs and foreign particles removed,and any other defects remediated prior to finishing. 5 Prior to finishing all fabricated steel shall be inspected and if, in the opinion of the coating applicator, the steel as blast cleaned is not sufficiently cleaned to ensure a high-quality finish, the steel shall be further cleaned as required to achieve the fmish desired. 6 Verify that all surfaces to be painted are dry,clean and free of dust,dirt,oil,wax,grease,or other contaminants. ws 7 Steel shall be shop-painted with two coats of primer as specified herein prior to delivery to site. The color of each primer and/or intermediate coat shall vary from the coat below to confirm coverage. 8 All steel shall be painted as per the recommendations of the coating manufacturer and the recommendations of the Structural Steel Painting Council Manual of Good Painting Practice. 9 Mix and apply all coatings per the paint manufacturer's recommendations. Apply paint only under the climatological conditions recommended by the paint manufacturer. 10 Check dry film thickness after application of each coat per the recommendations of SSPC-PA2. 11 Inspect finished steel members thoroughly prior to shipping to the site. Carefully package, ship, store, and protect primed steel prior to installation. no 12 Once steel members are installed, and prior to top-coating with finish coat of polyurethane, inspect steel for damage and staining. Remediate or replace damaged members. All repair procedures are subject to approval by the Architect who shall have the right to reject any installed work notwithstanding any remediation ,. procedures instituted. 13 Prior to application of the finish coat, inspect the primed substrates for any defects or conditions which may affect the application and quality of the finish coat. 14 Spray or roller apply the finish coating as per the paint manufacturer's recommendations and the recommendations of the Structural Steel Painting Council Manual of Good Painting Practice. If roller applied, ,w finish coat shall be rolled in one direction; avoid back-rolling of any kind. Avoid mixing application procedures;all surfaces shall be rolled or all surfaces shall be sprayed. 15 Mask adjacent surfaces not to receive paint and apply paint in a neat controlled manner to achieve a finish coat that is smooth, uniform in color, and free of flow lines, sags, brush marks, laps, runs, dry-spray, over-spray, imbedded particles or other imperfections,and skipped or missed areas. 16 The coating shall be opaque and uniform in color and tonality when viewed under a uniform light source such as north daylight. Inspection shall be by visual comparison with previously approved range samples and, if necessary, include the use of coordinated empirical inspection methods, such as the use of calibrated multi- angle spectrophotometers. *+ 17 Final color selection is subject to the review of the mock-up described in Section 4.01, Item A. 2.06 FINISHES OF STAINLESS STEEL .� A General ar 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26,2001 Page 28 of 49 °iMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 w p Complete certified inspection records for quality of finish and complete finish process records shall be maintained and made available to the Architect upon request. 2.05 FINISHES OF CARBON STEEL A General 1 All surfaces of steel members incorporated in the Skylight shall be finished. 2 If concealed from view, individual and aggregate members shall be hot-dip galvanized or receive a zinc-rich w coating system as per Section 2.03. B Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane on 1 If exposed to view,individual and aggregate members shall receive the following coating system: a Surface preparation: SSPC-SP10 Commercial Blast Cleaning. b Epoxy Primers/Intermediate Coats: SSPC Paint 22. c Primer: Fast Curing Epoxy Primer Coat. d Intermediate Coat: High-Build Epoxy-Polyamide Paint. e Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane Finish System. f An acceptable finish system is: Tnemec FC 27 Typoxy(4.0-6.0 mils DFT). Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline(3.0-5.0 mils DFT). Tnemec Series 73 Endura Shield(2.0-3.0 mils DFT). C Coating Standards 1 All steel shapes to be painted shall be of the highest quality and conforming to the minimum requirements of Section 2.13.C: Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel. 2 The Skylight Contractor shall propose and implement a quality control program to the approval of the Architect. The quality control program shall be vertically integrated, and include controls by the steel fabricator and the steel finisher, as well as by the Contractor to provide independent checks of steel quality and finish at the point of fabrication, finishing,and during installation. 3 Steel received from the mill shall be carefully inspected for any defects or damage which could adversely affect an the fabrication and finishing of the steel. All steel members shall be blast cleaned as per the requirements of SSPC-SP 10 prior to final fabrication and assembly. 4 All fabrication shall be done prior to finishing. All welds shall be ground smooth and finished to match 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26,2001 Page 27 of 49 MM No SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER .■ Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 f Prior to start of production coating, the Skylight Contractor shall submit samples of fmished extrusion and sheet indicating the anticipated range of color and tonality in the finished work. g To assure consistency of color and tonality in the finished work, the Skylight Contractor shall propose and implement a quality control program to approval by the Architects. The quality control program shall be vertically integrated and shall include controls by the alloy manufacturer and the anodizer, as well as by the Skylight Contractor, to provide three independent checks of color and tonality at the point of finishing, during assembly,and during installation. •s h No production coating application shall commence prior to approval of this quality control program by the Architect. Notwithstanding the implementation of an approved quality control program,any installed work with defects in anodized coating or variation in color or tonality in excess of the approved range will be subject to rejection. i In the event that aluminum must be sourced from more than one batch of alloy, the Skylight Contractor "�► shall fabricate and finish components in such a way that components from different alloy batches are not located contiguous to each other or in the same general area. j A full-time inspector shall be assigned to each production shift; the inspector shall inspect all production material and maintain a complete record of all inspections. k Samples from production lots of finished material shall be tested in accordance with the following ASTM and ISO standards. Coating Weight: ASTM B 137 w Coating Thickness: ASTM B 244 Seal Test: ASTM B 680, ISO 3210 (ASC to propose alternative, subject to approval) 1 Tests shall be conducted at the following intervals: IM, Coating thickness: Each rack-load of processed material shall be inspected. Coating seal: Each rack-load of processed material shall be inspected. an Coating weight: During each production shift, one sample shall be finished with a rack of production material and shall be tested for minimum coating weight. in Inspection shall be made in a large enclosed area, using General Electric Natural Daylight or Sylvania Metalarc lamps at a suitable level of illumination. Inspection shall be made by visual comparison with previously approved samples and, if necessary, shall include the use of coordinated empirical inspection methods,such as the use of calibrated multi-angle spectrophotometers. n The Architect shall be allowed the option of inspecting random production components in natural light, outdoors,between the hours of 10:00 am and 2:00 pm. o The Architect shall have final authority to accept or reject any or all material that does not conform to these finishing standards or any of the other requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 26 of 49 WX `SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 4 All surfaces not exposed to the exterior or the interior shall receive the chemical conversion coat pretreatment associated with organic coating. Approved coatings are: on a Alodine as manufactured by Amchem Products,Inc. b Bonderite as manufactured by The Parker Company. 5 All conversion coatings shall meet the minimum requirements of ASTM B 449. 6 Material shall not be shipped,delivered or supplied when the finish of such material: a Has not been inspected and tested in the manner and by the means prescribed above and as approved; b Does not meet all the specifications for the finishes set forth in the alloy manufacturer's instructions; ww c Does not fall within the color and tonality range approved by the Architect; go d Has been rejected by the Architect or the Owner; e Has not otherwise been processed in accordance with these instructions. No B Clear Anodic Coating 1 Extrusions: AA-M10 C22 A41,Class I,AAMA 611,SAA 46 - 1 hour clear 2 Panels: AA-M10 C22 A41,Class 1,AAMA 611, SAA 46 - 1 hour clear 3 For all anodized aluminum exposed in the finish work, the aluminum alloy consistency shall be carefully '! controlled from batch to batch. 4 Coating shall conform to the anodic coating standards described below: 40 a Workmanship and quality of extrusions and other aluminum materials proposed for finishing shall conform to the highest standards of the aluminum finishing industry. Such considerations shall include,but shall not be limited to: appearance, flatness, dimensional accuracy, soundness of welds, atmospheric corrosion, t" dents,scratches,abrasions,and other forms of damage,and overall quality of fabrication. b All aluminum alloy shall be of anodizing quality;specifically intended for finishing through anodizing. Nr c At the option of the Architect, material will be inspected by the Architect prior to finishing. The Architect and their Consultants shall serve as sole judge of its conformance to the Drawings and Specifications. "M d Aluminum shall be finished in accordance with the standards and procedures developed and recommended by the alloy manufacturer. All finishing of aluminum shall meet the minimum standards of the Aluminum Association Standards for Anodized Architectural Aluminum, SAA-44 and AAMA 611: Voluntary no Standards for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. e Finishing of aluminum shall be through a sulfuric acid anodizing process approved by the alloy manufacturer. Coating shall be a Type I clear anodic coating with a certified min. coating thk. of 0.7 mil. 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26,2001 Page 25 of 49 an SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 4 For protection against hydrogen embrittlement: ASTM A 143. an 5 For repair of damage to HDG coatings: ASTM A 780. B Zinc-rich Coating an 1 Surface preparation: SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. no 2 Painting system: SSPC-PS 12 Zinc-Rich Coating System(2 coats). 3 Primer: SSPC-Paint 20 Zinc-Rich Primer(Type II). am 4 Acceptable products are: a 90-97 Tneme-Zinc as manufactured by Tnemec Company,Inc(2.5 -3.5 mils DFT per coat). .o b Carboline 858 as manufactured by Carboline(2.0-4.0 mils DFT per coat). on C Bituminous Paint 1 SSPC-Paint 12,30 mil minimum thickness. no D Surface Preparation: 1 SSPC-SP6,as a minimum,and as required by the manufacturer of protection material. A, E Surface Protection Film 1 Colored,clear,strippable PVC film specifically intended for the temporary protection of metal. 2 Film thickness shall be a minimum of 3.0 mil. 2.04 FINISHES OF ALUMINUM A General 04 1 The following aluminum finishes are used for the Work of this Section. The finish designation given is for general information only, final finishes to be selected by the Architect from actual samples to be submitted by the Skylight Contractor. a Finish Type P-1: Acrylic Aliphatic Polyurethane b Finish Type A-1: Clear Anodized 2 All surfaces, whether exposed or concealed from view, shall be finished; no mill finish aluminum shall be permitted. 3 Surfaces shall match the appearance, color and texture of samples submitted to and approved by the Architect. 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26,2001 Page 24 of 49 �w SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 2 Extrusions a Painted Finish: AA 6063-T5 or T6;ASTM B 221 b Anodized Finish: Anodizing quality AA 6063-T5 or T6;ASTM B 221 C Carbon Steel 1 Rolled shapes,plates and bars: ASTM A 36. 2 Cold rolled sheet: ASTM A 611. 3 Fasteners: ae a Bolts and Screws: ASTM A 307 or A 325. b Nuts: ASTM A 563. D Stainless Steel 1 For shapes,plates,bars and strip(exposed): AISI Type 316,ASTM A 666. 2 For shapes,plates,bars and strip(concealed):AISI Type 304,ASTM A 666. 3 For sheet(non-structural):AISI Type 316,ASTM A 480. 4 For truss posts: AISI Type 304 or 306,ASTM A 269 !' 5 For medium high-strength truss rods:AISI Type 304 or 316 Heat Treated and/or Cold Drawn,ASTM A 580 6 For truss fittings: AISI Type 304 or 316,ASTM A 666 7 Fasteners: AISI Type 303,304 or 316 non-magnetic. a Bolts and screws: ASTM F 593,Alloy Groups 1 and 4. b Nuts: ASTM F 594,Alloy Groups 1 and 4. c Button and countersunk head screws: ASTM F 879,Alloy Groups 1 and 4. 2.03 PROTECTIVE TREATMENT FOR METALS A Galvanizing Carbon Steel(Hot Dip) 1 For shapes,plates,bars and strip: ASTM A 123 (2 oz/square foot minimum coating thickness). 2 For fasteners and hardware: ASTM A 153. 3 For sheet: ASTM A 653 (G90). 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26,2001 Page 23 of 49 am SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 1.11 ALTERNATES A General 1 Alternate materials other than those specified in PART 2 — PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, PROCESSES, AND FINISHES may be proposed provided all the following conditions are met: a Alternates may only be proposed in addition to,not in lieu of,the material specified. +��* b Alternates will only be considered by the Architect if they are substantially similar in color, grain structure, and otherwise in appearance to the specified materials. w� c Material properties of the proposed altemate(s)must be equal to or better than those specified. d Submit two(2)samples of the specified finishes for each alternate material. ► PART 2 PRODUCTS,MATERIALS,PROCESSES AND FINISHES 2.01 GENERAL A General w 1 Materials and components used shall be as specified or shall be suitable equivalents as approved by the Architect. 2 Materials not specified shall be of the best quality and suitable for the purpose intended and as approved by the Architect. 3 All materials shall be new and free from any defect in material or workmanship that may impair the strength, functioning,durability,or appearance of the Work of this Section or of adjacent construction. 2.02 METALS .s A General 1 It shall be the responsibility of the Skylight Contractor to select the alloy, degree of alloy control, homogeneity, temper, metallurgical quality, degree of hardness or softness, mill tolerances, cutting tolerances and flatness, required to achieve the requirements of design, quality, and color matching of finish set forth in Specifications and Drawings. .� B Aluminum 1 Plate and Sheet +� a Painted Finish: AA 3003 H 14,ASTM B 209 b Anodized Finish: Anodizing quality AA5005 H34,ASTM B 209 c All sheet shall be stretcher-leveled and stress-relieved. 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 22 of 49 WA ,MITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER go Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 on Team. 3 The QC Program shall provide for continuous monitoring of origin, dates of manufacture, and batch logging system of materials and component parts for tracking as required. 4 All QC Programs shall allow for a sufficient sampling to ensure 95 percent statistical certainty of conformance with the Contract Documents. 5 The Architect and Owner shall be allowed access to the Skylight Contractor and Sub-Contractor's facilities and those of the major suppliers to monitor QC procedures. The Skylight Contractor shall make available to the Owner and the Architect all QC Program records upon request. 6 The Skylight Contractor shall submit all shop drawings to glass and sealant manufacturers for their review, and provide written confirmation that their products are being used in accordance with manufacturer's eau recommendations. 1.10 WARRANTY A General 1 The Skylight Contractor shall agree to indemnify the Owner and Architect against any defects in the design, workmanship, quality of materials, watertightness or performance of the Work of this Section and to repair or replace defective design, workmanship or materials of the Skylight during the warranty period(s). Defective materials and workmanship include: a Abnormal deterioration,aging and weathering of the Skylight b Leakage of water or air exceeding specified limits c Structural failure of components resulting from exposure to pressures and forces within specified limits d Failure of operating parts to function normally e Deterioration/discoloration of finishes in excess of normal weathering and aging f Glass breakage due to improper installation, defects or failure of the skylight system. Edge separation or any other deterioration whatsoever of laminated glass g Failure of the Skylight to meet any other specified performance requirements 2 The warranty does not cover damage caused by vandalism, or natural conditions exceeding the performance requirements. Warranty period for glass breakage due to accidents or vandalism shall be one (1) year, to be provided by the Main Contractor under Basic Building Warranty. 3 The general warranty period is the ten(10) year period after the date stipulated in the Certificate of Substantial Completion, except only that warranties for insulating glass, low-E coating(s)on glass and cohesion/adhesion of structural silicone shall each be for a period of ten(10)years and warranties for laminated glass and ceramic frit silkscreening shall each be for a period of five(5)years after the date stipulated in the Certificate for Substantial Completion. 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 21 of 49 SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 c All applicable codes and standards * ! d Approval by the Architect B Skylight Contractor's Professional Engineer 1 The Skylight Contractor shall retain an experienced Professional Engineer, registered in the State of Massachusetts,acceptable to the Owner and Architect. 2 The Skylight Contractor's Professional Engineer shall prepare and endorse complete engineering design and calculations and shall check and monitor the preparation of all shop drawings for conformance with the engineering design and calculations,and for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3 Structural calculations shall be submitted for all components of the Skylight(Mock-up and Project) and shall indicate ultimate factors of safety. 4 As evidence of conformance to these requirements, each shop drawing and calculation sheet shall bear the seal and self-written signature of the Skylight Contractor's Professional Engineer. 5 The Professional Engineer shall periodically attend to the site supervision during installation of the Skylight. 6 Upon completion of the Skylight, the Professional Engineer shall prepare and endorse the necessary As-Built Drawings for submission to the Architect. C Manufacturer's and Fabricator's Calculations: 1 Submit glass fabricator/manufacturer's calculations for wind pressure analysis and thermal stress analysis. Submit written confirmation that the glass fabricator/ manufacturer has reviewed the pertinent shop drawings and has confirmed the acceptability of the proposed use of the specified glass products. 2 Submit written confirmation that the sealant manufacturer has reviewed the pertinent shop drawings and has confirmed the acceptability of the proposed use of the specified sealant products. 1.09 QUALITY CONTROL(QC) A General 1 Prior to the start of fabrication, the Contractor shall submit a comprehensive Quality Control Program covering all phases of the Skylight including,but not necessarily limited to,the following: a Procurement of materials including quality assurance programs of major suppliers b Fabrication of Skylight and Skylight components c Final assembly of components d Installation and site quality control 2 The QC Programs submitted are subject to review and approval by the Architect, the Owner, and the Consultant 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 20 of 49 MITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER No Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 H Maintenance Manual 1 At the completion of the Project, submit five (5) bound copies of a maintenance manual describing the various materials, equipment, and procedures for cleaning and maintaining the work of this Section. Include manufacturer's data for all components of the Skylight. 1.07 MANUFACTURERS,FABRICATORS, SUPPLIERS AND SUB-CONTRACTORS A General 1 The Work of this Section shall be the responsibility of one Contractor. 2 The Contractor and the Sub-Contractor(s) of the Work of this Section shall have proven achievement and experience in custom-designed, four-sided structural silicone glazed unit system skylight and are subject to final o* approval by the Owner and the Architect. 3 Manufacturers,Fabricators and Suppliers of all materials and components of the Work of this Section shall have proven achievement and experience in similar work for at least ten(10)years,and are subject to approval by the Architect. B Approved Suppliers and Fabricators go I Glass Supplier/Fabricator a Viracon b PPG py 2 Stainless Steel Tension Truss Components Supplier a Tripyramid Structures b Ronstan c Frontier Technologies d Seco South Inc. 1.08 ENGINEERING DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT A General 1 Engineering design development, materials and methods of construction other than that indicated or implied by the Contract Documents may be employed when such materials and methods conform to all of the following: a The design intent b The performance criteria 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 19 of 49 wee SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 g Finished S. S.rod and post 12 inches in length,each type .�. h Skylight Truss Fittings One Typical i Custom Glazing Adaptor Approx. 12 inch x 12 inch at typical 4-way intersection. j Glass: 12 inch x 12 inch,each type. k Fastening Devices Each type 1 Flashing 12 inches x 12 inches,each type. m Gaskets 12 inches long,each type,and 6 inch x 6 inch at each corner. n Sealants Cured sample- 12 inches long,each type. o Typical Joinery and Connections Approx. 12 inch x 12 inch at typical 4-way intersection. p Finish Hardware Each type D Engineering Calculations 1 Submit engineering calculations as described hereinafter and in the General Conditions. 2 Engineering calculations shall be submitted concurrently with the corresponding shop drawings. ,■,. 3 All calculations shall bear the stamp of a professional engineer registered in the State of Massachusetts. E Test Reports 1 Submit test reports for all tests described herein. ok 2 Test reports shall be submitted in a timely manner and well before execution of any related component of the Skylight. 3 All test reports are subject to approval by the Architect and the Owner. g' F Inspection and Production Testing Programs 1 Submit detailed description of inspection and production testing programs and inspection reports for: a Aluminum anodizing ww b Structural glazing G Record Shop Drawings .w 1 At the completion of the Project, provide five (5) bound sets of reduced (half-size) photocopies of all final approved shop drawings. 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26,2001 Page 18 of 49 w 7MITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 ,w g Clearly indicated dimensions for locating sinkages, rebates, provisions for jointing and details for lifting devices. no 2 Shop drawings shall include details of all connections to contiguous work as approved by the Subcontractor for the work adjacent. 3 Provide isometric details or three dimensional graphics of any condition as requested by the Architect. on 4 Clearly indicate all revisions to shop drawings on resubmissions. we 5 Shop drawing must be submitted concurrently with engineering calculations. 6 All shop drawing sheets shall be of one size and shall bear the seal of a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Massachusetts. �w C Samples 1 Submit samples of all materials and finishes.Include: a Samples matching the appearance,color,texture,and other characteristics of each finish required; b Range samples showing the complete range of variation in color, texture,and other characteristics resulting from the carefirlly controlled manufacture, finishing, fabricating, delivery, assembly, installation and cleaning processes; c Finished samples of major extrusions; d Finished samples of each sheet in thickness and type required; AN e Samples showing finishes over welds and over materials welded. 2 Sample submissions shall include three identical pieces of each sample required. In addition, the Skylight Contractor shall have available an adequate quantity of matching samples, approved by the Architect, in order to coordinate the construction and finishes of other trades. 3 Samples of production materials shall be the following sizes: a Anchor Extrusion Each Type Pa b Color Samples 12 inch x 12 inch,each color c Finish Samples: 12 inch x 12 inch,each type and finish. d Finished Sheet or Plate 12 inch x 12 inch, each type. e Stud or Plug Welds to Sheet 12 inch x 12 inch,each type. f Finished Extrusions 12 inches in length,each type 4W 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 17 of 49 SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 6 In addition to the above, completed,glazed units shall be de-glazed to confirm the homogeneity and integrity of �. the structural seal after mockup testing. G Embedded Anchor Testing .r, 1 Representatives of each anchor type embedded into concrete or reinforced masonry shall be site tested. 2 Each anchor type shall be tested for shear,tension,and shear and tension combined to 1.5 times the design load. 3 Testing shall comply with ASTM E 488, Test Method for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements. 4 A minimum of 5 percent but no less than 5 anchors of each anchor type shall be tested. 5 There shall be no failure or permanent deformation to the anchor or the concrete or reinforced masonry. 1.06 SUBMITTALS on A General 1 Submit shop drawings, samples and engineering calculations for the Architect's approval before proceeding with the Work of this Section. In addition to submission requirements as described in Section 01000, the am Skylight Contractor shall, within ten (10) days after date of written authorization to proceed, submit a completed copy of the shop drawing log and a list of major products proposed to be furnished, including manufacturer's data. Skylight Contractor is hereby advised that submissions shall be made according to a schedule that allows for review and approval by the Owner and the Architect as stated in the General Conditions. The Skylight Contractor shall be considered solely liable for any delays resulting from failure to allow review time as stipulated by the Contract Documents. 2 Submissions shall be complete and comprehensive and include all shop drawings, samples, material data submissions, and engineering calculations for the part of the Skylight addressed. All work shall be coordinated by the Skylight Contractor prior to submission. Incomplete, non-conforming, or uncoordinated submissions shall be subject to rejection or return without action by the Architect. Any work executed which deviates from the approved shop drawings and submittals shall be subject to rejection. B Shop Drawings am 1 Shop Drawings shall clearly illustrate all aspects of the Skylight including: a The relationship of the Work to the building structure,adjacent construction,roofs,and other related work. b The arrangement of components. c The sequence and details of fabrication,assembly and erection. d Full size details, including isometric drawings of sealing, flashing and jointing. e All dimensions and thicknesses,materials and finishes. f Material, type, size, location,and spacing of screws,bolts,welds,anchoring devices,and accessories. "` 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26,2001 Page 16 of 49 .s. SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 e Owner's approval. 3 The Skylight Contractor shall notify the Architect and the Owner well in advance of each such trial installation. If approved,this portion of the work may become part of the final installation. D Field Tests 1 Representative portions of the constructed Skylight shall be physically tested in accordance with the requirements of AAMA 501.2. No 2 Test areas shall be equal in scope to the test mock-up described in Section 4.0 1,Item A. 3 Initial testing shall be performed as soon as an area equal to a bay in width is installed. on 4 At least three (3) "initially successful" water tests shall be performed at different stages of installation on the Skylight system. 5 Tests shall be performed by the Skylight Contractor. Approval of all test areas, test procedures, remediation measures(if required)and test results rests with the Architect and the Owner. 6 Skylight Contractor is responsible for ensuring adequate water supply and pressure to meet the requirements of AAMA 501.2. 7 The amount and extent of retesting and remediation work required due to failure shall be to the approval of the Architect and the Owner. E Product Engineering Tests 1 All products and individual or aggregate components of the Work for which acceptable engineering or test data is not available shall be physically tested. 2 Unless otherwise specified herein, the Skylight Contractor shall propose the specific test procedures for approval by the Architect and the Owner. F Structural Silicone Testing 1 Silicone joint(s) proposed for structural glazing application shall be tested for performance in tension, in shear, and tension and shear combined. rt 2 Test specimens shall be approximately 2 inches in length, full dimension in width and depth, and be composed of the specified materials,colors and finishes. 3 Ten specimens for each condition shall be tested and the values for elongation-to-failure vs. stress recorded for each specimen,and the mean and standard deviation calculated for each condition. 4 Tests shall be performed by the sealant manufacturer(s)whose product(s)are being considered for the structural silicone joint(s). 5 In addition to the above, production testing shall be performed at regular intervals during assembly of the Work, as specified hereinafter. 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 15 of 49 xis SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER .R Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 d Dynamic Water Penetration AAMA 501.1 Standard Test Method for Exterior Skylights, Curtain Walls and Doors for Water Penetration Using Dynamic Pressure .w Test pressures shall conform to the requirements of Section 1.04 E. e Structural Performance ASTM E 330 Structural Performance of Exterior Skylights, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference Deflection shall not exceed the specified deflection ratio or limit at a structural test load equal to the specified design wind pressure. Test pressure/suctions shall each be held for a period of one minute. " f Thermal Cycling an AAMA 501.5-98 Test Method for Thermal Cycling of Exterior Walls While maintaining an interior temperature of 70 F with a relative interior humidity of 30%, slowly cool the exterior surface of the Assembly to 0 and maintain this temperature for 15 minutes. While maintaining an interior temperature of 70 F with a relative interior humidity of 30%, slowly heat the exterior surface of the Assembly to 140 F and maintain this temperature for 15 minutes. Inspect the Test Assembly for excessive condensation and other detrimental effects and repeat this cycle three times. Note temperature at which condensation or any other detrimental effects occur. g Repeat Static Water Penetration(Section 1.05.B. lc) h Structural Performance(Proof Load) ASTM E 330 Structural Performance of Exterior Skylights, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference(Proof Load). No glass breakage, permanent damage to panels, fasteners or anchors shall occur and permanent deformation to wall framing members shall not exceed 0.2 percent of their clear spans(L/500)at a structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design wind pressure (positive and negative) 40 for a period of one minute each. i Approval of the test assembly and the test results rests with the Architect and the Owner. C Trial Installations 1 Prior to general installation of any given typical portion or system of the Work, the Skylight Contractor shall N+ install a representative trial installation for the Architect's and the Owner's approval at designated locations on the building(actual location). 2 The Skylight Contractor shall propose the scope and location of trial installations for the Architect's and the 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26,2001 Page 14 of 49 �w SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 5 Tests shall be conducted at an independent test facility proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Architect and the Owner. The Skylight Contractor shall provide the test assembly and all associated work. 6 No pre-testing of the test assembly shall be allowed except by express written consent from the Architect and the Owner. 7 The test assembly shall be erected under supervision of the same personnel that will supervise installation of the Skylight at the project site. 8 Skylight Contractor shall provide at least one extra lite for each glass type and size on the test assembly for use VM in the event of breakage. Repeated glass failure shall constitute failure. 9 Skylight Contractor shall submit for approval detailed descriptions and shop drawings of test assembly, transducer locations, test procedure, test schedule, test location, and test report consistent with the submittal eww requirements of the Contract Documents. 10 Skylight Contractor shall submit two (2) copies of VHS format video recordings taken throughout the construction and testing of the test assembly. Record the activities using equipment capable of high quality recording at short play speed or equivalent resolution settings. a Record the installation of each individual component or trades work incorporated into the test assembly. Carefully note any deviations from the approved shop drawings. b Record the testing program including any pre-testing and carefully note all failures and remedial action undertaken. c Record the replacement procedure for the removal and re-installation of selected aluminum components. po B Laboratory Mock-Up Testing Procedure 1 The following tests shall be conducted in the order listed and conform to the following requirements: a Preload Load the test assembly to 0.5 times the specified design wind pressure and inspect the Assembly for detrimental effects. b Static Air Infiltration and Ex-filtration ASTM E 283 Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Skylights, Curtain Walls,and Doors. "! Test pressure shall conform to the requirements of Section 1.04 F. c Static Water Penetration ASTM E 331 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Skylights, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. Test pressures shall conform to the requirements of Section 1.04 E. 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26,2001 Page 13 of 49 +0 SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 a Perimeter beam and/or roof structure deflection due to service live load: Simple Support L/360 Cantilever L/180 b Perimeter beam and/or roof structure deflection due to live and dead load: Simple Support L/240 Cantilever L/120 c Perimeter beam and/or roof structure deflection due to long term creep: Simple Support 1.5(L/360) Cantilever 1.5(L/180) d Column Shortening or lengthening(H=column height) H/400 e Differential structural movement due to seismic load: North to South 1" East to West 1" 2 Notwithstanding the above limitations, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to refer to the appropriate specifications of Cast-In-Place Concrete and Structural Steel for the full description of structural movements. K Building Tolerances 1 Provision shall be made in the design of the Skylight for the erection tolerances of building structure. The Contractor shall refer to the appropriate specifications for Cast-In-Place Concrete and Structural Steel for the description of building tolerances. The Contractor shall be responsible for agreeing to and coordinating all tolerances with the Main Contractor. L Analysis w. 1 All requirements specified herein shall be analytically and mathematically proven, except for those requirements called for to be proven by physical testing methods. Calculations and related data, and their application in engineering, fabrication assembly and installation shall be the responsibility ty of the Skylight ON Contractor's registered Professional Engineer. 1.05 TESTING AND MOCK-UPS as A General 1 Full scale portions of the Work of this Section shall be tested for compliance with Section 1.04 (Performance ON Criteria). The test assembly shall be to the shape, size and dimensions indicated in Section 4.0 1, Item A. 2 The test assembly shall be of the materials,profiles, finishes, colors and design approved for the finished Work 00 complete in all respects including glass and glazing. The test assembly shall be mounted and sealed to a simulated building structure in the same manner and by the same fixings that are intended to attach the Skylight to the building structure. The support structure shall be of equivalent stiffness to that supporting the building to prevent unrealistic deflections of the mock-up sample. a" 3 The test assembly shall serve as a visual representation of the Work. Test assembly and test chamber configuration shall therefore be such as to permit viewing at various distances and under natural daylight im condition. 4 Samples of all materials for the mock-up shall be submitted in accordance with Section 1.07.C: (Samples), and approved prior to mock-up fabrication. om 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26,2001 Page 12 of 49 XW OR ,MITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER ON Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 err acting normal to the surface, for the specified time periods,using a water spray discharge rate of 5 gallons water per hour per square foot of surface frontal area: a Static Pressure of 10 pounds per square foot for a time of 15 minutes. b Dynamic pressure of 10 pounds per square foot for a time of 15 minutes. 4 Any leakage and/or condensation, which might take place within the Skylight, shall be drained within the Skylight framing members and discharged to the exterior of the Skylight. F Air Infiltration 1 Air infiltration, averaged over the frontal area of exterior surfaces having fixed components, shall not exceed 0.06 CFM per square foot of frontage when subjected to 6.24 PSF of positive pressure. 2 Air infiltration,averaged over the frontal area of exterior surfaces having operable components,shall not exceed 0.10 CFM per foot of crack perimeter when subjected to 6.24 PSF of positive pressure. ow G Condensation Resistance I Condensation is defined as water, ice or frost occurring on more than five percent of the interior surface of any on one component or water that is not collected and positively drained to the exterior through the condensation drainage gutter. 2 The Skylight shall be designed to prevent condensation on the interior under the following conditions: a Outdoor ambient air temperature of 0°F,with 8 MPH wind. b Indoor ambient air temperature of 70°F,with 30%relative humidity. H Thermal Movement 1 The Skylight shall be designed for differential thermal movement(expansion and contraction)resulting from an exterior surface temperature range of-15°F to 140°F,and a building interior temperature range of 60°F to 90°F. I Thermal Performance 1 The design and installation shall provide the minimum overall U-values and Shading Coefficients as required by the New Energy Conservation Requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code(780 CMR 13). a U-value of 0.29 BTU/(hr)(ft2)(F) b Shading Coefficient of 0.31 (based on low-e coating and 40%ceramic frit on the no. 2 surface) J Structural Movement 1 Provisions shall be made in the design of the Skylight to accommodate differential structural movements, deflections, interstory drift and thermal movement of the building structure(s) due to gravity loads, wind loads, seismic loads and temperature. 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 11 of 49 w SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 e Point live loads on sloped glazing of 200 pounds acting over an area of 1 square inch. �* f Dead load from water ponding on skylight glazing. Ise, 2 The pressures so determined are based upon the following design safety factors: a Fully-tempered Glass(Type FT) 1.4 b Heat-strengthened Glass(Type HS) 1.6 c Annealed Glass(Type AN) 2.5 „R d Sloped Glazing and Railing Glass 4.0 e These values shall be based upon destructive testing in which glass, representative of that described in the Drawings and Specifications, is exposed to uniform static loads held for one minute per 1/8 inch increment of center point deflection until destruction. The statistical distribution of such test results shall be normal and the coefficient of variation shall not exceed 25 percent. 3 In no case shall glass thickness be less than that shown on the Drawings, or the minimum thickness specified herein. so D Loads on Components Other than Glass 1 Individual and aggregate components of the Skylight shall withstand the loads, or combination of loads, acting eer normal to the surface described hereinafter. Load combinations shall be as per the specific requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code-780CMR: State Board of Building Regulations and Standards. a Wind pressures and suctions as per Section 1.04 C. la b Seismic forces on components of the Skylight shall be determined in accordance with the Massachusetts State Building Code — 780CMR: State Board of Building Regulations and Standards, Section 1612.0: Earthquake Loads. c Uniform snow load as per Section 1.04 C. lc go d Point live loads on sloped components of 200 pounds acting over an area of one(1)square inch. e A concentrated load of 10 pounds at any point, over one(1)square inch,on snap-engaged components. s■ E Water Infiltration 1 Water infiltration shall be defined as any uncontrolled water, exclusive of condensation, that appears on the w interior side of the Skylight. 2 Water temporarily contained within the Skylight system without ill effect, and that does not penetrate to the aee interior side of the Work,will not be considered water infiltration. 3 Water infiltration shall not occur when the completed Work is subjected to the following inward pressures 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 10 of 49 ..eM ,MITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER w Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 e Deflection of Framing at Edge of Monolithic Glass: Deflection of framing shall be limited to Dg=0.6(L9/ 100)2,where Lg is the length, in inches, of the monolithic glass edge being supported. f Center Deflection of Glass Lites: OR Deflection of glass at the center of the lite shall not exceeded L/254t for the loaded lite, or 3/4 inch, whichever is less, where L is the short span of the lite, in inches, at the design loads, and t is the thickness,in inches,of the glass lite. g Center Deflection of Metal Panels: Deflection of metal panels at the center of the panel not exceeded L/175, where L is the short !w dimension of the panel, or the clear span of the face material between supporting (stiffening) members, whichever is less. This deflection is to be measured in relation to the actual(deflected) position of the supporting member. 3 Tolerances greater than those specified herein. 4 Panel flatness in excess of that specified herein. 5 Water infiltration in excess of that specified in Section 1.04 F [Water Infiltration],below. 6 Air infiltration in excess of that specified in Section 1.04 G[Air Infiltration],below. 7 Condensation resistance less than that specified in Section 1.04 H[Condensation],below. C Loads on Glass 1 Glass shall be of appropriate thickness to withstand the greater of the following pressures, or combinations thereof, acting normal to the surface without center point deflections in excess of those specified. Load combinations shall be as per the specific requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code - 780CMR: State Board of Building Regulations and Standards. a Design wind loads shall be determined in accordance with the Massachusetts State Building Code — 780CMR: State Board of Building Regulations and Standards. Exterior wind pressures and/or suctions of ±9.6 psf at the field, and±20.4 psf at edge zones. Defmitions of edge zones are as per the Massachusetts State Building Code. b Seismic forces shall be determined in accordance with the Massachusetts State Building Code—780CMR: State Board of Building Regulations and Standards, Section 1612.0: Earthquake Loads. c Snow loads shall be determined in accordance with the Massachusetts State Building Code - 780CMR: State Board of Building Regulations and Standards, Section 1610.0: Snow Loads. Basic snow load is 35 psf. The load shall be multiplied by a factor of 1.5 at areas subject to unbalanced snow load and snowdrift. d Human impact loads in accordance with CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Category II in those locations designated as hazardous locations by the Massachusetts State Building Code - 780CMR: State Board of Building ! " --- Regulations and Standards or ASCE 7-98 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26,2001 Page 9 of 49 A" SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 j The specified documents of the Consumer Products Safety Cominission(CPSC). k Guidelines of the Architectural Spray Coaters Association(ASCA). .�w I Guidelines published by the Structural Steel Painting Council(SSPC). in Federal Specifications published by the United States Government Printing Office(FS). on n The specified documents of the Occupational Safety Hazard Association(OSHA). 1.04 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA so A General 1 Individual and aggregate components of the Work of this Section shall be designed, fabricated, assembled, transported, installed and protected so that no evidence of the following shall be apparent, visually or measurably, when Work of this Section is subject to the pressures, loads, temperatures, and conditions specified. B Conditions 1 Damage of any kind. 2 Deflections as follows: a Skylight Members or Vertical Members spanning floor to floor or sill to head: Deflection normal to the plane of construction shall be limited to L/240 of the clear span between structural supports, or 3/4 inch, whichever is less. Wherever infill members combine to form a continuous member spanning floor to floor, the deflection criteria shall be as that for a monolithic member. b Cantilevered Members: Deflection normal to the plan of construction shall be limited to 2L/240 of the span beyond the structural support, or 3/8 inch, whichever is less. When cantilever members comprise a part of a continuous mullion system, the deflection criteria of the composite member shall not exceed limitations specified in Section 1.04, B, 2a [Vertical Members],or Section 1.04,B, 2c [Transverse Members]. c Transverse Members: Deflection normal to the plane of construction shall be limited to L/240 of the clear span. Deflection in the plane of construction shall be limited to 1/360 of the span between supports, or 1/8 inch,whichever is less. (Open to discussion) am d Deflection of Framing at Edge of Insulating Glass: Deflection of framing shall be limited to Dg=0.4 (Lg/ 100)', where Lg is the length, in inches, of the insulated glass edge being supported. 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26,2001 Page 8 of 49 to 'MITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 19 Section 12500—Interior Window Treatments 20 Section 15310—Fire Protection Piping 21 Section 15330—Sprinkler Systems and Equipment 22 Section 15500—Heating,Ventilation and Air Conditioning. 23 Section 16000—Electrical Work 24 Section 16500—Exterior Lighting 1.03 REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS A General 1 All Work of this Section shall comply with the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code - 780CMR: State Board of Building Regulations and Standards, the specific requirement of the ASCE 7-98 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, all local and county regulations, and all amendments of the Codes at the date of this Specification. 2 All standards and codes referenced in this Specification shall be those editions including amendments current at the date of this Specification. ON 3 In case of any conflict between referenced codes and standards and/or the Drawings and Specifications, a discussion shall be held among the relevant parties to reach a resolution that is acceptable to all. In most cases, the code or standard having the more stringent requirements shall govern. B Standards a Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings issued by the American Institute of Steel Construction(AISC). b Steel designation issued by the American Iron and Steel Institute(AISI). c Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Stainless Steel Structural Members issued by the American Society of Civil Engineers(ASCE). d The Code for Welding in Building Construction issued by the American Welding Society(AWS). e Specification for Structures of Aluminum Alloys issued by the Aluminum Association(AA). f The specified documents of the American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM). g The specified documents of the American National Standards Institute(ANSI). h The specified documents of the American Architectural Manufacturers Association(AAMA). i Guidelines of the Glass Association of North America(GANA). 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26,2001 Page 7 of 49 w SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 12 Mock-up drawings,test procedures,testing and verification of design,components,and total assembly. 13 Material samples,trial installation mock-up,and performance mock-up assembly. Am 14 Scheduling and monitoring of the Work. 15 Storage,handling,protection,and cleaning. oft 16 Guarantees,warranties and indemnities. 17 All final exterior and interior cleaning of the Skylight. we C Related Work 1 Section 02200—Sitework ON 2 Section 03300—Cast-In-Place Concrete am 3 Section 05100—Structural Steelwork 4 Section 05300—Metal Decking 5 Section 05500—Metal Fabrications 6 Section 05551 —Perimeter Heating/Cooling Enclosures •OR 7 Section 05700—Ornamental Metal 8 Section 07100—Waterproofing 9 Section 07200—Insulation 10 Section 07500—Elastomeric Roofing System I 1 Section 07600—Flashing and Sheet Metal 12 Section 07920—Sealants and Caulking 13 Section 08600—Specialty Glazings, Vestibules,and Entrances 14 Section 08700—Finish Hardware 15 Section 08900—Curtain Walls,Storefront and Entrances 16 Section 09000—Interior Finish Systems 17 Section 09200—Lath and Plaster 18 Section 09900—Painting and Finishing 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26,2001 Page 6 of 49 OR "MITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 incorporate steel reinforcement where required to conform to performance criteria. Finish of all concealed carbon steel shall be hot dip galvanized. Finish of all aluminum shall be clear andoized. Typical skylight glazing shall be laminated insulating glass unit consists of 1/4" min. thk. clear outer FT lite, 1/2" airspace, and 1/2" min. thk. laminated inner lite (consisting of 1/4" min. thk. clear HS lite, 0.06" clear PVB interlayer, 1/4" min. thk. clear HS lite). At the southernmost two bays of the skylight, where indicated on addendum drawing issued by the Architect,outer lite shall be 5/16"min.thk.clear FT glass,to meet the specified deflection criteria. Outer lite of all IGUs shall incorporate high performance low- emissivity coating, and standard pattern and color ceramic frit on the #2 surface, providing an overall shading coefficient of±0.31. At cantilevered ends of the skylight, glazing shall be laminated glass consists of 1/4" min. thk. clear HS lite, 0.06" clear PVB interlayer, and 1/4" min. thk. clear HS lite, with ceramic frit pattern on the no.2 or 3 surface. System is mounted onto painted steel, and stainless steel post and rod truss assembly. System includes fittings, clevis pins,brackets,bolts and accessories for connection of: stainless steel to carbon steel, carbon steel to framing, and between stainless steel components. System includes continuous air and vapor seal. Finish of all exposed carbon steel shall be aliphatic polyurethane. Finish of all stainless steel shall be No. 4 brushed finish. B Elements of the Work 1 Skylights,including stainless steel and painted steel truss assembly 2 Supply and installation of all sealants, gaskets, elastomeric and metal flashing, including sealing at junctions with roofing membrane and waterproofing,and adjacent work. 3 Glass supply,fabrication,glazing and installation. !! 4 Coordination with the Work of Section 08400—Specialty Glazings, Vestibules, and Entrances(SGVE) and the work of other trades to achieve interface details of the Skylight with adjoining installations and finishes. Where an interface occurs between the Main Contract Works, and the Sub-Contactor's Works, the Contractor shall ON provide a seal and/or flashing where required. The Contractor shall be responsible for the weathertightness of such a seal and/or flashing interface detail. 5 All anchors, fixings, fastenings, attachments, reinforcements required for a complete installation, except those specifically indicated as being provided by other trades. 6 Temporary bracing. 7 Copings and back pans with continuous air and vapor seal. 8 All thermal insulation, firesafing, waterproofing, and sound deadening attached to or within the Work of this Section including attachment supports,backing,and reinforcements 9 Finishes,protective coatings and treatments w 10 Field measurements of adjacent and/or supporting construction and verification of existing conditions where feasible prior to the start of installation,once for the steel trusses,again for the glazing members. 11 Design engineering, shop drawings, calculations,engineering data,material properties,and test reports. 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 5 of 49 am s SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER am Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 SECTION 08600 SKYLIGHTS w� PARTI GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS,MEASUREMENTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS .w A Contract Documents 1 All work of this Section shall comply with the requirements of the Main Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, applicable provisions of Division 1 Sections, with the Drawings, and with all other Contract Documents. B Substitutions 1 The term"or approved equal" shall be deemed to have been inserted after all standards, references, products, materials,and equipment referred to in the Specification or on the Drawings for work of this Section. C Discrepancies am 1 Should any discrepancy or divergence occur in or between any of the Contract Documents as to the precise extent or nature of the work to be carried out by the Skylight Contractor,he shall immediately give notice to the Architect and Owner so that an Architect's direction or instruction may be given as to the work in fact required by the Architect. No 1.02 WORK INCLUDED an A General 1 It is recognized that the Contract Document may not cover some conditions. It is intended that the conditions not detailed or drawn accurately shall be developed through Contractor's shop drawings to the same level of so aesthetics and performance criteria as indicated for detailed areas and as stipulated in the Contract Documents. By accepting a contract for the Work, the Contractor acknowledges the above and agrees that the Architect shall have final decision as to all matters detailed in the Contract Documents. no 2 The Skylight Contractor shall design, engineer, test, fabricate, deliver, install, and guarantee all construction necessary to provide for the complete airtight and watertight enclosure of the building skylight for the Smith College Campus Center. Skylight shall be complete in every respect, including all measures that may be on required to that end. 3 The Work of this Section shall include,but is not limited to the following: on a Aluminum, Steel,and Glass Skylight System: System consists of high performance laminated insulating glass units structurally glazed onto custom 'm profile extruded aluminum framing incorporating integral water and condensation gutter system. System incorporates custom profile extruded aluminum glazing adaptors and fins to account for the differential glazing height between adjacent panels in the unique geometry of the Skylight. Framing members .f 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 4 of 49 ON ,MITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 CSound-deadening:................................................................................................... ...............................................33 2.12 GLASS.................................................................................................................................................................33 AGeneral....................................................................................................................................................................33 BAnnealed Glass:......................................................................................................................................................33 C Heat Strengthened and Fully Tempered Safety Glass: ..........................................................................................33 DInsulating Glass.......................................................................................................................................................33 ELow-e Coated Glass................................................................................................................................................34 !► F Laminated Glass (PVB)...........................................................................................................................................34 Glonoplast Interlayer..................................................................................................................................................35 HCeramic Frit Coated Glass......................................................................................................................................35 IGlass Quality...........................................................................................................................................................35 JGlass Products:.......................................................................................................................................................36 2.13 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................................................................36 AGeneral....................................................................................................................................................................36 BMetal Panels............................................................................................................................................................36 C Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel.................................................................................................................37 DSkylights:.................................................................................................................................................................38 so E Stainless Steel and Painted Carbon Steel Truss Assembly: ..................................................................................38 FEmbeds...................................................................................................................................................................39 PART3 EXECUTION........................................................................................................................................................39 3.01 FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY.......................................................................................................................39 AGeneral....................................................................................................................................................................39 BFabrication and Assembly.......................................................................................................................................40 CManufacturer's Standards.......................................................................................................................................40 DStorage and Handling .............................................................................................................................................40 E Jointing and Reinforcing FWelding ...................................................................................................................................................................40 GSealant and Gasket Application..............................................................................................................................41 HGlass and Glazing...................................................................................................................................................42 1 Structural Glazing....................................................................................................................................................43 J Stainless Steel Tension Rod Installation:................................................................................................................44 3.02 INSTALIATION ....................................................................................................................................................44 AGeneral....................................................................................................................................................................44 BAnchors and Connections.......................................................................................................................................45 CCorrosion Protection ...............................................................................................................................................46 DInstallation of Insulation...........................................................................................................................................46 EFlashings.................................................................................................................................................................46 3.03 PROTECTION, CLEANING AND ACCEPTANCE..............................................................................................47 AProtection ................................................................................................................................................................47 BCleaning..................................................................................................................................................................48 CAcceptance..............................................................................................................................................................48 PART 4 APPENDICES TO THE SPECIFICATION ..........................................................................................................49 4.01 MOCK-UP TEST DRAWINGS.............................................................................................................................49 08600—SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 3 of 49 am SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 AGeneral....................................................................................................................................................................20 ..� 1.10 WARRANTY........................................................................................................................................................21 AGeneral....................................................................................................................................................................21 1.11 ALTERNATES.....................................................................................................................................................22 AGeneral....................................................................................................................................................................22 PART 2 PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, PROCESSES AND FINISHES...............................................................................22 2.01 GENERAL............................................................................................................................................................22 AGeneral....................................................................................................................................................................22 ,. 2.02 METALS ..............................................................................................................................................................22 AGeneral....................................................................................................................................................................22 BAluminum ................................................................................................................................................................22 CCarbon Steel ...........................................................................................................................................................23 DStainless Steel.........................................................................................................................................................23 2.03 PROTECTIVE TREATMENT FOR METALS ......................................................................................................23 A Galvanizing Carbon Steel (Hot Dip)........................................................................................................................23 BZinc-rich Coating.....................................................................................................................................................24 CBituminous Paint.....................................................................................................................................................24 DSurface Preparation: ...............................................................................................................................................24 ESurface Protection Film...........................................................................................................................................24 *" 2.04 FINISHES OF ALUMINUM..................................................................................................................................24 AGeneral....................................................................................................................................................................24 BClear Anodic Coating..............................................................................................................................................25 2.05 FINISHES OF CARBON STEEL.........................................................................................................................27 AGeneral....................................................................................................................................................................27 BAliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane.................................................................................................................................27 CCoating Standards...................................................................................................................................................27 2.06 FINISHES OF STAINLESS STEEL.....................................................................................................................28 AGeneral....................................................................................................................................................................28 2.07 LOW FRICTION MATERIALS................................................................... ...29 AGeneral....................................................................................................................................................................29 2.08 SEALANTS AND SEAL BACKING MATERIAL...................................................................................................29 ACellular Glazing Tapes............................................................................................................................................29 B Structural Silicone Compounds...............................................................................................................................29 CWeatherseal............................................................................................................................................................30 DSealant Backing Materials.......................................................................................................................................30 EDense Glazing Bushings.........................................................................................................................................30 FExpanding Foam Sealant........................................................................................................................................30 GBond Breaker Tape.................................................................................................................................................30 HWeep Hole Filter......................................................................................................................................................30 2.09 PREFORMED SYNTHETICS..............................................................................................................................31 .� AGeneral....................................................................................................................................................................31 B Glazing Gaskets (NOT in contact with Silicone).....................................................................................................31 C Glazing Gaskets in contact with silicone ..................................31 DExpansion Joint Covers: ................... .....................................................................................................................31 '. EThermal Isolators:....................................................................................................................................................31 2.10 ELASTOMERIC SHEET MATERIAL...................................................................................................................32 AGeneral....................................................................................................................................................................32 2.11 INSULATION, BACK PANS AND SOUND DEADENING...................................................................................32 A High-density Semi-rigid Mineral Fiber Board..........................................................................................................32 BBack Pans...............................................................................................................................................................32 08600-SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 2 of 49 ''MITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER Weiss/Manfredi Architects RAHAC 0040 PART1 GENERAL..............................................................................................................................................................4 1.01 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, MEASUREMENTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS...........................................................4 AContract Documents .................................................................................................................................................4 BSubstitutions..............................................................................................................................................................4 CDiscrepancies............................................................................................................................................................4 1.02 WORK INCLUDED................................................................................................................................................4 AGeneral......................................................................................................................................................................4 BElements of the Work................................................................................................................................................5 CRelated Work.............................................................................................................................................................6 1.03 REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS.....................................................................................................................7 AGeneral......................................................................................................................................................................7 rB Standards..................................................................................................................................................................7 1.04 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA.................................................................................................................................8 AGeneral......................................................................................................................................................................8 BConditions .................................................................................................................................................................8 CLoads on Glass.........................................................................................................................................................9 D Loads on Components Other than Glass................................................................................................................10 EWater Infiltration......................................................................................................................................................10 ► F Air Infiltration ...........................................................................................................................................................11 G Condensation Resistance.......................................................................................................................................11 HThermal Movement.................................................................................................................................................11 ThermalPerformance .............................................................................................................................................11 ' J Structural Movement...............................................................................................................................................11 KBuilding Tolerances.................................................................................................................................................12 LAnalysis...................................................................................................................................................................12 1.05 TESTING AND MOCK-UPS................................................................................................................................12 AGeneral....................................................................................................................................................................12 B Laboratory Mock-Up Testing Procedure.................................................................................................................13 CTrial Installations.....................................................................................................................................................14 DField Tests...............................................................................................................................................................15 EProduct Engineering Tests......................................................................................................................................15 FStructural Silicone Testing ......................................................................................................................................15 GEmbedded Anchor Testing......................................................................................................................................16 1.06 SUBMITTALS......................................................................................................................................................16 AGeneral....................................................................................................................................................................16 BShop Drawings........................................................................................................................................................16 CSamples ..................................................................................................................................................................17 DEngineering Calculations ........................................................................................................................................18 ETest Reports............................................................................................................................................................18 F Inspection and Production Testing Programs.........................................................................................................18 GRecord Shop Drawings ...........................................................................................................................................18 HMaintenance Manual...............................................................................................................................................19 1.07 MANUFACTURERS, FABRICATORS, SUPPLIERS AND SUB-CONTRACTORS............................................19 AGeneral....................................................................................................................................................................19 BApproved Suppliers and Fabricators.......................................................................................................................19 1.08 ENGINEERING DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT................................................................................................19 AGeneral....................................................................................................................................................................19 B Skylight Contractor's Professional Engineer...........................................................................................................20 C Manufacturer's and Fabricator's Calculations:........................................................................................................20 1.09 QUALITY CONTROL (QC)..................................................................................................................................20 08600-SKYLIGHTS July 26, 2001 Page 1 of 49 A C. Final cleaning of finish shall be in accordance with AAMA 610.1. END OF SECTION wo no .o MW .w Smith Campus Center Aluminum Windows 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08520-6 2). The hinge shall be attached to both the frame and sash with concealed fasteners. The hinge shall be furnished to match the window. b. Locks: Provide key-operated custodial locks. 2.3 FIXED WINDOWS A. Provide fixed window assemblies (no operation/no hardware) matching materials and profiles of casement units. 2.4 FINISH OF ALUMINUM A. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish - Non-specular as fabricated; Chemical Finish - Etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating — Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. PART 3 EXECUTION on 3.1 INSPECTION AND REMOVALS A. Examine surfaces and conditions where aluminum windows are to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. B. Verify dimensions taken at the job site affecting the work. Bring field dimensions which are at variance to the attention of the Architect. Obtain decision regarding corrective measures before the start of installation. j 3.2 INSTALLATION ' "" A. Use only skilled tradesman with work done in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and specifications. B. Plumb and align window faces in a single plane for each wall plane and erect windows and materials square and true adequately anchored to maintain positions permanently when subjected to normal thermal and building movement and specified wind loads. C. Adjust windows for proper operation after installation. D. Furnish and apply sealants to provide a weathertight installation at all metal-to-metal joints and intersections of frames and at opening perimeters. Wipe off excess material and leave all exposed surfaces and joints clean and smooth. E. Aluminum shall be insulated from direct contact with steel, masonry, concrete, or 40 non-compatible materials by bituminous paint, zinc chromate primer, or other suitable insulation material. F. Blanket insulation shall be installed behind aluminum covers, panning and trim to insure thermally insulated seal. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. After completion of window installation, windows shall be inspected, adjusted, put into working order and left clean, free of labels, etc. B. Glass that is broken, damaged, cracked, or permanently stained shall be replaced. Smith Campus Center Aluminum Windows 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08520-5 1.7 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. Contractor shall require representative of manufacturer of the windows to provide field instructions and supervision of the installation of the windows. B. Contractor shall require the manufacturer's representative to make sure that the , subcontractor's workmen are fully instructed and trained in the handling and application of all the materials, and shall see that all the materials are correctly installed. C. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect in written form certification that the representative of the manufacturer of the windows has supervised the work of this Section and that all windows are correctly installed. 1.8 GUARANTEE A. Aluminum Windows and Related Materials 1. Ten (10) year guarantee on materials and workmanship including finish on aluminum on glass and glazing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 9M 2.1 WINDOWS A. Aluminum windows shall be the Out-Swinging Casement and Fixed Windows Series am 1750 by Peerless Products or approved equal. 2.2 CASEMENT WINDOWS am A. Aluminum Windows and Components 1. 3-1/4" deep frame of flush frame/vent design with thermal break, equal length frame legs, 3-5/8" sightline. „o 2. Aluminum thicknesses meeting ANSUAAMA and AA Specifications. 3. Cast white bronze cam-type locking handles. B. Glass and Glazing an 1. Shop glaze, Glass Type 1, see section 08800 for material description. C. Fabrication 1. General a. Finish, fabricate and shop assemble frame and sash members into complete windows under responsibility of one manufacturer. b. No bolts, screws or fastenings to bridge thermal barriers or impair independent frame movement. 2. Casement Ventilator: Miter all corners and mechanically stake over solid aluminum, corner block minimum 1/4" thick, set and sealed in epoxy leaving hairline joinery, then seal weathertight. Joinery methods must not discolor finish or be unsightly. 3. Main frame Members: Miter all corners and continuously weld along unexposed surfaces so as not to affect the structural or thermal integrity of the thermal barrier, then seal weathertight. 4. Weatherstripping: Securely stake and join at corners. 5. Glass Drainage: Provision shall be made to insure that water will not accumulate and remain in contact with the perimeter areas of sealed insulating glass. 6. Hardware w Smith Campus Center Aluminum Windows 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 085204 6. Show joinery techniques, provision for horizontal and vertical expansion, pe drainage and weep systems, glass and metal thicknesses and framing member profiles. 7. Identify all materials, including metal alloys, glass types, fasteners, and glazing materials. Identify all shop and field sealants by product name and locate on '"" drawings. Glazing details shall be at full size scale. 8. Show dimensioned position of glass edge relative to metal rabbet. 9. Shop drawings shall show attachments of window assemblies to adjoining twr construction and location of all work; kind, finish and size of frames, overall and detail dimensions, location and detail of each anchorage; supporting and adjoining construction; provision for the work of other trades; and all other required information. 10. Contractor shall verify all measurements of existing window openings in the field before commencing fabrication. 11. Any proposed deviations from work shown on the Contract drawings shall be indicated and so identified on shop drawings for Architect's review. B. Samples 1. Submit 12" long sample of extrusion with specified finish. 2. Full size corner section of all types of aluminum frame, showing construction, glass and finishing - 12" x 12". 3. All fasteners, straps, hardware, locks and keys, sealant, etc. C. Submit certified test results as required herein. D. Guarantees as noted in 1.8. E. Window manufacturer and Contractor for work of this section must each submit references of prior projects similar in size, scope and window type. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protection 1. Materials shall be packed, loaded, shipped, unloaded, stored and protected in a manner which will avoid abuse, damage and defacement in accordance with the recommendations contained in the AAMA Aluminum Curtain Wall Manual #10 entitled "Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site". 40 2. Remove all paper type wrappings and interleavings that are wet or which could become wet when unloading materials. 3. Store inside structure in space designated by CM. 4. Stack vertically or on edge so that water cannot accumulate on or within materials using wood or plastic shims between components to provide water drainage and air circulation. 5. Cover materials with tarpaulins or plastic hung on frames to provide air • circulation and prevent contaminants from contacting aluminum. 6. Keep water away from stored assemblies. 7. The CM shall be responsible for taking the steps necessary to protect the materials from careless handling of tools, weld splatter, acids, roofing tar, solvents, abrasive cleaners, and other items that could damage window components and finish. 1.7 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. Contractor shall require representative of manufacturer of the windows to provide field instructions and supervision of the installation of the windows. ow 4ft Smith Campus Center Aluminum Windows 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08520-3 .0 C. A thermal transmittance test and a condensation resistance test shall be conducted according to AAMA 1503-88, "Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections". Standard test conditions as specified in Section 9.1 of the 1503.1-88 shall be used. Windows shall meet the following minimum criteria: ... 1. Condensation Resistance Test (CRF) a. With window sash and ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance with AAMA 1502.7. b. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF) shall be not less than 50.0 for glass and 56.0 for frame. 2. Thermal Transmittance Test (Conductive U-Value) a. With window sash and ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance with AAMA 1503.0. b. Conductive thermal transmittance (U-value) shall be not more than 0.58 BTU/hr/sf/deg. F. D. Manufacturers shall have been engaged in the manufacture of aluminum windows of grades specified for not less than 10 years. E. Provide anchorage of window to building substrate to withstand pressure or suction winds loads per requirements of the Building Code but not less than 30psf. F. Life Cycle Testing: When tested in accordance with AAMA 910-93, there is to be no damage to fasteners, hardware parts, support arms, activating mechanisms or any other damage which would cause the window to be inoperable at the conclusion of testing. Air infiltration and water resistance tests shall not exceed the primary performance requirements specified. G. Fabricate and install window to allow for thermal movement of materials when subject to a temperature differential from —30 deg. F. to +180 deg. F. without damage of any finish. H. Take field measurements of existing openings prior to submitting shop drawings and show same on shop drawings for each opening. Note that the Contract Drawings show general locations and sizes of windows, but the Contractor shall remain "A responsible for all field measurements, quantities, etc. 1.5 SUBNHTTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Shop drawings shall show in detail and fully indicate the location and the quantities of all the work, the kind, finish, size, section of each unit, overall and detail dimensions, factory and field joint locations, arrangements and details, location and detail of each piece of anchorage, flashings, supporting construction provisions for the work of others. 2. Shop drawings shall show all surrounding conditions on elevations and details, including steel, concrete, masonry, lintels, block, and anchorage; all correctly dimensioned. 3. Shop drawings of building elevations shall be at scale of 1/8" = 1'-0", or larger. .� Other shop drawings shall be at a scale that is normal to trade, or larger if required by Architect. 4. Contract drawings may not be used (reproduced, enlarged, reduced, etc.) by Subcontractor for shop drawings. 5. Shop drawings also shall fully demonstrate all requirements respecting the manufacture, finishing, handling, storage, carting sequence and erection of all materials specified herein. .w Smith Campus Center Aluminum Windows 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08520-2 SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the aluminum windows as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but not limited to, the following: ' ` 1. Aluminum casement and fixed windows. 2. Miscellaneous insulation at window frames. 3. Anchors, hardware and accessories including trim pieces and panning. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Unit masonry - Section 04200. " B. Caulking and sealing—Section 07900. C. Glass and glazing— Section 08800. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Windows shall conform to the "Voluntary Specification for Aluminum Prime Windows & Sliding Glass Doors" as published by ANSI/AAMA 101/I.S.2-97 unless more stringent requirements are specified. Windows shall conform to minimum standards of HC-65 casement windows. B. Performance and Testing: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with air infiltration tests, water resistance tests and applicable load tests specified in ANSI/AAMA 101/I.S.2-97 for type and classification of window units required in each case. 1. Testing: Where manufacturer's standard window units comply with requirements and have been tested in accordance with specified tests, provide certification by manufacturer to the Architect and Owner showing compliance with such tests; otherwise, perform required tests through an AAMA-accredited testing laboratory or agency, and provide certified test results to the Architect and Owner. 2. Test reports shall be not more than four years old. 3. Sample submitted for tests shall be manufacturer's standard construction and whose overall dimensions shall be at least the lay-out size window and window/door unit required for this Project. Sequence of test shall be optional between manufacturer and the testing laboratory except that in all cases, air " infiltration test shall be performed before water resistance test. Sash in sample shall contain the approximate configuration as that of windows to be tested. 4. To evaluate testing and measure product performance, testing shall be conducted on manufacturer's standard product glazed with type of glazing material specified herein. Smith Campus Center Aluminum Windows ' 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08520-1 .. 3.3 ADJUSTMENTS, CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Damage to Factory-Applied Finish WW 1. Should the factory-applied coatings become scratched, abraded, or damaged during transport, delivery, storage or erection, it shall be this trade Contractor's responsibility to remove and/or repair those defective areas or components, as *W directed by the Architect and to the satisfaction of the Architect. 2. It is the essence of this repair work that it shall be identical to the factory-applied finish with regards to texture gloss finish, appearance and „® performance. B. Protection and Cleaning 1. Upon completion of work, remove protective coverings from exposed surfaces, wo and clean surfaces of soil and discoloration. Cleaning shall be in accord with the provisions of the requirements of the applicable manufacturers of the aluminum, glass,gasket and aluminum finishing manufacturers. 2. Weep holes and drainage channels shall be unobstructed and free of dirt, rubbish and sealants. 3. Clean all exposed work erected by this Section including interior and exterior surfaces of exterior glass. Remove all glazing compound and other foreign matter and thoroughly clean metal using cleaning preparations which will in no way harm aluminum or glass surfaces. During this cleaning, repair damaged surfaces, scratches,marks, etc., found to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner. 4. Exercise care when cleaning the exterior portions of the building to protect other work and sealant to metal joint work. C. The finished installation of the work shall be free of defects. Before final completion and acceptance of the building, this Contractor shall repair and/or replace at his own expense defective work, to the satisfaction of the Owner and the Architect. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Curtainwall, Storefronts, Vestibules, and Entrances 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08410-18 3. Anchors and connections that are designed for movement shall be of such construction that friction is low enough to allow for such movement without buckling and other damage and without causing binding and noises. 4. Self-drilling, self-threading fasteners shall not be permitted for use into concrete ON or masonry. 5. Metal surfaces shall be separated in such a manner that metal does not move on metal. Materials used for this purpose shall be low friction components, sealants or gaskets,as applicable. Im 6. Anchorages to structural steel shall not induce rotational forces in supporting members. 7. All anchors, connections and fixings outboard of the air-seal shall be 300 series w stainless steel. 8. Adhere to manufacturer's recommendation for installation of anchors. 9. Avoid excess shimming that may induce additional stress on fasteners. The total thickness (t) of a shim pack shall not exceed a dimension equal to the diameter(d) of the fastener/anchor. Where t > d, the fastener/anchor shall be recalculated to take into account the additional stress from bending on the fastener with the assumption that the shim does not contribute to resistance to fastener bending. Additional stress due to bending shall be added to tension stress and the tension/shear interaction analyzed. 10. Shim packs that resist compressive forces only may be high-impact plastic, ? " Korolath type or equal. Shim packs subject to shear forces shall be stainless steel or HDG steel plates pinned together to form a monolithic shim. F. Welding " 1. Perform welding using skilled mechanics qualified or licensed in accord with local building regulations, and conform to the recommended practices of the American Welding Society. Clean welds and adjoining burned areas in prime coated surfaces thoroughly and repaint with one coat of primer and coat welds in galvanized steel with one coat of zinc-rich paint. Take special care to protect glass and other finished surfaces from damage and to prevent fires. Preheat structural steel building components as required for the full penetration and distribution of structural welds. G. Sealant Application 1. Thoroughly clean the sealant joint substrate surfaces, per the sealant manufacturer's written recommendations, prior to the application of the sealant materials. Tape and tool exposed sealant applications as required for a clean, neat and watertight joint. Tool concealed sealant applications. 2. Metal-to-metal joints between aluminum elements shall be thoroughly cleaned and sealed by buttering joints with sealant immediately prior to the final assembly of abutting sections. Clean excess sealant from exposed surfaces. 3. Install sealant materials in strict accord with the manufacturer's instructions and apply using mechanics trained and experienced in their use. Before applying sealant, remove dirt, dust, moisture and other foreign matter completely from the substrate surfaces as required to maintain a clean and neat appearance. Tool sealant compounds to fill the joint and provide a smooth finished surface. 4. Install primers and proper diameter backer rods for exterior sealant work in accordance with the recommendations of the sealant manufacturer for encountered conditions. Smith Campus Center Curtainwall, Storefronts, Vestibules, and Entrances 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08410-17 expeditious installation of the work. Starting on the work shall imply acceptance of the surfaces and conditions to perform the work as specified. C. Verify dimensions taken at the job site affecting the work. D. Cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections so as not to delay job progress. E. Supporting elements shall be examined and spot checked to assure that tolerances specified herein have been adhered to. Check existing and new concrete surfaces and „M examine that they are within the construction tolerances and conditions to install the work of this Section. F. Items which are furnished for incorporation into the work by other trades shall be examined, to assure that they are properly located to accept all other related work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Perform work using skilled workmen, especially trained and experienced in the applicable trades employed and in full conformity with the reviewed shop drawings, samples and other submitted data. B. Carefully and accurately assemble with proper provision for contraction and expansion and install plumb and level at the required lines and elevations, within normal construction tolerances and finish straight, smooth and even, free from defects, and to profiles and sections shown on the drawings. Assemble work so that the joints are watertight, neat and finished smooth. C. Erection Tolerances: Components shall be erected plumb and true in proper alignment .a and relation to established lines and grades, as shown on reviewed shop drawings. the installed components shall conform to the following erection tolerances: 1. Amount or total deviation or misalignment in any direction for vertical members; 00 1/8" max. in 24'-0" or a maximum of 1/4" in a 48'-0" run. 2. Amount of total deviation or misalignment in any direction for vertical members; 1/8" max. in a 25 ft. run. 3. Maximum offset from true alignment between 2 abutting members will be 1/32". No edge projection will be permitted. 4. Maximum joint gap or opening between removable glazing stop, filler or closure and its adjacent member will be 1/32" or a maximum 1/32" cumulative opening at '► both ends of removable members(1/64" each end). D. Wherever aluminum comes in contact with the steel surfaces, the contact surfaces shall be provided with approved type separators and other devices which shall prevent galvanic action from taking place. E. Anchors and Connections 1. Connections between different materials shall be designed to allow for the A differential thermal movement of the respective materials. Provide oversize holes and/or slotted holes as appropriate to accommodate differential thermal movement between such materials as aluminum and mild steel, aluminum and concrete, etc. 2. Anchors and connections that do not provide for movement shall prevent such movement by welding or other appropriate means. Provision shall be made for vibration proofing of all fixings either by the use of locking nuts, locking washers '*w or application of an approved locking fluid. w, Smith Campus Center Curtainwall, Storefronts, Vestibules, and Entrances 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08410-16 k1% OR 00 7. Where slots or oversized holes are provided for adjustment only, secure connection after final adjustment. Washer or nuts, which rely on friction, are not acceptable, unless otherwise indicated. C. Protection of Metals 1. Provide protection against galvanic action wherever dissimilar metals are in contact. 2. Aluminum which is to be in contact with cured concrete or masonry mortar shall have its contact surfaces protected wherever the contact surfaces may entrap moisture and corrosive elements. Metals which are to be in contact with concrete or masonry mortar shall have their contact surfaces protected with an acceptable coating or separator. D. Welding 1. Perform welding of aluminum work by the inert gas shielded arc or fluxless resistant techniques, in accord with recommendations of the American Welding Society and use electrodes or methods recommended by the suppliers of the metals being welded. 2. Welds behind finished aluminum surfaces shall be done in an approved manner to eliminate distortion and discoloration on the finished side. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides on finished surfaces by descaling and grinding. Provide low heat fillet welds using chill bar on finished side to eliminate dimpling, distorting and discoloration on the finished or exposed surface. Plug,puddle or spot welding will not be permitted. E. Shop Painting of Carbon Steel: Items of carbon steel, unless galvanized, shall be thoroughly cleaned of loose scale, fillings, dirt and other foreign matter, and painted with zinc chromate primer. F. Reinforcing 1. Provide internal steel reinforcing components as required to conform to performance criteria and as necessary and required to accommodate adjacent work relying on this work for support and hardware cuts in jambs as required. Internal reinforcing shall also be provided as required to receive decorative glass system supports installed on the interior by others. Paint internal steel as specified in para. E. above. G. Contractor shall include all finishes and backup construction for metal, glass, and related items of the exterior construction from the lowest level to the uppermost elevation of the building. H. Work to be performed shall include all design, engineering, testing, fabrication, assembly, transportation, installation, protection, cleaning, and warranties required to provide the complete installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Study the Contract Drawings and specifications with regard to the work as shown and required under this Section so as to insure its completeness. B. Examine surfaces and conditions to which this work is to be attached or applied, and correct any conditions or surfaces exist which are detrimental to the proper and Smith Campus Center Curtainwall, Storefronts, Vestibules, and Entrances 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08410-15 a* E. Design glazing stops to allow replacement of glass without disassembly of frame. F. All stainless steel shall be AISI Type 316. Finish of all stainless steel to No. 4 brushed finish. Grain of finish shall be oriented in the vertical direction for all door and frame components. 2.11 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE on A. Workmanship 1. Execute work using skilled workman, especially trained and experienced in the ow applicable trades employed and in full conformity with applicable provisions of the listed References and Standards and as otherwise noted on the drawings or as specified herein. 2. Carefully fabricate and assemble work with proper and approved provision for noiseless thermal expansion and contraction, fabrication and erection tolerances, adjoining building component tolerances and dynamic movements. 3. Execute forming and welding operations prior to finishing operations. 4. Work: True to detail with sharp, clean profiles, straight and free from defects, dents, marks, indentations, waves or flaws of any nature impairing strength or appearance; fitted with proper joints and intersections and with specified finishes. «� 5. Removable members such as glass stops, fillers, or closures shall be extruded and securely engaged into adjacent components. Extrusions to be tightly toleranced to eliminate edge projection or misalignment at joints. 6. Install sleeves, lugs and related items in a full bed of sealant and seal perimeter when component is in final installed position. Clean excess sealant from exposed surfaces. 7. Labels and Trademarks: Labels and trademarks, including applied labels, shall not be visible on the finished work. 8. Aluminum work shall be of extrusions, sheets, plates, or other forms or combinations thereof, as best suited for the production of the work and as per the "® shop drawings. B. Connecting and Fastening Devices 1. Fastenings: Of a strength sufficient to support both horizontal wind load and wo vertical dead load, live load and building movement with safety allowance specified herein and spacing and of such sizes as will develop the maximum strength of the members they secure or support, in terms of adequate unit stresses, in accordance with submitted shop drawings. Anchors and connections shall be provided to fully satisfy their required purpose of adjustability movement and load transfer. 2. Seal and tool fasteners penetrating watertight or airtight assemblies. 3. Furnish to other trades proper anchoring inserts and other supporting devices which will be required to set into the concrete, attached to structural steel or otherwise attached to masonry or metal. Furnish location drawings along with the devices to be embedded well in advance of this work to assure job progress. Supporting devices shall be steel; aluminum devices will not be permitted for structural connections. 4. No self-drilling fasteners shall be allowed outboard of the air-seal line. 5. All jointing and splicing of members shall be concealed. 6. Exposed fasteners shall occur only where expressly permitted by the Architect. Where exposed in finished surfaces, screw heads shall be Phillips oval-head countersunk type, finish to match adjacent surfaces. Smith Campus Center Curtainwall, Storefronts, Vestibules,and Entrances 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08410-14 1. Semi-rigid mineral wool fiberboard with water-resistant binders conforming to the following requirements: a. ASTM C 612,Type III. b. ASTM C 518,thermal conductivity of'17=0.23 btu-in/hr ft2 at 75 deg F. C. Nominal density of 8 lbs/ft3. d. ASTM E 84, flame spread 25, smoke developed 5. e. Provide sizes to fit specific panel applications. Install foil tape around perimeter of foil-facing to adjacent metal framing to achieve positive vapor barrier. Thickness to be 2"minimum,unless otherwise indicated. 2. An acceptable product is U.S. Gypsum Co. "Thermafiber CW 90"(foil-faced). B. Sound Deadening 1. Acoustical board, thickness and density as required by design, non-combustible waterproof type, to meet Architect's approval. 2. Adhesive-backed, bitumen compound sheet membrane, thickness as required by design,to meet Architect's approval. 2.8 LOW FRICTION MATERIAL A. General: Whenever materials are subject by design to relative movement, provide suitable low friction moisture impervious material(s), such as: 1. Teflon strip, 0.03"thick; and Teflon tape, 0.005"thick. 2. High-impact polystyrene or polyamide equal to Nylatron or Eel-Slip pads as manufactured by Scan-Pac. 2.9 ALUMINUM DOORS " A. Aluminum doors shall be Rugged MS with 1"FT insulated glass as specified in Section 08800. B. Door hardware is specified in Section 08700. C. Doors stiles and rails excluding glass stops, shall be tubular with a wall thickness of .188". Door thickness shall be 2"with vertical stiles 4-1/4" overall and top rail 3-1/2" overall. Bottom rail shall have an overall dimension of 8-1/2". Door shall have snap-in stops with glazing gaskets on both sides of the glass. No exposed fasteners permitted. D. Finish of all aluminum shall be clear anodized as specified in 2.2F(herein). 2.10 STAINLESS STEEL DOORS A. The quality of materials, engineering and fabrication shall be of the highest international standards. B. Doors shall include fully-tempered glass as specified, custom profile rails and stiles of stainless steel, custom push-pulls at main entrance doors, panic hardware, reinforcements, thresholds, weatherproof floor grates, closing and operating mechanisms, pivots, locksets, and all other hardware and accessories required to achieve a complete and serviceable installation. C. Face sheets of doors at the main entrance shall be blanked-out from one sheet of 16 ga. stainless steel to achieve a seamless appearance on the exterior and interior surfaces. No welding shall be permitted on the exposed faces of the door. D. Stainless steel framing shall be assembled with concealed fasteners to the extent possible. Any exposed fasteners shall be stainless steel Phillips ovalhead countersunk screws. Smith Campus Center Curtainwall, Storefronts, Vestibules,and Entrances 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08410-13 D. Select joint fillers, primers and back-up materials per the written recommendations from the sealant manufacturer for each specific application. Shape, size, hardness, +•■ compatibility and bond breaking requirements are factors to be considered. E. Sealants shall be compatible with adjoining or adjacent sealants, back-up materials, substrate materials and their respective finishes. F. Sealants: One part, silicone conforming to ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25 having a performance range of—40 deg. F. up to 200 deg. F. and a dynamic movement capability of plus or minus 25%. Hardness(Shore A)—22. AM G. Color of sealants for internal use, not exposed to view, shall be at the option of this trade Contractor. Color of sealant exposed to view will be selected by the Architect for all joints required for this installation. H. Preformed foam plastics and synthetic rubbers, compressible, non-gassing, non- staining, and compatible with sealants and as recommended by sealant manufacturers. Backing shall be of the sizes and shapes to suit the various conditions and shall be a color different than the sealant color. Backer rods shall be 25 percent wider than the joint width. I. Acceptable Sealant Manufacturers are as Follows 1. General Electric 2. Dow Corning .�. 3. Or an equal acceptable to the Architect. 2.6 PREFORMED SYNTHETICS A. General 1. The particular alloy, compound, etc., shall be appropriate to the intended function of the preformed synthetic and is subject to approval of the Architect. 2. Base gasket material manufacturers and gasket extruders are subject to approval of the Architect. 3. All materials shall be non-staining, UV stabilized, and ozone-resistant. B. Glazing Gaskets(NOT in contact with Silicone) •r. 1. Interior closed cell sponge gaskets: Neoprene(polychloroprene), EPDM(ethylene propylene diene terpolymer),gaskets; ASTM C 509(60+1-5 Shore A durometer). 2. Exterior non-cellular dense wedge gaskets: Non-cellular Neoprene (polychloroprene), EPDM (ethylene propylene diene terpolymer), or Santoprene (EPDM-polypropylene alloy)gaskets; ASTM C 864(70+/-5 Shore A durometer). 3. Setting Blocks: Non-cellular (dense) extruded Neoprene (polychloroprene), EPDM (ethylene propylene diene terpolymer), gaskets; ASTM C 864 (90 +1-5 Shore A durometer). 4. Spacers and edge blocks: Non-cellular (dense) extruded Neoprene (polychloroprene), EPDM; ASTM C 864 C. Glazing Gaskets(in contact with Silicone) 1. Setting blocks: Non-xellular(dense)extruded silicone; ASTM C 1115 Type C (90 +/-5 Shore A durometer hardness). 2. Spacers and edge blocks: Non-cellular (dense) extruded silicone; ASTM C 1115 (60 +/-5 Shore A durometer hardness). .. 2.7 INSULATION AND SOUND DEADENING A. High-Density Semi-Rigid Mineral Fiber Board Insulation Smith Campus Center Curtainwall, Storefronts, Vestibules, and Entrances 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08410-12 ,� 1. Support joints with concealed stiffeners as required to hold exposed faces of adjoining sheets in flush alignment. 2. Fill space between stiffeners with sound deadening insulation attached to face sheet with cold applied asphalt mastic, unless otherwise indicated. D. Assemble aluminum elements in the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. E. Build in straps, plates, and brackets as required for supporting and anchoring fabricated items to adjoining construction. Reinforce sheet metal units as required to attach and support other construction. so F. Conceal fasteners unless otherwise noted on drawings. Size fasteners to support closures and trim, with fasteners spaced to prevent buckling or waviness in finished surfaces. G. Miter and weld or cope trim members and seal at corners to form watertight joints. H. All plywood backed sheet aluminum to be not less than 0.0375" thick. Refer to fee drawings for sheet sizes, jointing, and reveal dimensions. All closures and trim to be 0.0500"thick. I. Refer to section 08410.2.2.F.2 for finishing. 2.4 INSULATED ALUMINUM PANELS A. Manufacturer's standard laminated aluminum-faced panels of V thickness. Panel shall be flat, with no deviation in any direction exceeding 1/16" in 2; or 1/8" for the entire panel. 1. Face Sheets: Not less than 0.0249" thick and finished with Flurocarbon coating as per Section 08410.2.2.F.2 for insulated fascia panels. 2. Concealed Back Sheets: Aluminum or galvanized steel. 3. Stabilizer Sheets: 1/8" thick tempered hardboard. 4. Core Material: Rigid closed-cell polyisocyanurate. 5. Edge Condition: Prepared for glazing into framing and either sealed or vented to the exterior only. 2.5 SEALANTS A. The compatibility and sequence of installation for sealants shall be carefully considered in design proposals to insure the required cure and optimum performance. Sealants shall not degrade and/or fail under design conditions including, but not limited to, thermal movement, ultra-violet exposure and/or other adverse environmental conditions. B. Butter all exposed and concealed metal-to-metal, including tight or butt type metal-to-metal assembly joints with a full bed of sealant prior to assembly. High modulus and low modulus silicones can be used according to wall requirements. C. Concealed metal-to-metal and metal-to-concrete or other substrate material joints, or sleeved conditions where elements are to be installed or embedded in a full bed of sealant: A non-drying, non-skinning type of synthetic butyl rubber sealant may be go considered where recommended for the specific application. Use only in areas acceptable to the Architect and do not use at exposed areas. Smith Campus Center Curtainwall, Storefronts, Vestibules, and Entrances 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08410-11 G. Finishes for Carbon Steel 1. General a. All surfaces of steel members incorporated in the system shall be finished. b. If concealed from view, individual and aggregate members shall be hot-dip galvanized or receive a zinc-rich coating system as per 2.2.E4(herein). 2. Aliphatic Polyurethane: If exposed to view, individual and aggregate members .. shall receive the following coating system: a. Surface Preparation: SSPC SP10 Near White Blast Cleaning. b. Epoxy Primers/Intermediate Coats: SSPC SP Paint 22. "® C. Primer: Fast Curing Epoxy Primer Coat. d. Intermediate Coat: High-Build Epoxy-Polyamide Paint e. Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane Finish System. am f. Acceptable Finish System: Tnemec FC 27 Typoxy(4.0-6.0 mils DFT). Tmenec 66 High-Build Epoxoline (3.0 -5.0 mils DFT). va Tnemec Series 73 Endura Shield(2.0 -3.0 mils DFT). 3. Coating Standards a. All steel shapes to be painted shall be of the highest quality and conforming no to the minimum requirements of section 2.13,C: Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel. b. All fabrication shall be done prior to finishing. All welds shall be ground smooth and finished to match adjacent surfaces, all burrs and foreign 00 particles removed and any other defects remedied prior to finishing. C. Verify that all surfaces to be painted are dry, clean and free of dust, dirt, oil, wax, grease, or other contaminants. s d. Steel shall be shop-painted with two coats of primer as specified herein prior to delivery to site. The color of each primer and/or intermediate coat shall vary from the coat below to confirm coverage. e. Once steel members are installed, and prior to top-coating with finish coat of polyurethane, inspect steel for damage and staining. Remediate or replace damaged members. All repair procedures are subject to approval by the Architect who shall have the right to reject any installed work notwithstanding any remediation procedures instituted. H. Glass and Glazing: See Section 08800. 2.3 ALUMINUM SOFFITS, FASCIAS,CLOSURES AND TRIM A. General: Provide aluminum material with surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes where exposed to view in the finished unit. Do not use materials with pitting, seam marks, roller marks, variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by referenced standards for stretcher leveled metal sheet, stains, discoloration, or other imperfections. *` B. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods of aluminum fabrications with those of adjoining products and construction to produce integrated assemblies with closely fitting joints and with edges and surfaces aligned with one another in the relationship indicated. C. Increase metal thickness or reinforce metal with concealed stiffeners, backing .. materials, or both, as required to produce surfaces whose variations in flatness do not exceed those permitted by referenced standards for stretcher leveled metal sheet and to impart sufficient strength for indicated use. Smith Campus Center Curtainwall, Storefronts, Vestibules, and Entrances 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08410-10 plated steel in accordance with ASTM A165 and A164. Anchors shall be �. aluminum or steel,providing the steel is properly insulated from the aluminum. D. Shims,Blocking and Spacers 1. Metals used for shims, blocking and spacers shall be stainless steel incorporating separators for dissimilar materials, and at dynamic connections as and where required. 2. Do not use aluminum or plastic shims at structural connections or horseshoe (U) shaped shims at dynamic or other connections where they could work free. E. Metal Protective Materials 1. Bituminous coating shall be a cold applied asphalt mastic conforming to SSPC !! ! Paint 12, compounded for 30 mils thickness per coat. 2. Aluminum metal-and-concrete paint shall be a standard product specifically recommended by the manufacturer to protect aluminum against alkaline, corrosive and galvanic action. 3. Cadmium Plating: ASTM A165,Type NS. 4. Paint for Carbon Steel Used for Internal Supports a. One shop coat of zinc chromate primer conforming to Fed. Spec. TT-P-645. 5. Galvanizing of Carbon Steel for Anchorage a. Steel Sheets: FS QQ-S-775c. b. Hot-dip for Shapes, Plates,Bars and Strip: ASTM A123. C. Electro-galvanizing: ASTM A164 or FS QQ-A-325a. 6. Preformed Mastic Tape: NAAMM Specifications for Non-Shrinking, Non-Resilient Preformed Sealing Compound. F. Finishes for Aluminum 1. All aluminum framing and Vestibule soffit, fascia, closures and trim shall receive the following finish: a. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M21C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611 SAA 46— 1 hour clear. 2. Soffit, fascia, closures and trim shall receive the following finish: a. Fluorocarbon Coating: Provide high performance coating system consisting of primer and color finish coat conforming to AAMA 2605-98. Properly prepare substrates by inhibited chemical cleaning, conversion coating, and priming in compliance with coating manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Provide minimum 1.0 dry film thickness of thermo-cured fluorocarbon coating containing minimum 70% of one of the following resins: + ! b. Hylar 5000; Ausimont USA, Inc., Morristown,NJ 07962-1838 C. Kynar 500; Atochem North America, Inc., Philadelphia, PA 19102. 1). Color: Provide custom mixed color as selected by the Architect. d. The surface quality of the coating shall be smooth and free of flow lines, streaks, blistering or other imperfections. The coating shall be opaque and shall be uniform in color and tonality. e. Provide and furnish a compatible field touch-up PVDF coating system formulated for air-drying at ambient temperature, based on the Kynar ADS fluoropolymer resin, in color to match the factory finish. Smith Campus Center Curtainwall, Storefronts, Vestibules, and Entrances 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08410-9 also incorporates aluminum panel assemblies of 3mm min. thk. wall cladding and 4mm min. thick. soffit cladding, with reinforced edge closures of extruded aluminum, and an air and weather-sealed integral insulation panel, mounted on steel back-up framing. System also incorporates gutters where indicated.All exposed aluminum panel shall be visually flat, and free of distortion. Corners of panels shall be back-cut. Panels shall receive sound deadening protection as required to minimize the acoustical effects of rain drumming. Aluminum cladding within 3 feet of grade shall be reinforced with galvanized steel liner. Soffit aluminum panels shall include cut-outs, return housings, access panels, and all other provisions for recessed lighting and security equipment as required by the Owner. Finish of all concealed carbon steel shall be hot dip galvanized. Finish of all aluminum shall be clear anodized. "* 2.2 METALS A. Aluminum 1. Aluminum assemblies and all necessary and required components shall be manufactured of extruded aluminum shapes conforming to profiles, sizes and arrangements noted on the drawings. Metals shall be free from defects which will impair their strength,durability,performance or appearance. 2. Minimum wall thicknesses for extrusions shall be as required to conform to the performance requirements established herein but not less than .125" for main framing and.050" for snap on stops. 3. The alloys and tempers for aluminum elements which are to receive painted finishes shall be as recommended by the aluminum manufacturer. a. Alloy 6063-T5 (ASTM B221)as a minimum. .A 4. Aluminum not exposed to view, and where approved, may be mill finish 3003 except when it may be in contact with sealant. 5. Aluminum assemblies shall incorporate an integral flexible thermal break material held in place without clips or mechanical fasteners. 6. Aluminum Sheet a. Anodized finish: AA 5005 H34(ASTM B 209), anodizing quality. b. Painted finish: AA 3003 H14(ASTM B 209). 7. All sheet shall be stretcher-leveled and stress-relieved. B. Steel .R 1. Steel members for plates, angles, tees and other rolled or built up shapes for anchoring to adjacent construction shall conform to ASTM A36. Hot dip galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A123, A153 and A384. 2. Steel members used for internal supports shall conform to ASTM A36 and shall be shop primed with zinc chromate primer. C. Fasteners 1. Type, size, alloy, quantity and spacing of the fasteners and anchorage devices will be as required for performance. 2. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, bolts and other fastening devices, including their accessory items (washers, nuts, etc.), shall incorporate self-locking devices and torque tightening, as required, to achieve the maximum torque tension relationship in the fasteners. 3. Fasteners where exposed: Aluminum or 304 (19-8) stainless steel finished to match exposed aluminum, and where not exposed may be cadmium plated or zinc Smith Campus Center Curtainwall, Storefronts, Vestibules, and Entrances 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08410-8 , hinder or create a set of circumstances which will prevent the material(s) from ", properly being installed, and once installed from functioning for use intended. 1.10 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES A. General 1. The Contractor shall agree to indemnify the Owner against any defects in the design, workmanship, quality of materials, water tightness or performance of the Work of this Section. The general warranty period is ten (10) years. Warranties for insulating glass, laminated glass, coatings on glass, organic coatings, and cohesion/adhesion of structural silicone shall each be for a period of ten (10) years. B. Defective materials and workmanship include: 1. Abnormal deterioration, aging and weathering of he system. 2. Leakage of water or air exceeding specified limits. 3. Structural failure of components resulting from exposure to pressures and forces within specified limits. 4. Failure of operating parts to function normally. 5. Deterioration/discoloration of finishes in excess of normal weathering and aging. 6. Glass breakage due to improper installation, defects or failure of the system. Edge separation or any other deterioration whatsoever of laminated glass. 7. Failure of the system to meet any other specified performance requirements. C. The warranty does not cover damage caused by vandalism, or natural conditions exceeding the performance requirements. Warranty period for glass breakage due to accidents or vandalism shall be one year, to be provide under the general construction warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products manufactured by Vistawall. The following names and model numbers are those of Vistawall: 1. Curtain Wall: Vertical Glazing System consists of high performance insulating glass units conventionally glazed onto standard profile extruded aluminum framing, mounted onto painted steel back-up structure or adjacent structure. Finish of all concealed carbon steel shall be hot dip galvanized. Finish of all exposed + carbon steel shall be aliphatic polyurethane. Finish of all aluminum shall be clear anodized. Approved system includes Vistawall HP 175 with special profile cap, where indicated on drawings. 2. Exterior Storefront: Mor: Front System SYS1 with 1-3/4" profile and 4-1/2" depth,outside glazed. 3. Doors at Curtainwall: Rugged MS; see 2.9 of this section. 4. Entrance Doors at Vestibule: Glazed Stainless Steel Entrance Door assemblies consists of 3/8" min. thick FT monolithic clear glass glazed into standard profile extruded aluminum frames, with special profile extruded snap cap. 5. Vestibules consist of clear monolithic 1/2" thick FT glass, conventionally glazed onto standard profile extruded aluminum framing with special profile extruded snap cap on the exterior, and conventionally glazed onto standard profile extruded aluminum framing on the interior. Approved system shall be HP 175. System Smith Campus Center Curtainwall, Storefronts, Vestibules, and Entrances 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08410-7 4. F. Manufacturer's and Fabricator's Calculations: Submit glass fabricator's and curtainwall manufacturers calculations for wind pressure, thermal stress, and building ,. movement analysis. Submit written confirmation that the fabricators and manufacturers have reviewed the pertinent shop drawings and have confirmed the acceptability of the proposed use of the specified glass, curtain wall, and sealant products. 1.7 FIELD TESTING A. Representative portions of the constructed SYSTEM shall be physically tested in accordance with the requirements of AAMA 501.2. B. The Contractor shall notify the Architect and the Owner well in advance of each test. A C. At least 3 "initially successful" water tests shall be performed at different stages of installation on the SYSTEM. D. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor. Approval of all test areas, test procedures, remediation measures (if required) and test results rests with the Architect and the Owner. E. Contractor is responsible for ensuring adequate water supply and pressure to meet the .. requirements of AAMA 501.2. F. The amount and extent of retesting and remediation work required due to failure shall be to the approval of the Architect and the Owner. 1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver aluminum assemblies and all necessary and required components to the job site .�. in as large pre-assembled sections as practical, and transport handle and store in such a manner as to preclude damage of any nature. B. Deliver other materials to the site, ready for use, in the manufacturer's original and unopened containers and packaging, bearing labels as to type of material, brand name and manufacturer's name. Remove delivered materials which are disfigured, cracked, chipped, or scratched, or otherwise not suitable for installation from the job site and replace with new materials. Delivered materials shall be identical to approved samples in every respect with regard to color, finish and approved shop drawings. C. Store materials under cover in a dry and clean location, off the ground. D. Special care shall be exercised when handling, shipping and erecting factory-finished aluminum to avoid abrasion or other damage to the finished surfaces. Stacking and 00 storing of the members - in the shop, in transit, and at the job site - shall be done using softeners and timbers to keep individual members free from contact with the ground, and with each other; and shall be protected from soiling by adjacent fabrication or no construction operations. 1.9 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements '* 1. Install materials specified herein within the temperature and humidity criteria recommended by the manufacturer of each material. 2. Under no circumstances shall materials be installed on surfaces which contain �*+ frost, condensation, dirt, grime or other foreign materials encountered which will Smith Campus Center Curtainwall, Storefronts, Vestibules, and Entrances 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08410-6 r Item No. Size Description 1. S1 12" long Extruded member with each type, including special profile snap cover 2. S2 Actual Fasteners each type and kind 3. S3 --- Sealant color charts/cured samples, 6"long 4. S4 --- Actual anchors of each type and kind 5. S5 12"x 12" Finished sheet,plate or panel B. Submit certification indicating that assemblies meet Performance Requirements on specified herein. C. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings to Architect for Architect's review in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. No work shall be fabricated until the shop drawings and other related submittals, documentation,certifications and shapes have been reviewed by the Architect. 3. Shop drawings shall incorporate plans, elevations, sections and full size details for the work covered by this Section. the full size details shall show and note metal and glass thicknesses, types and finishes; areas to be sealed and sealant materials; gaskets; direction and magnitude of thermal expansion; direction and magnitude of applicable building movement; type of construction, including joinery, fasteners and welds; anchorage assemblies and components; the fabrication and erection tolerances for the work in this Section and the adjoining work even though not included in the work of this Section, to insure coordination of this work and the work of other trade contractors. 4. Interior and exterior sealants shall be designated and identified as to type, color, back-up and primers. 5. Anchorage assemblies and their related components shall be thoroughly scheduled and described on the shop drawings so that an installation can be evaluated to insure responsibility for furnishing and installing materials according to the shop drawings. D. Contractor's Professional Engineer air 1. The Contractor shall retain an experienced Professional Engineer, registered in the State of Massachusetts, acceptable to the Owner and Architect. 2. The Contractor's Professional Engineer shall prepare and endorse complete engineering design and calculations and shall check and monitor the preparation of all shop drawings for conformance with the engineering design and calculations, and for complete compliance with the Contract Documents. E. Product Data 1. Submit copies of each of the following to the Architect for review. Product data shall consist of printed literature, data and catalog sheets and cuts and, where applicable, test reports. 2. Information submitted shall include manufacturers' recommendations and limitations on installation preparation, storage and handling procedures. a. Sealants: each type and kind plus color charts. b. Neoprene components and silicone components: Each type and kind. 4 Smith Campus Center Curtainwall, Storefronts, Vestibules, and Entrances 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08410-5 Beam deflection due to live and dead load: Simple Support L/240 Cantilever L/120 w Beam deflection due to long term creep:Simple Support 1.5 (L/360) Cantilever 1.5 (L/180). Column shortening or lengthening: H/400 AW (H=column height) Interstory drift: H/400 2. Provision shall be made in the design of the system for the erection tolerances of wo building structure. The Contractor shall refer to the appropriate specifications for Cast-in-Place Concrete and structural Steel for the description of building tolerances. The Contractor shall be responsible for agreeing to and coordinating all tolerances. E. Thermal Movements: SYSTEM shall be designed for expansion and contraction resulting from an exterior temperature range of-15° to 140° F and a building interior temperature range of 60°to 90°F. F. Thermal Performance: The design and installation shall provide the minimum overall U-values and Shading Coefficients as required by the New Energy Conservation ow Requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code(780 CMR 13). G. Condensation Resistance: The SYSTEM shall be designed to prevent any condensation on the interior under the following conditions: 1. Outdoor ambient air temperature of 0°F, 8mp wind. 2. Indoor ambient air temperature of 70° F, 30%relative humidity. 3. Condensation is defined as water, ice, or frost occurring on more than 5% of the interior surface of any one component or water that is not collected and positively drained to the exterior through the condensation drainage system. H. Water Infiltration: Water Infiltration shall not occur when the completed work is subjected to the following inward pressures acting normal to any surface for the specified time periods, using a water spray discharge rate of 5 gallons of water per hour/ft'of surface frontal area: Pressure Type Pressure Time Period Static Pressure 10 psf 15 minutes Dynamic Pressure 10 psf 15 minutes I. Air Infiltration: 1. Air Infiltration averaged over the frontal exterior surfaces having fixed components shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ftz of frontage when subjected to 6.24 psf of positive pressure. 2. Air infiltration, averaged over the frontal area of exterior surfaces having operable components, shall not exceed 0.10 CFM per foot of crack perimeter when subjected to 6.24 PSF of positive pressure. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. The samples and certificates listed below are required to be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect for review. An omission of an item or items does not relieve the Contractor from this responsibility, and for compliance with the contract documents, of which this is a part. .. SAMPLES Smith Campus Center Curtainwall, Storefronts, Vestibules, and Entrances 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 084104 ,,,,, WX 2. Seismic Forces on components of the SYSTEM shall be determined in accordance with the Massachusetts State Building Code - 780CMR: State Board of Building Regulations and Standards, Section 1612.0: Earthquake Loads. 3. Snow loads shall be determined in accordance with the Massachusetts State Building Code - 780CMR: State Board of Building Regulations and Standards, Section 1610.0: Snow Loads. 4. Human impact loads in accordance with CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Category H for those locations designated as hazardous locations by code. 5. Concentrated load of 10-lbs at any point, over 1 sq. in., on snap-engaged components. 6. Load combinations shall meet the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code — 780CMR: State Board of Building Regulations and Standards, Section 1616.0: Combination of Loads. 7. Deflections of individual and aggregate components of the SYSTEM, when subject to the specified loads,shall be limited to the following: Vertical members: L/240 of the clear span between supports normal to the plane of construction, or 3/4 inch, whichever is less. Cantilevered members: Deflection normal to the plane of construction shall be 2L/240 of the span beyond the structural support or 3/8 inch, whichever is ON less. Transverse members: L/240 of the clear span between supports normal to the plane of construction, and L/360 of the NO clear span between supports in the plane of construction, or 1/8", whichever is less. Panels: L/175 of the short side clear span. Glass: Center deflection of L/254t of the short side clear span L, or 3/4", whichever is less, where t=glass thickness(inches). Framing at edges of insulating glass: Deflection shall be limited to W* Dg 0.4(Lg/100)2, where Lg is the length in inches of the glass edge supported. Framing at edge of monolithic glass: 8. The SYSTEM shall be designed to withstand 1.5 the specified wind loads without any damage or permanent deflection in excess of L/500 of any span. eaw D. Building Tolerances and Movements: 1. Provision shall be made in the design and installation of all components and systems for erection tolerances and movements of the building structure due to temperature, and gravity, wind and seismic loads, including lateral movement, column lengthening and shortening, and deflections of the building structure, as follows: Smith Campus Center Curtainwall, Storefronts, Vestibules, and Entrances 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08410-3 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards 1. American Institute of Steel Construction(AISC). 2. American Iron and Steel Institute(AISI). 3. Aluminum Association(AA). •�• 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 5. Architectural Spray Coaters Association(ASCA). 6. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association(BHMA). 7. Consumer Product Safety Commission(CPSC). 8. Glass Association of North America(GANA). 9. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers(NAAMM). 10. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Assoc. (AAMA). 11. American Welding Society(AWS). 12. American National Standards Institute(ANSI). 13. The Society for Protective Coatings(SSPC). 14. The requirement of the New Energy Conservation Requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code(780 CMR 13). B. Contractors'Qualifications 1. Aluminum assemblies and all necessary and required component parts specified herein shall be the product of a manufacturer who can furnish supporting evidence of manufacturing experience in design, fabrication, erection of aluminum assemblies, and of having been regularly engaged in such design, fabrications and erection for a period of not less than ten (10) years. Such experience shall have been in connection with custom fabrication similar to requirements of this project. *.R Qualifications of manufacturer and installer shall be subject to the review and acceptance of the Architect. 2. Carbon Steel fabricator: Painted carbon steel components shall be fabricated by a ,, company specializing in the fabrication of Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel(AESS)with a minimum of 10 years experience. 3. Installer: The work of this section shall be installed by a company specializing in the erection of the specified system with a minimum of 10 years experience. Manufacturer shall verify the competence of the installer, and ensure that they are an approved installing dealer. Submit, with bid description, photos of at least 3 projects completed in the last 5 years with similar scope and complexity. 1.5 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. The completed installation of all components and systems shall be sound, airtight, .. watertight, and free from defects of materials and workmanship. B. Performance of individual and aggregate components and systems shall conform to the wind load, seismic load, live load, safety, energy conservation and other requirements of all applicable codes or regulations, except as may be increased by the requirements of this specification. C. Loads and Deflections: 1. Design Wind Loads shall be determined in accordance with the Massachusetts State Building Code - 780CMR: State Board of Building Regulations and Standards, Section 1611.0: Wind Load: .. Pressure Zone Field Corner Vertical Glazing ±20 psf ±20.4 psf Smith Campus Center Curtainwall, Storefronts, Vestibules, and Entrances 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08410-2 SECTION 08410 CURTAINWALL,STOREFRONT,VESTIBULES AND ENTRANCES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES WW A. The materials, systems, and finishes for the exterior Curtainwall, Storefronts, Vestibules and Entrances shall provide the architectural design requirements, structural integrity, thermal and moisture protection, and other specified requirements for each building enclosure component of the project as follows, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Curtainwall 2. Exterior storefront. 3. Vestibules. 4. Aluminum and glass entry doors and frames. 5. Aluminum soffit, fascias,closures, gutters and trim. 6. Aluminum insulated metal panels. 7. Backup steel(painted steel girt [exposed] and concealed steel at vestibule). 8. Interface with skylight(Section 08600). 9. All gaskets, sealants, elastomeric and metal flashing including sealing at all junctions with roofing, waterproofing, and adjacent work. 10. Anchors,hardware and accessories, including trim pieces as shown on drawings. 11. All thermal insulation, firesafing, waterproofing, and sound deadening attached to or within the work of this section including attachment supports, backing and reinforcements. B. The system shall incorporate a dual-sealed system throughout, including all perimeter conditions and connections to adjacent construction, C. The system shall incorporate vapor barrier system throughout, including all perimeter conditions and connections to adjacent construction. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Concrete—Section 03300. B. Miscellaneous metals—Section 05500. C. Carpentry—Section 06200. D. Skylight—Section 08600. E. Door hardware- Section 08700. F. Glass and glazing- Section 08800. G. HVAC, for recessed heating unit at Vestibule—Section 15500. H. Electrical work—Section 16000. Smith Campus Center Curtainwall, Storefronts, Vestibules, and Entrances 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08410-1 ON C. Clean surfaces of grime and dirt using acceptable and recommended means and methods. r END OF SECTION go Smith Campus Center Folding Security Grille 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08330-3 PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.2 FOLDING GRILLES A. Provide folding grille, model OPAK by National Dagendor Ltd., 504, Riviere Sud, Saint-Eustache, Quebec, Canada J7R 4K3,Tel. 450-491-1050, or approved equal. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Curtain: Extruded aluminum panels 6" wide by 5'-0"(V.I.F.)high shall be connected to one-piece vertical hinge sections. Closure shall be suspended from an extruded aluminum top track by steel rods connected to molded nylon-tired ball bearing roller assemblies. The front and rear ends of the curtain shall be connected to 1 %<" by 2 `/4" extruded aluminum vertical members. The two intermediate members shall be incorporated into curtain at locations shown on drawings. B. Head Tracks: Shall be of extruded aluminum 1 3/8" wide by 1 %" high. Curved track shall be supplied with a 10" standard radius. Aluminum track finish shall be clear " anodized. C. Locks: Cylinder and lock assemblies specified in Section 08700. Provide dust proof .. floor sockets at location of posts as shown on drawings. D. Finish: All aluminum shall be clear anodized finish. E. Access Panel: Provide recessed panel unit as specified in Section 08300. The dimension of door shall be as shown on drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and field conditions to which this work is to be performed and notify Architect if conditions of surfaces exist which are detrimental to proper installation and timely completion of work. B. Prior to fabrication, verify all field dimensions taken at job site affecting the work. Notify Architect of any dimensions inconsistencies. ' 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation using only factory approved and certified representatives of the door manufacturer. B. Install door assemblies at locations shown in perfect alignment and elevation, plumb, level, straight and true. C. Adjust door installation to provide uniform clearances and smooth non-binding operation. .R 3.3 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect installed work using adequate and suitable means during and after installation until accepted by owner. B. Remove, repair or replace materials which have been damaged in any way. Smith Campus Center Folding Security Grille 100% Construction Documents: 01.1 1.12 08330-2 �" SECTION 08330 FOLDING SECURITY GRILLE (NON-RATED ENCLOSURES) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Work of this Section includes all materials, labor, equipment and services necessary to furnish, deliver and install interior security grilles as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Miscellaneous Metals -Section 05500. B. Access Doors- Section 08300. x C. Finish Hardware- Section 08700 D. Gypsum Dry Wall and Framing Assemblies -Section 09250. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawing: Furnish shop drawings for architect's approval. Include elevations, sections, and details indicating dimensions, materials, finishes, conditions for anchorage and support of each door. B. Product Literature: Submit manufacturer's technical literature describing the product to be used under this section. C. Maintenance and Operating Manuals: Furnish complete manuals describing the materials, devices and procedures to be followed in operating and maintaining all doors under this section. Include manufacturer's brochures and parts lists describing the actual materials used in the product. go 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances and regulations of federal, state and municipal authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Deliver and store materials in manufacturer's original packaging, labeled to show name, brand and type. Store materials in a protected dry location off the ground in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Grille Warranty: Furnish one (1) year written warranty signed by the manufacturer and installer agreeing to repair or replace work which has failed as a result of defects in materials or workmanship. Upon notification within the warranty period, such defects shall be repaired at no cost to the owner. Warranty begins at substantial completion. PR Smith Campus Center Folding Security Grille 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08330-1 F. Locking Devices 1. For non-rated access doors, provide flush, screwdriver operated cam locks of number required to hold door in flush, smooth plane when closed. 2. For fire rated doors,provide locks as described in paragraph 1.04, B. herein. ! " G. Inserts and Anchorage: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be built into masonry for the installation of access panels. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. H. All access doors shall be painted prior to installation; touch-up as required. 2.2 FLOOR ACCESS DOOR A. Provide single leafe floor access doors as manufactured by the Bilco company, type K- 2, 2'-6" x 2'-6". Assembly shall be an integral unit complete with all parts and ready for installation. B. Fabricate units with extruded aluminum frame and 1/4" diamond plate door, concealed hinges and compression spring operator. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where access doors are to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate all work with the mechanical trades to insure proper locations and in a timely manner to permit orderly progress of the total work. B. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face panels plumb or level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces. " C. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. D. Remove and replace panels or frames which are warped,bowed,or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION Wo Smith Campus Center Access Doors 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08300-3 with panel door, frame, hinge and latch from manufacturers listed in Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. "Classified Building Materials Index" for the rating shown. ■, 1. Provide UL label on each access panel. 2. Provide flush, key operated cylinder lock. C. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard size units which may vary slightly from sizes shown or scheduled. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Before any materials of this Section are delivered to the job site, submit complete manufacturer's literature to the Architect. Submit plans and schedules showing size and location of each and every access door for Architect's acceptance prior to installation. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide access door assembly manufactured by Milcor Inc, or equal made by Nystrom Inc., Karp Associates, Inc. or approved equal. Assembly shall be an integral unit complete with all parts and ready for installation. B. Fabricate units of continuous welded steel construction. Grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Provide attachment devices and fasteners of the type required to secure access panels to the types of supports shown. .. C. Frames for Masonry and Tile Wall Only(Flush Panel Units) 1. Fabricate frame from sixteen(16) gauge steel. Provide frame with exposed flange ■. not less than one (1) inch wide around perimeter of frame for the following construction: a. Exposed masonry. b. Tile finish. 2. For installation in masonry construction, provide frames with adjustable metal masonry anchors. D. Frameless Units for Drywall Surfaces(Recessed Panel Units) 1. Provide access doors without exposed frames for drywall adhered to recessed panel. .� E. Panels: Fabricate from fourteen (14) gauge steel, with concealed spring hinges set to open to 175 degrees. Provide removable pin type hinges of the quantity required to support the access panel sizes used in the work. Finish with manufacturer's factory applied baked enamel prime coat applied over phosphate protective coating on steel. Smith Campus Center Access Doors 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08300-2 SECTION 08300 oil ACCESS DOORS an PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS am A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the access doors as indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but not limited to, the following: 1. Frameless recessed panel access doors at drywall ceilings and walls. 2. Framed flush panel access doors at masonry and tile walls. 3. Provide access doors and frames for access from occupied spaces to the following, where indicated or required,and as directed by the trades of Divisions 15 and 16. a. All shutoff or balancing valves. b. Fire dampers, as required. C. Points of duct access. d. Pull boxes. e. Controls of mechanical and electrical items. f. Masonry shafts for pipes and conduits,as required. g. Pipe spaces, if required. h. Inlets of fans. i. Fusible link and splitter damper at filter bank. J. Automatic damper and motor. on k. Equipment not otherwise accessible. 4. Floor access doors. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Masonry- Section 04200. B. Drywall-Section 09250. C. Ceramic tile- Section 09310. D. Plumbing connections- Section 15400. E. HVAC -Section 15600. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For actual installation of the work of this Section, use only personnel who are thoroughly familiar with the manufacturer's recommended methods of installation and who are completely trained in the skills required. B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Wherever a fire-resistance classification is shown, or for construction where access doors are installed, provide access required door assembly Smith Campus Center Access Doors 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08300-1 an 4. Clearances: For non-fire doors provide clearance of 1/8" at jambs and heads, 1/8" at meeting stiles for pairs of doors, and 1/2" from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering, except where threshold is shown or scheduled provide 1/4" clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. 5. Fire-Rated Doors: Install in corresponding fire-rated frames in accordance with the requirements of NFPA Standard No. 80. Provide clearance complying with the limitations of the authority having jurisdiction. B. Refer to Section 08700 for installation of finish hardware. C. Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames which are warped, bowed or otherwise unacceptable. END OF SECTION NO .o oft rM MM Smith Campus Center Wood Doors 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08200-4 O ps B. Cross Bands: Shall be 1/16" thick hardwood extending full width of door and laid with grain at right angles to face veneers. Cross bands and faces shall be laminated to the core with Type I melamine fortified urea glue by the hot press process. C. Stiles, Rails: Stile edge bands shall be structural composite lumber laminated to the core. Stiles and rails must be securely glued to the core with no voids allowed. D. Doors with transparent finish to have balanced slip matched, quarter sliced, Maple veneer, minimum 1/28" thick. 2.2 SHOP FINISH A. Transparent Finish: Finish in the shop with clear satin catalyzed lacquer finish conforming to AWI System TR-2, Premium grade. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Prefit and premachine wood doors at the factory. B. Comply with the tolerance requirements of WDMA for prefitting. Machine doors for hardware requiring cutting of doors. Comply with final hardware scheduled and door frame shop drawings, and with hardware templates and other essential information required to ensure proper fit of doors and hardware. C. Take accurate field measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with machining in the factory. D. Doors shall be factory sized to door opening so that trimming and fitting are not required in the field. E. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances unless otherwise indicated: F. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3 unless otherwise noted. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates. 00 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. G. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kinds of doors required. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Once installed, maximum allowable warp, bow, cut or twist in doors shall be 1/16" as measured by the 1/16 inch feeler gauge and a straight-edge extending from corner to corner of the door face at stiles, top and bottom rails and along both diagonals. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Wood Doors 1. Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging. 2. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Fit door to frames and machine for hardware to whatever extent not previously worked at factory as required for proper fit and uniform clearance at each edge. Smith Campus Center Wood Doors 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08200-3 an C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for w fire ratings indicated on Door Schedule, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.8 WARRANTY �. A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) in excess of permitted standard noted in Article 2.5 herein, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers. 1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion: a. Solid Core Flush Wood Doors: Life of installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLID CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS A. Provide particleboard core, 1-3/4" thick, 5 ply, hot press, AWI Premium Grade solid core wood doors conforming to standards specified herein manufactured by Marshfield Door Systems, Inc., Algoma, Hardwoods Inc. or Eggers Hardwood Products Corp. 1. Core shall consist of a formed flat panel consisting of wood particles bonded ,�■. together with synthetic resins or other added binder, with an average density of 33 lbs. per cubic foot. The material shall meet or exceed the requirements of ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-LD-2 covering mat formed particleboard with face screw holding of 125 lbs., modulus of rupture of 800 psi and modulus of elasticity of 150,000 psi. 2. Core shall be capable of satisfying this WDMA TM-7 cycle slam test for surface mounted hardware. Where the manufacturer's core does not meet this criteria, stiles and rails must measure a minimum of 5-1/2" and must be fabricated of hardwood. a. Surface mounted hardware must be installed with 1-1/4" screw penetrations using threaded to the head screws; coordinate with Section 08700. Smith Campus Center Wood Doors 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08200-2 MR SECTION 08200 WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the wood doors as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but not limited to, the following: 1. Solid core flush wood doors. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Architectural woodwork - Section 06400. B. Hollow metal frames - Section 08100. No C. Finish hardware - Section 08700. D. Field painting — Section 09900. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit door manufacturer's product data, specifications and installation instructions for each type of wood door. 1. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. 2. Include factory finish specifications. 3. Include certifications to show compliance with specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, requirements for finishing and other pertinent data. ON 1. Include requirements for veneer matching. C. Submit the following 1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated"; latest edition "Premium" grade. 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or letter of licensing for Project indicating that doors comply with requirements of grade specified. Smith Campus Center Wood Doors "' 100% Construction Documents: 0 l.11.12 08200-1 work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF DOORS AND FRAMES A. Steel Doors and Frames 1. Install hollow metal units and accessories in accordance with the final shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified herein. 2. Setting masonry Anchorage Devices a. Provide masonry anchorage devices where required for securing hollow +•A metal frames to in-place concrete and masonry construction. b. Set anchorage devices opposite each anchor location, in accordance with details on final shop drawings and anchorage device manufacturer's instructions. 3. Placing Frames: Prior to installation, all frames must be checked and corrected for size, swing, squareness, alignment, twist and plumbness, Permissible installation tolerances shall not exceed the following: a. Squareness +/- 1/16": Measured on a line, 90 degrees from one jamb, at the upper corner of the frame at the other jamb. b. Alignment +/- 1/16": Measured on jambs on a horizontal line parallel to the plane of the wall. C. Twist +/- 1/16": Measured at face corners of jambs on parallel lines perpendicular to the plane of the wall. d. Plumbness +/- 1/16": Measured on the jamb at the floor. e. In masonry construction, building-in of anchors and grouting of frames is included in Section 04200 of the specification. f. At in-place concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure in place with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices. g. At steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with tapping screws. Spot grout anchors with USG Durabond Joint Compound just before board , is inserted into frame; coordinate with Section 09250. h. Place frames at fire-rated openings in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80. i. Make filed splices in frames as detailed on final shop drawings, welded and finished to match factory work. j. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces and spreaders. Leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 4. Door Installation: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in their respective frames, with the following edge clearances: a. Between Doors and Frames, at Head and Jambs: 1/8". b. At Door Sills Where No Threshold is Used: 3/8" max. C. At Door Sills Where Threshold is Used: 3/4" max. above finished floor.* d. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8". e. Place fire-rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80. f. * Finished floor is defined as the top surface of the floor, except when resilient tile or carpet is used, when it is the top of the concrete slab. .. Where carpet is more than 2/2" thick, allow 1/4" clearance. B. Refer to Section 08700 for installation of finish hardware. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Steel Doors and Frames 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08100-8 2. At Door Sills: Where no threshold or carpet is used - 1/4" maximum above finished floor; where threshold or carpet is used — 1/8" maximum above finished floor. 3. Between meeting edges of pairs of doors - 1/8." B. Fire rated doors shall have clearances as required by NFPA 80. 2.8 MANUFACTURING TOLERANCES A. Manufacturing tolerance shall be maintained within the following limits: 40 1. Frames for Single Door or Pair of Doors a. Width, Measured Between Rabbets at the Head 1). Nominal opening width +1/16", -1/32" b. Height (total length of jamb rabbet): 1). Nominal opening height + 3/64" C. Cross Sectional Profile Dimensions 1). Face: + 1/32" 2). Stop: + 1/32" 3). Rabbet: + 1/64" 4). Depth: + 1/32" 5). Throat: + 1/16". Frames overlapping walls to have throat dimension 1/8" greater than dimensioned wall thickness to accommodate irregularities in wall construction. 2. Doors a. Width: + 3/64" b. Height: + 3/64" C. Thickness: + 1/16" No d. Hardware Cutout Dimensions 1). Template dimensions +0.015", -0" e. Hardware Location: + 1/32" 2.9 PREPARATION FOR FINISH HARDWARE A. Prepare door and frames to receive hardware: 1. Hardware supplier shall furnish hollow metal manufacturer approved hardware schedule, hardware templates, and samples of physical hardware where necessary to insure correct fitting and installation. 2. Preparation includes linkages and cut-outs for mortise and concealed hardware. on B. Provide reinforcements for both concealed and surface applied hardware: 1. Drill and tap mortise reinforcements at factory, using templates. 2. Install reinforcements with concealed connections designed to develop full o strength of reinforcements. 2.10 REJECTION A. Hollow metal frames or doors which are defective, have hardware cutouts of improper size or location, or which prevent proper installation of doors, hardware or work of other trades, shall be removed and replaced with new at no cost. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where steel doors and frames are to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Smith Campus Center Steel Doors and Frames 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08100-7 no a. Where specified or scheduled, doors shall be provided with hollow metal mouldings to secure glazing by others in accordance with glass opening sizes shown on drawings. b. Fixed mouldings shall be securely welded to the door on the security side. C. Loose stops shall be not less than twenty (20) gauge steel, with mitered corner joints, secured to the framed opening by cadmium or zinc-coated countersunk screws space eight (8) inches o.c. Snap-on attachments will not be permitted. Stops shall be flush with face of door. C. Finish: After fabrication, all tool marks and surface imperfections shall be dressed, filled and sanded as required to make all faces and vertical edges smooth, level and free of all irregularities. Doors shall then be chemically treated to insure maximum paint adhesion and shall be coated, on all exposed surfaces, with manufacturer's �+ standard rust-inhibitive alkyd primer as specified for frames which fully cured before shipment. D. Flatness: Doors shall maintain a flatness tolerance of 1/16" maximum, in any direction, including in a diagonal direction. E. Door Louvers: Anemostat Model CHDL-2F (Inverted V Louver, Non-Vision), or approved equal, size as per Door Schedule. *� 1. Material: 18 gauge cold rolled steel frame; 20 gauge cold rolled steel blades. 2. Free Air Flow: 60% free area. 3. Provide louvers with baked enamel finish, in color as selected by the Architect. 2.5 LABELED DOORS AND FRAMES A. Labeled doors and frames shall be provided for those openings requiring fire protection ratings as scheduled on drawings. Such doors and frames shall be labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories or other nationally recognized agency having a factory inspection service. B. If any door or frame specified by the Architect to be fire-rated cannot qualify for appropriate labeling because of its design, size, hardware or any other reason, the Architect shall be so advised before fabricating work on that item is started. 2.6 HARDWARE LOCATIONS A. The location of hardware on doors and frames shall be as follows unless otherwise shown on drawings or required by prevailing Handicap Codes: 1. Hinges: Top five (5) inches from head of frame to top of hinge; bottom 10" f V from finish floor to bottom of hinge; intermediate centered between top and bottom hinges. 2. Unit and integral type locks and latches - thirty eight (38) inches to centerline W4 of knob. 3. Deadlocks: Sixty (60) inches to centerline of cylinder. 4. Panic Hardware: Thirty eight (38) inches to centerline of cross bar. �* 5. Door Pulls: Forty two (42) inches to center of grip. 6. Push-Pull Bars: Forty two (42) inches to centerline of bar. 7. Push Plates: Forty eight (48) inches to centerline of plate. 8. Roller Latches: Forty five (45) inches to centerline. 9. All of the above dimensions are from finished floor. 2.7 CLEARANCES A. Fabricate doors and frames to meet edge clearances as follows: 1. Between doors and frame, at head and jambs — 3/32". Smith Campus Center Steel Doors and Frames 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08100-6 primer standard with the manufacturer which is fully cured before shipment to a dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 2.4 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. Materials: Doors shall be made of commercial quality, level, cold rolled steel conforming to ASTM A366-68 and free of scale, pitting or other surface defects. Face sheets for interior doors shall be not less than eighteen (18) gauge. Face sheets for exterior doors shall be not less than sixteen (16) gauge and shall have a hot dipped galvanized coating conforming to ASTM A924, A-60 coating. B. Design and Construction 1. All doors shall be custom made, of the types and sizes shown on the approved shop drawings, and shall be fully welded seamless construction with no visible seams or joints on their faces or vertical edges. Minimum door thickness shall be 1-3/4". 2. All doors shall be strong, rigid and neat in appearance, free from warpage or buckles. Corner bends shall be true and straight and of minimum radius for the gauge of metal used. 3. Face sheets shall be stiffened by continuous vertical formed steel sections spanning the full thickness of the interior space between door faces. These stiffeners shall be not less than twenty two (22) gauge spaced not more than six (6) inches apart and securely attached to face sheets by spot welds not more than five (5) inches o.c. Spaces between stiffeners shall be sound-deadened and thermal insulated the full height of the door with an inorganic non-combustible batt-type material. 4. Door faces shall be joined at their vertical edges by a continuous weld extending the full height of the door. All such welds shall be ground, filled and dressed smooth to make them invisible and provide a smooth flush surface. 5. Top and bottom edges of all doors shall be closed with a continuous recessed steel channel not less than sixteen (16) gauge, extending the full width of the door and spot welded to both faces. Exterior doors shall have an additional flush closing channel at their top edges and, where required for attachment of weatherstripping, a flush closure also at their bottom edges. Openings shall be provided in the bottom closure of exterior doors to permit the escape of entrapped moisture. 6. Edge profiles shall be provided on both vertical edges of doors as follows: a. Single-acting swing doors - beveled 1/8" in two (2) inches. b. Double acting swing doors - rounded on 2-1/8" radius. 7. Hardware Reinforcements a. Doors shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for fully templated hardware only in accord with the approved hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier. Where surface- mounted hardware (or hardware, the interrelation of which is to be adjusted upon installation - such as top and bottom pivots, floor closers, etc.) is to be applied, doors shall have reinforcing plates. b. Minimum gauges for hardware reinforcing plates shall be as follows: 1). Hinge and pivot reinforcement - seven (7) gauge. 2). Reinforcement for lock face, flush bolts, concealed holders, concealed or surface mounted closers - twelve (12) gauge. 3). Reinforcements for all other surface mounted hardware - sixteen (16) gauge. 8. Glass Mouldings and Stops Smith Campus Center Steel Doors and Frames "" 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08100-5 40 an 3). Flush bolt reinforcements - twelve (12) gauge 4). Closer reinforcements - twelve (12) gauge 5). Reinforcements for surface mounted hardware - twelve (12) gauge. no 8. Floor Anchors a. Floor anchors shall be securely welded inside each jamb for floor anchorage. b. Where required, provide adjustable floor anchors, providing not less than two (2) inch height adjustment. C. Minimum thickness of floor anchors shall be fourteen (14) gauge. 9. Jamb Anchors a. Frames for installation in masonry walls shall be provided with adjustable jamb anchors of the stirrup and strap type. Anchors shall be not less than sixteen (16) gauge steel or 0.156" diameter steel wire. Stirrup straps shall •'" be not less than 2" x 10" in size, corrugated and/or perforated. The number of anchors provided on each jamb shall be as follows: 1). Frames up to T-6" height - three (3) anchors. 2). Frames T-6" to 8'-0" height - four (4) anchors. 3). Frames over 8'-0" height - one (1) anchor for each 2' or fraction thereof in height. b. Frames for installation in stud artitions shall be p provided with steel anchors of suitable design, not less than eighteen (18) gauge thickness, securely welded inside each jamb as follows: 1). Frames up to T-6" height - four (4) anchors. •! 2). Frames T-6" to 8'-0" height - five (5) anchors. 3). Frames over 8'-0" height - five (5) anchors plus one additional for each 2' or fraction thereof over 8'-0". C. Frames to be anchored to previously placed concrete or masonry shall be provided with minimum 3/8" concealed bolts set into expansion shields or inserts at six (6) inches from top and bottom and twenty four (24) inches o.c. Reinforce frames at anchor locations with sixteen (16) gauge sheet steel stiffeners welded to frame at each anchor. 10. Frames for installation in masonry wall openings more than 4'-0" in width shall have an angle or channel stiffener factory welded into the head. Such stiffeners shall be not less than twelve (12) gauge steel and not longer than the opening width, and shall not be used as lintels or load bearing members. 11. Dust cover boxes (or mortar guards) of not thinner than twenty six (26) gauge steel shall be provided at all hardware mortises on frames to be set in masonry or plaster partitions. 12. All frames shall be provided with a steel spreader temporarily attached to the feet of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. 13. Loose glazing stops shall be of cold rolled steel, not less than twenty (20) gauge thickness, butted at corner joints and secured to the frame with countersunk cadmium-or zinc-plated screws. Interior frames may be provided with snap-on glazing stops. 14. Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive three (3) silencers on strike jambs of single door frames and two (2) silencers on heads of double-door frames. ww C. Finish: After fabrication, all tool marks and surface imperfections shall be removed, and exposed faces of all welded joints shall be dressed smooth. Frames shall then be chemically treated to insure maximum paint adhesion and shall be coated on all accessible surfaces with one coat of rust-inhibitive baked-on alkyd Smith Campus Center Steel Doors and Frames 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08100-4 �' D. Prepare hollow metal units to receive finish hardware, including cutouts, reinforcing, drilling and tapping in accordance with Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware suppliers. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI Al 15 "Specifications for Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware". E. Locate finish hardware as shown on final shop drawings in accordance with locations noted herein. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products manufactured by Amweld Building Products, Inc., Ceco Door Products, Pioneer Industries, or approved equal meeting these specifications. 2.3 FRAMES A. Materials 1. Frames for exterior openings shall be made of commercial grade cold-rolled steel conforming to ASTM A366, not less than 14 ga., and shall have a hot dipped galvanized coating conforming to ASTM A924, A-60 coating. 2. Frames for interior openings shall be either commercial grade cold-rolled steel conforming to ASTM A366-68 or commercial grade hot-rolled and pickled steel conforming to ASTM A569-66T. Metal thickness shall be not less than sixteen (16) ga. for frames in openings 4'-0" or less in width; not less than fourteen (14) ga. for frames in openings over 4'-0" in width. B. Design and Construction 1. All frames shall be custom made welded units with integral trim, of the sizes and shapes shown on approved shop drawings. Knocked-down frames will not be accepted. 2. All finished work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, square, true and free of defects, warp or buckle. Moulded members shall be clean cut, straight and of uniform profile throughout their lengths. 3. Jamb depths, trim, profile and backbends shall be as shown on drawings. 4. Frames shall have corners mitered, reinforced and continuously welded full depth and width of frame; conforming to NAAMM Standard HMMA-820. 5. All glazing stops for hollow metal glazed partitions shall be made of 5/8" x 5/8" x 1/8" thick cold rolled steel angles, mitered at corner joints with all fastener holes preprimed and countersunk in the shop as per 2.0113 above. Glazing stops shall be secured to the frame with painted countersunk screws as follows: a. Space end screws 2" from corners. b. Divide remainder in equal intervals as close to 7" as possible. C. Align screws on both sides of mullions (both vertical and horizontal). 6. Frames for multiple or special openings shall have mullion and/or rail members which are closed tubular shapes having no visible seams or joints. All joints between faces of abutting members shall be securely welded and finished smooth. 7. Hardware Reinforcements a. Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for fully templated mortised hardware only, in accord with approved hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier. Where surface- mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall have reinforcing plates. b. Minimum thickness of hardware reinforcing plates shall be as follows: 1). Hinge and pivot reinforcements - seven (7) ga., 1-1/4" x 10" minimum size. 2). Strike reinforcements - twelve (12) gauge Smith Campus Center Steel Doors and Frames 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08100-3 C. Samples: At interior hollow metal and glass walls, provide full size sample of mullion intersection, including glazing stop. Sample shall be 24" x 24", and shall +w.� include finial finish. D. Door Schedule: Submit schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. • 1. Coordinate glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. E. Oversize Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies, submit certification of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to comply with design, materials, and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing custom steel doors and frames similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames palleted, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. ., B. Inspect doors and frames, on delivery, for damage. Minor damage may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are approved by Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store doors and frames under cover at building site. Place units on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 40 2.1 FABRICATION-GENERAL A. Fabricate hollow metal units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles. Weld exposed joints continuously, grind, dress, and make smooth, flush and invisible. Metallic filler to conceal manufacturing defects is not acceptable. B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips or Jackson heads for exposed screws and bolts. C. At exterior locations provide doors and frames which have been fabricated as thermal insulating assemblies. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal rated assemblies with U factors of + 0.24 Btu (hr./ft. 2/deg F.) Smith Campus Center Steel Doors and Frames .. 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 08100-2 SECTION 08100 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the steel doors and frames work as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but not limited to, the following: 1. Interior and exterior hollow metal doors and frames for fire rated and unrated door openings. 2. Custom fabricated hollow metal doors. 3. Trimmed openings. 4. Interior hollow metal and glass walls. 5. Preparation of metal doors and frames to receive finish hardware, including reinforcements, drilling and tapping necessary. 6. Preparation of hollow metal doors to receive glazing where required. 7. Steel louvers for hollow metal doors. 8. Furnishing anchors for building into masonry and drywall. 9. Factory prime painting of work of this Section. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Unit Masonry - Section 04200 B. Installation of doors and frames - Section 06200. C. Wood Doors - Section 06400. D. Finish hardware - Section 08700. E. Glass and glazing - Section 08800. F. Gypsum drywall — Section 09250. G. Painting - Section 09900. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, label compliance, sound and fire-resistance ratings, and finishes for each type of door and frame specified. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, dimensions of profiles and hardware preparation, location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessories. 1. Shop drawings shall indicate at large scale, profiles, gauges, sizes, and reinforcing and anchorage devices, for securing to adjacent materials. Smith Campus Center Steel Doors and Frames 100% Construction Documents: 0 1.1 1.12 08100-1 7 7 1 7 7 l 7 l 7 7 3 7 7 e e e e i E E C C e .. on PART 3 EXECUTION WX 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where miscellaneous joint fillers are to be so installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for the installation of joint filler. B. Set units at proper depth or position in the joint to coordinate with other work, including the installation of bond breakers, backer rods and sealants. Do not leave voids or gaps between the ends of joint filler units. , C. Recess exposed edges or faces of gaskets and exposed joint fillers, slightly behind adjoining surfaces, so that compressed units will not protrude from the joint. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Miscellaneous Joint Fillers 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07910-2 SECTION 07910 MISCELLANEOUS JOINT FILLERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the miscellaneous joint fillers as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Joint fillers as noted on drawings and not specified in other Sections of work. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS w A. Sealant work - Section 07900. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit twelve (12) inch long sample of joint filler and manufacturer's product literature. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General 1. Size and Shape: Provide the sizes and shapes of units as recommended by the manufacturer for the joint size and condition shown. 2. Color: Provide each concealed material in manufacturer's standard color which has the best overall performance characteristics for the application shown. Provide exposed materials in black. 3. Compatibility: Before purchase of each filler or gasket material, confirm that product is compatible with the substrate, sealants, and other materials in the joint system. 4. Adhesives: Pressure sensitive adhesives, compatible with each material in the joint system, may be applied (at installer's option) to one face of joint fillers and gaskets to facilitate installation and permanent anchorage. w B. Material: Provide closed cell neoprene Type NN-1 conforming to ASTM D1056, grade 1, high performance, as manufactured by Williams Products Inc., or equal made by D. S. Brown, Norton or approved equal. Smith Campus Center Miscellaneous Joint Fillers 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07910-1 .0 w� Mask adjacent surfaces of joint with non-staining masking tape prior to priming. 7. Joint Backing: In joints where depth of joint exceeds required depth of sealant, install joint backing (after primer is dry) in joints to provide backing and proper joint shape for sealant. Proper shape for sealant is a very slight "hourglass" shape, with back and front face having slight concave curvature. Use special blunt T-shaped tool or roller to install joint backing to the proper and uniform depth required for the sealant. Joint backing shall be installed with approximately twenty-five (25) percent compressions. Do not stretch, twist, braid, puncture, or tear joint backing. Butt joint backing at intersections. 8. Bond Breaker: Install bond breaker smoothly over joint backing so that sealant adheres only to the sides of the joint and not backing. .. 9. Sealant Application: Apply sealant in accordance with the manufacturer's application manual and manufacturer's instructions, using hand guns or pressure equipment, on clean, dry, properly prepared substrates, completely filling joints to eliminate air pockets and voids. Mask adjacent surfaces of joint with non-staining masking tape. Force sealant into joint in front of the tip of the "caulking gun" (not pulled after it) and force sealant against sides to make uniform contact with sides of joint and to prevent entrapped air or pulling of sealant off of sides. Fill sealant space solid with sealant. 10. Tooling: Tool exposed joints to form smooth and uniform beds, with slightly concave surface. Finished joints shall be straight, uniform, smooth and neatly finished. Remove masking tape immediately after tooling of sealant and before ' sealant face starts to "skin" over. Neatly remove any excess sealant from adjacent surfaces of joint, leaving the work in a neat, clean condition. 11. Replace sealant which is damaged during construction process. **! END OF SECTION .w. Smith Campus Center Joint Sealers 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07900-6 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Sample Section of Sealant 1. During sealant installation work in exterior wall, the manufacturer of sealant shall send his representative to the site, under whose supervision a section of on the wall (used as "control section") shall be completed for purposes of determining performance characteristics of sealant in joints. Architect shall be informed of time and place of such installation of control section. 2. Control section shall be installed according to specification given herein and shall not be considered as acceptable until written acceptance is provided by the Architect. 3. Accepted control section shall be standard to which all other sealant work must *a conform. B. Supervision: The Contractor shall submit to the Architect written certification from the sealant manufacturer that the applicators have been instructed in the proper application of their materials. The Contractor shall use only skilled and experienced workmen for installation of sealant. C. Apply sealant under pressure with a hand or power actuated gun or other +* appropriate means. Gun shall have nozzle of proper size and provide sufficient pressure to completely fill joints as detailed. Neatly point or tool joint to provide the contour as indicated on the drawings. " D. Preparation and Application 1. Thoroughly clean all joints, removing all foreign matter such as dust, oil, grease, water, surface dirt and frost. Sealant must be applied to the base surface. Previously applied film must be entirely removed. 2. Stone, masonry and concrete surfaces to receive sealant shall be cleaned where necessary by grinding, water blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or combination of these methods as required to provide a clean, sound base surface for sealant adhesion. a. Do not use any acid or other material which might stain surfaces. b. Remove laitance by grinding or mechanical abrading. so C. Remove loose particles present or resulting from grinding, abrading, or blast cleaning by blowing out joints with compressed air, oil and water free, or vacuuming joints prior to application of primer or sealant. w 3. Clean non-porous surfaces such as metal and glass chemically. Remove protective coatings on metallic surfaces by solvent that leaves no residue and is compatible with sealant. Use solvent with clean, lint free paper towels, and wipe dry with clean, dry lint free paper towels. Do not allow solvent to air dry ®'"' without wiping. Clean joint areas protected with masking tape or strippable films as above after removal of tape film. 4. Do not seal joints until they are in compliance with drawings, or meet with the ON control section standard. 5. Joint Size and Sealant Size: Joints to receive sealant shall be at least 1/4" wide. In joint 1/4" to 3/8" wide, sealant shall be 1/4" deep. In joints wider than 3/8" and up to 1" wide, sealant depth shall be one half the joint width. For joints wider than V, sealant depth shall be as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Depth of joint is defined as distance from outside face of joint to closest point of the filler. * 6. Primer: Thoroughly clean joints and apply primer to all surfaces that will receive sealant. Apply primer on clean, dry surfaces, and prior to installation of joint backing. Completely wet both inner faces of the joint with primer. Smith Campus Center Joint Sealers 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07900-5 .M 4. Bond and cohesion area of failure (a) after initial cure plus 7 days in 9 cm2 C 719 water None 9 cm2 C 719 ,. (b) after initial cure plus 14 days in None 9 cm2 C 719 water (c) after initial cure, plus 3 weeks @ 158° F , + plus 2 weeks in water 5. Adhesion-in-peel, lbs./inch (a) after initial cure plus 7 days in 5 C794 water None 5 C794 (b) after initial cure plus 14 days in water ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................; B. Interior Wall Sealant: Provide a one (1) part acrylic based sealant conforming to .� ASTM C834, equal to "AC-20+ Silicone"" made by Pecora or equal made by Tremco. C. Colors: Custom colors of sealants as selected by the Architect. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Back-Up Materials: Provide back-up materials and preformed joint fillers, non-staining, non-absorbent, compatible with sealant and primer, and of a resilient nature, equal to "Sof-Rod" made by Nomaco Inc. or approved equal, twenty-five (25) percent wider than joint width. Materials impregnated with oil, bitumen or similar materials shall not be used. Provide back-up materials only as recommended by sealant manufacturer in writing. B. Provide bond breakers, where required, of polyethylene tape as recommended by manufacturer of sealant. C. Provide primers recommended by the sealant manufacturer for each material to receive sealant. Note that each exterior joint must be primed prior to sealing. D. Provide solvent, cleaning agents and other accessory materials as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. E. Materials shall be delivered to the job in sealed containers with manufacturer's original labels attached. Materials shall be used per manufacturer's printed instruction. no PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION "` A. Examine the areas and conditions where joint sealers are to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. Smith Campus Center Joint Sealers 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07900-4 w 1.10 GUARANTEE A. Provide a written, notarized guarantee from the manufacturer and the applicator stating that the applied sealants shall remain watertight for a period of ten (10) years. B. Guarantee shall be in a form acceptable to the Owner and executed by an authorized individual. C. Guarantee shall further state that installed sealant is guaranteed against: 1. Adhesive or cohesive failure of sealant joints. 2. Crazing greater than three (3) mils in depth developing on surface of material. 3. Staining of surfaces adjacent to joints by sealants or primer by migration through building materials in contact with them. 4. Chalking, or visible color change on surface of cured sealant. 5. Increase or decrease of "Shore A" durometer hardness (5 second reading) of sealant of more than thirty (30) percent of seven (7) day value of "Shore A" durometer hardness of sealant. D. Include in guarantee provision, agreement to repair and/or replace, at Contractor's an expense, sealant defects which develop during guarantee period, because of faulty labor and/or materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Exterior Wall Sealant: Provide one (1) part non-sag silicone sealant equal to No. 790 or 795 made by Dow Corning, "Silpruf' made by G.E. or 890/895 made by Pecora or "Spectrum 2" made by Tremco conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, grade NS, Class 25, and conforming to the following minimum standards in excess of ASTM C920. Test Method C-290 Required ASTM Test Limits Limits Methods 1. Instantaneous Shore A, non-traffic (a) after initial cure 25-50 15-40 C661 (b) after 6 weeks @ 158° F. None 15-40 C661 j.........................................................................................................................................p..................................7.....................................{ 2. Instantaneous Shore A, traffic (a) after initial cure 25-60 25-45 C661 (b) after 6 weeks @ 158° F. None 25-45 C661 .................................................................................................... _ .............................. _................................. 3. % weight loss after heat aging (a) after 3 weeks @ 158° F. 10% C792 (b) after 6 weeks @ 158° F. None 6% C792 ......................................................................................................:...................................:...................................:.....................................; Smith Campus Center Joint Sealers 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07900-3 ON OR B. Samples: Submit the following: 1. Color samples of sealants. 2. Sealant bond breaker and joint backing. C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information and installation instructions for: 1. Sealant materials, indicating that material meets standards specified herein. 2. Backing rods. D. Submit manufacturer's certification as required by Article 1.6 herein. E. Submit results of testing required in Article 1.8 herein. 1.6 MANUFACTURER'S RESPONSIBILITY AND CERTIFICATION A. Contractor shall require sealant manufacturer to review the Project joint conditions and details for this Section of the work. Contractor shall submit to the Architect written certification from the sealant manufacturer that joints are of the proper size and design, that the materials supplied are compatible with adjacent materials and backing, that the materials will properly perform to provide permanent watertight, airtight or vaportight seals (as applicable), and that materials supplied meet specified performance requirements. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Temperature: Install all work of this Section when air temperature is above forty (40) degrees F. and below eighty (80) degrees F., unless manufacturer submits written instructions permitting sealant use outside of this temperature range. B. Moisture: Do not apply work of this Section on surfaces which are wet, damp, or s. have frost. 1.8 TESTING an A. Perform adhesion tests in accordance with ASTM C794 noting any modifications to this test procedure where compatibility is an issue. B. Perform testing on interior and exterior sealants to determine if sealants or primers ' will stain adjacent surfaces. No sealant work shall start until results of these tests have been submitted to the Architect and he has given his written approval to proceed with the work. ■, 1.9 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section, before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and ,■, replacements necessary. C. Storage 1. Store sealant materials and equipment under conditions recommended by their manufacturer. 2. Do not use materials stored for a period of time exceeding the maximum recommended shelf life of the material. Smith Campus Center Joint Sealers 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07900-2 SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the joint sealers work as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Flashing reglets and retainers. 2. Coping joints. 3. Exterior wall joints not specified to be sealed in other Sections of work. 4. Interior wall joints not specified to be sealed in other Sections of work. 5. Control and expansion joints in walls. 6. Joints at wall penetrations. SIR 7. Joints between items of equipment and other construction. 8. All other joints required to be sealed to provide a positive barrier against penetration of air and moisture. an 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Sealant at paving - Section 02750 and 02781. B. Exterior stone cladding - Section 04400. C. Roofing - Division 7. D. Hollow metal work - Section 08100. E. Sealant at metal to metal components of curtain wall - Section 08400. F. Glazing sealants - Section 08800. G. Sealant within drywall construction - Section 09250. H. Sealant at tile work - Section 09310 and 09330. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualification of Installers: Use only personnel who are thoroughly familiar, skilled and specially trained in the techniques of sealant work, and who are completely Jim familiar with the published recommendations of the sealant manufacturer. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing all joint conditions, indicating relation of adjacent materials, all sealant materials (sealant, bond breakers, backing, primers, etc.), and method of installation. 1. Submit joint sizing calculations certifying that movement capability of sealant is not being exceeded. Smith Campus Center Joint Sealers Will 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07900-1 4M OR PART 3 EXECUTION go 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where roof specialties and accessories are to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Coordinate with installation of roof deck and other substrates to receive accessory units, and with roof insulation, roofing and flashing; as required to ensure that each element of the work performs properly, and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. .� Anchor units securely to supporting structural substrates, adequate to withstand lateral and thermal stresses as well as inward and outward loading pressures. B. Isolation: Where metal surfaces of units are to be installed in contact with non-compatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces, or provide other permanent separation. C. Cap Flashing: Where cap flashing is required as component of accessory, install to go provide adequate waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashing (as counter flashing). Seal with thick bead of mastic sealant, except where overlap is indicated to be left open for ventilation. D. Operational Units: Test operational units with operable components. Clean and lubricate joints and hardware. Adjust for proper operation. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings. am END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Roof Specialties 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07700-2 0" 4a SECTION 07700 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL + 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services ? ' necessary to complete the roof specialties and accessories as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein,including but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Roof hatch. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Roofing-Section 07530. B. Sheet metal flashing-Section 07600. C. Metal framed skylight-Section 08630.. D. Roof smoke vents-Division 15. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Before any roof specialties and accessories are delivered to the job site, submit shop drawings showing profiles and anchoring devices. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOF HATCH A. Provide aluminum steel roof hatch unit, 2"-6" x 4'-6", with V rigid insulation at curbs and door and standard self-lifting mechanism. Provide manufacturer's standard hardware, including hold-open device, hinges, latch and operating handles for inside operation. Construct units for 401bs. per sq. ft. live load. B. Product: Bilco NB-50 at ships ladder, Bilco s-50 at all other locations. Smith Campus Center Roof Specialties 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07700-1 E. Joining: Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with the flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. F. Slip Joints: Locate slip joints not more than twenty four (24) feet apart and not more than eight (8) feet from comers. Form Slip joints as three (3) inch wide joints with cover piece behind flashing, and fill locked ends neatly with sealant. G. Coping: Install over base flashing in eight (8) to ten (10) foot lengths, lapped six (6) inches at ends. Coping shall be increased longitudinally to produce spring action to hold bottom edge of coping firmly against base flashing. Lap base flashing at least four (4) inches, folded back on underside at least _" inch to form drip. Form coping to profile indicated in details. Coping to be continuous at corners and angles. tuM H. Miscellaneous Flashing: Provide all other miscellaneous metal flashing not specifically mentioned herein, but indicated on drawings and/or required to provide a watertight installation. ±* I. Separation of Dissimilar Materials: Back paint surfaces of metal flashing in contact with dissimilar metals or with concrete or masonry with bituminous paint. END OF SECTION on 00 on so to Smith Campus Center Sheet Metal Work 1000% Construction Documents: 011.12 07600-3 am 1. Aluminum Flashing Materials: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated and with not less than .� the strength and durability of alloy and temper designated below: a. Factory-Painted Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, 3003-H14, with a minimum thickness of 0.050 inch where concealed and 0.062 inch where exposed, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Accessories and Fastenings: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other non- corrosive metal as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. ...R B. Aluminum outer window sills: Factory-painted aluminum, 0.125 inch thick, formed to profile indicated in details. C. Bituminous Paint: Fed.Spec. TT-C-494. D. Finish: Manufacturers standard 2-coat, thermocured system composed of specifically formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent plvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2. Color as selected by Architect PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where sheet metal work is to be installed and .. correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Reference Standard: Conform to the requirements of "SMACNA's, "Architectural "* Sheet Metal Manual". B. General: Fabricate and install metal flashing work in accordance with details and specifications of above Reference Standard, with manufacturer's instructions, and as herein specified, to provide a watertight installation. Apply metal flashing to smooth, even, sound, clean, dry surfaces free from defects. Make provisions to allow for expansion and contraction of metal flashing work. Wherever practicable, ..�, shop form all metal flashing work and deliver ready for installation. Form metal flashing work accurately to required profiles, with flat surfaces, straight edges and corners, free from defects. Fold exposed metal edges back not less than " and form drip. — C. Nailing: confine to sheets twelve (12) inches or less in width. Confine nailing to one edge only, locate nails where concealed. Use No. 12 x 1" long flat headed, annular threaded, Type 302 stainless steel nails for nailing to wood blocking; use one (1) �. inch long masonry nails for nailing to concrete. Space nails four (4) inches o.c. maximum. wr D. Cleating: Use cleats where sheets are more than twelve (12) inches in width. Space cleats approximately twelve (12) inches o.c. Cleats two (2) inches wide by three (3) inches long of the same material and weight as the metal flashing being installed. Secure one end of the cleat with two (2) nails and fold edge back over the nailheads. Lock other end into seam or into folded edge of metal flashing sheets. Pre-tin cleats for soldered seams. aw Smith Campus Center Sheet Metal Work no 1000% Construction Documents: 0 11.12 07600-2 SECTION 07600 SHEET METAL WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the sheet metal work, as indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but not limited to, the following: 1. Aluminum flashing. 2. Aluminum coping. 3. Aluminum outer window sills. 4. Field fabricating (including bending, cutting, etc.), if required, of aluminum flashing. 5. Aluminum flashing elsewhere, where metal flashing is indicated on drawings. 6. Separation of contacting surfaces of dissimilar metals. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Membrane roofing - Section 07530 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit, showing all materials, finishes, fastenings, joints, details, fabrication, construction and relation to adjoining construction. B. Samples: Submit 12" x 12" samples of flashing materials and finishes. C. Reference Standards: Submit copy of "Reference Standards" referred to under Article 3.2. 1.5 WARRANTY A. The contractor shall warrant that all Metal Flashing Work executed under this Section will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of ten (10) years from date of acceptance of the Project, and he shall remedy any defects in the Metal Flashing Work. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before during,during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Flashing Materials Smith Campus Center Sheet Metal Work 1000% Construction Documents: 0 11.12 07600-1 L. Adhesive Seam Installation (at specific transitions): Clean both faces of splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing membranes according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing membrane terminations. 1. Apply a continuous bed of back-seam(in-seam) sealant before closing splice. M. Repair tears,voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not meet requirements. N. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing membrane in place with clamping ring. 3.4 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION 'A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply Bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing. Use splicing adhesive to apply flashing to metal surfaces. C. Flash penetrations and field formed inside and outside corners with cured and uncured sheet flashing. D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll inside and end laps of overlapping sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations. E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars. 3.5 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Adhere walkways products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Maintain 3" spaces between pads to facilitate cross drainage. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. From time to time during the progress of the work and at the completion of the work, remove all rubbish, debris, dirt, equipment and unused materials from the site. Clean adjoining surfaces which may have been soiled by roofing work. B. Protect installed roofing from damage and abuse by other trades. Repair damages to watertight conditions at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Exercise care to protect installed work. Work which does become damaged in any way or is not watertight, shall be repaired and/or replaced as directed to the satisfaction of Architect and/or Owner at no additional cost or time. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Membrane Roofing and Roof Insulation "" 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07530-7 an as up time (will very based on temperature and amount of catalyst added), walk the boards into the adhesive to ensure full embedment. Optimal set up time should be 00, 5 to 10 minutes. 9. Walking on the boards immediately after placement in adhesive can cause slippage/movement until the adhesive has started to set up. On roofs with slope as grater than % inch in 12 inches, begin adhering insulation at the low point and work upward to avoid slippage. 10. Provide personnel designated to walk in all boards and trim/slit or apply weight to OR ensure adequate securement. 11. If multiple layers of insulation are specified or required, spray adhesive over the base layer once fully secured and follow the procedures noted above for attachment of each insulation layer. Stagger joints between boards in both directions. 3.3 ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install fleece-backed roof membrane over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing **� B. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. C. Accurately align roofing membrane and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. D. Spray-Applied Adhesive: Position and unroll successive sheets and align to provide the minimum 3 inch(8cm)wide splice. E. Fold adjacent sheets in half lengthwise to expose an approximate 10 foot wide by 50 foot long substrate area. Fold selvage sheet edges along the length of the sheets under the membrane to prevent overspray into the splice area. F. Spray adhesive onto the substrate area and allow to foam up approximately 1/8 inch. �++ Do not contaminate selvage edge at splice area with adhesive. G. Place the membrane into adhesive and roll the membrane with a weighted-rubber coated roller, approximately 18-30 inches wide weighing 60-100 pounds, to set the .� membrane into the adhesive. H. Fold remaining sheets lengthwise to expose additional 10 feet (3m) and by 50 feet (15m) substrate area(adjacent to are previously adhered) 1. Apply adhesive to substrate and continue process described above until all sheets are fully bonded. J. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. K. Tape Seam installation(Typical across field of the roof): Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing membranes according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing membrane terminations. Smith Campus Center Membrane Roofing and Roof Insulation 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07530-6 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where roofing is to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with the membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. D. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where tapered insulation is required and where overall thickness of insulation is greater than 3", install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 12 inches in each direction. E. Bevel surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards Fill gaps exceeding '/4 inch with insulation. 1. Cut and fit insulation within '/4 inch of nailers,projections, and penetrations. G. Adhered insulation: install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows: 1. The deck surface must be cleaned using compressed air, vacuum equipment or hand/power brooms to remove dust, loose dirt or debris. If excessive dust or dirt is present,a primer may be required prior to application of the adhesive. 2. Apply adhesive at the manufacturer's specified rate. 3. Check to insure the substrate is dry. 4. Mix parts A and B of the adhesive according to the manufacturer's recommendations for technique and equipment. Maintain thorough mixing (I5minutes) in order to maintain a consistent blend of materials for proper reaction of adhesive. 5. Use manufacturer's approved catalyst to accelerate curing of the adhesive, especially at temperatures between 40 F and 70 F. so as to produce set up time to approximately 10 minutes. 6. The second part (Part B) of the adhesive must be at least 70F prior to adding catalyst. The catalyst must be stirred to part A prior to adding the part B side to promote proper mixing. 7. Spray apply adhesive over the dry substrate area at the coverage rate to allow for full coverage. 8. Allow the adhesive to rise up approximately 1/8 inch and set insulation boards into adhesive. Continue to install boards into adhesive and after the necessary set Smith Campus Center Membrane Roofing and Roof Insulation ' 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07530-5 C. Spray-Applied Adhesive: two-component, low—rise spray foam urethane adhesive manufactured by the roof membrane manufacturer. D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard bonding Adhesive. E. Splicing Adhesive: manufacturer's standard adhesive formulated to splice EPDM sheet „e1 together. F. Seaming Tape: Manufacturer's standard synthetic-rubber polymer and 3-inch-wide minimum,butyl splice tape with release film on one and two sides. go G. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard single-component sealant. H. Backseam(In-seam) Sealant: Manufacturer's standard single-component sealant. .. I. Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant. J. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled aluminum bars, , approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors. K. Fasteners: Stainless steel fasteners designed for designed for fastening termination bars to substrate and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. L. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheer flashings, T joint covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips and other accessories. 2.3 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and referenced standards selected from manufacturers standard sizes and of thicknesses indicated. B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type H, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. 1. Manufacturer: a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. am C. Tapered insulation: provide factory tapered isocyanurate insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4inch per 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. Do not taper insulation in the field. D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 2.4 WALKWAYS A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy duty, solid-rubber, slip- resisting, surface-textured walkway pads, 30"x30", 12"x12" under Multiple-Use Terrace decking pedestals, approximately 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick, as manufactured by the membrane roofing system manufacturer. Smith Campus Center Membrane Roofing and Roof Insulation 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07530-4 D. Store roofing materials on platforms or pallets, above ground on roof level and cover with tarpaulins or on other suitable watertight covering. Store membrane, and handle, in such a way as to prevent damage to edges or ends. 1.8 PREROOFING CONFERENCE A. Prior to ordering of materials, a preroofing conference will be held to discuss the specified roofing system, and its proper application. Conference shall include installer, roofing manufacturer, installers of related work, Architect and representatives of Owner. Record discussions and agreements and furnish copy to each participant. Provide at least 72 hours advance notice to participants prior to convening conference. B. Coordinate application of the roofing system in such a manner that the complete installation is weather-tight and in accordance with guarantee requirements. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work shall not be installed when the roof deck is damp, wet or spotted with frost or if the ambient temperature is 35 deg. F. and falling or if there is a forecast for inclement weather which will be adverse to the proper installation of the roofing system. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty for the roofing work as specified in this section. Warrantee shall state that installed work shall be free from defects of materials and workmanship for manufacturer's fifteen(15)years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Warranty shall be in a form acceptable to the Architect and shall be duly executed by officers or principals of the manufacturer. C. Contractor shall inform the Architect if conditions exist which will interfere with issuance of the specified warranty. Start of work shall imply that the warranty as specified above will be issued. D. In addition to manufacturer's warranty, provide roofing Installers warranty for a period of two(2)years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EPDM ROOFING MEMBRANE A. Fleece-Backed EPDM Roofing Membrane: ASTM D 4637, Type III, nonreinforced, uniform, flexible sheet made from EPDM, laminated to a nonwoven fleece backing except at selvages, and as follows: 1. Manufacturer: Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. 2. Composite Thickness: 100 mils,nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: Black. 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. 1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil-thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application. Smith Campus Center Membrane Roofing and Roof Insulation 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07530-3 Not W1 B. Installer: A firm with not less than 5 years of successful experience in installation of roofing systems similar to those required for this project and which is acceptable to or +� licensed by the manufacturer of the primary roofing materials. C. UL Listing: Provide labeled materials which have been tested and listed by UL for application indicated and which have a "Class A" rating. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. The samples and certificates listed below are required to be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect, for review. An omission of an item or items, does not relieve the Contractor from this responsibility, and for compliance with the Contract Documents, of which this is a part. 1. Samples 2. Item No. Size Description a. S1 6" x 6" Membrane w/splice b. S2 6" x 6" Rigid insulation C. S3 6" x 6" Flashing materials 3. Notarized Certificates of Compliance .. 4. Item No. Description Standard a. C 1 Sheet membrane As specified b. C2 Submit manufacturers published specifications, which completely describe the preparation of surfaces and application of roofing systems. C. C3 Submit a letter from membrane manufacturer issuing sample guarantee and approving the applicator, prior to pre-application conference. B. Submit complete shop drawings showing details, dimensions, fabrication and fastening elements for each condition encountered, layout of each sheet noting seam locations, perimeter and penetration flashing and other details where roofing abuts other materials and/or conditions. Show adjacent materials and surfaces for coordination. Cross reference architect's details on all submittals. C. Submit shop drawings showing plans and details of tapered insulation, including layout patterns and shapes. .� D. Submit copies of pre-roofing conference records. 1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site ready for use in the manufacturer's original and unopened containers and packaging, bearing labels as to type, and brand. Delivered materials shall match approved samples. Fire classification labels shall be intact and visible. *�* B. Store materials under cover in a dry and clean location, off the ground and remove materials which are damaged, torn or otherwise not suitable for installation and replace with acceptable materials. C. Keep insulation and membrane dry, before and during installation. Remove wet materials from project site. Smith Campus Center Membrane Roofing and Roof Insulation .� 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07530-2 SECTION 07530 MEMBRANE ROOFING AND ROOF INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the membrane roofing, roof insulation and sheet metal work as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but not limited to, the following: 1. EPDM sheet membrane roofing. 2. Roof insulation below roof membrane. 3. Sheet flashing. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Metal deck-Section 05300. B. Sheet metal flashing-Section 07600. C. Drains and vents-Division 15. 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF THE SYSTEM A. The membrane roofing system specified herein shall consist of factory fabricated large sections of sheet membrane fully adhered over the rigid roof insulation. Provide flashing at roof penetrations and vertical surfaces. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCES A. Qualifications 1. The membrane roofing system specified herein shall be the product of a manufacturer who can furnish supporting evidence of manufacturing experience in the manufacture of the membrane roofing system and of having been regularly engaged in this business for not less than five (5)years. Such experience shall be in projects similar to the requirements for this project. 2. The details and specifications are based on a particular manufacturer. It is not the intention of this specification to restrict competition. But if a manufacturer other than the one specified is selected, it shall be his obligation and responsibility to modify and adjust his materials to suit the encountered conditions and to consult and coordinate his work with other trade Contractors to assure that the installation will be watertight and function for use intended and that the guarantee will be issued to the Owner. 3. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Carlisle Tire and Rubber co. Smith Campus Center Membrane Roofing and Roof Insulation 100% Construction Documents: 01.1 1.12 07530-1 other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping immediately and install new materials to product firestopping complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION w. so Smith Campus Center Firestops and Smokeseals 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07270-9 go 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. •. 3.5 INSTALLING FIRE RESISTIVE JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with ASTM C-1193, and with the sealant manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated. B. Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability and develop fire resistance rating required. C. Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross sectional shapes and depths relative to joint width that optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time joint fillers are installed. D. Tool no sag sealants immediately after sealant application and prior to the time skinning or curing begins. Form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated or required to produce fire resistance rating, as well as to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealants with sides of joint. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. 3.6 INSTALLING FIRESAFING INSULATION A. Install fire safing insulation utilizing welded or screw applied galvanized steel impaling pins and retaining clips; space clips or pins 24" o.c. maximum. B. Completely fill voids in areas where safing insulation is required. At spandrel conditions/floor edges, depth of insulation top to bottom shall be at least four (4) inches. C. Cover top of all safing insulation with firestop sealant. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting agency employed and paid by the Owner will examine completed firestopping to determine, in general, if it is being installed in compliance with requirements. B. Inspecting agency will report observations promptly and in writing to Contractor, Owner and Architect. C. Do not proceed to enclose firestopping with other construction until reports of examinations are issued. D. Where deficiencies are found, Contractor must repair or replace firestopping so that it complies with requirements. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping products and of products in which opening and joints occur. .� B. Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or Smith Campus Center Firestops and Smokeseals .� 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07270-8 a. If mineral wool is part of firestop system, the mineral wool must be completely covered by appropriate thickness of UL or Warnock Hersey listed firestop sealant. b. Refer to Article 3.6 herein for description of fire safing insulation. 2. Firestopping shall be provided whether or not there are any clips, angles, IM plates, or other members bridging or interconnecting the facing and floor systems, and whether or not such items are continuous. 3. Where an exterior wall of composite type construction passes a perimeter structural member, such as a girder, beam, or strut, and the finish on the interior wall face does not continue up to close with the underside of the structural floor above, thus interrupting the fire-resistive integrity of the wall system, and a space would otherwise remain open between the interior face of the wall and lower edge of the structural member, provide firestopping to continuously fill such open space. B. Interior Walls and Partitions 1. Construction joints between top of fire rated walls and underside of floors above, shall be firestopped. 2. Firestop system installed shall have been tested by either UL or Warnock Hersey, including exposure to hose stream test and including for use with steel fluted deck floor assemblies. 3. Firestop system used shall allow for deflection of floor above. !> C. Penetrations 1. Penetrations include conduit, cable, wire, pipe, duct, or other elements which pass through one or both outer surfaces of a fire rated floor, wall, or partition. No 2. Except for floors on grade, where a penetration occurs through a structural floor or roof and a space would otherwise remain open between the surfaces of the penetration and the edge of the adjoining structural floor or roof, provide firestopping to fill such spaces in accordance with ASTM E-814. 3. These requirements for penetrations shall apply whether or not sleeves have been provided, and whether or not penetrations are to be equipped with escutcheons or other trim. If penetrations are sleeved, firestop annular space, if any, between sleeve and wall of opening. D. Provide firestopping to fill miscellaneous voids and openings in fire rated construction in a manner essentially the same as specified herein before. 3.4 INSTALLING THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPS A. General: Comply with the through penetrations firestop manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/damming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce the cross sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings of designated through penetration firestop systems. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated a permanent components of firestop systems. C. Install fill materials for through penetration firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. Smith Campus Center Firestops and Smokeseals 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07270-7 .■r 2.5 MINERAL FIBER/CERAMIC WOOL NON-COMBUSTIBLE INSTALLATION (FIRE SAFING) A. Provide min. 4 pcf Thermafiber as manufactured by U.S. Gypsum Co., min. 4 pcf FBX Safing Insulation as manufactured by Fibrex, or min. 4 pcf Ceramic Fiber Insulation as manufactured by Manville Corp., or approved equal to suit conditions and to comply with fire resistance and firestop manufacturer's requirements. B. Material shall be classified non-combustible per ASTM E814. 2.6 MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing prior to application, comply with firestopping manufacturer's directions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce firestopping products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configuration, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of firestopping. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION "' A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints immediately prior to installing firestopping to comply with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and from penetrating items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping. 2. Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed upon completion of work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning ** methods used to remove smears from firestopping materials. Remove tape as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. 3.3 CONDITIONS REQUIRING FIRESTOPPING A. Building Exterior Perimeters 1. Where exterior facing construction is continuous past a structural floor, and a space (i.e. construction joint) would otherwise remain open between the inner face of the wall construction and the outer perimeter edge of the structural floor, provide firestopping to equal the fire resistance of the floor assembly. Smith Campus Center Firestops and Smokeseals 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07270-6 C. Intumescent Putty: Non-hardening, dielectric, water-resistant putty containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. D. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component, elastomeric sheet with aluminum or polyethylene foil on one side. E. Job-Mixed Vinyl Compound: Prepackaged vinyl-based powder product for mixing with water at Project site to produce a paintable compound, passing ASTM E 136, with flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings of zero per ASTM E 84. F. Mortar: Prepackaged dry mix composed of a blend of inorganic binders, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a non-shrinking, homogeneous mortar. ' G. Pillows/Bags: Re-usable, heat-expanding pillows/bags composed of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents and fire-retardant additives. H. Silicone Foam: Two-component, silicone-based liquid elastomer that, when mixed, expands and cures in place to produce a flexible, non-shrinking foam. I. Silicone Sealant: Moisture-curing, single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealant of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces and non-sag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a non-slumping/gunnable sealant, unless firestop system limits use to non-sag grade for both opening conditions. 2.4 FIRE-RESISTIVE ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated that complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those referenced for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses, and requirements specified in this Section applicable to fire-resistive joint sealants. 1. Sealant Colors: Color of exposed joint sealants as selected by the Architect. B. Single-Component, Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; exposure-related Use NT, and joint-substrate-related Uses M, G, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O. 1. Additional Movement Capability: Provide sealant with the capability to withstand 33 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 66 percent movement. C. Multi-Component, Non-Sag, Urethane Sealant: Type M; Grade NS; Class 25; exposure-related Use NT, and joint-substrate-related Uses M, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O. 1. Additional Movement Capability: Provide sealant with the capability to withstand 40 percent movement in extension and 25 percent in compression for a total of 65 percent movement in joint width existing at time of installation, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated. D. Single-Component, Non-Sag, Urethane Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; and Uses NT, M, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O. Smith Campus Center Firestops and Smokeseals 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07270-5 C. Install all firestop systems after voids and joints are prepared sufficiently to accept the applicable firestop system. w. D. Do not cover firestop systems until they have been properly inspected and accepted by the authority having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following manufacturers: 1. Tremco 2. Bio-Fireshield 3. 3M 4. Specified Technologies Inc. 5. U.S. Gypsum Co. 6. Nelson 7. Hilti, Inc. 8. Grace Flame Safe 2.2 FIRESTOPPING,GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems. Accessories include but are not limited to the following items: 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials including the following: a. Semirefractory fiber (mineral wool) insulation. *l* b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. C. Fire-rated form board. d. Joint fillers for joint sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. + 5. Steel sleeves. C. Applications: Provide firestopping systems composed of materials specified in this Section that comply with system performance and other requirements. `R D. Smokeseals at top of partitions shall be flexible to allow for partition deflection. 2.3 FILL MATERIALS FOR THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS A. Endothermic, Latex Compound Sealant: Single-component, endothermic, latex formulation. B. Intumescent, Latex Sealant: Single-component, Intumescent, latex formulation. Smith Campus Center Firestops and Smokeseals 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07270-4 systems, whose personnel to be utilized have received specific training and certification or approval from the proposed respective firestop manufacturer, and firestop installer shall have a minimum of three years experience (under present company name) installing firestop systems of the type herein specified. w H. Mock-Up: Prepare job site mock-ups of each typical Firestop System proposed for use in the project. Approved mock-ups will be left in place as part of the finished project and will constitute the quality standard for the remaining work. I. For firestopping exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions. 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems. 2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches or more in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting the floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means. 3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation. 1.7 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original unopened containers with manufacturer's name, product identification, lot numbers, UL or Warnock Hersey labels, and mixing and installation instructions, as applicable. B. Store materials in the original, unopened containers or packages, and under conditions recommended by manufacturer. C. All firestop materials shall be installed prior to expiration of shelf life. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work B. Do not use materials that contain solvents, show sign of damage or are beyond their shelf life. C. During installation, provide masking and drop cloths as needed to prevent firestopping products from contaminating any adjacent surfaces. D. Conform to ventilation requirements if required by manufacturer's installation instructions or Material Safety Data Sheet. E. Weather Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of firestop products when temperatures are in excess or below the manufacturer's recommendations. F. Schedule installation of firestop products after completion of penetrating item ' installation but prior to covering or concealing of openings. G. Coordinate this work as required with work of other trades. 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Pre-Installation Conference: Convene a pre-installation conference to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work. B. Sequence: Perform work of this and other sections in proper sequence to prevent damage to the firestop systems and to ensure that their installation will occur prior to enclosing or concealing work. Smith Campus Center Firestops and Smokeseals 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07270-3 F. ASTM E 1399 "Test For Dynamic Movement Conditions". G. ASTM E 1966 (Same as E. above). H. Published Through-Penetration Systems by recognized independent testing agencies. 1. UL Fire Resistance Directory, Volume I1 of current year. 2. Warnock Hersey Certification Listings, current year. 3. Omega Point Laboratories, current year. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product literature for each type of firestop material to be installed. Literature shall indicate product characteristics, typical used, performance, limitation criteria, test data and indicate that products comply with specified requirements. B. Submit shop drawings detailing materials, installation methods, and relationships to adjoining construction for each firestop system, and each kind of construction condition penetrated and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspection agency evidencing compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop configuration for construction and penetrating items. C. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit MSDS for each firestop product. D. Submit qualifications of firestop installer, including letter from firestop manufacturer of products proposed to be installed, wherein manufacturer approves or recognizes as trained / or certifies installer for installation of that manufacturer's products. E. Manufacturer's Letters: For installations or configurations not covered by a UL or Warnock Hersey design number, a recommendation shall be obtained from the manufacturer, in writing, for the specific application. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire, and the passage of smoke and other gases. B. Firestopping materials shall conform to Flame (F) and Temperature (T) ratings as required by local building code and as tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479. The F rating must be a minimum of one (1) hour but not less than the fire resistance rating of the assembly being penetrated. T rating, when required by code authority, shall be based on measurement of the temperature rise on the penetrating item(s). The fire test shall be conducted with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inches of water column. C. Firestopping products shall be asbestos free and free of any PCBs. D. Do not use any product containing solvents or that requires hazardous waste disposal. E. Do not use firestop products which after curing, dissolve in water. F. Do not use firestop products that contain ceramic fibers or ethylene glycol. *�+ G. Firestopping Installer Qualifications: Firestop application shall be performed by a single firestopping contractor who specializes in the installation of firestop Smith Campus Center Firestops and Smokeseals 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07270-2 SECTION 07270 FIRESTOPS AND SMOKESEALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES go A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the firestops and smokeseals as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but not limited to, the following: 1. Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated floor and roof construction including both empty openings and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items. 2. Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated walls and partitions including both empty openings and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items. 3. Penetrations through smoke barriers and construction enclosing compartmentalized areas involving both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items. 4. Sealant joints in fire-resistance-rated construction. 5. Penetrations at each floor level in shafts and/or stairwells. 6. Construction joints, including those between top of fire rated walls and underside of floors above; and those between exterior curtain walls and the outer perimeter edge of floor assemblies. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Cast-in-place concrete - Section 03300. B. Unit masonry- Section 04200. C. Joint sealers - Section 07900. r D. Aluminum curtain wall - Section 08400. E. Drywall - Section 09250. F. Ducts and piping penetrations - Division 15. G. Cable and conduit penetrations - Division 16. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM E 814 "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops". B. UL 1479, UBC 7-5 (Both are same as A. above). C. ASTM E 119 "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials". " D. UL 263, UBC 7-1 (Both are same as C. above). E. UL 2079 "Tests For Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems". Smith Campus Center Firestops and Smokeseals 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07270-1 ws 5. Provide control joints in locations noted on drawings, every 150 sq ft with 2:1 maximum height to width ratio. C. Sealant 1. At other penetrations and at control joints, provide back-up rod and sealant conforming tot he requirements of Section 07900. END OF SECTION s IM Smith Campus Center Exterior Insulation and Finish System 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07240-5 1. A "J" shaped track complying with ASTM D1784 and ASTM C1063 containing a slot for venting and drainage and located above the DryVit Vent Assembly, along with base of walls and horizontal compartments. H. DryVit Track 1. A "J" shaped track complying with ASTM D1784 and ASTM C1063 located above the DryVit Starter Strip. .w I. DryVit AP Adhesive 1. A moisture cure, urethane based adhesive used to attach the DryVit Track and Vent Track to the Dryshield Air Barrier. J. DryVit Reinforcing Mesh: Shall be a balanced, open weave glass fiber fabric treated for compatibility with other system components. 1. I.S. Reinforcing Mesh: Shall weight a minimum of 5 oz./yd' and have a minimum tensile strength of 225 lbs./in of width. 2. Panzer 20 Mesh: Shall weigh a minimum of 20 oz./yd2 and have a minimum tensile strength of 550 lbs./in of width. 3. Corner Mesh: Shall weigh a minimum of 7.2 oz./yd'and have a minimum tensile strength of 2741bs./in. of width. 4. Detail Mesh: Shall weight a minimum of 4.3 oz./yd2 and have a minimum tensile MW strength of 150 lbs./in of width. K. DryVit Base Coat 1. I.S. Base: An acrylic based product, field mixed with Portland cement in a 2"1 ratio by weight. L. DryVit Finish: As selected by Architect. M. At all penetrations, including windows, provide open cell polyurethane foam with water stabilized polymer modified acrylic equal to "EIFSTAPE" manufactured by Emseal or approved equal. N. Provide ultra high impact mesh reinforcing at areas of anticipated impact or high abuse. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where exterior insulation and finish system are to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. The System shall be installed in accordance with the current DryVit Outsulation MD System Installation Instructions, DS 169. B. Application 1. Attach insulation to sheathing back-up with approved adhesive. 2. Apply base coat of sufficient thickness to fully embed the Panzer mesh. 3. Over the embedded Panzer mesh apply another layer of base coat of sufficient thickness to fully embed Standard Plus mesh. 4. Over the embedded Standard Plus mesh apply another layer of base coat followed by selected finish. Smith Campus Center Exterior Insulation and Finish System 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07240-4 PR 5. One hundred sq. ft.of the approved insulation board. B. Package the containers securely to prevent deterioration and damage, and label each item clearly as to contents and where used. 1.9 WARRANTY MR A. Provide manufacturer's 10 year material and installation warranty. Warranty shall include the entire wall system including the sealant (Section 07900). Warranty shall cover the watertight characteristic of the wall system as well as cracking, delamination, fading and other defects. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. The specification is written based on "Class PB System Outsulation MD System made by DryVit Systems Inc.or approved equal by Sto or Senergy. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Air Barrier Components 1. DryVit Backstop: A 100% acrylic product, field mixed with Portland cement in a 1:1 ratio by weight. 2. DryVit Grid Tape: An open weave fiberglass tape with pressure sensitive adhesive. 3. DryVit Flashing Tape: A high density polyethylene film backed with a rubberized asphalt. 4. DryVit Flashing Tape Surface Conditioner: A water based surface conditioner and adhesion promoter for the DryVit Flashing Tape. B. Adhesive Material 1. Genesis: A fiber reinforced, acrylic modified product, field mixed with Portland cement in a 1:1 ratio by weight. C. I.S. Insulation Board 1. Thickness of the insulation board shall be a minimum 2". 2. The back side of the I.S. Insulation Board shall have factory cut vertical grooves measuring 1/4"deep by 1"wide, spaced 12"o.c. D. I.S. Insulation Board Closure Blocks 1. The I.S. Insulation Board Closure Blocks shall be aged, expanded polystyrene with a nominal density of 1.0 pcf but not less than .95 pcf. 2. The I.S. Insulation Board Closure Blocks shall measure a minimum 6"in width. E. DryVit Starter Strip 1. A 2" x 6" x 4" piece of aged expanded polystyrene configured to receive the DryVit Track and Vent Track. It is required at the base of all walls, at base of horizontal compartments, and heads of windows and other openings. F. DryVit Vent Assembly 1. A 2" x 6" x 10" piece of aged expanded polystyrene, which is configured to contain a formed aggregate matrix material and receive the DryVit Vent Track. It is required at the base of walls and the base of horizontal compartments and is capable of draining water. G. DryVit Vent Track Smith Campus Center Exterior Insulation and Finish System 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07240-3 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements including conforming to standards referenced herein. 3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this section with the work of adjacent trades, including flashing details and control joints. 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work. 5. Shop drawings shall contain the following statement "Materials and methods of installation have been reviewed by the manufacturer and meet manufacturer's recommendations." 6. Confirmation that system meets wind load criteria. B. Submit 24" x 24" samples of colors and textures available. Samples to be made utilizing tools and techniques proposed for installation. C. Submit written certification from the manufacturer stating that the applicator has the manufacturer's approval. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in original unopened containers with legible manufacturer's identification. B. Store products in a cool dry place out of direct sunlight, protected from the elements and from damage. 1. Store at a temperature of not less than 40 deg. F. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS ' A. Environmental Requirements 1. Application of the system shall be in ambient temperatures of at least 40 deg., and on unfrozen surfaces. 2. A minimum ambient temperature of 40 deg. F. shall be maintained for at least 24 hrs. after the system installation. B. Protection 1. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage during application of the system. 2. Protect finished work when stopping for the day or when completing an area in order that water will not penetrate behind the system, or damage finished work. C. Coordination 1. The work of this Section requires close coordination between related Sections. 2. All joints to be sealed shall be done immediately after the installation of the system. .� 1.8 EXTRA STOCK A. Upon completion of the work, deliver to the Owner at the job site a maintenance kit including, but not necessarily limited to: 1. Printed maintenance instructions. 2. Ten gallons of the approved adhesive. 3. Ten gallons of the approved finish for each color installed, and from the same batch as the installed finish. 4. One hundred sq. ft. of the approved reinforcing fabric. Smith Campus Center Exterior Insulation and Finish System 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07240-2 RM SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the exterior insulation and finish system(EIFS) as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Sealant work-Section 07900. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer 1. All Contract Documents shall be reviewed by the exterior insulation system manufacturer for conformity to acceptable details, recommendations and specifications for the system. This includes review and approval, in writing, of sealant specified in Section 07900. a. If the manufacturer requires changes necessary to issue warranty, those changes will be made with the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. B. The exterior insulation and finish system manufacturer's representative shall at least weekly inspect the 1. Application of the system shall be by an work in progress and final inspection shall be performed by the representative. Written inspection reports shall be filed with the Architect verifying that system meets approval of the manufacturer. 2. Applicator approved by the manufacturer of the system. 3. Follow manufacturer's latest printed application instructions and specifications. C. As a minimum product or system used must meet the same criteria as the latest published data of Dryvit for the following categories: 1. Resistance to the elements. 2. Resistance to wind loads as noted in Section 08920. 3. Resistance to impact. 4. Resistance to chemicals. 5. Adhesive strength. 6. Flexural strength. 7. Fire test data. D. System shall be capable of resisting wind loads of 35 psf positive and negative, unless greater required in Section 08920. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Smith Campus Center Exterior Insulation and Finish System 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07240-1 3.9 INSTALLATION OF BLANKET OR BATT FIBERGLASS INSULATION ' A. Install batt insulation only at concealed areas inaccessible to spray on insulation. B. Install blanket fiberglass insulation in larges pieces as practical with edges closely butted. Cut and fit insulation to closely fit intersecting or penetrating surfaces. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner may elect to engage an independent testing agency to perform field inspections, sample and test materials being used for conformance with specifications and Field Samples. 1. Testing agency will identify, seal, and certify samples of materials delivered to Project site, with Contractor present. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for material thickness, elongation, adhesion to substrate, solids content and any other of the product characteristics specified, using referenced test procedures and other tests cited in manufacturer's Product Data. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative shall be present to observe all required Field Samples, and to file reports describing them. Representative shall also make periodic site visits during the course of the work to verify the Installer's continued adherence to approved methods of installation. C. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates,reapply membrane, and repair sheet flashings. D. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with requirements. 3.11 PROTECTION A. Protect membrane and installation from damage and wear during the construction period. Do not permit membrane to remain exposed to sunlight for a period of more than one day. Do not permit insulation to remain exposed to sunlight for a period of more than four weeks. Provide temporary coverings where insulation or membrane cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. B. Damaged Work: remove and replace damaged membrane and/or insulation immediately and replace with new materials. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Building Insulation ''"" 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07210-7 w� D. Apply an initial application of membrane to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases, with an average dry film thickness of 70 mils and a minimum dry film thickness of 60 mils at any point. E. If area to be waterproofed is in direct sunlight and temperature is rising, apply"scratch coat" (a thin application of fluid applied air/water barrier) prior to the full application of the air/water barrier membrane. F. Inspect completed installation for pinholes. Using a depth gauge, check for overall thickness and satisfactory adhesion every 250 sq ft. Add additional membrane where required to conform to the specification minimums. 3.6 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate the placement of insulation courses with the placement of masonry anchors to the greatest extent possible, such that insulation can be installed in continuous horizontal rows between lines of anchors. B. Begin installation of insulation approximately 45-90 minutes following application of the membrane. Install a single layer of insulation to achieve required thickness over the still-tacky surface of the membrane. C. Place each insulation board firmly into the membrane using even pressure in order to achieve full bond between board and membrane. Where boards do not lie flat against the membrane and create gaps between membrane and the perimeter of the boards, apply an approved one-part urethane sealant to fill the gaps. Install insulation boards in horizontal, "running bond" pattern, butting each board snugly against the next in a , progressive pattern. Fill joints between boards in excess of 1/8" in width with an approved foam insulation. Cut and fit to within 1/2"of projections and penetrations. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF BELOW GRADE PERIMETER AND UNDERSLAB INSULATION A. On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Use type of adhesive as specified herein. B. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces (from damage during backfilling) by application of protection board. Set in adhesive in accordance with ., recommendations of manufacturer of insulation. C. Protect top surface of horizontal insulation (from damage during concrete work) by application of protection board. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF SPRAY ON INSULATION A. Prepare surface per manufacturer's specifications. B. Correct deficiencies in insulation installation before insulation is covered. C. Install spray on insulation throughout inside face of exterior wall assembly in a continuous layer from top of structural slab to underside of metal deck, including voids at overhangs and soffits. D. Installer to trim foam and remove scrap material. ■ Smith Campus Center Building Insulation 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07210-6 g* C. Insulation Joint Filler: One-part urethane sealant equal to"Sikaflex IA"by Sika Corp. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where building insulation and air/water barrier are to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's recommendations. Provide clean,dust-free, and dry substrate for membrane application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving membrane to prevent spillage or overspray affecting other construction. C. Remove all contaminants from steel and plywood surfaces to be covered. Remove fins, ridges,and other projections and fill all voids. 3.3 PREPARATION AT TRANSITIONS,TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS A. Prepare surfaces at terminations and penetrations through membrane and at expansion joints and sleeves according to manufacturer's recommendation. B. To all inside and outside corners of intersecting walls, over all transitions between concrete masonry, plywood sheathing, and all other materials, and at all other changes in plane within each wall, apply a double thickness of membrane and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat when recommended by membrane manufacturer. 1. Provide membrane cants around penetrations and at inside corners of intersecting walls and at stepped rough openings within each wall for windows and doors. 3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C898 and membrane manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install sheet flashing to form tie-ins between wall membrane and adjacent foundation and roof membrane systems according to membrane manufacturer's recommendations. C. Plywood substrates: Pretreat all plywood joints with 3" wide, reinforced self-adhesive tape. Secure all fasteners. 3.5 AIR/WATER BARRIER APPLICATION A. Apply membrane according to manufacturer's recommendations. B. Start installing membrane in presence of manufacturer's technical representative. C. Mix materials according to manufacturer's instructions using manufacturer's recommended spray equipment. Parts A and B are mixed at the nozzle end of the spray equipment. Premix the Part A prior to pumping. Smith Campus Center Building Insulation 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07210-5 2.3 BLANKET INSULATION A. Provide flexible glass fiber blankets/batts equal to "Fiberglass Flame Spread 25 Insulation" as manufactured by Owens Corning or equal made by Manville or Certainteed conforming to ASTM C612,Type IA or ASTM C665,Type III,Class A. B. Insulation shall have an R value of not less than 3.7/inch and shall be 3-1/2" thick unless otherwise noted on the drawings. 2.4 AIR/WATER BARRIER MEMBRANE , A. Fluid Applied Air/water barrier Membrane: two part, self-curing, synthetic latex rubber based material which meets or exceeds the performance requirements of ASTM C 836 and other ASTM standards as shown in the following table. 1. Procor 75 by W.R. Grace. B. Membrane Physical Properties: Pro e Standard Typical Value Color terra cotta Cured Film ASTM D 3767 Method A 1.5mm(0.060") Thickness 1.5 mm(0.060")nominal nominal Solids Content ASTM D 1644 100% 100% Flexibility, 180 deg ASTM D 1970 Unaffected bend over 25mm " (I")mandrel at 3 2 deg C(-25 deg F) Elongation ASTM D 412 500%minimum Peel Adhesion to ASTM D 903 Modified 880 N/m(5 lbs/in) Concrete +*�! 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS w A. Clips for securing Insulation to Encountered Surfaces, where required: Spindle anchor and washer type consisting of perforated metal plates with spindle welded to center and snap on washers. .� Spindle and washers shall receive a corrosion resistant electro-zinc plating. Adhesives for securing clips in place shall be recommended by the approved clip manufacturer. 1. Acceptable manufacturers we a. Miracle Adhesives Corp. b. Stic-Klip Mfg. Co., Inc. C. Eckel Industries, Inc. , B. Membrane reinforcing strip: Manufacturer's recommended polyester fabric or 50-mil uncured neoprene. Smith Campus Center Building Insulation 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 072104 PM In cool temperatures, store the material for several hours at room temperature to NO facilitate mixing and application. C. Remove and replace material damaged during storage or handling, or that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. D. Take every precaution to prevent the insulation from becoming wet, cover with tarps or other weather/watertight sheet goods. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply membrane within the following range of ambient and substrate temperatures: 1. Ambient 40 deg F to 95 deg F. 2. Substrate: 45 deg F to 85 deg F. B. Do not apply membrane to wet substrates when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F above dew point. 1. Do not apply membrane in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when such weather conditions are imminent during the application and curing period. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by membrane manufacturer and Installer agreeing to repair or replace membrane that does not meet requirements or that does not remain watertight within the specified warranty period. Warranty does not include failure of membrane due to failure of substrate prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate that exceed 1/16" in width. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FOUNDATION WALL, UNDERSLAB AND EXTERIOR WALL RIGID INSULATION A. Provide extruded polystyrene board insulation equal to "Styrofoam" manufactured by Dow Chemical Co., or approved equal made by Owens Corning or PACTIV Building Products, conforming to ASTM C578, Type IV (foundation and exterior wall), Type V (underslab),with a maximum flame spread and smoke developed indices of 75 and 450 + respectively. B. Insulation shall have an aged R value of not less than 5/inch; shall be 2" thick unless otherwise noted on the drawings. 2.2 EXTERIOR WALL SPRAY ON INSULATION A. Provide polyicynene spray on open cell insulation manufactured by lcynene,inc. or approved equal; maximum flame spread and smoke developed indices 20 and 400 respectively. B. Insulation shall have an R value not less than 10 for the total thickness of installation. C. Installer to be certified by the manufacturer for the installation of the spray on insulation. Smith Campus Center Building Insulation ' " 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07210-3 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer with at least three years experience installing similar membrane systems, and who is certified in writing by the membrane manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's membrane. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing fluid-applied air/water barrier membranes indicated for this Project and that has a record of successful in-service performance. C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain air/water barrier materials from a single manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacturing waterproofing. D. Field Samples: In the presence of the membrane manufacturer's technical representative and the Architect, apply Field Samples to 250 sq. ft. of cavity wall of each type of substrate to demonstrate surface preparation, joint and crack treatment, control of membrane uniformity of thickness and texture, insulation application, and ** overall standard of workmanship. Document all revisions on the shop drawings, and resubmit to the Architect. 1. Notify Architect two weeks in advance of the dates and times when field sample will be prepared. 2. Execute each aspect of the work (surface preparation, membrane application, insulation placement, transition reinforcement) using personnel, materials, and methods intended for the Project, consistent with approved submittals. 3. If Architect or manufacturer determines that Field Sample does not meet requirements, reapply membrane until field sample is approved. �. 4. Retain and maintain approved Field Sample during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed membrane. An undamaged field sample may be incorporated into the final Project work. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section"Project Meetings." 1. Before installing the membrane assembly, meet with Owner, Architect, membrane w manufacturer,and other concerned entities. 2. Review requirements for membrane application, including Field Sample procedures, construction schedule, sequencing of mobilization and application operations, surface preparation specified under other Sections, substrate condition and pretreatment, forecasted weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, coordination of masonry anchorage and wall opening stops, inspection,protection and miscellaneous repairs. 3. Notify participants at least two weeks before conference. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by membrane manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. Protect air/water barrier materials from freezing. _aw Smith Campus Center Building Insulation 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07210-2 '0' SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the building insulation as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein,including but is not limited to,the following: 1. Insulation under slabs-on-grade. 2. Foundation wall insulation. 3. Exterior wall rigid insulation. 4. Exterior wall spray-on insulation. 5. Blanket insulation. 6. Air/water barrier membrane. 7. Attachment devices. go 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Earthwork-Section 02300. B. Carpentry-Section 06200. _ C. Firestops and smokeseals-Section 07270. D. Roof insulation-Section 07530 and 07411. E. Acoustic insulation- Section 09250. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for each type of building insulation and air/water barrier material specified, including manufacturer's printed instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating the substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties. B. Shop drawings showing locations and extent of the membrane, including details for all transitions and terminations of the membrane, as well as substrate joints and cracks, fabric/sheet reinforcements, flashings, penetrations, and other Project conditions. Amend these drawings as required based on execution and approval of the Field Sample(see below). C. Samples, 12" x 12" minimum size, of each membrane assembly material required for Project. D. Installer certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that Installers comply with requirements under the"Quality Assurance"Article. on Smith Campus Center Building Insulation "" 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07210-1 so w followed immediately with a troweled-on scratch coat of 1:2 Portland cement plaster, applied at least 3/8" thick, well bonded to the slush coat and scratched to a bonding surface for the finish coat. After an interval of not less than 24 hrs., a second metallic waterproofing slush coat shall be applied, followed immediately with a finishing coat of 1:3 Portland cement plaster floated and troweled to a hard smooth surface. The total thickness of the wall " waterproofing shall not be less than V. 4. On horizontal surfaces, apply not less than 3 coats of the metallic waterproofing compound and water (min. 15 lbs. of metallic waterproofing *■ compound per 100 sq. ft. of surface area for the 3 coats) followed by a slush coat of metallic waterproofing applied as hereinbefore specified for wall application. Immediately following install a cement topping not less than 1" thick, consisting of 1 part Portland cement and 2 parts sand by volume, with as little water added as practicable. The mixture shall be spread to a uniform thickness, screeded to proper levels and steel floated and troweled to a true and smooth, hard wearing surface. Special care shall be taken to secure a good bond between the vertical and horizontal waterproofing coats so that a complete waterproofing job is obtained. 5. Where penetrating metallic cementitious waterproofing for anchors and .�. inserts, grout pocket with waterproofing material and follow manufacturer's instructions closely in order to maintain the guarantee and the integrity of the waterproofing. C. Curing: Waterproofing shall be treated to prevent excessive loss of moisture for a period of 7 days from the time of the application of the finish coat. 3.3 TESTING A. After waterproofing has thoroughly hardened, any areas that show, upon inspection, that the work is not sound, free from discolorations, peeling, blistering, crazing and other defects, or is out of line, or not thoroughly bonded, shall be removed and replaced. Test of the bond shall be made by tapping over the entire waterproofed surface with a wooden mallet. B. No loads shall be placed on the waterproofing itself until it is at least 4 days old. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Metallic Oxide Waterproofing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07160-4 d. Certification: Furnish a certified statement from a testing laboratory acceptable to the Architect attesting that the metallic waterproofing compound meets the chemical and physical composition specified herein. 4. Water: Potable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where metallic oxide waterproofing is to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Preparation 1. Fill all tie wire holes. The Junction between floor and walls, all joints at end of day's pour and around all conduit and pipes projecting through slabs and walls, shall be carefully cut out, cleaned and pointed up with a mixture of the metallic waterproofing, sand and cement. These materials shall be mixed dry, proportioned as recommended by the manufacturer, thoroughly screened, and with enough water to obtain mortar consistency. 2. After pointing work has been completed, the surfaces shall be thoroughly roughened to provide an entirely new bonding surface by exposing the aggregate, and shall be thoroughly cleaned and well washed in accordance with we manufacturer's instructions. 3. If the Contractor elects to roughen the walls by sand blasting, a min. of 1/16" of the surface shall be removed, or more if required to thoroughly expose aggregate. Sand blasting must not interfere with other trades. 4. Bush-hammering shall be performed if wall surfaces require more than sand blasting. B. Waterproofing Treatment 1. After surface preparation, the areas shall be water saturated and treated by applying a min. of 3 coats of metallic waterproofing compound and water, covering and sealing all pores. Completed treatment shall present a uniformly wu oxidized surface. Prior to applying each coat, wet the surfaces and keep damp during each application. Each coat shall be completed over the entire surface area before the succeeding coat is applied. Minimum total amount of metallic waterproofing compound per 100 sq. ft. of surface shall be 30 lbs. for the 3 coats. Allow an interval of 24 hrs. between application of each coat to permit oxidation of the compound. 2. Pack grooved recesses and intersections of vertical and horizontal surfaces with waterproofing mortar composed of 1 part Portland cement and 2 parts fine aggregate with 15 lbs. of waterproofing compound added to each sack of cement. Mortar shall be compacted into the groove and finished flush with on adjacent surfaces. Construction joints shall receive a brush-on coat of metallic waterproofing mortar prior to placement of adjoining concrete. 3. Wall Finish: After complete oxidation, (of the 3 coats described above) the wall surfaces shall be given a slush coat of the metallic waterproofing, sand and cement with sufficient water added to make a thick grout. Slush coat shall consist of 1 part Portland cement, 2 parts sand, 10 lbs. metallic waterproofing per sack of cement. This slush coat shall be thoroughly brushed on and Smith Campus Center Metallic Oxide Waterproofing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07160-3 B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect. 1.7 GUARANTEE A. Submit 2 copies of guarantee for the metallic waterproofing work, agreeing to repair or replace waterproofing which leaks water, deteriorates excessively or otherwise A fails to perform as required within a five (5) year guarantee period, due to failure of materials or workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WATERPROOFING WX A. Manufacturer: Provide metallic cementitious waterproofing meeting materials specification described herein, manufactured by Euclid Chemical Co., Ironite Co., Sonneborn, or approved equal meeting standards specified herein. am B. Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1. 2. Fine Aggregate Sand: Washed natural sand conforming to ASTM C144, except graded from fine to coarse within the following limits: Sieve No Percentage Retained 8 5 max. 16 10 to 30 30 30 to 60 50 65 to 85 100 95 to 99 3. Metallic waterproofing compound: Clean, commercial pulverized cast iron, mixed with a chemical oxidizing agent such as sodium peroxide, potassium peroxide or ammonium chloride in proper proportion, the product of an approved manufacturer as listed above, who shall submit evidence that he has manufactured this type of material for not less than 5 years. a. The pulverized cast iron shall consist of a min. of 85% by weight of metallic iron on the magnetic portion. The chemical oxidizing agent content shall be a min. of 3% and a max. of 5% by weight of compound. Presence of dirt, paraffin, bitumen, or other foreign substances in excess " of 0.10% by weight of waterproofing compound will be cause for rejection. b. The iron oxide content shall not exceed 5% by weight of magnetic iron. Iron shall contain not more than 0.05% by weight of oil on the magnetic portion. C. Magnetic iron particles shall be carefully graded as follows: Sieve No Percent Passing 20 100 35 95 to 100 **� 40 90 to 100 60 65 to 100 100 45 to 70 200 10 to 20 Smith Campus Center Metallic Oxide Waterproofing „ 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07160-2 - SECTION 07160 METALLIC OXIDE WATERPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the metallic oxide waterproofing as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Metallic oxide waterproofing of concrete pits and trenches, including elevator pits. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Concrete - Section 03300. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installers: Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the work and who shall be thoroughly experienced in installation of the specified products and shall direct all work performed under this Section. B. Manufacturer's Certification: Secure a visit to the job site by a representative of the manufacturer of the waterproofing materials used, who shall inspect and shall certify: 1. That the surfaces to which waterproofing were applied were in condition suitable for that application. 2. That the materials installed comply in all respects with the requirements of this Section of these specifications. 3. That the materials were installed in complete accordance with the far manufacturer's current recommendations. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List: Before any waterproofing materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the Architect a complete list of all materials proposed to be furnished and installed under this portion of the work. B. Manufacturer's Certification: Upon completion of this portion of the work, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver to the Architect 2 copies of the certification described in Article 1.4, B. above, each copy signed by an officer of the firm manufacturing the waterproofing materials used. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect waterproofing materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. Smith Campus Center Metallic Oxide Waterproofing !' 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07160-1 I. Integration of Sheet Membrane onto Sheet Membrane that has been installed in excess of 30 days prior a. Lap sheets 12 in., apply a 1/8 in. thick by 12 in. wide application of fluid membrane between sheets, to provide a 12 in. wide seal at this location. b. Install Waterproofing Tape centered at edge of lap and roll firmly into place with an approved roller. .. C. Install additional Waterproofing Tape to cover white film that has been installed over 30 days prior. 2. Repair of pre-applied sheet membrane M, a. Scratch on white coating exposing underlying black surfing of Sheet Membrane: Install Waterproofing Tape at areas where the white coating of the membrane is damaged, including boot scuff marks and abrasions by .� re bar. b. Damage or Puncture of Sheet Membrane: Install Patch of short Membrane set in Liquid Membrane. Patch must extend 3 in. in every direction around extent of damaged area. Install Waterproofing Tape �. centered over the edge of the patch. If the damaged area does not have 5 in. of sound material around it, inject Liquid Membrane into puncture until Liquid Membrane backs out, and proceed with patch as space allows. , 3.5 CLEAN-UP A. Upon completion of the waterproofing system, the General Contractor shall remove all equipment, material and debris from the work and storage area, and leave those areas in an undamaged and acceptable condition. END OF SECTION .�a Smith Campus Center Sheet Membrane Waterproofing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07130-6 4. Sealing Edges: Bituthene Waterproofing Membrane shall be applied over the edge of the slab or over the top of the foundation or parapet wall. If the membranes are terminated on the vertical surface, a reglet or counter flashing may be used or the membrane may be terminated directly on the vertical surface by pressing very firmly to the wall. Press edges with a metal or hardwood tool such as a hammer or knife handle. Apply a troweled bead of Bituthene Mastic to all vertical and horizontal terminations. Bituthene Liquid Membrane can be used as an alternative method at the General Contractor's option. 5. Sealing Seams: All edges and end seams must be overlapped at least 2-1/2". Apply succeeding sheets with a minimum 2-1/2" overlap and stagger end laps. Roll or press the entire membrane firmly and completely as soon as possible. Patch misaligned or inadequately lapped seams with Bituthene Membrane. Slit any fish mouths, overlap the flaps, and repair with a patch of Bituthene and press or roll in place. The edges of the patch shall be sealed with a troweling of ON mastic. Laps within 12" of all corners shall be sealed with a troweling of mastic. 6. Corner Forming: Outside corners must be free of sharp edges. Inside corners shall receive a fillet formed with Liquid Membrane, latex modified cement "" mortar equal to Daraweld C made by Grace mixed with cement mortar or epoxy mortar. Do not use fiber or wood cants. One of two methods may be used for treating corners at the General Contractor's option: e0 a. Apply Bituthene Liquid Membrane 6" in each direction from the corner and form a fillet with a minimum 3/4" face. b. Install an 11" minimum strip of Bituthene Membrane centered on the an corner. Install Bituthene Membrane over the treated inside and outside corners. C. Floor Slabs 1. Install Clay Mat on well-leveled substrate compacted to a minimum of 85% Modified Proctor. Crushed stone substrate must no greater than 3/4" diameter. 2. Install Clay Mat under footings, elevator pits, and grade beams contiguous with floor slabs below elevation 184.0. 3. Overlap sheets 4" and secure with nails or staples at intervals to prevent movement during concrete placement, Stagger sheet end laps 24". Extend a No minimum of 12" beyond slab edge. Provide a minimum of 6" overlap between underslab and vertical waterproofing. 4. Cut Clay mat to fit around penetrations. Provide 2" x 2" cant of granular bentonite under Clay Mat and trowel sealing compound 3/4" thick around penetration on top of Clay mat. 5. Inspect finish installation and repair any damaged material prior to concrete placement. Ensure that Clay mat is not disturbed during concrete placement. 3.4 SEAM REINFORCEMENT A. Provide a 6 in. strip of modified bituminous sheet membrane (Bituthene 4000) centered behind all laps. B. At locations where a salvage edge is not present and at end laps, lap sheets 6 in., apply a 1/8 in. thick by 6 in. wide application of liquid membrane between sheets, to provide a 6 in. wide seal. C. Integration of old onto new pre-applied sheet membrane. Smith Campus Center Sheet Membrane Waterproofing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07130-5 D. Bitustik Tape: Double sided synthetic adhesive tape. E. Protection Board: 1/4" thick semi-rigid protection board, Bituthene Asphaltic Hardboard. F. Bituthene Liquid Membrane: Two-component 100% solids trowel grade asphalt modified urethane. G. Hydroduct 220 Drainage Board/Composite: Prefabricated dimpled polystyrene drainage core with a non-woven filter fabric on one side and a tough polymer film on the reverse side. 1. At horizontal applications use Hydroduct 660. 2.2 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING A. Provide bentonite waterproofing under concrete floor slabs below elevation 184.0, "CCW Clay Mat" as manufactured by Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing Inc. B. Provide "CCW Sealing Compound" at slab penetrations and at joint between bentonite and sheet membrane waterproofing. PART 3 EXECUTION " 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where membrane waterproofing is to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected *� to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACES TO RECEIVE WATERPROOFING A. Conform to the requirements of Bituthene Techletter No. BTL 82-02 published by W.R. Grace for sheet membrane waterproofing. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Conform to recommendations and published specifications of the manufacturer, including environmental requirements. B. Foundation Walls • 1. General: The membrane, when in place must withstand a minimum static ground water pressure of 150 feet. 2. Priming: Application of primer shall be limited to what can be covered with Bituthene Waterproofing Membrane in a given work day. Primed areas not covered by membrane during the work day will be reprimed. Apply primer by spray, roller or brush at a rate of 250 - 350 sq. ft. per gallon. Roller shall be natural material such as lamb's wool, having a nap of approximately one inch. Primer shall be applied to a clean, dry, frost-free and dust-free surface. Sufficient primer must be used on the day surface to condition it to a dust-free state suitable for the application of Bituthene Waterproofing Membranes. a. Bituthene Surface Conditioner should not be applied below 40 deg. F. on vertical surfaces. Allow primer to dry 30 minutes. 3. Membrane Installation: Apply Bituthene Waterproofing Membrane vertically in sections of 8' in length or less. On higher walls apply two or more sections with the upper overlapping the lower by a least 2-1/2". Press all membrane in place with heavy hand pressure or rollers during application. Smith Campus Center Sheet Membrane Waterproofing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07130-4 OR 2. The manufacturer's representative shall be required to make sure that the workmen for waterproofing systems on the site of the Project are fully instructed and trained in the handling and application of all the materials, and shall see that all the materials are correctly installed. 3. Upon completion of the Installation, submit to the Architect written 00 certification that the representative of the manufacturer of the waterproofing material has supervised the work of this Section and that all materials were correctly installed. 1.9 PROTECTION A. Against Loads: Protect work of this Section against concentrated loads and any other loads or equipment that would damage the materials or work. B. Against Traffic: Do not permit traffic on horizontally installed work of this Section, except for workmen doing the work, during the installation, and after the as installation until membrane systems are covered with protective boards or with the specified finishing materials. C. Against Damage: Protect vertically installed work of this section from damage by reinforcing and placement. 1. Take and maintain necessary preventative measures to protect work of this Section from damage until Project is accepted. 2. Rejection of Damaged Work a. Damaged materials or work will be rejected. b. Rejected materials or work must be immediately removed and replaced with new materials. 1.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Construction Traffic: so 1. Limit construction traffic over completed membrane. 2. General Contractor shall provide 1/2 in. plywood protection layer, where construction traffic is unavoidable. B. Inform Architect in writing on a daily basis of any of the following events. State specific location of each occurrence. 1. Buckling to the Waterproofing and other deformations as a result of ground water events. 2. Leakage through the finished waterproofing installation. 3. Damage by other trades. C. Provide Manufacturer Representative report (prior to backfiil) stating that the so waterproofing has been inspected and is acceptable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE A. Provide accessible vertical waterproofing "Bituthene 4000" sheet waterproofing membrane, 60 mils thick, and "Bituthene Liquid Membrane", 60 mils, thick, for flashing, as manufactured by W.R. Grace or equal made by Mirafi. B. Bituthene Surface Conditioner: Latex/water based primer specifically formulated to provide adhesion of Bituthene Waterproofing Membranes. C. Bituthene Elastomeric Mastic: Rubberized asphalt base mastic. Smith Campus Center Sheet Membrane Waterproofing "" 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07130-3 .m no 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS A. No application of liquid applied urethane flashing shall commence or proceed during inclement weather, or the threat of imminent precipitation. B. All surfaces to receive the system shall be thoroughly dry and free of dew or frost. C. Application temperatures are not limited except that materials shall be stored until time of mixing at temperatures above 60 deg. F. to maintain a consistency suitable for mixing. Do no work below 40 deg. F. D. Prior to and during application, all dirt and dust shall be removed from surfaces either by vacuuming, sweeping, blowing with compressed air, or similar methods. E. Surfaces not designated to receive the system shall be properly masked or otherwise +* protected against accidental spillage or application of the material to those areas. 1.7 WARRANTY A. The General Contractor shall jointly warrant with the manufacturer the .. waterproofing system executed under this Section to be watertight and free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of ten (10) years from date of acceptance of this Contract, and that he, at his own expense, repair and/or replace all other work which may be damaged as a result of such defective work, and which becomes defective during the warranty period. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preinstallation Conference: Approximately 2 weeks prior to scheduled commencement of waterproofing installation, meet at Project site with Waterproofing Installer; preparer of substrate to receive waterproofing; installers of other work in and around waterproofing that must precede, follow, or penetrate waterproofing (including Mechanical and Electrical Installers as applicable); Architect; Owner; and waterproofing manufacturer's representative to review + materials, procedures, schedules, and other requirements and conditions related to installing waterproofing. B. Qualifications of Subcontractors 1. Subcontractors: All work of this Section shall be performed by a subcontractor who is approved by the manufacturer of the waterproofing material. 2. Qualifications of Subcontractors: Subcontractors shall submit evidence of being wm bona fide waterproofing subcontractors, and that they are approved by the manufacturer of the waterproofing material for the installation of the manufacturer's material in accordance with the requirements of this Section. a. Subcontractor shall submit a letter from manufacturer of waterproofing ' material stating that subcontractor is approved by the manufacturer for the application of the waterproofing systems specified and accepted for use on the Project. b. Letter shall certify that the subcontractor has previously and satisfactorily applied the waterproofing systems specified herein, under manufacture's supervision. C. Letter shall be on manufacturer's letterhead and shall be signed by an officer of the company, not by a local sales representative. C. Manufacturers Representative/Contractors Certification 1. Representative of the waterproofing material manufacturer shall be required to provide field instructions and supervision for the installation of the waterproofing systems at the start of the work of this Section. 4M Smith Campus Center Sheet Membrane Waterproofing w 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07130-2 SECTION 07130 SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES on A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the sheet membrane waterproofing as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Sheet membrane waterproofing, for foundation vertical surfaces. 2. Bentonite waterproofing under slabs below elevation 184.0. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Earthwork - Section 02300. B. Underslab drainage system - Section 02400. C. Concrete - Section 03300. D. Metallic oxide waterproofing - Section 07160. on 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Typical installation details, showing details at flashings, at terminations, at joints, at intersection of horizontal and vertical surfaces, and at penetrations in membrane system. B. Samples- Submit 1. Membrane, 6" x 6" samples. 2. Bentonite clay mat, 6" x 6" samples. 3. 6" x 6" sample of flashing. 4. 6" x 6" sample of protection board. 5. 6" x 6" sample of drainage board. C. Manufacturer's literature: Submit manufacturer's technical, safety data sheets, and installation literature for all materials of this Section. Submit Independent Test data indicating that membrane meets properties specified herein. D. General Contractor's Certification: Submit per Article 1.7. 1.5 STORAGE OF MATERIALS A. All materials shall be stored in their original tightly sealed containers or unopened packages; shall be clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name, brand name and number, and batch number of the material with expiration date where appropriate. Pro B. Materials shall be stored in a neat and safe manner so as not to exceed the allowable live load of the storage area. C. Material shall be stored out of the weather in a clean, dry area. D. Liquid materials, such as adhesives, thinners and primers, shall be stored in areas away from sparks, open flames and excessive heat. Smith Campus Center Sheet Membrane Waterproofing '!"" 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 07130-1 a 3 i G 1 E 1 E 1 6 t E E 1 E E e c 3.10 CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION A. Clean Up: At regular intervals during the course of the work, all debris and excess material shall be cleaned up and removed from the site. Upon completion of installation, clean all spaces of debris caused by woodwork installation. B. Protection: Protect all woodwork from marring, defacement of other damage until final completion and acceptance of the project by the Owner. Repair or replace all defective units prior to final inspection as directed by the Architect. Any units that cannot be satisfactorily repaired in the opinion of the Architect shall be replaced with new units of same original design, at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION MM 4M so Smith Campus Center Architectural Woodwork 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 06400-13 10. Gluing shall, where practicable, be by the hot plate press method and glued surfaces shall be in close contact throughout. Glue stains on finished work will not be permitted. 11. Cover surface fastenings, where permitted, with matching wood plugs unless otherwise noted, wood putty is not acceptable. Sand exposed edges of plywood. Leave edge free from machine or tool marks; edges with gaps, holes or showing laminate glue are not acceptable. Lock miter external corners; tongue and groove internal corners to allow for contraction and expansion. 12. Machine sand with grain, finish with hand sanding, leave exposed surfaces free from machine or tool marks that will show through the finish. 13. Work which adjoins drywall, concrete, or other finish shall be fitted and scribed in a careful manner and ample allowance shall be given for cutting and scribing. 14. Erect work true to lines, levels and dimensions, square, aligned and plumb, securely and rigidly fastened in place. B. Cabinet Work: Provide all items of cabinet work indicated on drawings and as herein specified. 1. Tops, sides,backs,bottoms, dividers, shelves, fronts, doors and drawer fronts shall be of veneer plywood and/or plastic laminate as indicated on drawings. 2. Cabinet doors and drawers shall be flush mounted. 3. Adjustable shelves in cabinets shall have grommets spaced 2" o.c. 4. Fixed shelves shall be dadoed into side supports and glued. 5. Shelves shall be 3/4" thick for spans up to 30"; for spans in excess of 30" to 48" shelves shall be 1" thick. 6. All cabinets shall have closed top, sides, bottom, and back with veneers to match face work. Cabinets to fit accurately into indicated locations; scribe moldings permitted only where indicated. 7. Countertops, counters, counter fronts, shelves, etc., indicated on drawings to have plastic laminate, shall have plastic laminate shop applied to 3/4" thick core, with plastic laminate backing sheet on underside or back of countertops, counters and shelves. Plastic laminate shall be pressure laminated to core with laminate at external corners. Provide concealed wood framing to support plastic laminate counters, securely fastened to wall and to underside of counters. 3.9 PAINTING AND FINISHING .� A. General: All painting and finishing work of this Section shall be shop applied, unless otherwise noted, as specified below. All painting and finishing shall match approved samples. Field finish painting, where specified below, shall be by painting Subcontractor, as specified for in Painting Section. B. Back-Painting: All work of this Section in contact with concrete or masonry or other moisture areas and all concealed surfaces of cabinet and millwork, shall be back-painted with one(1)coat of oil based paint prior to installation, shop applied where practicable. C. Field Touch-Up: Field touch-up shall be the responsibility of the installing Subcontractor, and shall include the filling and touch-up of exposed job made nail or screw holes, refinishing of raw surfaces resulting from job fitting, repair of job inflicted scratches and mars, and final cleaning up of the finished surfaces. Smith Campus Center Architectural Woodwork 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 06400-12 C. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. 3.6 HARDWOOD VENEERED PANELS A. Provide a system of concealed panel hanger clips, shims and corresponding wall clips to support the panel system. Face nailing shall not be permitted. B. Hang the panels in the designated locations. Panels shall be straight, level, flat and flush with adjoining panels. C. Where reveals are indicated, keep panels spaced so that reveals are parallel and of widths shown. D. Sand exposed edges. Leave edges free from machine or tool marks; edges with gaps, In holes or showing laminate glue are not acceptable. 3.7 CLOSET AND STORAGE SHELVING P"" A. Provide closet and storage shelving at the locations shown. Provide hang rods where shown. Set adjustable center hangers. on 3.8 CABINET WORK AND MILLWORK A. General 1. Materials and workmanship shall conform to the Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute specified herein and to the drawings. 2. Cabinet work and millwork shall be performed by experienced cabinet work and millwork company,having craftsmen skilled in their trade. 3. Fabricate all cabinet work and millwork completely in the shop, in complete and/or as large units as practical, leaving only fitting, assembly, installation and a minimum of fabrication and finishing to be done at the building. Assembled work " shall be rigidly secured and permanently fastened together with concealed fasteners. 4. Afford Architect every facility for inspection of work at shop or mill at such times ! " as the Architect may select. 5. As far as practicable, use concealed fastenings for joining and assembling the work. Where this is impossible, the means of securing shall be placed in 40 inconspicuous places and methods of joining and assembling submitted for Architect's approval prior to fabrication. 6. Mill all finish wood accurately to detail, with clean cut moldings, profiles and tw lines, machined, sanded smooth, housed,jointed, blocked, put together in the best manner, with provision for swelling and shrinkage, and to assure the work remaining in place without warping, splitting or opening of joints. 00 7. Cut trim to dimensions and profiles shown, from solid stock. 8. Make all trim and the like in single lengths wherever possible; joints mitered, glued and splined. Continuous members shall have tight flush joints, doweled or splined and glued. 9. Make all joints hairline tight, fitted accurately and joined with hardwood splines or dowels, glued together, or by other method approved by Architect. Use screws, not nails, for fastenings. Smith Campus Center Architectural Woodwork 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 06400-11 3.2 GROUNDS,BLOCKING,NAILERS AND FURRING A. Provide all wood grounds, blocking, nailers, furring, and the like for work of this Section, where shown and where required, dressed to size indicated or required to suit the condition. Install grounds, blocking, nailers, furring, etc., rigidly, in proper alignment, trued with a long straight edge. 3.3 ROUGH HARDWARE A. Provide all rough hardware, such as nails, screws, bolts, anchors, hangers, clips and .s similar items. Hardware shall be of the proper size and kind to adequately secure the work together and in place, in a rigid and substantial manner. Use galvanized hardware at locations where subject to moisture or where water will be present. B. Secure wood to concrete and to solid masonry with countersunk bolts in expansion sleeves or other approved manner, to steel with countersunk bolts, to hollow masonry and to drywall with heavy duty countersunk toggle bolts. Space fastenings not more than sixteen (16) inches apart. Hardened cut nails, power-driven fastenings, or other suitable devices may be used where approved by the Architect. C. Connections and fastenings shall be made in such manner as will compensate for swelling and shrinkage and shall permit the work to remain permanently in place without any splitting or opening of joints. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF CABINET FINISH HARDWARE A. All items of finish hardware furnished under this Section shall be carefully fitted and secured in place as part of the work of this Section. Locations and positioning of hardware shall be subject to the Architect's approval. Care shall be taken not to mar or damage hardware, or other work. Install doors plumb and true. Hardware shall be fitted . to assure operation without forcing. B. After preliminary fitting of hardware, the Contractor shall remove trim for painting and finishing work; after which he shall reinstall the hardware in a permanent manner. C. Upon completion of the work, before final acceptance of the building by the Owner, the Contractor shall, in the presence of the Architect, show that all hardware is in satisfactory working order; fit all keys in their respective locks and, upon acceptance of the work, shall tag and deliver all keys to the Owner's Representative. D. When directed by the Owner, at any time during the first year after the completion of the Contract, the Contractor shall return to the building and adjust and refit the work and hardware, and leave such items in satisfactory working order. .. 3.5 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required �. using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in 8'-0" for plumb and level (including countertops), and with 1/16" maximum offset in flush adjoining surfaces, 1/8"maximum offset in revealed adjoining surfaces. , B. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. Smith Campus Center Architectural Woodwork 100% Construction Documents: 01.1 1.12 06400-10 on O J. Prepare all countersunk wood screw attachments for wood plugs. Wood plugs shall match surrounding species and grain direction unless otherwise shown or specified, putty filling is not acceptable. 2.14 FABRICATION-SPECIFIC ITEMS A. Casework 1. Provide casework in accordance with AWI Section 400,Premium Grade. 2. Include all preparations for mechanical, electrical, telephone and plumbing work required. 3. Provide cabinet hardware for casework as shown. 4. Provide dust panels in body webs and between drawer units. 0, 5. Provide wood veneers for exposed surfaces as specified herein before. 6. Hollow core doors will not be permitted. 7. Provide matching veneers for edge treatments of case body members where wn transparent finishes are indicated or specified. 8. Provide drawers with slides as specified. Drawers shall not rest on web body frames. 9. Provide wood veneers for transparent finish, of matching and continuing grain, for drawer and door edges. B. Paneling 1. General Paneling Requirements a. Panel type shall be AWI, Premium Grade construction. b. Panel joints shall be flush type unless otherwise shown. C. Provide concealed wood blocking and framing, anchors, clips, splines, supporting and attaching devices. d. Provide cut-outs to receive attachments, mechanical and electrical work as w required. C. Closet and Storage Shelving 1. Provide closet and storage shelving in accordance with AWI Section 600, Premium Grade,unless otherwise shown or specified. 2. Exposed edges: Sand and seal with transparent finish. D. Standing and Running Trim 1. Provide standing and running trim of the sizes, profiles, species and finish as specified or shown and complying with AWI Section 300,Premium Grade. 4W PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where architectural woodwork is to be installed and fir► correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. Smith Campus Center Architectural Woodwork 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 06400-9 go 2.12 OPERABLE ACOUSTIC PANELS A. Outer Frame, stiles and rails: solid maple, 2" thick. Rabbet stiles and rails to receive flush back panels and upholstered panel. Shape stiles to radius required for proper operation. B. Inner frame, stiles and rails: solid maple, 1 %" thick. Rabbet to receive fabric covering. Provide cross bracing to prevent twisting under tension of fabric covering. Provide clearance between inner and outer frames for fabric. Secure inner frame with countersunk flathead screws Y-0"-/+on center to be removable. ** C. Fabric covering: provide fabric covering as specified by architect. Stretch fabric taut, with no wrinkles or folds, and staple to edge of inner frame. Do no overstretch, or warp or twist wood frame.Fabric to be railroaded. D. Acoustic insulation: fill core of panel with sound attenuating insulation per Section 09840. *■ E. Provide hardware per section 08700 2.13 FABRICATION-GENERAL .� A. Provide lumber framing for architectural woodwork, complete with all bracing and fastening devices as required for a rigid installation, and as required to sustain the imposed loads. B. Do all fabrication from field measurement with provision for scribing as required to meet built-in conditions. C. Coordinate the work of this Section with the work of other trades. D. Fabricate units in largest practicable sections. Assemble in the shop for trial fit, disassemble for shipment and reassemble with concealed fasteners. E. Maintain relative humidity and temperature during fabrication, storage and finishing operations matching that of the areas of installation. F. Details indicate the required type and quality of construction. Modifications to conform .� to manufacturer's standards will be considered providing they comply with the Contract Documents, maintain the profiles shown and subject to acceptance by the Architect. G. Reinforcing shown is minimum. Provide additional reinforcing as required to ensure a rigid assembly. Exposed surfaces shall be free from dents, tool marks, warpage, buckle, glue and open joints, or other defects affecting serviceability or appearance. Accurately fit all joints, corners and miters. Conceal all fasteners. Make threaded connections up tight so that threads are entirely concealed. H. Factory finish all items where possible. Defer final touch-up, cleaning and polishing until after delivery and installation. I. Comply with AWI Section 1500, Premium Grade for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, back priming and similar preparations for the finishing of architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. Smith Campus Center Architectural Woodwork ,.. 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 06400-8 ON applied at the factory. All finishes shall be free from runs, sags and other visual defects. All wood shall be thoroughly hand smoothed and hand sanded to remove all traces of me machine and tool marks. All steel or other metal components shall be deburred, thoroughly cleaned and degreased prior to finishing. Requirements for surface preparation shall be in accordance with AWI Standards specified. Surfaces shall be finished as follows: C. All wood veneer surfaces shall be given transparent finish as specified herein. 1. Grain direction shall be as selected by the Architect. Note that interior surface of cabinets, closets are to have a transparent finish. D. Edges: All visible edges of case and body members fabricated from veneer plywood shall be sanded and sealed with transparent finish. 2.9 CABINET HARDWARE A. Architectural Woodwork Hardware: See Section 08700. 2.10 WOOD FOR BASES A. Quality Standard: For the following types of interior architectural woodwork, comply with indicated standards as applicable. 1. Standard and Running Trim: AWI Section so B. Wood work for Paint Finish: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following: 1. Grade: Premium 2. Species of Solid Wood: Solid,paint grade, sound clear Poplar or Birch 2.11 HARDWOOD VENEERED PLYWOOD PANELS ON A. Type: Interior grade, hot press laminated with waterproof adhesive, pre-finished, with face veneers and core construction as specified, conforming to Dept. of Commerce Standard CS-35-61. No B. Core Construction: Shall be fire retardant treated, meeting requirements of Section 06200; type at fabricator's option. IM C. Thickness: 3/4"thick. D. Face veneers: Panels shall be as described herein in Article 2.2, para D. Veneer shall be minimum 1/28"thick. Grain direction shall be as selected by the Architect. E. Finish: Veneers shall be finely sanded and clear factory pre-finished using AWI System noted herein. F. Panel Sizes: See drawings for panel sizes required. G. Exposed edges of panels : solid wood minimum 1/16"thick. H. Where wood doors are adjacent to veneered wood paneling, veneer on door shall be sequenced to fit veneer pattern; doors to meet the requirements specified below. Smith Campus Center Architectural Woodwork 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 06400-7 5. Exposed Edges: Plastic laminate matching exposed panel surfaces. Ease exposed edge of overlap sheet. 6. Note that interior surface of cabinets are to have a transparent finish. B. Plastic Laminate 1. Plastic Laminate for Horizontal Surfaces: 0.050" thick, general purpose type (high pressure). 2. Plastic Laminate for External Vertical Surfaces: 0.028" thick, general purpose type(high pressure). 3. Plastic Laminate for Post Forming: 0.042"thick, post forming(high pressure). 4. Plastic Laminate Colors: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard satin finish products. Acceptable manufacturer: Nevamar. C. Shop Assembly: All work shall be shop assembled. Work that is too large for entrance into the use area shall be fabricated in attachable sections with provisions for reconnection in the using space. D. Material: See drawings for general materials thicknesses. Minimum thickness of solid lumber for web frames, trim, bases, etc., shall be 3/4". Minimum thickness of plywood shall be 3/4"and sealed with transparent finish. E. Sizes: See drawings for woodwork sizes required. The manufacturer shall check field dimensions and verify all openings and actual field conditions prior to fabrication of .� work. F. Note that interior surface of cabinet and shelves to be sealed with transparent finish. Exposed interior edges to have solid wood edges. G. Manufacturer is responsible for rigidity and structural stability. 2.7 PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Grade: Premium grade, as per AWI Standard, Section 400. B. Construction 1. Provide back-splash and end-splash, where detailed; top-mounted square butt .A joint, fully covered with matching plastic laminate,eased edges. 2. Exposed Counter Edges: Plastic laminate matching surface, except as otherwise indicated. Ease exposed edges of overlap sheet. 3. Cut openings for equipment to be installed. Comply with equipment manufacturer's requirements, but provide internal corners of 1/8" minimum radius. Smooth saw cut and ease edges. .�. 2.8 BUILT-IN CABINETS AND WOODWORK A. Construction: Details of cabinet and wood work construction shall conform to design as detailed on the drawings and shall be constructed in accordance with AWI Section 400, Premium Grade. B. Finishing: All work shall be factory pre-finished. No field finishing will be permitted, except minor retouching that is necessary after installation to leave work in perfect condition. Field touch-up shall be accomplished using the same finishes as originally Smith Campus Center Architectural Woodwork Am 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 06400-6 a. AWI Factory Finish System No.TR-2,catalyzed lacquer. b. AW1 Premium Grade. Rw C. Stain: As selected by Architect. d. Degree of Sheen: As selected by Architect(20-40 gloss). e. Filled or Unfilled Finish. s 2.3 PLASTIC LAMINATE A. Face Sheets: NEMA Publication LD3, Grade GP50, Type I, 0.05" thick, as manufactured by Nevamar. Color,pattern and finish as selected by the Architect. B. Backing Sheets: Non-decorative, high pressure plastic laminate, NEMA LD3, Grade BK20, 0.02"thick. C. Edges: Finish with plastic laminate to match face and applied before face sheets are applied, unless otherwise shown or specified. 2.4 METAL A. Steel 1. Structural Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36. 2. Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets: Commercial quality, ASTM A569, may be used for concealed parts only. Galvanize sheets for planters. 3. Primer for Unexposed Metal: Zinc chromate primer. +" 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS A. Fasteners 40 1. Wood Screws: FS FF-S-111, type, size, material and finish as required for the condition of use. 2. Nails: FS FF-N-105, type, size,material and finish as required for the condition of 00 use. 3. Anchors: Type, size,material and finish as required for the condition of use. B. Adhesives go 1. For Laminating Plastic Laminate Surfaces: Melamine, phenol-resin, or resorcinol- resin complying with FS MMM-A-181; type, grade and best suited for the purpose. 2. For All Other Uses: Moisture resistant complying with FS MMM-A125, Type H, or MMM-A-188,Type 111 or III. 2.6 CABINETS WITH PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISH A. General 1. Fabricate all cabinetry and millwork to the "Premium Grade" standards of the AWI, Section 400. 2. Face construction of cabinets shall be"Flush Overlay". 3. Provide 3/4" thick doors, drawer fronts and fixed panels (including thickness of 1" plastic)except where required to be thicker by Standards; and provide flush units. 4. Provide dust panels of 1/4" thick plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, except where located directly below counter tops. Smith Campus Center Architectural Woodwork 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 06400-5 am No D. Machine and sand woodwork to comply with requirements of Standards for specified grade. E. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles and details shown. Route or groove back to of flat trim members, kerf backs of other wide flat members except plywood. F. Miter joints by joining, splining and gluing to comply with requirements for the of specified grade. G. Inspect each piece of lumber and plywood or each unit of woodwork after drying; do not use twisted, warped,bowed of otherwise damaged or defective wood. 2.2 GENERAL—MATERIALS A. Provide fire-retardant materials where required by applicable codes or regulations. Certify that fire-retardant materials will not bleed through painted or natural finished surfaces. •.1 B. Grounds, Blocking, Nailers, Furring: Southern Pine, Douglas Fir or Sitka Spruce,grade to suit particular purpose and to be straight, square edged, straight grained, surfaced four sides (S4S), and which will retain nails and screws without splitting. Provide fire retardant treatment. C. Lumber: AWI Section 100 with the following requirements: 1. Hardwood for transparent Finish: Plain sawn Hard Natural Maple. 2. Hardwood for Opaque Finish: Any hardwood which, when finished, will not show any grain, imperfection or other surface defects when used with the opaque finish specified. D. Plywood: AWI section 200; fin ply with maple veneer and veneer core for built in A. benches; medium density fiberboard core (MDF) for all cabinet doors, wall panels, and other items more susceptible to warping than to structural failure. 1. Hardwood veneer: AWI grade AA, AWI section 200: Eastern Maple, plain sliced, no minimum 1/28" thick. Veneers shall be slip matched, continuous matched and balance matched. 2. Medium density fiberboard core: manufactured to ANSI standard A208.2, AWI r. section 200, fire retardant equal to duraflake for cabinets and wall panels. 3. Veneer core: AWI section 200, manufactured to have 12 ply layers per 3/4" thickness. 4. Edges: veneer core edges to be exposed and sanded, sealed with transparent finsh, unless otherwise shown or specified; Medium density fiberboard core or lumber core edges to have solid maple edges, minimum 1/16"thick. E. Closets 1. For closet shelving, provide A-A INT APA plywood, 3/4" thick with %4" hardwood edges. 2. Provide clothes rod where indicated in plans; 1" OD chrome plated steel clothes rod, .125" wall thickness, running full width of closet. Support at ends with end brackets and at center from shelf above rod with chrome plated rod support. F. Finishing(Wood) 1. Transparent Finish for Paneling and Casework .w Smith Campus Center Architectural Woodwork ,, 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 06400-4 go any other causes which may adversely affect appearance of use, or which may cause deterioration of finish, warping, distortion, twisting, opening of joints and seams, "a delamination, loosening,etc.,of work of this Section. B. Keep all finish carpentry, millwork, and cabinet work under cover both in transit and at the premises. Do not deliver any finish carpentry, millwork or cabinet work before it is go required for installation. Protect such work to avoid damage in transit, during erection and after erection until acceptance of the building; use all such methods to provide the proper protection. Remove such protection when directed by the Architect. 00 C. Deliver finish carpentry, millwork, and cabinet work in a dry stable condition; protect same against injury and dampness. Do not store or install finish carpentry, millwork or 40 cabinet work until after the concrete,masonry and plaster work are thoroughly dry. D. Damaged or defective items or work of this Section are subject to rejection and replacement with new by Contractor,at no cost to Owner. 1.9 JOB CONDITIONS � A. Humidity and Temperature Controls: Advise Contractor of requirements for maintaining heating, cooling and ventilation in installation areas as required to reach relative humidity necessary to maintain optimum moisture content specified for ON woodwork. B. Determine equilibrium moisture content and maintain required temperature and relative humidity as required for a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) percent of the specified optimum moisture content until woodwork receives specified finishes. Refer to "Guide to Wood Species Selection", AWI, for method of determining equilibrium moisture content values. C. Examination of Substrate and Conditions: The installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under which the work of this Section is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with work under this Section until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. PART 2 PRODUCTS on 2.1 BASIC REQUIREMENTS A. Wood Moisture Content: Provide kiln-dried (KD) lumber with an average moisture content range of 9 to 12 percent for exterior work and 6 to 11 percent for interior work. Maintain temperature and relative humidity during fabrication, storage and finishing operations so that moisture content values for woodwork at time of installation do not exceed 7 percent. Air B. Measurements: Before proceeding with woodwork required to be fitted to other construction, obtain field measurements and verify all dimensions of shop drawing details as required for accurate fit. C. Compatibility of Grain and Color: Architect reserves the right to select materials for best compatibility between visually related members and veneers. Smith Campus Center Architectural Woodwork 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 06400-3 B. In the event of a dispute as to the quality grade (or grades), or performance defects of the material prior to the end of the warranty period, all parties involved will (1) call upon the Architectural Woodwork Institute for an inspection under AWI's established inspection procedures, and (2) agree to abide by the decision of AWI. The cost of said inspection shall be borne by the Contractor. C. Employ only tradesmen experienced in the fabrication and installation of architectural woodwork. 1.5 SUBMITTALS No. A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings of all woodwork specified and indicated on the drawings. ,W Shop drawings shall indicate room plans and elevations at 3/4" equals F-0" scale and typical construction details at 3" equals 1'-0" scale. Shop drawings shall indicate all materials,thicknesses and finishes. 2. Shop drawings shall show all finish hardware,anchors, fastenings and accessories. no 3. Shop drawings shall show all jointing,joint treatment and butt jointing in veneers and plastic laminate. 4. Shop drawings for wood paneling must show complete elevations of rooms to receive paneling as well as panel matching required by these specifications. B. Samples: Submit samples of each of the following items: .� 1. Plastic laminate on plywood, twelve (12) inches square, with a 3" x 12" return demonstrating a section of outside corner. 2. Transparent finish for each species of wood veneered plywood, twelve (12) inches square, for each finish specified or shown; samples shall have at least two fully finished edges. 3. Each finish type of wood panel, 24"wide x 36"high. so 4. Cabinet hardware. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS as A. The work of this Section shall be provided by a firm having a minimum of five (5) years experience on projects of similar size and quality to that specified and shown. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work of this Section with other appropriate Sections of the specifications to insure proper scheduling for fabrication and installation of the work specified herein B. Coordinate with partition and finish trades to insure that proper provisions are made for the installation of the work specified herein. C. Verify all dimensions in the field prior to fabrication of all Architectural Woodwork to assure proper fit. 1.8 PRODUCT HANDLING A. All materials and work of this Section shall be protected from damage, from time of shipment from shop to final acceptance of work. Cover, ventilate, and protect work of this Section from damage caused by weather, moisture, heat, staining, dirt, abrasions, Smith Campus Center Architectural Woodwork 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 06400-2 SECTION 06400 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the architectural woodwork as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but not limited to,the following: 1. Wood paneling. 2. Wood casework and counters. 3. Wood casework and counters with plastic laminate finish. 4. Hardware for casework. 5. Wood shelving. 6. Operable acoustic panels. 7. Built in wood benches. 8. Wood grounds, blocking, nailers, furring, framing and rough lumber as required for work of this Section. 9. All rough hardware and fastenings for work of this Section. 10. Drilling concrete and masonry, drilling and/or tapping metal work, as required, for the installation of work of this Section. 11. Back painting as specified herein. 12. Shop finish of work of this Section, except items indicated herein to be shop primed only. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Carpentry- Section 06200. B. Painting-Section 09900. C. Wood Doors-Section 08200. im D. Finish hardware- Section 08700. E. Acoustic wall treatment- Section 09840 M 1.4 QUALITY STANDARDS A. The quality standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute, latest edition, shall apply to all workmanship for architectural woodwork and by reference are made a part of this specification. All work shall conform to "Premium" grade requirements of the AWI Quality Standards, unless otherwise modified herein. Smith Campus Center Architectural Woodwork 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 06400-1 r. SECTION 06200 CARPENTRY PART 4 APPENDICES TO SPECIFICATION 4.01 MOCK UP DRAWING q APPROX.AREA A. Fast Elevation 1/8"= 1,-0,, wM --MIT B. Roof plan APPROK AREA END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Carpentry 100%Construction Documents: 0 1.11.12 06200-8 proper size and kind to adequately secure the work together and in place, in a rigid and substantial manner. C. Secure rough carpentry to masonry with countersunk bolts in expansion sleeves or other acceptable manner, with fastenings not more than sixteen (16) inches apart. aM Secure woodwork to hollow masonry with toggle bolts spaced not more than sixteen (16) inches apart. D. Countersink bolts in nailers and other rough woodwork and include washers and nuts. Cut bolts off flush with surfaces and peen as may be required to receive finished work. E. Inserts to secure wood nailers to concrete shall be malleable iron threaded inserts with 3/8" diameter bolts of length to allow for countersinking. Locate at end of each nailer and at intervals not exceeding thirty(30) inches o.c. F. Furnish to the mason for building into the work, or attaching the work which is to be built in, anchors, bolts, wall plates bolted to masonry, corrugated wall plugs, nailing blocks, etc., which are required for the proper fastening and installation for the work or other items as called for in this Section. G. Detailed instructions with sketches of necessary requirements, shall be given to the masonry trade showing the location and other details of such nailing devices. lop 3.10 BACK PAINTING A. Prime all wood surfaces to receive paint finishes with one coat of primer prior to installation; let primer dry thoroughly before installation. B. Prime all concealed surfaces, surfaces in contact with masonry,or other moisture areas. 3.11 CLEANING UP A. General: Keep the premises in a neat, safe and orderly condition at all times during execution of this portion of the work, free from accumulation of sawdust, cut-ends and debris. B. Sweeping 1. At the end of each working day, or more often if necessary, thoroughly sweep all surfaces where refuse from this portion of the work has settled. 2. Remove the refuse to the area of the job site set aside for its storage. 3. Upon completion of this portion of the work,thoroughly broom clean all surfaces. 4" Smith Campus Center Carpentry 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 06200-7 r. 1. Furnish and install all wood grounds, furring, blocking, curbs, bucks, nailers, etc., that may be necessary and required in connection with the carpentry and with the work described for any other trades and including required carpentry for electrical fixtures. All blocking and nailers shall be continuous wherever required, whether or not so indicated. 2. Blocking shall be as required for the proper installation of the finished work and for items in mechanical sections as required. Blocking, edgings, stops, nailing strips , etc., shall be continuous, unless distinctly noted otherwise. Provide blocking as required to install all equipment. Provide blocking and nailers where shown or required to fasten interior sheet metal work. 3. Fastening for wood grounds, furring and blocking shall be of metal and of type ., and spacing as best suited to conditions. Hardened steel nails, expansion screws, toggle bolts, self-clinching nails, metal plugs, inserts or similar fastenings shall be used, of suitable type and size to draw the members into place and securely hold .�. same. C. Rough Lumber for Roofing and Sheet Metal 1. Furnish and install all wood nailing strips and wood blocking required in ., connection with respective types of roofing, fans, flashings, and sheet metal work, using preservative treated wood as herein before specified. 2. Wood blocking shall be of sizes and shapes as indicated on the drawings and/or designed for the reception of curb flashings for roof ventilators and similar items. 3. All nailing strips and blocking shall be carried out in accordance with the printed installation instructions, and/or recommendations of the accepted manufacturer of the roofing materials, and in coordination and cooperation with the sheet metal work trades. 4. All blocking and nailing strips shall be firmly secured in place using counter bored bolt and nut fastenings, or secured by any other proposed flush surfaced ` fastenings. 5. Wood nailing strips or blocking required to be embedded in concrete work shall be furnished in time due for placing, prior to start of concrete operations. Locations and spacings of nailing strips or blocking shall be performed in coordination with the concrete trades, as required for respective installations. 3.8 TELEPHONE AND ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT MOUNTING BOARDS A. Furnish and install 3/4" thick plywood panels to the walls of the telephone and electric equipment rooms in accordance with the requirements of the local utility company. B. Secure to wall using proper devices for substrates encountered, spaced twelve (12) inches o.c., maximum around the edges, 1-1/2" from corners, and in three (3) rows of three (3) each in the field. Recess fastening devices flush with the plywood surface. Adjacent panels shall be butted with 1/16" space between without lapping. 3.9 ROUGH HARDWARE A. Securely fasten rough carpentry together. Nail, spike, lag screw or bolt as required by conditions encountered in the field and the Contract Documents. B. Provide rough or framing hardware, such as nails, screws, bolts, anchors, hangers, clips, inserts, miscellaneous fastenings, and similar items of the best quality and of the Smith Campus Center Carpentry 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 06200-6 B. Inner layer: secure 3/4"plywood with(minimum) 1 %" #8 screws. C. Outer layer: secure '/2"plywood with(minimum) 1 '/4" #6 screws. Secure to inner layer of sheathing with metal `Z' strip furring at 24"o.c. 3.3 EXTERIOR SIDING A. General 1. Plug, sand and seal edges of plywood prior to installation. 2. Back prime plywood prior to installation. 3. Install siding with face grain vertical, `A' side exposed. Secure to sheathing with (minimum) 1 ''/z" #8 stainless steel flat head screws at 6" o.c. Allow '/4" clearance 00 between panels. Secure at perimeter prior to batten installation; secure at intermediate locations when battens are installed. 3.4 EXTERIOR BATTENS AND WOOD TRIM A. General 1. Face nail battens and trim to plywood siding with stainless steel nails at 6"o.c. Set nails and putty over; do not overdrive. 2. Use longest practical trim lengths to minimize joints. B. Wood Battens 1. Face nail vertical and horizontal battens to siding. Join vertical battens with scarf joints staggered vertically. C. Wood Trim 1. Face nail wood fascia, corner and soffit trim to siding. Use shiplap joints where trim exceeds the width of one board. No 3.5 EXTERIOR WOOD DECKING A. Decking supports: 4 x 4 pressure treated beams at 3'-0"o.c. Level with raised pedestals at 4'-0"o.c.to permit proper drainage of roof membrane. B. Assemble deck in panels removable for cleaning. Decking to be screwed and plugged. C. Deck to receive wood water repellant `Wood Treat MB'. ' 3.6 . EXTERIOR WOOD TRELLIS AND SUNSHADE A. Bolt slats to steel supports with non-corrosive, non-staining bolts. Countersink bolt heads at slats. Trellis and sunshade slats to be screwed and plugged. Finish per wood siding; see Finish Painting Section 09900. 3.7 BLOCKING AND MISCELLANEOUS WOOD A. General 1. Erect rough carpentry true to line, levels and dimensions required; squared, aligned,plumbed, and securely fastened in place. 2. Shim where required to true up furring,blocking and the like. Use wood or metal shims only. 3. Do all cutting, fitting, drilling and tapping of other work as required to secure work in place and to perform the work included herein. Do all the cutting and fitting of carpentry work, for the work of other trades as required. B. Blocking and Miscellaneous Wood Smith Campus Center Carpentry 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 06200-5 M an Osmose or "Dricon" made by Koppers. Provide UL approve identification on treated materials. 3. For exterior blocking, roofing and sheet metal, pressure treat wood with water borne, "CCA-Oxide" preservative complying with AWPB LP-2 (23 lbs./cubic foot of chemical in wood.) .� a. After treatment, kiln dry to a maximum moisture content of fifteen (15) percent. Treatment shall be equal to "Wolmanized" made by Koppers, or K33 made by Osmose,or approved equal. .. 4. Treated wood which is cut or otherwise damaged shall be further treated in accordance with the AWPA Standard M4. 5. All wood in contact with masonry or concrete or otherwise subject to moisture to be pressure treated. 2.2 HARDWARE A. Rough Hardware for Exterior Use: Hot-dipped galvanized, aluminum or an approved .� non-ferrous metal. B. Nails: per Fed. Spec. FF-N-105. No 1. Stainless steel at exterior 2. Common steel wire, untreated, at interior C. Bolts: Standard mild steel, square head machine bolts with square nuts and malleable an iron or steel plate washers or carriage bolts with square nuts and cut washers conforming to the following: 1. Bolts: FS-FF-B-575 and 584. „,m 2. Nuts: FF-N-836D. 3. Expansion Shields: FS-FF-B-561. 4. Toggle Bolts: FS-FF-B-588. so 5. Lag Screws and Bolts: FS-FF-B-56 L D. Wood Screws: Stainless steel per Fed.Spec. FF-S-I I ID E. Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Standard expansion-shield self-drilling type concrete anchors where so shown or noted on the drawings,or where approved by the Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION , 3.1 INSPECTION Wo A. Examine the areas and conditions where carpentry is to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper .R installation of the work. 3.2 EXTERIOR SHEATHING A. General go 1. Plug, sand and seal edges of plywood prior to installation. 2. Install sheathing with face grain perpendicular to steel studs. Secure with stainless steel flathead screws at 6" o.c. and 3/8" from panel edge at perimeter and 12"o.c. .o at intermediate attachment locations. Leave 1/8" gap between panels at sides and ends. Stagger vertical joints. .w Smith Campus Center Carpentry an 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 06200-4 B. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow proper attachment of other work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD MATERIAL A. General 1. All wood shall be sound, flat, straight, well seasoned, thoroughly dry and free from all defects. Warped or twisted wood shall not be used. " 2. Plywood for rough carpentry work shall conform to PS-74 and APA standards best grade for intended use. B. For exterior siding use APA A-C rated siding 303-OC exterior grade Douglas Fir plywood,rough sawn face, 3/4"thick. C. For exterior sheathing use APA Rated Sheathing Exposure I exterior grade plywood, 3/4"thick(inner layer)and %"thick(outer layer). D. For exterior wood trim use kiln-dried vertical grain fir, clear. 1. Vertical battens: 5/4 x 3 nominal (1"x 2 %" ); kerf back of panel joint battens for air and moisture migration. 2. Horizontal battens: 5/4 x 13/4", beveled profile, milled to size and shape from larger stock.Rabbet back for air and moisture migration. 3. Ornamental wood fins: 2 x 4 nominal(1 ''/�"x 3 %2") 4. Fascia,corner and soffit trim: 5/4 nominal thickness. 5. Projecting window jamb, head and sill: 2 x nominal thickness. Mill sill to profile shown in details. 6. Exterior wood trellis and sunshade: 2 x nominal thickness. we E. For exterior wood decking use clear heart redwood, lengths no shorter than 8%0". F. For miscellaneous wood blocking, grounds, furring as required, use Utility Grade Coastal Douglas Fir or Southern Pine, free from knots, shakes, rot or other defects, straight, square edges and straight grain, air seasoned with maximum moisture content of nineteen(19)percent. Wood shall be S4S, S-Dry, complying with PS-20. G. For plywood underlayment use C-D EXT APA underlayment exterior, 5/8" thick, with tongue and groove edges. H. For telephone and electric closets, provide 3/4" thick C-D EXT APA plywood, fire retardant treated as specified herein. I. Wood treatment 1. Provide fire-retardant treatment where required by applicable codes or regulations. 2. Fire retardant treatment to comply with the AWPA standards (C20 for lumber, C27 for plywood) for pressure impregnation with fire retardant chemical to achieve a flame spread rating of not more than 25 (UL Class"FR-S") when tested in accordance with UL Test 723 or ASTM E84 a. After treatment, kiln dry to a moisture content of fifteen (15) percent; if wood is to be painted or finished, kiln dry to a moisture content of twelve (12) percent. Treatment shall be equal to "Flameproof LHC" made by !w! Smith Campus Center Carpentry 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 06200-3 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Pressure Treatment: Include certification by treating plant stating chemicals and process used,net amount of salts retained and conformance with applicable standards. B. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Include certification by treating plant that treatment material complies with governing ordinances and that treatment will not bleed through finished surfaces. C. Samples: submit samples of each of the following items: MR 1. Plywood for wood siding, 24"wide x 36"high. 2. Wood batten, 36" long. 3. Wood trim, 5 %"wide x 36" long. A D. Mock-up 1. Portions of this and other sections shall be constructed at full size to the shape, size and dimensions indicated in Section 4.01. 2. The mock-up shall be of the materials, profiles, finishes, colors, and design approved for the finished work, complete including roofing, fascia and coping, siding and trim, and window unit with glazing. The mock-up will serve as a visual representation of the work and permit viewing at various distances under natural daylight. 3. Samples of all materials for the mock-up shall be submitted in accordance with Section 1.07.0(samples)and approved prior to mock-up fabrication. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver carpentry materials to the site ready to use with each piece of lumber clearly marked as to grade,type and mill, and place in an area protected from the elements. B. Deliver rough hardware in sealed kegs and/or other containers which shall bear labels as to type and kind. C. Pile lumber for rough usage, when delivered to the site in stacks to insure drainage and ow with a minimum clearance of six (6) inches above grade. Cover stacks with tarpaulins or other watertight coverings. Store grounds and similar small sized lumber inside the building as soon as possible after delivery. Seal exposed end grain upon delivery to minimize moisture absorption prior to installation. D. Do not store seasoned lumber in wet or damp portions of the building. E. Protect fire retardant treated materials against high humidity and moisture during storage and erection. F. Remove delivered materials which do not conform to specified grading rules or are otherwise not suitable for installation from the job site and replace with acceptable materials. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS A. Installer must examine the substrates and supporting structure and the conditions under which the carpentry work is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the work. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer and the Architect. Smith Campus Center Carpentry 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 06200-2 po SECTION 06200 CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the carpentry work as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but not limited to, the following: 1. Exterior plywood sheathing. 2. Exterior board and batten siding. 3. Exterior wood trim. 4. Exterior wood trellis and sunshade. 5. Exterior wood decking. 6. Blocking and miscellaneous wood 7. Underlayment sm 8. Rough hardware 9. Back painting as specified herein 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Architectural woodwork-Section 06400. B. Roofing-Section 07530. C. Sheet metal work-Section 07600. D. Gypsum drywall and framing assemblies-Section 09250 E. Painting-Section 09900 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber Standard: Comply with PS 20. B. Plywood Standard: Comply with PS 1 and American Plywood Assoc. (APA). C. Grade Marks: Identify lumber and plywood by official grade mark. aw 1. Lumber: Grade stamp to contain symbol of grading agency certified by Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee, mill number or name, grade of lumber, species grouping or combination designation, rules under which graded where applicable, and condition of seasoning at time of manufacture. a. S-Dry: Maximum nineteen (19) percent moisture content as per ASTM D2016. Smith Campus Center Carpentry 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 06200-1 7 7 7 7 3 7 1 7 l y 9 5 5 1 a t I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 with required accessories. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3" from each end and not more than 24" O.C. B. Continuity: Maintain continuity of expansion joint cover assemblies with a minimum number of end joints and align metal members mechanically using splice joints. Cut and fit ends to produce joints that will accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal to avoid buckling of frames. Adhere flexible filler materials (if any) to frames with adhesive or pressure sensitive tape as recommended by manufacturer. C. Extruded Preformed Seals: Install seals complying with manufacturer's instructions .� and with minimum number of end joints. For straight sections provide preformed seals in continual lengths. Vulcanize or heat-weld field splice joints in preformed seal material to provide watertight joints using procedures recommended by manufacturer. Apply adhesive, epoxy, or lubricant adhesive approved by manufacturer to both frame interfaces before installing preformed seal. Seal transitions according to manufacturer's instructions. .. D. Elastomeric Sealant Joint Assemblies: Seal end joints within continuous runs and joints at transitions according to manufacturer's directions to provide a watertight installation. E. Fire Barriers: Install fire barriers, including transitions and end joints, according to manufacturer's instructions so that fire-rated construction is continuous. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. When protective covering is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05810-4 w. 01• F. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, fasteners, set screws, spacers, flexible moisture barrier and filler materials, drain tubes, lubricants, adhesive, and other accessories compatible with material in contact, as indicated or required for complete installations. 2.3 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES A. General: Provide expansion joint cover assemblies of design, basic profile, materials, and operation indicated on drawings. Provide units comparable to those ON indicated or required to accommodate joint size, variations in adjacent surfaces, and dynamic structural movement without material degradation or fatigue when tested according to ASTM E 1399. Furnish units in longest practical lengths to minimize number of end joints. Provide hairline mitered corners where joint changes 1-" directions or abuts other materials. Include closure materials and transition pieces, tee joints, corners, transition pieces, curbs, cross-connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous joint cover assemblies. 1. Special conditions shall be shop fabricated. 2. Fabricate components in largest practical lengths to minimize field splicing. B. Moisture Barrier: Provide manufacturer's continuous, standard, flexible vinyl No moisture barrier under covers at locations indicated. C. Fire Rated Joint Covers: Provide expansion joint cover assemblies with manufacturer's continuous, standard, flexible fire barrier seals under covers at locations indicated to provide fire-resistive rating not less than the rating of adjacent construction. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION W A. Manufacturer's Instructions: In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for phases of Work, including preparing substrate, applying materials, and protecting installed units. B. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, templates, and instructions for installation of expansion joint cover assemblies to be embedded in or anchored to concrete or to have recesses formed into edges of concrete slab for later placement and grouting-in of frames. C. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary to secure expansion joint cover assemblies to in-place construction, including threaded fasteners with drilled-in expansion shields for masonry and concrete where anchoring members are not embedded in concrete. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction indicated and provide for secure attachment of expansion joint cover assemblies. aA 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting into new and existing construction as required to install expansion joint covers. Install joint cover assemblies in true alignment and proper relationship to expansion joints and adjoining finished surfaces measured from established lines and levels. Allow adequate free movement of thermal expansion and contraction of metal to avoid buckling. Set floor covers at elevations to be flush. Locate wall, ceiling, roof, and soffit covers in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces. Securely attach in place Smith Campus Center Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05810-3 B. Joint covers shall permit unrestrained movement of joint without disengagement of cover. C. Floor joint cover plate assemblies shall be capable of supporting a 200 psf uniform load and a 300 lb. concentrated load with a deflection not to exceed 1/16". 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide temporary protective cover on finished surfaces. B. Deliver joint covers to jobsite in new, clean, unopened crates of sufficient size and strength to protect materials during transit. C. Store components in original containers in a clean, dry location. D. Handle components with equipment of sufficient size to preclude hazard to personnel or components. PART 2 PRODUCTS �w 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products manufactured by one of the following: 1. Watson Bowman Acme 2. Construction Specialties 3. Balco/Metalines 4. MM Systems 2.2 MATERIALS .� A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209, alloy 6061-T6, sheet and plate; aluminum to have the following finishes: 1. Interior and exterior walking surfaces shall have clear anodized (A41) finish. 2. Exterior surfaces not subject to pedestrian traffic shall have a "Kynar 500" finish conforming to NAAMM 605.2; two (2) colors shall be required, one (1) color to match metal siding and the other color to match adjacent concrete surfaces. 3. Interior surfaces not subject to pedestrian traffic shall be shop primed with rust inhibitive primer, minimum 2 mils thick, ready to receive field painted finish. B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, No. 4 finish. C. Protect metal surfaces to be placed in contact with cementitious materials with a protective coating. D. Extruded Preformed Seals: Single or multi-cellular elastomeric profiles as classified under ASTM D 2000, designed with or without continuous, longitudinal, internal baffles. Formed to fit compatible frames, in color, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. E. Fire Barriers: Designed for indicated or required dynamic structural movement without material degradation or fatigue when tested according to ASTM E-1399. Tested in maximum joint width condition with a field splice as a component of an expansion joint cover per ANSI/UL 263, NFPA 251, U.B.C. 43-1, or ASTM E 119, including hose stream test of vertical wall assemblies by a nationally recognized testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Smith Campus Center Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05810-2 �r SECTION 05810 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the expansion joint covers as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but is not necessarily limited to the following: " 1. Floor expansion joint cover assemblies. 2. Wall expansion joint cover assemblies. 3. Ceiling expansion joint cover assemblies. 4. Roof expansion joint cover assemblies. B. Fire rated expansion joint cover assemblies where required. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Concrete - Section 03300. B. Masonry work - Section 04200. wrr C. Roofing - Section 07530. D. Painting - Section 09900. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for each type of expansion joint cover assembly specified, including manufacturer's product specifications, installation instructions, details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. B. Submit shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of expansion joint cover assembly including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, joints, splices, and attachments to other units of work. C. Submit samples for verification purposes in full size units of each type of expansion joint cover assembly indicated; within sets for each finish, color, texture, and pattern specified, showing full range of variations expected in these characteristics. Install elastomeric material for joints, samples to verify color selected.. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide expansion joint cover assemblies identical to those assemblies whose fire resistance has been determined per ANSI/UL 263, NFPA 251, U.B.C. 43-1, or ASTM E 119, including hose stream test of vertical wall assemblies, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire Resistance Ratings: 1 hour rating as shown on drawings. Smith Campus Center Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05810-1 support of work of this Section, but obtain Architect's approval prior to such preparation to work of others. C. Tolerances: All work of this Section shall be plumb, square, level, true to radius and correctly aligned within the following limitations: pa 1. Offset from true horizontal, vertical and design location shall not exceed 1/16" per ten(10)feet of length for any component,not cumulative. 2. Maximum offset from true alignment between abutting components shall not exceed 1/32". D. All railings shall be installed to withstand loads as required by prevailing Building w Code. E. Do not cut or abrade finishes which cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing or provide new units at Contractor's option. F. Install concealed gaskets and joint fillers as the work progresses, so as to make the work soundproof or lightproof as required. G. Restore protective coverings which have been damaged during shipment or installation of the work. Remove protective coverings only when there is no possibility of damage from other work yet to be performed at the same location. H. Retain protective coverings intact and remove simultaneously from similarly finished items to preclude non-uniform oxidation and discoloration. I. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for the procedures of manual shielded metal- arc welding, the appearance and quality of welds made, and the methods used in correcting welding work. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with ON clean water. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of ornamental metal from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by ornamental metal fabricator. Remove protective covering at the time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the filed to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Ornamental Metals 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05700-7 7. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect handrail and railing members ,. to other work, unless otherwise indicated. a. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable .,■ of withstanding loads imposed by handrails and railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. b. For railing posts set in concrete, provide preset sleeves of steel, not less than 6 inches long and inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post,with steel plate forming bottom closure. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where ornamental metal work is to be installed and .� correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install work of this Section square, plumb, straight, true to line or radius, accurately fitted and located, with flush, tight hairline joints (except as otherwise indicated or to allow for thermal movement), with provisions for other trades, with provisions to allow for thermal movement, with provisions to exclude water where exposed to weather, and with attachment devices as required for secure and rigid installation. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to assure himself that shop fabricated architectural metal items will properly fit the field condition. In cases where the shop fabricated architectural metal items do not fit the field condition, the item shall be returned to the shop for correction. B. Attachments 1. Unless otherwise indicated, work to be built into concrete or masonry shall be anchored with shop welded on galvanized steel strap anchors; work to be attached to concrete or masonry shall be anchored by bolts into embedded inserts or expansion shields; work attached to structural steel shall be anchored by welds or bolts; work attached to metals other than structural steel shall be anchored by bolts or screws. Power actuated fasteners not permitted unless approved by Architect. Provide all supplementary parts necessary to complete each item of work of this Section. 2. All attachment devices shall be of type, size and spacing to suit condition and as approved by Architect. Provide shims, slotted holes, or other means necessary for leveling, plumbing and other required adjustments. Attachment devices for work exposed to view shall be concealed, unless indicated otherwise. Where bolts or screws are permitted in work exposed to view, they shall be oval head and counter sunk, unless otherwise noted, with projecting end cut off flush with nuts or adjacent material, and shall match adjacent surfaces. 3. Do all necessary drilling, tapping, cutting or other preparations of surrounding construction in the field accurately, neatly and as necessary for the attachment and Smith Campus Center Ornamental Metals 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05700-6 �. 2.4 SHOP FINISHING A. General 1. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual' for finish designations and application recommendations,except as otherwise indicated. 2. Provide colors or color matches as indicated on selected samples. 3. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by application of strippable temporary protective covering prior to shipment. P! 4. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces which will be in contact with concrete, masonry, wood or dissimilar metals, in exterior work and work to be built into exterior and below grade walls and decks, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. Do not extend coating onto exposed surfaces. 2.5 PROTECTION A. Provide necessary protection to all exposed surfaces of architectural metal work, so as to prevent damage, staining,discoloration, abrasion, etc.,to these surfaces from time of shipment from factory to acceptance of work of this project. Protection shall be provided by wrappings, strippable coatings, or other means. After installation, remove protective paper or strippable coating and clean exposed surfaces, and then provide additional temporary protection to protect architectural metal work from damage during subsequent construction activities. Surfaces which are damaged, stained discolored, abraded etc., shall be rejected and replaced with new materials, at no cost to the Owner. 2.6 STEEL FRAMING, BRACING,SUPPORTS AND REINFORCEMENTS A. Steel framing, plate reinforcing, supplementary steel framing or reinforcing, bracket assemblies, and the like required for the support, framing, reinforcing, bracing, etc., of work of this Section shall be of such sizes and shapes as indicated on the drawings, or so as required to suit the conditions, and shall be provided with all necessary supports and accessory items such as inserts, hangers,braces, struts, clip angles, anchors,bolts, nuts, welds, etc., as required to properly and rigidly fasten, anchor or attach work of this Section in place and to the concrete,masonry and other connecting and adjoining work. 2.7 ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS A. Welded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railings for connecting members by welding. Cope components at perpendicular and skew connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld connections continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. so 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. 5. Form changes in direction of railing members by radius bends. 6. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain profile of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components. Smith Campus Center Ornamental Metals 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05700-5 w. G. Coordination: Accurately cut, fit, drill and tap work of this Section to accommodate and fit work of other trades. Furnish or obtain, as applicable, templates and drawings to or from applicable trades for proper coordination of this work. H. Exposed Work: In addition to requirements specified herein or shown on drawings, all surfaces exposed to view shall be clean, and free from dirt, stains, grease, scratches, distortions, waves, dents, buckles, tool marks, burrs and other defects which mar appearance of finished work. Ornamental metal work exposed to view shall be straight and true to line or curve, smooth anises and angles as sharp as practicable, miters formed in true alignment, profiles accurately intersecting, and with joints carefully matched to produce continuity of line and design. Exposed fastenings, where permitted, shall be of the same material, color and finish as the metal to which applied, unless otherwise indicated,and shall be of the smallest practicable size. 1. Materials used shall be of such strength, thickness and alloy that they are capable of meeting all standards and descriptions specified herein and as detailed on drawings. 2.3 GALVANIZING A. Scope: All ferrous metal exposed to the weather, and all ferrous metals indicated on drawings or in specifications to be galvanized, shall be cleaned and then hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. B. Cleaning: Thoroughly clean metal surfaces of all mill scale, rust, dirt, grease, oil, moisture and other contaminants prior to galvanizing. C. Application: Hot-dip galvanizing shall be applied in accordance with: 1. ASTM: A123: Standard Specificatioini for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2. ASTM A153: Glavanized Coating on Iron and Steel Hardware—Table 1. 3. ASTM A446: Galvanized Coating on Steel Sheets. 4. Minimum weight of galvanized coating shall be two (2) oz. per square foot of surface. D. Fabricate joints which will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. E. All galvanized materials must be inspected for compliance with these specifications �. and marked with a stamp indicating the name of the galvanizer, the weight of the coating, and the appropriate ASTM number. F. To minimize surface imperfection (eg: flux inclusions), material to be galvanized shall be dipped into a solution of Zinc Ammonium Chloride (pre-flux) immediately prior to galvanizing. The type of galvanizing process utilizing a flux blanket overlaying the molten zinc will not be permitted. G. After galvanizing all materials not exposed to view must be chromated by dipping material in a 0.2%chromatic acid solution. H. Galvanized surfaces, where exposed to view, must have a smooth, level surface finish. Where this does not occur, piece shall be rejected and replaced to the acceptance od the Architect. Smith Campus Center Ornamental Metals 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05700-4 10 F. Bituminous Paint: SSPC-Paint 12 (cold-applied asphalt mastic). G. Cast-in-Place and Preinstalled Anchors: Anchors fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Cutting: Cut metal by sawing, shearing or blanking. Flame cutting will be permitted only if cut edges are ground back to clean, smooth edges. Make cuts accurate, clean, sharp, square and free of burrs,without deforming adjacent surfaces or metals. B. Holes: Drill or cleanly punch holes (do not burn), so that holes will be accurate, clean, neat and sharp without deforming adjacent surfaces or metals. C. Connections 1. Make connections with tight joints,capable of developing full strength of member, flush unless indicated otherwise, formed to exclude water where exposed to water. Locate joints where indicated on drawings. Provide connections to allow for thermal movement of metal at locations and by methods approved by Architect. For work exposed to view, use concealed fasteners (unless welded or other connections indicated) with joints accurately fitted, flush and rigidly secured with hairline contacts. 2. Welding: Welding shall be in accordance with recommendations of the American Welding Society and shall be done with electrodes and/or methods recommended by the manufacturers of the metals being welded. Welds shall be continuous, except where spot welding is specifically permitted. Welds exposed to view shall be ground flush and dressed smooth with and to match finish of adjoining surfaces so that joint will not be visible; undercut metal edges where welds are required to be ground flush and dressed smooth. All welds on or behind surfaces which will be exposed to view shall be done so that finished surface will be free of �w imperfections such as pits, runs, splatter, cracks, warping, dimpling, depressions or other forms of distortion or discoloration. Remove weld splatter and welding oxides from all welded surfaces. ,— 3. Bolts and Screws: Make threaded connections tight with threads entirely concealed. Use lock nuts. Bolts and screw heads, where shown to be exposed to view, shall be flat and countersunk. Cut off projecting ends of exposed bolts and 40 screws flush with nuts of adjacent metal. D. Operating Mechanism: Operating devices, mechanism and hardware used in connection with this work shall be fabricated, assembled, installed and adjusted after installation so that they will operate smoothly, freely,noiselessly and without excessive friction. E. Built-In Work: Furnish anchor bolts, inserts, plates and any other anchorage devices, and all other items for architectural metal work to be built into concrete, masonry, or work of other trades, with necessary templates and instructions, and in ample time to facilitate proper placing and installation. F. Supplementary Parts: Provide as necessary to complete each item of work, even though such supplementary parts are not shown or specified. Smith Campus Center Ornamental Metals 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05700-3 w 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: Submit for all items of work of this Section, as enumerated under paragraph 1.2, showing locations, layouts, materials, thicknesses, finishes, dimensions, construction, relation to adjoining construction, erection details, profiles,jointing and all other details to fully illustrate the work of this Section. B. Samples: Submit fabricated samples (of sufficient size to fully show construction, materials and finishes)of all items of work as enumerated under paragraph 1.2 herein. C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's, fabricator's and finisher's specifications and installation instructions for products used in ornamental metal work, including finishing materials and methods. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, .� during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements �• necessary at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS am 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide materials which have been selected for their surface flatness, smoothness and *� freedom from surface blemishes where exposed to view in the finished unit. Exposed to view surfaces which exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, "oil-canning" stains, discolorations or other imperfections on the finished units will not be acceptable. B. Steel 1. Structural Shapes: ASTM A36. 2. Plates(for forming or bending cold): ASTM A283, Grade C. 3. Steel Sheets: ASTM A366,Grade 1. 4. Shop prime with rust inhibitive primer equal to Series 88 Azeron made by Tnemec,or approved equal made by Benjamin Moore or Sherwin Williams. C. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as recommended by producer of the metal to be welded, and as required for color match, strength and compatibility in the fabricated items. D. Fasteners: Furnish basic metal and alloy, matching finished color and texture as the metal being fastened, unless otherwise indicated. Provide Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. E. Anchors and Inserts: Either furnish inserts to be set in concrete or masonry work, or provide other anchoring devices as required for the installation of ornamental metal items. Provide toothed steel or lead shield expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide galvanized or cadmium-coated anchors and inserts for exterior installations. .. 1. Provide units with exposed surfaces matching the texture and finish of the metal item anchored. Smith Campus Center Ornamental Metals 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05700-2 SECTION 05700 ORNAMENTAL METALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the ornamental metals, including non-ferrous metal products which are used in building construction for functional, architectural and decorative effects and which are not a part of other metal systems specified in other Sections. The extent of these items is indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but not limited to, the following: 1. Exterior railings and handrails. 2. Architectural elements. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Miscellaneous metals-Section 05500. B. Elevator entrances-Division 14. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Work of this section shall be fabricated and installed by an experienced fabricator or manufacturer, who has been engaged in work of equivalent scope and fabrication standards for at least five (5) years. Materials, methods of fabrication, fitting, assembly bracing, supporting, fastening, operating devices and erection shall be in accordance with drawings and specifications, approved shop drawings, and be of highest quality practices of the industry, using new and clean materials as specified, OR having structural properties sufficient to safely sustain or withstand stresses and strains to which materials and assembled work will be subjected. All work shall be accurately and neatly fabricated, assembled and erected. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of the work. However, do not delay job progress; allow for adjustments and fitting where taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay the work. C. Shop Assembly: Insofar as practicable, fitting and assembly of work shall be done in go shop. Work that cannot be permanently shop assembled, shall be completely assembled, marked and disassembled in shop before shipment to insure proper assembly in field. Shop assemble work in largest practical sizes to minimize field work. It is the responsibility of the Contractor for this work to assure himself that the shop fabricated items will properly fit the field condition. In the event that shop fabricated items do not fit the field condition, the item shall be returned to the shop for correction. Smith Campus Center Ornamental Metals 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05700-1 2.3 EXTRUDED ALUMINUM GRILLES A. Aluminum grilles shall be 6063-T6 extruded aluminum frameless, without margins; straight bars; bars shall be 0.125" thick. B. Cut removable grille sections to sit flush with tops and be supported in recesses to a �• close fit without warp or rattle. C. Aluminum to have clear anodized (A-31) finish. 4M 2.4 SHOP FINISHING A. Clean, treat and paint ferrous metal in the shop. Apply shop finish to all surfaces of the fabricated units, whether exposed or concealed when finished. B. Clean ferrous metal of dirt, grease or other loose surface deposits, complying with SSPC-SP 1 "Solvent Cleaning", followed by SSPC SP-2 "Hand Tool Cleaning" as required to remove loose rust or mill scale. C. Apply metal pretreatment after cleaning to ferrous metal surfaces. D. Apply baked-on prime paint to exposed sheet metal surfaces immediately following cleaning and pretreatment to provide a min. dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where perimeter heating/cooling enclosures are to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION 40 A. General 1. Set unit enclosures in location and alignment, plumb and level with adjacent work. on 2. Anchor securely in the manner shown, using concealed anchorages wherever possible. 3. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fit together. .. 4. Repair enclosures damaged by cutting, welding, soldering and grinding operations required for fitting and jointing. 5. Restore prime coats of paint so that there is no evidence of corrective work. an END OF SECTION .. Smith Campus Center Fin Tube Enclosures and Grilles 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05580-4 �. G. Anchors: Use non-ferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchorages on exterior walls. Provide toothed steel or lead shield expansion bolt devices for drilled-in- place anchors. H. Steel Primer Paint: Manufacturer's standard baked-on rust resistant primer. I. Bituminous Paint: SSPC-Paint 12 (cold-applied asphalt mastic). 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate units from the gauges specified, made from cold-rolled steel sheets and provide a baked-on primer finish. B. Fabricate units to support a min. loading of 200 lbs. per sq. ft. or 150 lbs. per lin. ft (whichever is greater) without permanent deflection. Provide stiffeners or laminated backing as required for strength and rigidity. Include brackets, plates and go straps in the assemblies for support and anchorage to other work. C. Form enclosures to the profiles, sizes and shapes shown. Form sheet metal sections to provide flush meeting edges without metal-to-metal laps at joints or exposed metal edges, unless otherwise shown. Joints shall be hairline butt joints as few as possible in number and occurring on the building module. D. Use equivalent metal gauges or thicknesses to the following minimum for cold- rolled steel. 1. Framing: 12 ga. � 2. Sills and stools: 16 ga. 3. Front panels: 16 ga. 4. Concealed panels and trim: 20 ga. 5. Bases: 12 ga. E. Fabricate removable panels in enclosures to a fitting tolerance of not less than 1/32" and not more than 1/16" at each edge. on F. Provide front panels for access to enclosed heating elements. Locate fixed sections at window mullions only and at ends of runs, unless otherwise shown. G. Miters and copes to be tight fitting, square and in true alignment. Close exposed corners and seams by forming procedures or by welding, brazing or soldering and grinding smooth and flush on exposed surfaces. Comply with the recommendations of AWS and NAAMM for welding, brazing and soldering. H. Provide sound-deadening for concealed faces of metal panels over 6" wide, consisting of a heavy bituminous coating applied at the min. rate of 20 sq. ft. per 00 gal. Apply sound-deadening coating after completion of shop finishing. I. Coordinate and provide clip for fin tube hanger at each enclosure mullion. 4" J. Provide "punch-outs" at enclosure mullion faces shown on drawings for telephone and electrical outlets. K. Provide and install angle back-piece to toe-space as shown on drawing. L. Grilles at areaway shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel. Smith Campus Center Fin Tube Enclosures and Grilles """ 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05580-3 on enclosures has begun. Mock-ups shall include typical end and corner conditions. Each mock-up shall be a min. length of 2 typical sections. B. Rework mock-ups until approved by Architect. Installed work shall match approved mock-ups. C. Approved mock-ups may remain as part of the finished building construction. D. Provide an additional mock-up at a remote location associated with the building envelope testing. �. 1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, .. during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. so PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS "' A. General: Provide materials which have been selected for their surface flatness, smoothness and freedom from surface blemishes where exposed to view in the finished unit. Exposed to view surfaces which exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, "oil canning", stains, discolorations or other imperfections on the finished units are not acceptable. B. Cold Rolled Sheet Steel: Commercial Quality ASTM A366, Type F, or Drawing Quality ASTM A 620, as required for detai I ing;.matte finish. C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 coating, either commercial quality or .w lock-forming quality, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. D. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required: 1. Extruded Bars and Shapes: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T6. •R 2. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy 6061-T6. 3. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247, alloy 6061-T6. 4. Castings: ASTM B 26/13 26M, alloy A356-T6. E. Custom Fin Tube Enclosures: IPA No. 120, 1/4" diameter perforations. 5/16" centers, 58 percent open area, staggered line bent sheet steel of gauge as required to support loads; product of manufacturer approved by the Architect. F. Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners, of the same basic metal and finish as the fastened metal. Use Phillips flathead machine screws where exposed, unless otherwise indicated. Smith Campus Center Fin Tube Enclosures and Grilles 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05580-2 SECTION 05580 FIN TUBE ENCLOSURES AND GRILLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the fin tube covers and grilles as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Custom fin tube covers, except where premanufactured units are indicated. 2. Recessed fin tube grilles at Garden Lounge. 3. Galvanized steel grilles at areaway. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS 40 A. Gypsum drywall - Section 09250. B. Field painting - Section 09900. C. Heating elements - Division 15. D. Telephone and electrical outlet boxes - Division 16. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication, where possible, without OR delaying the project. Design units to provide for adjustment and fitting of components during field installation. B. Preassemble units at the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize mechanical joints, splicing and field assembly of units. C. Manuals: Industrial Perforators Association (IPA). 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings "s 1. Before any of the materials of this Section are delivered to the job site, submit complete Shop Drawings to the Architect. 2. Shop Drawings shall include plans, elevations and detail sections. Show jointing, anchorage and accessory items, and specify finishes. 1.6 FULL SIZE MOCK-UPS A. Provide a full scale mock-up of each type of enclosure, installed at a building location as selected by the Architect for approval before manufacture of the Smith Campus Center Fin Tube Enclosures and Grilles 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05580-1 END OF SECTION MW am ,o MW no No M no MW ■w ON Smith Campus Center Steel Stairs as 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05510-8 H. Galvanized surfaces, where exposed to view, must have a smooth, level surface finish. Where this does not occur, piece shall be rejected and replaced to the acceptance of the Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where steel stairs are to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Work in the field shall comply with the same requirements as specified for shop work above. B. Except where otherwise shown or specified for a particular item of work or for built-in work, fasten metal work to solid masonry with expansion bolts. Fastenings to wood plugs in masonry will not be accepted. Drill holes to the exact diameter of the bolts using a rotary drill for concrete and a percussion drill for other masonry. Thread screws full length to the head of the screw. C. Provide connecting members needed for properly securing the work to masonry, drywall and structural framing, including bolts, machine screws, rods, hangers, inserts, sleeves, plates, anchors, expansion bolts, washers and other items as required. Furnish built-in items to Drywall trades as required for proper anchorage. D. Leave work exposed to view, including stair soffits, clean, smooth and neatly finished. All exposed welds shall be dressed smooth. E. Include supplementary parts necessary to complete each item even though such work is not definitively shown or specified. F. Coordinate and schedule the work of this Section with the work of other trades. Furnish anchors, sockets, fastenings and other miscellaneous items to be embedded in concrete or masonry, or required for securing metal work to other construction so as not to delay job progress. G. Attach wall railings to the wall construction, using appropriate bolts and anchors to meet performance standards. H. Install work plumb and true to the exact lines and levels, in the correct location and in proper relation to adjoining work. I. Touch up marred and abraded shop paint of exposed surfaces after erection in the �. field. J. Posts shall be set plumb within 1/8" vertical tolerance. Longitudinal members shall be parallel with each other and with floor surface or slope of stair to a tolerance of 1/8" in ten (10) linear feet. Center lines of members within each run of railing shall lie in the same vertical plane. Field joints of connecting sections shall be hairline. Smith Campus Center Steel Stairs 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05510-7 9W 6. Construction: Connections shall be shop welded, except where expansion joints are required. Field connections shall be welded for continuity. All exposed welds shall be ground smooth and flush. 7. Anchor posts to steel with steel flanges, angle type or floor type as required by conditions, welded to posts and bolted to the steel supporting members. 8. Secure handrails to walls with wall brackets. Provide brackets as shown on drawings. For installation in drywall, furnish Drywall Section steel plate to receive wall plate portion of bracket and anchor or bolt wall plate through drywall to supporting steel plate. Locate brackets at not more than 5'-0" o.c. unless otherwise shown. 9. Anchor rail ends into adjacent walls with steel flanges welded to rail ends and anchored into the wall construction as described above. 2.3 SHOP APPLIED PRIMER FOR INTERIOR STAIRWORK A. All steel shapes to be painted shall be of the highest quality and conforming to the requirements of Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel. B. Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply rust-inhibitive alkyd primer per Section 09900. Primer shall be fully cured before shipment. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect. 2.4 GALVANIZING A. Scope: All ferrous metal exposed to the weather, and all ferrous metals indicated on drawings or in specifications to be galvanized, shall be cleaned and then hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. ., B. Cleaning: Thoroughly clean metal surfaces of all mill scale, rust, dirt, grease, oil, moisture and other contaminants prior to galvanizing. C. Application: Hot-dip galvanizing shall be applied in accordance with: 1. ASTM A123: Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2. ASTM A153: Galvanized Coating on Iron and Steel Hardware - Table 1. 3. ASTM A446: Galvanized Coating on Steel Sheets. 4. Minimum weight of galvanized coating shall be two (2) oz. per square foot of surface. D. Fabricate joints which will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. E. All galvanized materials must be inspected for compliance with these specifications and marked with a stamp indicating the name of the galvanizer, the weight of the coating, and the appropriate ASTM number. F. To minimize surface imperfection (eg: flux inclusions), material to be galvanized shall be dipped into a solution of Zinc Ammonium Chloride (pre-flux) immediately prior to galvanizing. The type of galvanizing process utilizing a flux blanket overlaying the molten zinc will not be permitted. G. After galvanizing all materials not exposed to view must be chromated by dipping .� material in a 0.2% chromic acid solution. Smith Campus Center Steel Stairs 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05510-6 I. Provide stringers, risers, sub-treads and platforms matching profiles as shown. Form tread and riser in a continuous piece to receive the finished tread; tread shall be minimum 1/4" thick steel plate. Weld risers and treads to carrier angles or bent steel support bar which shall be welded to the structural steel stringers. Fasten countersunk bolts or stud welded clips through mesh for cement fill. Provide welded-on clips for the support of gypsum drywall soffits. 2. On intermediate platforms, provide metal bases formed of stringers. Miter and weld and grind smooth internal and external corners of metal bases. Form platform runs of minimum 1/4" steel plate. 3. Countersink bolt heads and screws on finished surfaces or cut off flush with such surfaces. 4. Properly fit and securely fasten together all parts making exposed joints close fitting. Cut, drill, punch and tap as required for installation. 5. Make joints as strong and rigid as adjoining sections. Weld continuously along entire line of contact except where spot welding is indicated. two 6. Surfaces shall be blast cleaned and receive the finish specified herein. 7. Give ferrous metal surfaces a shop coat of primer. Before painting, thoroughly clean surfaces with wire brushes or other proper and effective means of po removing loose scale, filings or other objectionable materials. 8. Remove grease prior to painting. Separate dissimilar metals in or adjacent to work of this Section with a coat of bituminous paint on each surface prior to installation. xx 9. Closure and Filler Plates: Where indicated on drawings or as required, at least 1/4" steel plate unless otherwise indicated, securely fastened to top and bottom of stringer and adjacent wall, by welding or screws. ON 10. Struts, Hangers, Platform Headers and Subframing a. Provide supports as detailed and required, including all struts, clip angles, angles or hangers which are required and necessary for support of stair construction. ow b. Supports shall be of size suitable for the support load, as required. Struts, angles and hangers shall be supported by and directly connected to the structural framing. Struts and hangers, with their connections, shall be I" concealed. C. Provide other inserts, anchors and/or other subframing as may be required to complete the stair construction and properly support it on the structural framing. C. Balustrade, Handrails, Railings, Posts and Brackets 1. Provide continuous balustrade at stairs and walkways constructed of welded steel No bar and rod as shown on drawings, Weld balustrade to top of ornamental channel at walkways, outer stringer at stairs. 2. Provide steel stiffener bars 5'-0" o.c. at stair and walkway balustrade. Space stiffeners 8" o.c. from corners, aligned with steel rod baluster. 3. Provide steel bar handrail at stairs. Mount to stiffener bar with steel bracket. 4. For pipe railings and handrails, provide steel pipe of size shown on drawings, Schedule 40. Use heavier weight pipes and/or reinforce pipes internally as required to meet performance standards given in paragraph 1.7 herein. Fittings shall be flush type, malleable or cast iron. Wall brackets shall be steel design as detailed. 5. Handrail, post and railing spacing shall meet Code requirements. Smith Campus Center Steel Stairs ON 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05510-5 OR finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. OF K. Bituminous Paint: FS TT-C-494. L. Galvanize Repair Coating: For touching up galvanized surfaces after erection, OR provide Z.R.C. Cold Galvanizing Compound made by Z.R.C. Chemical Products Co. M. Concrete Fill and Reinforcing Materials I. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 .. Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, ready-mixed concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi. 2. Nonslip-Aggregate Finish: Factory-packaged abrasive aggregate made from *■ fused, aluminum-oxide grits or crushed emery; rustproof and nonglazing; unaffected by freezing, moisture, or cleaning materials. 3. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, 6 by 6 inches — W 1.4 by W 1.4, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide granite treads and landing pavers where indicated per Section 04400. 2.2 FABRICATION A. General 1. All steel exposed to view shall be Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel. 2. Steel stair work shall be fabricated by an experienced manufacturer in accordance with approved shop drawings and best practices of the industry, using new and clean materials as specified, having structural properties sufficient to safely sustain or withstand strains and stresses to which material will be subjected. 3. Fabricate shop assemblies in largest practical sizes to minimize field work. All exposed surfaces shall be clean and free from all dirt, stains, grease marks, scratches, waves, dents, buckles, tool marks, rattles, and other objectionable defects which mar appearance or use of finished work. 4. Cutting: Cut materials by sawing, shearing, or blanking. Flame cutting will be permitted when ground back to clean edges. Cuts shall be made accurately, M` clean, sharp and free of burrs, without deforming adjacent metals. 5. Connections: Make connections with tight joints, capable of developing full strength of the members, flush. Locate joints where least conspicuous. Use concealed fasteners where possible. Weld or rivet shop connections; bolt, screw or weld field connections. a. Welding: Welds shall be continuous, except where spot welding is specifically permitted. Welding shall conform to the Standard Code of the American Welding Society. Exposed welds are required to be ground flush. b. Bolts and Screws: Make threaded connections tight with threads entirely concealed. Use lock nuts, or upset thread ends. Exposed bolts and screw head shall be flat and countersunk, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Remove projecting ends of bolts and screws. Punch or drill holes; do not • burn. 6. Tolerances for fabrication and installation shall be half those normally acceptable for structural steel and, at a minimum, consistent with the AISC tolerances for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel. B. Stairs and Platforms Smith Campus Center Steel Stairs 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05510-4 4. Bent railing (each type). 5. Balustrade. B. Samples shall be submitted cleaned and shop primed and shall represent standards to which all respective materials used in the Project shall meet. 1.7 PERFORMANCE STANDARDS A. Stairs and railings shall be constructed to conform to the following performance on standards: 1. Stairs and platforms shall support a live load of one hundred (100) psf and a concentrated live load of three hundred (300) lbs. and shall have a live load deflection limited to 1/360 of the span. Loads shall not apply simultaneously. 2. Railings shall withstand a two hundred (200) lb. force applied to rail from any direction, and a uniformly distributed load of 50 lbs./lin. ft. applied downward or .� horizontally, loads not to act simultaneously. 1.8 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect steel pan stair before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and ON replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Structural Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36. B. Structural Steel Sheet: Hot rolled, ASTM A570; or cold rolled, ASTM A611, Class l; of grade required for design loading. C. Galvanized Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A446, of grade required for design loading. Coating designation as indicated, or if not indicated, G90. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E., Grade A, and ASTM A501. Use standard malleable iron fittings for steel pipe. E. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A47, Grade 35018. F. Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307, Grade A bolts. G. Machine Screws: Fed Spec. FF-S-92. +! H. Expansion Bolts: "Cinch" type, galvanized, of approved manufacture. 1. Threaded End Hanger Rods: Minimum 3/4" diameter, ASTM A-36. J. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with Smith Campus Center Steel Stairs so 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05510-3 .o D. Codes and Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with: 1. "Specifications for Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" of the American Institute of Steel Construction. 2. "Code for Welding in Building Construction" of the American Welding Society. 3. "Metal Stairs Manual" of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers. E. Conflicting Requirements: In the event of conflict between pertinent codes and regulations and the requirements of the referenced standards of these specifications, .w the provisions of the more stringent shall govern. F. Field Measurements: If construction process permits, take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress. Allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work. .� G. Tolerances: Allow for construction tolerances as required. H. Coordination: Coordinate this work with the work of all other trades interfacing with steel stairs, such as structural openings, sprinklers and standpipes, and other trades as required. 1.5 DRAWING SUBMISSION " A. General: It is the intent of the Working Drawings to display the layouts and general design parameters upon which the Shop Drawings shall be developed. Detail . development and all connections shall be part of Shop Drawing Development. B. Shop Drawings 1. Before any steel stairs are fabricated, submit shop drawings to the Architect for review. 2. Show all locations, markings, quantities, materials, sizes and shapes, and indicate all methods of connecting, anchoring, fastening, bracing, for the stair *� construction, support and attachment to the work of other trades. C. Engineering Data 1. Before any steel stairs are fabricated, submit engineering data drawings to the Architect for review. The Contractor is responsible for the structural design and supports for the stair system and must show his proposed system on these drawings. 2. These drawings must show all load conditions and design calculations relative to connections, fastening devices and anchorage, as well as size and gauge of stair members. Calculations and drawings must be prepared by a Structural Engineer licensed in the State of Massachusetts and shall be signed and sealed by this Engineer. 1.6 SAMPLES SUBMISSION ., A. Submit the following listed samples and other samples as may be requested by the Architect, to show the quality standards: 1. Railing bracket. 2. Exposed weld. 3. Exposed bolted connection. Smith Campus Center Steel Stairs 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05510-2 40 SECTION 05510 STEEL STAIRS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the steel stairs as indicated on the drawings and specified herein, including but not limited to, the following: 1. Steel pan stairs with steel pipe railings, guardrails and handrails at Stairs OOOSTI, 100ST1, 100ST5, and 300ST1. 2. Steel stairs with granite treads and steel bar handrails and rod balustrade at Stairs 100ST2, 100ST3, 100ST4 and 100ST6. 3. Steel bar and rod balustrade at interior walkways. 4. Exterior galvanized steel exit stair and canopy with steel bar handrails and guardrails. 5. Steel clips. hangers, inserts, braces and other supports required for installation of all steel stair systems.. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Granite treads and trim - Section 04400. NO B. Structural steel - Section 05120. C. Miscellaneous metals - Section 05500. D. Installation of inserts in drywall furnished by this Section - Section 09250. E. Finish painting of exterior stairwork - Section 09900. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualification of Welders: Use only certified welders and the shielded arc process for all welding performed in connection with the work of this Section. Protect adjacent surfaces when field welding to prevent damage or stain. Welders and welding operators must be qualified by tests as provided by AWS. B. Carbon Steel fabricator: Painted carbon steel components shall be fabricated by a company specializing in the fabrication of Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel u (AESS) with a minimum of 10 years experience. C. Installer: The work of this section shall be installed by a company specializing in the erection of the specified system with a minimum of 10 years experience. 04 Manufacturer shall verify the competence of the installer, and ensure that they are an approved installing dealer. Submit, with bid description, photos of at least 3 projects completed in the last 5 years with similar scope and complexity. on Smith Campus Center Steel Stairs me 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05510-1 P0 material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. F. Field Touch-Up of Galvanized Surfaces: Touch-up shop applied galvanized coatings damaged during handling and installation. Use galvanizing repair coating specified herein for galvanized surfaces. END OF SECTION go Smith Campus Center Miscellaneous Metals 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05500-11 so an H. Masonry Support Steel 1. Provide galvanized steel, relieving angles, plates, accessories and other steel No shapes for masonry support steel; for lintels refer to Para. C. herein. 2. Fabricate masonry support steel to allow final adjustment with the closest tolerances possible. Relieving angles which require cutting to fit masonry flashing shall be straightened without deflections. "' 3. Coordinate masonry support system with concrete work for locations of wedge inserts. 4. Install to meet requirements of building masonry work, face brick coursing and •• stone placement. Coordinate final adjustments with masonry work as work progresses. I. Sleeves in Concrete Walls and Slabs: Sleeves shall be of Schedule 40 steel pipe with i.d. 2" larger than o.d. of pipe or conduit (including insulation, if any) to be accommodated. Sleeves shall project 1/2" on each side of finished wall. Provide rectangular 1/4" steel plate collar at center, continuously welded to the perimeter of the sleeve, and 6" wider than the o.d. PART 3 EXECUTION go 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where miscellaneous metal is to be installed and .m correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 ERECTION A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction; including threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through- bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required. B. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. C. Fitting Connections: Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. D. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance, and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work. E. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same Smith Campus Center Miscellaneous Metals 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05500-10 .M IN ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 51-011 4" x 3-1/2" x 3/8" 6" x 4" x 3/8" 4" x 3-1/2" x 5/16" 1 ..................................................................... ....................................................g......................................................... 61-01f 5" x 3-1/2" x 3/8" 6" x 4" x 3/8" 5" x 3-1/2" x 5/16" ............................................................................................I.................................................................................................................... 71-011 5" x 3-1/2" x 3/8" 5" x 5" x 1/2" 5" x 3-1/2" x 3/8" ..................................................................... .................................................... ......................................................... 81-011 5" x 3-1/2" x 3/8" 5" x 5" x 5/8" 5" x 3-1/2" x 3/8" ..................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................. Two angles at all openings in eight (8) inch walls. 3. At columns or vertical surfaces where lintels cannot bear on masonry, provide clip angles sized for structural capacity of lintel. D. Miscellaneous Light Steel Framing 1. Light steel framing, bracing, supports, framing, clip angles, shelf angles, plates, etc., shall be of such shapes and sizes as indicated on the drawings and details or as required to suit the condition and shall be provided with all necessary supports and reinforcing such as hangers, braces, struts, clip angles, anchors, bolts, nuts, welds, etc., as required to properly support and rigidly fasten and anchor same in place and to steel, concrete, masonry and all other connecting and adjoining work. 2. All light steel framing steel shall be furnished and erected in accordance with the applicable requirements of the "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings: by the American Institute of Steel Construction and as specified herein. E. Aluminum Gratings and Frames I. Provide pressure-locked, rectangular bar aluminum gratings conforming to details and requirements published in NAAMM's "Metal Bar Grating Engineering Design Manual". Gratings shall be designed to support a live load of 100 psf and a concentrated load of 300 lbs. in accordance with NAAMM load charts and standards. Bars to have plain wearing surface. me 2. Hinged Section: Provide hinged sections in gratings where required by the drawings. Each hinged section up to 4'-0" wide shall be provided with two 5- knuckle, fast pin, regular weight, plain bearing, wrought bronze butt hinges. s Each hinged section over 4'-0" wide shall be provided with 3 butt hinges. o Hinged sections shall have provisions for padlocking on the underside. 3. Furnish grating frames, with corners mitered, welded and ground smooth, and with welded-on straps for secure anchorage into concrete. 4. Manufacturer: Provide gratings manufactured by Reliance, Borden, Irving Subway Grating, or approved equal. F. Miscellaneous Metal Trim: Provide materials, shapes and sizes for profiles shown. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural shapes and plates and bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation with other work. G. Counter Top Supports: Steel framing as indicated or required to support countertops. Conceal framing under countertops and within wall behind countertops. Provide supports to withstand a concentrated load of not less than 300 lbs. applied at any point with a deflection not to exceed L/240 for the length of the countertop. Smith Campus Center Miscellaneous Metals 100% Construction Documents: 0 1.11.12 05500-9 H. All plywood backed sheet aluminum to be not less than 0.0375" thick. Refer to drawings for sheet sizes,jointing, and reveal dimensions. All closures and trim to be 0.0500" thick. I. Finish: Kynar 500; Atochem North America, Inc., Philadelphia, PA. a. Color: Provide custom mix as selected by the Architect. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS METALS ITEMS A. Rough Hardware 1. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified in Division 6 Sections. 2. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers. B. Ladders " 1. Vertical steel ladders shall be 18" wide with 3/4" diameter non-slip steel rungs spaced 12" o.c. Stringers shall be 3/8" thick by 2-1/2" wide steel bars; rungs welded to bars. Attach ladders to walls 6" from top and bottom and maximum 36" o.c. from these points. At the roof, gooseneck the rails back to the structure to provide secure ladder access. 2. Provide sloping ladders (ship's ladders) where noted. At mechanical mezzanine, provide Model 330—60 degree Ships ladder as manufactured by ALACO Ladder Co., Chino, CA (tel. 888-310-70400), or approved equal. 3. Ladders shall be fabricated to support a live load of 100 lbs. per square foot and a concentrated load of 300 lbs. per rung; loads not to act simultaneously. "" C. Loose Steel Lintels 1. Provide loose structural steel lintels for openings and recesses in masonry walls r, and partitions as shown. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. Provide not less than eight (8) inches bearing at each side of openings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Loose lintels shall conform to the following Schedule: Opening WALL THICKNESS "" Width ......................................................................................................................................................................... (Maximum) 4 inches 6 inches 8 inches* 2'-0" 3-1/2" x 3-1/2" x 6" x 4" x 5/16" 3-1/2" x 3-1/2" x : 1/4 1/4 j.........................................y.........................................................i....................................................a........................................................ 3'-0" 3-1/2" x 3-1/2" x 6" x 4" x 5/16" 3-1/2" x 3-1/2" x 5/16" 5/16" .........................................:........................................................._....................................................a......................................................... 4'-0" 3-1/2" x 3-1/2" xs 6" x 4" x 5/16" 3-1/2" x 3-1/2" x 5/16" 5/16" .........................................9........................................................J....................................................;,......................................................... Smith Campus Center Miscellaneous Metals 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05500-8 ,�„ I. In addition to requirements specified herein and shown on drawings, all surfaces exposed to view shall be clean and free from dirt, stains, grease, scratches, " distortions, waves, dents, buckles, tool marks, butts, and other defects which mar appearance of finished work. 2. Metal work exposed to view shall be straight and true to line or curve, smooth arrises and angles as sharp as practicable, miters formed in true alignment, profiles accurately intersecting, and with joints carefully matched to produce continuity of line and design. 3. Metal work exposed to view shall receive surface preparation; SSPC-10 Near White Blast Cleaning. 4. Exposed fastenings, where permitted, shall be of the same material, color and finish as the metal to which applied, unless otherwise indicated, and shall be of the smallest practicable size. 2.6 ALUMINUM SOFFITS AND FASCIAS A. General: Provide aluminum material with surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes where exposed to view in the finished unit. Do not use materials with pitting, seam marks, roller marks, variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by referenced standards for stretcher leveled metal sheet, stains, discoloration, or other imperfections. B. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods of aluminum fabrications with those of adjoining products and construction to produce integrated assemblies with closely fitting joints and with edges and surfaces aligned with one another in the relationship indicated. C. Increase metal thickness or reinforce metal with concealed stiffeners, backing materials, or both, as required to produce surfaces whose variations in flatness do not exceed those permitted by referenced standards for stretcher leveled metal sheet and to impart sufficient strength for indicated use. 1. Support joints with concealed stiffeners as required to hold exposed faces of adjoining sheets in flush alignment. 2. Fill space between stiffeners with sound deadening insulation attached to face sheet with cold applied asphalt mastic, unless otherwise indicated. D. Assemble aluminum elements in the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. E. Build in straps, plates, and brackets as required for supporting and anchoring fabricated items to adjoining construction. Reinforce sheet metal units as required to attach and support other construction. F. Conceal fasteners unless otherwise noted on drawings. Size fasteners to support closures and trim, with fasteners spaced to prevent buckling or waviness in finished surfaces. G. Miter or cope trim members at corners to form tight joints. Smith Campus Center Miscellaneous Metals 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05500-7 am 4W In the event that shop-fabricated miscellaneous metal items do not fit the field condition, the item shall be returned to the shop for correction. C. Cutting: Cut metal by sawing, shearing, or blanking. Flame cutting will be permitted only if cut edges are ground back to clean, smooth edges. Make cuts accurate, clean, sharp and free of burrs, without deforming adjacent surfaces or metals. D. Holes: Drill or cleanly punch holes; do not burn. E. Connections: Make connections with tight joints, capable of developing full strength of member, flush unless indicated otherwise, formed to exclude water where exposed to weather. Locate joints where least conspicuous. Unless indicated otherwise, weld or bolt shop connections; bolt or screw field connections. Provide expansion and contraction joints to allow for thermal movement of metal at locations and by methods approved by Architect. 1. Welding a. Shall be in accordance with "Standard Code for Welding in Building Construction" of the American Welding Society, and shall be done with electrodes and/or methods recommended by the manufacturer of the metals being welded. b. Welds shall be continuous, except where spot welding is specifically permitted. Welds exposed to view shall be ground flush and dressed smooth with and to match finish of adjoining surfaces; undercut metal edges where welds are required to be flush. C. All welds on or behind surfaces which will be exposed to view shall be done so as to prevent distortion of finished surface. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from all welded surfaces. 2. Bolts and Screws: Make threaded connections tight with threads entirely .� concealed. Use lock nuts. Bolts and screw heads exposed to view shall be flat and countersunk. Cut off projecting ends of exposed bolts and screws flush with nuts or adjacent metal. F. Operating Mechanism: Operating devices (i.e. pivots, hinges, etc.) mechanism and hardware used in connection with this work shall be fabricated, assembled, installed and adjusted after installation so that they will operate smoothly, freely, noiselessly and without excessive friction. G. Built-In Work: Furnish anchor bolts, inserts, plates and any other anchorage devices, and all other items specified under this Section of the Specifications to be built into concrete, masonry or work of other trades, with necessary templates and instructions, and in ample time to facilitate proper placing and installation. H. Supplementary Parts: Provide as necessary to complete each item of work, even though such supplementary parts are not shown or specified. I. Coordination: Accurately cut, fit, drill and tap work of this Section to accommodate and fit work of other trades. Furnish or obtain, as applicable, templates and drawings to or from applicable trades for proper coordination of this work. J. Exposed Work No Smith Campus Center Miscellaneous Metals 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05500-6 ,w 4. Minimum weight of galvanized coating shall be two (2) oz. per square foot of surface. D. Fabricate joints which will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. E. All galvanized materials must be inspected for compliance with these specifications and marked with a stamp indicating the name of the galvanizer, the weight of the coating, and the appropriate ASTM number. F. To minimize surface imperfection (eg: flux inclusions), material to be galvanized shall be dipped into a solution of Zinc Ammonium Chloride (pre-flux) immediately prior to galvanizing. The type of galvanizing process utilizing a flux blanket overlaying the molten zinc will not be permitted. G. After galvanizing all materials not exposed to view must be chromated by dipping material in a 0.2% chromic acid solution. H. Galvanized surfaces, where exposed to view, must have a smooth, level surface finish. Where this does not occur, piece shall be rejected and replaced to the acceptance of the Architect. 2.4 PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. Whenever dissimilar metals will be in contact, separate contact surfaces by coating each contact surface prior to assembly or installation with one coat of specified so bituminous paint, which shall be in addition to the specified shop prime paint. Mask off those surfaces not required to receive protective coating. 2.5 WORKMANSHIP A. General 1. Miscellaneous metal work shall be fabricated by an experienced fabricator or manufacturer and installed by an experienced tradesman. 2. Materials, methods of fabrication, fitting, assembly, bracing, supporting, fastening, operating devices, and erection shall be in accordance with drawings and specifications, approved shop drawings, and best practices of the industry, using new and clean materials as specified, having structural properties sufficient to safety sustain or withstand stresses and strains to which materials and assembled work will be subjected. 3. All work shall be accurately and neatly fabricated, assembled and erected. 4. All fabrication shall be done prior to finishing. 5. Tolerances, as a minimum, shall be consistent with the AISC tolerances for on Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel, Section 10 of the Code of Standard Practice, except where more stringent tolerances are required by design. 6. Tolerances for fabrication and installation shall be half those normally acceptable for structural steel. 7. Surfaces shall be blast cleaned and receive yhe finish specified herein. B. Shop Assembly: Insofar as practicable, fitting and assembly of work shall be done in shop. Shop assembled work in largest practical sizes to minimize field work. It is the responsibility of the miscellaneous metal subcontractor to assure himself that the shop-fabricated miscellaneous metal items will properly fit the field condition. Smith Campus Center Miscellaneous Metals 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05500-5 E. Shop Paint: Shop prime all non-galvanized miscellaneous metal items using Series 88 Azeron Primer made by Tnemec or approved equal. F. Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187. G. Galvanize Repair Coating: For touching up galvanized surfaces after erection, " provide Z.R.C. Cold Galvanizing Compound made by Z.R.C. Chemical Products Co. 2.2 PREWE PAINTING A. Scope: All ferrous metal (except galvanized steel) shall be cleaned and shop painted with one coat of specified ferrous metal primer. No shop prime paint required on galvanized steel or aluminum work. �•* B. Cleaning: Conform to Steel Structures Painting Council Surface Preparation Specification SP 3 (latest edition) "Power Tool Cleaning: for cleaning of ferrous metals which are to receive shop prime coat. C. Application 1. Apply shop prime coat immediately after cleaning metal. Apply paint in dry .. weather or under cover. Metal surfaces shall be free from frost or moisture when painted. Paint all metal surfaces including edges, joints, holes, corners, etc. 2. Paint surfaces which will be concealed after shop assembly prior to such �. assembly. Apply paint in accordance with approved paint manufacturer's printed instructions, and the use of any thinners, adulterants or admixtures shall be only as stated in said instructions. �* 3. Paint shall uniformly and completely cover the metal surfaces, 2.0 mils minimum dry film thickness. No work shall be shipped until the shop prime coat thereon has dried. D. Touch-Up: In the shop, after assembly and in the field, after installation of work of this Section, touch-up damaged or abraded portions of shop prime paint with specified ferrous metal primer. E. Apply one shop coat to fabricated ferrous metal items, except apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first. 2.3 GALVANIZING A. Scope: All ferrous metal exposed to the weather, and all ferrous metals indicated on drawings or in specifications to be galvanized, shall be cleaned and then hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. B. Cleaning: Thoroughly clean metal surfaces of all mill scale, rust, dirt, grease, oil, moisture and other contaminants prior to galvanizing. C. Application: Hot-dip galvanizing shall be applied in accordance with: 1. ASTM A 123: Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2. ASTM A 153: Galvanized Coating on Iron and Steel Hardware - Table 1. 3. ASTM A446: Galvanized Coating on Steel Sheets. Smith Campus Center Miscellaneous Metals 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05500-4 ,�„ so PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Ferrous Metals 1. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. 2. All steel exposed to view shall be Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel. 3. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A36. 4. Steel Bar Grating: ASTM A569 or ASTM A36. 5. Steel Tubing: Cold formed, ASTM A500; or hot rolled, ASTM A501. 6. Structural Steel Sheet: Hot rolled, ASTM A570; or cold rolled, ASTM A611, Class 1;of grade required for design loading. so 7. Galvanized Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A446, of grade required for design loading. Coating designation as indicated, or if not indicated, G90. 8. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, type and grade as selected by fabricator and as required for design loading; black finish unless galvanizing is indicated; standard weight (Schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated. 9. Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A48, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. 10. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A47, grade as selected by fabricator. 11. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 12. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either _ malleable iron, ASTM A47, or cast steel, ASTM A27. Provide bolts, washers and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized, ASTM A153. B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required: 1. Extruded Bars and Shapes: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T6. 2. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy 6061-T6. 3. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247, alloy 6061-T6. 4. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, alloy A356-T6. C. Grout: Non-shrink, non-metallic grout conforming to the requirements of Section 03300. D. Fasteners 1. General: Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required. go 2. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A307, Grade A. 3. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36. 4. Lag Bolts: ASME B 18.2.1. NO 5. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3. 6. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME B18.22.1. 7. Masonry Anchorage Devices: Expansion shields, FS FF-S-325. 8. Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class and style as required. 9. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, ASME B18.21.1. Smith Campus Center Miscellaneous Metals 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05500-3 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop .. drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work. B. Shop Assembly: Pre-assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for re-assembly and coordinated installation. C. Reference Standards: The work is subject to requirements of applicable portions of �** the following standards: L "Manual of Steel Construction", American Institute of Steel Construction. 2. AWS D1-1 "Structural Welding Code", American Welding Society. 3. SSPC SP-3 "Surface Preparation Specification No. 3, Power Tool Cleaning", Steel Structures Painting Council. 4. SSPC PA-1 "Painting Application Specification", Steel Structures Painting Council. 5. "Handbook on Bolt, Nut and Rivet Standards", Industrial Fasteners Institute. D. Carbon Steel fabricator: Painted carbon steel components shall be fabricated by a , company specializing in the fabrication of Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS) with a minimum of 10 years experience. E. Installer: The work of this section shall be installed by a company specializing in the erection of the specified system with a minimum of 10 years experience. Manufacturer shall verify the competence of the installer, and ensure that they are an approved installing dealer. Submit, with bid description, photos of at least 3 projects completed in the last 5 years with similar scope and complexity. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Literature: Submit manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams, anchor details and installation instructions for products to be used in the fabrication of miscellaneous metal work, including paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings for the fabrication and erection of all assemblies of miscellaneous iron and aluminum work which are not completely shown by manufacturer's data sheets. Include plans and elevations at not less than 1" to 1'-0" 's scale, and include details of sections and connections at not less than 3" to 1-0" scale. Show anchorage and accessory items. C. Samples: Submit fabricated samples (of sufficient size to fully show construction, .� materials and finishes) of items 3, 5, 6 and 7 as enumerated under paragraph 1.2 herein. D. Welding shall be indicated on shop drawings using AWS symbols and showing length, size and spacing (if not continuous). Auxiliary views shall be shown to clarify all welding. Notes such as 1/4" weld, weld and tack weld are not acceptable. Smith Campus Center Miscellaneous Metals 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05500-2 Ow SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 04 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the miscellaneous metal work as indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but not limited to, the following: 1. Rough hardware. 2. Vertical steel ladders and ship's ladders. 3. Aluminum soffit and fascia panels. 4. Loose steel lintels. 5. Steel framing and supports for sun shade (at Main Lounge), trellis, operable acoustic panels (in Multi-Use), and for other construction not included as part of work of other trades. 6. Steel girt support for curtainwall. 7. Aluminum gratings and frames. 8. Elevator divider beams, guide rail beams and elevator pit hold down beams. 9. Countertop supports. 10. Masonry support steel. 11. Sleeves in concrete walls and slabs. 12. Steel framing, bracin g, supports, anchors bolts shims fastenings, and all other supplementary parts indicated on drawings or as required to complete each item of work of this Section. 13. Prime painting, touch-up painting, galvanizing and separation of dissimilar metals for work of this Section. 14. Cutting, fitting, drilling and tapping work of this Section to accommodate work of other Sections and of concrete, masonry or other materials as required for attaching and installing work of this Section. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Structural steel - Section 05120. B. Steel stairs - Section 05510. C. Carpentry - Section 06200. on D. Architectural woodwork - Section 06400. E. Curtainwall, storefronts, vestibules, and entrances - Section 08410 F. Painting - Section 09900. Smith Campus Center Miscellaneous Metals 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05500-1 an so exceed 16" o.c. spacing for nail or power-driven fasteners, or 12" o.c. for other types of attachment. Provide fasteners at corners and ends of tracks. 3. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb no walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. Space studs as shown on drawings; but not to exceed 16" o.c. max. 4. Where stud system abuts structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, anchor with stiffeners to supporting structure. 5. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing in metal framing systems required for rigidity and wherever walls or partitions are indicated to support fixtures, railings, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim and furnishings and similar work requiring attachment to the wall or partition. Where type of supplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with the stud manufacturer's recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering the weight or loading resulting from the item supported. 6. At track butt joints, abutting pieces of track shall be securely anchored to a common structural element, or they shall be butt welded or spliced together. 7. Studs shall be plumbed, aligned and securely attached to the flanges or webs of both upper and lower tracks by welding or screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges. .A 8. Temporary bracing shall be provided until erection is completed. 9. Wall stud bridging shall be installed by welding in a manner to provide resistance to both minor axis bending and rotation. Bridging rows shall be spaced according to the following schedule: a. Walls up to 10 ft.height: 2 rows of bridging equally spaced. b. Walls over 10 ft. height: Bridging equally spaced at 4 ft. o.c. max. 10. Splices in axially loaded studs shall not be permitted. 11. Provide insulation equal to that specified in Section 07210 in all doubled jamb studs and doubled header members which will not be accessible to the insulation trades. 12. At corners of stud walls provide 3 studs min., located so as to provide surfaces for attachment of all interior and exterior facings. 13. Provide web stiffeners at reaction points where indicated by final shop drawings. 14. Frame wall openings larger than T-0" square with double stud at each jamb of frame except where more than 2 are either shown or indicated in manufacturer's instructions. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jack studs with stud shoes or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height studs of wall. Secure stud system wall opening frame in manner indicated on final shop drawings. 15. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints with separate studs; do not bridge the joint with components of stud system. B. Field Painting: Touch-up shop-applied galvanized coating damaged during handling and installation. Use galvanizing repair coating specified herein for galvanized ., surfaces. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 Cold Formed Metal Framing 05400-4 OR reinforcements, fasteners and accessories, as recommended by manufacturer for the applications indicated, as needed to provide a complete metal framing system. B. Materials and Finishes: Studs shall be galvanized A525, Grade G-90 to correspond to the requirements of ASTM A446. 1. All galvanized studs and accessories, 16 ga. or heavier, shall be formed from steel that conforms to the requirements of ASTM A446 with a yield of 50 ksi and as set forth in Section A3.1 of the AISI "Specifications for the Design of Cold- formed Steel Structural Members:, latest edition(1986). 2. All galvanized studs and accessories 18 ga., shall be formed from steel that conforms to the requirements of ASTM A446, with a yield of 37 ksi and as set forth in Section A3.1 of the AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold-formed Steel Structural Members", latest edition(1986). 3. All galvanized studs and accessories, 20 ga., shall be formed from steel that conforms to the requirements of ASTM A-446, with a yield of 33 ksi and as set go forth in Section 1.2 of the AISI"Specification for the Design of Cold-formed Steel Structural Members", latest edition(1986). 2.3 GALVANIZING TOUCH-UP A. For touching up damaged galvanized surfaces after erection, provide Z.R.C. Cold Galvanizing Compound made by Z.R.C. Chemical Products Co. „ 2.4 FABRICATION A. Framing components may be prefabricated into panels prior to erection. Fabricate panels plumb, square, true to line and braced against racking with joints welded. Perform lifting of prefabricated panels in a manner to prevent damage or distortion in any members in the assembly. B. Fastenings: Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components by welding,bolting or screw fasteners,as standard with manufacturer. C. Wire tying of framing components is not permitted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where cold formed metal framing is to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF FRAMING A. General 1. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install metal framing systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed or written instructions and recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Runner tracks: Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately to the layout at base and tops of studs. Secure tracks as recommended by the stud manufacturer for the type of construction involved, except do not Smith Campus Center Cold Formed Metal Framing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05400-3 ,. 1. Submit shop drawings for special components and installations not fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include placing drawings for framing members showing size and gage designations, number, type, location and spacing. Indicate supplemental bracing, splices, accessories and details as may be required for proper installation. 2. If the Contractor elects to prefabricate framing members into panels for erection, he shall submit shop drawings of such panels at suitable scale showing all dimensions, components and methods of fastening and support. C. Engineering Data 1. Submit Engineering Data drawings to the Architect for review. The Contractor is responsible for the structural design and supports for the cold formed metal frame and must show his proposed system on these drawings. 2. These drawings must show all load conditions and design calculations relative to connections, fastening devices and anchorage, as well as size and gauge of members. Calculations and drawings must be prepared by a Structural Engineer licensed in the State of Massachussetts and shall be signed and sealed by this Engineer. 1.6 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Cold formed metal framing system shall be designed, fabricated and installed to withstand a lateral loading (wind load) as required by applicable building code or regulations for the maximum wall height required, with deflection limited to 1/240 of partition height,minimum 20psf. B. Stud Schedule,based on uniform lateral (wind) load of 20 psf Height Steel Stud Deflection Limit 10'-14' 6SW20 @ 16"o.c. L/360 14'-16' 6SW16 @ 16"o.c. L/360 22' 6SW 12 @ 16"o.c. L/240 31' 8SW12 @ 16"o.c. L/240 Blast Wall (2) 8SW14 @ 12",back/back L/240 1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Protect metal framing units from rusting and damage. Deliver to one project site in manufacturer's unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with name, brand, type and grade. Store off the ground in a dry ventilated space or protect with suitable waterproof coverings. PART 2 PRODUCTS .M 2.1 MANUFACTURER Im A. Provide cold formed steel framing manufactured by Marino, Dale Industries, Superior Steel Studs,U.S. Gypsum Co., or approved equal. 2.2 METAL FRAMING A. System Components: With each type of metal framing required, provide manufacturer's standard steel runners, (tracks), blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes, M. Smith Campus Center Cold Formed Metal Framing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05400-2 MW SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS !! A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the cold formed metal framing as indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein,including but not limited to,the following: 1. "C" shaped steel studs for exterior wall construction, including fascias and soffits. 2. Anchors and accessories. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Masonry-Section 04200. B. Structural steel- Section 05100. C. Carpentry-Section 06200. D. Building insulation- Section 07200. E. Gypsum drywall and framing accessories -Section 09250. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Component Design: Compute structural properties of studs in accordance with AISI "Cold Form Steel Design Manual". B. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Where framing units are components of assemblies indicated for a fire-resistance rating, including those required for compliance with governing regulations, provide units which have been approved by governing authorities having jurisdiction. C. Metal framing shall conform to the following ASTM standards: 1. A-653 Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)Zinc-Iron Alloy- ""' Coated(Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. C-1007 Standard Specification for the Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For information only, submit copies of manufacturer's product information and installation instructions for each item of cold formed framing and accessories. B. Shop Drawings Am Smith Campus Center Cold Formed Metal Framing 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05400-1 .■ D. Sheet metal closures and continuous edging as required. 14 gage sump pan for roof .. drains. E. Supplemental miscellaneous steel ASTM A36, support framing as required. as 2.2 FABRICATION A. Deck Section Requirements: Comply with the depth and gage requirements,criteria MW indicated and as listed below. 1. Where metal decking with concrete occurs below roofing waterproofing membranes, provide metal decking with perforations at the bottom to permit ** venting of moisture from concrete. 2. Comply with other design criteria as indicated in metal decking notes. B. Lengths: Provide metal-decking panels of the length required to span continuously over "" 3 supports or longer unless otherwise indicated 2.3 QUALITY CONTROL an A. The Owner will engage, at his own expense, a Testing Agency to inspect metal decking installation and to submit reports to the Owner. 1. The Testing Agency will be responsible for conducting and interpreting the tests, am will state in each report whether or not the test results comply with the Contract Documents, will specifically note any deviations therefrom, and will indicate corrective measures required and taken. 2. Provide the Testing Agency with the following: a. A complete set of shop and erection drawings. b. Proper facilities, including scaffolding, temporary work platforms and �. hoisting facilities for inspection of the Work in the field. 3. The Contractor shall provide and pay for corrective measures, including additional and more complete testing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION A. Attach panels to each structural support with 3/4 in. fusion welds spaced not more than 12 in. on center. At joints,weld both panels to support button-punch or weld side NO joints. Do not hang concentrated loads exceeding 50 lbs. from the metal decking. Provide tabs or clips for hanging loads if indicated. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field welding is subject to inspection by the Owner's Testing Agency. Give 3 days notice prior to welding. END OF SECTION Smith College Campus Center Metal Decking 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05300-2 eW SECTION 05300 METAL DECKING IMP PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and services, and perform operations required for installation of composite and/or non- composite Metal Deck, including supplementary framing and necessary reinforcement such as diagonal supports and any other miscellaneous supports required around columns,wind bracing,and pipe and shaft floor openings and the like as required to maintain the structural integrity of the metal deck. B. Related Sections: 1. Structural Steel—Section 05120. 2. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03300. 1.2 STANDARDS A. Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following standards and * codes latest edition): 1. AISC - "Light Gage Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual"; except as modified by governing codes and the Contract Documents. PO 2 AWS B 3.0 Part II,"Structural Welding Code." 3 SDI"Steel Roof Deck Design Manual." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop and erection drawings for all decking indicating type, fastening methods, closure pieces, type and sequence of welding, gages of metal, framing of openings, details of special conditions and including design calculations. B. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's data for proprietary items. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel for Galvanized Decking: ASTM A653, Grade 40. Galvanizing to comply with ASTM A653, Coating Designation G60 or approved equal. B. Galvanized Touch-Up Paint: Zinc rich paint for repairing galvanized surfaces and field welds. C. Accessories: Cover plates to close gaps and access openings. Sealed closures for ends of cells on single-unit decking. Rubber closures top and underside for closure of wall construction. Smith College Campus Center Metal Decking 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 05300-2 J. Do not, during construction, overload member beyond the design limit. If such members require reinforcing or replacement (larger size) submit contractor's proposed scheme to the SER for review prior to the work. Calculations must be performed by PE registered in the State of Massachusetts. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Connections shall comply with requirements specified in Part 2.1 and 2.3. B. Erection Bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds,and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. 1. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. �. 2. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. C. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas-cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in primary structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members that are not under stress, as acceptable to the Contracting Officer's Representative. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted. 3.3 FIELD TOUCH-UP PAINTING A. Field painting shall comply with the requirements specified in Part 2.7 Shop Painting. B. After erection, clean unpainted areas adjacent to field connections, and damaged areas to the shop coat to the paint manufacturer's requirements for the shop coat, and paint with the same primer. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Individual pieces shall be plumbed, leveled and aligned in accordance with the requirements of the "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." B. Dimensions shown on Drawings are based on an assumed design temperature of 70° F. Fabrication and erection procedures shall take into account the ambient temperature range at the time of the respective operations. C. Erection tolerance of adjustable items per AISC Code of Standard Practice - Section 7.11.3.3 shall be adjusted such that this location is within 3/16 inch of inch (above 3/8") of this location shown on the contract drawings. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field testing and inspection requirements shall comply with Part 2.8 Source Quality Control. Im END OF SECTION ko oft ,o Smith Campus Center Structural Steel 100% Construction Document: 01.11.12 05120 - 8 have been made or until compensate adjustments to structural steel work have been agreed upon with Contacting Officer's Representative. B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection proceeds. Provide adequate temporary bracing of the structure during the erection for wind and construction loads. C. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete work. D. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 1. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices. 2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. 3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure. 4. For proprietary grout materials, comply with manufacturer's instructions. so E. Field Assembly: Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances. 2. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating temperature of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be when completed and in service. 3. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop drawings. F. Check the alignment and elevations of all column supports and location of all anchor bolts with transit and level instruments before starting erection. Notify Engineer of any errors. Obtain Engineer's approval of methods proposed for correcting errors prior to proceeding with corrections and erection. G. Drift pins may be used only to align the several parts. They shall not be used in such manner as to distort or damage the metal. H. Thermal cutting of structural steel to correct errors shall not be permitted except if prior approval is received from the Engineer.(SER) I. Make all necessary provisions for temporary bracing and for completion of erection where structural members are temporarily left out for erection at a later date. Smith Campus Center Structural Steel 100% Construction Document: 01.11.12 05120-7 ow WAN 1. The Inspector shall make all tests and inspections specifically indicated on the drawings and as set forth in AWS D1.1 procedure. 2. The edges of material to be welded and plates greater than 1-1/2 inch thickness ... used in bending or "across-the-grain" tension will be ultrasonically examined for evidence of laminations, inclusions or other discontinuities. The extent to which No such defects will be permitted and the extent of repair permitted shall be determined by the Engineer and made in accordance with AWS D 1.1. 3. The root layer of all multiple pass welds and the backside of groove welds made from both sides, after back gouging or chipping, will be examined by magnetic so particle inspection (or dye penetration if magnetic particle inspection is not feasible). 4 At least 10 percent of all other welds of each type and size will be examined 00 ultrasonically or by magnetic particles, or by dye penetrant and, specifically, as follows: a. 100 percent of all tension groove welded joints and connections by ultrasonic. b. Visual inspection of all fillet welds. c. Testing of fillet welds by either magnetic particle or dye penetrant. 5. Ultrasonic inspection will be performed in accordance with Section 6, Part C of .. the AWS D1.1 by inspectors who qualify to NDT Level H. 6. Shop welds will be inspected in the shop before the work is painted or approved for shipment. 7. The Inspector will make joint tests and inspections of high strength bolt connections as required by AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." 8. Where inspection reveals non-conformance to the specifications, the extent of .w inspection will be increased as much as necessary to assure that the full extent of the non-conformance in a joint has been found, and to assure that the same occurrences are not present on similar parts or under similar circumstances. .� 9. Work that is not acceptable will be designated by "Repair" or "Reject", as applicable. 10. The Inspector will maintain a daily record of the work he has inspected and its disposition. One copy of each of the reports will be submitted to the Engineer, Architect and Owner's Representative on a weekly basis and field copy handed to the Contractor's Project Superintendent on a daily basis. Welding report of tests shall be made in the form prescribed in the"Structural Welding Code." D. Design of Members and Connections: Details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at site whenever possible without causing delay in the work. Promptly notify the Architect whenever design of members and connections for any portion of structure are not clearly indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION A. Surveys: Employ a licensed land surveyor for accurate erection of structural steel. Check elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and similar devices, before erection work proceeds, and report discrepancies to Contracting Officer's Representative. Do not proceed with erection until corrections Smith Campus Center Structural Steel 100% Construction Document: 01.11.12 05120 -6 architect shall be bent in the shop. Following is the list of shops that provide the Am bending service: 1. "Marks metal Technology", 10300 SE Jennifer, Clackamas, OR 97015. Tel: (503) 656-0901 2. "Oakley Steel Products Company", 650 S. 28h Avenue, Bellwood, fL 60104. Tel: (708) 544-7970 3. "N. J. McCutchen, Inc.", 123 W. Sonora St., Stockton, CA 95203. Tel: (209) 466- 9704. 2.7 SHOP PAINTING A. All structural steel shall receive a shop coat of primer paint except as follows: ► 1. Members encased in concrete. 2. Contact surfaces of welded connections and areas within 2 in.of field welds. 3. Contact surfaces of high-strength bolted connections. 4. Surfaces receiving stud shear connectors. 5. Members concealed by interior building finish as permitted by local codes. 6. Apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. X" Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steel work to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council(SSPC). C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply specified primer to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils, except for finished surfaces. No painting shall be done unless surface temperature of the steel is 5° F above the dew point at which condensation will occur. Apply paint thoroughly and evenly to dry surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use painting methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. D. Treat finished surfaces with rust inhibiting coating. 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and inspection of structural steel will be performed by a testing agency retained by the Owner. Provide the testing agency with the following: 1. A complete set of accepted documents required under Section 1.3, "Submittals," approved by the Engineer. 2. Cutting lists, order sheets, material bills, and shipping bills. 3. Information as to time and place of all rollings and shipment of material to shops. 4. Representative sample pieces as may be requested by the testing agency (i.e. bolt types, sizes, welding,rods,paint). 5. Accessibility for full and ample means and assistance for testing all material. 6. Proper facilities, including but not limited to scaffolding, temporary work platforms, etc., for inspection of the work in the shop and field. B. Each person installing connections shall be assigned an identifying symbol or mark and all shop and field connections shall be so identified so that the Inspector can refer back to the person making the connection. C. The Inspector will perform his duties, when possible, in such a way that fabrication and erection are not unnecessarily delayed or impeded, and as follows: Smith Campus Center Structural Steel 100% Construction Document: 01.11.12 05120- 5 OF or F. Detail horizontal members with natural mill camber up. Provide additional camber on horizontal members, bracing and trusses as indicated on the Drawings. aw 2.3 CONNECTIONS A. Connections shall be of the types shown on the Drawings, unless prior approval is so obtained from the Engineer (SER). Where connections have not been shown, develop and design connections for loads, forces and moments as indicated on the Drawings or noted in the general notes, and submit calculations to the Engineer for approval. B. Connections for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (HESS) shall be in .m accordance with Section 10 (AESS) of the AISC Code of Standard Practices. Locations shall be as designated on the drawings and subject to approval of the Architect. 2.4 BOLTING A. Length of bolts shall be sufficient to be flush with the nuts or shall not extend not more than 1/4 in. beyond the nuts after installation. Enter bolts into holes without damaging the thread. B. Use high-strength bolts in bearing and/or friction as shown. Make high-strength bolted joints without the use of erection bolts. Bring members tightly together with sufficient high-strength "fitting-up" bolts which shall be retightened as all the bolts are finally tightened. Bolts that have been completely tightened shall be marked for identification. C. Tightening of bolts shall progress systematically from the most rigid part of the joint to its free edges. D. Final tightening of high-strength bolts shall be performed by calibrated wrenches, .w ascertaining accuracy at least once daily for each bolt diameter, length and grade being installed. Turn-of-nut method, use of load indicator washers or tension control bolts may be used upon approval of the Engineer(SER). ? E. Draw unfinished bolt heads and nuts tight against the work with a suitable wrench. Mutilate bolt threads of unfinished bolts to prevent the nuts from backing off. an 2.5 WELDING A. Do not begin structural welding until joint elements are bolted or tacked in intimate contact and adjusted to dimensions shown on Drawings, or both, with allowance for a` any weld shrinkage that is expected. Weld heavy sections and those having a high degree of restraint with low hydrogen type electrodes. No members are to be spliced without approval by the Engineer(SER). •• B. Welding shall be performed by operators who have been certified in accordance with AWS standard qualification procedure for the type of work required. Welders shall have been qualified within the preceding six months or qualified within the preceding .. year, reexamined per AWS, and licensed where required by local Authorities having jurisdiction. C. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will produce true alignment of axes without warp. 2.6 BENDING A. Edge beams and stair stingers that need to be bent to the desired geometry shown on architectural, structural drawings, and finally on the shop drawings approved by the Smith Campus Center Structural Steel 100%Construction Document: 01.11.12 05120 -4 F. Unfinished Bolts: ASTM A307 regular hexagon-bolt types,minimum 3/4 in. diameter. G. Stud Shear Connectors: Studs complying with "Structural Welding Code," type and size as shown. H. Metallic Shrinkage Resistant Grout: Premixed factory-packaged ferrous aggregate grouting compound. I. Paint 1. For All Steel Not Otherwise Specified: Primer one of the following or approved equal: a. "Series 88 Azeron Primer" (Tnemec Company, Inc.). b. "Noxide Rust Inhibitive Primer" (Pratt and Lambert). c. "No. 67-Y-746" (E.I. DuPont de Nemours). 2. Finished Surfaces: Protected by an approved rust-inhibitive coating, readily removable prior to erection. 3. Exterior exposed steel: Zinc rich primer in an organic vehicle,of the following: a) Tnemec-Zinc (Tnemec Co., Inc.) b) Zinc Lock 309 (Porter Paint Co.) 2.2 FABRICATION A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabrication plants shall be certified by the AISC ,r Quality Certification Program for Category H. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members where indicated. 1. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. 2. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of markings,burrs, and other defects. B. Finish column and bearing stiffeners to give bearing over the cross section as per AISC and AWS requirements. Finish contact surfaces of bearing and base plate if not within ASTM A6 mill tolerances. It is not necessary to plane bottom surfaces of plates on grout beds. C. Drill or punch holes at right angles to the surface of the metal, not more than 1/16 in. larger than the connector diameter. Oversized and slotted holes require permission from Engineer. Do not make or enlarge holes by burning. Holes shall be clean-cut without torn or ragged edges. Remove outside burrs as required for proper bolting. AAR D. Provide holes, slots and openings I in members, where required and in members to permit connection of the work of other trades, together with necessary reinforcing when indicated on the Drawings. Use suitable templates for proper location of these so openings. Steel requiring adjustment shall be provided with slotted holes as shown. Where openings are shown on the Drawings or shop drawings, no change in location will be permitted without prior approval from the Engineer. E. Manual thermal cutting shall be done only with a mechanically guided torch. An unguided torch may be used provided the cut is within 1/8 in. of the required line. Smith Campus Center Structural Steel 100%Construction Document: 01.11.12 05120-3 4. Welding sequences as required by"Structural Welding Code." 5. Schedules for fabrication. 6. Erection drawings, erection sequence including piece numbers and location. 7. Cleaning and painting schedules. 8. Quality assurance program. 9. Submit letter of acceptance concurring with as-built foundation support locations, including anchor bolt locations prior to steel erection. C. Calculations: Submit calculations of all connections unless specifically shown on Drawings according to the load/force requirements indicated on the Drawings. Calculations shall bear the seal of a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Massachusetts, and shall be submitted to the Structural Engineer of Record (SER) for appropriateness and acceptance. ' D. Reports 1. Submit certified copies of mill test reports for all steel furnished. Perform mechanical and chemical tests for all material regardless of thickness or use. No part of the ASTM Specifications will be waived without written consent of the Engineer. 2. Submit copies of prequalified and other welding procedures in form prescribed in AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code." 3. Submit welder certifications. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of work. B. Do not handle structural steel until paint has thoroughly dried. Care shall be exercised to avoid abrasions and other damage. C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Stack material out of mud and dirt and provide for proper drainage. Protect from damage or soiling by adjacent construction operations. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of work that will be exposed to view, use only materials that are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust and �. scale seam marks, rolled trade names and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating, and applying surface finishes. B. Structural Steel: ASTM A572-Grade 50 unless otherwise shown. C. Plates and Bars: ASTM A36. D. Cold-formed steel tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. E. High Strength Bolts and Nuts: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts and hardened washers, complying with ASTM A325 or ASTM A490, minimum 3/4 in. diameter. Smith Campus Center Structural Steel 100% Construction Document: 01.11.12 05120 -2 .R PW SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide structural steel in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Elevator sheave beams and elevator tie-downs. 2. Miscellaneous metals not specifically shown on structural drawings. 3. Loose lintels. 4. Metal Decking-Section 05300 5. Setting anchor bolts (furnished herein) for base plates, leveling and bearing plates. 6. Grouting of base plates, leveling and bearing plates. 7. Field painting except as specified herein. 8. Setting wall plates. 1.2 STANDARDS A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following(latest edition): 1. AISC "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings." 2. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 3. AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." 4. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code." 5. SSPC "Steel Structures Painting Manual,Volume 2, Systems and Specifications." 6. OSHA 1970 as amended to date of contract. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product data or manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for following products. Include laboratory test reports and other data to show compliance with specifications(including specified standards). 1. Structural steel (each type), including certified copies of mill reports covering chemical and physical properties. 2. High-strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washers. Include Direct Tension Indicators if used 3. Structural steel primer paint. 4. Shrinkage resistant grout. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop standards prior to submitting shop and erection drawings for all structural steel components. Submit shop and erection drawings, prepared under supervision of a Structural Engineer licensed to practice in the State of Massachusetts, indicating the following: 1. Types of materials, including sizes and weights of members, identifying by piece numbers and locations. 2. Location,types and details of connections. so 3. Openings, including reinforcement as shown on the Drawings. Smith Campus Center Structural Steel 100% Construction Document: 0 l.11.12 05120- 1 3 3 7 3 7 7 9 7 7 7 7 7 e 1 i 1 1 1 1 A f 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 WK E. Before setting, all units shall be thoroughly cleaned on all exposed surfaces by washing with fiber brush and soap powder, followed by a thorough drenching with clear water. F. All stone joint surfaces not thoroughly wet shall be drenched with clear water just prior to setting. G. Every stone shall be set in full beds of mortar with all joints slushed full. All joints shall be 1/8" unless otherwise noted. 40 H. Lead or plastic setting pads shall be placed under heavy stones., in sufficient quantity to avoid squeezing mortar out. I. Joints shall be raked out 1" and pointed with pointing mortar. If sealant joints are noted, joint shall be raked out full depth to remove back-up rod and sealant per Section 07900. 3.4 REPAIRING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace stone units which are broken, chipped, stained or otherwise damaged. Where directed, remove and replace units which do not match adjoining stonework. Patching or hiding defects in stone will not be permitted. Provide new matching units, install as specified and reseal joints to eliminate evidence of 1" replacement. Reseal defective and unsatisfactory joints to provide a neat, uniform appearance. B. Clean stonework after completion of work, using clean water and stiff-bristle brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid type cleaning agents or other cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers. 3.5 PROTECTION A. After installation and cleaning, protect stone work from damage during subsequent construction activities. B. Protect all stone work from other material that will cause stain. Stone subject to damage after setting shall be properly covered or protected. C. At completion of construction work, remove all temporary protection from the work of this Section. D. Examine all work and repair all damage. Clean soiled or stained surfaces. In the event damage is irreparable, or soiled or stained surface cannot be cleaned, then remove and replace such items at no additional cost to Owner. 1W END OF SECTION 0 t Smith Campus Center Stonework 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 04400-9 C. Erection Tolerances 1. Permissible dimensional tolerance in the building frame and/or work .. surrounding or supporting the work of this Section are stated in the applicable structural Sections of the specifications. 2. The work shall be designed to accommodate all tolerances and anticipate dead and live load movement, creep, sway and torsion of the structure without any harmful effects. D. General 1. Do not use stone units with chips, cracks, voids, stains or other defects which .�. might be visible in the finished work. Patching or hiding defects in stone will not be permitted. 2. Execute stonework by skilled mechanics, and employ skilled stone fitters at the site for all required field cutting. 3. Metals: All fastenings into or through stone shall be stainless steel, and installed at an approved spacing. 3.3 SETTING STONE A. Setting Mortar: Conform to ASTM C-270 Type N, Portland cement/lime mortar. .� B. Pointing Mortar 1. 1 part non-staining white cement with color ingredient 2. 6 parts clean selected white sand to be compatible with the colored cement; sand to pass No. 16 sieve 3. 1 part hydrated lime to make as still a mix as can be worked 4. Water as required C. Mixing i. Mix cementitious materials, admixtures, and aggregate with the proper amount of water consistency which will result in a homogeneous, still and plastic mix. 2. Mix mortar in small batches by approved mechanical mixes. Monitor volume �. of materials per batch carefully. 3. Retempering of mortar will not be permitted, and mortar that has been allowed to stand more than one or two hours shall not be used. Mortar shall be mixed and kept tempered so that it will, at all times, contain as much water as it is able to carry. D. Set stone in accordance with drawings and final shop drawings for stonework. Provide anchors, fasteners, and other attachments shown, or necessary to secure stonework in place. Shim and adjust accessories as required for proper setting of stone. Completely fill holes, slots and other sinkages for anchors, dowels, fasteners, and supports with mortar during setting of stones. Smith Campus Center 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 Stonework 04400-8 F. Make faces of stone units in same plane flush at joints. All finished surfaces shall be true in line and face. G. Sawn surfaces and edges shall be cleaned of all rust stains and iron particles. H. No patching or use of stone with chipped edges or faces shall be permitted. I. Thickness: Provide stone panel of thickness shown on drawings. Saw-cut back surfaces which will be concealed in the finished work. Provide greater stone thickness than shown where thickness shown is insufficient for the sizes or where extent of cut-outs shown decreases effective strength of the remaining material, or for proper and sufficient anchorage, suitable and adequate bearing areas for surfaces. J. Identifying marks on stone pieces shall be applied in such a manner that markings will not interfere with application or performance of sealant applied between stone joints. 2.5 CUTTING,DRILLING AND FITTING A. Provide holes and sinkages required for anchors, dowels, other devices required to support stone, and to accommodate other items which connect to or penetrate the stone. B. Include all cutting, drilling and fitting of stone work required to accommodate the work of other trades. In cutting and fitting, carefully cut and grind edges to a neat tight fit. Do cutting in such manner so as not to impair strength or appearance of stone. Use physical templates for all cutting and drilling; obtain required templates from proper trades. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION OF STRUCTURE A. Examine all parts of the supporting structure and the conditions under which the stonework is to be installed, and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the installation of stonework until - unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. B. Review installation procedures and coordinate with other work, and with other r contractors whose work will be affected by the stonework. C. Advise CM of requirements relating to his placement of any inserts which are to be used by the Stone Installer for anchoring and supporting of stonework. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Qualification of Workmen: All work shall be performed by skilled workmen, especially trained and experienced in this type of work. B. Workmanship: All parts of the work shall be erected plumb and true, in proper alignment and relation to established lines and grades, and as shown on approved shop and/or erection drawings. Smith Campus Center Stonework 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 04400-7 2.3 STONE ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturer and General: Stone anchors and accessories shall be manufactured by a company specializing in the detail and fabrication of stone approved by Architect. Provide all fastening devices, support angles, relieving angles, anchors, shims, expansion shields, etc., necessary to properly secure stone. B. Stainless Steel for All Accessories in Contact with Stone 1. Sheet, bar and plate - ASTM A-666, Type 304. 2. Fasteners, anchor bolts - AISI Type 304, non-magnetic, ASTM A67. 3. Shims - AISI Type 304. C. Setting Pads: Setting pads shall be lead; or plastic. D. Mortar: 1. White Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, non-staining. Cement shall in no case contain more than .03% by weight of soluble alkali (calculated as .. Na20). Submit mill certificates of cement and certified analysis from an approved testing laboratory. 2. Sand: ASTM C144, except graded with 100% passing No. 16 sieve, non- staining. 3. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. .. 4. Water: Potable, clear and free of deleterious materials which would impair the quality of the mortar. 5. For colored pointing mortar, provide integral, non-fading colorant made by Davis Colors or approved equal; color selected by the Architect. 2.4 FABRICATION A. All stone work shall be executed by mechanics skilled in the trade. All stone shall be well-cured and seasoned before cutting. ! B. Stone shall be accurately cut to sizes, shapes, profiles and dimensions. There shall be no deviation from jointing. Refer to Article 1.06 herein for stone fabrication tolerances. C. Exposed surfaces and edges of stone units shall be free from cracks, broken corners, chipped arrises, scratches or other defects affecting appearance. Patching of filling not permitted. D. Backs of stone units shall be sawn to true planes, parallel to face plane. E. Cut stone units full and true on faces, reveals, beds, joint and top, to the full dimensions required by drawings. All edges shall be straight and true with sharp and true arrises. All stone shall fit together accurately. .. Smith Campus Center 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 Stonework 04400-6 M 2. All stone shall be cut from matched blocks. Matched blocks shall mean blocks extracted from a single bed of stratum in the quarry. The use of blocks chosen at random, though similar in general character and color to that of the approved stone shall not be permitted, except by written permission of the Architect. w B. Examinations 1. Examination at the Quarry: Quarried blocks shall be made available for *� inspection by the Architect at his request. 2. Examination at the Fabrication Plant: Production units shall be made available for inspection by the Architect at his request. To this end, the Contractor shall, after approval of final shop drawings, advise the Architect when production has begun and of the earliest possible opportunity to inspect a representative sampling of production work. ws 3. Provide lighting that is sufficient in intensity and color range to permit an adequate examination to the satisfaction of the Architect. C. Criteria for Stone 1. Visual: All examinations, selections, and approvals shall be for the purpose of Aw achieving a final appearance of stone with greatest possible uniformity, and will be based upon the following criteria: a. All stone shall be of sound stock and uniform texture, and shall be free from holes, seams, shakes, clay pockets, spalls, stains, starts, and other defects which would impair the strength, durability and appearance of the work, as determined by the Architect. b. Inherent variations characteristic of the stone and the quarry from which the stone is to be obtained shall be brought to the attention of the Architect at the time the samples are submitted for approval, and shall be on subject to approval of the Architect. C. All stone shall be selected for background color, veining, marking and matching, shall run in even shades, and shall be set accordingly. ON D. Physical and Mechanical: All engineering calculations and design shall be based on the mechanical and physical properties of the selected stone. Performance data for these properties shall have been derived by the Contractor from tests using a min. as of 5 specimens prepared from different blocks. Contractor to submit data to the Architect. 1. Absorption and Bulk Specified Gravity (ASTM C97) 2. Flexural strength (ASTM C880) 3. Compressive Strength (ASTM C170) 4. Modulus of Rupture (ASTM C99) Smith Campus Center Stonework 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 04400-5 w E. Samples: Submit 18" x 18" samples of each stone type with required color and finish. Submit four (4) sets of color range/stone variation samples for each finish. 1.9 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect stone during storage and construction against moisture, soiling, staining and physical damage. *? B. Handle stone to prevent chipping, breakage, soiling or other damage. Do not use pinch or wrecking bars without protecting edges of stone with wood or other rigid *■ materials. Lift with wide-belt type slings wherever possible; do not use wire rope or ropes containing tar or other substances which might cause staining. If required, use wood rollers and provide cushion at end of wood slides. .w C. Store stone on wood skids or pallets, covered with non-staining, waterproof membrane. Place and stack skids and stones to distribute weight evenly and to prevent breakage or cracking of stones. Protect stored stone from weather with waterproof, non-staining covers or enclosures, but allow air to circulate around stone. D. Protect mortar materials and stonework accessories from weather, moisture and contamination with earth and other foreign materials. 1.10 JOB CONDITIONS A. Contractor must review installation procedures and coordination with other work, with CM and other trades whose work will be affected by stonework. 1.11 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage. Protect exposed surfaces of stone units from damage or defacement. Prevent materials used for installing work of this Section from staining or damaging the exposed surfaces of stone units or the exposed surfaces of the adjoining construction. B. Protect all stone work from other materials that will cause staining or defacement. Stone subject to damage after setting shall be properly covered or protected. C. No lumber or other material liable to stain or deface the stone shall be used. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STONE A. Stone Type l: Jet Mist Granite with low honed finish; available from New England Stone Industries, Inc., 15 Branch Pike, Esmond, RI 02917 (tel: 401-232-2040). 2.2 GENERAL STANDARDS A. Quarrying Supervision l. Quarrying shall be supervised and coordinated by the stone fabricator to insure .. that the as-quarried block orientations will yield finished material with characteristics as described herein. Smith Campus Center 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 Stonework 04400-4 5. Stone thickness tolerance shall be -1/4", +1/4". 1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Methods and fabrication and assembly (except as specified herein) shall be at the discretion of the Contractor provided that the visible architectural effect is not changed. B. Anchors: Adequate number and size of anchors shall be provided to satisfy load r requirements and design criteria. In any case, anchors shall not be less in size and number than shown on drawings, unless approved by the Architect. C. Variations in Structure: The work shall be designed to accommodate variation in location of surrounding and supporting work, as defined as allowable variations in that work, as specified in other sections of the project specifications. 1.7 CODES AND STANDARDS A. All work shall be performed in accordance with the applicable Construction Code(s), or the requirements of this specification, whichever are more stringent. on B. Stonework shall conform to, but not be limited to, the following codes and standards: 1. ASTM Standards referenced herein; unless otherwise specified, the current revisions of standards are applicable. 2. National Building Granite Quarries Association Specification for Architectural Granite, Current Edition. on 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and installation of all work and associated components. me 1. Show details of all conditions for every member,joint, and anchorage. 2. Include coordination details for related and adjoining work, insert drawings and erection diagrams.. B. Review of shop drawings by the Architect will not relieve the Contractor of any responsibilities for providing a system within the required performance requirements. C. Submit complete Cutting and Setting Drawings to Architect for approval. Shop on sizes, shapes, thicknesses, jointing, anchoring, connection with other work, typical and special anchoring details, supports, dimensions, setting numbers, and color range for each piece of stone. Do not fabricate any stone (except for samples) until shop drawings have been approved by the Architect. D. Manufacturer's Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each stonework accessory required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. Smith Campus Center Stonework 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 04400-3 on ap C. The Contractor by commencing the work of this Section, assumes overall responsibility to assure that all assemblies, components and parts shown or required within the work of this Section, comply with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall further warrant: 1. That all components, specified or required to satisfactorily complete the installation, are compatible with each other and with the conditions of installation and expected use. 2. Compatibility with adjoining substrates, materials and work of other trades. 3. There shall be no premature material failure due to improper design and fabrication of the stone. All materials are to fully perform to their normal life expectancy. 4. Each piece of stone shall be subject to the Architect's approval, and any piece or pieces which may be rejected after having been set shall be carefully cut out and replaced with new suitable stone without delay, and without cost to the Owner. Any piece or pieces damaged in the removal and resetting of defective pieces shall also be removed, and suitable, approved pieces provided and set. D. Architect's inspection of the stone does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to provide all stonework in accordance with the approved samples and shop drawings. E. Examination Criteria: All examinations, selections and approvals shall be for the purpose of achieving a final appearance of stone with the greatest possible ,■, uniformity, and will be based upon the following criteria: 1. Color within approved, pre-selected color ranges and finish. 2. Sequence matching of adjacent stone units, as approved by the Architect. 3. Only one source of each type of stone shall be used throughout the work. .. Stone shall match the type, pattern, color, texture and finish of samples available for inspection in the office of the Architect. 4. Conformance to approved shop drawings and details within specified dimensions and tolerances. S. Other criteria as specified in Part 2 - Products, herein. 1.5 FABRICATION AND ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Tolerances are as follows: 1. Except as noted, all joints shall be nominal 1/4". 2. Joint dimension tolerance shall be -0", +1/16". 3. Stone dimension tolerance shall be +0, -1/16" in both directions with 90 deg. angle for all corners. 4. Stone face dimension tolerance (flatness) shall be +0", -1/16" in all directions. Smith Campus Center Stonework 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 04400-2 SECTION 04400 STONEWORK PART 1 GENERAL Pill 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. am 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES ww A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the stonework as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Granite stair treads and trim. 2. Granite pavers at stair landings. 3. Granite ledge and outer hearth at fireplace. 4. Anchors, accessories and all fastening devices as required to securely anchor in place all the stone. Where such items are to be built-in or cast-in to the structure under other Sections, coordinate and ensure proper location of same. 5. Mortar setting beds and grouting of stone joints. 6. Drilling, fitting and cutting of stone work as required for the proper completion of the work. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Steel stairs - Section 05510. am 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The work of this Section shall be performed by Contractors who are regularly engaged in the engineering, manufacture, fabrication, finishing, and installation of similar work. Contractor shall demonstrate to satisfaction of the Architect that he has successfully performed on comparable projects over the previous 5 years. All fabricating shall be by Fabricators for whom the Contractor is directly responsible. Contracting of any work included hereunder is specifically prohibited, except for that which may be approved by the Architect. B. The Architect reserves the right to visit the fabricating facilities at any time when the work is in progress. All shop and field materials and workmanship shall be subject to inspection by the Architect and his representatives at all times. Such P. inspections do not relieve the Contractor from obligations to provide materials conforming to all requirements of the Contract Documents. Smith Campus Center Stonework 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 04400-1 Pill NM w. ........................................................................................................................................................................... Number and Size of Reinforcing Bars Required at Concrete Block Lintels ......................................................................................................................................................................................... Maximum Clearance Span Wall Width Rebar No.-Size ...................................................................................................................: ................................................................. 2'-01' to 61-0" 6" 2-#3 6-01' to 81-0" 2-#4 ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 2'-011 to 61-0" 81, 2-#3 6-011 to 81-0" 2-#4 ....................................................................j................................................8.................................................................. 2'-0" to 6'-0" 12" 3 -#3 6'-011 to 81-0" 3- 44 .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3.5 PROTECTION, ADJUSTMENT A. Protection 1. Excess mortar shall be wiped off the masonry surfaces as the work progresses. 2. Wood coverings shall be placed over all such masonry surfaces as are likely to be damaged during the progress of the entire project. 3. Protective measures shall be performed in a manner satisfactory to the Architect. 4. Damaged masonry units shall be replaced to satisfaction of the Architect. B. Pointing: Point any defective joint with mortar identical with that specified for that joint. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Unit Masonry 100% Construction Documents: 0 1.11.12 04200-10 go 4. At interior partitions reinforce masonry openings greater than F-0" wide, with horizontal joint reinforcing placed in two (2) horizontal joints approximately eight (8) inches apart, immediately above the lintel and immediately below the sill. Extend reinforcing a minimum of 2'-0" beyond jambs of the opening, bridging control joints where provided. no 5. Corners a. Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course at corners. b. Provide continuity at corners with prefabricated "L" reinforcement units, in addition to masonry bonding. 6. Intersecting and Abutting Walls a. Unless vertical control joints are shown as part of structural frame, provide interlocking masonry bond. Provide starters and special shapes as _ shown on the drawings to bond these walls. b. In addition to masonry bonding, provide horizontal reinforcement using prefabricated "T" units at interior partitions. H. Ties and Anchors for Masonry Construction 1. Provide ties and anchors as shown or specified, but not less than one metal tie, spaced not to exceed sixteen (16) inches o.c. horizontally and/or vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties within 1'- 0" of all openings and spaced not more than 24" apart around perimeter of openings. 2. Anchor masonry to structure complying with the following: a. Provide an open space not less than 1/2" in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise shown. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials. I. Control and Expansion Joints 1. Provide vertical expansion, control and isolation joints in masonry as shown. Build in related items as the masonry work progresses. 2. CMU Control Joint Spacing: If location of control joints is not shown, place vertical joints spaced not to exceed 32'-0" o.c.. In addition, locate joints at wo points of natural weakness in the masonry work, including the following: a. At structural column or joint between bay. b. Above control joints in the supporting structure. C. Above major openings at end of lintels upward and below at ends of sills downward. Place at one side of jamb for openings not less than T-0" wide and at both sides for openings over 6'-0" wide. d. At reduction of wall thickness. e. Where masonry abuts supporting structure. f. If additional joints are required, indicate same on approved shop drawings. J. Lintels 1. Install loose steel lintels furnished by Section 05500, allowing eight (8) inch bearing at ends. 2. For concrete block walls, use specially formed U-shaped concrete block lintel units with reinforcing bars in accordance with the following table, filled with Type M mortar. an Smith Campus Center Unit Masonry on 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 04200-9 ON 7. Unless otherwise noted, fill vertical cells of masonry units solid with mortar which are below steel bearing plates, steel beams, and ends of lintels, to eight (8) inches beyond bearing and from floor to bearing. 8. Place wire mesh in horizontal joint below masonry unit cells to be filled with mortar, to prevent mortar from dropping into unfilled cells below. 9. Masonry indicated as being reinforced shall have all voids filled solid with grout. Grout shall be consolidated in place by vibration or other methods which insure complete filling of cells. When the least clear dimension of the grouted cell is less than two (2) inches, the maximum height of grout pour shall not exceed twelve (12) inches. When the least clear dimension is two (2) inches or more, maximum height of grout pour shall not exceed forty-eight (48) inches. When grouting is stopped for one (1) hour or longer, the grout pour shall be stopped 1-1/2" below the top of a masonry unit. Vertical bar reinforcing shall be accurately placed and held in position while being grouted, and shall be in place before grouting starts. All such reinforcing shall have a minimum clear cover of 5/8". Lap all bars a minimum of forty (40) bar diameters and provide steel spacer ties (not to exceed 192 bar diameter) to secure and position all vertical steel and prevent displacement during grouting. Provide continuous horizontal reinforcement embedded in mortar joints every second course. E. Cutting and Patching 1. All exposed masonry which requires cutting or fitting shall be cut accurately to size with motorized carborundum or diamond saw, producing cut edges. ! 2. Do not saw cut any masonry openings in face brick construction without Architect's approval and after a procedure has been reviewed and approved. 3. Holes made in exposed masonry units for attachment of handrail brackets and „! similar items shall be neatly drilled to proper size. 4. All masonry which required patching in exposed work, if approved by Architect, shall be patched neatly with mortar to match appearance of masonry as closely as possible and to the Architect's satisfaction. Rake back " joints and use pointing mortar to match as required. F. Solid Wall Construction 1. Fill the vertical longitudinal joint between wythes solidly with mortar by parging the in-place wythe and shoving units into the parging. 2. Tie wythes with continuous horizontal reinforcement embedded in mortar joints sixteen (16) inches o.c. vertically. G. Interior Block Partitions I. Build to height shown on drawings. At non-rated partitions fill void with .■► continuous neoprene filler conforming to the requirements of Section 07910. At fire rated partitions, fill void with fire stop material meeting the requirements of Section 07270. Fasten to structure at top of partition using steel angles as specified herein. 2. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing every other block course, except as otherwise noted. Fully embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8". Lap reinforcement a minimum of six (6) inches at ends of units. 3. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions. Smith Campus Center 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 Unit Masonry 04200-8 .� 6. Provide templates made of steel studs for plumbing of two story masonry openings. 7. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry patterns as noted on drawings. If not shown, provide running bond. Lay concealed concrete block with all units in a wythe bonded by lapping not less than two (2) inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units of less than four (4) inches horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 8. Where possible, masonry walls and partitions shall be built after all overhead ducts, pipes and conduits are in placed and tested. Masonry shall be neatly built around the items above. Walls and partitions shall be plumb, true to line and free from defects such as open cells, voids, dry joints and other similar defects. In rooms and spaces scheduled to have concrete block finish, all such surfaces including upper wall surfaces up to termination of structural ceiling in spaces without suspended ceilings, shall be made suitable for paint application. Cutting of openings in walls and partitions in place shall be done only with the approval of the Architect. B. Mortar Bedding and Jointing I. Lay concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on exterior walls and in all courses of piers, columns and pilasters, where solid CMU is used and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or filled with concrete or grout. a. To ensure alignment of brick and block coursing, adjust block back-up by cutting block to insure alignment of coursing or use adjustable anchorage. 2. Lay masonry walls with 3/8"joints unless otherwise shown on drawings. 3. Tool exposed joints slightly concave. Concealed joints shall be struck flush. 4. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh mortar. C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rake back 1/2 block length in each course; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if required) and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. D. Built-In Work 1. As the work progresses, build in items specified under this and other Sections of these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 2. Grout in door frames, access doors, louvers and other metal items embedded or built into masonry work solidly with grout. 3. Grout under lintels, bearing plates, and steel bearing on masonry with solid bed or mortar. 4. Sleeves, pipes, ducts and all other items which pass through masonry walls shall on be caulked with interior grade sealant meeting requirements of Section 07900, so as to be air tight and prevent air leakage. Refer to Section 07270 for packing of voids in rated masonry walls. 5. Fill vertical cells of masonry units solid with mortar or grout which have anchoring, reinforcing rods, supporting or hanging devices embedded in the cell including stone anchors and window or curtain wall anchors. 6. Fill vertical cells of masonry units solid with mortar on each side of door frames to sixteen (16) inches beyond. Smith Campus Center Unit Masonry �?"!' 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 04200-7 4. Mortar shall have a flow after suction of not less than seventy-five (75) percent of that immediately after mixing as determined by ASTM C91. E. Admixtures .. 1. No air-entraining admixtures or cementitious materials containing air-entraining admixtures shall be used in the mortar. 2. No antifreeze compounds or other substances shall be used in the mortar to lower the freezing point. 3. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride shall not be in mortar. e use .. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection 1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that masonry may be completed in accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the referenced standards, and the original design. 3. Do not start any work until mock-ups are approved by the Architect. B. Discrepancies I. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect in writing. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. "" 3.2 COORDINATION A. Carefully coordinate with all other trades to ensure proper and adequate interface of the work of other trades with the work of this Section. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Concrete Block: Do not wet concrete block units. 3.4 INSTALLATION ► A. General 1. Build walls to the full thickness shown. Build single wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness shown. .. 2. Build chases and recesses as shown or required for the work of other trades. 3. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry work. After installation of equipment, complete masonry work to match work immediately adjacent to the opening. 4. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings, movement type joints, returns and off-sets. Avoid the use of less than half size units at corners, jambs and wherever possible. 5. Lay up walls plumb and true with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. ON Smith Campus Center 100% Construction Documents: 01.1 L 12 Unit Masonry 04200-6 �" ON A E. Control Joint Filler 1. Vertical Installation Within Concrete Masonry Wall: Extruded high grade neoprene rubber, cross shape, for use with concrete masonry sash units, which shall provide a force fit in the grooves of the sash block, and shall have 1/2" diameter tubular ends (compressed 25% when installed in 3/8" wide joint). a. Provide the following sizes: 1). 2-5/8" wide control joint fillers for 4" block walls. 2). 4-5/8" wide for 6" block walls. 3). 6-5/8" wide for 8", 10" and 12" block walls. b. Provide backer rod and sealant joint over joint filler as per drawings and Section 07900 of these specifications. 2. Isolation Joint Filler at Abutting Construction and at Intersecting CMU Walls: + * Compressible and resilient closed cell neoprene gasket with pressure sensitive adhesive backing, thickness 30% greater than thickness of joint. Acceptable joint filler shall be "Everlastic, Type NN-1" by Williams Products, Inc., or approved equal. Recess joint filler and install backer rod and sealant as per drawings and Section 07900 of these specifications. 2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, standard color, one source. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S, as manufactured by Corsons, or approved equal. C. Sand: Clean, washed, buff colored sand, graded per ASTM C144. on D. Water: Clean, fresh and suitable for drinking. 2.3 MORTAR MIX 40 A. Masonry Construction: Provide Portland cement/lime mortar conforming to ASTM C270, Type N, for load bearing conditions, mortar shall conform to ASTM C270, Type M. B. Mortar for Cement Cants: One (1) part Portland cement and four (4) parts sand, by volume. 10 C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C-476 for grout for use in construction of unit masonry. Use grout of consistency (fine or coarse) at time of placement which will completely fill all spaces intended to receive grout. D. Mixing 1. General: Add cement just before mixing and mix dry. Use sufficient amount of water as necessary to produce workable mix. Mix in small batches to make plastic mass. 2. Mixing: Machine mix all mortars in approved type mixer with device to accurately and uniformly control water. Add hydrated lime dry. Mix dry materials not less than two (2) minutes. Add water, then mix not less than three (3) minutes. Mix only amount of mortar that can be used before initial set. Do not use mortar which has reached its initial set or two (2) hours after initial mixing, whichever comes earlier. Mortar may not be re-tempered. Clean mixer for each batch, whenever mortar type is changed, and at end of each day's work. 3. Acceleration or other admixtures not permitted. Smith Campus Center Unit Masonry 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 04200-5 concealed block surfaces, free from deleterious materials that would stain plaster or corrode metal. 7. Curing: All concrete block shall be steam cured, and air dried for not less than thirty (30) days before delivery. 8. Density of concrete block shall not exceed one hundred and five (105) lbs. per cubic foot. 9. Shrinkage: Shrinkage of concrete blocks shall not exceed .065% when tested in accordance with ASTM C426-70. 10. Water Content a. At the time of delivery to the job site, concrete masonry units shall have a value, in weight of contained water, of not more than thirty (30) percent of the fully saturated content for the unit tested. b. Ship all units from the factory, and store at the job site, with all necessary protection to prevent increase of water content from rain and other sources. B. Joint Reinforcing for Masonry Walls 1. For block walls and partitions, provide heavy duty reinforcing fabricated of ■. 3/16" dia. rods, truss or ladder design, no ties, spaced every second block course. 2. For reinforcement in loading dock wall construction, finish shall be hot dip , galvanized conforming to ASTM A153, with zinc coating of 1.5 oz. of zinc per sq. ft. after fabrication. 3. For reinforcement in interior walls, finish shall be mill galvanized conforming to ASTM A641, Class B-1 after fabrication. go 4. Approved Joint Reinforcing Manufacturers a. Hohmann & Barnard b. Dur-O-Wal C. Heckman Building Products No d. National Wire Products Industries, Inc. C. Anchors and Ties 1. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Galvanized steel equal to No. 305 anchor slot made by .� Hohmann & Barnard or approved equal by manufacturer noted above. 2. Flexible Metal Ties for Dovetail Anchor Slots: Galvanized steel, 16 gauge by 1" wide. 3. Wire Mesh: Galvanized sixteen (16) gauge steel wire, 1/4" square mesh, width .� 1/2" less than wall thickness, by length to suit condition. 4. For anchoring masonry to structural steel, provide hot-dip galvanized steel anchors as listed made by Hohmann & Barnard or approved equal manufacturer noted above. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A-153, with zinc coating of 1.5 oz. of zinc per sq. ft. a. No. 355 column anchors. b. No. 356 column anchors. C. No. 357 beam anchors. d. No. 359 F anchor straps with VWT tie. 5. For anchoring CMU interior partitions to underside of steel beams, provide .� hot-dip galvanized steel tube anchor equal to No. PTA-420 made by Hohmann & Barnard or approved equal. 6. For anchoring CMU interior partitions to underside of structural deck, provide 4" x 4" x 1/4" galvanized steel angles (ASTM A-36), 3'-0" long spaced 3'-0" o.c. alternately on each side of partition. Anchor partition securely to structural deck D. Reinforcing Bars and Rods: ASTM A615, Grade 60. See Drawings for size. Smith Campus Center 100% Construction Documents: 01.1 1.12 Unit Masonry 04200-4 w� 1• coatings which would destroy or reduce bond with mortar and will not be disfigured or bent out of shape. 1.7 CODE REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section shall conform to all applicable requirements of the State of we Connecticut Building Code. 1.8 JOB CONDITIONS A. In cold weather, when the outside temperature is below forty (40) degrees F., the temperature of the masonry, when laid, shall be above forty (40) degrees F., and maintained on both sides of the masonry wall for at least seventy-two (72) hours. me All water, sand and masonry units must be heated so that temperature of masonry when laid will be over forty (40) degrees F.. No anti-freeze admixtures will be allowed. Conform to the requirements of "Cold Weather Masonry Construction go and Protection Recommendations: publication by Brick Institute of America (BIA). B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and w humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg. F. and above. 'R PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Standard Concrete Block 1. Portland cement, ASTM C150, Type 1, one source. 2. Aggregates, ASTM C331, lightweight expanded shale, clay or slate aggregates, manufactured by the rotary kiln process equal to "Solite", "Norlite" or "Haydite". a. All block shall be from one aggregate type and from one manufacturer. 3. Concrete Masonry Units: Load bearing lightweight aggregate concrete masonry units conforming to the requirements of ASTM C-90, Grade N, Type I with a minimum prism strength (fm) of 1700 psi. a. Block for rated walls shall be 75% solid. b. All other block shall be hollow. 4. The producer of the concrete masonry units shall furnish certification from an independent testing laboratory confirming that all 8" or larger masonry units meet all of the UL-618 requirements for two (2) hours or better (as required), referencing full scale fire test reports (ASTM E-119). All 4" and 6" units shall P, conform to "National Bureau of Standards" and "National Research Council" full scale fire tests. 5. Sizes and Shapes: Nominal face size 8" x 16" by thickness as indicated on drawings, with stretcher units, jamb units, header units, square corner units (at ends and corners of exposed or painted work), sash units (at control joints within masonry wall), lintel units and other special shapes and sizes required to complete the work. on 6. Finish: For exposed or painted block surfaces. In addition to ASTM requirements, block shall have uniformly dense, flat, fine grain texture, with no cracks, chips, spalls, or other defects which would impair appearance. For Smith Campus Center Unit Masonry 04 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 04200-3 am C. Manufacturer's literature: Submit technical and installation information for: 1. Mortar materials, each material and mortar types. 2. Certification of mortar mix. 3. Flashing material, descriptive literature. 4. Concrete block, joint reinforcing, anchors, ties and joint filler; submit manufacturer's technical and descriptive literature. 5. Block manufacturer shall submit certifications of compliance with ASTM C-90, C-331 and UL-618 prior to any job site delivery. Field sampling of concrete block may be tested by an Independent Testing Laboratory retained by the ••� Owner according to the requirements of ASTM C-140. D. Construction Procedures (Submit the following) 1. Procedures and materials for cleaning masonry work; including certification ` that cleaner will not adversely affect stone, gaskets, sealants, etc. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to the following non-cumulative tolerances (any masonry work not meeting these standards shall be re-built as directed by the Architect). 1. Variation from the plumb: a. In lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arrises: 1). In 10 feet 1/8 b. b. For external corners, expansion joints and other conspicuous lines: all 1). In any story of 25 feet maximum 1/8" 2. Variation from the level or the grades indicated on the drawings; for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines: a. In any bay or 20 feet maximum 1/8" 3. Variation of the linear building lines from established position in plan related portion of columns and partitions: a. In any bay or 20 feet maximum 1/8" �++ 4. Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and in thickness of walls: a. Minus 1/8" b. Plus 1/8" 5. Variation in dimensions of masonry openings: a. Horizontal dimension -0" + 1/16" b. Vertical dimension +0" - 1/16" 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING A. General: Deliver, store, handle and protect all materials from damage, moisture, dirt and intrusion of foreign matter. Store all masonry units and mortar materials ..® on raised platforms and under ventilated and waterproof cover. Store packaged materials in manufacturer's unopened containers, marked with manufacturer's name and product brand name. Immediately reseal containers after partial use. Remove and replace damaged materials. B. Masonry Units: Pack, deliver and store to prevent breakage, cracking, chipping, spalling or other damage. Store, protect and ventilate units at project site. •■ C. Aggregate: Store with provisions for good drainage. D. Reinforcement and Anchors: Store and protect so that when placed, joint reinforcement and anchors will be free of soil, dirt, ice loose rust, scale, or other Smith Campus Center Unit Masonry 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 04200-2 s SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the der requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the unit masonry work as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Concrete block walls and partitions. 2. Metal joint reinforcing, anchors, ties, closures and related accessories for masonry. 3. Control joints in masonry, filled with joint fillers. 4. Chases, recesses, pockets and openings in masonry as required for installation - of work by others. 5. Building in of items furnished by others into masonry, including access doors, door frames, anchors, sleeves and inserts, and other similar items to be embedded in masonry. 6. Grouting in of metal items built into masonry work. _ 7. Protection, pointing and cleaning of masonry. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Concrete - Section 03300. B. Firestops and smokeseals - Section 07270. C. Sealant - Section 07900. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit for: 1. Anchoring details. 2. Control joint locations and details. B. Samples (Submit the following): 1. Joint reinforcing, each type, width and proposed locations (labeled). 2. Anchors, wedges and ties, each type; width and proposed locations (labeled). 3. Joint filler, each type. 4. Flashing, including splice sample, 12" x 12". 5. Mortar color, 12" long cured sample. go Smith Campus Center Unit Masonry 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 04200-1 a i a 3 7 7 7 7 7 7 e e 0 0 e e v r 0 0 ON ON d. If concrete strength tests do not comply with the strength requirements of the Contract Documents, the Architect and/or Owner may require that test specimens be cut from the structure at locations designated. Specimens shall be secured and tested in accordance with ASTM C42, petrographic analyses shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C856 and/or other tests shall be performed as required by the Architect. These tests, if required, shall be made at the Contractor's expense. If the results of these tests indicate non- w. compliance, the Architect may require that the concrete be removed from the structure or other corrective action at no additional cost. e. Other Tests: In the event that laboratory tests taken from any part of the structure indicate an apparent failure to develop the ultimate strengths required at 28 days, the Architect may, at his discretion, order other tests to be made on the portion of the structure affected to determine the adequacy of such portion to sustain the loads for which its members are designed. These tests, if required, shall be made at the Contractor's expense, and shall conform to the requirements of ACI 318 and local codes. If the structure, or any part of the structure, cannot pass the test, it shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. so END OF SECTION am w. we .o MR MW am on A .M Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-26 IM OR a. The Contractor shall be responsible for the expense of additional testing or inspections resulting from the consequence of the following: 1). Testing of Work not evidencing compliance with this specification and Work done without prior notice, without proper supervision, or contrary to standard construction practice. Such testing includes taking, curing and testing of concrete cores in accordance with ASTM C42 and ACI 318. (a). Make a minimum of 3 cores for each area indicated to be in non-compliance. No (b). Impact hammer testing shall be limited to comparative analysis and shall not be acceptable as a basis for actual concrete strength determination. b. Testing requested by the Contractor such as additional cylinders for early compressive strength test,etc. C. Facilitate the work of, and cooperate with, the Owner's Independent Testing and Inspection Laboratory inspectors. Notify the inspectors when formwork and reinforcing steel is in place in order to facilitate inspections. Do not place concrete until these inspections have been completed and all deficiencies reported by an inspector have been corrected to the inspector's satisfaction. Concrete placed prior to all required approvals is subject to removal. d. If ready-mix concrete is used, each load of concrete arriving at the job shall be accompanied by a delivery ticket which shall be subject to inspection by the Owner's Independent Testing and Inspection Laboratory at the plant and field and which shall contain the following minimum information: 1). Batch plant of origin. 2). The yardage of concrete. 3). The class of concrete. 4). The amount and type of aggregates. 5). The amount and type of cement. 6). The amount(s)and type(s)of admixtures. 7). The amount of water. 8). The exact time the last materials were discharged into the delivery truck. If, upon reaching the Project site, the concrete cannot be placed within the specified time limits or if the class of concrete delivered is incorrect, the inspector shall reject the load for use, and it shall be removed from the site at the Contractor's expense. 3. Enforcement: a. If field tests performed by the Owner's Independent Testing and Inspection Laboratory indicate non-compliance with the Contract Documents, the remainder of the batch of concrete from which the sample in question was taken will be rejected for use and shall be removed from the site at the Contractor's expense. pa b. When non-compliant tests or trends are observed by the Owner's Independent Testing and Inspection Laboratory, such information shall be faxed immediately to all parties on the test report distribution list. Copies shall qW be on different colored paper. The Contractor and his Subcontractors shall take immediate action to correct any deficiencies. C. Concrete found by laboratory test to have excess chlorides or sulfates will be subject to removal. Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-25 corrective measures and modify construction details or procedures as required. 1. Standard of Strength Control: 1). The Owner's Independent Testing and Inspections Laboratory shall maintain standard deviation data for the statistical evaluation of concrete for the Project. 2). After completion of 30 or more job test of any class of concrete, the Contractor may propose Mix Design modifications in accordance with ACI 301, Chapter 4, Paragraph 4.2.3.6. Use of these modifications on the Project is subject to the approval of the Architect and Owner's Independent Testing and Inspection Laboratory. 3). The Owner's Independent Testing and Inspection Laboratory shall maintain a moving average for compressive strength based on the 3 latest 28-day test results to check compliance with specification requirements. The figures for the standard deviation and moving , average for strength shall be kept continuously up to date by the Owner's Independent Testing and Inspection Laboratory and submitted on a weekly basis to the Architect and Contractor. The Owner's Independent Testing and Inspection Laboratory shall maintain a continuous up to date log in both graphical and tabulated form for each class of concrete. 4). In addition to reporting as outlined in the ASTM, each compression test report shall clearly indicate, as of the report date and for the class of concrete being reported: (a). Identity of job,Contractor, supplier. .. (b). Identity of mix and required strength. (c). Pour location of sampled concrete. (d). Slump, air content, truck number, time and date sampled, air OR temperature,concrete temperature,consistency. (e). Curing history. (0. Date tested. so (g). Compressive strength. (h). Type of fracture. (i). Compliance with specification(yes or no). •+ 0). The average of the latest three test results; (k). the lowest average of three consecutive test results; (1). The percentage of tests falling below specified strength; .. (m). The lowest single test result. 5). The Owner's Independent Testing and Inspection Laboratory shall maintain a moving average for range of test results for quality „ control purposes as described in ACI 214, Chapter 4, Paragraph 4.4 and 4.5. Graphical reports of moving average for range shall be submitted to the Architect and Contractor on a weekly basis. 6). Strength Requirements and Compliance Therewith: Concrete shall be considered to meet strength requirements of the Specifications when in compliance with ACI 301, Chapter 17, Paragraph 17.2 except as modified by local code. 2. Contractor's Responsibilities: Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-24 less than one set of three (3) cylinders for any one day's operations shall be sampled directly from the mixer. 2). In addition to specimens sampled directly from the mixer, test cylinders for superplasticized concrete shall also be made from concrete sampled at the point of deposit or as directed by the engineer designated for inspection. These test cylinders shall be 40 separate and distinct from those made from the mixer, and shall be made from the same batch and cured and tested in the same manner as described for the samples taken from the mixer. The number of No test cylinders made from concrete sampled at the point of deposit shall be a minimum of one set of 3 cylinders for every 150 cu. yds. or fraction thereof for each class of concrete mixed in any one days concreting. When concrete is being placed directly from the mixer into the forms without any intermediate conveyance, the additional cylinders will not be required. 3). Samples will be obtained in accordance with ASTM C172. 4). The Owner's Independent Testing and Inspection Laboratory shall comply with ASTM C31 in making, curing and subsequently handling test specimens, except as modified herein. Specimens will be tested in accordance with ASTM C39. 5). For cylinders made directly from the mixer, the cylinders shall be placed in laboratory storage under moist curing conditions at approximately 70 deg. F. within 24 hours after molding and maintained therein until tested. One cylinder of each set shall be tested at seven days. If the seven-day strength is below 60% of design strength, the Contractor shall be immediately notified. Two cylinders of each set shall be tested at 28 days. 6). For specimens sampled at the point of deposit, cylinders shall be 00 stored and maintained as above and shall be tested at 28 days. g. Air Content:Test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C173 or C231. 1). For air entrained concrete, test the first truck and every third truck .4 thereafter. 2). For concrete not air entrained, test each sample for cylinders. h. Unit Weight: Test in accordance with ASTM C138 for normal weight concrete. 1). First truck everyday and every 150 cu. yd. i. Slump: test in accordance with ASTM C 143. 1). Test each sample taken for cylinders. For concrete containing superplasticizer added at the site, one test shall be made prior to addition of the admixture,and another test after addition and mixing. Provide slump cone(s)and rod(s) for use on the job at all times. j. Microwave Test: The water content of freshly mixed concrete will be tested on a random basis during placement using Microwave Drying Oven, in accordance with AASHTO TP 23, Proposed Standard Method of Test for Water Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete Using Microwave Oven Drying. k. Perform flatness and levelness measurements in accordance with ASTM El 155M immediately after concrete has hardened, but prior to removal of any shoring or formwork, of actual slab finish elevations and promptly submit to the Architect and Contractor for review. Should slab elevations vary beyond the allowable tolerances, the Contractor shall employ necessary Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-23 b. At the start of the Project and monthly throughout the course of the Work, the Owner's Independent Testing and Inspection Laboratory shall check the following for compliance with the Contract Documents and submit a report to the Architect and Contractor. 1). Cement(ASTM C150) 2). Aggregate (ASTM C33) 3). Admixtures(ASTM C494) C. If ready mix concrete is used, each load of concrete arriving at the job shall be accompanied by a delivery ticket which shall be subject to inspection by a representative of the Owner's Independent Testing and Inspection Laboratory at the plant and field. If, upon reaching the Project site, the class of concrete delivered is incorrect, the laboratory's representative shall reject the load for use, and it shall be remove from the site at the Contractor's **` expense. d. Batch Plant Inspection: At the start of the Project and at least once each month or when new bulk materials are delivered to batch plant until the .� completion of the concrete work, the Owner's Testing and Inspection Laboratory shall observe and evaluate the following for compliance with the Contract Documents and submit reports to the Architect and Contractor: 1). Condition of batching equipment. 2). Condition of materials. 3). Inspect aggregate stockpiles and storage and bring to the attention of the concrete producer any practices which are causing segregation or contamination within the stockpiles. Test for dry rodded unit weight whenever a sieve analysis is made and when it appears that there has �. been a change in the characteristics of the aggregate. 4). Type of materials used. 5). Inspect trucks used to transport concrete to assure that they are clean and in condition to mix and to deliver a uniform mix. " 6). Mixing time, delivery time. 7). Additional pertinent controls; depending on weather,job conditions, and other factors affecting the Work. 8). Methods of batching. 9). Conformance with design mix proportions. 10). Inspect cement and admixtures for compliance with Contract Documents. e. Chloride and Sulfate: The Owner's Testing and Inspection Laboratory shall take specimens of each class of concrete and shall perform one test for each 300 cubic yards to verify that the total chloride ion content is within the specified limits. If the total chloride ion content exceeds the specified limits, the Owner's Testing and Inspection Laboratory shall perform, at the Contractor's expense, a water soluble chloride ion test in accordance with "Standard Method of Sampling and Testing for Water-Soluble Chloride Ion in Concrete"as contained in Report No. FHWA-RD-77-85. f. Compression Tests: The Owner's Testing and Inspection Laboratory shall supply all molds required for tests as described below, using molds of the same type and manufacture for making all test specimens. Take specimens of each class of concrete beginning with the first truck and as follows: .� 1). At least three (3) specimens for each 50 cu. yds. or fraction thereof or for each 5000 ft' of surface for slab or wall and in any case not Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-22 manufacturer of cement, aggregate and admixtures, the tests performed and the test results. a. Aggregate: Furnish the following test results prior to initiating concrete mix design: 1). ASTM C33, sieve analysis of fine and coarse aggregate which are representative of the materials to be used throughout the Work. 2). ASTM C29M,dry rodded weight of coarse aggregate. 3). Specific gravity (bulk saturated surface dry) of fine and coarse aggregate,ASTM C 127 and C 128. w 2. Prepare or verify design mixes in accordance with ACI 301, Chapter 4, Section 4.2.2.3, in a laboratory facility approved by the Owner. Furnish the laboratory facility with all Contract Documents. Bear all costs in connection with the design or verification of concrete mixes. Separate design mixes are required for each anticipated and/or actual change in mix materials. Each design mix must be submitted on the Mix Design Submittal Form included at the end of this specification. 3. Concrete mixes shall be proportioned to achieve average strengths greater than the specified design strengths in accordance with ACI 301 Chapter 4, Paragraph 4.2.3 e.� "Proportioning on the basis of previous field experience or trial mixtures." Submit documentation for average strengths indicating compliance with this section. 4. Do not change source or brand of cement and aggregate materials during the course of work. 5. Proposed mix designs, preliminary testing procedures and results shall be subject to the review and approval of the Owner's Independent Testing and Inspection Laboratory. Molds for preliminary tests shall be provided by the Owner's so Independent Testing and Inspection Laboratory and shall be of the same type and manufacture to be used on the Project. 6. Make one test for each design mix to verify that the total chloride (Cl) ion content on and the total sulfate (as S03) content is within the specified limits. Perform chloride tests in accordance with "Standard Method of Sampling and Testing for Total Chloride Ion in Concrete" as contained in Report No. FHWA-RD-77-85 published by U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration. Perform sulfate(as S03)tests in accordance with ASTM C 114. 7. Mix design reports for concrete specified to be air entrained shall include ASTM �w C 173 test results. C. Plant and Field Tests and Inspection (Owner's Independent Testing and Inspection): The Owner shall engage an independent testing and inspection laboratory to perform the following inspections and tests and to submit reports of the results, refer to Section 01410 TESTING AND INSPECTION for additional responsibilities and qualifications required of the Owner's independent testing and inspection laboratory. 1. Contractor's Independent Testing and Inspection Laboratory Responsibilities: a. General: Concrete work shall be subject to inspection and tests at the plant and in the field. Field and laboratory inspections and tests shall be made by the Owner's Independent Testing and Inspection Laboratory. Records of such tests and inspections shall be submitted to the Contractor, covering the quality and quantity of concrete materials, mixing and placing of concrete, ., concrete formwork, placing of reinforcing steel and the general progress of the work. Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-21 Im low and high areas as specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having the required slope. 1. Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete's durability. Surface defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 1/8 inch wide or that penetrate to the reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions. 2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days. 3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Specified underlayment compound or repair topping may be used when acceptable to the Architect. 4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove *�+ defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4 inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. .ft E. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter by dry-pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding w* compound. Place dry-pack before bonding grout or epoxy adhesive has dried. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. F. With prior approval of the Architect, as to method and procedure, all repairs of defective areas shall conform to ACI 301, Section 5.3.7, except that the specified bonding compound must be used. ! G. Leveling of floors for subsequent finished shall be achieved by use of the specified underlayment material with prior approval of the Architect. H. All exposed floors shall be leveled, where required, with the specified self-leveling repair topping with prior approval of the Architect. I. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of the Architect. 3.16 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. General: The Owner will engage an independent testing agency, to perform tests and to prepare test reports. B. Preliminary Design Mix Tests: 1. Material Analysis Testing: Perform tests to substantiate compliance with specified requirements for cement, aggregate and admixtures. Certified test reports of tests performed by testing agencies employed by product manufacturers or material .. suppliers will be acceptable. Submit reports identifying the source and Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-20 ow B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, slabs, and other structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days or until concrete has aw attained at least 75 percent of design minimum compressive strength at 28 days, or higher if required by Contractor's shoring engineer. Determine potential compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens representative of concrete location or members. C. Form-facing material may be removed 4 days after placement only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form-facing material without 40 loosening or disturbing shores and supports. 3.14 REUSING FORMS: as A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed,delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-coating compound as specified for new formwork. OR B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to the Architect. 3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS: A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar so immediately after removing forms, when acceptable to the Architect. B. Mix dry-pack mortar, consisting of one part Portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. 1. Cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, voids over `/4 inch in any dimension,and holes left by tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the area to be patched with bonding agent. Place patching mortar after rewettable bonding agent has dried or while the ' " bonding grout or epoxy adhesive is still tacky. 2. For surfaces exposed to view, blend white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide test areas at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of the Architect. Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb,rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes and fill with dry-pack mortar or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 1. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, containing defects that affect the concrete's durability. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete. A D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-19 w template at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer w furnishing machines and equipment. D. Non-Shrink Grout: Grout base plates and foundations as indicated using specified �*+ non-shrink grout. Where high fluidity and/or increased placing time is required using the specified high flow grout. 3.12 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION: A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss by fog misting. Fog misting for moist (water) curing is required where the rate of evaporation exceeds 0.2 psf/hr. (ACI 308 Section 1.2.1). Fogging shall continue after the finishing operation until wet burlap is placed over the concrete. Fog misting shall .. not be used to apply water to the surface of the concrete to facilitate lubrication for finishing purposes. B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after .� placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days. C. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moist(water) curing, by moisture-retaining cover or by use of the specified curing compound. Curing as follows: 1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 2. Curing and Sealing Compound: a. All exposed interior slabs, not receiving a liquid densifier, and troweled slabs receiving mastic applied adhesives or "shake-on" hardeners shall be cured with the specified curing and sealing compound. Exterior slabs, sidewalks, and curbs not receiving a penetrating sealer, shall be cured with the specified clear, non-yellowing curing and sealing compound. Maximum coverage shall be 400 ftz/gallon on steel troweled surfaces and 300 ftz/gallon on floated or broomed surfaces for the curing/sealing compound. 3. Post moist curing treatment: a. Slabs to receive subsequent floor toppings, setting beds for tile, membrane, roofing: No post moist curing treatment required. b. Exterior slabs and walks: One coat of penetrating anti-spalling sealer compound. D. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for the full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. Cure formed exposed-to-view surfaces with a clear curing compound after stripping. 3.13 REMOVING FORMS: A. General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard ' to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. ,.r Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-18 *a e. Immediately after finishing apply the seal/hardener material to all surfaces as per the manufacturer's instructions. Brush and work the liquid thoroughly into all the surfaces. 2. Finishing of Hardened Surfaces: a. Sawcutting: 1). Within 12 hours after casting sawcutting of the joint pattern shall be OF completed. 2). Layout joint lines as shown on the contract drawings. 3). The width of the joints shall be 1/8"and the depth of cut shall be 1" 4). Install hard filler in joint when cross cutting across a previously cut joint. b. Buffing: Immediately after sawcutting thoroughly clean all the cutting material and buff the floor with a "blue pad"buffing application. Remove all the white residue left by the application of the seal/hardener material and leave a consistent, smooth, even surface. C. Protect the floor as follows: 1). Allow no traffic of any kind on the floor for three full days after the buffing operation. 2). After three days put down a layer of un-reinforced brown Kraft paper. Do not use rosin paper or reinforced paper. Put paper down without lapping joints, but butting the joints and covering the floor completely. 3). On top of the paper lay Homosote board without disturbing paper layer. 4). On top of the Homosote board lay down t/4" Masonite with tightly butted edges and tape the joints. 5). Do not allow any liquid to spill on protected floor. F. Exterior Pavement Surfaces: 1. Placing and Wet Finishing: a. The concrete shall be placed,compacted struck off and leveled. b. Surface shall be power floated C. Final finishing shall be performed as follows: 1). Hand float finish: using a wood, cork and/or neoprene hand float to achieve a non-directional, matte, non-slip surface leaving no trowel marks or blemishes. 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. on Mix, place, and cure concrete as specified to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete Work. go B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-17 3.10 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile, terrazzo, and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, and where indicated. 1. After placing slabs, finish surface to tolerances of F(F) 17 overall/ 13 local (floor flatness) and F(L) 15 overall / 10 local (floor levelness), measured according to ASTM E 1155; grade tolerance +/- 1 inch. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains .. where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set with stiff brushes, brooms,or rakes. B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane waterproofing, membrane roofing,or fluid applied flooring; and where indicated. 1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to .. permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power- driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 20 overall/ 13 local (floor flatness) and F(L) 17 overall/ 13 local (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155; grade .. tolerance +/- 25 mm. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. C. Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces exposed to view and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring or carpet. 1. After floating, begin first trowel-finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 25 overall/16 local (floor flatness) and F(L) 20 overalU16 local (floor levelness), grade tolerance+/-19 mm, measured according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M). Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system. D. Finish top of exposed-to-view walls with hard steel trowel finish and a final wood float finish. Finish edges square. After concrete is hardened, stone edges with a masons stone to ease the edge 1/6"radius. E. Topping Slab Interior Floor Finish: 1. Placing and Wet Finishing: a. The concrete shall be placed, compacted struck off and leveled. b. Surface shall be power floated with a light, 2 HP, machine with 30"paddles (larger paddles or combination paddles shall not be used) C. Immediately after floating, surface shall be power troweled with 30 " trowel blades. Use high speed and do not turn blades to highest angle. Take care not to leave burnish marks on concrete surface. d. Final finishing shall be performed using a wood, cork and/or neoprene hand float to achieve a non-directional, matte, non-slip surface leaving no trowel marks or blemishes. Ow Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-16 00 2. Only use the specified non-corrosive accelerator. Do not use calcium chloride, thyocyanates, or admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions. H. Hot-Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified. 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of VM placement to below 90 deg F. Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. so 3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas. 4. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low No humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to the Architect. 3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES ors A. Rough-Formed Finish: Provide a rough-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finished Work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form-facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding '/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: Provide a smooth-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces + exposed to view or to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or another similar system. This is an as-cast as concrete surface obtained with selected form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins and other projections completely removed and smoothed. 1. Hard finishing a. Abrasive Blast Treatment: 1). Use abrasive material, particle size, pressure and nozzle size as performed on the approved mock-up sample. 2). Apply abrasive blast in an even, consistent manner exposing the aggregate as presented on the approved sample. r C. Utilize the same technicians throughout finishing operation. D. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth-rubbed finish on scheduled concrete surfaces that have received smooth-formed finish treatment not later than 1 day after form removal. 1. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. E. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed .w surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-15 no B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions. 3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete," and as specified. C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location. In framed slab and beam, do not space construction joint more than 60 feet. D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete complying with ACI 309. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible +�++ effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix to segregate. E. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until completing placement of a panel or section. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly '*! worked around reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use highway straightedges, bull floats or darbies to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. ..� Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position by securing to chairs prior to concrete placement. F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. w. G. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement. 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-14 w. C. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints except as indicated otherwise. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements. D. Use specified bonding compound, bonding grout containing the specified bonding admixture, or epoxy adhesive on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete. Do not use the rewettable bonding compound on surfaces subjected to moisture. E. Waterstops: Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated. Install waterstops to form continuous diaphragm in each joint. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of Work. Field-fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's printed instructions. F. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct isolation joints in slabs-on-grade at points of contact between slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as foundation walls, grade beams,and other locations, as indicated. po G. Contraction (Control) Joints in Topping Slab: Construct contraction joints in slabs-on- grade to form panels of patterns as shown. Use saw cuts 1/8 inch wide by one-fourth of slab depth. 1. Primary Method: Soff-Cut System method, by Soff-Cut International, Corona, CA (800)776-3328. Finisher must have documented successful experience in the use so of this method prior to this project. Install cuts within 2 hours after final finish at each saw cut location. Use 1/4 inch thick blade, cutting 1-1/4 inch into slab. 2. Optional Method (Where Soff-Cut System Method Equipment is Not Available): Properly time cutting with the set of the concrete. Saw-cut control joints within 12 hours after finishing. Start cutting as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent aggregates being dislodged by the saw. Complete cutting before shrinkage stresses become sufficient to produce cracking. Use 1/4 inch thick blade, cutting 1/4 slab depth. 3. If joint pattern is not shown, provide joints not exceeding 15 feet in either direction and located to conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at column !! " centerlines, half bays, third bays). 3.6 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items V„ to be attached. B. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. C. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust-preventative material. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable. 3.7 PREPARING FORM SURFACES A. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, vp form-coating compound before placing reinforcement. Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-13 E. Chamfer exposed corners and edges 3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated. Use wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. F. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. G. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before placing concrete. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. 3.3 VAPOR BARRIER INSTALLATION ' A. General: Place vapor barrier sheeting in position with longest dimension parallel the direction of pour. B. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended mastic or pressure- sensitive tape. 3.4 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as specified. 1. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder/barrier during reinforccement placement and concreting operations. Repair damages before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by the Architect. D. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete,not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 3.5 JOINTS A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints so they do not impair strength or appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the Architect. At exposed-to- view surfaces construction and crack control joints shall be located at reveal. Indicate „ locations and show details on shop drawing submittals. B. Provide keyways at least 1 %2 inch deep in construction joints in walls and slabs and between walls and footings. Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-12 on 2. Admixtures Introduced at the Site: Add to the mix separately, in solution form, and provide additional mixing time at the rate of 25 second/yd3 or a minimum of 90 seconds. B. Hand-Mixed Concrete: When hand-mixed concrete is allowed and approved for certain parts of the work, mix on watertight platforms. Proportion cement, sand and aggregate loose by volume, carefully measured. Thoroughly mix sand and cement together dry until the mixture is of uniform color. Add the aggregate and turn the mass over until the mixture is uniform and homogeneous. Add water by sprinkling and turn the mass over until it is uniformly mixed and of the required consistency. C. When required, the slump of concrete as delivered to the site may be increased prior to placement by the use of high range water reducing admixture. Dosage of the admixture shall be within the guidelines established by the manufacturer for the required slump increase and in accordance with the approved mix design. Redosage with the admixture may be approved by the Engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials, vapor retarderibarrier, and other related materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. Coordinate placement of wall penetrations, floor slab and ceiling slab depressions, pipe supports and hangers with Electrical and Mechanical Contractor and the Contract Documents. 3.2 FORMS A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances and surface irregularities complying with the following ACI 347 limits: 1. Provide Class A tolerances for concrete surfaces exposed to view. 2. Provide Class C tolerances for other concrete surfaces. B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features wo required in the Work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent cement paste from leaking. Do not use earth cuts as forms for surfaces, unless approved by the Architect. C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways,reglets, recesses, and the like for easy removal. D. Provide temporary openings for clean-outs and inspections where interior area of formwork is inaccessible before and during concrete placement. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent losing concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-11 AN f. Normal Weight Concrete Fill: Same materials and proportioning as normal weight structural concrete, and in accordance with ASTM C94, Alternative No. 2, to achieve the following minimum properties. 1). Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28-days. " 2). Slump: 6 inches at point of deposit after the addition of HRWR admixture. 5. Adjust the consistency of any mix to allow for specific placing methods and conditions. The slump of concrete filling small, thin or complicated forms shall be greater than for large masses, the degree of slump being governed by the least dimensions of the form. Maximum design slump shall be not more than 3 inches for slabs and sloping concrete surfaces and not more than 4 inches for all other concrete. For concrete proportioned with a superplasticizer, the design slumps shall be a maximum of 3 inches prior to addition of the admixture and a maximum "! of 8 inches after addition and mixing. 6. Measure materials for concrete by weighing. Separately weigh each size of aggregate and the cement; cement accurate within 1%, aggregates accurate within + + 2%. Cement in sacks of 95 lbs. need not be weighted, but weigh bulk cement and fractional packages. Measure mixing water by weight or volume accurate within 1%. 7. Durability: Air entrain concrete, in accordance with ACI 301, Chapter 4, Table 4.2.2.4. 2.6 ADMIXTURES A. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete, except as noted, as required for placement and workability. High-range water reducing admixture shall be used for all exposed-to-view concrete. B. Use accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 deg. F. C. Use high-range water-reducing admixture in concrete with water-cement ratios below 0.4, and as required for workability, except as noted. D. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise indicated. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent within the following limits: 6 percent air. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready Mixed Concrete: 1. General: Provide in accordance with ASTM C94, Alternative No. 1 for controlled mixes. Do not use concrete in the Work if it undergoes initial set or is not *■ deposited within 90 minutes after the water is introduced. Do not add water to unworkable concrete at delivery end, except under the following conditions: a. The Architect accepts procedure and observes additions of water. . b. Concrete is still unworkable after Contractor's adjustments to proportions by Contractor's mix designer. C. Workability without exceeding maximum slump can be attained with the site addition of not more than 3 1/m3 of concrete mixed for 30 seconds/m3. Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-10 Y. Patching Additive for Exposed-to View Surfaces: Shall be a liquid, acrylic-polymer bonding agent specifically made to be integrally mixed with mortar. "Acryl Set"; Master Builders. go 2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGNING MIXES A. Classes of Concrete: The strength, unit weight and other design parameters of the concrete for each portion of the structure shall be in accordance with the requirements indicated on the Drawings. B. Proportioning of Concrete: 1. General: Review requirements relative to slump, seasonal variation of admixtures and anticipated conditions in the Work, before formulating the design mixes. Provide separate design mixes for each anticipated or actual change in the type or proportion of basic materials, including admixtures, as well as changes due to seasonality, slump limits and concrete flowability requirements. All proposed mix designs shall be submitted on the Mix Design Submittal Form included at the end of this specification. Allow at least 6 weeks lead time for testing and verification of mix designs, and so that mixes can be reviewed by the Architect prior to use in the Work. File the mix designs in the Contractor's field office after review by *" Architect and prior to pouring concrete. 2. Assume full responsibility for the strength, consistency and handling of concrete. Design mixes in accordance with ACI 211.1 or ACI 211.2 ( as modified by local code).Provide normal weight concrete of the type and strength indicated subjected to the following requirements and design mix review by the Architect. 3. Use the minimum amount of water necessary to produce a mix that can be worked readily into corners of forms and around reinforcement without permitting segregation of materials or free water to collect on surface. 4. Requirements for normal weight concrete: on a. Proportioning: Provide in accordance with ACI 211.1 requirements. Produce normal weight concrete of the type and strength indicated, subject to the following requirements and design mix review by Architect. b. Maximum Water-Cement Ratio: 1). Interior Exposed Concrete to View: 0.4. C. Design Compressive Strengths: Design compressive strengths shall be obtained in a maximum 28 days. r d. Admixtures for Normal Weight Concrete: Provide the following: 1). Air Entraining Admixture: Air content shall be provided in accordance with ACI 318-95 (Revised 1992) TABLE 4.2.1 "Severe Exposure" for horizontal members, "Moderate Exposure" for vertical members. 2). High Range Water Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): Provide for concrete requiring increased workability and concrete with a water-cement ratio of 0.4 or less. e. Consistency of Normal Weight Concrete: Plastic and workable with cohesiveness sufficient to prevent segregation. 1). Slump, Without Superplasticizer: Maximum 4 inch slump at point of deposit. 2). Slump, With Superplasticizer: Maximum 8 inch slump at point of deposit; maintain 2 inch to 3 inch slump prior to addition of admixture. Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-9 AP .o must exhibit no scaling when exposed to 125 cycles of freezing-and- thawing. The system shall conform to the requirements with ASTM C957-81. The tests must be by an independent testing laboratory. Siloxane or silane based products applied at a rate of 125 feet per gallon.: 1. "Euco-Guard 100 or Euco-Guard VOX"; The Euclid Chemical Company. 2. "Chemtrete BSM 40"; Huls America 3. "Iso-Flex 618"; H.S. Peterson 4. "Hydrozo-40"; Hydrozo(PCR) 5. For exposed-to-view vertical surfaces: "SLX-100"; ProSoCo, T. Clear Curing and Sealing Compound (VOC Compliant): Liquid type membrane-forming curing compound, clear styrene acrylate type, complying with ASTM C1315, Type 1, Class A, 25% solids content minimum. Moisture loss shall be not more than 1.3 oz/ftz when applied at 300 sq. ft./gal. Manufacturer's certification is required. Subject to project requirements provide one of the following products: 1. "Super Diamond Clear VOX" The Euclid Chemical Company ..6 2. "Masterkure 100W" Master Builders or Curing and Sealing Compound: Liquid type membrane-forming curing compound, clear styrene acrylate type, complying with ASTM C1315, Type 1, Class B, 28% solids content minimum. These compounds meet Federal VOC limits. Moisture loss shall be not more than 1.0 oz/ftz when applied at 300 sq. ft./gal. Manufacturer's certification is required. Subject to project requirements provide one of the following products: 3. "Super Rez Seal"; Euclid Chemical Company 4. "Masterseal 30"; Master Builders 5. "Kure N Seal 30"Sonneborn " U. Epoxy Joint Filler: The epoxy joint filler shall be a two(2) component 100% solids compound, with a minimum shore D hardness of 50 .., 1. "Euco 700"; The Euclid Chemical Company 2. "Sikadur 51 SL" Sika Chemical Corporation V. Non-Shrink, Non-Metallic Grout: The non-shrink grout shall be a factory pre-mixed grout and shall conform to ASTM C1107, "Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-Shrink)." In addition, the grout manufacturer shall furnish test data from an independent laboratory indicating that the grout when placed at a fluid consistency shall achieve 95%bearing under a 4' x 4' base plate. Provide one of the following: 1. "NS Grout"by The Euclid Chemical Company. 2. "Five Star Grout"by U.S. Grout Corp. 3. "Masterflow 713"by Master Builders W. Sawcutting Material for Pavement Joints: shall be equipment specifically designed for cutting crisp edges in newly cast concrete (less than 16 hours old). The cutting machine should be a high-speed type (10,000 rpm min), self propelling without forcing the speed. The blade should be a 4 inch diameter blade especially made for the greenest " concrete. Blades shall be designed to cut 1/8" wide joints. Equipment and blades shall be by Soff-Cut Corporation, 1112 Olympic Drive,Corona, CA 91719. X. Abrasive Blasting Material: Sharp, hard, sand or material that will remove the cement matrix to the degree specified. Sizes of material shall vary from 22 screen to 16 screen. Use varying pressure and application techniques appropriate for the approved finish. Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-8 ON Use only in area not subject to moisture. In these areas use a non-rewettable; polymer modified,bonding compound. 3. "Flex-Con"; The Euclid Chemical Company. 4. "SBR Latex"; The Euclid Chemical Company. 5. "Daraweld C"; W.R. Grace. K. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C881; Type, Grade, and Class to suit project requirements; 2-component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces, 1. "Euco Epoxy No. 452 or No. 620"(Euclid Chemical Company.). 2. "Colma Dur"or"Sikadur HiMod"(Sika Chemical Corp.) 3. "Epoxite 2385"(A.C. Horn Company.). 4. "Epobond"(L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.) L. Anti-Corrosive Epoxy/Cementitious Adhesive: This adhesive shall be a water-based epoxy/cementitious compound for adhesion and corrosion protection of reinforcing members(20 hour maximum open time). .A 1. "Corr-Bond"; The Euclid Chemical Company. 2. "Armatec 110"; Sika Chemical Company. M. Expansion Joint Filler Strips: Preformed sponge rubber strips complying with ASTM D1752,Type 1. N. Non-Slip Aggregate: Crushed and graded aggregate material containing aluminum oxide. Minimum hardness of 7 on Mohs scale. 1. "Non-Slip"(Euclid Chemical Company.). 2. "Grip It AO"(L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.) 3. "Frictex NS"(Sonneborn Building Products.). O. Polymer Patching Mortar: Polymer and microsilica modified cementitious based compounds. Horizontal 1. "Thin Top Supreme, Concrete Top Supreme"' The Euclid Chemical Company. 2. "Sikatop 121 or 122"; Sika Chemical Vertical or Overhead 3. "Verticoat/Verticoat Supreme"; The Euclid Chemical Company. 4. "Sikatop 123"; Sika Chemical P. High Strength Flowing Repair Mortar: For forming and pouring structural members, or large horizontal repairs, provide the flowable one-part, high strength microsilica modified repair mortar with 3/8" aggregate. The product shall achieve 9000 psi @ 28- days at a 9-inch slump. 1. "Eucocrete'; The Euclid Chemical Company. 2. "Euco Speed MP"(Cold Weather) Euclid Chemical Company. Q. Liquid Cleaning Compound: 1. "Sure Klean"(ProSoCo.), or approved equal. R. Epoxy Injection System: 1. "Euco Epoxy Injection Resin" (The Euclid Chemical Company). 2. "Concresive 1380 or 1468"(Master Builders). S. Penetrating Anti-Spalling Sealer: The sealer shall be a siloxane-based compound which has a 92% chloride ion screen and a repellency factor of 92% when tested in accordance with NCHRP #244, Test Method. In addition, the sealer-treated concrete Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-7 L. Certification: Written conformance to the above-mentioned requirements and the chloride ion content of admixtures will be required from the admixture manufacturer prior to mix design review by the Engineer. .w 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS: A. Reglets: Where sheet flashing membranes are terminated in reglets, provide reglets of not less than 26-gage stainless steel. Fill reglet or cover face opening to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. B. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Stainless steel, not less than 22 gage with bent tab anchors. Fill slot with temporary filler or cover face opening to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. C. Waterstops: go 1. Provide expandable bentonite waterproofing waterstops (nominal V by 5/8") at the construction and other joints; CETCO RX101, or approved equal. 2. Preformed plastic waterstops not permitted. D. Vapor Barrier: Use only materials that are that are resistant to deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E154, as follows: 1. Polyethylene sheet not less than 6 mils thick. E. Non-slip Aggregate Finish: Provide fused aluminum oxide granules or crushed emery as the abrasive aggregate for a non-slip finish, with emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 25 percent ferric oxide. Use material that is factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, and unaffected by freezing, moisture,and cleaning materials. 40 F. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171. 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. I. 3. Polyethylene-coated burlap. G. Liquid Densifier/Sealer: The liquid densifier compound shall be a siliconate based sealer which penetrates concrete surfaces, increases abrasion resistance and provides a ON "low-sheen" surface that is easy to clean and eases the problem of tire mark removal. 1. "Euco Diamond Hard"; The Euclid Chemical Company. 2. "Seal Hard"by L&M Construction Chemical Company im H. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film-forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss. 1. "Eucobar"; Euclid Chemical Company No 2. "Confilm"; Master Builders I. Self-Leveling Cementitious Underlayment: Premixed, Portland cement underlayment material. Gypsum products not permitted. No 1. "Flo-Top 90"; (The Euclid Chemical Company). 2. "Ardex K-15"(Ardex). 3. "Levelex"(L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.). No J. Bonding Agent: The compound shall be a latex, non-rewettable, polymer modified, bonding grout containing an acrylic or styrene butadiene bonding admixture. wo L "Euco Weld'; The Euclid Chemical Company. 2. "Weldcrete"; The Larsen Company. w Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-6 vo ew C. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, gravel or crushed stone. Artificial or natural sand. Minimum 12%passing No. 50 sieve. Minimum 3%passing No. 100 sieve. D. Water: Potable. E. Admixtures, General: Each admixture manufacturer shall certify to the appropriateness of the use of their admixture(s) in the combination, dosages, batching and construction procedures proposed. Submit certified test results and manufacturer's statements verifying that each admixture to be used in the Work complies with specified requirements and is non-corrosive based upon acceptable long term testing by an !fir accelerated method such as electrical potential measures. Calcium chloride, thiocyanates and admixtures containing more than 0.05% chloride ions are not permitted. Provide only those admixtures which produce no detrimental effect on metal components such as form deck, reinforcing, embedments and conduit. Admixtures which when combined with other ingredients used to produce the concrete shall result in concrete having not more than the specified limits for soluble chloride ion content. All concrete shall contain a water-reducing admixture. F. Air-Entraining Admixture: Use air entrainment in all exposed (exterior) concrete. Conform to ASTM C260; 1. "MB-VR" (Master Builders Company). 2. "Daravair"(Grace Construction Products). 3. "Sika-Aer" (Sika Corporation). 4. "Air-Mix" (Euclid Chemical Company.). G. Water-Reducing Admixture: Comply with ASTM C494,Type A; 1. "WRDA with HYCOL, or Daracem 55"(Grace Construction Products). 2. "Eucon WR-75 or 89 or 91" (Euclid Chemical Company.). 3. "Pozzolith 322N" (Master Builders Company.). 4. "Plastocrete 160" (Sika Chemical Corp.). H. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture (superplasticizer): ASTM C494, Type F or Type G. 1. "Eucon 37"(Euclid Chemical Company.). 2. "Rheobuild 1000"(Master Builders Company.). 3. "Sikament FF"(Sika Chemical Corp.). 4. "Daracem 19 or Daracem 100" (Grace Construction Products). I. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: Comply with ASTM C494, Type C or E. Admixture shall be chloride-free and non-corrosive. 1. "Pozzutec 20"(Master Builders Company.). 2. "Polarset"(Grace Construction Products). 3. "Accelguard 80"(Euclid Chemical Company.). 4. "Plastocrete 161 FL" (Sika Chemical Corp.). J. Water-Reducing,Retarding Admixture: Comply with ASTM 494,Type D; L "Plastocrete 161R"(Sika Chemical Corp.). 2. "Eucon Retarder-75" (Euclid Chemical Company.). 3. "Daratard-17"(Construction Products Div., W.R. Grace). 4. "Pozzolith 100XR"(Master Builders Company.). a• K. The admixture supplier shall have a minimum of 10 years field performance in plastic and hardened concrete. Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-5 stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. C. Form Ties for General Use: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap- off metal form ties designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-% inch to the plane of the exposed concrete surface. D. Form Ties for Exposed-to-View Surfaces: Shall be designed to seal tightly to the form face material without fluid loss. The following ties shall be used on the Mock-up and one shall be selected and approved for use: , E. Through-the-Wall Taper Ties. Small end to leave a hole 5/8"on surface of concrete. F. Fiberglass Rod ties with non-slip anchoring devices. Color of tie shall be as approved by the Architect. Size of hole left on the concrete surface shall be maximum 9/16". G. Reveal Form Strips: Reveal form strips for vertical and horizontal construction and control joints as shown on drawings shall be Rigid Polyethylene(ie: white slick plastic) material cut and milled smooth to a trapezoid shape. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed; ASTM A 704, Grade 60, deformed for welded splices and connections. B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82,plain,cold-drawn steel. w' C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric. 1. Provide in mats only. Roll stock is prohibited. .A D. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497. E. Support s for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire s, bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications. 1. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. •* F. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact with forms,provide High-Density Wheel supports with small points of contact. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS: A. General: The total chloride (Cl) ion content shall not exceed the maximum allowable in accordance with ACI 318, chapter 4. The Sulfate (SO4) content of the entire mix shall not exceed 0.5% of the weight of the entire mix. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. Use one brand of cement throughout Project. 2. The alkali content shall not exceed 0.6% unless the manufacturer certifies that no alkali reactivity is produced with the proposed combination of materials when tested in accordance with ASTM C227. 3. The cement for exposed formed concrete shall be Type I, light warm gray. 4. The cement for exposed floor topping and exterior paving shall be Type I, dark gray. Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-4 OF 3. Mock-up for exterior placements: a. One 16' x 16' placed and wet finished. Place one construction joint and one sawcut joint at the center line of the mock-up. b. Finish surface the mock-up with a non-slip smooth finish as specified herein. C. Cure as specified. d. After a minimum of 14 days finish one half of the mock-up with strips of sandblasted finish. Apply up to six applications of different abrasive-blast finishes of varying types and degree for approval. Use alternative abrasive material, particle size, pressure, and nozzle size to achieve the approved texture. Perform all samples with the architect present. 4. All procedures and materials shall be as proposed and approved for the building construction. 1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. At least two weeks prior to commencement of concrete work, meet at the Project site to review methods and sequence of concrete construction, standard of workmanship, material selection, testing and quality control requirements, detailed requirements of the proposed mix designs, procedures for satisfactory concrete operations requirements for submittals, status of coordinating work, availability of materials, placement procedures, off-site batching requirements, coordination of the work with other trades and other pertinent topics related to the Work. Meeting shall include the following: 1. Owner's Representative 2. Architect 3. Construction Manager 4. Trade Subcontractor 5. Concrete Subcontractor 6. Testing Agency(ies) and Laboratory(s) 7. Ready mix concrete supplier 8. Admixture Manufacturer(s)Representative(s) 9. Formwork Manufacturer/Supplier 10. Any other subcontractor and/or material supplier or manufacturer required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Formwork: 1. For unexposed surfaces and rough work, use Exterior Type Southern Pine Grade B-B, Plywood, conforming to DOC PS-1, minimum }/4 inch thick, or undressed lumber, No. 2 common or better. Before reusing forms, withdraw nails and thoroughly clean surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 2. For exposed surfaces use High Density plastic overlaid onto A-A Plywood(HDO): "Multipour HDO" by Simpson Timber Co.; "Fourply" by Pacific Wood Laminates; "Wisaform" by Plywood and Door. by Simpson; "Pour Form" 45 by Ainsworth,or approved equal. 3. Form layout shall be in Imperial (US)units(feet and inches). B. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a maximum of 350 mg/1 volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-3 IM G. Samples and Mock-ups 1. For Exposed-to-View Walls and Pavement submit the following samples and Mock-ups. 2. Samples: Concrete Samples: a. Concrete color samples: 12"x12"xl", cast flat, using specified form material, to establish the color. Finish with specified finish treatment. Submit as required to attain approval of the Architect. b. Final samples for formed concrete with specified finish for record: Three 12"x12"x2-1/2" cast vertically for record set. Cast each panel vertical simulating techniques to be used in production casting to reduce the surface air voids and achieve the specified criteria. C. Final samples for formed concrete with specified finish for record: 12"x12"x2, cast flat. Finish hand finished surface with each type of specified finish treatment. 3. Actual installation work shall match approved samples in workmanship and finish quality. Retain approved samples during construction as standards for workmanship and appearance of installation. H. Mock-up for Formed Concrete Work: 1. After all samples, product data, and the shop drawings for the Mock-up are approved construct a mock-up of the work as described below. 2. Mock-up shall consist of the following placements: a. Foundation of a size and reinforcement adequate to support the work. b. 12ft. long x 4ft. high wall with one vertical construction joint and one vertical crack control joint (reveals both sides). Form with material and assembly details proposed for construction of building. C. Finish all exposed surfaces, not used for samples, with approved abrasive blast finish. d. Finish Samples: On one wall apply up to eight applications of different abrasive-blast finishes of varying types and degree for approval. Use alternative abrasive material, particle size, pressure, and nozzle size to achieve the approved texture. Perform all samples with the architect present. e. Expose aggregate on test surfaces from particles passing a #20 screen to particles 3/8" in size as per the architect's instruction during test. f Tie Hole Samples. Prior to finishing the Mock-up walls apply the two specified tie hole treatments on designated areas. On one wall perform a mortar patch as specified in "Finishes". On one wall apply a sealant plug as specified in"Finishes" 3. Reinforce units as per the similar detail on the drawings and add necessary A reinforcing and/or supports to maintain stability. I. Mock-up for Floor and Paving: .� 1. After all samples, product data, and the shop drawings for the Mock-up are approved by the Architect construct a mock-up of the work as described below. 2. Mock-up for interior placements: a. Place 10"x 10" base slab, finish with a scratch finish (allow to air cure for 7 w days). b. Place 10' x 10' topping slab and wet finish. C. Apply final seal/hardener finish as specified. '" d. Sawcut two joints, at center of panel each direction. e. Buff surface as specified. Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-2 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design,placement procedures, and finishes, including: 1. Foundations and footings. 2. Slabs on grade and deck. 3. Foundation walls. 4. Topping slab, including polished topping slab areas. 5. Reinforced concrete slabs and beams. 6. Equipment pads and bases. 7. Exterior paving. !! 8. Interior and exterior stairs. 9. Exterior concrete plinths. �w 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds,dry-shake finish materials, and others if requested by the Architect. C. Shop drawings for reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending, and placing concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, and arrangement of concrete PW reinforcement. Include special reinforcing required for openings, joints, curbs, depressions,and sleeves through concrete structures. D. Shop drawings for formwork prepared, signed and sealed by a registered professional engineer registered to practice in the State of Massachussetts indicating fabrication and erection of forms for all concrete work. Show form construction including jointing, no curbs, depressions, sleeves, special form joints or reveals, location and pattern of form tie placement, and other items that affect exposed concrete visually. Show locations and detail construction joints for concrete work. E. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design tests. F. Material Certificates: Submit material certificates signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that there is no chloride content in admixtures, and that admixture is compatible with other required admixtures. Smith Campus Center Cast-in-Place Concrete 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 03300-1 s 9 7 i 7 3 7 7 ti 3 I 9 l 3 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 "• 3.4 EXCAVATION A. Provisions for excavation are outlined in Section 02200—Earthwork. B. Exposed roots should be covered and kept moist during excavation. + C. After serious root injury, the contractor shall be responsible for a watering schedule determined in consultation with the Architect and Owner. 3.5 MULCHING A. Trees within protective fencing and selected trees within high impact areas (construction traffic,material storage and equipment parking) shall be mulched to a minimum depth of 6 inches. ww 3.6 WATERING A. Trees within protective fencing shall be watered on a weekly basis during period of Vn construction. Provide supplemental irrigation so that a minimum of 1"of water per week, including natural precipitation and irrigation, is supplied over entire area within protective fencing. Hoses and irrigation equipment to be supplied by Contractor. No 3.7 INSPECTIONS on A. Trees and shrubs to remain,protected areas,and future planting areas are to be inspected weekly be the Project Manager/Owner's Representative. The Contractor is responsible for immediate correction or any deficiencies and responsibility for all associated costs. 3.5 PENALTIES A. The Contractor shall be held liable for all violations of the aforementioned specifications and standards and shall,when necessary,repair or replace, as appropriate, all plans to be preserved and to correct all other deficiencies as determined by the Architect. END OF SECTION no W Smith Campus Center Tree and Shrub Clearing and Preservation 75% Construction Document: 01.09.03 02982 - 5 E. Dumping and disposal of waste(paint,oil, fuel,etc) is prohibited around all trees and shrubs. All construction debris is to be removed from the site and disposed of properly. No debris is to be buried on site. 3.3 CLEARING,GRUBBING,AND REMOVAL A. All trees and shrubs, unless noted to remain, shall be cut and removed in their entirety. All stumps,brush, vegetation,rubbish and other perishable or objectionable matter shall be cleared from the site. No on-site burning will be permitted. This debris shall be disposed of by the Contractor in an approved dumping site in compliance with local codes and the Wetlands Protection Act. .� B. Limits of clearing shall be those areas defined by the limits of cut and fill. Removal of trees, shrubs, and herbaceous perennials outside those areas shall be done only as noted on the drawings and as approved by the Architect and Project Manager/Owner's Representative. C. Fell trees in such a way as to not injure trees to be saved. Excavation or grading within the branch spread of trees to be saved shall be performed only under the direction of the Architect and the Project Manager/Owner's Representative. D. Existing trees to be saved,which have, in the opinion of the Architect and the Project + Manager/Owner's Representative,become damaged, shall be replaced with trees of similar size and species. Replacement trees to be tagged in the field or sales yard by the Project Manager/Owner's Representative. Planting specifications for all replacement plantings will be provided by the Owner. All expenses incurred shall be paid by the Contractor. If the tree or shrub cannot be replaced because of size or peculiarity of species, the Owner shall be reimbursed in accordance with the Tree Evaluation Formula as described in"Guide for Plant Appraisal"and"Manual for Plant Appraisers"(latest editions)as published by the Council of Tree and Landscape Appraisers. Warranty all replacement trees for one year after installation. E. Exercise extreme care during grubbing and stripping operations to prevent damage to surface roots of trees to be preserved. Stipping of topsoil around trees to be saved will be restricted to areas beyond the drip lines of existing trees unless otherwise noted. . Woody vegetation located near remaining trees is to be cut to ground level and left, or ground below grade(not pulled out), in order to reduce root injury to remaining trees. When lowering grade, scarifying and preparing sub grade for fills and structures within drip lines of trees to be saved, use retaining walls with discontinuous footings to maintain natural grade as far as possible. Excavate finish grade by hand and prune exposed roots. Soil beyond cut face can be removed by equipment sitting outside the drip line of the tree. F. Remove stumps and roots to clear depth of not less than 1' 0"below subgrade level except as otherwise noted or if woody growth is called to be cut to ground level. At lawns only, depth shall be 6"below finish grade. All depressions excavated below the original ground surface for or by the removal of stumps or roots shall be refilled with suitable material compacted to the density, grade,and contour of the surrounding earth. Smith Campus Center Tree and Shrub Clearing and Preservation 75% Construction Document: 01.09.03 02982 -4 go ' the site. Use only new and solid lumber of utility grade or better to construct temporary barricades around plants designated to remain. Barricades shall be 4"x 4" wood corner posts with three(3) 2"x 4"rails at 2' 0" intervals to 6' 0"height for trees and two(2)2"x 4"rails at 2' 0"intervals to 4' 0"height for shrubs. • B. Barricades shall be set at the outer drip line for shrubs, with special care taken not to damage large roots. All barricades/fencing shall be removed when no longer needed as determined by the Architect and the Project Manager/Owner's Representative. C. No access to fenced areas shall be permitted without prior approval by the Architect. D. Contractor shall provide maintenance and repair of fencing during the duration of this on contract. E. Trees to remain shall not be used for crane stays, guys, or other fastenings. Vehicles shall not be parked within the areas inside the drip line of trees or where damage may result to such trees. Do no stockpile fill, equipment,or building supplies with the areas inside the drip line of trees or within 5' of shrubs. F. Damage no plant by burning,pumping of water,cutting of live rots or branches, operating internal combustion engines beneath branches,or any other means. If, in order to perform excavation work,it becomes necessary to cut roots of plants to be saved, such roots must be neatly cut by a licensed Arborist after Architect's approval. on Roots should not be cut during bud break or leaving out. If at all possible,roots shall be cut in early Spring or late Summer. ON G. The Contractor is responsible for all costs of establishing and carrying out a maintenance program for plants to be saved throughout the time of construction. The program shall include regular feeding, watering, spraying, and cabling, and pruning of all dead or broken branches. op H. Pruning shall be done in a manner that does not change the natural appearance of the plant. Broken or badly bruised branches shall be removed with a clean cut. All ww pruning shall be done by a professional Arborist in accordance with specifications and standards set by the International Society of Arboriculture and the National Arborist Association appropriate to the type of plant and to its special or individual requirements. All pruning shall be reviewed by Architect and Project Manager/Owner's Representative before commencement. I. Carefully remove branches of any trees to be saved which endanger life or property. OR Remove dead branches of all trees to be barricaded with the Contract Limit Line,and desirable branches which may interfere with construction or be damaged during construction must be properly tied out of the way where possible,rather than removed. Prune and tie back branches to height requirements of construction equipment and emergency vehicles prior to construction. J. Any existing plant scheduled to be protected and preserved, that is injured or destroyed shall be replanted at the Contractor's expense. Report all damage promptly to the Architect so the licensed Arborist can treat the damaged plants appropriately. K. Use posts to hold retaining walls, construct walks, or other temporary structures on around trees to remain in order to protect root systems. Care must be taken to minimize root compaction between piers. Smith Campus Center Tree and Shrub Clearing and Preservation 75%Construction Document: 01.09.03 02982 - 3 as 4W PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Tree Protection Fencing: Utility Grade solid lumber,4"x4"posts and 2"x4"rails as shown on drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Site Inspection 1. Prior to work of this Section, carefully inspect the entire site and all objects "' designated to be removed and to be preserved. 2. Coordinate and complete a walk-through of the site with the Landscape Architect, licensed Arborist, and Project Manager/Owner's Representative. 3. Stake out all limits of cut and fill, and groups of trees and shrubs to be saved. At completion of stake-out, the Architect reserves the right to adjust location and +* elevations of layouts to minimize damage to trees, shrubs, and improvements to remain, areas to be left undisturbed, and areas adjacent to site. 4. Erect sturdy, temporary fencing along the work area limits, separating it from protected areas. Minimum distances from protected trees shall be to the outer drip lines around each'tree or group of trees and shrubs. Sensitive species may require fencing at even greater distances from the main trunk. �* B. Clarification 1. The drawings do not purport to show all objects existing on the site. .. 2. Before commencing work of this Section, verify by inspection all objects to be removed and all objects to be preserved. Do no clearing without a clear understanding of existing conditions. C. Scheduling 1. Schedule all work in a careful manner with all necessary consideration for neighbors and the public. 2. Avoid interference with the use of, and passage to and from, adjacent buildings and facilities. •* D. Carefully review Clearing work required adjacent to existing structures and subgrade foundations. 3.2 TREE AND SHRUB PROTECTION A. Plant materials selected to remain shall be protected by sturdy, temporary barriers .. erected prior to any construction or excavation work on the site. These barricades shall be maintained in good condition during the entire period of construction work on Smith Campus Center Tree and Shrub Clearing and Preservation 75% Construction Document: 01.09.03 02982 -2 No SECTION 02982 TREE AND SHRUB CLEARING AND PRESERVATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section shall be governed by the Contract Documents. Provide material, labor, equipment and services necessary to furnish and deliver all Work of this Section s as shown on the Drawings,as specified herein,and/or as required by job conditions. B. The work shall include but is not limited to the following: 1. Protection of all Trees and Plant material shown to remain that are within the scope of work or affected by construction staging and site access. 2. Demolition and removal of Trees, Shrubs and other vegetation including the associated root systems shown to be removed. 3. Grubbing and clearing within scope of work. 4. Protective Fence installation around trees. 5. Pruning operations,root pruning, and watering. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 02100 - Site Preparation B. Section 02200 -Earthwork on C. Section 02900 -Landscaping 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Engage a licensed Arborist with a current certification by the International Society Arboriculture(ISA)acceptable to Architect for tree and shrub work through construction period. C. All notes within this section requiring the approval of the Project Manager/Owner's Representative shall be done in cooperation with the Owner's Director of the Botanic Garden. „ 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under the provisions outlined in Division 1. B. Submit for approval plans indicating tree, shrub, and planting protection techniques. C. Submit Arborist's Inspection Reports listing tree and shrub conditions requiring attention needed and treatments necessary. no D. Submit a schedule of maintenance and procedures for care of plants to be saved throughout the construction. go Smith Campus Center Tree and Shrub Clearing and Preservation 75% Construction Document: 01.09.03 02982 - 1 3. Dig V-shaped trench and set edging into it. Do not drive edging into soil by pounding. 4. Set edging truly vertical without warping or waffling with smooth curves and straight lines that carry through butted sections. Keep lines and angles converging on corners accurate, smooth and aligned. 5. Align,bend,and adjust sections for whole assembly before setting. 6. Set edging and position stakes so that stake side will be turned away from viewer's eye in finished landscape. 7. Assure that top lip of edging is flush with finish grade on both sides or as otherwise indicated on Drawings. 8. Where edging must be cut-to-fit use sharp saw,making cuts square and clean. 9. Bend corners and angles sharply. Cut 2" deep kerf on bottom edge at point of bend to keep bend to 1/2"radius or less. 10. Stake edging at intervals of no more than 4'Lock butted ends securely with splicer stake or other mechanism designed into system. Ensure that stakes are driven full depth into firm soil and fully engaged. B. Gravel Beds: 1. Lay separation fabric so that subgrade is fully covered. Overlap edges and ends of sections minimum 6". Do not stretch fabric. Lay with fuzzy side up to increase friction to help prevent shifting of overlying gravel bed. 2. On slopes 2.5:1 V or steeper scarify subgrade making rough, shallow steps across slope to key fabric and gravel. Anchor fabric with staples. Staple overlaps and free edges 12" on center and internal areas of large fabric sections 18"-24"on center each way throughout. 3. Place and spread gravel fully covering separation fabric. Gravel elevation to be 2" below surrounding finish grades unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Do not shift or tear fabric. Rake and dress gravel surfaces for neat,even appearance. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect gravel beds from being covered with debris,mixed with foreign materials, from erosion and settlement and other disturbances. Replace,clean,correct grades,repair on and restore surface as necessary. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean work areas of excess materials and debris. END OF SECTION go Smith Campus Center Edging and Gravel Beds 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02955 -3 ■w Am PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS go A. Metal Edge: Steel edging, factory primed with black paint in sizes indicated on Drawings furnished with steel stakes and accessories necessary to join and support sections. "Ryerson Steel Landscape Edging"by Joseph T. Ryerson& Son, Inc., Chicago, Illinois,or approved equivalent. Size: '/<"x 5"deep. B. Separation Fabric: Nonwoven,needle punched polypropylene,with high resistance to abrasion,punctures and tearing; good light blockage, ultraviolet light resistance, water permeability,coefficient of friction, and substrata conformity; "Duon Professional Landscape Fabric", 3 oz./sy minimum average weight,manufactured by Phillips Fibers Corp.and distributed by: Bunk's Wholesale Supply, Inc. 3145 W. Columbus Avenue Chicago, IL 60652 .� Ph. (800)922-0550 or approved equivalent. C. Fabric anchor staples: 3mm(11 gauge) steel wire bent into U-shape with section between legs having flattened shape rather than round; throat width of 1"-2" with minimum 6" effective driving depth. D. Crushed Stone: ASHTO size#2 coarse aggregate, "dark grey"color to be approved by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions where gravel beds and edging work are to be done. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Stake-out locations of edging which are not fixed by dimensions indicated on Drawings in and around plant beds and lawns for approval by Architect prior to trenching. Make adjustments in stake-out as directed by Architect. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Metal Edging: •� I. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions except where otherwise specified herein. 2. Assemble to lines and elevations indicated on Drawings. Smith Campus Center Edging and Gravel Beds 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02955 -2 SECTION 02955 EDGING AND GRAVEL BEDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Everything necessary and proper for, or incidental to,executing and completing the work as required by this Section and as reasonably inferable from Drawings, including but not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Metal edges. !" 2. Gravel Beds. 1.3 SUBMITTALS on A. Submit full manufacturer's product data,recommendations and instructions for installation for metal edging. PP B. Submit material samples for: 1. Metal edging-24" long section with 1 stake. 2. Selected crushed stone in representative color and size range-5 lb.bag. 3. Separation fabric -24" square. 4. Fabric anchor staple-3 units. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver fabric in rolls in original wrapping adequate to protect fabric from ultraviolet radiation and abrasion during shipping and handling. Do not leave rolls of fabric or 00 installed fabric unnecessarily exposed to light. Cover installed fabric with overlying material without delay. Do not exceed total accumulated exposure of 2 weeks. !0 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate work under this Section closely with work of other trades of other Sections �w wherever such work affects or is affected by work included herein,especially lawns and planting. Smith Campus Center Edging and Gravel Beds 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02955 - 1 1. Maintain lawn by watering, fertilizing, weeding,mowing, trimming and other operations such as rolling,regrading and resodding/seeding as required to establish a smooth, MW acceptable lawn, free of eroded or bare areas, as determined by Architect. 3.14 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION ,m A. During landscape work, keep pavements clean and work areas in an orderly condition. B. Protect landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations,operations by other contractors and trades and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair or replace damaged landscape work as directed by Architect. 3.15 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE A. When landscape work is completed, including maintenance,Architect will,upon request, *� make an inspection to determine acceptability. 1. Landscape work may be inspected for acceptance in parts agreeable to Architect, provided work offered for inspection is complete, including maintenance. B. When inspected landscape work does not comply with requirements,replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance until re-inspected by Architect and found to be acceptable. Remove rejected plants and materials promptly from project site. C. Lawn areas will be acceptable provided all requirements, including maintenance, have be complied with, and a healthy, uniform,close stand of the specified grass is established free of weeds, undesirable grass species, disease and insects. No individual lawn areas shall have bare spots or unacceptable cover totaling more than 2%of the individual areas, in areas requested to be inspected. ,. D. Planted areas will be accepted provided all requirements, including maintenance,have been complied with and plant materials are alive and in a healthy, vigorous condition. ., 3.16 WARRANTY PERIOD A. Warranty period will begin at the time of provisional acceptance. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Landscaping 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02900-14 40 2. Distribute at following rate: Caliper No. of Packets a. Trees 1"-2" 2 2"-2 1/2" 3 2 1/2"-3" 4 311-411 J G ON 4" and up one packet per inch of caliper plus one packet. Example: 7"-8" caliper would receive 8 + 1 =9 packets. b. Shrubs 1 packet for every 12" of height or spread, whichever is larger. c. Vines 1 packet per plant. 3. Handle packets with care. Remove packets which are cut,ripped,or otherwise damaged along with any loose fertilizer from plant pit or hole and replace with new packets. C. Myrcorrhizal Fungal Innoculant: Incorporate mycorrhizal additive at rates and depth recommended by manufacturer prior to final backfill. D. Leaf Mold: Incorporate leaf mold into surface layer of soil as indicated on Drawings. C. Saucering: After topsoil mixture has been placed, form earth saucer for retention of water around each tree or shrub unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Make saucer same ? diameter as that of hole dug and lip level all around and at least 4" high for trees. D. Watering: Thoroughly soak soil around each plant immediately after planting, even if it is raining or expected to rain. E. Mulching: After watering, spread mulch to uniform depth indicated on Drawings,raking and dressing for neat, even surface. 3.13 LAWN ESTABLISHMENT AND PLANT MAINTENANCE A. Begin maintenance immediately after planting. B. Maintain trees, shrubs and other plants until final acceptance but in no case less than 60 days after substantial completion of planting. C. Maintain trees, shrubs and other plants by pruning, watering,cultivating and weeding as required for healthy growth. Restore planting saucers. Reset plants to proper grades or vertical position as required. Restore or replace damaged wrappings. Tighten guy wires. Spray as required to keep plants free of insects and disease. on D. Maintain lawns for not less than 60 days after substantial completion, and longer as required to establish an acceptable lawn. O. Smith Campus Center Landscaping 100%Construction Documents: 0 L 11.12 02900-13 3.12 PLANT INSTALLATION A. Setting Plants: 1. General: a. Ensure that chemical toxicity from herbicide applications has sufficiently dissipated to allow installation of plants without damage. b. Have pits,plant beds and topsoil mixtures prepared before distributing plants to planting locations so as to minimize exposure and drying. c. Place plants carefully so as not to break limbs, tear roots from ball, or damage integrity of ball. Reject and replace plants with damaged balls or root systems. d. Set plants upright,plumb and aligned as indicated on Drawings within plant pit or bed. Keep crown or ball of root system slightly above surface grade. Face plants to give best appearance or relationship to surrounding area or as otherwise directed by Architect. e. Backfill with topsoil mixture in lifts, firming by foot and settling around perimeter of plant ball with water to eliminate air pockets. Do not compact backfill. Do not fill around trunks, stems,or over top of root ball. Keep crown of ball or root system slightly above surface grade. 2. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Cut away and remove biodegradable burlap and twine from top and half way down side of root ball. Remove water resistant, waterproof and non- biodegradable materials completely. 3. Container Stock: Remove soil ball from containers and scarify roots all around prior to planting. 4. Bare Root Stock: a. Submerge plants totally in water 18-24 hours just prior to planting. Do not allow them to dry out while planting. b. Cleanly cut and remove broken or frayed roots. Spread roots out in natural position and work soil mixture carefully into roots. Firm soil by foot and water in to eliminate air pockets. Set root crown at surface level where it would naturally occur. 5. Ground cover and Perennial Plants: Space plants as indicated in Plant List. Adjust spacing as necessary to evenly fill planting beds with indicated quantity of plants. Assure that roots and soil balls are fully bedded in and surrounded by soil firmed by foot with crown below mulch, flush with soil surface. 6. Bulbs: Position each species according to its needs at correct depth for each variety and size. B. Fertilizing Trees, Shrubs, and Vines: 1. Distribute unopened fertilizer packets evenly around plant ball or roots within plant pit or hole at a depth of 6"-8". Do not place in direct contact with plant roots. Cover packets with remaining topsoil mixture. w. Smith Campus Center Landscaping 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02900-12 D. On completion of fine grading and amendment treatments,prior to actual installation of plants,make Type B Herbicide Application(pre-plant herbicide)to beds. Remove weeds prior to application. Cultivate beds 2" deep 2-3 weeks after application. 3.10 HERBICIDE APPLICATION A. Apply following herbicide types for control of unwanted weeds, grass and other vegetation in areas indicated on Drawings: Type A Herbicide Application(Weed and grass herbicide). Type B Herbicide Application(Preplant herbicide). B. Contractor shall be liable for damage resulting from herbicide or its application. Do not allow herbicide spray to drift. Apply herbicide so that it does not fall outside areas of treatment. Take necessary precautions to avoid damage to adjacent existing vegetation or existing vegetation to remain within areas of treatment. C. Notify Architect,other trades,Owner and public that may be nearby of upcoming application just before commencement of work. D. Make application in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions both in method of on application and quantities used. E. Make application within growth stage and season recommended by manufacturer and during WX optimum weather conditions. Do not apply when showers or rain threaten, on frozen ground, or during windy periods. F. Allow adequate time for herbicide to take complete effect and chemical toxicity to pass before proceeding with further work in area. 3.11 PLANTING SUBDRAINS A. Where indicated on Drawings, install plastic perforated pipe sections with perforations down, firmly bedded in porous material and pitched to drain. B. Provide collars and couplings for in-line joints,tees for intersections,elbows for corners and changes in direction, and unperforated pipe and caps for clean outs. Provide unperforated run out pipes and make connections to storm drain system or outfalls. C. Test system for inspection by Owner's Representative before back filling. Correct any portion which is not operating properly and retest as necessary to satisfy Owner's 00 Representative. D. After satisfactory testing place porous material over piping followed by filter fabric. Lap ends of fabric 6" and pin securely all around. Do not shift or tear separator when backfilling soil above. Smith Campus Center Landscaping 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02900-11 am am natural settlement finish grades will be at levels and profiles indicated on Drawings. Do not use mechanical compaction. ,�.. d. Prior to planting,return and place additional fill if necessary to compensate for settlement. 2. Bed Condition B(beds in undisturbed existing topsoil areas): a. Treat bed areas with Type A Herbicide Application(weed and grass herbicide). Make treatment adequate to kill roots and foliage of existing herbaceous vegetation. b. After herbicide treatment has taken full effect scalp away 1" depth of soil and roots along with thatch and foliage above and dispose of off-site. Turn over existing soil in beds 8" deep using rotary tiller and afterward spread following materials and till into beds 8" deep: (1) Bed Preparation Type A(general planting): 4" loose peat moss •• 1" sand 5 lbs. superphosphate/100 s.f, Additive required to bring pH to 5.5-6.5 ,. (2) Bed Preparation Type B (ericaceous planting): 6" loose peat moss 40 1" sand 5 lbs. superphosphate/100 s.f. Additive required to bring pH to 4.5-5.5 B. Fine grade beds to conform to finish grades and profiles indicated on Drawings,assuring uninterrupted drainage pattern, free of hollows and pockets. Remove rocks,roots and other debris on surface and dispose of off-site. C. Amend bed areas with following amendment treatments where indicated on Drawings, ^ incorporating materials 4" deep: 1. Amendment Treatment A(general treatment for ground covers, vines,perennials and bulbs): Commercial fertilizer 2-1/2 lbs/100 s.f. Natural organic fertilizer 2-1/2 lbs/100 s.f. Peat moss 2" loose layer 2. Amendment Treatment B (for Euonymus fortunei coloratus ground cover): Commercial fertilizer 2-1/2 lbs/100 s.f. Natural organic fertilizer 2-1/2 lbs/100 s.f. Peat moss 2" loose layer Ground limestone 2-1/2 lbs/100 s.f. Smith Campus Center Landscaping 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02900-10 3.6 PLANTING MIXTURE PREPARATION A. Do mixing on site by following method unless otherwise approved by Architect. 1. Spread topsoil in 8" deep layer and remove rocks and debris. g„ 2. Calculate amount of each required additive or amendment for amount of topsoil spread. 3. Spread each additive or amendment over top of topsoil uniformly. Mix small-quantity amendments together before spreading to assure even distribution. Spread amendments one at a time and mix. 4. Use rotary tiller tractor attachment to chop in amendments. Mix materials thoroughly to full 8" topsoil depth. B. Make up following types of planting mixtures using materials and proportions as follows: 1. Type A Topsoil Mixture(general planting): 3 parts topsoil with additive required to bring pH to 5.5-6.5 range 1 part loose peat moss 1 part sand with 5 lbs of superphosphate/cubic yard of mixture 2. Type B Topsoil Mixture(ericaceous planting): 3 parts topsoil with additive required to bring pH to 4.5-5.5 range. 3 part loose peat moss 1 part sand with 5 lbs.of superphosphate/cubic yard of mixture !" 3.7 PLANTING STAKE-OUT A. Stake-out locations of plants in field for approval by Architect prior to excavation of pits and planting holes. Make adjustments in stake-out as directed by Architect. 3.8 PLANT PIT PREPARATION 4W A. Excavate plant pits to depth and width indicated on Drawings. B. In areas where subgrade is contaminated, excavate pits additional 12" deep and wide all 40 around and replace with clean,uncontaminated,soil material approved by Architect. Dispose of contaminated material off site. C. In areas where subgrades are poorly draining provide corrective drainage indicated on Drawings. D. Scarify walls and bottoms of pits to key with topsoil mix backfill. 3.9 PLANT BED PREPARATION ON A. Make initial bed preparation according to following conditions: 1. Bed Condition A(beds in areas stripped and rough graded or otherwise without undisturbed existing topsoil). go a. In beds where subgrade is contaminated, excavate pits an additional 12" deep and replace with clean, uncontaminated soil material approved by Architect. b. Scarify subgrade 12" deep with vibratory plow or other methods approved by Architect. If proper drainage is not achieved,notify Architect for his direction prior to further work. c. Scarify subgrade surface to key with topsoil mix. Then backfill plant beds with proper mix type indicated on Drawings. Adequately overfill beds so that after full Smith Campus Center Landscaping go 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02900-9 3.2 RECONDITIONING EXISTING LAWNS A. Remove diseased or unsatisfactory lawn areas. Scalp away and remove vegetation, leaves, thatch and root crowns. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials resulting from Contractor's operations, including oil drippings, stone, gravel, and other construction .. materials. B. Where substantial but thin lawn remains, rake, aerate if compacted,and cultivate soil; fertilize and seed. C. Provide and apply fertilizer, seed and additives as specified for new lawns and as directed by Owner. Topdress with topsoil as required to fill low areas and meet new finish grades. ' 3.3 ROOT BED PREPARATION FOR LAWN AREAS A. Till undisturbed topsoil areas and areas of newly fine graded topsoil which have become crusted or compacted 6" deep to improve drainage and root penetration. 1. Remove stones over P in any dimension and sticks,roots,rubbish,and other debris. 2. Recess finish grade at edges of paving,walkways and tops of curbs P to accept sod and allow for growth and build up of grass. 3. Grade areas to smooth, free draining, even surface with loose, moderately coarse texture. Remove ridges, and fill depressions as required to drain by leveling,raking and rolling. B. Evenly distribute and thoroughly till additives for pH correction and fertilizers into the top 3" of topsoil. Apply and incorporate each material in separate operation with mechanical + equipment. Apply and incorporate by hand only in inaccessible areas. 1. Apply additive for pH correction at rate recommended by topsoil testing service to adjust pH of topsoil to not less than 6.0 nor more than 7.0. a. If otherwise required by Architect, apply ground limestone at a rate of 25 pounds per 1,000 square feet. 2. Apply starter fertilizer at the rate of 3.6 lbs. per 1000 s.f. C. Following incorporation of additive and fertilizer,correct disturbed grades by raking and dragging. aw D. Make final root bed preparation by lightly tilling, rolling and leveling surface so that soil is smooth, friable and uniformly fine textured followed by light raking to make granular surface with furrows and crevices to receive seed. 3.4 LAWN SEEDING A. Sow seed as directed by Owner. 3.5 LAWN MULCHING A. Spread hay mulch over seeded areas within 24 hours after seeding. B. Mulch at rate as directed by Owner. Smith Campus Center Landscaping ,,, 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02900-8 F. Leaf Mold: Well-composted, shredded leaves, free of branches,roots, contaminants and other foreign matter,acid-free. G. Subdrainage Materials: 1. PVC Perforated Pipe: Perforated and solid wall,rigid polyvinyl chloride underdrain pipe, couplings and fittings conforming to and marked with AASHTO M278 of sizes indicated on Drawings. 2. PE Perforated Tubing: Perforated and solid wall,corrugated polyethylene underdrain tubing,couplings and fittings conforming to and marked with AASHTO M252 of sizes indicated on Drawings. 3. Drainage Fabric: Nonwoven,needle punched,consisting of long-chain polymeric fibers composed of polypropylene,polyethylene, or polyamide. Fibers oriented into multi- directional stable network retaining their positions relative with each other and allowing passage of water as specified. Fabric free of chemical treatment or coating that reduces 00 permeability, inert to chemicals commonly found in soil and meeting physical property requirements as follows: an Test Acceptable Min. t Physical Property Method Test Results "a Weight, oz./sy ASTM D-3776 3.7 Tensile Strength, lbs. ASTM D-4632 100 Elongation,% ASTM D-4632 50 Coefficient or Water Permeability,cm/sec ASTM D-4491 0.10 Puncture Strength, lbs. ASTM D-37872 60 Apparent Opening Size, AOS U.S. Standard ASTM D-4751 60-100 1Minimum values in weaker principal direction in any sampled roll in lot. z Tension testing machine with ring clamp; steel ball replaced with a'" 7.94mm(5/16")diameter solid steel cylinder with flat tip and beveled edges,centered within ring clamp. "Supac 4NP" geotextile by Phillips Fibers Corp.is approved product. 4. Porous Material: AASHTO M43,#6(3/8" to 3/4")uniformly graded,clean crushed stone or gravel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 TOPSOIL TESTS A. Follow testing laboratory's recommendations for amending topsoil as required meeting these Specifications. Correct topsoil pH, if necessary, to required level and make corrections accordingly during preparation of beds by addition of ground limestone to raise level or aluminum sulfate or powdered sulfur to lower level of pH. Smith Campus Center Landscaping 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02900-7 ■. B. Deciduous Trees: 1. Provide trees of height and caliper scheduled or shown and with branching configuration ' recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and species required. Provide single stem trees except where special forms are shown or listed. 2. Provide balled and burlapped(B&B)deciduous trees. C. Deciduous Shrubs: Provide shrubs of the height shown or listed and with not less than minimum number of canes required by ANSI Z60.1 for type and height of shrub required. 1. Provide balled and burlapped(B&B)deciduous shrubs as specified. 2. Container grown deciduous shrubs will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped deciduous shrubs subject to specified limitations for container grown stock. D. Coniferous and Broadleafed Evergreens: Provide evergreens of sizes shown or listed. Dimensions indicate minimum spread for spreading and semi-spreading type evergreens and height for other types, such as globe,dwarf,cone,pyramidal,broad upright, and columnar. Provide normal quality evergreens with well-balanced form complying with requirements for other size relationships to the primary dimensions shown. 1. Provide balled and burlapped(B&B)evergreens. 2. Container grown evergreens will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped evergreens subject to specified limitations for container grown stock. E. Groundcover: Provide plants established and well-rooted in removable containers or integral .. peat pots and with not less than minimum number and length of runners required by ANSI Z60.1 for the pot size shown or listed. 2.4 SEEDED LAWN MATERIALS A. Grass Seed Mixture: To be provided by Owner. .,. B. Hay Mulch: Provided to Contractor by Owner. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE MATERIALS •� A. Anti-desiccant: Emulsion type, film-forming agent designed to permit transpiration but retard excessive loss of moisture from plants. Deliver in manufacturer's fully identified containers and mix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Bark Mulch: Shredded cedar bark with fibrous texture and uniform dark brown color. Partially decomposed,of a consistency so that not more than 25%will pass through a 1/2" sieve with a 1 1/2" maximum size, having an organic content of not less than 90%, with white wood content not exceeding 8%. "Cedar Scape" Decorative Shredded Cedar Bark by Atlantic Forest Products, Edenton, N.C. 27932, or approved equivalent. C. Preplant Herbicide: "Treflan"(triflurilin), emulsifiable concentrate by Elanco Products Co., Indianapolis, IN, or approved equivalent. D. Weed and Grass Herbicide: Broad spectrum, non-selective,post-emergent,non-residual. "Roundup"(glyphosate)by Monsanto Agricultural Products Co. E. Sand: Clean, course, ungraded, meeting ASTM C33 requirements for concrete sand. 4W Smith Campus Center Landscaping am 100%Construction Documents: 0 l.11.12 02900-6 �w 2.2 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Additives for pH correction: 1. Aluminum Sulfate or powdered sulfur commercial grade. 2. Ground limestone: Dolomitic,not less than 85%total carbonates and magnesium, ground so that 50%passes 100 mesh sieve and 90%passes 20 mesh sieve. Coarser material shall be acceptable provided that specified rates of application are increased proportionately on basis of quantities passing 100 mesh sieve. B. Natural Organic Fertilizer: "Milorganite",by Sewerage Commission,Milwaukee,Wisconsin, or approved equivalent having an analysis as follows: Total Nitrogen(N)-6.5%water insoluble nitrogen 6.0% Available Phosphoric Acid(P2O5) 3.0% so Soluble Potash(K2O) 0.0% Iron(Fe) 3.0% C. Commercial Fertilizer: Having the following minimum guaranteed composition by weight: nitrogen 5%(50%organic), available Phosphoric Acid(P2O5) 10%, Soluble Potash(K2O) 5%,unless soil tests indicate need for different composition as determined by Architect. go Elements becoming available according to methods adopted by Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. By Agway or approved equivalent. D. Fertilizer Packets: Fertilizer in polyethylene bags perforated with micropore holes for controlled feeding. "Nutri-Pak"by J"International Inc.,Fond Du Lac,WI 54935,414/922- 0148,or approved equivalent, containing two ounces of water-soluble fertilizer effective for approximately five years with guaranteed analysis as follows: Total Nitrogen(N) 16.0% Available Phosphoric Acid(P2O5) 8.0% Soluble Potash(K2O) 8.0% E. Superphosphate: Composed of finely ground phosphate rock commonly used for agricultural purposes. Containing not less than 18%available phosphoric acid. By Agway or approved equivalent. F. Mycorrhizal Fungal Transplant Innoculant: Endo/ectomycorrhizal Fungal additive with water absorbant hydrogel and organic soil conditioners. MycorTM Tree SaverTM Transplant as produced by Plant Health Care, Inc., Pittsburgh,PA(800-421-9051)or approved equivalent. 2.3 PLANT MATERIALS A. General: Provide trees, shrubs,and other plants of size, genus,species and variety shown and scheduled for landscape work and complying with recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z60.1, "American Standard for Nursery Stock". Plants shall have normal, fibrous root systems and well-developed branching systems;be sound,healthy,vigorous and acclimated, and free from breakage, abrasions, disfigurements, diseases and infestations of any kind. so Smith Campus Center Landscaping 02900-5 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 1.9 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY A. Warranty lawns through specified lawn maintenance period and until final acceptance. .® 1. Provide a uniform stand of vegetation by watering and maintaining seeded areas until completion and final acceptance of the entire project. Reseed seeded areas that fail to provide a uniform stand of vegetation with specified materials, until all areas are accepted by the Architect. B. Warranty trees, shrubs,and other plants through specified maintenance period and until final acceptance. 1. Warranty trees, shrubs, and other plants for a period of one year after date of provisional acceptance against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth,except for defects resulting from neglect by Owner,abuse or damage by others,or unusual phenomena or incidents which are beyond Landscape Installer's control. 2. Remove and replace trees, shrubs,or other plants found to be dead or in unhealthy condition during warranty period. Make replacements during growth season following end of warranty period. Replace trees and shrubs that are in doubtful condition at end of warranty period, unless, in opinion of Architect, it is advisable to extend warranty period for a full growing season. Warranty all replacement plans for one year after installation. 3. Another inspection will be conducted at end of extended warranty period to determine acceptance or rejection. Only one replacement(per tree, shrub,or plant)will be required at end of warranty period, except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with specified requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TOPSOIL A. Existing Topsoil: 1. Topsoil for landscape work available at site may be insufficient for the work of this Contract. Additional topsoil must be furnished, as necessary to complete the work, as specified. 2. Existing topsoil may be used so long as it meets the specifications for new topsoil. B. New Topsoil: 1. Provide new topsoil which is naturally fertile, friable; light, sandy loam containing 5- 25%organic matter. It shall be free of subsoil, clay lumps,brush, weeds and other litter, and free of roots, stumps, stones larger than 1-1/4" in any dimension, and other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth. 2. Obtain topsoil from local sources or from areas having similar soil characteristics to that found at project site. Obtain topsoil only from naturally, well-drained sites where topsoil occurs in a depth of not less than 4"; do not obtain from bogs or marshes. Smith Campus Center Landscaping 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 029004 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight,analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at site. B. Trees and Shrubs and Ground Covers: 1. Provide freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery unless otherwise approved by Architect. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such manner as to damage bark,break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. Do not drop balled and burlapped stock during delivery or planting operations. 2. Deliver trees, shrubs and ground covers after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, w set trees and shrubs in shade,protect from weather and mechanical damage,and keep roots moist by covering with mulch,burlap or other acceptable means of retaining moisture. 3. Do not remove container grown stock from containers until planting time. 1.8 JOB CONDITIONS A. Proceed with and complete landscape work as rapidly as portions of site become available, working within seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work required. B. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner that will avoid possible damage. Hand excavate as required. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned. C. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill,adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions,notify Architect before planting. 'a D. Planting Time: Plant or install materials during normal planting seasons for each type of landscape work required and in accordance with approved Planting Schedule. Plant during periods specified below, unless otherwise approved by the Architect: SPRING FALL Evergreen Trees&Shrubs When soil becomes workable:May 15 August 15—October 1 Deciduous Trees&Shrubs When soil becomes workable:May 1 October 15—December 1 Groundcovers&Vines Aril 15—June 15 Perennials May 15—July 15 Bulbs September 15—November 1 E. Coordination with Lawns: If possible,plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to planting of lawns. If planting of trees and shrubs must occur after lawn work, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage to lawns resulting from planting operations. Smith Campus Center Landscaping 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02900-3 ----ftMft._ ...y..� __ M ,.w 2. Herbicide application shall be performed by experienced workers under the supervision of licensed applicator approved by Architect. .�. B. Source Quality Control: 1. General: Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection required by governing .. authorities. Comply with regulations applicable to landscape materials. 2. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not obtainable,submit proof of non-availability to Architect, together with proposal for use of equivalent material. 3. Analysis and Standards: Package standard products with manufacturer's certified analysis. Provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the Association of Official Agriculture Chemists,wherever applicable. C. Trees, Shrubs and Plants: Provide trees, shrubs and plants of quantity, size,genus, species and variety shown and scheduled for landscape work and complying with recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z60.1 "American Standard for Nursery Stock". Provide healthy, vigorous stock, grown in recognized nursery in accordance with good horticultural practice and, free of disease, insects,eggs, larvae and defects such as knots, sun-scald, injuries, abrasions,or disfigurement. D. Label each tree and shrub with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common names. Where formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees .., or shrubs are shown, select stock for uniform height and spread,and label with number to assure symmetry in planting. E. Inspection: Trees and shrubs shall be subject to approval and tagging by Architect at place of .A growth or at site before planting, for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size and quality. Notify Architect at least two days prior to arrival of plant materials on site. Architect retains right to further inspect plant materials for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries and latent defects, and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected material immediately from project site. ®, 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Requirements and Procedures are specified in Division 1. ` B. Submit certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. C. Submit manufacturer's or vendor's certified analysis for soil amendments and fertilizer materials. Submit other data substantiating that materials comply with specified *' requirements, including topsoil analysis with testing laboratory's recommendations. D. Topsoil Tests 1. Submit tests for physical properties of topsoil including sieve analysis. ,Ok 2. Submit tests for chemical properties of soil including organic content and pH. Include laboratories recommendation for fertilizer amendments and pH correction for each type of proposed planting(lawns, ericaceous plantings, etc.). in E. Submit list for plant material showing source of production, size and quantity. F. Planting Schedule: Submit proposed planting schedule indicating dates for each type of landscape work during normal seasons for such work in area of site. Correlate with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance from date of substantial completion. Once .o accepted, revise dates only as approved in writing after documentation of reasons for delays. Confirm planting dates with Architect immediately prior to work. Smith Campus Center Landscaping 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02900-2 �w SECTION 02900 LANDSCAPING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. The work of this Section shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Subsoil preparation. 2. Topsoil(from off-site,if required, and fine grading). 3. Soil amendments. 4. Plant materials and accessories. 5. Planting soil mix. 6. Seeded lawn. 7. Maintenance and replacement as required through warranty period. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS !! A. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls B. Section 02100-Site Preparation C. Section 02200-Earthwork w D. Section 02291 —Haybale Erosion Checks E. Section 02293—Silt Fence F. Section 02430=Catch Basins&Manholes G. Section 02433—Storm Drain H. Section 02513 -Bituminous Concrete I. Section 02525—Granite Curbs J. Section 02713—Water Service K. Section 02722—Sanitary Sewer L. Section 02955—Edging and Gravel Beds M. Section 02982—Tree and Shrub Clearing&Preservation 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials Standards(ASTM), sections as specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractors: 1. Subcontract landscaping to a firm, acceptable to the Architect, specializing in landscape work with good reputation and a successful record over the last 5 years in projects with similar scope that maintains a regular force of experienced workmen skilled in the work of this section. Smith Campus Center Landscaping 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02900-1 40 E. Framing: 00 1. Bracing: Brace each terminal, gate, corner,end and pull post back to adjacent line post at mid-height with horizontal brace rail and diagonal truss rod secured with fittings. Adjust truss rod, ensuring posts remain plumb. 2. Top Rails: Install rail continuously through line post tops in minimum 18 feet lengths joined with rail sleeves and attached with fittings at terminal posts. 3. Tension Wire: Provide tension wire at bottom of fabric and at top, if top rail is not specified. Install tension wire before stretching fabric and attach to each post with ties. Attach tension wire to fabric with hog rings 24" (610mm) on center. F. Fabric so 1. Hang fabric so that posts and rails are on interior of fence enclosure. 2. Untwist and weave fabric to form single continuous piece between terminal posts. 3. Stretch fabric between each set of opposing terminal posts and at intervals of no more than 100 feet. 4. Maintain 2 inch clearance of bottom selvage of fabric above finish grade for: 5. Pull fabric taut,thread tension bar through fabric and attach to terminal posts with bands or clips at maximum of 15"(381mm)on center. Attach fabric with wire ties to line posts at 15"(381mm)on center and to rails,braces, and tension wire at 24"(600mm)on center. F. Wire Ties and Fasteners: Bend ends of wire ties to minimize hazard to persons and clothing. Install nuts on side of fence opposite fabric side for added security. G. Gates: Install gates plumb, level,closely fitted without binding,centered on gate posts and aligned with adjoining horizontal elements of fence. Adjust and lubricate hardware for 4" smooth operation. H. Barbed Wire: Uniformly space parallel rows of barbed wire on security side of fence. Pull wire taut and attach in clips or slots of each extension. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect and keep fences in first-class condition until final acceptance. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean work area of excess materials,debris and equipment and repair damage caused by installation work. B. Remove excavated post hole material and dispose of off site as directed by Owner. C. During installation prevent concrete and grout droppings on surrounding finish work and remove before staining and set takes place. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Chain Link Fences ' " 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02830-7 wee PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that areas to receive fencing are completed to final grades and elevations. Ensure property lines and legal boundaries of work are clearly established. Examine installation conditions. Do not start chain link fence work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected and layout has been approved. X" 3.2 PREPARATION A. Stakeout complete fence line in locations and to dimensions indicated on Drawings. .�. B. Locate and mark post positions. 1. Position terminal,end,corner, gate and pull posts. Provide corner posts at any abrupt changes in direction, either horizontally(more than 10 degrees)or vertically(more than 30 degrees). Between end, corner and gate posts spaced more than 100' apart, install pull posts at equal intervals of 100' and less. 2. Space line posts equally between above posts at maximum 10' on center measured parallel to rake of proposed fence. In straight sections keep posts centered on each other. C. Review stakeout with Architect for his approval. If so directed, make minor adjustments for .w terrain, vegetation and site improvements. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Provide rigid,plumb, finished fence structure with fabric tight and in tension and of nominal height indicated on Drawings. Install chain link fence system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and following ASTM F567. B. Post Anchorage: Provide type, size and depth indicated on Drawings. Wo C. Recessed Footings 1. Drill holes in undisturbed and compacted soil. For heavy lateral loads and soft soil conditions, excavate deeper than indicated for adequate support. If walls of holes cave in W" or sluff away, use full depth fiber forming tubes to form footings. 2. Place concrete around posts full depth in continuous pour and tamp to consolidate. Align and plumb each post, holding it in position during concrete placement and finishing operation until concrete has set sufficiently to maintain post's position. 3. Smoothly trowel finish tops of footings, crowning them to drain. 4. Maintain 2"depth of top for backfill. D. Swing Gate Hardware Anchorage: Set keepers matching post footing depth, stops and sleeves in concrete footings indicated on Drawings. Center hardware with flanges, edges and bases flush with surface. Excavate holes,cut openings, place and finish concrete similar to post footings. Smith Campus Center Chain Link Fences 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02830-6 or compensation with offset hardware. Provide 2 inch transom clearance. . Provide 2 inch clearance at bottom of gates. 4. Gate Frames: a. One-piece frame units with fusion or stainless steel welded connections or assembled panels joined with approved fittings to form rigid panels with no sagging and twisting. Provide assembled panels, 5 feet or wider each with 5/16 inch(7.9mm) minimum diameter,adjustable, diagonal truss rod. b. Provide vertical bracing at maximum 8 feet(2440mm)horizontal mid point intervals " and horizontal mid-point bracing. Provide other bracing as necessary to counter sagging of gate panels. c. Install fabric with hook bolts and tension bars on 4 sides,attached to gate frames no more than 15 inches(381mm)on center. 5. Gate Frame Finishes: Touch-up finishes damaged by fabrication,cutting and welding with matching rust preventive coating. 6. Gate Hardware: Provide approved metal items and fasteners required to make gates completely operable. Commercial/industrial duty hardware of materials similar to and with finishes matching fence accessories. a a. Hinges: Offset type allowing clear opening and close fit. Of size, strength and number to support gate without excessive sagging and with no binding on opening and closing. Non-lift off type with 180 degree swing(3.14 rad)either in,out,or in and out as indicated on Drawings. b. Latch: Fulcrum fork type with provisions for padlock. Sized and fitted to retain gate in closed position and to open and close smoothly. c. Keeper: Provide for gate leaves 5 feet(1524mm)wide and over. Sized and fitted to hold free ends of gate leaves in full open position. d. Double Gate Drop Rod: Non removable,pad-lockable in lowered position. Secured in raised and lowered position. Compatible with center stop and latch. e. Double Gate Center Stop: Mushroom type, 12" deep for setting in concrete footing. f. Gate Stop for One-Way Swing Gate: Plate mounted with bolts on latch side of gate frame to contact latch gate post on closure,preventing over swing and stress on hinges. g. Fasteners: Stainless steel screws and rivets. Galvanized bolts,nuts and locking washers. Finish similar to fence fasteners. G. Barbed Wire Top: 1. Smith Campus Center Chain Link Fences 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02830-5 am Based on Gate Leaf Single Width Type I Pie OD x Wt in x lb/ft (mm x kg/m) 6 ft(1829mm)to 12 ft(3657mm) 4.00 x 9.11 (101.6 x 13.6) D. Fence Accessories: 1. Provide approved metal accessories required to complete fence system. ASTM F626 except where otherwise indicated herein. Commercial/industrial duty. 2. Finishes: Provide galvanized ferrous accessories. On 3. Post Caps: Snug,outside fitting,weather tight closure caps, one for top of each post, secured against removal with 2 set screws. Provide cap styles for posts as follow: a. Round posts less than 3 inches(75mm)diameter: Dome caps. 4W b. Posts with top rails: Loop caps(no finials). 4. Top rail and brace rail ends. 5. Top rail sleeves: 6 inch(152mm)long,allowing for expansion and contraction and of OR design secure from slipping along rail. 6. Wire Ties: For attachment of fabric to: a. Line Post: 9 gauge,0.148 in. (3.76mm),galvanized steel wire. no b. Rails and Braces: double wrap 13 gauge,0.092 in. (2.324mm) c. Tension Wire: 12-1/2 gauge, 0.0985 in. (2.502mm hog rings. 7. Brace and Tension Bands: Beveled. OR 8. Tension Bars: One piece lengths equal to 2 inches (50mm) less than full height of fabric with minimum cross-section of 3/16"x 3/4"(4.76mm x 19mm) or equivalent fiber glass rod. Provide tension bars at terminal, end, gate, corner and pull posts. 9. Truss Rods: Minimum 5/16 inch(7.9mm), diameter steel, threaded for and fitted with turnbuckle and brace rail ends. 10. Barbed Wire: Double strand, twisted line wire of galvanized steel with 4 point barbs spaced approximately 3"on center. 11. Barbed wire supporting arms: Galvanized pressed steel arms with provisions for attaching 3 rows of barbed wire. Arms shall withstand 250 lb. downward pull at outermost end of arm without failure. 12. Fasteners: Stainless steel screws and rivets. Galvanized or stainless steel bolts,nuts and locking washers. E. Touch-up Paint: Zinc, aluminum or PVC paint recommended by manufacturer and matching adjacent fence finishes. 4W F. Swing Gates: 1. Provide materials, accessories and fabricate in accordance with ASTM F900 unless otherwise indicated herein. Fabricate and finish gate leaves and attach accessories to No extent possible in shop. 2. Use same gauge fabric and base metal type of framing, bracing and accessories in same finishes as specified for adjoining fence. aft 3. Size gates to fit post to post gate openings and opening heights indicated on Drawings, allowing for hinge, latch and drop rod dimensions without excessive looseness, rubbing no Smith Campus Center Chain Link Fences 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 028304 Ow M 1. Round Framing: Type I: ASTM F1083, standard weight schedule 40; minimum yield strength of 25,000 psi(170 MPa); sizes as indicated. Hot-dipped galvanized with minimum average 1.8 oz/f12 (550 g/m2)of coated surface area 2. Components: a. Tension Wire: ASTM A824, coiled spring steel, 7 gauge, 0.177 inch(4.5mm) diameter,Type 1. ww b. Pipe Size Equivalents Outside Diameter = Nominal Outside Diameter MR 1.66" = 1-5/8 1.9" = 2" 2.375" = 2-1/2" 2.875" = 3" c. Terminal, end,corner and pull posts(round). Based on Fabric Height Type I ODx Wall TxWt OM in x in x lb/ft (mm x mm x kg/m) OR over 6 ft(1830mm) 2.875 x 0.203 x 9.11 to 12 ft(J3660mm) (73.0 x 5.16 x 13.6) d. Line Posts(round): Based on Fabric Height Type I ODx Wall TxWt in x in x lb/ft (mm x mm x kg/m) over 6 ft(183mm) 2.375 x 0.154 x 3.65 to 8 ft(2440mm) (60.3 x 3.91 x 5.4) e. Rails and Braces(round): Type 1 * ODx Wall TxWt in x in x lb/ft (mm x mm x kg/m) 1.660 x 0.140 x 2.27 (42.2 x 3.56 x 3.4) so f. Gate Posts for Swing Gates(round): 40_ Smith Campus Center Chain Link Fences go 100% Construction Documents: 01.1 1.12 02830-3 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver chain link fence materials in the manufacturer's original packaging with tags and labels intact and legible. B. Handle and store materials in ways that prevent damage and deterioration. .. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS A. Coordinate work under this Section closely with work of other trades wherever such work affects and is affected by the work included herein. a�. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Fencing system products meeting specified requirement from the following manufacturers are approved for use: 1. Anchor Fence, Inc. Baltimore, MD Ph: (410) 633-6500 2. Reeves Southeastern Corp. Tampa,FL Ph: (800)669-9473 3. Allied Tube&Conduit Corp. Harvey, EL Ph: (800) 323-8640 4. Approved equivalent. .. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Setting Materials: 1. Concrete: ASTM C94 ready-mixed concrete,minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,000 psi (20 MPa)air-entrained 2% to 4%. 2. Anchoring Grout: Factory-prepackaged,non-shrink,non-staining, hydraulic controlled expansion cement formulation for site mixing with water to make pourable anchoring site compound. Formulation resistant to erosion from water exposure and recommended for exterior use by manufacturer. "super por-rok"by minwax construction products division or approved equivalent. B. Chain Link Fabric: Helically wound and woven, diamond mesh, one-piece width for 8' full height indicated on Drawings. 1. Industrial/commercial fabric: 2"mesh, 9 gauge, 0.148"(3.76mm) steel wire. Breakload 1290 lbf(5740n). .� 2. Finish: Galvanized, ASTM A392, Class I, 1.2 0 oz/ft2(366g/m2))zinc alloy. Coated after fabric fabrication. 3. Selvages: Top knuckled and bottom twisted fabric. C. Fence Framing: Smith Campus Center Chain Link Fences 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02830-2 .� *a SECTION 02830 CHAIN LINK FENCES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section,as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. The work of this Section shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Standard steel chain link fence. a. Galvanized round framing. b. Barbed wire top. c. Swing gates. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials and installation shall comply with latest editions of following standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM). 2. Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute(CLFMI)Product Manual. B. Provide chain link fences and gates as complete units including necessary erection accessories, fittings,and fastenings,produced by single manufacturer and meeting specifications of CLFMI Product Manual. C. Work of this Section shall be performed by approved Fence Installation Firm,certified Fence Professional of American Fence Association,with good reputation, successful record over past 5 years, using specified products, on projects of similar size and complexity and which maintains regular force of experience workmen skilled in work of this Section. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval product data for each type of fencing and finish required indicating compliance of materials and required options. B. Shop Drawings: Include plan with dimensional location and layout with details illustrating height, location and sizes of posts,rails,braces,gates, and anchorage. Provide hardware list and erection procedures. !" C. Material samples in required finish: 1. Fabric, 6"square sample. 2. End and line posts, 6" long sample. on 3. Fittings and accessories, one each. 4. Gate hardware, one each. D. Installer's certification that furnished materials meet specification requirements. Smith Campus Center Chain Link Fences ! 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02830-1 AM 3.4 CONNECT TO EXISTING SEWER MAIN A. Where the sanitary sewer service is to be connected into the existing sewer main, the connection shall be made at the existing sanitary manhole. END OF SECTION ..R ..A ,.. on .. 40 Smith Campus Center Sanitary Sewer 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02722-4 "w �. G. Joints shall not be "pulled" or"cramped" until permitted by the Engineer. An, H. Where any two pipe units do not fit each other closely enough to enable them to be properly jointed, they shall be removed and replaced with suitable units and new gaskets. I. After each pipe has been properly bedded, enough pipe bedding shall be placed between the pipe and the sides of the trench, and thoroughly compacted, to hold the pipe in correct alignment. Bell holes provided for jointing shall be placed and compacted to complete the pipe bedding,as indicated on the drawings. J. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent flotation of the pipe in so the trench. K. Except as otherwise indicated on the drawings, compacted bedding shall support the on pipe. No pipe or fitting shall be permanently supported on saddles,blocking or stones. Bedding shall be as specified under Trench Excavation in Section 02200—Earthwork.. L. Establish elevations of buried piping to ensure not less than 4.5 feet of cover, unless shown otherwise. "a M. All joint surfaces shall be cleaned. Immediately before jointing the pipe, the bell or groove shall be lubricated in accordance with the manufacture's recommendation. on 3.2 DISPLACEMENT AND ALIGNMENT TEST A. Sewer mains will be checked by the Engineer to determine whether any displacement of the pipe has occurred, after 2 feet of the trench has been backfilled in accordance with Section 02200—Earthwork. B. All Polyvinylchloride pipe shall be so installed that the deflection is not more than 7.5 percent of the base inside diameter. Such deflection shall be computed by multiplying the amount of deflection(nominal diameter less minimum diameter when measured)by 100 and dividing by the nominal diameter of the pipe. 3.3 FINAL INSPECTION A. Final inspection of the work will include a visual inspection of the sanitary sewer connection. The pipe shall be true to both line and grade; shall show no leaks; shall be free from cracks and from protruding joint materials and contain no deposits of sand, dirt or other materials which will reduce the full cross-sectional area. Groundwater infiltration shall not exceed the rates herein before stipulated and shall be distributed uniformly throughout the collecting system and not occur through a few joints. Wall Joints shall be tight. All finished work shall be neat in appearance and of first class workmanship. The Contractor shall furnish two laborers to assist the Engineer in this inspection at completion of work. B. If testing and inspection indicate defects, correct such defects and retest. Smith Campus Center Sanitary Sewer 100% Construction Documents: 0 l.11.12 02722-3 ww Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. The pipe shall have a pipe diameter to wall .� thickness ratio (SDR)of a maximum of 35; nominal diameter as shown on drawings. B. Straight pipe shall be furnished in lengths not more than 13 feet, and Y-branches shall be furnished in lengths of not more that 3 feet. C. No single piece of pipe shall be laid unless it is generally straight. The centerline of the pipe shall not deviate from a straight line drawn between the centers of the openings at the ends of the pipe by more than 1/16 inches per foot of length. If a piece of pipe fails to meet the requirements for straightness, it shall be rejected and removed from the site. D. Joints for PVC pipe shall be push-on bell and spigot joints using elastomeric ring gaskets. The gaskets shall be securely fixed into place in the bells so that they cannot be dislodged during joint assembly. The gaskets shall be of a composition and texture which is resistant to common ingredients of sewage and industrial wastes, including oil and groundwater, and which will endure permanently under the conditions of the proposed use. The joints shall conform to the requirements of the latest revision of .� ASTM D-3212. 2.2 VALVE BOXES A. Valve boxes shall be cast iron, two piece, sliding type with heavy foot piece. Valve boxes shall be designed for 5 feet of cover over the top of pipe and shall have a minimum inside diameter of 5-1/4". Valve box top shall be furnished with a top flange and shall have the word"sewer"clearly cast into the cover. 2.3 BEDDING MATERIALS , A. Pipe and Fittings: All pipe and fittings bedded and encased in beding stone, as specified in Section 02200. .A PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL *' A. Trench excavation and backfill shall be done in accordance with the Section 02200 - Earthwork. B. All pipe delivered to the job site shall be accompanied by test reports certifying that the pipe and fittings conform to the above-mentioned specifications. In addition, the pipe shall be subject to thorough inspection and tests, the right being reserved for the Engineer to apply such tests, as he deems necessary. C. The Contractor shall furnish all labor necessary to assist the Engineer in inspecting the pipe. Pipe will be inspected upon delivery, and all that does not conform to the requirements of these specifications shall be rejected and shall immediately be removed by the Contractor. E. Each pipe unit shall be handled into its position in the trench only in such manner, and by such means as acceptable to the Engineer. Care shall be taken to avoid damaging ` the pipe and fittings. F. Close all open pipe ends and fittings at the end of each construction day with watertight " expandable plugs. Do not use plywood, burlap, plastic, or other non-watertight covers. Smith Campus Center Sanitary Sewer 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02722-2 " SECTION 02722 SANITARY SEWER ps PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work of this section includes,but is not limited to the following: 1. Furnish and install pipe, fittings, and accessories for sanitary sewer as shown or specified. 1.2 RELATED WORK on A. Section 02200-Earthwork B. Section 02724-Sanitary Manholes. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Where "MHD Specifications is used, it shall mean "Massachusetts Highway Department's Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges, 1988", and "Supplemental Specifications to the 1988 Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges,December 23, 1998." 1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01770. B. Accurately record actual location of pipe runs, fittings, manholes, termination of laterals, couplings, lateral connections to the main, and invert elevations. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data sheets and certification of compliance with specifications for all pipe. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work with the location, alignment and elevation of water mains and storm " sewers. B. Verify pressure and vacuum testing procedure with the City of Northampton. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PVC PIPE A. Polyvinylchloride (PVC) pipe and fittings shall conform to the requirements of the latest revision of ASTM D3034, Standard Specification for Type PSM Polyvinyl Smith Campus Center Sanitary Sewer r 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02722-1 3.6 DISINFECTION A. Disinfection shall be carried out in accordance with ANSUAWWA C651-86,using the continuous feed method described in Section 5.2 of this standard except that 50 mg/1 free chlorine residual shall be achieved. Use of calcium hypochlorite granules prior to flushing will not be required. B. Mains shall be completely flushed after the hydrostatic test until all evidence of sediment is removed. A hypochlorite solution shall be applied,with a proper regulating device at the beginning of the pipe section to be disinfected,through a corporation stop in the newly laid pipe. Hypochlorites utilized in this work shall meet the requirements so of AWWA B300-87. Water from the existing distribution system entering the newly laid pipe shall be controlled to flow slowly during the application of hypochlorite. The rate of sodium hypochlorite application shall be in such proportion to the rate of water on flowing through the pipe that the treated water entering the newly laid pipe will have a concentration of chlorine residual of 50 parts per million. C. When disinfecting newly laid water pipe involving more than one valved section, all valves shall be operated while the pipeline is filled with disinfecting water. Hydrants and other appurtenances shall also be operated for disinfection. 00 D. There shall be a retention period of at least 24 hours and preferably more. The nonsporeforming organisms shall be destroyed and the chlorine residual after the retention period and at the extremity of the pipe shall be at least ten parts per million. Chlorine concentration at the end of the 24 hour period to be at least 24mg/1. E. After disinfection,the pipe section shall be flushed until,upon test,the quality of the water,both chemically and bacteriologically, is equal to the quality of the water served the public from the existing water supply. The procedure shall be repeated if necessary until the water from the pipe section is satisfactory. F. Coordination with the City of Northampton Water Department will be necessary and shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. G. Tests to determine the chlorine residual and the quality of the water in the new pipeline will be performed by the Owner. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate with the Water Department to arrange for the testing at the proper time. No less than 24 hours notice shall be given the Water Department when tests are to be performed. H. Where connections are to be made between new water mains and existing water mains after disinfection and flushing are completed,new materials shall be swabbed with a suitable hypochlorite solution. 3.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Do not place water distribution system in service until test results indicate that it is bacteriologically safe. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Water Service 100%Construction Documents: 01.1 1.12 02713-7 MW pipeline. Testing shall begin only after approval by the Engineer of the proposed methods. Any required coordination with the City of Northampton Water ■,,,, Department shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. All new sections of water main shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure of 100 pounds per square inch above normal operating pressure for a period of at least six hours. "Pressurization" and "air removal" shall be accomplished as specified in Section 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 of ANSUAWWA C600-87. After the test pressure is applied, any defective pipe, fitting, valve or hydrant discovered in consequence of .� this pressure test shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the job site and replaced at the Contractor's expense with sound material. The test shall be repeated until satisfactory to the Engineer. C. A leakage test shall be conducted concurrently with the pressure test. The Contractor shall furnish the gage,pump,connections and all other necessary apparatus and shall * furnish the necessary assistance to conduct the test. D. Leakage shall be defined as the quantity of water that must be supplied into the newly laid pipe, or any valved section thereof,to maintain pressure within 5 psi of the specified test pressure after the air in the pipeline has been expelled and the pipe has been filled with water. .O E. No pipe installation will be accepted if the leakage is greater than that determined by the following formula: me L=SD(P)v2 133,200 wo Where: L= Allowable Leakage in Gallons/Hour D= Normal Pipe Diameter in Inches P= Average Test Pressure during Leakage Test in Pounds Per we Square Inch,Gauge S = Length of Pipe in Feet G. When testing against closed metal-seated valves, an additional leakage per closed valve of 0.0078 gal/hour/inch nominal valve size will be allowed. H. When hydrants are in the test section, the test shall be made against the closed hydrant valve. I. If any test of pipe laid discloses leakage greater than that specified above, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, locate and repair the defective materials until the leakage is within the specified allowance. J. All visible leaks shall be repaired regardless of the amount of leakage. K. Any temporary thrust restraint required for testing sections of completed water main installation and later removed as directed by the Engineer shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Smith Campus Center Water Service 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02713-6 copper tubing,caps,plugs and thrust restraint. Any of these facilities which are of a temporary nature shall be removed by the Contractor after use. N. Disinfection Chemicals: Liquid Chlorien. 3.3 CONNECTING NEW WATER MAIN TO EXISTING WATER MAIN A. Where connections are to be made between new water mains and existing water mains, any unspecified materials required shall be utilized only after inspection and approval by the Engineer. All connections between new mains and existing mains shall be made only at such times and in a manner approved by the City of Northampton Water tiw Department. 3.4 HYDRANT REMOVED AND RESET A. Hydrants to be reset shall be set plumb, shall have the steamer nozzle facing the roadway,and in general,shall be set as shown on the Drawings. A pit at least 12 inches in depth below the bottom of the hydrant and at least 18 inches in diameter shall be dug at each hydrant. This pit and space around the hydrant barrel(18 inches in diameter) shall be refilled to within 6 inches of the ground surface with clean stone or gravel and shall be covered with suitable graded material. Backfilling around the hydrant shall be thoroughly rammed. In clay soil or ground in which the water table should stand above the level of the hydrant drip,the drip shall be plugged and the above-described precautions may be dispensed with. B. Concrete shall be placed between the back of the hydrant and the undisturbed trench in accordance with Section 3300-Concrete. The concrete shall be opposite the hydrant inlet and shall bear against at least 2 square feet of the trench. The concrete shall not obstruct the hydrant drip. so C. Hydrants shall have stuffing boxes well packed and oiled and shall be in good working condition before being installed. All hydrants shall be thoroughly flushed out before final acceptance of the work. D. The Contractor shall properly brace and support the exposed pipe and branch valve while excavating the new trench. In resetting the hydrant,new ductile iron pipe shall be connected to the existing branch using approved couplings. If the existing branch and valve are mechanical joint construction the Contractor may, with the approval of the Engineer, install one continuous section of new ductile iron pipe,Class 52,which shall be connected to the existing branch using approved couplings. so 3.5 HYDROSTATIC TESTING A. Pressure testing and leakage testing shall be carried out in accordance with the appropriate paragraphs of Section 4 of ANSUAWWA C600-87 with the following clarifications and qualifications: 1. The testing may be performed after either backfilling or partially backfilling the completed pipeline or sections thereof. Before testing, the Contractor shall submit, in writing, to the Engineer, his proposed method of testing the completed Smith Campus Center Water Service 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02713-5 JM into the trench. Any damaged lining,coating or wrapping shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced. D. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign matter from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without getting earth into it, the Engineer may require that before lowering the pipe into the trench, a heavy,tightly woven canvas bag of suitable size be placed over each end and left there until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. If necessary, the line shall be swabbed or flushed out to remove all foreign matter prior to ' testing. E. Before joining lengths of push-on joint pipe, the inside of the bell and the outside of the spigot shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove oil, grit, excess coating and other foreign matter. F. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends being in the direction of laying unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. When pipe is laid on a grade of 10 percent or greater, laying shall start at the bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade. G. The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings or closure pieces shall be done in a neat manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end at .,w right angles to the axis of the pipe. H. The maximum deflection at pipe joints to accommodate changes in horizontal or vertical alignment shall be 80% of AWWA standards or manufacturer's recommendation, ' whichever is less. Where bends are called for on the plans,a standard bend may be used with any additional deflection required accomplished by deflecting joints on adjacent pipes. 1. Bends shall be used only at the locations shown on the plans or at other locations approved by the Engineer. J. Underground gate valves shall rest on a 12"x8"x4" concrete block. All curb valves shall rest vertically on a solid masonry brick. Valve boxes shall not transmit shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve. The valve box cover shall be flush with the surface of the finished pavement or such other level as may be directed. K. Valves set with a depth to operating nut greater than 6 feet shall be equipped with extension stems providing an operating nut depth of 4.5 feet. Extension stems shall be installed such as to preclude accidental disconnection from the valve, shall stand plumb and shall be supported at the upper end with a centering device attached to the stem or valve box. L. Thrust restraint shall be provided at all bends and tees. Restraint shall be in the form of cast-in-place concrete thrust blocks. Concrete shall be mixed and placed in accordance with Section 03300 -Concrete. M. The Contractor shall provide appropriate facilities for testing, flushing and disinfecting the water mains. Such facilities may include, but not be limited to, corporation stops, Smith Campus Center Water Service 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 027134 WX 40 2.5 FITTINGS A. Fittings shall be ductile or gray iron meeting the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C 110/A2 L 10-87 or ductile iron meeting the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53-88. with mechanical joints in conformance with ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11-85. Fittings shall have a minimum pressure rating of 250 psi and shall have an inside lining of cement-mortar in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C 104/A21.4- 85. Exterior coating shall be the standard bituminous coating of either coal tar or asphalt base approximately one mil thick. 2.6 THRUST BLOCKS A. Concrete for thrust blocks and pipe encasement shall be 3,000 psi concrete as specified in Section 03300 -Concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Trench excavation and backfill shall meet the requirements of Section 02200 - ' ` Earthwork. 3.2 PIPE LAYING A. Ductile iron pipe,ductile or cast iron fittings and valves shall be installed as detailed and directed, and in full accordance with AWWA C600-87,manufacturers' recommendations,and accepted best practice-with the below listed qualifications and clarifications. The methods employed in performing the work and all equipment, tools and machinery used in handling material and executing any part of the work shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer before the work is started and,whenever found unsatisfactory, shall be changed and improved as required by the Engineer. All equipment,tools and machinery used shall be maintained in a satisfactory working on condition. B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate his work schedule, where required,with that of the City of Northampton Water Department. At all installations where connection is to be made by gating off sections of main which are normally open, the excavation shall be made the day before work is to start on the installation with all materials on hand. The work shall then be done as quickly as possible so that normal +" operation of the system will be interrupted a minimum amount of time. Any required operating of valves for this work will be performed by personnel of the water department, and ample notice shall be given to the water department so that a minimum of one day's notice may be given to any user whose service will be discontinued for any reason. Do not interrupt existing service without authorization. C. Proper implements, tools and facilities shall be provided and used by the Contractor for safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings and valves shall be lowered into the trench with a suitable device that will not damage protective coatings and lining. Under no circumstances shall water main material be dropped or dumped Smith Campus Center Water Service 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02713-3 am PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer,the pipe, fittings, valves and appurtenances + to be utilized in this work shall be new and unused, shall be of the types and materials specified herein and shall meet the requirements specified herein. All materials found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws or other defects will be rejected by the Engineer. All defective materials shall be promptly removed from the work site and replaced at no additional expense to the Owner. 2.2 WATER PIPE Ductile iron pipe shall meet the requirements of ANSUAWWA C151/A21.51-86. Joints shall be rubber gasket push-on type manufactured in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11-85. Pipe shall be supplied with the standard exterior bituminous coating " of either coal tar or asphalt base approximately one mil thick. The interior shall be cement lined in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4-85,and pipe shall be of Thickness Class 52. 2.3 VALVES A. Gate valves shall be iron body,bronze mounted, double disc,parallel seat valves with .. non-rising stems and shall meet the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C500-86. Gate valves shall have mechanical joint ends meeting the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11-85 and shall have O-ring stem seals. Gate valves shall be wrench- operated, left-opening(counter-clockwise)and rated at working and hydrostatic test pressures of 200 psi and 400 psi, respectively. Gate valves shall be manufactured by Kennedy Valve, Clow Corporation, Mueller Company or approved equal. B. Resilient-seated gate vales may be substituted for gate valves unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Resilient-seated gate valves shall meet the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C509-87. They shall have mechanical joint ends meeting the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11-85 and O-ring stem seals. Valves shall be wrench-operated, left-opening(counter-clockwise)and rated at a working pressure of 200 psi. Resilient-seated gate valves shall be manufactured by Kennedy Valve, Clow Corporation,Mueller Company, or approved equal. C. Valves boxes shall be cast iron and consist of a base and adjustable slide type top section with cast iron cover. The cover shall be the drop type with the word "WATER" cast on top. Valve boxes shall normally be designed for 4.5 feet of cover above the top of the pipe and shall be 5 inch diameter. 2.4 SLEEVES A. Connecting sleeves shall be mechanical compression sleeve couplings designed for the specific types of pipe to be joined and shall be manufactured by the Dresser Manufacturing Division or approved equal. Smith Campus Center 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 Water Service 02713-2 No SECTION 02713 _ WATER SERVICE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work under this item shall consist of providing water mains,valves, fittings and appurtenances as indicated on the Drawings. Also included as part of this item are testing and disinfection of the water mains and appurtenances. Work of this section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. B. Hydrostatic testing and disinfection of water system. ww 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 02200-Earthwork B. Section 03300-Concrete 1.3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01770. B. Accurately record actual locations of pipe runs, fittings,valves, service connection taps and curb boxes, and invert elevations. Ow 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pipe Fittings: Marked with manufacturer's name,nominal diameter of openings, pressure rating,class or thickness, linings,material, date and country of manufacture. B. Valves: Marked on the bonnet or valve body with manufacturer's name,year the valve casting was made, pressure rating. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data sheets and certification of compliance with specifications for all pipes,valves, fittings and appurtenances. B. Pipe laying schedule shall be submitted for approval. C. Hydrostatic testing method shall be submitted for approval. D. Test Reports: Pressure&Leakage Disinfection Report Bacterial; Report Smith Campus Center Water Service 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02713-1 w PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Drainage System: Excavate for drainage system after completion of excavation or after subgrade material has been compacted, but before drainage material course has been ,we placed. Provide a clear horizontal distance between drain pipe and trench wall or foundation wall on both sides not less than 2 times diameter of drain pipe, unless otherwise shown. Grade bottom of trench excavations to require slope and compact to a firm, solid bed for drain system. Apply and compact impervious fill material to raise low areas or where unsatisfactory oil bearing may occur. B. Filtering Material: Place supporting layer of filtering material over compacted subgrade where drainage pipe is to be laid to depth indicated or, if not indicated, to a compacted depth of not less than 4". After testing drain lines, place additional filtering material to 4"depth at top of drains and not less than 4"width around sides of drains. C. Laying Drain Pipe: Lay drain pipe solidly bedded in filtering material. Provide full bearing for each pipe section throughout its length, to true grades and alignment, and continuous slope in direction of flow. w.► 1. Lay perforated pipe with perforation down and joints tightly closed in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Provide collars and couplings as required. 2. Provide recesses in excavation bottom to receive bells for drain pipe having bell and spigot ends. Lay pipe with bells facing up slope with spigot end entered fully into adjacent bell. Seal joint in accordance with local practices having jurisdiction. D. Testing Drain Lines: Test or check lines before backfilling to assure free flow. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and retest system until satisfactory. E. Subsurface Drainage Mat: Coordinate placement of drainage mat with other foundation drainage materials. F. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for securing matting to substrate. Use adhesives and mechanical fasteners as recommended by matting manufacturer. Lap all edges of fabric and extend fabric around foundation drainage pipe in accordance with mat manufacturer's recommendations. Protect in-place matting during backfill operations in accordance with matting manufacturer's instructions. G. Prior to backfilling, inspect subsurface drainage mat for damage and for continuity of filter fabric. Replace damaged panels to ensure continuity of filtering and draining system. .� END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Foundation Drainage 100%Construction Document: 01.11.12 02710-2 ON SECTION 02710 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide foundation drainage system work as indicated on drawings and by provisions of this section. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. General excavation requirements are specified with Earthwork in Section 02200. 2. Porous fill subbase below slabs-on-ground will be specified with superstructure concrete in a Division-3 section of these specifications. 3. Underslab drainage system Section 02400. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Certification: Submit certification signed by Construction Manager and foundation drainage system Installer that installed materials conform to specified requirements and system was successfully checked and tested prior to covering with filtering and drainage fill. PART 2 PRODUCTS so 2.1 DRAINAGE PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Furnish drainage Perforated Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe, complete with bends, reducers, adapters,couplings, collars,and joint materials. 2.2 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE MAT A. Drainage Core: Manufacturer's standard three-dimensional, non-biodegradable, plastic material designed to effectively conduct water to foundation drainage system. B. Filter Fabric: Manufacturer's standard non-woven geotextile fabric of polypropylene or polyester fibers, or a combination thereof. 2.3 SOIL MATERIALS A. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense composite. we B. Drainage Fill: For backfill at subsurface drainage mat, provide evenly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel or crushed stone with 100%passing a 1/2" sieve and 0-5% passing a No. 50 sieve. C. Filtering Material: Evenly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel or crushed stone, and natural sand, with 100%passing a 1-1/2"sieve and 0.5%passing a No. 50 sieve. Smith Campus Center Foundation Drainage 100%Construction Document: 01.11.12 02710 - 1 responsible for keeping warning lights lit at all appropriate times. 3.02 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT The following is a general guideline which shall be adhered to: A. Adequate warning of the project limits will be provided for by placement of advance warning signs. B. Channelization will be accomplished through the use of proper reflectorized drums, signing, barricades and other lightweight devices which will yield when hit by errant vehicles. C. Safety controls for construction operations will be required throughout the duration of the project. D. The design, application and installation of all devices shall conform to the Massachusetts Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices, latest edition. E All traffic control devices shall be removed immediately when no longer needed. F. Public streets shall remain open to traffic at all times and shall be maintained to allow normal turning movements throughout the construction period, as required. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Traffic Control 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02585-2 SECTION 02585 TRAFFIC CONTROL PARTI GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. All operation necessary to maintain traffic flow, both vehicular and pedestrian, on all public roads along which work is to be done. B. This work shall include,but not be limited to, furnishing,erecting,moving, and dismantling barricades,drums,cones, signs and temporary lighting to inform the general public or hazards existing at the site of the work. C. Work under this section shall also include maintenance of trench surfaces and the furnishing, erecting,moving and dismantling of temporary bridging for vehicular traffic across trenches, and the prevention of slippery surface conditions resulting directly or indirectly from the Contractor's operations. 1.2 RELATED WORK wa A. Section 02200-Earthwork 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. No submittals are required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. No products involved. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall make all arrangements with the City of Northampton for the closing of sections of streets within the work area to accomplish his construction operations, and shall not barricade any street without prior approval from the City. Such temporary ok closings shall be for as short a period as feasible and the Contractor shall notify the Police Department and Fire Department immediately of such closing and openings. B. The Contractor shall provide,place and maintain such barricades, warning signs and lights as necessary to protect adequately the work and provide for public safety. Traffic policemen and flagmen shall be furnished by the Contractor as required for the proper directing and control of traffic during the construction period. The Contractor shall be Smith Campus Center Traffic Control 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02585-1 so 3.1 PAVEMENT MARKINGS A. Areas to which pavement markings shall be applied shall be dry,sufficiently clean of sand and road debris so as to provide an acceptable bond between the paint and the pavement. B. Paint shall be applied at the rate of 100 square feet to 115 square feet per gallon. C. All painting shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner. The lines shall be sharp and clear with no feathered edging or fogging and precautions shall be taken to prevent **"" tracking by tires of the striping equipment. D. After application, the paint shall be protected from crossing vehicles for a time at least equivalent to the drying time of the paint. 3.2 SIGNING A. Placement and dimensions of copy,border and mounting holes in signs shall conform to the details on the plans. END OF SECTION low m Smith Campus Center Striping and Signing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02577-2 ` SECTION 02577 STRIPING AND SIGNING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work of this section includes,but is not limited to the following: 1. Furnish painted pavement markings and painted legend. 2. Furnish and install signs and supports. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Carefully examine all of the Contract Documents for requirements which affect the work of this section. Other specifications sections which directly relate to the work of this section ! " include,but are not limited to the following: 1. Section 02513 -Bituminous Concrete 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Where"MHD Specifications"is used,it shall mean"Massachusetts Highway Department's Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges, 1988", and "Supplemental Specifications to the 1988 standard specifications for Highways and Bridges,December 23, 1998." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit certificate of compliance with specifications for signs,posts,and paint. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PAVEMENT MARKINGS A. Paint utilized for pavement markings shall conform to the requirements of Section M7 and Subsection M7.01.10 of the MHD Specifications and shall be 15 minute dry paint. 2.2 SIGNS AND POSTS A. Sign posts shall conform to the requirements of Section 840 of the MHD Specifications. B. Sign mounting bolts shall conform to the requirements of Section 840 of the MHD Specifications. C. Silk screening of enclosed lens reflective sheeting shall conform to the requirements specified by the reflective sheeting manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION Smith Campus Center Striping and Signing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02577-1 .R w B. Do not exceed 1/16"unit-to-unit vertical offset from flush(lippage)and a tolerance of 1/8" in 10' from level or slope as indicated for finished surface of paving. 3.5 CLEANING A. General: Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon completion of the work. Remove from site excess materials, debris, and equipment. Repair damage resulting from paving operations. B. Sweep pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations,dirt,and other foreign material immediately prior to final acceptance. uw 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect all paving from damage due to construction and vehicular traffic until final acceptance. WN END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Granite Paving 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02526-4 '"" B. Grout, Mortar and Joint Filler Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I,natural color. Provide white portland cement for colored mortar and grout. 2. Sand: ASTM C144, washed,clean, and graded. Provide white sand for colored mortar and grout. 3. Water: Clean, fresh, and potable. 4. Mortar and Grout Colorant: Mineral oxide pigments, lime and alkali-proof compatible with additives; "Chromix"by L.M. Scofield Co.,Los Angeles, CA, or equivalent. 5. Bonding Admixture: Sika latex, acrylic polymer latex bonding agent, as manufactured by Sika Corporation,P.O. Box 297, Lyndhurst,NJ,07071, 201-933-8800,or Laticrete types 3701 and 4237, Laticrete International, 1-800-243-4788, or equivalent; mix and gauge in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations;. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSCRIPTION CARVING A. All work shall be done by skilled stone carvers in a correct manner in strict accordance with the Architect's drawings. Architect to provide computer file of inscription graphics. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Verify layout and grades of concrete base and granite curbing before proceeding with any work. B. Establish grade controls,maintaining the required lines,grades, crown, and cross-slopes for each course during paving operations. 3.3 INSTALLATION-GENERAL A. Do not use pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, other visible defects or defects that might cause staining in finished work. 3.4 MORTAR SETTING BED AND JOINTS A. Conform to the requirements as detailed on the Drawings. r Smith Campus Center Granite Paving 02526 - 3 3 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 Im an 1. Granite Paving: Three(3) 18"x18"square samples indicating the complete range of colors and finishes of stone to be used. C. Inscription: Four(4)engraved samples(including(2)carved samples and(2) laser cut samples)indicating type and depth of all proposed cuts, showing full range of epoxy fill choices. D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and installation of all work and associated components. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS .. A. Coordinate with the work of all other sections, separate contracts on the site, including especially the placing of concrete bases and granite steps. ■.► B. Cold Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace work damaged by freezing. 1.7 DELIVERY/STORAGE/HANDLING 10 A. All packaged materials shall be delivered to the site in original unopened packaging, .� clearly indicating manufacturer's name,brand name,and other identifying information. B. All materials shall be stored in a dry location off the ground, and in such a manner as to prevent damage or intrusion of foreign matter. C. Paving stone shall be protected from scratches and scrapes both before and after installation until final acceptance. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Granite Paving Stones shall be "Jet Mist,"available from: New England Stone Industries, Inc. 15 Branch Pike Esmond, RI 02917 (401.232.2040) Pavers shall be dimension cut stone, 2-1/2"thick, with light thermal finish on exposed surfaces of sizes indicated on the drawings. Smith Campus Center Granite Paving 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02526-2 .. ow ,0 SECTION 02526 GRANITE PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 3.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work of this Section,as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Everything necessary and proper for, or incidental to,executing and completing the work Pw as required by this Section and as reasonably inferable from Drawings, including but not necessarily limited to the following: 10 1. Inscribed granite paving mortared on concrete(base installed under Section 02200 - Concrete). 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02525—Granite Curb B. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: The work of this section shall be performed by qualified and experienced installers. B. Materials and methods of construction will comply with the following standards: American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM). C. Do not change source or brands for granite paving units;setting materials or grout during progress of work. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each manufactured product proposed for the work; identify material sources; sieve analysis test results of base, subbase and bedding materials. B. Samples: Submit the following samples and obtain approval prior to ordering materials: Smith Campus Center Granite Paving 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02526 - 1 Im w w am so ow so ■o ww SAW r.. W B. Base: Spread porous base material and compact in maximum 6" lifts to 95%of the maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698 Standard Protector Method. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Setting Curb: Place concrete at the joints as indicated on the Drawings. All remaining spaces under the curb shall be filled with additional porous material thoroughly compacted so that the curb will be completely supported throughout its length. B. Line and Grade: The curb shall be set at the line and grade required as shown on the plans. Curb shall be fitted together as closely as possible. C. Pointing: The joints(both front and back)between curb stones shall be carefully filled with ` cement mortar and neatly pointed on the top and front exposed portions. 3.4 CLEANING A. After pointing, the granite curb shall be satisfactorily cleaned of all excess mortar that may have been forced out of the joints. B. Wash granite curb free of stains, discolorations,dirt and other foreign material immediately prior to final acceptance. END OF SECTION ON W go -- Smith Campus Center Granite Curbs ► 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02525-3 MW containers with labels intact and legible. Store material off the ground, under cover and protect from weather damage and deterioration. Stockpile and handle aggregates to prevent mixing with foreign materials. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS No A. Coordinate with the work of all other sections, separate contracts on the site, including especially the placing of concrete bases and granite paving. B. Establish and maintain required lines and grade elevations. C. Do not install granite curb work over wet, soggy, muddy or frozen subgrade. D. Do not install concrete or mortar when air temperature is below 40 degrees F. Use of calcium chloride, salt, or any other admixture to prevent concrete or mortar from freezing is .� prohibited. E. Protect adjacent work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Granite Step at Stepped Terrace: "Jet Mist'dimension cut stone, with light thermal finish on ' exposed surfaces, and of sizes as indicated on drawings. B. Granite Curb: Fletcher—Chelmsford; as complying with MAHD M9.04.1. C. Mortar: MAHD M4.02.15. D. Porous Fill: AASHTO M43, #6(3/8"to 3/4")uniformly graded, clean crushed stone or gravel. E. Concrete: Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete. �. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine subgrades and installation conditions. Do not start granite curb work until .. satisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION 00 A. Subgrade: Verify that subgrade of granite curb has been prepared in accordance with Section 02260—Formation of Subgrade. Do not proceed with work until subgrade has been am adequately prepared. .■ Smith Campus Center Granite Curbs 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02525-2 .. W SECTION 02525 GRANITE CURBS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. a. SECTION INCLUDES A. The work of this Section shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Granite curbs. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02110-Site Preparation !" B. Section 02200 -Earthwork C. Section 02232—Subbase D. Section 02260—Formation of Subgrade E. Section 02513 -Bituminous Concrete F. Section 02526—Granite Paving G. Section 02900—Landscaping so H. Section 02955 —Edging and Gravel Beds I. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable operations,materials and methods shall be in accordance with the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, Highway Department, Standard Specifications for ?' Highways and Bridges, 1988, and Addenda, (MAHD), except where otherwise specified herein. as B. Provide each stone type from only one quarry to ensure cross-sectional uniformity and consistent color range and texture. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each type of curb required. ! " B. Samples: Submit three(3) foot long samples of each stone type to include the full range of exposed color,texture and finish proposed for the work. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Stone Curb: Deliver, store and handle stone to prevent soiling and damage. Stack stone off the ground. B. Mortar Materials: Deliver mortar materials in manufacturer's unopened and undamaged Smith Campus Center Granite Curbs 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02525-1 40 A. Immediately after placement, protect pavements from mechanical and vehicular traffic damage until final acceptance. END OF SECTION wo Smith Campus Center Bituminous Concrete 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02513-4 "' 2. In areas where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the disturbed surface would be adversely affected by the weather if left unpaved, and in 3. In other areas if directed by the Engineer. B. Temporary pavement repair, where required, shall be placed for the full width of the area disturbed by the trench excavation, regardless of width. C. The trench shall be backfilled and compacted in accordance with the Earthwork section of these technical provisions and carefully shaped to a grade two inches below the surface of the proposed pavement. The temporary pavement shall then be placed and shall consist of a w Type I-1 bituminous concrete mixtures(cold laid,if hot laid is not available)approved by the Engineer, and shall be compacted to a minimum depth of two inches, matching the grade of the existing pavement. The surface of the temporary pavement shall be reasonably smooth, and the Contractor shall be responsible for its maintenance until the permanent surface can be replaced. If, in any case, the Contractor does not maintain the temporary pavement adequately,the Owner will make the necessary repairs to prevent accidents,and the Contractor will be charged by the Owner for this work. 3.3 PERMANENT REPAIR PREPARATION A. The Contractor shall begin permanent pavement repairs when authorized by the Engineer. The Contractor shall cut back both sides of the patch area with a saw or pneumatically operated spade. The cut shall be vertical and in straight lines and as directed by the engineer. B. If pavement outside the trench area has settled or cracked due to the excavation,it shall also be included in removal and repair. The area to receive permanent pavement repairs shall be carefully excavated to the depth required, and the subgrade shall be shaped and recompacted if necessary. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Flatness: Maximum variation of/4 inch measured with 10-foot straight edge. B. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness will not be acceptable if exceeding the following allowable variations. 1. Binder Course—Plus or minus 1/4 inch 2. Top Course—Plus or Minus 1/8 inch C. Elevation: Within '/2 inch of the established elevation. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner's Testing and Inspection Agency shall provide field quality control testing and inspection during asphaltic concrete paving operations. 3.6 PROTECTION Smith Campus Center Bituminous Concrete 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02513-3 no 1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING A. The bituminous concrete mixture shall be transported in trucks having tight bodies which have previously been cleaned of all foreign materials. B. Loaded trucks shall be tightly covered with waterproof canvas or other suitable covers. C. The mixture shall be delivered at a temperature within 25EF of the approved job mix formula. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE A. The bituminous concrete mixture,the sources of supply,formula for mix,mix tolerances, approval of mix formula and the control of the mixture shall conform to the requirements of Section M3, Bituminous Materials of the MHD Specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Verify type and limits of paving as shown on the drawings. B. The methods employed in performing the work and all equipment, tools, machinery and other plant used in handling material and executing any part of the work shall conform to all the requirements of Sections 420,460 and 472 of the MHD Specifications. C. Verify gradients and elevations of subbase are correct. D. The line between existing pavement to remain and existing pavement to be removed shall be snapped with a chalk line and cut with a saw so as to leave a smooth, straight vertical .� edge. Before bituminous concrete is placed, the kerfed edges shall be given a light tack coat of asphalt emulsion. E. Check for unstable or loose areas of base. Do not begin paving work until deficient areas .a have been corrected. Remove and replace unstable corrugated areas. F. Verify Frames for manholes,drainage inlets,and other such units,within areas to be paved, are at the proper elevations. G. Adjust frames as required to match paving. Provide temporary closures over openings until completion of roller operations. Remove closures at completion of the work. 3.2 TEMPORARY REPAIR A. Temporary pavement repair shall be required where existing street pavement has been damaged or removed according to the limits as shown on the plan or at the following *w locations: I. In all traveled ways where heavy or continuous traffic is expected; w Smith Campus Center Bituminous Concrete 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02513-2 '"" SECTION 02513 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this section,as shown or specified,shall be in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Construction of a two course bituminous concrete pavement on a prepared base. B. Pavement repair of Elm Street,campus driveways or sidewalks as specified. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 02200 -Earthwork B. Section 02232 -Subbase C. Section 02579 -Pavement Markings 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Where AMHD Specifications@ is used, it shall mean AMassachusetts Highway Department=s Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges, 1988", and "Supplemental Specifications to the 1988 standard specifications for Highways and Bridges, December 23, 1998." B. Testing and inspection of bituminous concrete pavement shall be made by an independent testing agency paid for by the owner. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit certificate of compliance with specification for bituminous concrete. B. Submit the proposed job mix formula for approval of mixture. ± ► 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not place hot-mix asphalt concrete when base surface temperature is less than 50 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen. B. Do not apply tack coat materials when surface temperatures are 45 degrees F or below. Do not apply to wet base surface. Smith Campus Center Bituminous Concrete 02513-1 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 H. Each pipe unit shall be handled into its position in the trench only in such manner, and by such means as acceptable to the Engineer. Care shall be taken to avoid damaging the pipe and fittings. I. Joints shall not be "pulled" or"cramped" until permitted by the Engineer. J. Where any two pipe units do not fit each other closely enough to enable them to be properly jointed, they shall be removed and replaced with suitable units and new gaskets. K. After each pipe has been properly bedded, enough pipe bedding shall be placed between the pipe and the sides of the trench, and thoroughly compacted, to hold the pipe in correct alignment. Bell holes provided for jointing shall be placed and compacted to complete the pipe bedding,as indicated on the drawings. L. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent flotation of the pipe in the trench. M. Except as otherwise indicated on the drawings, the pipe shall be supported by compacted bedding. No pipe or fitting shall be permanently supported on saddles, blocking or stones. Bedding shall be as specified under Trench Excavation in the Earth work Section 02200. N. All joint surfaces shall be cleaned. Immediately before jointing the pipe, the bell or groove shall be lubricated in accordance with the manufacture's recommendation. O. Normally, the placement of pipe shall start at the downstream end and progress upstream with hubs upgrade and with the spigot ends fully entered into the adjacent hubs. P. Storm drain pipes will be checked by the Engineer to determine whether any displacement of the pipe has occurred, after the trench has been backfilled, or mounding has been accomplished. ree Q. All pipe shall be so installed that the deflection is not more than 7.5 percent of the base inside diameter. Such deflection shall be computed by multiplying the amount of deflection (nominal diameter less minimum diameter when measured) by 100 and dividing by the nominal diameter of the pipe. R. When the nature of the foundation is poor, the poor material shall be removed and replaced with a layer of gravel fill of such depth as the Engineer may direct. S. If so ordered by the Engineer, any pipe which is not in true alignment or which shows any settlement or distortion after laying shall be taken up and relayed or corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer without additional compensation. TIM 3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Upon completion of the work, all connections shall be inspected by the Contractor to ensure that they meet the manufacturer's requirements and these specifications. No pipe shall be backfilled until the Engineer has approved the installation. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Storm Drain 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02433-4 "" ON Diameter Pipe Stiffness Diameter Pipe Stiffness 4"(100mm) 50psi (340kN/m2) 18"(450mm) 40psi (280kN/m2) 6"(150mm) 50psi (340kN/m2) 24"(600mm) 34psi(240kN/m2) 8"(200mm) 50psi(340kN/m2) 30"(750mm) 28psi (200kN/m2) 10"(250mm) 50psi(340kN/m2) 36"(900mm) 22psi(150kN/m) 12"(300mm) 50psi(340kN/m2) 42"(1050mm) 19psi(l40kN/m2) 15"(100mm) 42psi(290kN/m2) 48"(1200mm) 17psi(120kN/m2) 5. Fittings shall be made from the same material as the pipe and shall meet the requirements of paragraph 2.01 A. of this section. "Fully pressure rated fittings" shall be used,providing capability of design pressure equal to the piping system. W4 6. The polyethylene stub ends at joints shall be backed up by nylon coated stainless steel flanges and shaped as necessary to suit the outside dimensions of the pipe. The stub ends shall be connected with corrosion resisting bolts and nuts of Type 316 Stainless Steel as specified in ASTM A726 and ASTM A307. Flat gaskets of 1/8-in thick neoprene conforming to ASTM F477 shall be installed between the opposing ends of the stub ends. C. Perforated HDPE shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F667. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL PR A. Trench excavation and backfill shall be done in accordance with the Section 02200, Trench Excavation. B. All pipe shall be laid in open trench. No projecting pipe condition will be allowed. C. Lengths of storm drain pipe shown on the plans are approximate. The Contractor shall install pipe based on actual field measurements between structures. D. All pipe and accessories shall be of new and unused material and shall be laid true to lines and grades indicated on the plans. E. When work is not in progress,the open ends of the pipe shall be closed to prevent entry of groundwater,earth or foreign materials. F. All pipe delivered to the job site shall be accompanied by test reports certifying that the pipe and fittings conform to the above-mentioned specifications. In addition, the pipe shall be subject to thorough inspection and tests, the right being reserved for the Engineer to apply such tests as he deems necessary. G. The Contractor shall furnish all labor necessary to assist the Engineer in inspecting the pipe. Pipe will be inspected upon delivery, and all that does not conform to the requirements of these specifications shall be rejected and shall immediately be removed by the Contractor. Smith Campus Center Storm Drain 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02433-3 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE A. PVC PIPE 1. Polyvinylchloride (PVC) pipe and fittings shall conform to the requirements of the latest revision of ASTM D3034, Standard Specification for Type PSM Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. The pipe shall have a pipe diameter to wall thickness ratio(SDR)of a maximum of 35. 2. Straight pipe shall be furnished in lengths not more than 13 feet, and Y-branches shall be furnished in lengths of not more than 3 feet. 3. No single piece of pipe shall be laid unless it is generally straight. The centerline w. of the pipe shall not deviate from a straight line drawn between the centers of the openings at the ends of the pipe by more than 1/16 inches per foot of length. If a piece of pipe fails to meet the requirements for straightness, it shall be rejected and removed from the site. 4. Joints for PVC pipe shall be push-on bell and spigot joints using elastomeric ring gaskets. The gaskets shall be securely fixed into place in the bells so that they cannot be dislodged during joint assembly. The gaskets shall be of a composition and texture which is resistant to common ingredients of sewage and industrial wastes, including oil and groundwater, and which will endure permanently under ..� the conditions of the proposed use. The joints shall conform to the requirements of the latest revision of ASTM D-3212. B. HDPE 1. The HDPE shall be manufactured from first quality, virgin high density polyethylene. Neither reground nor reclaimed polyethylene shall be added to the resin. The pipe shall be resistant to in-ground deterioration and shall contain stabilizers to prevent degradation by ultraviolet light. 2. The drain shall have smooth interior walls. The exterior walls shall be either smooth or corrugated. Wb 3. The pipe shall be N-12, manufactured by Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. of Columbus, Ohio or equal and shall be approved by the QAC or Engineer. on 4. The pipe shall have an HDP density greater than or equal to 0.94 g/cc and the following stiffness values when tested in accordance with ASTM D2412: Smith Campus Center Storm Drain 100% Construction Documents: 01.1 1.12 02433-2 on SECTION 02433 STORM DRAIN PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work of this section includes,but is not limited to the following: 1. Furnishing and installing new storm drain pipes as specified. 2. Coordination with location and alignment of curbing. 3. Coordination with location and alignment of existing drainage structures. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 02200 -Earthwork pa B. Section 02430 -Catch Basins and Storm Manholes 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Where "MHD Specifications" is used, it shall mean "Massachusetts Highway Department's Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges, 1988", and "Supplemental Specifications to the 1988 Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges,December 23, 1998." B. Accurately record actual locations of pipe runs, fittings, connections, drainage inlets, and invert elevations. C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. 1.4 SUBMITTALS OF A. The Contractor shall submit a physical sample of each lot of the High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HDPP) and PVC pipe used in the landform. The samples shall be labeled with manufacturer's name,product identification and lot number. B. Prior to delivery of the HDPP to the site, the Contractor shall require the manufacturer to provide the required material certifications and test results. The manufacturer shall submit notarized certifications indicating that each lot of the material meets these plans and specifications and shall be signed by an authorized employee of the manufacturer. 0, 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to a minimum of 50 degrees F prior on to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. Smith Campus Center Storm Drain 02433-1 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 Openings shall be formed by the insertion of two(2)inch pipes or by leaving two(2)open vertical joints in the masonry. C. All metal fittings shall be set in a full bed of mortar. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Catch Basins and Storm Manholes 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02430-3 �.w D. Backwater valve shall be similar or equal to backwater valve as manufactured by Jay R. �+*� Smith Mtg. Co., Figure No. 7070. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL A. Concrete shall conform to Section M4 of the MHD Specifications. B. Brick shall conform to ASTM C-32, Grade MS. C. Mortar shall be composed of one(1)part portland cement and two(2)parts by volume of clean sand. �* 2.3 METAL PRODUCTS A. Catch basin frames and grates shall be structural steel conforming to ASTM A-36, Massachusetts 2" square opening frame and grate, LeBaron LF244 as manufactured by LeBaron Foundry Inc., or approved equal. Manufacture, curing and fabrication shall comply with the requirements of the Massachusetts Highway Department. Following fabrication,all steel shall be given a coat of Bitumastic Primer or approved equal and,on completion of installation, the primer shall be touched up and all steel given one coat of Bitumastic 50 or approved equal. B. Manhole frame and covers shall be heavy duty,conforming to the dimensions shown on the .. plans, and shall be cast iron conforming to ASTM A48, Class 25 as manufactured by LeBaron Foundry Inc., Cat. No . LA268. Frames and covers shall have a hot-dipped bitumastic coating. C. Manhole steps shall be similar or equal to steel reinforced polypropylene plastic as manufactured by M.A.Industries,model PS-2-PF-SL. The portions of any aluminum steps to be imbedded in concrete shall have a protective coating of zinc chromate or approved bitumastic material PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Trench excavation and backfill shall conform to the requirements of Section 02200. B. Inlet and outlet pipes shall extend through the walls for a sufficient distance beyond the outside surface to allow for satisfactory connections and the concrete or masonry shall be constructed around them neatly to prevent leakage. C. Pipe shall be cut flush with the inside face of walls. 3.2 STRUCTURES A. The outside of structures shall be parged with a minimum 2 inch layer of mortar. B. Pervious material shall be used for backfilling the upper portion of the excavation made for catch basins down to the invert of the outlet pipe, but in no case to a depth greater than three(3)feet below the top of the structure. Drainage openings shall be formed in the four (4) walls of the inlets at or immediately above the bottom of the pervious backfill. Smith Campus Center Catch Basins and Storm Manholes 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 .,, 02430-2 SECTION 02430 CATCH BASINS AND STORM MANHOLES „w PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work of this section includes,but is not limited to the following: 1. Construction of all catch basins and manholes in conformity with the lines, grades, dimensions and details shown on the plans. 1.2 RELATED WORK +m A. Carefully examine all of the Contract Documents for requirements which affect the work of this section. Other specifications sections which directly relate to the work of this section include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Section 02200 -Earthwork 2. Section 02433 -Storm Drain 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Where AMHD Specifications@ is used, it shall mean AMassachusetts Highway Department=s Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges, 1988", and "Supplemental Specifications to the 1988 Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges,December 23, 1998." go 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data sheets and certification of compliance with specification for all precast concrete units and metal items. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS, FRAMES, AND GRATES A. Inlet frames and gratings shall be structural steel conforming to ASTM A-36. Dimensions shall conform to details shown on the plans. Manufacture, curing and fabrication shall comply with the standard pattern of the Massachusetts Highway Department. Following fabrication,all steel shall be given a coat of Bitumastic Primer or approved equal and,on completion of installation, the primer shall be touched up and all steel given one coat of Bitumastic 50 or approved equal. go B. Precast concrete masonry units shall conform to ASTM C-139. C. Precast manhole sections shall be similar or equal to that shown on the plans and shall conform to ASTM C-478 and C-443 (joint). Smith Campus Center Catch Basins and Storm Manholes 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02430-1 4W ■p C. Lay pipe to the grade and alignment shown. Shape bed for lowest 1/4 of the pipe to fit that portion accurately. Join pipe by snugly fitting ends. Relay any defective pipe or pipe which has its grade or joint disturbed. .. D. After laying pipe, install filter material at sides of pipe and above pipe no less than 4". END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Underslab Drainage System 100%Construction Document: 01.11.12 02400-2 �w SECTION 02400 UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section shall be governed by the Contract Documents. Provide material, labor, equipment and services necessary to furnish and deliver all Work of this Section as shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and/or as required by job conditions. B. The work shall include but is not limited to the following: 1. Furnishing and installing drain pipe. 2. Furnishing and installing non-woven filter fabric. 3. Furnishing and installing filter material. 1.2. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 02200 -"Earthwork." B. Section 02710, "Foundation Drainage." C. Section 07130, "Sheet Membrane Waterproofing." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Literature: Submit manufacturer's printed specifications and installation instructions. B. Submit shop drawings of drainage system layout and details, including connection details. Shop drawings should reflect actual site conditions including but not limited to variations in the trenches resulting from rock excavation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Drain Pipe: Piping, intersections,joints and corners of standard strength PVC perforated drainage pipe, ASTM D2729. B. Filter Material: Clean, crushed stone or gravel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install all components of the underslab drainage system in strict accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. B. Install a bed of filter material to a depth of 6 in.below invert of pipe and compact to provide a firm foundation. Smith Campus Center Underslab Drainage System 100%Construction Document: 01.11.12 02400 - 1 3.4 TIEBACKS A. Tiebacks: Drill for, install,grout,and tension tiebacks into position. Test load-carrying capacity of each tieback and replace and retest deficient tiebacks. 1. Test loading shall be observed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for design of sheeting system. .. 2. Maintain tiebacks in place until permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures. 3.5 BRACING A. Bracing: Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other permanent work. If necessary to move brace, install new bracing before removing original brace. 1. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete *" work, unless otherwise approved by Architect. 2. Install internal bracing, if required, to prevent spreading or distortion of braced frames. 3. Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or until .. permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures. 3.6 REMOVAL AND REPAIRS. A. Remove sheeting systems when construction has progressed sufficiently to support excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to avoid disturbing underlying soils or damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities. 1. Remove sheeting systems to a minimum depth of 48 inches below overlying construction and abandon remainder. 2. Repair or replace, as approved by Architect, adjacent work damaged or displaced , by removing sheeting systems. B. Leave sheeting systems permanently in place. END OF SECTION w Smith Campus Center 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 Sheeting and Bracing 02360-4 "" PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop during sheeting system operations. 1. Shore, support, and protect utilities encountered. B. Protect trees, shrubs and plants from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop during sheeting system operations or excavation with approved retaining walls. Locate walls no closer than halfway between the drip line and the trunk. C. Install sheeting systems to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Locate sheeting systems clear of permanent construction so that forming and finishing of concrete surfaces is not impeded. E. Monitor sheeting systems daily during excavation progress and for as long as excavation remains open. Promptly correct bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to ensure that sheeting systems remain stable. F. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installing sheeting systems. 3.2 SOLDIER BEAMS AND LAGGING A. Install steel soldier beams before starting excavation. Space soldier beams at regular intervals not to exceed allowable flexural strength of wood lagging. Accurately align exposed faces of flanges to vary not more than 2 inches from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment. B. Install wood lagging within flanges of soldier beams as excavation proceeds. Trim excavation as required to install lagging. Fill voids behind lagging with soil, and compact. C. Install wales horizontally at centers indicated and secure to soldier beams. 3.3 SHEET PILING A. Before starting excavation, install one-piece sheet piling lengths and tightly interlock to form a continuous barrier. Limit vertical offset of adjacent sheet piling to 60 inches. Accurately align exposed faces of sheet piling to vary not more than 2 inches from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment. Cut tops of sheet piling to uniform elevation at top of excavation. Smith Campus Center Sheeting and Bracing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02360-3 .0 1. Include Shop Drawings signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer .. responsible for their preparation. B. Qualification Data: For Installer and professional engineer. C. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by the absence of, the installation of,or the performance of sheeting systems. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. B. Available Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information from the project manger. The opinions expressed in this " report are those of the geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data. ■�' 1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for sheeting. C. Survey adjacent structures and improvements, employing a qualified professional engineer or land surveyor; establish exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. 1. During installation of sheeting systems, regularly resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations and positions for comparison with original elevations and positions. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations or positions occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction. D. Do not splice elements of support system unless approved. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that are either new or in serviceable condition. B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 690/A 690M, or ASTM A 992/A 992M. C. Steel Sheet Piling: ASTM A 328/A 328M, ASTM A 572/A 572M, or ASTM A 690/A 690M; with continuous interlocks. Smith Campus Center Sheeting and Bracing 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02360-2 SECTION 02360 SHEETING AND BRACING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. The work of this section shall include,but not limited to the following: 1. Preparation and installation of temporary sheeting systems as indicated and required. B. Protection of adjacent existing structures, utilities, and other facilities against any damage from the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for such damages resulting from his operations. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS 1. Section 01500 -Temporary Facilities and Controls 2. Section 02200 -Earthwork 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Sheeting System: Supports excavation sidewalls, resists soil and hydrostatic pressure, and resists superimposed and construction loads. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE No A. Provide professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility, including preparation of Shop Drawings and a comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer in accordance with OSHA regulations 1926652.. an B. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading,dikes,or other means. m C. Install sheeting systems without damaging existing buildings, pavements, and other improvements adjacent to excavation. D. The contractor shall provide, in writing, the name and qualifications of the "competent person" who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings and working conditions and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings for Information: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer for sheeting systems. S Sheeting and Bracing Smith Campus Center 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02360-1 D. Any sediment deposits remaining in place after the silt fence is no longer required shall be dressed to conform to the existing grade,prepared and seeded. END OF SECTION 4M 40 "'a an Smith Campus Center Silt Fence MW 100%Construction Documents; 01.11.12 02293-3 ON B. Some silt fences do not require a wire backing. Consult manufacturer's instructions for no proper installation requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION WA 3.1 SILT FENCE INSTALLATION A. The height of the silt fence shall not exceed 36 inches (higher fences may impound volumes of water sufficient to cause failure of the structure). Ideally the silt fence shall be placed 10 feet away from the toe of slope. B. When joints are necessary, filter cloth shall be spliced together only at a support post, with a minimum 6-inch overlap, and securely sealed. See manufacturer's recommendations. C. Posts shall be spaced a maximum of 10 feet apart at the barrier location and driven securely into the ground (minimum of 12 inches). When extra strength fabric is used 4. without the wire support fence, post spacing shall be as manufacturer recommends. D. A trench shall be excavated approximately 6 inches wide and 6 inches deep along the line of posts and upslope from the silt fence in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. When standard strength filter fabric is used, a wire mesh support fence shall be .� fastened securely to the upslope side of the posts using heavy duty wire staples at least 1 inch long, tie wires or hog rings. The wire shall extend into the trench a minimum of 2 inches and shall not extend more than 36 inches above the original ground surface. F. The standard strength filter fabric shall be stapled,wired or tied to the wire fence,and 8 inches of the fabric shall be extended into the trench. The fabric shall not extend more .w than 36 inches above the original ground surface. Filter fabric shall not be stapled to existing trees. G. When extra strength filter fabric and closer post spacing are used, the wire mesh support fence may be eliminated. In such a case, the filter fabric is stapled, wired, or tied directly to the posts with all other provisions of Paragraph F applying. w* H. The trench shall be backfilled and the soil compacted over the filter fabric. I. Silt fences shall be removed when they have served, their useful purpose, but not .� before the upslope area has been permanently stabilized. 3.2 SILT FENCE MAINTENANCE A. Silt fences shall be inspected immediately after each rainfall and at least daily during prolonged rainfall. Any required repairs shall be made immediately. B. Should the fabric decompose or become ineffective prior to the end of the expected usable life and the silt fence still be necessary, the fabric shall be replaced promptly. C. Sediment deposits shall be removed when they reach approximately one-half the height of the fence. Smith Campus Center Silt Fence 100% Construction Documents; 01.1 1.12 02293-2 SECTION 02293 SILT FENCE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This work consists of the installation of silt fence at the locations shown on the Drawings or where directed by the Engineer. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 02100 -Site Preparation B. Section 02200 -Earthwork C. Section 02291 -Hay Bale Erosion Checks • PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SYNTHETIC FILTER FABRIC A. Synthetic filter fabric shall be a pervious sheet of propylene, nylon, polyester or ethylene filaments and shall be certified by the manufacturer or supplier as meeting the following requirements: PHYSICAL PROPERTY REQUIREMENTS Filtering Efficiency 75%(min.) Tensile Strength at 20% (max.) Elongation Extra Strength: 50 lbs./lin. in.(min.) Standard Strength: 30 lbs./lin.in. (min.) Flow Rate 0.3 gal./sq. ft./min. (min.) 2.2 FENCE POSTS A. Posts for silt fences shall be either 2 X 3 or 2 X 4 inch studs or 0.5 pounds (minimum) per linear foot steel with a minimum length of 5 feet. Steel posts shall have projections for fastening wire to them. 2.3 WIRE REINFORCEMENT A. Wire fence reinforcement for silt fences using standard strength filter cloth shall be a minimum of 42 inches in height, a minimum of 14 gauge and shall have a maximum mesh spacing of 6 inches. Smith Campus Center Silt Fence 100% Construction Documents; 01.11.12 02293-1 SECTION 02291 HAYBALE EROSION CHECKS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Install haybale erosion checks where required to prevent erosion and sedimentation of storm drainage systems. B. Maintain and replace haybales as required. C. Remove hay bales when no longer required and collected sediment. am 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 02200 -Earthwork on PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HAYBALES am A. Haybales shall be made of hay with forty pounds minimum weight and one hundred and twenty pounds maximum weight. Wood stakes shall be a minimum of 1 inch by 1 inch nominal size by a minimum of 3 feet long. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Bales shall be placed where shown on the plans or where directed by the Engineer. They shall be held in place by two wood stakes in each bale. B. Bales shall be maintained or replaced until they are no longer necessary for the purpose intended or are ordered removed by the Engineer. C. Sediment shall be removed and bales replaced as required to fulfill the purpose intended. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Haybale Erosion Checks 02291-1 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 wo SECTION 02260 FORMATION OF SUBGRADE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The area of parking and drives upon which the pavement structure, including base courses, is placed, shall be known as the subgrade. This is the plane coincident with the bottom of the first constructed base course. The work of Formation of Subgrade shall be performed at this plane. B. After all grading for the parking area and drives has been substantially completed and all drains laid, the subgrade shall be brought to the lines, grades and cross sections shown on the plans. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 02200 -Earthwork B. Section 02232 -Subbase PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL on A. All soft and yielding material and other portions of the subgrade which will not compact readily when rolled, vibrated or tamped shall be removed and replaced with suitable material. The surface shall be compacted uniformly by rolling with an approved power roller having a minimum compression of 300 pounds per inch of width of tread on the rear wheel or wheels, and weighing not less than 10 tons, or with an equivalent vibratory roller or compactor. B. When more than one compacting unit is used, the unit exerting the greatest compactive effort shall be used to make the initial compaction. Any portion of the subgrade which is not accessible to a roller or other compacting unit shall be compacted thoroughly with hand tampers or with approved mechanical vibrators. C. The rolling, vibrating or tamping shall be continued until the entire subgrade is uniformly and thoroughly compacted, true to line and grade given. D. The Contractor shall protect the subgrade from damage by exercising such precautions on as the Engineer may deem necessary. At all times,the subgrade surface shall be kept in such condition that it will drain readily and correctly. The subgrade shall be checked and approved before any foundation or surfacing material is placed thereon. ON END OF SECTION on Smith Campus Center Formation of Subgrade 02260-1 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 qu SECTION 02232 SUBBASE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Subbase shall consist of clean mixture of bank or crushed gravel, crusher run stone or any combination thereof, placed where shown on the plans or where directed by the Engineer and in accordance with these specifications. -- 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 02513 -Bituminous Concrete 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Where "MHD Specifications" is used, it shall mean "Massachusetts Highway Department's Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges, 1988", and "Supplemental Specifications to the 1988 standard specifications for Highways and Bridges,December 23, 1998." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. A materials certificate shall be submitted for subbase material. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBBASE A. Subbase material for use under base course shall conform to Subsection M1.03.1, Processed Gravel for Subbase in the MHD Specifications. on PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. This work shall conform to Section 401, Gravel Subbase in the MHD Specifications. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Subbase 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02232-1 0M �w C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades,at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with the tested stratum. Perform the following tests: 1. For cohesionless soil,one plate bearing test(ASTM D1194)and one field density test (ASTM D1556 or ASTM D2167). 2. For cohesive soil,one unconfined compression test: ASTM D2166. D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D1557,ASTM D 2167,ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937,as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Paved Areas AND building Slab Upgrades: The top 12"of subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer,at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m)or less of paved area,but in no case fewer than three tests. 2. Foundation Wall Backfill: Take at least 3 field density tests(ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D2167) at locations and elevations as directed. E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate,or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.18 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded,rutted, settled,or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact. No C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses,remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material,compact,and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, am and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. 3.19 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: 1. Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. 2. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris,and legally am dispose of it off Owner's property. r• END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Earthwork 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02200-11 so 3.15 COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches(100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. ., B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are �. muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. D. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698: 1. Structures, Building Slabs and Steps,Pavements: Compact top 12"of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to ninety-five(95%)percent maximum dry density. 2. Backfill Foundations And Landscape Areas: Compact top 12"of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to ninety-two(92%)percent maximum dry density 3.16 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. MW 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. an Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch(25 mm). 2. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch(13 mm). *■ C. Grading Surface of Fill Under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of %"when tested with a ten(10') foot straightedge. 3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage at his own expense a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform all tests and submit reports specified in this section. B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. w Smith Campus Center Earthwork 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02200-10 .� C. Proof roll subgrade with heavy pneumatic red equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades. D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water,or construction activities, as directed by Architect. PM 3.11 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade,and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of ' ! remaining trees. 3.12 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly,but not before completing the following: 1. Construction below finish grade including,where applicable,dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. 3. Inspecting,testing and approving underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork after concrete has attained 28 day design strength.. on 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. 3.13 FILL A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris,unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills. B. Plow, scarify,bench,or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material with aggregate subbase. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill with aggregate subbase. 4. Under footings and foundations,use engineered fill with aggregate subbase. 3.14 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace,or scarify and air-dry,otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. Smith Campus Center Earthwork 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02200-9 am 1-888-DIG-SAFE(1-888-344-7233)and procure a DIG SAFE number for each location at least 48 hours in advance of any excavation to have utility locations marked out. As the excavation approaches these services and other expected pipes,conduits or other underground .� structures,digging by machinery shall be discontinued, and the excavation shall be done by means of hand tools. B. Where determination of the exact location of pipe or other underground structure is necessary for doing the work properly, the Contractor may be required to excavate test pits to determine such locations. When such test pits may be properly considered as incidental to other excavations,the Contractor shall receive no additional compensation, the work being understood to be included as a part of the excavation. 3.9 TRENCH EXCAVATION A. Excavate topsoil from trench area to be further excavated. B. Stockpile topsoil to be reused in a designated area on-site. �* C. Excavate subsoil to full depth and grade to accommodate the laying of utilities and setting structures. Lay backs and slopes shall conform to OSHA regulations. D. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation of trench box, shoring, forms, utilities, and allow inspection. Provide ample trench width to permit placing of fittings and thrust blocking. Maximum and minimum trench width for utilities in accordance with Drawings. „ E. Provide uniform surface of solid and undisturbed subgrade for placement of utility or bedding material. Hand trim excavation for bell and spigot pipe joints. Remove loose matter. F. Excavate to depth required below pipe invert. G. Excavate trenches by hand in areas with roots larger than I". Tunnel under plant roots larger than 2"in diameter. H. A trench can be mechanically dug toward a tree to its drip line or one-third of the tree's height from the trunk, whichever is greater. Excavation should be then continued by hand, but must stop when 2"diameter roots are encountered. Tunneling should continue under the central root system to reach the other side. I. Remove ledge rock, bounders, and large stones greater than 6"diameter, to provide clearance of 6"below and 8"on each side of all utility pipes and fittings. J. Correct areas of utility trench over-excavated with compacted structural fill. K. Provide bedding material of the type and depth specified for the utility and in accordance • with the Drawings and specifications. L. Remove all excess excavated materials from the site. 3.10 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE A. Notify Soils Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade, who will make an inspection of conditions.. B. If Soils Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed by Soils Engineer. 1. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. Smith Campus Center Earthwork 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02200-8 ' " w 3. Rock Payment Lines: Payment will be made for actual quantity of rock removed but no payment will be allowed for rock excavated beyond the following limits. on a. Two feet outside of concrete work for which forms are required, except footings. b. One foot outside of the perimeter of footings where forms are required. c. In pipe trenches, six in.below invert elevations of pipe and two ft. wide than the !pa inside diameter of the pipe. d. Neat outside dimensions of concrete work where no forms are required. w® C. Stability of Excavations: Slope sides of excavation s to comply with local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. D. Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers,and cross braces in god serviceable condition. 1. Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be 40 open. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation progresses. 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR SITE STRUCTURES,PAVEMENTS AND PLANTED AREAS A. Excavate surfaces under site structures,pavements and planted areas to indicated cross sections, elevations,and grades. B. The Contractor shall remove existing pavement as necessary to perform the work. Where excavations are made in paved surfaces to remain, the Contractor shall saw cut the pavement ahead of the excavation. All pavement shall be cut with a saw. Cutting and removal shall be done so as to produce clean, uniform,vertical edges without damage to the remaining pavement. In the street,the pavement shall be removed from the full paved width of the disturbed lane. C. Removed pavement shall not be mixed with other excavated materials,but shall be disposed of away from the site of the work before the remainder of the excavation is made. 3.7 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minimum 0.10 feet,and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services,other construction,and for inspection. 1. In excavating for footings and foundations,take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 3.8 EXCAVATION NEAR EXISTING FACILITIES no A. Attention is directed to the fact that there are water mains, storm drains and other utilities in certain locations. Some of these have been indicated on the Drawings,but no attempt has been made to show all of the building services, and the completeness or accuracy of the information om given is not guaranteed. In advance of normal machine excavation, location of services shall be investigated and the expected location marked. It shall be the responsibility of the Conractor to contact the appropriate utility company and notify"Mass.DIG SAFE"Telephone Op Smith Campus Center Earthwork 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02200-7 so 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining,washout,and damage by rain or water *" accumulation. 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required. C. All water pumped or drained from the Work shall be disposed of in a suitable manner without .� undue interference with other work or damage to pavements,other surfaces or property. If such water is to be discharged to a stream or storm drainage system, the Contractor shall be responsible for removing all particulate matter which would otherwise be deposited in the stream or storm drainage system. The Contractor shall submit his proposed methods or procedures to the Engineer for approval. 3.3 EXAMINATION A. Verify that grades and elevations of pavement subgrade are correct prior to requesting proofrolling observation. ,w B. Provide minimum of 48 hour notice to Engineer for proof rolling the pavement subgrade. Verify that Engineer has observed proof rolling and that testing agency has completed ••r compaction tests prior to placing aggregate courses. 3.4 EXPLOSIVES no A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. 3.5 GENERAL EXCAVATION an A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials,and obstructions. 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfrll include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock,replace with satisfactory soil materials. B. Classified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations classified as earth and rock. Rock excavation will be paid on basis of Contract Conditions relative to changes in work. 1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with .w soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation. a. Intermittent drilling; ram hammering; or ripping of material not classified as rock excavation is earth excavation. 2. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock. a. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross-sectioned by Soils Engineer. Smith Campus Center Earthwork 100%Construction Documents: 01,11,12 02200-6 go 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Warning Tape: Acid-and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches(150 mm)wide and 4 nuts(0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows: 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam,and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems. B. Drainage Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile, specifically manufactured as a drainage geotextile; made from polyolefins,polyesters,or polyamides; and with the following minimum properties determined according to ASTM D 4759 and referenced standard test methods: 1. Grab Tensile Strength: 110 lbf(490 N); ASTM D 4632. 2. Tear Strength: 40 lbf(178 N); ASTM D 4533. 3. Puncture Resistance: 50 lbf(222 N); ASTM D 4833. ps 4. Water Flow Rate: 150 gpm per sq. ft. (100 L/s per sq. m); ASTM D 4491. 5. Apparent Opening Size: No. 50(0.3 nun); ASTM D 4751. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide and pay for tests and anaylsis of aggregate material performed in accordance with ASTM C136. NO B. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change materials and retest. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks,pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by - settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Retaining Structures: Provide bracing, shoring, sheeting, sheet piling,underpinning for other retaining structures necessary to guard against any movement or settlement of existing or new construction, utilities,paving, light standards,piping or conduit. Assume responsibility for the strength and adequacy of retaining structures,and for the safety and support of construction, utilities or paving, and for any movement, settlement or damage thereto C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. D. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. E. Protect all temporary benchmarks, control points,property monuments, existing structures and fences from excavation equipment and vehicular traffic. Smith Campus Center Earthwork 100%Construction Documents: 0 l.11.12 02200-5 ow 3. Be responsible for any and al damages which may arise or occur to any pary whatsoever by reason of the neglect in providing proper lights, guards, barriers,or any other safeguards to prevent damage to property, life and limb. 4. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks,pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations. 1.9 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A. The Contractor is responsible for the performance of all work, furnishing all materials and installing all measures required to reasonably control soil erosion resulting from construction operations and preventing excessive flow of sediment from the construction site. This work must be accomplished in accordance with the requirements of local and state regulatory .. agencies. PART 2 PRODUCTS No 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS OR A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW,GP,GM, SW, SP,and SM, or a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation,and other deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC,ML,MH, CL,CH, OL, OH, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols. I.Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials. E. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artifically graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2- inch(38-mm)sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200(0.075-mm)sieve. F. Drainage Fill: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone,or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2- inch(38-mm)sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm)sieve. G. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a f- inch(25-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4(4.75-mm) sieve. H. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state. Smith Campus Center Earthwork 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 022004 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548. B. Soils Consultant: Retain a qualified soils consultant who is a licensed Professional Engineer registered in Massachusetts to design, check and approve all temporary retaining strtuctures and other items pertinent to the Work and to advise on all construction methods which will prevent settlement and damage to surrounding structures, sidewalks,roads,utilities embankments, and other improvements on the Site and adjacent properties. C. Pre-excavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. All information given on the Drawings, or in the Contract Documents,relating to subsurface conditions and existing pipes and other structures is available from the Project Manager and is for information only. B. All such information and drawings of existing construction are furnished only for in the information and convenience of bidders. It shall be understood and agreed that the Owner does not warrant or guarantee that materials encountered during construction will be the same as those indicated by information given on the Drawings. Bidder must satisfy himself regarding character, quantities and conditions of various materials and work to be done. C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others 4" unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. ! * 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. 3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. 4. Cooperate with Owner and utility authority to keep their respective services and facilities in operation. D. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be on removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. E. Dust Control: Use all means necessary to control dust on or near the work. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust being a nuisance to the public,neighbors, and performance of other work on the site. F. Protection: 1. Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide the necessary safeguards to prevent accidents,to avoid all unnecessary hazards 40 and protect the public, the work and the property at all times, including Saturdays, Sundays and holidays. uw Smith Campus Center Earthwork 40 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02200-3 .s Wa D. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. E. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and "" boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. (0.57 cu. m)or more in volume that when tested by an independent geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586, exceeds a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows/2 inches(97 blowsi50 mm). as F. Site Structures: Footings, foundations,retaining walls, slabs, tanks,curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances,or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface, which are not part of or directly tied to a building. G. Subbase: Subbase shall consist of clean mixture of bank or crushed gravel,crusher run stone or any combination thereof. H. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation,or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase,drainage fill,or topsoil materials. I. Earth Excavation: Excavating in materials of whatever nature except rocks as defined above. J. Utilities: On-site underground pipes,conduits,ducts,and cables,as well as underground services within buildings. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for the following: 1. Each type of plastic warning tape. 2. Drainage fabric. 3. Drainage fill. 4. Filter material. B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site or borrow soil material op proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. + 3. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. C. Material Source: Submit name and address of imported aggregate materials suppliers. Provide materials from same source throughout the work. Change of source requires engineer approval. Wa D. Submit one copy of excavation protection system design data in accordance with OSHA regulations 1926.652.C. Smith Campus Center Earthwork 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 +*" 02200-2 der SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. The work of this Section shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Excavation and backfilling for structures,trenches,pavements and planted areas. 2. Preparation of subgrade for structures,trenches,pavements and planted areas. 3. Rough grading. , ., 4. Dewatering. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS "a A. Section 01500 -Temporary Facilities and Controls B. Section 02100—Site Preparation C. Section 02221 —Trenching and Backfilling D. Section 02232—Subbase s E. Section 0260—Formation of Subgrade F. Section 02291 —Haybale Erosion Checks G. Section 02293—Silt Fence H. Section 02360—Sheeting I. Section 02900—Landscaping J. Section 02982—Tree and Shrub Clearing and Preservation 1.4 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for the work are as indicated. 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation. B. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. C. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations. 1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Architect. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. 2. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet(3 m) in width and pits more than 30 feet(9 m) in either length or width. 3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated 40 dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. Smith Campus Center Earthwork 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02200-1 3.8 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS A. Remove waste materials from Owner's property and dispose off site in legal manner. B. Remove temporary protection and erosion control materials and legally dispose of off site at + , such time they are no longer necessary for the purpose intended or are ordered removed by the Architect. C. Leave site clean and neat on completion of work. END OF SECTION wee Smith Campus Center Site Preparation 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02110-6 C. Scarify and remove existing bituminous, concrete and other pavements and gravel bases to be removed, including any reinforcement as indicated on drawings. "a D. Where sections of existing bituminous pavement are removed, make clean,continuous vertical saw cut through pavement between material to be removed and material to remain. Protect vertical edges of material to remain from damage. E. Remove concrete sections to the first control joint or expansion joint beyond new work unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Saw cut clean continuous vertical edge at control joints. F. Remove curbing at existing joint. G. Unearth and completely remove underground structures,bases, foundations, footings of items to be removed. 3.6 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Clear trees, shrubs, stumps,branches and debris in strict accordance of Section 02982—Tree and Shrub Clearing and Preservation. B. Fill excavations made below sub-grade surface during removal of trees, shrubs, stumps,root crowns and roots with suitable material,compacted thoroughly in accordance with the provisions governing formation of fills in Section 02200, Earthwork. 3.7 STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL A. Topsoil is defined as friable loam surface soil reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2" in diameter,and without weeds,roots, and other objectionable material. B. Prior to the start of general excavation, strip topsoil,peat and organic silt, regardless of depth encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping. C. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles not to exceed 10' in height in a location approved by the Project Manager/Owner's Representative. Construct storage piles to freely drain surface water; control siltation by surrounding stockpile(s)with silt fencing. Topsoil shall not be piled over root systems of existing trees. Cover storage piles if required to prevent erosion. No topsoil is to be removed from Owner's property, campus,without approval. on Smith Campus Center Site Preparation 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02110-5 aw ..o E. Protection of Utilities: Preserve in operating condition all active utilities traversing the site and designated to remain. .� F. Carefully review clearing work required adjacent to existing structures and subgrade foundations. „m 3.2 STAKE-OUT A. The Survey Engineer will provide and maintain staking throughout the construction period as ow required for accurate construction of each stage of the work and adequate for Architect's inspection as follows: 1. Stake-out locations of boundaries and limits of work,proposed buildings, utility M structures and changes of direction of utility lines, horizontal alignments,edges and curbs of paved areas, walkways and walls and other elements to be installed to dimensional requirements indicated on Drawings. "® 2. Install grade stakes for finish grade and subgrade elevations for rough and finish grading and paved areas. In general, set stakes at intervals no more than 50'apart and at closer intervals at high and low points,along ridge lines,prominent grade breaks, saddles,toes '" and shoulders of slopes,and drainage lines. 3. Install grade stakes for vertical alignments of roadways and walks including high and low points at 50'intervals or closer as required. ON 4. Set inverts of underground utilities. 5. Set elevations for footings, foundations, utility structures,walls, curbs, fences,paving, pads, slabs, equipment, signs, lights and proposed other elements. am 3.3 ANTI-TRACKING APRON A. Construct and maintain anti-tracking aprons where shown on the plans or where directed by No the Engineer. B. Stone shall conform to the requirements of Subsection M2.01.1 of the MHD Specifications . and shall be 2" size. 3.4 SALVAGE OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS A. Carefully remove items indicated to be retained or relocated, and store for reinstallation. Items include, but are not limited to catch basins, manholes, exterior site lighting. B. Provide protection necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements to be salvaged. 1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition to satisfaction of Architect. 2. Replace all salvaged items damaged by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. 3.5 REMOVAL OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS A. Demolish and remove from site above grade and below grade improvements and existing conditions required for completion of project work,as indicated on drawings. B. Abandonment and removal of certain underground pipe or conduits may be indicated on mechanical or electrical drawings, and is included under work of this section. Smith Campus Center Site Preparation 100% Construction Documents: 01.1 1.12 02110-4 .® I. If during stake out operations conflicts are found in proposed dimensional layout, spot grades or elevations indicated on the Drawings,notify Architect and obtain his direction for resolution. 2. At completion of stake-out,the Architect reserves right to adjust location and elevations of layouts to minimize damage to trees, shrubs and improvements to remain, areas to be left undisturbed,and areas adjacent to site. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Burlap new cloth made from jute,weighing 10-12 ounces per linear yard on a 40"wide basis. �r B. Wood Planks: Sound 2x4 planks. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Site Inspection 1. Prior to work of this Section,carefully inspect the entire site and all objects designated to be removed and to be preserved. 2. Coordinate and complete a walk-through of the site with Landscape Architect prior to the clearing to identify and tag plant life to be protected and preserved. 3. Locate all existing utility lines and determine all requirements for disconnecting and capping. 4. Locate all existing active utility lines traversing the site and determine the requirements s for protection. B. Clarification 1. The drawings do not purport to show all objects existing on the site. 2. Before commencing work of this Section,verify by inspection all objects to be removed and all objects to be preserved. C. Scheduling 1. Schedule all work in a careful manner with all necessary consideration for neighbors and the public. 2. Avoid interference with the use of,and passage to and from, adjacent buildings and facilities. wa D. Disconnection of Utilities: Before starting site operations, disconnect or arrange for the disconnection of all utility services designated to be are moved,performing all such work in accordance with the requirements of the utility authority. ON Smith Campus Center Site Preparation 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02110-3 D. Perform routine inspections of sediment and erosion control practices and immediately following any storm event exceeding %" in depth of rainfall. Adjust #* practices as necessary to minimize deposition of sediments off the site. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Requirements and Procedures are specified in Division 1. B. Submit for approval plans indicating staging areas, trailer and stockpile locations, construction traffic and parking plans, temporary signage, off-site staging, storage areas, setup areas and construction phasing. Coordinate plans with erosion and sediment control measures,as required. 1. Conform to requirements of Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls-Section 01500. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: 1. The Contractor for the work of this Section shall be held to have visited the site, ` examined the premises,determined for himself the existing conditions, character of equipment and facilities needed for the performance of the work,and all matters which may in any way affect the work before submitting a bid. No claim for additional costs will be allowed due to lack of knowledge of conditions. a. Information regarding existing construction or conditions is based on available record drawings, which may or may not truly reflect existing conditions. Such documents are made available on the assumption that they may be of interest to the Contractor but neither the Architect, Owner nor any of their consultants assumes any responsibility for their accuracy or completeness. .� b. Record drawings of the existing structures are available for review at the office of the Project Manager/Owner's Representative. The drawings are for informational purposes only and are not considered part of the construction documents. c. Notify the Architect if, during the course of demolition,conditions are discovered which significantly vary from those shown on the contract documents. Do not proceed until authorized by Architect. w. 2. The Contractor shall accept the condition of the site and structures as found. The Architect and Owner assume no responsibility for condition of site or neither structures nor the continuation of the condition existing at time of bidding or thereafter. 3. If Contractor uses portions of property beyond the project area to accomplish work, restore these portions at completion of work to satisfaction of Architect. B. Accommodating Owner: Owner will occupy adjacent facilities during entire period of construction. Perform site work operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner's use of premises and conduct of his normal operations. C. Traffic'"Conduct site preparation operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close and obstruct streets, walks and other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. D. Stake Out: Smith Campus Center Site Preparation 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02110-2 w SECTION 02110 SITE PREPARATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. The work of this Section shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Verification of existing conditions. 2. Layout and grade staking. 3. Protection and salvage of existing improvements. 4. Removal and disposal of existing improvements. 5. Topsoil stripping and stockpiling. 6. Erosion and sediment control. 7. Tree and plant protection. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01050—Field Engineering B. Section 02200—Earthwork. C. Section 02900—Landscaping D. Section 02982—Tree and Shrub Clearing and Preservation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform work to applicable federal, state and local codes and regulations having jurisdiction. B. Engage licensed Survey Engineer acceptable to Architect to do layout and grade staking of work through construction period. C. Locate, identify and protect utilities that remain from damage. Be assured as to the location and position of gas, water, sewer, electric, telephone and services and mains, culverts and other conduits that may be affected by the construction and notify the respective authorities in charge of same of the work in the vicinity. Call U.F.P.O. (Underground Facilities Protective Organization) 1-800-962-7962 BEFORE STARTING EXCAVATION OPERATIONS. The Contractor will be held strictly responsible for the cost of repairs or replacement of all utilities and other conduits damaged directly by his forces or indirectly by failure to provide proper protection or support of the same. The Contractor will also be held responsible for damages to others caused by utility lines damaged either directly or indirectly by his operations. Smith Campus Center Site Preparation 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 02110-1 3 7 7 9 7 J 7 7 3 1 7 7 7 7 3 9 e i i i SUBCONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE/WARRANTY FORM- ONE YEAR Project: Smith College Campus Center DOC Project# 1999 - 118 Location: Northampton MA Date: TO: Mr. Gary Hartwell TO: Joseph Maliszewski Smith College Physical Plant Daniel O'Connell's Sons, Inc. 126 West Street P. 0. Box 267 Northampton, MA 01063 Holyoke, MA 01041-0267 In consideration of the sum of One Dollar ($1.00) and other good and valuable considerations, the receipt of which is hereby acknowledged, we (I) guarantee/warranty the Work, go Specification Section(s) , including materials and equipment installed by us in the above-named building under our Agreement, Contract, C- , dated , with Daniel O'Connell's Sons, and change orders thereto, to be free from imperfect workmanship, and/or materials and equipment, and Fm to be in accordance with all Contract Documents including Drawings and Specifications, revisions and written modifications made by the Architect. We agree to repair and/or replace and make adjustments necessary to meet specified performance results at our own cost and expense for a period of one(1)year from approved date of Substantial Completion, on as hereinafter noted, all of the Work covered under said contract and change orders that may prove defective, including materials or equipment partially or completely covered by manufacturer's guarantee/warranty or which were not installed in accordance with Contract Documents at any time during the period of guarantee/warranty. We also agree to pay the cost of all repairing all damage to other work resulting from defects in our own work and to pay the cost of replacing other work which we may disturb in making good the defects in our work. MI corrections to defective work will be done at the convenience of the Owner and will include all labor and material necessary to remove and replace any part of the building or its equipment installed under the Agreement noted above, where such removal may be necessary to complete the correct work. We further agree to make or have made any corrections or adjustments necessary to meet specific performance results. WIN Any materials or equipment which in the opinion of the Architect requires excessive service at any time during the first year of operation shall be considered defective and shall be replaced under this guarantee/warranty at no expense to the Owner. As to equipment or parts thereof which are replaced under this guarantee/warranty, or longer, per guarantee/warranty op provisions, shall run from the approved date of Substantial Completion of the replaced installation or parts thereof. Should the Owner, for his/her convenience, require the work to be done during hours other than regular working hours, the Owner shall pay all extra costs involved by such requirements. It is understood that the Owner shall give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness and all questions arising under this guarantee/warranty shall be decided by the Architect. Approved date of Substantial Completion of work: Date of expiration of this guarantee/warranty: Subcontractor/Supplier w. By: (Authorized Signature) Closeout Manual Page 1 of I Smith College— Campus Center November 2001 am no d. Remove tools,construction equipment, machinery,and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid �* disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, .. plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. „ i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and w windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision- obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. 1. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication,paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers,registers,and grills. q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. S. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection +� and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report. D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Closeout Procedures 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01770-6 W PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 40 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. Refer to Division 17 for go Commissioning Requirements. 1. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. 2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires ON seasonal operation,provide similar instruction at the start of each season. 3. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days'advance notice. 4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction,and course content. B. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. For each training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline. Include instruction for the following: 1. System design and operational philosophy. 2. Review of documentation. 3. Operations. 4. Adjustments. ,, 5. Troubleshooting. 6. Maintenance. 7. Repair. 40 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even textured surface. Smith Campus Center Closeout Procedures 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01770-5 1.8 WARRANTIES/CLOSEOUT BOOK A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated ' portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. Refer to Subcontractor's Guarantee/Warranty Form at the end of this section. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8- 1/2"x 11"paper. .� 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 1.9 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. MEPFP and Specialty Items: Submit three (3) sets of operating and maintenance manuals, prepare all such manuals in durable plastic binders approximately 8-1/2 x 11" in size with at least the following: 1. Identification on, or readable through, the front cover stating general nature of the manual. •w 2. Neatly typewritten index near the front of the manual furnishing immediate information as to location in the manual of all emergency data regarding the installation. .. 3. Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of all equipment involved. 4. Complete nomenclature of all replaceable parts, their part numbers, current cost, w and name and address of nearest vendor of parts. 5. Copy of all guarantees and warranties issued. 6. Copy of the approved shop drawings with all data concerning changes made during construction. B. Where contents of manuals include manufacturer's catalog pages, clearly indicate the precise items included in this installation and delete or otherwise clearly indicate all manufacturer's data with which this installation is not concerned. 1.10 COMMISSIONING A. Refer to Division 17 for Commissioning Requirements. Smith Campus Center Closeout Procedures 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01770-4 P d. Name of Construction Manger. e. Page number. 1.7 PROJECT RECORD AND CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTS A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. B. The Construction Manager ad the Architect shall submit one (1) copy of all Construction Progress Documentation the Owner's Representative during the course of the work. Progress record documentation shall include all Submittals/Shop Drawings, 40 Request's for Information (RFI's), Architect's Supplemental Instruction's (ASI's), Construction Change Directives (CCD's), and Change Orders. The Architect will copy the Owner's Representative on all ASI's, RFI's, and CCD's as part of their distribution go process. The Construction Manager will copy the Owner's Representative on all Construction Progress Documentation as part of their Agreement. C. MEP Record Drawings(As Builts): Maintain and submit one set of reproducibles and on one set blue-or black-line white prints of Record Drawings. 1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, pm whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot ON be readily identified and recorded later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. d. Mark Record Drawings, showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. 2. Mark record sets with erasable,red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. 3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 4. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 5. Refer to MEPFP sections of the Specification for additional closeout requirements. D. Record Specifications and Drawings: The Architect will submit one copy of Project's Specifications and Drawings, including addenda and contract modifications to the Owner's Representative at Project Closeout. E. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection PM with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. Smith Campus Center Closeout Procedures *" 01770-3 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. .■, 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify CM of items, either on CM's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final *�* Completion. 1.5 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion,complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment. 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training videotapes. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify CM of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will notify CM of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.6 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by CM that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name of Architect. Smith Campus Center Closeout Procedures 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01770-2 o. SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,but not limited to,the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project Record Documents. 3. Warranties. 4. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 5. Final cleaning. 6. Operating and Maintenance data. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Execution requirements—Section 01700. 1.4 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, 40 final certifications,and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, !FM and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs and photographic negatives, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. eM 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records(by Owner). 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. Smith Campus Center Closeout Procedures 01770-1 100%Construction Documents: 0 l.11.12 3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION w� Smith Campus Center Execution Requirements 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01700-6 .A C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum an the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. ON E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint,mortar,oils,putty, and similar materials. 1. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. H. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. ON Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. L During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. J. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. K. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the !! construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 40 3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units,replace with new units,and retest. !s" B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Testing and Inspections." 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. P B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. Smith Campus Center Execution Requirements "!' 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01700-5 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes,ducts,and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. G. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. H. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. ' 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg. F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. Smith Campus Center Execution Requirements 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01700-4 00 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work ,M progresses. S. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, tw grading, fill and topsoil placement,utility slopes,and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for an mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Reference Points by Owner: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. B. Benchmarks by Owner: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. w 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. C. Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work. D. Final Property Survey to be executed by Owner: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point. 2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." Smith Campus Center Execution Requirements "" 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01700-3 .p an 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. am C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. �** 1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. C. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility .. with existing finishes or primers. 3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. .� Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures,utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with ** recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in .. relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered,notify Architect promptly. B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of +*� construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. Smith Campus Center Execution Requirements 100% Construction Documents: 01.1 1.12 01700-2 '" SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. go 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including,but not limited to,the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. General installation of products. 3. Progress cleaning. 4. Starting and adjusting. 5. Protection of installed construction. 6. Correction of the Work. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Closeout procedures—Section 01770. No 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, 40 investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services. B. Existing Utilities: Before beginning site work, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services. Smith Campus Center Execution Requirements 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01700-1 o ,w work in coordination with entire work. Isolate each unit of work from non-compatible work,as required to prevent deterioration. L. Coordinate enclosure (closing-in) of work with required inspections and tests, so as to avoid necessity of uncovering work for that purpose. M. Mounting Heights: Except as otherwise indicated, mount individual units of work at e� industry-recognized standard mounting heights, for applications indicated. END OF SECTION am 40 Smith Campus Center Materials and Equipment 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 016004 warehousing charges of any materials stored offsite. The CM shall also be responsible for the cost of delivery to the job site of any materials that has been stored offsite. B. Materials delivered to the job site shall be carefully stored and protected from damage. Damaged material shall not be used in the work. The CM shall provide, where directed temporary storage facilities as may be required for the storage of all materials which might be damaged by weather. C. Manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by the representative manufacturers, unless otherwise specified. D. Equipment, plant, and appliances, such as concrete lifts, rigging, walks, ramps, chutes, scaffolding, implements, transportation, cartage and other things necessary and required for the adequate execution of the work and as required by law and applicable Union rules shall be provided and shall be maintained in good and safe mechanical working order, be responsible for their safe use, and remove them when no longer required. Applicable requirements of OSHA shall become and form a part of this document. E. During handling and installation of work at project site clean and protect work in progress and adjoining work on a basis of perpetual maintenance. Apply suitable protective covering on newly installed work where reasonably required to ensure freedom from damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion; otherwise, clean and perform maintenance on newly installed work as frequently as necessary W through remainder of construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. F. Require installer of each major unit of work to inspect substrate to receive the work, and conditions under which the work will be performed, and to report (in writing to CM) unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. G. Where installations include manufactured products, comply with manufacturer's applicable instructions and recommendations for installation to whatever extent these are more explicit or more stringent than applicable requirements indicated in the Contract Documents. H. Inspect each item of materials or equipment immediately prior to installation and reject damaged and defective items. I. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods for securing work properly as it is installed; true to line and level, and within recognized industry tolerance if not otherwise indicated. Allow for expansions and building movements. Provide uniform joint widths in exposed work, organized for best possible visual effect. Refer questionable visual-effect choices to Architect for final decision. J. Recheck measurements and dimensions of the work as an integral step of starting each installation. K. Install work during conditions of temperature, humidity, exposure, forecasted weather, and status of project completion which will ensure best possible results for each unit of Smith Campus Center Materials and Equipment " " 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01600-3 .. .. 1.6 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned, and conditioned as directed by the respective manufacturers, unless otherwise specified. 1.7 IDENTIFYING MARKINGS A. Name plates and other identifying markings shall not be affixed on exposed surfaces of manufactured items installed in finished spaces. .. 1.8 PRODUCT APPROVAL STANDARDS A. Where the words "or approved equal" or other synonymous terms are used, it is expressly understood that they shall mean that the approval of any such submission is vested in the Architect, whose decision shall be final and binding upon all concerned. All submissions are subject to such approval and shall conform to the requirements of Article 1.10 herein. 1.9 ACCEPTANCE OF NON-SPECIFIED PRODUCTS PRIOR TO BID DATE A. For approval of products other than those specified, Bidders shall submit a request in ' writing at least ten (10) days prior to bid date and hour. Requests received after this time will not be reviewed or considered regardless of cause. Requests shall clearly define and describe the product for which approval is requested. Requests shall be accompanied by manufacturer's literature, specifications, drawings, cuts, performance data, list of reference or other information necessary to completely describe the item. Approval by the Architect will be in the form of an addendum to the specifications issued to all prospective bidders of record. The addendum will indicate the additional products which are approved for this project. 1.10 SUBSTITUTIONS A. See Supplementary General Conditions, 3.4.7. 1.11 TEMPORARY USE OF EQUIPMENT A. No equipment intended for permanent installation shall be operated for temporary purposes without the written permission of the Architect. B. The temporary or trial usage by the Owner of any mechanical device, machinery, apparatus, equipment or any work or materials supplied under this Contract before final completion and written acceptance by the Architect, shall not be construed as evidence , of the acceptance of same by the Owner. The Owner shall have the privilege of such temporary and trial usage, for such reasonable length of time as and when the Architect shall deem to be proper for making a complete and thorough test of same and no claim for damage shall be made by the CM for the injury to or breaking of parts of such work which may be caused by weakness of inaccuracy of structural parts or by defective material or workmanship. If the CM so elects, he may at his own expense, place a competent person or persons to make such trial usage; such trial usage shall be under the supervision of the CM. 1.12 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. In the event that it is necessary for the CM to store any materials offsite, he shall first obtain the approval of the Architect. The CM shall be responsible for insurance and Smith Campus Center Materials and Equipment 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01600-2 ON SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to on complete materials, and equipment requirements as specified herein, including but not limited to, the following: 1. Transportation and handling. 2. Storage and protection. 3. Installation requirements. 4. Identifying markings. 5. Product approval standards. 6. Substitution requirements. 7. Temporary use of equipment. 8. General standards. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. General Conditions. on 1.4 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Materials, products, and equipment shall be properly containerized, packaged, boxed, and protected to prevent damage during transportation and handling. B. More detailed requirements for transportation and handling are specified under the technical Sections. 1.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Provide suitable temporary weathertight storage facilities as may be required for MR materials that will be damaged by storage in the open. B. Allocate such space for storage purposes. Any additional off-site space required is the responsibility of the CM. C. Allocate the available storage areas and coordinate their use by the trades on the job. Maintain a current layout of all storage facilities. D. Store and protect materials delivered at the site from damage. Do not use damaged material on the work. Smith Campus Center Materials and Equipment ' "' 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01600-1 No an C. As soon as permanent stairs are erected,provide temporary protective treads, handrails, and shaft protection. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 REMOVAL A. Maintain all temporary facilities and controls as long as needed for the safe and proper completion of the work. Remove all such temporary facilities and controls as rapidly as progress of the work will permit or as directed by the Architect. END OF SECTION wa Smith Campus Center Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 100%Construction Documents: 0 l.11.12 01500-6 '"�' C. When the permanent water supply and distribution system has been installed, it may be used as a source of water for construction purposes, provided that the Contractor (1) obtains the approval of the Architect, (2) assumes full responsibility for the entire water distribution system, and (3) pays costs for operation, maintenance, and restoration of the system including the cost of water used. D. At the completion of the construction work or at such time after the Contractor makes use of the permanent water installation, all temporary water service equipment and piping shall be removed, and all worn or damaged parts of the permanent system shall be replaced and equipment placed in first class condition equal to new. 2.12 WATER, SNOW AND ICE CONTROL A. From the commencement to the construction of the completion of the work, keep all parts of the site and the project free from accumulation of water, and supply,maintain, �w and operate all necessary pumping and bailing equipment. B. Remove snow and ice as necessary for the protection and prosecution of the work, and protect the work against weather damage. C. The CM shall take over responsibility for site drainage upon entering the premises and shall maintain such drainage until completion of the work so as not to adversely affect the adjacent areas. 2.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS A. The CM shall comply with all applicable Federal, State and local laws, regulations, pa ordinances, codes and standards concerning environment control. Particular attention shall be given,without limitations, to: 1. Minimization of dust, containment of chemical vapors, control of engine exhaust wr gases, and control of smoke from temporary heaters. 2. Reduction of water pollution by control of sanitary facilities, proper storage of fuels and other potential contaminants, and prevention of siltation from land erosion. 3. Minimization of noise levels. 4. Proper and legal disposal, off site unless otherwise provided, of waste and spoil resulting from construction activities. 2.14 SITE LOGISTICS PLAN A. A Staging Plan shall be included in the drawing by the CM. The Staging Plan shall locate all temporary facilities and services, including parking for the CM's and subcontractor's employees, within the limits of the staging areas, and shall allot ground space to Subcontractors for storage of materials, and the erection of sheds and tool houses. Materials and equipment can only be stored in the staging area. The staging area shall be maintained in good repair, free of mud and standing water, and passable at all times. All materials stored within the project site are the responsibility of the CM. op At the completion of the work, the staging areas shall be restored to their original condition, gravel removed, topsoil replaced and graded and re-seeded. 2.15 TEMPORARY STAIRS, LADDERS,RAMPS, AND RUNWAYS A. Provide and maintain all equipment such as temporary stairs, ladders, ramps, runways, and chutes as required for the proper execution of the work. B. All such apparatus, equipment, and construction shall meet all requirements of the Labor Law and other state or local laws applicable thereto. Smith Campus Center Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 40 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01500-5 No, breakers, disconnect switches, and other electrical devices as required to protect the power supply system. 1. Provide double duplex outlets at not more than 200' o.c. both directions .. throughout this building. C. A temporary lighting system shall be furnished, installed, and maintained as required to satisfy minimum requirements of safety and security. The temporary lighting system shall afford general illumination in all building areas and shall supply not less than 150 watt lamps on 30' centers both directions of floor area for illumination in the areas of the building where work is being performed. D. All temporary equipment and wiring for power and lighting shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of the governing codes. All temporary wiring shall be maintained in a safe manner and used so as not to constitute a hazard to persons or property. E. When the permanent electrical power and lighting systems are in operating condition, they may be used for temporary power and lighting for construction purposes, provided that the Contractor (1) obtains the approval of the Architect, (2) assumes full responsibility for the entire power and lighting system, and (3) pays costs for power, operations, maintenance, and restoration of the system. 2.9 ROADS AND ACCESS TO SITE A. Construct and maintain in good usable condition all required temporary roads and access to site, and, when no longer required, remove all temporary construction and restore the site. B. Where streets now in use are within or adjacent to the work, keep the passageways of such streets open to vehicular and pedestrian traffic to building fronting thereon. Maintain constant access for police, fire and ambulance service. C. Mud carried off the site and into public roads shall be removed immediately by the CM. 2.10 TEMPORARY TOILETS A. Provide and maintain in a sanitary condition enclosed weathertight toilets for the use of all construction personnel at a location within the contract limits, complete with fixtures, water, and sewer connections and all appurtenances. Upon completion of the work, toilets and their appurtenances shall be removed. Installation shall be in accordance with all applicable codes and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. ` Chemical toilets will be permitted. The number of toilet rooms required shall be in accordance with the ANSI Standard Safety Code for Building Construction or other local authorities. , 2.11 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Provide at a point within 10 feet of the building (or buildings) all water necessary for construction purposes. Make all temporary connections to existing mains; provide temporary meter; and make arrangements to pay for the temporary water service including cost of installation, maintenance thereof, and water used. , B. Furnish drinking water with suitable containers and cups for use of employees. Drinking water dispensers shall be conveniently located in the building where work is in progress. Smith Campus Center Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 015004 w• 40 C. Open fire will not be permitted within the building enclosure or on the project site. ap 2.7 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION A. Provide temporary heat as required during construction to protect the work from freezing or frost damage, and as necessary to ensure suitable working conditions for the construction operations of all trades. In areas of the building where work is being conducted, the temperature shall be maintained as specified in the various sections of the Specifications, but not less than 45 degrees Fahrenheit. Under no circumstances shall the temperature be allowed to reach a level that will cause damage to any portion of the work which may be subject to damage by low temperatures. B. Until the building, or any major portion thereof, is enclosed, temporary heating shall be by smokeless portable unit heaters of type listed by Underwriter's Laboratories,Factory Mutual, and the Fire Marshall. Pay for fuel, maintenance, and attendants required in connection with the portable unit heaters. Interior or exterior surfaces damaged by the use of these space heaters shall be replaced by new materials or be refinished. C. The building shall be considered enclosed when it has reached the stage when exterior on walls have been erected, the roof substantially completed, exterior openings closed up either by the permanently glazed windows and doors, or by adequate temporary closing,and the building is ready for interior masonry and plastering operations. D. After the building, or any major portion thereof, has been enclosed, the permanent heating system as specified below may be used for temporary heat. E. When the permanent heating system, or a suitable portion thereof, is in operating condition, the system may be used for temporary heating, provided that the CM (1) obtains approval of the Architect, (2) assumes full responsibility for the entire heating system, and (3) pays all costs for fuel, operation, maintenance, and restoration of the system. F. Provide adequate ventilation as required to keep the temperature of the building within 40 10 degrees Fahrenheit of the ambient outdoor temperature when such ambient temperature exceeds 70 degrees Fahrenheit, and to prevent accumulation of excess moisture or to prevent excess thermal movement in the building. G. Upon conclusion of the temporary heating period, remove all temporary piping, temporary heating units, or other equipment and pay all costs in connection with repairing any damage caused by the installation or removal of temporary heating equipment. Thoroughly clean and recondition those parts of permanent heating and air circulation systems used for temporary service. 2.8 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER A. Make all arrangements with the local electric company for temporary electrical service to the construction site; provide all equipment necessary for temporary power and lighting; and pay all charges for this equipment, the installation thereof, and for current used. The electrical service shall be of 120v and 240v for single phase loads up to 30 amps for all construction tools and equipment without overloading the temporary facilities and shall be made available for power, lighting, and construction operations of all trades. B. In addition to the electrical service, provide power distribution as required throughout structure. The terminations of power distribution shall be at convenient locations in the building. Terminations shall be provided for each voltage supply complete with circuit Smith Campus Center Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01500-3 ON .. 2.2 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION go A. No signs or advertisements will be allowed to be displayed on the premises without the approval of the Architect or Owner. B. One construction sign on the site shall be provided by the CM and shall be subject to "® the review of the Architect and the approval of the Owner. Text and lettering shall be provided for at a later date. ON C. Erect the construction sign on the site where directed by the Architect approximately 4 ft. x 8 ft. in size, of 3/4 in. plywood with suitable frame, moldings, and supports. Use Douglas Fir Overlaid Plywood, Grade B-B high density, exterior, good two sides, no complying with PS-1. The sign shall be primed and given two coats of approved white paint. Lettering shall be black of an approved type, size, and lay-out as directed by the Architect. Sign shall contain the name of the building, Owner, Architect, CM, and such other reasonable information as the Architect or Owner may require. The '" Architect will provide an electronic format version for fabrication in 4' x 8' size. 2.3 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION OPENINGS A. Provide openings in slabs, walls, and partitions where required for moving in large pieces of equipment of all types. Close and/or restore all openings and finish them after the equipment is in place. Structural modification, if required, shall be subject to review by the Architect and Engineer. 2.4 TEMPORARY FENCE A. Provide and maintain chain link fence with tennis court mesh liner to enclose the area at the job site as required to stage the project effectively and to guard and close effectively the designated area. Provide gates at locations where required for access to the enclosed area. Gates shall be of substantial construction, cross-braced, hung on heavy strap hinges, and shall have suitable hasps and padlocks. Submit shop drawings of fence and gates for review of Architect and Owner. B. Remove the fence upon completion of the work or at such time before final completion as directed by the Owner. 2.5 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A. Provide and maintain a field office with a telephone and fax at the job site. In addition, provide a temporary office adequate in size and accommodation for CM's offices, supply and storage until the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion. Field and temporary offices shall be removed when no longer required. Provide a telephone and fax and pay all charges for installation and calls,including long distance calls. .� B. Construction shanties, sheds, and temporary facilities provided as required above, or for the CM's convenience, shall be maintained in good condition and neat appearance, including painting with two coats of approved paint of a color selected by the , . Architect. 2.6 FIRE PROTECTION A. Provide and maintain adequate fire protection, ready for instant use, distributed around the project. B. Make arrangements for periodical inspection by local fire protection authorities and +��* insurance underwriters inspections. Cooperate with said authorities and promptly carry out their recommendations. Smith Campus Center Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01500-2 ON so SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS on PART 1 GENERAL „" 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the construction facilities and temporary controls as shown on the drawings and specified herein,including but not limited to,the following: 1. Construction sign. 2. Stairs and ladders. 3. Construction fence. 4. Field office and sheds. 5. Fire protection. 6. Temporary utilities. 7. Temporary toilets. 8. Roads and site access. 9. Security. 10. Water, snow and ice control. 11. Environmental controls. 12. Site Logistics Plan 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Materials and equipment-Section 01600. B. Cleaning-Section 01700. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Arrange for and provide temporary facilities and controls as specified herein and as required for the proper and expeditious prosecution of the work. All utility costs are by Owner, except as otherwise specified, until final acceptance of the work unless the Owner makes arrangements for the use of completed portions of the work after substantial completion. B. Make all temporary connections to utilities and services in locations acceptable to the local authorities having jurisdiction thereof, furnish all necessary labor and materials, and make all installations in a manner subject to the acceptance of such authorities; maintain such connections; remove the temporary installation and connections when no longer required; restore the services and sources of supply to proper operating condition. C. All costs for temporary electrical power, temporary water, and temporary heating (energy usage); will be by Owner. 40 Smith Campus Center Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01500-1 By advance discussions with the inspection service and testing laboratory selected M, by the Owner, determine the time required to perform inspections and tests and to issue each of its findings. 2. Provide all required time within the construction schedule. B. Revising Schedule 1. When changes of construction schedule are necessary during construction, coordinate all such changes of schedule with the inspectors and testing laboratory it as required. C. Adherence to Schedule 1. When the testing laboratory is ready to test according to the determined schedule but is prevented from testing or taking specimens due to incompleteness of the work, all extra costs for testing attributable to the delay will be back-charged to the Contractor. 3.3 TAKING SPECIMENS A. All specimens and samples for testing, unless otherwise provided in these Contract Y Documents, will be taken by the testing laboratory; all sampling equipment and personnel will be provided by the testing laboratory; and all deliveries of specimens and samples to the testing laboratory will be performed by the testing laboratory. END OF SECTION 40 go OR Smith Campus Center "resting and Inspection " " 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01410-3 ON am B. Retesting: When initial tests and inspections indicate non-compliance with local Codes and the Contract Documents, all subsequent retesting occasioned by the non- No compliance shall be performed by the same testing laboratory and inspectors and the costs thereof will be deducted by the Owner from the Contract Sum. 2.2 CODE COMPLIANCE TESTING AND INSPECTION MW A. Inspections and tests required by Codes or Ordinances, or by a plan approval authority, shall be paid by for by the Owner unless otherwise noted in this Section or other Sections of work. Retesting or inspection as required shall conform to the w requirements of Article 2.1 B of this Section. 2.3 CONTRACTOR'S TESTING No A. All costs associated with inspection or testing performed exclusively for the Contractor's convenience shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. B. Where operating tests are specified, the Contractor shall test his work as it progresses, .� on his own account, and shall make satisfactory preliminary tests in all cases before applying for official tests. C. Tests shall be made in the manner specified, for the different branches of the work. Each test shall be made on the entire system for which such test is required, wherever practical. In case it is necessary to test portions of the work independently, the Contractor shall do so without extra compensation. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, material and apparatus, make corrections and conduct the official test. The test will be conducted in the presence of a representative of the Architect. D. All parts of the mechanical and electrical work and associated equipment shall be tested and adjusted to work properly and be left in perfect operating condition. All defects disclosed by these tests shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Architect .. and Engineer without any additional cost to the Owner. Tests shall be repeated on this repaired or replaced work if deemed necessary by the Architect. The Architect shall be notified at least forty-eight(48) hours in advance of all test, and shall be represented at tests that he deems necessary. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary instruments, other equipment, and personnel required for such tests. E. Required certificates of inspection, testing or approval shall be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered by him to the Architect. F. If the Architect or Engineer is to observe the inspections, tests or approvals required by the Contract Documents, he will endeavor to do so promptly and, where practicable, at the source of supply. G. This project will have formal Commissioning,refer to Division 17 for requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 COOPERATION WITH TESTING LABORATORY AND INSPECTORS A. Representatives of the testing laboratory and inspectors shall have access to the work at all times. Provide facilities for such access in order that they may properly perform their functions. 3.2 SCHEDULES A. Establishing Schedule Smith Campus Center Testing and Inspection 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01410-2 NN SECTION 01410 TESTING AND INSPECTION PART 1 GENERAL MIN 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ON 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to 00 complete the testing and inspection requirements as specified herein. B. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, 00 receipts for fee payments,judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Requirements for testing and inspection shall be described in various Sections of these Specifications. Where no testing and inspection requirements are described but the Owner decides that it is required, the Owner may require additional testing and inspection to be performed at his own expense. B. Work Not Included 1. Unless otherwise noted in this Section or other Section of work, the Owner will select a pre-qualified independent testing laboratory and inspection professional. 2. Unless otherwise noted in this Section or other Sections of work, the Owner will pay for all initial services of the testing laboratory and inspection professionals as further described in Article 2.1 of this Section of these Specifications. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The testing laboratory will be qualified to the Owner's approval in accordance with ASTM E-329-95 "Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction". B. Testing, when required, will be in accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations and with selected standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Promptly process and distribute all required copies of test reports and related instructions to ensure all necessary retesting and/or replacement of materials with the least possible delay in progress of the work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PAYMENTS FOR TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES A. Initial Services: The Owner will pay for all initial testing and inspection services. Smith Campus Center Testing and Inspection 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01410-1 C. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Submit with a ,■ request for information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 2.6 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. CM's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. �w 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. +. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, duration's, actual starts and finishes, and activity duration's. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner's Representative, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Construction Progress Documentation 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01320-8 F. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity duration's in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. G. Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists,sorted by finish dates. �.. 1. In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 2. In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. w 3. In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as of list date. 4. Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with progress meetings. a. In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and "cumulative value completed" with total at bottom. b. Submit value summary printouts one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. etr 2.5 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: The CM shall prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 5. Accidents. 6. Meetings and significant decisions. 7. Unusual events(refer to special reports). 8. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 9. Meter readings and similar recordings. 10. Emergency procedures. 11. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 12. Change Orders received and implemented. 13. Construction Change Directives received. 14. Services connected and disconnected. 15. Equipment or system tests and startups. 16. Partial Completions and occupancies. Mn 17. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. Smith Campus Center Construction Progress Documentation do 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01320-7 B. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for commencement of the Work. Outline significant construction activities for the first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. C. CPM Schedule: Prepare CM's Construction Schedule using a CPM network analysis diagram. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 30 days after date established for commencement of the Work. 2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors'personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. 3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time. D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the ■*° Work. Using the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Purchase of materials. C. Delivery. d. Fabrication. e. Installation. 2. Processing: Process data to produce output data or a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as AN necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 3. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. to a. Sub-networks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. E. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start-total float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Principal events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value of activity(coordinated with the Schedule of Values). Smith Campus Center Construction Progress Documentation 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01320-6 g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control. 6. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to,the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. C. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. uw k. Curing. 1. Startup and placement into final use and operation. 7. Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: go a. Structural completion. b. Permanent space enclosure. C. Completion of mechanical installation. AN d. Completion of electrical installation. e. Substantial Completion. E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the schedule. 4W F. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for preparation of payment requests. an G. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. H. Computer Software: Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. 2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven days of date established for commencement of the Work. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. 2.4 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON(activity-on-node) format. Smith Campus Center Construction Progress Documentation 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01320-5 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and CM's Construction Schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary network diagram. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of CM's Construction Schedule. 2.2 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE,GENERAL A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling." .w B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of Final Completion. , 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date,unless specifically authorized by Change Order. C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. •. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals,purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 10 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract w. Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date. Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 5. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. C. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. Smith Campus Center Construction Progress Documentation .. 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 013204 I. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions. J. Special Reports: Submit two copies at time of unusual event. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting. 00 B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the Preliminary Construction Schedule and CM's 00 Construction Schedule, including,but not limited to, the following: 1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. ,. 3. Discuss constraints, including work stages, area separations, interim milestones, and partial Owner occupancy. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 6. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 7. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies. 8. Review time required for completion and startup procedures. 9. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 10. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule. 12. Review procedures for Requests for Information (RFI's), Architect's Supplemental Instructions(ASI's), and Proposal Requests. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. C. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer and provide auxiliary services requested, including access to Project site and use of temporary facilities including temporary lighting. 40 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, 40 ordering,manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Smith Campus Center Construction Progress Documentation 41 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01320-3 no om 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the following activity. ,. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. F. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail. G. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element. .� H. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement. I. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity relationships. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article and in-house scheduling personnel to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. B. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Refer to DOC Outline Schedule. C. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit two printed copies; one a single sheet of reproducible media, and one a print; large enough to show entire network for entire construction period. D. Construction Manager's Construction Schedule: Submit two printed copies of initial schedule, one a reproducible print and one a blue- or black-line print, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. 1. Submit an electronic copy of schedule, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule Initial or Updated and date on label. E. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit three printed copies of each of the following computer-generated reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, original duration, remaining duration, early start date,early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float. 1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. M, 4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from commencement of the Work until most recent Application for Payment. F. Construction Photographs: Submit digital photographs to the Architect, of no less than thirty(30)per month. G. Construction Reports: Submit copies to the Architect or provide access to report logs during job meetings or as required. H. Material Location Reports: Submit copies to the Architect or provide access to report logs during job meetings or as required. Smith Campus Center Construction Progress Documentation 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01320-2 an SECTION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the work, including or but not limited to, the following: 1. Preliminary Construction Schedule. 2. Construction Manager's Construction Schedule. 3. Submittals Schedule. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Field condition reports. 6. Special reports. *V 7. Construction photographs. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Coordination—Section 01040. B. Progress meetings—Section 01202. C. Submittals—Section 01300. D. Closeout procedures—Section 01770. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a '00 construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 00 2. Predecessor activity is an activity that must be completed before a given activity can be started. B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. C. Critical Path: The longest continuous chain of activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. E. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time belongs to Owner. on Smith Campus Center Construction Progress Documentation 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01320-1 SHOP DRAWING / SUBMITTAL COVER FORM W/M Submittal No.: :PROJECT: SMITH CAMPUS CENTER OWNER: THE TRUSTEES OF THE SMITH COLLEGE Smith College, Northampton, MA 30 Belmont Ave., Northampton, MA 01063 ARCHITECT: WEISS/MANFREDI ARCHITECTS CM: DANIEL O'CONNELL'S SONS. INC. 130 West 29th Street, 12`x'Floor, 480 Hampden St., P.O. Box 267 New York, NY 10012 Holyoke, MA 01041-0267 SUBCONTRACTORSECTION.................................................................................................................................................. Item submitted: Spec. Section: Page: Para: Subcontractor: Trade: Date: Review of shop drawings does not relieve the subcontractor or material supplier of his responsibility to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Substitutions and/or deviations from specified items should be clearly noted. Field dimensions are the responsibility of the subcontractor/material supplier. CONSTRUCTIONMANAGER SECTION......................................................................................................... Construction Manger's review that the information complies with general intent of Contract Documents. By: Date: DOC Submission# 'IISCIPLINE APPROVAL STAMPS............................................................................................................................................ ARCHITECT STAMP ENGINEER STAMP �MMr c: Mr. Gary Hartwell, Smith College Job, File am rr. .Ae� PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS A. Prior to submittal for Architect's review, use all means necessary to fully coordinate all ?! material, including the following procedures: 1. Determine and verify' all field dimensions and conditions, materials, catalog numbers and similar data. go 2. Coordinate as required with all trades and with public agencies involved. 3. Secure all necessary approvals from public agencies and others and signify by stamp, or other means,that they have been secured. r 4. Clearly indicate all deviations from the Contract Documents. B. Unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Architect, make all submittals in groups containing all associated items; the Architect may reject partial submittals as not !" complying with the provisions of the Contract Documents. C. The CM shall provide all copies or drawings as reasonably required by subcontractors, material suppliers, inspectors and other required for the work or as directed by the Architect. The CM shall pay all costs in connection with printing and distribution. 3.2 COLOR SCHEDULE on A. The Architect will issue a color schedule. Cooperate in furnishing required color samples to aid in the final selections. Where special or custom colors are specified, furnish physical samples of these colors, in the actual material specified, on the actual "" substrate to be provided for review. END OF SECTION ew no W ON Smith Campus Center Submittals ON 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01300-7 no 6W finish, graining, or other similar property, the CM shall submit sets of pairs illustrating the full scope of the range. go 4. Two (2) samples of each submission will be returned to the CM. Samples stamped "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected" by the Architect shall be resubmitted in triplicate by the CM. 5. All samples stamped "No Exceptions Taken" or "Make Corrections Noted" shall be kept at the site in the CM's field office facilities for reference at all times. "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected" samples shall not be kept at the site. Samples stamped "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected" shall be resubmitted as above. 2.4 INTEGRATED DRAWINGS A. See Section 01040 Paragraph 1.5 Coordination Drawings for additional requirements. B. The HVAC subcontractor shall prepare a Drawing or Drawings showing duct work, heating and sprinkler piping. This Drawing shall include location of grilles, registers, etc., and access doors in hung ceilings. Locations shall be fixed by elevations and dimensions from column center lines and/or walls. C. The HVAC subcontractor shall prepare and distribute to the Plumbing and Electrical subcontractors,the CM,and to the Architect a sepia of the above. D. The HVAC subcontractor shall lay out on his sepia the reflected ceiling plan, beam soffit elevations,ceiling heights,roof openings, etc. E. The Plumbing subcontractor shall lay out on his sepia the piping, valves, clean-outs, etc., indicating locations and elevations and shall indicate the necessary access doors. F. The Electrical subcontractor shall indicate on his sepia the fixtures, large conduit runs, clearances,pull boxes,junction boxes, sound system speakers, etc. G. The CM shall indicate on his sepia any structural framing,ceiling hangers, etc. H. The CM shall call as many meetings with the subcontractors as are necessary to .r resolve any conflicts that become apparent. He will call on the services of the Consultant Engineer or Architect where necessary. The CM is responsible for the coordination of the Drawing or Drawings. I. On resolution of the conflicts, each subcontractor shall enter his own work on the HVAC subcontractor's sepia, which shall become the master or integrated Drawings. The master sepia shall be signed by each contributing subcontractor to indicate his acceptance of the arrangement of the work. J. The CM will be responsible to send the Coordination Drawings to the Commissioning Agent for review. K. A reproducible copy of the master integrated Drawing will be prepared by the HVAC subcontractor. The CM will make distribution. „ L. Each subcontractor shall prepare his Shop Drawings in accordance with the integrated Drawings. No installation of work will be permitted without approved Shop Drawings. It is therefore essential that this procedure be instituted as quickly as possible. ** Smith Campus Center Submittals 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01300-6 B. Submission of Shop Drawings, Manufacturer's Literature, Including Catalog, Catalog me Cuts, Brochures, Charts,Test Data, and Similar Information 1. Architectural Work (Shop Drawings): Submit one (1) sepia reproducible and three (3) black line prints of each shop drawing to the Architect for approval. If 40 approved, the Architect will return one (1) sepia and one (1) print stamped "No Exceptions Taken" or "Make Corrections Noted", and the CM shall print the required number of copies as required for their distribution. In the event the Architect returns one (1) sepia stamped "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected", the CM shall make indicated changes and resubmit one (1) sepia reproducible and three(3)black line prints to the Architect. 2. Architectural Work(Literature): Submit six(6)copies of manufacturer's literature to the Architect for acceptance. If accepted, the Architect will return four (4) copies stamped "No Exceptions Taken" or "Make Corrections Noted". In the event the Architect returns the literature stamped "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected", he will return two (2) copies only. The CM shall resubmit six (6) copies of correct or corrected literature of all submissions stamped by the Architect"Revise and Resubmit" or"Rejected". +w 3. Structural Work and Mechanical Work (Shop Drawings): Submit one (1) sepia reproducible and two (3) black line prints of each shop drawing to the Engineer, with one (1) black line print (for first submissions only) and copy of the +sr transmittal to the Architect. If accepted, the Architect shall return one (1) sepia and one (1) print stamped "No Exceptions Taken" or "Make Corrections Noted", and the CM shall print the required number of copies. In the event the Architect returns one (1) sepia stamped "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected", the CM shall make indicated changes and resubmit one(1) sepia reproducible and two(2)black line prints to the Engineer,with a copy of the transmittal form to the Architect. 4. Structural Work and Mechanical Work (Literature): Submit six (6) copies of manufacturer's literature to the Architect. If accepted, the Architect will return four(4) copies stamped "No Exceptions Taken" or "Make Corrections Noted". In the event the Architect stamps the literature "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected", he will return two(2)copies only. The CM shall resubmit six(6)copies of correct or corrected literature to the Architect for all submissions stamped by the Architect"Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected". 5. Prints: The CM shall provide all prints or shop drawings as reasonably required by subcontractors, material suppliers, superintendents, inspectors, and others as required for the work, or as directed by the Architect. The CM shall pay all costs in connection with printing and distribution of shop drawings. C. Submissions of Samples VW 1. All samples shall be submitted in triplicate unless otherwise indicated in the Contract documents. Where sets of samples are required, three (3) sets shall be submitted to the Architect. 2. Samples will receive consideration only when accompanied by the transmittal form properly filled out, as indicated, and listing each sample, as well as the listing of any ASTM, Federal or other standard references specified or applicable and such additional information as may be required by the Specifications for the VA materials being submitted. Any deviation from the contract requirements shall be so stated on the above form or attached to it. 3. Unless otherwise specified, samples of sufficient size to indicate general visual OR effect shall be submitted. Where samples must show a range of color, texture, Smith Campus Center Submittals 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01300-5 accompanying their return. The submittals must be corrected and resubmitted for approval. 12. All shop drawings and samples shall be identified as follows: .� a. Date of submittal. b. Title of project. C. Name of CM and date of his approval. d. Name of subcontractor or supplier and date of submittal to CM. e. Number of submission(in an agreed upon format between the Architect and CM. f. Any qualification, departure, or deviation from the requirements of the Contract. g. Federal Specification or ASTM number where required. h. Such additional information as may be required by the Specifications for the particular material being furnished. 13. If the CM wishes to deviate from the materials or details as shown in Specifications or Drawings, he shall submit the proposed deviation with shop drawings and/or samples stating the extent and the materials or details being replaced. The CM shall also submit information on the allowed credit or extra cost required for the proposed deviation, and also all information relating to the work of other Sections revised by the proposed deviation. 14. The Architect will review and approve shop drawings and samples for approval with reasonable promptness, but only for conformance with the design concept of the work and with information contained in the Contract Documents. 15. Incomplete shop drawings will be returned without checking for proper submission, and this shall not be considered as cause for delay of the work or extra compensation to the CM. 16. The CM shall submit appropriate transmittal forms with every submittal of shop drawings, manufacturer's literature, and samples. All sepia reproducibles shall be rolled on cardboard tubes for resubmittal. The CM shall submit all required shop drawings, manufacturer's literature and samples in accordance with the procedures specified herein. "* 17. Unless otherwise specifically directed by the Architect, make all shop drawings accurately to a scale sufficiently large to show all pertinent features of the item and its method of connection to the work. Reproduced copies of the bid documents will not be accepted and will not be reviewed by the Architect. 18. Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not a Shop Drawing. 19. No work or materials which are not covered by complete and accepted submission may requisitioned for, and the Owner may withhold payment on any portion of the Work, at a value determined by the Architect's judgement of its worth, until acceptable submissions have been made for that portion and reviewed favorably. 20. Make all submission sufficiently in advance of field requirements to allow ample time for checking. Allow fifteen (15) days for the Architect to review and return each submittal and each resubmittal. No claim for extension of the project schedule will be granted by reason of failure to anticipate time required for review and acceptance, nor for repeated review of unsatisfactory submissions. Smith Campus Center Submittals 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 013004 '" superficially, will be returned unchecked by the Architect for re-submission by the CM. go a. Include in the CM's review stamp a box for signature of the person on the CM's directly employed staff that "This submission has been checked by me, and is complete, and meets requirements of the Contract Documents in every respect, except as specifically noted." No shop drawing submissions shall be reviewed without first being reviewed by the CM for compliance with the Contract Documents. 7. In checking shop drawings, the CM shall verify all dimensions and field conditions and shall check and coordinate the shop drawings of any Section or trade with the requirements of all other Sections or trades whose work is related thereto, as required for proper and complete installation of the work. The Architect will review shop drawings. The Architect's acceptance of shop drawings is for design only and not method of assembly or erection. Acceptance shall in no way be construed as (1) permitting any departure whatsoever from the Contract Documents; (2) relieving the CM of full responsibility for any error in details, dimensions, omissions, or otherwise that may exist; (3) relieving the CM of full responsibility for adequate field connections, erection techniques, bracing, or deficiencies in strength; (4)relieving the CM of full responsibility for satisfactory performance of all work and coordination with the work of all subcontractors and other contractors; or (5) permitting departure from additional details or instructions previously furnished by the Architect. Acceptance of such drawings shall not be construed as a complete check, nor shall it relieve the CM from responsibility for proper fitting of the work, nor from the necessity of furnishing any work which may not be indicated on shop drawings when approved. The CM shall be solely responsible for any quantities shown in the Contract Documents. 8. No work shall be fabricated, manufactured, or installed from shop drawings stamped "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected", and such shop drawings shall be corrected and resubmitted by the CM until accepted by the Architect. At least one complete set of"No Exceptions Taken, Make Corrections Noted" shop drawings PP shall be kept at the site in the CM's field office for reference at all times. "Revise and Resubmit" or"Rejected" shop drawings shall not be permitted at the site. 9. Submittals marked"No Exceptions Taken": ON a. Submittals which require no corrections by the Architect will be marked"No Exceptions Taken". 10. Submittals marked"Make Corrections Noted": a. Submittals which require only a minor amount of correcting shall be marked "Make Corrections Noted". This mark shall mean that checking is complete and all corrections are obvious without ambiguity. Fabrication will be allowed on work "Make Corrections Noted", provided such action will expedite construction and noted corrections are adhered to. If fabrication is not made strictly in accordance with corrections noted, the item shall be rejected in the field, and the CM will be required to replace such work in accordance with corrected submittals. 11. Submittals marked "Revise and Resubmit" or"Rejected": a. When submittals are contrary to contract requirements or too many corrections are required, they shall be marked "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected". No work shall be fabricated under this mark. The Architect shall list his reasons for rejection on the submittals or in the transmittal letter Smith Campus Center Submittals 100% Construction Documents: 0 l.l 1.12 01300-3 B. Establish necessary reference lines and permanent bench marks from which building lines and elevations shall be established. Establish not less than two such bench marks ^ in widely separated locations. Be responsible for the proper location and level of the work and for maintenance of the reference lines and bench marks. Establish bench marks and axis lines at each floor showing exact floor elevations and other lines and « dimensional reference points as required for the information and guidance of all trades; field checking of the structure and surveys thereof as may be required by the technical Sections of the Specifications; the marking and layout of walls and partitions; and the taking of settlement readings as hereinafter specified. C. Take settlement readings of the work at a predetermined number of points selected by the Architect. Take readings weekly until the work if substantially completed and until such time as the Architect directs. Record survey data and submit to the Architect. D. The mechanical and electrical trades shall be responsible for the layout of the duct work,piping, and conduit based on the reference lines and bench marks established. ' E. Upon completion of foundation walls, prepare and submit to the Architect a survey showing the dimensions, elevations, angles, and the location of the building are in accordance with the Contract Documents. When enclosing walls are completed, a further survey shall be submitted,certifying their location and plumbness. 2.3 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES A. General 1. The CM shall pay for and coordinate preparation of and all distribution of all submittals. 2. The CM shall be responsible for coordinating the schedule for submittal of shop drawings and samples with the CM's progress schedule and the requirements of the Contract Schedule, and submit a coordinated schedule of submission of all shop drawings and samples to the Architect, subject to relevant approval. 3. Failure of the CM to schedule and submit shop drawings and samples in ample time for checking, correction, and rechecking will not justify any delay in the Contract Schedule. Allow ample time for items to be tested, including time for retesting if the tests or mock-ups fail. 4. Samples, shop drawings, manufacturers' literature, and other required information shall be submitted in sufficient time to permit proper consideration and action on same before any materials and items are delivered on the work. Stagger submissions so that the Architect can review the documents in an orderly and ... timely manner. All samples of materials requiring laboratory tests shall be submitted to the laboratory for testing before such materials are required to be used in the work. All other samples, manufacturers' literature, and other sample information shall be submitted for approval before such materials are required to be used in the work. 5. Shop drawings for each Section of the work shall be numbered consecutively, and the numbering system shall be retained throughout all revisions. Each drawings .. shall have a clear space for the stamps of the CM shop drawing/submittal stamps, Architect, and one of the Architect's consultants. 6. All shop drawings shall be thoroughly checked by the CM for compliance with the .� Contract Documents before submitting them to the Architect and shall bear the CM's stamp that indicates that they have been so checked. Any shop drawings submitted without this stamp, and shop drawings which, in the Architect's opinion, are incomplete, contains errors or have not been checked, or only checked Smith Campus Center Submittals 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01300-2 .. Im SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete submittal requirements as specified herein, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Survey data. 2. Shop drawings and samples. 3. Integrated drawings. 4. Pre-construction submittals. W 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Construction Progress Documentation—Section 01320. 40 B. Substitution requirements - Section 01600. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRE-CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS A. Submit prior to the first pre-construction meeting the following: 1. Name of CM's authorized personnel, including name and qualifications of the superintendent. 2. List of Subcontractors. 3. Written substantiation of the qualifications of subcontractors or other personnel as required by other sections of these specifications. 4. Schedule of values. 5. Shop drawing stamp. 6. Construction progress schedule. 7. Logistics plan. 8. Temporary services plan. 9. A preliminary submittal schedule. 10. Name and qualifications of CM's superintendent. 11. Staging plans per Section 01500. 2.2 SURVEY DATA A. The Contractor shall be responsible for properly laying out the work and for the lines and measurements for the work executed under the Contract Documents. Verify the figures shown on the Drawings before laying out the work, form control points provided and report errors or inaccuracies in writing to the Architect before commencing work. The Architect or his representative will in no case assume the responsibility for laying out the work. Smith Campus Center Submittals 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01300-1 such other copies as he wishes. Minutes shall be forwarded for review and comment no later than 3 days after meeting date. Agendas shall be prepared and forwarded to the Owner and Architect 2 days prior to scheduled meeting for their review and comment. PART 2 PRODUCTS .. (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION MR 3.1 MEETING SCHEDULE Wo A. Coordinate with the Architect and Owner's Representative and appropriate subcontractors as required to establish a mutually acceptable schedule for project meetings. WM 3.2 MEETING LOCATION A. To the maximum extent practicable, project meetings shall be held at the job site. Provide adequate space and facility including table, chairs, and lighting for proper conduct of meeting. 3.3 ATTENDANCE A. To the maximum extent practicable, assign the same person or persons to represent the CM at project meetings throughout the construction period. Subcontractors, materials suppliers, and others may be invited to attend those project meetings in which their ` aspects of the work are involved. END OF SECTION ww Smith Campus Center Progress Meetings 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01202-2 SECTION 01202 PROGRESS MEETINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. To enable orderly review of progress during construction and to provide for systematic discussions of problems, the Owner's representative, the Architect, the Construction Manager (CM) and appropriate subcontractors will conduct project meetings throughout the construction period. B. In general, project meetings will be held weekly at the job site in accordance with a mutually acceptable schedule. C. The purpose of the project meetings is analysis of problems that might arise between the Owner and the CM relative to execution of the work. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. The CM's relations with his subcontractors and materials suppliers, and discussions relative thereto, are the CM's responsibility as described in the general conditions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Persons designated by the CM to attend and participate in project meetings shall have all required authority to commit the Architect and CM to solutions as agreed upon in 06 the project meetings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Agenda Items: To the maximum extent possible, advise the Architect and the Owner's Representative at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the project meeting regarding all items to be added to the agenda. B. Minimum Progress Meeting Agenda 1. Review work progress since last meeting. 2. Note field observations,problems and decisions. 3. Identify problems which impede planned progress. 4. Review off-site fabrication problems. 5. Develop corrective measures and procedures to regain schedule. so 6. Coordinate projected progress with other prime contractors. 7. Review submittal schedules,expedite as required to maintain schedule. 8. Review of RFI's, ASI's and their status including review of design issues/design questions. C. Minutes and Agendas: The CM will compile minutes of each project meeting and will distribute copies to the Owner and the Architect. The CM shall make and distribute Smith Campus Center Progress Meetings 40 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01202-1 wR includes a compressor, electric strike, wiring and specified closer (standard closer to be used in lieu of specified closer). B. The Owner may elect this alternate at any time within 1 year after the execution of the Contract. 2.7 ALTERNATE NUMBER 7 A. Add additional door and window contacts at exterior wall as shown in security drawings. These contacts are to be integrated to the base building security system, also as shown in the security drawings. vp PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ADVANCE COORDINATION A. Immediately after award of Contract, and to the Maximum extent practicable, thoroughly and clearly advise all necessary personnel and suppliers as to the nature and extent of alternates as selected by the Owner; use all means necessary to alert those personnel and suppliers involved as to all changes in the work caused by the Owner's selection of alternates. 3.2 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Prior to installation of the alternate items, verify that all surfaces have been modified as necessary to accept the installation and the item or items may be installed in complete accordance with their manufacturer's current recommendations; in the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect and proceed as directed. 3.3 ACCEPTANCE OF ALTERNATE A. Acceptance of the Alternate makes all requirements of scope,performance, submissions, service and guarantees binding as if that material name appeared in the Specifications for the Base Bid. All necessary changes in building design or construction to accommodate the alternate materials shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor without extra cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION to on Smith Campus Center Alternates 4M 01100-3 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 ow work of each Alternate. It is recognized that the descriptions of Alternate Bids are primarily scope definitions and do not necessarily detail the full range of material and process needed to complete the work as required. Any change of details, construction, etc., as required to accommodate the Alternate shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be included in his Alternate Bid Price. G. Except as otherwise described or accepted, materials and workmanship of the Alternate Bids shall conform to the requirements specified under the various Sections of the Specifications for similar items of the work. H. Where methods of construction, materials, finishes, or details of installation required by the various Alternate Bids differ from the requirements shown on drawings or specified for corresponding items, the alternate construction, materials, etc. will be subject to acceptance by the Architect. I. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings and samples for the work under each accepted Alternate Bid for acceptance in conformance with requirement of Section 01300. PART2 ALTERNATES 2.1 ALTERNATE NUMBER 1 A. In lieu of all maple veneer plywood paneling on the partitions at the Main Lounge Room 101, finish and paint the gypsum wallboard partition subsurface,which is included in the Base Bid. B. The Owner may elect this alternate at any time within 1 year after the execution of the Contract. 2.2 ALTERNATE NUMBER 2 A. Delete the Exterior Sun Shading Device at the Main Lounge Room 101, including painted steel support brackets,painted steel channel tie backs, and painted steel pipe legs. B. The Owner may elect this alternate at any time within I year after the execution of the Contract. 2.3 ALTERNATE NUMBER 3 A. Delete operable acoustic panels, associated hardware, and painted steel supports and frame in the Multiple Use Room 208. B. The Owner may elect this alternate at any time within 1 year after the execution of the Contract. 2.4 ALTERNATE NUMBER 4 A. Add maple veneer plywood paneling over the gypsum wallboard partition, which is included in the Base Bid, at the Multi-Purpose Room 208 ceiling and wall. See detail 16/A905 in the Contract Drawings. B. The Owner may elect this alternate at any time within 1 year after the execution of the Contract. 2.5 ALTERNATE NUMBER 5 A Replace all vapor barrier under slab on grade at the Lower Level with a under slab waterproofing continuous with the foundation wall waterproofing. See detail 20/A602 in the Contract Drawings 2.6 ALTERNATE NUMBER 6 .w A. Remove smoke purge function in Main Lounge 101. This includes removing 1 roof smoke purge fan and automatic door opening function for 1 door. Automatic door opening equipment Smith Campus Center Alternates 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01100-2 ± SECTION 01100 ALTERNATES PART GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. To allow the Owner to compare total costs where alternate material and methods might be used, and to enable the Owner's decision prior to awarding the Contract, certain alternates have been established in this Section of the Specifications. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Where noted herein, pertinent Sections of those specifications describe the materials and methods under the various alternates. XV B. The method of stating the proposed Alternate Sum is described on the Bid Form. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. All alternates described in this Section of those Specifications are required to be reflected in the bid submitted on the Bid Form for the work; however, do not submit alternates other than those described in this Section. B. Any additional costs to the Contractor due to the inclusion of alternates shall be included in the amount to be added to the Contract Sum, so that no additional costs shall be borne by the Owner due to the inclusion of deductive alternates. C. Any deductive costs to the Contractor due the inclusion of alternates shall be included in the amount to be deducted from the Contract Sum, so that all deductive costs will accrue to the Owner due to the inclusion of deductive alternates. 1.4 PROCEDURES FOR ALTERNATE BIDS A. Each Bidder shall submit on the Proposal Form all Alternate Bids stated herein. Alternate Bids shall state the difference in price as "additions to" or "deductions from" the Base Bid, unless otherwise noted, for the substitution, omission, or addition to the alternate material, items or construction form that shown and specified. B. The Alternate Bids,when accepted,become part of the Contract. C. Each Bidder shall carefully check the Drawings and Specifications to determine the extent of each Alternate Bid required. D. Alternate Bids shall include all overhead and profit applicable thereto. gr E. Alternate Bids shall reflect the increase or decrease in cost of all work of every name and nature which may be affected thereby and no subsequent claims for extras by reason of the Contractor's failure to observe this requirement will be considered. F. The description herein for each Alternate Bid is recognized to be incomplete and abbreviated, but implies that each change must be complete for the scope of the work affected. Refer to the applicable Specifications Sections, and to applicable drawings, for the specific requirements of the work, regardless of whether references are so noted in the description of each Alternate. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required to properly integrate with the Smith Campus Center Alternates 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01100-1 SECTION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 LAYOUT OF WORK A. Construction staking shall be performed by the Contractor in accordance with the provisions in this section. B. Construction staking shall consist of construction layout and reference staking necessary for the proper control and satisfactory completion of the construction work and the acceptance of the Contract. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the placement and preservation of adequate ties to all control points, centerline pins, street monuments, and property lines, which were provided by others,necessary for the accurate re-establishment of all existing points. D. The Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for the accuracy of the line and grade of all features of the work. Any errors or apparent discrepancies found in previous surveys,plans,specifications or special provisions shall be called to the Architect's attention by the Contractor for correction or interpretation prior to proceeding with the work. E. All staking shall be performed by qualified engineering or surveying personnel who are trained, experienced and skilled in construction layout, and who are acceptable to the Engineer. F. The Contractor will arrange with the Architect the measuring of any item by the Civil Engineer that is paid for on a unit price basis. G. The Civil Engineer will supply to the Contractor all available control points and bench marks located by the Engineer for the prosecution of the work. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Field Engineering 01050-1 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place, during handling and installation. Apply protective covering where required to assure protection from damage or deterioration at substantial completion. B. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to assure operability without damaging effects. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Coordination 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01040-3 L Prepare similar memoranda for the owner and separate contractors where coordination of their work is required. .w C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress of the work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of schedules. 2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities. 3. Delivery and processing of submittals. 4. Progress meetings. 5. Project closeout activities. .4 D. Conservation: Coordinate construction operations to assure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Existing salvaged material shall remain the property of the Owner, as shown on the drawings, or '" as defined in Site Preparation, section 02110. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated in, the work. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings where careful coordination is needed for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. Prepare coordination drawings where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components. I. Show the relationship of components shown on separate shop drawings. 2. Indicate required installation sequences. 3. Comply with requirements contained in section "submittals". B. Staff Names: Within 15 days of commencement of construction operations, submit a list of the contractor's principal staff assignments, including the superintendent, other personnel, the Owner/Owner's Representatives, and the Architect and their representatives in attendance at the project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities. List their addresses and telephone numbers. 1. Post copies of the list in the project meeting room, the temporary field office, and .. each temporary telephone. PART 2 PRODUCTS W, (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION on 3.1 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS A. Inspection of conditions: Require the installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. B. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests to minimize the necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose. Smith Campus Center Coordination 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01040-2 w. no SECTION 01040 COORDINATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to P-9 complete the project coordination as specified herein, including but not limited to, the following: 1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Conservation. 3. Coordination drawings. 4. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 5. Cleaning and protection. 6. Connecting to existing systems. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Project meeting- Section 01202. B. Submittals-Section 01300. C. Materials and equipment- Section 01600. D. Contract closeout-Section 01700. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction operations included in various sections of these specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the work. Coordinate ! " construction operations included under different sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the work depends on installation of other components,before or after its own installation. 2. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. RP 3. Coordinate with Smith College contacting all local utility companies having jurisdiction prior to beginning work. The Contractor is responsible for all damage to any utility. Coordinate all on-site work with utility company. Verify that existing utilities indicated as having been abandoned are actually abandoned and inactive. Arrange for a representative of the utility company to be on-site during demolition and excavation operations. Coordinate interruptions of existing utilities with the utility company. B. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings. Smith Campus Center Coordination 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01040-1 W NESHDC Northhampton Elm Street Historic SCMA Southern Cypress Manufacturers District Commission Association NFC National Fire Code SDI Steel Deck Institute NFPA National Fire Protection Association SDI Steel Door Institute NFPA National Forest Products Association SJI Steel Joist Institute NHC Northhampton Historic Commission SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Contractors National Association Association SMFMA Sprayed Mineral Fiber Manufacturers NHPMA Nor-them Hardwood and Pine Association,Inc. Manufacturers Association SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau NPA National Particleboard Association SPR Simplified Practice Recommendations, NPCA National Paint and Coatings Association U.S.Department of Commerce NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council Association SWFPA Structural Wood Fiber Products NSC National Safety Council Association NSF National Sanitation Foundation TCA Tile Council of America NSSEA National School Supplies and TEMA Tubular Exchange Manufacturing Equipment Association Association �. NTMA The National Terrazzo and Mosaic TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association,Inc. Association NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers TPI Truss Plate Institute *�+! Association UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility OCIP Owner Controlled Insurance Program Standards OPD City of Northhampton Office of UL Underwriter's Laboratories,Inc. Planning&Development UPC Uniform Plumbing Code OSHA Occupational Safety and Health USCGS U.S.Coast and Geodesic Survey Administration WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau PCA Portland Cement Association WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute WWPA Western Wood Products Association PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute,Inc. PNNL Pacific Northeast National Laboratory PS Product Standard,U.S.Department of no Commerce RIS Redwood Inspection Service RTI Resilient Tile Institute wo SAE Society of Automotive Engineers SBI Steel Boiler Institute SC Smith College END OF SECTION ■ Smith Campus Center Abbreviations Used in the Documents 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01020-12 Pw ADC Air Diffusion Council DFPA Douglas Fir Plywood Association AFI Air Filter Institute EAC Energy Advisory Committee AGCA Associated General Contractors of EOEA Secretary of Environmental Affairs !! America,Inc. ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories AGI American Gas Institute FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association AGMA American Gear Manufacturers FHA Federal Housing Administration MR Association FIA Factory Insurance Association AIA American Institute of Architects FM Factory Mutual Engineering Division AIA American Insurance Association Association of Factory Mutual Fire AIMA Acoustical and Insulating Materials Insurance Companies Association FPL Forest Products Laboratories AISC American Institute of Steel Construction FS Federal Specifications AISI American Iron and Steel Institute FSIWA Federation of Sewage and Industrial AITC American Institute of Timber Waste Association Construction FTI Facing Tile Institute ALS American Lumber Standards GA Gypsum Association AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning GTA Glass Tempering Association Association HPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers ANSI American National Standards Institute, Association Inc. IBRM Institute of Boiler and Radiator APA American Plywood Association Manufacturers API American Petroleum Institute IECC International Energy Conservation Code ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Institute Engineering ASAHC American Society of Architectural IES Illuminating Engineering Society Hardware Consultants IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Association F Refrigerating and Air Conditioning MAC Masonry Advisory Council Engineers MADOER Division of Energy Resources ASME American Society of Mechanical MDFA Massachusetts Development Finance Engineers Agency ASTM American Society for Testing and MED Massachusetts Elevator Department Materials MGL Massachusetts General Laws ATI Asphalt Tile Institute MHD Massachusetts Historical Commission AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute MIA Marble Institute of America AWPA American Wood Preservers' MLMA Metal Lath Manufacturers Association Association MSBC Massachusetts State Building Code AWPI American Wood Preservers' Institute MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society AWS American Welding Society of the Valves and Fittings Industries AWWA American Waterworks Association NAAMM National Association of Architectural BBRS Board of Building Regulations and Metal Manufacturers Standards NAFM National Association of Fan BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Manufacturers Association NAPM National Association of Plastic BIA Brick Institute of America Manufacturers BOCA Building Officials and Code NBHA National Builders Hardware Association Administrators International,Inc. NBS National Bureau of Standards BRI Building Research Institute NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association !! CABRA Copper and Brass Research Association NEC National Electric Code(NFPA CAGI Compressed Air and Gas Institute Pamphlet No. 70) CFA Commission of Fine Arts NELMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers CM Construction Manager Association,Inc. CMR Code of Massachusetts Regulations NEMA National Electric Manufacturers CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Association CS U.S.Commercial Standard NEMI National Elevator Manufacturing - CSI Construction Specification Institute Industry, Inc. CTI Cooling Tower Institute Smith Campus Center Abbreviations Used in the Documents 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01020-11 4W TZ terrazzo W/ with U U value<thermal conductivity> W/O without UA Underwriter's Laboratory approved WB wet bulb UC undercut WC[1] water closet .� UFD underfloor duct WC[2] water cooled UH unit heater WCO wall cleanout ULT ultimate WD wood UNF unfinished WDB wood base UON unless otherwise noted WDW window UPS uninterruptible power supply WGD with guard UR[1] urethane WH wall hung UR[2] urinal WHBP wheel bumper UV ultraviolet WHST wheel stop V[1] valve WI wrought iron V[2] volt WK week V[3] vanadium WL wind load VAC vacuum WM wire mesh VAR varies WO without VAT vinyl asbestos tile<obsolete> WOAK white oak VB [1] vapor barrier WP waterproof(ed/ing) VB[2] vinyl base WPT working point VCP vitreous clay pipe WR[1] water repellent VCT vinyl composition tile WR[2] wound rotor VENT ventilat(e/tion) WRGL wired glass VERT vertical WS[1] wood screw VEST vestibule WS [2] waterstop VF vinyl fabric WS [3] weatherstripping VG vertical grain WSCT wainscot ., VID video WSHR washer VIF verify in field WT[1] weight VIN vinyl WT[2] wiring trough VIT vitreous WTW wall to wall Vi vee joint(ed/ing) WU window unit VNR veneer W WF welded wire fabric VOL volume XE xenon VP [1] veneer plaster XFER transfer[1] VP[2] vent pipe XFMR transformer[I] VP[3] vapor proof XH extra heavy w. VRM vermiculite XMIT transmit(ter/tal)[1] VRN varnish XS extra strong VS versus XSCT cross section VT vinyl tile YD yard W[1] width YP yield point W[2] watt YR year W[3] west YS yield strength we W[4] tungsten ZN zinc PART 3- ABBREVIATIONS OF NAMES OF ORGANIZATIONS AND STANDARDS AA Aluminum Association ACHP Advisory Council on Historic am AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Preservation Association ACI American Concrete Institute AASHTO American Association of State Highway ACRI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration and Transportation Officials Institute ABMA American Boiler Manufacturers ADA Americans with Disabilities Act Association ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines Smith Campus Center Abbreviations Used in the Documents 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01020-10 . SDG siding SUB[2] submerge(d) SDL saddle SUP supply SDR sprinkler drain riser SUPT superintendent SEC second SUPV supervisor(y) SECT section SURF surface(2] SEL select SUSP suspended SEP separat(e/tion) SW switch SERV service SWBD switchboard SF square feet SWGR switchgear SFGL safety glass SWR sewer W SH shel(f/ving) SXB sex bolt SHGL, sheet glass SYM symmetr(ical/y/ically) SHO shor(e/ed/ing) SYN synthetic SHT sheet SYS system SHTG sheeting T tread SHTH sheathing T&G tongue and groove SI[1] square inches TAN tangent(ial) SI[2] silicon TB towel bar SIAM Siamese connection TC[1] terra cotta SIM similar TC[2] top connection SK sketch TECH technical SKI, skylight TEL telephone SLNT sealant TELCO telephone company SLT slate TEMP temperature 40 SLV sleeve TEN tenon(ed) SMP simple(x) TG top grille SN tin THD thread OF SNR sanitary napkin receptor THK thick(ness) SOL solid THLD threshold SP[1] soundproof THRU through SP[2] soil pipe TI titanium SP [3] specific TKBD tackboard SP [4] static pressure TKS tack strip SP [5] spare TLC translucent SPC spacer TLT toilet SPEC specif(y/ication) TMP temporary SPKL sprinkler TOL tolerance SPKR speaker TOS top of slab[2] SPL special TOT total SPR sprayed TPD [1] tempered SQ square TPD (2] toilet paper dispenser SRF surface [I] TPL triple(x) SS stainless steel [1] TPTN toilet partition SSK service sink TR[1] transom ST STL stainless steel[2] TR[2] top register ST[1] steel TRANS [1] transfer[2] ST[2] storm TRANS [2] transformer[2] ST[3] street TRANS [3] transmit(ter/tal) [2] STA station TRGR transfer grille STC sound transmission coefficient TS [1] thermostat STD standard TS [2] tamper switch go STG seating TSL top of slab[1] STL steel TST top of steel STM steam TUB tub(e/ing) STOR storage TV television ow - STR structur(e/al) TW top of wall SUB [1] substitute TYP typical Smith Campus Center Abbreviations Used in the Documents R's 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01020-9 so PP power panel REF[1] reference<point> am PPW partial penetration weld REF[2] refrigerator PR pair REFR[1] refrigerant PREFAB prefabricate(d)[2] REFR[2] refractor(y) PREM premium REG register PRFM preform(ed) REINF reinforce(d/ing/ment)[2] PROJ project(ed/ing) REM remove PRTN partition[2] REP repair PS polystyrene REPL replace PSC prestressed concrete REPRO reproduc(e/tion) PSF pounds per square foot REQ required[2] PSI pounds per square inch READ required[1] PSL plain sliced REQT requirement PSW plain sawn RES resilient PT[1] point RET return PT[2] pint REV revis(e/ed/ion) PTC post-tensioned concrete RFG roofing PTD[1] paper towel dispenser RFH roof hatch 14"" PTD [2] painted RFL reflect(ed/or/ive) PTDR paper towel dispenser/receptor RGD rigid PTN partition[I] RH[1] right hand PTR paper towel receptor RH[2] re-heat coil PTRT penta treated RH[3] relative humidity PU polyurethane RH[4] Rockwell hardness PUB public RHMS round head machine screw +w� PVC polyvinyl chloride RHWS round head wood screw PVG paving[1] RL rail(ing) PVMT pavement[1] RM room PVT private RMS root-mean-square PWR power RNF reinforce(d/ing/ment)[1] QD quick disconnect RO[1] rough opening RTL quarry the RO[2] reverse osmosis QSL quarter sliced ROAK red oak QSW quarter sawn ROW right of way QT quart RR railroad QTR quarter RSL rift sliced QUAD quadruple(x) RSW rift sawn QUAL quality RVS reverse(d) w. R[1] riser RVT rivet R[2] radius RWC rain water conductor R[3] right S [1] side R[4] R value<thermal resistivity> S [2] south +��* RA return air SAF safety RAD radiator SAN sanitary RB rubber base SAT satin RBL rubble<stone> SBLS sandblasted RBT[1] rabbet(ed) Sc[1] solid core RBT[2] rebate(d) SC[2] squirrel cage RBTL rubber tile SCH schedule RC remote control SCO sprinkler capped outlet RCP[1] reflected ceiling plan SCRN screen RCP[2] reinforced concrete pipe SCT structural clay tile RCV riser control valve<with TS> SCV sprinkler control valve RCVR receiver SD [1] smoke detector RD [1] round SD[2] soap dispenser RD [2] roof drain SD[3] storm drain REC receptacle SD [4] splitter damper Smith Campus Center Abbreviations Used in the Documents 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01020-8 .w am! MPX multiplex OV outlet velocity MR mop receptor OWJ open web joist MRB marble OZ ounce MRGB moisture resistant gypsum board P [1] page MRTS mortise(ed) P[2] pole MS [1] machine screw PA public address MS [2] military specification PAR parallel MT mount(ed/ing) PAV pav(e/ed) MTD mounted PAVG paving[2] MTFR metal furring PAVMT pavement[2] MTL[1] material[1] PB [1] panic bar MTL[2] metal[2] PB [2] pull box MTR[1] motor PB [3] lead MTR[2] miter(ed) PBD particle board MTZM muntz metal PC[1] precast MUL mullion PC[2] piece MULT multiple PC[3] plumbing contractor MWK millwork PC[4] pull chain N[1] north PCC precast concrete N[2] nitrogen PCF pounds per cubic foot am N[3] neutral PCPL portland cement plaster NAT natural PE porcelain enamel NE neon PED pedestal NEG negative PER perimeter NI nickel PERF perforat(e/ed/ion) NIC not in contract PERM permanent NI,[1] nail(able) PERP perpendicular NI,[2] night light circuit PF power factor NMT nonmetallic PFB prefabricate(d) [1] NO number PFD preferred NOM nominal PFN prefinish(ed) NR noise reduc(ing/tion) PG paging NRC noise reduction coefficient PH[1] phase NS non-slip PH[2] phone NTS not to scale PH[3] pre-heat coil NW normal weight PHOTO photograph(y/ic) O oxygen PK park(ing) OA [1] overall PL[1] plate(d) OA[2] outside air PL[2] property line OAI outside air intake PLAM plastic laminate OBS obscure PLAS plaster OC on center PLB plumb OCT octagon(al) PLBG plumbing OD outside diameter PLEN plenum OFF office PLF pounds per lineal foot OH[1] overhead PLG plug(ged) OH [2] opposite hand[2] PLGL plate glass OHMS oval head machine PLP plastic pipe OHWS oval head wood screw PLY plywood OL overload PND peened OP opaque PNEU pneumatic(ally) OPG opening[1] PNL panel OPH opposite hand[1] PNT paint OPNG opening[2] PO plugged outlet OPP opposite POL polish(ed) OPS opposite surface PORC porcelain ORIG origin(al) POS positive Smith Campus Center Abbreviations Used in the Documents 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01020-7 IPS iron pipe size LVL level ISJT isolation joint LVLR leveler J joist LVR[1] louver(ed) JB junction box LVR[2] lever JC janitor's closet LW light weight JCT junction LWC light weight concrete JF joint filler M[1] meter JT joint M[2] moment<bending> K kilo-<thousand> M[3] main KB kilobyte MA milliampere KCPL Keene's cement plaster MACH machine(ry) KD knocked down MAN manual KG kilogram MAS masonry KIT kitchen MATL material[2] KM kilometer MAX maximum KNR knurled MB [1] machine bolt KO knockout MB [2] megabyte KPL kickplate MBR[1] member ` KSI kips per square inch MBR[2] master bedroom KVA kilovolt-ampere MC[1] mechanical contractor KW kilowatt MC[2] medicine cabinet .■ KWH kilowatt hour MCC motor control center L[1] length MCM thousand circular mils L[2] left MECH mechanic(al) L[3] liter MED medium LAB laboratory MEM membrane LAD ladder MET metal[I] LAM laminate(d) MEZZ mezzanine �*�! LAT lateral MFD metal floor decking LAV lavatory MFG manufacturing LB pounds MFR manufacture(er/er's) w LBL label MH manhole LC light control MHG mahogany LF linear feet MI malleable iron LG long MIC microphone LGBT lag bolt MIL[1] thousandths of an inch LH left hand MIL[2] military LI lithium MIN[1] minimum LIC license MIN[2] minute LIN linear MIR mirror LL live load MISC miscellaneous LOA length overall MIX mixture LOG logarithm(ic) MK mark LP [1] low point MKBD marker board LP[2] low pressure ML milliliters LP [3] lighting panel MLC monolithic LP [4] light proof MLD molding LPR low pressure steam return MM millimeter LPS low pressure steam supply MO [1] masonry opening LPS [1] low pressure steam MO[2] molybdenum LPW lumens per watt MOD modular LS loudspeaker MOT motor LST limestone MOV movable LT[1] light MPL maple LT[2] low tension MPR medium pressure steam return LTG lighting MPS [1] medium pressure steam " LTL lintel MPS [2] medium pressure steam supply Smith Campus Center Abbreviations Used in the Documents 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01020-6 .� on FRC fire resistant coating HBD hardboard FRG forged HC [1] hollow core FRP fiber reinforced plastic HC[2] heating coil FRTD fire retardant HC[3] hung ceiling FS [1] full size HD [1] heavy duty FS [2] federal specification HD [2] head FSTP fire standpipe HDL handle FT foot HDPB high density particle board FTG[1] footing HDR header FTG[2] fitting HDW hardware FTR finned tube radia(tor/tion) HES high early strength<cement> FUR f irr(ed/ing) HEX hexagonal FUT future HG mercury -W FX fire extinguisher HGT height[2] FXC fire extinguisher cabinet HH hand hole FXT fixture[1] HJT head joint FZ fire zone HK hook G girder HM hollow metal. GA gauge HOR horizontal GAL gallon HOSP hospital sw GALV galvanized[2] HP[1] high point GAR garage HP[2] horsepower GB [1] gypsum board HP[3] high pressure GB [2] gigabyte HPR high pressure steam return GBBR grab bar HPS high pressure steam GC general contract(or) HPS [2] high pressure steam supply GCMT glazed CMT HR hour GCMU glazed concrete masonry units HSE house GD[1] grad(e/ing) HT[1] height[1] GD [2] ground HT[2] high tension GEN generator HTG heating ' GI galvanized iron HTP heat pump GL gla(ss/zed/zing) HTR heater GLBK glass block HVAC heating/ventilating/air conditioning GLFB glass fiber HVY heavy GLTL glazed<bisque>tile HW [1] heavy weight GP galvanized pipe HW[2] hot water GPBK gypsum block HWH hot water heater GPLT gypsum lath HWY highway GPM gallons per minute HXHD hex head GPPL gypsum plaster HYD hydraulic GPT gypsum tile IB internal boot GR[1] grade ICM intercom[1] GR[2] gravity ID inside diameter GRN granite ILK interlock GRT grout IMPG impregnate(d) GSKT gasket IN inch GSS galvanized sheet steel INC incremental GST glazed structural tile INCAN incandescent GTR gutter INCL include(d) GV galvanized[1] IND industr(y/ial) GWB gypsum wallboard INFO information GYP gypsum INS insulat(e/ed/ion) H[1] hard INT[1] interior H[2] hydrogen INT[2] intercom[2] H [3] hermetic INTM intermediate HB hose bibb INV invert Smith Campus Center Abbreviations Used in the Documents a"!' 100% Construction Documents: 0 l.l 1.12 01020-5 DSP dispenser FAB fabricate .■ DTA dovetail anchor FAS fasten(er) DTAS dovetail anchor slot FB face brick DTL detail FBD fiberboard DUP duplex FBO furnished by others DVTL dovetail(ed) FC[1] file cabinet DW dishwasher FC[2] foot-candle .. DWG drawing FC[3] flexible connection DWL dowel(ed) FCAP factory applied DWR drawer FCF factory finish DXS double extra strong FCO fire standpipe capped outlet DZ dozen FD floor drain E east FDR feeder EB expansion bolt FE iron EC[1] empty conduit FF finish face EC[2] electrical contractor FFE finished floor elevation EF each face FFL finished floor line EJT expansion joint FG fiberglass EL elevation FH fire hydrant ELEC electric(al) FHC fire hose cabinet ELEV elevator FHMS flathead machine screw „ EM emergency circuit FHS fire hose EMER emergency FHWS flathead wood screw EMT electrical metallic tubing FIBO fiimished and installed by others ENC enclos(e/ure) FIG figure ENGR engineer(ed/ing) FIN finish(ed) ENTR entrance FIXT fixture[2] EP[1] electrical panel FJT flush joint EP [2] explosion proof FL[1] floor[1] EQ equal FL[2] flash(ing) EQP equipment[1] FL[3] flush EQPT equipment[2] FL[4] foot-lambert w� EQUIP equipment[3] FL[5] flux ESC escalator FLCO floor cleanout ESCT escutcheon FLD fusible link damper EST estimat(e/or) FLG flashing EVAP evaporat(e/or/ion/ive) FLGL float glass EW each way FLR[I] fusible link register EWC electric water cooler FLR[2] floor[2] EXC excavat(e/ion) FLRG flooring EXG existing[1] FLUOR fluorescent EXH exhaust FLX flexible ** EXIST existing[4] FNC fence EXMP expanded metal plate FND foundation EXP [1] exposed FNNL finish nail EXP[2] expan(ded/sion) FOB face of building EXS extra strong FOC face of concrete EXST existing[2] FOM face of masonry EXT exter(nal/ior) FOS face of studs " EXTG existing[3] FOST face of steel EXTR extru(de/sion) FP fireproof(ed/ing) F[1] Fahrenheit FPL floor plate F [2] fluorine FPLC fireplace .. F[3] filter FPM feet per minute FA[1] fire alarm FPW full penetration weld FA [2] fresh air FR fram(e/ed/ing) FA[3] face area FRBK fire brick Smith Campus Center Abbreviations Used in the Documents 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 010204 .� go CIPC cast-in-place concrete CRLD cold rolled CIR circle CRS course[2] CIRC circu(lar/inference) CS cable support CK caulk(ing) CSK counters(ink/unk) CKBD chalk board CSMT casement CKT circuit CSS countersunk screw CL[1] centerline CST cast stone CL[2] closer CT ceramic tile CL[3] centiliters CTD coated CL[3] closet[2] CUT construction joint No CL[4] chlorine CTR counter CL[5] clock CU[1] cubic CL[6] closure [2] CU[2] copper CLG ceiling CUH cabinet unit heater CUT control joint CUST custom CLL contract limit line CVB curb valve in box CLOS closet[1] CW cold water an CLR clear(ance) CWK casework CLS closure[1] CWVO cold water valved outlet CM[1] centimeter CX connection[1] No CM[2] circular mil CYD cubic yard CMT ceramic mosaic tile CYP cypress CMU concrete masonry unit D penny CND conduit[1] DA double acting CNV convector DB [1] decibel CO[1] cleanout DB [2] dry bulb CO[2] capped outlet DBL double COD clean out door DC direct current CODP cleanout with deck plate DEC decimal COEF coefficient DEG degrees COL column DEL delete COM common DEM demoli(sh/tion) COMB combination DEP depress(ed/ion) COMM communication DET detail COMP compress(ed/ion/ible) DF drinking fountain COMPO composit(e/ion) DH double hung COMPR compressor DI deionized COMPT compartment DIA diameter CONC concrete DIAG diagonal COND [1] cond(enser/ensation) DIM dimension COND[2] condition DIV divi(der/sion) COND [3] conductor DL dead load CONN connection[2] DMBW dumbwaiter CONST construct(ion) DMR dimmer CONT continu(e/ous) DMT demountable CONTR contract(or) DN down CONV[1] conver(sion/ter) DO ditto<the same> CONV[2] convenience DP [1] dampproof(ing) CORG corrugate(d) DP [2] dew point CORR corridor DP [3] distribution panel CP [1] clothes pole DPR damper CP [2] communication panel DR door CPCT compact(ed/ion) DRB drain board CPT carpet DRN drain CR[1] chrom(e/ium) DRTL drain tile CR[2] ceiling register DS downspout CRG cross grain DSGN design Smith Campus Center Abbreviations Used in the Documents 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01020-3 AHD allen head BLO blower AHU air handling unit BLR boiler AL aluminum[1] BLST bluestone ALG align BLW bellow ALK alkyd BM[1] beam ALLOW allow(able/ance) BM[2] bench mark ALM alarm BO[1] by others ALT alternate BO[2] blank off ALUM aluminum[2] BOT bottom ALWS alum. louver and wire mesh screen BP back plaster(ed) ANC anchor(age/ed) BPL bearing plate ANOD anodized BR[1] bedroom AP[1] access panel BR[2] break AP [2] appliance panel BR[3] bottom register APT apartment BRG bearing APX approximate BRK brick ARCH architect(ural)[1] BRS brass ARCHT architect(ural)[2] BRZ bronze ASB asbestos BS both sides ASC above suspended ceiling BSC below suspended ceiling ASHL ashlar BSHD brushed w ASPH asphalt BSMT basement ASSN association BTU British thermal units ASST assist(ant) BTUH BTU/hour ASSY assembly Y BVL bevelled) ASYM asymmetr(ical/y/ically) BW both ways AT asphalt tile BWG Birmingham wire gauge AU gold C[1] course[1] .. AUD audi(o/tory/torium) C[2] Celsius AUTO automatic C[3] conduit[2] AVG average C[4] carbon w. AWG American wire gauge CAB cabinet[2] B&S [1] bell and spigot CAT catalog B&S[2] Brown and Sharp CB catch basin B/M bill of material CBD cement board BAL balanc(e/ed/ing) CBT cabinet[1] BBD bulletin board CC[1] cubic centimeter BBL barrel CC[2] cooling coil a� BD board CD[1] ceiling diffuser BDT bidet CD [2] cadmium BEL below CDR cedar BET between CEM cement BF[1] board feet CER ceramic BF[2] blind flange CFC chloro-fluoro-carbonate BFF below finished floor CFL counterflashing BFP backflow preventer CFM cubic feet per minute BG bottom grille CFT cubic foot BH Brinnell hardness CG[1] ceiling grille BHMS binder head machine screw CG[2] corner guard BI black iron<cold rolled steel chan.> CH[1] cabinet heater BIT bituminous CH[2] channel[2] BJT bed joint CHAM chamfer BL[1] building line CHAN channel[1] BL[2] blank CHLR chiller BLDG building CHT ceiling height BLK block Cl cast iron BLKG blocking CIP cast iron pipe Smith Campus Center Abbreviations Used in the Documents 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01020-2 .. No PX SECTION 01020 ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE DOCUMENTS PART 1 GENERAL . 1.1 NOTES ON USAGE AND DEFINITION OF ABBREVIATIONS A. The following abbreviations may be used in any of the contract documents, or may be superseded by specific abbreviations listed on any subset of the drawings. B. Abbreviations may be used with or without the periods or apostrophes which in conventionally printed text signify the presence of abbreviated words. C. Although most definitions are given in singular form, the same abbreviation may signify the plural forms as well. D. Suffixes in parentheses following a definition indicate alternative grammatical forms of the same abbreviation which may be used to signify the same word or phrase. When multiple �. alternative endings are supplied, they are separated by diagonal slashes (n within the parentheses; which alternative is intended should be clear from context. E. Numbers in [square brackets] following a definition indicate alternative abbreviations which may stand for the same meaning. F. Numbers in [square brackets] following an abbreviation indicate alternative meanings for the same abbreviation; which definition is intended should be clear from context. G. Words in<angle brackets>are given to indicate the context of a definition. H. Some abbreviations not listed here, but common in business or scientific usage may also be found in the contract documents; they shall be interpreted according to their usual meanings. I. Abbreviations of the names of trade, regulatory, or other organizational bodies will also be found in the documents; their definitions are given separately in Part 3 below. PART 2 ABBREVIATIONS OF CONSTRUCTION TERMS A[1] ampere ACTL acoustical tile A[2] area AD [1] area drain A[3] argon AD [2] access door A/C air conditioning[1] ADD addendum AB anchor bolt ADDL additional ABD automatic ball drip ADDN addition ABV above ADH adhesive AC[1] alternating current ADHD adhered AC [2] air cooled ADJ[1] adjust(able) AC[3] air conditioning ADJ[2] adjacent ACC access ADJT adjacent[1] ACFL access floor AFD automatic fire detection ACPL acoustical plaster AFF above finished floor ACR acrylic AFG above finished grade ACST acoustical AG silver ACT actual AGG aggregate ACT acoustic tile ARCS allen head cap screw Smith Campus Center Abbreviations Used in the Documents "' 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01020-1 oft .m 4. Promptly inspect products jointly with the Construction Manager, record shortages, damaged or defective items. 5. Handle products at the site, including uncrating and storage. am 6. Protect products from exposure to elements,and from damage. 7. Assemble, install, connect, adjust, and finish products, as stipulated in respective sections of Specifications. 8. Repair or replace items or material damaged by the Subcontractor, or installed .m improperly. 3.6 APPLICABLE CODES A. Massachusetts State Building Code (780 CMR), the Sixth Edition, which includes the New Energy Conservation Requirements; January 1, 2001. B. Americans with Disabilities Act(Public Law 101-336) 3.7 INFORMATION AVAILABLE CONCERNING THE PROJECT The following documents, exclusive of the Contract Documents are available from the Project Manager / Owner's Representative for reference and shall be reviewed for informational purposes by each bidder. Neither the Architect nor the Owner warrants the accuracy of the data contained in them. Each bidder is still required to visit the job .,. site. A. Geotechnical Study Report; Dr. Clarence Welti, P.E., P.C.; dated August 2, 1999. The evaluation includes an six borings at the location of the proposed Campus Center and one consolidation test performed on a clay sample. No services were performed to evaluate sub-surface conditions; provided by the Owner. B. Skylight Subcontract Request for Proposal including Project Manual and Drawings as per DOC Subcontract Exhibit G: The Project Manual includes Section 08600 Skylights (49 pages); last dated July 26, 2001; for Reference and Information. Additionally, RFP1 — Skylight Plan; dated August 17, 2001 is included in the drawing set for Reference and Information. C. Existing Electrical Substation and Duct Bank drawings; provided by the Owner. D. Drawing sets of neighboring buildings including,but not limited to; J.M.Greene,Haven House, Drew Hall, and 76 Elm; provided by the Owner. E. Site Survey - Existing Conditions; by Almer Huntley, Jr & Associates, Inc.; dated January 10, 2001; provided by the Owner; provided by the Owner. F. Site Survey- Existing Utilities; by Almer Huntley, Jr &Associates, Inc.; dated January 10, 2001; provided by the Owner; provided by the Owner. G. Site Survey by Fuss&O'neill; provided by the Owner. H. Site Logistics Plan; provided by the Construction Manager. am END OF SECTION 40 Smith Campus Center Summary of Work 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01010-6 M 3.4 CONTRUCTION MANAGER FURNISHED AND INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Construction Manager's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and deliver necessary shop drawings, product data and samples to the Subcontractors, when coordination with the work of the Contract is required. 2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to the site, in accordance with the construction schedule. 3. Deliver supplier's bill of materials to the Subcontractor. 4. Inspect deliveries. 5. Submit claims for transportation damage. 6. Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective or missing items. 7. Assemble, install, connect, adjust, and finish products, in accordance with construction schedule determined in coordination with the Subcontractor for this Contract 8. Arrange for manufacturer's warranties, bonds, service, and inspections, as required. 40 B. Subcontractor's Responsibilities: 1. In consultation with the Construction Manager, coordinate location and installation of roughing or infrastructure shown in the Contract Documents, timing of deliveries, installation sequence, onsite storage and protection of materials, and availability of workspace and utilities, with other Consultants or Subcontractors retained by the Owner to design, provide and install work not included in this Contract. 2. Review shop drawings, product data, and samples for items, which require coordination with work, which is part of this Contract. Submit notification of any discrepancies or problems with the use of the product. 3. Protect products, from the date of arrival onsite, until the project is accepted by the Owner, from exposure to elements, and from damage. 4. Provide workspace and requisite utilities, minimize interference between the Construction Manager's workforce and that of independent Subcontractors delivering or installing work not part of this Contract. 5. Repair or replace items damaged by the Subcontractor. 3.5 CONTRUCTION MANAGER FURNISHED PRODUCTS TO BE INSTALLED AS PART OF THIS CONTRACT A. Construction Manager's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and deliver necessary shop drawings, product data and samples to the Subcontractors. 2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to the site, in accordance with the construction schedule. 3. Deliver supplier's bill of materials to the Subcontractor. 4. Inspect deliveries jointly with the Subcontractor. 5. Submit claims for transportation damage. 6. Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective or missing items. 7. Arrange for manufacturer's warranties, bonds, service, and inspections, as required. no B. Subcontractor's Responsibilities: 1. Designate a delivery date for each product on the construction schedule. 2. Review shop drawings, product data, and samples for items. Submit notification of any discrepancies or problems with the use of the product. 3. Receive and unload product at site. Smith Campus Center Summary of Work 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01010-5 1. Labor, materials and equipment; , 2. Tools, construction equipment and machinery; and 3. All other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the work. B. Pay required sales, consumer and use taxes, except as specifically excluded by the Supplementary Conditions. 1. The Owner is a tax-exempt institution in the State of Massachusetts; Subcontractors/ Suppliers are responsible for all other applicable taxes: Federal, State, Local or otherwise. 2. Refer to Article 9 of the General Conditions for further information. C. Secure and pay for, as necessary for proper execution and completion of work, and as applicable at time of Contract Award. 1. Permits. 2. Government fees. 3. Licenses. D. Give required notices. E. Comply with codes, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders, and other legal requirements of public authorities,which bear on performance of the work. F. Promptly submit written notice to the Architect of any observed variance of Contract Documents from the Commonwealth of Massachusetts State Building Code. 3.2 WORK SEQUENCE A. Plan and perform work sequentially in stages planned to minimize disturbance to the ., normal daily operation of Smith College. Coordinate construction schedule and operations with Smith College. Keep the appropriate officials informed of project progress and scheduling,and respond to their concerns. B. Stages of Construction shall be established by the Construction Manager, in consultation with the Owner, and the Project Manager. Among others, these constraints must be observed: ,. 1. Refer to the Construction Manager's Site Logistics Plan. 2. Preparations or investigations necessary at the site in order to assure the timely provision of items with long lead-times. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S AND THEIR SUBCONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES A. Construction Manager and/or their Subcontractors shall limit their use of the premises for work, storage and construction operations,to allow for: 1. Hours of operation of Smith College as set by the Agreement; 2. The least inconvenience to Smith College Students, Faculty, and Staff on campus, w� which will remain open throughout the duration of the project; 3. Construction Manager and/or their subcontractors shall confine all operations within the material storage area and the work area for the stage of the project under construction 4. Work by others, including maintenance crews of Smith College. B. Coordinate use of the premises under direction of Smith College through the Project .� Manager. The Project is under jurisdiction of the City of Northampton; observe all regulations or permit conditions established or issued by the City of Northampton. Smith Campus Center Summary of Work 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 010104 M B. Furniture including the Front Counters and Coffee Bar Counter in the Servery 100DA, Booth Tables and Seating and Banquette Bench in the Dining Room 1001), the Information Desk in the Lobby 100L, a Bench along the North wall in the Main Lounge 101, Work/E-mail Counters at the Mailroom 000MRI, Motorized Shades and Curtains in the Multiple-Purpose Room 208, Manual Shades at the Conference Room 204, and Manual Curtains in the TV Lounge/Bar 001, Main Lounge 101, Quiet Lounge/Green No Room 207. However, sequencing of the work, any supportiblocking required within wall constructions to support the identified furniture, and their final power, plumbing, and communication connections are part of this contract. C. Security alarm or surveillance equipment, which is not shown in the Contract Documents. D. Telephone/data connections or intercom systems, which is not shown in the Contract Documents. E. Permanent signage/donor plaques,which is not shown in the Contract Documents. F. Audiovisual equipment, projectors, projection screens, and sound systems. However, electrical roughing, enclosures, floor and wall boxes are part of the Contract. G. Public Telephone Installation. Electrical roughing is part of the Contract. am The Construction Manager and/or their subcontractors shall be responsible to coordinate roughing or infrastructure shown on the Contract Documents, timing of installation sequences, onsite storage and protection of materials, and availability of P. workspace and utilities; with other consultants or contractors retained by the Owner to design, provide and install work outside the scope of the Contract. See below under Part 3. on 1.5 PROJECT MANAGER/OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. The Owner has identified Gary Hartwell from the Smith College Physical Plant Department to act as the Project Manager for this project. All routine communication No with the Owner and the Architect shall be made through the Project Manager. B. The Project Manager will, on the Owner's behalf: 1. Negotiate the terms of the Contract, and assist with approval of Sub-Contractors; 2. Maintain a full-time presence on the construction site; 3. Chair Progress Meetings; 4. Observe daily progress of the project; 5. Monitor Construction Manager's quality control on site; 6. Monitor the Construction Manager's scheduling; 7. Negotiate terms for modifications of the project scope, Contract Sum or Contract Ps Time, and initiate Change Orders; and 8. Review Requisitions for Payment, with the Architect. ®w PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S AND THEIR SUBCONTRACTOR'S DUTIES A. Except as specifically noted elsewhere,provide and pay for: Smith Campus Center Summary of Work so 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01010-3 E. Wherever the words "as shown" or "as indicated", "as scheduled" or words of like import are used, they mean "drawn", "noted", "scheduled", "detailed" or any other diagrammatic or written reference made on the Drawings or in the Specifications. F. "Submit"means submit to the Architect unless otherwise explicitly directed in context. G. "Furnish" or "supply" means to purchase, procure, acquire and deliver to the job site complete with all other related accessories and information necessary to permit all functions and operation as intended. H. "Install" means to erect, mount and connect to all other work, test, have inspected (if required)and have certified(if required). I. "Provide", or any grammatical variation thereof used with reference to physical components of the Work, means furnish and install into place, complete, and with all elements required for proper functioning of the system, in correct and optimal operating condition. Wherever "provide" is used with reference to labor or services, the Contractor shall supply,pay for,coordinate and schedule such work. 1.3 SCOPE OF THE PROJECT Work of this contract comprises the construction of the Smith Campus Center on Elm .. Street in Northampton, Massachusetts for the Smith College (the Owner) as shown on drawings and specified in the Project Manual. Major work items include, in order of anticipated commencement: A. Preparation for the project, including the recording of existing conditions, careful planning of logistics and operations, and coordination of those operations with Smith College Operations and Facilities. w„ B. Establishment of effective, yet esthetically acceptable, construction boundaries and temporary facilities within an area zoned as urban residence, and protection of existing features and plantings to be preserved. *■ C. Demolition of plantings, driveways, parking lots as shown in the drawings and specified in the Project Manual. D. Excavation for the building's lowest level, modification of existing utilities, and site including new driveways, and parking lots. E. Construction of a campus center as a three-story 55,000 square foot structure including new utility connections,and modification of existing utilities as required. F. Construction of new landscaped and hard surfaced plaza areas, grading, and planting over the entire project site including exterior lighting and site fixtures. 1.4 WORK BY OTHERS Work which will be executed during the work of this Contract, for which provision and installation are excluded from this Bid Process: A. Custom Aluminum and Glass Skylight System with Steel Support Truss and Cable Assembly and its associated anchors, fixings, attachments, reinforcements, parapets, copings and backpans. However, coordination, staging, and sequencing of the work with the Skylight Glazing Subcontractor will be part of the Contract. Painted Aluminum Closure Connections where curtain wall end walls interface with the skylight and the responsibility for the weather tightness of such a seal and/or flashing interface detail of the End Wall are also part of the Contract. Smith Campus Center Summary of Work 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01010-2 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK w PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 PROJECT DEFINITION,REQUIREMENTS AND INFORMATION This section outlines the requirements of the project, and provides information of a """' general nature: A. Definitions B. Scope of the project(see subpart 1.3 below) C. Work by others D. Project Manager/Owner's Representative E. Contractor's duties F. Work sequence G. Contractor's use of premises H. Applicable codes I. Information available concerning the project 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. "Owner", shall be as defined in the Agreement. B. "Architect", wherever referred to in the Contract Documents, and "Consultant" where that term is used within the Agreement or General Conditions, means Weiss/Manfredi ■. Architects, and includes partners and employees of that firm. Any authorization, direction or approval required to be from the Architect shall be valid by a previously and duly authorized representative, of that firm. Do not accept direction from the Architect's consultants without corroboration in writing by an authorized representative of Weiss/Manfredi Architects. C. Wherever the words "reviewed", "accepted","approved", "disapproved", "acceptable", "unacceptable", "satisfactory", "unsatisfactory", "directed", "required", "permitted", "ordered", "designated", "prescribed", "equal", "similar to", or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the required action, reference, or determination of sufficiency rests with the authorities having legal jurisdiction, the Owner, or the Architect(in order of precedence). D. Wherever materials are specified or indicated and the terms "or equal", "or accepted equal", "or equal as accepted", "equal to", "similar to", or other similar terms are used after the name or names of materials, products other than those identified in the Contract Documents by manufacturer's name and product number may be considered for acceptance only under the following conditions: that such products are produced by experienced, reputable and qualified manufacturers and such materials are truly equal or superior in quality; are equivalent in type, design, and performance characteristics, r. as indicated by approved test data, and fulfill the intent of the design of the specified materials. The acceptance of such submission of"or equal" materials shall be vested solely in the Architect, who may require submissions not otherwise listed in the Contract Documents, and whose judgments in this regard are final and binding. All "or equal" submissions are subject to such acceptance. Smith Campus Center Summary of Work � "" 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 01010-1 7 7 7 7 7 7 3 7 7 l 1 7 7 7 7 B v 8 C f B E 1 1 6 E 6 1 E f t pa Appendix B.7 Smith College Project Monthly Contract Accident Summary Contract: ! ► Contractor: Report Period: � fla#$ �j� �e�cto��yt3af a ti Hours Worked First Aid Cases OSHA Recordables Lost Time Cases Days Lost :omments/Explanations: (Any OSHA Recordables this month should be listed in this section with worker name, :mployer, date of accident,and nature of injury.Attach separate sheet as needed.) IMP Prepared by: Date: am Contractor Superintendent: Date: Mail or Fax to the OCIP Administrator by the 5th day of each month. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 7 (Appendix B.6) Smith College Project OCIP Notification / Contact List Summary Smith College Project Representative: The Contractor Representative: Contractor Project Manager: Contractor Safety Representative: Acordia Safety Auditor: Acordia OCIP Administrator: Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 6 "'" (Appendix B.5) - OSHA 200 Log — Summary of Occupational Injuries and Illnesses Each Contractor is required to maintain an OSHA 200 Form - The OSHA Log. The form can be obtained at a local OSHA office or from the Acordia Safety Auditor. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 5 (Appendix B.4) Contractor First Aid Log All First-Aid Treatment should be logged by the care provider. The form should be maintained on site for the duration of the Contract. Date Injured Worker Treatment Provider Signature Additional copies of this form should be made as necessary. Note, all injuries to non-workers should be reported to the Contractor Safety Representative. „! Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 4 .�. (Appendix B.3) Weekly Toolbox Meeting Attendance Roster Name (print) Signature Craft Signatures should be continued on back page and/or additional page(s). Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 3 a. (Appendix B.3) Weekly Toolbox Meeting Agenda Smith College Project Date Contract Contractor Topics Discussed: 1. Upcoming work, safety hazards, safety controls. 2. Safety related Incidents since last meeting. 3. Observed Safety non-compliance issues. 4. Actions Taken/Planned as a result of this meeting. Foreman's Signature Safety Representative's Signature. Copies of completed forms, with attendees signatures should be forwarded to the Safety Auditor Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 2 e« (Appendix B.2) Contractor Safety Survey Checklist A Contract Safety Checklist will be available from the Acordia Safety Auditor. 40 No 4• Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 1 �w (Appendix B.1) y S �#h ogle a Pao ec# uperv>tsors ccldent-lnvest�gafionepa ` ���ht . 9 1 :�. Contract: Date of Report: Contractor: Incident date/time: Weather Conditions: Incident Location (specific): Incident Type (Circle): Worker injury Non-worker injury Near miss incident Property damage Fire Explosion Other Describe Injury (Injury/Illness type, body parts affected): ow Injured Person/ Property Owner: Address/Phone: Description of Incident: (Brief factual description of incident. Use Separate sheet if necessary.): Incident Causes: (Immediate, Contributory, Root) Corrective Action(s): Witnesses (Name, Address, Phone): �. Police Report filed? Y / N Photos taken? Y / N OSHA or other Agency involved?: Foreman / Supervisor: Date: or Project Manager/ Superintendent: Date: The entire form should be completed and additional paper used as necessary. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual t specialized equipment, or jackhammers be utilized? Will explosives be stored on 00 site, or transported on the site? Will licensed blasters be used? What is the company and blasters' experience? Explain how the public will be warned and informed that blasting will be conducted in the area. When blasting operations are being conducted, consideration should be given to damage created by flyrock, vibration, or air blast. Precautions taken to lessen the possibility of damage due to these causes should be commented upon in description. Explain the extent to which these precautions are to be taken. If pre-construction surveys are being conducted, explain the detail that will be involved. Will an outside blasting consultant be used? po go in go Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 23 so FA safeguards to be taken. If any specialized equipment is to be installed, describe this equipment and the operations required putting it into place. AM Hazards involved with plumbing and mechanical type work come from various operations; such as, welding and cutting, heavy material handling, work in tight or am close quarters, and work with high pressures involved with testing and startup of plumbing or mechanical systems. Steam Fitting: Steam fitting operations have hazards similar to plumbing operations with the difference being that the piping will carry steam. Pressures and temperatures within . this piping can be quite high and, therefore, safeguards should be taken to protect workers from these hazards. When commenting upon steam fitting operations, describe the operations to be conducted and the safeguards to be used. , Painting: Painting operations can create a number of hazards and/or exposures on a job. Over X4 spray from painting operations should be controlled to present damage to adjacent exposures (cars, buildings, pedestrians) and adjacent work areas. Paint fumes should be properly exhausted and/or the workers should wear proper respiratory •w, protection when paints contain chemicals, which can be dangerous when inhaled. This is particularly important when working with lead based paints as on bridge painting operations. Paint flammability should be considered so that appropriate safeguards and fire prevention measures can be taken. Be sure to describe any on- site storage of any flammable paints. Describe work at heights and fall protection concerns and controls. , Drywall/Plastering: Explain how materials will be brought to the site (crane, material hoist, manually). Plaster may be pumped and sprayed on. Can floors be overloaded with construction materials? For powder actuated tools, have workers been trained and certified? (Documentation should be on site) Will employees use eye, hearing, and respiratory protection? Explain any unusual scaffolds required. Street & Highway: This may cover excavation, drainage operations, or bridgework as well as paving. Street and highway operations pose a variety of hazards and exposures. Areas, which should be emphasized, are traffic control procedures, incidental bridgework, underground utilities, and adjacent exposures. If traffic will be rerouted, explain signing, barricades, after hours warning lights, and maintenance of traffic control devices. Review equipment security procedures to be used to control theft and aw vandalism. Blasting: OSHA 1926.900-914 Give an estimate of the volume of rock, in cubic years, to be blasted. Also describe adjacent structures. Can alternate methods of rock removal such as ripping, use of Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 22 ,� Roofing: OSHA 1926.500 Describe the type of roofing system to be installed. Tell what precautions will be used to safeguard roofing operations. Hazards normally associated with roofing operations include falls from heights, burns from hot materials (hot asphalt), fumes from coal tar pitch, and fire potential from asphalt heating equipment. Describe safeguards. Workers should be properly clothed for work on roofs, particularly during summer months. Roofing operations can create injury and property damage from windblown or dropped debris, water leakage, or splatter from roofing materials. Describe the safeguards to be taken in these areas. Determine method for lifting materials to roof level. If membrane roof, determine types of solvent, cleaners, and cements to be used. Describe controls of hazards associated with these items. Electrical: OSHA 1926.400-405 Explain what electrical work will be taking place, who will be performing this work, and what safeguards will be taken. Tell if any "hot work" will be performed or if tie-ins will be made to existing systems. Comment upon any work, which may be conducted on or around electrical utilities. Describe the work to be performed and the safeguards to be taken. Will a utilities locator service be used (i.e., DIGSAFE) be notified? If temporary wiring is involved, another area to consider is the type of grounding program to be utilized on the project. Describe how if ground fault protection will be implemented on site. What type of inspection/testing of GFI's and installations will be conducted? What testing will be done of installations, and what records will be maintained? Describe energizing procedures of buildings and/or processes. What controls will be in place to protect workers from the release of hazardous energy? (Lockout/Tagout) HVAC (Heating,Ventilating, Air Conditioning): Work of this nature normally involved work with sheet metal duct sections which can be quite large at times. Fiberglass ductwork is also used. Many hazards are involved with this type of work but the most prevalent are cuts from sharp edges; material handling; problems due to heavy and bulky materials; and foreign body in eye accidents from metal shavings created by cutting, drilling, or screwing into duct sections. What testing will be done of installations and what records will be maintained? Will hoisting units to the roof involve special rigging considerations? Plumbing: Describe any plumbing or mechanical work which will be performed and the Smith College Project Construction Master Safety �r Program Guidelines Manual 21 stripping of forms. Explain how forming materials will be stored before and after use. Tell if any form releasing agents are being used and what precautions are ,. being taken to reduce splatter or ignition of combustible agents. Often, concrete forming operations have a history of poor housekeeping. This is caused by the presence of scrap lumber, nails, fasteners, excess concrete splatter, and other ., materials. How will these issues be controlled. Describe fire prevention/protection and fall protection issues. Concrete Placement: OSHA 1926.700 702 Describe how the concrete will be placed (bucket, pump, conveyor, buggy). Tell of precautions to be used to reduce concrete splatter. This is particularly important on .�► high rise construction. Describe safeguards to be taken to protect workers who are placing concrete. For columns, piers, and building perimeters, how will fall exposure be controlled? Explain temporary heating methods and controls for cold «. weather pouring operations. Carpentry: Explain the type of carpentry work to be performed. Tell of any unusual carpentry operations to be conducted, and operations which may present a serious hazard to workers; (e.g., working at heights). Explain proposed safeguards to protect workers from these hazards. Major hazards associated with carpentry operations include housekeeping machinery, and material handling. Areas where work is being performed and carpentry shop areas should be kept clear of scrap lumber, sawdust, and debris. Debris should be removed on a scheduled basis. Masonry: Tell type of masonry to be used (HCB, brick). Consider access of scaffolds, hoists, and material handling equipment at working levels above ground level. Describe overhead protection for areas below where work is being performed. Tell how free standing masonry walls will be braced against winds. �* Hazards normally associated with masonry operations are falling debris and collapse of unbraced walls during construction. Structural Steel: OSHA 1926.750-752, 1926.550 Outline work to be done, and describe hoisting equipment to be used and method to bring steel to site. Will there be any offsite storage of materials? Describe how workers will be protected from falls during steel erection. Tell what protective measures will be taken to protect surrounding exposures from hazards associated with steel erection; (e.g., planking to protect surrounding buildings/persons from accidentally dropped members/tools/materials). What precautions will be taken to contain sparks and slag from welding operations. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 20 PR PR Contractor/Subcontractor knows what they are drilling into. When shoring is used, will movement(horizontal, vertical, or rotational) of the shoring system be monitored. This is particularly important when there are adjacent exposures that could be affected by soil movement. If ground water may build up behind shoring, has the shoring been designed for this load? Pile Driving: OSHA 1926.603 Describe the type of piles and either the number of piles or the linear feet of piles to be driven. Describe the method in which they will be driven. How will piles be brought to the site? Will there be a designated lay-down area? State the depth to which they will be driven. What is the distance to nearby structures? Describe measures to be used to control impact of vibration on surrounding exposures and effect of noise on workers. Are pre-construction surveys required? Underpinning: Explain the type of structure to be supported and the method by which it is supported normally. Explain the type of underpinning to be used and its method of installation. Describe any problems anticipated. Who designed the underpinning and what is their experience? Are confined space issues expected? Grading: Grading is normally considered to be the light (relatively) movement of soil around a given site. Cuts and fills may only be a couple of feet in depth. For greater depths, the work would be classified as excavation. Hauling of any quantity of soil or rock on to or away from the site would also make the work fall into the excavation category. A lawn or parking area might be graded while a basement would be excavated. Will structures and/or adjacent vehicles be at risk of damage? How will the public be kept from work areas during operations? Caissons: OSHA 1926.801 Will these be vertical shafts that are hand dug or drilled, or will these be of the pneumatic type used on large bridge foundations? To what depth will the caisson go? Any potential for explosive or toxic gases? Will personnel or inspectors have to go into the caissons? If shaft caissons have to be belled out at the bottoms, will it be done mechanically or by hand? Explain how workers will be protected from soil collapse. Describe air monitoring plans and planned rescue procedures. Also describe perimeter fall protection. If the caissons involve compressed air, give details. Concrete Form Work: OSHA 1926.700-702 Describe the type of forming system to be used; such as, built in place, flying forms, pre-engineered panel forms, slip forms, or pan forms. Determine the schedule for forming, placement of reinforcing steel, concrete pouring, and Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 19 Work From Heights: OSHA 1926.500 Describe work and areas from which workers will be exposed to fall hazards. Identify methods of fall protection including planned controlled access zones and Fall Protection Plans. Any work requiring documented Fall Protection Plans (OSHA 1926.502) should not commence without submittal of the Plan to Safety Auditor for review. Also discuss specific training as required in OSHA 1926.503. Body belts will not be an acceptable means of fall protection on the Smith College Project. Scaffolding: OSHA 1926.450 Describe scaffolding to be used on the project. Who will erect/dismantle and what type of fall protection will be used. Is the scaffolding owned by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or rented/leased? Who will inspect and maintain the scaffolding at what intervals? Who will be allowed to use the scaffolding? Excavation: OSHA 1926.650-653 Explain the excavation work involved, including depth of excavation and type of material to be excavated. Will a utilities locator service be used (ie, DIGSAFE) be .•� notified? Explain how the material will be excavated. Will material be hauled off site or brought in from off site? If de-watering is to be performed, explain method or system to be used and planned safeguards. . Will support of excavation be specially designed? By whom? Who will maintain responsibility of the competent person? Will excavations be covered during off- hours. What are the expected fall hazards associated with the excavations? Will areas have perimeter protection? Do you expect environmental hazards such as hazardous materials and/or air quality issues? How will these be addressed? + Another item to consider during excavation is the surrounding exposures. Buildings, structures and utilities may all be subject to vibration from excavation operations or to soil subsidence due to de-watering or soil slope failure. If the possibility of these hazards exists, pre-construction surveys should be considered. If shoring or de-watering will be involved, a program for monitoring movement of the shoring system of surrounding buildings should be implemented. Another area to consider is silt and mud runoff from the project. Identify measures taken (silt settling ponds, woven plastic fabric fences, etc.) used to contain silt runoff. Excavation Shoring: OSHA 1926.650-653 Describe the method of shoring to be utilized. Who designed it? State whether there will be any wales, cross bracing, rakers, or tie backs. (A simple sketch may be helpful.) If tie backs are used, describe the material into which they are being anchored. One caution regarding tie backs, check to be sure the Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 18 00 C. Specific Operations Planning For each of the following operations, identify which will be self-performed by the Contractor, and which will be subcontracted. In addition describe, the methods, anticipated safety and health concerns (hazards), and controls to be used when performing the operations. In areas where specific information is unknown, describe when the expected information will become available and plans to be followed in forwarding the information to the Safety Auditor prior to initiation of the involved phase(s). For topics listed below that are not applicable to the Contract,the topic should be listed with an N/A designation. To assist in determining related OSHA requirements, some general section reference numbers have been given under listed operations. ANSI, state, local, and manufacturers (equipment, materials) should also be consulted for appropriate hazard control methods also. Land Clearing: OSHA 1926.604 Involves the removal of trees and brush. Grubbing also includes removal of stumps. Describe the size of the area to be cleared, site conditions, and methods which will be used to clear and dispose of materials. No open fires will be permitted without specific approval from the local Fire Department, other agencies having jurisdiction, and the Safety Auditor . How will materials be removed from the site and how often? Wrecking/Demolition: OSHA 1926.850-860 Describe any wrecking/demolition operations which may be performed. Describe the type of demolition to be done (salvage, use of heavy equipment, wrecking ball or blasting). Remember that wrecking/demolition is a very hazardous operation. Hazards such as collapse, falling objects, poor housekeeping, sharp objects, and possible use of explosives can all exist at one time. Demolition should be well planned before operations begin. This planning should include procedures for searching the structure prior to beginning demolition to clear the area of vagrants, children, or other unauthorized personnel. One particular area of concern is the demolition of pre-stressed or post-tensioned concrete structures. When demolishing structures of this type, special attention should be given to tendons or steel stands under stress. Remember that wrecking/demolition operations not only occur during the demolition of an entire structure but also during renovation, remodeling, and addition work. The method for transporting rubble from the site should be described. Where is the debris disposed of? Will asbestos lead abatement be involved? Describe fire prevention/protection plans. Has the wrecking plan been reviewed by a qualified person, and the necessary regulatory officials, if required, to evaluate the collapse exposure. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 17 M an Appendix A on Contract Safety Planning Guide In developing a site specific construction safety and health plan, it is important that a systematic approach be taken to identify and evaluate potential hazards with each phase of the construction process. With potential hazards identified, plans can be developed to control expected hazards, and sometimes eliminate them altogether. As described in Section 1.2.2 of the Guidelines, Contractors are required to identify operations to be performed under the Contract. The following outline shall be used as a template by the Contractor in organizing the site-specific description of Contract operations, expected hazards, and planned controls on the Smith College Project. Each phase of the work should be described in detail with special attention given to expected hazards and controls. All applicable topics should be discussed in brief narrative form. Non-applicable topics should be listed and noted with "N/A". *�* A. General Contract Information I. Give contract price, start date, completion date, and overall scope of the Contract, and the expected level of workforce that is anticipated. Attach a job progress schedule illustrating a rough sequence of the primary phases and operations of the contract II. Describe any significant known structural or unusual hazards as well as any pre-construction surveys that have been or will be conducted . Is groundwater expected to be a concern? III. What site security precautions will be taken for the term of the contract. Will the site have perimeter fencing? How will the public be separated from the work area? How will equipment and materials be protected from use by trespassers? Will alarms/guards be used? Include any on-shift and off-shift activity. Are multiple work shifts anticipated? Be sure to discuss weekend night WA security and protection. B. Pre-Construction Surveys Pre-construction surveys are a method used to document the conditions of adjacent facilities prior to construction so that, in the event of a liability claim for damaged facilities, it will be possible to determine if damage has occurred and the extent of it. Typical construction operations that may lead to losses include blasting, pile- driving, excavating, de-watering adjacent to structures, operation of heavy equipment, and underpinning. Will any pre-construction surveys be conducted for .� this contract? Describe. on Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 16 10 w 7.5 Doctor/Lost Time Cases When a Contractor or Subcontractor employee is referred to a physician or medical facility for treatment of an occupational injury/illness, the following forms should be completed and copies forwarded to the OCIP Coordinator : Worker's Compensation Form (First Report of Injury) - This form should be forwarded immediately to the OCIP Administrator and must be completely filled out. Instructions for completing necessary insurance forms will be provided by the OCIP Coordinator . Supervisor's Incident Investigation Report - This form shall be completed by the injured/ill employee's Supervisor immediately upon report of an occupational injury/illness that requires treatment by a physician. Worker's Description of Incident- This should be completed by the worker in his/her handwriting, describing the circumstances and events leading to and including the cause of, the injury or illness. This document must be signed and dated by the employee. 7.6 OSHA 200 Log- Summary of Occupational Injuries and Illnesses OSHA requires that each employer maintain records of occupational injuries and illnesses. This log and summary shall be maintained by each Contractor and Subcontractor at their work sites and shall be provided to the Safety Auditor upon request. In addition, OSHA requires that these forms be posted, in an area available to employees, for the month of February each year. 7.7 Monthly Contract Accident Summary The Contractor shall complete and submit the Smith College Monthly Contract W, Accident Summary as shown in Appendix B.7. Data on the report should include information for the Contractor and all Subcontractors. The report shall be submitted to the Safety Auditor no later than 5 days after the month summarized. For months with no accidents, a completed report with zeros in the appropriate columns is required. Assistance in completing this report is available from the Safety Auditor. 7.8 Inspections by Regulatory Agencies In addition to audits conducted by the Safety Auditor and Insurance Representatives, Contractor activities are subject to periodic inspection by OSHA and other safety and health regulatory agencies. Upon notification of an on- site inspection, the inspector should be directed to the Safety Representative to discuss to the purpose and objectives of the visit. The Safety Representative should immediately notify the Owner, Construction Manager, and the Safety Auditor to determine if their presence is necessary. The Safety Representative shall document Ir all inspection activities from inception to completion and will take photos where appropriate. The Contractor will forward, to the Safety Auditor copies of any and all inspection reports and/or citations by regulatory agencies. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 15 W documentation of all adverse safety and health incidents resulting from activities that occur on the work site. 7.2 Notification The following incidents require notification to the Owner and the Safety Auditor by the most rapid means available: • Fatalities • OSHA Recordable Injuries (Includes all lost time injuries) • General public injuries requiring medical attention • Property Damage over$1000 • All fires and explosions 7.3 Investigation Investigation of workplace incidents, including injury, illness,property damage, and significant near-misses, is a key to improving safety and health programs. Investigation is different from reporting in that it is an effort to determine incident causes through analysis of conditions, witness accounts, and other facts surrounding specific happenings. Investigation of the following shall be conducted to determine immediate, contributing, and root causes. The Plan should specify a system for preventing recurrence of investigated incidents. All investigations must be conducted by appropriate supervisory personnel and must be documented on the Contractor's '"' Incident Investigation Report (Appendix B.1) or similar document(approved by Safety Auditor). • All incidents other than non-OSHA recordable injuries/illnesses and property damage under$1000 shall be investigated thoroughly to determine the circumstances, nature, and extent of injuries, illnesses, or property damage. • All incidents involving medical attention to the general public shall also be thoroughly investigated to determine the circumstances, nature, and extent of injuries, illnesses, or property damage. • All other potentially serious incidents, including near misses, shall be investigated to identify their circumstances, causes, and corrective actions. 7.4 Documentation and Reporting All incidents requiring investigation will require a preliminary written report to the Safety Auditor by the end of the following work day and a final report within 5 working days. Documentation of all other incidents, including first-aid, will be maintained on file at the Contractor's office and be available for review by the Safety Auditor at any time. All completed "First Report of Injury" forms will be sent to the OCIP Coordinator by the end of the following day of notification of M injury. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 14 „+, P0 personnel should be encouraged to be current first aid and CPR card holders. 6.3 Reporting All on-site workers, whether employed by the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors, shall be instructed to report all injuries, no matter how minor, to their supervisor. The supervisor shall then notify the Safety Representative. Treatment shall be rendered by qualified persons and the incident recorded on the Contractor's First Aid Log. A monthly summary of First Aid incidents is required as described in section 7.7 of the Guidelines. 6.4 Transportation The Contractor shall provide transportation for employees needing medical treatment for work-related injury or illness on their initial visit to the doctor/medical facility. The Plan shall indicate what doctor or medical facility the Contractor plans to utilize. For emergency transportation, the local ambulance service should be used for the emergency transportation of injured or ill employees. The Plan shall designate who will be responsible for notifying the ambulance and providing information describing the exact location of the injured employee. The Plan shall also provide a system for assigning responsibility for emergency notification in the absence of designated persons. 6.5 Local Emergency Telephone Numbers The Plan shall identify the following telephone numbers which shall be conspicuously posted at the work site and provided in the Contractor's site telephone book. In addition active phone service or equal communication system must be in place at all times during the operations. • Ambulance t • Fire Department • Police • Hospitals (Emergency Room) 00 • Poison Control Center • Pollution, Toxic Chemical and Oil Spill Response • Owner • Safety Auditor The list shall be reviewed at least quarterly and updated as necessary. 7. Incident Investigation, Reporting, and Record Keeping 7.1 Purpose and Scope The Plan shall establish procedures for notification, investigation, report, and Smith College Project Construction Master Safety W Program Guidelines Manual 13 hazard warnings. • A training program regarding hazards of substances that are used in the workplace and the protective measures that must be taken by the employee or any other persons potentially exposed to the hazardous substances. 5.4 Hazard Communication Training The Contractor shall ensure that each employee prior to working with, or being •• potentially exposed to, hazardous substances receives initial training on the HCP and the safe use of these hazardous substances. Additional training must be provided to employees whenever new substances are introduced to the workplace. �* In addition, the training program must include the following: • Methods that can be used to detect the presence or release of a hazardous substance in the work area. These methods include: monitoring, automatic alarms, visual appearance or odor of hazardous substances when being released, etc. • The physical and health hazards of the substances in the work area. • Examples of protective measures, including specific procedures the Contractor has implemented to protect employees from exposure to hazardous substances (e.g., appropriate work practices, emergency procedures, and personal protective equipment) to be used. • The details of the HCP developed by the employer shall include an explanation of the labeling system and how to use the MSDS for exposure prevention and emergency response. 5.5 Record Keeping Permanent records shall be maintained by the Contractor, describing all HCP training sessions. Persons conducting the training shall verify attendance by circulating an attendance sheet. 6. First Aid and Medical Services + 6.1 Purpose and Scope The Plan shall include written procedures for providing first aid treatment, medical services, and transportation of workers who incur occupational injuries or illnesses at the work sites. 6.2 Staffing The Plan shall describe how the Contractor will ensure that first-aid is readily available to all Contractor and Subcontractor employees during all work shifts. Names and qualifications of designated First-Aid/CPR responders shall be included in the Plan and posted on site to facilitate quick response. All supervisory Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 12 ,,,� • Safe Work Areas • Safe Work Practices • Emergency Response • Accident Investigation • Safety Inspection • Safety Training • Fire Prevention and Protection • Enforcement • Equipment Safety • Safety Equipment Use and Maintenance 4.2.6 Documentation Retention All safety meeting and training shall be documented with records maintained by the Contractor and retained on-site for the duration of the Contract. 5. Hazard Communication 5.1 Purpose and Scope In order to protect workers who may use or be exposed to hazardous substances, the Plan shall include a written Hazard Communication Program. 5.2 Responsibilities The Contractor shall ensure that each worker is informed of the Hazard Communication Program including the required list of hazardous substances, and the associated Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). In addition, the Contractor shall ensure that hazardous substances and/or their containers in the workplace are marked with the identity of their contents. The means of identification must provide warnings appropriate for employee protection. The Contractor shall develop, implement, and maintain a system that will ensure that employees of any other contractors, visitors or vendors who are exposed to its hazardous substances are informed of the hazards of those substances. 5.3 Hazard Communication Program ("HCP") The Contractor shall ensure that a written HCP is developed and that it contains the following elements: • The name of the program coordinator. • A formal written system that ensures that MSDSs are obtained and made readily accessible to all employees, including lower tier Subcontractor personnel, on each shift. In the event of an emergency, MSDSs shall be made available on an immediate basis. • A labeling program that ensures that containers of hazardous substances in the workplace are properly labeled with the name of the substance and any applicable Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 11 on prevention of unsafe acts and conditions. All plans shall be site specific. 4.2 Training Elements The Plan shall include, but not be limited to, the following elements: 4.2.1 Contract Safety Orientation Prior to entering the work area for the first time, each on-site employee of the Contractor and any Subcontractor shall receive a safety and health orientation, .■ which shall provide basic information regarding the Plan, OSHA Standards, emergency procedures, and applicable Contract rules and procedures. Additional safety and health instructions shall be required for the performance of hazardous or unfamiliar tasks. Documentation of this and all training shall be kept on site for the duration of the Contract. 4.2.2 Weekly Tool Box Safety Meetings The Contractor is required to ensure each on-site worker, whether employed by the ** Contractor or any of its Subcontractors, attends a weekly "Tool Box Safety Meeting". Subject material will be furnished by the Contractor and shall follow the "Weekly Toolbox Meeting Agenda" and be documented. A member of the Contractor's supervisory staff, above the level of the foreman, should attend each Tool Box Safety Meeting and attendance documentation shall be recorded on copies of the "Weekly Toolbox Meeting Agenda" form. Copies of completed forms should be sent to the Safety Auditor each week. 4.2.3 Contractor Safety Meetings •• Contractor Safety Meetings shall be conducted at least weekly and may be in conjunction with other meetings. The Contractor and Subcontractor supervisory personnel and the Safety Representative will be required to attend. A written agenda shall be provided and minutes kept on actions taken. An attendance sheet should be signed by those present and retained by the Contractor. 4.2.4 Hazard Communication Training Hazard Communication Training shall be conducted prior to employees being subjected to an exposure to, or use of, a known hazardous substance. Specific requirements of this training are described in section 5.4 of these Guidelines. 4.2.5 Safety Orientation for Supervisors Contractor shall design and implement a program to orient supervisors on their roles in the safety program. This orientation, which shall be documented, will outline his/her duties and responsibilities for safety and health in daily work activities. At a minimum, this orientation will address their responsibilities and procedures for the following: • Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines • Contractor Safety and Health Plan Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 10 ,,,n RIM soils tracking, and other debris associated with the Construction operations. The Plan should also describe methods of control for the identified hazards, including vehicle wheel-washes, wet-down methods, debris nets, covered debris containers, and rodent control methods. P 3. Emergency Procedures 3.1 Purpose and Scope The Plan shall include emergency procedures for the protection of all persons on site (including the general public, vendors, visitors, and employees of other contractors), equipment, structures, and materials on the Project. 3.2 Site Specific Procedures Site- specific emergency procedures shall be developed and implemented for, but not limited to, the following: • Fire • General evacuation of the worksite. • Confined space rescue. • Personal injury. • Workplace violence. • Explosion. 1-W • Bomb threats. • Release of hazardous substances. • Severe weather. • Public demonstrations. • Interruption of public utilities. eP The Plan should discuss what procedures are in place for emergency situations and how the procedures are continually communicated to workers. The Plan should discuss methods of communication and documentation of emergency events as well Im as responsibility chains of command. The Plan should identify responsible personnel by name and title where possible. ON All emergency phone numbers should be conspicuously posted at the work site and employees should be aware in their responsibilities. Should a serious accident or emergency occur, the Contractor shall contact the Owner immediately upon securing the required emergency assistance. If an emergency requires the presence of an ambulance, the Fire Department or Police, the Contractor shall secure the appropriate service and then notify the Owner, and the Safety Auditor . 4. Safety and Health Training 4.1 Purpose and Scope The Plan shall establish and implement programs for the education and training of employees, Subcontractors, visitors, and vendors in the recognition, avoidance, and Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 9 no Respiratory Protection- when respirators are necessary, the Contractor shall have a respiratory program that complies with OSHA 1926.103 (Revised 1998). Employees shall be fitted for and instructed in the proper use of respirators that will afford them the maximum protection for the environmental hazard in which they are working. Copies of this program shall be given to the Safety Auditor. The program shall contain the reason for and the conditions under which such equipment shall be worn and discuss methods of enforcement and disciplinary actions for non-compliant workers. 2.8 Special Hazardous Work Procedures * ! The Plan shall include effective controls to prevent workplace injury, illness, and property damage in special hazardous work environments. Specific procedures shall address supervisory control over hazard recognition, isolation, testing, evacuation, and monitoring. Detailed emergency procedures shall identify available emergency equipment and personnel responsible for rescue operations. The Plan shall also provide for the development and implementation of hazardous work permit procedures. These special permits shall be issued by the Contractor and retained at the project site for the duration of the contract. They will include written Job Hazard Analysis (JHA) to be completed and approved prior to the issuance of permits. The Safety Auditor may request a written Job Hazard Analysis, any time during the Contract, for operations expected to, or shown to involve hazardous operations. Examples of Special Hazardous work environments include, but are not limited to: • Confined Spaces • Maintenance of Energized Equipment(Lockout/Tagout) • Critical Crane/Hoist Lifts • Burning, Welding, Grinding • Excavations • Work from Heights • Hazardous Materials Handling • Building Demolition The Safety Auditor is available for assistance in the development of Special Hazardous Work Procedures during the course of the contract. 2.9 University Community Public Protection The Plan should specifically identify hazards to be anticipated by visitors, vendors, trespassers, and the general public and describe actions planned to control these hazards. 2.10 Dust/ Debris Control Plan The Plan should outline hazards/concerns to be expected through creation of dust, Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual Project or to use, possess, conceal, transport, promote or sell any of the above substances will be grounds for disciplinary action, up to and including termination from employment on said project. In support of this policy, the Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to maintain an effective employee substance abuse program. The Contractor is also responsible for reporting to the Owner, via the Safety Auditor, any incidents in violation of the substance abuse program and the disposition of the violation. The Contractor shall submit to periodic audits by the Owner or its Designee of the Contractor's substance abuse program. 2.5 Weapons and Controlled Items The Owner prohibits the use, possession, concealment, transportation, promotion or sale of the following controlled items at the jobsite: • Firearms, weapons, and ammunition-except when authorized for security reasons. • Unauthorized explosives including fireworks. • Stolen property or contraband. 2.6 Disciplinary Sanctions The Plan shall include procedures for enforcement of safety rules. The Safety Representative shall continually monitor the construction safety performance of the Contractor and all Subcontractors. Should the Contractor or a Subcontractor continually be in non-compliance with Safety and Health requirements of their Plan, work operations should be ordered to be stopped by the Safety Representative (at the Contractor's expense), until all concerns are abated. Persistent non-compliance may result in termination of the Contract. ! ► 2.7 Personal Protective Equipment The Plan shall include a written personal protective equipment program. The program shall address, but is not limited to the following: Hard Hats - mandatory at all work sites, at all times. Hearing Protection- mandatory in all operations creating noise above 85 DBA; Eye Protection- mandatory in all situations where potential eye injury exists. Specifically required when welding/burning/cutting, performing tasks near activity producing flying debris (including dusts) and when handling chemicals; *' Safety Harnesses - shall meet ANSI Standards and be worn by employees who are exposed to any fall exposure six feet(6) or more in height that cannot be properly guarded with rails or other means, body belts will not be an acceptable method of !! fall protection; Footwear - shall be sturdy and made of leather; Shirts - only those with sleeves are allowed, no tank tops or mesh shirts; Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 7 9" NOTE: No requested advice from the representatives of the OCIP Administrator, the Safety Auditor, Project Architects, Engineers, the Owner, or Insurance Carrier shall in any way relieve, alter, change or amend any of the Contractor's expressed, implied or inherent legal and/or contractual obligations. Furthermore, the authority vested in the Owner and its designated representatives, including the OCIP Administrator and the Safety Auditor, to act on, or notify the Contractor with respect to,safety matters, shall not in any way reduce the Contractor's responsibility for safety and accident prevention 2. Hazard Control 2.1 Purpose and Scope The Contractor shall establish controls for the recognition and elimination of unsafe practices by employees, Subcontractors, visitors, and vendors, and shall maintain safe physical conditions for all persons at the work site. 2.2 Supervisory Control Continued safety monitoring of each Contract work area will be accomplished by the Contractor's supervisors and Safety Representative. The Contractor's supervisors shall conduct daily surveys of operations to detect any potential sources of injury or property damage. A written record of the daily surveys shall be kept and shall include corrective actions for corrected deficiencies. Systems shall be in place for developing, implementing, and tracking corrective actions. 2.3 Employee Involvement in Hazard Identification A system shall be in place by which Contractor's employees are able to notify their supervisors and the Safety Representative immediately of the existence of any hazards at the worksite. This system shall include provisions for timely corrective actions and for providing feedback to employees. 2.4 Substance Abuse Policy .. A policy shall be in place for the establishment and maintenance of a safe and efficient work environment for all personnel, free from the effects of alcohol, illegal drugs, and other controlled substances. +•� The Contractor's policy shall specifically prohibit the use, possession, concealment, transportation, promotion, or sale of any of the following: • Alcoholic beverages. • Marijuana and other illegal drugs, look-alikes and designer drugs. • Drug paraphernalia. • Controlled substances such as medications when usage is abused or when the substance is possessed without proper prescription labeling. To be under the influence of any of the above substances while working on the Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 6 on = duties, the Owner reserves the right to request additional site safety management assistance, including the appointment of another full-time, site dedicated, qualified safety professional. The Safety Representative's duties shall include, but are not limited to: • Conducting and documenting at least daily, safety and health inspections of the Contractor's site. • Ensuring Subcontractor compliance to all applicable safety and health. requirements of the Guidelines and the Plan. • Verifying and documenting safety and health orientations for employees, visitors, and vendors. • Monitoring employee compliance with applicable safety and health requirements. • Coordinating workplace injury, illness,and property damage reports. • Training and advising personnel on safety and health regulations, inspections, and activities. • Providing information to employees regarding emergency response duties and procedures. • Attending and participating in project safety and toolbox meetings. • Verifying and documenting safety and health meetings. • Maintaining the Contractor's Safety Bulletin Board. • Posting safety notices, bulletins, and emergency telephone numbers in designated areas. • Interpreting safety and health requirements for the Contractor. 1.2.5 Safety Auditor The Safety Auditor, hired by the OCIP Administrator to assist the Owner in assuring that the Contractor implements its safety program, will monitor compliance with applicable safety and health regulations including Federal, State, and local standards and the Plan. The Safety Auditor's duties shall include: • Reviewing the submitted Plan for compliance to the Guidelines. •Reporting unsafe working conditions, or safety hazard exposures, when observed, to the Safety Representative or Contractor management. • When deemed necessary, notifying the Contractor of non-compliance with requirements of the Plan. Notification shall be in writing with copies to the Owner. • Reviewing incident reporting and claim information submitted by the Safety Representatives for completeness. • Evaluating accident frequency and severity data, and recommend appropriate corrective action as necessary. • Providing quarterly reports to the Owner, containing an evaluation of the status of the program and of accident frequency and severity. • Assisting the Contractor with investigation of safety related incidents. • Participating and assisting in Contractor's training efforts, including occasional safety meetings and "Tool Box" meetings. • Providing assistance with OSHA Construction Safety Requirement interpretations. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 5 no w Subcontractors, vendors, and visitors. In this regard, supervisors have the highest level of management responsibility for ensuring workers conduct their work in a •• safe and efficient manner. The supervisory responsibility for safe performance requires that supervisors be trained in hazard recognition and safe work practices, and have the skills to convey these elements to the worker. The Plan must address safety and health responsibilities at all levels of supervision. These responsibilities shall include, but not be limited to the following: • Providing safety supervision during all work shifts. • Providing an effective administrative and managerial structure to administer the Plan. • Implementing hazard prevention in all aspects of job planning. • Instructing employees in the recognition and avoidance of hazards on the worksite. • Verifying that the employees are trained in the recognition and avoidance of hazards on the worksite. • Enforcing the requirements of the Plan. • Encouraging the active participation of employees in safety meetings. • Developing and implementing procedures for proper treatment, investigation, documentation, and reporting of all employee injuries and illnesses. • Taking appropriate corrective action when unsafe acts or conditions are identified. • Maintaining open lines to communicate management and employee safety concerns effectively. • Maintaining all equipment in safe condition. • Issuing appropriate personal protective equipment and training employees in its use. • Performing or assisting in the investigation of all incidents. • Cooperating fully with the Safety Auditor . • Monitoring employee safety and health. 1.2.4 Designation of Safety Representative The Contractor shall propose, in writing, a member of its organization to serve as Safety Representative, who will be responsible for enforcing the Contractor's safety and health obligations and its Plan. The Safety Representative shall be an on-site, ` full-time member of the Contract supervisory staff. This person's name and qualification shall be submitted to the Safety Auditor by the Contractor. In addition, each Subcontractor shall also be required by the Contractor to designate a responsible supervisory representative to assist the Safety Representative in the performance of duties described below. The Safety Representative shall have authority to correct immediately unsafe conditions and/or unsafe acts throughout all phases of the contract, including those involving Contractors, Subcontractors, employees, visitors, vendors, and the general public. The Safety Representative shall be involved in the construction planning process. In the event of substandard performance by the Safety representative in its Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 4 .,R ON 1. Administration & Organization 1.1 Purpose and Scope The Contractor shall develop and implement a written, site-specific, safety and health plan(the "Plan") for its work under the Project. The Contractor shall establish an administrative and organizational structure for implementing its Plan. 1.2 Duties and Responsibilities 0. 1.2.1 Contractor Requirements The Contractor shall comply with all applicable Federal, State, and local safety of requirements and its Plan. Upon receipt of a notice by the Owner or the Safety Auditor of non-compliance under its Plan,the Contractor shall initiate corrective actions as soon as possible. 1.2.2 Contractor's Safety and Health Plan The Contractor shall submit its Plan to the Safety Auditor for review within fifteen (15) days of selection and conditional designation for Contract award. The Plan, which shall include details commensurate with the work to be performed, must clearly describe the Contractor's commitments for meeting its obligations to provide a safe and healthy work environment for its employees and Subcontractor employees, and its obligations to protect vendors, visitors, and members of the general public. The Plan shall reference Federal OSHA standards, and any other rules or regulations applicable to the Smith College Construction Project, including state and local requirements. In fulfilling its obligation to develop and implement the Plan, the Contractor is required to follow the Guidelines. The Plan shall specifically describe operations to M be conducted, and whether this work will be self-performed or subcontracted. A brief description of the expected hazards of each task should be given, followed by steps to control these hazards. The Contract Safety Planning Guide (Appendix A) should be used as a template in identifying and describing construction operations, expected hazards, and planned safety controls for all activities under the Contract. The Safety Auditor is available for assistance in all phases of Plan development and implementation. The Contractor's contractual safety and health requirements and these Guidelines W will be highlighted during the Pre-Construction Conference. The Plan shall be revised by the Contractor on an as-needed basis and will be submitted to the Safety Auditor immediately for review. as 1.2.3 Contractor Management Responsibilities The Contractor is responsible for providing safety supervision of its employees, 4 Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 3 me be responsible for thorough safety and loss control training and instruction of its employees. The objective of this policy is to establish, throughout the entire Project, that the prevention of accidents and protection of property is paramount and, shall, therefore, be made top priority and obtain the active support and participation by Contractors and Subcontractors. PROJECT OBJECTIVES The Guidelines have been created to coordinate the elimination or reduction of •� hazards and risks associated with the construction project, prevent accidents, reduce employees' injuries, prevent damage to property, promote maximum efficiency, and effect savings by the reduction of unplanned business interruption. .� Active participation by the Owner, The Contractor, Contractor management, supervisory staff and employees will make the Project not only effective, but also successful by coordinating the participants' efforts in performing the following tasks: • Provide a safe environment for employees to perform high quality work. • Use safety planning as a tool to reduce bodily injury and property damage. • Provide inspections to locate and abate unsafe conditions and practices. �** • Protect the public and property immediately adjacent to all construction sites. • Educate and train employees through: i. New hire orientation; ii. Safety meetings; iii Safety training (i.e., Hazard Communication, Fall Protection, Lockout/Tagout, Etc.); iv. Mandatory personal protective equipment programs; V. Injury reporting and record keeping to maintain up-to-date accident experience information, trend analysis, etc. vi. Using accident investigation information to abate deficiencies and eliminate any additional losses. ■* 4" NP an an Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 2 ,m PM Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines FOREWORD Smith College Construction Safety Program Guidelines (the "Guidelines") have been compiled to set forth safety and health requirements to be utilized by Contractors performing work under the Smith College Project, (the "Project"). The Guidelines specifically include required elements of a site-specific safety and health plan which must be developed by Contractors working on the Projects included in the Owner Controlled Insurance Program ("OCIP") established by Smith College. The information and standards summarized in these Guidelines were compiled from ± sources believed to be reliable. It cannot be assumed that this material includes every loss potential, code violation or exception to good practice and, therefore, is not guaranteed. It is solely the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that its site-specific safety and health plan is in conformance with the provisions of the Guidelines and standards set forth under the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 as amended, and any other federal, state and local safety and health standards as they apply. The Contractor shall ensure that each of its Subcontractors complies with the requirements of these Guidelines. It should also be emphasized that, as with all other aspects of the work, the on Contractor's selection of means and methods is his own, and that any and all suggestions contained in these Guidelines are only representative of the types of techniques and practices which the Contractor may choose to employ on this project. Smith College Project Policy Statement The principles of safety and loss control included in the Guidelines reflect a determination by Smith College (the "Owner") to prevent injuries to the general public and workers, as well as to prevent damage to property and equipment. The Owner considers no phase of construction or administration of greater importance than accident prevention, and asserts that accidents which result in personal injury and damage to property and equipment represent needless waste and loss. It shall be the policy of the Owner to conduct all operations safely and thereby prevent injuries to persons and damage to property. Planning for safety shall start with the design and continue through purchasing, fabrication and construction in all phases of the Project. All practical steps shall be taken to maintain a safe place to work. The Contractor must accept the responsibility for the prevention of accidents on work under its direction and shall Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 1 5. Hazard Communication 5.1 Purpose and Scope 5.2 Responsibilities 5.3 Hazard Communication Program (HCP) 5.4 Hazard Communication Training 5.5 Record Keeping 6. First Aid and Medical Services 6.1 Purpose and Scope 6.2 Staffing 6.3 Reporting 6.4 Transportation 6.5 Local Emergency Telephone Numbers 7. Incident Investigation, Reporting, and Record Keeping 7.1 Purpose and Scope �. 7.2 Notification 7.3 Investigation 7.4 Documentation and Reporting 7.5 Doctor/Lost Time Cases 7.6 OSHA 200 Log 7.7 Monthly Accident Summary 7.8 Inspections by Regulatory Agencies Appendix A. Contractor Safety Planning Guide B. Project Forms B.1 Contractor Incident Investigation Form B.2 Contractor Safety Survey Checklist B.3 Weekly Toolbox Meeting Sign-In Sheet *■+ B.4 Contract First Aid Log B.5 OSHA 200 Log- Summary of Occupational Injuries and Illnesses B.6 Safety Program Notification/Contact List B.7 Monthly Contract Accident Summary Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines o. aw Table of Contents i. Forward ii. Policy Statement iii. Program Objectives 1. Administration and Organization 1.1 Purpose and Scope 1.2 Duties and Responsibilities 1.2.1 Contractor Requirements 1.2.2 Contractor Site Specific Safety and Health Plan 1.2.3 Contractor Management Responsibilities 1.2.4 Designation of Contractor Safety Representative 1.2.5 Safety Auditor 2. Hazard Control 2.1 Purpose and Scope 2.2 Supervisory Control 2.3 Employee Involvement in Hazard Identification 2.4 Substance Abuse Policy 2.5 Weapons and Controlled Items 2.6 Disciplinary Sanctions 2.7 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) 2.8 Special Hazardous Work Procedures and Job Hazard Analysis 2.9 Community Public Protection 2.10 Dust/Debris Control Plan 3. Emergency Work Procedures 3.1 Purpose and Scope 3.2 Site Specific Procedures 4. Safety and Health Training 4.1 Purpose and Scope 4.2 Training Elements 4.2.1 Contract Safety Orientation 4.2.2 Weekly Toolbox Safety Meetings 4.2.3 Contractor Safety Meetings 4.2.4 Hazard Communication Training 4.2.5 Safety Orientation for Supervisors 4.2.6 Documentation Retention Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines ow Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Smith College o• Owner Controlled Insurance Program Note: All Contractors are responsible for providing a ow copy of this manual to their subcontractors. Owner: Smith College OCIP Administrator: Acordia RM .M INSURANCE COST VERIFICATION FORM A. Workers' Compensation Premium: Class Code Description Straight Time WC Rate WC Premium On site Payroll Deviation(if applicable) .. Increased Employers Liability WC Experience Modification (Attach Copy) Construction Class Credit(Attach Copy) •• Standard Premium ARAP (if applicable) Less other discounts (Describe) •M Total Discounted WC Premium DIA Assessment Total WC Cost .. B. General Liability limit currently purchased = $ Million Payroll/Revenue (circle one) X Rate = GL Premium Amount: X = C. Umbrella Liability limit currently purchased= $ Million Payroll/Revenue (circle one) X Rate = Umbrella Premium X = Note: If Umbrella limit and cost noted above is less than $2,000,000, indicate cost to raise your limit to $2,000,000 ADDITIONAL COST$ The Deductive Alternative for the provision of the OCIP is offered as follows: Workers' Compensation($1,000,000 Employers Liability) $ General Liability($1,000,000 limit) $ Products/Completed Operations (3 Yr. After Substantial Completion) $ Umbrella/Excess Liability ($2,000,000 limit) $ TOTAL INSURANCE COST: $ Overhead & Profit on Insurance Premium: $ TOTAL INSURANCE DEDUCTION: $ SIGNED BY: TITLE: PRINT NAME: DATE: ***NOTE: It is recommended this form be completed by the Contractor's/Subcontractor's insurance broker/agent, or copies be furnished to such party for review and/or information. Contractor's/Subcontractor's Insurance Broker/Agent: Company Name: Telephone #: Contact Person: Date Prepared: Page 10 Revised 2/2/01 w� PM Exhibit B Owner Controlled Insurance Program Insurance Information Form Smith College-Campus Center Project Contractor Name: Phone#: Address: Fax#: go Payroll Contact: Phone#: Insurance Contact: Fax#: Subcontractor To: Project Name: Contract#: Scope of Work: Total Est. Man-Hours: Contract Amount: Est.Payroll: Est. Contract Start Date: Est.Contract Completion Date: ** NOTE: If your firm will hire lower-tier contractors,then a copy of this form must be completed and attached for each subcontractor. I. Worker's Compensation Insurance Credit(Project-Site Payroll Only!) Regular Workers' Compensation Insurer: Experience Rating Date&Policy Effective Date): Interstate Bureau ID#: Federal Employer ID# (If Applicable) AGREEMENT Contractor/Subcontractor hereby assigns, transfers and sets over absolutely unto the Owner its right,title and interest to any and all returns of premium,dividends,discounts, or other adjustments to any Owner Controlled Insurance Program. This assignment shall pertain to the policies as now written and as subsequently modified,rewritten or replaced in the Owner's insurance company, including any additional amount or coverages as a result thereof. The Contractor/Subcontractor also assigns its right of cancellation of all insurance policies provided to the Contractor/Subcontractor by the Owner. This assignment is only valid for insurance policies whose premiums have been paid by the Owner on behalf of such Contractor/Subcontractor. The Contractor and Subcontractor(s)are required to provide information about their insurance rates and coverage's to enable the Owner to estimate and document the projected insurance costs for all work related to the performance of their contract. Special Note: This is an initial estimate only. The final insurance cost will be subject to review and audit of actual insurance policy(ies) rate information,actual audited payrolls and revenues for the initial award plus any additive amendments/Change Orders. At final or interim audit any additional insurance deductions will ;0 be collected from the Contractor,or Subcontractors of any and all tiers via change order. If an audit warrants, additional insurance credits will be paid to the Contractor or Subcontractors of any and all tiers via change order. 4s Page 9 an Revised 2/2/01 Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program H. Certificate of Insurance Checklist: (For Contractors/Subcontractors Provided Coverage Under the O.C.I.P.) NOTE: Each certificate must be on an Acord Form and contain the following information for each corresponding section: ➢ Companies Affording Coverage: Must be acceptable to Smith College „ ➢ Workers'Compensation: Statutory Limits (For off site coverage only) ➢ Employers' Liability: Limits: $1,000,000 (For off site coverage only) ➢ General Liability: Limits: $1,000,000 each occurrence ... (For off site coverage only) ➢ Automobile Liability: Limits: $1,000,000 each occurrence *� ➢ Excess Liability: Limits: $2,000,000 each occurrence Note: This$2,000,000 limit requirement may be lowered as applicable to subcontractors of all tiers upon agreement between Contractor and OCIP Administrator.OCIP Administrator's agreement will not be unreasonably withheld. ➢ Waiver of Subrogation: All Contractors and all tiers of Subcontractors shall waive all rights of recovery against the Owner, the O.C.I.P.Administrator,their officers,agents and employees on all policies. ➢ Additional Insureds: All contractors and subcontractors of every tier must include Smith College, its agents,employees and directors,and the Construction Manager as Additional Insureds. ➢ Certificate Holder: Smith College C/O Acordia 125 Summer Street s. Boston, MA 02110 Attn: Wendy O'Brien Notice of Cancellation: Must provide 30 days advance written notice. 8. Smith Bid Procedures Revised 2/2/01 on Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program G. O.C.I.P. Administration Contact List: If there are any questions concerning the O.C.I.P., its coverages and/or requirements, please contact one of the following O.C.I.P. Administration Team personnel. Acordia Phone: (617)330-1005 125 Summer Street Boston,MA 02110 ➢ Project Manager: Bonney Hebert,Acordia Sr.Vice President (617)330-1005,Ext.212 Daily Contacts: ➢ Account Manager: Pamela Anderson,Acordia Insurance Program Issues Vice President (617)330-1005,Ext.281 ➢ OCIP Administration Manager: Wendy O'Brien,Acordia Enrollment/Administrative Issues OCIP Administration Mgr. (617)330-1005 Ext. 229 ➢ Project Safety Consultant: Fran McCormack,CSP Safety Issues Acordia Manager,Safety and Health Services (617)330-1005 Ext.237 �r 7. Smith Bid Procedures go Revised 2/2/01 Am Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program 6. Payroll Reporting Procedures: ➢ Each Contractor and Subcontractor of any tier insured under the O.C.I.P. shall report the payrolls of all non-excluded employees performing Contract work at the Project-Site. ➢ Each Contractor and subcontractor will complete payroll reporting forms for each month worked(pg. 14). ➢ Payroll reports are due to Acordia on a monthly basis by the 10`h. Contractors must provide O.C.I.P.payroll report for each month they are enrolled in the O.C.I.P. If no payroll is generated during an enrolled month a payroll report indicating Zero(0)payroll must be provided. Please note"Final'on the final month of payroll reported to w indicate that work has been completed. .e� w 6. .. Smith Bid Procedures Revised 2/2/01 ,,,�, Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program F. Summary of Contractor/Subcontractor Responsibilities: 1. Identify ALL estimated insurance costs for those coverages provided under the O.C.I.P.from the Contract Price: (include deductions for all Subcontractors of any tier). 2. Enrollment into the Owner Controlled Insurance Program: POP ➢ Complete Insurance Information Form(pg. 10) ➢ Notify Acordia of all Subcontractors being used ➢ Require all Subcontractors to complete Insurance Information Form ➢ Send completed Insurance Information Forms to Acordia OCIP Administrator ! " ➢ Complete(if applicable)Change Order Insurance Information Form(pg. 15) 3. Resources for Completing Insurance Enrollment Form: �w ➢ Your insurance policies ➢ Your insurance agent ➢ Acordia's O.C.I.P.Administrator 4. Certificate of Insurance Requirements: ➢ Provide to Acordia a Certificate of Insurance displaying proof of required insurance coverages. (Automobile Liability and Off-Site Coverages) ➢ Proof of coverage must be provided to Acordia before access to the Project-Site is allowed. ➢ NOTE: Every Contractor and Subcontractor of any tier must comply with this requirement. ➢ See"Certificate of Insurance Checklist". (Pg 9) 5. Claims Reporting Procedures: all ➢ Within 24 hours,report and provide the necessary documentation for all losses occurring on the Project-Site. ➢ Severe accidents should be reported immediately! to ➢ Complete and provide Acordia with the following information in the event of a loss: (See Contact List—Pg 8) A. Workers' Compensation Claims—"Employer's First Report of Injury"(pg. 16) B. General Liability Claims—"General Liability Loss Notice"(pg. 17) NOTE: A"Supervisor's Accident Report" should accompany all loss notices(pg. 18) 5. Smith Bid Procedures Revised 2/2/01 on Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program .0 an E. Insurance Requirements of all Contractors, Subcontractors, Vendors, "" Suppliers, Truckers, Delivery Men and Others NOT COVERED under the Smith College O.C.I.P. ,.. ➢ Coverage for the following must be secured by the Contractor or Subcontractor(s)of each and every tier at their own expense and through their own efforts. ➢ NOTE: Proof of coverage must be provided to the O.C.I.P.Administrator before am access to the Project-Site is allowed. 1. Workers' Compensation and Employer's Liability: .w Providing coverage for operations at and away from the Project-Site. 2. Comprehensive General Liability: ON Providing coverage for operations at and away from the Project-Site. w 3. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Providing coverage for operations at and away from the Project-Site. am 4. Contractor's Equipment Floater(optional) Providing coverage for all equipment and tools being used both at and away from the 0M Project-Site. 5. Any other insurance required by your contract and not included in the Owner Controlled Insurance Program an M" as .0 4. .w Smith Bid Procedures Revised 2/2/01 Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program D. Other Insurance Requirements for all Contractors/Subcontractors ENROLLED under the Smith College O.C.I.P. ➢ Coverage for the following must be secured by the Contractor or Subcontractor(s)of each and every tier at their own expense and through their own efforts. 1. Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability: Providing coverage for operations away from the Project-Site. 2. Comprehensive General Liability: Providing coverage for operations away from the Project-Site. 3. Comprehensive Automobile Liability: PM Providing coverage for operations at and away from the Project-Site. 4. Contractor's Equipment Floater(optional): Providing coverage for all equipment and tools being used at the Project-Site. 5. Any other insurance required by your contract and not included in the Owner Controlled Insurance Program w 3. Smith Bid Procedures Revised 2/2/01 MM Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program B. O.C.I.P. Coverage EXCLUSIONS: ➢ 1. No insurance coverage provided by the Owner under the O.C.I.P.shall extend to •w the activities or products of contractors,subcontractors of any tier,suppliers, materialmen, vendors,haulers,truckers and"owner/operators"whose employees perform no on-site work and/or are engaged solely in the delivery, loading, stocking,testing or hauling of equipment, supplies or materials. ➢ 2. Contractor and Subcontractor employees not working at the project-site(such as delivery men,truckers,haulers,etc.)and others who occasionally visit the project- site are excluded by the O.C.I.P. Such persons are required to provide evidence of their own insurance before access to the project-site is allowed. C. Insurance NOT Provided by the Smith College O.C.I.P.: ➢ Coverage for the following must be secured by the Contractor or Subcontractor(s)of each and every tier at their own expense and through their own efforts. 1. Automobile Liability Coverage: Automobile coverage is not provided for any Contractor's/Subcontractor's vehicles at or away from the Project-Site. NOTE: Evidence of such coverage must be provided to the O.C.I.P. Administrator before access to the Project-Site will be allowed. 2. Contractor's Equipment Coverage: Property coverage is not provided for any Contractor's/Subcontractor's equipment or tools being used at or away from the Project-Site. 3. Other Coverage: Insurance coverage for office equipment,bonding or any other coverage not included in the Owner Controlled Insurance Program. "■" w� ws 2. Smith Bid Procedures Revised 2/2/01 ww 4M Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program ow Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program (O.C.I.P) Coverage Summary A. Insurance Provided by Smith College (herein called the Owner): NOTE: The full cost of the following O.C.LP.coverages are paid for by the Owner. The Contractor hereby warrants that the insurance costs(including ALL Subcontractors of any tier)for the coverage provided under this program are to be removed from its bids. 40 1. Workers' Compensation/Employer's Liability Insurance: M,„ Covers: Statutory limits required by the Workers' Compensation laws of the applicable jurisdiction,with Coverage B—Employer's Liability Limit of$1,000,000 MR 2. Commercial General Liability& Excess Liability Insurance: Covers: Third Party Personal Injury, Bodily Injury and Property Damage MR Liability Includes: Premises/Operations Coverage,Completed Operations(three years after substantial completion),Contractual Liability, Personal Injury Liability Total Limits:, Limits of at least: $50,000,000 Each Occurrence—All Insureds $50,000,000 General Aggregate—All Insureds Deductible: The Contractor/Subcontractor agree that any payment made by the Owner arising out of third party bodily injury and/or property damage losses caused by the intentional acts or omissions of the Contractor and/or Subcontractor of any tier,may be withheld from the Contractor/Subcontractor. The total sum withheld shall not exceed $2,500 for each occurrence. The sum shall be assessed to the Contractor/Subcontractor causing the damage and/or injury and shall become property of the Owner. w 1. Smith Bid Procedures Revised 2/2/01 Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program Table of Contents ! " Contents: Page SECTION I: A. Insurance Provided 2 B. OCIP Coverage Exclusions 3 C. Insurance Not Provided 1. Automobile 2. Contractors Tools and Equipment 3. Other D. Insurance Requirements for Enrolled Contractors 4 E. Insurance Requirements for Contractors Not Enrolled 5 X0 F. Summary of Contractor Responsibilities 6 Bidding Insurance Information Form Certificates of Insurance Claim Reporting uwr Payroll Reporting G. OCIP Administration Contact List 8 H. Certificate of Insurance Checklist 9 Attachments: Insurance Information Form 10 Payroll Reporting Form 14 Insurance Information Form for Change Orders 15 Workers Compensation First Report of Injury 16 General Liability Notice of Occurrence/Claim 17 Supervisors Accident Investigation Report 18 Monthly Contract Accident Summary 19 SECTION II: A. Sample Policies(GL, WC,Umbrella,Builders Risk) (General Contractor Only) SECTION III: A. Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Smith Bid Procedures Revised 2/2/01 0" 5 Colleges — Smith College Owner-Controlled Insurance Program Bidding & Enrollment Procedures O.C.I.P. Coverage Summary Contractor Responsibilities Presented By: Acordia 125 Summer Street Boston, Massachusetts 02110 Phone: (617) 330-1005 - Fax: (617) 330-5339 Smith Bid Procedures W Revised 2/2/01 WA INSURANCE COST VERIFICATION FORM Page 2 of 2 A. Workers' Compensation Premium: Class Code Description Straight Time WC Rate WC Premium •. On site Payroll Deviation(if applicable) Increased Employers Liability WC Experience Modification(Attach Copy) Construction Class Credit(Attach Copy) Standard Premium ARAP(if applicable) Less other discounts(Describe) ,. Total Discounted WC Premium DIA Assessment Total WC Cost B. General Liability limit currently purchased = $ Million Payroll[Revenue(circle one) X Rate = GL Premium ■ Amount: X = C. Umbrella Liability limit currently purchased = $ Million Payroll/Revenue(circle one) X Rate = Umbrella Premium ++�+ X = Note: If Umbrella limit and cost noted above is less than$2,000,000, indicate cost to raise your limit to $2,000,000 ADDITIONAL COST $ The Deductive Alternative for the provision of the OCIP is offered as follows: .w Workers' Compensation($1,000,000 Employers Liability) $ General Liability($1,000,000 limit) $ Products/Completed Operations +�* (3 Yrs. After Substantial Completion) $ Umbrella/Excess Liability($2,000,000 limit) $ TOTAL INSURANCE COST: $ Overhead & Profit on Insurance Premium: $ TOTAL INSURANCE DEDUCTION: $ SIGNED BY: TITLE: PRINT NAME: DATE: w. ***NOTE: It is recommended this form be completed by the Contractor's/Subcontractor's insurance broker/agent, or copies be furnished to such party for review and/or information. Contractor's/Subcontractor's Insurance Broker/Agent: MW Company Name: Telephone#: Contact Person: Date Prepared: T:5 colleges/SmithContract/CovemotePreBid2-2/2/01 go Owner Controlled Insurance Program Insurance Information Form for Enrollment Page 1 of 2 Smith College-Campus Center Project Contractor Name: Phone#: Address: Fax#: Payroll Contact: Phone#: Insurance Contact: Fax#: Subcontractor To: 40 Project Name: Contract#: Scope of Work: Total Est. Man-Hours: Contract Amount: Est.Payroll: Est.Contract Start Date: Est.Contract Completion Date: ** NOTE: If your firm will hire lower-tier contractors,then a copy of this form must be completed and attached for each subcontractor. I. Worker's Compensation Insurance Credit(Project-Site Payroll Only!) Regular Workers' Compensation Insurer: _ Experience Rating Date&Policy Effective Date): Interstate Bureau ID#: Federal Employer ID# (If Applicable) AGREEMENT Contractor/Subcontractor hereby assigns,transfers and sets over absolutely unto the Owner its right,title and interest to any and all returns of premium,dividends, discounts,or other adjustments to any Owner Controlled Insurance Program. This assignment shall pertain to the policies as now written and as subsequently modified, rewritten or replaced in the Owner's insurance company, including any additional amount or coverages as a result thereof. The Contractor/Subcontractor also assigns its right of cancellation of all insurance policies provided to the Contractor/Subcontractor by the Owner. This assignment is only valid for insurance policies whose premiums have been paid by the Owner on behalf of such Contractor/Subcontractor. The Contractor and Subcontractor(s)are required to provide information about their insurance rates and coverage's to enable the Owner to estimate and document the projected insurance costs for all work related to the performance !! of their contract. Special Note: This is an initial estimate only. The final insurance cost will be subject to review and audit of actual insurance policy(ies) rate information,actual audited payrolls and revenues for the initial award plus any additive amendments/Change Orders. At final or interim audit any additional 10 insurance deductions will be collected from the Contractor,or Subcontractors of any and all tiers via change order. If an audit warrants,additional insurance credits will be paid to the Contractor or Subcontractors of any and all tiers via change order. M 40 T:5 colleges/SmithContract/CovemotePreBid2-2/2/01 M an All claims are to be reported to Acordia within 24 hours. Severe accidents should be reported immediately. When reporting a workers' compensation claim a"First Report of Injury"needs to be completed. When reporting a general liability claim a"General Liability Loss Notice" must be completed. A"Supervisor's Accident Report"should accompany all loss notices. These forms will be included in the Procedures and Enrollment Guidelines, which will an be given to all contractors and subcontractors who are enrolled in the OCIP Also included in the Procedures and Enrollment Guidelines is the Safety Program Guidelines. These Guidelines are am intended to be a framework which can help when developing a safety plan for this project. If there are any questions or concerns we urge you to contact your insurance representative. Additionally, as r" administrator of the OCIP, Acordia is committed to work with you or your representative to facilitate the smooth operation of this program. no Wendy O'Brien Pamela Anderson Fran McCormack OCIP Administrator Account Executive Safety Manager Acordia Acordia Acordia 125 Summer St 125 Summer St. 125 Summer St. Boston, MA 02110 Boston, MA 02110 Boston, MA 02110 Ph: 617 330-1005 ext 229 Ph: 617 330-1005 ext 281 Ph: 617 330-1005 ext 237 Fax: 617 330-5339 Fax: 617 330-5339 Fax 617 330-5339 .. no T:5 colleges/SmithContract/CovemotePreBid2-2/2/01 4 00 OWNER CONTROLLED INSURANCE PROGRAM (OCIP) OWN OVERVIEW Welcome to the Owner Controlled Insurance Program. What follows is a brief overview of the OCIP program and what will be required by all contractors and all subcontractors of every tier. This project is to be insured under an OCIP. An OCIP is a single insurance program which insures the owner, all w� enrolled contractors, all enrolled subcontractors of every tier and other entities designated by the owner for work performed at the project site. In contrast, a traditional approach requires each Contractor/Subcontractor to provide their own coverage. Under the terms of the OCIP, the owner has arranged for Workers' Compensation, General Liability, and Umbrella Liability coverage. The Limits of Liability for these coverages are: 00 Workers Compensation: Statutory Employers' Liability: $1,000,000 each Accident General Liability: $1,000,000 each Occurrence Excess Liability: $50,000,000 each Occurrence These coverages apply only to work performed at the project site. All contractors and subcontractors of every tier who will be working on the site must be enrolled in the program. To become enrolled in the program you will need to complete the Insurance Information Form (attached), prior to your work starting on the project site. The Insurance Information Form is our way of determining what your insurance costs would have been had you provided your own insurance for this project. We refer to this as your deduct. We suggest that you have this form PF completed by your insurance agent and forwarded to the OCIP Administrator, Acordia, when complete. The OCIP Administrator will review your enrollment form for accuracy and will verify the amount of the estimated deduct that has been offered. All Change Orders are handled in the same manner. on The OCIP coverages do not apply to vendors, suppliers, material dealers, truckers and independent owner/operators. so All enrolled contractors and subcontractors of each and every tier are required to provide evidence of insurance, in the form of a certificate of insurance, for workers' compensation and employer's liability, general liability, automobile liability and excess liability for coverage away from the project site. Receipt of this certificate of insurance to the OCIP Administrator is part of the enrollment process and is required prior to your work starting on the project site. The Limits of Liability you should carry are as follows: Workers Compensation: Statutory Employers' Liability: $1,000,000 General Liability: $1,000,000 each Occurrence/$2,000,000 Aggregate Automobile Liability: $1,000,000 each Accident AN Excess Liability: $2,000,000 each Occurrence/$2,000,000 Aggregate The Owner is responsible for payment of premiums to the insurance carriers providing these insurance coverages. As such, you should promptly notify your insurance carrier(s)to delete this project from your current insurance program. Even though you will not pay the premiums for the OCIP each Contractor and Subcontractor of any tier insured under the OCIP shall report the payrolls of all non-excluded employees performing contract work at the OR project site. Payroll reports are due to Acordia on a monthly basis. Additionally, all workers' compensation losses on this project will be reported to the National Council on Compensation Insurance(NCCI) and will apply to your Experience Modifier(EMR) for the next three years. W Y5 colleges/SmithContract/CovernotePreBid2-2/2/01 .m INSURANCE COST VERIFICATION FORM .. Smith College-Campus Center Project A. Workers'Compensation Premium: an Class Code Description Straight Time WC Rate WC Premium On site Payroll Deviation(if applicable) Increased Employers Liability WC Experience Modification(Attach Copy) Construction Class Credit(Attach Copy) Standard Premium ARAP(if applicable) Less other discounts(Describe) Total Discounted WC Premium DIA Assessment Total WC Cost .� B. General Liability limit currently purchased = $ Million Payroll/Revenue(circle one) X Rate = GL Premium Amount: X = C. Umbrella Liability limit currently purchased = $ Million ► Payroll/Revenue(circle one) X Rate = Umbrella Premium X Note: If Umbrella limit and cost noted above is less than$2,000,000, indicate cost to raise your limit to$2,000,000 ADDITIONAL COST $ Person providing this information: Name: Phone: The Deductive Alternative for the provision of the OCIP is offered as follows: Workers' Compensation($1,000,000 Employers Liability)$ .� General Liability($1,000,000 limit) $ Products/Completed Operations $ (3 Yr.After Substantial Completion) $ Umbrella/Excess Liability($2,000,000 limit) $ ..e TOTAL INSURANCE COST: $ Overhead& Profit on Insurance Premium: $ TOTAL INSURANCE DEDUCTION: $ �. SIGNED BY: TITLE: PRINT NAME: DATE: w ***NOTE: It is recommended this form be completed by the Contractor's/Subcontractor's insurance broker/agent, or copies be furnished to such party for review and/or information. Contractor's/Subcontractor's Insurance Broker/Agent: Company Name: Telephone#: Contact Person: Date Prepared: s 20 of 20 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 , ±ww Exhibit B Owner Controlled Insurance Program Insurance Information Form Contractor Name: Phone#: Address: Fax#: Payroll Contact: Phone#: Insurance Contact: Fax#: Subcontractor To: Project Name: Contract#: Scope of Work: Total Est. Man-Hours: Payroll: Contract Amount: Est.Pa Y Est.Contract Start Date: Est.Contract Completion Date: **NOTE: If your firm will hire lower-tier contractors,then a copy of this form must be completed and attached for each subcontractor. I. Worker's Compensation Insurance Credit(Project-Site Payroll Only!) Regular Workers' Compensation Insurer: Experience Rating Date&Policy Effective Date): Interstate Bureau ID#: Federal Employer ID# (If Applicable) AGREEMENT Contractor/Subcontractor hereby assigns,transfers and sets over absolutely unto the Owner its right,title and interest to any and all returns of premium,dividends, discounts, or other adjustments to any Owner Controlled Insurance Program. This assignment shall pertain to the policies as now written and as subsequently modified, rewritten or replaced in the Owner's insurance company, including any additional amount or coverages as a result thereof. The Contractor/Subcontractor also assigns its right of cancellation of all insurance policies provided to the Contractor/Subcontractor by the Owner. This assignment is only valid for insurance policies whose premiums have been paid by the Owner on behalf of such Contractor/Subcontractor. The Contractor and Subcontractor(s)are required to provide information about their insurance rates and coverage's to enable the Owner to estimate and document the projected insurance costs for all work related to the performance of their contract. Special Note: This is an initial estimate only. The final insurance cost will be subject to review and audit of actual insurance policy(ies) rate information,actual audited payrolls and revenues for the initial award plus any additive amendments/Change Orders. At final or interim audit any additional insurance deductions will be collected from the Contractor,or Subcontractors of any and all tiers via change order. If an audit warrants, additional insurance credits will be paid to the Contractor or Subcontractors of any and all tiers via change order. 19 of 20 15 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 an Section 3.3 EMERGENCIES: (a) In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property,or in the event of a claimed violation of any federal or state safety or health law or regulation,arising out of or in any way connected with the work or its performance,the Contractor shall act immediately to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss and to remedy said violation. Failing such action the Owner or its designee may immediately take whatever steps it deems necessary including,but not limited to,suspending am the work as provided in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. (b) The Owner or its designee may offset any and all costs or expenses of whatever nature, including attorneys'fees,paid or incurred by the Owner or its designee(whether such fees are for in-house counsel or counsel retained by the Owner), in taking the steps authorized by Section 3.3 above against any sums then or thereafter due to the Contractor. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold the Owner, its officers,agents,employees and the O.C.I.P.Administrator harmless against any and all costs or expenses pursuant to this Section 3.3,by whomsoever incurred. If the Contractor shall be entitled to any additional compensation or extension of time claimed on account of emergency work not due to the fault or neglect of the Contractor or its Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors, it shall be handled as a claim as provided for in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. Section 3.4 OWNER'S STANDARDS: "a (a) The Owner and its designee reserves the right,but assumes no duty,to establish and enforce guidelines and to make the appropriate changes in the Construction Master Safety Program so Guidelines,for the protection of persons and property and to review the efficiency of all protective measures taken by the Contractor. The Contractor shall comply with all guidelines and changes made by the Owner or its designee. The issuance of any such guidelines or changes by the Owner or its designee shall not relieve the Contractor of its duties and responsibilities under this Contract, so and the Owner or its designee shall not thereby assume,nor be deemed to have assumed,any such duties or responsibilities of the Contractor. NO as so ■m go ow OR .m 18 of 20 15 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 ss S•• In any and all claims against those indemnified hereunder by any employee of the Contractor,any Subcontractor of any tier or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable,the indemnification obligation under this 3.1.6 shall not be limited in any way as to the amount or type of damages,compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any Subcontractor of any tier under any workers'compensation act,disability benefit or other employee benefit acts. 3.1.7 PRE-QUALIFICATION CRITERIA FOR GENERAL CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS (a) Any General Contractor or sub-contractor regardless as to tier with a Workers' Compensation Experience Modification factor as promulgated by the Workers' Compensation Rating Bureau of 105%or less will be eligible to participate in the OCIP and the project. If a General Contractor or sub-contractor,regardless as to tier,has a modification over 106%the Owner may include such 40 General Contractor or sub-contractor in the OCIP and the project provided that the General Contractor or sub-contractor is approved by the Owner or its designee. The Owner or its designee will evaluate the General Contractor's or sub-contractor's adverse modification to determine any mitigating circumstances,such as but not limited to,a single loss causing a high modification,etc. 3.1.8 ALTERNATIVE/LIGHT DUTY WORK AVAILABILITY (a) Contractor shall endeavor to provide alternative work or light duty for injured employees with temporary physical restrictions. Section 3.2 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY/RESPONSIBILITY FOR LOSS: 3.2.1 CONTRACTOR'S PROTECTION OF WORK. (a) The Contractor shall,throughout the performance of the work,maintain adequate and continuous protection of all work and temporary facilities against loss or damage from whatever cause,shall ` protect the property of the Owner and third parties from loss or damage from whatever cause arising out of the performance of the work,and shall comply with the requirements of the Owner or its designee and its insurance carriers, and with all applicable laws,codes,rules and �! regulations,with respect to the prevention of loss or damage to property as a result of fire or other hazards. The Owner or its designee may, but shall not be required to,make periodic inspections of the Project site. In such event,however,the Contractor shall not be relieved of its aforesaid responsibilities and the Owner or its designee shall not assume,nor shall it be deemed to have assumed,any responsibility otherwise imposed upon the Contractor by this Contract. 3.2.2 SURFACE OR SUBSURFACE WATER. (a) Surface or subsurface water or other fluid shall not be permitted to accumulate in excavations or under the structures except where required by the Contract Documents for the Project. Should such conditions develop or be encountered,the water or other fluid shall be controlled and suitably disposed of by means of temporary pumps,piping,drainage lines,ditches,dams or other methods so approved by the Owner or its designee in writing,and in accordance with all regulatory requirements. The proposed location and coordination of temporary channels and conduits diverting accumulated water from the Project site shall be submitted to the Owner or its designee ON for its prior written approval. All such work shall be done as a reimbursable cost of the work. am 17 of 20 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contracd2/2/01 on 3.1.3 CONTRACTOR'S DESIGNATION OF SAFETY REPRESENTATIVE. (a) In accordance with the requirements of the Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines,the Contractor shall designate a qualified member of its organization at the Project site,whose duties shall be to enforce the Contractor's safety programs,to assure compliance with this Article 3 and to prevent accidents. This person's name and qualifications shall be submitted to the Owner or its designee in writing by the Contractor for approval. The Contractor shall further cause each of its Subcontractors of any tier to designate a responsible supervisory representative to assist the Contractor's representative in the performance of its duties as described above. 3.1.4 SUSPENSION OF CONTRACTOR'S WORK. (a) Should the Contractor fail to provide a safe area for the performance of the Work or any portion thereof,the Owner or its designee shall have the right,but not the obligation,to suspend work in the unsafe area. All costs of any nature(including,without limitation,overtime pay, liquidated damages or other costs arising out of delays)resulting from the suspension,by whomsoever incurred,shall be borne by the Contractor. ,. 3.1.5 CONTRACTOR'S ASSURANCE OF SAFETY EQUIPMENT. (a) The Contractor and each subcontractor of every tier shall provide to each worker on the Project ' site the proper safety equipment for the duties being performed by that worker and will not permit any worker on the Project site who fails or refuses to use the same. The Owner or its designee shall have the right,but not the obligation,to order the Contractor to send a worker home for the .w day,or to discharge a worker,for his/her failure to comply with safe practices or anti-substance abuse policies,and the Contractor shall promptly comply with all such orders. 3.1.6 CONTRACTOR'S INDEMNITY OF THE OWNER FOR CONTRACTOR'S NON-COMPLIANCE WITH SAFETY PROGRAM. (a) Contractor recognizes that it has sole responsibility to assure its Safety Program is implemented and to assure its construction services are safely provided. The Contractor shall indemnify,defend and hold the Owner and its designee harmless, from and against any and all liability(whether public or private),penalties(contractual or otherwise), losses,damages,costs,attorneys'fees, w expenses,causes of action,claims or judgments resulting,either in whole or in part, from any failure of the Contractor, its Subcontractors of any tier or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable,to comply with the provisions of this Article 3. The Contractor shall not be relieved of its responsibilities under this Article 3 should the �"*^ Owner or its designee act or fail to act pursuant to its rights hereunder. The Owner and the OCIP Administrator shall not assume,nor be deemed to have assumed,any responsibilities otherwise imposed upon the Contractor by this Contract, by virtue of providing the Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines. Contractor shall not raise as a defense to its obligation to indemnify under this 3.1.6 any failure of those indemnified hereunder to assure Contractor operates safely, it being understood and agreed that no such failure shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to assure safe operations or from its obligation to so indemnify. The Contractor also hereby waives any rights it may have to seek contribution,either directly or indirectly, from those indemnified hereunder. wa 16 of 20 Y5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 ws OR NO ARTICLE 3. CONTRACTOR'S SAFETY PROGRAM TO ENSURE PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Section 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S SAFETY PROGRAM: P0 3.LICONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES. (a) The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating,maintaining and supervising safety,property loss prevention and anti-substance abuse precautions and programs in connection with the work. Contractor shall provide all protection to prevent injury to all persons involved in any way in the work and all other persons,including,without limitation,the employees,agents,guests,visitors, invitees and licensees of the Owner who may visit the job site or be affected by the work. These precautions shall include,but in no event be limited to: (1)those set forth in the most current provisions of the Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines,which is incorporated by reference as a Contract Document and which the Owner will have on file before bid opening,and which will be provided to the successful bidder after award;(2)the posting of danger signs and personal notification to all affected persons of the existence of a hazard of whatever nature;(3)the furnishing and maintaining of necessary traffic control barricades and flagman services;(4)the use,storage,removal or disposal of required explosives or other hazardous materials only under the supervision of qualified personnel and after first obtaining permission of all applicable governmental authorities;(5)and the maintenance of adequate quantities of both hose and operable fire extinguishers at the Project site. The Contractor shall set forth in writing its safety,property loss prevention and anti-substance abuse precautions,programs,and action plans in connection with the work and submit the same to the Owner or its designee for review. The Contractor shall not be permitted on the Project Site for the performance of work until these precautions,programs and plans have been reviewed by the Owner or its designee. The Owner or its designee may,but shall not be obligated to,make suggestions and recommendations to the Contractor with respect thereto. 3.1.2 COMPLIANCE OF WORK, EQUIPMENT, AND PROCEDURES WITH ALL LAWS. (a) All work,whether performed by the Contractor or its Subcontractors of any tier, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,and all equipment,appliances,machinery,materials,tools and like items incorporated or used in the work,shall be in compliance with and conform to: (a) all applicable laws, ordinances,rules,regulations and orders of any public,quasi-public or other governmental authority relating to the safety of persons and their protection against injury, specifically including,but in no event limited to,the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970,as amended,and all rules and regulations now or hereafter in effect pursuant to said Act; and(b)all rules,regulations and requirements of the Owner or its designee and its insurance carriers relating thereto. In the event of conflicting requirements,the more stringent shall govern. Aw 15 of 20 OR T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 Section 2.16 SUBROGATION AND WAIVER: (a) Contractor shall require all policies of insurance that are in any way related to the Work and that are secured and maintained by Contractor and all tiers of Subcontractors,to include clauses providing that each underwriter and carrier shall waive all of its rights of recovery,under subrogation or otherwise,against the Owner,the O.C.I.P.Administrator,their officers,agents and employees,the Contractor,and all tiers of Subcontractors. (b) Contractor waives all rights of recovery against the Owner,the O.C.I.P.Administrator,their officers,agents and employees,and all Subcontractors regardless of tier which Contractor may have or acquire because of deductible clauses in or the inadequacy of limits of any policies of insurance that are in any way related to the Work and that are secured and maintained by Contractor. (c) Each Contractor shall require all tiers of Subcontractors to waive the rights of recovery in the same manner(as waived in the preceding paragraph by Contractor)against the Owner,the O.C.I.P. Administrator,their officers,agents and employees,Contractors,and other Subcontractors regardless of tier. Section 2.17 COVERAGE DETERMINED BY POLICY: (a) The coverages referred to above are set forth in full in the respective policy forms,and the foregoing descriptions of such policies are not intended to be complete,or to alter or amend any provision of the actual policies,and in matters, if any, in which the said description may be conflicting with such instruments,the provisions of the policies of the insurance shall govern. Section 2.18 MISCELLANEOUS: 2.18.1 CONTRACTOR'S OTHER CONTRACT OBLIGATIONS. (a) Nothing contained in Article 2 or 3 of this "Attachment to Construction Specification"shall relieve ..� the Contractor,and its Subcontractors of any tier,of their respective obligations to exercise due care in the performance of their duties in connection with the Work or to complete the Work in strict compliance with the Contract. 2.18.2 FURTHER O.C.I.P.INFORMATION. (a) At the time of pre-bid conference,the Owner will make its O.C.I.P. Administrator available to bidders so that they may resolve any questions they may have about the O.C.I.P. The Owner will also have on file prior to bid opening,a more detailed description of the O.C.I.P.as set forth in a booklet listing the Contractor's Insurance Guidelines. The successful bidder will be provided a copy of and must satisfy these guidelines. 14 of 20 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 �w 40 tM (b) For insurance purposes,each Contractor agrees,and will require each Subcontractor to agree: (1) to keep and maintain an accurate and classified record of its payroll,(2)to furnish to Administrator and to the insurance company or companies full and accurate payroll data and information in accordance with the requirements of the insurance company or companies,and(3)to permit its books and records to be examined and audited periodically by the insurance company or companies or Administrator and their respective representatives. (c) Prior to the respective parties'commencement of the Work,Contractor shall furnish and cause each Subcontractor at any tier to furnish to Administrator or their designees, in a form satisfactory to them,an estimate of labor cost(listed by Standard Workers'Compensation Insurance classification)to be incurred in connection with the Work at the Project site by each Subcontractor,and the total price due each Subcontractor under its contract. (d) Contractor shall furnish each bidding and negotiating Subcontractor,vendor,supplier,material dealer or other party a copy of this Article 2 describing the insurance requirements for the Contractor and Subcontractors of all tiers under the O.C.I.P.,and shall require each to impose the same requirement with respect to their subcontracting and procurement procedures. Section 2.15 NOTICES,COSTS,AND LOSSES: (a) All policies of insurance that either Contractor(s),Subcontractors,or the Owner is required to secure and maintain under the terms of this Agreement shall be endorsed to provide that the insurance company shall notify the Owner,Contractor,and the Named Insured,at least thirty(30) days prior to the effective date of any cancellation or modification of such policies. (b) The Contractor and its subcontractors shall not be permitted on the Project site for the performance of work until the OCIP Administrator issues appropriate certificates of insurance. Prior to the date on which Contractor or any Subcontractor,regardless of tier,commences performance of its part of the Work,Contractor shall cause to be furnished to the Owner certificates of insurance maintained by Contractor and each such Subcontractor in connection with the performance of the r Work. As and when the Owner may direct,copies of the actual insurance policies,or renewals or replacements thereof,shall be submitted to the Owner and shall be in form and content acceptable to the Owner. (c) The cost of the premiums for the insurance specified above to be obtained by the Owner will be paid for by the Owner,and the Owner shall receive and pay,as the case may be,all adjustments in such costs,whether by way of dividends or otherwise. Each Contractor shall execute such instruments of assignment as may be necessary to permit Owner's receipt of such adjustments and shall cause all Subcontractors covered by such insurance to do the same. (d) The cost of any losses sustained because of clauses that specify Contractor deductible amounts in any of the insurance policies furnished by the Owner shall be paid by the Owner. If the Owner- provided O.C.I.P.policies described in Subsections 2.1.2 and 2.1.3 have deductible amounts above the Contractor deductible amounts,such excess amounts shall be paid by the Owner provided that Contractor shall be responsible for losses greater than policy limits. (e) Payments by the insurer for all losses covered under the All Risk Builder's Risk policy,as specified in Section 2.1.3,will be made to The Owner. The Owner will make monies from the Builder's Risk policy available to the contractor for rebuilding work damaged by covered perils. 13 of 20 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 rte. 2.12.5 UMBRELLA LIABILITY: Insurance for operations AWAY FROM THE PROJECT SITE,and to cover such liability arising when on the project site but explicitly not covered by Owner provided insurance pursuant to Section 2.1 (c)(iii)through(vi),by the Contractor or Subcontractor of any tier as referenced in Subsections 2.12.3 and 2.12.4 and for all operations referenced in Subsection 2.12.1. Total limits of$2,000,000 each occurrence. Section 2.13 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY TO ASSURE VENDORS TO JOBSITE HAVE INSURANCE: (a) The Contractor,or its Subcontractor of any tier,shall require their respective vendors, suppliers, material dealers,truckers(whether owners or operators)and others who merely transport,pick-up, deliver or carry materials,personnel,parts or equipment or any other items or persons to or from the Project site to maintain the following insurance: (i) Workers'Compensation Insurance providing coverage for Statutory Limits of the w. Workers'Compensation Laws of the applicable jurisdiction,with Coverage B- Employer's Liability,to limits of not less than One-Million Dollars($1,000,000), insuring operations of the party required to furnish same performed in connection with the Work at the Project site. (ii) Automobile Liability Insurance covering all owned,non-owned and hired automobiles, trucks and trailers of the respective parties required to provide and maintain this insurance. Such insurance shall provide coverage not less than that of the Standard Comprehensive Automobile Liability policy in limits not less than One Million Dollars ($1,000,000)Combined Single Limit each occurrence for bodily injury and property damage. (iii) General Liability Insurance for all operations(including products liability for any product manufactured,assembled or otherwise worked upon away from the Project site unless such manufacturing or assembly is called for in the Contract Documents) in a form providing coverage not less than that of the Standard Commercial General Liability insurance policy form("Occurrence Form")for operations of the party required to furnish same, including hazards of operations(including explosion,collapse and underground coverage),elevators, independent contractors,products and completed operations, with contractual liability coverage(for any contracts related to the Work)for claims arising out of the Work hereunder for personal injury, bodily injury and property damage in a policy or policies of insurance such that the total available limits combined shall not be less than One-Million Dollars($1,000,000)combined single limit. (iv) Other. Owner reserves the right to add or subtract coverages required by the Contractor. ... If such additions or deletions are made, an equitable adjustment to the contract amount shall be made by change order. (v) The Contractor shall require its subcontractor's compliance with the foregoing requirements. Section 2.14 CONTRACTOR OBLIGATIONS: (a) The Contractor shall not violate,or knowingly permit to be violated,any conditions of the policies of insurance provided by the Owner under the terms of the contract issued pursuant to this "* specification,and shall at all times satisfy the requirements of the insurance companies issuing the same. All requirements imposed by the policies referred to above which are to be performed by ontractor,shall likewise be imposed upon, assumed and performed by each of its Subcontractors. 12 of 20 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 wo ON (b) The insurance may be provided in a policy or policies,primary and excess,including the so-called umbrella or catastrophe form. As and when the Owner may direct copies of the actual insurance policies or renewals or replacements thereof shall be submitted to the O.C.I.P.Administrator in form and content acceptable to the O.C.LP. Administrator. Liability covered shall be as stated below,unless,prior to commencement of any work,written approval is granted by the Owner, acting through its Administrator, for variance from those limits. 2.12.1 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE: 00 (a) Insurance covering all owned,non-owned and hired automobiles,trucks and trailers of the respective parties required to provide and maintain automobile liability coverage. Such insurance shall provide coverage not less than that furnished under the Standard Comprehensive Automobile Liability policy form and in limits not less than,as respects Contractor and all tiers of lO Subcontractors,One-Million Dollars($1,000,000)Combined Single Limit each occurrence for bodily injury and property damage. Such insurance shall cover occurrences both at and away from the Project site. 2.12.2 AIRCRAFT LIABILITY: (a) If aircraft of any kind is used by the Contractor,any tier of Subcontractor or by anyone else on their behalf,the Contractor or Subcontractor shall maintain,or cause the operator of the aircraft to maintain,aircraft public liability insurance insuring passengers and the general public against personal injury,bodily injury or property damage arising from aircraft owned,used,operated or hired in connection with the Work by the Contractor,Subcontractor or anyone else, in limits of Ten-Million Dollars($10,000,000)Combined Single limit for any one occurrence,each aircraft. 2.12.3 GENERAL LIABILITY: Insurance for operations AWAY FROM THE PROJECT SITE,and to cover such liability arising when on the project site but explicitly not covered by Owner provided insurance pursuant 40 to Section 2.1(c)(iii)through(vi),by the Contractor,or any tier of Subcontractor(including products liability for any product manufactured,assembled or otherwise worked upon away from the Project site unless such manufacturing,assembly or otherwise is called for by the Contract Documents between the Owner and Contractor),under a form providing coverage not less than that go of the Standard Commercial General Liability insurance policy form("Occurrence Form")for operations of the party required to furnish same,including hazards of operations(including explosion,collapse and underground coverage),elevators, independent contractors,products and completed operations, for claims arising out of the Work hereunder for personal injury,bodily injury and property damage in policy or policies of insurance such that the total available limits combined shall not be less than One-Million Dollars($1,000,000)per occurrence. "a 2.12.4 WORKERS' COMPENSATION: (a) Insurance in Statutory Limits of the Workers'Compensation Laws of the applicable jurisdiction, with Coverage B--Employer's Liability,to limits of not less than One Million Dollars ($1,000,000),covering operations AWAY FROM THE PROJECT SITE,and to cover such liability arising when on the project site but explicitly not covered by Owner provided insurance pursuant to Section 2.1 (c)(iii)through(vi), of the Contractor or any tier of Subcontractor. 11 of 20 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 (b) If the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors of any tier should fail to comply with their respective obligations,under this specification,the Owner may withhold any payments due the Contractor until such time as the Contractor and its Subcontractors of any tier shall have performed their obligations to the Owner's reasonable satisfaction. Section 2.12 CONTRACTOR-PROVIDED INSURANCE NECESSARY FOR THE WORK,BUT OUTSIDE THE O.C.I.P.: .w (a) Each Contractor shall,at all times during the period in which the contract award pursuant to this specification is in force and effect,provide and maintain insurance,and shall require all Subcontractors of any tier to provide and maintain insurance,of the type and in limits as set forth below in Subsections 2.12.1 to 2.12.4. Except as otherwise provided in Subsection 2.12.1,this insurance is intended to cover employee injury,personal injury,bodily injury and property damage liability for Project Work performed away from the Project site and to cover such liability arising ' when on the Project site but explicitly not covered by Owner-Provided insurance pursuant to Section 2.1(c)(iii)through(vi). Such insurance shall name the parties required to secure same as insureds and shall be in a form and issued by companies acceptable to the Owner. Such insurance shall contain a defense of suits provision. The submitted policy shall contain provisions,either in the original policy or by endorsement,substantially as follows: "(i) Notwithstanding any inconsistent statement in the policy to which this endorsement is attached,or any endorsement or certificate now or hereafter attached hereto, it is agreed that the Owner,the O.C.I.P. Administrator,their officers,agents and employees,(and such other persons or interests as the Owner may specifically designate)are additional insureds hereunder,and that coverage is provided for all operations,uses,occupation, acts and activities of the insured under the Contract for Construction and under any amendments,modifications,extensions or renewals of said Contract for Construction, regardless of whether liability is attributable to the insured or a combination of the insured and an additional insured. The requirements of this paragraph do not apply to Subsection 2.12.4. (ii) The policy to which this endorsement is attached shall not be canceled or reduced in coverage until the Owner has been given thirty(30)days prior written notice by registered mail addressed to the Owner; (iii) The coverage provided by the policy to which this endorsement is attached is primary coverage and any other insurance carried by the Owner is excess coverage; (iv) In the event one of the named or additional insureds incurs liability to any other named or additional insured,this policy shall provide protection for each named or additional insured against whom a claim is or may be made, in the same manner as if separate policies had been issued to each named or additional insured. Nothing contained .rw herein shall operate to increase the company's limit of liability. The requirements of this paragraph do not apply to Subsection 2.12.4. w (v) Notice of occurrences or claims under the policy shall be made to the person designated by the Owner." wr 10 of 20 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 ww Section 2.9 ALTERNATIVE INSURANCE: (a) In the event the Owner for any reason is unable to furnish,or after commencement of work elects ps not to furnish or to continue to furnish,the insurance as specified in this Article,and upon thirty (30)days written notice from the Owner,the following shall be required: "► (i)Contractor shall secure at Owner's cost and thereafter maintain during the performance of this Agreement all or any part of the insurance described in this Article 2 as specified by Owner, and the Owner shall no longer be obligated to furnish that part of the insurance specified. (ii)A11 insurance secured by Contractor or its Subcontractors pursuant to the Owner's requirement under the provisions of this Section 2.9 shall be in policies subject to the Owner's approval,(acting through its OCIP Administrator)as to form,content, limits of liability,cost and issuing company. Section 2.10 PROCEDURES AND SERVICES: (a) The Owner shall formulate and publish its statement of procedures and services relating to the insurance coverages to be provided pursuant to this Article. The Contractor shall fully comply go with,and shall require its Subcontractors of any tier to fully comply with,all of said plans, procedures and services, including but not limited to,completion of all necessary applications for coverage,prompt and full compliance with all audit requests and claim reporting procedures,and full compliance with the safety, loss prevention and loss control programs implemented by,or at the request of,the Owner. Section 2.11 COOPERATION: (a) The Contractor and each of its Subcontractors of any tier for whom insurance is provided by the Owner pursuant to this Article shall: ; (i)Furnish to the OCIP Administrator, its designees or the insurance carriers all information and documentation which the OCIP Administrator may reasonably require from time to time in connection with the issuance of any policies,pursuant to this agreement, in such form and substance as the Administrator may prescribe; (ii)Fumish to the OCIP Administrator, its designees or the insurance carriers certified payroll and accident summary reports as required once a month on the forms provided by the OCIP Administrator and any payroll records required to assist the carriers in any audits. The Contractor will be required under this subsection to segregate its respective reports relating to the Project from records relating to any other work which it may be _ performing and for which insurance is not provided by the Owner pursuant to this specification; (iii)Promptly comply with the recommendations of the insurance carriers so that said insurance carriers will continue to provide the coverage to be maintained by the Owner pursuant to this Article at a reasonable premium. 9 of 20 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 Section 2.5 OWNER'S RIGHT TO AUDIT: (a) The Contractor hereby warrants to the Owner the accuracy of the information provided on the .. "O.C.I.P. Insurance Information Form"and agrees that the Owner, its insurance carriers and/or the O.C.I.P. Administrator may audit the records of the Contractor and its subcontractors to confirm the accuracy of all insurance information provided, including,without limitation,any affect on insurance resulting from changes in the Work. If an audit warrants,additional insurance �* deductions will be collected from the Contractor,or Subcontractors of any and all tiers. If an audit warrants,additional insurance credits will be paid to the Contractor or Subcontractors of any and all tiers. The Contractor further warrants and agrees that the Owner is entitled to all credits in .w O.C.I.P. insurance premiums which accrue from the audit of Contractor's records related to the Owner provided coverage. Contractor acknowledges that even if the Project described in this specification is included under the O.C.I.P.,Contractor will be required to provide those insurance coverages described in Section 2.12 below. Contractor agrees that the Owner may audit all .w records related to such policies Section 2.6 ASSIGNMENT: (b) The Contractor,and each of its Subcontractors of every tier,shall assign to the Owner all return premiums,premium refunds,dividends and other monies due or to become due in connection with the insurance which the Owner provides or the Contractor provides pursuant to Section 2.12 below,to the extent such monies result from Contractor's inaccurate assumptions or from changes in the Work,all of which shall inure to the benefit of the Owner. The Contractor and said Subcontractors of any tier shall execute such other further documentation as may be required by the Owner to effectuate this assignment. Section 2.7 O.C.I.P.CLAIMS: am (a) The Contractor and its Subcontractors of any tier shall assist and cooperate in every manner reasonably necessary in connection with the adjustment of all claims arising out of the operations conducted under,or in connection with,the Project,and shall cooperate with the insurance carrier o fti or carriers of the Owner,the Contractor and its Subcontractors in all litigated claims and demands which arise out of said operations which the insurance carrier or carriers are called upon to adjust or resist. am Section 2.8 O.C.LP.COVERAGES: (a) Although the scope of coverages afforded under this program may provide coverage beyond the as scope required in the Contractor's agreement awarded pursuant to this specification,the Owner makes no warranty or representation that such broad coverage will remain in effect throughout the duration of the work. The Owner further does not warrantor represent that the O.C.I.P.coverages constitute an insurance portfolio which adequately addresses all the risk faced by the Contractor or no its Subcontractor(s). The Contractor and Subcontractors of every tier shall satisfy themselves as to the existence,extent and adequacy of the O.C.I.P. coverages prior to the commencement of work on the Project under any contract. 4W .w� 8 of 20 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 ■w Section III: Excess/Umbrella Liability Use the current rates applicable to on-site project operations as outlined in your current policy. To determine the premium,multiply the rate by the amount of exposure for this project. The exposure will normally be"per$100 of payroll" or"per $1,000 of sales." Please see your policy for verification. Excess/Umbrella Liability Insurance limits of$2,000,000 per occurrence must be provided. This$2,000,000 limit requirement may be lowered as applicable to subcontractors of all tiers upon agreement between Contractor and OCIP Administrator. OCIP Administrator's agreement will not be unreasonably withheld. Section IV: Completed Operations(3 Years) Use the current rates applicable to on-site project operations as outlined in your current policy. To determine the premium,multiply the rate by the amount of exposure for this project. The exposure will normally be"per$100 of payroll" or"per $1,000 of sales." Completed Operations extension of three(3)years must be provided. ,A, Section V: Lower-Tier Contractor Premiums and Allocated Losses(excluding Automobile) If lower-tier contractors are included in your bid,please provide them with a set of these forms and instructions. Attach the lower-tier contractors'forms to your submission. The aggregate premiums must equal the amount report in this section. NOTE: Please see section 2.1(c)to determine which entities are not eligible for coverage under the OCIP. If lower tier contractors have a deductible or retention level within their insurance program,they must also include allocated losses, which they would expect within that deductible/retention on this project. Section VI: Total Premiums f . Sum sections I, II, III, IV and V. r Section VII: Overhead&Profit on Insurance Premiums Please enter the overhead and profit your firm adds to the insurance premiums. Section VIII: Total Amount Excluded from Bid This represents the amount of insurance being excluded from the bid price due to the on coverages being provided under the Owner Controlled Insurance Program. This amount also represents the amount added to the Contract Sum in the event the Owner elects not to include this project in its OCIP. (e) It is recommended that this form be referred to your agent/broker if your estimating staff is unfamiliar with this method of premium computation. Carefully review the"AGREEMENT" ON portion of this form because it allows for bid adjustments if major variances exist between the estimated and audited payrolls. ' 7 of 20 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 �1 Im Section 2.3 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR DEFECTIVE OR DAMAGED WORK: (a) Until final acceptance of the Work by the Owner pursuant to this specification,the Contractor shall have full and complete charge and care of,and shall bear all risk of loss, injury or damage to,the Work or any portion thereof(specifically including Owner-furnished supplies,equipment or other items to be utilized in connection with, or incorporated in,the work)from any cause whatsoever. (b) The Contractor shall rebuild,repair,restore and make good all losses, injuries or damages to the Work or any portion thereof(specifically including Owner-furnished supplies,equipment or other items to be utilized in connection with,or incorporated in,the Work)before final acceptance of the Work. Such rebuilding,repair or restoration shall be at the Contractor's sole cost and expense provided,however,the Owner shall make available the monies from the Builder's Risk policy(ies)which the Owner carries for reconstruction. Section 2.4 NAMED INSUREDS AND INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BY BIDDERS: (a) The Named Insureds on the Owner-provided O.C.I.P.policies shall include the Owner,the O.C.I.P. Administrator,their officers,agents and employees,Contractors and Subcontractors of any tier(but excluding suppliers,vendors,materialmen,truckers or haulers)for whom the Owner has agreed to furnish an O.C.I.P. (b) Coverage shall be limited to the Project site and any locations incidental thereto. (c) Bidders shall complete and include with their bid the Owner-Controlled Insurance Program Insurance Information Form set forth in Exhibit A hereto to provide estimated payroll, premium data and such other information as the OCIP Administrator deems necessary. The form is provided with the bid documents so that bidders can contact their carriers immediately and raise any questions at the pre-bid meeting which Contractors or their carriers may have. (d) Specific Instructions for completing the Contractor's "Insurance Information Form": Section I: Workers'Compensation .w A. For project site operations only,reports the classifications,codes,experience modifier and rates used in your current workers compensation policy. Provide the name of your regular workers'compensation carrier,along with your policy effective dates and Federal Employer ID#. B. If your regular W.C.program includes a deductible or retention level, include allocated losses you would expect within that deductible retention on this project. Section 1I: General Liability A. Use the current rates applicable to on-site project operations as outlined in your current policy. To determine the premium,multiply the rate by the amount of w. exposure for this project. The exposure will normally be "per$100 of payroll" or"per$1,000 of sales." Please see your policy for verification. General Liability Insurance limits of$1 Million per occurrence must be provided. B. If your regular G.L. program includes a deductible or retention level, include allocated losses you would expect within that deductible retention on this project. .e 6 of 20 7:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 on go (b) Coverage will include all materials,supplies and equipment that are intended for specific installation in the project,while such materials,suppliers and equipment are located at the Project Site, in Transit or while temporarily located away from the Project Site for the purpose of repair,adjustment or storage at the risk of one of the insured parties. (c) This insurance will not include coverage for any tools or clothing of workmen or any tools,equipment, protective fencing,scaffolding,temporary structures,forms and equipment owned,rented or used by the Contractor or Subcontractors or any tier and used in the performance of the Work,unless such items are specifically identified in the Contract Documents between The Owner and Contractor and their value is included in the cost of the work. (d) The Owner,its OCIP Administrator,their officers,agents and employees,and Consultant shall not be liable or responsible for any loss or damage whatever to the items excluded in the above paragraph and the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless The Owner,their officers,agents and employees,and _ Consultant,other Contractors and Subcontractors from any claims or causes of action brought by any person or parties as a result of loss or damage to such excluded items. (e) The Builder's Risk policy will be endorsed(a)waiving the carrier's rights of recovery under subrogation against the Owner, its OCIP Administrator,their officers,agents and employees,and Consultant,Contractor and Subcontractors whose interest is insured under such policy,and(b)so as to provide that the insurance company will not cancel such insurance without giving at least ninety(90)days prior written notice to The Owner and any additional insureds as their interests may appear. (f) Contractors shall be liable for a deductible of$5,000 each loss for fire,extended coverages and vandalism and malicious mischief and$5,000 each loss for all other perils unless the Contract Documents provide differently. Section 2.2 CONTRACTOR RETAINS VARIOUS OBLIGATIONS: (a) The furnishing of said insurance by the Owner shall in no way relieve,or limit,or be construed to relieve or limit,the Contractor or Subcontractors of any tier of any responsibility or obligation whatsoever otherwise imposed by this Contract. Nothing contained in this Article 2 of the"Attachment to Construction Specification" shall be construed as: (1)limiting in any way the extent to which the Contractor may be held legally responsible for damages to persons or property,or(2)limiting the indemnity obligations which Contractor has to Owner pursuant to other sections of the Contract for the Work awarded under this specification. The intent of the O.C.I.P. is simply to assure that Contractor has been provided the insurance coverage indicated up to the limits and with the contractor deductible indicated. 5 of 20 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 so Im (e) Owner assumes no obligation to provide insurance other than that evidenced by the policies referred to in Subsections 2.1.1,2.1.2,2.1.3,and 2.1.4. The Owner,however,reserves the right to furnish insurance coverage of various types and limits,provided that such coverage shall not be less than that specified above go (so long as such insurance and limits are reasonably available in the insurance market)and provided that the costs of such insurance shall be borne by the Owner. 2.1.1 WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE. (a) Providing coverage for the statutory limits required by the Workers'Compensation Laws of the applicable jurisdiction, including coverage for the benefits provided under the United States Longshoremen and Harbor Workers'Act,the Jones Act and other extensions,with Coverage B-Employer's Liability, including Maritime,to limits of not less than One Million Dollars($1,000,000),which will cover operations of the Owner,the O.C.I.P.Administrator,Contractor and Subcontractors of all tiers performed in connection with the Work at the Project site. Coverage under the Broad Form All States extension is also included. This insurance is primary for all occurrences at the Project site. 2.1.2 LIABILITY INSURANCE(EXCLUDING AUTOMOBILE AND PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY). (a) Under a form providing coverage not less than that available under a Commercial General Liability insurance policy,and insuring the Owner,the O.C.I.P.Administrator,the Contractor, Subcontractors of all tiers and such other persons or interests as the Owner may designate,in connection with the performance of the Work; including coverage for hazards of operations(including explosion,collapse and underground coverage),elevators, independent contractors,employees as additional insureds,completed operations for three years after substantial completion of the Work,contractual liability coverage(for contracts related to .w the work)and personal injury liability coverage for claims arising out of the Project hereunder,and for personal injury,bodily injury and property damage, in a policy or policies of insurance such that the total available limits to all insureds combined will not be less than Fifty Million Dollars($50,000,000), combined single limits;provided that the Owner, in its sole discretion,may decide the size of any deductible so long as Contractor will not be liable to pay more than the first Two Thousand Five Hundred Dollars($2,500)of the deductible for each occurrence. (b) Contractor may be liable,at its expense, to a maximum of Two Thousand Five Hundred Dollars($2,500) each occurrence to the extent losses payable are attributable to its intentional acts or omissions,or the intentional acts or omissions of its Subcontractors of any tier or any other entity or person for whom it may be responsible. The Contractor's deductible shall encompass the costs of defense, including court costs and attorney's fees. (c) The insurance provided under the O.C.I.P. will not extend coverage for products liability to any insured + party, vendor,supplier,material dealer or others for any product manufactured, assembled or otherwise worked upon away from the Project site, unless such manufacturing or assembly is required by the contract between the Owner and its Contractors. 2.1.3 ALL RISK BUILDER'S RISK,INCLUDING TRANSIT. (a) Insuring the interest of The Owner,Contractor and Subcontractors of all tiers, including coverage on an "All Risk" basis, including,but not limited to,coverage against fire, lightning, wind damage, hail, explosion,riot or civil commotion,aircraft,and other vehicles,collapse and coverage available under the so-called Builders Risk. The polic(ies)for such insurance shall be secured and maintained by the Owner in Am a form and amount not less than the full replacement value of the new and existing building(s)included in the Project. Contractor is aware that insurance companies providing"All Risk" Builder's Risk insurance usually excludes several classes of unusual risk Contractor agrees that the term of the Builder's Risk policy shall define any exclusion which may exist Im on 4 of 20 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 ARTICLE 2. INSURANCE OBLIGATIONS OF OWNER AND CONTRACTOR, IF THE OWNER AWARDS A CONTRACT AND PROVIDES O.C.I.P. INSURANCE x? Section 2.1 INSURANCE PROVIDED BY THE OWNER: (a) Prior to commencement of the Work,the Owner,at its sole option and cost,shall have the right to secure and thereafter maintain,except as otherwise provided herein,the insurance coverages described in Subsections 2.1.1,2.1.2and 2.1.3 at all times specified in this Article 2,covering as insured parties the Owner,Contractor, its Subcontractors of all tiers and such other persons or interests as the Owner may designate in connection with the performance of the Work,and with limits not less than those specified for each coverage. 'w (b) Contractor agrees to furnish as a reimbursable cost of the Work the insurance described in the Contract Documents specifically Article 8 of the Agreement and Article 11 of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions. (c) No insurance coverage provided by the Owner shall extend to the activities or products of the following: (i) Any person and/or organization that fabricates and/or manufactures products,materials and/or supplies away from the project site(s),unless such manufacturing or assembly is required by the contract between the Owner and its Contractors. (ii) Any architect,engineer or surveyor and their consultants except where required by Contract Documents. (iii) Truckers,materialmen,vendors,suppliers,and owner/operators(independent contractors),whose Operation(s)and/or employee(s)is/are engaged solely in the loading,hauling and/or unloading of material,supplies and/or equipment to or from the project-site(s). (iv) Any employee(s)of an enrolled or non-enrolled Contractor or Subcontractor of any tier, including Employee(s)of truckers,materialmen,vendors,suppliers,and owner/operators(independent contractors),which is/are engaged solely in the loading,hauling and/or unloading of material, supplies and/or equipment to or from the project-site(s). (v) Any employee(s)of an enrolled Contractor and Subcontractor of any tier,that does not work and/or generate payroll at the project site(s). No (vi) Any employee(s)of an enrolled Contractor and Subcontractor of any tier,that occasionally visits the project site(s)to make deliveries,pick up supplies and/or personnel,to perform supervisory and/or progress inspections,or for any other reason. no (d) Unless herein otherwise specifically indicated,the policies set forth in Subsections 2.1.1,2.1.2 and 2.1.3 below shall cover only those operations of the insured parties performed at the Project site or sites incidental to the Work called for in the contract between the Owner and the Contractor. OR 3 of 20 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 so w ARTICLE 1. DEFINITIONS 1.1 "Owner" means the Owner,Financier or Sponsor of the Project. 1.2 "OCIP Administrator" means the administrator retained by the Owner to implement and administer the O.C.I.P. In part,the administrator will assure that Contractor implement and effectively manages a .. Contractor Safety Program and assure that Contractor and insurance carriers effectively manage claims resulting from construction of the Project. The O.C.I.P. Adminstrator designated for this project is Acordia Northeast. 1.3 "Contractor"means the person or entity awarded the contract for the Project described in this specification. Contractor understands that all Contractors obligations set forth in the Owner's O.C.I.P., whether performed directly by Contractor or indirectly by its Subcontractors,are the responsibility of Contractor. Contractor shall assure that all Subcontractors of all tiers satisfy all safety program,claim management and applicable insurance requirements. Whenever this specification establishes obligations for Contractor, it shall also be deemed to establish obligations for Subcontractors. For emphasis,this specification sometimes expressly refers to both Contractor and Subcontractors. The term"Contractor" refers to the entity awarded the contract pursuant to this specification. Vendors,suppliers, fabricators, material dealers,drivers and others who merely transport,pick up,deliver or carry materials,personnel, parts or equipment or any other items or persons to or from the Project site shall not be considered Contractor(s),or Subcontractors of any tier for the purpose of insurance coverage. 1.4 "Construction Manager"means the engineering/design firm hired by the Owner to manage the process of construction. 1.5 "Owner-Controlled Insurance Program" ("O.C.I.P.")means an insurance delivery method that assures the Contractor all Subcontractors of any tier,and all other contractors on the construction Project,are insured for Statutory Workers'Compensation,Employers Liability and Commercial General Liability,and such other coverages as the Owner may in writing specifically add or delete for the construction Project. The O.C.I.P. for the construction Project for which this contract is awarded is more fully described in Articles 2 and 3 below. 1.6 "Project" means the construction of the particular improvement set forth in this specification. 1.7 "Safety Manager" means the Safety Manager hired by the Administrator to assist the Owner in assuring that Contractor implements its safety program. 1.8 "Subcontractor" means a person or entity furnishing labor and/or material to the Project pursuant to a .� contract either directly with the Contractor as that party is defined in Section 1.3 hereinabove or as a sub- subcontractor of any tier. ON OR ro Mw am 2 of 20 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 ww lA ATTACHMENT TO CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY OF THE OWNER-CONTROLLED INSURANCE PROGRAM SETTING FORTH CONTRACTOR INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACTOR SAFETY PROGRAM OBLIGATIONS This attachment shall apply only if the Owner,Prior to executing a construction contract,states in writing that this project shall be included in its owner controlled insurance program. If this project is included in the owner controlled insurance program,this attachment shall supplement the terms and conditions applicable to the Contractor which are set forth in the Contract Documents. wu INTRODUCTION The Owner is implementing an Owner-Controlled Insurance Program("O.C.I.P."or"Program")for many on of its construction projects,which will be bid during the term of the O.C.LP. In an O.C.I.P.,the Owner purchases most of the insurance to cover the Worker's Compensation losses,and General Liability losses, (and possibly other coverages for other risks)associated with construction of the projects. This insurance covers the Owner,Contractor and Subcontractors of all tiers,but not vendors coming onto the construction site. An O.C.I.P. allows the Owner to obtain a lower project cost,an effective contractor safety program, and efficient management of claims resulting from the Project. Depending on the insurance market, Contractor expertise,type of project,and other factors,Contractors can sometimes provide insurance for a construction project at a price competitive to the Owner's expected O.C.I.P.cost. Even under an O.C.I.P., the Contractor still provides some coverage as described more particularly below. For the above reasons,the Owner has selected this Project as a candidate for its O.C.I.P. Bidders are required to provide a base bid representing the bidder's total cost assuming that the Owner provides those Project insurance coverages set forth in more detail in Article 2 below. To be responsive to the bid specification,bidders must also include a bid for the cost of the insurance coverages described in the General Conditions. The successful bidder must provide said insurance coverage if,and only if,the Owner decides not to include this Project in its O.C.I.P.at time of award. By bidding on the Work set forth in this specification and accepting a contract for such work,bidder agrees to(1)accept the Owner's O.C.LP. if the Owner includes this Project in the O.C.I.P. and awards a contract based on the base bid,or(2)construct the Project and provide all insurance necessary if the Owner decides not to include this Project in its O.C.I.P. Bidder recognizes that the O.C.LP.benefits the successful bidder and the Owner by reducing overall costs. Bidder recognizes that a critical element in the success of the O.C.I.P. is the successful bidder's obligation to protect persons and property on the construction and related sites so that claims may be avoided and quickly and effectively managed if they occur. Accordingly,bidder no agrees that it has fully reviewed and agrees to the Safety Program obligations set forth in Article 3. Bidder also specifically agrees to all the covenants and conditions set forth in Articles 2 and 3 if the Owner includes this Project in the O.C.I.P. 1 1 of 20 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 3.15 CLEANING UP Add the following paragraphs: 3.15.2 In addition to the provisions of 3.15.1, the Contractor shall perform the following cleaning operations: 1 Remove all marks, stains, fingerprints and other soil and dirt from all decorated and finished work and exposed surfaces, including stains and dirt on existing "® structure caused by Contractor's operations. 5. ARTICLE 5 -SUBCONTRACTORS 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK Add the following paragraphs: 5.2.1.1 Not later than thirty (30) days after the date of commencement, the Contractor shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities proposed as manufacturers for each of the products identified in the technical Specifications. 6. ARTICLE 11 -INSURANCE 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE ,. Add the following paragraphs: 11.1.1.9 The Architect shall be named as an insured under the Contractor's Insurance Policies. 11.1.1.10 Refer to DOC and OCIP requirements. 11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.4.1 Refer to DOC AND OCIP requirements. 11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 11.5.1 Refer to DOC requirements. END OF SECTION Smith Campus Center Supplementary General Conditions 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 4 himself to submit proposals and accept award of contract based upon the use of such materials. Use of such reference is intended to obtain the materials which the Architect has determined are requisite and necessary for the project. Where two or more materials are indicated or specified, the Contractor has the option of which to use. The right is reserved by the Architect to approve or disapprove proposed deviations of design, function, construction or similar differences which will affect the design intent. 3.4.7 If the Contractor requires to substitute any materials for those specified, due to unavailability, he shall submit such requests to the Architect for approval, in writing, stating the amount of credit or extra cost involved, if any. Such requests PO for approval shall clearly define and describe materials for which the substitution is being requested, and such requests shall also include all technical data, manufacturer's literature, catalogs, performance data, test data, specifications, drawings, samples and other information necessary to completely describe the item. Substitutions shall be considered only under the following conditions, and the Architect's decision shall be final and binding in connection with approval or disapproval of requests for substitutions. .l The Contractor shall have placed orders for specified materials promptly upon award of contract. No excuse or proposed substitution will be considered due to unavailability unless proof is submitted that firm orders were placed within thirty (30)days after approval of the progress schedule by the Architect. .2 The reason for the unavailability is beyond the control of the Contractor. Unavailability will be construed as being due to strikes, lockouts, bankruptcy, discontinuance of the manufacture of the materials,or Acts of God. O .3 Requests for such substitution shall be made in writing to the Architect after the award of contract and within ten (10) days of the date that the Contractor ascertains he cannot obtain the materials specified or indicated. 3.4.8 By making requests for substitutions the Contractor: .1 represents that he has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified; .2 represents that he will provide the same warranty for the substitution that he would for that specified; .3 certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs M under this Contract but excludes costs under separate contracts, and excludes the Architect's redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent; and .4 will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for the work to be complete in all respects. Smith Campus Center Supplementary General Conditions 100% Construction Documents: 01.1 1.12 3 ,A 2. Addenda,with those of later date having precedence over those of earlier date. 3. The Supplementary Conditions. .A 4. The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 5. Drawings and Specifications. In the case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the drawings shall typically define location, dimensions, and quantity of the work. The specifications shall typically define performance and quality of the work. Add the following paragraphs: 1.2.5 Dimensions of the work shall not be determined by scale or rule, and figured dimensions shall be followed at all times, unless obvious discrepancies exist. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions at the job site, and shall take any and all measurements necessary to verify the drawings and to properly lay out the work. Any discrepancies affecting the layout of the work shall be called to the Architect's attention. No work so affected shall proceed until such discrepancy is corrected. 1.2.6 Where on any drawing a portion of the work is fully drawn and the remainder is indicated in outline, the portions fully drawn shall apply to all other like positions of the work, unless specifically indicated or specified otherwise. 3. ARTICLE 2 -OWNER we Delete paragraph 2.2.5 and substitute the following: 2.2.5 Refer to DOC requirements. 4. ARTICLE 3 -CONTRACTOR 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS Add the following paragraphs: 3.4.5 Wherever any material is specified in accordance with Federal Specifications, ASTM Specifications, American National Standards Institute, Inc. Specifications, manufacturer's associations specification standards, or other standards, the Contractor shall provide, an affidavit from the manufacturer certifying that the material complies with the particular standard specification if required under each section of the specifications. Where necessary and ..w requested or specified, supporting test data shall be submitted to substantiate compliance. 3.4.6 Wherever any materials are specified or indicated by reference to trade or brand name, model number, catalog number, manufacturer's name, or similar reference, without the use of the words "or equal", or similar work, the Contractor obligates Smith Campus Center Supplementary General Conditions 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 2 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 1. GENERAL CONDITIONS a A. The "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" AIA Document A- 201, 1997, Edition, of The American Institute of Architects, referred to in the Contract Documents as the General Conditions, together with the following Article of the Supplementary General Conditions, which amend, modify and supplement various articles and provisions of the General Conditions are made part of the Contract and shall apply to all work under the Contract. B. All articles and parts of articles of the General Conditions not amended, modified or supplemented by the Supplementary General Conditions, shall remain in full force and effect. Should any discrepancy become apparent between the General Conditions and the Supplementary General Conditions, the Contractor shall notify the Architect, in writing, and the Architect shall interpret and decide such matters in accordance with the provisions of the General w Conditions. t 2. ARTICLE 1 -GENERAL PROVISIONS Add the following sub-paragraphs: 1.1.8 MISCELLANEOUS DEFINITIONS .l Unless otherwise expressly stated, wherever in the Contract Documents the words "approved", "reviewed", "acceptable", "unsatisfactory", "directed", "required", �, required , "permitted", "ordered", "designated", "prescribed", or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the required action, reference, or determination rests with the Owner, the jurisdictional authorities or the Architect. .2 Unless otherwise expressly stated, wherever in the Contract Documents the words "as shown" or "as indicated" or words of like import are used, they shall "noted", "scheduled",mean noted , scheduled , detailed n, or any other diagrammatic or written reference made on the drawings. .3 Unless otherwise expressly stated, wherever in the Contract:Documents the word "provide" is used, it shall mean furnished and installed in place, complete and tested. 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Add the following paragraphs: 1.2.4 In the event of conflicts or discrepancies among the Contract Documents, interpretations will be based on the following priorities: 1. The Agreement. Smith Campus Center Supplementary General Conditions 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 1 Equal Employment Opportunity 15.0 Minority Hiring Plan A. During the performance of this contract the Subcontractor agrees as follows: 1. The Subcontractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, sex, religion, national origin or age. The Subcontractor will take affirmative action to insure that ' applicants are employed and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, color, sex, religion, national origin, handicap, or age. Such action shall include but not be limited to, the following: employment,upgrading,demotion or transfer, recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Subcontractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by an appropriate agency or the federal government WX setting forth the requirements of these nondiscrimination provisions. 2. The Subcontractor will state, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the Subcontractor, that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race,color;sex,-religion.,national origin,handicap,or age. 3. The Subcontractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which the Subcontractor has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding a notice to be provided by the Owner, advising the Labor Union of Workers' Representative of the Subcontractor's commitments under Section 202 of Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965 as amended, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. 4. The Subcontractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965,as amended,and the rules,regulations and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor. to 5. The Subcontractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965 as amended, and by the rules, regulations and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto,and shall permit access to his books,records and accounts by an appropriate agency of the federal government and by the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules,regulations and orders. 6. In the event of the Subcontractor's noncompliance with the equal opportunity conditions of this contract or with any of such rules, regulations or orders, this contract may be cancelled, terminated or suspended in whole or in part, and the Subcontractor may be declared ineligible for further government contracts or 00 federally assisted contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in Fxecutive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, as amended, and such other sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked as provided in said Executive Order, or by rule,regulation or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law. 7. The Construction Manager will include all clauses 15.A.7 inclusive in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by rules,regulations or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to Section 204 of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, as amended, so that such provisions will be binding upon each Subcontractor or Vendor. The Construction Manager will take such action with respect to any Subcontractor or Vendor as the appropriate agency of the federal government may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions, including sanctions for noncompliance provided, however, that in the event the Construction Manager becomes involved m,or is threatened with,litigation with a Subcontractor or Vendor as a result of such direction by the.appropriate agency of the federal government,the Construction Manager go, may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States. 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work,including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor.If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance,the Contractor shall pay the dif- ference to the Owner.The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner,as the case may be,shall be certified by the Architect, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.3.1 The Owner may,without cause,order the Contractor in writing to suspend,delay or inter- rupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. `M 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension,delay or interruption as described in Subparagraph 1.4.3.1.Adjustment of the go Contract Sum shall include profit.No adjustment shall be made to the extent: .1 that performance is,was or would have been so suspended,delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible;or ow .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. IMP 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. ■ 14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall: .1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; .2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work;and .3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice,terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders. 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall be entitled �. to receive payment for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination,along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed. w1a 0 0 . .o 000.�.00 o .�I 01997 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR we CONSTRUCTION The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 9/97 �4VW ow WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. Fill .3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1,or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents;or .4 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor's request,reasonable evidence as required by Subparagraph 2.2.1. 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if,through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Paragraph 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than loo percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion,or 12o days in any 365-day period,whichever is less. Bw 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Subparagraph 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists,the Contractor may, upon seven days'written notice to the Owner and Architect,terminate the Contract and recover �w from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable overhead, profit and damages. 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work,the Contractor may,upon seven additional days'written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Subparagraph 14.1.3. 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor: .1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; .3 persistently disregards laws, ordinances, or rules, regulations or orders of a public authority having jurisdiction;or .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist,the Owner,upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety,if any,seven days'written notice,terminate employment of the Contractor and may,subject to any prior rights of the surety: 1 take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; o, o <>. .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Paragraph 5.4;and o o° .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient.Upon request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in CONSTRUCTION Subparagraph 14.2.1,the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work The American Institute is finished. of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing,inspection or approval under Subparagraphs 13.5.1 and 13-5.2 t.. reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses shall be at the Contractor's expense. 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing,inspection or approval shall,unless otherwise required by ■. the Contract Documents,be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing. 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. 13.6 INTEREST ww 13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or,in the absence thereof,at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. 13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD 13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor: .1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substantial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of Substantial Completion; .2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any applicable statute of .0 limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment;and .3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment,any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to any Warranty provided under Paragraph 3.5,the date of any correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Paragraph 12.2,or the date of actual commission of any other act or failure to perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor or Owner,whichever occurs last. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT c c 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR 0000 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 con- w„R l� secutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor or 0 1 9 9 7 A I A GO their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, for any of the following reasons: GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR 1 issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction which CONSTRUCTION requires all Work to be stopped; The American Institute 2 an act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency which requires all of Architects Work to be stopped; ■w 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 w WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. 40 ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 GOVERNING LAW 111.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves,their partners,successors,assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners,successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants,agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Subparagraph 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party ! ! attempts to make such an assignment without such consent,that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. �Iw 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to an institutional lender providing construction financing for the Project. In such event, the lender shall assume the Owner's rights and obligations under the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment. 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended,or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. ■w 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties,obligations,rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner,Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder,except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract 11101 Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time.Unless otherwise provided,the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner,or with the appropriate public authority,and shall bear all related costs of tests,inspections and approvals.The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may aaA be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals III) which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. 0 0 13.5.2 If the Architect,Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions 000° of the Work require additional testing,inspection or approval not included under Subparagraph 13.5.1, the Architect will,upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 make arrangements for such additional testing,inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to GENERAL CONDITIONS ► the Owner,and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests OF THE CONTRACT FOR and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such CONSTRUCTION costs,except as provided in Subparagraph 13.5.3,shall be at the Owner's expense. The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue,N. Washington,D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. mow 1 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 12.2.1.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents,whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work,including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,shall be at the Contractor's expense. .w 12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.5,if,within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Subparagraph 9.9.1,or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition.During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify Xhe Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction,the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Paragraph 2.4. 12.2.2.2The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of "R Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. .w, 12.2.2.3The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Paragraph 12.2. w 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. .e. 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of '• the Contract Documents. 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Subparagraph 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, �.. and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract o, o Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be o., . , o commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations ��� other than specifically to correct the Work. © 1997 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK GENERAL CONDITIONS 12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment The American Institute shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 w WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. 11.4.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear,subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Subparagraph 11 410. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. 11.4.9 If required in writing by a party in interest,the Owner as fiduciary shall,upon occurrence of an insured loss,give bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties.The cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received h the fiduciary. The owner sha such separate account proceeds so received,whit agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or in accordance with an arbitration award in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Paragraph 4.6.If after such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience,replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article 7. 11.4.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the , the dispute shall be resolved as om Owner's exercise of this power; if such objection is made provided in Paragraphs 4.5 and 4.6.The Owner as fiduciary shall,in the case of arbitration,make settlement with insurers in accordance with directions of the arbitrators. If distribution of 40 insurance proceeds by arbitration is required,the arbitrators will direct such distribution. 11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 11.5.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering Pill faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract. 11.5.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary,of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under tto be made.t, the Contractor shall promptly FIN furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION,OF WORK 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements writing s specifically expressed in the Contract Documents,it replaced at he Contract r bxpense without be uncovered for the Architect's examination and be change in the Contract Time. 410 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered,the Architect naaccord request to see such the ork and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work Contract jII� 0 o�oo Documents,costs of uncovering and replacement shall,by appropriate Change Order,be at the o....,.., OR Owner's expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents,correction C� shall be at the Contractor's expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. GENERAL CONDITIONS Illp OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION The American Institute of Architects 4M 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. Washington,D.C. 20006-5292 on WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.s.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. 00 occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, without mutual written consent,take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation,lapse or reduction of insurance. 11.4.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance. The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law,which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner;this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work,and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. 11.4.3 Loss of Use Insurance. The Owner, at the Owner's option,may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or other hazards,however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property, including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused. 11.4.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall,if possible,include such insurance,and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order. 11.4.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties,real or personal or both,at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project,or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period, the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Subparagraph tt.4.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. 11.4.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur,the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of "■" each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Paragraph 11.4. Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed *■+ to expire,and that its limits will not be reduced,until at least 3o days'prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. 11.4.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against(i)each other and any of their subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employees,each of the other,and (z) the Architect,Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employees,for damages caused by fire " or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph 11.4 or other property insurance applicable to the Work,except such rights as they have nil to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as '* appropriate,shall require of the Architect,Architect's consultants,separate contractors described °• ° in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees of any of c;1 'o° them,by appropriate agreements,written where legally required for validity,similar waivers each .� 0 ©1997 A I A O in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a GENERAL CONDITIONS person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnifica- OF THE CONTRACT FOR tion, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and CONSTRUCTION whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. The American Institute of Architects rw 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington,D.C. 20006-5292 sw WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. 1w shall reimburse the Contractor by increasing the Contract Sum to pay the cost of purchasing and maintaining such optional insurance coverage, and the Contractor shall not be responsible for purchasing any other liability insurance on behalf of the Owner. The minimum limits of liability purchased with such coverage shall be equal to the aggregate of the limits required for Contractor's Liability Insurance under Clauses 11.1.1.2 through 11.1.1.5. 11.3.2 10 the extent damages are covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance, the Owner,Contractor and Architect waive all rights against each other for damages,except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance. The policy shall provide for such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. 11.3.3 The Owner shall not require the Contractor to include the Owner, Architect or other persons or entities as additional insureds on the Contractor's Liability Insurance coverage under MIN Paragraph 11.1. 11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.4.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder's risk"all-risk"or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others,comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained,unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance,until final payment has been made as provided in Paragraph 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Paragraph 11.4 to be covered,whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Project. 11.4.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an"all-risk" or equivalent policy form and shall include, MR without limitation,insurance against the perils of fire(with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse,earthquake, flood,windstorm, falsework, testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. 11.4.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above,the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work.The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor in writing,then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. 0 0 o. .o aw 11.4.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles. © 19 9 7 A I A OO AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 11.4.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site, and also GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR portions of the Work in transit. CONSTRUCTION 11.4.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragraph 9.9 shall not commence until the The American Institute insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Paragraph 4.3 and Article 7. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully a authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor maybe legally liable, ww whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: .1 claims under workers' compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which are applicable to the Work to be performed; .2 claims for damages because of bodily injury,occupational sickness or disease,or death of the Contractor's employees; .3 Claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death of any person other than the Contractor's employees; .4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage; .s claims for damages,other than to the Work itself,because of injury to or destruction of ,s.F tangible property,including loss of use resulting therefrom; .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership,maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; .. .7 claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations;and .a claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18. 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages,whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis,shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. 11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Paragraph 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 3o days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final payment and are reasonably available,an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9.10.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief. l• a 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE o011.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual Q C� liability insurance. © 19 9 7 A I A@ AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 113 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE GENERAL CONDITIONS w OF THE CONTRACT FOR 11.3.1 Optionally, the Owner may require the Contractor to purchase and maintain Project CONSTRUCTION Management Protective Liability insurance from the Contractor's usual sources as primary coverage for the Owner's, Contractor's and Architect's vicarious liability for construction The American Institute operations under the Contract.Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,the Owner of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. Io 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 1" 10.3.1 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl(PCB),encountered on the site by the Contractor,the Contractor shall, XW upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. 10.3.2 The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or RW absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and,in the event such material or substance is found to be present,to verify that it has been rendered harmless.Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and on Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance. The Contractor and the Architect will JIM promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner,the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection.When the material or substance has been rendered harmless,Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor.The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shut-down, delay and start-up,which adjustments shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7. 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law,the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor,Subcontractors,Architect,Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,damages,losses and expenses,including but not limited to attor- neys'fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact on the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Subparagraph 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim,damage,loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of tangible property(other than the Work itself) and provided that such damage,loss or expense is not due to the sole negligence of a party seeking indemnity. 10.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under Paragraph 10.3 for materials and substances brought to the site by the Contractor unless such materials or substances were required by the ��II Contract Documents. 0 0 10.5 If,without negligence on the part of the Contractor,the Contractor is held liable for the °000° cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as 9 9 7 A I A required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and o AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 OR expense thereby incurred. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 10.6 EMERGENCIES 10.6.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the The American Institute Contractor's discretion,to prevent threatened damage,injury or loss.Additional compensation or of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington,D.C. 20006-5292 11111 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.s.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment,except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. .e� 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from: .1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents;or .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents. .rle 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor,a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage,injury or loss to: .r .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein,whether in storage on or off the site,under care,custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors;and so .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements,roadways,structures and utilities not designated for removal,relocation or replacement in the course of construction. 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage,injury or loss. 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract,reasonable safeguards for safety and protection,including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work,the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. III �I 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss o. o° insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents)to property referred to in oo .00 Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a s 0 © 1 9 9 7 A I A@ Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10.2.1.2 GENERAL CONDITIONS and 10.2.1.3,except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or w� OF THE CONTRACT FOR anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of CONSTRUCTION them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The The American Institute foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under of Architects Paragraph 3.18. 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 wl WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. IN have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Subparagraph 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or,if no agreement is reached,by decision of the Architect. 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use,the Owner,Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the ! Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such w inspection and,when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed,the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge,information and belief,and on the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and inspections,the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable.The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Subparagraph 9.10.2 I®1 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment,and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered(less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 3o days'prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents,(4)consent of surety,if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations,such as receipts,releases and waivers of liens,claims,security interests sal or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner.If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made,the Contractor shall iII refund to the Owner all money that the Owner maybe compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. o. o o. b oo.�o0 9.10.3 If,after Substantial Completion of the Work,final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, © 19 9 1 A I A o AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 and the Architect so confirms,the Owner shall,upon application by the Contractor and certifi- GENERAL CONDITIONS ! cation by the Architect,and without terminating the Contract,make payment of the balance due OF THE CONTRACT FOR for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted.If the remaining balance for Work not CONSTRUCTION fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if The American Institute bonds have been furnished,the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that of Architects 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. i i 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT 9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor,within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration,then the Contractor may,upon seven additional days'written notice to the Owner and Architect,stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received.The Contract Time shall be extended appropri- ately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut-down,delay and start-up,plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. *� 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately,is substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ws 9.8.3 upon receipt of the Contractor's list,the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect's inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor's list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use,the Contractor shall,before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon �t notification by the Architect.In such case,the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete,the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate.Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and . , Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon such acceptance and consent of surety,if any,the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 0 0 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE 00 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work © 1 9 9 7 A I A O at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Clause 11.4.1.5 and GENERAL CONDITIONS authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work.Such partial occupancy or use OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, The American Institute retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 go WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. ■ opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Subparagraph 3.3.2,because of 1 defective Work not remedied; .2 third part-claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment; .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .s damage to the Owner or another contractor; .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time,and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay;or .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. Rw 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment,the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect. 9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor,upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work,the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work.The Contractor shall,by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor,require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. 9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. 9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Subparagraphs 9.6.2,9.6.3 and 9.6.4. >ww 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment,a progress payment,or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract I (' Documents. 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of oo. .00 the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or © 1 9 91 A I A 0 AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the GENERAL CONDITIONS Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require OF THE CONTRACT FOR money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, CONSTRUCTION shall create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust The American Institute or shall entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for of Architects breach of the requirements of this provision. 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington,D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.s.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work.If approved in advance by the Owner,payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. !* Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon com- pliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest,and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment.The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge,information and belief,be free and clear of liens,claims,security interests or encum- brances in favor of the Contractor,Subcontractors,material suppliers,or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor,materials and equipment relating to the Work. ..�r 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for .w Payment,either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment,with a copy to the Contractor,for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due,or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1. 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment,that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that,to the best of the Architect's knowledge,information and belief,the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents.The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of .� subsequent tests and inspections,to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However,the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work,(2)reviewed construction means,methods,techniques, •w! sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment,or(4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner,if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Subparagraph 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application,the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as 0 C) 1997 A I A provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1.If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, O AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect GENERAL CONDITIONS is able to make such representations to the Owner.The Architect may also withhold a Certificate rls OF THE CONTRACT FOR for Payment or,because of subsequently discovered evidence,may nullify the whole or a part of a CONSTRUCTION Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's The American Institute of Architects am 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 ' to WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. PIP by the Owner,the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days or other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of morgages,mechanic's ! liens and other security interests. 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect,or of an employee of either,or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner,or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries,unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control,or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration,or by other causes which the Architect determines may justify delay,then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Paragraph 43• 8.3.3 This Paragraph 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. 40 ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.1 CONTRACT SUM go 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and,including authorized adjustments,is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require.This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or ON Architect may require,such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents. VIII ,III 9.3.1.1 As provided in Subparagraph 7.3.8,such applications may include requests for payment on o 0 account of changes in the Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives,or by interim determinations of the Architect,but not yet included in Change Orders. © 1 9 9 7 A I A 9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS - which the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier,unless such OF THE CONTRACT FOR Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay. CONSTRUCTION The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. � Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. we .4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar an taxes related to the Work;and .s additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. on 7.3.7. The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase,if any,with respect to that change. 7.3.8 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner,amounts not in dispute for such changes in the Work shall be included in Applications for Payment accompanied by a Change Order indicating the parties' agreement with part or all of such costs. For any portion of such cost that remains in dispute, the Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs. That determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order,subject wRll to the right of either party to disagree and assert a claim in accordance with Article 4. 7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time,or otherwise reach .A agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate Change Order. 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjust- ment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent , of the Contract Documents.Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor.The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly. w. ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1 DEFINITIONS 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized .. adjustments,allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Paragraph 9.8. 8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By >. o executing the Agreement the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period ofor performing the Work. ©1997 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly,except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in GENERAL CONDITIONS writing,prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of ewe OF THE CONTRACT FOR insurance required by Article it to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner. The date of CONSTRUCTION commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance. Unless The American Institute the date of commencement is established by the Contract Documents or a notice to proceed given im of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 ON WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. M i to 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS Will 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner,Contractor and Architect,stating their agreement upon all of the following: .1 change in the Work; .2 the amount of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Sum;and "w .3 the extent of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Time. 7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed in Subparagraph 7.3.3• 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES apt 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect,directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment,if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive,without invalidating the Contract,order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. P• 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement. on the terms of a Change Order. an 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum,the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: .i mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; PIP .2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; .3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee;or .4 as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.6. 7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive,the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. 7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith,including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them.Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. 7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum,the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Architect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change,including,in case of an increase in the Contract Sum,a reasonable allowance for overhead II�� and profit. In such case,and also under Clause 7.3.3.3,the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate o ° supporting data.Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,costs for the purposes of this Subparagraph 7.16 shall be limited to the following: © t 99 7 A i A I costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 benefits required by agreement or custom,and workers'compensation insurance; GENERAL CONDITIONS .2 costs of materials,supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether OF THE CONTRACT FOR incorporated or consumed; CONSTRUCTION .3 rental costs of machinery and equipment,exclusive of hand tools,whether rented from The American Institute the Contractor or others; of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. � Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 Weonnur. linl7ron<orl nhnrnrnnvino violates U.S.coovriQht laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3,this Article 6 and Articles io,a and 12. 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to w proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or separate contractor's completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. 6.2.3 The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner which are payable to a separate contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction of the Contractor. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs incurred by the Contractor because of delays,improperly timed activities,damage to the Work or defective construction of a separate contractor. 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. no 6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Subparagraph 3.14. 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP 6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish,the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. ewe ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 GENERAL 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract,by Change Order,Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work,subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. o•. 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and °o Architect;a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and O 19 9 7 A I A® may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor;an order for a minor change in the Work may be AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 issued by the Architect alone. GENERAL CONDITIONS rw1 OF THE CONTRACT FOR 71.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract CONSTRUCTION Documents,and the Contractor shall proceed promptly,unless otherwise provided in the Change The American Institute Order,Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 on WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. Subcontractor's Work,which the Contractor,by these Documents,assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights,and shall allow to the Subcontractor,unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement,the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agree- ment,copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement fora portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that: .w 1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Paragraph 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor in writing;and .2 assignment is subject to the prior'rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract. 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 3o days, the w Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably,adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces,and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these-including those portions related to insurance and waiver of,subrogation.If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner,the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Paragraph 4.3. 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for Aifferent portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site,the term"Contractor"in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement. 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of'the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor,who shall cooperate with them.The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the @�* a, C>3, - ctA'o construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The o construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor,separate © 1997 A I A o X11 contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised. AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs CONSTRUCTION so construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces,the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights which apply to the The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington,D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. 4.6.5 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. 4.6.6 Judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 DEFINITIONS 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site.The term"Subcontractor"is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect`contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub-subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor. 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OETHE WORK 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the am Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in.writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities(including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the an Work.The Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity.Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work,the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall beinereased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work. However, no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. o, o o. ,w, o° 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor,person or entity previously selected if the O C>✓U�p o Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitute. 01997 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement,written where legally required for validity,the Contractor shall OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION require each Subcontractor,to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor,to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the The American Institute Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the of Architects 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. subject to mediation as a condition precedent to arbitration or the institution of legal or equitable proceedings by either party. 4.5.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which,unless the parties mutually agree otherwise,shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect.Request for mediation shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of a demand for arbitration but, in such event,mediation shall proceed in advance of arbitration or legal or equitable proceedings,which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 6o days from the date of filing,unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. 4.5.3 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally.The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located,unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4.6 ARBITRATION 4.6.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Subparagraphs 4.3.10,9.10.4 and 9.10.5,shall,after decision by the Architect or 3o days after submission of the Claim to the Architect,be subject to arbitration. Prior to arbitration, the parties shall endeavor to resolve disputes by mediation in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 4.5. 4.6.2 Claims not resolved by mediation shall be decided by arbitration which,unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. The demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association,and a copy shall be filed with the Architect. 4.6.3 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified in Subparagraphs 4.4.6 and 4.6.1 as applicable,and in other cases within a reasonable time after the Claim has arisen, and in no event shall it be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings j= based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations as determined pursuant to Paragraph 13.7. 4.6.4 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner, the Architect, the reference to Architect's employees or consultants, except by written consent containing specific the Agreement and signed by the Architect, Owner,Contractor and any other person or entity sought to be joined. No arbitration shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner,parties other than the Owner,Contractor,a separate contractor as described in Article 6 and other persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or law whose presence is Ilj� required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration. No person or entity other than the Owner, Contractor or a separate contractor as described in Article 6 shall be included as an o 0 original third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose interest or responsibility is oo. •oo � C7 insubstantial.Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute O i 9 9 7 A I A consent to arbitration of a Claim not described therein or with a person or entity not named or AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 described therein.The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an GENERAL CONDITIONS !� OF THE CONTRACT FOR additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically CONSTRUCTION enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington,D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. so condition precedent to mediation,arbitration or litigation of all Claims between the Contractor so and Owner arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless 3o days have passed after the ' Claim has been referred to the Architect with no decision having been rendered by the Architect. The Architect will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner. ' 4.4.2 The Architect will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of the Claim take one or more of the following actions: (i) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim,(4)suggest a compromise,or(5) advise the parties that the Architect is unable .. to resolve the Claim if the Architect lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Architect concludes that, in the Architect's sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Architect to resolve the Claim. 4.4.3 In evaluating Claims,the Architect may,but shall not be obligated to,consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Architect in rendering a decision. The Architect may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner's expense. 4.4.4 If the Architect requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data,such party shall respond,within ten days after receipt of such request,and shall either provide a response on the requested supporting data, advise the Architect when the response or supporting data will be furnished or advise the Architect that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Architect will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. 4.4.5 The Architect will approve or reject Claims by written decision,which shall state the rea- sons therefor and which shall notify the parties of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both.The approval or rejection of a Claim by the Architect shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and arbitration. 4.4.6 When a written decision of the Architect states that (1) the decision is final but subject to mediation and arbitration and (2) a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 3o days after the date on which the party making the demand receives the w.. final written decision,then failure to demand arbitration within said 3o days'period shall result in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor. If the Architect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated,such decision may ■. be entered as evidence, but shall not supersede arbitration proceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties concerned. INS 4.4.7 Upon receipt of a Claim against the Contractor or at any time thereafter,the Architect or the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety,if any,of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor's default,the Architect or the Owner VIII .sr may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. p O °o'ccA'o° 4.4.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien,the party asserting such Claim No [� may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines (D 19 9 7 A I A AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 prior to resolution of the Claim by the Architect,by mediation or by arbitration. oft GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR 4.5 MEDIATION CONSTRUCTION 4.5.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, except Claims relating to aesthetic The American Institute effect and except those waived as provided for in Subparagraphs 4.3.10,9.10.4 and 9.10.5 shall,after OR of Architects initial decision by the Architect or 3o days after submission of the Claim to the Architect, be 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 40 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. 4.3.5 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum,written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Paragraph io.6. 4.3.6 If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited to (1) a written interpretation from the Architect, (2) an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault,(3) a written order for a minor change iii the Work issued by the Architect, (4) failure of payment by the Owner, (5) termination of the Contract by the ? " Owner, (6) Owner's suspension or (7) other reasonable grounds, Claim shall be filed in accordance with this Paragraph 4.3. an 4.3.7 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL TIME 4.3.7.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time,written notice as provided herein shall be given.The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work.In the case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary. 4.3.7.2 If adverse weather conditions are`.the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim on shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. on 4.3.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party,or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible,written notice of such injury or damage,whether or not insured,shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. 4.3.9 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. 4.3.10 Claims for Consequential Damages. The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes: 1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons;and .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there;for losses of financing,business and repu- tation,and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable,without limitation,to all consequential damages due to either oo �o party's termination in accordance with Article 14.Nothing contained in this Subparagraph 4.3.10 1=� shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated direct damages, when applicable, in © t 9 9 7 A I A O AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 aCCOCdaIlCe with the requirements Of the Contract Documents. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR 4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES CONSTRUCTION 4.4.1 Decision of Architect. Claims, including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect but excluding those arising under Paragraphs 10.3 through 10.5, shall be referred The American Institute initially to the Architect for decision. An initial decision by the Architect shall be required as a of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington,D.C. 20006-5292 i i 0 -I WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2,then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish ,, such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made for them. 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings.When making such interpretations and initial decisions,the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor,will not show partiality to either and ew will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith. 4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking,as a matter of �. right, adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money,extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim" also includes.other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to, ..� the Contract.Claims must be initiated by written notice.The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. 4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days-after w occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim,whichever is later.Claims must be initiated by written notice to the Architect and the other party. OR 4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution of a Claim except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Subparagraph 9.7A and Article 1.4,the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4.3.4 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions.If conditions are encountered at the site which are (r)subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature,which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents,then notice by the observing party shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of fhe conditions.The Architect +� will promptly investigate such conditions and,if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of,or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those a o indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, 00 o° the Architect shall so notify the Owner and Contractor in writing,stating the reasons.Claims by w either party in opposition to such determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect 0 1 9 9 7 A I A O has given notice of the decision. If the conditions encountered are materially different, the AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted,but if the Owner and Contractor GENERAL CONDITIONS WR OF THE CONTRACT FOR cannot agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,the adjustment shall be CONSTRUCTION referred to the Architect for initial determination, subject to further proceedings pursuant to The American Institute Paragraph 4.4• go of Architects 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. Washington,D.C. 20006-5292 tm WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. '' 4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwise provide in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communtCommun cationss by and with i the about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract.Architect. Communicati Architect's consultants s lasu be lierh shalgl bethhrough the Contrrac or.Communicbation by and Subcontractors and material pp with separate contractors shall be through the Owner. 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications w will s Payment, for Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor Payment in such amounts. 4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract qX Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable,the Architect will have .5.2 and authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13 13.5.3, Whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors,material and equipment suppliers,their agents or employees,or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take Dal r and appropriate action upon the but only for the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product P limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.The Architect's ol of the110wner,uConiractorbor, le ull■ promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities separate contractors,while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of � determining the accuracy and completeness of o other d quipment oreystemstiall of for substantiating instructions for installation performance of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents.The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations 40 under Paragraphs 3.3,3.5 and 3.12.The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or,unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect,of any construction means, methods, techniques,sequences or procedures. The Architect's approval of a specific item shall 011111 not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives,and may 4.2.8 authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Paragraph 7.4. 4,2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections will(dreceive1land fodrward or to the Owner, for the Completion and the date of final completion, III' Owner's review and records,written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor,and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance o with the requirements of the Contract Documents. oo©o 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project o t 9 9 A I A o AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 representatives to assist in carrying out the Arch�e rosectsreoresbentaitivestshall be as set forthein GENERAL CONDITIONS the site. The project P responsibilities and limitations of authority o s OF THE CONTRACT FOR an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents. CONSTRUCTION 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and The American Institute of Architects requirements of,the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. no No construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph 3A8. 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Paragraph 3.18 by an sm employee of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Subparagraph 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or No benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers'compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. .w ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1 ARCHITECT 4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully Im practicing architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Architect"means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative. an 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted,modified or extended without written consent of the No Owner,Contractor and Architect.Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. 4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated,the Owner shall employ a new Architect against whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract .r. Documents shall be that of the former Architect. 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT No 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents,and will be an Owner's representative(1)during construction,(2)until final payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time during the one-year period for no correction of Work described in Paragraph 12.2.The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents,unless otherwise modified in writing in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. so 4.2.2 The Architect,as a representative of the Owner,will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of the Contractor's operations (1) to become generally familiar with and to keep the Owner informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, (2) to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work,and(3)to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed,will be in accordance with the Contract Documents.However,the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will neither have control over or charge of, nor be VIII responsible for,the construction means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures,or for the .� safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the 0 o Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in 00 •o° Subparagraph 3.3.1. 0 © 1 9 9 7 A I A O 4.2.3 The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have GENERAL CONDITIONS control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION Subcontractors,or their agents or employees,or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. The American Institute me of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington,D.C. 20006-5292 ew WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. PM 3.13 USE OF SITE 3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law,ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. ew 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering such construction,or by excavation.The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering'the Work. 3.15 CLEANING UP 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of 0W waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract.At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials,rubbish,the Contractor's tools,construction equipment,machinery and'surplus materials. 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK 3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. 3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS 3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees.The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof,but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design,process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design,process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such Rol information is promptly furnished to the Architect. 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims, damages, losses or th I t expenses are not covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by e Ilj Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 11.3,the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless o 0 60 the Owner,Architect,Architect's consultants,and agents and employees of any of them from and oo, ,00 against claims,damages,losses and expenses,including but not limited to attorneys' fees,arising [� out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or o 19 97 A i A expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 � GENERAL CONDITIONS tangible property (other than the Work itself),but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts OF THE CONTRACT FOR or omissions of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them CONSTRUCTION or anyone for whose acts they may be liable,regardless of whether or not such claim,damage,loss The American Institute or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be of Architects 1735 New York Avenue,N.W Washington,D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. M on the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors.Submittals which are not .eA marked as reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents and approved by the Contractor may be returned by the Architect without action. 3.12.6 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals,the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto,or will do so,and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents .., require submittal and review of Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall am not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and (i) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect's approval thereof. 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals,to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such written notice the Architect's ..w approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services which constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods,techniques,sequences and procedures.The Contractor shall not be required to provide no professional services in violation of applicable law.If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems,materials or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents,the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance ,,w and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design professional,whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings,calculations,specifications,certifications,Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the .o Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect o, o shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, so oo •oo certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services 0 1 9 9 7 A I A 0 must satisfy.Pursuant to this Subparagraph 3.12.10,the Architect will review,approve or take other as AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with g P OF THE CONTRACT FOR concept g information given and the desi n expressed in the Contract Documents.The Contractor CONSTRUCTION shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the on The American Institute Contract Documents. of Architects 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 Ift WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case. 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 3.10.1 The Contractor,promptly after being awarded the Contract,shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work.The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents,shall be revised at on appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project,shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents,and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. ON 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the Architect's approval,a schedule of submittals which is coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. wo 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect. awl 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE 3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record field changes and selections made during construction,and one record copy of approved Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar required submittals.These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings,diagrams,schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures,diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials,equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. �w► 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents.The purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required by the Contract Documents the way by which the Contractor o 0 proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract 0000° Documents. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may ©19 9 7 A I A be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals which are not required by the Contract AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 Documents may be returned b the Architect without action. GENERAL CONDITIONS Y Y OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals required by The A�Americ sn Institute 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington,D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. am Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation,or normal wear and tear and normal usage.If required by the Architect,the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. 3.6 TAXES 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales,consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by ; the Contractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. ; t 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections an necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received or negotiations concluded. owl 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. 3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,building codes,and rules and regulations. However, if the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification. 3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws,statutes,ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. 3.8 ALLOWANCES 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents.Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct,but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection. I 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents: .i allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes,less applicable trade discounts; fill .2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall 0 o be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; .3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect © i 9 9 7 A I A o (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Clause 3.8.2.1 and AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS (2) changes in Contractor's costs under Clause 3.8.2.2. OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner in sufficient The American Institute time to avoid delay in the Work. of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. M. I �Iw 3.2.3 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions issued by the Architect in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Subparagraphs 3.2A and 3.2.2, the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Subparagraphs 4.3.6 and 4.3.7. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Subparagraphs 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as "a would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations.The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents or for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency,omission or difference and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work,using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means,methods,techniques,sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the OWN Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures,the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and,except as stated below,shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures may not be safe,the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor, the Owner shall be solely responsible for any resulting loss or damage. 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Con- tractor's employees,Subcontractors and their agents and employees,and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for or on behalf of the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work,whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. on 3.4.2 The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order. (IjI 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's o, o employees and other persons carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit °oo.�oo° employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. © 19 9 7 A I A 3.5 WARRANTY AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment OF THE CONTRACT FOR furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or CONSTRUCTION permitted by the Contract Documents,that the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the The American Institute quality required or permitted,and that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. i aw I� accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been + eliminated;however,the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity,except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3. ow 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the so Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may after such seven-day period give the Contractor a second written notice to correct such deficiencies within a three-day period. If the Contractor within such three-day period after receipt of such second notice fails to commence and continue to correct any deficiencies, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting e� from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies,including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect.If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts,the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. wsa ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3.1 GENERAL 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Contractor"means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. I� 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor. 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 3.2.1 Since the Contract Documents are complementary, before starting each portion of the Work,the Contractor shall carefully study and compare the various Drawings and other Contract I Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.3,shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it.These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor and are not for the .�. purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, any errors,inconsistencies or omissions discovered by the Contractor shall be reported °• promptly to the Architect as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. Is <>. �.00 O © 19 9 7 A I A 3.2.2 Any design errors or omissions noted by the Contractor during this review shall be AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 reported promptly to the Architect,but it is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the OR GENERAL CONDITIONS Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional unless otherwise OF THE CONTRACT FOR specifically provided in the Contract Documents.The Contractor is not required to ascertain that CONSTRUCTION the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building me The American Institute codes, and rules and regulations, but any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the of Architects Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect. 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 to WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. 111110 1 ON the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's W or Architect's consultants'copyrights or other reserved rights. ARTICLE 2 OWNER 2.1 GENERAL 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Subparagraph 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written �w request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic's lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located,usually referred to as the site, and the wl Owner's interest therein. 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 2.2.1 The Owner shall,at the written request of the Contractor,prior to commencement of the !!!�° Work and thereafter, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract.Furnishing of such evidence shall be a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the Work. After such evidence has been furnished, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor. 2.2.2 Except for permits and fees,including those required under Subparagraph 3.7.1,which are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents,the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals,easements,assessments and charges required for construction,use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. 2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics,legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project,and a legal description of the site.The Contractor shall no be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. _ 2.2.4 Information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness.Any other information or services relevant to the Contractor's performance of the Work under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner after receipt from the Contractor of a written request for such information or services. 0 0 o. b oo.�.00 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor will be furnished, C� free of charge, such copies of Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for © 1 9 9 7 A I A o execution of the Work. AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK CONSTRUCTION 2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Paragraph 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. � Washington,D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. i complementary,and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all;performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions,sections and articles,and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. 1.3 CAPITALIZATION 1.3.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are (>) specifically defined,(2)the titles of numbered articles and identified references to Paragraphs,Subparagraphs rIw and Clauses in the document or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. 1.4 INTERPRETATION 1.4.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as"all"and"any"and articles such as"the"and"an,"but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. 1.5 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Im 1.5.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor. If either the Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract Documents,the Architect shall identify such unsigned Documents upon request. 1.5.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.6 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE w 1.6.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents, including those in electronic form, prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants are Instruments of Service through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The Contractor may retain one record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect or the Architect's consultants, and unless otherwise .w indicated the Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors of them and (III will retain all common law,statutory and other reserved rights,in addition to the copyrights.All copies of Instruments of Service,except the Contractor's record set,shall be returned or suitably o, o accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of the Work. The Drawings, °o o° Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants,and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor,are for use solely with respect to this Project.They are © 1 9 9 7 A I A® not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material or no AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR without the specific written consent of the Owner,Architect and the Architect's consultants.The CONSTRUCTION Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are am The American Institute authorized to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and other of Architects documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 ' w WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.coovrivht laws and will sirhiart th=violator to leoal omsPrution 4• 1 w ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement), Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), ea Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract.A Modification is (t) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect.Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement,the Contract Documents do not include other documents such as bidding requirements (advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the Contractor's bid or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements). 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents Form the Contract for Construction.The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements,either written or oral.The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification.The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (t)between the Architect and Contractor,(2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and Architect or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor.The Architect shall,however,be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties. 1.1.3 THE WORK The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed,and includes all other labor,materials,equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations.The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. !!MI 1.1.4 THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors. 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details,schedules and diagrams. 111111110 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written require- ments for materials,equipment,systems,standards and workmanship for the Work,and perfor- 1111110 mance of related services. o 0 o. .b 1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL The Project Manual is a volume assembled for the Work which may include the bidding o 1 9 9 7 A I A o requirements,sample forms,Conditions of the Contract and Specifications. AEA DOCUMENT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS CONSTRUCTION ON 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are The American Institute P of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington,D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. Substitution of Subcontractors Title to Work 5.2-3,5.2.4 9.3.2 9.3.3 Substitution of Architect UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 4.1.3 12 Substitutions of Materials Uncovering of Work 3.4.2,3-5.1,7.3-7 12.1 Sub-subcontractor,Definition of Unforeseen Conditions 5.1.2 4.3-4,8.3-1,10.3 Subsurface Conditions Unit Prices 4.3.4 4.3.9,7.3.3.2 Successors and Assigns Use of Documents 13.2 1.1.1,1.6,2.2.5,3.12.6,5.3 Superintendent Use of Site 3.9,10.2.6 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 Supervision and Construction Procedures Values,Schedule of 1.2.2,3.3,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3,6.2.4, 9.2,9.3.1 7.1.3,7.3.6,8.2,8.3.1,9.4.2,10,12,14 Waiver of Claims by the Architect Surety 13.4.2 4.4.7,5.4.1.2,9.8.5,9.10.2,9.10.3,14.2.2 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor Surety,Consent of �w Y 4.3.10,9.10.5,11-4.7,13-4.2 9.10.2,9.10.3 Waiver of Claims by the Owner Surveys 4-3-10,9.9-3,9.10.3,9.10.4,11.4.3,11.4.5,11.4.7, 2.2.3 12.2.2.1,13.4.2,14.2.4 �o Suspension by the Owner for Convenience Waiver of Consequential Damages 14.4 4.3.10,14.2.4 Suspension of the Work Waiver of Liens 5.4.2,14-3 9.10.2,9.104 ww Suspension or Termination of the Contract Waivers of Subrogation 4.3.6,5.4.1.1,11.4.9,14 6.1.1,11.4.5,11.4.7 Taxes Warranty wu 3.6,3.8.2.1,7.3.6.4 3.5,4.2.9,4.3.53,9.3.3,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10.4,12.2.2, Termination by the Contractor 13.7.1.3 4.3-10,14.1 Weather Delays Termination by the Owner for Cause 4.3.7.2 '" 4.3.10,5.4.1.1,14.2 Work,Definition of Termination of the Architect 1.1.3 4.1.3 Written Consent w Termination of the Contractor 1.6,3.4.2,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,4.3.4,4.6.4,9.3.2, 14.2.2 9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3,11-4.1,13.2,13-4.2 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT Written Interpretations 14 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6 Tests and Inspections Written Notice 3-1.3,3-3.3,4-2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.3,9.9.2, 2.3,2.4,3.3.1,3.9,3.12.9,3.12.10,4.3,4.4.8,4.6.5, 9.10.1,10.3.2,11.4.1.1,12.2.1,13.5 5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7,9.10,10.2.2,10.3,11.1.3,11.4.6, TIME 12.2.2,12.2-4,13.3,14 8 Written Orders Time, Delays and Extensions of 1.1.1,2.3,3.9,4.3.6,7,8.2.2,11.4.9,12.1,12.2,13.5.2, o a 14.3.1 s1 3.2.3,4.3.1,4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3.1, L� 7.4.1,7.5.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7-1,10-3.2,1o.6.1,14.3.2 © 1997 A I A Time Limits O AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 2.1.2,2.2,2.4,3.2.1,3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1, GENERAL CONDITIONS 4.2,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,5.2,5.3,5.4,6.2.4,7.3,7.4, 8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.4.1,9.5 9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9, OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 9.10,11.1.3,11.4.1.5,11.4.6,u.4.1o,1z.2,13.5 13.7,14 Time Limits on Claims >Iw The American Institute 4.3.2,4.3.4,4.3-8,4.4,4.5,4.6 of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 » WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright 1JW and will subject the violator to legal prosecption_ M ON Product Data,Definition of Safety of Persons and Property 10.2,10.6 Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings Safety Precautions and Programs ;.1 t,3.12,4.2.7 3.3.1,4.2.2,4.2.7,5.3-1,10.1,10.2,io.6 Progress and Completion Samples,Definition of 4.2.2,4.3.3,8.2,9.8,9-9.1,14.1.4 3.12.3 Progress Payments Samples,Shop Drawings, Product Data and 4.3.3,9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3,13.6,142.3 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 Project,Definition of the Samples at the Site, Documents and 1.1.4 3.11 Project Management Protective Liability Insurance Schedule of Values 11.3 9.2,9.3.1 tr Project Manual, Definition of the Schedules,Construction 1.1.7 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.1.3 Project Manuals Separate Contracts and Contractors 2.2.5 1.1.4,3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,4.2.7,4.6.4,6,8.3.1,11.4.7, Project Representatives 12.1.2,12.2.5 4.2.10 Shop Drawings,Definition of Property Insurance 3.12.1 III 10.2.5,11.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 3.1 t'3.12'4.2.7 10 Site, Use of Regulations and Laws 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 1.6,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6, Site Inspections 9.6.4,9.9.1,10.2.2,11.1,11.4,13.1,13.4,13.5.1,13.5.2, 1.2.2,3.2.1,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.10.1,13.5 13.6,14 Site Visits,Architect's Rejection of Work 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1,13.5 3.5.1,4.2.6,12.2.1 Special Inspections and Testing Releases and Waivers of Liens 4.26,12.2.1,13.5 9.10.2 Specifications,Definition of the Representations i.t.6 1.5.2,3.5.1,3.12.6,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.4.2,9.5.1, Specifications,The 9.8.2,9.10.1 1.1.1,1.1.6,1.1.7,1.2.2,1.6,3.11,3.12_10,3.17 !-0 Representatives Statute of Limitations 2.1.1,3.1.1,3.9,4.1.1,4.2.1,4.2.10,5.1.1,5.1.2,13.2.1 4.6.3,12.2.6,13.7 Resolution of Claims and Disputes Stopping the Work 4.4,45,4.6 2.3,4.3.6,9.7,10.3,14.1 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work Stored Materials 3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8,5.3.1,6.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1,10 6.2.1,9.3.2,10.2.1.2,10.2.4,11.4.1.4 Retainage Subcontractor,Definition of 9.3.1,9.6.2,9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 5.1.1 Review of Contract Documents and Field SUBCONTRACTORS Conditions by Contractor 5 1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3,3.12.7,6.1.3 try Subcontractors,Work by Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner 1.2.2,3.3.2,3.12.1,4.2.3,5.2.3,5.3,5.4 93.1.2,9.6.7 and Architect 3.10.1,3.10.2,3.11,3.12,4.2,5.2,6.1.3,9.2,9.8.2 Subcon,5.4,9.3 Relations � 5.3,5.4,9.3.1.z,9.6,9.10 10.2.1,11.4.7,11.4.8,14.1, Review of Shop Drawings,Product Data and 14.2.1,14-3.2 Samples by Contractor °occA'o° Submittals [� 3.12 1.6,3.10,3.11,3.12,4.27,5.2.1,5.2.3,7.3.6,9.2,9.3, © 1997 AiAo Rights and Remedies 9.8,9,9.1,9.10,2,9.10.3,11.1.3 AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 1.1.2,2.3,2.4,3.5.1,3.15.2,4.2.6,4.3.4,45,4.6,5.3, .4,6.1,6.3,7.3.1,8-3,9.5.1,9.7,[0.2-5,10.3,12-1.2, 6.1.1, Waivers of GENERAL CONDITIONS 5 5. 4 13 4 14 6.1.1,11.4.5,11.4.7 OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION Royalties, Patents and Copyrights Substantial Completion 3�7 42.9,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,99.1,9.10.3, The American Institute 9.10.4.2,12.2,13.7 of Architects Rules and Notices for Arbitration Substantial Co 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. 4.6.2 rpletion,Definition of 9.8.1 Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. Mediation Owner's Loss of Use Insurance 4.4.1,4.4.5,4.4.6,4.4.8,4.5,4.6.1,4.6.2,8.3.1,10.5 11.4.3 Minor Changes in the Work Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.6,7-t,7.4 1.1.2,5.2,5.3,5-4,9.6.4,9.10.2,1 2.2 4--- MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work 13 2.4,12.2.4.14.2.2.2e Modifications,Definition of Owner's Right to Clean Up 1.1.1 6.3 Modifications to the Contract Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to 1.1.1,1.1.2,3.7.3,3.11,4.1.2,4.2.1,5.2.3,7,8.3.1,9.7, Award Separate Contracts >w 10-3.2,11-4.1 6.1 Mutual Responsibility Owner's Right to Stop the Work 6.2 2.3 ew Nonconforming Work,Acceptance of Owner's Right to Suspend the Work 9.6.6,9.9.3,123 14.3 Nonconforming Work,Rejection and Correction of Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract 2.3,2.4,3.5.1,4.2.6,6.2.5,9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.4, 14.2 'ee" 12.2.1,13.7-1.3 Ownership and Use of Drawings,Specifications Notice and Other Instruments of Service 2.2.1,2.3,2.4,3.2.3,3.3.1,3.7.2,3.7.4,3.12.9,4.3, 1.1.1,1.6,2.2.5,3.2.1,3.11.1,3.17.1,4.2.12,5.3 t1e11 4.4.8,4.6.5,5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7,9.10,10.2.2,11.1.3, Partial Occupancy or Use 11.4.6,12.2.2,12.2.4,13.3,13.5.1,13.5.2,14.1,14.2 9.6.6,9.9,11.4-1-5 Notice, Written 2.3,2.4,3.3.1,3.9,3.12• 12.10, Patching,Cutting and 9,3• 4.3,4.4.8,4.6.5, 3.14,6.2.5 '""� 5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7,9.10,10.2.2,10.3,11.1.3,11.4.6, 12.2.2,12.2.4,13.3,14 Patents Notice of Testing and Inspections 3.17 13-5.1,13-5.2 Payment,Applications for 00 Notice to Proceed 4.2-5,7.3.8,9.2,9-3,9-4,9.5.1,9.6-3,9.7.1,9.8.5, 8.2.2 9.10.1,9.10.3,9.10.5,11-1.3,14.2-4,14-4.3 Notices, Permits, Fees and Payment,Certificates for 2.2.2,3.7,3.13,7.3.6.4,10.2.2 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7.1,9.10.1, O 9.10.3,13.7,14.1.1.3,14.2.4 Observations,Contractor's Payment, Failure of 1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3,4.3.4 4.3.6,9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2,14.1.1.3,14.2.1.2,13.6 so Occupancy Payment,Final 2.2.2,9.6.6,9.8,11.4.1.5 Orders,Written 4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2,9.8.2,9.to,11.1.2,11.1.3,11.4.1, 11.4.5,12.3.1,13.7,14.2.4,14.4.3 1.1.1,2.3,3.9,4.3.6,7,8.2.2,11.4.9,12.1,12.2,13.5.2, CIA Payment Bond,Performance Bond and 14.3.1 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9,10.3,11-4.9,11.5 OWNER Payments,Progress 2 4.3.3,9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3,13.6,14.2.3 t Owner,Definition of PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 2.1 9 Owner,Information and Services Required of the Payments to Subcontractors 2.1.2,2.2,3.2.1,3.12.4,3.12.10,4.2-7,4.3.3,6.1.3, 6.1.4,6.2.5,9.3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.10.3,10.3.3, 5.4.2,9.5.1.3,9.6.2,9.6-3,9.6-4,9.6-7,11-4.8, 11.2,11.4,13.5.1,13.5.2,14.1.1.4,14.1.4 14.2.1.2 Owner's Authority PCB 3.1 1.6,2.1.1,2.3,2.4,3.4.2,3.8.1,3.12.10>3.14-2,4.1.2, 4.1.3,4.2.4,4.2.9,4.3.6,4.4.7,5-2.1,5.2.4,5.4.1, Performance Bond and Payment Bond 6.1,6.3,7.2.1,7.3.1,8.2.2,8.3.1,9.3.1,9.3.2,9.5.1, 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3,11.4.9,11.5 O 1 9 9 7 A I A OO 9.9.1,9.10.2,10.3.2,11.1.3,11.3.1,11.4.3,11.4.10, Permits, Fees and Notices AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 12.2.2,12.3.1,13.2.2,14.3,14.4 2.2.2,3.7,3-t3,7-3.6-4,10.12 GENERAL CONDITIONS Owner's Financial Capability OF THE CONTRACT FOR PERSONS AND PROPERTY,PROTECTION OF CONSTRUCTION 2.21'13.2.2,14.1-1.5 10 Owner's Liability Insurance Polychlorinated Biphenyl The American Institute 11.2 10-3.1 of Architects 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 ttr WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. Faulty Work Insurance Companies,Consent to Partial Occupancy (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) 9-9.1,11.4-1.5 Final Completion and Final Payment Insurance Companies,Settlement with 4.2.1,42.9,4.3.2,9.8.2,9.10,11.1.2,11.1.3,11.4.1, 11.4.10 11.4.5,12.3.1,13.7,142.4,14.4.3 Intent of the Contract Documents Financial Arrangements,Owner's 1.2.1,4.2.7,4.2.12,4.2.13,7.4 21.1,13.2.2,14.1.1.5 Interest Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance 13.6 11.4 Pill Interpretation GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.2,3,1.4,1.4, I.t, 1 3 4• 4.3.1,5.1,6.1.2,8.1.4 Interpretations,Written Governing Law 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6 "A 13.1 Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required Guarantees(See Warranty) 4.6.4 Hazardous Materials Judgment on Final Award 10.2.4,103,10.5 4.6.6 Identification of Contract Documents Labor and Materials, Equipment 1.5.1 1.1.3,1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, ON Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 42.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.6,9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3, 5.2.1 9.10.2,10.2.1,10.2.4,14.2.1.2 Indemnification Labor Disputes 3-17,3.18,9.10.2,10-3.3,10.5,11.4-1.2,11.4.7 8.3.1 Information and Services Required of the Owner Laws and Regulations 2.1.2,2.2,3.2.1,3.12.4,3.12.10,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, 1.6,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6, 6.1.4,6.2.5,9.3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.10.3,10.3.3, 9.6.4,9.9.1,10.2.2,11.1,11.4,13.1,13.4,13.5.1,13.5.2, 11.2,11.4,13.5.1,13.5.2,14.1.1.4,14.1.4 13.6,14 Injury or Damage to Person or Property Liens 4.3.8,10.2,1o.6 2.1.2,4.4.8,8.2.2,9.3.3,9.10 Inspections Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder 3.1.3,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.2, 4.6.4 9.8.3,9.9.2,9.10.1,12.2.1,13.5 Limitations,Statutes of Instructions to Bidders 4.6.3,12.2.6,13.7 1.1.1 Limitations of Liability IIIII Instructions to the Contractor 2.3,3.2.1,3.5.1,3.7.3,3.12-8,3.12.10.3.17,3A8,4.2.6, 3.2.3,3.3.1,3.8.1,4.2.8,5.2.1,7,12,8.2.2,13.5.2 4.2.7,4.2.12,6.2.2,9.4.2,9.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.4,10.3.3, Insurance 10.2.5,11.1.2,11.2.1,11.4.7,12.2.5,13.4.2 3.18.1,6.1.1,7.3.6,8.2.1,9.3.2,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10.2, Limitations of Time 9.10.5,11 2.1.2,2.2,2.4,3.2.1,3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1, Insurance,Boiler and Machinery 4.2-7,4-3,4.4,4-5,4.6,5.2,5.3,5-4,6.2.4,7.3,7.4, 8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3-3,9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9-7,9.8,9.9, 11.4.2 9.10,11.1.3,11.4.1.5,11.4.6,11.4.10,12.2,13.5,13.7,14 0-0 Insurance,Contractor's Liability Loss of Use Insurance 11.1 11.4.3 Insurance,Effective Date of Material Suppliers 8.2.2,11.1.2 1.6,3-12.1, 2. 3- ,4- 4,4.2.6,5.2.1,9.3,9.4.2,9.6,9.10.5 Insurance,Loss of Use Materials,Hazardous 11.4.3 10.2-4,10.3,10.5 Insurance, Owner's Liability Materials,Labor,Equipment and 11.2 1.1.3,1.1.6,1.6.1,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.23,3.12,3.13, Insurance, Project Management Protective Liability .15.1,4•z.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1, °' ° Y 7.3-6,9.3.2,9.3.3, oO 11.3 9.5.1.3,9.10.2,10.2.1,10.2-4,14.2.1.2 po Insurance, Property Means,Methods,Techniques,Sequences and © 19 9 7 A I A o 10.2.5,11.4 Procedures of Construction AIA DOCUMENT A2014997 Insurance,Stored Materials 3.3.1,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,9.4.2 GENERAL CONDITIONS 9.3.2,11.4-1.4 Mechanic's Lien OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION INSURANCE AND BONDS 4.4.8 it The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. Contractor's Relationship with Separate Damages,Claims for Contractors and Owner's Forces 3.2.3,3.18, to,6.1.1,8. . 4�3• 3 ,3 9.5.1,9.6-7,10-3.3, 3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,6,11.4.7,12.1.2,12.2.4 11.1.1,11.4.5,11.4.7,14.1.3,14.2.4 Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors Damages for Delay 1.2.2,3.3.2,3.18.1,3.18.2,5,9.6.2,9.6.7,9.10.2, 6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1.6,9.7,10-3.2 11.4.1.2,11-4.7,11-4.8 Date of Commencement of the Work,Definition of Contractor's Relationship with the Architect 8.1.2 1.1.2,1.6,3.1.3,3.2.1,3.2.2,3.2.3,3.3.1,3.4.2,3.5.1, Date of Substantial Completion,Definition of 3.7-3,3.10,3.11,3.12,3.16,3.18,4.1.2,4.1.3,4.2,4.3.4, 8.1.3 4.4.1,4.4.7,5.2,6.2.2,7,8.3.1,9.2,9.3,9-4-5,9.7, +�! 9.8,9.9,10.2.6,10.3,11.3,11.4.7,12,13.4.2,13.5 Day,Definition of Contractor's Representations 8.1.4 1.5.2,3.5.1,3.12.6,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.8.2 Decisions of the Architect 4.2.6,4.2.7,4-2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13,4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.5, "w Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing 6 6 4.4. ,4.5, • , the Work 3 73.6,7.3.8,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2,9.4,9.5.1, 3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8,5.3.1,6.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1,10 9.8.4,9.9-1,13-5.2,14.2.2,14.2.4 Contractor's Review of Contract Documents Decisions to Withhold Certification 1.5.2,3-2,3.7.3 9.4.1,9.5,9.7,14.1-1.3 go Contractor's Right to Stop the Work Defective or Nonconforming Work,Acceptance, Rejection and Correction of 9 7 2.3,2.4,3.5.1,4.2.6,6.2.5,9.5.1,9.5.2,9.6.6,9.8.2, Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 9.9.3,9.10.4,12.2.1,13.7.1.3 4.3-10,14.1 Defective Work,Definition of Contractor's Submittals 3.5.1 3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,7.3.6.92,9.31 w 8 z 8 Definitions 9• 9• 3,9.9.1,9.10,2,9.10.3,11.1.3,11.5.2 1.1,2.1.1,3.1,3.5.1,3.12.1,3.12.2,3.12.3,4.1.1,4.3.1,5.1, Contractor's Superintendent 6.1.2,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.3.6,8.1,9.1,9.8.1 3.9,10.2.6 Delays and Extensions of Time "M Contractor's Supervision and Construction 3.2.3,4.3.1,4-3.4,4-3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.4.1, Procedures 7.5.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7.1,10.3.2,10.6.1,14.3.2 1.2.2,3.3,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3,6.2.4, Disputes 7.1.3,7.3.4,7.3.6,8.2,to,12,14 4.1.4,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,6.3,7.3.8 Contractual Liability Insurance Documents and Samples at the Site 11.1.1.8,11.2,11.3 P 3.11 Coordination and Correlation Drawings,Definition of 1.2,1.5.2,3.3.1,3.10,3.12.6,6.1.3,6.2.1 rMl 1.1.5 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications Drawings and Specifications,Use and Ownershi of 1.6,2.2.5,3.11 P 1.1.1,1.3,2.2.5,3.11,5.3 Copyrights 1.6,3.17 Effective Date of Insurance w 8.2.2,11.1.2 Correction of Work Emergencies 2.3,2-4,3.7.4,4.2.1,9.4.2,9.8.2,9.8.3,9.9.1,12.1.2, 8 12.2,13.7-1.3 4-3-5,10.6,14-1.1.2 !art Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents Employees,Contractor's 1.2 3.3.2,3.4-3,3.8.1,3-9,3-18.2,4.2.3,4.2.6,10.2,10.3, 11.1.1,11.4.7,14.1,14.2.1.1 7.3• Cost,Definition of Equipment,Labor,Materials and Wit Costs 1.1.3,1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, 4.2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.6,9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3, 2.4,3.2.3,3.7.4,3.8.2,3.15.2,4.3,5.4.2,6.1.1,6.2.3, 9.10.2,10.2.1,10.2.4,14.2.1.2 °o•.-. o° 11 4,12.1,12 z i,12.2.4313.5 142,10.3.2,10.5,11.3, Execution and Progress of the Work we O L�JYO Cutting .1.3,1.2.1,1.2.2,2.2.3,2.2.5,3.1,3.3,3.4,3.5,3.7, �7 g and Patching 3.10,3.12,3.14,4.2.2,4.2.3,4.3.3,6.2.2,7.1.3,7.3.4, © 1997 AIAOO 6.2.5,3.14 8.2,9.5,9.9.1,10.2,10.3,12.2,14.2,14.3 AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Extensions of Time OF THE CONTRACT FOR Contractors 14.2, 3.2-3,4.3.1,4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2 2.1, 2 3 7 73 741 CONSTRUCTION 3.14.2,6.2.4,9.2.1.5,10?.1.2,1o.z.5,10.6,11.1,11.4,12.2.4 9.5.1,9.7.1,10.3.2,10.6.1,14.3.2 Failure of Payment The American Institute Damage to the Work 4.3-6,9.5.m 9.7,9.10.2, 14.1.1.3,14.2.1.2,13.6 of Architects 3.14.2,9.9.1,10.2.1.2,10.2.5,1o.6,11.4,12.2.4 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 sul WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. Fill Certificates of Inspection,Testing or Approval Conditions of the Contract 13.5.4 1.1.1,1.1.7,6.1.1,6.1.4 Certificates of Insurance Consent,Written 9.10.2,11.1.1 1.6,3.4.2,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,4.3.4,4.6.4,93.2, Change Orders 9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3,11.4.1,13.2,13.4.2 1.1.1,2.4.1,3.4.2,3.8.2.3,3.11.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.4, CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE 4.3.9,5.2.3,7.1,7.2,7.3,8.3.1,9.3.1.1,9.10.3,11.4-1.2, CONTRACTORS 11.4.4,11.4.9,12.1 2 1.1.4,6 Change Orders,Definition of Construction Change Directive,Definition of 7.2.1 7.3.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK Construction Change Directives 3.11,4.2.8,7,8.3.1,9.3.1.1,11.4.9 1.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.9,7.1,7.3,9.3.1.1 Claim,Definition of Construction Schedules,Contractor's 43.1 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.1.3 Claims and Disputes Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 3.2.3,43,4.4,4.5,4.6,6.1.1,6.3,7.3.8,9.3.3,9.10.4, 5.4,14.2.2.2 10.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 4.3.3 4.6.5 Contract,Definition of Claims for Additional Cost 1.1.2 3.2.3,4.3.4,4.3.5,4.3.6,6.1.1,7.3-8,10-3.2 CONTRACT,TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE Claims for Additional Time 5.4.1.1,11.4.9,14 3.2.3,4.3.4,4.3.7,6.1.1,8.3.2,10.3.2 Contract Administration Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions 3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5 -- 4.3.4 Contract Award and Execution,Conditions Relating Claims for Damages to Pill 3.2.3,3A8,4.3.io,6.1.1,8-13,9-5-1,9.6-7,10-3-3, 3.7.1,3.10,5.2,6,1,11.1.3,11.4.6,11.5.1 11.1.1'11.4.5'11.4.7'14.1.3'14.2.4 Contract Documents,The Claims Subject to Arbitration 4.4.1,4.5.1,4.6.1 Contract Documents,Copies Furnished Cleaning Up and Use of 3.15,6.3 1.6,2.2.5,5.3 Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period Contract Documents,Definition of 13.7 1.1.1 Commencement of the Work, Contract Sum Conditions Relating to 3.8,4.3.4,4.3-5,4-4-5,5.2-3,7.2,73,749-11,942, 2.2-1,3.2.1,3.4.1,3.7.1,3.10.1,3.12.6,4.3.5,5.2.1, 9.5.1.4,9.6.7,9.7,10.3.2,11.4.1,14.2.4,14.3.2 5.23,6.2.2,8.1.2,8.2.2,8.3.1,11.1,11.4.1,11.4.6,11.5.1 Contract Sum, Definition of Commencement of the Work,Definition of 9.1 8.1.2 Contract Time low Communications Facilitating Contract 4.3.4,4.3.7,4-4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1.3,7.3,7.4,8.1.1,8.2, Administration 8.3.1,9.5.1,9.7,10.3.2,12.1.1,14.3.2 3.9.1,4.2.4 Contract Time,Definition of Completion,Conditions Relating to 8.1.1 1.6.1,3.4.1,3.11,3.15,4.2.2,4.2.9,8.2,9.4.2,9.8, CONTRACTOR 9.9.1,9.10,12.2,13.7,14.1.2 COMPLETION,PAYMENTS AND 3 III' 9 Contractor,Definition of o 0 Completion,Substantial 3.1,6.1.2 °6 cLA o° 4.2.9,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.3, Contractor's Construction Schedules Q 9.10.4.2,12.2,13.7 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.1.3 © 1991 AIAOO Compliance with laws Contractor's Employees AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 1.6.1,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6.4, 3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.2,4.2.3,4.2.6,10.2,10.3, GENERAL CONDITIONS 4.6.6,9.6.4,10.2.2,11.1,n.4,13.1,13.4,13.5.1, 11.1.1,11.4.7,14.1,14.2.1.1, OF THE CONTRACT FOR 13.5.2,13.6,14.1.1,14.2.1.3 Contractor's Liability Insurance CONSTRUCTION Concealed or Unknown Conditions 11.1 The American Institute 4.3.4,8.3.1,10.3 of Architects 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. Washington,D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. �f I 1 I aIw INDEX Architect's Authority to Reject Work Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 3.5.1,4.2.6,12.1.2,12.2.1 w 9.6.6,9-9.3,12.3 Architect's Copyright Acceptance of Work 1.6 9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.1,9.10.3,12.3 Architect's Decisions Access to Work 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13,4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.5, 3.16,6.2.1,12.1 4.4.6,4.5,6.3,7.3.6,7.3.8,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2,9.4,9.5.1, Accident Prevention 9.8.4,9.9.1,13.5.2,14.2.2,14.2.4 4.2-3,10 Architect's Inspections Acts and Omissions 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.8.3,9.9.2,9.10.1,13.5 3.2,3.3-2,3.12.8,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8,4.4.1,8.3.1,9.5.1, Architect's Instructions 10.2.5,13.4.2,13.7,14.1 3.2.3,3.3.1,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.8,7.4.1,12.1,13.5.2 Addenda Architect's Interpretations 1.1-1,3-11 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6 Additional Costs,Claims for Architect's Project Representative 4.3.4,43.5,4.3.6,6.1.1,10.3 4.2.10 go Additional Inspections and Testing Architect's Relationship with Contractor 9.8.3,12.2.1,13.5 1.1.2,1.6,3.1.3,3.2.1,3.2.2,3.2.3,3.3.1,3.4.2,3.5.1, Additional Time,Claims for 3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12,3.16,3.18,4.1.2,4.1.3,4.2,4.3.4, 4.3.4,4.3.7,8.3.2 4.4.1,4.4.7,5.2,6.2.2,7,8.3.1,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5,9.7, 9.8,9.9,10.2.6,10.3,11.3,11-4.7,12,13.4-2,13-5 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors 3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5 1.1.2,4.2.3,4.2.4,4.2.6,9.6.3,9.6.4,11.4.7 Advertisement or Invitation to Bid Architect's Representations 1.1.1 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1 Aesthetic Effect Architect's Site Visits 4.2.13,4.5.1 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1, Allowances 13.5 3.8 Asbestos All-risk Insurance 10.3.1 11.4.1.1 Attorneys'Fees Applications for Payment 3.18.1,9.10.2,10-3.3 4.2.5,7.3.8,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5.1,9.6.3,9.7.1,9.8.5, Award of Separate Contracts 9.10,11.1.3,14.2.4,14.4.3 6.1.1,6.1.2 to Approvals Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts 2.4,3.1.3,3-5,3.10.2,3.12,4.2.7,9.3.2,13.4.2,13.5 for Portions of the Work Arbitration 5.2 4.3.3,4.4,4.5.1,4.5.2,4.6, 8.3.1,9.7.1,11-4.9,11.4-10 Basic Definitions Architect 1.1 4.1 Bidding Requirements Architect,Definition of 1.I.1,1.1.7,5.2.1,11.5.1 4.1.1 Boiler and Machinery Insurance Architect,Extent of Authority 11.4.2 2.4,3.12.7,4.2,4.3.6,4.4,5.2,6.3,7.1.2,7.3.6,7.4, Bonds,Lien 9.2,9.3.1,9.4,9.5,9.8.3,9.10.1,9.10.3,12.1,12.2.1, 9.10.2 13.5.1,13.5.2,14.2.2,14.z.4 (� Bonds,Performance,and Payment Architect,Limitations of Authority and 7,3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3,11.4.9,11.5 Responsibility <5. 0 2.1.1,3.3.3,3.12.4,3.12.8,3.12.10,4.1.2,4.2.1,4.2.2, Building Permit °d cib° 4.2.3,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.10, 2.12, 2.1 , 3.7.1 4- 4• 3 4-4,5.2.1, 7.4,9.4.2,9.6.4,9.6.6 Capitalization © 1 9 9 7 A I A® Architect's Additional Services and Expenses 1.3 AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 2.4,11.4-1.1,12.2.1,13.5.2,13.5.3,14.2.4 Certificate of Substantial Completion GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR Architect's Administration of the Contract 9.8-3,9.8.4,9-8.5 CONSTRUCTION 3-1.3,4.2,4.3.4,4-4,9.4,9.5 Certificates for Payment Architect's Approvals 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7.1,9.10.1, The American Institute 2.4,3.1.3,3.5.1,3.10.2,4.2.7 9.10.3,13.7,14.1.1.3,14.2.4 of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.coovripht laws and will suhiect the violator to legal prosecution 19 9 7 ED IT I ON AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction This document has impor- tant legal consequences. L TABLE OF ARTICLES Consultation with an attorney is encouraged 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS with respect to its completion or modification. 2. OWNER This document has been approved and endorsed by _ The Associated General 3. CONTRACTOR Contractors of America. 4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 5. SUBCONTRACTORS k 6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7. CHANGES IN THE WORK 8. TIME 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11. INSURANCE AND BONDS 12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK mil, I 13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS NX �, ,��e I- 14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT © 1997 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A2014997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION CAUTION:2'ou should use an original AIA document with the AIA logo printed in red.An original assures that changes will not be obscured as ma,v occur when documents are reproduced. The American Institute of Architects -- — 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Copyright 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1967,1970,1976,1987,01997 by The American Institute of Architects. Washington,D.C. 20006-5292 Fifteenth Edition.Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permissico of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. AMENDMENT NO. 1 TO AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONSTRUCTION MANAGER Pursuant to Paragraph 2.2 of the Agreement, dated between (Owner) and (Construction Manager), for (the Project), the Owner and Construction Manager establish a Guaranteed Maximum Price and Contract Time for the Work as set forth below. w ARTICLE I GUARANTEED MAXIMUM PRICE "° The Construction Manager's Guaranteed Maximum Price for the Work, including the estimated Cost of the Work as defined in Article 6 and the Construction Manager's Fee as defined in Article 5, is rep Dollars (S ). This Price is for the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents listed and attached to this Amend- ment and marked Exhibits A through F, as follows: Exhibit A Drawings, Specifications, addenda and General, Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract on which the Guaranteed Maximum Price is based, pages through dated Exhibit B Allowance items, pages through dated go Exhibit C Assumptions and clarifications made in preparing the Guaranteed Maximum Price, pages through dated Exhibit D Completion schedule, pages through dated Exhibit E Alternate prices, pages through dated Exhibit F Unit prices, pages through dated ARTICLE II CONTRACT TIME The date of Substantial Completion established by this Amendment is: OWNER: CONSTRUCTION MANAGER: By: By: Date: Date: u. ATTEST: ATTEST: MCAUTION: You should sign an original AIA document which has this caution printed in red. ., An original assures that changes will not be obscured as may occur when documents are reproduced. AIA DOCUMENT A121/CMc and AGC DOCUMENT 565 • OWNER-CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AGREEMENT• 1991 EDITION AIA" • ©1991 •THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.0 20006-5209 A121/CMc AIA AGC° • ©1991 • THE ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA, 1957 E STREET, N.W, WASHINGTON, D.0 20006-5209•WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. AGC 565- 1991 16 OF Pill struction Manager shall terminate such subcontract,purchase under Subparagraph 14.1.2 of AIA Document A201 shall not order or rental agreement and the Owner shall pay the Con- exceed the amount the Construction Manager would be enti- struction Manager the costs necessarily incurred by the Con- tled to receive under Subparagraphs 10.1.2 or 10.1.3 above, struction Manager by reason of such termination. except that the Construction Manager's Fee shall be calculated PRO 10.2 TERMINATION SUBSEQUENT TO ESTABLISHING as if the Work had been fully completed by the Construction GUARANTEED MAXIMUM PRICE Manager, including a reasonable estimate of the Cost of the Work for Work not actually completed. Subsequent to execution by both parties of Amendment No. 1, 10.3 SUSPENSION the Contract may be terminated as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201. The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201;in such case,the Guaranteed 10.2.1 In the event of such termination by the Owner, the Maximum Price, if established, shall be increased as provid- amount payable to the Construction Manager pursuant to Sub- ed in Subparagraph 14.3.2 of AIA Document A201 except that paragraph 14.1.2 of AIA Document A201 shall not exceed the the term "cost of performance of the Contract" in that Sub- amount the Construction Manager would have been entitled paragraph shall be understood to mean the Cost of the Work to receive pursuant to Subparagraphs 10.1.2 and 10.1.3 of and the term "profit" shall be understood to mean the Con- this Agreement. struction Manager's Fee as described in Subparagraphs 5.1.1 10.2.2 In the event of such termination by the Construction and 5.3.4 of this Agreement. Manager,the amount to be paid to the Construction Manager ARTICLE 11 OTHER CONDITIONS AND SERVICES FIN 40 1> ow This Agreement entered into as of the day and year first written above. OWNER: CONSTRUCTION MANAGER: By: By: Date: Date: ATTEST: ATTEST: sjw - I I CAUTION: You should sign an original AIA document which has this caution printed in red. An original assures that changes will not be obscured as may occur when documents are reproduced. AIA DOCUMENT A121/CMc and AGC DOCUMENT 565• OWNER-CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AGREEMENT• 1()'J1 EDITION AIA° • <01991 •THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.0 200065209 A121/CMc AGC° • ©1991 • THE ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA, 1957 E STREET, NUO., WASHINGTON, DC. 20006-5209•WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. AGC 565- 1991 15 son or entiry dulV consented to by parties to this Agreement ARTICLE 10 shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any no court having jurisdiction thereof. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 9.1.6 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall 10.1 TERMINATION PRIOR TO ESTABLISHING be final,and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance GUARANTEED MAXIMUM PRICE with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 10.1.1 Prior to execution by both parties of Amendment No. 1 9.2 DISPUTE RESOLUTION FOR THE establishing the Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Owner may CONSTRUCTION PHASE terminate this Contract at any time without cause, and the 9.2.1 Am' other claim, dispute or other matter in question Construction Manager may terminate this Contract for any of arising out of or related to this Agreement or breach thereof the reasons described in Subparagraph 14.1.1 of AIA Docu- shall be settled in accordance with Article 4 of AIA Document ment A201. A201, except that in addition to and prior to arbitration, the parties shall endeavor to settle disputes by mediation in accor- 10.1.2 If the Owner or Construction Manager terminates this no dance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the Contract pursuant to this Paragraph 10.1 prior to commence- American Arbitration Association currently in effect unless the ment of the Construction Phase, the Construction Manager parties mutually agree otherwise.Any mediation arising under shall be equitably compensated for Preconstruction Phase ser- vices performed prior to receipt of notice of termination;pro- this Paragraph shall be conducted in accordance with the pro �* visions of Subparagraphs 9.1.2 and 9.1.3. vided, however,that the compensation for such services shall not exceed the compensation set forth in Subparagraph 4.1.1. 9.3 OTHER PROVISIONS 10.1.3 If the Owner or Construction Manager terminates this 9.3.1 Unless otherwise noted, the terms used in this Agree- Contract pursuant to this Paragraph 10.1 after commencement �* ment shall have the same meaning as those in the 1987 Edi- of the Construction Phase, the Construction Manager shall, tion of AIA Document A201, General Conditions of the Con- in addition to the compensation provided in Subparagraph tract for Construction. 10.1.2, be paid an amount calculated as follows: 9.3.2 EXTENT OF CONTRACT .1 Take the Cost of the Work incurred by the Construe- This Contract, which includes this Agreement and the other lion Manager. documents incorporated herein by reference, represents the •2 Add the Construction Manager's Fee computed upon entire and integrated agreement between the Owner and Con- the Cost of the Work to the date of termination at �s struction Manager and supersedes all prior negotiations, the rate stated in Paragraph 5.1 or, if the Construe- representations or agreements, either written or oral. This tion Manager's Fee is stated as a fixed sum in that Agreement may be amended only by written instrument sign- Paragraph,an amount which bears the same ratio to ed by both the Owner and Construction Manager. If anything that fixed-sum Fee as the Cost of Work at the time in any document incorporated into this Agreement is incon- of termination bears to a reasonable estimate of the sistent with this Agreement, this Agreement shall govern. probable Cost of the Work upon its completion. 3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made 9.3.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DOCUMENTS by the Owner on account of the Construction Phase, The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared to The Owner shall also pay the Construction Manager fair com- by the Architect, and copies thereof furnished to the Con- pensation, either by purchase or rental at the election of the struction Manager,are for use solely with respect to this Prof- Owner, for any equipment owned by the Construction ect. They are not to be used by the Construction Manager, Manager which the Owner elects to retain and which is not Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors or suppliers on other proj- otherwise included in the Cost of the Work under Clause w ects,or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the 10.1.3.1. To the extent that the Owner elects to take legal Work, without the specific written consent of the Owner and assignment of subcontracts and purchase orders (including Architect. The Construction Manager, Subcontractors, Sub- rental agreements), the Construction Manager shall,as a con- subcontractors and suppliers are granted a limited license to dition of receiving the payments referred to in this Article 10, use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, execute and deliver all such papers and take all such steps, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Archi- including the legal assignment of such subcontracts and other tect appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work contractual rights of the Construction Manager,as the Owner under the Contract Documents. may require for the purpose of fully vesting in the Owner the ww 9.3.4 GOVERNING LAW rights and benefits of the Construction Manager under such The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where subcontracts or purchase orders. the Project is located. Subcontracts, purchase orders and rental agreements entered so 9.3.5 ASSIGNMENT into by the Construction ;Manager with the Owner's written approval prior to the execution of Amendment No. 1 shall con- The Owner and Construction Manager respectively bind tain provisions permitting assignment to the Owner as themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal rep- described above. If the Owner accepts such assignment, the resentatives to the other party hereto and to partners, sue- Owner shall reimburse or indemnify the Construction cessors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party Manager with respect to all costs arising under the subcon- in respect to covenants,agreements and obligations contained tract,purchase order or rental agreement except those which in the Contract Documents. Neither party to the Contract shall would not have been reimbursable as Cost of the Work if the no assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the contract had not been terminated. If the Owner elects not other. If either party attempts to make such an assignment to accept the assignment of any subcontract, purchase order without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain or rental agreement which would have constituted a Cost of legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. the Work had this agreement not been terminated, the Con- AIA DOCUMENT A121/CMc and AGC DOCUMENT 565 • OWNER-CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AGRF:FNIENT• IVA EDITION AIA* • 01991 •THE AMFRICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCI11-FECIS, 1-15 NEW YORK AVENUE,NW.WASHINGTON,D.C.20006-5209 A121/CMc AGCY • �'cA991 • THE ASSOCIATFD GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA, 1951 F. STREET. N\V, WASHINGTON, DC 20000- 209•WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. AGC 565- 1991 14 "� 8.1.3 Automobile Liability (owned, non-owned and hired vehicles) for bodily injury and property damage: $ Each Accident 8.1.4 Other coverage: - (ff L'mhre!!a E-ecess Liubilitl'coreruge is recjuire•d ot•er the printarl'insru-curce or reterrt ion.insert the curerctke lirnirs. Cnnrmercicr!Genercd l.iabi(ih'and Autonrohile Liabilitl'limits oral-be attained bl-individual policies or bt•cr combination of prinrarl'policies awl umbrella ancllkn Excess liabilitr policies.) t 8.2 INSURANCE REQUIRED OF THE OWNER During both phases of the Project, the Owner shall purchase and maintain liability and property insurance, including waivers of subrogation, as set forth in Paragraphs 11.2 and I1.3 of AIA Document A201. Such insurance shall be written for not less than the following limits, or greater if required by law: 8.2.1 Property Insurance: $ Deductible Per Occurrence $ Aggregate Deductible 8.2.2 Boiler and Machinery insurance with a limit of: $ (if not a blanket police, list the objects to be insured.) 8.3 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 8.3.1 The Construction Manager (Insert "shall"or "shall not')furnish bonds covering faithful perfor- mance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder. Bonds may be obtained through the Construction Manager's usual source and the cost thereof shall be included in the Cost of the Work. The amount of each bond shall be equal to percent ( %) of the Contract Sum. 8.3.2 The Construction Manager shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner at least three days before the commencement of any Work at the Project site. ! " ARTICLE 9 9.1.4 Demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to this Agreement and with the American Arbitra- MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS tion Association.A demand for arbitration may be made con- currently with a demand for mediation and shall be made 9.1 DISPUTE RESOLUTION FOR THE within a reasonable time after the claim, dispute or other mat- PRECONSTRUCTION PHASE ter in question has arisen. In no event shall the demand for arbitration be made after the date when institution of legal 9.1.1 Claims, disputes or other matters in question between or equitable proceedings based upon such claim, dispute or the parties to this Agreement which arise prior to the com- other matter in question would be barred by the applicable mencement of the Construction Phase or which relate solely statute of limitations. to the Preconstruction Phase services of the Construction Manager or to the Owner's obligations to the Construction 9.1.5 No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract Manager during the Preconstruction Phase,shall be resolved Documents shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in by mediation or by arbitration. any other manner, the Architect, the Architect's employees 9.1.2 Any mediation conducted pursuant to this Paragraph or consultants,except by written consent containing specific 9.1 shall be held in accordance with the Construction Industry reference to the Agreement and signed by the Architect, Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association cur- Owner,Construction Manager and any other person or enti- rently in effect, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise. [y sought to be joined. No arbitration shall include, by con- Demand for mediation shall be filed in writing with the other solidation or joinder or in any other manner, parties other party to this Agreement and with the American Arbitration than the Owner, Construction Manager, a separate contrac- Association. Any demand for mediation shall be made within for as described in Article 6 of AIA Document A201 and other a reasonable time after the claim, dispute or other matter in persons substantially involved in a common question of fact question has arisen. In no event shall the demand for media- or law whose presence is required if complete relief is to be tion be made after the date when institution of legal or accorded in arbitration. No person or entity other than the equitable proceedings based upon such claim, dispute or Owner or Construction Manager or a separate contractor as described in Article 6 of AIA Document A201 shall be included other matter in question would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. as an original third party or additional third party to an arbi- tration whose interest or responsibility is insubstantial. Con- 9.1.3 Any claim, dispute or other matter in question not sent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity resolved by mediation shall be decided by arbitration in accor- shall not constitute agreement to arbitration of a dispute not dance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the described in Such consent or with a person or entity not American Arbitration Association currently in effect unless the named or described therein.The foregoing agreement to arbi- parties mutually agree otherwise. trace and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional per- AIA DOCUMENT A121/CMc and AGC DOCUMENT 565• OViNER-CONST'RUCT'ION MANAGER AGREEMENT • 1991 EDITION MAO • ©1991 •THE ANIERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW PORK AVENUE,NW,WASHINGTON,DC-20006-5209 A121/CMc AGC° • ©1991 • THE ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA, 1957 E STREET, NVt(, WASHINGTON, DC_ 21x)06-5209•WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. AGC 565- 1991 13 No 7.2.2 The amount of the final payment shall be calculated as follows: .1 lake the sum of the Cost of the Work substantiated by the Construction Manager's final accounting and the Construc- tion Manager's Fee; but not more than the Guaranteed Maximum Price. .2 Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Architect withholds, in whole or in part, a final Certificate for Payment as pro- vided in Subparagraph 9.5.1 of AIA Document A201 or other provisions of the Contract Documents. .3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner. If the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner exceeds the amount due the Construction Manager,the Construction Manager shall reimburse the difference to the Owner. 7.2.3 The Owner's accountants will review and report in writing on the Construction Manager's final accounting within 30 NP days after delivery of the final accounting to the Architect by the Construction Manager. Based upon such Cost of the Work as the Owner's accountants report to be substantiated by the Construction Manager's final accounting, and provided the other conditions of Subparagraph 7.2.1 have been met, the Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the written report of the Owner's accountants, either issue to the Owner a final Certificate for Payment with a copy to the Construction Manager, so or notify the Construction Manager and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding a certificate as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1 of AIA Document A201. The time periods stated in this Paragraph 7.2 supersede those stated in Subpara- graph 9.4.1 of AIA Document A201. 7.2.4 If the Owner's accountants report the Cost of the Work as substantiated by the Construction Manager's final accounting to be less than claimed by the Construction Manager, the Construction Manager shall be entitled to proceed in accordance with Article 9 without a further decision of the Architect. Unless agreed to otherwise, a demand for mediation or arbitration of the disputed amount shall be made by the Construction Manager within 60 days after the Construction Manager's receipt of a copy of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment. Failure to make such demand within this 60-day period shall result in the substantiated amount reported by the Owner's accountants becoming binding on the Construction Manager. Pending a final resolution of the disputed amount,the Owner shall pay the Construction Manager the amount certified in the Architect's final Certificate for Pavment. 7.2.5 If,subsequent to final payment and at the Owner's request, the Construction Manager incurs costs described in Paragraph no 6.1 and not excluded by Paragraph 6.2 (1)to correct nonconforming Work, or(2)arising from the resolution of disputes, the Owner shall reimburse the Construction Manager such costs and the Construction Manager's Fee, if any, related thereto on the same basis as if such costs had been incurred prior to final payment, but not in excess of the Guaranteed Maximum Price. w If the Construction Manager has participated in savings, the amount of such savings shall be recalculated and appropriate credit given to the Owner in determining the net amount to be paid by the Owner to the Construction Manager. ARTICLE 8 INSURANCE AND BONDS 8.1 INSURANCE REQUIRED OF THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER w During both phases of the Project, the Construction Manager shall purchase and maintain insurance as set forth in Paragraph 11.1 of AIA Document A201. Such insurance shall be written for not less than the following limits, or greater if required by law: 8.1.1 Workers' Compensation and Employers' Liability meeting statutory limits mandated by State and Federal laws. If(1)limits in excess of those required by statute are to be provided or(2)the employer is not statutorily bound to obtain such insurance coverage or (3) additional coverages are required, additional coverages and limits for such insurance shall be as follows: �w WIN 8.1.2 Commercial General Liability including coverage for Premises-Operations,Independent Contractors' Protective, Products- Completed Operations, Contractual Liability, Personal Injury, and Broad Form Property Damage(including coverage for Explo- sion, Collapse and Underground hazards): $ Each Occurrence $ General Aggregate $ Personal and Advertising Injury *� $ Products-Completed Operations Aggregate .1 The policy shall be endorsed to have the General Aggregate apply to this Project only. .2 Products and Completed Operations insurance shall be maintained for a minimum period of at least ( ) year(s) after either 90 days following Substantial Completion or final payment, whichever is earlier. .3 The Contractual Liabilitv insurance shall include coverage sufficient to meet the obligations in AIA Document A201 under Paragraph 3.18. AIA DOCUMENT A121/CMc and AGC DOCUMENT 565 •OWNER-CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AGREEMENT • 1991 EDITION .AIA' • Oc 1991 •THE AMERICAN INSTErI.'TE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C-20006-5209 A121/CMC AGCY 20-WARNING:Unlicensed tphotocopying violates U.S.copyright laws tand will suble t the violator to legall prosecution. AGC 565- 1991 12 7.1.4 With each Application for Payment, the Construction Manager shall submit payrolls, petty cash accounts, receipted invoices or invoices with check vouchers attached, and any other evidence required by the Owner or Architect to demonstrate that cash disbursements alreadv made by the Construction Manager on account of the Cost of the Work equal or exceed(1)progress payments already received by the Construction Manager; less(2) that portion of those payments attributable to the Construc- tion Manager's Fee; plus (3) payrolls for the period covered by the present Application for Payment. 7.1.5 Each Application for Payment shall be based upon the most recent schedule of values submitted by the Construction Manager in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of values shall allocate the entire Guaranteed Maximum Price among the various portions of the Work, except that the Construction Manager's Fee shall be shown as a single separate item. The schedule of values shall be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect,shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Construction Manager's Applications for Payment. 7.1.6 Applications for Payment shall show the percentage completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. The percentage completion shall be the lesser of(1) the percentage of that portion of the Work which has actually been completed or(2)the percentage obtained by dividing(a)the expense which has actually been incurred by the Construction Manager on account of that portion of the Work for which the Construction Manager has made or intends to make actual payment prior to the next Application for Payment by(b)the share of the Guaranteed Maximum In Price allocated to that portion of the Work in the schedule of values. 7.1.7 Subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents,the amount of each progress payment shalt be computed as follows: .1 Take that portion of the Guaranteed Maximum Price properly allocable to completed Work as determined by multiply- ing the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the Guaranteed Maximum Price allocated to that portion of the Work in the schedule of values. Pending final determination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work, amounts not in dispute may be included as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.7 of AIA Document A201, even though the Guaranteed Maximum Price has not yet been adjusted by Change Order. .2 Add that portion of the Guaranteed Maximum Price properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work or, if approved in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. .3 Add the Construction Manager's Fee, less retainage of percent The Construction Manager's Fee shall be computed upon the Cost of the Work described in the two preceding Clauses at the rate stated in Subparagraph 5.1.1 or, if the Construction Manager's Fee is stated as a fixed sum in that Subparagraph, shall be an amount which bears the same ratio to that fixed-sum Fee as the Cost of the Work in the two preceding Clauses bears to a reasonable estimate of the probable Cost of the Work upon its completion. .4 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner. .5 Subtract the shortfall, if any, indicated by the Construction Manager in the documentation required by Subparagraph 7.1.4 to substantiate prior Applications for Payment, or resulting from errors subsequently discovered by the Owner's accountants in such documentation. .6 Subtract amounts,if any,for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate for Payment as provided in Paragraph 9.5 of AIA Document A201. 7.1.8 Except with the Owner's prior approval, payments to Subcontractors shall be subject to retention of not less than percent ( %). The Owner and the Construction Manager shall agree upon a mutually acceptable procedure for review and approval of payments and retention for subcontracts. 7.1.9 Except with the Owner's prior approval, the Construction Manager shall not make advance payments to suppliers for materials or equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site. 7.1.10 In taking action on the Construction Manager's Applications for Payment, the Architect shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy and completeness of the information furnished by the Construction Manager and shall not be deemed to represent that the Architect has made a detailed examination, audit or arithmetic verification of the documentation submitted in accor- dance with Subparagraph 7.1.4 or other supporting data; that the Architect has made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspec- tions or that the Architect has made examinations to ascertain how or for what purposes the Construction Manager has used amounts previously paid on account of the Contract. Such examinations, audits and verifications, if required by the Owner, will be performed by the Owner's accountants acting in the sole interest of the Owner. 7.2 FINAL PAYMENT 7.2.1 Final payment shall be made by the Owner to the Construction Manager when(1)the Contract has been fully performed by the Construction Manager except for the Construction Manager's responsibility to correct nonconforming Work, as provid- ed in Subparagraph 12.2.2 of AIA Document A201, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which necessarily survive final AIRi payment;(2)a final Application for Payment and a final accounting for the Cost of the Work have been submitted by the Con- struction Manager and reviewed by the Owner's accountants; and (3) a final Certificate for Payment has then been issued by the Architect; such final payment shall be made by the Owner not more than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment, or as follows: AIA DOCUMENT A721/CMc and AGC DOCUMENT 565 • OWNER CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AGREEMENT • 199!, EDITION AIA° •©1991 •THE AMERICAN tNSTFFUTE OE ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE..N.AY,WASHINGTON,DC-_,0006-5209 A121/CMc go AGCa • 1,D1991 • THE ASSOCIATED GENFRAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA, 195' E STREET N.W. WASHINGTON, D-C- 20000-5209•WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. AGC 565- 1991 11 Manager or the Construction Manager's foremen, engineers or superintendents, or other supervisory, administrative or managerial personnel of the Construction Manager, or the failure of the Construction Manager's personnel to super- vise adequatel} the AVork of the Subcontractors or suppliers,and only to the extent that the cost of repair or correction is not recoverable by the Construction Manager from insurance, Subcontractors or suppliers. 6.1.9 The costs described in Subparagraphs 6.1.1 through 6.1.8 shall be included in the Cost of the Work notwithstanding any provision of AIA Document A201 or other Conditions of the Contract which may require the Construction Manager to pay such costs, unless such costs are excluded by the provisions of Paragraph 6.2. 6.2 COSTS NOT TO BE REIMBURSED 6.2.1 The Cost of the Work shall not include: aat .1 Salaries and other compensation of the Construction Manager's personnel stationed at the Construction Manager's principal office or offices other than the site office, except as specifically provided in Clauses 6.1.2.2 and 6.1.2.3. .2 Expenses of the Construction Manager's principal office and offices other than the site office except as specifically pro- no vided in Paragraph 6.1. .3 Overhead and general expenses, except as may be expressly included in Paragraph 6.1. .4 The Construction Manager's capital expenses, including interest on the Construction Manager's capital employed for the Work. na .5 Rental costs of machinery and equipment, except as specifically provided in Subparagraph 6.1.5.2. .6 Except as provided in Clause 6.1.8.2, costs due to the negligence of the Construction Manager or to the failure of the Construction Manager to fulfill a specific responsibility to the Owner set forth in this Agreement. .7 Costs incurred in the performance of Preconstruction Phase Services. wt .8 Except as provided in Clause 6.1.7.1, any cost not specifically and expressly described in Paragraph 6.1. .9 Costs which would cause the Guaranteed Maximum Price to be exceeded. 6.3 DISCOUNTS, REBATES AND REFUNDS 6.3.1 Cash discounts obtained on payments made by the Construction Manager shall accrue to the Owner if(1)before making the payment, the Construction Manager included them in an Application for Payment and received payment therefor from the Owner, or (2) the Owner has deposited funds with the Construction Manager with which to make payments; otherwise, cash discounts shall accrue to the Construction Manager. Trade discounts, rebates, refunds and amounts received from sales of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to the Owner, and the Construction Manager shall make provisions so that they can be secured. 6.3.2 Amounts which accrue to the Owner in accordance with the provisions of Subparagraph 6.3.1 shall be credited to the .� Owner as a deduction from the Cost of the Work. 6.4 ACCOUNTING RECORDS 6.4.1 The Construction Manager shall keep full and detailed accounts and exercise such controls as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Contract; the accounting and control systems shall be satisfactory to the Owner. The Owner and the Owner's accountants shall be afforded access to the Construction Manager's records, books, correspondence, instruc- tions, drawings, receipts, subcontracts, purchase orders, vouchers, memoranda and other data relating to this Project, and the Construction Manager shall preserve these for a period of three years after final payment, or for such longer period as may be required by law. ARTICLE 7 CONSTRUCTION PHASE 7.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 7.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Construction Manager and Certificates for Pay- ment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Construction as Manager as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 7.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month, or as follows so am 7.1.3 Provided an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the day of a month, the Owner shall make payment to the Construction Manager not later than the day of the month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fixed above, payment shall be made by the Owner not later than days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment. no AIA DOCUMENT A121/CMc and AGC DOCUMENT 565 • OWNER-CONSTRUCTION MANAGER .AGREEMENT • 1991 EDITION AIA • J1991 •-THE,AMERICAN INS7lTUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENGE,NW,WASHINGTON,IBC.20()or5209 A121/CMc AGC` • ©1991 • THE ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA, 1957 E STREET, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C- � 20006-5209•WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. AGC 565- 1991 10 6.1.4 COSTS OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT INCORPORATED IN THE COMPLETED CONSTRUCTION 1111 .1 Costs, including transportation, of materials and equipment incorporated or to be incorporated in the completed construction. .2 Costs of materials described in the preceding Clause 6.1.4.1 in excess of those actually installed but required to provide reasonable allowance for waste and for spoilage. Unused excess materials, if any, shall be handed over to the Owner at the completion of the Work or, at the Owner's option, shall be sold by the Construction Manager; amounts realized, if any, from such sales shall be credited to the Owner as a deduction from the Cost: of the Work. 6.1.5 COSTS OF OTHER MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT, TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND RELATED ITEMS .1 Costs, including transportation, installation, maintenance, dismantling and removal of materials, supplies, temporary facilities, machinery, equipment, and hand tools not customarily owned by the construction workers, which are pro- vided by the Construction Manager at the site and fully consumed in the performance of the Work;and cost less salvage value on such items if not fully consumed, whether sold to others or retained by the Construction Manager. Cost for items previously used by the Construction Manager shall mean fair market value. .2 Rental charges for temporary facilities, machinery,equipment,and hand tools not customarily owned by the construc- tion workers,which are provided by the Construction Manager at the site, whether rented from the Construction Manager PIP or others, and costs of transportation, installation, minor repairs and replacements, dismantling and removal thereof. Rates and quantities of equipment rented shall be subject to the Owner's prior approval. .3 Costs of removal of debris from the site. .4 Reproduction costs, costs of telegrams, facsimile transmissions and long-distance telephone calls, postage and express delivery charges, telephone service at the site and reasonable petty cash expenses of the site office. .5 That portion of the reasonable travel and subsistence expenses of the Construction Manager's personnel incurred while traveling in discharge of duties connected with the Work. 6.1.6 MISCELLANEOUS COSTS 1 .1 That portion directly attributable to this Contract of premiums for insurance and bonds. - (11 charges for self insurance are to be included, specify the basis of reiniburseniew .2 Sales, use or similar taxes imposed by a governmental authority which are related to the Work and for which the Con- struction Manager is liable. .3 Fees and assessments for the building permit and for other permits, licenses and inspections for which the Construe tion Manager is required by the Contract Documents to pay. .4 Fees of testing laboratories for tests required by the Contract Documents,except those related to nonconforming Work other than that for which payment is permitted by Clause 6.1.8.2. .5 Royalties and license fees paid for the use of a particular design,process or product required by the Contract Documents; - the cost of defending suits or claims for infringement of patent or other intellectual property rights arising from such requirement by the Contract Documents; payments made in accordance with legal judgments against the Construction Manager resulting from such suits or claims and payments of settlements made with the Owner's consent; provided, however, that such costs of legal defenses, judgments and settlements shall not be included in the calculation of the Construction Manager's Fee or the Guaranteed Maximum Price and provided that such royalties, fees and costs are not excluded by the last sentence of Subparagraph 3.17.1 of AIA Document A201 or other provisions of the Contract Documents. .6 Data processing costs related to the Work. .7 Deposits lost for causes other than the Construction Manager's negligence or failure to fulfill a specific responsibility to the Owner set forth in this Agreement. .8 Legal, mediation and arbitration costs, other than those arising from disputes between the Owner and Construction Manager, reasonably incurred by the Construction Manager in the performance of the Work and with the Owner's writ- ten permission, which permission shall not be unreasonably withheld. .9 Expenses incurred in accordance with the Construction Manager's standard personnel policy for relocation and tem on porary living allowances of personnel required for the Work, in case it is necessary to relocate such personnel from distant locations. 6.1.7 OTHER COSTS .1 Other costs incurred in the performance of the Work if and to the extent approved in advance in writing by the Owner. 6.1.8 EMERGENCIES AND REPAIRS TO DAMAGED OR NONCONFORMING WORK The Cost of the Work shall also include costs described in Subparagraph 6.L 1 which are incurred by the Construction Manager: .1 In taking action to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss in case of an emergency affecting the safety of persons and property, as provided in Paragraph 10.3 of AIA Document A201. .2 In repairing or correcting damaged or nonconforming Work executed by the Construction Manager or the Construc- tion Manager's Subcontractors or suppliers, provided that such damaged or nonconforming Work was not caused by - the negligence or failure to fulfill a specific responsibility to the Owner set forth in this Agreement of the Construction AIA DOCUMENT A1211CMc and AGC DOCUMENT 565• OWNER-CONSTRUCTION MANAGER NGRE;ENIENF • 1991 EDITION AIA") • ©1991 •THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF.ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,NWT'WASHINGTON,D.C.20006-5209 A121/CMC AGC° • JI991 • THE ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OP AMERICA, 1957 E STREET, NW-, WASHINGTON, DC. 111,1110 200065209•WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. AGC 565- 1991 9 am 5.2 GUARANTEED MAXIMUM PRICE 5.2.1 The sum of the Cost of the Work and the Construction Manager's Fee arc guaranteed by the Construction Manager not to exceed the amount provided in Amendment No. 1, subject to additions and deductions by changes in the Work as provided in the Contract Documents. Such maximum sum as adjusted by approved changes in the Work is referred to in the Contract Documents as the Guaranteed Maximum Price. Costs which would cause the Guaranteed Maximum Price to be exceeded shall be paid by the Construction Manager without reimbursement by the Owner- � (lust'rt speciltc prru'nitms q the Corrstructiou.Ilcotager is to paltrctpate on attl'sayings.) Alt 5.3 CHANGES IN THE WORK 5.3.1 Adjustments to the Guaranteed Maximum Price on account of changes in the Work subsequent to the execution of Amend- M ment No. 1 may be determined by any of the methods listed in Subparagraph 7.3.3 of AIA Document A201. 5.3.2 In calculating adjustments to subcontracts (except those awarded with the Owner's prior consent on the basis of cost plus a fee), the terms"cost"and"fee"as used in Clause 7.3.33 of AIA Document A201 and the terms"costs" and"a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit" as used in Subparagraph 7.3.6 of AIA Document A201 shall have the meanings assigned M to them in that document and shall not be modified by this Article 5. Adjustments to subcontracts awarded with the Owner's prior consent on the basis of cost plus a fee shall be calculated in accordance with the terms of those subcontracts. 5.3.3 In calculating adjustments to the Contract, the terms "cost" and "costs" as used in the above-referenced provisions of AIA Document A201 shall mean the Cost of the Work as defined in Article 6 of this Agreement and the terms "and a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit"shall mean the Construction Manager's Fee as defined in Subparagraph 5.1.1 of this Agreement. 5.3.4 If no specific provision is made in Subparagraph 5.1.1 for adjustment of the Construction Manager's Fee in the case of changes in the Work, or if the extent of such changes is such, in the aggregate, that application of the adjustment provisions of Subparagraph 5.1.1 will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Construction Manager, the Construction Manager's Fee shall be equitably adjusted on the basis of the fee established for the original Work. ARTICLE 6 COST OF THE WORK FOR CONSTRUCTION PHASE 6.1 COSTS TO BE REIMBURSED 9" 6.1.1 The term "Cost of the Work" shall mean costs necessarily incurred by the Construction Manager in the proper perfor- mance of the Work. Such costs shall be at rates not higher than those customarily paid at the place of the Project except with prior consent of the Owner. The Cost of the Work shall include only the items set forth in this Article 6. w 6.1.2 LABOR COSTS .1 Wages of construction workers directly employed by the Construction Manager to perform the construction of the Work at the site or, with the Owner's agreement, at off-site workshops. .2 Wages or salaries of the Construction Manager's supervisory and administrative personnel when stationed at the site with the Owner's agreement. (11 it is httended that the wages or salaries of certain personnel stationed at the Construction:Manager's principal office or offices other than the site office shall be included in the Cost of(be Work. such personnel shall be identified below-) AAIR .3 Wages and salaries of the Construction Manager's supervisory or administrative personnel engaged,at factories, workshops or on the road, in expediting the production or transportation of materials or equipment required for the Work, but only for that portion of their time required for the Work. ..� .4 Costs paid or incurred by the Construction Manager for taxes, insurance,contributions,assessments and benefits required by law or collective bargaining agreements, and, for personnel not covered by such agreements, customary benefits such as sick leave, medical and health benefits, holidays, vacations and pensions, provided that such costs are based on wages and salaries included in the Cost of the Work under Clauses 6.1.2.1 through 6.1.2.3. 6.1.3 SUBCONTRACT COSTS Payments made by the Construction Manager to Subcontractors in accordance with the requirements of the subcontracts. . _Owl AIA DOCUMENT A1211CMc and AGC DOCUMENT 565 • OWNER-CONS-1 RUCI-ION MANAGER AGRFEMEN-1 • 1991 EDITION ALA • 001991 •THE,A,NIERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECT'S, 1735 NEW YORK..AVENUE,NYX'_,WASHINGTON,DC 20006-52o) A121/CMC AGC` • 1)1991 • THE ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OI' .AMERICA, 195' E STREET, NW. WASHINGTON, D.0 20006 52o9•WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. AGC 565- 1991 8 w ARTICLE 4 COMPENSATION AND PAYMENTS FOR PRECONSTRUCTION PHASE SERVICES The Owner shall compensate and make payments to the Construction Manager for Preconstruction Phase services as follows: 4.1 COMPENSATION 4.1.1 For the services described in Paragraphs 2.1 and 2.2 the Construction Manager's compensation shall be calculated As follows: (State basis o/compeuscttiory whether a stipulated strut multiple rf Uirect Per'souuel I:Apeuse, actual cost. etc: Iwlttde a slatement of reimbuccable cast items as applicable/ 1 1l 4.1.2 Compensation for Preconstruction Phase services shall be equitably adjusted if such services extend beyond from the date of this Agreement or if the originally contemplated scope of services is signifi- cantly modified. No 4.1.3 If compensation is based on a multiple of Direct Personnel Expense, Direct Personnel Expense is defined as the direct salaries of the Construction Manager's personnel engaged in the Project and the portion of the cost of their mandatory and customary contributions and benefits related thereto,such as employment taxes and other statutory employee benefits, insurance, sick leave, holidays, vacations, pensions and similar contributions and benefits. PW 4.2 PAYMENTS 4.2.1 Payments shall be made monthly following presentation of the Construction Managers invoice and, where applicable, shall be in proportion to services performed. ON 4.2.2 Payments are due and payable ( )days from the date the Construction Manager's invoice is received by the Owner.Amounts unpaid after the date on which payment is due shall bear interest at the rate entered below, or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. (Insert rate of interest agreed upon.) (Ilsurp laws and requirements Harder The Federal Truth in Lending Act, similar state and local consumer credit laus and other regulations at the Owners crud Construction Manager's principal places of business, the location o/the project acrd elsewhere may affect the raliditi-of this provision. legal advice should be obtained with respect to deletions or modifications atut also regarding requirements such as written disclosures or waivers) ARTICLE 5 COMPENSATION FOR CONSTRUCTION PHASE SERVICES The Owner shall compensate the Construction Manager for Construction Phase services as follows: 5.1 COMPENSATION 5.1.1 For the Construction Manager's performance of the Work as described in Paragraph 2.3, the Owner shall pay the Con- struction Manager in current funds the Contract Sum consisting of the Cost of the Work as defined in Article 6 and the Con- struction Manager's Fee determined as follows: (State a Lamp surn,percentage of actual Cost o/the Work or other prori.sion for determining the Construction Managers Fee.and explain hou,the Consn'uctton dlcmager's Fee is to be adjusted for changes in the U'rrrk) AIA DOCUMENT A121/CMc and AGC DOCUMENT 565 • OWNER-CON�IRt:Ct'ION MANAGER AGREENILN-1 • 1991 EDITION AIA� • ©I991 •THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCIIFFECTS_ I'i5 NEV' )'OKK AVENUE,Nlx,VASHINGTON.DC 2(H)o6-5201) A121/CMC AGC° • ©1991 • THE ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACIORS OF AMERICA. 195" E STREET, N.AY'.. vXASHINGTON. D-C. 20006-5209•WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. AGC 565- 1991 7 of the material or substance reported by the Construction contours of the site; locations,dimensions and necessary data Manager and,in the event such material or substance is found pertaining to existing buildings,other improvements and trees; to be present, to verify that it has been rendered harmless. and information concerning available utility services and lines, Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the both public and private, above and below grade, including Owner shall furnish in writing to the Construction Manager inverts and depths. All information on the survey shall be and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or enti- referenced to a project benchmark. ties who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence Of Such material or substance or who are to perform the task 3.1.4.3 The services of geotechnical engineers when such of removal or safe containment of such material or substance. services are requested by the Construction Manager.Such ser- The Construction Manager and Architect will promptly reply vices may include but are not limited to test borings,test pits, to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has determinations of soil bearing values, percolation tests,evalua- reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by tions of hazardous materials,ground corrosion and resistivity the Owner. if either the Construction Manager or Architect tests, including necessary operations for anticipating sub- has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, soil conditions, with reports and appropriate professional '*! the Owner shall propose another to whom the Construction recommendations. Manager and Architect have no reasonable objection. 3.1.4.4 Structural,mechanical,chemical,air and water pollu- tion tests, tests for hazardous materials,and other laboratory ARTICLE 3 and environmental tests, inspections and reports which are OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES required by law. 3.1.4.5 The services of other consultants when such services 3.1 INFORMATION AND SERVICES are reasonably required by the scope of the Project and are 3.1.1 The Owner shall provide full information in a timely requested by the Construction Manager. manner regarding the requirements of the Project,including 3.2 OWNER'S DESIGNATED REPRESENTATIVE a program which sets forth the Owner's objectives,constraints and criteria, including space requirements and relationships, The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who flexibility and expandability requirements,special equipment shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect and systems, and site requirements. to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. This representative shall have the authority to make decisions 3.1.2 The Owner, upon written request from the Construe on behalf of the Owner concerning estimates and schedules, tion Manager,shall furnish evidence of Project financing prior construction budgets, and changes in the Work, and shall to the start of the Construction Phase and from time to time render such decisions promptly and furnish information thereafter as the Construction Manager may request. Fur- expeditiously, so as to avoid unreasonable delay in the ser- nishing of such evidence shall be a condition precedent to vices or Work of the Construction Manager. commencement or continuation of the Work. 3.1.3 The Owner shall establish and update an overall budget 3.3 ARCHITECT for the Project,based on consultation with the Construction The Owner shall retain an Architect to provide the Basic Ser- no Manager and Architect,which shall include contingencies for vices, including normal structural, mechanical and electrical changes in the Work and other costs which are the respon- engineering services, other than cost estimating services, sibility of the Owner. described in the edition of AIA Document B141 current as of the date of this Agreement. The Owner shall authorize and 3.1.4 STRUCTURAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL TESTS, cause the Architect to provide those Additional Services SURVEYS AND REPORTS described in AIA Document B141 requested by the Construc- In the Preconstruction Phase, the Owner shall furnish the tion Manager which must necessarily be provided by the following with reasonable promptness and at the Owner's Architect for the Preconstruction and Construction Phases of w expense, and the Construction Manager shall be entitled to the Work.Such services shall be provided in accordance with rely upon the accuracy of any such information, reports, time schedules agreed to by the Owner, Architect and Con- surveys, drawings and tests described in Clauses 3.1.4.1 struction Manager. Upon request of the Construction Manager, through 3.1.4.4, except to the extent that the Construction the Owner shall furnish to the Construction Manager a copy Manager knows of any inaccuracy: of the Owner's Agreement with the Architect, from which compensation provisions may be deleted. 3.1.4.1 Reports, surveys, drawings and tests concerning the conditions of the site which are required by law. 3.4 LEGAL REQUIREMENTS r 3.1.4.2 Surveys describing physical characteristics,legal limita- The Owner shall determine and advise the Architect and Con- tions and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a struction Manager of any special legal requirements relating written legal description of the site. The surveys and legal specifically to the Project which differ from those generally information shall include, as applicable, grades and lines of applicable to construction in the jurisdiction of the Project. Streets, alleys, pavements and adjoining property and struc- The Owner shall furnish such legal services as are necessary tures, adjacent drainage; rights-of-way, restrictions,easements, to provide the information and services required under encroachments, zoning, deed restrictions, boundaries and Paragraph 3.1. we AIA DOCUMENT A121/CMc and AGC DOCUMENT 565 • OWNER-CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AGREEMENT• 1991 EDITION A121/CMc AIA[ • 01991 •THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECI'S, 1735 NEW YORE;AVENUE,NW,WASHINGTON,DC.20006-5209 AGC(!) • 01991 • THE ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA, 1957 E STREET, NW., WASHINGTON, DC. 6 AGC 565- 1991 20006-5209•WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. 2.2.8 Upon acceptance by the Owner of the Guaranteed Max- ments of the Contract Documents without reservations or imum Price proposal, the Guaranteed Maximum Price and its exceptions, but the Owner requires that another bid be _ -- basis shall be set forth in Amendment No. 1. The Guaranteed accepted, then the Constriction Manager may require that Maximum Price shall be subject to additions and deductions a change in the Work be issued to adjust the Contract Time by a change in the Work as provided in the Contract and the Guaranteed Maximum Price by the difference between Documents and the date of Substantial Completion shall be the bid of the person or entity recommended to the Owner subject to adjustment as provided in the Contract Documents. by the Construction Manager and the amount of the subcon- tract or other agreement actually signed with the person or 2.2.9 The Owner shall authorize and cause the Architect to entity designated by the Owner. revise the Drawings and Specifications to the extent necessary to reflect the agreed-upon assumptions and clarifications con- 2.3.2.3 Subcontracts and agreements with suppliers furnish- tained in Amendment No. 1. Such revised Drawings and Spec- ing materials or equipment fabricated to a special design shall ifications shall be furnished to the Construction Manager in conform to the payment provisions of Subparagraphs 7.1.8 and 1 accordance with schedules agreed to by the Owner,Architect 7.1.9 and shall not be awarded on the basis of cost plus a fee and Construction Manager. The Construction Manager shall without the prior consent of the Owner. promptly notify the Architect and Owner if such revised duct Drawings and Specifications are inconsistent with the agreed- d 4 The Construction Manager shall schedule and con- upon assumptions and clarifications. duct meetings at which the Owner, Architect, Construction Manager and appropriate Subcontractors can discuss the status 2.2.10 The Guaranteed Maximum Price shall include in the of the Work. The Construction Manager shall prepare and Cost of the Work only those taxes which are enacted at the promptly distribute meeting minutes. we time the Guaranteed Maximum Price is established. 2,3.2.5 Promptly after the Owner's acceptance of the Guaran- 2.3 CONSTRUCTION PHASE teed Maximum Price proposal, the Construction Manager shall prepare a schedule in accordance with Paragraph 3.10 2.3.1 GENERAL of AIA Document A201, including the Owner's occupancy requirements. 2.3.1.1 The Construction Phase shall commence on the earlier of: 2.3.2.6 The Construction Manager shall provide monthly (1) the Owner's acceptance of the Construction written reports to the Owner and Architect on the progress Manager's Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal and of the entire Work.The Construction Manager shall maintain issuance of a Notice to Proceed, or a daily log containing a record of weather, Subcontractors working on the site, number of workers, Work(2) the Owner's first authorization to the Construction accomplish- ed,problems encountered and other similar relevant data as Manager to: the Owner may reasonably require. The log shall be available (a) award a subcontract, or to the Owner and Architect. (b) undertake construction Work with the Con- 2.3.2.7 The Construction Manager shall develop a system of struction Manager's own forces, or cost control for the Work, including regular monitoring of (c) issue a purchase order for materials or equip- actual costs for activities in progress and estimates for uncom- ment required for the Work pleted tasks and proposed changes.The Construction Manager shall identify variances between actual and estimated costs 2.3.2 ADMINISTRATION and report the variances to the Owner and Architect at reg- 2.3.2.1 Those portions of the Work that the Construction ular intervals. Manager does not customarily perform with the Construction 2.4 PROFESSIONAL SERVICES Manager's own personnel shall be performed under subcon- tracts or by other appropriate agreements with the Construc- The Construction Manager shall not be required to provide tion Manager. The Construction Manager shall obtain bids professional services which constitute the practice of architec- from Subcontractors and from suppliers of materials or equip- ture or engineering, unless such services are specifically ment fabricated to a special design for the Work from the list required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work previously reviewed and, after analyzing such bids, shall or unless the Construction Manager has specifically agreed t deliver such bids to the Owner and Architect.The Owner shall in writing to provide such services. In such event, the Con- then determine,with the advice of the Construction Manager struction Manager shall cause such services to be performed and subject to the reasonable objection of the Architect,which by appropriately licensed professionals. bids will be accepted.The Owner may designate specific per- sons or entities from whom the Construction Manager shall 2.5 UNSAFE MATERIALS obtain bids; however, if the Guaranteed Maximum Price has been established,the Owner may not prohibit the Construc- In addition to the provisions of Paragraph 10.1 in AIA Docu- ment A201, if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to tion Manager from obtaining bids from other qualified bid- ders.The Construction Manager shall not be required to con- prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting tract with anyone to whom the Construction Manager has from a material or substance encountered but not created reasonable objection. on the site by the Construction Manager, the Construction Manager shall,upon recognizing the condition, immediately 2.3.2.2 If the Guaranteed Maximum Price has been estab- stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to lished and a specific bidder among those whose bids are the Owner and Architect in writing. The Owner, Construc- delivered by the Construction Manager to the Owner and tion Manager and Architect shall then proceed in the same Architect(1)is recommended to the Owner by the Construc- manner described in Subparagraph 10.1.2 of AIA Document tion Manager; (2) is qualified to perform that portion of the A201. The Owner shall be responsible for obtaining the ser- f" Work;(3)has submitted a bid which conforms to the require- vices of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence AIA DOCUMENT A1211CMc and AGC DOCUMENT 565• OWNER-CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AGREEMENT • 1991 EDITION AIA`D •©1991 •THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,NW,WASHINGTON,DC 20006-5209 A1211CMc 4" AGC° • 9)1991 • THE ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA, 1957 E STREET, NW, WASHINGTON, DC 20006-5209•WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates US.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. AGC 565- 1991 5 Construction Manager shall prepare a detailed estimate with teed Maximum Price,which shall be the sum of the estimated supporting data for review by the Architect and approval by Cost of the Work and the Construction Manager's Fee. the Owner. During the preparation of the Construction Docu- 2.2.2 As the Drawings and Specifications may not be finished ments,the Construction Manager shall update and refine this estimate at appropriate intervals agreed to by the Owner,Archi- at the time the Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal npre- test and Construction Manages pared, the Construction Manager shall provide in the Guaranteed Maximum Price for further development of the 2.1.5.4 If anv estimate submitted to the Owner exceeds pre- Drawings and Specifications by the Architect that is consis- viously approved estimates or the Owner's budget, the Con- tent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable struction Manager shall make appropriate recommendations therefrom. Such further development does not include such to the Owner and Architect. things as changes in scope, systems, kinds and quality of materials, finishes or equipment,all of which,if required,shall 2.1.6 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS be incorporated by Change Order. wR The Construction Manager shall seek to develop subcontrac- 2.2,3 The estimated Cost of the Work shall include the Con- tor interest in the Project and shall furnish to the Owner and struction Manager's contingency, a sum established by the Architect for their information a list of possible subcontrac- Construction Manager for the Construction Manager's ex- tors,including suppliers who are to furnish materials or equip- elusive use to cover costs arising under Subparagraph 2.2.2 ■* ment fabricated to a special design,from whom proposals will and other costs which are properly reimbursable as Cost of be requested for each principal portion of the Work. The the Work but not the basis for a Change Order. Architect will promptly reply in writing to the Construction Manager if the Architect or Owner know of any objection to 2.2.4 BASIS OF GUARANTEED MAXIMUM PRICE wM such subcontractor or supplier. The receipt of such list shall not require the Owner or Architect to investigate the qualifica- tions The Construction Manager shall include with the Guaranteed of proposed subcontractors or suppliers, nor shall it Maximum Price proposal a written statement of its basis, waive the right of the Owner or Architect later to object to which shall include: or reject any proposed subcontractor or supplier. 1 A list of the Drawings and Specifications, including all addenda thereto and the Conditions of the Con- 2.1.7 LONG-LEAD TIME ITEMS tract, which were used in preparation of the Guaran- The Construction Manager shall recommend to the Owner teed Maximum Price proposal. and Architect a schedule for procurement of long-lead time .2 A list of allowances and a statement of their basis. items which will constitute part of the Work as required to .3 A list of the clarifications and assumptions made by meet the Project schedule. If such long-lead time items are the Construction Manager in the preparation of the procured by the Owner,they shall be procured on terms and Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal to supple- conditions acceptable to the Construction Manager. Upon the ment the information contained in the Drawings and 'A4 Owner's acceptance of the Construction Manager's Guaran- Specifications. teed Maximum Price proposal,all contracts for such items shall .4 The proposed Guaranteed Maximum Price,including be assigned by the Owner to the Construction Manager,who a statement of the estimated cost organized by trade shall accept responsibility for such items as if procured by categories, allowances,contingency,and other items an the Construction Manager. The Construction Manager shall and the fee that comprise the Guaranteed Maxi- expedite the delivery of long-lead time items. mum Price. 2.1.8 EXTENT OF RESPONSIBILITY .5 The Date of Substantial Completion upon which the proposed Guaranteed Maximum Price is based,and we The Construction Manager does not warrant or guarantee esti- a schedule of the Construction Documents issuance mates and schedules except as may be included as part of the dates upon which the date of Substantial Completion Guaranteed Maximum Price. The recommendations and is based. advice of the Construction Manager concerning design alter- �! natives shall be subject to the review and approval of the 2.2.5 The Construction Manager shall meet with the Owner Owner and the Owner's professional consultants.It is not the and Architect to review the Guaranteed Maximum Price pro- Construction Manager's responsibility to ascertain that the posal and the written statement of its basis. In the event that Drawings and Specifications are in accordance with applicable the Owner or Architect discovers any inconsistencies or inac- No laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, rules and regula- curacies in the information presented, they shall promptly tions. However, if the Construction Manager recognizes that notify the Construction Manager,who shall make appropriate portions of the Drawings and Specifications are at variance adjustments to the Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal, its therewith, the Construction Manager shall promptly notify basis or both. we the Architect and Owner in writing. 2.2.6 Unless the Owner accepts the Guaranteed Maximum 2.1.9 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY Price proposal in writing on or before the date specified in AND AFFIRMATIVE ACTION the proposal for such acceptance and so notifies the Construc- tion Manager, the Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal shall The Construction Manager shall comply with applicable laws, regulations and special requirements of the Contract Docu- not be effective without written acceptance by the Construc- ments regarding equal employment opportunity and affir- tion Manager. mative action programs. 2.2.7 Prior to the Owner's acceptance of the Construction .. 2.2 GUARANTEED MAXIMUM PRICE Manager's Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal and issu- PROPOSAL AND CONTRACT TIME ance of a Notice to Proceed, the Construction Manager shall not incur any cost to be reimbursed as part of the Cost of 2.2.1 When the Dra-,vings and Specifications are sufficiently the Work, except as the Owner may specifically authorize complete,the Construction Manager shall propose a Guaran- in writing. AIA DOCUMENT A121/CMc and AGC DOCUMENT 565 - OWNER-CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AGREEMENT- 1991 EDITION A121/CMc AIA''3 - 101991 -THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,NW,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006-5209 ww AGC° - O1991 - THE ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA, 1957 E STREET, N W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 4 AGC 565- 1991 20006-5209-WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONSTRUCTION MANAGER WHERE THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER IS ALSO THE CONSTRUCTOR ARTICLE 1 dations on construction feasibility;actions designed to mini- mize adverse effects of labor or material shortages; time GENERAL PROVISIONS requirements for procurement, installation and construction completion;and factors related to construction cost including 1.1 RELATIONSHIP OF PARTIES estimates of alternative designs or materials, preliminary The Construction Manager accepts the relationship of trust budgets and possible economies. and confidence established with the Owner by this Agree- 2,1,3 PRELIMINARY PROJECT SCHEDULE ment,and covenants with the Owner to furnish the Construc- tion Manager's reasonable skill and judgment and to cooperate When Project requirements described in Subparagraph 3.1.1 with the Architect in furthering the interests of the Owner. have been sufficiently identified, the Construction Manager The Construction Manager shall furnish construction admin- shall prepare, and periodically update, a preliminary Project istration and management services and use the Construction schedule for the Architect's review and the Owner's approval. Manager's best efforts to perform the Project in an expedi- The Construction Manager shall obtain the Architect's approval tious and economical manner consistent with the interests of of the portion of the preliminary Project schedule relating to the Owner. The Owner shall endeavor to promote harmony the performance of the Architect's services.The Construction and cooperation among the Owner,Architect, Construction Manager shall coordinate and integrate the preliminary Proj- Manager and other persons or entities employed by the Owner ect schedule with the services and activities of the Owner, for the Project. Architect and Construction Manager.As design proceeds,the preliminary Project schedule shall be updated to indicate pro- 1.2 GENERAL CONDITIONS posed activity sequences and durations, milestone dates for receipt and approval of pertinent information, submittal of tiw For the Construction Phase, the General Conditions of the a Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal,preparation and pro- Contract shall be the 1987 Edition of AIA Document A201, cessing of shop drawings and samples, delivery of materials General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, which or equipment requiring long-lead time procurement,Owner's is incorporated herein by reference. For the Preconstruction occupancy requirements showing portions of the Project Phase,or in the event that the Preconstruction and Construc- having occupancy priority,and proposed date of Substantial tion Phases proceed concurrently,AIA Document A201 shall Completion. If preliminary Project schedule updates indicate apply to the Preconstruction Phase only as specifically pro- that previously approved schedules may not be met, the Con- vided in this Agreement. The term "Contractor" as used in struction Manager shall make appropriate recommendations AIA Document A201 shall mean the Construction Manager. to the Owner and Architect. ARTICLE 2 2.1.4 PHASED CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S The Construction Manager shall make recommendations to the Owner and Architect regarding the phased issuance of RESPONSIBILITIES Drawings and Specifications to facilitate phased construction of the Work, if such phased construction is appropriate for The Construction Manager shall perform the services the Project, taking into consideration such factors as econ- described in this Article. The services to be provided under omies, time of performance, availability of labor and mate- Paragraphs 2.1 and 2.2 constitute the Preconstruction Phase rials, and provisions for temporary facilities. services.If the Owner and Construction Manager agree,after consultation with the Architect,the Construction Phase may 2.1.5 PRELIMINARY COST ESTIMATES commence before the Preconstruction Phase is completed, in which case both phases shall proceed concurrently. 2.1.5.1 When the Owner has sufficiently identified the Proj- ect requirements and the Architect has prepared other basic 2.1 PRECONSTRUCTION PHASE design criteria, the Construction Manager shall prepare, for the review of the Architect and approval of the Owner, a 2.1.1 PRELIMINARY EVALUATION preliminary cost estimate utilizing area, volume or similar con- ceptual estimating techniques. The Construction Manager shall provide a preliminary evalua tion of the Owner's program and Project budget requirements, 2.1.5.2 When Schematic Design Documents have been pre- each in terms of the other. pared by the Architect and approved by the Owner, the Con- struction Manager shall prepare for the review of the Archi- 2.1.2 CONSULTATION tect and approval of the Owner,a more detailed estimate with supporting data. During the preparation of the Design Devel- The Construction Manager with the Architect shall jointly opment Documents, the Construction Manager shall update schedule and attend regular meetings with the Owner and and refine this estimate at appropriate intervals agreed to by Architect. The Construction Manager shall consult with the the Owner, Architect and Construction Manager. Owner and Architect regarding site use and improvements, and the selection of materials, building systems and equip- 2.1.5.3 When Design Development Documents have been ment. The Construction Manager shall provide recommen- prepared by the Architect and approved by the Owner, the AIA DOCUMENT A121/CMc and AGC DOCUMENT 565 • OWNER-CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AGREEMENT • 1991 EDITION AIA° • ©1991 •THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,NW,WASHINGTON,D.0 20006-52.09 A1211CMc AGC© • ©1991 • THE ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF ANIERICA, 1957 E STREET, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5209•WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. AGC 565- 1991 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS ARTICLE 6 COST OF THE WORK FOR 1.1 Relationship of Parties CONSTRUCTION PHASE 1.2 General Conditions 6.1 Costs To Be Reimbursed 6.2 Costs Not To Be Reimbursed ARTICLE 2 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S 6.3 Discounts, Rebates and Refunds RESPONSIBILITIES 6.4 Accounting Records 2.1 Preconstruction Phase ARTICLE 7 CONSTRUCTION PHASE w 2.2 Guaranteed Maximum Price Proposal and Contract Time 7.1 Progress Payments 2.3 Construction Phase 7.2 Final Payment 2.4 Professional Services 2.5 Unsafe Materials ARTICLE 8 INSURANCE AND BONDS ARTICLE 3 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 8.1 Insurance Required of the Construction Manager 3.1 Information and Services 8.2 Insurance Required of the Owner 3.2 Owner's Designated Representative 8.3 Performance Bond and 3.3 Architect Payment Bond 3.4 Legal Requirements ARTICLE 9 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS ARTICLE 4 COMPENSATION AND PAYMENTS FOR PRECONSTRUCTION PHASE 9.1 Dispute Resolution for the SERVICES Preconstruction Phase 9.2 Dispute Resolution for the 4.1 Compensation Construction Phase 4.2 Payments 9.3 Other Provisions w ARTICLE 5 COMPENSATION FOR ARTICLE 10 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION CONSTRUCTION 10.1 Termination Prior to Establishing PHASE SERVICES Guaranteed Maximum Price *■+ 5.1 Compensation 10.2 Termination Subsequent to 5.2 Guaranteed Maximum Price Establishing Guaranteed 5.3 Changes in the Work Maximum Price ta. 10.3 Suspension ARTICLE 11 OTHER CONDITIONS AND SERVICES Attachments AMENDMENT NO. 1 to Agreement Between Owner and Construction Manager AIA DOCUMENT A121/CMc and AGC DOCUMENT 565•OWNER-CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AGREEMENT• 1991 EDITION A121/CMc AIA° •©1991•THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.200065209 AGC° • ©1991 • THE ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA, 1957 E STREET, NW, WASHINGTON, D.0 2 AGC 565- 1991 20006-5209•WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. AIA Document A121 1CMc and AGC Document 565 Pill Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Construction Manager where the Construction Manager is also THE CONSTRUCTOR 1991 EDITION THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES; CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION. The 1987 Edition of AIA Document A201, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, is referred to herein. This Agreement requires modification if other general conditions are utilized. AGREEMENT made as of the day of in the year of (In words, indicate day, month and year) BETWEEN the Owner: (Name and address) and the Construction Manager: (Name and address) The Project is: (Name, address and brief description) #IA The Architect is: (Name and address) The Owner and Construction Manager agree as set forth below. Portions of this document are derived from AIA Document Al 11,Standard Form of Agreement Between the Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is the Cost of the Work Plus a Fee,copyright 1920, 1925, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1978, ©1987 by The American Institute of Architects;other portions are derived from AGC Document 500,©1980 by The Associated General Contractors of America.Material in this document differing from that found in AIA Document Al l I and AGC Document 500 is copyrighted ©1991 by The American Institute of Architects and The Associated General Contractors of America.Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of AIA and AGC violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. AIA DOCUMENT A121/CMc and AGC DOCUMENT 565.OWNER-CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AGREEMENT s • 1991 EDITION• AIA° • ©1991 •THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK � A�C AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5209 • AGCm • ©1991 • THE ASSOCIATED GENERAL A121/CMc -W, �� s CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA, 1957 E STREET, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5209 • WARNING: OR Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright taws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. AGC 565- 1991 1 ID ' 2003 2004 —T= 40 ! 14AUG02 08OCT02 MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC JAN FEB 1350 15 i 15AUG02 04SEP02 1335 45 04SEP02 05NOV02 per Level 1 1505 j 20 105SEP02 02OCT02 370 40 i 26SEP02 20NOV02 1445! 15 26SEP02 0CT61 02 I n ' 1351 22 090 2 07NOV0)i el { 1380 I 40 240CT02 18DECO2 1 fight 1390 65 06NOV02 06FEB03 I nt Tie-in 1450 20 07NOV02 04DECO2 and Fins 1352 22 08NOV02 09DECO2 Jpper Level 1510 20 08NOV02 05DECO2 el 1515 20 10DECO2 08JAN03 pperLevel 1420 20 i 19DECO2 17JAN03 I Lower level 1228 5 20JAN03 24JAN03 i- Finish Floors-Lower Level 1421 20 20JAN03 14FEB03 Lions-Main Level 1410 20 27JAN03 21 FEB03 awer Level 1430 55 07FEB03 24APR03 1545 40 07FEB03 03APR03 =_M EP System EP Trim&Finishes 1238 5 17FE603 21FE603 ill and Finish Floors-Main Level 1422 20 17FEB03 14MAR03 r Partitions-Upper Level 1555 40 21FEB03 17APR03 eDimming System 1 1411 20 24FEB03 ' 21MAR03 ( i s-Main Level AttaAAA 1440 20 24FEB03 21MAR03 9 I 'ork&Woodwork-Lower Level 1525 ' 15 24FEB03 14MAR03 Lower Level 1560 40 ! 07MAR03 01MAY03 Security System 1248 5 17MAR03 21MAR03 :ret6 Fill and Finish Floors-Upper Level 1412 20 24MAR03 18APR03 1455 20 24MAR03 18APR03 i Ceilings-Upper Level 1477 30 24MAR03 02MAY03 j Millwork,Woodwork&Equipment-Main Level �Kitchen Servery Equipment 530 15 24MAR03 11APR03 Lights--Main-Level---- 2360 20 07APR03' 02MAY03 Site Concrete Paving 1460 15 21APR03 09MAY03 3 Interior Finishes%Painting/Wall Coverings-Lower 1465 20 21APR03 16MAY03 3 Tworro c,Woodwork&Equipment-Upper Level 1535 15 21APR03 09MAY03 3mn�Lights-Upper Level 1470 20 05MAY03 I 30MAY03 YO mMo Flooring/Carpet/Tile Finishes-Lower Level 2365 20 05MAY03 I 30MAY03 tm�^Initial Landscaping 1461 15 12MAY03 30MAY03 Y0� 3immitnten'or Finishes/Painting/Wall Coverings-Main 1500 30 12MAY03 20JUN03 RqY Testing and Start Up 2350 10 12MAY03 23MAY03 tkY4imn Loam and Seed 1462 15 02JUN03 20JUN03 0�JONO3- Interior Finishes/Painting/Wall Coverings-Upper 1471 15 02JUN03 20JUN03 -02JUNU Flooring/Carpet/Tile Finishes-Main Level 1540 25 02JUN03 07JUL03 —� I -D2JUNb��Building Commissioning 1472 15 23JUN03 14JUL03 .23JUN03m Flooring/Carpet/Tile Finishes-Upper Level 1550 20 08JUL03 04AUG03 08JUL03 unch List and Final Cleanup 1520 5 05AUG03 11AUG03 05A1T m Obtain Certificate of Occupancy 2355 10 09SEP03 22SEP03 I 09SEP03m Final Landscaping Qvn�r`s��El�omFnfissron�ig _ 1590 20 12AUG03 08SEP03 12AUG03 Owner move-in 1600 0 08SEP03 Grand Opening ),Earty bar Start date 24JAN01 A Early start point Finish date 22SEWi Progress bar Data date 170CT01 Critical bar Run date 180C101 Summary bar Page number 2A�77 Start milestone point ®Primavera Systems,Inc. i Finish milestone point •0 FEB YAR APR - MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC JAN FEB 1063 i 0 �22JANNMDesign Develop ment 2070 18 23JAN01 A 23100%Design Develor '()80 18 !23FEB01 A 20APR01 A EBOI A�100%DD J90 ! 0 1 23FEBO1 A 22MAR01 A =EbOl A�Design Develop f ! 1080 137 05MAR01 A� 20SEP01 A 5MAR01 1 3010 10 126MAROI A 06APR01 A 26MAR01 Am Building Con 1086 1 21SEP01 A 12NOV01 2100 110 24SEP01A 1 BOCT01 2180 15 25SEP01 A 170CT01 A 2110 22 13NOV01 I 12DEC01 1150 i 10 28NOV01 11DEC01 1170 4 13DEC01 ; 18DE601 2115 1 13DEC01 13DEC01 2125 0 18DEC01 3015 3 19DEC01 21DEC01 4010 1 8 19DEC01 ( 02JAN02 3025 0 26DEC01 1200 45 27DEC01 28FEB02 4000 23 03JAN02 04FEB02 2135 1 05FEB02 05FE602 cbhstR1C$IOt1 - ---- - — 1218 40 08JAN02 04MAR02 2211 1 100 08JAN02 I 27MAY02 1220 20 05MAR02 01APRO2 !I 2220 5 12MAR02 18MAR02 2225 5 12MAR02 18MAR02 L2235 2 12MAR02 13MAR02 ' 2245 3 19MAR02 21MAR02 255 7 26MAR02 03APRO2 2230 17 04APR02 , 26APRO2 2250 15 22APR02 10MAY02 I 2260 15 22APR02 10MAY02 2265 25 29APRO2 31MAY02 2320 10 29APR02 10MAY02 1365 10 13MAY02 24MAY02 2325 4 13MAY02 16MAY02 2295 5 17MAY02 23MAY02 1395 3 24MAY02 28MAY02 2240 11 03JUN02 17JUN02 2270 11 18JUN02 02JUL02 2280 10 18JUN02 01JUL02 2300 5 02JUL02 09JUL02 2275 10 03JUL02 i 17JUL02 2285 8 03JUL02 15JUL02 t 1320 41 10JUL02 I 04SEP02 1400 15 10JUL02 30JUL02 2330 15 10JUL02 30JUL02 1330 15 15JUL02 I 02AUG02 2305 ! 5 16JUL02 22JUL02 2290 10 18JUL02 31JUL02 2315 5 31JUL02 06AUG02 2335 7 31JUL02 08AUG02 2310 3 01AUG02 05AUG02 1325 45 07AUG02 080CT02 :I 340 3 09AUG02 13AUG02 go - Start date 24JAN01 ` Early bar p Early start pant Finish date 22SEP03 _Progress bar Data date 170CT01 Run date 180CT01 CAticat bar Summary bar Page number 1A — n r► Start milestone pant ®Primavera Systems,Inc. Finish mitestone pant --- FORM ST-SC REVERSE Signed Under the Pains and Penalties of Perjury ..we Signature Title CONTRnTT.FR Name of Firm DANIEL O'CONNELL'S SONS INC so Address 480 HAMPDEN ST PO BOX 267 HO= MA 01041-0267 Date 10/25/01 Registration No. (if any) 04-1685580 NOTICE TO VENDORS Exempt governmental agencies are: the United States, the Commonwealth of Massachusetts or any political subdivision thereof, or their respective agencies. Exempt organizations are: any corporation, foundation, organization or institution which is exempt from taxation under provisions of 5501 (c) (3) of the U.S. Internal Revenue Code, as amended and in effect for the applicable period, and which organization or agency has been issued a Certificate of Exemption by the Commissioner of Revenue under Massachusetts General Laws, Chapter 64H, 56 (d) and (e) . Any abuse or misuse of this certificate by any tax-exempt organization or any unauthorized use of this certificate by any individual constitutes a serious violation and will lead to revocation. wilful misuse of this Certificate of Exemption is subject to criminal sanctions of up to 1 year in prison and $10,000 ($50,000 for corporations) in fines. �s Exempt purchases of building materials and supplies are limited to: those materials and supplies used, consumed, employed or expended in the construction, reconstruction, alteration, remodeling or repair of any building, structure, public highway, bridge or other such public work as well as such materials and supplies physically incorporated therein. Exemptions also include rental charges for construction vehicles, equipment and machinery rented specifically for use on the site of any tax exempt project or .� while being used exclusively for the transportation of materials for any such tax exempt project under Massachusetts General Laws, Chapter 64H, S6(f) . A Contractor's Exempt Purchaser Certificate applies only to the contract specified therein. You must record the name of the purchaser, the sales price, and date of each separate sale made under such certificate. A copy of a valid ST-2, Certificate of Exemption, must be submitted at the time of sale. The contract number, or other i.• identifying designation of an unnumbered contract, must appear on purchase orders and invoices. The Vendor must retain a copy of Form ST-5C accompanied by Form ST-2 as are other tax records. See Record Retention Regulation 830 CMR 62C.24. w If necessary, additional information may be obtained from: Massachusetts Department of Revenue Determinations Bureau P. 0. Box 7027 Boston, Massachusetts 02204 •• Exhibit "I" FORM ST-SC THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE DETERMINATIONS BUREAU C O N T R A C T O R' S E X E M P T P U R C H A S E C E R T I F I C A T E MASSACHUSETTS DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE CERTIFICATE OF EXEMPTION % Certification is nereoy Maas mat the organization herein named is an exitmot ourcnaser under General Laws.Cit"ter 64N.Sections&d) and(el.All purchases of tangible owsonat property by this organization are exemot from taxation under said chapter to me extent that sucn orcoany is Used in the conduct of tree business of the ourcnassr.Arty&Ouse or misuse of this canificate by any lax-exempt organization of any unauthorized Use of MIS caMflcate by any individual constitutes a senous violation and vnll lead to revocation. WIOhd misuse of tMs CaMfleate a Exilmodon is subject to criminal sanctions of up to 1 yew it prison and 51111,01011(250,000 for eonmWatteral In fines. NAME THE TRUSTEES OF THE SMITH COLLEGE EXEMPTION NUMBER£ 041-843-040 PLEASE ISSUEDATE 01/04/99 COMPLETE ADDRESS TREASURER'S OFFICE THIS CERTIFlCATE EXPIRES ON 01/04/04 SECTION CITY NORTHAMPTON STATE MA ZIP 01063 NOT ASSIGNABLE OR TRANSFERABLE COMMISSIONER OF REVENUE I hereby certify under the penalties of perjury that I am engaged in the go performance of the following described contract for the construction, reconstruction, alteration, remodeling or repair of a building or structure for an exempt governmental agency or for a 5501 (c) (3) certified exempt organization; and that the following described quantities of building materials and supplies are being purchased for use exclusively in said contract: Date of Contract PENDING Est. Date of Completion SEPTEMBER 2002 Contract No. 1999118 Location and Description of Project SMITH COLLEGE CAMPUS CENTER ELM ST- NORTIWIPTON ,uLA 03 063 Description of Rind and Quantity of Property to be Purchased BUILDING -& SUPPLIES To the best of my knowledge and belief, building materials and supplies used in said contract are exempt from the sales and use tax under the provisions of Massachusetts General Laws, Chapter 64H, 56(f). I will maintain adequate records to show the disposition of all building materials and supplies purchased under this certificate. I hereby assume full liability for the payment of any use tax due in the event that the property purchased under this certificate is used for any other purpose. 011111 (This fora is approved by the Commissioner of Revenue and may be reproduced.) Exhibit"H" AFFIDAVIT OF FINAL PAYMENT & RELEASE In consideration of the total sum of and other good and valuable consideration(the"Payment"),including a final payment of the receipt and sufficiency of which is hereby acknowledged, paid by DANIEL O'CONNELL'S SONS, INC. ("DOC") to the undersigned, or to a subcontractor, materialmen, supplier, laborer, trustee of employee benefit groups, materialman, (use supplier) or creditor of the undersigned, for services or labor employed in and/or materials or equipment furnished for the construction of a project known as Smith Campus Center, (the "Project"), the undersigned, and its/his/her/their heirs, successors and assigns, hereby executes this AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT & RELEASE ("Release"),and certifies as follows: ! 1. Upon receipt of the above described final payment, the undersigned will have received payment in full for all services, labor, materials and equipment provided and/or for all work performed connection with the construction of the Project- Except for the above stated final payment, and as an inducement to DOC to make said final payment, the undersigned hereby affirms that there are no outstanding claims against DOC,or against the owner of the Project(the"Owner"),or against either of its/their sureties or guarantors in connection with this Project- 2. Upon the receipt of the above described Payment, the undersigned does hereby forever release, waive, and discharge DOC, the Owner, their sureties, and any and all other guarantors or obligors on any Bond or other undertaking, along with their insurers, partners, officers, directors, agents, employees, attorneys, successors, administrators, executors, heirs and assigns (collectively hereinafter referred to as "RELEASEES")from any and all manner of actions,causes of action,suits,debts,accounts,claims,contracts,demands,agreements,encumbrances, liens,controversies,judgments,obligations,damages and liabilities of any kind,nature and description whatsoever, in law or equity,whether or not now known, suspected or claimed which the undersigned ever had, now has or hereafter may have or claim to have against said RELEASEES by Pw reason of any act,transaction,practice,conduct or omission of RELEASEES or any matter,cause,effect,or thing of any kind whatsoever that arose or occurred prior to the date of this RELEASE, including,without limiting the generality of this RELEASE,any claim that arose out of,relates to or is based upon, in whole or in part,any act,transaction,practice,conduct,omission,matter,cause,effect or thing which was,or which could have been alleged or asserted in an action relating to the Project. 3. The undersigned warrants that all potential lien or bond claimants whose claims arise from the undersigned's work, including but not limited to laborers, trustees of employee benefit groups, materialmen, suppliers, subcontractors, and any other service providers engaged or employed by the undersigned in connection with the Project, (collectively the "CLAIMANTS"), have been paid in full and that none of such 'LAIMANTS has any claim,demand or lien against the Project. The undersigned further warrants that all applicable taxes,fee and benefits relating iirectly or indirectly to the undersigned's work have been paid in full- wI 4. The undersigned hereby agrees to indemnify and hold harmless DOC and the other RELEASEES from any and all damages,costs, expenses,demands,causes of action, suits,debts, accounts,encumbrances,judgments,claims, demands and legal fees,directly or indirectly arising from any claim or lien by any CLAIMANT or other party which provided labor,services,equipment or materials to or on behalf of the undersigned in connection with the Project. IBM 5. The undersigned has not and will not assign any claim against DOC, its sureties, and other guarantors on the Bond or other undertaking,nor any lien or right to perfect a lien against the Project. The undersigned warrants that no security interest has been given or executed h by the undersigned for in connection with any materials,appliances,machinery,fixtures,or furnishings placed upon or installed in the Project. 6. This AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT&RELEASE shall be an independent covenant and shall operate and be effective with respect to all work, services, labor,equipment or materials furnished in connection with the Project under any contract or supplemental contract, whether oral ■w or written,and shall be applicable to any and all contract,extra or additional work performed or costs incurred at any time with respect to the Project. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,with all right,power,and authority required to execute this document,this AFFIDAVIT OF FINAL PAYMENT& RELEASE has been executed on the day of 200_ WITNESS: [SUBCONTRACTOR] IMP BY: TTTLE: No Duly Authorized Subscribed,sworn to,and acknowledged before me this day of 200 Notary Public: My Commission Expires: DOGREL 2(4/1/98) XM Page 1 of 1 Smith College Campus Center November 2001 Exhibit "G" CONTRACT DOCUMENTS no Vw on op 0,0- - Page 1 of 1 Smith College—Campus Center November 2001 o 0 � N Y N � O Z V N m C N N N co _a C (D r O o E m 7aj � � Y O z 0 � N O z •E O O d d c (a d Q d p m a' Q' 0 � d n. W V Q N . Q. � N 3 � U O v p N Fes- fl- �A1 � c t X o m o ) 0 a� s `m cu � p O � 1 N m r U j o d Z � L1 L O � V U � y w U Q d U d CL E co ° CL CL w V E .°° CL t H cn O ~ Y O O t E = N v � o o a _j 0 0 a� a Exhibit "E" SCOPE OF WORK In conjunction with the agreed upon Scope of Work and generally the Work as further described in the Contract Documents issued by Weiss/Manfredi Architects dated , (and as amended) and "Instructions to Bidders" 1! dated November 2001. The work by this Subcontractor will be inclusive of,but not limited to the following items: 1. The work of this Subcontractor shall be in accordance with federal, state and local codes and regulations as interpreted by the agency and/or authority having such jurisdiction. 2. The storage of material, equipment and apparatus at the construction site will be permitted only to the extent approved by Construction Manager. 3. This Subcontractor shall coordinate his work with the work of all other trades. 4. Work hours shall be between the hours of 8:00 a.m. and 4:30 p.m. 5. Courteous behavior is expected and shall be enforced. Workers shall refrain from harassing any student, staff member or a fellow worker. Occurrence will require immediate termination of the responsible person(s). 6. All materials are subject to the approval of the Architect. 7. The Subcontractor,on a daily basis,shall do cleanup to a dumpster provided by the Construction Manager. 8. The Subcontractor acknowledges that he has inspected the site and verified to his satisfaction the nature and quantity of the work involved,and is familiar with all conditions to be encountered and that he will accomplish all work herein undertaken for the sum set out in the subcontract. 9. Subcontractor acknowledges that he has received, reviewed and familiarized himself with the Contract Documents (specifications, drawings, and addenda). 10. The Owner will entertain value Engineering/Substitution Suggestions. Submission of such information must include all pertinent product/procedure changes and cost differential information and shall be specifically separate from all base bid information presented. 11. Any changes or modifications to the plans or specifications made by this Subcontractor must first be submitted to the Construction Manager for approval by the Architect. 12. In the event of any dispute as to whether or not any portion of work is within the scope of the work to be performed by any Subcontractor any dispute as to whether or not the Subcontractor is entitled to additional compensation for any work requested of the Subcontractor shall continue to proceed diligently with performance required by the Construction Manager. In no event shall delay in the resolution of any dispute excuse prompt performance of work. 13. Provide hoisting, rigging, staging, and/or scaffolding for your work. 14. All deliveries will be scheduled with the Project Superintendent. 15 Free parking will be available at a designated location. 16 Unauthorized vehicles parked on any premises will be removed at the Subcontractor's expense. Page 1 of 1 Smith College—Campus Center November 2001 w , w � I frr - oA A — 3 00 w ° � � � � � � � � OU !! o W o O 0 « ° W � m U U Y Cr, oq U b b Q Q 3 I w > ° t > d > cz C� U °o W ° x a � ! in. ( U co a, I o E b aj nl Cl. wOU U10 go Exhibit "D" .15.3 Equal Opportunity A. During the performance of this contract the Subcontractor agrees as follows: 1. The Subcontractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, sex, religion, national origin or age. The Subcontractor will take affirmative action to insure that applicants are employed and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, color, sex, religion, national origin, handicap, or age. Such action shall include but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Subcontractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by an appropriate agency or the federal government setting forth the requirements of these nondiscrimination provisions. 2. The Subcontractor will state, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the Subcontractor, that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race,color,sex, religion, national origin, handicap, or age. 3. The Subcontractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which the Subcontractor has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding a notice to be provided by the Owner, advising the Labor Union of Workers' Representative of the Subcontractor's commitments under Section 202 of Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965 as amended, and shall post copies of the an notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. 4. The Subcontractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965,as ap amended,and the rules, regulations and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor. 5. The Subcontractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965 as amended, and by the rules, regulations and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or ! ' pursuant thereto,and shall permit access to his books, records and accounts by an appropriate agency of the federal government and by the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations and orders. 6. In the event of the Subcontractor's noncompliance with the equal opportunity conditions of this contract or with any of such rules, regulations or orders, this contract may be cancelled, terminated or suspended in PM whole or in part, and the Subcontractor may be declared ineligible for further government contracts or federally assisted contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, as amended, and such other sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked as provided in said Executive Order, or by rule, regulation or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise on provided by law. 7. The Construction Manager will include all clauses 15.A.7 inclusive in every subcontract or purchase order am unless exempted by rules, regulations or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to Section 204 of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, as amended, so that such provisions will be binding upon each Subcontractor or Vendor. The Construction Manager will take such action with respect to any Subcontractor or Vendor as the appropriate agency of the federal government may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions, including sanctions for noncompliance provided, however, that in the event the Construction Manager becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a Subcontractor or Vendor as a result of such direction by the appropriate agency of the federal government, the Construction IF Manager may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States. Page 1 of 2 Smith College—Campus Center November 2001 Exhibit"C" LIEN WAIVER- SUBCONTRACTOR OR SUPPLIER (To be Submitted with Each Application for Payment) OWNER: The Trustees of The Smith College Northampton, MA P0 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER: Daniel O'Connell's Sons, Inc. Holyoke, MA PROJECT: Smith Campus Center Northampton, MA SUBCONTRACTOR AND/OR SUPPLIER: Current Contract Amount: $ Total Amount Previously Paid $ Total Amount Invoiced and Outstanding $ Invoice Date(s): Retainage Held to Date: $ "" In consideration of all past payments received in connection with the Project, and upon receipt of the amount set forth above the Subcontractor/Supplier acknowledges and agrees that except for the retainage listed above, it has been paid in full for all labor, materials and/or equipment furnished by the Subcontractor/Supplier and by its subcontractors and suppliers in connection with the Project, including work required by the contract documents and any work claimed to be additional work thereunder. go [Except to any extent prohibited by law, in which case the provisions of this paragraph shall be severed herefrom and all other terms, conditions, covenants, warranties and representations herein shall be otherwise remain in full force and effect, the Subcontract/Supplier hereby releases, discharges, relinquishes and waives any and all liens, claims or rights to lien under the statutes of the State of Massachusetts with respect to the Owner, the Project and/or against the Owner on account of any labor, materials and/or equipment previously furnished and paid for as shown above.] The undersigned individual represents and warrants that he/she is the duly authorized representative of the Subcontractor/Supplier, empowered and authorized to execute and deliver this document on behalf of the Subcontractor/Supplier and that this document shall be binding upon the Subcontractor/Supplier. Signed under the penalties of perjury as of this date of , 200 _. Name of Subcontractor or Supplier Releasing Lien Signature of Authorized Individual Signing this Lien Waiver Printed Name and Title of Above Individual Submitted with Construction Manager's Payment Application No.: Page 1 of 1 Smith College—Campus Center November 2001 DOC-REL t(4/1/98) Exhibit"C Exhibit"B" SUBCONTRACTOR'S APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT CONTRACT NO.: C - COST CODE NO.: VENDOR NO.: TO: DANIEL O'CONNELL'S SONS, INC. + " 480 HAMPDEN STREET P. O. BOX 267 HOLYOKE, MA 01041-0267 DATE: JOB NAME: Smith Campus Center W JOB NUMBER: 1999— 118 SUBCONTRACTOR: ADDRESS: ITEM OF WORK: STATEMENT OF CONTRACT ACCOUNT 1. Original Contract Amount $ 2. Approved Changes (Net) (Add/Deduct) $ (As per attached breakdown) 3. Adjusted Contract Amount $ 4. Value of Work Completed To-Date: $ (As per attached breakdown) 5. Value of Approved Change Orders Completed To-Date: $ (As per attached breakdown) 6. Total: (4 + 5) $ 7. Less Amount Retained ( %) (Deduct) $ 8. TOTAL LESS RETAINAGE $ 9. Total Previously Certified (Deduct) $ 10. AMOUNT OF THIS REQUEST $ PO Page 1 of 1 Smith College—Campus Center November 2001 2. Comprehensive General Liability a. Endorsements required: (1) Premises-operations liability (2) Independent contractor's liability (3) Completed operations and products liability (4) Broad form contractual liability (5) Personal injury liability insurance for all coverage (6) Broad form property damage liability including completed operations (7) Blanket"XCU' coverage(if applicable) (8) Employees as additional insureds b. Policy limits: (1) Bodily injury - per occurrence=$1,000,000.00 per aggregate =$1,000,000.00 (2) Property damage - per occurrence= $1,000,000.00 per aggregate = $1,000.000.00 (3) Contractual bodily injury - per occurrence=$1,000,000.00 per aggregate =$1,000,000.00 OR (4) Contractual property damage - per occurrence=$1,000,000.00 per aggregate = $1,000,000.00 ON (5) Personal injury - per occurrence=$1,000,000.00 per aggregate =$1,000,000.00 3. Comprehensive Automobile Liability OM a Including coverage for owned, non-owned and hired vehicles; including the loading or unloading thereof. b. Policy limits: (1) Bodily injury-per occurrence= $1,000,000.00 (2) Property damage-per occurrence= $1,000,000.00 4. Excess Liability Umbrella Coverage a. The umbrella policy(ies) shall contain a minimum total occurrence and aggregate limit of $2,000,000.00. The policy(ies) shall contain coverage no less restrictive than that required under Paragraph III B.2a, 2b and III B.3a, 3b above. If higher limits are carried, such limits must be shown on the insurance certificate. 5. Any combination of Comprehensive General Liability and Excess Liability Umbrella insurance with limits totaling at least$3,000,000.00 will be acceptable. 6. Watercraft Hull and Protection and Indemnity Liabilii (if applicable) a. Including coverage for owned, non-owned, and hired crafts; including the loading or unloading thereof. b. Policy limits: (1) Value of hull and N/A(protection and indemnity)bodily injury and property damage. 7. Aircraft Hull and Liability(if applicable) a. Including coverage for owned, non-owned, and hired crafts; including loading and unloading thereof. b. Policy limits: (1) Combined single limit bodily injury and property damage = N/A to include passenger liability without any seat limitations. 40 Page 3 of 3 Smith College—Campus Center November 2001 If the Subcontractor shall fail to certify required insurance coverage to the Construction Manager as set forth in this agreement, before commencing work hereunder, the Construction Manager may, at its option, place insurance of the character, nature, and limits described in this agreement to cover the operations of the Subcontractor, paying the premiums for the same and charging same to the Subcontractor. Each policy shall provide that it will not be canceled or materially altered except after thirty (30) days' advance written notice to Construction Manager mailed to the address indicated in the subcontract, and the certificates of insurance shall so state. Upon receipt of any notice of cancellation or alteration, Subcontractor shall, within ten (10) days, procure other policies, about to be canceled or altered, and, if Subcontractor fails to provide, procure, and deliver acceptable policies of insurance, or satisfactory evidence thereof, in accordance with the terms hereof then at Construction Manager's option, Construction Manager may obtain such insurance at the cost and expense of Subcontractor, without the need of any notice to Subcontractor. The Construction Manager may, at its option, require the Subcontractor to furnish originals or certified copies of the policy of policies including all endorsements required to provide stated coverages. The Construction Manager may, at its option, terminate the subcontract in the event the Subcontractor fails to meet the insurance coverage and limits described in this agreement upon thirty (30) days written notice to the Subcontractor. The Subcontractor shall be entitled to payment for all work executed prior to said termination and for any loss sustained by the Subcontractor who furnishes satisfactory proof of such loss, and including an allowance for profit on the work executed prior to termination, all as determined by the Architect, but without claim or payment for loss of profit on that portion of the work not executed. B. O.C.I.P Subrogation and Waiver: (Language inserted per request of Smith College.) .w 1. Construction Manager shall require all policies of insurance that are in any way related to the Work and that are secured and maintained by Construction Manager and all tiers of Subcontractors, to include clauses providing that each underwriter and carrier shall waive all of its rights of recovery, under subrogation or otherwise, against the Owner, the O.C,I.P Administrator, the Construction Manager their officers, agents, heirs and employees, and all tiers of Subcontractors. 2. Construction Manager waives all rights ofrecovery against the Owner, the 0.C.LP.Administrator, their officers, agents, heirs, and employees, and all Subcontractors regardless of tier which Construction Manager may have or acquire because of deductible clauses in or the inadequacy of limits of any policies of insurance that are in any way related to the Work and that are secured and maintained by �. Construction Manager. 3. Each Construction Manager shall require all tiers of Subcontractors to waive the rights of recovery in the same manner(as waived in the preceding paragraph by Construction Manager) against the Owner, the 0.C.LPAdministrator, the Construction Manager, and other Subcontractors their officers, agents, heirs, and employees, regardless of tier. C. The insurance required under this paragraph shall include the following coverage and limits, or such greater coverage or larger limits as may be required by law, in the following categories,amounts and detail: 1. Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability Coverage a. If applicable, coverage required for United States Longshoremen and Harbor Worker, and the �+ Jones Act. b. Endorsements required: (1) Broad form all states endorsement (2) Voluntary compensation endorsement C. Policy limits: (1) Coverage A. (Worker's Compensation)=statutory (2) Coverage B. (Employer's Liability) = $1,000,000 minimum limit per accident or disease Page 2 of 3 Smith College—Campus Center November 2001 Exhibit "A" INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS In the event Subcontractor or any of its sub-subcontractors are not an insured party within the Owner- Controlled Insurance Program (OCIP), the following insurance requirements are in force. In the event Subcontractor or any of its Sub-subcontractors are included as an insured party within the Owner- Controlled Insurance Program, Subcontractor or any of its Sub-subcontractors are instructed to refer to the "Summary of the Owner-Controlled Insurance Program" document attached to the construction specifications for the governing insurance requirements. I. Subcontractor's Liability Insurance A. The Subcontractor shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies licensed to do business in the state in which the project is located, insurance as will protect him, the Owner, the Owner's Representative and the Construction Manager's officers, agents, heirs and employees from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Subcontractor's operations under the subcontract, whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: 1. Claims under workers' compensation,disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts; 2. Claims for damages because of injury, occupational sickness or disease,or death of his employees; 3. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than his employees; NO 4. Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained (i) by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by the Subcontractor, or(ii)by any other person;and 5. Claims for damages because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom;and OR 6. Claims for damages of bodily injury or death of any person;personal injury or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any vehicle. tns II. The insurance required by subparagraph (1), above, shall be written for liability specified herein or required by law_ whichever is greater, and shall include contractual liability insurance as applicable to the Subcontractor's obligations under the subcontract. OR III. Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Construction Manager shall be filed with the Construction Manager, containing the following requirements: ON A. Subcontractor and, unless otherwise specified, each of Subcontractor's Sub-Subcontractors, shall obtain and maintain insurance and shall be carried in companies satisfactory to Owner and shall name Owner("The Trustees of The Smith College"), the Architect ("Weiss /Manfredi Architects") the Construction Manager (`Daniel O'Connell's Sons, Inc.") and their officers, agents, employees, heirs, and such other parties as the Construction Manager may identify by notice to the Subcontractor as additional insureds (and evidenced as such on the policy certificates). Subcontractor shall not commence work hereunder until true copies or certificates evidencing such insurance have been submitted to and approved by Construction Manager. Subcontractor shall not allow any Sub-Subcontractor to commence work until ON such Subcontractor has obtained the same insurance coverage. The Subcontractor shall maintain completed operations liability for not less than one (1) year after final completion of the work. 40 Page 1 of 3 Smith College—Campus Center November 2001 Article 13 Alterations 13.1 (All alterations to this agreement are to be stated hereunder.) Article 14 Right-to-Know Law 14.1 "Right-to-Know - Each Subcontractor is required to implement the provisions of 29 cfr-1926 OSHA hazard communication standards upon its effective date. When furnishing any material the Subcontractor will furnish the required Material Safety Data Sheet, together with appropriate labels and employee training or instruction material for that substance." Article 15 Complete Agreement �• 15.1 This agreement, together with all documents, specifications, drawings, incorporated herein by reference, constitute the entire agreement between the Construction Manager and Subcontractor. There are no terms, conditions, or provisions, either oral or written, between the parties hereto, other than those contained herein. This agreement supersedes any and all written representations, inducements, or understandings of any kind or nature between the parties hereto, relating to the particular project involved herein. �w 15.2 The said parties for themselves, their heirs, successors, executors, administrators and assigns, due hereby agree to the full performance of the covenants herein contained. .w In witness whereof they have hereunder set their hands the day and date first above written. In the presence of SUBCONTRACTOR'S NAME Subcontractor By .R. Witness Authorized Signature Date DANIEL O'CONNELL'S SONS,INC. Construction Manager w By Witness Authorized Signature Date Page 10 of 10 Smith College—Campus Center November 2001 on P Article 9 Construction Manager Rights and Responsibilities 9.1 The Construction Manager shall be bound to the Subcontractor by the terms of this agreement. To the extent that the provisions of the contract documents between the Owner and the Construction Manager apply to the work of the Subcontractor as defined in this agreement, the Construction Manager shall assume toward the Subcontractor all the obligations and responsibilities that the Owner, by those documents, assumes toward the Construction Manager. 9.2 The Construction Manager shall not give instructions or orders directly to employees or workers of the "! Subcontractor, except to persons designated as authorized representatives of the Subcontractor. 9.3 Provide 100%Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond,i,f required The Construction Manager shall have the right to require any Subcontractor to furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the subcontract and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder. The failure of the Subcontractor to furnish a bond within ten (10) days after having been given notice of such requirement by Owner or Construction Manager shall constitute sufficient cause for termination of his subcontract. Rr Article 10 Equal Opportunity- See Exhibit"D" 10.1 During the performance of this agreement, the Subcontractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or go applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, handicap, age, or national origin. The Subcontractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed without regard to their race,color, religion, sex, or national origin. The Subcontractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order No. 11246 of Sept. 24, 1965, including all amendments, updates, and modifications to this executive order, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor. Article I 1 Governing Law 11.1 The validity, interpretation and performance of this contract shall be governed by laws of the state where the designated principal place of business of the Construction Manager is located. The Subcontractor hereby accepts said state's jurisdiction and agrees to accept service of process as if it were personally served within said jurisdiction. Titles, captions or headings to any provision, article, etc., shall not limit the full contents of same. These articles have the full force and effect as if no titles existed if any term or provision of the contract is found on invalid, it shall not affect the validity and enforcement of all remaining terms and provisions of the contract. Article 12 Legal Forum 12.1 Any dispute or claim arising out of this contract, or from a breach of this contract, and which is not resolved by the terms and provisions of this contract, shall be submitted to the judicial court within the county and state of the ! " Construction Manager's designated principal place of business for decision. The Subcontractor agrees to participate in,join in, and be bound by any proceeding, be it judicial, administrative, arbitration or other, which directly or indirectly relates to this contract or project and for which the Construction Manager demands, by written notice, that the Subcontractor participate. Any claim or action by the Subcontractor must be commenced within two years of the date the cause of action accrued, but in no event later than one year after substantial performance of this contract, and in no event after final payment to the Subcontractor. If any claim or dispute arises relating to this contract, the Subcontractor shall immediately make all of its books and records available to the Construction Manager for review and audit. Page 9 of 10 Smith College—Campus Center November 2001 ■w 8.11 The Subcontractor shall submit to the Construction Manager upon request, copies of orders placed for the various materials required for the project or authentic stock lists if such material is normally a stock item. Order copies need not reflect prices but should indicate type of material, quantity, vendor name, and address, etc. The Subcontractor shall be required to submit to the Construction Manager a monthly Purchase and Delivery Schedule (Exhibit "F") or more often if required by Construction Manager, as a prerequisite for the monthly progress payment The Subcontractor shall notify the Construction Manager immediately upon learning of a change of status of any material,equipment, or supplies. 8.12 The Subcontractor shall continuously and adequately protect all his work during construction and will immediately w replace all damaged and defective work. 8.13 The Subcontractor agrees to maintain an adequate force of experienced workers and the necessary materials, supplies, and equipment to meet the requirements of the Construction Manager and other trades in order to maintain construction progress schedules, as established by the Construction Manager and Owner, in the event that this force is, in the judgment of the Construction Manager, inadequate to meet the established schedules during the regular working hours, the Subcontractor agrees to work sufficient overtime hours or increase his work force to meet such schedules at no extra cost to the Construction Manager or Owner. 8.14 The Subcontractor agrees to employ competent administrative, supervisory, and field personnel to accomplish the work, including layout and engineering and preparation and checking of shop drawings. If required, the Subcontractor shall substantiate this employment of competent personnel to the Construction Manager's satisfaction before initiating any work. .. 8.15 The Subcontractor shall insure that all construction tools, equipment, temporary facilities, and other items used in accomplishing the work, whether purchased, rented, or otherwise provided by the Subcontractor or provided by the others, are safe, sound, and in good condition, they must be capable of performing the functions for which they are intended and maintained in conformance with applicable laws and regulations. 8.16 The Subcontractor shall keep the site of the work free from rubbish, waste and/or materials resulting from his operations. He shall undertake, at his own expense, to daily clean up all refuse, rubbish, scrap materials and debris resulting from his operations, to the end that at all times the site of the work shall present a neat,orderly and workmanlike appearance. The Subcontractor is solely responsible for identifying and removing all hazardous ■ material and waste which he uses and generates. Failure to comply with this requirement, after proper notification by the Construction Manager shall constitute authorization for the Construction Manager to perform such work, and to backcharge the Subcontractor. 8.17 Liens and encumbrances: the filing or effectuating of any liens or encumbrances by a Supplier of the Subcontractor shall constitute a material breach of tltis subcontract. The Subcontractor shall be responsible and liable for all damages and expenses, including bond premiums,attorneys' fees, etc. To discharge and/or defend against same, the existence of any such lien or encumbrance shall preclude the Subcontractor's right to receive payment until such encumbrance has been satisfied and removed. w�. 8.18 The Subcontractor agrees to attend mandatory weekly construction and coordination meetings if required by the Construction Manager. The attendee shall be an assigned Project Manager or other employee approved by the Construction Manager. A fine of$100.00 per missed meeting will be assessed to non-participants. 8.19 Parking company or privately owned vehicles outside the designated parking area(s) will result in a$100 fine per incident assessed directly to the offending Subcontractor i.Supplier. Page 8 of 10 Smith College—Campus Center b P November 2001 P" (C) State Department of Labor and Industries-Division of Industrial Safety. (D) Insurance safety requirements. (E) Construction Manager's Written Safety Program. (F) Local,State and Federal safety regulations. (G) In the event of OSHA fines being charged to the project, the offending Subcontractor/Supplier agrees to promptly pay that portion assessed against the Construction Manager, directly attributable to his work or actions. (H) Hard hats and appropriate personal protection equipment(PPE)shall be worn at all times while in the designated construction at-ea. Failure to comply will result in the offender being permanently removed from the project and the employing Subcontractor/,Supplier being directly assessed a fine of$100 per incident. (1) Failure to obtain a.Smith College "Hot Work and Confined Space Permit"when required will result in the offending Subcontractor/Supplier being directly assessed a fine of$100 per incident. 8.6 In the event the Subcontractor fails to take corrective action to insure compliance with said safety regulations and/or removal of rubbish and debris resulting from his work after receiving twenty-four(24)hour written notice from the Construction Manager, the Construction Manager shall undertake these obligations and charge the cost of same to the Subcontractor's account without further notice to the Subcontractor. The Subcontractor shall reimburse the Construction Manager for all monetary penalties assessed to the Construction Manager,for any citations which are the Subcontractor's responsibility, resulting from any federal,state and/or local inspections. 8.7 The Subcontractor agrees to notify the Construction Manager of all accidents which may occur on the jobsite to persons or property and shall provide the Construction Manager with a copy of all accident reports within two (2) days of occurrence. 8.8 The Subcontract shall procure its materials from such sources and employ such labor subject to Subcontractor terms and conditions, in order to insure harmonious labor relations on the site and prevent strikes or labor disputes by other trades. In the event of a strike or other labor disputes affecting the labor employed by the Subcontractor, the Construction Manager has the option to terminate this agreement and hold the Subcontractor liable for increased so costs and damages. However, when such a strike or labor dispute is not due to any fault of the Subcontractor, then the Construction Manager shall compensate the Subcontractor for the value of labor and materials furnished, proportional to the contract sum. 00 8.9 The Subcontractor will not assign this agreement, nor sublet the whole or any part of the work to be performed hereunder, without the prior written consent of the Construction Manager. In the event of such a consent, a Sub- subcontractor must comply with all the requirements of this agreement and provide required insurance certificates as defined in Exhibit `A"-Insurance Requirements. 8.10 The Subcontractor agrees that all disputes concerning the jurisdiction of trades shall be adjusted in accordance with OR any plan for the settlement of jurisdictional disputes which may be in effect either nationally or in the locality in which the work is being done. The Subcontractor shall be bound by, and shall abide by, all such adjustments and settlements of jurisdictional disputes, whether or not the Subcontractor is signature bound by the agreement establishing the impartial jurisdictional disputes board and/or its successors. The Subcontractor agrees not to cause a work stoppage, due to the jurisdictional assignment of work. Page 7 of 10 Smith College--Campus Center November 2001 An .�r Article 8 Subcontractor Responsibilities 8.1 The Subcontractor shall provide sufficient, safe, and proper facilities at all times for the inspection of the work by the Construction Manager and the Owner, or their authorized representatives. The Subcontractor shall, within 24 hours notice from the Construction Manager, proceed to take down all portions of the work and remove from the grounds or buildings, all materials, whether worked or unworked, which the Construction Manager, the Owner, or ■*! their authorized representatives shall condemn as unsound or improper, or as in any way failing to conform to the contract documents. The Subcontractor shall make good at its own expense, all work damaged or destroyed thereby. 8.2 The Subcontractor agrees, in the performance of this agreement, to comply with all federal, state, municipal, and local laws, ordinances, codes and governing regulations, to pay all costs and expenses required thereby; to pay all fees and taxes, including sales and use taxes, and to pay all taxes imposed by any federal, state, or local law for employment insurance, pensions, old age benefits, union benefits, or for such comparable purpose. Nonresident Subcontractors and/or Suppliers shall obtain a certificate, in duplicate, from the Massachusetts Commissioner of Corporations and Taxation indicating that the requirements of M.G.L.A. Chapter 64h, Section 30A, and Chapter 64I, Section 31A have been met. The Construction Manager shall retain 5% of the total amount of the subcontract until the said certificate is obtained and copy furnished to the Construction Manager, or the tax imposed by said chapters has been paid. This project is Federal and Massachusetts Sales Tax Exempt, see Exhibit "I". 8.3 The Subcontractor agrees that all equipment, materials, devices or manufactured materials furnished under this agreement, which are not of the Subcontractor's design, composition, or manufacture, shall be free and clear of infringement of any valid patent, copyright, or trademark. The Subcontractor will indemnify and save harmless, the Construction Manager and Owner from any and all expense, liability, and loss of any kind, including attorneys' fees, resulting from suits or actions alleging such infringement. 8.4 Should the Subcontractor become insolvent, or at any time, refuse or neglect to supply a sufficiency of properly skilled workers, or equipment and materials of the proper quantity or quality, or fail in any respect to prosecute the work with promptness and diligence, or fail in the performance of any of the agreements, herein contained, the Construction Manager shall be at liberty, after forty-eight(48) hours written notice to the Subcontractor, to provide any such labor, equipment, and materials and deduct the cost thereof, from any money then due or thereafter to •. become due to the Subcontractor, under this agreement. If such refusal, neglect, or failure is, in the opinion of the Construction Manager, sufficient ground for such actions, the Construction Manager shall also be at liberty to terminate the employment of the Subcontractor. Consequently, the Construction Manager may enter upon the premises to take possession, for the purpose of completing the work included under this agreement, of all materials, .� tools, and equipment thereon, and to employ any other person or persons to finish the work and provide the labor, materials and equipment therefore. In case of such discontinuance of the employment, the Subcontractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment under this agreement until the said work shall be wholly finished. If the unpaid balance of the amount to be paid under this agreement shall exceed the expense incurred by the Construction Manager in finishing the work, such excess shall be paid by the Construction Manager to the Subcontractor. If such expense shall exceed such unpaid balance, the Subcontractor shall pay the difference to the Construction Manager. The expense incurred by the Construction Manager, as herein provided, either for furnishing materials, or finishing the work, and any damage incurred through such default, shall be chargeable to the Subcontractor. so 8.5 The Subcontractor and supplier undertakes to comply with all statutory regulations and requirements including but not limited to: (A) Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 as amended. we (B) 29 CFR-1926 OSHA hazard communication standards. ON Page 6 of 10 Smith College--Campus Center November 2001 ow No In any and all claims against the Owner, the Architect, or the Construction Manager or any of their agents or employees by any employee of the Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by him or anyone for whose acts he may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this paragraph 5.2 shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Subcontractor under workers' or workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. we 5.3 The obligations of the Subcontractor, under paragraph 5.2 shall not extend to the liability of the Architect/Engineer, his agents, or employees, arising out of: the preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, change orders, designs, or specification and/or the giving of or failure to give directions or instructions by the Architect/Engineer, his agents or employees, providing such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or damage. Article 6 Warranty 6.1 The Subcontractor agrees to promptly make good, without cost to the Owner or Construction Manager, any and all defects, due to faulty workmanship and/or materials of this Subcontractor, which may appear within the guarantee or warranty period so established in the contract documents. If no such period be stipulated in the contract documents, then such guarantee shall be for a period of one (1) year from date of substantial completion and acceptance of the work by Owner. The Subcontractor further agrees to provide any and all guarantees as required by the terms of the contract documents, as a condition precedent to final payment. Article 7 Changes in the Work 7.1 The Subcontractor may be ordered in writing by the Construction Manager,without invalidating this agreement, to make changes in the work within the general scope of this agreement. These changes may consist of additions, deletions, or other revisions,the contract sum and the contract time being adjusted accordingly. The Subcontractor, prior to the commencement of such changed or revised work, shall submit promptly to the Construction Manager written copies of any claim for adjustment to the contract sum and contract time for such revised work in a manner consistent with the contract documents. 7.2 Where changes in the work involve both additions and deletions, percentage fees shall be applied to the net difference of such values for labor and materials. 7.3 The amount to be paid by the Construction Manager for changes in the work, as outlined in paragraph 7.1 shall be made on the basis of one of the following methods: (A) By such applicable unit prices as set forth in the agreement. Unit prices shall be deemed to include all general and administrative expense, overhead, profit, supervision, and all other direct and indirect expenses. (B) If no such unit prices are set forth, then by a lump-sum mutually agreed upon by the Construction Manager and the Subcontractor, or (C) If no such unit prices are set forth and if the parties cannot agree upon a lump-sum, then by actual net cost in money to the Subcontractor of materials and labor (including insurance and applicable taxes) required, plus rental of plant equipment plus compensation of ten percent (10%) for overhead and profit. All time and material work shall be substantiated by daily signed work tickets. For work performed by a Sub- subcontractor, the Subcontractor will be allowed to add five percent (5%) only and said Sub-subcontractor's markup shall not exceed the aforementioned percentage for overhead and profit. 7.4 Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor (trade executing the work)may only markup changes in the work-for, overhead. .Superintendence, and profit by ten percent (10%). All levels above may only markup changes in the work overhead. superintendence, and profit by five percent(S%). Page 5 of 10 Smith College—Campus Center November 2001 4.2 The Subcontractor agrees to perform the work under the general direction of the Construction Manager and subject to the final approval of the Architect/Engineer or other specified representative of the Owner, in accordance with the contract documents. 4.3 To the extent of the work to be performed by the Subcontractor, the Subcontractor agrees to be bound to and assume toward the Construction Manager and the Architect all of the obligations and responsibilities that the Construction Manager, by those documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Contract documents are available,during normal business hours, at the office of the Construction Manager for examination by the Subcontractor. 4.4 If there is a provision for liquidated damages in the contract documents, the Subcontractor shall be liable to the Construction Manager for any liquidated damages for which the Construction Manager is held responsible by reason of the failure of this Subcontractor to complete their work in a timely manner. .o 4.5 List of Exhibits Exhibit"A" is Insurance Requirements oft Exhibit`B" is Subcontractor's Application for Payment coversheet Exhibit"C" is Lien Waiver-Subcontractor or Supplier Exhibit"D" is Equal Opportunity and "Workforce Report" Exhibit"E" is Scope of Work X°` Exhibit"F" is Purchase and Delivery Schedule Exhibit"G" is List of Contract Documents Exhibit"If' is Affidavit of Final Payment&Release s Exhibit `T'is Massachusetts Sales Tax Exempt Certificate (to be issued with award of contract) Exhibit `J"is Instructions to Bidders MR Article 5 Insurance and Indemnity-see Exhibit"A" 5.1 The Subcontractor agrees to, at the time of execution of this agreement, furnish the Construction Manager with certificates of an insurance company authorized to do business under the laws of the State in which the work is to be performed and acceptable to the Construction Manager. These certificates should certify that the Subcontractor is protected on the work with insurance as required by the contract documents and in accordance with the attached schedule, "Insurance Requirements", Exhibit `A". The Subcontractor shall submit a copy of insurance policies for the coverages required by Contract, prior to start of Work or within ten days of the Letter of Intent and ,shall include as additional insureds "The Trustees of The Smith College" and "Weiss /Manfredi Architects", and "Daniel O'Connell's Sons, Inc." and their officers, agents, employees, and heirs. No progress payments will be ..w made unless current certificates and policies are filed with the Construction Manager. The Subcontractor will not be permitted to start work at the site until these certificates are filed with the Construction Manager. Compliance by the Subcontractor with the foregoing requirements, as to carrying insurance and furnishing certificates and policies shall not relieve the Subcontractor of it liabilities and obligations. 5.2 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Subcontractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, the Architect and the Construction Manager and all of their agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorney's fees, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Subcontractor's work under this subcontract, provided that any such claim, damage, loss, or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property ` (other than the work itself) including the loss of use resulting therefrom, to the extent caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of the Subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed by him or anyone for whose acts he may be liable, regardless of whether it is caused in part by a party indemnified thereunder. Such ..� obligation shall not be construed to negate, or abridge, or otherwise reduce any other right or obligation of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to any party or person described in this paragraph 5.2. Page 4 of 10 Smith College—Campus Center November 2001 Article 3 The Contract Sum and Pavment 3.1 The Construction Manager agrees to pay the Subcontractor for the satisfactory performance of his work the total ! ! sum of ($ ) dollars. Current funds subject to additions and deductions for changes,as may be agreed upon, and to make payments on account thereof as follows: Contract Amount: $ Bond(s)Cost: $ (if required) OCIP Credit: $ Total: $ Owner/Construction Manger Options: w 3.2 As per the attached payment request schedule, the Subcontractor shall deliver to the Construction Manager, a detailed, quadruplicate statement acceptable to the Construction Manager, and if required, supported by receipts, vouchers, showing values of all materials delivered and work completed up to the established billing date for which payment is requested. Progress and final payments will be made to the Subcontractor within fourteen (14) days after receipt of payment by the Construction Manager from the Owner for the work of the Subcontractor. It is specifically understood and agreed that the payment to the Subcontractor is dependent, as a condition precedent, upon the Construction Manager receiving contract payments. Prior to submission of the first statement, the Subcontractor will deliver to the Construction Manager, for review and approval, a detailed breakdown of this contract sum showing a schedule of values for the various parts of the work. Once accepted, this schedule of values will be used as a basis for checking the Subcontractor's monthly statement. Attached Exhibit`B" &"C " shall be used for each monthly requisition. 3.3 The Subcontractor shall, with the second and each succeeding monthly request for payment, submit receipts and/or "Lien Waiver - Subcontractor or Supplier" (Exhibit "C") showing all payments made for labor and materials and on account for all work covered in the previous months request for payment. Affidavit and Waiver of Liens may be required to be submitted from Subcontractor's suppliers and/or Sub-Subcontractors. The Subcontractors shall be required to execute a general release prior to receiving final payment Affidavit of Final Payment & Release" (Exhibit"If'). 3.4 Ten percent(10%) shall be withheld from progress payments until the Subcontractor and/or Major Supplier is fifty percent(50%) complete. If the work to date is acceptable, no further retainage shall be withheld leaving a net five percent (5%) retainage at project completion. The Owner, in its sole discretion, may reduce the amount of retainage during the remaining construction process, upon written request from the Subcontractor or Supplier, but not prior to the submission and approval of the O &M Manuals and Record Drawings and Close-out Items and any other items or issues the CM may have with the Subcontractor or Supplier on behalf of the Owner's interests. 3.5 No payment made under this agreement, including the final payment, shall be conclusive evidence of the performance of the work, either wholly or in part, and no payment shall be construed as an acceptance of defective work or improper materials. 3.6 All Applications for Payment are to be made on the attached form provided by Daniel O'Connell's Sons, Inc. (Exhibit"B", coversheet for Application for Payment, and Exhibit"C", Lien Waiver) Article 4 The Contract Documents 4.1 The contract documents consist of this agreement and any exhibits attached hereto; the agreement between the Owner and the Construction Manager, the conditions of the agreement between the Owner and the Construction Manager, general conditions, supplementary, special and other conditions, the drawings, specifications, general instructions to bidders, supplements to bidder's documents, form of proposal, all addenda issued prior to and all modifications issued after execution of the agreement between the Owner and Construction Manager and agreed -~ upon by the parties and the project schedule as may be amended from time to time. Page 3 of 10 Smith College—Campus Center November 2001 �r Article 1 The Work 1.1 The Subcontractor and the Construction Manager agree that the materials and equipment to be furnished and the work to be performed will be in accordance with the contract documents issued by Weiss/Manfredi Architects on 2001, (see Exhibit G for the list of contract documents). The work by this Subcontractor *' will be as follows but not limited to: wie Furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary to furnish and install complete in accordance with Section # of the Specifications titled and dated in its entirety and in accordance with Exhibits A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, and J attached hereto and made a part hereof, but not limited to attached. 1.2 The Subcontractor shall furnish all labor and supervision,furnish,supply,and install all equipment, supplies, tools, �+ scaffolding, hoisting, transportation, unloading and handling;do all things required to complete the work described above on the project all in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications prepared by the Architect/Engineer, and furnish all necessary information, shop drawings, erections drawings, details, samples, brochures, for the s Architect's approval, as may be required. All required submittals to be submitted within O week(s) of Letter of Intent,or Subcontract. so Article 2 Time of Commencement and Completion 2.1 Time is of the essence of this Agreement. Accordingly, the Subcontractor shall commence work upon notice from ,wa the Construction Manager and shall promptly and expeditiously perform said work in accordance with the instructions of the Construction Manager utilizing labor, which can work in harmony with the Construction Manager, approved materials, equipment, and tools in such quantities and of such types as the Construction Manager may from time to time deem necessary and shall work overtime or extra shifts as may be required without additional cost to the Construction Manager. 2.2 The Subcontractor is to coordinate its work with the work of other subcontractors and to follow the scheduling �* directives of Daniel O'Connell's Sons, Inc. 2.3 The Subcontractor shall complete its work in sufficient time to allow the Construction Manager to complete the Oft entire project within the Construction Manager's planned schedule. If requested by the Construction Manager, Subcontractor shall furnish a progress schedule to the Construction Manager in such detail, as the Construction Manager requires. we 2.4 The Subcontractor agrees to participate in preparing the overall project schedule covering its portion of the work and to complete portions and the whole of the work by the following anticipated dates: wu START DATE: SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION DATE: 2.5 In the event any delay in the completion of the General Contract is caused or occasioned by the Subcontractor, which causes or results in damages being incurred by the Construction Manager including, but not limited to damages as assessed by the Owner against the Construction Manager under the provisions of the General Contract, a sum equal to all such damages or expenses as assessed shall be chargeable to and paid by the Subcontractor to the Construction Manager. It is agreed that any such damages charged to the Subcontractor, is based upon damages to the Construction Manager and shall not be construed as imposing a penalty. No Page 2 of 10 Smith College Campus Center November 2001 we AGREEMENT Contract Number: C- Job Number: 1999-118 00 Made as of the day of in the year Two Thousand Two. Between the Construction Manager: Daniel O'Connell's Sons, Inc. (DOC) 480 Hampden Street P. O. Box 267 Holyoke,MA 0 1041-0267 1" 413 534-5667(Telephone) 413 534-2902(Facsimile) Mr. Joseph Maliszewski —Project Manager to (413) (Site Telephone) (413) (Site Fax) jmaliszeti ski ii..connells.com (E-mail) And the Subcontractor: The Project: Smith Campus Center Smith College 0 Northampton, MA 01063 The Owner: "The Trustees of The Smith College" 40 126 West Street Northampton,MA 01063 Mr. Gary Hartwell—Project Manger 413 585-2441 (Telephone) 413 585-2398 (Fax) ghart«ell a.smith.edu (E-mail) The Architect: Weiss/Manfredi Architects (W/M) 130 West 29's Street, 12u'Floor New York, NY 10001 Mr. Tae-Young Yoon 212 760-9002 (Telephone) 212 760-9003 (Fax) tN•yoon:?iwcissmanfrcdi.com (E-mail) Page 1 of 10 Smith College---Campus Center November 2001 40 00 55. DOC STANDARD SUBCONTRACT Enclosed is a copy of Daniel O'Connell's Sons' standard subcontract to be used. By submitting a proposal, the bidder acknowledges complete understanding of its contents and the impact of it as it pertains to their Scope(s)of Work. -END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS- 40 am 40 Page 11 of I I Smith College—Campus Center November 2001 .w 49. COMPOSITE COORDINATION DRAWINGS war Composite Coordination Drawings are required from the mechanical, electrical, fire protection, and plumbing Subcontractors. They will be generated as follows: All participating Subcontractors are to produce their information utilizing the designated version of AutoCAD by Autodesk. The HVAC Subcontractor is responsible for generating the base file / sheet at 3/8" scale showing all their items: ducts, equipment, acoustical treatment, dampers, etc. The base file or sheet will also show all building architectural and structural elements, including but not limited to: walls, ' columns, slabs, beams, ceiling, etc. These will be used at the MEP Coordination Meetings and modified prior to passing the files to the Plumbing, Fire Protection, and Electrical Subcontractors who shall then input their respective information. me 50. SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS Submittals are to include the following: am A. Submittal Form—Coversheet B. All materials subject to approval by the Architect C. One sepia and five prints go D. Ten brochures and/or literature packets from the manufacturer E. Samples as required by specifications (minimum of 3) F. Drawings size no larger than 48"x 36" G. Certificates of product data as required by specifications The Subcontractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for any deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of the shop drawings, product data, or samples unless the 00 Subcontractor has specifically informed the Architect, in writing,of such deviation at the time of submission and the Architect has given written approval to said deviation. 51. PROGRESS RECORD DRAWINGS ro The Construction Manager and Subcontractors shall maintain, at the Construction Manager's field office, a record copy of the Construction Documents. All Trades shall record changes and progress made during no construction on a weekly basis. Monthly progress payment by the.Owner will only be contingent upon these documents being correct and current. so 52. RECORD DRAWINGS AND O&M MANUALS All Subcontractors / Suppliers are responsible for their record drawings, (Auto CAD Mylars), O & M Manuals, guarantees, etc., and other closeout items required by the Contract Documents. These items w should be collected and submitted as the project nears completion (28 days prior to completion). There will be no retainage reduction until these items are submitted and approved. an 53. COMMISSIONING The formal process of start-up and testing of systems or equipment will be coordinated with the no Construction Manager, Owner, Architect, and the Commissioning Agent. A five-day written notice is required prior to the start-up of each item. 54. CONDUCT me A. No smoking in the Owner's buildings. B. No entering buildings or any areas other than that which is within your Scope of Work. �* C. No calling, shouting or use of profanity. D. No radios, no Walkman radios. E. No shorts, sleeveless shirts or sneakers. F. The wearing of hard hats is mandatory. G. The wearing of safety glasses is strongly suggested. Page 10 of 1 1 Smith College—Campus Center November 2001 41. BOXOUTS, SLEEVES, AND ACCESS PANELS All Subcontractors are responsible to furnish, coordinate, schedule, and install their own boxouts and sleeves in the basic structure (slabs, walls, etc.). Access panels in finished surfaces will be supplied and their location and installation will be coordinated by the Subcontractor requiring access panels. The drywall Subcontractor or other Subcontractor doing the finish surfaces will install them. Subcontractors removing panels to perform work are to replace them immediately upon completion of their work (or at the end of the day if work hasn't been completed). 42. COORDINATION OF WORK The Subcontractor / Supplier shall coordinate its work and deliveries with that of other trades and to follow the scheduling directives of Daniel O'Connell's Sons. • 43. SUBCONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS (Following award of subcontract) Items required of Subcontractors and Suppliers prior to proceeding with the work or receiving payment: on A. List of Sub-subcontractors and/or Sub-suppliers B. Schedule of Values, breakdown for Requisition on C. Progress Schedule D. List of Subcontractor's personnel,addresses, telephone numbers and copies of licenses E. Copies of all permits and permit applications F. Certificates of insurance with Owner and CM indicated as additionally insured G. Performance&Payment Bonds (if required) H. Executed Letter of Intent, Contract or Purchase Order I. Executed Owner Controlled Insurance Program forms 44. EQUAL OPPORTUNITY Exhibit "D" of the subcontract defines the Subcontractor's responsibilities regarding hiring practices. Subcontractors agree they will comply with all provisions. Subcontractor's Foremen are to inform DOC of the workforce count information on a daily basis. 45. PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A mandatory Preconstruction Meeting will be held on the jobsite after the award of all major subcontracts. Many general and operational issues will be discussed. 46. CONSTRUCTION MEETINGS There will be on-site construction meetings every week. Subcontractors, Suppliers,and Major Sub-sub- contractors will be required to attend the meetings when they are determined to be an active participant within the project's progress or as otherwise required by the Construction Manager. A fine of $100 per missed meeting will be assessed to the offending non-participants. 47. FOREMEN'S MEETING "a Foremen's Meeting shall be held weekly. Jobsite foremen are required to attend and participate. 48. MEP COORDINATION On-site mechanical, electrical, fire protection and plumbing coordination meetings shall be held weekly. Applicable subcontractors are required to attend. Coordination drawings will be generated from these meetings by all mechanical, electrical, fire protection, and plumbing trades as stated within the Contract Documents. Page 9 of 11 Smith College—Campus Center November 2001 am 38. DISPUTES "" In the event of any dispute as to whether or not any portion of the work is within the scope of work to be performed by any Subcontractor and/or whether or not the Subcontractor is entitled to additional + compensation for any work required of the Subcontractor, he shall continue to proceed diligently with performance required by the Construction Manager. In no event shall delay in the resolution of any dispute excuse tardy performance of work. 39. SAFETY Each Subcontractor and Supplier is responsible for the health and safety of its own workers and shall comply with the latest applicable regulations, including, but not limited to, those of the U.S. Department of Labor(OSHA). Each subcontractor shall issue and enforce the use of all personal protection equipment (PPE) as required while on site. The Subcontractor and Supplier shall comply with all statutory „r regulations and requirements including but limited to: (A) Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 as amended. (B) 29 CFRO1926 OSHA Hazard Communication Standards. (C) State Department of Labor and Industries--Division of Industrial Safety (D) Insurance Safety Requirements/Owner Controlled Insurance Program(O.C.LP.) (E) Construction Manager's Written Safety Program. (A copy may be reviewed at our Project Office) ** (F) Local Safety Regulations. (G) Owner's"Hot Work and Confined Space Permits"Program Failure to obtain the Owner's"Hot Work and Confined Space Permit" when required would result in the offending Subcontractor/Supplier being directly assessed a fine of$100 per incident. (H) Hard hats and appropriate personal protection equipment(PPE)shall be worn at all times while in the designated construction area. Failure to comply will result in the offender being removed from the project permanently and the employing Subcontractor/Supplier being directly assessed a fine of$100 4W per incident. The Subcontractor Job Foreman shall attend the Construction Manager's Monthly Safety Meetings. „ft In the event the Subcontractor fails to take corrective action to insure compliance with said safety regulations and / or remove rubbish and debris resulting from lus work after receiving 24-hours written notice from the Construction Manager, (or immediately if required for safety purposes) the Construction no Manager shall undertake these obligations and charge the cost of same to the Subcontractor's account without further notice to the Subcontractor. The Subcontractor and Supplier shall notify the Construction Manager of all accidents, which occur on the jobsite to persons or property and shall provide the Construction Manager with a copy of all accident reports within two(2)days of occurrence. BE CAREFUL TODAY! This is Daniel O'Connell's Sons' motto. We insist on safe practices and will do everything in our power to insure a safe jobsite for everyone. All Subcontractors and Suppliers will be expected to participate actively and rigorously in our goal. *+ Substance abuse of any kind will not be tolerated and shall evoke immediate termination of employment. In the event of OSHA fines being charged to the project, the offending Subcontractor agrees to promptly s. pay that portion assessed against the Construction Manager, directly attributable to the Subcontractor's work. 40. CODE COMPLIANCE The Subcontractor and its Sub-subcontractors / Suppliers shall comply with all applicable codes, "* ordinances, regulations and requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction. Page 8 of 11 Smith College—Campus Center November 2001 4" 30. TRAFFIC CONTROL Subcontractors are responsible for the scheduling and payment for Police Details,as required by City Agencies or Officials, for any and all Work executed on public ways. 31. TELEPHONE SERVICE The Construction Manager will only provide a pay phone. Subcontractors requiring individual phone service shall coordinate with the Owner's representative and pay for all associated costs. 32. HOISTING AND SCAFFOLDING Subcontractors shall provide all their own ladders, scaffolding, staging, planking services, hoisting equipment and all other necessary tools and equipment for the completion of their Subcontract Work except and in consideration of industry standards for example when a Subcontractor typically supplies scaffold / access for other trades to use: i.e. the use of concrete Subcontractor's platforms and access means by ironworkers, rebar installers, laborers,and others so that they can perform their portion of work. For this Project, the Construction Manager will provide (during a portion of the Work) a complete " perimeter scaffold for the installation of the major facade components ( Not Storefront or Curtain Walls). All trades may use this scaffold when available at no charge. 33. ENGINEERING&FIELD LAYOUT Subcontractors shall coordinate their work with the work of other trades and shall be responsible for their own field dimensioning and layout from control lines established by the Construction Manager. 34. CUTTING AND PATCHING Subcontractors shall include all cutting, drilling, punching, patching, caulking, firestops, and reinforcing of holes as required for the coordination of his work, and shall coordinate the above with the Construction Manager. 35. SUB-SUBCONTRACTORS/SUPPLIERS Prior to its work, each Subcontractor shall submit to the Construction Manager for approval, a complete listing of all Sub-subcontractors / Suppliers it proposes to employ or purchase from. Each Subcontractor is responsible for the compliance of its Sub-subcontractors / Suppliers to all terms and conditions of the subcontract. 36. MARKUP ON CHANGES Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors (trade executing the work) may only markup changes in the work for overhead, superintendence and profit by ten (10%). All levels/tiers above may only add five(5%)for their overhead, superintendence and profit, not-to-exceed fifteen(15 %)plus Construction Manager's Fee. 37. CLAIMS FOR CHANGES Electronic Format AIA Document A201 1997-- General Conditions, Section 4.3 Claims and Disputes. Subsection 4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims. "Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. Claims must be initiated by written notice to the Architect and the other party." Page 7 of I 1 Smith College—Campus Center November 2001 so 22. NOISE CONTROL awe As mandated by Smith College, noise generated by the Subcontractors must be controlled to a maximum level of 800. Noise is defined as raised voices, idling and/ or running of gasoline, diesel and electric motors and pneumatic equipment, use of hand tools and contact of two or more similar or dissimilar * materials. The City of Northampton, MA has a noise ordinance that restricts noise before 7 a.m. and after I1 p.m. a. "Noisy Task": as defined by the Owner's Project Manager includes such things as concrete demolition, sawing or drilling. Work such as this shall be scheduled in advance with the Construction Manager, performed during off hours and shall create no additional cost or schedule impact. 23. DAILY CLEANUP CLEANUP to a dumpster provided by the Construction Manager,shall be done by the subcontractors on a DAILY BASIS. If necessary the Construction Manager will do the cleanup at the expense of the subcontractor responsible. 24. SUPERVISION AND WORKFORCE Subcontractors are required to employ competent supervisory and field personnel and shall coordinate their work with the work of all other trades. The Foreman in charge of the work shall be on- +�* site at all times during the performance of their work. Subcontractors agree to furnish labor that can work in harmony with all other elements of labor employed or to be employed on the Project. 25. TEMPORARY POWER The Electrical Subcontractor will provide necessary temporary lights and power. The Owner will pay for the cost of power consumed, provided that it is not wasted. Also provided in this work is the distribution of temporary light and power, including the supply, installation, replacement and maintenance of light bulbs. Ample light and power throughout the project for productive work will be required. 26. TEMPORARY HEAT u The Construction Manager will provide temporary heat and enclosures as necessary for the first heating season. The HVAC Contractor will have the permanent equipment on-line and provide the heating / ew cooling requirements the second heating/cooling seasons. The Owner will pay for the cost of the energy consumed. Im 27. TEMPORARY WATER AND TOILETS The Construction Manager will provide portable toilets until the building is ready for more permanent an facilities. At the direction of the CM, the Plumbing Subcontractor will provide temporary water (two locations) and two temporary toilets in the building utilizing the permanent waste and vent piping when the systems are available. ow 28. TEMPORARY STANDPIPE The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall supply the required temporary fire protection standpipes that are am required by the local Fire Authority during the construction process_ 29. OWNER UTILITY CONNECTIONS as Subcontractors shall notify The Construction Manager (CM) at least five days in advance of the desire to connect, disconnect, turn on, or turn off any utility service from the Owner's supply systems. The CM in turn will notify the Owner's Representative and the actual operation shall be performed by technicians from the Owner's staff. .s Page 6 of 1 I Smith College—Campus Center November 2001 16. PERMITS AND FEES The Construction Manager will apply and pay for the basic Building Permit. All Subcontractors are to apply and pay for their required permits for the execution of their work. Subcontractors will submit copies of all permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, notices,judgments and communications from Authorities having jurisdiction. 17. SUBCONT'RACTOR'S REQUISITIONS All Subcontractor Applications for Payment shall be received by the twenty-fifth of each month so the requisition may be completed and submitted to the Owner by the Construction Manager on or about the first of the month. No application for payment will be accepted or processed unless the schedule of values, bonds (if required), and the insurance certificate have been received. A Release of Lien (partial or final) s shall be submitted with each Application for Payment. Mail original requisitions to Daniel O'Connell's Sons, Incorporated 480 Hampden Street, P. O. Box 267, Holyoke, MA 01041-0267 and submit a copy to the Construction Manager's on-site representative. +�e 18. RETAINAGE A 10 percent retainage shall be withheld from progress payments until the Subcontractor or major Supplier is 50%complete. If the work to date is acceptable no further retainage shall be withheld leaving a net 5% retainage at project completion. The Owner, in its sole discretion, may reduce the amount of retainage during the remaining construction process, upon written request from the Subcontractor or ,ors Supplier, but not prior to the submission and approval of the O &M Manuals and Record Drawings and Close-out Items and any other items or issues the CM may have with the Subcontractor or Supplier on behalf of the Owner's interests. 19. MATERIALS STORED OFF-SITE Materials stored off-site may be compensated for at a rate of 90% of their value. Request for payment should include insurance certificates indicating that coverage for such materials exists at their full value and the appropriate affidavits and bills of sale indicating that stored materials are to be used exclusively for the project and ownership of the material is transferred to the Construction Manager and Owner. Stored material and equipment shall be protected from weather and theft and available to be viewed by Owner's Representatives. 20. USE OF PREMISES The Construction Manager's Site Logistics Plan is included as part of the Contact Documents. Subcontractors shall coordinate with the Construction Manager for space within the indicated contract No limits. The storage of material, equipment and apparatus at the construction site shall be permitted only to the extent approved by the Construction Manager. The workforce is to utilize only designated area within the contract limits. Employee termination shall result from using the adjacent Smith College facilities including toilets, telephones, and parking. Construction Manager and Subcontractors are responsible to repair and to return Smith College property to its original, existing conditions in conjunction with the on-going or completion of their Work for the ! ! Campus Center. 21. HARASSMENT Courteous behavior shall be enforced. Working personnel will not harass any student, faculty, staff member or affiliate of the College. Occurrence will require immediate termination of the responsible person(s). This provision will be strictly enforced by the Construction Manager. Page 5 of I 1 Smith College—Campus Center November 2001 13. COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION WORK (continued) B. Working hours shall exist between 8:00 AM and 4:30 PM,Monday through Friday, unless overtime is required to maintain the scheduled progress of work and is approved by the Construction Manager. C. The overall project schedule is attached. Bidders shall familiarize themselves with the schedule and plan their work accordingly. Any manufacturer or supplier up-charges required to meet the w schedule shall be included in the bid. D. Be aware that the Owner may require occasional curtailment of work activities due to special wr occasions associated with the College. Smith College does not anticipate limiting working hours,Monday through Friday at any time .� during the course of work on the Campus Center. The College may request that the Subcontractors maintain a reasonable amount of restraint in terms of noise creation on the construction site on the following dates: w.► Fall Semester 2002 Pre-exam Study Period Dec. 13 — 16 Examinations Dec. 17—20 Spring Semester 2002 2003 Pre-exam Study Period May 4—6 May 3 —5 Examinations May 7— 10 May 6—9 Commencement May 17 May 16 E. Subcontractor agrees to commence work on the Project within four(4)calendar days after the award of the Contract or Letter of Intent and to substantially complete the work in coordination with the Job Progress Schedule. 14. PARKING AND DELIVERIES NO PARKING IS AVAILABLE ON CAMPUS OR ON-SITE, but free parking will be available at a designated remote location on Campus. DOC will provide limited shuttle bus service from and to the designated parking lot. Parking company or privately owned vehicles inside the contract limits will result in a $100 fine per incident assessed directly to the offending Subcontractor / Supplier. Delivery of materials and equipment shall be coordinated through the Construction Manager. ABSOLUTELY XQ deliveries will be allowed to the site or Campus before or after working hours without prior consent of the Owner. 15. INSURANCE This project will be participating in an "Owner Controlled Insurance Program" (OCIP). Please refer to the Five Colleges — Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program plan in the specifications. Base Bid Quotations from Subcontractors will be with insurance cost. The Construction Manager's .w Insurance Requirements are attached as Exhibit "A". All Subcontractors shall comply with the limits stated or indicate what the added cost is to comply. Sub-subcontractors shall also obtain and maintain insurance per Exhibit"A". All insurance certificates shall name "The Trustees of The Smith College" �. and "Weiss/Manfredi Architects", and "Daniel O'Connell's Sons, Inc.", and their officers, agents, employees,and heirs,as additional insureds. Page 4 of I 1 Smith College—Campus Center November 2001 l 7. SUBSTITUTIONS Substitutions of any item detailed or specified is being discouraged as part of the Base Bid of each Trade Contract. In all cases in which a manufacturer's name, trade name or other proprietary designation is -an used in connection with materials or articles to be furnished under this Contract, whether or not the phrase "or equal" is used after such name, the Subcontractor shall furnish the product named manufacturer(s) without substitution, unless a written request for a substitute has been submitted by the Subcontractor and approved, in writing,by the Architect. 8. SITE VISIT With submission of a proposal, the bidder acknowledges that they have inspected the site and have verified to their satisfaction the nature and quantity of the work involved, and they will complete all work herein undertaken for the sum set out in their subcontract(s). 9. BONDS to The Owner / Construction Manager reserves the right to request Payment & Performance Bonds in the amount of 100% of the Bid. The cost of these Bonds is to be quoted as an ADD on the Bid Form to the Bid. on 10. OWNER'S RIGHT TO REJECT BIDS The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all subcontract bids and to waive any informality in the wr bidding should it be deemed in the Owner's opinion to be in any way in his interest to do so. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The following is a list of some general requirements for which all Subcontractors / Suppliers will be responsible to comply with. Please note that this memo in no way releases the Subcontractors/ Suppliers ON from the requirement established by the Contract Documents, Please Note: The Subcontractor / Supplier, to the extent that the work to be performed by them, is bound to the Construction Manager by the term of the contract documents, and assumes toward the Construction Manager all the obligations and responsibilities which the Construction Manager assumes toward the Owner. 1l. TAXES on This Project is exempt from only the following: Massachusetts Sales Tax. (Certificate will be furnished to successful bidders.) Subcontractors / Suppliers are responsible for all other applicable taxes: Federal, State,Local or otherwise. 12. SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER SELECTION Construction Manager will submit in writing to the Owner and Architect recommendations as to which Subcontractor/Supplier with whom it has reached tentative agreement to execute a portion of the work. The Owner and Architect reserve the right to have final approval of the selection of the Subcontractors and Suppliers. 13. COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION WORK A. The Work at the project site will begin on March 1, 2002. All Subcontractors will progress with proper and sufficient workforce and ample supply of materials to meet the satisfaction of the Construction Manager to assure overall Substantial Completion late-July 2003 (approximately 17 months). Page 3 of 11 Smith College Campus Center November 2001 ow 2. WORKFORCE AGREEMENT am All Subcontractors are encouraged to submit active competitive Proposals regardless of their labor relation policies except for the following: Daniel O'Connell's Sons, Inc. has Union Agreements with as Operating Engineers, Masons, Laborers, and Carpenters. Subcontractors shall furnish labor accordingly, and ensure that their employees work in harmony with all elements of labor to be employed on the project. 3. SUBMISSION OF BIDS so Proposals shall be properly executed per the Construction Manager's instructions and enclosed in a sealed envelope. Printed plainly by the Bidder on the outside of the envelope shall be: so A. "SMITH COLLEGE—CAMPUS CENTER" B. Your Company Contact Person For Project No C. Your Complete Company Name D. Your Complete Company Mailing Address (P. O. Box, if any,and Street) E. Your Telephone and Fax Numbers with Area Codes F. E-mail address(if any) ow If using U.S. Postal Service or UPS,etc. send to: Mr. Joseph Maliszewski Daniel O'Connell's Sons, Inc. an 480 Hampden Street P. O. Box 267 Holyoke, MA 01041-0267 no Faxed Bids will be accepted if followed up with a written confirmation in same day's mail. Bid submissions must include, but not be limited to, the following specific information: A. The bidder's complete name,address, phone&fax numbers, and contact individual. B. Specification Section numbers being bid and the description of work and/or materials supplied. wir C. The total quotation amounts less any bond costs D. Acknowledgment of any addendum received. E. Whether the quotations are for material furnished only, installed only, or furnished and installed. F. Indication of approximate start date and total work duration. G. Indication of any special attention, long-lead-time items that may impact the job schedule. H. Bidders are requested to bid entire specification section(s)—per plans and specifications. If not, be very specific about any exclusions,clarifications,and/or qualifications to the bid. 4. SCHEDULE All bidders shall review the attached schedule and incorporate the information and deadlines into their .. proposals. Bidders shall concur and comply with the requirements of the attached Schedule. 5. INTERPRETATION OF DOCUMENTS Requests for interpretation of the Bidding Requirements and the Contract Documents shall be by fax to Mr. Tae-Young Yoon of W/M (212 760-9003) and to Mr. Joseph Maliszewski of DOC (413 536-6915). +�! Addenda notifications,as issued, will be forwarded or faxed to all bidding subcontractors of record. 6. INTENT OF DRAWINGS It is understood that the contract drawings delineate the general intent of the. work and that each Subcontractor / Supplier shall provide whatever incidental material and labor necessary to translate the intent of the documents into a finished and usable structure. + Page 2 of 11 Smith College—Campus Center November 2001 ESTABLISHED 1879 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Re: Smith College Campus Center Exhibit "J" Smith College DOC Job No.: 1999-118 126 West Street Northampton, MA 01063 November 2001 Daniel O'Connell's Sons (DOC) is the Construction Manager for the above referenced project. Weiss / Manfredi Architects (W/M) has designed the new 55,000 SF three-story structural steel frame building. It will be approximately 200` long and 80' wide with a longitudinal roof skylight, curtain walls, and painted wood-siding facade. The project is located on the Campus of Smith College off of Elm Street, Northampton, MA. Start of construction is scheduled for early March 2002 with an anticipated completion date of late July 2003, (an approximate 17-month duration). BIDDING REQUIREMENTS CONTRACT DOCUMENTS will be available on November 15, 2001, in full and half sets — architectural / structural or mechanical/electrical; order accordingly from Tom Moitoza of DOC 413-534-5667. They may also be reviewed at our Waltham Office(781642-0660)and our Holyoke Office(413 534-5667)between the hours of 8 am—5 pm. (It's best to call prior to visiting to assure prompt viewing.) PRE-BID MEETING: Thursday, November 29"' at 10:00 am. at the Project Site adjacent to J.M. Greene Hall on Elm Street and Henshaw Avenue, Northampton,MA 01063. 1. Bids will be taken on all items except Custom Skylight. In accordance with the Bidding Requirements and Contract Documents prepared by the Architect: Mr. Tae-Young Yoon Weiss/Manfredi Architects (W/M) 130 West 29th Street, 12th Floor New York,NY 10001 (212) 760-9002 (Telephone) (212) 760-9003 (Fax) t�tinnnGlaveissmanfrerli corn (E-mail) The Owner shall receive Proposals at the office of the Construction Manager. w Mr. Joseph Maliszewski Daniel O'Connell's Sons, Inc. (DOC) 480 Hampden Street,P.O. Box 267 Holyoke, MA 01041-0267 (413) 534-5667 (Telephone) (413) 536-6915 (Fax) ln�alisie�wski:'ci.o�onnells crnn (E-mail) until 2:00 p.m. on Bid Day -- Tuesday, December 18, 2001. Bids should carry the cost of insurance— this will be an OCIP Project. Proposals shall remain in effect for sixty (60) calendar days after time and date of receiving bids, may be accepted by Owner anytime within that period, and may be withdrawn after that time by the bidder without notice. The Owner reserves the right to select all bids / contracts and assign them to the Construction Manager. The selected sub-bidder shall execute the Contract Agreement within seven (7) calendar days after receiving written notification of award of contract or presentation of the contract agreement, whichever is later. FS 104 Main Level Foodservice Equipment Special Conditions Plan 01.11.12 FS201 Upper Level Foodservice Equipment Plan and Schedule 01.11.12 "* FS202 Upper Level Foodservice Equipment Mechanical Spot Connection Plan 01.11.12 FS203 Upper Level Foodservice Equipment Electrical Spot Connection Plan 01.11.12 FS204 Upper Level Foodservice Equipment Special Conditions Plan 01.11.12 FS301 Foodservice Equipment Utility Load Schedule 01.11.12 FS302 Foodservice Equipment Utility Load Schedule 01.11.12 FS303 Foodservice Equipment Utility Load Schedule 01.11.12 FS304 Foodservice Equipment Utility Load Schedule 01.11.12 w END TABLE OF CONTENTS/DRAWING LIST ON me ■o AM on Smith Campus Center Table of Contents 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 Page 8 •• No E401 Electrical Panel Schedules Sheet No. 2 01.11.12 E402 Electrical Panel Schedules Sheet No. 3 01.11.12 E404 Electrical Panel Schedules Sheet No. 5 01.11.12 E405 Electrical Panel Schedules Sheet No. 6 01.11.12 E406 Electrical Detail Plans Sheet No. 1 01.11.12 E408 Site Utility Plan 01.11.12 go E500 AN Equipment Power Plan Sheet No. 1 01.11.12 E501 A/V Equipment Power Plan Sheet No. 2 01.11.12 E505 Electrical Panel Schedules Sheet No.4 01.11.12 Security dated SEC 100 Security Legend 01.11.12 SEC101 Security Lower Level Plan 01.11.12 SEC102 Security Main Level Plan 01.11.12 SEC 103 Security Upper Level Plan 01.11.12 SEC300 Security Riser Diagram 01.11.12 SEC601 Security Details 01.11.12 SEC602 Security Details 01.11.12 Plumbing dated P 100 Plumbing Cover Sheet 0l.11.12 P101 Lower Level Plumbing Plan 01.11.12 P102 Main Level Plumbing Plan 01.11.12 P 103 Upper Level and Mezzanine Plumbing Plan 01.11.12 P104 Roof Plumbing Plan 01.11.12 P200 Domestic Water Riser Diagram 01.11.12 wo P201 Storm Piping Riser Diagram 01.11.12 P202 Sanitary Riser Diagram 01.11.12 P300 Toilet Room Details 01.11.12 P301 Main Level Servery and Kitchen Plan 01.11.12 P302 Upper Level Student Kitchen and Pantry Plans 01.11.12 P303 Piping Details 01.11.12 P400 Equipment Schedule 01.11.12 Fire Protection dated FP 100 Fire Protection Cover Sheet 01.11.12 FP101 Lower Level Fire Protection Plan 01.11.12 FP 102 Main Level Fire Protection Plan 01.11.12 FP 103 Upper Level and Mezzanine Fire Protection Plan 01.11.12 FP200 Fire Protection Riser Diagrams 01.11.12 Foodservice dated FS 101 Main Level Foodservice Equipment Plan and Schedule 01.11.12 FS 102 Main Level Foodservice Equipment Mechanical Spot Connection Plan 01.11.12 FS 103 Main Level Foodservice Equipment Electrical Spot Connection Plan 01.11.12 Smith Campus Center Table of Contents 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 Page 7 .s Structural dated S100 General Notes 01.11.12 *" S101 Foundation Plan 01.11.12 S102 Main Level Framing Plan 01.11.12 „W S103 Upper Level Framing Plan 01.11.12 S104 Roof Framing Plan 01.11.12 S601 Typical Details A 01.11.12 S602 Typical Details B 01.11.12 S603 Column Schedule and Details 01.11.12 S604 Bracing Elevations Sections and Details 01.11.12 S605 Details A 01.11.12 S606 Details B 01.11.12 Mechanical dated M100 General Notes and Key to Symbols 01.11.12 M101 Lower Level Mechanical Plan 01.11.12 M102 Main Level Mechanical Plan 01.11.12 M103 Upper Level Mechanical Plan 01.11.12 M104 Roof Mechanical Plan 01.11.12 M201 Lower Level Piping Plan 01.11.12 M202 Main Level Piping Plan 01.11.12 M203 Upper Level Piping Plan 01.11.12 M300 Mechanical Part Plans and Elevations No. 1 01.11.12 M400 Schematic Flow Diagrams 01.11.12 M500 HVAC Schedules#1 01.11.12 M501 HVAC Schedules#2 01.11.12 �. M502 HVAC Schedules#3 01.11.12 M600 HVAC Details#1 01.11.12 M601 HVAC Details#2 01.11.12 M602 HVAC Details#3 01.11.12 Electrical dated E 100 Electrical Title Sheet 01.11.12 E 101 Lower Level Electrical Power Plan 01.11.12 E102 Main Level Electrical Power Plan 01.11.12 E103 Upper Level Electrical Power Plan 01.11.12 E104 Roof Level Electrical Power Plan 01.11.12 E201 Lower Level Electrical Lighting Plan 01.11.12 E202 Main Level Electrical Lighting Plan 01.11.12 E203 Upper Level Electrical Lighting Plan 01.11.12 E300 Electrical Power Riser Diagram 01.11.12 E301 Fire Alarm System Riser Diagram 01.11.12 E400 Electrical Panel Schedules Sheet No. 1 01.11.12 Smith Campus Center Table of Contents 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 Page 6 "' PM Architectural dated A100 Plan Geometries A 101 Lower Level Plan 1.11.12 0 01.11.12 A102 Main Level Plan 01.11.12 A103 Upper Level Plan 01.11.12 A104 Roof Plan 01.11.12 RFP1 Skylight Plan(NIC—for reference only) A201 Lower Level Reflected Ceiling Plan 01.11.12 A202 Main Level Reflected Ceiling Plan 01.11.12 ur A203 Upper Level Reflected Ceiling Plan 01.11.12 A301 Elevations 01.11.12 A302 Elevations 01.11.12 A401 Sections—North/South 01.11.12 A402 Sections—East/West 01.11.12 A501 Wall Sections 01.11.12 A502 Wall Sections 01.11.12 A503 Wall Sections 01.11.12 A504 Wall Sections 01.11.12 A505 Wall Sections 01.11.12 A601 Main Lounge Details 01.11.12 A602 Main Building Exterior Details 01.11.12 A603 Main Building Details—South End 01.11.12 A604 Not included in set 01.11.12 A605 Bar Building Details 01.11.12 A606 Exterior Wall Panels 01.11.12 A607 Details—Vestibules and Miscellaneous 01.11.12 A608 Details—End Walls and Skylight 01.11.12 A701 Stairs—Plans and Sections 01.11.12 A702 Stairs—Plans and Sections 01.11.12 PO A703 Stair and Rail Details 01.11.12 A704 Elevators 01.11.12 A705 Toilet Rooms—Plans, Elevations,Details 01.11.12 A801 Interior Elevations 01.11.12 A802 Interior Elevations 01.11.12 A803 Interior Elevations 01.11.12 A901 Partition Schedule&Base Details 01.11.12 A902 Door Schedule 01.11.12 A903 Details—Doors 01.11.12 A904 Main Lounge Interior Details 01.11.12 A905 Multiple Use Room Details 01.11.12 A906 Interior Details—Atrium Gallery 01.11.12 A907 Interior Details—HM and Miscellaneous 01.11.12 Smith Campus Center Table of Contents 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 Page 5 Section 16770 Security Systems CDA DIVISION 17 PROJECT MAINTANENCE .. Section 17000 Building Systems Commissioning(HVAC, Electrical,Plumbing, BVH and Fire Protection) 4M Key to section authors SC Smith College WMA Weiss/Manfredi Architects ..� DOC Daniel O'Connell's Sons WA Weidlinger Associates Inc. JB&B Jaros,Baum&Bolles .• F&O Fuss&O'Neill TG Towers Golde RHA R. A.Heintges Architects RDG Renfro Design Group CL Cini-Little International SMW Shen Milsom&Wilke,Inc. CDA Chapman Ducibella Associates CS Construction Specifications BVH BVH Integrated Services LIST OF DRAWINGS General Information dated --- Cover Sheet G101 Title Sheet 01.11.12 G102 Code Summary 0l.11.12 --- Data Accumulation Survey(See Summary of Work, Section 01010.3.7) 01.11.12 --- Site Survey—Existing Conditions(See Summary of Work, Section 01010.3.7) 01.11.12 --- Site Survey—Existing Utilities(See Summary of Work, Section 01010.3.7) 01.11.12 --- Site Logistics Plan(See Summary of Work, Section 01010.3.7) 01.11.12 Civil dated C101 Site Preparation and Erosion Control Plan 01.11.12 C 102 Site Utility Plan 01.11.12 C601 Utility and Erosion Control Details 01.11.12 C602 Utility Details 01.11.12 C603 Infiltration System Details(NIC—for reference only) 01.11.12 Landscape dated 1,101 Building Location Plan and Site Work Layout Key Plan 01.11.12 L102 Detail Site Layout Plan—Area 1 01.11.12 L103 Detail Site Layout Plan—Area 2 01.11.12 L104 Detail Site Layout Plans—Areas 3 and 4 01.11.12 L105 Site Grading Plan 01.11.12 L106 Site Planting Plan 01.11.12 L201 Site Details 01.11.12 L202 Site Details 01.11.12 Smith Campus Center Table of Contents 100% Construction Documents: 01.11.12 Page 4 """ Section 08600 Skylights (For Information and Reference) RHA Section 08700 Finish Hardware and Door Schedule WMA Section 08800 Glass and Glazing CS DIVISION 9 FINISHES Section 09250 Gypsum Drywall and Framing Assemblies CS Section 09310 Ceramic Tile CS Section 09330 Quarry Tile CS Section 09510 Acoustic Panel Ceilings CS Section 09511 Suspended Fabric Ceiling System CS Section 09560 Wood Strip Flooring CS Section 09660 Resilient Tile Flooring CS Section 09681 Carpet(Glue Down) CS Section 09840 Acoustical Wall Treatments CS Section 09900 Painting and Finishing CS DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES Section 10161 Floor Mounted Toilet Partitions CS Section 10200 Aluminum Louvers CS Section 10300 Fireplaces CS .w Section 10522 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets CS Section 10650 Operable Partitions CS Section 10800 Toilet Accessories CS DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT Section 11132 Projections Screens CS Section 11160 Dock Equipment WMA ! Section 11400 Food Service CL DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS go (not used) DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (not used) go DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS Section 14240 Hydraulic Elevators CS DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL OR Section 15400 Plumbing Table of Contents JB&B Section 15400 Plumbing JB&B Section 15500 Fire Protection Table of Contents JB&B Section 15500 Fire Protection JB&B Section 15600 Heating,Ventilating and Air Conditioning Table of Contents JB&B Section 15600 Heating,Ventilating and Air Conditioning JB&B x> Section 15950 Building Automation and Temperature Controls Table of Contents JB&B Section 15950 Building Automation and Tempera6re Controls JB&B DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL Section 16100 Electrical Table of Contents JB&B Section 16100 Electrical JB&B Section 16510 Architectural Lighting Fixtures RDG Section 16511 Architectural Dimming Systems RDG Smith Campus Center Table of Contents 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 Page 3 0M Section 02526 Granite Paving TG Section 02577 Striping and Signing F&O • Section 02585 Traffic Control F&O Section 02710 Foundation Drainage WA Section 02713 Water Service F&O •! Section 02722 Sanitary Sewer F&O Section 02830 Chain Link Fence TG Section 02900 Landscaping TG Section 02955 Edging and Gravel Beds TG Section 02982 Tree and Shrub Preservation and Clearing WMA&SC DIVISION 3 CONCRETE Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete WMA DIVISION 4 MASONRY Section 04200 Unit Masonry CS Section 04400 Stonework CS DIVISION 5 METALS Section 05120 Structural Steel WA Section 05300 Metal Decking WA .. Section 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing CS Section 05500 Miscellaneous Metals CS Section 05510 Steel Stairs CS Section 05580 Perimeter Heating/Cooling Enclosures CS Section 05700 Ornamental Metals CS Section 05810 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies CS DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06200 Carpentry CS Section 06400 Architectural Woodwork CS DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07130 Sheet Membrane Waterproofing CS ° Section 07160 Metallic Oxide Waterproofing CS Section 07210 Building Insulation CS Section 07240 Exterior Insulation and Finish System CS Section 07270 Firestops and Smokeseals CS Section 07530 Membrane Roofing and Roof Insulation CS Section 07600 Sheet Metal Work CS Section 07700 Roof Specialties and Accessories CS Section 07900 Joint Sealers CS Section 07910 Miscellaneous Joint Fillers CS DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08100 Steel Doors and Frames CS Section 08200 Wood Doors CS Section 08300 Access Doors CS Section 08330 Folding Security Grille WMA Section 08410 Curtainwall, Storefronts, Vestibules, and Entrances CS Section 08520 Aluminum Windows CS Smith Campus Center Table of Contents 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 Page 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 0 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, CONTRACTUAL ATTACHMENTS DOC Instruction's to Bidders DOC Subcontract with Exhibits DOC Outline Construction Schedule Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Construction Manager where the Construction Manager is also the Constructor(AIA A 12 1/CMc-199 1) General Conditions of the Contract for Construction(AIA A201-1997) Equal Employment Opportunity Supplementary General Conditions Summary of the Owner Controlled Insurance Program (OCIP) Setting Forth Contractor Insurance Requirements and Contractor Safety Program Obligations OCIP Overview OCIP Bidding&Enrollment Procedures OCIP Program Guidelines Geotechnical Study Report(See Summary of Work, Section 01010.3.7) DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01010 Summary of Work WMA Section 01020 Abbreviations Used in the Documents WMA Section 01040 Coordination CS Section 01050 Field Engineering F&O Section 01100 Alternates WMA Section 01202 Progress Meetings CS Section 01300 Submittals CS Shop Drawing/Submittal Cover Form Section 01320 Construction Progress Documentation CS Section 01410 Testing and Inspection CS Section 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls CS Section 01600 Materials and Equipment CS Section 01700 Execution Requirements CS Section 01770 Closeout Procedures CS DIVISION 2 SITEWORK Section 02110 Site Preparation TG Section 02200 Earthwork TG Section 02232 Subbase F&O Section 02260 Formation of Subgrade F&O Section 02291 Haybale Erosion Checks F&O Section 02293 Silt Fence F&O Section 02360 Sheeting and Bracing F&O Section 02400 Underslab Drainage System WA Section 02430 Catch Basins and Storm Manholes F&O Section 02433 Storm Drain F&O Section 02513 Bituminous Concrete F&O Section 02525 Granite Curbs TG Smith Campus Center Table of Contents 100%Construction Documents: 01.11.12 Page 1 OR MR 14 Smith Campus School Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 01063 r.4 fi 1 50r--,L Project Manual Weiss/Manfredi Architects 130 West 29th Street 12fl New York NY 10001 T